\\*b  ^ 

Number:. 

LIBRARY 

Trinity  College 

Durham,  N.  C. 


Presented  by 


Date  : 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2016 

Jm 


https://archive.org/details/principlesofnatu01davi 


t - 7>t 


THE 


PRINCIPLES  OE  NATURE, 

HER  DIVINE  REVELATIONS, 

AND 


BY  AND  THROUGH 


ANDREW  JACKSON  DAVIS, 

THE  " POUGHKEEPSIE  SEEK”  AND  “ CLAIRVOYANT  ” 

e- 

IN  THREE  PARTS. 

PART  FIRST. 

Any  theory,  hypothesis,  philosophy,  sect,-ureed,  or  institution,  that  fears  investigation,  openly 
manifests  its  own  error. 

PART  SECOND. 

Reason  is  a flower  of  the  spirit,  and  its  fragrance  is  liberty  and  knowledge. 

PART  THIRD. 

When  distributive  justice  pervades  the  social  world,  virtue  and  morality  will  bloom  with  an  im 
mortal  beauty;  while  the  Sun  of  Righteousness  will  arise  in  the  horizon  of  universal  industry,  and 
shed  its  genial  rays  over  all  the  fields  of  peace,  plenty,  and  human  happiness.' 


TENTH  EDITION. 


NEW  YORK: 

PUBLISHED  BY  S.  S.  LYON,  AND  WM,  FISHBOUGH. 

FOR  SALE,  WHOLESALE  AND  RETAIL,  BY  J.  S.  REDFIELD,  CLINTON  HALL. 


1852. 


Entered,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1847, 

By  SILAS  S.  Li' ON,  AND  WILLIAM  FISHBOUGH, 

in  the  Clerk’s  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  United  States,  in  and  for  the  South- 
ern District  of  New  York. 


STKKF.OTYI'I  !)  UV  KKI>m:r.I>  & SAVAOJfc, 
13  CliiunLcrs  &tieet,  N.  Y. 


SCRIBE’S  INTRODUCTION. 


BIOGRAPHICAL  SKETCH  OF  THE  AUTHOR,  AND  HISTORY  OF  THE 
PRODUCTION  OF  THIS  VOLUME. 

A work:  of  unprecedented  character  is  here  presented  to  the  world.  It 
consists  of  the  consecutive  reasonings  and  revelations  of  a spirit  freed,  by  a 
certain  physical  process,  the  philosophy  of  which  is  explained,  from  the  ob- 
structing influence  of  the  material  organization,  and  exalted  to  a position  which 
gave  access  to  a knowledge  of  the  structure  and  laws  of  the  whole  material 
and  spiritual  Universe.  It  treats  upon  subjects  of  the  profoundest  interest  and 
of  the  most  unspeakable  importance  to  the  human  race ; and  as  its  claims  are 
confessedly  of  the  most  startling  character,  and  its  professed  disclosures,  with  the 
phenomena  attending  them,  are  in  some  respects  unparalleled  in  the  history  of 
psychology,  it  is  certainly  no  more  than  just  that  the  world  should  be  furnished 
with  a plain,  concise,  yet  circumstantial  account  of  the  author  of  the  hook,  with 
a history  of  its  origin  and  production,  and  with  the  means  of  either  verifying 
or  refuting  what  is  said  concerning  the  source  from  which  it  sprang,  and  the 
means  employed  in  its  production.  A few  preliminary  remarks,  however,  are 
deemed  proper  as  introductory  to  the  statements  herein  to  be  submitted. 

It  is  obvious  to  every  intelligent  mind  that  the  condition  of  the  human  race, 
socially,  nationally,  mentally,  and  spiritually,  is  continually  changing.  There 
is  at  present  no  civilized  nation  upon  the  globe  which  does  not  present  a 
totally  different  aspect  as  to  manners,  customs,  social  structure,  science,  art, 
religion,  and  all  the  conventionalisfns  of  life,  from  any  nation  existing  upon 
the  earth  four  thousand  years  ago.  Every  period  of  human  history  shows, 
upon  the  whole,  a distinct  progress  in  the  condition  of  mankind  beyond  that 
of  previous  periods.  Instances  of  apparent  retrogression,  as  in  the  cases  of 
the  various  catastrophes  that  have  occurred  at  different  periods  during  the  geo- 
logical history  of  the  earth,  only  exhibit  the  apparent  disorder  incident  to  a 
transition  from  a lower  to  a higher  state  of  development.  In  passing  through 
the  uncouth  semi-harbarism  of  the  early  ages  to  the  refinements  and  intellec- 
tual and  artistic  attainments  of  the  nineteenth  century,  the  race  has  of  course 
passed  through  every  intermediate  stage  of  cultivation  ; and  a close  observation 
and  analysis  will  prove  that  every  decided  stage  of  human  progress  has  been 
accompanied  by  new  and  distinct  mental  and  social  wants  ; and  in  order  that 
these  might  he  duly  supplied,  new  resources  have  been  invariably  opened,  and 
new  instrumentalities  have  been  instituted. 


JV 


INTRODUCTION. 


It  would  require  but  little  argument,  therefore,  aside  from  the  fact  that 
change  is  perpetual,  to  prove  that  the  mental  and  social  wants  of  the  present 
differ  essentially  from  those  of  any  previous  generation.  Perhaps  at  no  period 
in  the  tvorld’s  history  so  little  characterized  by  revolutionary  violence,  has  the 
general  mental  and  social  condition  of  mankind  undergone  changes  so  marked 
and  conspicuous  as  during  the  last  century.  In  respect  to  all  matters  of  science, 
particularly,  has  there  been  an  immense  unfolding ; and  the  mechanical  and 
economic  arts  have  been  correspondingly  improved.  The  seven  seals  of  the 
great  geological  book  have  been  broken,  and  its  rocky  leaves  have  disclosed 
the  physical  history  of  the  earth  for  millions  of  years.  Powerful  telescopes 
have  penetrated  the  abysses  of  space,  and  the  grandeur  and  harmony  of  the 
Universe  have  been  unfolded  to  an  extent  far  transcending  all  previous  concep- 
tion : and  the  researches  in  the  departments  of  chemistry,  physiology,  and  com- 
parative anatomy,  are  constantly  proving  more  and  more  conspicuously  that 
all  things  are  but  parts  inseparably  connected  in  one  grand  System.  jAll  these 
sublime  results  of  science  tend  to  expand  the  mind  beyond  the  narrow  circle  of 
which  self  is  the  centre,  and  to  unite  the  soul  with  those  things  which  it  be- 
holds, contemplates,  and  admires.  Man  is  thus  made  deeply  sensible  that  he 
is  a mere  atom  in  infinite  space,  surrounded  by  beings  and  creations  unspeaka- 
bly more  important  than  himself ; and  as  he  contemplates  the  wide-spread 
fields  of  creation,  teeming  with  tokens  of  impartial  favor,  a flame  of  philan- 
thropy is  enkindled  in  his  soul  that  consumes  all  narrow  prejudices  and  selfish 
inclinations,  and  he  sympathizes  with  universal  Man  as  the  great  Body  of 
which  he  is  a mere  organ. 

Such  are  the  moral  and  social  tendencies  of  the  science  of  the  age,  even  con- 
sidering the  same  in  the  more  abstract  point  of  view.  But  from  the  same 
source  more  important  influences  indirectly  arise.  From  the  materials  of  sci- 
ence the  busy  hand  of  mechanism  is  forming  filaments  to  bind  together  the  ex- 
tremities of  each  nation,  and  is  developing  the  resources,  exchanging  the  com- 
modities, and  harmonizing  the  interests,  of  every  clime.  Iron  steeds,  nerved 
by  the  stimulus  of  the  expanding  vapor,  are  plunging  through  the  ocean,  meas- 
uring the  distance  between  the  two  hemispheres  by  the  lapse  of  a few  days,  or 
prancing  to  and  fro  in  the  earth,  facilitating  exchanges  and  promoting  friendly 
intercourse  between  all  communities  and  people.  The  imponderable  elements 
have  been  laid  under  contribution,  and,  by  the  subtle  agency  of  the  electric 
fluid,  man  converses  with  his  neighbor  at  the  distance  of  a thousand  miles  Avith 
the  same  facility  with  which  two  would  converse  a few  rods  apart.  The  veins, 
and  arteries,  and  nerves,  of  the  great  Body  of  humanity,  are  thus  being  devel- 
oped, in  the  form  of  steamships,  and  railroads,  and  magnetic  telegraphs,  and 
its  muscles  and  sinews  are  being  unfolded  in  the  form  of  labor-saving  and  pro- 
ductive machinery.  And  all  science  and  art  tend  powerfully  to  extend  the 
fibres  and  channels  of  communication  thus  being  unfolded,  throughout  the  whole 
earth,  and  thus  to  form  of  the  whole  race  one  harmonious  Body,  posses- 
sing one  common  spring  of  action,  one  common  social  and  theological  system, 
and  bound  together  with  one  chain  of  sympathy  running  through  all  its  diver- 
sified parts. 

Such,  we  say,  are  the  conspicuous  and  powerful  tendencies  of  all  the  scien- 
tific and  artistic  attainments  of  the  age.  But  to  these  tendencies  there  exist 
the  most  powerful  obstructions,  which  have  thus  far  defied  all  attempts  of  phi- 


INTRODUCTION. 


V 


lanthropists  and  reformers  to  remove.  These  obstructions  consist  in  the  local 
prejudices,  and  the  social,  national,  commercial,  and  theological  antagonisms, 
that  prevail  throughout  the  whole  earth.  All  men  and  communities  are  anx- 
ious for  the  establishment  of  a more  intimate  unity  in  the  race,  but  each  desires 
that  this  unity  should  be  founded  on  the  basis  of  his  own  peculiar  system.  The 
Cai^ust  would  have  the  whole  world  form  one  harmonious  brotherhood,  pos- 
sessing one  faith,  one  hope,  and  one  baptism,  but  then  he  would  have  them  all 
Calvinists  ; the  Arminian  desires  the  same  union,  but  only  on  the  basis  of  his 
own  theological  system.  The  Catholic  desires  that  all  should  become  Catho- 
lics, and  only  on  this  ground  will  he  consent  to  a union  with  others.  The  Jews 
desire  a unity  of  the  race,  but  they  desire  first  to  be  restored  to  the  land  of  Pales- 
tine, and  then  that  all  Gentile  nations  should  unite  as  their  subordinates  under 
the  reign  of  their  expected  Messiah.  The  intelligent  Mohammedan  desires  the 
establishment  and  perfection  of  the  universal  brotherhood,  but  he  demands  that 
every  man  should  first  devoutly  exclaim,  “Allah  is  God,  and  Mohammed  is 
his  prophet.”  And  the  same  remarks  might  with  equal  propriety  be  extended 
to  all  parties,  sects,  denominations,  and  religionists,  throughout  the  whole 
earth.  All  are  equally  sincere  in  their  opinions,  and  equally  zealous  in  their 
proclamation,  each  believing  that  his  own  system  is  sanctioned  by  the  Deity  ; 
though  as  the  devotees  of  all  social,  national,  and  especially  theological  sys- 
tems, derive  their  opinions  from  the  fortuitous  circumstances  of  birth  and  early 
education,  it  is  impossible  that  more  than  one  out  of  the  thousand  can  be  right, 
and  the  extreme  probability  is  that  all  are  wrong.  And  while  the  followers 
of  each  system  pray  fervently  and  labor  diligently  for  the  conversion  of  the 
whole  world,  all  are  mutually  and  purposely  obstructing  the  efforts  of  each 
other ; and  the  obstruction  creates  impatience,  jealousy,  bigotry,  fanaticism, 
and  every  species  of  hostility  and  persecution  that  now  so  unhappily  distract 
the  human  race,  and  array  brother  against  brother,  and  community  against 
community,  causing  the  truly  philanthropic  soul  to  weep  in  hopeless  despon- 
dency. f 

It  is  clear  to  every  mind  that  so  long  as  these  diversified  antagonisms  in  so- 
ciety exist  throughout  the  world,  so  long  that  universal  peace,  brotherly  love, 
and  social  and  national  unity,  so  devoutly  to  be  desired,  can  not  possibly  take 
place.  The  all-absorbing  desire  of  the  enlightened  philanthropist,  therefore,  is 
that  these  antagonisms  may  be  removed  by  the  institution  of  some  grand  and 
universal  System  of  thought  and  action,  based  upon  the  nature  of  things  and 
the  true  relations  of  men  to  each  other.  This,  therefore,  should  be  considered 
as  the  true  and  great  leading  want  of  the  human  mind  at  the  present  more  than 
at  any  previous  age  of  the  world  ; and  who  shall  judge  a priori  that  in  the  un- 
varying laws  of  the  All-Wise  Being,  provisions  may  not  have  been  made  to 
supply  this  as  well  as  all  real  wants  of  the  human  race  at  all  previous  ages? 
And  when  to  the  foregoing  remarks  is  superadded  the  consideration  that  nei- 
ther reason  nor  any  previous  revelation  authorizes  the  belief  that  the  channels 
of  spiritual  communication  with  this  lower  world  have  been  permanently 
closed,  may  we  not  expect  a respectful  attention  to  the  following  statement 
and  remarks,  and  also  such  a candid  perusal  of  the  volume  herewith  submitted, 
as  may  enable  the  reader  properly  to  judge  what  relation  (if  any)  the  same 
bears  to  those  very  demands  of  the  age  which  are  of  all  others  the  most  pres- 
sing ? — 


VI 


INTRODUCTION. 


Andrew  Jackson  Davis,  the  youthful  author  of  this  book,  is,  while  in  his 
normal  state,  distinguished  by  no  mental  or  physical  peculiarities  that  would 
be  likely  to  excite  the  particular  attention  of  any  merely  superficial  observer. 
He  is  of  the  ordinary  stature,  with  a well-proportioned  physical  frame,  posses- 
sing a bilious-sanguine-nervous  temperament.  His  features  are  prominent, 
and  his  head  is  cf  the  medium  size,  and  very  smoothly  developed,  especially 
in  the  frontal  and  coronal  regions.  The  base  of  the  brain  is  small,  except  in 
the  region  of  the  perceplives,  which  are  prominent.  The  head  is  covered  with 
a profusion  of  jet-black  hair.  The  expression  of  his  countenance  is  mild, 
placid,  and  indicative  of  a peculiar  degree  of  frankness  and  benevolence ; and 
from  his  eyes  beams  forth  a peculiar  radiance  which  we  have  never  witnessed 
in  any  other  person.  This  is  especially  the  case  in  his  moments  of  interior 
meditation  and  mental  expansion.  His  inferior  passions  are  only  moderately 
developed,  and  are  completely  under  the  control  of  reason  and  the  moral  sen- 
timents. During  daily  intercourse  with  him  for  eighteen  months,  we  have 
never  known  him  to  manifest  the  least  degree  of  anger  or  impatience,  though 
we  have  known  him  to  be  severely  tried.  He  is  very  fond  of  congenial  soci- 
ety, though  he  is  peculiarly  sensitive  to  what  are  in  his  book  called  the 
“ spheres”  of  certain  individuals,  or  the  influence  or  atmosphere  emanating 
from  them.  Thus  he  is  instinctively  either  attracted  to  or  repelled  from  a man 
on  first  coming  into  his  presence,  and  from  the  same  cause  he  generally  forms 
a judgment  of  human  character  at  first  sight,  which,  as  to  accuracy,  we  have 
seldom  if  ever  known  to  fail.  This  sensitiveness  to  spheres  forms  a striking 
trait  in  his  character.  He  has  a most  ardent  and  devoted  attachment  to  his 
friends.  He  recognises  no  enemies,  though  the  presence  of  some  persons,  es- 
pecially of  those  who  are  conceited,  bigoted,  or  dogmatical,  seems  to  give  him 
pain  ; and  such  he  accordingly  avoids.  To  congenial  spirits  he  is  inclined  to 
be  communicative  ; and  his  address  is  natural  and  easy,  though  devoid  of  all 
artificiality.  His  disposition  is  characterized  by  an  equanimity  and  cheerful- 
ness which  apparently  no  circumstance,  however  depressing,  can  disturb.  His 
mind  acts  with  vivacity,  and  he  is  rather  strongly  inclined  to  mirthfulness, 
though  he  informs  us  that  this  latter  characteristic  is  often  assumed  in  order  to 
counteract  a natural  tendency  of  the  mind  to  abstraction,  which  forms  an- 
other marked  trait  in  his  character.  His  imaginative  faculties  are  well  devel- 
oped, though  not  so  as  to  form  a prominent  trait  in  his  character.  A supreme 
love  of  truth  is  the  central  point  around  which  all  his  moral  faculties  revolve. 
Hence  he  holds  himself  entirely  open  to  conviction  from  all  sources  of  informa- 
tion, and  is  ever  ready  to  abandon  preconceived  opinions,  however  ardently 
cherished,  the  moment  he  finds  they  are  erroneous.  It  is  from  this  cause  that 
he  manifests  the  utmost  unconcern  when  his  pretensions  are  attacked.  His 
benevolence  is  very  active  and  steadfast,  and  is  not  confined  to  friends,  associ- 
ates, party,  or  sect,  but  extends  to  all  classes  of  mankind.  He  thus  takes  the 
utmost  pleasure  in  relieving  distress  and  in  bestowing  favors  whenever  oppor- 
tunity affords,  though  his  bestowments  are  always  graduated  by  an  acute  dis- 
crimination of  the  capacities  of  the  individuals  to  appreciate  and  profitably 
employ  them.  His  perceptive  and  reflective  faculties  are  well  and  evenly 
developed ; and  the  most  prominent  point  in  his  intellectual  character  is  an  easy 
and  instinctive  comprehension  of  great  general  principles  and  laws  that  govern 
Nature  and  Mankind.  His  intellectual  harmoniously  blend  with  his  moral  fac- 


INTRODUCTION. 


VII 


ulties  to  form  a perfectly-balanced  character  ; and  as  all  his  faculties  are  in  a 
nearly  equal  state  of  development,  he  is  remarkably  free  from  exaggeration  or 
“angular  forms  of  thought,”  and  is  disposed  to  give  to  each  subject  which 
he  comprehends,  all  the  importance  which  really  and  naturally  belongs  to  it, 
but  no  more.  Hence  his  judgment  is  matured  to  a degree  seldom  witnessed  in 
those  of  a more  mature  age ; and  what,  perhaps,  is  still  more  remarkable  than 
all  is,  that  all  his  leading  mental  operations  and  outward  actions  appear  to  be 
governed  by  a species  of  interior  prompting.  Upon  the  whole,  therefore,  he 
may  be  considered  as  a most  amiable,  simple-hearted,  truth-loving,  and  un- 
sophisticated young  man,  being  disconnected  from  all  sects,  parties,  creeds,  and 
denominations,  and  governed  solely  by  his  own  intuitions. 

Such  is  a description  of  his  character  while  in  his  normal  state,  as  it  has  ap- 
peared to  us  during  daily  intercourse  with  him  for  the  last  eighteen  months. 
And  it  is  owing  to  his  peculiar  physical  and  mental  constitution  that  he  has 
been  enabled,  by  the  assistance  of  magnetism,  to  abstract  himself  from  the 
gross  tangibilities  of  the  outer  world,  and  enter  that  state  of  exceeding  spiritual 
exaltation  and  mental  expansion  that  has  enabled  him  to  dictate  the  book  now 
submitted  to  the  world. 

But  the  mind  given  mainly  to  sensuous  processes  of  reasoning,  in  order  to 
feel  justified  in  reposing  full  confidence  in  the  authenticity  of  this  book,  will 
require  some  account  (such  as  he  may  either  verify  or  refute)  of  Mr.  Davis’s 
past  history,  of  his  acquirements  by  ordinary  processes  of  education  and  men- 
tal discipline,  and  of  the  origin  and  production  of  this  book.  This  reasonable 
demand  shall  be  gratified  to  the  extent  of  our  present  ability ; and  the  main 
facts  shall  be  substantiated  by  the  testimony  of  disinterested  persons. 

A singular  instance,  showing  Mr.  Davis’s  indifference  to  things  of  no  practi- 
cal importance,  consists  in  the  fact  that  he  did  not  until  recently  know  where 
he  was  born.  At  the  earliest  period  to  which  his  recollection  extends,  he  resi- 
ded with  his  parents  in  the  township  of  Hyde  Park,  Dutchess  county,  New 
York ; and  during  two  summers  of  his  residence  in  that  township,  he  was  also 
employed  by  Mr.  W.  W.  Woodworth  in  the  capacity  of  a keeper  of  cattle. 
But  his  father  recently  informed  us  that  he  was  born  in  Bloominggrove,  Orange 
county,  New  York,  and  that  on  the  11th  of  August,  1847,  he  will  be  twenty- 
one  years  of  age  — according  to  which  he  must  have  been  born  on  the  11th  of 
August,  1826.  From  Hyde  Park  he  removed,  with  his  father,  to  Poughkeep- 
sie, on  the  first  of  September,  1838,  after  which,  for  some  eighteen  months,  he 
worked  with  his  father  at  his  trade.  Immediately  after  this  he  was  engaged 
in  the  grocery  of  Mr.  Nicholas  Lawrence,  which  store  his  father  subsequently 
purchased,  and  in  which  he  continued  until  the  spring  of  1841,  when  he  bound 
himself  as  an  apprentice  to  Mr.  Ira  Armstrong. 

His  father  is  a simple-hearted  unsophisticated  man,  who  follows  .the  re- 
spectable occupation  of  a shoemaker  ; and  so  far  as  this  world’s  goods  are  con- 
cerned, he  has  always  been  very  poor.  His  mother  (long  since  deceased),  we 
are  informed,  was  one  of  those  gentle  beings  whose  supreme  delight  it  is  to 
mingle  in  scenes  of  sickness  and  sorrow,  and  to  administer  to  the  relief  of  suf- 
fering humanity.  Neither  father  nor  mother  was  particularly  inclined  to  in- 
tellectual pursuits,  and  hence  they  felt  no  anxiety  to  bestow  an  education  upon 
their  son  extending  beyond  the  simplest  rudiments  that  may  be  acquired  in  a 
common  school.  Owing  to  this  fact,  in  connexion  with  the  straitened  financial 


nn 


INTRODUCTION. 


• 

circumstances  of  the  parents,  the  hoy’s  school  tuition  was  confined  to  about 
five  months,  during  which  time  he  learned  to  read  imperfectly,  to  write  a fair 
hand,  and  to  do  simple  sums  in  arithmetic.  From  early  youth,  therefore,  until 
he  entered  on  his  clairvoyance  career,  he  was  mostly  kept  at  such  manual  em- 
ployments as  were  adapted  to  his  age,  during  which  time  his  little  earnings 
and  affectionate  attentions  contributed  greatly  to  the  support  of  his  immediate 
family  connexions.  With  these  duties  and  responsibilities  constantly  pressing 
upon  his  mind,  he  had  neither  desire  nor  opportunity  to  study  and  inform  him- 
self even  upon  the  simplest  branches  of  science,  history,  or  general  literature. 
During  the  intervals  between  his  hours  of  employment  he  was  never  knorvn  to 
frequent  public  libraries,  and  was  seldom  known  to  take  up  a book  ; and  his  very 
limited  reading  was  confined  to  a few  juvenile  productions,  fugitive  essays,  and 
light  romances,  not,  perhaps,  comprising  over  four  hundred  or  five  hundred 
pages  at  most ; and  even  this  little  reading  was  pursued  in  the  most  desultory 
manner.  The  frankness,  openness,  and  sincerity,  which  have  characterized  the 
boy  from  infancy  to  the  present  moment,  and  the  probabilities  arising  from  his 
youth  and  inexperience  in  the  arts  of  the  world,'  forbid  entirely  the  suspicion 
that  he  could  have  been  pursuing  in  secret  any  sinister  designs  upon  the  credu- 
lity of  the  world  ; and  the  restrictions  Avhich  poverty  imposed  upon  his  mental 
exertions,  and  the  ten  thousand  incidentals  connected  with  a daily  and  hourly 
intercourse  of  some  one  or  more  persons  with  him,  absolutely  forbid  the  possi- 
bility of  his  having  in  secret  carried  on  a design  of  this  kind,  even  had  he  been 
morally  capable  of  a fraud  so  palpable. 

The  foregoing  facts  are  gathered  from  incidental  and  free  conversations  with 
different  persons  who  were  familiarly  acquainted  with  the  young  man  from 
early  youth  up  to  his  forming  a connexion  with  Dr.  Lyon,  and  removing  to 
New  York,  in  August,  1845.  To  these  statements  we  will  add  the  following 
testimonies  from  respectable  citizens,  the  first  of  Hyde  Park,  the  next  three  of 
Poughkeepsie,  and  the  last  from  R.ev.  A.  R.  Bartlett,  now  of  Chicago : — 

Hyde  Park,  January  2,  1847. 

Dear  Sir:  In  answer  to  yours  of  the  30lh  December  last,  asking  some  informa- 
tion respecting  A.  J.  Davis,  I can  only  say  that  he  was  born  in  this  town*  of  poor 
but  respectable  parents.  His  father,  during  the  period  of  his  (A.  J.’s)  early  youth, 
was  in  my  employ  some  three  or  four  years,  during  which  time  I saw  the  boy  almost 
every  day.  There  was  nothing  remarkable  in  him,  unless  it  might  have  been  an 
inquiring  disposition,  which,  however,  Avas  not  remarkable  to  a very  great  extent. 
He  was  of  good  moral  character.  His  only  facilities  for  obtaining  an  education  were 
such  as  are  afforded  by  a district  school,  which  he  was  not  much  disposed  to  attend. 
As  to  his  natural  talents,  there  was  nothing  that  I ever  saw  to  induce  the  belief  that 
they  were  either  above  or  below  mediocrity.  In  short,  he  was  what  might  have  been 
called  an  ordinary,  civil,  well-disposed  boy. 

Yours,  respectfully,  JOHN  HINCHMAN. 

Poughkeepsie,  January  2,  1847- 

Friend  Wm.  Fishbougi-i:  Thine  of  the  30th  of  last  month  is  received,  requesting 
of  me  to  give  thee  what  information  I am  irr  possession  of  in  relation  to  the  charac- 
ter, habits,  fcc.,  of  A.  J.  Davis  while  a resident  of  our  village. 

The  first  I knew  of  him  was  when  about  sixteen  years  of  age,  while  he  was  an  ap- 
prentice to  the  shoemaking  business ; and  from  that  time  I saw  him  very  frequently 
until  he  left  the  place,  which  was  from  two  to  three  years  after,  I think.  As  to  his 
character  and  habits,  I always  believed  them  to  be  good;  and  his  opportunities  of 
instruction,  if  he  had  any,  were  very  limited.  I believe  him  to  be  an  uneducated 
young  man,  and  of  very  humble  parentage. 

Very  respectfully  thy  friend,  E.  C.  SOUTHWICK. 

* That  is  ? mistake,  according  to  the  statement  of  his  father,  mentioned  above. 


INTRODUCTION. 


is 

Poughkeepsie,  January  21,  1847. 

Dear  Sir:  In  complying  'with  your  request,  to  write  you  an  account  of  wha-:  I 
know,  whether  favorable  or  otherwise,  of  the  character,  habits,  education,  &c.,  of 
Mr.  A.  J.  Davis,  permit  me  to  express  my  satisfaction  at  being  enabled  to  render  yon 
an  account  which  is  favorable.  I have  enjoyed  a personal  acquaintance  of  three 
years  with  Mr.  Davis,  under  circumstances  favorable  to  obtaining  a correct  knowledge 
of  his  character,  &c. ; and  so  fully  persuaded  am  I of  his  moral  worth  and  integrity, 
that  I would  not  hesitate  to  place  implicit  confidence  in  him  under  the  most  trying 
circumstances.  From  seeing  and  conversing  with  him  almost  daily  during  the  first 
year  of  our  acquaintance,  and  from  the  frequent  subsequent  intercourse  we  have 
had,  I have  the  assurance  to  think  I know  him  as  wrell  as  any  other  person  ; and 
such  is  the  opinion  I have  formed  of  him.  His  honesty,  his  frankness,  his  veracity, 
his  sensibility — in  short,  his  virtue  to  the  fullest  extent  in  which  this  word  can  be 
understood,  are  worthy  of  all  praise.  Of  his  education  (that  which  he  obtained  at 
school  or  from  books,  I mean),  I am  constrained  to  say  it  is  of  a very  limited  charac- 
ter, he  having  never  received  more  than  about  five  months’  schooling,  as  he  has  often 
stated  to  me ; which  statement  is  corrobprated  by  the  testimony  of  those  who  have 
known  him  from  his  childhood.  His  reading  has  also  been  limited,  and  of  a character 
calculated  to  yield  him  no  great  benefit.  It  has  served  as  a mere  pastime — a mere 
gratification  for  the  moment.  Indeed,  he  seemed  to  have  no  higher  end  in  it  than 
amusement  for  the  time  being. 

Yours,  very  respectfully,  S.  S.  LAPHAM. 

The  following  letter  from  Mr.  Armstrong,  to  whom  young  Davis  was-. a$. 
apprentice  for  about  two  years,  is  deserving  of  particular  attention : — 

Poughkeepsie,  January  9,  fS47. 

Dear  Sir  : Your  letter  was  received  a few  days  ago,  but  I have  lacked  time  to 
answer  it  before  now.  The  world,  you  say,  may  yet  ask,  Who  is  A.  J.  Davis?  To 
this  question,  so  far  as  I am  able,  it  shall  have  a frank  and  truthful  answer.  With 
the  early  life  of  A.  J.  Davis  I am  altogether  unacquainted,  except  from  his  own 
account  of  it,  sustained  by  the  testimony  of  others.  His  father  was  in  exceedingly 
straitened  circumstances;  so  much  so,  that  Jackson  was  in  very  early  life,  and  long 
before  I knew  him,  compelled  to  toil  and  watchfulness  to  aid  in  supporting  his  father’s 
family.  I have  often  thought  that  it  was  this  circumstance  more  than  any  other 
which  gave  him  habits  of  steadiness  and  sobriety  far  beyond  his  years.  He  was,  I 
think,  near  fifteen  when  I first  became  acquainted  with  him.  I had  occasion  for  the 
services  of  a hoy  somewhat  acquainted  with  the  shoe-trade,  and  employed  him  for  a 
fortnight  to  assist  me.  During  this  time,  I was  so  much  pleased  with  his  good  sense 
and  industry,  that,  upon  his  own  solicitation  and  the  wish  of  his  father,  I took  him  as 
an  apprentice.  His  education  barely  amounted  to  a knowledge  of  reading,  writing,  and 
the  rudiments  of  arithmetic.  His  reading  was  exceedingly  limited,  and  eonfined  to  that 
of  a light  and  juvenile  description.  During  his  two  years  of  apprenticeship,  he  estab- 
lished a character  for  faithfulness  and  integrity  not  to  he  surpassed,  and  which  is  seldom 
equalled.  There  was  no  probability  that  we  should  have  parted  before  the  conclusion 
of  his  apprenticeship,  for  we  were  mutually  satisfied  with  each  other.  But  Mesmerism 
stepped  in  between  us ; and  Jackson  being  thought  a prodigy  in  prescribing  for  and 
curing  disease,  we  parted,  with  the  understanding  that  our  separation  was  to  be  hut 
temporary.  But  circumstances  have  made  it  perpetual,  so  far  as  apprenticeship  is. 
concerned. 

Yours,  IRA  ARMSTRONG. 

Rev.  A.  R,  Bartlett,  now  of  Chicago,  and  author  of  the  following  letter, 
was  formerly  a settled  and  esteemed  pastor  in  Poughkeepsie 

Chicago,  March  31,  1847. 

Mr.  Fishbough  : You  ask  me  for  a frank  statement  of  what  I know  of  the  men- 
tal and  moral  character,  opportunities,  acquirements,  &c.,  of  A.  J.  Davis,  during  the 
period  of  my  intercourse  and  . acquaintance  with  him.  In  reply,  permit  me  to  say 
that  I first  became  acquainted  with  A.  J.  Davis  in  Poughkeepsie,  N.  Y.,  early  in  the 
year  1842.  At  that  time,  ana  until  his  services  were  wholly  absorbed  by  the  mes- 
meric art,  he  was  engaged  in  the  business  of  shoemaking.  He  had  no  mother  living; 
his  father  was  very  industrious,  but  poor.  Hence,  at  a tender  age,  the  subject  of  this 
sketch  was  thrown  to  a great  extent,  if  not  wholly,  upon  his  own  exertions  for  the 
means  of  support  and  progress.  This,  at  least,  was  his  condition  when  I formed  his 


X 


INTRODUCTION. 


acquaintance.  What  his  earliest  opportunities  may  have  been,  I can  not  testify  from 
personal  knowledge.  But  at  the  date  of  our  intimacy,  no  one  could  resist  the  con- 
viction that  his  advantages  had  not  been  sufficient  to  give  him  common  proficiency  in 
the  simplest  elements  of  the  English  language.  Decided  disadvantages  were  all 
around  him,  and  so  continued,  so  far  as  obtaining  an  education  was  concerned;  for 
during  my  acquaintance  with  him,  which  was  most  intimate  from  A.  D.  1842  to  1845 
(and  continued  by  correspondence  till  recently),  he  had  not  an  hour’s  schooling,  nor 
could  lie  have  afforded  it  consistently  with  his  circumstances.  Yet  he  possessed  an 
inquiring  mind — loved  books,  especially  controversial  religious  works,  which  he 
always  preferred,  whenever  he  could  borrow  them  and  obtain  leisure  for  their  peru- 
sal. Hence,  he  was  indebted  to  his  individual  exertions  for  some  creditable  advances 
which  lie  made  in  knowledge.  He  became  a good  thinker.  Still,  his  natural  method 
of  communication  at  times  tended  to  obscure  his  thoughts,  through  a misuse  of 
words.  His  orthography  and  syntax  were  often  faulty. 

The  singular  powers  claimed  for  Mr.  Davis  were  first  brought  into  public  notice 
by  the  experimental  assistance  of  Mr.  William  Levingston,  by  whom  he  continued  to 
be  mesmerized  for  many  months.  This  was  not  far  from  October,  1843.  In  his  nat- 
ural appearance,  deportment,  or  opportunities,  no  change  was  observable  at  this  or 
any  other  period  of  my  acquaintance  with  him.  There  was  nothing  in  his  general 
deportment  or  character  that  would  attract  the  attention  of  those  who  were  not  his 
intimates,  except  it  might  be  the  fact  that  he  had  few  associates  of  his  own  age,  and 
preferred  the  society  of  more  experienced  men  : though  a few  companions  suited  him 
better  than  many.  He  was  always  fond  of  asking  questions,  but  had  no  power  to 
conceal  his  object  in  proposing  them  ; very  communicative  to  those  whom  he  regarded 
as  friends — moderately  so  to  others.  His  veracity,  so  far  as  I have  been  able  to  ob- 
serve— and  I have  criticised  him  closely — could  be  depended  upon.  I know  that  he 
would  suffer  much  inconvenience  rather  than  descend  to  untruthfulness.  He  was 
always  cheerful  and  pleasant,  and  at  times  rather  inclined  to  levity  through  the 
natural  exuberance  of  his  spirits.  Over  the  latter,  however,  he  held  a strong  con- 
trol. He  was  rather  devotional  in  his  feelings,  with  very  strong  sympathies  in  behalf 
of  the  struggling  and  suffering  ; an  ardent  temperance  man  ; and  his  moral  charac- 
ter was  worthy  of  general  approbation.  Indeed,  I fully  believe  that  he  aimed  to  be 
governed  by  high  and  holy  principles.  That  I am  qualified  to  make  the  above  state- 
ments you  can  easily  judge,  when  I tell  you  that,  as  long  as  opportunity  allowed,  we 
were  intimate  almost  without  reserve,  and  the  mutual  confidants  of  each  other. 

A.  R.  BARTLETT. 

Many  more  testimonies  of  like  tenor  with  the  above  might  be  collected,  but 
these  are  deemed  sufficient,  at  least  for  the  present. 

We  will  now  present  a brief  history  of  Mr.  Davis’s  career  in  clairvoyance, 
including  an  account  of  the  origin  and  production  of  this  book. 

In  the  autumn  of  1843,  a Mr.  Grimes  delivered  in  Poughkeepsie  a number 
of  lectures  on  Animal  Magnetism,  performing  during  his  course  a number  of 
illustrative  experiments.  Among  the  persons  on  whom  Mr.  Grimes  essayed 
to  operate  was  young  Davis ; but  in  this  instance  his  most  powerful  efforts 
failed  to  produce  any  apparent  effect.  By  his  lectures  and  the  successful  ex- 
periments accompanying  them,  however,  considerable  excitement  was  created 
in  the  village  concerning  this  important  branch  of  psychological  science  ; and 
among  others  who  were  induced  to  test  their  own  powers  in  producing  the 
magnetic  phenomenon,  was  Mr.  William  Levingston.  Young  Davis  happen- 
ing into  the  tailor-shop  of  Mr.  Levingston  during  the  general  excitement,  the 
latter  gentleman  proposed  a trial  to  magnetize  him.  The  experiment  which 
followed  succeeded  ; and  the  boy  exhibited  powers  of  clairvoyance  which  were 
truly  surprising.  A great  variety  of  tests  were  submitted,  such  as  requiring 
him  to  visit  and  describe  places  which  he  had  never  seen,  to  read  from  a closed 
volume  with  his  eyes  bandaged,  &c. ; and  the  result  was  to  establish  his  power 
of  interior  sight  beyond  dispute.  This  experiment  took  place  about  the  first  of 
December,  1843. 


INTRODUCTION. 


XI 


From  that  time  forward  the  hoy  was  frequently  thrown  into  the  abnormal 
state,  and  Mr.  Levingston’s  house  was  for  months  the  common  resort  of  the 
curious  who  were  indiscriminately  invited  to  come  and  witness  the  experi- 
ments. But  after  submitting  for  two  or  three  months  to  all  species  of  tests  for 
no  other  purpose  than  that  of  gratifying  curiosity  and  establishing  the  reality 
of  the  clairvoyant  state,  the  boy,  while  in  the  latter  state,  protested  against 
being  longer  subjected  to  any  tests,  except  such  as  might  involve  matters  of 
practical  utility  — informing  Mr.  Levingston  that  the  great  object  of  his  powers 
in  the  stage  of  development  to  which  they  had  then  attained,  was  to  enable  him 
to  examine,  and  prescribe  for,  the  diseased.  Shortly  after  this,  he  left  Mr.  Arm- 
strong, to  whom  he  was  an  apprentice,  and  entered,  with  his  magnetizer  Mr. 
L.,  into  the  exclusive  employment  of  treating  the  diseased,  in  which  employ- 
ment, as  it  appears  from  all  the  testimonies  we  have  received,  he  was  surpri- 
singly successful.  Not  long  after  this,  and  by  progressive  stages,  his  scientific 
powers  became  immensely  unfolded ; and  there  was  no  science  the  general 
principles  and  much  of  minutise  of  which  he  did  not  seem  to  comprehend  while 
in  his  abnormal  state.  He  also  from  time  to  time  presented  many  novel  and 
highly-interesting  ideas  concerning  the  nature  and  powers  of  the  human  soul, 
seeming  to  demonstrate  an  intimate  connexion  between  the  present  and  the 
spirit  world. 

On  the  7th  of  March,  1844,  he  fell,  without  the  assistance  of  the  magnetic 
process,  into  a strange  abnormal  state,  during  which  phenomena  occurred  of  the 
most  surprising  character.  For  the  greater  part  of  the  time  during  two  days, 
he  seemed  to  be  entirely  insensible  to  all  external  things,  and  to  live  wholly  in 
the  interior  world.  Possessing,  however,  an  increased  power  over  his  physical 
system,  he  travelled  a long  distance  during  this  time,  without  any  apparent 
fatigue.  It  was  during  this  extraordinary  state  of  his  mental  and  physical  sys- 
tem that  he  received  information  of  a very  general  character,  of  his  future  and 
peculiar  mission  to  the  world.  The  process  by  which  this  information  was 
received,  with  many  other  things  of  intense  interest,  shall  be  made  public  after 
questions  by  which  the  phenomena  may  be  rationalized  shall  have  been  more 
thoroughly  discussed  on  independent  grounds.  By  minds  duly  prepared,  it  may 
now  be  conceived  on  reading  the  portion  of  this  volume  which  treats  on  the 
Spiritual  Spheres. 

The  reader  is  now  requested  to  observe  that,  according  to  the  foregoing  state- 
ments (which  are  open  to  refutation  if  false),  the  first  magnetic  experiment 
performed  on  Mr.  Davis  by  Mr.  Levingston  was  manifestly  suggested  by  the 
prevailing  excitement  growingout  of  Mr.  Grimes’s  lectures  and  experiments  — 
it  was  apparently  the  casual  prompting  of  a momentary  thought,  and  not  the 
result  of  a long-premeditated  and  ingeniously-arranged  plot.  Let  it  also  be  ob- 
served that  on  the  performance  of  this  first  experiment,  the  boy  Davis  suddenly 
became  a general  object  of  interest  such  as  he  had  not  been  before,  and  was 
freely  visited  and  tested  by  numerous  persons  while  he  was  (professedly  at 
least)  under  the  influence  of  magnetism.  Now  unless  the  reality  of  some  strange 
abnormal  condition  is  admitted,  some  more  rational  explanation  should  cer- 
tainly be  given  of  this  uneducated,  unsophisticated  young  boy  thus  suddenly, 
and  to  all  appearance  accidentally , being  brought  out  from  obscurity,  and  be- 
coming a public  wonder  on  account  of  his  strange  and  inexplicable  powers. 
But  if  an  acUtal  abnormal  and  inexplicable  condition  is  admitted,  the  reader 


Xll 


INTRODUCTION. 


should  reflect  before  deciding  against  the  possibility  of  anything  that  is  claimed 
as  growing  out  of  that  condition  in  a due  state  of  development. 

If,  from  the  time  the  boy  was  first  magnetized  until  the  time  he  left  Mr. 
Armstrong  (which  was  some  three  months  or  more  subsequently),  the  former 
had  made  any  considerable  effort  by  reading  to  inform  himself  upon  anatomi- 
cal, physiological,  astronomical,  geological,  or  psychological  subjects,  the  latter 
would  certainly  have  discovered  the  fact  and  mentioned  it  in  his  letter  which 
we  have  inserted  above.  Besides,  the  proficiency  in  these  subjects  which  could 
have  been  made  under  those  circumstances  by  such  a boy,  could  have  been  but 
little  even  with  the  most  diligent  efforts. 

Up  to  this  time,  therefore,  his  education,  according  to  Mr.  Armstrong,  “ barely 
amounted  to  a knowledge  of  reading,  writing,  and  the  rudiments  of  arithmetic” 
— and  “ his  reading  was  exceedingly  limited  and  confined  to  that  of  a light  and 
juvenile  description.”  At  this  period  (which  rvas  in  March,  1844)  we  find 
him  entering  on  a career  of  medical  practice,  in  which  he  sustained  himself  to 
the  utmost  satisfaction  of  all  patients  who  gave  him  a fair  trial,  until  April 
10, 1847,  after  which  time  he  ceased  to  be  magnetized  for  an  indefinite  period. 

During  Mr.  Davis’s  exclusive  connexion  with  Mr.  Levingston  (which  was 
from  March,  1S44,  to  August,  1845),  his  opportunities  for  acquiring  information 
by  external  processes  were  but  little  if  any  more  extensive  than  they  had  been 
before.  Mr.  L.  having  for  the  previous  part  of  his  life  been  absorbed  in  the 
respectable  occupation  of  a tailor,  had  not  been  able  to  store  his  mind  with  that 
scientific  and  philosophic  knowledge  which  could  have  qualified  him  to  impart 
any  important  instruction  to  the  young  man.  Nor  did  he  even  understand 
many  of  the  anatomical  and  medical  technicalities  which  the  clairvoyant  would 
frequently  use  in  his  examinations  and  prescriptions.  Nor  did  Mr.  L.  possess 
a library  from  which  the  young  man  could  have  derived  any  important  aid  in 
developing  his  mind  to  the  immense  extent  necessary  to  the  composition  of 
this  book.  Thus  the  Rev.  Mr.  Bartlett,  in  his  letter  above  inserted,  whose  in- 
timate acquaintance  with  Mr.  Davis,  according  to  his  own  statement,  extended 
from  early  in  1842  to  1845,  says  of  the  latter,  in  speaking  of  the  first  few  months 
of  his  clairvoyance-career,  “In  his  natural  appearance,  department , or  oppor- 
tunities, no  change  was  observable  at  this  or  any  other  period  of  my  acquaint- 
ance with  him." 

Mr.  Davis’s  connexion  with  Mr.  Levingston  continued  for  some  eighteen 
months,  during  the  fore  part  of  which  period  their  associate  labors  were  confined 
mostly  to  Poughkeepsie,  but  toward  the  latter  part  they  made  frequent  excur- 
sions to  Danbury  and  Bridgeport,  Connecticut,  in  all  of  which  places  they  had 
more  or  less  patients.  And  wherever  Davis  went  he  was  an  object  of  intense 
curiosity,  and  his  movements  were  as  a consequence  closely  observed,  not  only 
while  in  his  abnormal  but  while  in  his  ordinary  state.  In  each  of  those  places, 
therefore,  he  was  well  known  by  numerons  persons ; and  no  one  among  them 
has  ever  observed  any  reliable  indication  on  his  part  of  a studious  habit : or  if 
they  have,  they  will  give  forth,  not  their  vague  surmises,  but  the  tangible  facts 
susceptible  of  proof,  and  so  far  our  statement  will  be  considered  as  refuted. 
Indeed,  the  desultory  life  which  he  led  during  this  period  was  very  unfavora- 
ble to  study,  especially  to  that  land  of  study  which  could  have  afforded  any 
assistance  in  the  production  of  the  book  now  before  the  reader.  When  no< 
travelling,  he  was  on  an  average  thrown  into  the  abnormal  state  twice  a day  for 


INTRODUCTION-. 


XIII 


the  purpose  of  attending  to  the  diseased  ; and  most  of  the  time  while  in  the 
ordinary  state,  he  spent  in  some  light  manual  exercise,  in  walking,  or  in  visit- 
ing his  friends  ; and  he  spent  little  or  no  time  in  solitude. 

The  writer  of  this  first  became  acquainted  with  Mr.  Davis  in  July,  1844,  being 
at  that  time  on  a professional  visit  to  Poughkeepsie.  He  was  then  nearly  eigh- 
teen years  of  age,  appeared  to  be  of  rather  ^lender  constitution,  and  exhibited 
some  of  the  marks  of  delicate  health.  We  then  had  a long  conversation  with 
him,  during  which  he  appeared  very  communicative,  and  unbosomed  himself 
with  great  simplicity  ; and  from  the  thousand  little  indications  incidentally 
connected  with  his  manner,  pronunciation,  use  of  language,  the  form  and  char- 
acter of  his  thoughts,  &c.,  we  were  irresistibly  impressed  that  he  was  a young 
man  of  very  little  school  education,  having  almost  no  acquaintance  with  books, 
and  totally  uninstructed  in  the  arts  and  conventionalities  of  the  world.  His  mind, 
however,  indicated  a delicate  susceptibility  to  impressions,  and  a capacity  to 
comprehend  natural  principles  which  we  had  witnessed  in  but  few  of  his  age. 
Still  his  unique  style  of  expression  irresistibly  proved  that  his  own  heart  within, 
and  the  invariable  indications  of  Nature  without,  were  almost  the  only  books 
which  he  had  perused. 

We  also  at  the  same  time  heard  him  examine  a number  of  patients  while  in 
the  clairvoyant  state.  While  in  the  latter  state  he  appeared  as  if  metamor- 
phosed into  a totally  different  being.  The  human  system  seemed  entirely 
transparent  to  him,  and  to  our  utter  astonishment  he  employed  the  technical 
terms  of  anatomy,  physiology,  and  materia  medica , as  familiarly  as  household 
words  ! Our  surprise  was  equally  excited  by  the  exceeding  clearness  with 
which  he  described  and  reasoned  upon  the  nature,  origin,  and  progress  of  a dis- 
ease, and  concerning  the  appropriate  means  to  employ  for  its  removal.  From 
infallible  indications  presented,  we  saw  that  there  could  be  no  collusion  or  de- 
ception, and  no  such  thing  as  receiving  his  impressions  sympathetically  from 
the  mind  of  the  magnetizer.  From  that  time  we  neither  saw  nor  heard  any 
more  of  young  Davis  until  the  next  May. 

In  February,  1S45,  Mr.  Davis  being  (with  his  magnetizer)  in  Bridgeport, 
Connecticut,  attending  to  such  patients  as  required  his  services,  formed  an  ac- 
quaintance with  Dr.  S.  S.  Lyon,  the  magnetizer  connected  with  him  during  the 
delivery  of  this  book,  and  who  was  at  that  time  a successful  medical  practitioner 
in  Bridgeport.  Dr.  Lyon  had  previously  been  an  unbeliever  in  clairvoyance,  but 
the  evidence  of  its  truth,  as  presented  in  the  case  of  young  Davis,  proved  too 
powerful  for  him  to  resist ; and  under  a deep  conviction  of  its  importance,  he 
did  not  hesitate  to  render  it  his  open  encouragement,  and  to  avail  himself  of 
the  clairvoyant’s  advice  in  the  treatment  of  some  difficult  cases  of  disease  then 
under  his  charge. 

In  the  following  May,  the  writer  of  this  happening  to  be  at  Bridgeport,  'ac- 
cidentally fell  in  with  Mr.  Davis  and  Mr.  Levingston,  who  were  then  at  that 
place  on  business  connected  with  their  occupation.  During  a most  interesting 
consultation  which  we  then,  in  company  wiih  Rev.  S.  B.  Brittan  and  several 
other  gentlemen,  enjoyed  with  the  clairvoyant,  in  respect  to  various  scientific 
and  spiritual  subjects,  we  learned  for  the  first  time  that  he  was  soon  to  com- 
mence a 'series  of  lectures  and  revelations  upon  subjects  such  as  are  embraced 
in  this  book.  But  not  until  about  thirty  hours  previous  to  the  commencement 
of  these  lectures,  as  will  hereafter  be  shown,  had  we  the  least  anticipation  of 
being  connected  with  him  as  his  reporter. 


XIV 


INTRODUCTION. 


About  the  first  of  the  following  August,  Mr.  Davis,  while  in  the  clairvoyant 
state,  voluntarily  chose  Dr.  Lyon  to  be  his  magnetizer  during  the  delivery  of 
this  book,  this  choice  neither  having  been  solicited  nor  in  the  least  degree  an- 
ticipated by  Dr.  L.,  until  it  was  announced.  In  obedience  to  the  direction  of 
the  clairvoyant,  Dr.  Lyon  immediately  relinquished  a remunerative  and  in 
creasing  practice  in  Bridgeport,  qjid  removed  to  New  York,  in  which  city  the 
clairvoyant  decided  that  the  revelations  should  be  delivered.  The  object  of  sr 
early  a removal  to  that  city  was,  to  establish,  before  the  lectures  commenced, 
a medical  practice  that  might  in  some  measure  assist  in  sustaining  them  while 
said  lectures  were  in  progress. 

During  the  three  months  which  Mr.  Davis  spent  in  New  York  previously  to 
the  commencement  of  this  book,  he  was  thrown  into  the  abnormal  state  at  an 
average  of  twice  a day,  at  least  four  hours  of  each  day  being  thus  consumed  by 
the  duties  of  his  occupation.  Being,  as  usual,  an  object  of  great  curiosity,  he 
received  the  calls  of  many  persons  who  sought  his  acquaintance,  both  while  in 
the  normal  and  abnormal  state;  and  the  intervals  between  his  sittings  for  the 
treatment  of  disease  were  known  to  be  occupied  chiefly  in  conversation,  in 
writing  to  his  friends,  in  playing  on  his  accordeon,  or  in  walking  ; and  all  evi- 
dences conspired  against  the  idea  that  he  was  habitually  inclined  to  books. 
He  remained,  then,  up  to  the  commencement  of  his  lectures,  the  uneducated,  un- 
sophisticated child  of  Nature,  entirely  free  from  the  creeds,  theories,  and  phi- 
losophies of  the  world  : and  up  to  this  day,  he  has  never  been  inclined  to  seek 
the  society  of  scientific  men,  but  has  rather  avoided  them.  If  the  foregoing 
somewhat  circumstantial  history  of  his  life  is  untrue  in  any  particular  essen- 
tially involving  the  object  for  which  it  is  here  presented,  it  will,  considering 
the  immense  interests  that  are  at  stake,  certainly  he  refuted  ; forwe  have  thus 
unreservedly  laid  open  the  subject  to  the  investigation  of  the  whole  world. 

On  the  27th  of  November,  1845,  residing  at  the  time  in  New  Haven,  Con- 
necticut, we  received  per  mail  a note  from  Dr.  Lyon,  stating  that  we  had  been 
appointed  by  Mr.  Davis,  while  in  the  clairvoyant  state,  as  the  scribe  to  report 
and  prepare  for  the  press  his  lectures  which  were  to  commence  immediately. 
This  appointment  was  entirely  unsolicited  (we  will  not  say  undesired)  by  our- 
self ; and  so  far  from  anticipating  such  an  honor,  we  were  then  busily  engaged 
in  making  arrangements  to  remove  to  Massachusetts.  The  next,  day,  however, 
we  embarked  for  New  York,  and  in  the  evening  wrote  Mr.  Davis’s  first  lec- 
ture at  his  dictation  — subsequently  agreeing  to  write  and  prepare  the  whole 
for  the  press. 

Before  Mr.  Davis  commenced  his  lectures,  he  voluntarily,  while  in  the  ab- 
normal state,  chose  the  three  witnesses  mentioned  in  his  address,  to  the  world, 
to  be  present  as  their  circumstances  would  allow,  at  the  delivery  of  the  lectures, 
in  order  to  be  able  to  testify  of  the  medium  through  which  they  were  given. 
Rev.  J.  N.  Parker  has  since  removed  to  Boston  ; Theron  R.  Lapham  resides  at 
present  at  Poughkeepsie,  New  York  ; and  T.  Lea  Smith,  M.  D.,  is  in  Bermuda. 
The  twenty-three  incidental  witnesses  mentioned  in  the  note  on  page  2 of  the 
address  to  the  world,  are  all  still  living,  except  James  Victor  Wilson,  and  he 
has  left  his  testimony  behind.*  Either  of  the  living  witnesses  is  op^n  to  con- 

• A few  days  before  this  esteemed  and  highly-worthy  young  man  departed  to  the 
other  world,  he  published  an  interesting  pamphlet  entitled  “ Magnetism  and  Clair- 
voyance explained,  inculcated,  and  applied,”  in  which  he  says,  “ The  world  will  be 


INTRODUCTION. 


XV 


saltation ; and  each  will  testify  to  portions  of  the  book  being  delivered  in  his 
presence  by  Mr.  Davis  while  under  the  influence  of  magnetism  — to  the  origi- 
nal manuscripts  of  which  portions  (which  are  carefully  preserved)  they  may 
find  their  signatures  attached. 

The  number  of  witnesses  whose  names  are  mentioned  were  deemed  suffi- 
cient : if  their  testimony  is  not  received,  especially  when  it  is  ascertained  that 
they  (or  at  least  as  many  of  them  as  we  are  familiarly  acquainted  with)  are 
men  of  irreproachable  character,  it  is  not  probable  that  that  of  a thousand  others 
would  share  a fate  essentially  different.  During  the  delivery  of  each  lecture 
the  clairvoyant  required  that  the  utmost  tranquillity,  both  mental  and  physical, 
should  be  preserved  in  the  room.  While  in  the  sphere  of  the  body  (a  phrase 
hereafter  to  be  explained))  excitement  of  any  kind  always  disturbed  him,  as  did 
also  the  presence  of  persons  whose  “ spheres”  were  uncongenial.  Hence  an 
indiscriminate  admittance  of  persons  to  the  lectures  would  have  been  as  im- 
practicable as  it  was  unnecessary.  Yet  such  applicants  as  were  actuated  by  a 
supreme  desire  to  know  the  truth  irrespective  of  their  previous  opinions,  were 
generally  admitted  to  a number  ranging  from  one  to  six,  whether  they  were  be- 
lievers or  unbelievers  in  Clairvoyance,  and  such  persons  were  always  instantly 
distinguished  by  the  lecturer  while  in  his  superior  state. 

Shortly  after  the  lectures  commenced,  and  several  times  during  their  prog- 
ress, accounts  were,  in  various  journals,  published  of  the  same,  and  of  the 
nature  of  some  of  the  developments,  and  investigation  was  invited  from  all 
persons  who  might  feel  disposed  to  inquire  into  the  facts  stated.  Our  rooms, 
when  the  clairvoyant  was  not  lecturing,  were  freely  accessible  to  all  persons, 
from  seven  o’clock  in  the  morning  until  ten  o’clock  in  the  evening,  including 
the  hours  of  medical  examinations.  All  questions  were  promptly  and  candidly 
answered,  and  the  clairvoyant’s  manuscripts  were  always  open  to  the  inspec- 
tion of  the  curious ; and  if  any  responsible  person,  among  the  thousands  who 
called  on  us  from  all  parts  of  the  United  States,  during  the  fifteen  months  while 
the  book  was  in  progress,  discovered  at  any  time  the  extensive  tomes  and  par- 
aphernalia of  a profound  student  into  the  mysteries  of  the  whole  material  and 
spiritual  Universe  ; or  if  Mr.  Davis  was  ever  discovered  in  the  act  of  receiving 
scientific  or  philosophical  instruction  from  those  capable  of  one  half  the  range 
of  thought,  and  of  consistent  and  consecutive  argument  displayed  in  this  book, 

shortly  apprized  of  a triumph  of  Clairvoyance  through  the  celebrated  Mr.  Davis, 
which  millions  will  be  totally  unprepared  for.  During  the  past  year,  this  uneduca- 
ted, unsophisticated,  and  amiable  young  man,  has  been  delivering  verbally,  day  by 
day,  a comprehensive,  well-planned,  and  extraordinary  Book  — relating  to  all  the 
vast  questions  of  the  age,  to  the  physical  sciences,  to  Nature  in  all  her  infinite  rami- 
fications, to  Man  in  his  innumerable  modes  of  existence,  to  God  in  the  unfathomable 
abysses  of  his  Love,  Power,  and  Wisdom.  No  human  author,  in  any  department  of 
literature  or  science,  has  ever  electrified  mankind  to  the  degree  that  the  eloquent  yet 
simple  reasonings,  the  lofty  and  sublime  disclosures,  will,  that  constitute  this  great 
compend  of  universal  philosophy.  Perhaps  over  four  thousand  different  persons  who 
have  witnessed  him  in  his  medical  examinations  or  in  his  scientific  disclosures,  live 
to  testify  to  the  astonishing  exaltation  of  mind  possessed  by  Mr.  Davis  in  his  abnor- 
mal state.  The  two  new  planets  of  our  system  recently  conjectured  were  described 
in  Davis’s  manuscripts  fourteen  months  ago  [March  15  and  16,  1846].  I have  seen 
him  discoursing  in  a most  angelic  manner  for  more  than  four  hours  in  succession.” 


XVI 


INTRODUCTION. 


he  will  of  course  make  the  same  known  to  the  world  by  proof  on  which  the 
public  may  rely,  always  being  careful  to  distinguish  properly  between  vague 
imaginings  and  tangible  fact.  And  if  it  is  even  admitted  that  a youth  of  twenty 
years,  with  five  months’  school  tuition,  and  having  been  subjected  throughout 
his  life  to  the  most  unfavorable  circumstances,  could,  unknown  to  his  most 
intimate  associates,  have  famaliarized  his  mind,  by  any  external  process,  with 
all  important  writings  extant  in  all  languages,  upon  the  subject  of  cosmogony, 
astronomy,  geology,  ethnology,  archaeology,  mythology,  theology,  psychology, 
history,  metaphysics,  &c.,  &e.,  &c.  — the  wisdom  with  which  gleanings  have 
been  made  from  all  these,  the  ability  displayed  in  their  classification,  the  bold 
and  familiar  criticism  displayed  in  reference  to  them  all  and  especially  the 
soaring  flights  of  mind  into  regions  not  previously  explored  by  any  earthly 
being,  will  constitute  a phenomenon  still  demanding  explanation. 

The  fact  is,  however,  it  is  known  to  an  absolute  moral  certainty  to  Mr.  Da- 
vis’s most  intimate  acquaintances,  that  he  Avas,  Avhile  in  his  normal  state, 
totally  uninformed  on  all  the  great  leading  subjects  treated  in  his  book,  until  he 
•perused  the  manuscripts  of  his  own  lectures. 

The  question  whether  Mr.  Davis  may  not  have  received  much  of  the  contents 
of  this  book  by  sympathetic  influx  from  the  minds  of  those  associated  Avith  him, 
Ave  would  prefer  to  have  discussed  by  others,  if,  indeed,  such  a question  can 
possibly  occur.  Suffice  it  say,  that,  for  the  best  of  reasons,  we  know  that  such  a 
thing  could  not  be.  Many  facts,  principles,  and  theories,  are  presented  in  this 
volume  which  Avere  before  totally  unconceived  and  unbelieved  by  either  of  Mr. 
Davis’s  associates,  especially  on  cosmological,  theological,  and  spiritual  sub- 
jects. One  of  Mr.  Davis’s  associates,  at  least,  has  been  truly  pronounced  as  in 
a merely  “ rudimental  state”  (see  page  3 of  the  author’s  address  to  the  world) ; 
and  the  other  Ave  presume  would  have  as  little  difficulty  in  proving  that  his  mind 
has  not  been  overburthened  with  knowledge  upon  the  subjects  herein  discussed. 
Should  it  be  necessary,  the  evidence  touching  this  point  will  be  presented  here- 
after, though  this  may  not  be  the  most  gratifying  to  the  personal  vanity  of  him 
upon  whom  may  devolve  the  task  of  setting  it  forth  to  the  Avorld. 

If  this  laAV  of  sympathetic  influx,  hoAvever,  is  admitted,  it  should  be  duly 
explained  and  defined  before  the  conclusion  is  formed  that  it  may  not,  under 
favorable  circumstances,  be  a medium  through  Avhich  spirits  of  the  higher 
Avorld  may  transmit  their  knowledge  to  mankind  on  earth.  Certainly  the 
sympathetic  transmission  of  a thought  from  one  person  to  another,  Avhile  both 
are  in  the  body,  is  quite  as  inexplicable  as  Avould  be  the  transmission  of  the 
thoughts  of  a disembodied  spirit  to  a person  rendered  duly  susceptible  to  sym- 
pathetic influx.  As  touching  this  subject,  hoAvever,  see  the  author’s  remarks  on 
Animal  Magnetism,  Clairvoyance,  and  the  source  of  his  impressions  in  the 
forepart  of  this  volume,  in  Avhich  the  nature  and  ground  of  his  claims  are  duly 
set  forth. 

If  the  foregoing  statements  concerning  Mr.  Davis’s  past  life,  opportunities, 
acquirements,  &c.,  are  correct,  then  it  irresistibly  folloAvs  that  this  book  must 
have  been  dictated  by  some  other  and  higher  source  of  information  than  that 
accessible  to  the  physical  senses.  That  source  of  information  we  claim  to  be 
the  Spiritual  World.  The  evidence  of  this  Avill  be  apparent  on  a perusal  of 
the  Avhole  volume,  and  especially  of  that  portion  of  it  Avhich  is  comprised 
between  pages  33  and  57. 


INTRODUCTION. 


XVU 


We  will  now  proceed  to  describe  the  process  of  the  production  of  this  hook, 
and  the  phenomena  connected  therewith : — ■ 

In  the  first  place,  the  magnetizer  and  magnetizes  are  seated  in  easy  posi- 
tions facing  each  other.  The  ordinary  manipulations  are  then  performed,  from 
three  to  fire  minutes  being  required  for  the  completion  of  the  process.  A sud- 
den convulsion  of  the  muscles,  such  as  is  produced  by  an  electric  shock,  indi- 
cates that  the  subject  is  duly  magnetized,  immediately  after  which  his  eyes 
are  bandaged  to  protect  them  from  the  light.  He  then  remains  speechless  for 
some  four  or  five  minutes,  and  motionless,  with  the  exception  of  an  occasional 
sudden  convulsion  of  the  muscles.  One  of  these  convulsions  at  length  brings 
him  to  a state  of  external  consciousness,  and  gives  him  perfect  command  over 
the  muscles  of  the  system  and  the  organs  of  speech.  He  next  assumes  a posi- 
tion inclined  either  to  the  right  or  to  the  left,  and  becomes  cold,  rigid,  motion- 
less, and  insensible  to  all  external  things.  The  pulsations  become  feeble,  the 
breathing  is  apparently -almost  suspended,  and  all  the  senses  are  closed  entirely 
to  the  external  world.  This  condition,  according  to  his  own  explanation,  cor- 
responds almost  precisely  to  that  of  physical  death.  The  faint  vital  forces  still 
remaining  in  his  system,  are  only  sustained  sympathetically  by  the  presence 
of  the  magnetizer,  whose  system  is  by  an  ethereal  medium  blended  and  united 
with  his  own.  If  while  he  is  in  this  condition  the  magnetizer  should  by  any 
means  lose  connexion  with  him,  the  vital  movements  of  the  body  would  cease, 
and  the  spirit  would  be  incapable  of  re-entering  it,  as  he  himself  has  informed 
us.  In  this  respect  he  is  different  from  any  person  we  have  ever  seen  while 
under  the  magnetic  influence.  His  mind  is  now  entirely  freed  from  the  sphere 
of  the  body,  and,  consequently,  from  all  preconceived  ideas,  from  all  theologi- 
cal isms,  and  from  all  influences  of  education  and  local  circumstances,  and  all 
his  impressions  are  received  from  the  interior  or  spiritual  world.  His  percep- 
tions, conceptions,  and  reasoning  powers,  are  now  immeasurably  expanded. 
His  spiritual  sight,  freed  from  its  material  obstructions,  now  extends  to  worlds 
and  systems  innumerable,  and  he  feels  that  he  has  almost  ceased  to  be  a mem- 
ber of  the  human  family  on  earth,  and  is  a member  only  of  that  great  Family 
of  intelligent  beings  which  inhabit  universal  space.  He  is  thus  elevated  above 
all  the  narrow,  local,  and  sectarian  prejudices  that  pervade  the  earth.  His  phi- 
losophy is  only  that  which  is  involved  in  the  laws  and  principles  which  control 
the  Universe  and  mankind  unerringly,  and  his  theology  is  only  that  which  is 
written  on  the  wide-spread  scroll  of  the  heavens,  in  which  every  star  is  a 
word,  and  every  constellation  a sentence.  He  associates  familiarly  with  the 
inhabitants  of  the  spirit-world,  and  the  diversified  knowledge  cultivated  by 
them  is  rendered  accessible  to  his  mind.  The  associated  spirits  and  angels  of 
the  “ Second  Sphere,”  are,  as  one  grand  Man,  in  sympathetic  communication 
with  him  to  transmit  knowledge  to  mankind  on  earth,  which  they  perceive 
the  latter  are  for  the  first  time  prepared  to  receive.  Thus  exalted,  he  gives 
forth  his  impressions  of  truth  as  it  actually  appears  to  him,  without  reference 
to  any  of  the  beliefs,  philosophies,  theories,  or  sectarian  prejudices,  that  exist 
in  the  world. 

Having  thus  access  to  all  the  knowledge  of  the  Second  Sphere  combined  with 
that  of  the  first,  such  truths  as  are  appropriate  to  communicate  flow  spontane- 
ously into  his  mind,  these  being  at  the  same  time  arranged  according  to  a nat- 
ural order  of  sequence.  As  soon  as  a distinct  impression  is  thus  received,  the 

2* 


XV111 


INTRODUCTION. 


spirit  returns  again  to  its  material  habitation,  and  employs  the  organs  of 
speech  to  communicate  it  to  those  present.  A few  words  only  are  uttered  at 
a time,  which  the  clairvoyant  requires  to  be  repeated  by  Dr.  Lyon,  in  order 
that  he  may  know  that  he  is  understood.  A pause  then  ensues  until  what  he 
has  said  has  been  written,  when  he  again  proceeds;  and  the  passage  into  and 
out  of  the  spiritual  state  occurs  at  an  average  of  about  once  every  sentence. 

His  diction  is  of  the  most  direct  and  simple  kind,  and  his  ideas  seem  usually 
to  be  clothed  in  those  words  which  first  present  themselves.  His  phraseology 
is  not  a subject  of  interior  direction  except  when  nice  distinctions  are  to  be 
drawn  and  great  precision  of  expression  is  required.  His  style  is  much  such 
as  he  would  use  in  his  normal  state  if  a knowledge  were  imparted  to  him  on 
the  subjects  on  which  he  treats  while  in  his  elevated  condition.  His  grammar 
is  therefore  defective;  and  although,  when  it  is  necessary  in  order  to  properly 
embody  an  idea,  he  employs  technical  terms,  and  even  foreign  words  and 
phrases,  with  the  greatest  facility,  he  sometimes  mispronounces,  yet  not  in 
such  a way  as  to  obscure  his  meaning.  Correctness  might  have  been  attained 
in  all  these  particulars,  yet  the  labor  on  his  part  would  in  that  case  have  been 
immensely  increased,  by  making  all  those  minutiae  matters  of  interior  investi- 
gation. Hi's  great  object  was  simply  to  present  the  idea,  leaving  the  niceties 
of  the  verbal  clothing  to  be  adjusted  by  myself,  with  the  restriction  that  the 
corrections  should  be  such  as  not  to  destroy  the  peculiarities  of  the  general 
style  and  mode  of  expression. 

His  enunciation  was  characterized  by  a peculiar  breathing  solemnity  as 
though  every  word  gushed  from  the  depths  of  the  soul ; and  his  simple,  pure, 
and  unaffected  manner,  was  impressive  in  the  extreme.  If  we  were  to  say  it 
seemed  that  the  very  atmosphere  of  heaven  surrounded  him,  and  that  angels 
were  continually  breathing  their  thoughts  through  his  organs  of  speech,  the 
expression  would  appear  to  be  prompted  by  a heated  enthusiasm  ; yet  a phrase 
less  expressive  would  fail  to  convey  an  adequate  idea.  This  remark  applies 
also  to  all  his  philosophical  and  spiritual  conversations  while  in  the  abnormal 
state. 

The  time  occupied  in  the  delivery  of  a lecture  varied  from  forty  minutes  to 
about  four  hours,  and  the  quantity  of  matter  delivered  at  a sitting  varied  from 
three  to  fifteen  pages  of  foolscap  closely  written.  There  were  one  hundred  and 
fifty-seven  lectures  in  all,  the  first  being  delivered  November  28,  1845,  and  the 
last  (viz.,  the  “ address  to  the  world,”  which  comes  first  in  the  book)  was 
delivered  on  the  25th  of  January,  1847. 

On  closing  the  address  to  the  world,  the  author  immediately  proceeded  to 
give  general  directions  as  to  the  corrections  of  the  manuscripts,  and  the  prepa- 
ration of  the  work  for  the  press.  These  directions  (preserved  in  writing  and 
subscribed  by  a witness)  I have  scrupulously  followed  to  the  best  of  my  ability. 
With  the  exception  of  striking  out  a few  sentences  and  supplying  others,  ac- 
cording to  direction,  I have  only  found  it  necessary  to  correct  the  grammar,  tc 
prune  out  verbal  redundancies,  and  to  clarify  such  sentences  as  would  to  the 
general  reader  appear  obscure.  All  ideas  have  been  most  scrupulously  pre- 
served, and  great  care  has  been  taken  to  give  them  to  the  reader  in  the  preeise 
aspect  in  which  they  appeared  when  received  from  the  speaker.  We  have 
also,  conscientiously  abstained  from  adding  any  ideas  of  our  own.  Also  ah 
comparisons,  and  technical  and  foreign  terms  and  phrases,  and  all  peculiaritie? 


INTRODUCTION. 


XIX. 


of  expression,  are  exclusively  the  speaker’s.  When  we  have  found  it  neces- 
sary to  reconstruct  sentences,  we  have  employed,  as  far  as  possible,  only  the 
verbal  materials  found  in  the  sentence  as  it  first  stood,  preserving  the  peculiar- 
ities of  style  and  mode  of  expression.  The  arrangement  of  the  work  is  the 
same  as  when  delivered,  except  that  in  three  instances  contiguous  paragraphs 
have  been  transposed  for  the  sake  of  a closer  connexion.  With  these  unim- 
portant qualifications,  the  work  may  be  considered  as  paragraph  for  paragraph, 
sentence  for  sentence,  and  word  for  word,  as  it  was  delivered  by  the  author. 
The  notes  interspersed  through  the  book,  except  that  on  page  593,  were  com- 
posed by  ourself. 

Furthermore,  the  work  was  originally  proposed  by  the  clairvoyant  him- 
self ; the  time  of  its  commencement  was  fixed  upon  by  himself ; and  all 
the  instrumentalities  connected  with  its  production  have  constantly  been 
under  his . authoritative  direction.  He  has  spoken  only  as  directed- by  his 
interior  promptings,  and  no  portions  of  his  work  have  been  elicited  by  the  in- 
terrogatories or  suggestions  of  another.  When  he  has  spoken  he  has  spoken 
spontaneously ; and  at  such  times  as  his  interior  perceptions  were  not  duly 
expanded,  he  has  refused  to  proceed  with  his  dictations.  All  persons  around 
him  connected  in  any  way  with  the  production  of  the  book,  were-  therefore 
moved  by  him  ; he  was  not  in  the  least  degree  moved  or  influenced  by  any  of 
them  ; and  it  is  owing  solely  to  influences  from  the  interior  world  as  operating 
on  his  mind,  that  the  book  now  makes  its  appearance. 

In  connexion  with  the  above,  one  fact  may  now  be  stated  which  must 
appear  to  all  reasoning  minds  as  of  powerful  significance : Immediately  after 
giving  general  directions  as  to  the  correction  and  publication  of  the  work,  he 
roluntarily,  in  the  presence  of  a witness,  and  contrary  to  the  expectation  of 
every  one,  renounced  all  claim , direct  and  indirect,  to  any  portion  of  the  copy- 
right, and  the  proceeds  of  the  sales  of  the  work,  simply  claiming  a reasonable 
compensation  for  the  time  he  had  been  employed  in  its  delivery. 

Concerning  the  character  of  the  book  we  offer  no  remark  further  than  what 
is  involved  in  the  foregoing.  It  speaks  for  itself,  and  is  its  own  interpreter. 
We  also  abstain  (for  the  present  at  least)  from  all  defence  of  its  contents,  from 
a profound  conviction  that  these  need  no  defence.  It  will  be  observed,  how- 
ever, that  as  the  work  advances  from  the  commencement  toward  the  close,  the 
style  and  diction  gradually  improve  — which  fact  is  to  be  explained  by  the  law 
of  habit  applicable  to  the  mind  in  every  condition  in  which  it  is  capable  of 
being  placed. 

The  question  will  perhaps  occur  to  many  minds,  “ Is  this  work,  professing, 
as  it  does,  to  be  a new  revelation,  to  be  considered  as  infallible  ?”  The  answer 
is  involved  in  the  teachings  of  the  work  itself : It  recognises  infallibility,  in  the 
unrestricted  sense  of  that  term,  as  belonging  to  no  being  save  the  Deity  himself. 
If  this  or  any  other  work  embodied  in  human  language  should  claim  for  itself 
infallibility,  the  mind  nevertheless  would  be  unable  to  receive  its  teachings 
only  as  the  reasoning  powers  could  digest  and  assimilate  them  ; and  this  the 
reason  would  dp  rvith  more  facility  if  no  such  claims  were  preferred.  But  the 
moment  any  teachings,  artificially  expressed,  are  forced  upon  the  mind  under 
the  plea  of  infallibility,  that  moment  Reason  and  Nature  are  thrown  aside,  and 
the  standard  of  belief  becomes  entirely  arbitrary.  Belief  in  this  case  is  nothing 
more  than  superstition  ; and  those  who  are  sufficiently  frank  and  dignified  to 


XX 


INTRODUCTION. 


avow  a rejection  of  the  “infallible  standard”  from  the  incoherence  of  its  teach- 
ings wish  the  dictates  of  enlightened  reason,  are  subjected  to  the  indignation  of 
“ the  faithful”  who  demand  unconditional  credence  in  that  which  they  suppose 
to  be  of  more  authority  than  all  reason  and  natural  consistency,  and  which,  if 
the  mind  receives,  it  can  not  either  comprehend  or  practically  apply.  Thus 
have  arisen  all  the  superstition,  bigotry,  and  sectarian  hostility,  that  ever  have 
cursed  the  human  race ; and  it  is  impossible  that  the  Deity  could  ever  have 
designed  the  establishment  of  an  “ infallible  standard”  that  could  tend  to  sucli 
results. 

Reader,  do  not  consider  this  book  as  a standard  so  infallible  as  to  relieve  you 
from  the  exercise  of  your  own  reason.  Remember  that  although  it  is  the  pro- 
duction of  a mind  immensely  exalted,  and  having  access  to  the  knowledge  of  a 
higher  world,  it  is  still  the  production  of  a human  mind  ; and  if  the  work  will 
not  stand  upon  its  own  intrinsic  merits,  let  it  he  rejected.  If,  however,  its 
contents  on  due  investigation  commend  themselves  to  the  approbation  of  your 
interior  being,  let  them  be  considered  as  true,  even  infallibly  so,  at  least  until 
they  are  proved  otherwise.  And  in  this  connexion  we  may  remark  that  the 
work,  as  to  all  its  essential  principles,  is  the  product  of  great  care  on  the  part 
of  its  author.  At  each  entrance  into  the  abnormal  state  for  the  purpose  of  lec- 
turing, he  was  capable,  by  an  effort  of  a few  moments’  duration,  of  reviewing 
all  the  manuscripts  of  his  previous  lectures.  Hence  it  is  not  probable  that  any 
serious  error  would  have  long  escaped  detection,  had  such,  through  inadver- 
tence, been  even  liable  to  occur.  And  to  this,  again,  it  may  be  added  that  thi 
clairvoyant  never  lectured  when  from  physiological  causes  or  surrounding  cir 
cumstances  he  was  rendered  incapable  of  that  perfect  disconnexion  from  the 
darkening  influences  of  the  material  world,  which  was  necessary  to  the  full 
development  of  his  mental  susceptibilities.  Inasmuch,  however,  as  the  author 
establishes  the  principle  that  “ particulars  and  minutia  can  not  be  depended 
upon  as  connected  with  any  great  general  principle,”  it  can  scarcely  be  expect- 
ed that  the  many  particulars  and  minutiae  involved  in  this  work  of  eight  hun- 
dred pages  are  in  every  individual  case  nicely  accurate.  But  whatever  inac- 
curacies of  this  kind,  apparent  or  real,  may  be  discovered  (and  the  real  ones 
will  be  few  if  any),  these  can  not  have  any  effect  upon  the  great  general  prin- 
ciples and  truths  which  it  is  the  only  aim  of  this  work  to  establish,  and  on 
which  alone  it  must  stand  or  fall. 

This  book  is  not  put  forth  to  the  world  without  a definite  conception  of  the 
obstacles  it  vyill  have  to  contend  with,  and  the  influences  that  will  be  favora- 
ble to  the  general  dissemination  of  its  principles.  There  are  three  general 
classes  of  minds  to  which  it  makes  its  appeal.  The  first  of  these  consists  of 
those  who  are  strongly  attached  to  hereditary  customs  and  modes  of  thought, 
and  who  are  averse  to  the  unfolding  of  any  truths  in  the  departments  of  science 
and  theology  which  conflict  with  that  which  they  have  been  taught  to  believe 
and  cherish  as  sacred.  These  will  oppose  this  work,  not  by  dignified  and 
manly  argumentation,  giving  a fair  and  candid  representation  of  its  contents, 
but  by  the  most  unqualified  denunciation,  and  calling  it  all  kinds  of  opprobrious 
names  ; by  representing  it  as  most  revolting  in  its  teachings  and  dangerous  in 
its  tendencies,  and  cautioning  all  minds  to  abstain  from  reading  it,  lest  they  be 
led  astray  ; by  seeking  to  throw  contempt  and  distrust  upon  the  source  from 
which  it  came  ; and  by  raising  the  cry  throughout  the  land,  “ Great  is  Diana 


INTRODUCTION. 


XXI 


of  the  Ephesians  !”  But  the  truthfulness  of  the  author’s  motto  can  not  hut  he 
apparent  to  every  reflecting  mind,  that  “Any  theory,  hypothesis,  philosophy, 
sect,  creed,  or  institution,  that  fears  investigation,  openly  manifests  its  orvn 
error.”  Twenty  years  ago,  the  obstructing  influence  of  this  class  of  minds 
would  have  been  effectual,  and  hence  this  work  was  not  at  that  time  given. 
But  now  a different  state  of  things  has  obtained.  New  truth  is  now  beginning 
to  be  regarded  as  more  sacred  than  old  error ; and  hereditary  impression,  which 
has  from  the  infancy  of  the  race  led  almost  all  the  world  astray,  is  beginning 
to  be  abandoned  as  an  unstable  foundation.  Everything  betokens  the  approach 
of  a mighty  revolution  in  the  affairs  of  the  social  and  religious  world ; and  the 
influence  of  old  and  venerated  customs  and  forms  of  thought,  in  obstructing  the 
progress  of  any  truthful  principles  that  maybe  embodied  in  this  work,  can  last 
but  for  a day. 

The  second  class  of  minds  to  which  this  work  makes  its  appeal  consists  of 
those  who  have  no  decided  affection  either  for  any  established  customs,  exist- 
ing institutions,  or  prevailing  modes  of  faith,  but  are  willing  to  become  the 
servants  or  opposers  of  any  as  their  social  or  financial  interests  may  dictate. 
Many  among  these,  being  moved . by  the  popular  current,  will  peruse  this  vol- 
ume, not  for  the  purpose  of  truly  understanding  its  teachings,  and  adopting 
them  so  far  as  true,  but  for  the  purpose  of  criticising,  reviewing,  and  ob- 
structing its  influence.  Such  will  distort  passages  from  their  proper  connex- 
ion, force  upon  them  a meaning  which  the  author  did  not  intend,  and  thus 
hold  up  the  work  to  the  ridicule  and  execration  of  the  world.  But  as  minds 
of  this  class  have  no  fixed  principles,  truth  has  nothing  permanently  to  fear 
from  their  influence,  though  they  may  succeed  in  slightly  obstructing  its  prog- 
ress for  a season. 

The  third  class  consists  of  those  who  are  governed  by  the  supreme  love  of 
truth  and  the  practical  results  to  whicfl  it  leads.  Such  neither  favor  nor  oppose 
any  institution,  creed,  or  philosophy,  either  because  it  is  old  or  new.  They 
consider  everything  according  to  its  own  intrinsic  merits,  irrespective  of  all 
collateral  circumstances  attending.  They  are  open  to  conviction  from  all 
sources,  but  will  neither  receive  nor  reject  a thing  unexamined.  They  are 
upon  the  broad  ocean  of  universal  investigation,  content  to  be  moved  only  by 
the  winds  and  tides  of  evidence,  confiding  in  the  efficacy  of  these  to  waft  them 
to  the  haven  of  some  grand  system  of  truth  and  righteousness  based  upon  the 
nature  of  things  and  universally  applicable.  Thousands  of  such  minds  are  now 
already  in  the  field  of  action,  and  their  number  is  daily  increasing ; and  there 
are  tens  of  thousands  naturally  belonging  to  this  class  among  all  parties,  sects, 
and  denominations,  throughout  the  land.  Such  are  the  minds  which  are  as- 
cending the  throne  of  the  world,  and  by  these  all  inferior  classes  must  be  di- 
rected and  elevated.  To  such  this  book  more  particularly  addresses  itself ; and 
from  such  the  utmost  fairness  may  be  expected  in  the  investigation  of  its  con- 
tents. From  such,  therefore,  the  work,  if  true,  has  nothing  to  fear,  but  every- 
thing to  hope. 

With  the  foregoing  statements  and  remarks  this  book  is  submitted  to  the 
world  with  the  utmost  confidence  that  it  is  all  it  professes  to  be,  and  with 
the  most  entire  reliance  upon  its  intrinsic  power  to  accomplish  its  proposed 
work.  For  its  pure  and  elevated  morality,  for  its  high  and  holy  principles, 
for  its  unspeakably  sublime  and  consoling  truths,  we  are  willing,  if  absolu  ^ 


XXII 


INTRODUCTION. 


necessity  should  require,  to  sacrifice  all  things  earthly  and  even  life  itself.  In 
this  we  rejoice  to  know  that  we  are  not  alone.  We  would,  then,  simply  ask 
that  this  volume  may  be  perused  with  a candor  and  seriousness  which  the 
nature  of  its  contents  demands  : that  decishm  may  be  pronounced  for  or  against 
it,  according  to  the  preponderance  of  evidence,  and  that  corresponding  action 
may  be  prompt,  decided,  and  energetic.  We  await  the  result  with  the  most 
cheering  anticipations. 


WlLUAJISBUUGH,  N.  Y . Juh/.  18-17. 


WILLIAM  FISHEOUGII. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS.* 


PART  I.— THE  KEY. 

General  remarks  on  the  condition  of  society  in  past  and  present  times — Causes 
of  evils  not  visible  on  the  external  of  things,  but  are  hidden  in  the  soul  of  existing 
institutions.  The  interior  of  all  things  is  the  only  “real  Reality” — the  external  is 
the  mere  transient  expression.  Rationale  of  Animal  Magnetism,  Clairvoyance,  and 
the  source  of  the  author’s  impressions.  Proof  of  a spiritual  existence.  Generaliza- 
tions and  reasonings  on  various  laws  and  principles  of  the  Universe.  Universal  and 
eternal  Motion.  Eternal  progression  of  all  things  through  circular  or  spiral  lines  of 
development.  Universal  correspondence  or  analogy.  The  “'Great  Positive  Mind 
the  Cause,  Nature  the  Effect,  and  Spirit  the  Ultimate,”  &c.,  &c. 

PART  II.— THE  REVELATION. 

The  original  condition  of  all  matter  as  liquid  fire.  The  great  Sun  of  the  “ Uni- 
vercoelum ” as  the  Throne  or  Vortex”  of  Infinite  Power  and  Intelligence.  Evolution 
of  an  igneous  atmosphere  from  the  Great  Centre,  and  formation  of  successive  nebu- 
lous zones,  encircling  almost  the  immensity  of  space.  Formation  of  countless  mil- 
lions of  suns  from  these,  with  their  respective  planets.  The  immensity  of  creation. 
Laws  of  planetary  motion.  Origin  and  rationale  of  Universal  Gravitation.  Our 
own  solar  system.  Origin  of  the  sun  and  planets — inhabitants  of  the  latter.  Geo- 
logical history  of  the  earth  minutely  traced.  Development  of  the  mineral,  vegetable, 
and  animal  kingdoms,  and  Man.  Original  settlement  of  the  nations.  Former  inhab- 
itants of  Central  America,  & c.  Origin  of  languages — of  hieroglyphics — of  mytho. 
logical  theology — of  creeds  and  institutions  that  have  no  foundation  in  Nature 
Former  revelations.  What  is  man  physically  ? What  is  man  spiritually  ? Analysi 
of  -the  human  faculties — laws  of  their  government.  The  process  of  death.  Tin 
Second  Sphere,  or  world  of  human  existence.  The  3d,  4th,  5th,  6th,  and  7th  gj 
great  Spiritual  Sun  of  the  Universe  and  Throne  of  Divine  Love  and  Wisdom. 

PART  III.— THE  APPLICATION. 

Analysis  of  society.  Diseases  of  the  great  social  Body.  Corruptions  of  institu- 
tions— disunities — universal  conflicts  of  interests,  and  consequent  vice.  The  Rem- 
edy. The  law  of  univeral  association,  affinity,  or  gravitation,  applicable  to  Man  as 
to  all  other  things  in  the  Universe.  A natural  situation  adapted  to  every  person, 
and  a person  adapted  to  every  natural  situation.  Mankind  organized  to  correspond 
to  the  planetary  system,  or  the  Universe ; i.  e.,  each  one  gravitating  to  his  own  conge- 
nial employment,  climate,  association,  &c.,  &c.,  and  laboring  in  the  sphere  which  he 
is  qualified  to  fill.  The  transition-process  of  social  reorganization,  and  the  first  and 
subsequent  steps  to  be  taken  by  farmers,  mechanics,  manufacturers,  lawyers,  phy- 
sicians, and  clergymen.  Society  as  it  will  be  ere  long.  The  new  heaven  and  the 

NEW  EARTH,  &C. 

* Our  table  of  contents  for  the  present  is  designedly  brief  and  very  general.  What  is 
given  we  trust  will  not  in  any  case  tend  to  divert  the  mind  of  the  reader  to  particular  parts. 
in  such  a way  as  to  prevent  that  progressive  and  consecutive  perusal  of  the  u-hole  volume! 
which  alone  can  insure  a proper  understanding  of  the  parts. 


AN  ADDRESS  TO  THE  WORLD. 


Brethren:  Fear  not,  for  Error  is  mortal  and  can  not  live,  and 
Truth  is  immortal  and  can  not  die  ! Duty  demands  serious  analysis 
and  investigation  of  all  conspicuous  subjects.  Truth  may  be  found 
in  the  following  Revelation  : if  so,  Nature  must  be  the  standard  by 
which  all  men  may  judge  whether  the  truths  therein  contained  are 
pure,  practical,  and  elevating.  No  arbitrary  or  external  standard 
shall  be  recognised  as  suitable  to  test  the  truth  of  what  is  herein  pre- 
sented, or  the  character  of  the  truths  which  may  be  herein  contained. 
The  verdict  of  Nature,  and  not  of  men , is  required.  Inasmuch  as 
all  terrestrial  creations  are  the  spontaneous  productions  of  the  Divine 
mind,  no  truth  is  lessened  by  disbelief — no  error  is  made  true  be- 
cause the  learned  receive  it  as  such.  Nothing  can  be  changed  that 
is  unchangeable,  by  man  or  his  actions.  Then  press  onward  ! Ex- 
ercise your  choicest  gift,  which  is  Reason  — and  fear  no  corruption 
from  truth,  though  new  ; and  expect  no  good  from  error,  though  long 
believed. 

I have  been  impressed  to  speak  the  things  contained  in  the  fol- 
lowing pages,  not  because  truth  was  before  undiscovered,  but  in 
order  to  give  it  a new  and  attractive  form,  and  a power  to  instruct, 
purify,  and  elevate  the  race. 

The  First  Part,  or  Key,  presents  a general  view  of  theories 
that  exist,  and  unfolds  the  foundation  of  the  philosophy  that  is  pre- 
sented in  the  Second  Part,  which  is  the  soul  or  basis  of  the  whole 
superstructure.  The  Third  Part,  or  Application,  consists  of  an 
analysis  of  human  society,  and  an  application  of  previously-revealed 
principles  to  it,  in  order  that  a reformation  like  unto  a new  heaven 
and  a new  earth  may  legitimately  flow  therefrom.  , 

The  physical  and  mental  organization  of  man  enforces  the  conclu- 
sion that  there  are  no  possible  limits  to  social  progress  and  spiritual 
attainment  and  elevation  : for  man  is  a microcosm , or  a combined 

1 


Q 


ADDRESS  TO  THE  WORLD. 


expression  of  all  the  perfections  contained  in  the  Divine  essence  that 
animates  and  preserves  the  harmony  of  the  Universe.  Upon  the 
constitution  of  man,  who  is  a type  of  Divine  wisdom,  are  based  those 
important  principles  which,  when  duly  comprehended,  will  construct 
of  the  whole  world  one  Brotherhood. 

Moreover,  I was  impressed  to  select  three  witnesses,  who 
should  be  present  at  the  lectures,  so  that  the  world  through  them 
might  know  from  what  source  these  revelations  flow.*  The  number 
corresponds  to  a trinity,  everywhere  manifested  in  Nature  and  her 
productions  ; and  was  fixed  upon  for  the  purpose  of  having  as  many 
specific  degrees  of  perception  and  qualification.  And  also  a scribe 
was  necessary  to  preserve  these  sayings,  and  to  prepare  and  present 
them  to  the  general  mind.  And  it  was  impossible,  without  a quali- 
fied manipulator,  to  enter  the  sphere  of  wisdom  which  was  neces- 
sary to  enable  me  to  relate  these  things. 

The  first  witness  chosen  was  Rev.  J.  N.  Parker,  whose  physi- 
cal and  mental  structure  predisposed  him  to  external  observation  and 
investigation.  He  was  inclined  to  perceive  and  understand  the  nature 
and  qualities  of  all  exterior  movements  — had  the  ability  to  compre- 
hend the  things  related — but  was  inclined  to  outward  and  general 

* Besides  the  witnesses  specially  chosen,  the  following  persons  have  witnessed 
respectively  a greater  or  less  number  of  the  lectures  : — 

Joseph  Haight,  New  York. 

Rev.  S.  B.  Brittan,  Albany,  N.  Y. 

S.  W.  Britton,  Troy,  N.  Y. 

Benajah  Mallory',  Bridgeport,  Conn. 

James  Victor  Wilson,  New  Orleans. 

Isaac  S.  Smith,  M.  D.,  Detroit,  Mich. 

Dr.  Thomas  Loweree,  Newark,  N.  J. 
Joseph  H.  Goldsmith,  Southold,  N.  Y. 
John  I.andon,  Factory  Point,  Vt. 

Abner  Howe,  Syracuse,  N.  Y. 

Hervey  K.  Haight,  Bridgeport,  Conn. 

There  were  one  hundred  and  fifty-seven  lectures  in  all.  To  the  original  pencilled 
manuscripts  of  one  hundred  and  forty  of  these,  I find  attached  two  hundred  and 
sixty-seven  signatures  as  witnesses  — one  or  more  of  the  names  of  the  above 
persons,  including  the  witnesses  specially  chosen,  being  subscribed  to  each  lecture. 
The  number  of  lectures  witnessed  by  any  one  individual,  ranges  from  one  to  seventy- 
three.  There  is  here  and  there  a lecture  (amounting  to  seventeen  in  all)  which 
does  not  contain  any  signature  as  a witness;  but  the  identity  of  the  source  of  these 
with  that  of  the  others  will  not  be  doubted  by  any  one  on  proper  investigation. 

A few  persons,  not  named  above,  were  present  at  particular  lectures  ; but  as  their 
names  do  not  appear  upon  the  documents,  it  is  unnecessary  to  mention  them. 


Israel  Kinsman,  New  York. 
H.  G.  Cox,  “ “ 

J.  H.  Bailey',  “ “ 

C.C.  Wright,  « « 

B.  S.  Horner,  “ “ 

Henry  J.  Horn,  “ “ 

Pendleton  Lapham,  “ “ 

Dr.  A.  Johnson,  “ “ 

Albert  Brisbane,  “ “ 

Rev.  T.  L.  Harris,  “ “ 

James  Taylor,  “ “ 

William  L.  Burdict,  “ “ 


ADDRESS  TO  THE  WORLD. 


3 


observation.  Therefore  he  was  qualified  to  take  cognizance  of  each 
physical  phenomenon  — and  thus  corresponds  to  the  principle  of 
love,  which  the  sequel  will  define. 

The  second  witness  chosen  was  TheronR.  Lapham,  who  is  physi- 
cally and  mentally  qualified  to  perceive  external  manifestations,  and  to 
enter  deeply  into  the  interior  of  the  subjects  revealed.  He  is  natu- 
rally inclined  to  critical  investigation  of  the  various  subjects  tending 
to  unfold  the  mind  and  elevate  the  race.  He  is  qualified,  by  a com- 
bination of  experiences,  to  comprehend  the  truth  and  practicability 
of  each  subject  familiarly  treated  upon.  He  can  feel  the  applicability 
of  these  principles  to  society,  being  personally  conscious  of  their 
truth,  and  naturally  though  silently  desirous  of  beholding  their  per- 
fect work.  Therefore  he  was  chosen  because  he  corresponds  to  the 
principle  of  will,  or  executive  power,  which  also  the  sequel  will  define. 

The  third  witness  chosen  was  Hr.  T.  Lea  Smith,  who  was  in  a 
transition  state  between  the  artificial  doctrines  and  philosophies  of 
the  world,  and  those  high  and  more  important  truths  which  Mind 
only  is  capable  of  perceiving  and  associating  with.  He  is  naturally 
inclined  to  interior  meditation,  and  qualified  to  feel  the  force  of  any 
high  and  interior  truth  when  presented  to  his  mind.  He  is  inclined 
to  spiritual  association,  displaying  at  all  times  a purity  of  intention 
and  earnestness  of  devotion.  Therefore  he  corresponds  to  the  prin- 
ciple of  wisdom,  which  also  the  sequel  will  unfold. 

The  scribe  who  was  chosen  is  William  Fishbough,  who  is 
physically  and  mentally  constituted  so  as  to  preserve  a harmony  and 
dignity  of  outer,  and  a purity  and  goodness  in  his  inner  being.  He 
is  by  nature  inclined  to  associate  with  those  high  and  elevating  truths, 
a knowledge  of  which  proceeds  from  the  sublime  manifestations  of 
Nature  and  the  Divine  mind.  He  has  an  interior  desire  to  search 
and  comprehend  all  useful  natural  and  spiritual  truths.  He  is  men- 
tally disposed  to  seek  the  higher  spheres,  and  to  repose  confidence 
in  their  unfailing  revealments.  He  is  generally  qualified  to  preserve 
a harmony  in  the  movements  of  natural  life,  and  a purity  in  respect 
to  the  teachings  of  divine  things ; and  he  has  a sense  of  justice  not 
to  be  purchased  by  natural  interests.  Hence  he  is  chosen  to  act  in 
this  capacity,  because  he  corresponds  to  love,  will,  and  wisdom, 
combined.  Though  these  are  still  in  a rudimental  state,  yet  they 
are  sufficiently  developed  to  produce  their  natural  results,  the  nature 
of  which  the  sequel  will  describe. 

The  manipulator,  Dr.  Silas  Smith  Lyon,  is  physically  con- 


4 


ADDRESS  TO  THE  WORLD. 


stituted  so  as  to  be  able  to  impart  a congenial  influence  to  the  system 
of  the  speaker,  whereby  the  transition  of  the  natural  faculties  to  the 
spiritual  sphere  has  been  accomplished.  He  is  mentally  inclined 
to  perceive  and  comprehend  elevating  principles,  and  to  apply  them 
to  his  life  and  general  actions.  He  is  earnestly  engaged  at  all  times 
in  doing  what  those  principles  demand,  desiring  justice  and  a general 
good  to  all ; and  he  is  thus  mentally  qualified  to  understand  all  spir- 
itual truths  which  are  the  subjects  of  interior  meditation.  Hence 
he  is  naturally  opposed  to  all  dissimulation,  and  will  present  those 
things  which  form  a part  of  his  mind,  not  in  speech,  but  in  general 
deportment  and  action.  Therefore  I was  impressed  to  seek  this 
outer  association  as  the  primary  means  of  assisting  the  mind  to  obtain 
and  reveal  these  things. 

Being  thus  situated,  surrounded  by  witnesses  earnest,  desirous, 
and  qualified  to  receive  the  truth  ; a scribe  spiritually  absorbed  in  the 
things  related ; and  a manipulator  to  govern  the  action  in  delivering 
these  things,  I have  been  impressed  without  obstruction  to  present 
these  disclosures. 

Of  the  physical  and  mental  structure  of  the  speaker,  the  world  will 
know  by  a different  process  — one  which  will  be  suggested  to  the 
scribe,  by  whom  all  useful  information  concerning  these  things  will 
be  presented  to  the  world. 

Such,  brethren,  were  the  external  means  by  and  through  which 
this  book  has  made  its  appearance.  Your  duty  is  to  search ; and 
after  searching,  ask  Nature  and  your  own  superior  judgments  how 
much  practical  truth  there  is  herein  revealed.  In  doing  this,  you 
will  display  the  dignity  of  your  natures,  perform  your  highest  duty, 
receive  the  most  unbounded  interior  approbation,  and  obtain  mental 
happiness  ! 


PART  I. 


THE  KEY, 

OR 

THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


§ 1.  Reason  is  a principle  belonging  to  man  alone.  The  office 
of  the  mind  is  to  investigate,  search,  and  explore,  the  principles  of 
Nature,  and  trace  physical  manifestations  in  their  many  and  varied 
ramifications.  Thought,  in  its  proper  nature,  is  uncontrolled — un- 
limited. It  is  free  to  investigate,  and  to  rise  into  lofty  aspirations. 
And  the  only  hope  for  the  amelioration  of  the  world  is  free  thought 
and  unrestricted  inquiry.  Anything  which  opposes  or  tends  to  ob- 
struct this  sublime  and  lofty  principle,  is  wrong. 

The  mind  can  not  be  chained  ! It  will  leave  its  resting-place, 
and  explore  the  fields  of  science  ; and,  not  satisfied  with  the  investi- 
gation of  terrestrial  things,  it  has  soared  to  the  heavens  and  counted 
the  stars.  It  has  familiarized  itself  with  the  motions  of  the  planets, 
given  names  to  laws  that  control  the  universe,  and  has  proved  the 
existence  and  qualities  of  these  laws  by  mathematical  analysis  and 
demonstration.  The  mind  is  naturally  unrestrained  in  its  actions 
and  thoughts — free  from  all  shackles  and  bonds  of  the  external 
world.  Yet  man  has  not  been  allowed  to  express  sentiments  irre- 
sistibly flowing  into  his  mind.  Ignorance,  superstition,  and  bigotry, 
have  wielded  a tyrannical  sceptre,  and  sectarianism  has  usurped  the 
dominion  over  the  human  soul  ! 

Man  has  rights  founded  in  principles  of  Nature.  These  rights 
nave  been  perverted,  crushed,  and  prostrated.  Folly  has  reigned  in 


6 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


the  place  of  reason  ; imbecility  has  reigned  instead  of  thought ; vice 
has  reigned  instead  of  virtue  ; ignorance  has  reigned  instead  of  knowl- 
edge, and  bigotry  has  reigned  instead  of  benevolence  ! Thus  the 
highest,  holiest  and  sublimest  powers  of  man  have  been  repressed 
and  distorted  by  the  degrading  shackles  of  superstition  and  false 
imagination. 

The  office  of  the  mind  is  to  hold  dominion  where  the  above 
evils  have  reigned.  It  is  to  become  unchained  and  free  from  the 
prison  of  sectarian  darkness,  and  ushered  into  the  light  of  truth  and 
the  atmosphere  of  liberty.  The  tall  monuments  of  ignorance  which 
have  existed,  may  be  interrogated  by  generations  yet  unborn. 

Man  has  not  been  permitted  to  enjoy  the  free  and  uncontrolled 
exercise  of  his  powers  and  intellectual  endowments.  He  has  not  had 
the  liberty  to  express  thoughts  gushing  from  the  depths  of  his  mind, 
but  has  been  compelled  to  restrain  and  repress  them  for  want  of  an 
atmosphere  of  light  and  liberty.  The  few  who  have  dared  to  ex- 
press themselves  freely,  have  done  it  at  the  immediate  risk  of  their 
physical  destruction.  Truths  that  are  eternal  have  been  conceived 
of,  yet  smothered  by  the  hand  of  a dominant  and  tyrannical  Ig- 
norance. 

This  ignorance  still  exists  ; this  bigotry  and  superstition  still  exist ; 
and  where  is  the  responsibility  for  the  cause  of  their  existence  ? 
Sectarian  usurpation  must  bear  the  charge.  It  has,  in  its  long  career, 
crushed  and  prohibited  the  free  exercise  of  moral  and  intellectual 
attainment.  It  has  obstructed  the  progress  of  human  knowledge. 
It  has  obscured  the  main  features  and  manifestations  of  truth,  and 
thrown  a mantle  of  ignorance  and  fanaticism  over  the  world.  It  has 
covered  and  concealed  from  the  mind  of  man  the  real  and  only  prin- 
ciple which  constitutes  his  peculiar  dignity.  It  has  sapped  the  foun- 
dations of  human  happiness.  It  has  produced  a schism  in  the  race, 
and  a wasting  prostitution  of  human  powers  yet  uncorrected  and  un- 
controlled. The  true  interests  of  mankind  have  thus  been  perverted 
to  those  of  vice  and  misery.  Wisdom  has  not  existed,  but  folly 
has  usurped  her  throne.  Knowledge  has  been  limited,  while  igno- 
rance has  been  universal.  Happiness  has  been  crushed  to  the 
ground,  while  misery  has  everywhere  raised  her  hideous  head.  Per- 
secution, incited  and  sustained  by  ignorance  and  party  prejudice, 
has  destroyed  thousands  of  human  beings.  The  mind  of  man  has 
thus  become  enslaved,  and  no  principle  or  power  of  truth  and  virtue 
has  been  able  to  break  its  chains  ! 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


7 


Deplorable  have  been  the  results  of  ignorance  and  vice.  With  a 
ruthless  hand  they  have  grasped  and  held  the  interests,  affections, 
and  mental  associations  of  men,  until  the  voice  of  Nature  had  no 
power  to  speak  and  tell  of  the  victim’s  fate  ! Thus  most  melan- 
choly has  been  the  condition  of  generations  past.  The  cause  is 
vividly  reflected  on  our  minds  ; and  the  reflection  induces  the  con- 
j elusion  that  such  conditions  shall  not  again  exist.  Reflection  on 
things  past  and  present  show  to  the  inquiring  mind  that  the  institu- 
tions which  have  existed  have  been  in  direct  opposition  to  the  inter- 
ests, feelings,  and  affections,  of  human  nature.  Those  institutions 
can  not  exist  to  the  extent  to  •which  they  have,  because  the  mind  of 
man  has  become  nearly  unshackled,  and  free  to  act  and  investigate, 
and  boldly  to  express  its  earnest  and  serious  convictions.  And 
these  investigations  will  remove  the  foundations  of  illiberal  institu- 
tions, which  are  based  upon  impure  motive,  and  not  on  true  prin- 
ciple— which  are  sustained  by  motives  of  individual  interest,  and 
^not  by  the  interest  and  good  of  mankind. 

T he  world  is  existing  on  wrong  foundations.  The  interests  of  one 
person  are  in  direct  opposition  to  the  interests  of  another  ; and  what 
is  one  man’s  interest  results  in  another’s  misfortune.  The  interests 
of  individuals  are  centred  in  their  isolated  and  distinctive  principles 
and  pursuits  ; and  the  corrupt  condition  of  society  and  the  world  is 
owing  to  the  great  amount  of  individual  -absorption  from  the  common 
rights  of  humanity.  It  is  from  this  cause  that  the  world,  instead  of 
harmonizing  in  all  its  parts  and  ramifications,  is  in  a disorganized 
state ; and,  from  the  fact  that  each  part  is  obstructed  in  so  many 
ways  from  communicating  and  harmonizing  with  others,  the  whole 
has  become  disunited  and  confused. 

As  the  world  is  situated,  those  elements  that  are  united  become 
absorbents  from  those  which  are  not ; and  hence,  instead  of  an  har- 
moniously-organized condition  of  the  world,  one  part  is  extraneous 
and  excrescent  to  another.  Hence,  instead  of  being  united,  the 
world  is  disunited  ; and  instead  of  harmonizing,  it  is  confused.  In- 
stead of  universal  peace  and  good-will,  war  and  devastation  have 
prevailed  ; and  instead  of  the  happiness  and  interests  of  one  man 
consisting  in  the  happiness  and  interests  of  the  whole,  the  interests 
of  each  one  are  in  direct  opposition  to  the  interests  of  others.  This 
can  not  and  shall  not  much  longer  exist.  Its  causes  are  becoming 
revealed  ; and  this  revelation  arouses  the  feelings,  interests,  and 
crushed  affections  of  man,  to  one  vast  rebellion  against  the  domin 


8 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


ions  of  vice  and  misery.  Truth,  in  her  mighty  power,  shall  prevail 
over  ignorance  ; and  all  her  enemies  shall  be  crushed,  to  rise  no 
more  ! One  principle,  one  foundation,  one  faith,  one  interest,  one 
universal  and  eternal  asylum,  shall  exist  for  the  whole  world  of  man- 
kind ! This  result  rises  above  the  utmost  conceptions  of  the  mind; 
and  this  will  usher  in  that  light  which  has  been  hid  so  long  from  the 
world.  This  light  is  happiness  and  peace ; and  this,  too,  is  the  light 
which,  when  once  it  expands,  can  not  contract.  And  this  is  the 
resurrection  from  moral  and  intellectual  degradation  ! 

§ 2.  The  general  principles  of  Nature  and  of  human  rights  de- 
mand this  amelioration.  Interests  in  the  form  of  sectarian  desires 
have  prostrated  the  energies  of  the  freeborn  mind,  and  the  moral 
principles  have  become  enslaved  and  imprisoned  in  the  darkness  of 
fanaticism  that  has  covered  the  intellects  of  men.  Not  only  have  the 
true  principles  of  the  nature  of  man  become  obscured  and  vague,  but 
their  legitimate  workings  and  manifestations  have  been  misrepresented. 
Dispositions,  feelings,  and  affections,  which  man  never  possessed, 
have  been  thought  to  compose  his  nature ; and  this  mistaken  idea 
nas  led  to  the  conclusion  that  man  can  hold  situations  which  are  in 
direct  opposition  to  his  interests. 

But  he  is  immorally  situated,  whose  interest  tells  him  one  thing, 
while  his  conscience  and  duty  tell  him  another.  He  is  immorally 
situated,  whose  interest  it  is  to  withhold  knowledge,  when  his  reason 
tells  him  that  the  same  should  be  extensively  disseminated.  He  is 
immorally  situated  who  is  obliged  to  withhold  from  the  world  his 
feelings  and  affections,  and  to  suppress  the  general  principles  of  his 
nature,  in  order  to  preserve  his  individual  interests.  It  is  thus  that 
the  true  principles  of  man’s  nature,  and  the  true  source  of  human 
happiness,  are  concealed  ; and  when  there  is  a correct  manifestation 
of  these,  it  passes  away  before  the  eyes  of  the  world  as  a mere  ap- 
parition, and  appears  fleeting  and  evanescent  as  the  thoughts  of  the 
last  generation. 

Circumstances  are  thought  irresistibly  to  control  the  world,  both 
collectively  and  individually  ; and,  under  this  impression,  man  has 
consented  to  be  controlled  by  them.  But  man  holds  the  power  to  de- 
stroy those  circumstances  which  are  unfavorable  to  his  happiness 
and  peace  ; and  by  exercising  this  power,  he  will  sustain  and  co- 
operate with  the  principles  of  Nature.  These  fleeting  circumstances 
being  destroyed,  man  will  be  controlled  only  by  the  operations  of 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


9 


general  law.  This,  however,  has  not  yet  been  done,  because  man 
individually  can  not  do  it. 

No  one  principle  of  government,  unvarying  in  its  nature,  could  be 
made  to  manifest  its  proper  results,  as  applied  to  an  isolated  and  de- 
tached community.  Those  who  have  founded,  and  put  forth  efforts 
to  sustain,  communities,  have  been  persons  who  have  striven  to  fa- 
miliarize the  laws,  which  governed  them,  to  their  feelings  and  affec- 
tions. The  condition  of  society  and  of  the  world  has  become  repul- 
sive to  their  feelings  and  sentiments  ; and  their  movements  are  but 
the  outbreaking  and  gushing  forth  of  those  desires  that  have  been  so 
long  concealed. 

A knowledge  of  the  natural  laws  which  govern  society  should  have 
been  before  understood  ; but  the  sources  of  knowledge  which  exist 
in  the  world  have  been  perverted  from  their  legitimate  object  and 
use.  Institutions  for  the  diffusion  of  knowledge  are  founded  on  an 
artificial  basis.  It  is  the  interest  of  every  institution  to  confine  its 
knowledge  to  itself ; whereas,  it  should  be  both  the  principle  and 
interest  of  all  such  to  cause  their  knowledge  to  become  universal. 
Moreover,  people  who  have  not  the  capacity  to  comprehend  the  sci- 
ences, should  not  be  educated  for,  and  compelled  to  hold  situations, 
where  such  knowledge  is  absolutely  required. 

The  situations  of  'professional  men  are  exceedingly  corrupting  and 
vitiating.  Those  who  would  be  honest,  can  not ; for  their  interests 
oppose.  The  condition  of  these  and  of  other  members  of  society  at 
this  time,  is  an  artificial  representation  of  the  circumstances  by  which 
the  world  is  controlled.  Generations  that  are  past  have  neglected 
the  great  light  of  the  knowledge  of  these  truths.  Their  time  and 
talents  were  engaged  in  the  upbuilding  of  sectarian  and  denomina- 
tional casts  ; and  in  protecting  these,  nations  have  warred  against 
nations.  Destruction  and  devastation  were  the  legitimate  results ; 
and,  neglecting  the  general  and  personal  good,  man  lost  his  happiness 
by  these  inhuman  proceedings.  No  man  could  utter  a thought,  or 
express  himself  in  any  respect,  contrary  to  the  prevailing  sentiment. 

This  vice,  misery,  illiberality,  and  uncharitableness,  with  all  their 
legitimate  moral  and  intellectual  results,  still  exist ; and  man  has  lost 
much  of  the  light  and  knowledge  which  he  would  now  possess,  if  the 
real  had  existed  in  place  of  the  artificial. 

Free  and  unrestrained  inquiry  is  necessary  to  moral  and  intellectual 
progress,  and  therefore  should  be  encouraged.  Truth  is  an  eternal 
principle  ; and  any  institution,  creed,  denomination,  or  any  influence 


10 


TIIE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


of  a sectarian  character,  that  opposes  in  any  way  the  free  and  unre- 
strained investigation  of  truth,  must  evidently  be  founded  on  igno- 
rance, superstition,  and  bigotry.  And,  moreover,  anything  which 
tends  to  restrict  the  spirit  of  inquiry,  openly  manifests  its  own  error. 
Every  principle  opposed  to  free  and  unrestrained  investigation  shows 
distinctly  the  fear  of  light  and  knowledge.  Light  upon  any  subject 
of  a moral  nature  should  be  received  free  from  interests  or  local  pre- 
judices ; and  if  free  investigation  or  the  most  unlimited  exercise  of 
the  human  mind,  is  obstructed,  the  obstruction  proclaims  its  author’s 
own  condemnation  : for  this  is  the  condemnation,  that  light  is  come 
into  the  world,  and  men  choose  the  darkness  of  bygone  ages,  and 
foster  it,  rather  than  light,  because  their  institutions  and  actions  are 
evil. 

Appeal  is  now  made  to  the  feelings,  desires,  and  the  understand- 
ing : Is  it  consistent  with  the  natural  promptings  of  true  moral  prin- 
ciple that  the  interests  of  mankind  should  be  distinct  and  conflicting, 
or  that  man’s  interests  should  be  in  direct  opposition  to  his  sense  of 
justice  and  right?  Is  it  right  that  man  should  suppress  thought, 
rather  than  let  it  have  its  free  course  ? Is  it  right  that  man  should 
mistake  things  that  exist  for  things  which  do  not  exist  ? Is  it  right 
that  man  should  be  so  situated  as  that  his  interest  must  conflict  with 
his  duty  ? Is  it  right  that  sectarian  usurpation  should  hold  the  sway 
over  the  mind  of  man,  rather  than  that  man  should  be  allowed  to 
reason  understandingly  ? Is  it  right  that  the  morals' of  man  should 
be  supplanted  by  the  prevalence  of  vice  and  misery  ? Is  it  right  that 
one  idea  should  constitute  the  scope  of  the  minds  of  any  class  or 
community,  rather  than  free,  universal  thought  and  action?  Is  it 
right  that  truth  and  its  results  should  be  crushed  and  subdued  by 
error  ? Is  it  right  that  happiness  and  peace  should  be  expelled  from 
the  world,  to  give  place  to  wretchedness  and  imperfection?  Is 
right  that  the  free  and  unpolluted  atmosphere  of  light,  truth,  and  lib- 
erty, should  he  contaminated  by  the  impure  elements  of  ignorance 
and  folly  ? Language  is  inadequate  to  set  forth  the  importance  of 
these  questions  and  their  answers  ! 

Association,  when  based  upon  true  and  natural  principles,  is 
proper  and  highly  advantageous ; but  when  perverted  and  arbitrarily 
formed,  it  is  exceedingly  evil  and  vitiating.  It  is  the  nature  of  man 
to  seek  an  association,  wherein  he  may  breathe  an  atmosphere  of  light 
and  liberty;  and  it  is  his  nature  to  appreciate  the  associations  which 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


11 


lie  forms  from  the  spontaneous  impulses  of  his  affections  and  inclina- 
tions. But  though  it  is  natural  for  man  to  form  attachments,  these, 
in  order  to  be  genuine,  must  be  governed  altogether  by  his  internal 
sensibilities  and  affections.  The  sphere  of  one  man  can  approach 
that  of  another  only  in  accordance  with  the  laws  of  a natural  conge- 
niality ; and  impressions  upon  the  man  internal , though  received 
through  the  senses,  are  governed  and  sanctioned  by  one  universal 
law  of  Nature.  For  man  possesses  a visible  form,  which  serves  as  a 
medium  through  which  he  associates  with  things  invisible  and  eternal. 

Thus  man  has  the  power  to  comprehend  and  analyze  the  impor- 
tant features  of  truth , which  is  invisible  and  eternal ; and  if  he  had 
rightly  used  this  power,  he  would  not  feel  that  he  is  existing  among 
uncontrollable  and  foreordained  circumstances,  but  would  display  his 
true  nature  and  dignity  by  investigating  and  removing  the  causes  of 
which  these  circumstances  are  the  effects : and  if  these  causes  were 
removed,  the  effects  themselves  would  cease.  But  a protective 
policy  has  prevailed  throughout  the  world,  destroying  the  power  and 
disposition  to  change  these  circumstances.  The  cause  of  these  has 
been  universal  ignorance ; and  man  can  change  this  cause  only  by 
becoming  free  and  intelligent. 

% 3.  Inasmuch  as  man  is  governed  by  interest,  this  is  in  reality 
his  principle  ; and  the  general  object  to  be  aimed  at  is  to  change  his 
interests  to  the  interests  of  the  whole.  He  should  feel  that  what  is 
his  good,  is  the  good  of  all ; and  that  what  governs  and  controls  his 
actions,  should  control  and  govern  the  actions  of  the  world ; and  that 
what  constitutes  his  happiness  and  peace,  should  constitute  the  hap- 
piness and  peace  of  all  mankind.  He  should  feel  that  what  it  is  his 
interest  to  explore  and  investigate,  should  in  like  manner  be  related 
to  the  interests  of  all ; and  he  should  feel  that  what  contributes  to  his 
comfort  and  improvement,  should  administer  to  the  comfort  and  im- 
provement of  the  race.  And  he  should  feel  that  the  highest  and 
only  good  of  his  own  nature  comports  with,  and  is  conducive  to,  the 
highest  and  only  good  of  all  his  species.  This  principle  will  be 
recognised ; but  not  until  the  shackles  of  sectarian  usurpation  are 
stricken  off,  and  the  mind  of  man  becomes  free  to  think,  express, 
and  act  out,  what  he  and  the  whole  world  receives  with  approbation. 
Then  will  man  manifest  his  true  nature  and  dignity,  and  then  will  he 
manifest  his  intrinsic  worth.  Then  will  he  be  actuated  by  the  great 
moral  principles  which  were  designed  to  govern  his  being.  Then 


12 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


will  be  made  perfect  the  beauty  of  virtue ; then  will  man  be  gov 
erned  by  the  immutable  laws  of  kindness  and  affection ; and  then  he 
will  be  man,  in  the  highest  and  holiest  acceptation  of  that  term. 
Then  righteousness,  justice,  and  equity,  will  be  the  inevitable  char- 
acteristics of  his  thoughts  and  actions.  Then  patience,  perseverance, 
and  the  guidance  of  his  mental  nature,  will  be  manifested  in  all  his 
moral  and  intellectual  enterprises.  Man  has  the  promise  that  all 
these  results  shall  be  attained.  The  sun  of  moral  light  will  dawn 
through  the  clouds  of  his  past  history ; and,  by  the  aid  of  past  expe- 
rience, light,  warmth,  and  virtue,  shall  be  spread  with  universal 
diffusion ! 

But  it  is  necessary  to  set  forth  to  view  more  distinctly  the  vice 
and  misery  which  have  been  experienced  in  generations  past ; for 
experience  is  the  only  true  monitor,  which,  by  reminding  men  of 
former  errors,  may  lead  them  into  the  paths  of  right.  And  it  is 
man’s  province  to  learn  by  experience  dearly  bought,  and  by  errors 
past  detected  by  him,  to  practise  righteousness. 

Institutions  which  have  been  founded  upon  the  artificial  demands 
of  a dominant  ignorance,  cast  at  this  time  a mantle  over  the  world 
which  prevents  unrestrained  and  free  inquiry.  To  defend  these  in- 
stitutions, man  has  been  forced,  against  his  nature  and  duty,  and  to 
the  entire  sacrifice  of  justice,  his  feelings,  and  his  conscience,  to  take 
the  sword  against  his  brother.  War,  persecution,  vice,  and  misery, 
have  thus  reigned.  The  moral,  social,  and  intellectual  nature  of 
man,  has  been  thus  crushed  and  prostrated  ! Mohammedanism  has 
wielded  her  tyrannical  sceptre,  and  in  her  career  she  has  crushed 
thousands  to  the  earth.  The  sympathetic  tear,  and  the  gushing 
affections  and  feelings  of  man,  have  been  repressed  in  the  madness 
of  fanaticism,  thought  to  be  religion.  Man  at  that  time  was  not  man 
in  his  feelings,  desires,  or  actions ; as  the  distinctive  characteristics 
of  his  nature  were  smothered  by  the  inexorable  hand  of  persecution 
and  distress.  Legislation  was  at  that  time  unrestricted  by  any  prin- 
ciple of  human  rights.  The  social  principles  were  no  longer  cared 
for  by  those  who  founded  institutions.  Thoughtlessly  and  fearlessly 
was  this  high-handed  destruction  of  the  morals  and  peace  of  the 
world  carried  on.  Man  at  that  time  was  oppressed  by  all  temporal 
and  external  power,  and  was  not  at  liberty  to  express  even  a desire 
to  be  free  from  his  degraded  condition.  His  moral,  intellectual, 
civil,  and  social  rights,  were  completely  prostrated.  His  utmost 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


13 


energies  were  inadequate  to  produce  a revolution  in  the  condition  of 
mankind.  A reorganization,  such  as  would  give  scope  to  his  pow 
ers  and  faculties,  was  impossible.  A restitution  of  his  crushed  rights 
was  even  beyond  his  conceptions ; for  his  mind  was  not  free  to  ex- 
pand, if  it  would,  or  even  to  hope  for  a resurrection.  Inquisitorial 
institutions,  without  control  or  restriction,  spread  over  the  nations 
like  a great  flood ; and  at  that  time,  as  is  yet  the  case,  the  mind  was 
not  free  to  think  and  to  reveal  its  inward  convictions.  No  principle 
of  justice  or  of  nature  was  any  longer  recognised  as  a propelling 
power  to  prompt  man  in  his  actions.  These  were  all  perverted,  and 
man  was  forced  to  stand  at  the  stake,  where,  amid  the  burning  flames, 
the  instinctive  principles  of  his  nature  would  gush  forth,  and  he  would 
stand  unmoved  and  unchanged ! But  the  world  has  not  been  so 
vitiated  as  to  destroy  the  principles  of  some  noble  characters  which 
have  lived. 

Men  have  become  degraded,  not  only  from  darkness  and  igno- 
rance, but  they  have  become  still  more  degraded  and  depressed  by 
the  martyrdom  of  their  physical  and  mental  natures.  Many  have 
passed  the  fiery  trials  which  ignorance,  and  vice,  and  inquisitions, 
could  subject  them  to,  and  have  suffered  not  only  the  loss  of  their 
physical  and  mental  freedom,  but  have  sacrificed  their  very  lives. 
All  this  mental  slavery  is  caused  by  a perversion  of  man’s  natural 
inclinations,  and  of  the  principles  of  Nature. 

And  there  are  beings  now  existing  as  perfect  as  any  others  in  size, 
symmetry,  and  physiological  structure  ; governed  by  the  same  feel- 
ings, affections,  and  natural  associations ; manifesting  the  same  in- 
stinctive and  genuine  affections  and  desires  for  their  physical  freedom 
— beings  who  form  a part  of  mankind,  though  they  are  not  quite  the 
same  as  others  in  their  external  complexions  — and  over  these  you 
have  assumed  a control  which  it  is  not  your  office  to  exercise.  And 
by  an  abandonment  of  all  sense  of  justice  and  righteousness,  you  have 
enslaved  these,  and  thus  held  a part  of  your  own  species  in  physical 
and  legal  servitude  ! The  mental  slavery  of  generations  past  bears 
a resemblance  to  the  physical  slavery  of  the  present. 

The  only  hope  for  the  physical  and  mental  amelioration  of  man- 
kind, is  based  upon  a slow  but  steady  mental  progress  ; and  this  must 
be  the  result  of  a steady,  patient,  but  firm  and  decided  investigation 
of  the  causes  of  the  existence  of  present  evils.  And  the  experience 
of  the  errors  of  ages  past  will  serve  as  a monita  for  our  future  pro- 
ceedings. 


14 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


The  condition  of  society  at  this  time  prevents  the  exercise  of  true 
moral  principles,  and  the  justness  of  human  action.  It  is  the  object 
and  interest  of  institutions  to  keep  knowledge  confined  within  their 
own  limits,  and  to  withhold  what  little  they  may  possess  from  the 
general  ifiind ; for  if  knowledge  were  universal,  these  institutions 
would  be  useless.  Professional  men  also  feel  it  their  interest  to 
withhold  knowledge  relating  to  their  distinct  spheres  of  pursuit. 
The  physician  feels  it  his  interest  to  have  but  little  knowledge  pre- 
vail concerning  the  physiological  and  anatomical  structure  of  the 
luman  system  : for  if  the  knowledge  of  this  and  of  the  law  which 
controls  physical  organization  were  generally  diffused  in  the  world, 
each  person  would  know  the  result  of  organic  violation,  and  would 
avoid  it.  And  men  would  be  morally  as  well  as  intellectually  in- 
formed ; and  hence  they  would  not  only  prevent  disease,  but  would 
individually  abstain  from  violating  the  laws  of  society.  And  in  pro- 
portion as  the  knowledge  of  this  science  exists  in  the  community  or 
the  world,  man’s  individual  interests  become  absorbed  in  the  general 
good.  The  physician  therefore  feels  that  his  interest  consists  in  the 
amount  of  ignorance,  vice,  and  consequent  disease.  As  a physician, 
he  will  tell  you  so ; as  a man,  he  will  utterly  disapprove  and  abhor 
this  state  of  things.  Similar  in  this  respect  is  the  situation  of  every 
man  in  society. 

Another  vice  may  be  mentioned  : The  distiller's  interest  consists  in 
the  amount  of  inehriacy  that  prevails  in  the  world ; and  the  degrada- 
tion of  man  through  ignorance,  adds  to  his  profits  by  promoting  un- 
restrained indulgence  in  beastly  gratifications.  Hence  intemperance 
has  prevailed  to  an  alarming  extent.  And  this  state  of  things,  too, 
is  sanctioned  by  the  highest  civil  laws  of  states  and  nations  ; and  each 
legislative  body  has  given  its  approval,  while  its  best  feelings,  sense 
of  justice,  and  consciousness  of  duty,  abhorred  the  act. 

§ 4.  Society  is  thus  existing  on  wrong  foundations  — is  based  upon 
a mistake  and  misconception  of  the  real  principle  which  actuates  man. 
It  seeks  isolated  rather  than  the  general  good  ; and  a destruction  of 
the  morals  and  peace  of  society  and  the  world  has  followed. 

Is  there,  then,  liberty  for  the  unrestricted  exercise  of  thought  and 
expression  ? Is  man  irrecoverably  lost  to  his  true  nature,  in  the  cir 
cumstances  and  condition  of  things  which  have  placed  him  where  he 
is  ? Is  there  any  one  who  would  oppose  the  free  investigation  of 
the  principles  which  govern  his  being?  And  is  there  a being  in  the 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


15 


world  who  would  not  readily  apply  all  his  mental  force  and  energy 
to  produce  a revolution  a/nd  reorganization  of  society  ? And  instead 
of  society  and  the  world  existing  in  a disunited  and  disorganized 
state,  depending  wholly  upon  external  circumstances,  and  being  sub- 
jected to  the  immediate  rule  of  artificial  laws,  would  it  not  be  better 
to  understand  and  recognise  the  law  that  controls  Nature  and  man 
with  an  undeviating  and  unchangeable  government?  Would  it- not 
be  better  to  have  those  laws  understood  whose  results  can  at  all  times 
be  depended  upon,  so  that,  in  accordance  with  their  demands,  the 
whole  actions  and  interests  of  mankind  may  be  made  generally  re- 
ciprocal, and  each  individual  interest  to  harmonize  with  the  interest 
and  happiness  of  the  race?  Would  it  not,  we  repeat,  be  best  to 
have  the  world  exist  upon  these  immutable  laws  ? Then  existence 
would  be  emblematical  of  the  brightness  and  beauty  of  Eden  ! Then 
that  great  Tree  which  has  been  so  long;  concealed  from  the  mental 
view,  but  whose  roots  have  existed  eternally,  founded  only  in  that 
great  system  of  Nature  of  which  we  are  the  subjects  and  the  effects, 
ivould  grow  and  progress  in  glory,  beauty,  and  perfection.  It  would 
assume  the  true  form  and  display  the  ennobling  qualities  legitimately 
belonging  to  its  nature.  It  would  branch,  bud,  and  bloom,  in  beauty, 
and  its  fruits  would  be  the  united  interests  of  mankind.  It  would 
diffuse  the  fragrance  of  a general  benevolence,  brotherly  kindness, 
and  charity.  Its  branches  would  wave  over  the  world,  and  genera- 
tions yet  unborn  would  repose  in  its  invigorating  shade.  Such  would 
be  the  delicious  fruits  of  the  great  Tree  of  Knowledge  ! 

Its  opposite  has  existed.  It  has  been  permitted  to  grow  upon  the 
mistaken  and  misdirected  minds  of  men,  and  upon  supposed  princi- 
ples, such  as  never  did  compose  the  nature  of  mankind.  Upon  all 
these  superficialities  has  been  permitted  to  germinate  the  roots  of  the 
tree  of  evil.  And  now  understanding  the  foundation  on  which  this 
tree  is  permitted  to  grow,  it  becomes  your  duty,  your  interest,  your 
highest  and  greatest  good,  to  undermine  and  overthrow  it ; and  then 
to  establish  mankind,  both  socially  and  mentally,  in  the  various  natu- 
ral spheres  and  organizations  of  existence.  And  then  will  be  seen 
towering  above,  and  completely  transcending  the  highest  conceptions 
of  man,  that  great  tree  whose  foundation  is  in  Nature,  and  whose 
growth  depends  upon  the  fertility  of  your  minds  and  just  actions. 
And  its  legitimate  effect  will  be  to  send  through  the  world  one  uni- 
versal fragrance  of  affection,  -which  will  bind  the  interests,  feelings,  and 
associations  of  men,  in  one  united  mass  ^ and  the  race  will  be  perfect, 


16 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


even  as  was  its  representative,  the  man  Adam  ! Then  this  earth 
will  be  one  grand  and  universal  garden,  the  true  Eden  of  existence; 
and  then,  too,  will  mankind,  as  one  nation,  be  like  their  representa- 
tive, standing  perfect  in  this  garden,  without  spot  or  blemish.  And 
then  this  great  Tree,  whose  growth  has  been  so  long  depressed  and 
retarded,  will  germinate  and  spread  its  branches  over  the  nations  of 
the  world,  whose  interest  will  be  one  interest ; whose  morals  will  be 
one  vast  and  universal  stream  of  light  and  righteousness.  All  parts 
will  be  joined  to  compose  one  vast  harmonious  whole ; and  then  will 
be  the  true  millennium  ! Then,  too,  will  the  united  voices  of  each 
succeeding  generation  repeat  that  grand  and  holy  exclamation  which 
is  now  smothered,  yet  unrepealed  — “Peace  on  earth,  good  will  to 
men  !” 

These  prophetic  thoughts  are  not  merely  the  result  of  a heated 
imagination  ; but  they  are  conclusions  arrived  at  by  direct  appeals  to 
cause  and  effect — inductions  drawn  from  a comparison  of  past  and 
present  generations.  A synopsis  of  this  reasoning  is  as  follows  : 
Truth  is  a positive  principle:  Error  is  a negative  principle  ; and  as 
truth  is  positive  and  eternal,  it  must  subdue  error,  which  is  only 
temporal  and  artificial.  And  as  knowledge  is  a direct  and  ever- 
unchangeable  result  of  Truth,  it  must  overpower  and  subdue  its  oppo- 
site— ignorance,  superstition,  vice,  and  misery.  The  first  is  eternal ; 
the  second  is  temporal.  One  is  founded  on  the  unchangeable  laws 
that  control  the  Universe  and  all  organic  beings,  and  the  other  is 
founded  on  the  misdirected,  crushed,  and  perverted  understanding. 
And  as  that  which  is  eternal  must  and  does  prevail,  that  which  is 
temporal  and  terrestrial  can  not  prevail  : and  Truth  will  gain  the  as- 
cendency. Ignorance,  which  has  been,  and  still  appears  to  be,  inex- 
orable in  its  influences,  must  be  destroyed  by  the  annihilating  hand 
of  Truth  and  Wisdom,  which  are  omnipotent. 

Man,  who  has  now  approached  to  some  degree  of  knowledge, 
feels  sustained  by  surrounding  beings  who  wonder  at  his  indulgence. 
He  becomes  lofty,  dignified,  and  vain.  He  assumes  a spirit  of  arro- 
gance, and  with  an  air  of  pomposity  takes  the  stand  of  a foolish  critic. 
He  will  complain  of  the  great  laws  which  compose  and  govern  the 
Universe,  and  dare  to  suggest  alterations  and  improvements  in  their 
operations.  He  will  laugh  at  the  appearances  which  the  world  mani- 
fests, and  assume  the  ground  which  nothing  but  ignorance  can  prompt 
him  to  maintain — daring  to  sneer  at  the  great  laws  which  govern  this 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


17 


and  other  worlds,  when  in  reality  he  has  not  the  capacity  to  compre- 
hend the  component  parts  of  one  atom  that  goes  to  compose  the 
Universe! 

There  are,  however,  some  lofty  and  noble  characters  in  the  world. 
They  do  not  hesitate  to  sacrifice  their  individual  interest  for  the  in- 
terest they  feel  in  Truth.  Possessing  a high  sense  of  conscientious- 
ness, and  a deep  and  solemn  veneration,  the  very  elements  of  moral 
philanthropy  compose  their  nature  and  desires  : and  these,  with  in- 
tense and  patient  deliberation,  search  deeply  into  the  causes  of  the 
social  effects  which  are  visibly  manifested.  Their  interest  is  involved 
in  exploring,  investigating,  and  revealing,  the  cause  that  produces  the 
disunion  and  disorganization  which  spread  persecution  throughout 
the  world,  and  which  genders  vice  and  misery,  and  consequent  per- 
sonal and  national  wretchedness.  Such  a one,  with  the  best  feelings 
and  actuated  by  the  best  of  motives,  dares  to  lift  his  voice  against  the 
causes  of  the  prevailing  evils  in  society.  He  does  this  with  firmness, 
and  yet  with  a feeling  of  philanthropy  and  benevolence.  He  ad- 
dresses himself  to  the  world  in  the  mildest  language.  He  states  the 
truth  with  simplicity  yet  fearlessly  ; and  his  thoughts  are  not  con- 
tracted to  one  particular  society  or  state,  but  he  speaks  forth  his 
irresistible  convictions  to  the  world.  The  world  opposes  him  with 
its  varied  interests,  individual,  sectarian,  denominational,  and  politi- 
cal. These  weapons  are  hurled  against  him  with  anger,  and  the  fire 
of  indignation  and  wrath  is  set  against  his  efforts  ; and  he  is  finally 
obliged  to  leave  the  field  as  a reformer,  and  retires  in  despondency 
and  heartfelt  wretchedness  ! He  no  longer  feels  life  a blessing,  but 
longs  for  the  dissolving  elements  that  compose  his  being  to  terminate 
their  work.  Discouraged  with  the  experience  of  this  life,  he  seeks 
for  a future.  He  arrives,  through  analogy,  at  the  conclusion  which 
he  sought,  stops  breathless  and  amazed,  and  sinks  to  be  known  no 
more  ! And  is  this  free  thought  and  unrestricted  inquiry  ? 

The  man  who  presumes  upon  knowledge  which  is  merely  super- 
ficial, is  praised  and  approbated.  He  maintains  the  sentiments  of  the 
institutions  which  covel:  the  land.  He  freely  enters  and  breathes 
their  atmosphere,  when  he  has  an  internal  consciousness  and  irresist- 
ible conviction  that  it  is  deleterious  to  the  world.  He  not  only  as- 
sumes all  this,  but  he  is  sustained  in  his  assumptions  by  the  strongly- 
fortified  denominational  institutions  to  which  he  personally  adheres. 
—And  there  is  the  meek  and  lowly  reformer,  who  feels  the  moral  con- 

2 


18 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


victions  of  Ills  nature,  and  claims  an  atmosphere  of  light  and  liberty 
to  express  them  — and  his  voice  is  hushed;  his  influence  is  arrested 
by  private  and  public  denunciation  ! And  is  this  free  thought?  If 
truth  exists,  why  is  it  closed  to  all  examinations  of  a free  mind  ? If 
truth  one  possesses,  why  should  he  be  afraid  of  investigation  ? If 
one  has  found  truth,  why  should  he  not  be  permitted  to  manifest  it  to 
the  world  ? If  an  interest  should  be  taken  in  truth,  which  is  more 
powerful  than  any  motive  of  selfishness,  why  not  take  hold  and  assist 
every  new  reformer  ? If  knowledge  is  desirable,  why  not  let  it  be- 
come universal  ? If  this  generation  is  now  open  to  free  inquiry,  why 
does  it  not  receive  the  truths  which  are  obscurely  yet  daily  mani- 
fested ? 

And  here  a former  declaration  may  be  repeated  : That  anything 
which  tends  to  oppose  or  in  any  way  to  retard  the  progress  of  the 
highest  and  holiest  principle  of  man,  which  is  Reason,  carries,  by 
such  opposition,  internal  conviction  to  every  person  of  capacity  and, 
intelligence,  that  it  is  erroneous  and  very  imperfect. 

§ 5.  To  further  view  and  contemplate  the  causes  that  have  pre- 
vented the  progress  of  knowledge  and  morality,  it  is  necessary  again 
to  reflect  upon  the  dark  and  deplorable  picture  of  man’s  primitive 
history.  Kingdoms  warred  against  kingdoms ; and  nations  were 
persecuted,  divided,  and  destroyed.  From  the  ruins  of  each,  new 
kingdoms  and  nations  have  been  formed,  each  holding  its  respective 
and  exclusive  rights.  Each  has  founded  barbarous  and  sectarian 
institutions,  and  established  standards,  marking  and  limiting  the  ex- 
tent of  thought.  And  those  who  have  dared  to  go  beyond  the  boun- 
dary marked  out  by  their  spiritual  shepherds,  have  been  tortured  and 
put  to  death  under  the  sanction  of  the  nation  or  the  church.  Horri- 
ble and  dreadful  machines  have  been  invented  to  compel  men  to 
believe  that  which  was  sanctioned  by  public  opinion  ; and  they  were 
thus  forced  to  bow  'physically,  but  not  mentally.  They  might  be 
compelled  to  bend  the  body  in  humble  submission  to  these  inhuman 
tortures,  yet  the  mind  could  not  be  made  to  waver  or  change.  Pris- 
ons were  erected  to  confine  within  their  walls  the  depressed  and 
afflicted  who  claimed  the  right  of  free  thought  and  expression.  Asy- 
lums and  hospitals  were  erected  to  contain  the  emaciated  and  insane, 
made  so  by  existing  institutions ; and  there  men  were  compelled  to 
linger  out  a long  and  wearisome  existence.  There  they  were  chained 
and  plunged  into  unminglcd  and  unimaginable  gloom  ! No  combi- 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


19 


nation  of  figures  would  be  adequate  to  express  the  number  of  prayers 
that  have  been  offered  for  their  physical  dissolution.  Others,  again, 
would  kneel  in  faith  and  submission  to  these  tyrannical  institutions — 
with  their  eyes  closed  and  their  minds  circumscribed  to  the  narrow 
and  contracted  circle  which  was  well  marked  out  and  defined  by 
their  leaders.  Revolutions  and  rebellions  against  kings  and  king- 
doms, sects  and  institutions,  caused  an  incalculable  amount  of  life 
and  property  to  be  sacrificed : for  when  man  could  no  longer  endure 
his  unfortunate  condition,  his  mental  and  physical  energies  would  be 
aroused  to  one  vast  rebellion  against  its  causes  ; and  thus,  from  time 
to  time  have  been  conquered  and  subdued  the  inexorable  laws  and 
institutions  of  the  kingdoms. 

The  guillotine  was  no  less  an  invention  to  destroy  man  and  prevent 
crime,  than  the  modern  gallows.  It  was  then  thought  to  be  a medi- 
um of  great  good  in  promoting  the  morals  of  the  world  ; but  it  is  now 
considered  as  a relic  of  the  ignorance  and  degradation  of  former  gen- 
erations. It  still  stands  as  an  engine  of  destruction — as  do  also 
prisons  and  asylums  as  receptacles  for  deranged  and  insane  beings. 
These  are  supported  by  the  laws  of  the  nations  — and  are  all  founded 
upon  the  evils  arising  out  of  misconceptions  of  human  rights  and  of 
the  laws  of  Nature. 

F ree  institutions  ( so  called ),  for  the  general  diffusion  of  science 
md  knowledge,  are  sustained  and  sanctioned  by  the  nation  and  the 
church,  which  claim  the  exclusive  right  and  privilege  to  enforce  their 
own  doctrines  and  opinions,  and  to  prevent  the  introduction  of  any 
new  ones.  It  would  be  well,  however,  for  the  world  to  solve  and 
give  answers  to  the  following  questions : Are  there  not  existing  in 
some  instances,  innumerable  opinions  relative  to  one  particular  science? 
Are  there  not  a great  number  of  physicians  whose  theory  and  prac- 
tice are  in  direct  opposition  ? Can  there  be  more  than  one  true  re- 
ligion ? Is  there  not  one  foundation  for  each  science  ? Must  there 
not  be  one  true  and  universal  medical  theory  and  practice  ? These 
are  not  all  true  ; but  which  is  ? - . 

The  progress  of  light  and  knowledge  in  the  world,  will  develop 
the  true  relation  between  nature  and  science  and  science  and  Man. 
Man’s  course  is  onward.  Thought  is  like  a great  ocean  whose  tide 
is  continually  rising,  but  unlike  the  waters  of  earth,  it  will  not  again 
ebb.  Truth  is  one  vast  Mountain,  lifting  its  head  with  exalted  dig- 
nity. It  stands  unmoved,  and  will  not  bow  to  the  caprices  of  man ; 
yet  man  will  progress  until  he  reaches  its  very  heights.  Ignorance 


20 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


and  error  can  not  remove  its  foundation,  nor  prevent  the  progress  ol 
mental  and  moral  attainment.  Xerxes,  marching  with  his  mighty 
army  to  invade  Greece,  and  being  obstructed  in  his  progress  by  the 
.ofty  Mount  Athos  — with  the  assumed  pomp  of  ignorance  and  self- 
sufficiency,  and  feeling  that  he  possessed  all  power,  raised  his  hand 
and  commanded  it  in  imperious  tones  to  give  way  and  let  him  pass. 
He  threatened  its  destruction  if  it  did  not  quail  at  his  voice  : bu< 
finding  it  would  not  move,  he  commenced  the  tiresome  work  of  per- 
forating his  way  through  it.  But  large  and  massive  rocks  obstructed 
his  progress.  And  then  his  mighty  bridge  over  the  Hellespont  became 
broken  in  pieces  and  destroyed.  On  seeing  this,  he  commanded 
that  by  large  stones  and  chains,  the  waves  should  be  bound  and  re- 
pressed. But  the  waters  heeded  him  not ; but  with  a steady  and 
fearless  progress,  ebbed  and  flowed  as  in  derision  of  his  feeble  and 
prostrate  powers.  And  so  with  the  ocean  of  moral  and  intellectual 
progress.  Urged  by  the  great  impetus,  the  love  of  truth,  it  will  flow 
on  until  it  subdues  and  overflows  all  that  is  of  an  opposite  nature,  and 
the  world  will  be  cleansed  and  renovated,  and  man  will  stand  in  the 
brightness  and  beauty  of  his  nature.  Then  there  will  be  diffused 
from  this  great  source,  a universal  good,  as  constituting  one  'Principle, 
one  universal  thought  and  action,  one  grand  and  lofty  aspiration  for 
perfection.  Then  all  will  compose  one  Body  — whqse  organs  will 
reciprocally  assist  and  promote  the  good  of  each  other.  And  there 
will  be  no  absorbents,  no  excrescences,  no  superfluous  or  imperfect 
parts.  There  will  not  be  any  individual  or  general  wretchedness  or 
distress  ; but  all  will  act  on  the  principles  of  their  nature,  as  these 
will  be  set  forth  in  the  following  Revelation. 

^ 6.  The  object  of  the  foregoing  has  been  to  exhibit  to  the  mind 
the  past  and  present  condition  of  the  world  as  viewed  in  its  intellect- 
ual and  moral  aspects  ; to  show  that  the  privilege  of  unrestrained 
investigation  is  yet  limited,  and  to  notice  specifically  the  causes  of 
mental  restriction.  It  has  been  the  object  to  make  these  causes  plain 
to  the  understanding,  by  viewing  retrospectively  the  condition  of  gen- 
erations past — and  to  prove  all  things,  and  retain  that  only  which  is 
just  and  good.  It  is  thus  perceived  that  ignorance  has  been  the 
cause  of  all  the  distress,  vice,  misery,  and  wretchedness,  that  have 
prevailed.  And  the  existing  cause  of  this  ignorance  is  individual, 
local,  and  national  'prejudices  — closing  men’s  minds  and  their  insti- 
tutions against  any  new  reveahnents  of  truth.  Ecclesiastical  bodies 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


21 


have  contributed  most  to  this  state  of  things.  Any  progression,  or 
the  revealment  of  any  new  truths,  in  theological  matters,  has  been 
discountenanced  and  treated  with  intolerance.  They  have  taught, 
and  do  still  teach,  that  such  is  impious  and  sinful.  The  consequence 
has  been  the  establishment  of  the  most  confirmed  and  deeply-rooted 
prejudices.  Hence  men  who  have  progressed  in  knowledge,  and 
have  offered  their  attainments  to  the  world,  have  been  repelled  by 
strongly-fortified  prejudices,  and  have  been  classed  either  with  mys- 
tics or  skeptics.  And  many  indeed  have  become  skeptics  from  such 
causes.  But  being  free  from  the  conventionalisms  of  the  world,  they 
have  freely  examined  all  phenomena  and  manifestations  external,  and 
by  these  means  have  arrived  unbiased  at  truths,  and  have  embraced 
them  for  their  own  sake.  Such  persons  have  a high  sense  of  honor, 
justice,  and  conscientiousness,  and  do  good  for  the  love  thereof. 

And  is  this  the  nineteenth  century  ? And  has  ignorance  so  pre- 
vailed that  the  spiritual  and  internal  principle  of  man  has  become 
hidden  and  obscured  ? And  is  this  an  age  in  which  such  a principle 
should  be  doubted?  Seven  times  have  I been  requested  to  explain 
the  nature  and  composition  of  Spirit.  What  an  age  to  ask  such  a 
question ! But  this  has  been  propounded  by  men  of  free  and  ex- 
pansive minds,  willing  to  receive  truth  if  evidently  manifested,  but 
who  would  not  and  could  not  believe  unless  a cause  was  shown  ade- 
quate to  produce  the  effect  to  be  believed.  This  skepticism  is  honest ; 
this  honesty  is  virtue  ; this  virtue  is  the  principle  which  should  gov- 
ern man  in  all  his  mental  and  moral  actions. 

But  I have  frequently  been  in  connexion  with  persons  whom  I 
have  found  to  be  dishonest  skeptics,  and  who  concealed  the  same  by 
wearing  a fashionable  cloak  of  hypocrisy.  From  these  I expect 
criticisms,  reviews,  and  obstruction.  From  these  will  be  noticed  the 
greatest  manifestations  of  fear  of  deception  and  imposition.  These 
will  decry,  retard,  and  oppose  ; and  to  these  I have  nothing  to  offer. 
But  to  the  honest  inquirer  after  truth,  this  Revelation  is  submitted, 
that  by  it  he  may  become  convinced  of,  and  familiar  with,  the  im- 
mutable laws  which  govern  Nature  and  man.  And  to  him  I would 
say,  “Follow  me  through  this  investigation,  and  then  decide  for  or 
against  the  conclusions  arrived  at,  according  to  the  preponderance  of 
evidence  which  you  receive.”  And  it  is  the  duty  and  interest  of  the 
world  to  subject  these  developments  to  investigation ; and  such  is  the 
positive  and  fearless  demand  of  the  subject.  And  by  revealing  and 
making  plain  to  man,  through  his  organization,  or  senses,  the  teach- 


22  THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 

ings  of  Nature,  and  the  true  principles  of  reasoning  from  cause  to 
effect,  the  race  may  be  elevated,  united,  and  rendered  happy. 


$ 7.  Outward  searching  after  truth,  and  inductions  drawn  from  the 
appearances  of  substances  external,  has  been  thought  the  only  process 
by  which  man  can  demonstrate  tangible  realities.  Men  generally 
proceed  in  this  way  to  become  convinced  of  the  reality  of  things  — 
are  satisfied  only  in  proportion  as  evidence  appeals  to  their  senses, 
respecting  forms  visible,  and  consider  this  as  the  only  test  of  truth 
and  reality.  Such  men  found  their  belief  or  disbelief,  in  the  evi- 
dences of  their  senses,  making  the  outward  passive,  and  the  inward 
active.  , Objects  and  manifestations  observed,  they  take  as  the  test 
of  truth : things  which  are  invisible  and  imperceptible,  they  either 
doubt,  or  arrive  at  the  conclusion  that  their  existence  is  imaginative 
and  visionary.  Hence  men  have  expended  much  talent  in  forming 
theories  founded  on  visible  facts  and  appearances ; and  probably  the 
following  generation  will  experience  and  witness  phenomena  relative 
to  this  science,*  which  will  be  in  direct  contradiction  of  the  theories 
received. 

Theories  founded  on  facts  visible,  men  have  labored  to  reduce  to 
science.  Believing  that  the  fact  which  existed  was  attributable  to 
some  cause  invisible,  search  has  been  made,  and  the  real  cause  evi- 
dently demonstrated.  From  this  men  have  reasoned  to  the  effect, 
which  was  visible  and  manifest.  This  reasoning  is  the  true  reason- 
ing— proving  visible  effects  by  imperceptible  and  invisible  causes. 
Sciences  have  been  founded  upon  this  ground,  which  can  not  be  over- 
thrown : that  is,  their  causes  are  true,  and  their  effects  are  true,  and 
to  be  depended  upon  as  a general  rule.  But  those  who  might  expect 
their  effects  to  manifest  themselves  to  the  senses  as  unchangeable , 
would  inevitably  be  mistaken  as  respects  their  particulars  and  minu- 
tiee.  There  are  such  things  as  general  causes  to  produce  general 
effects  : but  there  is  not  such  a thing  as  a general  cause  manifesting 
invariably  both  general  and  minute  effects,  particularly  when  these 
effects  are  looked  for  or  expected  in  forms. 

Upon  Man,  for  instance,  many  useful  and  correct  sciences  have 


* Magnetism. 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


23 


been  established.  Man  has  witnessed  corporeal  phenomena  as  pro- 
ceeding from  his  organism,  and  presenting  many  varied  and  myste- 
rious manifestations.  Upon  his  form  has  been  established  the  sci- 
ence of  Anatomy.  Theories  and  books  have  been  given  to  the  world 
almost  without  number,  giving  extensive  and  minute  delineations  of 
his  anatomical  structure.  Many  of  these  have  been  received  as  true 
in  all  their  descriptions  of  the  generals  and  particulars  of  the  structure 
of  man.  It  is  generally  supposed  that  the  extensive  study  which 
has  been  employed  on  the  science  of  Anatomy,  prohibits  even  a pos- 
sibility of  its  being  in  any  particular  erroneous  or  misunderstood. 
Practice  has  been  established  ; and  this  science  has  been  a chart  and 
directory  to  the  practitioner.  But  every  practitioner  will  give  in  his 
experience  as  differing  from  that  of  others,  in  many  particulars.  All 
depend  upon  the  structure  of  the  human  system,  which  they  have 
found  invariably  the  same  ; but  in  the  minutiae  of  practice,  they  differ 
exceedingly.  Thus  the  foundation  of  practice  (or  the  theory  of  the 
anatomy  of  the  human  system)  is  proved  to  be  invariably  true  by  the 
united  experience  and  observation  of  all  men ; but  the  minutiae  and 
'particulars  have  been  found  irregular  in  their  manifestations.  And 
this  proves  that  particulars,  as  looked  for  through  the  medium  of  the 
external  senses,  are  not  to  be  depended  upon. 

The  science  of  Physiology  has  also  been  proved  in  generals,  but 
not  in  particulars.  The  science  of  Phrenology  has  been  proved  de- 
monstratively to  every  erudite  man  of  science,  and  is  admitted  to  be 
true  as  regards  its  foundation  and  general  phenomena.  It  compre- 
hends the  structure  of  the  organ  of  the,  mind,  including  its  undula- 
tions and  developments  as  indicated  on  the  external  surface  of  the 
cranium.  And  practitioners  in  this  science  know  its  truth  by  its 
many  manifestations  in  shape,  size,  and  general  appearances.  These 
hold  good  as  general  indications  ; but  when  their  particular  and  mi- 
nute effects  are  looked  for,  there  will  be  observed  extreme  variances. 
Thus  this  science  is  true  in  its  generals,  and  is  to  be  invariably  relied 
upon ; but  its  minutiie  vary  greatly  in  their  manifestations.  All  sci- 
ences relative  to  man  and  his  physical  and  mental  organization,  are 
truthful  and  to  be  relied  on,  as  is  demonstrated  by  the  general  and 
united  experience  of  all  mankind.  But  the  ultimates  and  minutiae 
are  changeable — the  anatomical,  physiological,  and  phrenological 
constitution  of  man,  being  the  bases  on  which  these  sciences  are 
founded.  And  effects  and  ultimate  minutias  are  also  observed  differ- 
ently by  every  person,  even  when  they  are  invariable. 


24 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


Thus  man,  making  the  external  the  test  of  truth  and  reality,  be- 
comes invariably  and  inevitably  deceived.  Reasoning  from  cause  to 
effect,  is  the  only  sure  guide  to  truth  : and  then  analogy  and  associa- 
tion may  follow,  as  carrying  direct  evidence  to  the  mind  of  that  which 
is  beyond  the  reach  of  the  senses.  If  external  and  visible  appear- 
ances are  the  correct  test  of  truth  and  reality,  whence  the  innumerable 
theories  that  are  presented  in  explanation  of  any  one  of  the  sciences? 
All  agree  indisputably  as  to  the  foundation  and  cause;  but  each  widely 
differs  from  others  in  accounting  for  the  various  effects  and  manifesta- 
tions. Is  not  this  conclusive  evidence  against  making  external  ap- 
pearances the  test  of  positive  and  absolute  truth  and  reality  ? 

For  illustration  : Suppose  you  cast  your  eyes  upon  a beautiful 
fruit.  It  is  pleasing  and  enticing  to  the  eye  ; it  is  grateful  to  the 
palate  ; it  is  pleasing  in  its  action  upon  the  taste  and  stomach.  You 
saw  it : that  convinced  you  of  its  reality.  But  had  you  any  evidence 
of  its  minutiae  and  effects  ? The  general  was  known  : the  particular 
was  not  known  ; for  in  a few  hours,  in  a given  instance,  this  same 
fruit  works  out  a most  deleterious  and  destructive  effect.  What  evi- 
dence then  had  you  of  the  real  reality,  by  knowing  that  the  fruit  did 
exist  by  the  evidence  of  vision  ? 

But  in  all  psychological  research  and  investigation,  the  external  and 
manifest  have  been  made  the  test  of  inward  reality.  Reasoning  from 
effects,  in  a retrograde  manner,  men  have  arrived  at  non-entity,  and 
become  confirmed  in  a disbelief  of  anything  beyond  what  the  senses 
will  recognise  as  existing.  Are  you  not  convinced  by  the  fluctuating 
nature  of  things  external,  temporal,  and  transient,  and  which  are  fleet- 
ing and  evanescent  as  the  leaves  of  the  trees,  that  these  are  mere 
effects,  and  not  realities  ? — that  the  real  or  cause  is  invisible,  and  the 
effect  is  a mere  transient  expression  ? For  matter  and  form  can  not 
be  depended  upon  as  producing  the  same  and  unchangeable  appear- 
ances. For  there  is  a perpetual  exhalation  and  inhalation  going  on 
throughout  all  Nature  imperceptibly  — a steady  flux  and  reflux  of 
matter,  daily,  hourly,  and  secondly,  as  changing  forms  and  appear- 
ances. Are  you  not  convinced  that  the  causes  of  this  continual 
changing  throughout  all  Nature  are  invisible,  not  to  be  heard  or  seen, 
yet  nevertheless  actual  and  real?  From  this  you  will  learn  to  make 
the  test  of  truth  the  amount  of  evidence  you  receive  through  the  or- 
ganization, and  not  that  originating  in  the  organization.  Make  the 
body,  the  organs,  the  medium  through  which  you  test  reality. 
Be  passive  in  the  inward ; active  on  the  outward.  The  outward  is 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


25 


an  instrument,  an  agent,  a medium  through  which  may  be  tested 
things  external. 

<§  8.  That  my  meaning  may  be  more  distinctly  comprehended,  let 
it  be  observed  that  the  body  is  a form , is  transient,  is  changeable:  the 
internal  is  not  changeable.  The  man  is  the  internal : the  effect  or 
form  is  external.  The  mind  is  not  acted  upon  by,  but  acts  on,  the 
body.  That  which  is  internal  is  the  reality:  that  which  it  acts  on 
is  visible  and  mortal.  And  all  appearances  foreign  are  composed 
of  the  same  mortal  ingredients  — mortal  in  the  restricted  sense  of  that 
term. 

Now  it  being  proved  that  the  visible  is  not  the  real,  but  that  the 
invisible  is  the  eternal,  it  follows  that  you  must  make  the  test  of  truth 
to  consist  in  an  imperceptible,  yet  unchangeable  and  eternal  principle. 
Admitting  this  much,  you  are  able  to  advance  one  step  further  in  the 
cognizance  of  probable  possibilities.  Effects  are  witnessed  : they  are 
traced  to  an  immediate  cause,  which  is  demonstrated  by  strict  and 
severe  analysis.  This  cause  producing  this  effect,  shows  you  that 
the  effect  is  not  without  a cause.  This  effect  produces  another,  and 
that  also  another ; and  so  by  analogy  you  may  see  that  there  is  an 
endless  and  incalculable  amount  of  causes  and  effects.  And  tracinc; 
effects  to  causes,  and  causes  to  effects,  is  the  correct  process  of  rea- 
soning : and  this  you  do  in  your  imagination  until  you  arrive  at  a 
chaos  of  existence, — then  stop  breathless  and  return  to  ask,  What 
was  the  cause  of  the  first  cause?  You  would  not  have  gone  upon 
these  trackless  peregrinations,  if  you  had  but  considered  all  forms  and 
externals  as  not  causes,  but  effects.  In  process  of  this  Key  to  the 
Revelation  which  is  to  follow,  you  will  receive  still  further  evidence 
directly  in  favor  of  this  form  of  reasoning. 

I will  here  indicate  the  order  of  reasoning  and  investigation  to  be 
pursued.  First,  we  are  to  commence  at  the  First  Cause,  and  trace 
causes  to  their  effects,  until  we  reach  the  human  body,  which  is  an 
ultimate  effect  of  the  Great  Cause.  To  prevent  this  train  of  remark 
from  being  considered  as  based  upon  senseless  hypothesis,  we  will 
also  (race  the  ultimate  effect  through  cause  and  effect,  until  we  arrive 
at  the  First  Cause.  Approaching  with  deep  reverence  the  First 
Cause,  we  will  commence  at  the  Great  Head  of  all  existence,  and 
through  the  formation  and  operation  of  all  spheres  celestial,  trace  the 
chain  of  existence  to  the  terrestrial,  and  until  we  arrive  at  the  last 
effect,  or  the  ultimate, — considering  it  to  be  an  eternity  which  pro- 


26 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


daces  and  reproduces  spheres,  existences,  and  forms,  until  there  is  an 
infinite  expansion  of  ultimates.  And  this  process  will  be  understood 
by  the  following  familiar  illustration : The  germ,  roots,  body,  branches, 
limbs,  buds,  blossoms,  beauty.  Or  this  : Water,  steam,  ether,  imma- 
terial. Or : Fall,  winter,  spring,  and  summer  in  its  brightness  and 
beauty.  The  great  train  of  investigation  which  is  soon  to  follow,  is 
based  upon  the  principles  of  reasoning  which  have  been  laid  down 
and  illustrated. 

And  conceive  of  a germ  being  hidden  beneath  the  surface  of  tins 
hard  earth.  Imagine  that  you  forget  its  existence.  Let  a few  years 
of  time  elapse,  and  then  cast  your  eyes  to  the  spot  where  it  ivas  con- 
cealed, and  you  see  a lofty  and  beautiful  tree,  standing  in  all  the 
majesty  and  dignity  of  its  nature.  And  would  it  not  be  as  absurd 
and  impossible  to  disbelieve  the  existence,  as  it  would  be  to  doubt  for 
one  moment  the  germ  which  has  produced  this  existence?  The  tree 
stands,  and  is  visible  as  an  ultimate  : man  stands,  and  he  is  also  an 
ultimate.  The  germ  of  the  tree,  you  knew  of  its  existence  ; but  the 
germ  of  the  world,  you  do  not  know  of  its  existence.  But  is  it  not 
evident  that  the  latter  is  at  least  possible,  since  the  first  is  known  and 
demonstrated  ? By  even  assenting  to  such  a possibility,  you  have 
become  prepared  to  take  one  more  careful  step  in  this  investigation. 

By  the  next  careful  step  which  is  to  be  taken,  is  meant  the  admis- 
sion of  the  process  here  indicated,  as  being  the  only  correct  mode  of 
reasoning.  But  before  this  step  is  taken,  it  becomes  highly  neces- 
sary to  illustrate  still  further  the  truthfulness  of  this  rule,  tracing  syn- 
thetically visible  effects  to  their  causes,  and  analytically  causes  to  their 
effects.  The  transition  from  the  usual  mode  of  reasoning  to  this, 
would  be  too  sudden  for  the  mind  to  receive,  without  its  being  made 
still  more  plain  by  reasons  deduced  from  general  truths,  as  they  are 
indisputably  and  extensively  known  to  exist.  Illustrations  and  repre- 
sentations which  have  been  made  are  direct,  but  too  comprehensive 
to  be  familiarly  understood,  in  proof  that  things  which  are  visible  and 
external,  are  only  tangible  effects  and  ultimates  of  causes  invisible. 
The  following  is  to  make  still  more  plain  the  reason  of  this  rea- 
soning : — 

All  things  external,  in  forms,  series,  and  degrees,*  appear  to  differ- 
ent persons  to  present  different  manifestations.  Suppose  a man  dis- 
eased : physicians  examine  his  case,  guided  both  by  the  physiological 

•What  is  meant  by  “forms,  series,  and  degrees,”  is  the  unfoldings  of  the  various 
and  successive  stages  or  kingdoms  of  creation,  as  the  sequel  will  illustrate. 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


27 


manifestations  of  the  disease,  and  by  the  feelings  which  the  disease 
produces,  which  are  not  perceptible  to  them  by  any  process  of  exter- 
nal observation.  The  patient  communicates  his  own  feelings,  the 
physicians  taking  these  for  granted  ; and  from  these,  together  with 
the  symptoms  manifest,  they  decide  upon  the  name  of  the  disease. 
Each  of  these  physicians,  from  the  evidence  which  he  has  received 
through  the  senses,  differs  from  the  others  as  to  the  character  of-the 
disease.  Have  you  not  here  proof  that  the  external  and  manifest  is 
the  effect  and  can  not  be  relied  on,  while  the  cause  is  hidden  ? — And 
you  do  not  possess  any  means  by  which  you  can  investigate  its 
cause. 

Again  : A man  has  a carious  tooth  : he  tells  you  he  experiences  a 
severe  pain ; but  you  doubt  his  word,  and  ask  for  proof.  He  points 
you  to  the  tooth,  which  is  the  object  tangible.  But  does  the  evidence 
of  which  your  senses  admit,  convince  you  that  he  has  a pain  ? The 
tooth  is  the  external,  the  ultimate  : the  pain  is  the  invisible,  but 
reality.  In  both  of  the  above  cases,  are  you  not  internally  convinced 
that  you  must  adopt  some  other  process  of  reasoning  and  investiga- 
tion to  find  the  true  cause  of  the  objects  manifested  ? Conclusions 
drawn  from  things  visible,  which  are  effects  and  ultimates,  can  not  be 
so  reliable  as  inferences  drawn  from  internal  causes  as  to  their  legiti- 
mate effects. 

One  more  illustration  : You  have  a foundation  of  belief  which  you 
call  the  evidence  of  your  senses,  and  which  you  implicitly  rely  on 
as  proving  truth  and  reality.  But  notwithstanding  the  evidence  which 
you  may  receive  through  the  senses,  particularly  that  of  vision,  the 
following  illustration  will  enable  you  to  conceive  of  the  possibility  of 
internal  truths  : The  whole  world  of  mankind  can  give  in  their  uni- 
ted testimonies  that  they  positively  and  absolutely  see  the  sun  rising 
in  the  east,  and  setting  in  the  west.  Is  there  not  internal  evidence 
that  the  external  and  manifest  of  this  is  positively  unreal  ? Inward, 
searching  after  truth  has  established  the  cause  of  this  phenomenon, 
and  proved  that  the  sun  does  not  move.  But  it  is  the  visible  and  ex- 
ternal that  you  are  deceived  by,  and  not  the  invisible,  which  is  the 
reality.  True  philosophy  embraces  both  of  these  processes  of  rea- 
soning— synthetically  from  effect  to  cause,  and  analytically  from  cause 
to  effect.  The  philosopher  who  pursues  only  one  of  these  processes, 
is  not  a philosopher;  but  he  who  adopts  both,  is  a true  philosopher, 
and  has  true  philosophy.  Admitting  this  as  the  true  course,  you  be 
come  a reasoner  from  internal  realities  to  external,  visible  effects. 


28 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


$ 9.  And  now  free  your  minds  from  all  things  present,  and  retro- 
spectively view  the  past : Have  you  not  times  innumerable  been  per- 
fectly deceived  by  visible  manifestations  ? Has  not  appearance  often 
been  in  direct  opposition  to  the  reality?  Has  not  the  appearance  of 
a person  deceived  you  when  you  least  supposed  it  possible  ? Have 
not  the  particulars — the  minutiai  of  everything  familiar  to  your 
senses,  irregularly  presented  different  and  opposite  manifestations  ? 
Have  you  not  been  mistaken  almost  as  often  as  you  have  relied  on 
this  as  a mode  of  receiving  truth  ? Desponding  on  the  deceptions 
caused  by  a reliance  upon  things  external  and  manifest,  has  not  the 
whole  become  repulsive  to  many  minds,  and  have  they  not  doubted 
appearances  and  totally  disbelieved  invisibles  ? If  so,  how  inexpres- 
sible should  be  man’s  delight  to  know  that  that  is  not  real  which  is 
visible  ? A person  may  have  a passion  or  an  emotion  ; he  may  have 
sentiments  and  thoughts  which  are  not  known  to  exist  by  any  other 
person  ; for  a thought  is  invisible.  The  only  process  by  which  the 
world  may  become  convinced  of  its  existence,  is  its  manifestation  on 
the  body — the  external  being  the  effect  or  ultimate  ; the  cause  inter- 
nal and  real. 

So  with  every  form  and  manifestation,  tangible  and  external. 
You  see  light  : you  are  thus  convinced  by  the  evidence  of  vision 
that  that  light  exists.  It  may  proceed  from  various  states  of  matter, 
from  fire,  or  a candle.  But  does  the  sight  of  it  convince  you  as  to 
the  nature  of  its  source  ? If  you  had  not  the  conviction  previously 
that  it  would  burn,  then  by  presenting  any  part  of  the  body  in  con- 
nexion with  it,  you  would  find  the  reality  of  fire : but  of  this  you 
would  know  nothing  until  it  was  proved  by  a different  process  from 
that  of  external  and  tangible  manifestations.  This  presents  evidence 
conclusive  that  the  internal  is  the  cause  and  reality ; the  external, 
the  effect  and  ultimate.  Why  judge  ye  not  yourselves  of  the  right? 
External  representations  have  been  too  much  relied  on  as  proof  of 
reality.  The  outside  of  the  platter  was  clean;  but  the  inside  — the 
invisible — was  full  of  extortion  and  excess.  Arriving  at  these  truths, 
(which  will  be  universally  acknowledged),  have  you  not  seen  suffi- 
cient reason  not  to  pursue  this  course  any  longer  ? 

It  is  now  clearly  seen  and  proved  that  the  things  which  constitute 
causes,  are  invisible,  and  that  their  effects  are  manifested  in  all  forms 
external.  Hence  the  latter  can  not  be  realities , for  such  a suppo- 
sition would  involve  a self-inconsistency. 

The  process  of  reasoning  thus  to  be  adopted,  is  based  on  an  inte- 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


29 


gral  view  of  the  universe.  And  by  resting  on  positive,  and  not  on 
particular — depending  on  general  and  not  on  minutiae  in  external 
manifestations,  your  expectations  will  be  realized  in  the  general 
manifestations.  Associating  cause  and  effect  with  analogy  and  cor- 
respondence, observing  forms,  series,  degrees,  associations,  and 
spheres,  is  to  be  the  method  by  which  their  future  condition  will  be 
shown  to  be  in  analogy  with  things  which  are  here  visible.  But  this 
is  not  to  be  commenced  until  the  careful  step  is  taken  : and  that  is 
to  prove  the  visible  by  the  invisible.  And  the  foundation  of  true 
reasoning  being  established,  it  brings  with  it  irresistibly  the  convic- 
tion of  this  state,*  which  you  are  to  have  evidently  demonstrated  to 
yourself  internal.  Proof  of  this  state,  and  of  the  source  from  which 
I received  these  impressions,  must  be  made  apparent  and  conspicuous 
before  you  feel  yourself  constrained  to  admit  the  contents  of  the  fol- 
lowing Revelation.  In  order  that  the  real  foundation  of  my  impres- 
sions may  be  established,  it  is  necessary  to  first  explain  the  admitted 
science  known  as  Animal  Magnetism  — upon  which  I will  proceed 
to  explain  this  state,  of  the  real  importance  of  which  you  receive 
externally  but  little  evidence. 

To  comprehend  a subject  so  vast  and  extensive  as  that  of  animal 
or  human  magnetism,  and  to  familiarize  the  mind  with  its  various 
and  mysterious  phenomena,  with  the  main  features  of  its  manifesta- 
tion, and  with  the  grounds  upon  which  it  rests,  it  becomes  highly 
necessary  to  make  illustrations  relative  to  the  proofs  to  be  intro- 
duced. A man  intending  a journey  to  some  foreign  country,  would, 
if  a judicious  traveller,  familiarize  himself  with  the  geography  of  it, 
and  acquaint  himself  with  the  maps  and  charts  of  the  various  ways 
by  following  which  he  might  reach  the  place  of  his  destination. 
These  he  would  know  in  order  that  he  might  not  misunderstand  the 
direction  of,  and  means  of  proceeding  to,  the  place  where  he  intends  to 
terminate.  Of  the  existence  of  the  place  he  does  not  know  by  any 
direct  evidence  through  his  organization,  but  of  this  he  is  convinced 
by  the  previous  reports  of  men,  and  by  the  uniform  admission  of  all. 
So  with  this  science  : its  foundation  and  basis  must  be  admitted  by 
the  evidences  of  previous  research  and  investigation,  instituted  by 
erudite  men,  both  in  this  and  previous  generations.  But  the  many 
ways  which  lead  to  its  peculiar  phenomena,  it  is  proper  to  become 
familiar  with,  in  order  to  arrive  at  its  legitimate  attributes.  The  di- 
rection to  its  known  results  may  be  given  in  the  following  explana- 
• The  abnormal  state  in  which  this  was  dictated. 


30 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


tion  ; and  the  guide  to  the  paths  will  be  the  isolated  facts  presented 
in  the  remarks  upon  individual  and  universal  experience. 

The  foundation  of  this  science  can  not  be  doubted  : for  it  is  ad- 
mitted that  there  are  existing  two  fluids,  which  may  here  be  termed 
Magnet  ism  and  Electricity.  In  making  the  subject  familiar  to  the 
understanding,  it  is  proper  to  give  a brief  description  of  the  organs 
of  sense. 

The  organ  of  vision  is  supposed  to  be  the  only  medium  by  which 
man  can  communicate  with  the  external  world,  in  such  a way  as  to 
receive  a knowledge  of  forms  and  substances  foreign  from  his  reach. 
The  retina  acts  as  a medium  for  the  intervention'  of  things  visible, 
the  reflection  of  which  it  comes  in  contact  with  ; and  thence  the 
impression  goes  through  the  optic  nerve  to  the  brain  or  seat  of  per- 
ception. 

The  ear  is  supposed  to  he  the  only  medium  to  receive  the  vibration 
of  external  disturbances  ; and  it  is  thought  that  hearing  can  not  exist 
without  the  perfection  of  this  organ.  The  tympanum,  its  mem- 
brane, bones,  and  stapes,  are  thought  to  be  requisite  to  perform  this 
office.  But  physiologists  are  aware,  by  innumerable  experiments, 
that  the  tympanic  membrane  and  the  small  bones,  with  the  exception 
of  the  stapes,  may  be  totally  destroyed  without  materially  injuring 
that  sense.  Hence  there  must  be  a different  medium  through  which 
that  sensation  may  be  produced. 

The  organ  of  smell  may  also  lose  some  of  its  parts,  and  still  per- 
form its  office.  The  various  convoluted  parts  of  the  nasal  organ  are 
not  developed  until  the  child  is  quite  advanced  ; still  the  sensation 
of  this  organ  is  apparently  manifested  in  the  earlier  stages  of  its  de- 
velopment. 

The  organ  of  speech  also  can  exist  without  every  part  of  its  pres- 
ent structure.  The  lingual  nerve  may  be  severed  ; yet  there  will 
he  existing  muscular  action  of  the  tongue,  and  a continual  perform- 
ance of  its  office. 

The  sense  of  feeling  may  be  partially  destroyed,  from  some  ex- 
ternal and  incidental  connexion,  such  as  may  partially  paralyze  its 
action  ; yet  there  will  be  still  existing  acute  sensitiveness  of  this 
sense. 


§ 10.  Each  of  these  senses  may- and  does  perform  its  office  indi- 
rectly upon  the  mind,  without  any  direct  interference  or  connexion  with 
anything  external.  This  is  demonstrated  by  the  experience  of  ev- 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


31 


eiy  person  during  the  hours  of  slumber.  It  is  generally  supposed 
that  thoughts  will  not  be  excited  upon  tangible  realities,  without  a 
direct  connexion  between  the  organs  and  such  realities  : and  it  is 
also  supposed  that  the  nerves  of  sensation,  which  are  active  in  con- 
veying all  the  organic  impressions  to  the  mind,  can  only  be  excited 
oy  the  action  of  the  external  upon  them,  to  transmit  the  emotion 
necessary  to  generate  thought.  This  is  not  entirely  correct;  — and 
the  true  state  of  the  case  will  be  known  by  appeals  to  your  own  ex- 
perience during  your  normal  and  abnormal  existence.  During  the 
hours  of  physical  repose,  while  the  parts  of  the  system  are  recruiting 
and  reproducing  new  strength  and  energy,  and  while  the  organs  of 
sense  are  closed  to  all  external  impressions,  the  mind,  free  from  all 
obtrusive  and  disturbing  influences,  makes  imaginative  excursions  to 
different  places  and  contemplates  different  things  in  existence.  It 
supposes  it  sees  or  hears ; while  sometimes  it  is  arrested  in  its  trav- 
els by  the  sound  of  beautiful  music,  or  by  various  pleasing  scenes 
which  it  appears  to  enjoy.  Sometimes  it  supposes  it  walks,  feels, 
tastes,  or  suffers  excruciating  pain.  It  also  appears  to  be  irresistibly 
in  many  places,  where  it  had  no  previous  desire  or  intention  to  be. 
During  all  of  these  peregrinations,  the  wave  of  sound,  the  reflection 
of  sight,  the  susceptibility  of  feeling,  the  pleasure  of  tasting,  are  all 
supposed  to  be  enjoyed.  This  can  not  be  Spirit ; for  if  it  were,  it 
would  be  distinguished  by  the  perfection  of  all  its  qualifications 
during  its  disconnected  state  from  the  body.  This  is  Mind,  con- 
nected with  the  body ; and  the  impression  which  it  receives  through 
the  disturbed  condition  of  the  nerves  of  sensation.  This  proves 
that  there  is  an  internal  medium  of  sensation  by  which  the  mind 
enjoys  its  capacity  as  if  the  external  were  in  connexion  with  the 
world.  It  proves  also  that  there  is  a medium,  which  I have  not  yet 
named,  existing  upon  these  nerves  of  sensation,  independent  both 
of  internal  and  external  exciting  causes. 

Having  thus  established  the  existence  of  an  independent,  con- 
scious medium,  I will  now  proceed  to  explain  its  existence.  And 
of  this  the  foundation  is  universally  known  and  admitted,  and  hence 
it  is  not  necessary  to  speak  particularly  in  reference  to  its  existence. 
This  foundation  is  the  muscular  and  sympathetic  nerves.  A synop- 
sis of  the  theory  is  as  follows  : Man  possesses  two  coatings,  which 
are  classified  as  the  serovs  and  mucous  surfaces.  The  serous  covers 
each  organ,  nerve,  and  fascia  of  the  muscles,  including  the  whole  of 
their  surfaces.  The  mucous  surfaces  constitute  the  inner  of  every 


32 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


organ,  nerve,  and  muscle.  The  serous  surfaces  and  mucous  generate 
and  sustain  a positive  and  negative  fluid.  This  controls  the  circula- 
tion. The  negative  expands  the  ventricles,  and  that  attracts  the  blood 
to  its  reservoir.  The  positive  contracts  the  ventricles,  and  thus  re- 
pulses the  blood  throughout  the  system.  Hence  there  is  a continual 
expansion  and  attraction,  and  contraction  and  repulsion  — which  illus- 
trates familiarly  the  oflice  of  these  forces.  The  serous  surfaces  are 
susceptible  of  feeling,  while  the  mucous  surfaces  are  not.  The  mus- 
cular nerves  aro  controlled  by  the  mind,  while  the  sympathetic,  or 
nerves  of  sensation,  are  the  medium  of  actuating  the  mind,  whose 
motion  produces  thought. 

The  brain  is  composed  of  a sensitive  and  complicated  composition 
of  fibres,  to  which  no  other  part  of  the  body  bears  any  analogy.  Be- 
ing sensitive,  it  is  attractive  or  positive  to  all  that  is  existing  on  the 
nervous  medium : hence  it  receives  impressions  irresistibly.  It  pos- 
sesses within  itself  the  positive  and  negative  poles,  or  greater  and 
lesser  parts : the  one  controlling,  the  other  subject ; the  one  receiving 
power,  the  other  transmitting  and  exercising  power.  The  ethereal 
substance  which  serves  as  a medium,  may  be  termed  Magnetism. 
The  muscular  motion  of  the  system  is  performed  through  the  medi- 
um of  the  substance  which  maybe  termed  Electricity.  When  there 
is  a full  and  uninterrupted  exercise  of  all  the  powers  and  organs 
of  the  body ; when  there  is  a harmony  existing  throughout  the 
whole  physical  system,  there  is  perfect  health  and  enjoyment ; be- 
cause its  forces  (which  are  positive  and  negative,  or  magnetic  and 
electric)  are  regularjy  performing  their  functions  : and  this  indicates 
a perfect  condition  of  the  magnetic  or  nervous  medium.  Neverthe- 
less, when  the  body  becomes  deranged  in  any  of  its  various  parts,  it 
is  a loss  of  the  positive  or  negative  power  which  produces  its  health 
and  harmonious  action.  But  when  all  parts  are  in  perfect  unison 
and  harmony,  then  the  system  is  thoroughly  magnetized.  In  order 
to  demagnetize  it,  you  must  in  some  way  overcome  the  equilibrium, 
and  extract  the  positive  power  by  a power  still  more  positive ; and 
this  will  produce  the  unconscious  state  called  the  magnetic. 

The  medium,  heretofore  explained,  exists  between  all  organic  be- 
ings. Magnetism  composes  the  sphere  — rather  the  atmosphere  — 
by  which  every  person  is  individually  surrounded.  And  besides 
this,  there  is  a medium  existing  which  extends  through  all  things, 
placing  man  over  the  lower  aninrd  creation.  For  animals  are  sub- 
jected to  man’s  control  by  the  positive  nr  subduing  power  which  he 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


33 


possesses ; and  they  receive  this  to  their  minds  by  the  same  medium 
which  exists  between  an  organ  and  the  brain.  Man  being  positive, 
and  all  else  negative,  the  latter  must  yield  to  his  control.  Here 
again  is  proof  that  the  internal,  invisible,  is  the  real  cause  of  all  ex 
ternal  and  ultimate  manifestations. 


§ 11.  The  state  termed  magnetic  can  be  produced  by  the  follow- 
ing process  (which  is  not  in  any  way  confusing  the  laws  of  Nature, 
but  instead  thereof,  is  only  developing  its  powers  and  attributes, 
which  have  not  been  known  to  exist  as  appertaining  to  animal  or 
physical  creation)  : One  system  coming  in  contact  with  another  of 
less  positive  power,  will  be  attractive  (the  attraction  depending  upon 
the  medium  universally  established),  and  will  attract  the  positive 
power  from  the  patient  or  subject,  with  whom  the  former  is  in  con- 
tact ; and  the  positive  or  magnetic  force  which  is  attracted  from  the 
subject’s  system,  is  that  which  exists  upon  the  nerves'  of  sensation, 
which  terminate  in  the  serous  surfaces.  This  fluid  being  withdrawn, 
the  patient  is  not  susceptible  of  external  impressions,  simply  because 
the  medium  by  which  these  are  transmitted  is  absent.  He  is  then 
demagnetized — leaving  sensation  only  existing  upon  the  internal  or 
mucous  surfaces  which  produce  vital  action.  The  negative  power 
remains ; the  positive  does  not  remain.  Vital  action  becomes  torpid 
and  feeble  according  to  the  loss  of  power  which  previously  controlled 
it.  This  is  the  magnetic  state  ; and  in  this  peculiar  condition,  the 
patient  is  in  sympathy  with,  or  is  submissive  to  the  will  or  positive 
magnetic  power  of,  the  operator.  This  is  the  first  state. 

The  subject  in  the  first  state  is  obedient  to  the  will  or  wish  of  the 
operator,  through  an  established  equilibrium  of  the  two  forces  which 
must  exist  in  all  things  to  produce  motion.  The  subject  is  negative  ; 
the  operator  is  positive.  Hence  the  negative  phenomena,  witnessed 
in  the  patient’s  system,  stand  in  analogy  to  muscular  motion  or  nega- 
tive manifestations  in  one  man.  The  subject  and  operator  form  one 
system  in  power.  There  is  a visible  disunion,  yet  there  does  exist 
an  invisible  union.  One  is  positive,  the  other  negative;  and  the  one 
performs  negatively  what  the  other  performs  positively.  And  this 
representation  illustrates  the  condition : Man,  when  uninterrupted  in 
any  of  his  functional  capacities,  stands  magnetized ; one  part  of  his 
system  being  'positive,  the  other  negative,  and  the  two  being  united 
by  an  equilibrium  which  does  (yet  invisibly)  exist ; and  all  phenom- 
ena produced  by  his  mind  as  the  positive , upon  his  body  as  the  negci- 

3 


34 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


tive , are  parallel  to  what  takes  place  in  the  patient  and  the  operator. 
It  is  not  necessary  to  give  a minute  description  of  the  various  changes 
and  modifications  which  these  potent  fluids  pass  through.  But  the 
fact  is  visible,  manifest — produced  by  the  real,  invisible,  yet  the 
primary  cause  all  the  external  appearances. 

To  convince  the  rational  mind  of  the  foregoing  inductions,  I will 
state  the  position  which  the  true  reasoner  occupies:  There  is  a con- 
tinual antagonism  between  faith  and  doubt.  The  true  reasoner  stands 
as  a mediator  between  the  two.  Man  can  not  disbelieve  nor  believe 
— there  is  no  such  thing  as  disbelief  or  belief — without  evidence  to 
produce  one  decision  or  the  other.  To  be  a disbeliever,  man  requires 
in  reality  the  same  amount  of  evidence  that  he  does  to  become  a 
believer.  The  mere  expression  of  belief  or  disbelief  has  no  meaning 
unless  it  is  determined  by  a sufficient  and  reasonable  amount  of  evi- 
dence. Supposing  you  to  stand  as  a mediator  between  belief  and 
disbelief,  and  to  require  the  same  amount  of  evidence  to  make  you 
take  either  side,  I now  ask  you  this  question  in  reference  to  the  ex- 
planation of  this  subject : Have  you  not  received  a sufficient  amount 
of  internal,  conscious  evidence,  to  make  you  take  the  side  of  the  be- 
liever ? If  you  have  not,  then  your  evidence  must  be  sufficiently 
strong  and  powerful  to  make  you  disbelieve;  and  this  it  is  your  duty 
to  make  known  as  extensively  as  possible,  in  order  to  settle  the  an- 
tagonism existing  between  faith  and  doubt  upon  this  particular  subject. 

Thus  the  phenomenon,  known  as  magnetic,  does  not  controvert  or 
subvert  in  any  way  the  laws  of  Nature ; but  instead  thereof,  such 
should  be  looked  upon  as  a progression  and  further  development  of 
the  laws  which  govern  organic  beings.  The  placing  of  one  person 
in  the  magnetic  state,  he  composing  the  negative,  and  the  operator 
the  positive,  thus  brings  the  law  that  controls  one  system  in  its  vari- 
ous parts,  to  control  two  beings,  as  composing  one  with  all  the  requi- 
site magnetic  forces. 

It  would  not  be  inappropriate  here  to  introduce  a few  thoughts 
upon  the  utility  of  this  influence  in  alleviating  the  sufferings  of  hu- 
manity. There  are  several  classes  of  disease  which  greatly  excite 
the  nerves  and  surfaces  upon  which  the  magnetic  medium  exists  ; and 
excitement  causes  them  to  generate  an  excessive  amount  of  the  mag- 
netic medium,  or  positive  fluid.  This  often  produces  excessive 
fevers.  When  intense,  it  affects  the  brain,  and  often  produces  awful 
paroxysms  and  derangements — which  could  all  be  removed  by  the 


y 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


35 


contact  of  a person  who  is  strongly  positive.  By  this  would  be  ex- 
tracted the  superabundance  of  heat,  or  magnetic  ether,  which  being 
excessive,  produces  the  effects  above  described.  In  all  cases  where 
there  is  too  great  an  amount  of  positive  power,  it  can  be  relieved  by 
the  application  of  a due  and  superior  amount  of  positive  power.  All 
excess  of  heat,  or  fever,  such  as  is  caused  by  innumerable  derange- 
ments of  the  system,  can  be  invariably  reduced  to  an  equilibrium  by 
employing  this  new  development. 

There  are  properly  four  magnetic  states.  In  the  first , no  particu- 
lar phenomena  are  witnessed,  only  that,  the  external  organs  being  in 
some  measure  divested  of  their  ordinary  share  of  magnetism,  a feel- 
ing of  dulness  pervades  the  system.  Persons  in  this  state  lose  none 
of  their  senses,  but  are  susceptible  to  all  external  impressions.  They 
have  also  the  full  power  of  muscular  action  ; and  if  situated  nearly 
midway  between  the  first  and  second  states,  they  are  inclined  to  happy 
feelings.  And  all  phenomena  witnessed  in  this  state,  are  only  of  a 
physical  nature  : but  in  the  higher  states,  the  phenomena  consist  in 
the  development  of  the  mental  powers. 

The  next  state,  or  the  second , manifests  itself  through  the  mental 
organization.  The  patient  still  manifests  his  intellectual  faculties,  but 
is  deprived  of  all  muscular  power.  The  pupil  of  the  eye  expands, 
and  that  organ  refuses  to  act  on  the  brain.  The  tympanic  membrane 
and  cavity  of  the  ear  expand  and  refuse  to  perform  their  wonted  ac- 
tion. The  extremities  are  somewhat  cold.  In  the  latter  part  of  this 
state  all  sensation  and  feeling  is  destroyed,  so  that  any  surgical  opera- 
tion can  be  performed  without  giving  pain.  The  patient  in  this  con- 
dition appears  mentally  associated  with  the  operator.  All  the  external 
organs  being  closed,  there  is  no  possible  means  of  receiving  impres- 
sions from  without ; but  all  phenomena  are  produced  through  the 
medium  which  exists  between  the  operator  and  the  patient.  Hence 
there  are  sympathetic,  incoherent,  and  indefinite  accounts  received 
from  the  mind  of  the  patient,  which  are  analogous  to  the  impressions 
of  the  man  previously  spoken  of,  who  seemingly  recognised  external 
realities  during  his  moments  of  dreaming.  Thus  the  phenomena  are 
of  a mental  nature,  and  are  a natural  production  of  the  mind  so 
situated. 


§ 12.  The  ear  is  not  entirely  closed  to  sound  in  the  first  part  of  the 
third  slate.  The  patient  can  hear  indistinctly,  possesses  the  power 
of  speech,  and  partly  of  muscular  action.  About  the  middle  of  this 


36 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


state,  the  ear  is  completely  closed,  and  all  impressions  made  upon 
the  brain  from  external  objects,  are  at  an  end.  The  patient  is  then 
placed  in  an  unconscious  condition  so  far  as  the  external  world  is 
concerned.  Divested  of  his  ordinary  share  of  magnetism,  he  pos- 
sesses just  enough  to  perform  vital  action. 

In  this  state  there  is  a strong  sympathy  existing  between  the  ope- 
rator and  his  subject.  The  chain  of  sympathy  which  connects  the 
mind  of  the  operator  with  that  of  his  subject,  is  animal  electricity , — 
the  same  fluid  which  is  the  agent  of  all  muscular  motion.  It  is 
through  the  agency  of  this  fluid  that  magnetic  sleep  is  induced.  The 
operator  sits  down  with  the  determination  to  put  his  subject  to  sleep  : 
all  the  powers  of  his  mind  are  concentrated  on  this  object.  His  will 
being  exercised  to  this  point,  the  electric  fluid  passes  from  his  own 
brain  and  nerves,  to  the  brain  and  system  of  his  patient,  and  forms 
between  the  two,  a chain  of  sympathy.  The  one,  then,  is  com- 
pletely subject  to  the  control  of  the  other ; and  in  this  manner  you 
may  easily  account  for  all  the  phenomena  witnessed  in  the  sympa- 
thetic somnambulist. 

In  this  state  the  patient  is  wholly  unsusceptible  to  any  tangible  or 
physical  connexion,  no  feeling  existing  upon  the  surfaces.  The 
magnetic  medium  is  far  less  active  than  in  the  previous  states ; but 
the  negative  or  muscular  forces  are  still  preserved.  At  this  crisis  the 
mind  is  extremely  susceptible  of  external  mediums  which  connect 
mind  to  matter.  Hence  the  subject  appears  to  see  and  hear,  and  to 
perform  many  wonderful  and  mysterious  things,  during  this  condition 
of  the  mental  faculties.  This  is  a state  of  still  higher  mental  devel- 
opment, and  of  consciousness  or  perception  of  mediums.  This  is 
often  supposed  to  be  the  clairvoyant  state ; but  it  is  not.  It  stands 
in  analogy  to  natural  somnambulism  ; only  one  is  a phenomenon  in- 
duced by  magnetism,  and  the  other  is  a similar  mental  state,  but  nat- 
urally produced  by  an  inactivity  of  the  magnetic  medium  or  sensation. 
The  magnetic  subject  has  progressed  in  his  mental  capacity  toward 
the  state  known  as  death  : for  the  positive  power  does  not  remain, 
while  the  negative  or  muscular  does  remain.  — And  the  increased  per- 
ception of  the  mind  is  through  the  medium  of  its  own  association. 

Passing  from  the  third  to  the  fourth  state,  a still  greater  and  higher 
mental  manifestation  will  be  observed.  About  midway  between  these 
two  conditions,  the  mind  loses  almost  all  its  sympathy  which  attaches 
it  to  the  system.  At  this  time  the  chain  of  sympathy  existing  be- 
tween the  positive  and  negative,  is  nearly  disconnected.  The  mind 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


37 


becomes  free  from  all  inclinations  which  the  body  would  subject  it  to, 
and  only  sustains  a connexion  by  a very  minute  and  rare  medium, 
the  same  that  connects  one  thought  with  another.  In  this  condition 
the  patient  progresses  into  the  fourth  state.  Then  the  mind  becomes 
free  from  the  "organization,  except  as  connected  by  the  medium  be- 
fore mentioned ; and  then  it  is  capable  of  receiving  impressions  of 
foreign  or  proximate  objects,  according  to  the  medium  with  which  it 
particularly  becomes  associated.  The  body  at  this  time  is  dormant 
and  inactive  in  all  its  parts,  except  the  negative,  or  muscular  and  vital 
action,  which  is  constantly  kept  up  and  controlled  by  the  united  forces 
of  the  operator  upon  the  operatee. 

And  this  stands  in  analogy  to  that  natural  state  of  physical  disunion 
known  as  death.  Death  is  produced  by  the  loss  of  both  forces  ; but 
the  clairvoyant  state  is  produced  by  the  blending  of  the  forces  of  the 
two  persons,  and  making  them  physically  equivalent  to  one.  The 
mind,  in  the  first  case,  loses  all  of  the  medium  which  connects  it  with 
the  body : the  latter  is  the  same  state  mentally  with  the  former,  with  the 
exception  of  the  medium  referred  to.  All  the  phenomena  are  seen, 
and  do  exist,  with  every  being.  Their  healthy  state  is  the  magnetic 
state,  and  the  various  conditions  and  developments  of  the  mind  du- 
ring sleep,  until  death,  are  analogous  to  the  various  phenomena 
induced  by  magnetism,  — only  one  is  an  ordinary  manifestation,  and 
the  other  is  a further  development  of  the  same  principles  and  laws 
which  constitute  and  govern  animal  organization. 

The  science  is  thus  explained ; and  the  phenomena  and  appearan- 
ces, which  may  be  invariably  expected,  may  thus  be  generalized. 
But  the  'particulars  and  minutice  will  vary  exceedingly,  according  to 
the  various  dispositions  and  organizations  upon  which  the  magnetic 
condition  is  induced.  To  particularize  would  require  an  indefinite 
length  of  remark,  consisting  of  individual  observations  and  isolated 
inductions. 

A great  question  now  presents  itself  for  investigation : Is  there 
such  a thing  existing  as  independent  clairvoyance  ? I answer,  There 
is.  You  ask  for  proof.  Such  you  shall  receive  by  the  following 
investigations. 

It  is  well,  however,  to  understand  the  meaning  which  is  applied  to 
the  word  independent.  If  you  mean  self-existent,  abstract,  indefinite, 
and  without  any  connexion — then  the  expression  means  nothing:  for 
in  this  sense  there  is  no  such  thing  as  independence.  But  if  the 


88 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


word  is  intended  to  mean  free  from  direct  instigation , then  it  has 
meaning ; and  to  it  this  signification  should  be  attached.  I am  com- 
pelled at  this  time  to  explain  and  reveal  the  mental  phenomenon  as 
I experience  it ; and  the  reasoning  to  familiarize  it  to  the  mind  will 
be  given  hereafter. 

It  was  admitted  that  the  body  is  in  negative  subjection  to  its  opera- 
tor— and  also  that  muscular  and  vital  action  are  still  sustained,  yet 
in  a less  degree  of  activity  than  during  the  self-possession  of  the 
forces  of  motion.  The  body  so  situated  is  dependent  for  its  activity 
upon  one  source,  while  the  mind  or  the  intellectual  quality  is  depen- 
dent upon  another.  While  I am  examining,*  I am  directly  de- 
pendent upon  the  close  connexion  of  the  physical,  and  the  steady  and 
intense  cognizance  of  the  mental.  But  when  the  independent  con- 
dition or  crisis  is  produced,  the  body  assumes  an  inclined  position. 
It  becomes  cold,  rigid,  and  unsusceptible  ; and  hearing  and  all  the 
physical  organs  are  torpid  and  inactive.  But  when  the  body  resumes 
its  natural  position,  hearing  returns,  muscular  motion  is  commenced 
and  active,  and  the  organ  of  speech  is  also  in  full  exercise.  Each 
of  these  power*  must  be  in  operation  in  order  to  communicate  exter- 
nally what  the  natural  organs  are  seemingly  cognizant  of.  This  de- 
pendence is  not  what  is  termed  sympathetic,  but  it  is  in  reality  a sit- 
uation which  that  word  will  express.  The  medium  existing  between 
thought  and  thought,  between  mind  and  mind,  and  between  time  and 
eternity,  is  the  only  active  pervading  medium  which  T am  dependent 
on  for  the  conception  of  thought,  and  for  the  perception  of  all  things 
of  a refined,  ethereal,  or  spiritual  constitution.  This  is  while  the 
activity  of  the  body  and  mind  appears  to  be  sympathetic  or  depen- 
dent. I am  not  impulsed  or  impressed  by  the  thoughts  or  feelings 
of  a foreign  person,  though  I am  cognizant  of  them  through  the  me- 
dium above  termed  ethereal.  The  independent  condition  is  when 
the  body  manifests  the  external  appearance  of  rigidity,  &c.,  above 
described  ; and  in  this  situation  only  is  the  term  “ independence” 
applicable. 

% 13.  I will  now  illustrate  the  connexion  between  the  internal, 
through  the  organization,  with  the  external ; that  is,  what  the  mind 
is  dependent  upon  to  generate  ideas.  Forms  of  all  things  make  an 
impression,  or  rather  cast  a reflection  upon  the  mind,  which  reflection 
is  the  idea.  Sound  of  every  kind  conveys  to  the  mind  a peculiar 

* That  is,  examining  the  diseased,  with  a view  to  the  application  of  remedies. 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


39 


vibration — imperceptibly  yet  irresistibly  undulates  the  portion  of  the 
mind  with  which  it  comes  in  contact.  This  vibration  is  the  idea. 
The  vibration  and  idea  are  simultaneous,  yet  perfect.  Words  (or 
sounds  which  are  called  words)  are  the  agent  of  ideas.  So  also 
when  a person  meets  or  observes  a form  or  substance,  he  necessarily 
receives  an  idea  concerning  it.  And  the  idea  once  created  is  irrevo- 
cable ; and  association  of  the  mind  with  the  form  external,  excites  and 
develops  the  idea  first  established.  So  also  with  sound  or  words. 
Hence  in  learning , a frequent  repetition  of  the  association  of  ideas  is 
necessary  ; and  when  the  idea  is  established,  the  same  sound  or 
word,  even  though  irregularly  or  indefinitely  repeated,  renews  it,  and 
thus  confirms  the  knowledge  through  the  faculty  or  medium  termed 
association  or  imitation. 

All  thoughts  or  ideas  are  thus  dependent  upon  exciting  causes, 
the  medium  of  which  is  but  obscurely  known.  Yet  every  thought  is 
an  unrestrained  production  of  a mind  acted  upon  by  forms,  reflections, 
sounds,  associations,  or  imitation.  All  thoughts,  in  one  word,  may  be 
termed  irresistible  impressions.  The  cause  of  all  such  is  invisible. 
It  is  not  the  form,  substance,  sound,  or  word,  that  produces  thought ; 
but  it  is  the  irresistible  impression  which  such  produce  upon  the 
mind.  There  is,  first,  the  cause  ; secondly,  the  effect  produced  ; and 
thirdly,  the  thought,  idea,  or  ultimate.  Thought  is  dependent ; mind 
is  independent,  not  existing  with  the  body  as  a component  part  of  its 
constitution,  but  is  an  ultimate  of  organization ; and  thought  is  an  ul- 
timate of  both. 

Let  it  further  be  considered  that  a physical  manifestation  is  not 
produced  until  thought  as  a cause  or  prompter  previously  exists. 
Let  it  also  be  considered,  that  an  idea  or  thought  could  not  be  pro- 
duced without  the  mind  previously  existing.  And  let  it  further  be 
impressed,  that  a mind  could  not  be  individualized  without  the  pre- 
vious existence  of  the  physical  organization  ; and  still  further,  that 
the  organization  could  not  be  constituted  and  established  without  its 
previous  and  eternal  elementary  existence ; and  that  this  all  could 
not  exist  without  a self-existent,  unchangeable,  and  eternal  Principle. 
Here,  again,  is  developed  the  principle  previously  established  : that 
the  visible  and  external  are  effects  and  uUimatcs  of  invisible  yet  real 
producing  causes. 

In  analyzing  mind,  it  becomes  necessary  to  admit  what  you  at  first 
would  doubt.  If  you  say  the  mind  is  a principle  belonging  to,  and 
is  produced  and  developed  by,  the  action  of  the  organization,  you  at 


40 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


the  same  time  admit  the  production,  and  its  existence  ; but  if  you  do 
admit  and  sanction  this  alone,  then  you  virtually  approbate  and  sanc- 
tion a most  ingenious  theory  : that  all  forms  which  possess  within 
themselves  a moving  force , are  no  less  than  thinking  principles  ! So, 
then,  to  be  consistent  in  your  efforts  to  analyze  your  own  mind,  you 
must  admit  a power  beyond  man’s  present  power  of  investigation. 
And  if  such  a principle  does  exist  (and  you  are  compelled  irresisti- 
bly to  admit  it),  you  may  call  it  spirit,  or  substitute  for  that  word  any 
other  name  which  may  alleviate  an  inward  skepticism  of  a continua- 
tion of  this  principle’s  identity. 

And  by  the  admission  of  a Principle  previously  existing,  adequate 
in  power  and  wisdom  to  produce  organizations,  and  to  disseminate 
universally,  life  and  vivacity,  you  positively  deny  the  belief  in  the 
annihilation  of  the  most  minute  substance  in  existence.  And  by 
prostrating  the  grounds  of  such  a belief  artificially  sustained,  there  is 
established  in  its  stead  the  existence  of  an  invisible  yet  unchangeable 
Principle,  which  is  previously  admitted  to  be  even  more  than  a prob- 
able possibility.  And  while  you  have  no  possible  means  of  refuta- 
tion, just  quiet  the  mind,  until  I reveal  the  situation  in  which  my 
mind  is  placed  while  observing,  and  receiving  impressions  which  you 
at  this  time  have  no  possible  means  of  arriving  at.* 

When  the  mind  becomes  free  from  the  organization,  and  is  launched 
from  itsnidulated  state,  it  passes  into  anew  sphere  of  existence.  Im- 
pressions of  truth,  of  virtue,  of  principles  which  govern,  control,  and 
actuate,  tangible  and  physical  substances,  all  converge  to  one  Focus. 
This  I call  the  Fountain,  the  Sun,  the  Great  Illuminator,  the  un- 
changeable, eternal  Positive  Mind  ! This  fills  all  negative  sub- 
stances. Worlds,  their  forces,  their  physical  existences,  with  their 
life  and  forces,  are  all  negative  to  this  Positive  Mind.  This  is  the 
great1  Positive  Power  ; all  subordinate  existence  is  negative.  Both 
positive  and  negative  exist  as  a united,  unchangeable  Principle  of  all 
action.  F or  an  illustration,  let  the  mind  conceive  of  a wheel,  sphere, 
or  circle.  Let  it  be  concentrated  at  the  centre  of  this,  and  it  will  be 
perceived  that  there  is  an  expansion  of  circles  from  the  centre  to  the 
circumference,  or  that  one  wheel  can  not  exist  without  another.  And 
so  with  the  Great  Positive  and  Negative,  which  compose  one  whole 
Sphere  of  Existence.  If  these  two  forces  produce  all  existence,  do 
they  not  from  the  centre  expand  to  the  circumference,  passing  through 

• Whatever  obscurity  may  seem  to  be  connected  with  the  last  two  paragraphs,  will 
be  amply  cleared  up  in  the  Revelation. 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


41 


minute  and  modified  forms,  until  they  pervade  the  U niverse  and  con- 
stitute the  powers  of  all  things?  From  this  Focus  then  I receive 
impressions  of  the  many  and  various  principles  and  mediums  which 
exist  between  the  mind  and  the  objects  to  which  it  aspires.  When 
I pass  into  this  sphere,  I become  associated  with  the  spheres  of  the 
persons  or  forms  which  it  is  the  previous  desire  to  associate  with.  I 
do  not  pass  to  the  F ocus  of  all  existence,  but  to  the  focus  of  this 
existence  — which  is  analogous  to  the  expansion  and  centre  of  every 
wheel  of  existence.  When  I pass  from  the  body,  it  is  not  the  dis- 
tance— the  indefinite  space  through  which  the  mind  proceeds,  that  is 
necessary  to  enable  it  to  obtain  its  information ; but  it  is  the  transition 
or  metamorphosis  of  the  principle  of  mind  to  its  second  sphere  of 
existence. 


§ 14.  In  a wheel,  there  is  but  one  centre  : so  at  this  Focus,  there 
is  but  one  Principle,  one  united  attribute  of  Goodness  and  Truth.  If 
it  were  possible  for  a circle  to  have  several  centres,  then  it  would  be 
possible  for  various  principles  and  truths,  both  good  and  evil,  to  ema- 
nate from  this  Source.  But  as  the  first  is  impossible  in  a particular 
sense,  so  the  other  is  positively  impossible  in  a general  sense.  As 
the  sun  stands  as  an  emblem  of  this  great  truth,  you  can  not  resist 
the  impression  of  its  positive  analogy.  The  sun  produces  light:  it 
can  not  produce  darkness.  It  is  a focus  for  the  universal  diffusion 
of  light,  and  this  it  sends  forth  to  the  extreme  sphere  of  its  existence. 
So  this  Centre  is  a Focus  for  the  universal  diffusion  of  Knowledge, 
Truth,  and  one  unchangeable  principle,  as  disseminated  to  the  ex- 
treme sphere  of  its  positive  power  or  existence.  The  focus  of  tins 
existence  is  but  an  indefinite  expansion  of  the  Great  F ocus,  passing 
from  general  positive  to  general  negative  existence  — and  being  the 
controlling  power  of  this  existence,  even  as  the  Great  F ocus  governs 
all  existences.  To  this  centre — to  this  focus  — to  the  great  posi- 
tive power  of  this  sphere  (which  is  an  effect  or  ultimate)  — to  this 
great  actuator  and  propeller,  consisting  of  one  principle,  which  is 
Goodness  without  distinction — I go  to  receive  information  ! And  as 
the  mind  generates  thought  by  coming  in  contact  with  external  exci- 
ting causes  in  the  natural  body ; so  this  Mind*  creates  in  my  mind 
parallel  ideas  which  I term  impressions.  And  by  the  minute  yet  ex- 

* All  the  inhabitants  of  the  second  Sphere  or  World  of  human  existence,  are  con- 
sidered as  united  and  forming  one.  The  “Mind”  referred  to,  therefore,  is  the  Gen- 
eral Mind  of  the  Second  Sphere. 


42 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


isting  medium  between  the  mind  and  the  body,  I arriv  e back  to 
convey  the  impressions  through  the  natural  organization. 

How  little,  therefore,  is  the  evidence  of  reality  to  be  observed  in 
corporeal  manifestations  ! for  while  the  phenomenon  termed  clairvoy- 
ance is  visible  as  an  ultimate,  the  real  cause  is  invisible , and  but  faintly 
evident  to  the  senses. 

The  ultimate  perfection  of  all  substances,  the  ethereal  existences 
of  spiritual  spheres,  and  the  means  by  which  I receive  impressions, 
are  evident  to  me  ; but  so  greatly  different  from  anything  familiar  to 
the  natural  mind,  acting  through  the  organization,  that  it  is  impossi- 
ble at  this  moment  to  make  these  things  evident  to  your  senses.  But 
I must  reveal  these  things  as  the  impressions  are  received  : the  par- 
allel facts  and  inductive  conclusions  will  be  made  evident  to  your 
minds  hereafter.  And  I must  proceed  to  give  the  appearances  of  all 
second  spheres  as  they  are  to  me  manifested. 

The  human  organization  appears  as  a perfection  and  combination 
of  all  substances  below  its  exalted  composition.  It  is  controlled  by 
chemical  and  mechanical  forces,  and  is  a coating,  a casement  to  con- 
tain its  inward  properties.  There  is  another  distinct  principle,  which 
appears  and  is  evident  to  me  as  Spirit.  Also  there  is  a mediator , or 
medium  connecting  the  spirit  with  the  body.  This  mediator  I know 
as  sensation.  And  when  this  medium  becomes  disunited,  there  is  a 
physical  dissolution,  and  a spiritual  elevation  to  a different  sphere  of 
existence ; when  the  mind  becomes  connected  with  this  sphere  by  a 
medium  similar  to  that  which  connects  it  with  the  body.  It  is  then 
identified  with  a personal  sphere  peculiar  to  itself,  even  as  spheres 
are  peculiar  to  different  organizations. 

The  man  is  the  internal  of  the  body,  occupying  the  organs  as  instru- 
ments for  external  communication ; and  when  transferred,  he  retains 
all  the  senses,  in  a spiritual  condition.  And  his  mediums  of  com- 
munication are  then  spiritual.,  and  he  is  susceptible  to  all  properties 
and  elements  that  compose  the  existence  of  all  things.  He  receives 
impressions  by  these  as  exciting  causes, — which  are  imperceptible  to 
the  natural  senses,  but  extremely  evident  and  manifest  to  the  spiritual 
senses.  And  while  the  natural  organization  perceives  substances  and 
appearances  as  artificial  and  external,  the  spiritual  organization  per- 
ceives the  real  and  invisible — is  susceptible  to  the  action  of  all 
existing  properties  through  a sensation  peculiarly  belonging  to  its 
nature. 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


43 


When  I pass  off  into  the  independent  state  of  clairvoyance  to  re- 
ceive impressions,  I receive  them  as  the  knowledge  of  the  reality  (or 
essence)  of  the  substance  which  I had  a previous  desire  to  investi- 
gate. And  as  it  is  a law  of  Nature  which  can  not  be  reversed,  that 
positive  is  attractive  to  subordinate  or  negative  substances,  I must 
pass  to  the  positive  sphere  of  this  existence.  There  I do  not  have 
any  counsellor  or  informer,  but  I receive  the  reality  of  what  I request. 
I do  not  observe  entities  as  they  would  be  naturally  known  to  exist ; 
but  I know  the  peculiar  connexion  existing  between  all  ultimate 
spheres  of  man.  When  passing  from  the  organization,  all  natural 
forms  and  substances  appear  closed  from  my  view  by  a great  shade 
or  mantle,  when  all  above  appears  one  broad  and  extensive  light, 
passing  through  all  of  the  second  spheres  of  existence.  This  light  is 
the  medium  of  perception  and  association,  which  pervades  the  second 
spheres,  and  unites  them  together,  even  as  the  natural  spheres  are 
bound  together.  And  when  it  was  said  that  all  shall  know  the  truth, 
this  was  spoken  in  reference  to  the  ultimate  of  this  life,  or  to  the  sec- 
ond sphere  of  future  existence,  for  there  the  truth  is  known.  The 
reality,  the  invisible,  the  real  cause  of  all  effects,  are  then  known ; 
and  this  knowledge  makes  us  free. 

§ 15.  The  laws  that  govern  Nature  go  on  with  a steady  and  un- 
changeable progression.  They  are  not  at  any  time  retarded  or 
accelerated.  Nothing  can  prevent  the  natural  results  of  these  laws. 
They  are  established  by  one  great  Positive  Power  and  Mind,  — and 
equalled  by  a negative  or  ultimate  Equilibrium.  Hence  their  contin- 
ued and  united  forces,  by  the  influence  of  which  all  things  are  actuated, 
governed,  and  developed,  and  pass  on  in  a steady  process  of  progres- 
sion. Every  particle  of  matter  possesses  the  same  power  which  gov- 
erns the  whole  Universe  ; and  in  each  particle  you  see  a representa- 
tion and  evidence  of  these  divine  laws.  Thus  in  the  stone  you  may 
see  the  properties  of  the  soil ; in  the  soil,  the  properties  of  the  plant ; 
in  the  plant,  the  properties  of  an  animal : in  the  animal  you  see  Man, 
— and  in  Man  you  can  not  see,  but  you  can  feel,  the  immortal  prin- 
ciple. 

The  free,  unshackled  spirit,  then,  should  be  considered  as  the  es- 
sential principle  belonging  to  the  organization,  that  with  one  sympa- 
thetic chain,  encircling  all  spheres  of  this  existence,  can  receive 
impressions  instantaneously  of  all  things  desired,  — and  with  its  spir- 
itual senses,  communicate  with  spiritual  substances.  And  as  all 


44 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


these  must  be  in  a sphere  necessarily  attached  to  this  sphere,  it  is 
there  that  I receive  my  impressions.  I do  not  receive  these  from 
the  Great  Supreme  Mind,  but  from  this  second  sphere,  focus,  or  me- 
dium, which  legitimately  belongs  to  this  globe  alone.  When  you 
ask  me  a question,  I am  then  existing  in  the  medium  or  sphere  of 
the  body  ; but  in  investigating  and  finding  the  answer,  I pass  to  the 
sphere  where  I can  associate  with  the  truth  and  reality. 

It  is  impossible  by  words,  to  convey  a full  and  adequate  concep- 
tion of  the  manner  in  which  I arrive  at  truth.  I can  only  employ 
such  words  as  convey  all  the  idea  that  words  can  convey,  of  this 
process.  My  information  is  not  derived  from  any  persons  that  exist 
in  the  sphere  into  which  my  mind  enters,  but  it  is  the  result  of  a Law 
of  truth,  emanating  from  the  Great  Positive  Mind,  and  pervading  all 
spheres  of  existence.  By  this,  truth  is  attracted  to,  and  is  received 
by,  the  mind. 

It  is  impossible  for  any  one  to  enter  voluntarily  that  state  in  which 
he  can  view  with  clearness  things  belonging  to  a sphere  of  existence 
higher  than  the  natural  world.  Were  such  a thing  to  take  place, 
that  moment  death  would  necessarily  and  inevitably  ensue.  For  this 
state  can  not  be  entered  without  a loss  of  one  of  the  controlling  forces 
of  the  system  ; and  if  this  force  is  not  supplied  by  the  system  of  an- 
other, the  natural  functions  of  the  organization  would  cease,  and  the 
spirit  could  not  re-enter  it  after  it  had  once  departed.  Independent 
clairvoyance,  therefore,  must  be  induced  by  the  action  of  another  sys- 
tem, by  which  the  positive  power  is  extracted  from  the  subject.  To 
sustain  life,  this  is  supplied  sympathetically  by  the  system  of  the  ope- 
rator ; and  so  long  as  this  is  the  case,  there  is  a rare  and  subtle  me- 
dium of  sympathy  existing  between  the  mind  and  the  body,  by  which 
the  former  finds  its  way  back  to  the  latter  after  a temporary  absence. 
If  this  medium  were  destroyed,  the  mind  could  not  return  ; and  it  is 
impossible  to  go  voluntarily  into  the  independent  state  of  clairvoyance 
without  destroying  it. 

To  some,  however,  it  is  possible  to  go  voluntarily  into  a state  in 
which  the  mind  is  greatly  developed,  and  made  cognizant  of  princi- 
ples and  truths  pertaining  to  this  mundane  sphere.  This  sometimes 
happened  with  a well-known  Grecian  philosopher.*  During  his 
hours  of  slumber,  he  often  received  impressions  which  led  him  to  ex- 
tensive generalizations;  and  such  was  the  source  of  those  excellen- 
ces in  his  works  which  have  so  long  been  the  admiration  of  the  world. 

* Aristotle. 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


45 


He  was  k the  habit  of  wearing  particular  kinds  of  stones  about  his 
person,  imagining  that  these  had  the  virtue  of  inducing  this  condition 
of  mind. 

A celebrated  orator*  of  the  same  country  frequently  went  into  the 
same  state  of  mind.  Some  of  his  best  impressions  were  received 
during  his  hours  of  slumber.  These  he  would  subsequently  sys- 
tematize &,nd  carry  out  to  their  legitimate  results  : and  the  ability  for 
which  he  was  distinguished  may  in  a great  measure  be  referred  to 
this  source. 

A distinguished  ancient  physiciant  also  received  impressions  in  the 
same  way,  which  led  him  to  analyzations  of  the  properties  of  plants 
and  to  the  discovery  of  their  medicinal  applications,  which  before  had 
been  locked  in  secresy,  and  which  must  long  have  remained  unknown, 
independent  of  this  source  of  discovery. 

A similar  mental  phenomenon  often  happened  in  a still  more  perfect 
degree  with  a noted  Swedish  philosopher  and  psychologist,  $ who 
flourished  within  the  last  century.  His  impressions  vvere  more  ex- 
tensive and  distinct  than  those  of  either  of  the  others  to  whom  I have 
referred  ; and  by  these  means  he  was  led  to  extensive  generalizations 
on  the  animal  kingdom,  which  are  true.  He  also  had  visions  of  the 
future  state ; but  not  being  in  independent  clairvoyance,  these  were 
not  in  all  respects  perfect.  Yet  to  some  extent  they  were  true, — 
and  were  valuable  as  being  the  best  that  could  be  received  under  the 
circumstances. 

Besides  these,  several  Chinese  and  several  Germans,  and  other 
writers  who  have  had  the  most  influence  upon  the  wTorld,  received 
the  leading  ideas  which  characterize  their  works,  in  the  same  way. 

Such  impressions  wTere  of  the  same  species  with  those  which  I re- 
ceive, though  theirs  were  received  through  a different  medium,  and 
were  measurably  clouded  by  the  organization. 

To  go  into  the  future  state,  many  people  suppose  that  the  mind 
must  depart  to  an  indefinite  distance  from  the  body,  and  assume  a par- 
ticular location.  This  is  not  so.  Mathematically  speaking,  two  feet 
from  where  I now  sit  is  as  much  into  the  future  state  as  any  other 
distance.  This  consists  simply  in  the  condition  wffiich  the  mind  as- 
sumes, and  not  necessarily  in  any  change  of  its  location. 

Information  concerning  the  things  of  which  I speak  in  these  dis- 
courses, is  received  while  I am  in  this  state  of  mind.  For  instance, 
I know  not  now  what  I shall  say  the  next  moment,  but  must  first 
• Demosthenes.  f Galen.  J Swedenborg. 


4G 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


pass  off  in  search  of  thoughts  and  truths  to  be  presented  next  in 
order. 

F urthermore,  the  manner  in  which  I obtain  my  information,  may 
be  compared  to  a process  of  chemical  analysis.  In  analyzing  a body, 
the  chemist  separates  its  constituents  until  he  has  found  its  simple 
elements.  These  are  Truth.  It  is  by  a process  of  spiritual  analysis 
that  I obtain  truth.  I pass  from  the  body  with  a desire  for  a particu- 
lar kind  of  information.  This  desire  attracts  the  particular  kind  of 
truth  of  which  I would  be  informed,  separates  it  from  all  other  things, 
and  causes  it  to  flow  into  the  mind.  And  when  I thus  obtain  the 
truth  of  which  I am  in  quest,  I return  to  communicate  it  through  the 
organization. 

§ 16.  Thus,  though  the  transition  of  my  inner  life  to  its  second 
sphere,  presents  to  the  senses  but  little  evidence  of  its  reality,  to 
me  it  appears  a metamorphosis  analogous  to  death.  While  the 
senses  observe  the  cessation  of  life,  and  the  dissolution  of  the  natu- 
ral body,  they  have  no  tangible  evidence  of  the  real  change  which 
the  inner  passes  through.  But  the  latter  itself  is  conscious  of  the 
change.  The  worm,  while  in  its  pupa  state,  passes  through  succes- 
sive changes,  till  it  arrives  at  the  form  of  the  caterpillar.  We  can 
see  a further  metamorphosis  : the  caterpillar  knows  not  of  it.  The 
butterfly  is  conscious  of  its  former  encasement.  The  appearances 
to  the  senses  constitute  one  species  of  evidence,  while  the  conscious- 
ness of  changing  in  the  creature,  constitutes  another.  To  the  natu- 
ral senses,  the  effect  or  phenomenon  only  is  present : the  cause  is 
foreign  and  seemingly  disconnected.  To  me,  both  cause  and  effect 
are  present.  Forms  and  substances  external  are  the  subjects  of 
outer  association  ; but  their  reality,  internal,  rarefaction  or  refinement, 
is  what  I am  associated  with.  The  natural  senses  are  cognizant  of 
corporeal  and  formal  investiture  ; but  when  things  pass  into  their 
various  progressive  conditions,  they  are  lost  sight  of.  Like  the 
water — which,  while  remaining  as  such,  is  perceived  by  the  senses; 
but,  when  it  passes  into  steam,  air,  and  the  luminiferous  ether — be- 
comes rare  and  refined  — the  natural  mind  and  senses  lose  the  per- 
ception of  its  existence,  and  apply  to  it,  as  to  all  unparticled  mat- 
ter, the  appellation  of  spirit,  for  the  want  of  a better  term  to  define 
its  condition.  To  me  this  all  is  known  as  matter  become  rare 
and  unparticled  — as  the  ultimate  of  matter,  to  which  is  applied  the 
word  spirit. 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


47 


A natural  tendency  of  the  mind  is  to  feel  a conviction  of  its  own 
continuance  and  progression.  This  amounts  to  a belief,  but  not  to  an 
absolute  hiowledge.  F or  no  collection  of  particles  or  substances  of 
any  kind,  possesses  the  power  of  self-analyzation.  Hence  all  above 
the  power  of  the  mind  may  be  received  as  a desirable  conviction, 
yet  not  a palpable  reality.  To  me  this  reality  is  made  perfect.  My 
perceptions  and  general  impressions  are  from  the  ultimate  or  perfec- 
tion of  all  material  substances.  The  scope  of  these  perceptions  and 
impressions,  comprehends  the  substance  of  the  second  Sphere  in  a 
particular  sense,  even  as  it  comprehends  all  in  a general  sense. 
And  as  the  result  of  present  things  is  the  substance  of  the  second 
Sphere,  I in  this  Sphere  have  the  perception  of  the  things  pre-im- 
pressed  upon  the  mind  to  investigate.  Things  appear  real  to  me 
which  are  beyond  the  reach  of  the  natural  organization,  which  knows- 
of  nothing  except  what  exists  in  matter  and  form. 

To  me  the  grosser  matter  is  impelling  the  rare  and  refined ; while 
the  rare  and  refined  is  pervading  the  grosser.  Or,  in  other  words, 
forms  and  appearances  are  effects  of  matter  in  approximating  to  its 
future  state  of  perfection  ; while  its  perfected  state,  or  ultimate,  is 
in  return  controlling  and  refining  these  substances  and  forms.  This 
is  illustrated  by  the  fact  that  the  atmosphere  becomes  purified  by  the 
intervention  of  an  ether  or  vapor.  Thus  water,  passing  into  vapor, 
purifies  the  air  contained  in  a room,  in  a particular  way,  as  the  same 
refinement  of  water  purifies  the  air  in  a general  way. 

All  ultimates,  to  me,  are  still  matter ; but  to  you  they  are  spirit. 
These  appertain  to  the  second  Sphere,  or  ultimate  condition,  which  I 
become  associated  with.  As  the  natural  senses  are  cognizant  of 
forms , the  spiritual  senses  are  cognizant  of  their  ultimates.  Thus 
a particle  of  matter,  in  its  ultimate  perfection,  can  not  associate  with 
a grosser  particle  ; but  when  the  grosser  progresses  to  its  ultimate, 
it  becomes  an  associate  with  other  ultimates.  The  rare  acts  on  the 
lower ; but  the  lower  can  not  act  upon  the  rare.  So  with  the  mind 
— with  the  senses : they  can  progress  in  their  inward  nature  to  their 
unparticled  or  ultimate  state  ; but  the  ultimate  can  not  associate  with 
the  senses.  So  psychological  theories  are  only  based  upon  desires 
of  the  mind,  and  convictions  which  it  receives  through  the  external 
senses. 

In  the  state  in  which  I am  placed,  all  things  are  in  an  exalted 
condition  ; and  this  I am  conscious  of  by  arriving  at  the  same  ulti- 
mate sphsre.  And  by  association  with  these,  and  by  inquiry  and 


48 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


analyzation  of  any  given  subject,  I perceive  the  reality  or  ultimate 
of  the  things  visible  to  the  natural  senses ; and  with  this  impression 
I arrive  to  associate  in  the  organic  sphere,  and  thus  am  enabled  to 
convey  my  impressions  by  words  instinctively  accompanying  them. 

And  this  explains  the  distinction  and  apparent  contradiction  be- 
tween dependent  and  independent,  as  manifested  in  my  own  case. 
For  while  I am  off,  I am  independent  of  objects  and  forms  external, 
but  dependent  upon  things  interior,  for  the  information  which  I re- 
ceive. The  impression  is  made  upon  my  ultimate  or  inner  principle; 
this  impression  creates  thought ; this  thought,  when  I return  to  the 
body,  brings  up  an  association  of  words  to  express  it,  on  which  words 
I am  thus  dependent.  Words  are  to  me  signs  or  sounds  by  which 
impressions  are  conveyed  to  others.  All  words,  corporeal  manifes- 
tations, muscular  actions,  the  organs  of  the  body,  and  such  like,  are 
instruments  or  means  of  external  communication  ; but  the  things 
communicated,  I am  conscious  of  through  a different  agent  or  me- 
dium. While  receiving  impressions,  I am  a representation  and 
signification  of  the  second  or  future  association  belonging  to  man 
and  matter,  or  of  their  ultimate  or  perfected  state.  I have  no 
means  of  directly  convincing  the  understanding  of  this  condition ; 
for,  as  was  before  mentioned,  grosser  matter  can  not  associate  with 
more  refined ; but  refined  and  perfected  matter  can  and  does  associ- 
ate with  grosser.  So  while  you  can  not  associate  your  impressions 
with  mine,  I can  associate  my  impressions  with  yours,  yet  not  dis- 
tinctly, evidently,  or  consciously  to  yourself — any  more  than  grosser 
matter  is  conscious  of  its  pervading  unparticled  matter  or  moving 
principle.  To  make  the  understanding  analogically  convinced  of 
the  ultimation  of  matter  termed  spirit,  it  is  necessary  to  commence  at 
the  beginning  of  all  things  formal  and  rudimental,  and  trace  them 
evidently  and  naturally  to  their  ultimate  perfection. 

My  impressions  of  spheres,  or  of  matter  in  its  second  or  ultimate 
stage  of  progression,  are  received  in  a way  analogous  to  the  natural, 
but  by  virtue  of  a perception  much  more  exalted ! But  ultimates 
are  no  more  than  finite  to  me,  as  they  appear  in  a particular  sense 
finite  to  you,  but  in  a general  sense  infinite.  As  the  natural  ideas 
are  associated  with  matter  in  its  gross  and  perfected  state,  it  appears 
limited;  while  to  me  the  whole  appears  unlimited , evident,  and  is 
present  with  all  its  features  and  representations  of  cause  and  effect. 
Thus  the  human  body  shows  both  the  grossness  and  perfection  of 
matter.  The  grosser  composes  the  bones  ; its  progression  produces 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


49 


nerves  and  all  secondary  formations  of  flesh  and  filaments ; while  the 
ultimate  produces  the  skin  and  hair.  So  with  the  blood  : it  passes 
from  its  grosser  state  of  coagulation  to  the  refined  state,  when  it  be- 
comes fitted  for  deposition  and  reproduction  ; and  it  becomes  more 
and  more  rare  and  refined  until  it  escapes  the  body  in  insensible  per- 
spiration. So  with  the  moving  power,  or  volition  : while  the  grosser 
is  active  in  moving  the  muscular  fibre,  its  refinement  and  perfection 
constitutes  the  thinking  principle  — which  becomes  so  refined-  that  it 
constantly  escapes  in  thoughts  or  ultimates  of  which  the  mind  is  the 
originator.  Thus  the  finer  pervades  the  coarser  ; but  the  coarser  can 
not  pervade,  but  is  approximating  to,  the  finer  ; and  when  it  arrives 
at  its  ultimate  state,  it  becomes  an  associate  with  that  which  has  pre- 
viously arrived  at  the  same  general  condition. 

So  with  my  inner  life  or  ultimate  sphere  r it  associates  with  the 
ultimates  or  realities  of  all  grosser  substances ; and  by  such  a con- 
nexion, traces  subjects  analytically  yet  instantaneously  from  cause  to 
effect ; and  this  supplies  me  with  the  knowledge  which  to  your  minds 
and  understanding  bears  the  impress  of  being  derived  from  direct  su- 
pernatural and  spiritual  intercourse  — while  to  me  the  word  “supernatu- 
ral” has  no  meaning.  All  natural  things  can  not  produce  supernatu- 
ral; but  this  term  is  only  applied  to  effects  wThen  their  causes  are  not 
evident. 

, Through  such  impressions,  all  things  sought  for  appear  present. 
The  knowledge  of  the  modus  operandi  of  the  Universe,  from  generals 
to  particulars,  is  present  with  me.  All  this  comes  instinctively 
through  an  impressive  connexion  with  matter  and  ultimates.  These 
principles  instinctively  perceived,  to  me  appear  realities,  and  all 
things  else  as  superficial.*  So  this  instinctive  perception  of  truth 
enables  me  to  communicate  the  knowledge  of  the  second  Sphere 
through  the  organization,  to  the  external  world.  You  may  term  this 
an  expansion  of  the  mind  ; a quickness  of  perception  ; an  exalted 
condition  of  the  imagination.  You  may  doubt  its  real  truth ; you 
may  question  the  existence  of  the  principle  of  which  I speak ; but 
you  will  not,  if  you  consider  the  position  which  the  true  reasoner  and 
philosopher  sustains.  — 

But  those  who  will  doubt,  are  doubters  and  skeptics  by  nature 

• The  -word  “ superficial which  frequently  occurs  hereafter,  is  applied  by  the  au- 
thor to  that  which  is  incidental,  external,  opposed  to  the  inward  or  “ real  reality,” 
and  which  floats,  as  it  were,  upon  the  surface  of  general  causation.  The  terns 
isunreal:’  is  also  frequently  employed  in  the  same  sense. 

4 


50 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


and  profession.  A disposition  like  unto  this  is  not  in  a state  to  receive 
truth,  or  to  progress  in  knowledge ; and  when  the  transition  or  meta- 
morphosis occurs  from  this  sphere  to  a future  one,  such  a mind  will 
not  be  refined  and  progressed  to  its  ultimate  condition.  It  will  be 
like  the  second  refinement  of  matter  ; and  hence  will  take  a long  time 
to  progress  to  its  legitimate  ultimate — 'and  then  it  will  associate  in 
the  spheres  of  those  who  have  arrived  at  the  state  of  perfection  pre- 
viously. The  mind  exalted  before  it  assumes  its  second  body  or 
sphere,  is  so  much  progressed  toward  its  ultimate  state  ; and  it  will 
be  associated  with  knowledge  which  subordinate  or  less-refined  minds 
can  not  appreciate  or  enjoy. 

§ 17.  Thus  grosser  matter,  or  rudimental  beings,  and  their  pro- 
gression until  they  arrive  at  their  ultimate  perfection,  are  in  corre- 
spondence with  mind  and  its  progress  to  its  ultimate  sphere.  Their 
many  spheres  and  associations  are  only  such  as  mark  the  natural  re- 
finement or  progression  of  all  things.  Intellectual  progress  com- 
mences in  the  body  or  first  individualization : thence  the  mind  goes 
onward  through  its  many  stages  of  knowledge,  corresponding  to  the 
various  stages  of  its  ultimate  progression. 

It  is  a law  of  Matter  to  produce  its  ultimate,  Mind.  It  is  the  law 
of  mind  to  produce  its  corresponding  principle,  Spirit.  It  is  the  na- 
ture of  Spirit  to  progress  in  knowledge  and  understanding  relative  to 
the  cause , of  which  all  things  else  are  the  effects.  Knowledge  in  its 
nature  corresponds  to  Truth  : Truth  represents  light  and  peace  ; and 
the  acquisition  of  these  two  produces  the  enjoyment  which  a lover 
of  truth  appreciates  in  this  sphere,  while  he  anticipates  and  will  re- 
ceive the  same  enjoyment  in  future. 

All  things  in  forms  and  corporeal  investiture,  which  exist  upon  the 
face  of  the  earth  as  displaying  life,  are  correspondents  of  their  inner 
life  or  principle  — which  not  only  actuates  them  to  thriftiness,  but  is 
working,  by  an  undeviating  law,  the  refinement  of  all  subordinate 
substances : and  these  visible,  corporeal  manifestations  also  stand  in 
analogy  with  the  ultimation  of  their  inner  and  living  principle,  which 
by  influx  produces  rudimental  sensation  in  the  organic  system,  and 
becomes  a part  of  animal  existence.  So,  tracing  the  refinement  of 
matter  from  vegetable  to  animal  existence  (the  life  or  soul  of  plants 
being  perfected  to  become  animal  sensation),  the  refinement  and  per- 
fection of  these  two,  to  become  the  substance  of  mind — and  the  pro- 
gression of  its  nature  to  its  second  sphere  and  investiture — you  arrive 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


51 


naturally  and  reasonably  at  an  idea  of  the  future  properties,  the  posi- 
tively individualized  condition  and  existence  of  the  mind  in  its  first 
ultimate  state  of  progression.*  Admitting  this  much,  you  arrive  at 
the  condition  of  existence  in  which  my  mind  is  placed. 

Admit  mind  and  its  future  identity — and  you  then  can  conceive 
of  thought  being  irrevocable,  and  existing  in  repetition  and  associa- 
tion with  the  form,  or  cause  of  its  production.  Individual  perception 
establishes  this  truth  : That  a thought  once  produced,  never  requires 
reproduction  : but  it  is  only  necessary  to  associate  the  mind  with  the 
cause  of  its  first  development,  to  renew  or  refresh  its  action.  Mind, 
therefore,  corresponds  to  a fulcrum,  upon  which  operates  the  lever  of 
producing  thought,  which  revolves,  in  its  action,  the  principles  and 
associations  of  ideas  which  thoughts  seek  to  conceive.  Then  a repe- 
tition of  thoughts  once  produced,  creates  as  an  ultimate,  or  effect, 
accompanying  new  ones. 

Each  of  these  laws  of  matter  and  mind  stands  as  a representation 
of  what  is  future  ; and  an  admission  of  the  foregoing  presses  upon  the 
mind,  as  an  irresistible  conclusion,  the  probability  of  its  natural  and 
eternal!  progression  ! 

Facts  have  thus  been  presented  in  illustration  of  the  condition  and 
sphere  of  my  inner  life,  to  make  it  evident  to  the  senses  as  corre- 
sponding to  the  sphere  which  you  are  now  in,  and  to  enable  you  to 
receive  the  truth  by  analogy.  Being  compelled  to  admit  the  visible 
facts,  you  are  equally  constrained  to  admit  as  probable,  a correspon- 
dent or  ultimate  Sphere.  Conclusions  arrived  at  by  independent 
processes  are  an  evidence  of  its  reality  ; though  by  no  process  of  in- 
vestigation now  known,  have  you  the  means  to  prove  demonstratively 
the  sphere  which  I am  at  this  time  associated  in.  Therefore  re- 
ceive impressions  favorable  to  its  truth;  for  such  impressions  answer 
as  a guide  to  your  future  progress  in  knowledge  and  truth. 

I am  now  compelled  by  a reasonable  demand  of  the  subject  to  ex- 
plain the  cause  of  several  particular  phenomena  which  sometimes 
present  themselves  in  the  state  of  the  physical  system  induced  by 
magnetism,  and  its  ultimate,  known  as  clairvoyance. 

There  are  times  when  I,  apparently  to  the  senses,  do  not  receive 
vision  or  impressions.  This,  being  a particular  phenomenon  or  effect, 
requires  an  adequate  explanation.  When  progressed  to  the  condi- 

• In  a subsequent  part  of  this  work  this  subject  is  unfolded  and  illustrated  in  such 
a way  as  to  insure  a thorough  and  correct  understanding, 
t The  speaker  here  remarked  that  he  used  the  word  eternal  in  its  full  force. 


52 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


tion  or  state  known  as  completely  demagnetized  (which  is  invariably 
induced),  physical  causes  incidental  to  the  exTernal  system,  some- 
times indirectly  interfere  with  the  medium  of  sensibility.  This  me- 
dium being  disqualified  from  particularly  and  internally  attaching  the 
mind  to  the  body,  prevents  occasionally  the  free  expansion  or  transi- 
tion of  the  mind,  and  its  intimate  connexion  and  necessary  attachment 
to  the  organization.  When  this  occurs  (and  it  can  not  be  perceived 
by  the  senses),  impressions  can  not  be  received,  because  the  mind 
has  not  become  thoroughly  independent. 

Again  : The  expression  “ I see,”  which  I frequently  use  in  famib 
iar  conversation  during  examinations  of  various  descriptions,  would, 
literally  understood,  convey  a wrong  impression.  If  I should  use 
any  other  term,  you  would  not  understand  its  signification.  This 
expression  naturally  conveys  the  idea  of  vision  — of  an  optical  knowl- 
edge of  a foreign  substance.  In  reality  the  expression  simply  con- 
veys the  idea  of  knowing  by  a peculiar  process  ; for  the  knowledge 
of  a foreign  substance  is  obtained  through  the  imperceptible  reflection 
which  the  substance  casts  upon  the  retina.  So  it  is  knowledge,  sight 
being  simply  a process  to  convey  inward  the  existence  of  the  outer. 
Hence  if  the  expression  “I  know ,”  were  ordinarily  used  (which 
would  be  correct),  I would  use  the  same  to  give  the  impression  of 
what  I know,  independently  of  optical  or  other  processes  of  rudimen- 
tal  perception.  Therefore,  “ I see,”  means,  simply,  “ I know.”  I 
know  of  things  by  the  process  explained  in  the  foregoing  remarks  ; 
and  all  phraseology  which  characterizes  my  conversation,  is  adapted 
to,  and  corresponds  with,  your  present  sphere  of  perception  and  un- 
derstanding. 

These  last  phenomena,  which  are  sometimes  manifested,  and  are 
occasions  of  impressing  wrong  conclusions,  are  explained  as  being 
'particulars  which  can  not  be  depended  upon.  Particulars  and  mi- 
nutiae correspond  to  incidentals ; and  you  naturally  repose  no  confi- 
dence in  the  invariable  repetition  of  these  things.  Generals  are 
always  manifest,  corresponding  with  truth  and  inward  reality.  Hence 
it  is  again  necessary  to  impress  the  conclusion,  that  generals  can  be 
depended  upon  as  inevitably  manifesting  inward  truth  and  invisible 
corresponding  causes.  But  particulars  and  minutiae  can  not  be  relied 
on  as  producing  the  same  unchangeable  effects : for  they  stand  in  cor- 
respondence with  incidental  intervening  circumstances  which  are 
always  necessarily  of  a subordinate  character. 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


63 


§ IS.  In  bringing  my  remarks  on  Animal  Magnetism  and  Clair- 
voyance to  a close,  it  would  not  be  inappropriate  to  recapitulate  the 
arguments  adduced  to  prove  the  phenomena.  All  that  I have  said 
upon  this  subject,  has  been  said  without  reference  to  any  particular 
axioms,  or  facts  presumed  to  be  admitted,  or  dependence  upon  any 
manner  or  form  of  belief  that  may  exist. 

First : The  magnetic  state  was  proved  to  be  a further  develop- 
ment and  extension  of  the  motive  powers  of  organic  life ; and  it  was 
shown  that  the  propelling  forces  that  control  one  system  in  sensation, 
life,  health,  and  enjoyment,  could  be  united  to  another  system,  and 
both  become  as  one — that,  according  to  the  laws  which  govern  ani- 
mal existences  of  a positive  nature  with  reference  to  their  negatives, 
the  magnetic  state  could  be  produced  by  a transferation  of  the  forces 
of  the  two. 

Secondly  : It  was  shown  that  all  states  between  the  first  magnetic 
state  and  perfect  vision,  are  analogous  to  phenomena  witnessed  in  the 
various  conditions  of  natural  sleep  and  somnambulism  ; that  the  transi- 
tion of  the  inner  principle  to  the  second  Sphere,  corresponds  to  that 
painful  metamorphosis  termed  dealh  ; and  that  the  connexion  exist- 
ing between  the  inner  life,  or  mind,  and  the  organization,  is  a medium 
analogous  to  that  existing  between  one  thought  and  another,  famil- 
iarly understood  as  the  power  of  concentration. 

Thirdly  : That  the  source  of  the  impressions  which  I receive,  ex- 
ists in,  and  corresponds  with,  the  second  Sphere,  or  the  ultimate  of 
this  sphere,  and  which  corresponds  to  this ; and  that  the  knowledge 
which  I receive,  is  obtained  by  associating  with  the  causes  which  lead 
the  mind  instantaneously  to  their  effects.  Cause  and  effect,  thus  pre- 
senting themselves  almost  at  the  same  moment,  give  me  the  power 
of  analyzation  from  generals  to  particulars. 

Therefore  what  has  been  said  regarding  these  things,  and  the  rea- 
sons for  reposing  credence  in  them,  is  not  founded  upon  hypotheses, 
or  facts  admitted,  but  it  is  a tracing  of  general  truths  to  their  corre- 
sponding ultimates  ; proving  evidently  and  carefully  these  phenom- 
ena as  not  being  a perversion  of  the  laws  of  Nature.  The  whole  is 
thus  made  too  evident  to  require  the  word  supernatural ; too  reason- 
able and  manifestly  true  to  be,  by  a truth-loving  mind,  doubted ! 
Still  the  'whole  is  submitted  to  the  analyzation  of  minds  which  it  has 
been  analyzing.  And  as  it  was  admitted  that  no  principle  possesses 
the  power  of  self-analyzation,  you  will  doubtless  arrive  at  the  point 
familiarly  established,  that  Truth  is  Truth  in  every  law,  from  that 


54 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


which  governs  the  most  minute  atom  in  existence,  to  that  which  pro- 
pels and  actuates  the  planetary  system.  — And  you  are  not  to  admit 
some  of  the  premises  to  be  evident  and  truthful,  and  consider  the  re- 
mainder as  requiring  a greater  extension  of  credulity  than  you  feel 
responsible  to  exercise. 

But  you  admit  one  truth  which  stands  at  the  basis  of  all  these  — 
the  motive  power  of  life  and  volition.  In  this  your  faith  is  estab- 
lished : the  rest,  then,  you  can  not  disbelieve  for  the  want  of  the 
amount  of  evidence,  necessary  to  prove  them  untrue.  But  if  you 
either  doubt  or  sanction  the  truthfulness  of  this  explanation,  without 
previously  and  seriously  weighing  the  arguments  for  and  against,  nei- 
ther your  approbation  nor  disapprobation  can  be  considered  as  legiti- 
mate. 

Magnetism  and  Clairvoyance  and  their  various  phenomena  being 
traced,  ,by  evident  facts,  to  their  ultimate  effect,  which  is  an  opening 
of  the  second  Sphere,  they  were  left  there  ; and  the  science  of  corre- 
spondences was  adduced  in  their  favor.  The  first  train  of  reasoning 
consisted  in  investigating  facts,  and  analyzing  realities  to  obtain  their 
conclusions.  The  second  train  consisted  in  presenting  analogous 
truths,  agreeing  with  the  visible  and  terrestrial,  and  ascending  to  the 
invisible  and  celestial.  A third  train  of  proofs  is  that  which  for  dis- 
tinction maybe  called  representation ; showing  that  facts  represent 
Truth,  and  that  truth  is  a representative  of  knowledge  and  intellec- 
tual progress  : and  that  these  all  are  representations  of  each  other, 
including  the  subject  to  be  established.* 

First:  Matter  corresponds  to  Life,  or  the  law  of  activity.  Matter 
and  life  correspond  to  production  and  reproduction.  These  corre- 
spond to,  and  represent  the  existence  of  plants.  The  small  plant  or 
herb  stands  as  a representative  of  the  largest  tree  ; and  all  these  cor- 
respond to  animals.  The  smallest  species  in  animal  existence,  stands 
as  a representative  of  the  most  perfect  animal  organization.  The  least 
atom  that  goes  to  compose  this  existence,  is  a representative  and  sig- 
nification of  the  largest  globe  or  sphere  existing  in  the  Universe. 
Once  more  : The  inhaling  of  the  Vegetable  Kingdom,  and  the  life 
which  it  possesses  — its  Soul — corresponds  to,  and  is  a representative 

•When  the  author  speaks  of  one  thing  as  “representing”  or  “ corresponding”  to 
another,  he,  in  general,  means  that  the  one  thing  indicates,  points  to,  or  shadows 
forth,  the  existence  of  the  other.  The  distinction  which  the  author  makes  between 
truth  and  fact,  in  the  above  sentence,  and  in  other  places,  is  the  same  as  that  which 
exists  between  cause  and  effect,  or  law  and  its  manifestation. 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


55 


of,  the  influx  and  reflux  of  the  same  principle  in  animal  existence. 
Life  in  the  Vegetable  Kingdom,  represents  life  and  sensation  in  the 
Animal  Kingdom.  In  the  least  of  animal  existences  there  is  seen  a 
law  to  govern  them  in  reproduction,  activity,  and  in  sustaining  their 
own  existence.  And  there  is  another  peculiar  manifestation  of  this 
law,  which  is  termed  instinct.  This  instinct  represents,  and  corre- 
sponds with,  the  mind  of  man.  The  forces  that  act  upon  the  least 
particle  of  matter,  presenting  positive  and  negative  manifestations,  are 
representative  of  that  great  eternal  Positive  and  Negative  Principle 
which  governs  all  matter.  The  mind  of  man  represents  the  Great 
Mind.  Thus  facts  which  have  been  presented  in  the  foregoing,  are 
one  step  beyond  the  argument  of  correspondences. 

Is  not  the  first  train  of  reasoning  admitted?  Is  not  the  second 
al^  true  as  harmonizing  with  facts  first  established  ? Is  not  the  third 
also  admissible  ? When  considering  their  relative  bearings  from  first 
facts  to  ultimate  realities,  does  not  the  first  adequately  explain  the 
second?  Does  not  the  second  confirm  the  first?  Does  not  the  third 
correspond  with  both,  and  stand  as  a representative  of  Truth?  If 
so,  will  you  let  Truth  stand  as  a representative  of  your  intellectual 
progress  ? 

<§>19.  The  science  of  representatives  being  thus  developed  and 
established  by  a consideration  of  general  truths  and  visible  realities, 
the  application  of  this  science  will  be  necessary  to  further  confirm 
the  proofs  deduced  in  previous  argument,  of  a transferation  of  spheres, 
or  transition  of  inner  life.  First:  The  healthy  and  powerful  man, 
equal  in  all  the  forces  of  his  body,  represents  the  connexion  of  two 
bodies,  or  the  unity  of  their  positive  and  negative  forces  which  makes 
the  two  correspond  to  one.  Secondly  : The  extreme  sensibility  and 
acuteness  of  the  perceptive  powers,  or  the  medium  unconsciously 
existing  upon  the  nerves,  and  which,  independently  of  external  dis 
turbing  causes,  excites  upon  the  mind  thought,  corresponds  to  the 
phenomenon  of  dreaming,  or  the  peregrinations  made  by  the  mind 
during  the  hours  of  repose.  Thirdly : the  extension,  transferation, 
or  transition,  of  the  mind  from  this  to  another  sphere,  represents  the 
disconnexion  of  the  mind  from  the  body  at  the  period  of  physical 
dissolution.  The  moment  of  independence,  which  is  during  the  ap- 
parently stiffened  condition  of  the  body,  its  inclined  position  and 
appearance  of  sleep,  represents  death.  The  medium  which  connects 
the  mind,  or  second  sphere,  with  the  body,  or  this  sphere,  represents 


56 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


the  medium  which  exists  between  thought  and  thought,  between 
cause  and  effect,  between  general  and  particular  truths,  causes  invis- 
ible and  effects  visible.  It  is  the  same  that  exists  between  all  par- 
ticular things  relative  to  matter  and  mind,  being  imperceptible  to  the 
sight,  hearing,  taste,  and  smell,  but  perceptible  to  the  feeling. 

Again  : First,  facts  have  been  presented ; secondly,  established 
truths  corresponding  with  facts  ; and  thirdly,  representation  — sustain- 
ing the  two  former  by  appeals  made  to  visible  and  external  truths,  in- 
dependent of  belief  or  disbelief.  These  becoming  manifest,  not  only 
establish  facts  as  corresponding  with  facts,  but  the  first  two  confirm 
the  last,  and  the  last  represents  and  confirms  all.  All  this  is  posi 
tively  sustaining  the  truth  which  was  first  apparently  presumed  to 
exist  in  the  phenomenon  termed  Clairvoyance. 

The  amount  of  evidence  is  now  before  you  on  which  may^ie 
grounded  your  faith,  or  rather  confidence,  in  that  which  is  to  come. 
But  if  it  is  not  sufficiently  overwhelming  to  your  minds  as  evidence 
to  establish  faith,  you  must  admit  the  following  by  affirming  the  ques- 
tions propounded  : If  what  has  been  said  does  not  correspond  with 
your  preconceived  opinions  and  admitted  theories,  or  is  not  agree- 
able to  your  present  desires  and  feelings,  does  it  it  not  nevertheless 
correspond  with  Truth  ? If  what  has  been  said  relative  to  the 
grounds  of  true  reasoning  does  not  associate  itself  with  your  present 
mode  of  reasoning,  does  it  not  correspond  with  truth  and  invisible 
realities  as  manifested  in  external  effects,  and  thus  explain  theories 
which  you  have  long  fostered  as  true  ? If  what  has  been  developed 
relative  to  the  science  of  Magnetism  and  its  ultimate,  Clairvoyance, 
does  not  appear  reasonable  for  you  to  believe,  does  it  not  appear 
more  unreasonable  to  disbelieve  it  ? If  what  I have  stated  in  refer- 
ence to  the  second  Sphere,  or  the  source  of  my  impressions,  does  not 
correspond  with  what  you  regard  as  truths  evident  to  your  senses, 
does  not  all  that  I have  revealed  in  candor,  consecutiveness  of  inves- 
tigation, and  freeness  of  expression,  commend  itself  favorably  to  your 
minds?  Even  if  the  propositions  presented  appear  at  first  the  oppo- 
site of  truth,  does  not  the  investigation — the  close  development  of 
forms,  series,  associations,  correspondences,  representations — yea, 
the  strict  analysis  of  all  these — manifest  truth  and  sincerity  corre- 
sponding to  that  Great  Focus  of  Positive  Truth,  to  which  all  things 
else  are  subordinate  ? 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


57 


§ 20.  In  the  progress  of  this  Key  to  the  Revelation,  and  in  fa- 
miliarizing the  truths  and  principles  to  be  unfolded,  with  the  present 
sphere  of  reasoning,  as  to  make  plain  and  demonstratively  evident 
all  things  invisible  as  associating  with,  and  corresponding  to,  things 
which  are  known  to  exist  — it  becomes  highly  important  to  investi- 
gate the  main  attributes  and  various  developments  of  matter.  As  it 
is  known  in  forms,  from  the  animal  and  vegetable  down  to  the  min- 
eral and  earthy,  and  in  the  many  modifications  which  it  assumes,  it 
is  generally  believed  to  be  totally  disconnected  from  all  principles  of 
intellect,  or  spiritual  and  inner  life. 

Many  opinions  have  existed  relative  to  the  motion  of  matter,  and 
its  “vis  inertia .”  It  is  evident  that  the  foundation  upon  which  the 
prevailing  theories  and  hypotheses  have  been  based,  is  laid  in  a mis- 
conception of  the  true  mode  of  reasoning — taking  some  visible  forms 
and  manifestations  of  Nature  as  moving , and  some  as  not  moving ; 
and  taking  one  as  an  established  principle  of  truth,  and  the  other  as 
a probable  reality  : or  assuming  that  inertia  was  a law  of  matter,  when 
the  contrary  might  have  been  evidently  demonstrated  in  various  ways. 

Nature  and  her  forms  present  more  evidence  in  favor  of  a cease- 
less and  unchangeable  motion  in  matter  than  otherwise.  There  is  no 
such  thing  existing  as  positive  inertia  in  matter.  It  is  not  particular 
in  what  way  matter  is  developed  ; it  is  not  particular  whether  activity 
in  any  form  of  matter  is  directly  manifest  to  the  senses  or  not- — ac- 
tivity in  such  nevertheless  does  exist ; for  universal  motion  may  be 
demonstrated  as  a general  and  positive  law  of  Nature.  Then  why 
take  'particulars  and  minutiae  in  evidence  of  the  opposite  ? 

Matter  possesses  within  itself  the  positive  and  negative  motion,  and 
the  specific  essence  of  Life  and  Sensation.  Some  philosophers  have 
supposed  that  matter  contains  within  itself  the  principles  of  Motion, 
Life,  Sensation,  and  Intellect — regardless  of  any  distinction  in  the 
organisms  or  modes  of  these  various  principles.  Their  reasonings 
are  based  upon  the  known  existing  principle  in  matter,  Sensation; 
and  they  have  endeavored  to  prove  by  this  development  that  a fur- 
ther perfection  and  refinement  in  matter  wTould  produce  Mind  or 
Spirit,  independent  of  any  absolute  change  or  distinction  in  the  or- 
ganization of  inherent  Motion.  It  will  be  proved,  however,  that  this 
is  not  the  case.  The  great  distinction  between  Life  and  Sensation 
has  never  been  named  or  properly  understood  in  philosophical  and 


5S 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


pschylogical  disquisitions.  But  as  this  refinement  of  matter,  termed 
spirit,  is  not  the  proper  subject  to  speak  about  at  this  time,  I will 
proceed  to  speak  of  the  Motion  and  Laws  which  govern  the  material 
Universe. 

If  there  is  a principle  of  inertia  existing  in  Matter,  then  man  pos- 
sesses the  power  to  create  ; but  if  there  is  not  such  a thing  existing, 
then  man  has  merely  the  power  of  developing.  One  or  the  other  of 
the  above  must  necessarily  be  true.  Preponderance  of  evidence,  as 
connected  with  individual  and  external  experience,  must  decide 
which  is. 

The  most  apparently  immoveable  substance  known  in  creation  is 
that  of  stone ; and  the  question  has  often  been  asked,  “ Does  stone 
form  and  develop  itself  like  unto  other  forms  in  Nature?”  In  an- 
swering this  question,  it  is  necessary  to  understand  the  relation  and 
distinction  existing  between  the  form  and  composition  of  matter  in 
the  stone,  and  the  nature  and  composition  of  the  form  that  interro- 
gates. For  if  the  stone  were  composed  of  the  same  principles  and 
possessed  the  same  movements  with  the  subject  which  is  investiga- 
ting its  properties,  the  answer  would  be  immediately  evident.  But 
instead  of  this,  though  the  composition  of  the  stone  is  of  itself  active, 
the  action  is  so  slow  and  imperceptible,  in  comparison  to  the  quick 
activity  and  changeableness  of  man,  that  he  arrives  at  the  conclusion 
that  the  stone  is  inactive , while  his  body  is  active. 

That  a living  and  moving  principle  exists  even  in  stones,  is  ren- 
dered evident  to  the  senses  by  the  appearance  on  their  surface  of 
decomposition  and  decay.  Where  decomposition  takes  place,  re- 
composition must  also  occur  ; for  matter  is  indestructible.  Therefore 
rocks  and  stones  give  particles  to,  and  take  them  from,  other  bodies. 
Also  when  mines  are  found  not  so  thoroughly  developed  as  the  ge- 
ologists or  miners  expected  to  find  them,  they  often  leave  them  to 
grow,  germinate,  or  “ get  ripe,”  as  they  express  it.  Does  not  this 
afford  external  evidence  of  the  activity  of  matter  ? 

And  could  man  constantly  unite  with  his  body  substances  and 
matter  which  are  not  active,  or  which  do  not  possess  a living  princi- 
ple ? Food  is  constantly  taken  ; it  is  active  upon  the  body  ; it  be- 
comes a part  of  the  texture  and  substance  of  the  system — is  sub 
jected  to  the  physiological  operations,  and  is  governed  by  the  same 
mutual  motive  forces  that  pervade  all  things.  If  matter  weie  inac 
tive,  could  it  be  associated  with  activity?  Can  motion  and  rest 
exist  together  ? 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


59 


Chemists  who  have  instituted  investigations  relative  to  matter  and 
motion,  will  tell  you  that  one  substance  will  unite  with  another  of 
like  affinity  ; but  they  go  no  further.  But  if  particular  matter  will 
only  associate  with  that  of  like  affinity,  how  is  it  that  four  or  five  ele- 
ments are  often  found  to  exist  in  one  composition  ? The  truth  is, 
there  is  a mutual  affinity  existing  between  all  forms  and  substances 
throughout  Nature,  including  the  mineral,  vegetable,  and  animal 
kingdoms.  There  is  a constant  fluctuation  of  all  these,  from,  to, 
and  through  each  other,  acting  fast  or  slow  according  to  the  develop- 
ment of  the  matter  sustaining  these  mutual  actions.  There  is  a con- 
stant and  unchangeable  movement  throughout  all  Nature,  produced 
by  the  ultimate  of  matter,  or  what  is  now  known  to  he  its  inherent 
properties  of  life  and  sensation.  There  is  a constant,  undeviating 
action,  which  produces  and  reproduces  all  forms  visible  and  external. 
Composition,  decomposition,  recomposition,  visible  and  invisible,  are 
evidently  performing  their  natural  yet  ceaseless  work,  according  to 
established  laws.  Earth  and  atmosphere  form  and  compose  vegeta- 
ble existence  ; and  these  three,  in  their  united  and  energetic  forces, 
compose  their  ultimates,  the  higher  degrees  of  matter  known  as  ani- 
mal existence.  And  this  last  constantly  gives  to,  and  takes  from,  all 
things  below  its  existence.  Hence  there  is  a ceaseless  and  endless 
chain  of  formation  and  reproduction ; loss  and  gain  ; accumulation 
and  dispersion,  taking  place  yearly,  hourly,  and  secondly,  throughout 
the  Universe.  If  there  is  an  infected  place  upon  the  body,  such  as 
a sore  or  wound,  you  may  see,  in  its  action  of  healing,  a representa- 
tion of  all  Nature.  You  may  there  see  the  perfect  operation  of  the 
two  principles  or  forces  of  the  anatomical  and  material  system.  What 
is  decomposed,  will  be  gradually  repulsed  from  the  wound ; what 
has  formed  pure  and  healthy,  by  a fresh  ultimation  and  composition 
of  particles,  is  gradually  and  carefully  deposited  at  the  place  where 
it  is  required.  There  is  not  one  particle  too  much  or  too  little ; but 
the  whole  sustains  an  harmonious  and  united  action  in  forming  anew 
the  parts,  and  repulsing  the  extraneous  and  decomposed  substances, 
until  the  whole  is  united  as  before ! So  with  all  Nature  : every  par- 
ticle of  matter  being  governed  by  these  laws  and  forces,  produces 
harmony  and  union  in  all  parts  of  existence.  With  an  undeviating 
tendency,  each  particle  in  Nature  proceeds  to  its  destined  spot,  there 
to  form  what  is  required,  or  to  become  more  refined  to  produce  its 
grand  effects  and  sublime  ultimates  ! 

Thus  all  things  have  mutual  affinities,  yet  these  are  not  always 


60 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


perceptible ; for  some  substances  and  elements  have  progressed  too 
far  to  associate  visibly  with  that  which  has  not  arrived  at  a similar 
condition.  The  analysis  and  knowledge  of  the  real  principles  (which 
are  invisible),  governing  even  the  atoms  of  existence,  would  teach  a 
lesson  of  truth  in  reference  to  the  laws  and  movements  of  all  things. 
For  the  least  substance  in  existence  contains  within  itself  the  specific 
forces  and  essences  that  exist  in  the  remotest  sphere  in  immensity. 
Matter  in  its  present,  not  only  represents  matter  in  its  ultimate  state, 
but  it  is  typical  of  Intelligence,  or  spiritual  ultimation,  throughout 
eternity. 

^21.  In  speaking  of  the  origin  and  primitive  Cause  of  all  life,  it  is 
necessary  to  sustain  the  position  to  be  assumed,  by  inductions  drawn 
from  Nature  and  her  laws. 

First : If  man  is  an  animated  being,  and  the  earth  inanimate,  how 
can  these  exist  together  ? If  man  is  formed  as  an  extraneous  sub- 
stance, separate  from  the  great  mass,  how  can  he  take  from,  and  give 
to,  the  elements  that  compose  his,  and  other  existences  ? If  motion 
or  life  existed  in  one  part  of  Nature,  and  repose  in  another,  could 
these  two  be  made  to  characterize  a Universe  ? Or  can  activity  and 
rest  exist  in  one  substance  ? If,  on  the  contrary,  motion  is  manifest 
in  the  general  departments  of  the  Universe,  is  it  not  more  than  prob- 
able that  all  things  are  active,  either  in  a visible  or  invisible  way  ? 
The  motive  power  of  all  life  and  activity  in  Nature,  must  be  a part 
of  the  same.  It  must  exist  with  it,  for  it  can  not  separately  act  upon 
it.  Motion  is  then  coexistent,  coessential,  and  coeternal  with  Nature. 
It  acts  on  all  matter  in  a greater  or  less  degree  of  perfection  ; and 
consequently  there  is  not  a particle  or  substance  in  Nature  in  an  inac- 
tive condition,  but  all  things  are  full  of  life  and  energy. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  explain  the  formation  of  this  sphere  at  this 
time,  but  only  to  investigate  matter  and  motion  as  evidently  mani- 
fested to  the  senses.  Motive  Power,  existing  with  Matter  indivis- 
ibly,  is  the  cause  of  Life ; and  to  distinguish  Motion,  Life,  and  Sen- 
sation, from  Intelligence,  there  must  be  a correspondence  shown  as 
existing  universally,  representing  these  principles  as  Motion  in  a 
greater  or  less  degree  of  perfection.  What  is  known  as  Motion,  is 
not  properly  Life  ; for  Motion  exists  where  Life  does  not. 

The  harder  substances,  such  as  mineral  and  stone,  are  apparently 
motionless  ; but  still  they  are  continually  decreasing  or  increasing, 
according  to  their  peculiar  states  of  perfection.  F or  mineral  bodies 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


61 


are  formed  by  the  association  and  action  of  such  elements  as  enter 
into  their  composition.  When  they  commence  forming,  they  are  in 
a crude  and  unrefined  state ; but  by  the  activity  and  motion  which 
characterize  them,  they  constantly  extract  from  other  substances,  par- 
ticles for  their  own  composition.  And  as  that  which  has  progressed 
to  a condition  to  enter  into  such  a formation,  associates  with,  and  be- 
comes a part  of,  the  mineral,  so  all  which  has  not  progressed  to  the 
proper  state  to  associate  with  the  same,  is  repulsed  and  separated  as 
dross  and  extraneous  matter ; and  this  associates  with  that  of  like  affin- 
ity, even  as  did  the  former. 

Particles  may  accumulate  from  the  combined  elements  in  the  inte- 
rior of  the  earth,  to  form  what  is  termed  ore.  And  this  can  not 
remain  inactive  when  it  is  formed,  but  progresses  to  metal.  Then  it 
possesses  no  visible  motion  or  activity.  But  time  will  develop  its 
slow,  yet  perfect  action : for  rust  will  be  seen  accumulating  on  its 
surface,  and  finally  the  whole  becomes  dissolved  and  disunited,  and 
passes  into  other  substances  of  like  and  equal  affinities.  In  this, 
therefore,  is  seen  a perfect  illustration  of  the  steady  motion  existing 
as  an  invisible  reality. 

The  appearances  of  forms  and  substances  would  almost  give  the 
impression  that  they  exist  as  independent  of  earth  and  atmosphere  ; 
for  the  question  could  with  propriety  be  asked,  If  animal  and  vegeta 
ble  existences  belong  to  and  are  a part  of  earth,  why  are  they  not  all 
like  earth  ? or,  why  is  not  earth  like  unto  them  ? 

The  distinction  is  not  properly  made  between  substances  which 
are  constantly  progressing  to  specific  states  of  perfection  and  associa- 
tion. A peculiar  kind  of  earth  is  perfected,  and  has  the  essential 
property  of  associating  with,  and  forming  mineral ; while,  by  a long 
and  imperceptible  progression,  earth  and  minerals  associate  with  and 
form  vegetable  existence.  By  a gradual  progression  and  refinement, 
particles  of  the  mineral  and  vegetable  kingdoms  are  rendered  capable 
of  becoming  the  substance  of  animal  organization.  And  there  is  be- 
tween earth  and  animal  existence,  a general  and  particular  corre- 
spondence,— and  there  are  intermediate  associations  of  matter,  grosser 
or  more  refined,  which  produce  the  various  substances  and  forms 
existing  between  each  of  these  kingdoms. 

In  earth  and  minerals,  and  all  matter  which  is  commonly  said  to  be 
in  repose,  there  is  existing  the  primitive  and  original  principle  insep- 
arably belonging  to  and  characterizing  the  whole  Universe.  There 
is  motion  in  these,  developing  power  in  its  action  such  as  man  is  not 


62 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


capable  of  comprehending ; for  man,  with  all  his  powers  of  intelli- 
gence combined,  is  not  competent  to  investigate  and  properly  com- 
prehend the  force  and  moving  power  of  his  own  existence.  Yet  in 
grosser  matter,  there  is  contained  the  primitive  and  essential  'principle 
of  Motion  ; and  this  is  the  first  of  all  powers  existing  in  Matter 
throughout  the  Universe.  Life  does  not  exist  in  such  forms,  yet  this 
is  a specific  and  essential  quality  belonging  to  Motion ; but  one  which 
can  not  yet  be  developed,  for  the  want  of  a higher  and  more  perfect 
state  of  material  existence. 


§ 22.  For  illustration,  imagine  this  sphere  as  existing,  and  nothing 
of  what  is  now  known  as  vegetable  and  animal  forms.  — Let  matter 
be  destitute  of  any  higher  state  of  perfection  than  the  grosser  substan- 
ces which  compose  this  sphere  only.  Then,  if  you  are  in  a condition 
to  be  cognizant  of  all  motion,  which  is  incessantly  going  on  among  the 
various  atoms  and  particles,  you  have  the  principle  of  Motion  primi- 
tively existing.  You  would  not  know  of  a principle  of  Life  or  Sen- 
sation. Your  mind  could  not  extend  to  vegetable  and  animal  creation, 
for  such  you  would  think  were  utterly  impossible.  But  suppose  you 
still  continue  in  the  condition  to  be  cognizant  of  the  progression  and 
continual  motion  universally  existing  : you  would  next  see  the  forma- 
tion of  minerals.  You  would  consider  these  as  forming  from  the  pro- 
gression and  ultimate  refinement  of  grosser  matter.  Yet  no  combi- 
nation of  numbers  would  express  to  the  understanding  the  number 
of  years  intervening  between  the  first  or  rudimental  stages  of  Matter 
and  the  formation  of  minerals. 

Next,  you  would  see  plants  germinating  and  springing  up,  of  a 
diminutive  size,  over  the  face  of  creation.  Here  again  is  a substance 
manifested  which  you  did  not  know  as  existing  previously  to  its  for- 
mation. Yet  by  a steady  perception,  you  could  see  that  it  was  evi- 
dently the  progression  of  matter  that  produced  such  an  accumulation 
of  particles  to  form  a Vegetable  Kingdom.  There  would  be  also  a 
new  development  of  the  law  of  Motion.  You  would  here  see  Life  in 
every  particle  of  vegetable  existence,  a principle  which  you  did  not 
know  as  existing  previously  to  the  formation  of  the  substances  in 
which  it  is  developed.  Yet  it  would  be  evident  that  this  Life  is  an 
essential  quality  and  development  of  the  first  principle  of  Motion. 

Intermediate  formations  would  gradually  be  produced ; and  a long 
series  of  years  would  elapse  between  the  formation  of  the  last  King- 
dom and  the  production  and  development  of  another.  You  would  next 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


63 


see  animals  existing  in  minute  and  delicate  forms,  corresponding  with 
the  minute  and  delicate  forms  of  plants.  From  these  there  would  be 
gradually  created  higher  degrees  of  animal  organization,  correspond- 
ing with  the  higher  vegetable  existences,  until  you  would  observe 
(the  qualities  and  particles  becoming  so  perfect  from  the  ultimation 
of  the  grosser  matter)  the  formation  and  production  of  the  magnificent 
and  wonderful  mechanism  of  the  human  form , comprising  within 
itself  the  ultimate  properties  of  all  previously  existing  matter,  and 

which  stands  as  an  ultimate  and  combination  of  all  else  existing  ante- 
. . . . - 
rior  to  its  creation  ! 

Thus  you  have  seen  matter  pass  from  its  grosser  condition,  through 
its  many  stages  and  spheres  of  progression,  until  it  arrives  at  conse- 
quent animal  organization  ! 

There  is  another  principle  also  developed,  corresponding  with  the 
perfection  of  matter.  You  first  saw  Matter  and  Motion ; secondly, 
you  saw  its  gradual  progression  until  it  formed  substances  capable  of 
developing  a new  principle  of  motion.  This  was  Life , corresponding 
in  perfection  to  the  forms  which  contained  it.  Then,  again,  you  knew 
of  no  other  principle  existing  besides  Motion  and  Life : but,  in  due 
time,  new  forms  were  produced  by  the  same  unchangeable  laws  of 
progression  and  association,  corresponding  to,  and  capable  of  devel- 
oping, a new  principle  of  Motion  and  Life,  which  was  Sensation. 
Then  you  saw  that  Sensation  was  a further  development  of  the  essen- 
tial properties  of  Motion  — that  the  former  contained  the  latter,  but 
could  not  manifest  it  without  corresponding  forms  of  progressed  mat- 
ter, capable  of  producing  such  a development. 

You  are  now  convinced  that  the  physical  organization  of  Man  is  an 
ultimate  of  matter,  and  an  effect  produced  by  an  internal,  invisible,  yet 
eternal  Cause:  and  you  are  further  convinced  that  Sensation,  Life, 
and  Motion,  are  consequent  qualifications  of  the  organic  consti- 
tution. 

You  have  observed  the  gradual  progress  of  all  things  until  Man 
was  formed.  You  may  now  be  removed  from  the  position  which 
you  have  occupied  as  being  raised  above  this  sphere,  for  the  purpose 
of  observation, — to  direct  your  attention  to  the  beings  which  you 
have  patiently  seen  formed.  And  now,  existing  and  moving  among 
other  forms  and  beings  like  unto  yourself,  are  you  capable  of  com- 
prehending and  explaining  what  you  evidently  saw  as  manifest  to 
your  senses  while  thus  situated?  You  are  not:  for  you  are  now 
dwelling  in  a sphere  lower  than  that  which  you  previously  occupied, 


64 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


and  therefore  can  not  associate  with  the  same.  Nor  can  you  associate 
with  this  sphere  fully ; for  you  are  not  only  one  among  millions  of 
forms,  but  you  are  apparently  self-existing,  and  isolated  from  the 
great  mass  of  universal  production. 

You  now  see  that  man  possesses  something  besides  Life  and  Sen- 
sation. And  it  is  for  the  want  of  a capacity  to  make  a proper  dis- 
tinction, that  you  confuse  Motion,  Life,  Sensation,  and  Intelligence, 
in  one  form,  and  sanction  the  theory  that  Intelligence  is  a result  of 
organization.  The  cause,  then,  of  your  belief  is  evidently  demon- 
strated.— It  is  for  the  want  of  a higher  sphere  to  enable  you  to  asso- 
ciate with  that  which  belongs  to  your  present  sphere.  But  becoming 
confused  in  investigating  your  own  composition,  you  arrive  at  the 
conclusion  that  the  principle  of  mind  is  eternal,  yet  not  individ- 
ualized, or  associating  identically  with  spheres  of  ultimate  progression, 
as  corresponding  with  the  spheres  which  you  have  demonstrated  to 
your  senses  in  the  earthy,  mineral,  vegetable,  and  animal  kingdoms, 
with  their  minutiae  and  intermediates,  — and  in  primitive  Motion,  Life, 
Sensation,  and  Intelligence. 

And  in  this  place  it  is  necessary  to  impress  again  the  proposition, 
That  no  substance  or  power  of  any  character,  whether  physical  or 
intellectual,  possesses  within  itself  the  power  of  self-investigation  or 
comprehension.  Therefore  you  can  comprehend  and  trace,  analogi- 
cally and  correct^,  grosser  substances  to  the  formation  of  yourselves ; 
but  you  arrive  at  Mind,  Intelligence,  Sjririt, — and  though  this  is  the 
principle  which  has  enabled  you  to  explore  and  comprehend  all  be- 
low it,  you  find  that  this  itself  is  necessarily  vague  and  indefinite  to 
you.  And  hence  there  is  either  too  much  belief  as  respects  this 
principle  and  its  composition,  or  too  much  disbelief;  and  each  is  a 
natural  consequence  of  a principle  attempting  to  investigate  itself. 

Having  no  means  to  arrive  distinctly  and  evidently  at  a knowledge 
of  the  essence  and  principle  of  Intelligence,  you  are  compelled  to  let 
me  occupy  the  situation  which  you  have  been  supposed  to  sustain, 
and  thereby  reveal  what  you  would  willingly  and  joyously  receive, 
as  corresponding  to  your  natural  yearnings,  and  answering  your  de- 
sires for  a higher,  nobler,  and  more  dignified  understanding  of  your 
nature  and  its  legitimate  offices  and  ultimate  destination. 

§ 22.  The  classification  of  Series,  Degrees,  and  Representations, 
must  be  properly  understood,  in  order  that  Nature  and  her  coexistent 
and  essential  laws  may  be  duly  comprehended.  A focus  formed  of 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


65 


nebulous  matter,  or  in  other  words,  a Centre  produced  by  a conglom- 
eration of  particles,  must  of  necessity  be  a body,  crude,  heterogeneous, 
yet  a cause.  Its  inherent  forces  are  spontaneously  producing  effects , 
and  these  effects  are  necessarily  producing  ultimates.  It  exhibits 
also  the  inherent  principle  in  matter  known  as  Motion , which  is 
admitted  to  be  coexistent  with  matter  itself,  — producing  effects, 
which  effects  are  producing  ends  or  ultimates.  Such  an  incipient 
formation  is  the  only  basis  on  which  can  rest  a proper  understanding 
of  the  potency  of  matter  and  the  excellency  of  ultimates. 

The  correspondential  reasoning  to  be  instituted  is  based  upon  gen- 
erals and  universals  — or  upon  the  Cause  which  is  perpetually  pro- 
ducing effects  and  ends.  Intermediate  and  isolated  divisions  are  not 
essential  to  a proper  investigation  of  terrestrial  laws. 

There  is  an  invisible  Cause  producing  spontaneously  external 
Effects ; and  these  may  be  divided  into  series , degrees,  and  repre- 
sentations. At  first,  Matter  and  Motion  existed : and  these  formed 
one  series.  Vegetable  production  and  its  essential  developments 
and  accompanying  life,  are  a second  form  and  degree.  Animal  organ- 
ization is  a third  development,  or  an  ultimate  of  the  inward  or  first 
Cause:  and  its  kingdom  is  a third  form  and  degree,  — the  whole 
forming  three  series.  First,  Matter,  spontaneously  producing  and 
reproducing  Ends  or  Ultimates.  Secondly,  Motion,  graduated  and 
developed  according  to  the  perfection  and  utilization  of  matter  into 
forms,  suitable  as  agents,  and  perfect  as  ultimates,  to  develop  its 
inward  principle  to  the  external  sphere.  Again  (for  a more  partic- 
ular distinction),  first,  Matter;  secondly,  perfect  degree  of  vegetable 
existence ; and  thirdly,  matter  in  animal  organization  as  its  highest 
state.  These  are  three  series  or  degrees.  Secondly,  Motion  as  a 
coexisting  principle  with  Matter,  Life  as  an  effect,  and  Sensation  as 
an  ultimate  or  end : constituting  three  series  or  degrees  of  the  pro- 
gression of  matter  and  its  inherent  motion,  — or  of  the  development 
of  the  great  Cause  internal,  which  progresses  to,  and  produces  ex- 
ternal and  visible  forms.  These  classifications  must  be  understood, 
in  order  to  arrive  at  the  corresponding  principles  which  are  still  invis- 
ible, yet  creating  infinite  ends  and  ultimates,  from  eternal,  invisible, 
and  potent  laws  of  causation. 

For  an  understanding  of  the  reasonings  which  may  properly  be 
based  upon  these  classifications,  according  to  the  science  of  corre- 
spondences, familiar  and  physiological  illustrations  may  be  presented. 
These  will  answer  as  a chart  for  universal  investigation  ; for  effects  are 

5 


66 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


charts  by  which  internal  causes  may  be  arrived  at.  For  forms  and 
effects  are  representatives  in  a higher  degree,  of  what  is  existing  in  a 
lower  or  first  degree ; and  the  substance  of  ultimates  is  a develop- 
ment and  progression  of  all  beneath  its  sphere  of  existence,  and  is  a 
compound  of  all  substances,  refined  and  rarified  to  a sphere  of  ulti- 
mate perfection.  Consequently  it  involves  all  of  the  lower  orders  of 
spheres  and  existences.  Hence  it  acts  on,  and  subsists  upon,  sub- 
stances and  particles  which  compose  the  original  elements  of  its  na- 
ture. All  beneath  an  ultimate,  or  an  effect,  thus  supplies  the  effect 
and  ultimate ; and  hence  ultimates  or  effects  correspond  to,  and  rep- 
resent all  things  in  an  inferior  degree  and  sphere  of  perfection. 
Thus,  the  human  body  is  a composition  of  all  else:  — but  to  famil- 
iarize it  with  the  understanding  as  corresponding  with  universals  in 
Nature,  an  examination  of  its  laws  and  functions  generally,  and  a 
classification  of  them  in  series  and  degrees,  will  be  necessary : and 
this  will  manifest  the  doctrines  which  it  is  necessary  to  enforce. 

First,  the  form  is  a representative  of  Matter  originally  existing  : for 
the  system  is  formed  by  laws  not  distinctly  comprehended,  even  as 
is  the  great  system  of  the  Universe.  There  is  an  invisible,  an  inter- 
nal cause,  existing  in  the  human  form ; and  there  is  an  external,  an 
ultimate,  an  end  also.  These  two  are  generals;  but  there  are  other 
specific  qualities  and  essences,  producing  distinct  results;  — and  a 
classification  of  these  is  necessary  in  order  to  make  them  familiar  to 
the  mind,  as  corresponding  with  distinct  departments  in  Nature. 

First,  the  head,  secondly,  the  chest,  and  thirdly,  the  abdomen. 
These  are  the  three  orders  of  degrees  in  the  same  form,  arising  out 
of  the  general , as  the  original  basis.  The  head  is  the  cause,  the 
chest,  the  effect,  the  abdomen,  the  end,  or  ultimate.  Or,  the  head, 
as  a cause,  involves,  acts  on,  and  produces  all  which  the  organism 
usually  manifests. 

Still  more  plainly  is  this  principle  illustrated  and  represented  in 
the  functional  operations  of  the  viscera,  in  forming  that  essence  of 
organic  life,  the  blood.  First,  the  mouth,  tongue,  and  its  mucous 
surfaces ; secondly,  the  stomach  ; and  thirdly,  the  termination  of 
the  same  in  the  small  and  large  intestines.  Or,  the  saliva,  the 
gastric  juice,  the  pancreatic  and  hepatic,  or  bile.  The  saliva  is  the 
cause,  and  performs  the  essential  office  of  preparing  the  food  for  the 
stomach.  Saliva  produces  an  effect  or  immediate  result,  called  gas- 
tric juice,  which  is  the  same  juice  developed  and  potentialized  to 
perform  its  grand  end  or  ultimate.  Its  termination  is  the  active  and 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


67 


finely-secreted  fluids  of  the  small  and  large  intestines,  terminating  at 
the  rectum.  Hence  the  element  known  as  blood  commences  in  the 
mouth,  and  by  the  tongue  dissolving  and  preparing  the  substances 
which  are  to  form  such  : and  for  the  further  development  of  the  same 
particles  and  substances,  it  passes  to  the  stomach,  and  there  is  acted 
on  by  the  gastric  principle,  is  coagulated,  — and  the  ultimate  of  this 
operation  forms  blood; — which  is  drawn  by  the  forces  heretofore  ex- 
plained, into  the  absorbing  vessels,  and  terminates  in  the  venous  and 
arterial  circulation.  The  gross  and  impure  particles,  which  are  not 
capable  of  associating  with  the  refined  and  progressed  part,  pass  into 
the  substance  known  as  faeces  or  excrement , — while  according  to  the 
law  of  universal  life,  activity  and  progression,  the  blood  becomes  still 
more  refined.  It  forms  a serum  or  lymph,  which  is  the  next  stage  of 
its  progression  ; and  the  ultimate  of  this  is  the  insensible  perspiration. 

Or  for  further  illustration:  There  is  a chyle  of  the  mouth  and 
tongue,  an  original  substance  — a cause  of  producing  a second  chyle, 
that  of  the  stomach  and  pancreas,  and  which  is  a still  more  refined 
development  of  the  same  principle.  And  then  a chyle  is  produced, 
of  the  small  and  large  intestines,  as  an  effect  or  grand  ultimate  of  the 
whole  functional  movements  of  the  formation  of  blood. 


§ 23.  Now  to  bring  what  has  been  last  said  into  a comprehensive 
condition,  we  will  recapitulate  : First,  the  head,  chest,  and  abdomen. 
Secondly,  the  power  which  these  have  upon  the  system,  as  an  inter- 
nal force  to  produce  external  manifestations.  Thirdly,  the  mouth, 
stomach,  and  intestines.  Fourthly,  the  saliva,  gastric  and  hepatic, 
and  pancreatic  juices.  Fifthly,  chyle  of  the  mouth,  chyle  of  the 
stomach,  coagulation,  blood,  serum,  insensible  perspiration.  Each  is 
a cause  to  produce  its  ultimate.  These  are  all  scries  — correspond- 
ing to  the  series  in  material  existence.  And  as  the  formation  and 
development  of  blood  takes  place  through  a functional  operation  of 
the  system,  so  Life  and  Sensation  are  produced  by  the  developments 
of  the  material  system.  The  Universe  originally  contained  within 
itself  all  the  essential  properties  and  substances  which  are  now  known 
to  be  developed : so  the  food  which  is  taken  into  the  mouth,  posses- 
ses within  itself  all  the  properties  and  essences  of  blood,  but  needs 
form  and  condition  of  series  and  degrees,  to  produce  such  a devel- 
opment. And  each  force,  organ,  or  function  which  is  necessarily 
called  into  action  to  produce  blood,  must  possess  within  itself  the 
power  to  cause  all  which  is  ultimately  developed.  Each  has  a series 


68 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


consisting  of  three;  — corresponding  with  the  series  and  degrees  in 
universal  creation.  And  man,  therefore,  stands  as  a representative  of 
the  Universe,  — containing  within  himself  the  ultimate  properties  of 
all  subordinate  substances;  — and  consequently  he  is  involved  in  all 
things,  which  act  for  and  on  him  as  an  ultimate. 

It  is  proper,  therefore,  to  deeply  and  seriously  investigate  the 
original  structure  and  motive  power  of  man,  together  with  the  many 
complicated  parts  which  are  uniformly  made  evident  external : and 
by  understanding  the  forms  and  forces,  and  the  consequent  perfection 
which  is  manifested  in  the  human  organism,  you  will  perceive  a cor- 
respondence to  all  else,  whether  superior  or  subordinate,  existing  in 
universal  Nature  and  her  laws.  Know  one  and  you  consequently 
know  the  other ; and  by  investigating  and  exploring  all  below  the 
power  of  mind,  constituting  your  own  nature,  you  arrive  analogically 
at  the  relative  powers  of  the  original  laws  of  motion,  which  have 
governed  from  the  beginning,  and  do  still  manifest  an  undeviating 
tendency  to  universal  and  eternal  progression. 

As  motion  is  perpetually  changing  and  exchanging  particles,  so 
there  are  continual  sequestrations  and  prominent  developments  of  the 
same  in  forms  going  on  throughout  all  existence ; and  forms,  forces, 
and  motions,  are  refined  through  successive  stages,  from  the  most 
minute  atom  in  existence,  to  the  most  perfect  form  and  symmetry 
which  are  displayed  in  the  physical  organization  of  Man.  The  law 
or  power  of  procreation  and  reproduction  (in  the  sense  in  which 
these  words  are  applicable),  is  universal  and  eternal.  There  is  not 
such  a thing  as  absolute  creation  ; but  what  is  termed  such,  is  merely 
a development  of  inherent  principles,  which  are  eternally  established 
and  sustained.  New  forms  and  properties,  new  developments,  and 
refined  and  exalted  conditions  of  matter,  are  merely  the  visible  ulti- 
mates  of  the  grosser,  yet  essential  principles  of  Matter  and  Motion. 
They  are  therefore  produced,  or  rather  made  manifest  by  the  law  of 
perpetual  progression.  The  highest  and  most  perfect  form  known  to 
exist,  and  manifest  to  the  senses,  is  one  link  in  the  great  chain  of  cor- 
respondences, which  all  particles  immediately  or  remotely  unite  with  ; 
and  it  is  a representative  of  each  successive  link.  Admit  this  propo- 
sition, and  you  are  compelled  through  that  admission  to  repose  belief 
in  one  Great  Power  which  is  governing  and  controlling  all  things, 
and  has  established  a Law  equal  to  its  own  comprehension,  — whereby 
not  one  thing  is  existing  but  what  is  uniformly  developed  in  forms, 
series,  degrees,  and  associations,  according  to  the  force  and  power 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OP  NATURE. 


69 


which  is  indivisibly  and  eternally  coexistent  therewith!  Contempla- 
tion is  necessary  ; deliberate  reverence  and  a submissive  disposition 
are  positively  required,  in  order  to  comprehend  and  enjoy  the  privi- 
lege of  associating  with  the  conceptions  and  argument  herein  set 
forth  ! /.  • 

For  a further  and  familiar  illustration  of  the  motive  forces  of  inter- 
nal existence,  we  will  speak  of  the  different  motions  which  are  devel- 
oped in  Nature,  which  act  on  geometrical  and  mechanical  principles. 
These  are  particulars  and  minutiae,  and  vary  exceedingly,  according 
to  the  forms  and  circumstances  of  their  outward  manifestation ; yet 
they  are  all  comprehended  and  contained  in  the  First  and  only  Great 
Law  of  Motion,  known  as  positive  and  negative  Forces. 

There  is  existing  a motion  termed  rectilinear.  This  contains  un- 
developed, and  progresses  to,  the  spiral  motion,  which  is  an  ultimate 
of  the  same  principle.  The  first  motion  could  not  exist  until  there 
were  forms  capable  of  manifesting  it : and  when  such  motion  became 
established,  the  curvilinear  motion  was  next  developed.  And  other 
motions  legitimately  followed,  such  as  the  vibratory,  undulatory,  ec- 
centric, and  spiral  or  ultimate  motions.  The  many  modifications  in 
which  these  motions  or  powers  are  developed  in  momentum  processes, 
were  only  displayed  when  there  were  developments  in  Nature,  of  par- 
ticles, forms,  and  substances,  capable  of  manifesting  these  essential 
principles.  First,  the  Great  Law  of  Motion  existed;  and  lastly,  as 
an  ultimate  development,  spiral  motion  was  unfolded ; and  between 
these,  intermediate  motions  were  developed  and  became  visible  : and 
then,  and  only  then,  could  these  motions  be  admitted  or  believed  to 
be  existing. 

Did  not  the  first  motion  contain  the  specific  properties  and  forces 
of  all  the  others  ? or  were  they  individually  and  independently  pro- 
duced or  created  ? Is  it  not  probable  that  they  were  produced  by, 
and  according  to,  the  law  of  universal  energy  and  development,  and 
that  they  bear  a likeness  to  all  other  progressions,  in  forms,  degrees, 
and  consequent  forces,  such  as  Matter,  Mineral,  Vegetable,  Animal, 
Man,  and  their  respective  properties  and  essences,  of  Motion,  Life, 
and  Sensation,  display?  Does  not  the  whole  form  a succession  of 
united  and  corresponding  links  in  the  great  chain  of  material  devel- 
opment ? 

The  first  Power  of  Motion  contained  all  forces  that  are  now  known 
to  exist.  So  also  did  Matter  contain  the  specific  essences  and  prop- 
erties to  produce  Man.  Therefore  the  original  forces  and  laws  of 


70 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


gross  Matter  and  Motion,  comprehended  all  that  may  now  be  termed 
purified  and  rarified  effects  and  ultimates  ; and  the  whole  corre- 
sponded, in  a general  sense,  to  the  law  of  positive  and  negative,  or 
grosser  and  ultimate,  cause  and  effect,  internal  and  external : and  all 
intermediates,  and  superabounding  effects  or  manifestations,  legiti- 
mately and  indivisibly  belong  to,  and  are  a part  of,  the  Great  Cause , 
\ Effect,  and  End. 

F acts  have  thus  been  accumulated,  and  these  stand  instead  of  as- 
sertions. They  are  demonstratively  evident  as  sustaining  the  propo- 
sition first  established,  as  to  the  existence  of  a universal  and  eternal 
inherent  Law  of  Motion  in  Matter,  and  its  powerful  and  energetic 
productions  which  visibly  exist  as  its  effects  and  grand  ultimates. 
And  these  all  have  been  demonstrated  in  known  and  visible  realities, 
in  order  that  the  correspondences  and  laws  of  association  may  be 
known  and  properly  understood,  so  that  the  great  question  at  issue 
may  be  decided. 

§ 24.  Thus  it  may  be  considered  established,  that  Matter  contains 
within  itself  an  eternal  Law  of  progressive  activity. — And  what  has 
been  said  of  Motion,  and  the  various  ways  in  which  it  is  developed, 
proves  also  a corresponding  law  of  life  and  action  as  existing  indi- 
visibly and  coessentially  with  Matter ; the  whole  containing  forces 
and  materials  to  produce  in  future  developments,  all  forms  and  sub- 
stances in  existence.  It  is  thus  also  shown,  that  the  Whole  is  com- 
posed of  parts,  and  that  the  parts  are  necessary  to  compose  the  Whole; 
and  that  the  Whole  is  a vast  Machine,  operating  unceasingly  by  an 
inherent  principle  of  perpetual  action.  It  throws  out  Effects,  which 
are  the  results  caused  by  this  action.  The  whole  is  a mechanical 
operation,  developing  each  principle  and  force,  each  object  and  form 
which  is  known  to  the  senses  to  exist.  The  whole  is  governed  by 
the  principle  known  as  the  Law  of  Nature.  Scientific  investigations 
lead  to  these  conclusions,  yet  can  not  rest  at  this  point,  but  look  back 
still  further  in  search  of  the  First  Cause.  The  inductive  mind  will 
distinctly  observe  the  indications  which  all  Nature  presents,  as  point- 
ing to  the  Great  First  Cause,  or  Positive  Mind.  And  upon  such, 
as  a basis,  the  mind  will  rest  satisfied,  feeling  that  search  to  find  out 
a cause  still  ulterior  is  absurd,  and  even  beyond  its  powers  of  con- 
ception. 

But  resting  on  the  foundation  of  such  a conclusion  irresistibly  es- 
tablished, the  mind  can  not  but  look  at  the  whole  of  Nature  as  pro- 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


71 


during  grand  effects  in  an  infinite  process  of  progression  ; and  observe 
adaptation  of  means  to  ends,  as  displaying  external  proof  of  design. 
It  can  not  fail  to  perceive  that  each  part  is  necessary  to  the  composi- 
tion and  structure  of  the  Whole  ; and  that  the  Whole,  of  necessity, 
must  be  composed  of  parts ; and  that  each  part  performs  its  specific 
office  in  producing  and  developing  new  effects  and  ultimates. 

This  all  proves  that  Matter  and  Motion  are  coeternal  principles 
existing  in  Nature  ; that  it  is  impossible  for  the  general  and  estab- 
lished laws  of  these  principles  to  be  changed  or  subverted  ; and  that 
these  laws  are  eternally  progressive , and  consequently  are  eternally 
producing  successive  states  of  perfection,  — and  that  they  consequently 
form  degrees,  series,  and  associations,  as  successive  stages  of  devel- 
opment, from  the  germ  of  existence  to  the  highest  point  of  material 
perfection. 

'And  anything  appearing  or  manifesting  operations  contrary  to  the 
laws  of  Nature,  must,  in  such  manifestations,  be  positively  incorrect. 
Such  things  do  not  manifest  the  inward  reality.  And  all  scientific 
investigations  prove  that  external  manifestations  are  not  to  be  depended 
upon  as  a true  means  of  understanding  the  real  producing  cause  ; but 
that  the  Reality  — the  Cause  of  all  things  — lies  deeply  behind  all 
external  appearances. 

And  so  with  Nature.  The  Internal,  the  Infinite  Reality,  the  Great 
Positive  Mind,  is  producing,  as  a Negative,  infinite  Effects  and  Ulti- 
mates, commencing  from  the  inward,  expanding  and  developing  to 
the  outward.  The  Internal  is  infinite  ; and  so  likewise  is  the  Exter- 
nal. The  Whole  may  be  comprehended  by  understanding  the  prin- 
ciples and  laws  of  cause  and  effect ; for  the  Cause  is  the  beginning  ; 
the  Effect  is  the  Ultimate.  The  Whole,  considered  as  universal  and 
eternal,  composes  an  intelligent,  thinking,  Positive  Mind.  Such  is  a 
generalization  of  all  things,  setting  forth  the  corresponding  movements 
and  forces  that  govern  this  material  existence,  and  proving  demon- 
stratively that  Motion  and  Matter  exist  essentially  together,  and 
possess  the  properties  and  essence  of  all  things,  organic  and  inor- 
ganic, and  also  the  forces  of  Life  and  Sensation  by  which  such  are 
governed. 

And  by  the  establishment  of  this  principle,  you  have  a safe  and 
sure  basis  upon  which  your  hopes  and  anticipations  respecting  the 
future  may  be  rested,  not  depending  upon  any  theories  of  a future 
existence  heretofore  prevailing.  It  evidently  proves  a future  life  be- 
yond a doubt,  and  makes  it  as  sure  and  as  eternal  as  the  laws  that 


72 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


govern  the  Universe.  The  existence  must  be  identical  and  progres- 
sive ; for  such  it  is  known  at  present  to  be.  And  the  whole  is  car- 
ried on  by  principles  unchanging  and  eternal  in  their  nature,  and 
which  can  not  be  in  any  way  confused  or  disorganized ; and  thus  all 
things,  from  the  first,  progress  with  an  energetic  step  to  their  ultimate 
perfection. 

It  is  not  the  object  at  this  time  to  prove  how  (or  in  what  state ) the 
existence  will  be,  but  it  is  the  object  to  prove  that  it  shall  be.  And 
by  admitting  the  basis  upon  which  the  argument  is  founded  (Motion, 
Life,  and  Sensation),  all  else  is  plainly  manifested  : so  that  even  a 
disposition  to  disbelieve  future  identity  does  not  in  the  least  affect  the 
argument  from  past  and  present  progression,  and  individualization. 
Also  a generalization  of  these  truths  makes  the  existence  plain  as  be- 
longing to  a universal  movement.  But  if  the  details  and.  particulars 
were  noticed,  many  visible  facts  would  seemingly  rather  controvert 
the  proposition : for  in  particularizing,  the  connexion  with  generals 
and  universals  is  apparently  broken.  Therefore,  as  the  only  true 
method,  you  are  compelled  to  generalize,  in  order  to  have  one  correct 
glimpse  of  a future  and  boundless  eternity. 

It  being  established  as  indisputable  (yet  as  an  idea  too  vast  for  or- 
dinary comprehension)  that  Matter  possesses  Motion  inherently,  and 
that  the  whole  contains  the  substance  and  properties  to  produce  all 
things,  you,  by  admitting  this,  adopt  the  belief  in  the  possibility  of 
future  progression  ; and  by  admitting  such  a possibility,  you  are  com- 
pelled (in  consistency)  to  remain  quiet  until  I trace  generally  and 
particularly,  from  the  Great  Positive  Mind,  the  Cause,  Effect,  and 
Ultimate,  of  all  things  : and  this  will  exhibit  the  infinite  progression  of 
all  particles  in  existence,  and  show  that  this  progression  develops  the 
principle  so  long  involved  in  obscurity,  viz.,  Spirit. 

§ 25.  The  two  great  points,  then,  which  it  is  the  object  to  establish, 
are,  the  original  Cause  of  all  things,  and  the  ultimate  of  man,  which 
is  Spirit.  The  premiss  is,  the  coexistence  and  universal  action  of 
Matter  and  Motion.  — This  establishes  the  existence  of  an  original 
Cause,  which  latter  it  is  the  object  to  contemplate,  so  that  from  this, 
tracing  secondary  causes  and  effects  through  Nature,  may  be  proved 
the  existence  and  identical  perpetuity  of  the  principle  of  Spirit.  Na- 
ture is  the  fulcrum  upon  which  the  first  is  established  of  necessity ; 
and  the  second  as  a consequence  not  only  proved  by  the  law  of  pro- 
gression and  association,  but  by  the  science  of  correspondences,  in  the 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


73 


light  of  which  all  the  combined  sciences  should  be  understood  : for 
it  is  by  correspondential  investigation  that  we  are  led  to  universally- 
connected  and  kindred  truths.  Therefore,  if  Nature  displays  univer- 
sal motion,  such  as  is  manifested  in  all  substances  and  forms  which 
are  known  to  exist,  does  not  this  prove  progression  ? And  progres- 
sion develops  the  various  spheres,  which  each  substance  and  parti- 
cle passes  through.  If  universal  association  exists  (as  is  proved  to 
be  the  case),  does  there  not  exist  a corresponding  future  invisible  prin- 
ciple ? This  must  of  necessity  exist,  as  the  result  of  motion  and  pro- 
gression. And  the  whole  combined  forms  one  chain  of  proofs  which  is 
eternal,  establishing  the  truths  which  are  seen  and  which  are  not  seen. 

Nature  therefore  represents  things  which  exist  in  an  original  con- 
dition, and  that  which  is  to  be  in  an  ultimate  Sphere ; and  all  are  es- 
tablished by  her  eternal  laws.  The  beginning  and  ending  form  one 
infinite  circle  of  movement,  development,  and  progression.  Repre- 
sentations of  this  great  principle  are  seen  in  the  movements  of  Nature, 
the  whole  of  which  is  formed  of  concentric  circles,  from  the  smallest 
particles  in  existence  to  the  united  and  perfect  form  of  all  things. 

It  is  the  office  of  paltetiological*  sciences  to  set  forth  general  truths 
in  the  departments  of  astronomy,  geology,  anatomy,  physiology,  &c., 
all  as  in  perfect  harmony  with  each  other,  and  as  forming  a general 
and  undeniable  proof  of  the  united  chain  of  existences,  and  binding 
the  whole  together  as  one  grand  book,  treating  upon  all  proper  sub- 
jects of  investigation,  contemplation,  and  aspiration  — the  only  au- 
thentic and  eternal  Book  of  truths,  which  is  inspired  by  the  Original 
Designer,  the  First  Cause  ! From  this  Book  properly  interpreted, 
should  be  derived  the  text  of  every  sermon.  In  this,  true  theology 
has  its  foundation  ; and  the  teachings  of  this  should  constitute  the 
only  study  of  the  theologian. 

By  collecting  palsetiological  facts,  then,  these  things  are  gradually 
developed  ; and  thus  is  unfolded  the  actual  demonstration  of  original 
design,  uniformity  of  motion  and  progression,  and  the  consequent 
adaptation  of  means  (which  are  effects  of  ulterior  causes),  to  produce 
ultimates.  — And  thus  is  displayed  the  principle  of  Cause,  Effect, 
and  End,  commencing  at  the  foundation  of,  and  operating  through, 
Nature.  And  in  the  process  of  natural  development,  each  particle, 
substance,  and  form,  enters  into  the  composition  of  vegetable,  animal, 

• From  -noiXcuis,  old  or  former,  atria,  a cause,  and  \6yos,  a discourse.  Palmtiological 
sciences,  therefore,  are  those  sciences  formerly  established,  which  conspire  in  the 
formation  of  a cause  or  foundation  from  which  other  conclusions  may  be  developed. 


74 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


and  all  else  existing,  by  which  process  the  substance  or  essential  prin- 
ciple becomes  individualized,  but  not  until  Man  is  made  the  instru- 
ment. And  by  such  individualization,  it  becomes  the  future  and 
corresponding  principle,  Spirit  — representing,  in  a second  condition, 
the  instrument  of  its  individualization.  And  as  Matter  contains  the 
essence  and  properties  to  produce  Man  as  a progressive  ultimate,  so 
Motion  contains  the  properties  to  produce  Life  and  Sensation.  These 
together  and  perfectly  organized,  develop  the  principle  of  Spirit. 
This  is  not  a production  consequent  of  organization,  but  it  is  the  re- 
sult of  a combination  of  all  the  elements  and  properties  of  which  the 
organization  is  composed ; and  the  organization  serves  merely  as  an 
instrument  to  develop  the  principle  of  Spirit.  But  such  principle 
must  have  existed  eternally — as  emanating  from  the  Great  Source 
and  Fountain  of  Intelligence ; but  it  could  not  be  individualized  and 
made  manifest  without  a vessel  like  unto  man. 

The  subject  of  which  we  are  now  speaking  comprehends  too  much 
to  be  readily  and  distinctly  apprehended,  and  from  its  obscurity  you 
may  be  unfavorably  impressed  ;but  not  if  you  are  reminded  of  the 
proposition  heretofore  established,  That  no  substance  or  principle 
contains  within  itself  the  power  of  self-comprehension  and  investiga- 
tion. But  to  analyze  the  principle  of  spirit,  would  require  self-com- 
prehension on  your  part.  Such  a thing  can  not  exist  while  all  inves- 
tigation and  research  is  depending  on  the  material  organization. 
Therefore,  when  in  a sphere  exalted  beyond  this  one,  you  will  be 
able  to  comprehend  the  compound  existence  in  this  sphere.  While 
occupying  the  second  sphere,  you  will  comprehend  all  helow,  but  can 
not  in  the  same  sense  comprehend  anything  above  you.  The  human 
embryo,  if  it  possessed  intelligence,  would  require  as  much  argument 
to  prove  its  future  existence  as  it  requires  to  prove  the  future  exist- 
ence and  identity  of  the  Spirit.  The  embryo  would  not  progress  to 
a perfect  being,  if  it  were  not  for  the  instruments  and  vessels  fitted  for 
its  development.  So  likewise  Spirit  could  not  be,  if  it  had  not  a cor- 
responding instrument  adapted  to  its  development.  But  when  the 
foetus  is  perfectly  formed,  there  is  a symmetry  and  beauty  of  design 
manifested  in  all  the  various  parts  of  its  formation.  Each  organ 
must  exist  in  order  to  produce  a perfect  form  ; and  the  whole  must 
act  on  each  part,  and  each  part  must  necessarily  exchange  particles 
with  the  whole.  And  so  each  part  has  its  specific  office  to  perform, 
in  order  that  the  whole  may  form  one  united  series  of  concentric  cir- 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


75 


cles  of  cause  and  effect.  Such  is  its  first  sphere  of  existence,  corre- 
sponding to  the  first  of  spiritual  existence. 

The  body  progresses  in  size  and  symmetry  until  it  attains  the  ulti- 
mate of  its  progression,  according  to  the  inherent  properties  which 
the  germ  contained  ; and  from  childhood  to  youth,  from  youth  to  man- 
hood, and  from  manhood  to  old  age,  are  therefore  spheres  which  the 
organization  passes  through.  Accompanying  these  various  spheres 
of  the  organization,  are  corresponding  spheres  of  knowledge  and  ex- 
perience. Hence  there  is  an  accumulation  of  intellectual  essences 
and  properties  legitimately  belonging  to  the  individual.  This  corre- 
sponds to  spiritual  progression.  Only  as  the  same  is  developed  in 
the  visible  and  material  form,  is  developed  invisibly  and  in  future,  the 
principle  of  spiritual  life.  The  whole  forms  one  chain  of  progressive 
correspondences : for  as  the  human  embryo  contains  an  essential 
principle  and  quality  to  produce  the  perfect  organization  of  man,  so 
does  the  germ  in  all  existence  possess  the  essence  and  quality  to  pro- 
duce its  corresponding  result  and  ultimate,  which  is  Spirit.  This 
forms  one  infinite  and  eternal  Circle.  Finite  circles  are  correspon- 
dences to  those  which  are  eternal ; and  there  is  a commencement  and 
an  end  to  every  particle,  visible  and  invisible  ; and  each  one  possesses 
the  same  essential  power  and  motion  which  the  whole  contains. 

^ 26.  Therefore  the  Whole  is  composed  of  parts,  and  the  parts 
compose  the  Whole ; and  all  these  combinations  in  Nature  are  pro- 
ducing designedly  that  principle  which  is  so  vague  and  indefinite  to 
the  mind — which  is  the  subject  of  much  contemplation,  but  not  a sub- 
stance which  Gan  be  proved  to  exist  by  external  investigation ; though 
it  is  known  to  exist  as  an  eternal  ultimate,  of  which  proof — mathe- 
matical demonstration  — exists  in  Nature.  And  it  is  only  necessary 
to  comprehend  general  and  universal  laws,  as  these  point  to  that  spir 
itual  and  intellectual  principle,  which  can  not  be  known  to  exist  by 
any  other  process  of  investigation,  external  or  internal.  But  it  is  de 
monstrated  by  these  known  laws,  which  are  constantly  producing  and 
developing  corresponding  principles,  ascending  in  their  degrees  of 
perfection.  For  these  laws  exhibit  an  infinite  chain  of  progression  : 
and  as  the  whole  forms  one  great  circle,  it  comprehends  and  combines 
all  other  circles  or  corresponding  motions  and  developments  that  ex- 
ist in  subordinate  spheres.  And  so  the  original  Cause  uses  Nature 
as  an  instrument — a means  — a vessel  fitted  in  all  its  various  parts 
and  complications,  to  produce  its  ultimate,  which  is  Spirit. 


76 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


It  is  the  object,  then,  that  spirit  should  be  individualized.  The 
object  of  such  individualization  is  to  establish  a communion  and  sym- 
pathy between  the  Creator  and  the  thing  created.  For  the  Spirit 
progresses  to  the  Source  whence  it  came,  and  then  only  becomes 
fitted  for  new  spheres  of  its^  eternal  existence. 

The  proofs  of  such  design  are  found  in  physiological  indications  — 
also  in  the  astronomical  and  geological  appearances,  and  the  evident 
truths  which  each  of  these  separately  unfolds.  And  the  whole  com- 
bined forms  proof  of  original  adaptation  of  parts  to  produce  results 
corresponding.  But  such  design  can  only  be  known  or  comprehend- 
ed by  induction.  And  finding  that  each  of  these  successive  depart- 
ments of  Nature  forms  one  circle,  which  is  eternal , the  conclusion 
irresistibly  follows  that  their  combined  result  (individual  man)  is 
equally  so.  Thus  the  Basis,  or  original  Cause,  is  using  Nature  as 
an  instrument,  which  may  be  termed  an  Effect,  to  produce  Spirit  as 
an  End  or  Ultimate.  The  F oundation,  the  Effect,  and  the  Ultimate, 
are  all  eternal. 

For  natural  and  external  evidences  to  demonstrate  the  great  points 
at  issue,  more  particular  recourse  must  be  had  to  the  received  palas- 
tiological  sciences,  as  these  exhibit  a general  connexion  between  all 
sciences,  and  between  cause,  means,  and  ends. 

External  and  visible  facts  in  Nature  relative  to  the  whole  circle 
of  forms,  and  the  laws  which  they  observe,  are  necessary  and  nat- 
ural productions  of  the  original  Principles  established.  And  an 
exhibition  of  the  circles,  or  of  the  united  and  progressive  motions  of 
all  things,  will  serve  as  an  index  to  direct  the  mind  to  the  original 
Cause,  and  to  conclusions  concerning  the  grand  result  and  ultimatum. 
For  there  are  seen  undeniable  facts,  which  prove  the  circular  motion 
and  perpetual  progression  of  each  particle  and  substance.  Also  each 
science  furnishes  facts  proving  the  inseparable  connexion  which  all 
particles,  forms,  and  substances,  observe. 

It  is  a familiar  truth,  universally  known,  yet  but  little  compre- 
hended, that  the  germ  of  the  plant  contains  within  itself,  though  not 
as  perceptible,  all  the  essential  qualities  of  its  future  being.  For 
soon  after  being  deposited  in  the  earth,  there  is,  according  to  laws 
which  Nature  has  established,  a commencement  of  its  germination. 
Not  long,  and  it  makes  its  appearance,  assuming  a body,  a form,  a 
peculiar  sphere.  It  becomes  visible  : it  progresses  to  its  physiologi- 
cal stature,  and  is  fully  developed  in  size  and  symmetry.  Leaves 
gradually  are  unfolded.  And  thus  from  the  germ  to  the  ultimate, 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


77 


exist  and  are  developed  the  powers  originally  embodied.  Hence 
the  germ  was  the  Cause  ; the  form , the  effect ; the  seed,  the  ultimate 
individualized.  This  not  only  establishes  the  law  of  progression, 
but  it  proves  that  there  is  a circle  in  the  progression ; for  the  plant 
ends  precisely  where  it  commenced.  It  only  makes  perfect  what  the 
original  essence  contained  imperfect.  This  is  a representation  of  all 
germination  throughout  Nature.  It  proves,  by  analogy,  parallel 
developments  in  all  other  things.  And  as  each  vegetable  reproduces 
its  like,  it  continually  re-forms,  and  produces  new  identities.  One 
law  governs  all ; yet  each  is  minutely  manifested,  and  generally  de- 
veloped in  its  own  peculiar  way. 

The  material  Universe  is  a Vortex , from  which  all  forms,  material 
and  immaterial,  are  unfolded  and  developed  to  the  external  or  sur 
face.  The  forms  assume  the  force  and  form  of  the  Vortex ; while 
the  Vortex  possesses  the  form  and  force  of  the  Whole  ; and  from  it 
new  particles  and  developments  are  constantly  and  successively  ema- 
nating. And  each  is  in  immediate  juxtaposition  with  every  corre 
sponding  part  or  particle.  Consequently,  Nature  also  forms  an 
arch,  — and  as  such,  to  sustain  itself  requires  parts  to  form  the 
Whole.  And  if  any  part  should  become  disunited,  the  whole  would 
become  prostrate  and  disorganized.  But  instead  of  this,  each  part 
performs  its  specific  office,  as  an  end,  in  the  great  Arch  composed 
of  them  all.  It  even  requires  an  ultimate  to  join  the  great  chain  or 
circle  of  united  motion,  as  the  keystone  is  required  to  unite  and  per- 
fect the  whole  arch  of  existence. 

Therefore  each  part  must  of  necessity  constitute  an  essehtial  sub 
stance,  and  accomplish  a particular  object ; and  thus  the  arch  is  ren- 
dered perfect.  But  if  any  part  did  not  perfectly  unite  with  the  other 
parts,  and  with  the  general  formation,  the  whole  would  be  internally 
and  externally  confused  and  disorganized.  It  consequently  forms, 
as  a whole,  a perfect  Structure  ; and  in  particulars  it  is  constituted 
of  the  various  particles  and  substances,  as  means,  effects,  and  instru- 
ments, to  develop  and  unite  the  whole,  so  that  a perfect  system 
may  be  formed,  to  accomplish  the  ultimate  design  of  the  original 
Conte  mplator ! 

$27.  Physiologists,  in  dissecting  and  analyzing  the  various  parts 
of  the  human  system,  will  discover  principles  corresponding  to  those 
in  Nature.  The  anatomy  is  a framework  which  contains  no  useless 
parts.  It  is  complicated,  but  has  not  too  many  parts  to  p&duce  the 


7S 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


manifestations  which  are  required,  and  to  fill  offices  which  it  was  the 
design  to  sustain.  Each  part  is  necessary  to  the  perfection  of  the 
whole  ; the  whole  is  necessary  to  the  parts.  The  whole  system  is 
composed  of  organs,  each  of  which  gives  to  and  takes  from,  every 
part  that  composes  the  system.  There  is  a constant  inspiration  and 
exhalation  — a constant  interchanging  of  particles  going  on  through- 
out the  whole  organization;  and  thus  the  whole  constantly  produces 
and  reproduces  new  particles,  fitted  to  its  progressive  formation. 

Again,  the  whole  is  composed  of  minute  and  particular  parts  ; and 
the  whole  depends  upon  these  for  the  harmonious  results  which  are 
constantly  occurring.  It  not  only  constitutes  a system  analogous  to 
Nature,  but  it  contains  the  specific  forces  and  laws  of  procreation. 
Therefore,  Man  is  a representative  of  the  whole  material  Universe; 
and  the  laws  which  he  constantly  develops,  correspond  with  the 
motions  of  matter  and  its  reproducing  effects,  according  to  the  law 
of  Nature.  Man  first  germinates,  until  finally  the  original  Cause 
develops  in  his  maturer  condition,  the  principle  of  spiritual  life; 
while  he,  again,  as  a material  substance,  reproduces  his  like.  Con- 
sequently, he  forms  one  grand  circle  of  united  action.  Naturalists, 
anatomists,  and  physiologists,  are  aware  that  these  general  principles 
are  established  as  irresistible  truths ; and  as  such  they  are  made  to 
subserve  the  purpose  for  which  they  are  here  used. 

Again  : The  geologist  forms  his  speculations  concerning  the  inner 
structure  of  the  earth,  from  the  general  appearance  of  the  external 
surface.  Observing  the  upper  strata,  he  is  led  to  the  conclusion  that 
there  are  corresponding  ones.  And  by  research  and  investigation 
relative  to  the  primitive  formation,  he  penetrates  deeply  into  causes, 
and  the  primitive  condition  of  all  matter ; and  then  reversing  the 
order  of  his  thoughts,  he  traces  primitive  formation  to  the  surface, 
which  is  the  ultimate  development  and  progression  of  the  inner  prin- 
ciple which  the  former  contains.  Therefore,  by  observing  the  va- 
rious strata  and  layers  of  earthy  formation,  and  with  them  the 
remains  of  the  mollusca,  radiata,  articulata,  and  vertebrata  (forms 
and  animals  existing,  which  were  successively  and  gradually  devel- 
oped, accompanying  the  formations  of  rock  in  which  they  are  respec- 
tively found),  he  perceives  that  each  forms  a successive  link,  devel- 
oping from  the  centre  to  the  outside,  various  appearances  and  forms 
which  the  earth  has  produced.  And  at  each  geological  epoch,  there 
are  also  seen  corresponding  productions  of  the  vegetable  and  animal 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


79 


kingdoms.  Geological  investigations  thus  correspond  with  physio- 
logical investigations. 

Then  again,  the  atmosphere  which  surrounds  this  globe  has  cor- 
responding strata  of  formations,  each  one  holding  a position  in  rela 
don  to  the  earth  according  to  its  specific  rarity.  The  earth  possesses 
an  attractive  power  over  the  same,  the  influence  of  which  counteracts 
the  expansive  force,  and  prevents  the  formation  of  an  atmospheric 
connexion  with  the  other  earths  in  existence.  Consequently  the  at- 
mosphere terminates  but  a few  miles  from  the  earth’s  surface.  Hence 
it  forms  strata  or  layers  ; and  each  exerts  a pressure  on  that  which  is 
beneath  it : and  the  whole  produces  a Weight  which  is  confining  to 
every  particle  or  substance  existing  upon  the  surface  of  the  earth. 
Hence  the  geology  of  the  atmosphere  corresponds  with  the  geology 
of  the  earth  ; for  each  contains  strata  equal  to  its  primitive  force  of 
successive  development.  The  whole  consequently  forms  concentric 
circles  of  atmospheric  and  material  formation. 

The  progression  from  the  lower  stages  of  the  radiated  to  the  ver- 
tebrated  animals,  forms  also  a corresponding  circle  of  development. 
And  from  the  lowest  stages  of  the  vertebrated  (or  those  which  possess 
skull  and  lateral  appendages),  to  the  perfect  organization  of  Man, 
forms  another  circle  of  physical  progression.  The  Motion  of  original 
matter  toward  the  Life  existing  in  the  lower  spheres  of  vegetable  and 
animal  existence,  and  to  Sensation  in  Man,  produce  another  circle  or 
chain  of  development  from  internal  to  external.  Motion,  Life,  and 
Sensation,  combined  and  perfected  in  Man,  and  the  purification  of 
matter  as  united  with  these,  forms  a compound  fitted  to  produce  spirit 
individualized.  This  is  the  beautification  of  all  beneath  and  inferior 
to  its  sphere  of  existence ; and  consequently  it  completes  one  united 
chain  or  circle  of  progression,  from  the  germ  of  the  vegetable  exist 
ence,  to  its  own  development.  Therefore  it  is  an  expansion  — an 
opening  of  the  invisible  principles  and  properties  in  existence,  to  an 
ultimate  or  perfect  state. 

Then  Nature  also  must,  of  necessity,  contain  and  form  that  which 
is  analogous  to  what  minimum  particles  contain  and  form.  And  if 
Nature  manifests  one  principle  of  Motion,  Life,  and  Sensation;  one 
law  of  progressive  and  reproductive  development,  — it  must,  of  neces- 
sity, according  to  an  eternal  law,  operate  as  an  effect  or  secondary 
cause,  to  produce  higher  and  more  perfect  spheres  of  material  ex- 
istence. 

It  was  the  object,  then,  for  the  earth  to  gradually  progress  in  its 


80 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


material  perfection  to  produce  plants,  animals,  and  Man.  It  is  also 
the  object  for  Motion,  Life,  and  Sensation,  to  combine  with  the  per- 
fection of  the  former,  to  develop  the  principle  of  inner  life.  Each 
form  and  substance  in  existence,  therefore,  is  constantly  operating  as 
cause,  effect,  and  end ; and  the  object  of  each  is  to  produce  higher 
and  corresponding  results.  So  the  First  or  Great  Positive  Mind 
operates  as  a Cause,  through  Nature  as  an  Effect,  to  produce  Spirit 
as  an  Ultimate. 

Every  palastiological  science,  therefore,  adds  proof  of  the  great 
subject  under  contemplation.  If  Nature  in  a particular  sense  mani- 
fests unchangeable  productions,  having  so  many  and  various  forms, 
complications,  and  correspondences,  does  not  this  amount  to  an  abso- 
lute demonstration  of  her  inherent  and  eternal  operations  in  a general 
process  of  development?  And  as  the  germ  of  the  herb  produces 
body  as  an  effect,  and  seed  as  an  ultimate  ; so  the  Great  Essence  and 
Spiritual  Fountain  of  all  existence,  produces  Nature  as  an  Effect,  and 
Spirit  as  an  Ultimate.  Is  there  not  internal  and  external  evidence 
of  this,  which  transcends  the  mere  force  of  words  to  express  thought? 
Are  there  not  inward  convictions  dwelling  in  the  mind,  corresponding 
to  its  desires  for  a future  and  eternal  state  ? Does  not  the  internal 
constitute  the  substance  of  the  external?  Does  not  Nature,  as  an 
external  Effect,  point  deeply  and  directly  to  the  Internal,  or  Fountain 
of  its  original  production  ? Is  it  not  a chart  whose  various  lines  lead 
directly,  and  with  almost  mathematical  certainty,  to  a future  and 
higher  state?  Do  not  the  inseparable  truths  which  each  science  un- 
folds, constitute  paths  which  terminate  at  one  common  F ocus  ? 

And  man  contains  all  this  evidence  combined  within  his  own  phys- 
ical constitution.  Yet  it  would  be  impossible  for  him,  in  his  present 
sphere  of  existence,  to  have  the  subject  of  a future  life  demonstrated 
to  his  senses.  Therefore,  he  contemplates  Nature  and  her  laws,  as 
invisibly  and  eternally  producing  results  according  to  their  inherent 
qualities  and  forces.  And  yet  the  highest  and  most  important  sub- 
ject, and  the  one  most  desirable  to  comprehend,  is  the  principle,  the 
substance,  the  inward  reality  which  constitutes  the  ultimate  existence 
of  the  contemplator ! 

§ 28.  The  facts  and  phenomena  of  all  the  physical  sciences ; the 
geological  history  of  the  earth  up  to  the  physiological  formation  of 
man  ; and  the  motion,  activity,  and  progression  displayed,  in  all  things, 
afford  abundant  proof  of  the  propositions  established.  The  particu- 


81 


# 

THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 

Iars  and  minutiae  of  these  various  sciences,  and  the  discrepancies  in 
the  opinions  and  hypotheses  of  philosophers  to  which  they  have  given 
rise,  do  not  in  any  case  destroy  the  force  of  general  principles. 
Conclusions  arrived  at  from  the  apparent  indications  of  minutiae  and 
isolated  phenomena  in  Nature,  can  not  alter  the  force  of — can  not 
he  irreconcilable  with — universal  and  established  laws. 

Even  if  research  into  the  'particulars  of  geology  has  given  rise  to 
various  opinions  ; if  each  species  of  rock  or  earthy  formation  contains 
various  species  of  animals,  whereupon  doubts  have  arisen  relative  to 
the  original  uniformity  of  organic  development,  from  the  lowest  to 
the  highest  spheres  ; and  if  marks  of  organized  beings  are  found  only 
in  some  parts  of  the  face  of  Nature  — does  this  alter  the  great  fact 
that  they  all  may  in  general  terms  be  demonstrated  to  have  existed 
in  different  periods  of  time,  corresponding  to  our  previous  proposi- 
tions ? Such  is  the  uniformitarian  theory,  as  it  may  be  termed  ; and 
internal  and  external  evidence  demonstrates  its  truthfulness. 

In  various  parts  of  the  earth,  strata  must  have  been  deposited  which 
are  wanting  in  other  parts  ; for  does  not  Nature,  in  a particular  sense, 
manifest  evidence  of  catastrophic  events  and  occurrences?  Does  it 
not  likewise,  in  a general  sense,  manifest  steady  and  universal  forma- 
tion of  the  various  systems  of  strata?  If,  therefore,  formations  are 
to  be  found  deeper  at  some  places  than  at  others,  does  not  this  prove 
the  action  of  some  particular  and  modifying  circumstance  or  occur- 
rence ? 

These  facts,  particularly  considered,  seem  to  refute  several  opin- 
ions of  geologists  ; but  generalization  establishes  the  principle  of  uni- 
form and  progressive  geological  development.  Hence  the  science 
of  geology  must  be  received  as  true  ; but  its  particular  manifestations 
must  be  regarded  as  having  been  produced  by  local  causes. 

As  particular  conditions  of  the  earth  vary  from  the  general  appear- 
ance, so  do  zoological  formations  present  corresponding  variances. 
But  zoology  generalized , establishes  the  principle  of  uniformity  in 
development.  Geological  formations  present  a correspondence  with 
zoological.  Each  adds  evidence  to  the  great  doctrines  of  universal 
and  eternal  motion,  order,  forms,  species,  associations,  correspon- 
dences, and  still  further  confirms  the  inherent  law  of  progression. 
Also  each  establishes  one  grand  circle  of  inherent  truth  and  external 
evidence. 

A knowledge  of  the  physiology  of  existing  plants  and  vegetables 

6 


82 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


assists  the  mind  greatly  in  properly  comprehending  their  relations  to 
former  forms  in  existence,  and  to  conceive  of  the  spheres  which  it  is 
their  nature  ultimately  to  occupy.  In  observing  the  vegetable  king- 
dom, you  will  notice  particular  parts  which  seemingly  refute  the  gen- 
eral idea  of  progression.  All  plants  have  not  the  same  mode  of  pro- 
gression and  reproduction : and  even  if  the  smallest  vegetable  form 
should  bear  a correspondence  in  a particular  way  to  the  stupendous 
and  massive  oak,  you  would  lose  the  representation  in  a general  and 
universal  point  of  view.  Hence  in  investigating  the  anatomy  and 
physiology  of  the  vegetable  kingdom,  the  basis  upon  which  the  mind 
must  rest  to  arrive  correctly  at  truth,  is  that  of  known  and  universal 
principles  — but  not  'particular  and  seeming  contradictions  which  the 
intricacies  of  this  kingdom  may  sometimes  present  to  the  mind  of  the 
contemplator.  Therefore,  if,  as  a wliole , this  kingdom  presents  regu- 
lar and  corresponding  appearances,  the  connexion  must  not  be  broken 
by  isolated  and  seemingly-conflicting  facts.  But  if  your  contempla 
tions  are  sufficiently  deep,  searching,  and  universal,  when  your  con 
elusions  are  legitimately  induced  from  the  mass  of  physical  facts 
former  deductions  from  scientifics  will  only  serve  to  confirm  them. 
But  if  the  manifestations  are  correctly  and  philosophically  traced, 
they  will  produce  an  harmonious  and  united  mass  of  evidences,  lead- 
ing to  truths  as  pertaining  to  the  future,  and  of  which  the  whole  is  an 
external  representation. 

No  morphological*  theory  can  arise  out  of  a general  and  united 
survey  of  the  whole  arcana  of  Nature.  Morphological  theories  have 
arisen  from  apparent  discrepancies  existing  between  detailed  facts, 
and  from  observing  these  without  reference  to  the  whole.  The  small- 
est plant,  and  the  largest  tree,  present  to  the  generalizing  mind  one 
reflection  and  one  impression  ; while  to  the  mind  which  is  not  capa- 
ble of  receiving  universals,  or  perceiving  the  relations  of  cause  and 
effect,  small  and  large  present  the  appearance  of  disunity,  not  even 
manifesting  a correspondence.  Consequently  the  former  mind  would 
comprehend  Nature  in  her  united  action ; the  latter  would  hold  to 
morphological  opinions,  and  consequently  would  observe  in  Nature 
apparently  illegitimate  productions.  Therefore  he  would  see  no 
steadfast  law,  but  only  repose  and  impulse,  rest  and  activity,  and 
catastrophic  and  irregular  productions.  Hence  the  power  of  indi- 
vidualization and  generalization  in  the  former  can  perceive  no  har- 

• The  word  “morphological”  (whether  entirely  a new  coinage  or  not,  I am  not 
able  to  say)  relates  here  to  a heterogeneous  and  irregular  succession  of  forms. 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


S3 


mony  and  unity  of  action,  but  merely  a chaos  of  universal  confusion 
and  development. 

Is  it  strange,  therefore,  that  theories  based  upon  the  idea  of  chance 
should  have  arisen  ? Is  it  marvellous  that  men  whose  intellects  were 
not  in  a condition  or  sphere  of  general  and  united  comprehension, 
should  not  receive  impressions  of  general  and  eternal  truths  ? Is  it 
a condemnation  to  such  minds  that  they  have  formed  such  theories 
in  reference  to  Nature  and  her  origin  ? For  the  cause  of  such  a the- 
ory being  formed  is  evidently  seen  : it  is  the  want  of  a perfect  organi- 
zation, and  owing  to  the  inferior  state  or  sphere  in  which  its  framer 
exists.  Is  it  not  to  he  expected  that  a person  whose  organization  is 
perfect  in  all  its  parts  ; whose  intellect  is  expansive  and  searching  ; 
whose  aspirations  are  exalted  and  refined — will  produce  theories 
nearer  truth  than  those  in  an  inferior  state  of  spherical  association  ? 

§ 29.  Again  : The  anatomy  of  Man,  as  connected  with  that  of  the 
whole  animal  kingdom,  adds  strength  to  the  chain  of  our  circled  in- 
ductions. The  anatomist,  like  the  geologist,  observes  various  forms 
and  adaptations.  The  form  of  each  joint  shows  original  design,  and 
the  internal  and  external  formation  of  the  bones  demonstrates  the  in- 
tention of  producing  strength,  lightness,  and  beauty,  combined.  He 
sees,  in  the  hollowness  and  cylindrical  form  of  several  of  the  bones, 
a design  to  combine  the  greatest  amount  of  power  with  the  smallest 
amount  of  material. 

As  he  passes  to  the  sacral  bones,  he  there  observes  a basis  and 
support  for  the  lateral  appendages,  and  observes  that  its  form  could 
not  be  dispensed  with,  and  the  same  amount  of  strength  and  action 
be  combined  within  so  small  a compass.  And  proceeding  from  the 
os  coccyx  up  the  spine,  he  observes  twenty-four  different  parts  united 
in  one  column,  combining  strength  with  beauty.  Reflection  discov- 
ers the  purpose  of  such  a formation.  Between  each  part  or  bone  are 
spaces  or  intervertebral  substances,  the  object  of  which  is  to  give 
elasticity  to  the  whole  column,  and  to  adapt  it  to  sustain  with  ease 
and  comfort  the  cranium,  with  other  connected  parts.  Again,  if  the 
spine  were  straight  and  immoveable,  the  body  could  not  perform  the 
necessary  movements.  Nor  could  it  sustain  the  same  amount  of 
weight ; for  the  slightest  incidental  inclination  would  disunite  the 
column. 

The  adaptation  is  otherwise  manifestly  perfect : for  the  whole  col- 
umn possesses  twenty-four  distinct  springs.  Consequently  all  the 


84 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


parts  unite  in  performing  one  motion,  and  are  necessary  to  the  great 
whole,  characterizing  it  with  strength,  elasticity,  beauty,  and  use- 
fulness. 

* 

Finally,  the  anatomy  of  the  human  body,  and  also  that  of  the  infe- 
rior species  of  the  animal  kingdom,  teach  this  grand  and  important 
truth  — original  and  eternal  design  ! These  things  are  inimitable  by 
artificial  skill  ! No  means  have  yet  been  conceived  of  by  the  human 
mind,  to  combine  within  so  small  a space  the  same  amount  of  power, 
and  the  same  variety  of  motion,  which  the  anatomical  structure  of 
man  and  of  the  inferior  species  clearly  manifest.  Hence  the  great  sat- 
isfaction which  the  true  and  comprehensive  anatomist  derives  from 
his  studies.  In  this  science  he  contemplates  all  things  previously 
existing  — still  further,  the  original  Cause  and  perfect  Designer  of  all 
material  and  physical  existences  ! An  internal  conviction  is  pro- 
duced in  his  mind  that  there  is  an  inherent  and  necessarily  intelli- 
gent Principle  existing  ; because,  from  the  lowest  point  of  unpro- 
gressed Nature  to  the  anatomical  structure  of  the  animal  kingdom 
and  man,  he  perceives  a united  chain  of  harmonious  development, 
displaying  the  principles  of  order  and  progression,  and  exhibiting  an 
adaptation  of  all  parts  to  produce  a perfect  system.  And  his  field  of 
reflection  is  too  broad,  too  comprehensive,  not  to  lead  him  to  the 
conclusion  that  there  will  be  a corresponding  and  ultimate  perfection 
of  the  same  principles  which  he,  in  the  sphere  of  anatomy,  contem- 
plates as  an  original  production  of  the  Great  Positive  Mind ! 

The  true  anatomist,  therefore,  will  not  detail  and  particularize  the 
parts  of  the  whole,  if  the  desire  is  to  arrive  at  general  principles  ; 
but  he  will  investigate  the  parts  as  composing  the  whole,  and  the 
whole  as  composed  of  the  various  parts,  — and  will  observe  the  true 
and  leading  principles  exemplified,  as  corresponding  with  those  gov- 
erning the  great  framework  of  Nature. 

The  physiologist,*  if  he  correctly  investigates  the  laws  of  the  hu- 
man system,  and  of  the  animal  kingdom,  will  observe  the  same  inter- 
changing and  transmutation  of  all  living  particles  throughout  the  whole 
animal  economy — a constant  and  universal  absorption  and  exhalation, 
a universal  order  and  harmony  as  pervading  the  organs  of  the  body. 

•The  speaker  here  remarked  parenthetically  as  follows  : £:  I am  compelled  to  use 
circumlocution  in  examining  the  various  sciences  ; to  induce  various  conclusions  to 
form  one  conclusion,  and  to  plainly  bring  the  subject  to  one  mind  by  one  process  of 
reasoning,  and  the  same  to  other  minds  by  a different  process,  — so  that  the  truths 
may  be  confirmed  to  the  different  mental  organizations  which  may  peruse  the  contents 
of  this  work.” 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


85 


The  minute  changing  in  Nature  is  not  the  rule  by  which  general 
truths  may  be  harmonized.  The  consideration  that  all  Motion,  Life, 
and  Sensation,  subsist  as  dependent  upon  every  part,  leads  to  uni- 
versal principles, — thus  to  the  idea  of  existing  harmony.  The  true 
physiologist  observes  that  the  lowest  form  of  life  passes  from  its 
sphere,  in  other  forms,  through  each  stage  of  animal  existence,  until 
it  becomes  fitted  for  the  nourishment  of  the  human  form.  He  ob- 
serves and  contemplates  this  as  a progressive  fluctuation  of  animal 
life  toward  higher  spheres  of  perfection.  Also,  this  forms  one  united 
circle  of  assimilation  of  lower  with  higher  substances,  and  conse- 
quently adds  to  the  whole  united  mass  of  living  species  and  beings 
universally  existing,  depending  upon  the  interchange  of  these  parti- 
cles to  sustain  their  original  forms,  and  also  to  constantly  reproduce 
new  systems  at  different  periods  of  time,  as  determined  by  the  per- 
fection, influx,  and  reflux  of  animal  matter. 

Hence  the  Whole,  in  a broad  and  comprehensive  sense,  is  neces- 
sary to  the  mutual  and  perpetual  action  of  all  particles,  which  leads 
to  the  perfection  of  matter  and  fits  it  to  sustain  the  physiological 
structure,  symmetry,  and  beauty  of  the  whole  animal  kingdom.  This 
represents  Nature  in  all  spheres  of  anterior  production  and  procrea- 
tion. It  bears  a correspondence  to  the  teachings  of  every  other  sci- 
ence,— and  distinctly  points  to  the  original  Focus  and  Fountain  of 
Spiritual  Intelligence  which  is  thus  universally  manifested. 

Each  palsetiological  science,  therefore,  in  its  general  application, 
confirms  the  internal  and  external  harmony  and  unity  of  Nature’s  mo- 
tions, as  leading  to  perfection  in  all  its  parts  ; and  from  the  smallest 
and  internal  circle,  and  the  remotest  period  of  primitive  existence,  is 
constantly  observed  a perpetual  progression  and  development.  F rom 
minimum  points  Nature  expands  in  comprehension  of  beings  and 
substances,  until  there  is  an  infinite  expansion  of  all  particles,  and  of 
united  circles  of  life  and  activity.  For  as  the  whole  is  a Vortex  of 
reproducing  causes,  the  ultimate  must  bear  a correspondence  to  the 
eternal  Fountain  or  internal  Vortex  of  external  development! 

§ 30.  Among  the  many  inquirers  into  the  principles  of  Nature, 
there  is  none  who  holds  a more  conspicuous  place,  and  whose  expe- 
rience is  more  useful,  than  the  true  mechanic.  To -him  are  due  the 
many  inventions  which  have  from  time  to  time  been  produced,  and 
the  development  of  the  wonderful  powers  which  have  been  found  as 
contained  in  substances  thought  to  be  almost  immaterial.  Electric 


86 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


and  magnetic  forces  have  been  constantly  producing  and  reproducing 
the  smallest  particles  which  are  distinctly  seen  undergoing  changes 
constantly.  They  not  only  produce  life  and  motion  in  all  forms,  but 
the  powerful  action  of  the  muscular  fibre  of  the  animal  creation,  is 
produced  thereby.  By  this  means  certain  animals  are  enabled  to  lift 
an  immense  weight,  and  to  draw  many  tons ; while  without  it  they 
could  not  exhibit  any  muscular  manifestations.  The  motion  existing 
among  all  forms,  spheres,  and  planets,  can  be  legitimately  traced  to 
the  omnipotent  power  which  is  contained  within  these  principles. 

And  water,  also,  has  been  observed  to  pass  into  an  unparticled  and 
rarified  form.  In  the  dew-drop,  and  in  the  broadest  ocean,  constant 
evaporation  and  refinement  of  this  element  is  taking  place.  But  not 
until  lately  was  discovered  the  energetic  power  that  existed  in  the 
expansion  of  watery  vapor.  But  now  such  power  is  employed  for 
practical  purposes,  though  it  is  not  yet  fully  developed.  The  prog- 
ress of  knowledge  in  these  principles  has  been  corresponding  to 
their  outward,  physical  manifestations.  The  power  of  steam  was  at 
one  time  unknown  and  disbelieved ; and  those  minds,  who  by  un- 
wearied research  became  internally  convinced  of  the  existence  of  such 
a power,  and  openly  expressed  their  convictions,  did  not  escape  the 
charge  of  fanaticism.  Visible  and  ocular  demonstrations  have  at 
length  convinced  the  skeptic  and  the  world,  that  there  is  an  inherent 
pow'er  contained  in  water  unparticled ; but  how  much,  and  to  what 
extent  it  may  be  applied,  is  not  yet  known. 

Did  it  not  originally  require  the  same  amount  of  argument  to  con- 
vince the  understanding  that  such  a principle  and  power  existed,  as 
it  requires  to  convince  the  mind  of  a similar  principle  as  existing  in 
other  rarified  and  unparticled  matter?  The  first  allows  evident  proof; 
the  latter  does  not  admit  of  the  same.  For  the  latter  is  the  highest 
and  most  perfect  condition  of  all  things  existing ; while  the  former  is 
a mere  subordinate  and  mechanical  development,  — notwithstanding 
it  corresponds  with  the  inherent  principle  that  constitutes  the  reality 
of  all  things. 

Inventions,  then,  are  mere  imitations  of  Nature,  and  applications 
of  principles  therein  contained.  Nature,  in  a mechanical  respect,  is 
acting  in  a perfect  way ; while  man’s  inventions  are  but  an  imperfect 
representation  of  the  same.  Consequently,  there  is  no  invention  — 
no  creation  of  pr  inciples — no  forming  originally  what  has  not  primi- 
tively existed. 

The  most  perfect  telescope,  now  about  being  constructed,  and 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


87 


through  the  instrumentality  of  which  other  planets  and  spheres  will 
become  still  more  visible,  and  their  physical  condition  more  distinctly 
apparent,  is,  with  all  its  perfection  of  formation,  and  the  millions  of 
particles  which  compose  it,  only  an  imitation  of  the  principles 
involved  in  the  human  eye!  Yet  the  latter  in  its  construction,  and 
in  the  principles  on  which  it  acts,  is  of  itself  an  emblem  of  original 
and  eternal  Design.  The  whole  forms  an  instrument  combining 
beauty  and  usefulness.  It  is  not  yet  properly  imitated  by  this  great 
and  wonderful  telescope,  which  is  now  about  to  be  developed  on 
corresponding  principles. 

The  true  mechanic  receives  his  lessons  from  Nature,  in  each  of 
which  he  discovers  his  inability  more  than  partially  to  imitate  the 
principles  therein  manifested  : and  when  forces  are  combined  and 
developed  in  the  various  machines  which  he  constructs,  he  only  finds 
them  to  be  an  imitation  of  some,  great  principle  which  Nature  origi- 
nally and  eternally  contained.  And  if  his  inquiries  are  first  to  know 
the  laws  and  principles  existing  in  Nature,  his  action  next  will  be  to 
apply  the  same  mechanical  principles,  only  in  an  inferior  degree  of 
magnitude;  and  thus  he  avails  himself  of  the  usefulness  of  such 
seeming  inventions.  And  when  observing  Nature  as  a Whole, 
operating  in  her  various  parts  on  mechanical  principles,  all  his  rea- 
sonings and  inventions  will  be  of  a corresponding  character.  And  if 
he  did  not  soar  too  soon  from  the  surrounding  and  visible  manifesta- 
tions of  these  potent  principles,  to  the  origin  of  motion  in  the  centre 
of  the  planetary  system,  -lie  would  receive  more  truth  and  light  upon 
these  subjects,  by  properly  understanding  that  which  is  around  him. 
But  desiring  to  be  free  from  external  intrusions  and  interruptions, 
which  his  connexion  with  the  world  subjects  him  to,  he  vainly 
attempts  to  shut  all  the  senses  which  connect  him  with  such,  and  in 
this  state  of  abstraction,  while  the  internal  principle  takes  unto  itself, 
as  it  were,  similar  senses,  'he  endeavors  to  associate  with  a higher 
sphere  of  material  existence.  Not  satisfied  with  the  general  and 
minute  representations  of  Nature  that  are  around  him,  he,  with  the 
internal  principle,. views  higher  spheres,  for  the  purpose  of  investi- 
gating the  laws  which  govern  their  perpetual  motion  and  activity. 
Hence,  theories  and  hypotheses  innumerable  have  been  produced, 
merely  because  abstract  reasoning  can  not  be  perfect,  while  the  intel- 
lect is  still  connected  with  its  original  tenement,  and  because  men 
have  not  reasoned  correspondentially  from  principles  which  are 
abundantly  existing  around,  above,  and  within  them. 


ss 


TIIE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


The  phenomenon  known  as  gravitation  is  universally  observed 
Why  not,  then,  investigate  the  cause  of  gravitation  ? And  by  cor- 
rectly understanding  this,  you  would  establish  the  true  theory  of  all 
other  and  corresponding  manifestations  throughout  the  planetary 
system.  Many  disquisitions  have  been  given  to  the  world,  relative 
to  the  fact  of  gravitation,  but  none  particularly  explaining  the  cause 
of  the  phenomenon.  It  is  well,  therefore,  not  to  pass  above  or 
beyond  immediately  surrounding  manifestations,  until  you  have 
become  thoroughly  convinced  of  the  inherent  properties  and  princi- 
ples which  cause  such.  

§ 31.  Mechanical  principles,  therefore,  constitute  the  united  action 
and  forces  of  Nature:  and  by  and  through  these,  the  true  mechanic 
receives  his  unchangeable  instructions.  And  by  following  these  as 
he  has  done-,  he  gradually  develops  the  principles  contained  in  them 
as  invisible  and  universal.  Also,  each  motion,  from  the  curvilinear 
to  the  spiral  (the  only  motions  which  he  knows  as  existing,  but  which 
have  eternally  existed  in  Nature),  have  been  isolatedly  manifested  in 
the  various  machines  which  he  has  seemingly  invented.  And  having 
the  various  forces  and  motions  concentrated  in  a small  space,  he  for 
the  time  being  loses  the  thought  that  his  invention  is  a mere  imitation 
of  Nature’s  original  laws,  and  feels  a self-elevation  in  contemplating 
the  great  and  inimitable  production,  of  the  creation  of  which  he  feels 
he  was  the  cause.  But  by  reflection,  he  observes  that  Nature  and 
her  inherent  principles,  are  only  developed  and  made  manifest  in  his 
contrivance.  And  by  having  his  contemplations  extended  through- 
out the  various  parts  of  creation,  in  reference  to  the  Whole  as  a 
reflection  of  each  part,  he  quiets  the  ambitious  principle  within  him 
by  the  consolatory  feeling  that  what  he  has  seemingly  created,  was 
established  by  the  eternal  design  of  the  First  Cause  or  Positive 
Mind  ! As  these  principles  are  all  impressed  indelibly  in  Nature,  he 
feels  that  a correct  knowledge  of  them  leads  to  corresponding  truths: 
and  the  first  idea  of  original  design  impresses  the  mind  with  a Final 
Cause.  And  if  they  exist  in  one  particle  in  Nature,  or  if  they  are 
(as  they  are  acknowledged  to  be)  spread  throughout  Nature,  and  are 
manifest  in  all  her  movements,  they  must  be  of  necessity  eternal 
principles ; and  when  developed,  they  correspond  to  intellectual 
progression  ; and  that  progression  with  the  conviction  of  the  mind’s 
eternal  existence  ; and  which  conviction,  when  properly  developed 
in  the  mind,  leads  to  all  corresponding  truths. 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


89 


A law  can  not  be  different  in  different  parts  of  the  Universe  ; and 
when  you  properly  understand  the  cause  of  gravitation  in  a small 
substance  or  particle  visible,  you  may  know  that  the  same  cause 
produces  corresponding  effects  in  every  other  state  of  material 
existence.  * 

The  principles  of  Nature  (as  now  manifest),  and  the  laws  and 
forces  of  mechanics,  are  a progression  of  the  inherent  properties  and 
essences  primitively  contained  in  all  things.  The  true  mechanic 
looks  through  Nature,  and  obtains  a conviction  of  its  primitive  and 
original  condition : and  also  from  Nature  forward  and  upward, 
through  the  Spheres  of  future  and  eternal  progression,  and  spiritual 
development.  If  he  has  not  a comprehension,  he  has  still  an  irre- 
sistible conviction , of  these  things.  He  observes  cause,  effect,  and 
end,  in  all  things.  He  can  contemplate  the  state  which  the  natural 
progress  of  all  things  tends  to  develop.  Original  design  is  not  man- 
ifested, without  means  to  produce  an  end.  He  arrives  at  the  con- 
clusion that  there  can  not  be  too  much  activity  nor  too  much  rest ; 
that  there  can  not  be  illegitimate  or  catastrophic  productions,  as 
arising  from  the  general  law  and  motions  of  Nature.!  He  will  not 
take  the  details  and  minutias  for  general  and  universal  truths. 

The  contemplation,  the  reflection,  the  experience,  therefore,  which 
the  rational  mechanic  derives  from  Nature,  adds  one  other  link  to 
our  chain  of  palsetiological  science,  and  to  the  great  circle  of  uni- 
versal truth.  , 

Thus  mathematical  and  mechanical  instruments  have  been  pro- 
duced ; and  they  have  afforded  means  by  which  new  truths  could 
be  developed.  The  principles  of  Nature  give  lessons  to  the  searcher 

*By  way  of  note  it  was  here  observed  by  the  speaker,  that  although  perpetual  mo- 
tion is  an  inherent  principle  of  Nature,  yet  of  necessity  man  could  not  imitate  it  by  any 
mechanical  construction  or  process.  It  had  been  already  remarked,  that  “ no  principle 
contained  within  itself  the  power  of  self-investigation”  — that  spirit,  for  instance,  can 
not  comprehend  spirit.  Now  man  is  of  himself  a perpetual  motion;  it  is  this  that 
investigates ; and  the  production  of  perpetual  motion  by  him,  would  involve  the  prin- 
ciple of  self-investigation  or  comprehension. 

fit  was  here  remarked  incidentally  by  the  speaker,  that  catastrophes,  or  irregular 
impulses  of  Nature,  were  by  some  thought  to  account  for  the  production  of  man  and 
other  living  beings;  but  that  this  can  not  be  true,  according  to  principles  previously 
laid  down.  The  harmony  existing  between  the  various  parts  of  the  organic  king- 
doms, and  their  development  according  to  the  precise  order  of  a graduated  progression, 
preclude  the  idea  of  any  irregular  or  paroxysmal  efforts  of  Nature  being  engaged  in 
their  production.  The  generals  of  this  subject  will  be  understood  by  perusing  the 
author’s  theory  of  creation,  as  it  is  progressively  unfolded  in  the  sequel. 


90 


TI-IE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


into  their  essential  constituents,  which  are  of  immense  value.  Yet 
there  are  instruments  by  which  principles  have  been  found  to  be 
existing,  which  were  before  unknown.  These  have  been  useful  in 
the  investigation  of  the  inherent  properties  of  Matter  and  Motion, 
besides  in  the  developing  of  mechanical  laws.  And  thus  Nature 
and  her  general  principles  are  made  to  yield  to  man  the  internal  evi- 
dence of  external  truth.  He  can  see  an  absolute  display  of  Nature’s 
laws  in  every  form  and  particle  of  material  existence.  He  can 
observe  the  close  connexion  and  inherent  sympathy  existing  between 
all  particles  that  compose  the  fabric  of  the  universe.  No  being  is  in 
a condition  or  sphere  of  association  with  more  inherent  truth  than 
the  true. . mechanic.  He  can  see  the  inherent  properties  of  every 
production  of  his  hand,  contained  in  Nature:  and  when  reflecting 
that  his  invention  is  but  a mere  facsimile  of  Nature,  he  rejoices  in 
the  inward  conviction  that  the  Fountain  of  Nature  is  overflowing 
with  truths  which  are  gradually  assuming  new  forms,  according  to 
their  specific  character,  in  order  to  present  themselves  in  a more 
perfect  state  of  progressive  existence.  He  feels  the  inward  convic- 
tion, from  the  evidence  of  external  truths,  that  Nature  is  inexhaust- 
ible ; and  that  what  is  required  is  for  him  to  continue  his  precise  and 
indefatigable  researches,  not  with  a previous  bias  of  mind,  but  with 
a freedom  to  receive  any  conclusions  which  a reasonable  amount  of 
evidence  may  establish.  He  sets  no  limits  to  the  expanse  of  thought. 
He  establishes  no  belief  until  he  is  forced  by  the  preponderance  of 
evidence  impressed  upon  the  internal  understanding.  He  observes 
all  laws  as  tending  to  a state  of  ultimate  perfection ; and  through  the 
same  laws  he  casts  reflection  back,  and  contemplates  the  original, 
intelligent,  Organizer  of  the  Universe  ! 

Such  mechanical  investigations  are  of  too  deep  and  rational  a na- 
ture to  permit  superficial  or  external  appearances  to  divert  the  mind 
from  internal  and  ultimate  conclusions.  The  inductions  carry  the 
mind  back  from  each  effect  to  its  original  cause ; and  each  cause, 
being  an  effect  of  a cause  still  anterior,  the  intimations  of  uninter- 
rupted causation  which  are  seen  in  all  the  corresponding  sciences, 
carry  the  reasoner  back  to  the  First,  Original,  Positive  Principle, 
which  he  can  not  but  believe  is  the  very  essence  of  perfect  intelli- 
gence. And  then  he  can  see  a design  in  all  forms  presented  to  the 
senses.  But  can  he  confine  his  belief  to  these  points  ? And  is  he  not 
forced  to  believe  that  which  is  to  be?  For  the  First  and  Last  are 
constantly  demonstrated  in  Nature.  Organizations  and  forms  are 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


91 


constantly  being  reproduced : disorganization  and  dqcay  are  seemingly 
the  counterpart  of  life, — but  in  reality  are  only  the  process  of  meta- 
morphosis from  the  first  sphere  to  some  other  state  of  progression. 
Hence  the  disorganized  being  appears  in  a new  form — is  organized 
in  new.spheres — but  still  is  a continuation  of  its  previous  inherent 
properties.  It  is  also  fitted  for  a new  work,  in  which  there  is  a man- 
ifest design  to  form  some  part  corresponding  to  other  parts  of  the 
whole  Fabric  of  Nature.  Life  and  death  in  any  particles,  are  not 
opposite  to  each  other ; but  the  first  must  exist  to  produce  the  last : 
the  last  must  occur  to  reproduce  and  continue  the  progression  of  the 
former. 


$ 32.  Each  form,  therefore,  is  constantly  passing  through  an  end- 
less succession  of  spheres,  in  order  to  associate  and  correspond  with 
the  particles  and  essences  that  compose  its  original  nature.  And 
when  the  mechanic  observes  all  these  appearances,  which  are  con- 
stantly developing  themselves  with  accompanying  principles  of  life 
and  activity,  he  has  the  consolation  of  knowing  that  these  all  operate 
upon  eternal  mechanical  law.  And  as  developments  in  Nature  be- 
come visible,  he  observes  that  all  principles  which  are  gradually 
evolved  from  the  internal,  are  manifest  in  proportion  to  the  perfection 
of  the  substance,  form,  and  instrument,  through  which  each  motion 
and  law  is  made  visible.  His  experience  corresponds  with  truths 
established  in  other  sciences.- — And  the  whole  confirms  the  proposi- 
tions that  have  been  established  : That  there  is  a constant  and  uni- 
versal motion  existing  in  matter,  as  an  essential  property  of  its  nature  ; 
that  it  is  continually  (and  must  of  necessity  be)  -progressive  ; and  that 
it  also  reproduces  forms  by  virtue  of  the  inherent  properties  of  its 
nature,  and  that  each  assumes  a degree  and  species  and  consequent 
peculiar  association : that  these  are  the  production  of  Matter , and 
Life  and  Sensation  the  production  of  Motion  ; that  the  continuation 
and  perfection  of  the  two  principles  conjoined,  compose  Man  as  an 
Ultimate  ; and  that  man  is  composed  of  particles  and  essences  of  all 
things  else  existing. 

Consequently  all  below  man  must,  of  necessity,  enter  into  the  com- 
position of  his  being.  The  perfection  of  his  material  organization 
(including  all  the  essences  which  have  originally  become  refined  to 
associate  with  the  same  parts  of  matter)  produces,  as  a specific  ulti- 
mate, the  principle  of  Intelligence.  The  ultimate  of  this,  correspond- 
ing with  all  other  progression,  composes  Spirit  individualized . And 


92 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


according  to  the  eternal  impetus  which  this  first  received,  it  ascends 
through  new  spheres  of  existence,  corresponding  to  that  which  it  pre- 
viously occupied  ; and  also  represents  the  universal  perfection  and 
refinement  of  all  parts  as  becoming  unparticled,  — and  which  then, 
like  spirit,  form  a counterpart  to  material  progression. 

Hence  the  whole  develops  the  science  of  correspondences.  It 
proves  the  concentric  movements  of  all  Nature  ; it  establishes  the  fact 
that  the  reality  of  all  external  things  is  existing  in  an  invisible  condi- 
tion, and  that  forms  are  but  the  constant  manifestations  of  their  inward 
reality.  And  the  mechanic  feels  these  laws  to  be  associated  with  his 
mind  as  Truth  is  associated  with  Nature.  Consequently  he  can 
also  appreciate  and  realize  the  internal  truth  which  Nature  openly 
manifests. 

This  all  recalls  to  mind  the  sublime  and  established  truth,  That 
the  Cause  is  using  Nature  as  an  Effect,  to  produce  Spirit  as  an 
Ultimate ! 

The  Original  Cause  of  all  things  must  produce  Ultimates  to  corre- 
spond with  its  own  nature.  If  the  First  is  perfect,  the  End  must  be 
also.  If  the  first  Essence  is  progressive  in  its  nature,  its  Ultimate 
must  be  the  same.  If  the  original  F ountain  was  Supreme  Intelli- 
gence by  nature,  it  must  produce  intelligence  as  a legitimate  result. 
If  the  First  was  divinely  pure,  the  Ultimate  must  be  the  same  in  all 
its  specific  qualities.  If  the  First  was  eternal , the  Ultimate  must  be 
equally  so.  If  the  Original,  Positive  Mind  — the  Germ  — the  intel- 
ligent Organizer  of  material  and  universal  Nature  — contains  within 
itself  all  the  perfection  of  beauty  and  intelligence,  infinitely  beyond 
the  comprehension  of  finite  beings,  must  not  the  Ultimate,  the  spirit 
of  man,  of  necessity,  be  in  harmony  therewith  in  all  its  specific 
essences  and  qualities  ? Must  it  not,  as  a legitimate  offspring  of  the 
Great  Omnipotent  Productor,  be  correspondingly  pure  and  divine? 

If  Nature,  in  any  of  her  chains  of  visible  production,  contradicts 
any  general  principle  of  this  conclusion,  then  the  mind  is  not  called 
upon  to  respond  to  the  teachings  of  her  immutable  laws  as  producing 
from  the  internal,  external  effects.  If  the  germ  of  a plant,  of  an  ani- 
mal, of  any  reproducing  form  or  sphere  in  Nature,  produces  an  ulti- 
mate unlike  itself,  then  you  may  reasonably  conclude  that  the  seed 
or  ultimate  is  contaminated  in  the  process  of  passing  from  inward  to 
outward  spheres.  But  it  is  evident  that  the  seed  (or  ultimate  of  the 
original  germ)  has  assumed  a more  perfect  sphere  of  existence.  It 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


93 


has  not  become  more  pure  or  refined  in  its  qualities  and  essences ; 
but  it  has  ascended  to  an  ultimate  sphere  of  a nature  corresponding 
to  its  first,  and  exists  in  the  beauty  and  freshness  of  its  newly-assumed 
condition.  Hence,  though  not  intrinsically  more  perfect,  it  is  more 
Beautiful  and  reproductive.  Consequently  spirit,  individualized  from  ' 
the  Germ  of  an  eternal  existence,  through  the  instrumentality  of  Na- 
ture and  Man,  has  become  like  the  Primitive  Essence,  only  progressed 
by  its  internal  freshness  of  beauty  and  refinement.  Hence  it  bears  the 
impress  and  contains  all  the  essential  properties  of  the  Original  Source ! 
It  is  divine,  pure,  intelligent : it  of  necessity  must  be  so,  because  it 
is  a legitimate  Termination,  an  Ultimate,  an  entity  composed  of  the 
substance,  the  particles,  the  inherent  qualities,  which  were  contained 
in  the  Great  Spiritual  F ountain.  Therefore  its  nature  is  inexhausti- 
ble, perfect,  and  refined,  — generating  intelligence  of  a progressive, 
identical  nature,  equal  to  its  combined  essences  as  originally  con- 
tained in  the  Vortex  in  which  existed  the  Great,  Omnipotent,  Posi- 
tive Mind  ! 

Spirit  may  be  considered  as  a negative  result,  but  it  is  no  less  pure 
no  less  perfect,  on  that  account.  It  is  what  the  First  was  : it  will 
be  what  the  First  is.  And  here  again  the  mind  is  internally  im- 
pressed with  the  truthfulness  of  that  eternal  chain  of  cause  and 
effect ! 


■$>  33.  The  meditations  and  experience  of  the  true  artist  are 
too  valuable,  and  of  too  convincing  a nature,  to  be  here  disregarded. 
And  by  noticing  them,  there  will  be  no  less  good  done  than  appeal- 
ing to  his  reflections,  and  conveying  to  him  an  internal  confirmation 
of  the  principles  heretofore  discussed.  As  his  associations  are  with 
Nature  and  her  developments,  deep  and  truthful  impressions  must  of 
necessity  be  made  upon  his  mind  thereby.  Even  the  laws  of  art  are 
in  accordance  with  Nature,  and  coincide  with  all  general  principles 
which  are  correct  and  infallibly  true  ; and  these  laws  point  him  to  the 
magnitude  and  beauty  of  Nature’s  general  and  detailed  manifestations. 
His  associations  are  worth  more  than  they  are  supposed  to  be  by  the 
mass  of  other  researchers  in  the  various  departments  of  science  to 
which  we  have  alluded.  The  manifestations  of  Nature  are  by  him 
constantly  intended  to  be  impressed  upon  the  understanding,  so  that 
these  may  answer  as  symbols  and  types,  shadowing  forth  to  the  mind 
the  internal  and  invisible  causes.  And  as  all  scientific  investigations 
are  based  upon  the  appearances  of  things,  so  likewise  is  the  deep 


94 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


meditation  of  the  true  and  profound  artist  based  upon  such  appear- 
ances. And  the  innumerable  processes  by  which  he  has  explored 
the  many  parts  and  avenues  of  Nature,  bring  convictions  to  his  mind 
corresponding  to  the  conclusions  drawn  from  all  paltetiological  sci- 
ences ; and  as  these  convictions  emanate  from  the  Source  of  all  true 
and  correct  impressions,  they  should  be,  and  are  received. 

It  is  not  because  bis  pursuit  tends  to  soften  and  refine  the  feelings 
of  his  nature  ; it  is  not  that  it  has  such  an  overwhelming  and  subdu- 
ing influence  upon  all  his  actions  and  internal  desires  — that  I here 
call  up  his  meditations  and  experience  : but  it  is  because  it  pertains 
to  the  source,  the  fountain,  the  manifestation  of  all  things  in  the  ma- 
terial landscape  of  existence,  and  because  his  communion  with  these 
things  conveys  truths  at  once  subduing  and  convincing — and  which 
truths  are  beyond  the  conception  of  any  class  of  mankind  who  do  not 
associate  with  the  same  things  which  he  is  compelled  to  associate 
with.  His  main  desire  and  effort  is  to  copy  or  imitate  the  general 
appearance  of  that  which  is  before  him.  He  feels  that  in  doing  this, 
he  accomplishes  a great  work,  merely  because  it  is  based  upon  that 
which  is  inexhaustible.  lie  feels  that  Nature  contains  all  the  varie- 
gated scenes  and  manifestations  which  he  would  fain  grasp  and  famil- 
iarly develop.  He  also  is  impressed  with  the  thought  that  all  his 
efforts  are  to  develop  that  which  is  internally  and  externally  manifest 
to  his  senses.  He  feels  also,  in  recalling  the  experience  of  the  effect 
of  that  which  he  has  previously  accomplished,  that  it  is  to  him  like 
the  machine  to  the  mechanic  — an  imitation , an  outward  development 
of  that  which  is  internally  existing. 

In  analyzing  the  laws  of  colors,  he  arrives  legitimately  at  the  con- 
clusion that  the  five  or  seven*  original  colors  can  be,  and  are,  evolved 
from  one  ; that  that  contains  within  itself  the  properties  and  qualities 
from  which  all  other  distinct  reflections  may  be  unfolded.  He  also 
is  aware  that  these  colors  may  be  produced  and  reproduced  accord- 
ing as  there  are  instruments,  agents,  or  substances,  through  which 
they  may  be  manifested.  It  is  owing  to  the  developments  which 
Nature  is  constantly  producing  and  reproducing,  that  these  various 
colors  are  unfolded.  Light,  as  originally  and  universally  existing, 
contained  the  specific  essences  and  attributes  which  are  contained  in 
the  various  colors  as  they  are  at  present  distinguished  and  classified. 
And  each  of  these  colors  was  revealed  according  as  suitable  outward 

* The  lecturer  wished  it  stated  that  it  was  not  his  intention  here  to  discuss  or  inti- 
mate the  actual  number  of  primitive  colors. 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


95 


instruments  were  developed.  All  of  this  teaches  him  the  undeniable 
and  important  truth,  that  the  Original  contained  undeveloped  that 
which  exists  in  present  forms,  and  that  all  which  does  thus  exist  is 
owing  to  the  progressive  principle  which  is  inherent  and  eternal. 
Then  by  these  deep,  solemn,  and  irresistible  convictions,  he  per- 
ceives the  connexion  which  he  sustains  with  all  other  existences. 
He  also  feels  the  conclusion  pressing  with  redoubled  force,  that  Na- 
ture and  her  manifestations  are  leading  to  a higher  and  correspond- 
ing Sphere,  to  which  it  is  his  constant  desire  and  aspiration  to  attain. 
These  correspondences  are  to  him  a mediator  — a fulcrum  — upon 
which  his  accumulated  knowledge  and  experience  performs  its  vari- 
ous operations  : for  they  are  not  only  established  by  that  which  is 
demonstrated  to  the  senses,  but  they  afford  as  deep  and  convincing 
proof  of  the  invisible  and  real  Reality. 

Back  of  Nature,  he  silently  contemplates  the  Cause  which  pro- 
duced this  theatre  of  human  existence ; and  with  the  highest  rever- 
ence for  truths  pertaining  thereunto,  he  can  almost  associate  with  the 
* first  Principle  of  Life  and  activity  ! His  aspirations  are  purely  of  an 
intellectual  and  moral  character,  intending  his  highest  and  best  pro- 
ductions as  a familiar  development  of  that  which  Nature  so  vividly 
manifests.  And  when  contemplating  that  which  he  has  produced, 
there  is  an  exalted  and  elated  thought  which  forces  itself  upon  his  mind 
(and  which  is  altogether  imaginary),  that  he  has  created  something 
which  Nature  does  not  contain.  But  in  observing  the  many  forms 
and  substances  which  are  constantly  developing  and  reflecting  new 
truths  to  his  mind,  he  recognises  something  infinitely  surpassing  that 
which  he  vainly  supposed  to  be  created  by  his  skill. 

Then,  again,  the  draught  of  Nature  suggests  to  his  mind  that  she 
contains  inherent  truths  ; for  in  viewing  his  production,  the  impression 
is  called  up  that  Nature  nowhere  presents  a parallel.  Thus,  at  sec- 
ond-thought, his  picture  loses  its  intrinsic  beauty  ; and  the  exalted 
imagination  which  created  it  proves  to  be  as  evanescent  as  the  colors 
of  the  eastern  sky  when  tinged  by  the  innumerable  reflections  of  the 
horizon.  F or  as  his  imagination  is  excited  upon  subjects  distinct 
from  his  production,  a change,  corresponding  to  the  change  of 
thoughts,  takes  place  in  the  appearance  of  the  latter.  For  Nature, 
with  a renewed  reflection,  impresses  his  mind  with  more  intrinsic 
truth  than  is  represented  in  his  imitation,  which  is  of  so  shadowy  and 
evanescent  a character. 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


96  ' 

§ 34.  All  the  imitations  or  types  of  the  appearances  and  substances 
existing  around  him  then,  are  merely  a developing  of  original  truths 
in  a familiar  manner,  so  that  he  may  associate  moie  closely  with  that 
which  it  was  his  constant  desire  and  intention  to  produce.  Being 
convinced  of  this  truth,  he  does  not  strain  his  mental  and  physical 
powers  to  outdo  or  misrepresent  that  which  is  before  him,  but  he  is 
contented  if  his  production  is  a facsimile  of  that  which  does  constant- 
ly develop  itself  to  the  senses.  His  occupation  also  tends  to  impress 
his  mind  with  the  truth  that  generals  and  universals  are  the  only  reli- 
able evidence  of  truth  in  contemplating  the  boundless  landscape  of 
Nature.  He  finds  that  in  detailing  and  'particularizing,  he  spoils 
the  grand  and  sublime  effect  that  it  is  his  intention  to  reproduce. 
For  the  general  view  presents  beauty  and  perfection  ; the  particular 
disconnects  and  disorganizes  the  grand  features  of  the  whole.  His 
experience  teaches  him  that  detailing  disorganizes  and  disunites  the 
truth  which  it  is  his  object  to  impress  ; but  that  generalizing  presents 
one  unbroken  chain  of  connected  beauty,  magnificence,  and  perfection. 
And  above  all  other  aspirations  to  which  he  is  led,  is  that  to  have* 
the  effect  of  his  production  such  as  will  precisely  accord  with  origi- 
nal and  eternal  Truth.  He  finds  that  th e parts — the  lights  and  shades, 
the  distance  and  perspective  — compose  the  whole,  and  that  the 
whole  is  necessary  to  the  parts.  The  whole  combined  presents  the 
internal  conviction  that  the  Effect  must,  in  quality  and  principle,  be 
like  that  which  originally  produced  it. 

Thus  his  meditations  are  impressive  ; and,  like  all  the  others  re- 
ferred to,  are  irresistibly  convincing.  F or  each  representation  of  ne- 
cessity connects  the  mind  with  its  antitype  ; and  by  this  means  truth 
must  necessarily  be  unfolded  to  the  understanding.  Likewise,  from 
the  invisible  to  the  visible,  and  from  that  to  the  ultimate,  he  observes 
a circle,  or  a series  of  concentric  circles,  of  corresponding  and  never- 
ending  truths.  And  while  his  thoughts  and  feelings  are  thus  exalted 
by  a contemplation  of  the  beauties  which  Nature  manifests,  he  also 
is  internally  impressed  with  the  proposition  before  mentioned,  that 
the  Original,  the  First  Organizer  of  all  the  concentric  and  progres- 
sive circles  of  material  existence,  must  of  necessity  and  absolutely, 
from  its  inherent  nature,  produce  like  Ultimates. 

As  the  First  is  positive,  the  Ultimate  is  negative.  As  the  First  is 
inward,  the  End  is  outward ; and  as  the  First  is  eternal,  the  Ulti- 
mate must  be  the  same.  And  as  the  First,  or  the  Omnipotent  Posi- 
tive Mind,  contained  all  the  essential  attributes  of  purity,  refinement, 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OP  NATURE. 


97 


and  perfection — the  grand,  sublime,  and  legitimate  Result  of  this 
First  Principle  can  not  be  of  a less  pure  and  perfect  nature. 

Thus  the  experience  and  conviction  of  every  true  artist ; the  im- 
pressive lessons  which  he  receives  from  the  various  symbols  and 
types  of  internal  beauty  and  perfection  ; the  subduing  effect  and  con- 
trolling and  tranquillizing  action  which  these  have  upon  his  disposi- 
tion ; the  general  appearances  of  things,  and  the  indestructible  union 
which  he  perceives  existing  between  all  particles  composing  the  mass 
of  the  material  existence  ; the  confidence  which  he  is  enabled  to  re- 
pose in  Nature,  and  the  internal  design  manifested  on  the  external — 
all  go  to  establish  the  main  truths  and  conclusions  which  it  is  neces- 
sary to  impress. 

Consequently,  his  thoughts  and  affections  are  associated  with  truth. 
His  desires  and  interests  are  no  less  pure  and  perfect  than  the  les- 
sons which  cause  them  to  exist.  His  reason  leads  him  by  connected 
steps  to  the  truths  and  inductive  conclusions  above  established,  re- 
specting the  First  and  Ultimate  of  existence. 

When  he  becomes  disconnected  from  the  manifestations  of  Nature, 
and  associates  with  the  innumerable  thoughts  and  feelings  which  are 

o o 

constantly  agitating  the  external  world  ; when  unprincipled  and  im- 
pure interests  obtrude  upon  his  feelings  and  attract  his  mind  from  the 
train  of  thought  and  contemplation  in  which  he  is  naturally  engaged 
while  copying  Nature  and  her  inimitable  beauties  and  when  his  mind 
becomes  involved  in  the  pursuit  of  an  individual  subsistence  and 
preservation  of  life — he  then  forcibly  realizes  the  great  extreme  of 
commotion,  immorality,  and  imperfection,  that  pervade  the  external 
world  of  mankind.  He  then  can  see  that  truths  can  not  be  received 
from  man  alone,  but  from  Nature ; and  that  the  truths  thus  received 
are  irresistible  and  eternal. 

The  extremes  also  impress  him  with  the  conclusion,  that  the  innu- 
merable capacities,  powers  of  perception,  and  spheres  of  association, 
into  which  mankind  are  divided,  have  no  foundation  in  Nature  or  her 
laws.  He  is  in  a condition  to  perceive  the  great  disconnexion  be- 
tv/een  Nature’s  established  laws,  and  man’s  present  ignorance,  imper- 
fection, and  grossness.  In  the  former,  he  is  impressed  with  the 
immutable  and  imperishable  harmony  and  truth  which  are  constantly 
and  openly  manifested  ; and  in  the  latter,  he  sees  general,  superficial, 
and  erroneous  conceptions  of  the  principles  of  organic  life,  — and  still 
a greater  perversion  of  the  affections,  the  understanding,  and  the  in- 
ward principles,  which  constitute  the  spiritual  nature  of  man. 

7 


9S 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


The  beauty,  the  magnificence,  the  degrees  of  perfection  manifested 
in  all  external  appearances,  upon  the  broad  plain  of  material  exist- 
ence, enforce  the  conviction  of  an  inner  life  of  corresponding  beauty 
and  perfection. 

Between  the  lowest  and  highest  conceptions  ; between  the  meaner 
opinions  and  desires  of  illiterate  persons,  and  the  most  brilliant  and 
refined  imaginations  of  the  intellectual  man  ; between  the  lowest  germ 
and  the  highest  sphere  of  vegetable  existence,  and  between  the 
diminutive  and  instinctive  animal  and  the  highest  and  most  erudite 
man  of  science,  — can  be  observed  a medium,  a centre,  a focus,  which 
is  an  ultimation  of  the  two  extremes.  Truth  may  in  this  way  be 
manifested  and  correctly  arrived  at ; for  the  extremes  of  two  points 
must,  of  necessity,  be  poised  upon  an  intermediate  point  : and  this 
may  represent  the  truth  which  it  is  absolutely  necessary  to  impress, 
— that  there  must  exist  invisible  truths  corresponding  to  all  that  is 
seen,  known,  felt,  or  desired.  For  each  object  of  sense  must  have  a 
:ause  back  of  its  production.  So  also  the  intellectual  and  aspiring 
lisposition  of  mankind  is,  in  reality,  a symbol  — a type  of  truths  such 
as  correspond  to  the  workings  of  the  mind.  Therefore,  between  the 
Great  Positive  Mind  and  the  human  Spirit,  there  must  be  a medium, 
a type,  a symbol,  through  which  may  be  seen  the  original  Design, 
and  the  future,  ultimate  Perfection. 

To  the  searcher  and  observer  of  external  manifestations,  the  Uni- 
verse is  a symbol,  a type  of  that  which  was  and  is,  and  of  that  which 
must  and  will  be.  Hence,  taking  Nature  as  truth,  it  carries  these 
convictions,  — which  have  been  heretofore  impressed.  Like  all  other 
mediums,  it  must  be  truth,  or  it  could  not  be  a medium.  It  answers 
as  a guide  to  internal  meditation,  and  as  a subject  of  external  con- 
templation. Therefore,  the  First  and  Ultimate  of  all  things  are 
rational  and  irresistible  inductions  that  can  be  drawn  from  the  prolific, 
fertile,  and  truthful  experience  and  meditation  of  the  true  artist , and 
who  associates  with  Nature’s  inimitable  beauties. 


§ 35.  The  subject  of  Spirit,  or  the  future  individualization  of  the 
intellectual  powers  of  man,  has  never  yet  been  properly  demonstrated 
to  the  various  minds  which  this  work  will  be  submitted  to.  Opin- 
ions theories,  and  hypotheses,  have  been  formed  upon  this  subject, 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


99 


and  also  upon  the  subject  of  the  Supreme  Organizer  of  the  material 
Universe  ; and  as  these  two  subjects  are  of  like  nature,  though  man- 
ifestly extremely  remote  in  their  connexion  (especially  as  they  ap- 
pear to  the  intellect  of  man),  various  thoughts  have  been  in  order 
communicated  to  the  world  in  reference  to  the  origin  of  Matter  and 
Motion,  and  respecting  the  formation  and  organization  of  the  vegeta- 
ble and  animal  kingdoms,  together  with  the  three  powers  combined 
as  vitality : and  many  well-written  theories  upon  the  subject  of  intel- 
lectual and  spiritual  composition  have  been  produced.  Each  person 
who  has  presented  these  subjects  according  to  his  individual  percep- 
tions and  convictions,  has  set  forth  some  very  important  truths,  and 
has  fallen  into  as  many  errors  of  like  magnitude. 

The  persons  who  have  thus  presented  their  impressions  to  the 
world,  have  done  it  under  circumstances  and  conditions  exceedingly 
unfavorable  to  the  communication  of  truth  without  disconnexion. 
Nature  and  their  impressions  have  afforded  some  deep  convictions, 
which  they  could  not  express  with  sufficient  clearness  to  be  familiarly 
understood.  The  sphere  that  they  associated  with,  was  likewise  un- 
favorable for  acute  and  correct  perception.  Being  surrounded  by  all 
the  interruptions  and  intrusions  of  life  and  activity  in  the  external 
world,  and  their  senses  being  too  familiarly  associated  with  the  same, 
and  the  utter  impossibility  of  their  rising  above  the  first  sphere  of  in- 
tellectual existence,  have  prevented  the  full  communication  of  eternal 
and  imperishable  truth.  It  is  not  strange,  therefore,  that  men  thus 
situated  should  communicate  their  thoughts  to  the  beclouded  and 
unstable  minds  of  the  world,  tinctured  with  various  sophistries  and 
untruths,  which,  if  they  might  justly  be  penned  ~as  convictions,  were 
nevertheless  misconceptions  of  those  internal  and  ultimate  principles 
which  govern  the  spheres  upon  which  their  theories  have  been  founded. 
It  is  not  strange  that  men,  thus  reasoning  from  Nature  alone,  and  the 
temporal  and  celestial  appearances  that  she  irregularly  develops,  should 
arrive  at  erroneous  conclusions,' — for  which  they  are  not  condemna- 
ble,  yet  not  justifiable. 

For  let  it  be  again  impressed,  that  Nature  must  be  the  result  of  an 
anterior  Cause;  and  that  the  First  Cause,  or  Organizer,  instituted, 
or,  in  other  words,  from  its  eternal  nature,  organized  the  many  spheres 
of  material  existence  that  are  disseminated  universally  throughout  the 
broad  expanse  of  unimaginable  space.  These  laws,  thus  divinely  in- 
stituted, acting  through  that  mass  of  nebulous  matter  which  existed 
from  the  beginning,  have  gradually  produced  and  reproduced  new 


100 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


forms,  and  finally  have  developed  just  such  worlds  of  material  forma- 
tion as  are  now  manifested.  Then  why  take  Nature,  or  rather  the 
small  particles  of  the  Universe,  of  which  this  world  is  one,  as  being 
the  primary  Cause  of  animal  organization,  and  this  as  having  progressed 
to  Man,  through  chance  and  change  of  the  elementary  particles  and 
compositions  of  matter,  until  the  necessary  particles  have  philosophi- 
cally and  mutually  agreed  to  perform  the  specific  office  which  the 
human  organization  manifests?  That,  too,  while  each  function  of  the 
system  is  so  perfect,  so  genuine  in  all  its  reproductions,  that  one  effort 
— one  energetic  impulse  — started,  and  has  ever  since  continued,  the 
whole  in  motion  ! For  at  the  very  moment  the  heart  contracts  and 
sends  forth  the  blood  throughout  the  indescribable  parts  and  avenues 
of  the  human  form,  the  lungs,  the  brain,  the  whole  system  becomes 
active;  and  that  activity  produces  intelligence! 

And  the  conception  which  has  been  formed  of  the  original  produc- 
tion of  man,  is  no  less  groundless  as  applied  to  the  intellectual  prin- 
ciple of  his  nature.  Taking  Nature  as  almost  containing  the  laws  of 
her  own  existence,  independently  of  any  coexisting  Power,  vain  at- 
tempts have  been  made  to  account  for  the  production  of  the  principle 
of  Mind ; and  in  these  attempts,  there  have  been  thoughts  and  im- 
pressions received  into  the  minds  of  many,  that  the  First  must  have 
been  Matter,  and  that  Man  is  a production  of  some  energetic  and 
violent  effort  of  Nature  and  her  constituent  particles  — that  Man  thus 
exists  by  an  indefinite  Chance  ! t 

As  the  First  is  the  Omnipotent,  Original,  Positive  Mind,  and  the 
Third,  Spirit  individualized  and  unparticled,  constituting  a corre- 
sponding intelligence,  and  approximating  to  higher  spheres  of  intel- 
lectual perfection,  these  theories  arise  from  mistaking  the  Effect  (or 
Nature)  for  the  Cause.  They  consequently  darken  the  perception 
of  future  and  corresponding  spheres  of  intellectual  existence ; and 
their  adherents  take  Nature  as  the  Cause,  Man  as  the  Effect,  and 
Mind  as  a natural  result  of  physical  organization.  The  first  is  vis- 
ible : the  last  is  thought  to  be  also  ; for,  taking  external  appearances 
for  realities,  and  depending  upon  them  as  the  only  source  of  undis- 
putable  truth  — as  ocular  demonstration  — man  loses  sight  of  all  con- 
nexion between  internal  reality  and  temporal  substances,  and  between 
body  and  spirit. 

The  connexion  thus  broken  can  not  be  united  in  a mind  thus  ob- 
serving Nature.  The  result  has  been  to  throw  upon  the  world  theo- 
ries misconceived  and  misconstructed.  But  by  observing  (through 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


101 


the  power  of  analysis)  the  invisible,  the  reality  of  all  things,  and  taking 
this  as  a basis  of  reasoning, — by  virtue  of  a concentration  and  ana- 
logical application  of  the  mind  to  the  subject  under  consideration,  and 
by  tracing  distinctively,  collectively,  generically,  progressively,  and 
universally,  all  things,  — the  conclusion  becomes  irresistible,  that 
Spirit  must  exist  as  an  absolutely  necessary  result  of  the  nature,  es- 
sence, and  composition,  of  the  Supreme  and  Omnipotent  Productor ! 

I have  not  brought  up  theories  previously  presented  to  the  world, 
in  order  to  refute,  or  even  to  criticise  them.  I have  not  presented 
the  subject  in  such  a manner  as  to  cast  disparaging  reflections  on 
those  who  have  conscientiously  penned  these  theories  ; but  I have 
briefly  spoken  of  these  in  order  to  establish  and  make  plain  three  in- 
ductive conclusions  : First,  that  a man,  subjected  to  the  interference 
of  the  commotions  of  the  outer  world,  can  not,  by  any  possible  means, 
fully  perceive  and  comprehend  general  truth.  Secondly,  that,  in- 
stead of  legitimate  inductions  and  conclusions,  the  above  theories  are 
unjustifiable  assumptions,  and  illegitimate  conclusions  drawn  there- 
from. Thirdly,  that  the  Original  Organizer  of  the  Universe  has  been 
even  forgotten  or  misconceived  of,  by  ill-directed  veneration  for  truth  ; 
that  Spirit  has  consequently  been  annihilated  from  the  sanctions  of 
the  reasoning  powers,  and  has  had  no  part  in  the  admissible  conclu- 
sions of  such  minds,  — and  that,  in  consequence  of  receiving  the 
above  as  the  basis  of  reasoning,  the  First  and  Ultimate  were  thus 
obscured  in  the  minds  of  men,  and  shrouded  in  inextricable  and  im- 
penetrable mystery ! 

§ 36.  These  three  are  the  conclusions  I intended  should  be 
drawn  from  the  general  survey  of  misdirected  reasoning.  I do  not 
wish  that  the  above  should  be  considered  as  a refutation  or  discus- 
sion of  any  principles  referred  to,  or  that  it  was  for  this  purpose  that 
these  theories  were  called  up  for  present  meditation.  The  intention 
has  not  been  to  show  the  errors  of  human  judgment,  nor  even  to 
offset  these  conclusions  by  opposite  reasonings ; but  it  has  rather 
been  to  excuse  such  investigators,  and  to  encourage  them  to  look 
deeper  and  further  for  real  producing  causes  ; to  justify  their  impres- 
sions so  far  as  they  contain  truth , and  to  point  out  the  great  distinc- 
tion between  interior  truth,  and  the  error  conveyed  by  visible  and 
external  appearances,  though  such  are  still  considered  as  ocular 
demonstrations  of  unchanging  truth.  I would  show  the  impossibility 


102 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


of  such  theories  and  hypotheses  being  true,  not  in  a spirit  of  exul- 
tation or  self-approbation,  but  to  direct  the  minds  of  their  believers 
to  a deeper  and  indestructible  basis,  from  which  arc  constantly  ema- 
nating through  the  veins  and  avenues  of  Nature,  never-ending  Truth. 
Not  that  the  mind  should  leave  its  rational  resting-place,  and  cleave 
to  that  which  is  miraculous,  superstitious,  or  without  demonstration  : 
but  the  reasoner  upon  these  subjects  should  be  like  the  chemist,  and 
not  base  his  conclusions  upon  the  visible  appearance  of  the  substance, 
or  form  ; but  analyze  the  composition  to  find  its  elements , and  invisible 
reality.  Then  the  arguments  based  upon  these  internal  principles 
will  lead  synthetically  to  irresistible  conclusions,  irrespective  of  the 
form  or  appearance  of  the  substance  external.  And  then  the  truth 
will  become  manifest ; and  to  it,  as  such,  you  should  respond  with 
the  deepest,  internal,  true  affection  and  veneration.  Then  may  be 
understpod  the  force  and  propriety  of  the  expression  (which  is  as  true 
as  the  laws  of  Nature),  that  “ the  things  which  are  seen  are  temporal ; 
but  the  things  which  are  not  seen  are  eternal.” 

Under  whatever  circumstances,  or  by  whatever  individual,  Truth 
may  be  conceived  of,  or  whenever  it  may  be  found  or  written,  it 
should  be  duly  appreciated.  No  direct  course  of  reasoning  can  be 
entirely  barren  of  truthful  conclusions,  notwithstanding  these  may  be 
mingled  with  errors.  All  investigations  of  a scientific  and  theologi- 
cal character,  have  conduced  to  some  important  conclusions  ; never- 
theless in  these  some  deductions  have  been  made  which  are  incorrect. 
The  mind  should  observe  a train  of  connected  induction  to  arrive  at 
truth  : a mind  not  thus  concentrated,  would  come  far  short  of  correct 
impressions. 

The  subjects  of  the  First  and  Last,  as  seen  through  Nature,  have 
been  much  thought  upon,  and  discussed  with  pure  dispositions  and 
intentions ; and  in  the  numerous  productions  of  men  upon  these 
subjects,  many  valuable  truths  have  been  set  forth.  The  whole  truth 
could  not  be  conceived  of,  for  the  want  of  a higher  sphere  of  associ- 
ation. No  metaphysical  researches,  therefore,  have  yet  established 
or  adecpiately  demonstrated  to  the  comprehension,  the  principle  of 
Spirit,  or  inner  life.  And  if  the  decisions  of  minds  partially 
clouded  and  obstructed  by  surrounding  circumstances,  have  occasion- 
ally, and  to  some  extent,  been  correct,  a confirmation  will  be  found 
in  the  Revelation.  Those  which  are  not  true,  and  have  been  the 
result  of  unjustifiable  modes  of  reasoning,  the  Revelation  will  also 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


103 


place  in  their  proper  light.  And  whatever  truths  have  entered  the 
minds  of  investigators,  they  will  see  the  same  reflected;  which  will 
be  a source  of  inward  gratification.  There  will  also  be  a consola- 
tion derived  from  the  things  contained  in  the  Revelation,  consisting 
in  the  reflection  that  the  dross  and  impurities  of  systems  and  theories 
have  become  purged  off,  or  rather  repulsed  by  the  truth  which  is 
positive  and  eternal. 

The  claims  which  I would  prefer,  are  that  the  conclusions  offered 
are  correctly  and  instinctively  arrived  at ; inasmuch  as  I become 
associated  with  the  various  spheres  of  intellectual  development  and 
progression,  and  by  this  means  am  enabled  to  communicate  that 
which  exists  in  the  sphere  or  state  of  existence  below  that  in  which  I 
am  situated.  Of  this  I have  spoken  before  : and  the  inquiring  mind 
is  solicited  to  venerate  the  truth  as  it  is  herein  presented,  and  as  it 
may  be  convincing  to  his  understanding.  Such  truth  should  be  ven- 
erated only  the  same  as  it  should  be  if  it  had  been  conceived  of  and 
accumulated  by  any  other  process. 

In  speaking  incidentally  of  theories  which  have  been  founded  on 
Nature  and  her  laws  alone,  and  in  explaining  the  cause  of  such  being 
produced,  the  impossibility  of  their  entire  incorrectness  has  been 
shown,  with  the  intention  of  calling  up  these  latter  contemplations. 
It  has  not  been  the  intention  to  demonstrate  the  production  and  sub- 
stance of  Spirit,  but  the  intention  has  been  to  prove  its  existence; 
and  by  doing  this,  to  establish  the  idea  of  a corresponding,  yet 
Eternal,  Omnipotent  Productor.  And  these  two  have  been  estab- 
lished by  indirect  and  direct  appeals  to  the  general  and  universal 
manifestations  of  Nature  and  her  inherent  laws.  And  the  unchaiUe- 

O 

able  and  undeviating  connexion  and  progress  of  all  parts  that  com- 
pose the  Universe  being  established,  the  mind  is  thus  led  back  to  the 
potential  laws  of  causation,  and  forward  to  the  natural  and  positive 
result  of  material  perfection. 

A definite  understanding  can  not  be  had  of  these  t\vo  important 
subjects  until  they  are  explained,  or  rather  developed  in  the  progress 
of  the  Revelation.  But  the  First,  or  the  Great  Positive  Mind,  and 
the  Ultimate  — the  Negative  — or  the  Spirit  of  man,  have  been  con- 
clusions irresistibly  received  from  the  various  appeals  made  to  Nature, 
and  the  experience  of  men  who  are  associated  with  her  laws.  Her 
prominent  principles,  as  developed  through  the  received  palsetiologi- 
cal  sciences,  have  been  connectively  investigated  and  set  forth  in  this 


104 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


key,  in  order  to  convince  the  mind  of  the  possibility  of  spiritual 
existence.  And  to  make  the  train  of  argument  still  more  impressive 
and  certain,  it  was  shown  that  it  must  of  necessity  exist,  according 
to  the  Nature  and  essence  of  its  Productor,  and  the  principles  and 
laws  which  govern  all  things  that  are  of  a like  eternal  nature.  Thus 
Spirit  must  of  necessity  exist,  to  correspond  with  all  other  existences 
that  by  these  continued  operations  are  constantly  being  developed. 

Matter  and  spirit  have  heretofore  been  supposed  to  constitute  two 
distinct  and  independent  substances,  the  latter  not  having  any  mate- 
rial origin.  And  minds  not  being  able  to  comprehend  this  classifi- 
cation, have  been  driven  to  extreme  and  illegitimate  conclusions. 
And  this  would  naturally  tend,  more  than  any  other  classification, 
to  produce  a disbelief  in  the  united  action  of  Nature.  Instead  of 
making,  material  and  spiritual  existence  totally  disconnected,  the 
object  and  intention  of  the  foregoing  has  been  to  prove  by  acknowl- 
edged laws  and  principles  of  matter,  the  production  of  Intelligeiice , 
the  perfection  of  which  is  Spirit ; and  to  unite  the  whole  operations 
and  mutations  of  Nature’s  inherent  properties  of  Motion,  Life,  and 
Sensation,  from  the  Great  Positive  Mind  through  all  intermediate 
things,  to  Man ; to  show  that  in  Man  this  eternal  principle  of  Spirit- 
ual Nature  becomes  individualized,  — and  that  the  First  operated 
through  Nature  as  a Second,  to  produce  Spirit  as  a Third  and  grand 
Result. 

The  former  conclusion,  then,  may  be  again  repeated,  in  order  to 
impress  the  mind  still  more  strongly  with  the  perfect  harmony  exist- 
ing in  all  things,  — That  the  Organizer  and  Great  Positive  Mind 
uses  Nature  and  all  things  therein,  as  an  Effect,  to  produce  Spirit  as 
an  End  and  designed  Ultimate. 


§ 37.  For  a proper  comprehension  of  the  qualities  and  attri- 
butes contained  in  the  Great  Fountain  of  Causation,  and  unfolded  in 
the  various  stages  of  material  progression,  it  can  not  be  inappropriate  to 
appeal  to  visible  and  invisible  truths  and  facts  in  Nature  and  expe- 
rience. And  by  receiving  almost  the  whole  truth  in  reference  to  the 
First  Cause,  and  the  various  attributes  of  its  nature,  the  mind  would 
be  prepared  to  enter  the  higher  stages  or  spheres  of  the  Revelation : 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OP  NATURE. 


105 


and  this  would  also  prepare  the  mind,  if  well-constituted  and  directed, 
to  perceive  the  close  and  connected  order  of  development  existing 
between  the  Beginning  and  the  End  of  all  things. 

Thoughts,  feelings,  desires,  and  passions,  which  are  existing  in  the 
minds  of  men,  are  not  appealed  to,  to  respond  to  what  is  herein  con- 
tained. It  can  only  be  properly  conceived  of,  and  comprehended, 
by  the  Reason  and  the  internal  light  of  the  love  of  Truth.  And 
Reason  will  respond  to  this,  if  properly  developed,  and  disconnected 
from  all  improper  interests,  or  interruptive  external  influences,  during 
the  investigation. 

• 

The  rational  and  well-organized  mind  has  an  unquenchable  thirst  to 
search  and  inquire  after  the  First  Cause.  And  this  is  conceived  of 
by  observing  the  causes  and  effects  which  are  constantly  developing 
themselves  and  acting  in  all  particles  composing  the  Universe.  Ev- 
ery effect  presented  to  the  mind,  presupposes  an  adequate  cause  for 
its  appearance  and  development ; and  the  chain  of  causes  and  effects 
which  are  performing  their  operations  in  all  parts  of  Nature,  is  to  the 
generalizing  mind,  unbroken.  All  inductive  philosophy,  together 
with  all  conclusions  based  upon  palaetiological  researches,  converge 
to  one  point — that  of  the  First  Cause  of  all  things.  All  Nature,  in 
her  powerful  and  energetic  movements,  operating  upon  principles 
which  can  not  be  misinterpreted,  proclaims  to  the  mind  the  truth  of 
the  Great,  Positive,  Omnipotent  Mind. 

The  mind  must  of  necessity  have  some  foundation  whereupon  it 
may  rest,  as  it  must  investigate  from  a point  established.  The  indi- 
cations of  Nature  are  of  such  a character  as  of  themselves  to  convey 
a conception  of  the  First  Cause  of  all  subordinate  existences.  Rea- 
soning from  the  established  axiom  that  there  must  be  a Beginning,  or 
a First  Cause,  to  produce  corresponding  ones,  it  follows  that  either 
Matter  has  existed  from  all  eternity,  or  else  the  essence  of  an  intelli- 
gent First  Cause.  One  or  the  other  of  these  conclusions  must  of 
necessity  be  drawn  from  the  indications  which  all  external  substances, 
and  forms  present.  The  idea  is  indisputable  that  something  must 
have  originally  existed  to  produce  that  which  does  now  exist ; that 
Matter  and  Motion  must  have  existed  independently,  or  that  the 
Great  Cause  must  have  been  the  Productor  of  that  which  does  ex- 
ist. The  mind,  therefore,  is  led  back  from  effect  to  cause,  until  it 
conceives  of  the  First  Cause,  or  rather  is  compelled  to  admit  the 
existence  of  such. 


106 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


The  conclusion  drawn  from  this  reasoning  must  be  irresistible, 
since  Nature  presents  indications  which  constantly  carry  the  mind 
through  its  connected  chains  of  progression  to  a true  conception  of 
a Fi  rst  Existence,  and  of  that  which  is  to  be  produced.  There  must 
be  a Beginning,  and  also  an  Ultimate : and  of  this  all  things  afford 
demonstration  to  the  mind. 

The  mechanical  forces  which  are  constantly  being  developed,  and 
the  chemical  properties  and  affinities  existing  in  all  things,  are  mani- 
festly of  a corresponding  nature.  The  motive  powers  and  vital  en- 
ergies of  the  vegetable  and  animal  kingdoms  ; the  perfect  exchanging 
and  reproduction  of  all  parts  ; the  decided  development  of  perception 
and  volition ; the  inherent  properties  contained  in  the  subtle  fluid 
which  is  producing  these  phenomena  ; and  finally  the  beauty  and  per- 
fection of  the  human  organization  ; its  power,  and  the  consciousness 
that  the  mind  is  capable  of  conceiving  ideas  and  thoughts  even  tran- 
scending thepowTer  of  expression  — all  these  wonderful  manifestations 
and  developments  move  the  mind  with  a deep  and  solemn  veneration 
for  that  which  first  existed. 

Again,  the  bone,  the  flesh,  solids,  nerves,  skin,  nails,  and  hair,  are 
composed  of  elements  which  no  chemical  process  yet  known  can 
fully  unfold  and  demonstrate.  All  things  so  refined,  so  rarified,  as 
to  be  beyond  the  reach  of  any  known  process  of  chemical  analysis, 
and  as  to  exclude  the  possibility  of  a full  demonstration  to  the  mind 
of  their  internal  essences  and  qualities,  require  some  other  means  be- 
sides sciences  yet  learned,  to  unfold  the  interior  truths  which  they 
contain.  Therefore  from  original  Matter  and  the  mechanical  powers 
which  it  displayed,  to  the  inherent  particles  and  properties  composing 
the  human  organization,  there  is  presented  to  the  mind  one  broad 
and  extended  field  of  united  action  and  motion,  operating  upon  the 
principle  of  cause  and  effect,  until  effects  have  become  so  apparently 
disconnected  from  the  Original  Cause,  that  the  mind  has  no  basis,  no 
cadence,  no  bounds  to  its  conceptions  ; and  hence  it  receives  or  re- 
pulses in  a hasty  and  unqualified  manner,  that  which  should  not  be 
quickly  either  grasped  or  rejected.  Hence,  too,  it  is  that  belief  or 
disbelief  is  so  imperatively  enforced  in  the  intellectual  world  upon  all 
subjects  relating  to  an  inherent,  invisible  Cause  of  all  else  existing. 

It  is  by  such  thoughts  as  the  foregoing  that  a conception  of  the 
First  Cause  is  forced  upon  the  mind  of  the  investigator.  And  in 
reference  to  this  great  subject  he  argues  as  follows  : Some  principle, 
some  substance,  must  have  previously  existed,  or  things  which  do 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


107 


exist  could  not  have  existed.  He  can  not  conceive  that  from  noth- 
ing, something  could  have  been  produced  and  organized  into  forms 
such  as  are  evident  to  his  senses  ; for  Effect  could  not  exist  without 
Cause.  But  he  finds  all  beyond  this  axiom  to  be  clothed  in  impene- 
trable darkness  and  mystery  ; and  therefore  he  searches  no  further. 
He  is  convinced  of  the  uselessness  of  asking  Nature  or  his  own  mind, 
What  was  the  beginning?  What  form  must  the  First  Cause  origi- 
nally and  eternally  have  assumed  ? Or  what  motive,  desire,  and  ul- 
timate design,  must  have  determined  the  action  of  the  Eternal  Mind  ? 

All  things  are  effects,  ends,  and  uses  ; or,  in  other  words,  they  are 
instruments  and  agents  to  develop  externally  that  which  they  inhe- 
rently contain.  The  internal  contemplation  of  the  First  Cause  is  of 
itself  a chaos  of  contemplation.  Therefore  we  will  now  take  for 
granted  the  established  and  universally-admitted  axiom  of  the  First 
Cause,  and  speak  of  the  attributes  which  are  constantly  flowing 
from  this  Eternal  Source,  through  the  bodies  of  the  stellar  and  solar 
systems,  the  earth,  vegetable  and  animal  existence,  Mankind,  and 
Intelligence. 

These  attributes  are  distinctly  displayed  throughout  every  depart- 
ment of  Nature,  and  in  all  things  therein  contained  ; and  uniting  (as 
all  other  principles  invariably  and  unchangeably  do),  they  form  each 
successive  link  in  the  great  chain  of  universal  progression  and  devel- 
opment. And  so,  in  contemplating  the  First  Cause,  a correct  idea 
is  obtained  of  its  Nature  as  an  Eternal  Mind! 


§ 3S.  No  possible  combination  of  figures  would  be  adequate  to 
present  to  the  human  mind  the  number  of  spheres  contained  in  the 
broad  ocean  of  the  stellar  system.  If  each  particle  of  matter  com- 
posing this  sphere  could  be  numbered,  the  w'hole  would  not  even 
convey  an  idea  of  the  number  of  worlds  contained  in  infinite 
space  ! A constant  formation  is  taking  place  in  every  part  of  the 
Universe.  Each  of  these  parts  is  changing  and  exchanging  ; and 
particles  are  thrown  from  existing  spheres  and  added  to  others,  or 
unite  in  forming  new  ones.  There  is  a universal  condensation  and 
consolidation  of  matter  constantly  going  on,  caused  by  the  dissipation 
or  repulsion  of  that  heat  and  ether  which  it  contained  in  its  fluid  state  ; 
and  consequently  there  is  a constant  reception  and  rejection  of  par- 
ticles taking  place  between  all  bodies  in  the  Universe.  This  constant 
formation,  creation,  or  rather  reproduction,  is  caused  by  the  law 
originally  instituted,  and  which  is  perpetually  discharging  its  legitimate 


10S 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


office.  Besides  this,  there  is  no  disqualification  of  the  united  Whole 
to  produce  essential  and  particular  results.  Also  the  universal  mo- 
tion and  recreative  activity  of  the  Whole,  is  caused  hy  the  same  pro- 
gressive law  that  produces  the  modifications  and  refinements  which 
are  constantly  observed  in  the  parts  : and  hence  the  Whole  becomes 
fitted  for  different  spheres  of  association. 

Orbs,  planets,  spheres,  are  thus  organized  ; and  the  whole  plane 
of  the  solar  system  is  presented  in  corresponding  formations  to 
the  mind.  Thus  are  represented  the  constant,  unchangeable  action 
of  all  things,  and  the  ascending  forms  which  each  assumes  ; and  thus 
is  represented  the  mighty  power  which  eternally  acts  through  the 
Whole  ! 

There  are  therefore  centres  around  which  innumerable  planets  re- 
volve ; and  planets  revolve  around  these  again  : and  thus  one  circle 
after  another  is  developed.  Like  the  sun  and  its  planets,  there  is 
formed  one  sphere  of  action,  around  which  subordinate  spheres  move 
with  undeviating  and  mathematical  precision,  until  from  the  centre 
outward  there  are  concentric  circles  constantly  developed  from  the 
one  circle,  until  the  farthest  point  of  its  powerful  and  controlling  in- 
fluence is  attained. 

Conceive  of  the  sun,  its  planets,  and  their  satellites  — their  com- 
position, and  the  offices  which  they  perform  — and  you  will  be  able, 
by  the  laws  of  analogy,  to  indefinitely  comprehend  the  movements  of 
infinite  space,  and  to  conceive  of  the  innumerable  suns  and  centres 
of  like  motion  and  activity.  For  each  sphere  or  orb  in  boundless 
space  may  be  conceived  of  and  comprehended  by  the  light  of  analo- 
gy. Contemplate  a Power  so  great,  so  omnipotent,  so  eternal,  as  to 
institute  a Law  in  matter  which  thus  produces  what  is  known  to  be 
existing  ! Meditate  upon  the  unimaginable  number  of  spheres  that 
are  contained  below,  around,  and  above  your  more  transient  theatre 
of  existence  ; and  let  the  thoughts  which  are  contemplating  the  things 
and  powers  that  are  contained  in  the  celestial  spheres  of  existence, 
be  no  less  active  ! And  think  of  the  omnipotent  force  and  power 
which  they  manifest  in  all  their  united  and  harmonious  motions  ! 
You  thus  have  a perfect  system  of  material  formation,  supported  by 
an  invisible  Power  and  Law,  perfect  in  all  its  forces  and  motions 
which  are  openly  observed  and  known  to  exist ! 

There  can  be  no  thought  profound  and  expansive  enough  to  com- 
prehend the  overwhelming  idea  of  Infinite  Power  ! For  this  power 
is  no  less  perfect  in  the  solar  system  than  it  is  in  all  the  systems  and 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


109 


kingdoms  existing  upon  this  earthly  sphere  which  you  are  associated 
with.  It  is  manifest  in  the  various  divisions  of  formation  ; in  the 
general  kingdoms  which  have  been  progressively  developed  ; and  in 
the  perfect  and  efficacious  process  by  which  they  are  constantly  and 
unchangeably  being  produced.  In  every  kingdom  of  the  physical 
and  organic  formations  of  the  earth,  there  is  evinced  an  inexhausti- 
ble, incomprehensible,  and  omnipotent  force,  which  actuates  them 
and  all  their  developments  and  reproductions  ! So  perfect  is  this 
force,  so  harmonious  and  beautiful  is  its  action,  that  nothing  is  de- 
stroyed or  annihilated ; but  all  things  answer  the  end  for  which  they 
were  originally  designed.  And  both  in  a minute  and  general  field 
of  observation,  the  same  power  may  be  seen  as  unchangeably  active 
in  the  production  and  purification  of  particles,  as  also  in  causing  their 
association  with  those  of  like  affinity,  until  the  very  substance  of  Sen- 
sation is  developed  into  Intelligence ; and  then  intelligence,  as  a re- 
finement of  all  else  existing,  can  associate  with  all  corresponding 
intelligence.  And  thus  the  reason  is  made  manifest  why  the  mind 
is  pleased  to  associate  with  that  of  an  intellectual  nature.  It  is  thus 
able  to  conceive  of  Intelligence  in  Omnipotence. 

The  earth  and  all  things  therein  contained,  and  the  system  which 
is  above,  below,  and  occupying  all  space,  unite  in  all  their  unspeaka- 
ble manifestations  in  impressing  the  mind  with  that  deep  and  solemn 
truth  which  is  the  great  pillar  of  all  truth,  that  the  Great  First  Cause 
possesses  as  one  attribute,  the  essence,  the  quality  of  unimaginable,  in- 
comprehensible, and  eternal  Power  ! The  impressions  received 
from  all  these  manifestations  are  irresistibly  subduing,  convincing, 
and  wonderful  ! The  expressions  which  are  used  by  Nature  to  con- 
vey such  a conclusion,  are  of  such  a character  that  the  internal  man 
only  can  receive  and  associate  with  them.  The  evidences  of  such 
can  not  be  adequately  expressed  by  man  ; but  they  are  demonstra- 
tively convincing  and  penetrating,  as  the  inward  voice  of  all  Nature. 

§ 39.  Thus  the  foregoing  train  of  remark  establishes  the  eternal 
attribute  of  Omnipotence.  — And  while  observing  the  powerful  move- 
ments of  all  things  contained  in  the  terrestrial  and  celestial  spheres, 
there  can  not  but  be  a conception  of  Divine  Wisdom  legitimately 
accompanying  the  former  conclusion.  The  innumerable  centres  of 
the  stellar  system  ; the  many  suns,  with  their  accompanying  orbs, 
planets,  and  satellites  ; the  perfect  precision  of  the  general  movements 
of  all  these  bodies  ; their  regular  and  connected  adjustment  and  unity ; 


110 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


die  distributive  harmony  and  equilibrium  of  forces  and  motions  which 
they  constantly  display  — are  all  manifestations  of  grandeur,  beauty, 
and  order  unspeakable.  The  regular  inclinations  of  orbits  and  axes, 
and  the  definite  distances  of  globes  from  each  other  ; their  constant 
sameness  of  motion,  and  the  uniform  direction  which  all  take  ; the  ap- 
parent sympathy  and  reciprocation  of  the  spheres  and  atmospheres  of 
the  innumerable  and  apparently-independent  bodies ; the  united  and 
constant  action  which  each  of  these  manifests  — all  conspire  to  force 
upon  the  mind  the  irresistible  impression  that  the  great  and  united 
movements  of  the  Universe  are  all  being  performed  according  to  a 
most  inconceivably-perfect  adjustment  of  mathematical  and  mechani- 
cal laws,  and  that  all  things  are  guided  in  the  very  motions  of  their 
inherent  life  and  activity,  by  the  essence  of  Omnipotent  Wisdom  ! 
Their  formation  and  procreation  ; their  particles  and  constituent  parts 
manifest  in  their  order  and  arrangement,  the  perfection  of  pure  Wis- 
dom and  Intelligence  — while  their  numerical  extent  and  diverse 
modes  of  development,  infinitely  transcend  the  highest  powers  of  hu- 
man calculation  and  demonstration.  No  process  of  analogical  rea- 
soning or  of  mathematical  calculation  has  yet  reached  that  point  of 
perfection  by  which  may  he  demonstrated  and  calculated  the  exact 
distances  at  which  these  spheres  revolve,  the  immensity  of  space 
which  they  occupy,  and  the  harmony  of  the  Whole  ! 

Again  : Geological  investigators  have  decided  upon  the  relative 
eras  at  which  the  various  formations  were  gradually  produced. 
Also  that  the  various  strata,  from  the  first  to  the  last,  were  succes- 
sively developed,  according  to  the  induction  received  from  the  inter- 
nal appearances  which  they  now  present. 

Accompanying  each  of  these  developments,  were  corresponding 
productions  of  vegetable  and  animal  life.  And  whether  the  chain  is 
unbroken  from  the  first  development  of  living  species  to  those  which 
now  exist,  is  a question  which  has  no  essential  bearing  upon  the  induc- 
tions legitimately  received  ; for  the  generalization  of  the  geological  and 
physiological  sciences  leads  to  corresponding  universal  truths.  There- 
fore the  orderly  development  of  the  earth,  and  of  accompanying  and 
corresponding  organic  beings,  manifests  unspeakable  Wisdom  and 
Design  ! 

So  also  throughout  the  labyrinths  of  the  many  inferior  develop- 
ments up  to  Man,  is  the  same  constantly  observed.  The  operation 
of  Nature  upon  the  principle  of  cause  and  effect;  the  succession  of 
the  four  seasons ; of  day  and  night ; the  continued  production  and 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


Ill 


reproduction  of  all  things,  as  determined  by  the  constant  and  harmo- 
nious operations  of  these  last  principles  in  Nature,  and  which  cause 
the  fertility  of  the  earth ; the  constant  perfecting  and  purification  of 
all  particles , composing  the  material  and  organic  universe ; the  com- 
parative repose  of  the  functions  of  vegetable  life,  during  the  hours 
of  darkness,  so  as  to  produce  mature  perfection,  — all  these  speak 
decisively  and  impressively  of  unbounded  Wisdom  ! 

And  there  is  a time  also  for  human  physical  repose,  in  order  that 
the  many  organs  and  functions  of  the  body  may  regain  what  has  been 
expended  during  the  hours  of  activity,  so  that  there  may  be  a con- 
stant and  uniform  supply  of  materials  and  forces  generated  hourly 
and  secondly,  by  the  energetic  movements  of  the  organization. 
Contemplation  on  the  structure  and  mutual  adaptation  of  all  the  parts 
of  the  latter,  and  the  uses  therein  manifested ; on  the  essential 
chemical  properties  and  qualities  composing  the  fluids  and  solids ; 
the  regular  reaction  and  transmutation  of  each  particle  of  the  solid 
and  fluid  substances  of  the  body ; the  harmonious  and  undeviating 
law  upon  which  the  whole  is  sustained,  developing  cause,  effect,  and 
end,  in  every  motion  and  particle  of  its  organization,  — all  these,  con- 
nected with  the  previous  contemplations,  carry  to  the  mind  the  inter- 
nal and  deep  conviction,  that  from  the  planetary  system  to  geological 
formations  and  developments,  vegetable  and  animal  creations,  and 
Man,  all  things  are  ordered  and  arranged  by  Divine  Wisdom. 

The  law  of  gravitation;  of  repulsion;  of  progression;  — also  the 
evaporation  and  refinement  of  particles  existing  upon  the  face  of 
Nature ; the  immense  and  inconceivable  good  which  is  thus  con- 
stantly being  produced ; finally,  the  beauty  and  harmony  of  all 
things;  the  Cause,  Effect,  and  End;  the  Design;  the  uses;  the 
unchangeable  and  eternal  simplicity  of  movements  externally  mani- 
fested, still  which  are  too  immense  and  powerful  to  be  compre- 
hended,— speak  only  the  voice  of  eternal  Power  and  Wisdom! 
And  the  mind  thus  contemplating  Nature  and  all  her  various  forces 
and  motions,  receives  distinct  and  impressive  truths  from  the  univer-  • 
sals  of  existence,  that  kindle  within  it  an  intellectual  flame  of  rever- 
ence and  adoration ! And  by  steady  and  profound  meditation,  this 
will  burn  and  brighten,  and  purify  the  internal  principle  of  organic 
life.  And  the  field  of  such  meditations  is  unbounded,  inasmuch  as 
thoughts  themselves  are  inadequate  to  conceive  of  the  high  and 
deep  Wisdom  emanating  from  the  Great  Cause  of  causation! 


112 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


§ 40.  And  while  admiring  the  wisdom  as  seen  and  felt  in  all  things 
around  and  above,  the  mind  is  impressed  still  more  deeply,  and  with 
a clearer  perception,  with  an  attribute  still  more  perfect,  viz.,  that  of 
goodness  ! The  incalculable  number  of  worlds  which  the  mind  has 
previously  contemplated,  with  their  power  of  action  and  wise  adjust- 
ment of  motion,  display  goodness  and  design  in  all  their  various 
spheres  and  states  of  activity.  Goodness  is  manifested  in  the  fact 
that  each  law  of  a positive  nature  produces  effects  of  a negative  na- 
ture ; and  the  equilibrium  existing  between  all  motions  and  forces, 
causes  the  principle  of  goodness  to  be  displayed  from  the  very  centre 
to  the  circumference  of  their  united  actions.  And  also  all  the  palas- 
tiological  sciences,  when  traced  to  the  present  time,  or  retraced  to 
causes  anterior,  show  the  constant  adaptation  and  succession  of  parts 
serving  as  agents  and  instruments  to  produce  future  effects,  and  which 
produce  others  still,  until  the  whole,  up  to  the  formation  of  Man, 
presents  a united  chain  of  progression,  — a system  of  concentric 
circles  of  development,  — and  the  Whole  displays  beauty,  purpose, 
and  design.  Each  successive  circle  evinces  an  infinite  amount  of 
power,  wisdom,  and  goodness,  until  all  combined  produce  Man  as 
an  Ultimate  — and  that  these  all  were  essential  principles  and  oper- 
ations carried  through  Nature,  for  the  very  purpose  of  producing  this 
sublime  Result ! 

And  as  Man  contains  the  perfected  and  refined  substances  of  all 
else  existing,  he  stands  as  an  emblem  of  this  great  Attribute.  For 
man,  through  this  principle  of  goodness,  possesses  an  intellectual 
composition  whereby  he  exercises  power,  wisdom,  and  goodness,  over 
all  below  his  exalted  state,  in  the  vegetable  and  animal  kingdoms. 
And  that  the  earth  might  be  made  useful,  and  that  plants  and  animals 
might  add  to  the  usefulness  thereof,  it  was  positively  necessary  and 
good  that  they  should  have  a lord  and  governor.  If  all  things  below 
the  composition  of  man  were  existing  without  him,  there  could  be 
no  good  results  seen,  known,  or  appreciated.  For  then  the  life  of 
plants,  and  the  sensation  and  instinct  of  animals,  would  have  been 
the  highest  developments,  and  there  would  have  been  no  further  per- 
fection of  the  same  principle.  Consequently,  according  to  the  laws 
of  wisdom  and  goodness,  Man,  with  all  his  physical  powers  and  his 
capacities  of  mind  to  exercise  judgment  and  justice  toward  all  things, 
conceives,  by  the  action  of  his  inner  principle,  the  perfect  adaptation 
of  all  things  to  him,  and  also  of  the  perfecting  of  all  things  approx- 
imating to  him,  so  that  he  may  subsist  upon  the  constant  production 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


113 


and  refinement  of  the  elements  and  substances  contained  in  the  va- 
rious inferior  kingdoms.  And  thus  he  is  a controller,  inventor,  and 
designer,  in  respect  to  all  things  thus  presented  for  his  meditation 
and  use. 

This  perfect  adaptation  and  harmony  of  all  things,  thus  sends 
forth  throughout  the  Universe  the  unchangeable  message  of  the 
divine  attributes  of  infinite  Power,  Wisdom,  and  Goodness ; and  in 
so  impressive  a manner  that  expression  does  not  answer  as  a proper 
means  to  convey  the  thoughts  caused  thereby ! 

§ 41.  Again : Throughout  all  this  vast  ocean  of  organic  life,  all 
known  laws,  forces,  and  motions,  whether  in  the  celestial  spheres  or 
on  this  present  globe,  are  acknowledged  to  perform  their  office 
(unless  incidentally  obstructed),  with  the  most  perfect  Justice  and 
Equity.  And  again,  as  the  material  constituents  of  all  things  are 
combined  in  the  constitution  of  Man,  he  can  exemplify  this  principle, 
and  thus  a true  conception  of  corresponding  Justice  may  be  obtained. 
The  laws  that  govern  the  organic  and  mental  constitution,  are  oper- 
ating, according  to  their  nature,  with  a steady  and  undisturbed  action. 
But  if  any  of  these  laws  are  interfered  with  by  any  incidental  or  in- 
tentional impediment  or  violation,  they  bring  with  them  corresponding 
natural  results.  If  all  the  demands  of  the  physiological  law  are  not 
properly  and  justly  obeyed  ; if  this  law  is  in  any  way  interfered  with, 
or  violated  in  any  particular  or  general  sense,  there  must,  and  of 
necessity  will  be,  a corresponding  result  following  the  violation. 

Likewise  the  mental  law,  if  violated  or  disregarded  as  to  its 
demands  upon  the  being  subject  to  it,  will  in  all  instances  produce  a 
corresponding  result.  And  therefore  if  the  physiological  and  intel- 
lectual laws  are  at  any  time  interrupted  in  their  movements  by  any 
cause  foreign  or  immediate,  they  will  illustrate  and  demonstrate  to 
the  mind  the  perfect  harmony  that  exists  in  all  the  motions  and  laws 
of  Nature  — that  they  are  equal  and  just,  and  that  good  or  evil 
results  must  of  necessity  be  produced  according  as  they  are  obeyed 
or  disobeyed. 

F or  all  movements  must  produce  natural  results.  Hence  if  any 
law  is  impeded,  it  produces  as  a consequence,  impure  results ; but  if 
not  interfered  with,  but  obeyed  in  all  its  requirements  and  demands, 
it  will  produce  pure  and  happy  results.  Therefore  there  is  con- 
stantly in  operation  the  law  and  principle  of  Goodness,  to  produce 
'pure  effects ; and  (as  an  opposite  or  negative  manifestation),  an  inter- 

8 


114 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


ruption  of  its  forces  produces  impure  results.  And  between  the 
pure  and  impure ; between  goodness  and  its  legitimate  effects ; be- 
tween harmony  and  disunion,  may  be  seen  still  more  distinctly  the 
infinite  attribute  of  never-ending  Justice  ! 

Thus  Power,  Wisdom,  and  Goodness,  are  combined  in  the  gen- 
eral and  specific  compositions  of  all  things,  from  the  lowest,  up  to 
and  in  Man.  They  point  to  the  united  and  infinite  Source  from 
which  they  emanated,  — and  develop  the  principle  of  eternal  Justice, 
which  is  universally  displayed  among  every  class  and  species  exist- 
ing in  the  terrestrial  spheres.  And  the  whole  is  indicative  of  higher 
and  more  perfect  attributes,  which  will  be  gradually  manifested, 
directly  and  indirectly,  in  the  various  portions  of  the  Revelation. 

The  bodies  and  spheres  contained  in  the  immensity  of  inconceiv- 
able space,  thus  follow  in  order  the  powerful  Law  by  which  they  are 
produced  and  governed,  and  that  with  inconceivable  precision,  uni- 
formity of  motion,  and  reciprocal  actions  upon  each  other.  The 
perpetual  and  mutual  intervolutions  and  revolutions  ; the  strict  exact- 
ness of  the  specific  forces  and  motions  uniformly  existing  in  each 
part  and  particle  composing  the  celestial  spheres ; the  beauty  and 
harmony  displayed  in  these  motions  with  respect  to  each  other,  and 
around  their  respective  centres,  and  the  perfect  precision  manifested 
in  every  line  and  path  in  which  they  travel,  — throwing  off  particles 
and  attracting  the  refined  ones  of  others ; the  constant,  reciprocal, 
and  universal  sympathy  which  they  display, — manifest  in  their  gen- 
eral indications,  the  divine  attribute  of  Mcebiess,  Compassion,  and 
Mercy.  Each  motion,  action,  and  force,  observed  in  the  planetary 
system,  is  a true  and  correct  signal  of  distributive  Justice  and 
infinite  Mercy  ! 

Individual  and  isolated  observations,  apparently  disconnected  with 
the  universal  law  of  motion,  will  impress  still  more  deeply  upon  the 
mind  this  irresistible  conclusion.  Still  in  descending  from  the  gen- 
eral observation  to  the  particular  and  individual  manifestations  of 
this  attribute,  the  mind  should  not  lose  sight  of  its  revealment  in  the 
great  and  universal  Law  of  Nature. 

The  known  evidences  contained  and  revealed  in  the  traditional 
histories  of  the  world,  including  the  many  investigations  into  the  ma- 
terial and  physical  sciences,  and  the  well-established  axioms  that 
have  been  set  forth  in  the  many  contemplations  of  Nature  and 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


115 


Art,  carry  with  them  conviction  of  the  indestructible  attribute  under 
consideration. 

The  natural  developments  of  the  earth,  from  the  grosser  stages  up 
to  the  animal  creation,  unfold  one  united  and  harmonious  chain  of 
progression.  And  Life,  Sensation,  and  Intelligence,  have  also  fol- 
lowed in  their  respective  orders,  as  the  legitimate  results  of  inherent 
and  eternal  laws.  Throughout  the  whole  vegetable  kingdom,  there  is 
observed  between  different  forms  a constant  giving  to  and  taking  from 
each  other  of  particles,  in  order  that  one  may  sustain  another,  and  that 
thus  the  kingdom  as  a whole  may  be  sustained  : and  thus  also  is  de- 
veloped the  truth  of  universal  Reciprocation,  Kindness,  and  Mercy. 

This  harmony,  this  universal  sympathy,  kindness,  benevolence, 
and  charity,  corresponds  to  the  great  and  infinite  attribute  of  divine 
and  unspeakable  Compassion,  and  must  of  necessity  accompany  other 
eternal  attributes  that  are  contained  in  the  Great  Fountain  of  all 
existence. 

The  animals  display  more  lenity,  more  unqualified  compassion,  and 
more  instinctive  justice,  than  are  often  known  to  be  displayed  by  the 
perverted  and  misdirected  principles  of  mankind.  They  also  display 
unqualified  mercy  and  instinctive  attachment.  From  the  lower  to  the 
higher  states  of  animal  existence,  there  is  one  chain  of  universal  sym- 
pathy, justice,  and  benevolence,  corresponding  to  the  harmonious 
reciprocations  observed  in  the  vegetable  kingdom  — also  to  the  exalted 
and  unperverted  morality  of  universal  humanity.  The  vegetable  and 
animal  forms  of  material  production  therefore  manifest  sympathy  and 
mercy,  corresponding  to  what  is  observed  in  the  planetary  worlds. 
And  Man,  the  refined  and  exalted  perfection  of  all  else — the  unlim- 
ited governor  and  controller  of  his  own  being — possesses  the  com 
bined  refinements  of  Justice,  Mercy,  and  Benevolence,  known  as  the 
unspeakable  blessing — the  faculty  of  unclouded  Reason.  By  this 
he  may  understand  Truth,  and  subdue  all  artificial  feelings  and  de- 
sires illegitimately  evolved  from  his  nature ; and  he  thus  stands  as  a 
perfect  standard  and  emblem  of  distributive  Justice,  universal  Com- 
passion and  Mercy.  It  is  his  highest  attainment — it  is  his  most 
happy  and  blessed  condition  of  existence — to  exercise  judgment  and 
justice  without  distinction.  And  thus,  from  man  to  animals,  with 
their  constant  mental  developments  ; and  from  these  to  vegetables, 
with  their  sympathy  and  equality  of  action ; and  from  these  to  the 
material  sphere  which  contains  these  all ; and  thence  throughout  the 
immensity  of  universal  space, — -there  is  an  indestructible  impression 


116 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


conveyed  of  reciprocation,  harmony,  beauty,  and  magnificence ; jus- 
tice, mercy,  sympathy,  and  eternal  benevolence  ! 

§ 42.  The  profound  meditations  on  the  infinitude  of  Space,  in- 
duce upon  the  mind  the  parallel  conception  of  infinite  Time.  For 
lime  and  space  arc  parallel  and  synonymous  in  signification ; but  as 
a distinction  is  made  between  them,  and  is  universally  acknowledged, 
it  will  not  be  disregarded, — hut  we  will  continue  the  association  of 
thoughts  as  thus  conceived. 

The  surface  of  the  earth  may  he  compared  to  infinite  space  and 
time,  as  conceived  of  by  the  human  mind.  The  various  and  innu- 
merable forms,  planets,  and  bodies,  existing  in  space,  may  be  com- 
pared with  the  forms,  bodies,  and  organizations,  here  existing.  For 
each  celestial  sphere  can  be  no  more  than  a form  that  matter  has 
assumed  in  obedience  to  its  omnipotent  law  of  progression.  The 
forms  and  entities  here  existing,  are  no  more  than  modifications  and 
correspondent  productions  of  the  material  elements  composing  the 
Universe.  All  bodies  upon  the  earth  are  sustained  upon  its  surface 
by  laws  acting  in  connexion  and  correspondence  with  the  universal 
law  of  Cause,  Effect,  and  End.  The  atmosphere  of  this  sphere 
holds  to  the  same  the  many  living  beings  and  entities  that  are  exist- 
ing upon  its  surface.  And  each  other  sphere  has,  again,  its  atmo- 
sphere, as  corresponding  to  the  earth’s  atmosphere,  — governed  by 
the  laws  of  attraction  and  repulsion,  or  inspiration  and  exhalation,  in- 
flux and  reflux,  giving  to  and  taking  from.  And  this  whole  chain 
performs  its  specific  duties  on  laws  corresponding  to  those  of  the 
most  refined  and  exalted  sphere  in  the  regions  of  infinity. 

Therefore  a correspondence  and  positive  analogy  may  be  observed 
as  existing  between  and  connecting  all  things  emanating  from  the 
Great  Sphere  or  Focus  of  the  Great  Positive  Mind.  There  is  a 
perfect  and  successive  gradation  and  established  juxtaposition  mani- 
fested in  all  forms  and  entities,  both  visible  and  invisible,  terrestrial 
and  celestial ; and  the  wrhole  are  governed  by  the  perpetual,  uniform 
action  of  the  former  combined  attributes,  whose  law  is  thus  powerful, 
wise,  and  good. 

Justice  and  Mercy  are  thus  legitimate  attendants  of  the  formei 
principles  combined  ; and  from  the  first  attribute  to  the  last,  and  from 
the  combination  of  the  whole  as  forming  the  conception  of  infinite 
Perfection,  there  is  developed  and  expressed  in  all  things,  visible 
and  invisible,  the  unspeakable  attribute  of  Eternal  Truth  1 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


117 


Thus  Tower  first  existed.  Further  development  showed  infinite 
Wisdom ; still  further,  unbounded  Goodness  ! And  again,  Motion 
becoming  refined  and  perfected  into  Sensation  and  Life  (correspond- 
ing to  the  celestial  life  of  the  planetary  spheres),  shows  the  great  law 
and  attribute  of  universal  Justice.  And  by  the  constant  sympathy, 
kindness,  and  benevolence,  manifested  in  the  imperceptible  recipro- 
cation of  all  their  parts  and  particles,  there  is  developed  another  attri- 
bute— that  of  eternal  and  impartial  Mercy  ! 

The  contemplation  of  unlimited  space  and  time,  and  the  recogni- 
tion of  the  perfect  analogy  between  space  and  the  surface  of  this 
earth — between  forms  and  entities  therein  contained,  and  forms  and 
entities  existing  on  the  earth, — give  a correct  idea  (so  far  as  it  is 
possible  to  conceive  of  one)  of  the  universal  creation  and  procreation 
of  all  forms  and  spheres  contained  in  boundless  space,  as  correspond- 
ing to  those  existing  on  this  globe. 

Compare  world  with  world ; space  with  time ; form  with  form ; 
particles  with  the  whole  fabric  of  existence  ; cause  with  effect ; effect 
with  ultimate,  and  that  with  design.  Then  investigate  the  hidden 
laws  of  material  and  organic  motion.  Keep  in  view,  in  this  whole 
train  of  contemplation,  the  great  original  Mind,  the  Cause  of  all 
things  known  as  effects,  and  of  that  which  is  not  visually  known,  but 
which  does  exist — the  ultimate  of  material  perfection.  Conceive 
once  more  of  the  great  archwork  of  Nature,  and  how  it  was  produced. 
Contemplate  still  more  deeply  the  causes  which  the  effects  prove  to 
exist;  and  the  conception — the  subduing  and  tranquillizing  knowledge 
— will  be  produced  in  the  mind,  that  the  very  perfection,  the  highest 
possible  refinement,  of  the  former  attributes,  the  very  nature  and  es- 
sential quality  of  the  Great  Positive  Mind,  is  unchangeable  and  eter- 
nal Truth ! 

There  is  not  one  feature  in  Nature  that  presents  itself  to  the  gen- 
eral observer,  which  is  not  stamped  with  the  impress  of  its  divine 
origin.  The  same  may  be  observed  in  every  planet ; in  every  form 
and  sphere  of  the  mineral  and  vegetable  wTorld ; in  every  modifica- 
tion of  anatomy  and  form  in  the  plant.  So  also  does  the  animal 
creation  bear  this  indestructible  impress,  by  its  undeviating  and  unre- 
stricted harmony,  and  its  production  and  reorganization  that  are  con- 
stantly going  on,  and  are  manifested  throughout  all  its  various  spheres 
up  to  Mankind.  And  the  physical  and  mental  composition  of  man, 
his  faculties  and  capacities,  are  still  onward  in  their  progressive  ten- 
dency to  their  sublime  results.  And  all  these  things  are  expressions 


118 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


of  unchangeable  Truth,  of  divine  Perfection,  and  of  an  eternal  prin 
ciple  of  divine  Intelligence. 

Thus  Power,  Wisdom,  Goodness — Justice,  Mercy,  and  Truth — 
are  the  gradual  and  successive  developments  of  an  eternal  and  inter- 
nal Principle,  constituting  the  divine,  original  Essence  ! 

& 

Thus,  then,  are  established  the  law  of  progression ; of  develop- 
ment ; the  science  of  correspondences ; the  doctrine  of  concentric 
circles  ; the  idea  of  an  endless  chain  of  eternal  action,  motion,  and 
development,  throughout  all  Nature  ; the  immortality  of  all  things  in 
a purified  and  perfected  state  of  existence ; the  unity  and  harmony 
of  all  things,  and  the  impossibility  of  a positive  opposite  to  exist  in 
Nature  or  any  of  her  apartments  or  spheres  of  united  and  progressive 
movement. 


§ 43.  The  all-pervading  Essence  contained  in  Nature  is  of  itself 
an  eternal  and  immortal  Principle.  Every  particle  of  matter  at  some 
time  during  the  course  of  ages  passes  through,  and  becomes  a part 
of , animal  life!  The  hardest  substance  that  is  existing  in  the  earth; 
the  earth  itself,  and  all  things  contained  in,  below,  and  above  it,  will 
ultimately,  and  at  different  periods,  compose  some  parts  or  particles 
of  animal  existence.  According  to  the  progression  of  each  part, 
there  is  an  equal  association  of  the  same  with  that  of  like  affinity. 
For  the  substance  of  the  earth  progresses  to  that  of  mineral  and  crys- 
tallized bodies ; then  becomes  such  : and  these  progress  to  the  sub- 
stance of  the  vegetable,  and  then  become  vegetable  matter  : this  to 
animal,  and  then  enters  into  the  composition  of  animal  existence ; 
and  then,  purified  from  all  lower  spheres  and  states  which  it  has  pre- 
viously occupied,  the  whole  becomes  perfected  to  associate  with  and 
compose  the  organization  of  Mankind.  Thence  it  goes  onward  to 
other  states  of  refined  and  unparticled  matter. 

This  demonstrates  conclusively  to  the  profound  investigator  and 
searcher  into  Nature’s  inherent  qualities  and  specific  laws,  that  all 
matter  composing  orbs  and  planets,  all  entities,  from  the  highest  in 
the  planetary  system  to  this  — that  every  particle  in  all  these  must 
of  necessity  become  at  some  time  the  associate,  the  quality,  the  com- 
position, of  animal  life  ! 

This  movement  and  constant  refinement  and  perfection,  is  imper- 
ceptible to  the  senses,  because  it  is  gradual  and  eternal,  while  the 
senses  are  finite  and  evanescent — existing  but  a moment  in  compari- 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


119 


son  to  the  other  existences,  and  are  consequently  not  capable  of  pal- 
pable and  cognizant  conviction.  For  finite  and  infinite  are  extremes 
to  the  mind  seemingly  disconnected  ; therefore  man  can  not  be  cog- 
nizant of  the  internal  movements  of  the  Universe. 

Forms  and  entities  are  mere  modifications  of  original  matter,  which 
assumes  states  of  material  association  and  composition  according  to 
its  degree  of  progression.  Forms  are  therefore  but  finite  and  exter- 
nal— are  fleeting  and  evanescent  in  comparison  to  the  imperceptible 
motion  of  gross  matter.  For  all  things  are  assuming  forms,  not  only 
as  necessary  results,  but  as  uses  to  develop  new  truths  and  princi- 
ples, and  for  the  purification  and  organization  of  higher  and  more 
perfect  forms  of  life. 

Man  is  pre-eminently  beautiful,  as  he  contains  all  things  else  in  a 
state  of  purity  ; and  he,  like  other  results  of  Nature,  is  a designed 
instrument — is  a use  — to  develop  a more  sublime  Ultimate. 

All  forms,  therefore,  are  external  effects,  and  are  mortal.  They 
can  not  be  depended  upon  as  affording  proofs  of  immortality,  or  as 
demonstrating  even  the  probability  of  a future  life.  But  there  is  an 
internal,  invisible  Quality  and  Essence  that  may  be  found  by  search 
and  analysis  to  be  the  Truth  of  all  truths,  and  the  Real  of  all  reali- 
ties— the  internal  Principle  of  the  Eternal  Positive  Mind  ! 

The  First  and  Last,  or  the  Cause  and  Ultimate,  which  it  has  been 
the  object  to  prove  and  demonstrate  to  the  rational  mind,  is  the  ex- 
istence, the  reality,  the  true  conception,  of  an  intelligent  First  Cause 
(and  this  has  been  proved  from  all  the  palaetiological  sciences,  and 
all  the  philosophical  inductions  of  Nature),  and  the  positive  individu- 
alization of  the  inner  life,  or  spiritual  principle.  — And  the  last  has 
been  shown  from  the  irresistible  conclusions  drawn  from  the  physical 
sciences,  together  with  philosophy,  reason,  and  the  approbations  of  a 
comprehensive  intelligence,  to  be  more  than  a probable  possibility  — 
and  actually  demonstrated  to  be  a real  reality — to  be  the  natural 
result,  but  still  a perfect  and  eternal  one,  of  the  material  organi- 
zation. 

Therefore,  as  the  First  and  Last  have  been  positively  proved, 
the  Key  has  now  done  its  specific  duty,  by  having  prepared  the  mind 
to  contemplate  that  which  is  still  higher,  yet  connected  with  all  things 
existing  in  an  inferior  degree.  And  as  Nature  has  been  proved  to 
be  a combined  Effect  of  the  First  Cause,  and  Spirit  an  Ultimate, 
Nature  therefore  stands  as  a mediator  between  disbelief  and  present 
conviction  ; and  upon  her  and  her  laws,  as  a foundation  (speaking 


120 


THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


correspondentially  of  all  spheres  in  universal  space),  shall  be  based 
the  Revelation — which  will  progressively  reveal  every  visible  and 
invisible  existence,  until  it  arrives  at  the  highest  Sphere  of  perfec- 
tion ; and  then  will  retrace  the  links  of  development  back  to  the 
original  Cause  and  Foundation  of  all  things. 

During  the  delivery  of  this  Key,  I have  occupied  a Sphere  second 
to  this  in  mental  refinement  and  perfection.  And  to  reveal  the  Sec- 
ond Sphere,  I progress  or  ascend  to  the  Third;  thence  to  the 
Fourth  ; thence  onward  and  upward  to  the  Fifth,  Sixth,  and  finally, 
as  an  ultimate,  to  the  Seventh  — in  which  Sphere  I shall  be  able  to 
comprehend  all  others.  Then  from  this,  again,  I shall  descend  to 
that  which  I now  occupy.  And  the  whole  is  to  be  in  accordance 
with  the  laws  of  Universal  Truth,  as  the  Perfection  and  Ultimate 
of  all  the  other  attributes  belonging  to  the  Great  Positive  Mind  ! 


END  OF  THE  FIRST  PART,  OR  KEY. 


PART  II. 


OK, 


NATURE’S  DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


§ 1.  In  the  beginning,  the  Univercoelum  was  one  boundless, 
undefinable,  and  unimaginable  ocean  of  liquid  fire  ! The  most 
vigorous  and  ambitious  imagination  is  not  capable  of  forming  an  ade- 
quate conception  of  the  height,  and  depth,  and  length,  and  breadth 
thereof.  There  was  one  vast  expanse  of  liquid  substance.  It  was 
without  bounds  — inconceivable  — and  with  qualities  and  essences 


was  without  forms  ; for  it  was  but  one  Form.  It  had  not  motions  ; 
but  it  was  an  eternity  of  Motion.  It  was  without  parts  ; for  it  was  a 
Whole.  Particles  did  not  exist ; but  the  Whole  was  as  one 


There  were  not  Suns,  but  it  was  one  Eternal  Sun.  It  had  no  oegm- 
ning,  and  it  was  without  end.  It  had  not  length ; for  it  was  a Vor- 
tex of  one  Eternity.  It  had  not  circles ; for  it  was  one  infinite 
Circle.  It  had  not  disconnected  power;  but  it  was  the  very  essence 
of  all  Power.  Its  inconceivable  magnitude  and  constitution  were 
such  as  not  to  develop  forces,  but  Omnipotent  Power ! 

Matter  and  Power  were  existing  as  a Whole,  inseparable,  j The 
Mutter  contained  the  substance  to  produce  all  suns,  all  worlds,  and 
systems  of  worlds,  throughout  the  immensity  of  space.  It  contained 
the  qualities  to  produce  all  things  that  are  existing  upon  each  of 
these  worlds.  \ The  Power  contained  Wisdom  and  Goodness, — 
Justice,  Mercy,  and  Truth.  It  contained  the  original  and  essential 
Principle  that  is  displayed  throughout  immensity  of  space,  con- 
trolling worlds  and  systems  of  worlds,  and  producing  Motion,  'Life, 


122 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


Sensation,  and  Intelligence,  to  be  impartially  disseminated  upon  their 
surfaces  as  [Jltinyites  ! 

This  Great  Centre  of  worlds — this  Great  Power  of  Intelligence — • 
this  Great  Germ  of  all  existences — was  One  World! — corre- 
sponding to  a globe  visible  : for  it  was  but  One  — containing  the  ma- 
terials and  Power  to  produce  all  others.  It  had  Wisdom  equal  to 
Matter,  to  plan  them  and  direct  their  infinite  movements.  It  had 
Goodness  equal  to  the  extent  of  its  substance,  to  give  perfect  harmony 
and  distributive  usefulness  to  all  parts  of  this  Infinitude.  It  had  Jus- 
tice.; hut  only  to  be  manifested  in  proportion  to  developments  of  suit- 
able mediums  upon  these  subordinate  spheres,  or  forms  of  the  Great. 
Sphere.  It  had  Mercy , Lenity , and  Forbearance , to  be  developed 
as  corresponding  with  like  developments  in  sensitive  and  intelligent 
beings.  It  contained  Truth  eternalized, , like  its  own  nature.  So 
the  whole  of  these  principles  were  joined  into  one  vast  Vortex  of 
Pure  Intelligence  ! 

Thus,  Matter  and  Motion  are  co-eternal  principles,  established  by 
virtue  of  their  own  nature'7'|and  they  were  the  Germ,  containing  all 
properties,  all  essences,  aTl  principles,  to  produce  all  other  forms  and 
spheres  that  are  now  known  to  be  existing.  The  great  original  Mas% 
was  a substance  containing  within  itself  the  embryo  of  its  own  per- 
fection. It  became  pregnated  by  virtue  of  its  own  laws,  and  was 
controlled,  guided,  and  perfected,  by  virtue  of  its  own  omnipotent 
Power  ! 

Crystallization  and  organic  life  being  the  two  general  developments 
belonging  to  the  Mundus  of  spheres,  there  was  nothing  existing  as 
things  are  now  known  to  exist : for  it  was  one  Sphere,  one  Substance, 
one  Germ,  one  Cause,  containing  the  power  to  produce  all  the  sys- 
tems that  are  now  swimming  in  the  vacuum  of  undefinable  space.  It 
contained  the  'power  of  progression,  but  had  not  progressed. 

Therefore  Matter  and  Power  were  the  only  Principles  developed ; 
and  there  were  no  other  spheres  of  progression.  This  great  Mass 
of  Matter  abounded  with  heat  and  fire  immense,  insomuch  that  each 
seeming  particle  was  in  reality  not  such,  but  the  Whole  was  a mass 
of  liquid  lava.  The  elements  then  developed  were  Light  and  Heat. 
The  Power  contained  in  this  great  Vortex  was  the  Great  Positive 
Mind!  — and  its  development  was  Eternal  Motion!  And  so 
Matter  and  Motion  constituted  the  original  condition  of  all  things ! 

Matter  contained  all  the  attributes,  characteristics,  essential  quali- 
ties, and  peculiar  combinations,  which  the  whole  Univercoelum  mani- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


123 


fests.  No  limits  could  be  given  to  its  inconceivable  extension,  no 
combination  of  numbers  could  represent  its  diameter,  and  no  concep- 
tion of  form  could  be  properly  applied  to  its  appearance  ! F or  Cause 
and  Effect  were  involved  in  one  universal  Motion,  undulating  almost 
its  own  immensity  ! No  parts  were  acting  upon  other  parts,  but  the 
Whole  was  acting  by  virtue  of  its  own  internal  power,  which  was  of 
inconceivable  greatness.  No  name  or  quality  can  properly  repre- 
sent its  original  substance  : for  the  whole  was  flaming  with  internal 
heat,  which  evolved,  as  an  effect,  the  principle  of  Light. 

So  Matter,  Heat,  and  Light,  constituted  the  primitive  condition  of 
the  material,  eternal  Substance.  Possessing  all  these  essential  qual- 
ities, characteristics,  and  compounds,  it  was  suitable  to  produce  all 
things  which  have  been  produced,  and  to  be  the  Cause  and  Effect  to 
produce  indeterminable  Ultimates.  Its  ultimate  purification  would 
necessarily  produce  the  peculiar  essence  of  animal  life  and  Intelli- 
gence. The  very  essence  that  it  contained,  would  inevitably  breathe 
forth  the  amazing  and  indescribable  qualities  that  characterize  all  the 
organic  kingdoms  ! The  Terra  and  Terminus  were  both  combined 
in  jthis  great  Ocean  of  unparticled  substance.  This  contained  the 
parts  to  produce  all  things  subsequently  created.  It  was  the  Cause 
of  an  eternalized  system  of  concentric  spheres  of  heavens  which 
were  and  are  the  very  Foundation  and  Cause  of  all  that  is  terrestrial 
and  corporeal,  yet  developing  that  which  is  celestial  and  heavenly. 

The  original  form  was  angular.  This  contained  the  principle  and 
nature  of  all  other  forms : so  that  from  the  lowest  and  intermediate 
forms  up  to  the  highest,  could  be  constantly  produced  other  forms 
accompanied  with,  and  controlled  and  acted  upon  by,  the  Great  Pos- 
itive Power.  Progression  of  the  angular  evolved  the  circular. 
This  assumed,  not  a spherical  constitution,  but  it  was  a combination 
of  angular  and  rectilinear  plane.  Therefore  the  continuance  of  the 
angular  to  the  circular  was  only  a perpetually  progressive  form, 
ascending  toward  the  spiral,.  And  this  developed  diameters,  axes, 
and  poles,  containing  the  perpetual  angular,  and  progressed  to  a still 
higher  and  more  perfect  form,  that  of  the  vortical,  properly  the 
celestial. 

Thus  from  the  lowest  to  this  sphere  of  progression,  there  was  a 
constant  development  of  inherent  principles  and  laws,  the  lower  con- 
taining the  higher,  and  the  perfected  comprehending  all  below  it. 
The  perpetual  vortical  or  celestial,  was  the  Spiritual ; in  which  there 
is  nothing  but  what  is  refined,  pure,  and  everlastingly  infinite,  con- 


124 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


tabling  unspeakable  and  celestial  glory,  brightness,  and  grandeur.  It 
is  the  Vortex,  the  inconceivably  perfect  and  spontaneous  substance 
of  the  Great  Positive  Mind  ! 

The  greatest  comprehends  the  lesser,  still  that  which  was  first, 
hough  is  not  developed  except  by  order  and  virtue  of  degreed 
progression.  And  so  each  state  assumed  new  qualities  and  involved 
new  developments,  until  the  highest  put  forth  its  everlasting  bright- 
ness, an  index  of  its  own  origin  ! 

§ 2.  Matter  and  Motion  reigned  throughout  the  regions  of  bound- 
less infinitude.  There  were  no  other  forms  and  no  other  attributes 
evolved  from  Power  ; for  they  all  existed  undevelqped  together. 
Matter  and  its  peculiar  combinations,  existed  from  time  unimagina- 
ble, as  the  vehicle  of  more  sublime  Ultimates,  to  be  eternally  devel- 
oped by  the  Design  and  Power  which  were  constantly  being  sent 
forth  from  the  great  Vortex  of  Positive  Power! 

It  was  impossible  for  Matter  to  exist  without  a principle  of  inhe- 
rent and  eternal  production.  It  was  impossible  for  this  internal, 
invisible,  Positive  Power  to  exist  without  Matter  as  its  accompani- 
ment and  Vehicle.  \_  In  order  that  this  Matter  might  assume  forms, 
the  action  of  the  Great  Positive  Power  was  necessary  to  impel  it  to 
higher  states  of  progression.  So  the  Matter,  thus  acted  upon,  was 
developed  until  it  became  an  external  Equilibrium  or  Negative  of 
the  Great  Positive  Power  internally  acting  upon  it.  And  thus  Posi- 
tive and  Negative  were  eternally  established  in  Matter.  And  Matter 
was  thus  obliged  to  obey  every  impulse  or  force  given  it  by  the 
internal  Principles,  emanating  from  the  Great  Positive  MinckJ 

The  Great  First  Cause,  or  the  Vortex  of  pure  Intelligence,  was 
a First,  or  Cause  Internal.  Matter,  with  its  properties  and  incon- 
ceivable combinations,  was  an  accompaniment  or  counterpart  that 
may  be  termed  a Second  or  Effect.  And  the  external  or  counter- 
vailing force  developed  by  the  action  of  the  Internal,  was  a Third  or 
Ultimate. 

Thus  was  established  the  Law  of  universal  and  eternal  Motion. 
In  the  beginning  God  created — or  the  Great  Positive  Mind  caused  — 
the  existences  and  forms  that  are  now  universally  manifested. 

Having  arrived  at  this  state  and  order  of  material  formation,  the 
true  conception  of  Matter  and  Motion,  of  their  original  combination, 
of  the  self-establishment  of  laws  and  principles  suitable  to  develop  ulti- 
mate results,  and  of  the  adjustment  of  laws  to  produce  such,  — are 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


125 


made  present  to  the  mind.  And  this  was  the  condition  of  these 
elements  and  principles  in  the  beginning ; and  they  were  thus  pre- 
pared to  develop  forms  corresponding  to  the  virtue  of  the  internal 
principles  involved  in  the  Great  Mass,  and  to  the  inherent  Power 
emanating  from  the  Great  Vortex  in  which  nothing  but  everlasting 
perfection  is  contained  ! Herein  is  involved  all  that  is  everlasting, 
eternal,  and  infinite  : And  herein  are  established  the  laws  that  are  to 
govern  the  vast  Univercoelum  and  all  things  therein  contained!  At 
this  epoch  and  state  of  infinite  original  constitution,  all  the  laws, 
elements,  and  combinations  of  elements,  were  involved  in  the  Great 
Mass,  to  be  subsequently  developed  in  order  and  succession  of  de- 
grees, throughout  every  undefinable  avenue  of  eternal  motion,  life, 
and  activity. 

The  universal  Cause,  Law,  and  Reality,  is  now  established  and 
organized.  Internal  and  External,  Cause  and  Effect,  Positive  and 
Negative,  have  now  assumed  their  proper  stations  to  produce  a con- 
stant development  of  their  inherent  attributes.  The  forms  that  are 
involved  in  this  great  Whole,  are  to  be  also  successively  developed 
and  made  visible,  with  their  consequent  developments.  The  consti- 
tution and  laws  of  Matter  # with  all  its  sublime  qualities  and  essences, 
will  be  unfolded  ultimately,  but  by  a process  graduated  by  like  de- 
velopments of  the  Great  energetic  Cause  and  Positive  Power. 

This  extensive  general  organization  having  become  now  eternally 
established,  new  developments  must  consequently  and  inevitably 
occur.  Each  of  these  developments  leads  only  to  the  perfection  that 
is  existing  in  the  Vortex  of  internal  and  everlasting  Intelligence. 

But  before  contemplating  the  spontaneous  developments  of  this 
great  and  unimaginable  Ocean  of  Matter  and  Motion,  it  is  well  to 
contemplate  the  substances  which  it  contains  undeveloped. 

The  gross  and  lower  qualities  that  are  contained  in  this  great  Mass; 
the  almost  entire  dissimilarity  of  particles  constituting  the  same,  with 
any  which  may  be  present  to  the  mind,  and  the  great  amount  and 
utter  incomprehensibility  of  the  original  substance,  give  some  obscu- 
rity to  the  lower  and  more  perfected  particles  that  compose  this  great 
Vehicle  of  Positive  Power.  The  mighty  magnitude  of  this  terra- 
material;  the  duration  of  Eternity ; the  mighty  substances  and  particles 
that  are  destined  to  produce  mightier  spheres  of  beauty  and  perfection  ; 
the  inconceivableness  of  this  great  expanse,  developing  perpetually 

• The  lecturer  here  remarked,  that  in  speaking  of  the  original  condition  of  things, 
he  used  Matter  and  Fire  as  synonymous. 


12G 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


spheres  and  Spheres  of  spheres,  and  forms  that  are  indices  of  foims 
still  higher  and  greater  in  their  many  and  successive  degrees  of  per- 
petual progression, — these  all  are  too  vast  for  human  conception! 
But  still,  a general  conte mplation  would  be  useful,  as  conveying 
some  slight  idea  of  their  nature  and  destination,  — though  the  almost 
vacuum  of  indefinite  thought  will  only  radiate  and  revibrate  that 
which  was  intended  to  be  the  subject  of  conception. 

First,  it  contains  the  peculiar  combinations  that  form  a Sun  so  vast 
that  it  again  forms  similar  ones,  corresponding  to  the  great  Sun  or 
World  that  was  first  repulsed  from  the  great  Body,  or  Infinite  Centre  ! 
And  this  is  an  index  — a symbol  — of  an  eternity  of  worlds  like  unto 
the  first  launched  from  the  great  Centre  to  the  extremity  of  its  own 
atmospheric  circle.  And  each  having  subordinate  worlds,  and  these 
having  satellites,  they  in  order  revolve  around  each  other,  and 
the  whole  around  the  Centre  or  Sun  which  produced  them.  And 
this,  with  all  corresponding  suns  and  constellations,  attended  with 
their  many  planets  and  satellites,  revolves  around  the  Great  Centre 
or  Sun  from  which  the  whole  emanated ! And  thus  is  established 
the  first  motion  of  planetary  worlds  ! And  these  having  developed 
upon  geometrical  principles,  the  angular,  circular,  and  spiral  motions, 
this  eternal  establishment  becomes  the  first  system  of  concentric  circles ! 

After  the  great  Fountain  has  produced  from  its  inherent  substance, 
an  infinite  number  of  worlds,  the  worlds,  or  the  compositions  therein 
contained,  progress  perpetually  to  higher  states  of  perfection.  The 
next  development  is  the  crystallization  of  internal  particles,  producing 
the  various  earthy  and  mineral  substances.  The  highest  state  of 
mineral,  by  order  of  degrees  and  progression  of  particles,  brings  forth 
the  great  substance  of  the  whole  Vegetable  Kingdom.  The  lowest 
of  this  (including,  as  it  does,  the  highest),  produces  the  most  delicate 
plant.  This  kingdom,  again,  constitutes,  in  order  and  degree,  animal 
composition.  And  this  again  ascending  to  higher  and  more  perfect 
orders  and  degrees,  brings  forth  the  essences  and  qualities  that  com- 
pose the  organization  of  Man.  And  all  intermediate  substances 
developed,  are  the  Uses  adapted  to  the  wants  and  requirements  of 
each  successive  material  development.  So  all  substances,  which  are 
constantly  assuming  forms  by  the  action  of  the  Great  First  Form  and 
its  perpetual  ascension  to  Ultimates,  are  in  like  manner  ascending 
through  successive  and  corresponding  stages  of  development. 

The  Mass  tbit  was  first  repulsed  from  the  Great  Centre  of  worlds, 
contained  the  properties  and  essences,  not  only  to  compose  itself,  but 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


127 


to  produce  and  develop  the  minutest  and  most  sublimated  of  all  in- 
tricacies, apparently,  that  could  be  formed  from  the  finest  materials  : 
it  furnishes  materials  for,  and  produces,  the  brain  and  human  eye,  with 
all  their  inimitable  refinements  of  matter  ' 

Thus,  then,  this  great  Ocean  of  Eternal  Matter,  not  only  is  a Woild 
immense  and  infinite  of  itself,  but  it  contains  the  matter  to  produce 
the  most  inconceivable  corresponding  World;  and  this  again  forming 
others  of  like  nature,  progresses  from  inherent  qualities  to  the  outer 
development  of  an  organ  of  vision,  and  to  the  substance  and  forma- 
tion of  the  mental  organization  ! Thus  the  Lowest  or  First  contains 
all  else ; whereas  the  highest  state  of  perfection  acts  on  the  lower. 
So  while  that  which  is  first  contains  the  Ultimate,  the  Ultimate  acts 
on  all  things  below  it,  which,  though  less  perfect,  are  still  symbols  of 
eternal  essences  to  be  expanded  and  developed  in  visible  forms  and 
spheres  of  the  highest  degrees  of  magnificence. 

§ 3.  Contemplation  on  the  Attributes  contained  in,  and  belonging 
to,  the  Great  Positive  Power,  would  also  lead  the  mind  to  properly 
comprehend  what  is  contained  In  the  Great  Vortex  of  infinite  Perfec- 
tion undeveloped.  Power  is  manifested  in  the  guidance  and  control 
of  the  great  World  evolved  from  the  greater  one.  And  this  Power 
is  unlimited  and  uncontrolled  ; yet  developing  Wisdom  in  the  univer- 
sal expansion  and  extension  of  planetary  productions.  The  perfect 
and  inimitable  adaptation  of  every  constellation,  planet,  and  satellite, 
to  the  great  Sun  of  its  central  motion,  displays  infinite  Goodness. 
For*  Goodness  is  the  proper  adaptation  of  things  to  ends,  in  order  to 
accomplish  some  grand  and  sublime  ultimate. 

The  proper  adherence  and  obedience  of  all  these  planetary  worlds, 
to  the  Positive  Law  of  Cause  and  Effect,  each  and  every  one  obey- 
ing the  original  impetus  given  it  when  this  eternal  law  was  established, 
displays  infinite  and  universal  Justice.  For  Justice  and  Equity  con- 
sist in  an  obedience  to  the  laws  of  Cause  and  Effect.  - 

The  proper  accomplishment  of  the  end  desired  by  the  original 
Premeditator,  displays  the  highest  and  most  perfect  attribute  of  Mercy 
For  light  is  evolved  from  the  great  Centre  thus  established;  propel 
elements  are  developed ; air  is  universally  distributed,  sufficient  to 
sustain  life  and  to  equalize  the  parts  composing  the  great  Whole,  — and 
all  to  prepare  suitable  habitations  for  vegetable  and  animal  existences  : 
and  this  is  the  accomplishment  of  the  Ultimate  intended.  And  in 
this  way  is  displayed  the  exalted  and  essential  attribute  of  everlasting 


12S 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


Mercy  ; for  Mercy  consists  in  the  adaptation  of  parts  to  the  Whole 
and  in  the  dissemination  and  sustaining  of  sensitive  beings. 

The  gradual  and  progressive  development  of  each  form  from  the 
condition  of  things  first  existing ; the  constant  and  inevitable  mani- 
festations occurring  in  every  epoch  or  stage  of  Motion ; the  mutual 
adaptation  of  all  things  which  is  plainly  visible,  and  the  perfect  and 
absolute  accomplishment  of  the  end  desired,  — display  the  perfection 
of  all  attributes,  the  Ultimate  of  the  Great  Positive  Mind,  Eternal 
Truth  ! For  Truth  is  that  inherent  principle  of  divine  Law  which 
determines  the  certain  and  adequate  accomplishment  of  any  good  and 
glorious  end  contemplated. 

Thus  Power  and  its  Vehicle  constitute  the  Fountain  from  which 
flow  all  things  to  ultimate  perfection.  The  inconceivable  fiery  mass 
of  Matter,  in  its  magnitude  and  constituents  of  composition,  pass  all 
comprehension.  And  Power,  wielding  its  mighty  and  energetic  in- 
fluence, coeternal  with  the  substance  of  Matter,  is  of  too  great  and 
mighty  a nature  to  be  imagined  or  conceived  of.  And  this  was  the 
condition  of  things  in  the  beginning. 

The  infinite  mass  of  Matter  developed  heat  and  light  by  virtue  of 
inherent  fire.  And  Power  being  positive,  developed  a Negative,  or 
the  eternal  Law  of  Gravitation.  Thus  Motion  was  eternally  estab- 
lished in  and  throughout  the  vast  material  composition. 

The  extension  of  the  atmosphere  from  the  Great  Body,  was  like- 
wise infinite.  And  the  Great  Centre  or  Sun  constantly  gave  offbeat 
and  light,  each  of  which  was  a development  of  Matter,  thrown  off  by 
its  repelling  power.  This  superior  combination,  as  evolved  from  the 
Centre,  was  suitable  for  the  formation  of  immense  worlds.  The  sub- 
stance or  unparticled  matter  which  was  constantly  thrown  from  the 
Centre,  became  at  length  a nebulous  Zone,  surrounding  the  immensity 
of  space  ! By  constant  action  and  development  of  the  particles  thus 
subjected  to  the  motion  of  attraction,  repulsion,  and  the  laws  of  con- 
densation ; by  a repelling  of  that  which  was  averse  to  the  process  of 
consolidation,  and  an  attracting  of  that  which  was  of  like  affinity  and 
suitable  to  become  part  of  the  same  mass,  the  formation  of  worlds 
was  first  instituted, — on  the  law  of  progression  and  development  from 
the  Great  Centre,  until  the  material  evolved  was  fitted  to  produce  a 
World,  and  that  others,  corresponding  to  the  great  original  Source. 
The  worlds  thus  formed  were  properly  Suns,  produced  from  an  in- 
conceivable mass  of  unparticled  matter  existing  before  the  process  of 
consolidation  commenced. 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


129 


Thus  an  incomprehensible  and  incalculable  number  of  Centres  or 
Suns  were  produced  by  the  development  of  beat  and  light,  and  their 
gradual  condensation.  And  from  these  were  created  systems  of  plan- 
ets, each  of  which  revolved  around  its  controlling  Centre,  according  to 
the  development  of  the  circular  and  spiral  motions,  and  the  influence 
of  attraction  and  repulsion,  or  the  laws  of  centripetal  and  centrifugal 
forces.  The  first  great  Ring  of  converging  formations  was  thus  com- 
menced and  completed. 

After  an  unimaginable  elapse  of  time  — almost  the  annihilation  of 
time  to  the  mind,  if  an  attempt  is  made  to  calculate  the  immensity  of 
its  duration  — the  constant  evolving  from  the  Great  Centre,  of  light 
still  more  perfected,  produced  innumerable  millions  of  suns,  which 
occupied  another  orbit  or  circle  in  relation  to  the  Great  Parent  of 
their  formation ! After  a corresponding  organization  of  parts,  these, 
by  attraction,  condensation,  repulsion,  and  the  evolution  of  their  own 
atmospheres,  produced  planets  and  satellites,  in  a manner  correspond- 
ing to  the  infinite  formations  of  the  first  Circle. 

The  extreme  heat,  the  intensity  of  which  transcends  the  utmost 
conception  of  thought,  and  is  as  many  million  degrees  greater  than 
the  hottest  artificial  fire,  as  the  latter  is  degrees  above  the  warmth  of 
the  human  system,  — this  heat  constantly  evolving  light  so  intense, 
that  its  strength  would  have  repulsed  planets  supposed  to  be  near  its 
source  (if  such  were  possible)  from  their  orbits,  — formed,  by  such 
radiation,  another  Circle  of  Suns.  And  each  constantly  develops 
its  laws,  forces,  and  motions,  expands  in  power  and  contracts  in  vol- 
ume, according  to  the  law  of  equal  magnitudes.  And  each  of  these 
suns  possesses  matter  still  more  refined  and  unpartioled  than  those  of 
the  former  system,  and  their  planets  were  formed  out  of  matter  still 
more  refined  as  evolved  from  their  own  centres.  And  so  there  was 
an  endless  circle  of  suns  and  formations  produced  as  corresponding 
to  other  circles,  each  circle  being  a System  of  eternal  systems,  and  an 
index  and  symbol  of  the  Great  Sun  or  F ocus  of  undefinable  magni- 
tude from  which  all  emanated  ! 

A fourth  Circle  of  Suns  was  correspondingly  formed,  with  accom- 
paniments similar  to  those  produced  by  the  former. 

A fifth  Circle  of  Suns  was  also  evolved  in  the  order  of  progressive 
material  development.  And  from  each  of  these  suns  an  atmosphere, 
as  was  the  case  with  the  former,  passed  to  the  circumference  of  its 
influence,  the  matter  of  which  formed  constellations,  planets,  and  sat- 
ellites, each  observing  the  same  laws  as  were  first  established,  each 

9 


.30 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


revolving  on  its  axis,  and  also  observing  nearly  the  same  plane  in  its 
revolutions  around  the  Centre  or  Sun  which  produced  them.  And 
thus  was  formed  a fifth  Circle  of  Suns  and  systems  of  worlds. 

A sixth  Circle  of  formations  was  also  produced  : and  these  are  Suns 
only.  As  they  have  not  yet  become  properly  consolidated,  their  at- 
mosphere has  not  yet  produced  other  formations ; and  so  they  are  at 
this  time  pursuing  their  undefinable  orbits  in  the  form  and  composi- 
tion of  blazing  Comets .* 

The  time  that  has  elapsed  in  years,  from  the  Beginning  until  the 
completion  of  the  six  circles  of  suns,  could  not  be  represented  to  the 
human  mind,  if  every  particle  that  composes  this  globe  should  pass 

* On  a subject  so  immense,  human  ideas,  especially  in  this  sphere  of  being,  must 
of  necessity  be  of  a very  general  and  indefinite  character;  and  any  illustrations  offered 
must  appear  exceedingly  diminutive  and  unworthy  of  the  subject.  But  on  the  princi- 
ple that  one  atom  represents  the  whole  Universe,  let  the  reader  suppose  that  the  com- 
parative atom,  which  is  all  the  most  powerful  imagination  can  conceive  of  in  attempting 
to  form  an  idea  of  the  Great  Sun  of  the  Univerccelum,  is  stationary  in  the  centre  of 
infinite  space.  Flaming  with  the  most  inconceivable  heat,  its  vaporized  materials 
extended  from  the  nucleus  far  beyond  the  utmost  bounds  of  the  human  imagination. 
By  virtue  of  a chemical  association  of  particles  of  like  affinity,  or  gravitation  (which 
the  author  explains  as  synonymous),  this  igneous  atmosphere  of  the  great  Body,  in 
process  of  time  unimaginable,  gradually  divided  itself  into  six  concentric  rings,  the  only 
analogue  of  which  we  have  in  the  nous  condensed  rings  of  Saturn.  So  long  as  the 
great  Nucleus  remained  stationary,  it  would  be  the  common  focal  point  of  all  the  con- 
centric rings,  being  equi-distant  from  all  parts  of  their  respective  circumferences.  But 
a rapid  motion  of  the  great  Body  (which  the  author  says  it  possessed  from  the  begin- 
ning) would  produce  an  elongation  of  these  rings  somewhat  analogous  to  the  trail  of  a 
comet, — leaving  the  great  mass  of  materials  in  its  rear.  Supposing  the  motion  to  be 
in  an  elliptic  orbit,  the  sudden  recurve  and  centrifugal  impetus  of  the  projecting  trail, 
occurring  at  every  passage  of  the  great  Body  around  the  foci  of  the  ellipse,  would 
finally  (when  condensation  became  sufficiently  advanced)  produce  a detachment  of 
the  great  vapory  trail,  which  would  subsequently  assume  a spheroid  form  and  become 
a Sun  corresponding  to  its  origin.  In  this  way  the  six  “nebulous  zones”  formed  a 
corresponding  number  of  central  suns,  and  from  which  have  emanated  a correspond- 
ing number  of  Universes  1 These  the  author  calls  “ circles  of  suns,” — that  is,  circular 
planes  of  suns, — and  are  all,  with  their  countless  millions  of  appendages,  silently  de- 
scribing their  infinite  orbits  around  the  great  Centre  of  all  centres! 

Our  sun  and  system,  and  all  the  innumerable  stars  which  the  telescope  can  reveal, 
the  author  informs  us,  belong  to  the  fifth  great  Circle  or  plane  of  formations. 

The  author  requests  me  to  say  that,  as  this  work  is  merely  intended  to  establish 
general  principles,  this  great  subject  is  here  treated  with  brevity,  and  more  particular 
descriptions,  and  especially  calculations  as  to  distances  and  magnitudes,  will  be  given 
In  a future  work. 

The  nebular  theory  of  creation,  as  presented  on  this  magnificent  scale,  does  not  de- 
pend upon  any  present  nebular  appearances  in  the  heavens,  as  the  author  distinctly 
says,  that  with  an  instrument  sufficiently  powerful,  these  all  might  be  resolved 
into  start. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


131 


separately  before  the  human  vision,  and  millions  of  years  were  to 
elapse  between  the  passage  of  each  particle  ! If  this  duration  could 
be  conceived  of,  the  mind  would  still  be  incompetent  to  comprehend 
the  time  which  elapsed  from  the  Beginning  to  the  sixth  formation ! 

The  Gieat  Centre  from  which  all  of  these  systems  and  Systems 
of  systems  emanated,  is  still  an  exhaustless  F ountain  of  never-ending 
materials  ! It  is  a magnificent  and  glorious  Sun — a Centre  around 
which  all  suns  and  Suns  of  suns  revolve.  It  is  a Vortex,  breathing 
forth  a system  of  concentric  circles  of  suns  and  systems  of  suns.  It 
is  an  everlasting  and  unchangeable  Parent  of  all  things  ! It  is  still 
an  Ocean  of  undulated  and  undefinable  fire,  the  holy  emblem  of  Per- 
fection. With  an  everlasting  spontaneousness,  it  breathes  forth  un- 
numbered worlds,  and  a corresponding  infinite  expansion  of  co-eter- 
nal and  immutable  Power.  It  displays,  throughout  the  immensity 
of  space,  correspondences  of  its  own  inherent  nature.  It  is  a Germ , 
in  which  nothing  exists  but  what  is  everlasting  and  infinite  ; and 
it  develops  these  inexpressible  attributes  in  the  successive  degrees 
and  orders  of  formation,  throughout  the  vast  Univercoelum  and  the 
boundless  duration  of  ^Eternity  ! 

§ 4.  The  magnificent  nebulous  Zone,  which  was  formed  in  time 
unimaginable  by  the  incessant  emanation  of  light  and  heat  from  the 
Great  Eternal  Sun,  not  only  approximated  nearly  to  its  Productor, 
but  expanded  through  the  regions  of  infinite  space  even  far  beyond 
the  sixth  circle  of  suns. 

The  great  mass  of  Matter  or  Fire  contained  heat,  the  latter  being 
a production  of  the  former.  The  heat  contained  light,  which  it  in 
order  spread  throughout  the  expanse  of  infinity.  And  this  light  was 
the  peculiar  composition  adapted  to,  and  assigned  for,  the  production 
of  an  infinity  of  worlds  and  systems  of  worlds,  in  orders  and  degrees 
of  development,  and  in  forms  like  unto  the  first  Great  Form.  Thus 
light  is  a perfection  and  development  of  the  original  composition. 
And  light  thus  formed  the  nebulous  Ring  or  Circle,  surrounding 
undefinable  space ! 

Positive  and  Negative  constantly  acting  on,  and  producing  eternal 
motion  throughout  the  mass  of  nebulous  associated  particles,  the  Pos- 
itive, or  Attraction,  called  to  a great  centre,  particles  of  like  affinity 
and  suitable  to  enter  into  combination.  The  Negative  force,  or  the 
repulsion,  threw' off  from  the  great  body  particles  not  suitable  to  its 


132 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


interior  combinations.  Thus  were  formed,  at  equal  periods,  the  suns 
of  the  First  Circle. 

These  suns  (especially  the  centres  of  them),  were  still  fire  incon- 
ceivable ; and  these  also  gave  off  an  emanation  of  heat  and  light. 
This  light,  or  the  particles  composing  it,  in  the  same  manner 
as  the  suns  themselves  were  formed,  produced  planets  and  sat- 
ellites. The  suns  being  too  light  and  unparticled,  could  not  con- 
solidate in  a manner  similar  to  the  condensation  of  their  light  in 
other  centres  or  worlds.  But  the  light  thrown  from  them  was  capa- 
ble of  becoming  less  rare  than  their  own  composition ; and  therefore 
the  constant  absorption  of  the  .rays  of  light  produced  in  each  of  their 
planets  a hardened  or  consolidated  combination  of  particles. 

The  number  of  planets  and  other  formations  emanating  from  these 
suns,  is  as  incalculable  as  the  number  of  suns  produced  from  the 
Eternal  Sun.  Each  of  these  suns  has  its  own  established  planetary 
system,  each  planet  in  which,  in  order,  observing  the  same  plane, 
and  taking  the  same  direction,  moves  around  the  sun  or  centre  which 
formed  it:  and  the  whole  move  around  the  Eternal  Centre  or  Germ 
of  their  existence  ! 

These  planets  can  not  properly  be  termed  such  : for  their  compo- 
sitions are  too  rare  to  form  mineral  substances.  They  are  rather  an 
adhesion  of  particles  caused  by  the  law  of  condensation  and  mutual 
attraction,  or  gravitation.  But  still  they  are  bodies  of  an  almost 
wholly  fiery  interior  constitution.  So  they  are  in  reality  what  would 
be  termed  cometary  bodies ; each  of  which  pursues  the  orbit  of  its 
first  formation,  according  to  the  bulk  and  density  of  its  peculiar  ele- 
ments. Such  is  the  condition  of  the  first  infinite  Circle  of  suns,  and 
of  the  worlds  by  them  produced. 

A still  greater  accumulation  of  particles  sent  off  from  the  Great 
Sun,  produced  another  circle,  like  unto  the  first , — with  a corre- 
sponding number  of  planets  and  satellites.  The  suns  in  this  circle 
being  still  more  rare  than  those  in  the  first,  have  less  fire,  but  con- 
tain more  heal;  and  they  are  capable  of  expanding,  and  sending 
forth  more  unparticled  light  relatively  than  the  former.  The  same 
laws  still  work  their  mighty  influence  throughout  the  circle  formed 
by  these  suns  : and  by  constant  emanation  of  nebulous  matter,  plan- 
' ets  are,  at  irregular  distances,  in  constant  process  of  formation.  By 
the  attraction  of  these  suns,  all  particles  negative  to  their  own  com- 
position, gravitated  to  them  again  : and  others  by  virtue  of  inherent 
motion  and  refinement,  were  repulsed  or  thrown  off  with  a velocity 


nature’s  divine  revelations.  133 

nconceivable,  seeking  substances  of  like  affinity  among  other  forma- 
tions in  the  system  which  the  sun  had  thus  yielded  forth.  The  con- 
densation of  materials  into  planets  belonging  to  this  system,  was  pro- 
duced by  a constant  attraction  or  absorption  of  light,  the  rare  parti- 
cles composing  them  gravitating  to,  or  being  attracted  by,  the  sun. 
And  these  may  be  properly  styled  planets ; for  they  gradually  con- 
densed into  particles  of  earthy  composition.  The  one  closest  to  the 
sun  is  harder  than  the  second ; and  the  third  is  still  more  dense  than 
the  latter;  and  denser  and  rarer  alternately  and  correspondingly  succeed 
each  other,  throughout  the  worlds  composing  one  of  these  systems. 

The  condensed  particles,  and  the  progression  of  the  same  forming 
the  substance  that  is  termed  earth,  are  totally  unlike  any  composi- 
tions of  a terrestrial  nature  that  are  known  to  be  in  existence  by  the 
human  mind. 

It  is  impossible  to  calculate  the  immensity  of  their  circumferences 
or  diameters ; for  they  are  infinitely  larger  than  several  millions  of 
the  suns  belonging  to  the  fifth  Circle.  And  the  suns  of  the  second 
Circle  transcend  the  utmost  powers  of  the  conception  or  imagina- 
tion. And  the  suns  of  the  first  Circle,  and  their  planets,  are  still 
more  inconceivable  — are  utterly  beyond  conception,  even  as  is  the 
unimaginable  and  unchangeable  Sun  that  gave  them  an  existence. 

§5.  The  suns  forming  the  third  System  of  concentric  circles,  have  less 
heat  and  more  light  than  the  former,  and  are  nearer  the  state  of  con- 
densation. Still  they  are  not  condensed  ; for  they  contain  heat  incon- 
ceivable. Their  light,  associating  with  atoms  of  like  nature,  has 
become  suitable  to  produce  still  denser  bodies  than  are  produced  by 
the  light  of  those  of  the  former  circle ; and  so  these  suns  were  des- 
tined to  produce  planets  of  a still  more  condensed  and  consolidated 
constitution.  The  constant  interchanging  of  particles  ; the  throwing 
off  of  the  non-associating  atoms,  and  the  receiving  of  others  of  like 
affinity,  gradually  produced  a system  of  planets  and  satellites,  corre- 
sponding to  other  creations  of  like  nature. 

The  particles  which  have  progressed  to  the  terra- material  forma- 
tion of  these  planets,  are  still  of  such  a peculiar  and  refined  nature 
that  no  substance  known  on  earth  bears  a resemblance  to  them. 
The  first  has,  in  process  of  condensation,  assumed  a hardened  sur- 
face having  two  strata,  the  first  of  which  is  an  imaginable  formation 
of  particles  of  sand,  somewhat  in  appearance  like  the  carbonate  of 
lime  mixed  with  coral  substances,  yet  not  in  any  particular  contain 


134 


nature’s  DIVINE  REVELATION’S. 


ing  the  qualities  or  essences  of  either.  It  is  more  refined  than  is 
possible  to  conceive  of  from  a comparison  with  any  substance  known 
on  earth. 

Such  is  the  composition  and  constitution  of  the  first  and  second 
planets  of  the  third  circle  of  suns.  And  the  appearance  of  the  same 
is  gradually  diminished  with  their  increasing  distances ; and  many 
of  the  planets  that  they  sustain  have  none  of  the  above  compositions 
yet  developed. 

The  suns  of  the  fourth  Circle  contain  still  less  heat  and  light  than 
those  of  the  former  ; but  still  the  intensity  of  each  is  incomprehen- 
sible to  the  mind.  They  send  off  light  still  more  unparticled,  inso- 
much that  they  become  active  agents  of  light.  After  an  inconceiv- 
able period  of  time,  and  an  incessant  emanation  of  this  unparticled 
matter  from  the  suns  which  this  composed,  this  produced  corre- 
sponding systems  of  planetary  worlds,  diminishing  in  number  and 
magnitude,  yet  too  mighty  in  expanse  to  be  calculated  or  compre- 
hended. By  virtue  of  the  motion  going  on  throughout  this  great 
system  of  systems,  and  by  the  laws  of  condensation,  absorption,  grav- 
itation, repulsion  and  association  of  atoms,  the  planets  formed  became 
still  more  dense  in  constitution  than  those  before  described. 

Planets  that  are  nearest  these  suns  have  progressed  to  earthy  for- 
mations and  developments  ; while  those  that  are  further,  are  still  more 
refined  and  less  dense  in  particles  that  compose  earthy  substance. 
Those  that  are  progressed  have  three  formations;  the  last  of  which 
nearly  resembles  the  present  appearance  of  this  globe ; but  is  not  of 
the  same  constitution  or  quality.  Their  materials  are  more  refined 
and  perfect,  not  in  quality,  but  in  particles. 

So  likewise  a fifth  Circle  of  suns  was  brought  into  existence,  cor- 
responding to  the  other  creations.  These  are  composed  of  less  heat 
and  light  relatively  than  the  former : still  their  heat  and  light  are 
immense.  And  particles  evolved  from  these  suns  were  still  more 
refined  and  ethereal.  But  by  virtue  of  eternal  laws  inherent  and 
immutable  in  this  composition,  it  gradually  and  correspondingly 
brought  into  existence  an  immense  number  of  planets  and  satellites, 
the  magnitude  of  which  is  not  yet  fully  determined  or  comprehended. 
By  the  operation  of  these  laws,  and  after  an  inconceivable  period  of 
time,  the  planets  were  created  which  belong  to  our  own  solar  system. 
Planets  that  are  nearer  to  these  suns  are  correspondingly  denser  than 
those  further  from  them. 

The  distance  that  the  light  of  the  suns  of  the  fifth  circle  passes  off 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


135 


into  space,  is  too  vast  for  ordinary  conception,  still  is  limited  com- 
pared to  the  extension  of  the  light  of  suns  of  the  previous  circles. 

The  condensation  of  particles  from  the  sun  of  our  own  solar  sys- 
tem (which  stands  as  a general  representative  of  all  others  in  this 
Circle)  has  produced  various  strata  of  earthy  formations.  The  first 
planet  is  extremely  dense,  and  its  surface  is  composed  of  a mineral 
and  rocky  substance.  It  has  combinations  similar  to  those  upon  this 
globe,  but  which  are  more  refined  in  appearance,  though  not  in 
quality.  This  one  has  been  named  Mercury. 

The  next  has  formations  four  in  number,  the  last  of  which  has  not 
yet  been  fully  developed  : and  it  is  less  in  density  of  composition 
than  the  former.  This  is  named  Venus. 

The  third  has  combinations  of  earthy  substances  still  less  dense 
than  the  former.  The  number  of  formations  and  strata  developed  is 
Jive,  the  last  being  nearly  consummated.  The  composition  of  the 
first  partakes  of  silica,  lime,  and  other  mineral  developments.  And 
the  formations  successively  produced  in  the  order  of  development, 
consist  of  various  species  of  earth  and  stone,  until  the  fourth,  and 
now  nearly  the  fifth,  is  produced.  The  last  of  these  composes  the 
crust,  or  the  fifth  geological  development  of  the  planet  termed 
Earth. 

The  next  one  in  order  has  corresponding  formations.  It  is  not 
any  larger,  but  is  less  dense  than  the  latter.  It  is  termed  Mars. 

The  one  succeeding  this  has  still  a greater  number  of  formations, 
which  are  still  more  refined,  in  quality  and  constitution.  This  is 
termed  Jupiter. 

The  next  has  formations  unequalled  by  those  of  any  planet  exist- 
ing between  it  and  the  sun  to  which  it  belongs.  Its  composition  is 
still  less  dense  and  less  gross  than  the  latter.  The  earth  that  its  for- 
mations have  developed,  is  pure,  fertile,  and  inconceivably  refined. 
And  like  the  Great  Sun  whence  it  came,  but  to  which  it  is  as  the 
least  particle  that  composes  the  eye  of  the  smallest  insect  is  to  it,  it 
has  formed  a nebulous  zone,  and  that  another,  — each  of  which  sur- 
rounds it  still,  unbroken  and  but  slightly  condensed  ; but  which  will 
ultimately  compose  other  nebulous  masses,  the  whole  of  which  will 
form  a globe  which  will  assume  a track  according  to  its  own  specific 
gravity,  as  have  and  do  all  others.  This  planet  is  termed  Saturn. 

The  planets  receding  still  further  from  this,  grow  less  dense  and 
more  refined  than  those  preceding.  Some  of  them  pursue  their 
orbits  uncondensed  and  unstratified.  Their  orbits  are  immense,  but 


136 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


are  in  proportion  to  the  refinement  of  their  constituents,  as  not  being 
suitable  to  associate  with  any  composition  of  the  sun  which  produced 
them.  From  this  cause  they  are  repulsed  to  the  extreme  distance 
that  the  nature  of  their  compositions  can  allow  them  to  occupy. 
And  these  are  Comets  — each  of  which  will  assume  the  constitution 
of  a planet  of  like  nature  with  all  others  in  the  same  circle  of 
formation. 

A sixth  Circle  of  suns  was  in  order  produced;  and  these  contain 
no  fire,  less  light,  and  more  electricity.  And  having  not  yet  become 
suns  properly,  by  reason  of  their  inherent  qualities  and  compositions, 
they  are  at  this  time  traversing  almost  the  bounds  of  undefinable 
space.  The  orbit  of  their  revolution  surrounds  space  incalculable. 

§ G.  Thus  the  Univercoelum  is  a boundless  accumulation  of  par- 
ticles that  have  assumed  by  virtue  of  inherent  qualities,  forms,  orders, 
degrees,  associations,  and  correspondences.  Every  particle,  from 
the  first  to  the  last  circle,  gravitated  to  the  centre  destined  for  its 
association.  Thus  were  established  forms  ; and  perpetual  forms  pro- 
duced Order.  And  by  the  association  of  each  particle  throughout 
the  vast  Univercoelum,  with  particles  of  like  affinity,  from  the  lowest 
to  the  highest,  Degrees  were  established  throughout  every  depart- 
ment of  Creation.  And  there  was  a constant  gravitation  of  particles 
going  on  throughout  the  whole  Mass  of  material  compositions.  And 
thus  in  order  was  produced  this  vast  and  universal  extension  of 
worlds  and  systems  of  worlds,  throughout  immensity  of  space. 

Development  of  inherent  qualities  to  an  external  manifestation  of 
the  same,  and  progression  of  all  things  to  ultimate  refinement  and 
purification,  were  only  in  order  with  corresponding  developments  of 
higher  spheres  and  more  eternal  assemblages.  And  each  particle 
was  destined  ultimately  to  ascend  to  that  degree  of  refinement ; and 
each  sphere  successively  and  incessantly  put  forth  its  ultimate  parti- 
cles to  produce,  sustain,  and  associate,  with  others  of  like  affinity  and 
nature,  that  were  thrown  off  from  the  Mass  as  too  pure  and  unparti- 
cled  to  associate  with  that  of  a grosser  and  denser  quality. 

Therefore  the  Great  Sun — the  unimaginable  Ocean  of  liquid  ma- 
terial— was  a Centre  from  which  (according  to  the  development  of 
its  atmosphere,  which  extended  throughout  immensity)  rolled  forth  a 
circle  of  suns  to  the  extreme  extent  of  particles  associating  to  produce 
them. 

Thus  also  Order  and  Form  were  developed.  For  their  distance 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


137 


from  the  Great  Sun  their  Parent,  was  in  proportion  to  the  density  of 
their  composition ; and  their  distances  from  each  other  were  corre- 
spondingly sustained  by  the  same  influence  of  eternal  gravitation. 
And  all  worlds  emanating  from  these,  were  but  blazing  and  productive 
suns  to  other  planets.  And  corresponding  ultimate  associations  and 
formations  have  progressed,  until  the  extreme  of  their  emanation  has 
resulted  in  the  formation  of  the  sixth  Circle. 

And  so  the  suns  of  the  first  Circle  are  an  ultimate  of  the  Great 
Sun  ; and  those  of  the  second  Circle  may  be  called  an  ultimate  of  the 
first.  They  are  no  more  than  accumulations  of  particles,  and  thus 
are  planets.  Agd  the  third  Circle  of  Suns  are  an  ultimate  of  the  sec- 
ond ; and  the  fourth,  of  the  third ; and  the  fifth,  of  the  fourth ; and 
the  sixth,  of  the  fifth.  Thus  there  is  no  disconnexion ; but  there  is 
a perfect  harmony  and  unity  in  all  celestial  and  terra-material  pro- 
ductions : and  so  each  may  be  considered  as  a part  necessary  to  the 
completion  of  the  whole  Univercoelum  of  boundless  infinitude  ! 

Time  and  space,  height  and  depth,  length  and  breadth,  are  anni- 
hilated in  this  vast  system  of  concentric  and  celestial  circles — a per- 
fection and  perpetual  development  of  the  Great  Fountain  from  which 
they  all  successively  emanated.  An  attempt  to  calculate  the  immense 
magnitude  of  one  of  these  systems,  would  be  useless  ; for  they  trans- 
cend the  utmost  conceptions  and  calculations  of  the  human  mind. 
One  of  the  suns  of  the  second  Circle  is  several  millions  of  trillions 
times  larger  than  the  sun  of  our  solar  system,  which  is  in  the  fifth 
Circle ! No  combinations  of  numbers  is  adequate  to  express  the 
diametrical  magnitude  of  those  of  the  second  Circle  ; and  millions  of 
times  more  incalculable  are  those  of  the  first ! And  the  Great  Sun 
or  F ountain,  from  which  all  of  these  sprang,  is  too  infinite  in  its  mag- 
nitude to  be  in  any  way  meditated  upon  consistently  ; and  so  a defi- 
nite conception  can  not  be  had  of  the  Germ  that  has  produced  an 
infinitude  of  inconceivable  worlds  ! 

And  the  time  which  has  elapsed  during  these  formations  is  equally 
incalculable ; for  it  is  beyond  the  powers  of  the  most  vigorous  and 
brilliant  imagination  to  even  pass  one  thought  upon  the  time  that 
elapsed  between  the  first  assumption  of  form  by  particles  thrown  from 
the  Great  Mass,  to  that  form’s  ultimate  production. — And  yet  follow- 
ing this  were  suns  and  systems  of  suns,  and  constellations  and  planets, 
without  number,  and  new  forms  constantly  displaying  themselves 
until  millions  and  millions  of  millions  of  worlds  — an  infinity  of  worlds 
— were  traversing  the  boundless  fields  of  immensity,  displaying  the 


13S 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


most  perfect  order,  arrangement,  and  organization.  These  constantly 
put  forth  new  particles,  an  evidence  and  index  of  new  and  youthful 
productions,  which  were  constantly  succeeding.  And  so  we  may  trace 
correspondingly  another  almost  infinity  of  formations  and  consequent 
re-formations,  until  all  arrive  at  their  present  state  of  order,  and  their 
present  refinement  of  ultimate  particles,  — having  condensed  and  con- 
solidated by  a gradual  association  of  inherent  particles,  both  gross 
and  refined,  each  of  which  gravitates  to  its  like,  and  possesses  motion 
in  proportion  to  the  specific  density  or  rarity  of  the  substances  with 
which  it  is  in  combination. 

And  thus,  from  the  first  to  the  last,  has  elapsed^an  inconceivable 
period  of  time,  and  as  immense  a production  of  new  forms,  in  orders, 
degrees,  and  associations,  throughout  the  whole  vast  immensity  which 
they  fill ! And  yet  creation  (or  its  ultimate)  extends  infinitely  beyond 
the  sixth  Formation  ! For  there  is  from  the  Great  Fountain,  Germ, 
or  Parent  of  these  worlds,  an  everlasting  combination  of  materials, 
which  when  once  developed  would  extend  into  infinite  space,  and 
light  up  every  chamber  throughout  the  vast  Univercoelum  with  a light 
inaccessible  and  inconceivable,  constantly  bringing  into  existence  new 
forms  as  results  of  the  inherent  qualities  and  combinations  composing 
the  Great  Eternal  Sun  ! And  the  emanations,  after  establishing 
the  sixth  Circle  of  formations,  both  breathe  from,  and  cause  to  con- 
verge to  it  (according  to  internal  and  immutable  laws  that  were  estab- 
lished in  the  beginning),  elements  which,  by  constant  flux  and  reflux, 
are  engaged  in  producing  a Universe  of  pre-eminent  grandeur  and 
infinitude  ! 

Creation,  then,  has  just  commenced  ! For  it  is,  as  it  everlastingly 
has  been,  putting  forth  new  forms  and  manifesting  unchangeable  en- 
ergies— the  very  essence  of  all  power  — the  uncontrollable  fiat  of  the 
Great,  Positive  Mind! 

The  Great  Sun,  thus  pregnated  with  the  immutable,  eternal  Essence 
of  divine  Positive  Power,  and  being  itself  as  immutable  and  eternal, 
containing  particles  destined  to  become  infinitely  sublimated,  will  still 
produce  the  most  magnificent  and  excellent  forms,  displaying  infinite 
beauty,  refinement,  and  perfection,  throughout  the  undefinable  periods 
of  this  Eternity,  which  opens  and  unfolds  a new — an  eternity  of  eter- 
nities, and  throughout  space  not  yet  conceived  of,  nor  yet  filled  with 
the  perfection  with  which  it  is  destined  to  abound  ! 

It  is  the  nature  of  all  things  (and  this  is  derived  from  the  Great 
Origin)  to  assume  forms  and  characteristics  corresponding  with  the 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


139 


interior  qualities  contained  in  the  particles.  And  the  forms  assumed 
observe  perpetual  Order , and  develop  degrees , these  all  correspond- 
ing to  inherent  and  invisible  qualities  which  constitute  their  cause  and 
actuator.  Therefore,  from  the  inherent,  interior  elements,  essences, 
and  attributes  of  the  Great  F ountain  of  all  fountains,  corresponding 
worlds  and  systems  of  worlds,  too  vast  to  be  adequately  compre- 
hended, have  been  produced. 

§ 7.  If  every  second  of  animal  life  that  ever  has  elapsed  upon 
this  globe,  from  the  first  sentient  production  unto  the  present  moment, 
could  be  comprehended,  still  all  would  be  but  one  second  in  compari- 
son to  the  time  that  elapsed  between  the  first  assumption  of  form  by 
particles,  and  the  breathing  forth  and  establishment  of  the  last  system 
of  suns.  F or  there  have  not  seconds  yet  gone  by  since  this  globe 
and  all  things  on  it  have  had  an  existence,  to  compare  with,  or  ade- 
quately to  express,  the  number  of  years,  or  even  centuries,  occupied 
in  the  formation  of  one  of  the  systems  contemplated.  And  yet  crea- 
tion, or  the  existence  and  production  of  worlds,  has  been  but  one  mo- 
ment in  progress  as  compared  to  the  duration  of  the  formations  that 
are  to  go  on  throughout  time  and  space  unimaginable? 

Then  all  these  systems,  with  all  their  emanations  and  appendages, 
arising  from,  and  yet  progressing  to,  the  Vortex  of  Positive  Power, 
may  be  justly  considered  as  one  System  ! It  is  here  subdivided, 
in  order  to  facilitate  a general  conception  of  the  whole  Structure  by 
enabling  the  mind  to  associate  the  various  orders  and  degrees  of  de- 
velopment which  it  is  more  capable  of  comprehending.  Yet  it  is  but 
one  general  Evolution  of  worlds  from  the  Great  Centre,  and  there- 
fore is  but  one  infinite  Production  from  one  eternal  Origin ! And 
only  one  single  moment  has  elapsed,  comparatively,  since  the  first 
formed  of  these  vast  and  universal  systems  has  had  an  existence  ! 
But  one  single  moment  have  they  been  in  process  of  development  from 
the  Great  Source,  and  in  passing  through  all  the  various  changes  and 
conditions  which  the  particles  of  each  have  assumed,  in  form,  order, 
specific  gravities,  geological  developments,  undefinable  and  unimagin- 
able revolutions,  and  reciprocal  and  incessant  interchanging  and  cir- 
culation of  parts  and  particles  ! 

The  vast  Ocean  of  materials  in  ceaseless  motion  and  activity,  from 
whose  bosom  these  systems  were  developed  and  born  into  existence, 
and  each  inconceivably  extended  system  and  System  of  systems  in- 
volved together,  with  all  their  accompanying  excellences  and  beau- 


140 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


ties,  are  everlasting  indices  of  future,  inevitable,  and  corresponding 
emanations  from  the  great  exhaustless  Fountain  from  which  these  all 
have  successively  flown.  All  these  productions  and  reproductions 
— all  these  suns  and  systems  of  suns,  with  all  their  accompanying 
worlds — are  hut  as  one  particle,  are  hut  one  breathing  forth  of  in- 
ternal qualities  from  the  great  eternal  Fount,  in  comparison  to  the 
grand  and  glorious  developments  that  are  to  he  produced  and  ex- 
tended throughout  the  height,  and  depth,  and  length,  and  breadth,  of 
the  whole  vast  Univercoelum  ! 

Thus  but  one  atom  has  been  developed  in  comparison  to  that  which 
shall  be  developed  ; and  but  one  second  has  elapsed  in  comparison  to 
the  corresponding  extension  of  time  ! 

Thus  the  thought  finds  no  resting-place.  It  feels  the  material 
form,  and  is  conscious  of  its  habitation.  It  meditates  definitely  only 
upon  objects  that  are  suitable  for  its  comprehension  and  association. 
Anything  beyond  such  objects  is  but  a vacuum  in  which  imagination, 
whose  flight  is  swifter  than  the  sunbeam,  seeks  for  a resting-place. 
It  searches  throughout  the  chambers  of  the  heaven  of  heavens,  and 
roams  through  the  labyrinths  that  are  continually  opening  into  new 
fields  of  celestial  beauty  which  utterly  transcend  all  minds  but  that 
Mind  which  produced  them.  It  returns  from  its  flight  in  the  infini- 
tude of  space,  and  inquires  with  breathless  and  inexpressible  amaze- 
ment, When  was  the  beginning,  and  when  shall  be  the  end,  of  eternal 
time  and  unbounded  creations? 

Thus  the  human  mind  can  not  conceive  of  eternity  or  infinity  ; for 
it  is  limited  in  its  nature,  belonging  to,  and  produced  by,  finite  forms, 
and  existing  among  transient  things.  Consequently  its  thoughts  must 
have  bounds  ; and  subjects  must  be  limited,  or  it  can  not  comprehend 
them.  Creations  must  not  be  of  indefinite  extent,  or  of  materials 
without  sensible  parallel,  or  else  the  mind  can  not  conceive  of  their 
magnitude,  or  their  elements  and  properties.  Limits  are  therefore 
necessary,  in  order  that  the  mind  may  conceive  correctly  of  internal 
realities  and  external  forms  and  substances.  For  if  the  boundless 
infinitude  is  presented  to  the  mind,  with  it  a condition  of  indefinite 
thought  presents  itself  likewise.  Its  capacities  are  finite,  and  its  con- 
ceptions are  of  like  nature.  No  matter  how  exalted  it  may  be,  it 
must  conceive  of  bounds,  or  else  there  is  no  conception. 

But  in  its  sparkling  brilliancy,  the  imagination  will  pass  off  into  in- 
finite space ; and  not  being  able  to  perceive  limits,  it  becomes  con- 
fused and  bewildered.  And  hence  the  question  above  referred  to 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


141 


has  been  asked  with  as  little  meaning  as  the  mind  has  had  conception 
of  infinite  space. 

No  human  power  or  invention  is  capable  of  representing  any  cor- 
rect idea  of  the  immensity  of  systems  which  extend  and  expand 
throughout  unmeasured  space.  No  mathematical  calculation  can  be 
made  respecting  them;  for  numbers  are  lost  in* worlds  whose  num- 
bers transcend  the  conceptions  of  the  human  mind.  Figures  maybe 
combined  to  such  an  extent  as  to  transcend  all  powers  of  comprehen- 
sion ; yet  the  mere  comprehension  of  these  would  give  but  a limited 
understanding  of  this  immensity.  No  matter  how  extensive  and  how 
powerful  the  figure  maybe  to  represent  time  and  space,  it  has  limits ; 
and  is  therefore  no  comparison. 

The  mind  may  contemplate  the  many  formations  in  the  sidereal 
heavens ; it  may  contemplate  their  circumferences,  their  diameters, 
their  immense  revolutions  ; it  may  ponder  and  meditate  upon  the 
compositions  and  combinations  that  are  existing  in  each  formation ; 
it  may  endeavor  to  conceive  of  the  various  geological  formations  of 
each  as  they  were  successively  developed  from  the  first  condensation 
of  particles  into  worlds,  to  the  extended  and  almost  infinite  expanse 
of  systems  to  the  sixth  formation  of  suns,  — and  even  if  it  could  suc- 
ceed in  grasping  all  these,  its  conceptions  would  be  limited , — and 
therefore  would  give  not  the  least  possible  idea  of  infinite  space! 

The  mind  may  be  mighty  enough  to  comprehend  one  system  and 
its  compositions,  forms,  movements,  and  all  the  objects  and  forms, 
both  perfect  and  imperfect,  that  are  existing  upon  its  surfaces  ; it  may 
be  sufficiently  expansive  to  comprehend  the  interior,  the  invisible, 
realities  and  external  appearances  of  all  things  thereon  existing ; it 
may  be  penetrating  enough  to  understand  the  motive  power,  and 
energy  of  all  action,  motion,  and  sensation,  that  each  of  these  forms 
develops;  — and  these  would  be  mighty  conceptions  — would  con- 
stitute the  full  range  of  human  thought ! But  still,  how  comparatively 
limited  and  contracted  are  these  conceptions  ! — for  they  in  reality  do 
not  constitute  one  particle  in  comparison  to  one  half  of  the  first  for- 
mation of  suns  ! 

§ 8.  Therefore  the  human  mind  is  absolutely  incompetent  to  con- 
ceive of  infinity  ; and  to  the  mind,  this  word  vibrates  and  echoes  no 
corresponding  thought.  The  word  infinity,  as  applied  to  indefinite 
space,  is  one  substituted  in  place  of  an  idea.  And  there  never  was 
and  never  can  be  an  adequate  conception  of  Eternity  ; for  the  thought 


142 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


of  this  is  of  itself  a non-entity,  and  the  word  expresses  no  signifi- 
cation. 

But  as  the  human  mind  is  a composition  of  the  refined  and  per- 
fected materials  of  all  else  existing,  it  refuses  to  associate  with  things 
of  a lower  order  and  less  degree  of  refinement ; but  has  a tendency 
to  pass  ofF  to  explore  and  associate  with  something  of  a like  lofty 
nature.  Hence  it  seeks  not  to  analyze  and  comprehend  things  in 
the  lower  degrees  of  existence,  but  it  aspires  to  higher  and  more  ex- 
alted spheres.  Mind  is  then  only  seeking  its  equilibrium.  It  is 
gravitating  toward  the  sphere  that  is  attractive  to  it.  It  is  endeav- 
oring to  pass  from  its  present  nidulated  state,  to  some  unknown,  yet 
attractive,  habitation  among  the  avenues  and  chambers  of  the  spiritual 
and  celestial  forms. 

Such  is  mind  ! and  such  are  its  inclinations.  The  amount  of 
thought  that  has  been  excited  in  reference  to  the  subject  under  con- 
templation, is  incalculable  ; yet  if  all  the  thoughts  that  ever  have 
existed,  since  the  formation  and  existence  of  this  globe  up  to  the 
present  moment,  were  combined,  they  would  not  give  the  mind  a 
proper  conception  of  the  number  of  years,  or  even  centuries , that  this 
globe  itself  was  assuming  the  form  which  it  now  possesses  ! 

As  it  was  in  the  beginning,  so  the  vast  and  boundless  Univercoelum, 
the  Great  Sun  and  Centre  from  which  all  these  worlds  and  systems 
of  worlds  emanated,  is  still  an  exhaustless  F ountain  of  chaotic  mate- 
rials, and  living,  inherent  energy  to  drive  into  existence  billions  and 
millions  of  billions  of  suns,  with  all  their  appendages,  more  than  have 
yet  been  produced  ! For  it  has  eternal  Motion,  and  contains  the 
forms  that  all  things  subsequently  assume  ; and  it  contains  laws  that 
are  displayed  in  the  geometrical  and  mechanical  structure,  combina- 
tions, and  movements,  of  the  vast  systems  that  are  brought  forth. 
And  from  this  great  living  Vortex  roll  forth  the  unimaginable  elements, 
properties,  combinations,  laws,  forces,  forms,  and  motions,  that  have 
produced,  and  will  still  produce,  an  infinitude  of  systems  and  Systems 
of  systems,  whose  concentric  circles  are  but  an  expanse  from  the 
Great  Germ  of  all  existence,  and  are  incessantly  acting  and  reacting, 
changing,  harmonizing,  organizing,  and  etherealizing,  every  particle 
of  chaotic  and  undeveloped  matter  that  exists  in  the  Vortex  ! 

Yet  in  the  beginning,  such  was  the  condition  of  the  materials  of  all 
worlds  that  now  have  an  existence.  And  there  are  now  existing  six 
circles  of  blazing  suns,— -each  cf  which  has  assemblages  so  vast  and 
extensive  that  they  can  not  be  conceived  of  by  the  human  mind  ! 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


143 


And  the  various  productions  that  have  resulted  from  these  organized 
bodies,  and  the  peculiar  combinations  that  they  contain,  are  equally 
incomprehensible.  rStill,  in  the  very  contemplation  of  this  incon- 
ceivable creation  ofujadsfinable  systems,  the  mind  is  led  still  onward 
to  inquire  for  the  EndfJ  But  why  interrogate  concerning  that  which 
can  not  be  conceived  of?  And  why  endeavor  to  comprehend  the 
space  and  time  that  infinitude  is  composed  of?  Yet  the  mind  goes 
onward  and  upward  to  higher  states  and  further  researches  into  the 
undefinable  regions  of  eternity. 

So  then  all  these  systems  that  have  been  produced,  and  are  exist- 
ing, are  in  reality  but  one  single  atom,  and  occupying  but  one  inch, 
in  comparison  to  that  which  is  to  be.  And  so  time  and  space  are 
virtually  annihilated ; and  Power  and  Materials  are  adequate  to  fill 
the  extreme  bounds  of  their  indivisible,  undistinguishable  infinitude  ! 

All  of  the  mighty  systems  that  were  evolved  from  the  great  Centre, 
observed,  according  to  the  density  or  rarity  of  each  respectively,  a 
rotary  and  orbicular  motion  around  the  Centre  from  which  they  ema- 
nated. The  very  moment  that  an  association  of  particles  was  estab- 
lished, action  and  reaction,  condensation,  and  an  orbicular  and  rotary 
motion,  were  produced.  And  in  accordance  with  the  density  or 
rarity  of  the  planet,  was  the  distance  intervening  between  it  and  the 
sun  around  which  it  revolved.  There  was  no  disconnected  force  or 
impetus  applied  to  the  bodies  thus  formed,  to  set  them  in  harmonious 
motion ; no  foreign  power  impulsed  and  guided  them  in  order  in 
their  respective  planes  of  revolution ; but  inherent  laics,  capable  of 
controlling  these  manifestations,  were  developed  and  brought  into 
action,  according  to  the  development  of  the  forms  to  be  thus  acted 
upon. 

And  so  the  great  worlds  that  are  distributed  throughout  the  immen- 
sity of  space,  are  incessantly  reciprocating  particles  and  substances 
with  each  other.  And  in  accordance  with  their  density  or  rarity, 
with  their  lower  or  higher  degrees  of  development,  with  their  gross 
or  refined  conditions,  are  their  distances  determined,  and  their 
motions  established. 

And  the  great  eternal  elements  that  were  successively  developed 
and  evolved  from  the  Great  Centre  that  contained  them,  were  Heat, 
Light,  and  Electricity.  Heat  was  an  emanation  from  fire  ; and  the 
light  produced  from  heat  by  its  becoming  less  particled  and  more 
rare  and  active,  was  so  much  sublimated  and  refined,  that  its  ultimate 


144 


nature’s  divine  revelations 


was  (and  is)  that  all-pervading  element  throughout  the  Universe, 
Electricity. 

Electricity  could  not  have  existed  in  its  present  condition  primi- 
tively ; for  there  were  no  means  and  no  substances  qualified  to  develop 
it.  But  as  the  First  existed  alone,  its  constant  progression  until 
Electricity  was  produced  as  an  ultimate,  shows  that  the  latter  was  a 
perfection  of  that  which  was  eternally  existing.  Thus  the  lower 
contained  and  developed  the  highest,  while  the  highest  acts  on,  and 
pervades,  all  below  its  exalted  state  of  perfection.  Hence,  electri- 
city pervades  all  bodies,  all  substance,  all  elements,  and  passes  unre- 
strictedly through  every  averpie  and  pore  that  exists  in  every  particle 
throughout  the  Universe.  It  is  the  elastic  substance  that  exists 
within  and  surrounds  all  things,  and  is  the  powerful  agent  of  motion, 
life,  and  activity.  ! It  is  constantly  and  incessantly  engaged  in  rarify- 
ing  and  purifying  all  things ; and  is  a medium  to  transmit  power  and 
matter  in  particles,  from  one  substance  to  another,  and  from  one 
^planet  to  another,  and  from  each  planet  to  the  sun. 

There  is  not  existing  a quantity  of  electricity  in  the  sun  amounting 
to  a positive  or  attractive  power.  Nor  is  there  such  a thing  existing 
as  positive  repulsion , as  produced  by  any  elements  or  principles  of 
like  nature  : and  motion  is  neither  produced  nor  sustained  by  any 
such  actuating  principles.  Nor  is  anything  formed,  or  organized,  or 
existing,  as  an  effect,  produced  b y positive  opposites.  For  if  a sub- 
stance could  be  produced  in  this  way,  it  would  be  existing  in  a 
vacuum,  and  between  two  antagonistic  principles ; and  hence  it  could 
experience  no  motion,  no  action,  no  exchanging  of  particles,  no 
increase  nor  diminution.  It  would  be  an  immovable  and  un- 
changeable object,  destitute  of  all  life  and  usefulness.  But  instead 
of  opposites  existing,  there  is  a harmony  in  all  the  formations,  and  a 
positive  and  absolute  necessity  of  each  production,  according  to  the 
forces  and  elements  existing  in  the  Vortex  of  Positive  Power,  and 
the  Fount  of  chaotic  materials.  For  both  are  immutable  and  eternal 
in  their  adaptations,  the  one  to  form,  and  the  other  to  constitute  the 
materials  for  the  formations.  And  thus  the  systems  of  suns  and 
planets,  with  all  their  appendages,  and  all  the  vast  assemblages  of 
worlds  throughout  the  sidereal  regions,  were  brought,  intq  existence  by  * 
the  united  and  harmonious  action  of  fixed  and  established  principles. 

Then  what  is  meant  by  attraction,  gravitation,  and  condensation,  is 
an  association  of  particles  possessing  mutual  affinities.  And  as  there 
is  constantly  a refinement  of  inherent  particles  in  all  bodies,  so  there 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


145 


is  a constant  passing  off  from  the  same  of  those  particles  which 
have  become  too  refined  to  continue  an  association  with  the  same 
composition. 

And  the  constant  attraction  existing  between  all  bodies  in  the  vast 
system  of  the  planetary  worlds,  is  owing  to  a mutual  gravitation 
from  each  of  particles  that  have  become  fitted  to  associate  with 
each  other’s  composition.  And  thus  worlds  and  Worlds  of  worlds 
were  made ; and  thus  are  they  sustained.  And  thus  is  universal 
motion,  from  the  angular  to  the  spiral,  developed.  And  thus  does, 
and  shall,  the  great  Eternal  Laboratory  unceasingly  produce  and 
reproduce,  until  all  things  and  all  substances  shall  become  rarified, 
refined,  and  perfected,  and  until  all  will  gravitate  to  spheres  of  celes- 
tial attraction  and  spiritual  association. 

§ 9.  The  great  system  of  planetary  formations,  and  the  inherent 
laws  by  which  they  were  produced  in  order,  harmony,  and  progres- 
sive development,  are  now  presented  to  the  mind.  In  this  manner 
were  these  developed  from  primeval  matter,  which  was  fire,  this 
being  acted  upon  by  the  Great  Positive  Power,  the  Vortex  of  which 
contained  this  as  the  only  substance.  And  all  material  substances 
and  compositions  were  an  emanation  or  a progressive  sphere  or  atmo- 
sphere, proceeding  from  the  great  internal  Actuator.  And  a pro- 
gression (such  as  has  been  described)  to  the  organization  and  estab- 
lishment of  systems  of  worlds,  and  a constant  operation  of  all  laws 
inherently  contained  in  the  Great  Mass,  have  produced  all  things  that 
are  now  in  being.  And  thus  is  the  immensity  of  space  peopled  with 
worlds,  and  planets,  and  their  appendages,  and  still  finer  and  more 
remote  assemblages,  which  are  beyond  the  power  of  human  vision! 

Th e plan  of  the  great  System,  thus  presented,  gives  order  to  the 
thoughts,  and  assists  the  mind  in  its  endeavors  to  comprehend  its 
vastness.  This  extensive  generalization  is  the  only  means  by  which 
the  human  mind  can  conceive  of  the  countless  worlds  that  are  below, 
above,  and  around  its  own  existence. 

The  peculiar  elements  and  combinations  existing  in  other  worlds, 
are  greatly  dissimilar  to  any  substance  that  is  existing  in  this  material 
sphere.  If  a .particular  and  detailed  description  of  these  innumer- 
able worlds  wrere  given,  it  would  be  beyond  the  comprehension  of 
the  mind,  and  also  beyond  its  power  of  forming  conceptions  from 
analogy.  If  the  geological  formations  of  these  worlds  -were  consid- 
ered, from  the  primary  condensation  of  particles  to  the  lowest  point 

10 


.46 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


of  gravitation ; and  if  the  various  divisions  of  that  which  is,  and  of 
that  which  is  not  stratified,  were  presented  ; and  if  their  present  ex- 
ternal appearances  were  also  given,  together  with  their  diameters  and 
circumferences,  — it  would  be  revealing  that  which  the  mind  could 
neither  comprehend  nor  associate  with  by  any  process  of  analogical 
reasoning,  or  any  power  of  expansive  thought.  If  I were  to  speak 
of  the  minerals,  or  particles  that  had  become  the  constituents  of  such 
bodies  ; and  if  the  epoch  was  described  when  these  were  produced, 
together  with  the  peculiar  animals  and  species  of  plants,  this  would 
likewise  be  unnecessary  and  useless.  If  all  the  animated,  organized 
beings  that  are  existing  upon  these  innumerable  worlds  were  de- 
scribed ; . and  if  an  anatomical  and  physiological  description  and 
delineation  of  their  peculiar  structures  were  given,  and  the  degrees 
of  perfection  that  they  occupy  in  the  scale  of  universal  progression 
relative  to  others  in  existence,  were  spoken  of;  and  if  the  degrees 
and  orders  of  their  mental  associations  were  likewise  represented, — 
it  would  be  only  indulging  the  desire  and  love  for  the  marvellous, 
creating  wonder  and  astonishment,  but  presenting  nothing  that  would 
be  of  real  application  or  usefulness,  even  if  it  were  susceptible  of 
comprehension.  For,  if  it  is  impossible  for  the  human  mind  to 
conceive  of  the  vastness  of  this  infinity  of  worlds,  is  it  not  also 
impossible  for  it  to  conceive  of  any  of  the  specific  or  detailed  com- 
positions or  bodies  that  are  existing  upon  their  external  surfaces  ? 

But  a true  conception  of  the  Univerccelum,  and  of  its  harmonious 
formations,  would  lead  the  human  mind  to  conceive  of  systems  corre- 
sponding to  each  other,  and  to  make  useful  and  extensive  generali- 
zations,— the  result  of  which  would  be  to  cause  man  to  carry  out 
more  harmoniously,  in  his  own  life,  the  teachings  of  the  beauties  that 
exist  in  the  Universe,  and  to  apply  them  properly  to  his  own  happi- 
ness and  usefulness. 

The  Great  Sun  of  all  suns  emanated  the  three  principles  and  ele- 
ments that  are  mediums  and  connecting  links  of  universal  motion  and 
activity.  The  Fountain  from  which  they  all  sprang  into  existence, 
was  an  emanation  from  the  Interior,  and  from  qualities  and  essences 
therein  existing.  And  so  the  great  Body  was  an  atmosphere  or  halo 
surrounding  the  great  Centre  or  Sun  internally  existing.  And 
Heat,  Light,  and  Electricity,  were  successive  developments  of  this 
great  Mass.  Each  being  properly  developed,  the  last  became  an 
active  agent,  a Negative  to  the  internal,  Positive  Power. ! And  Mat- 
ter, existing  in  its  unparticled  state,  was  the  vehicle  and  substance 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


147 


through  and  on  which  the  two  great  Powers  could  act  to  produce  all 
that  has  been  rolled  forth  into  the  immensity  of  space.  J 

Electricity  therefore  pervades  the  infinity  of  space.  It  penetrates 
all  substances,  and  exists  in  and  throughout  all  worlds,  with  all  their 
component  parts.  It  exists  in  everything  and  everywhere  ; and  there 
is  not  one  particle  in  the  realms  of  infinite  space  that  has  not  within 
its  composition  the  unparticled  and  active  agent  of  Electricity. 
Being  the  ultimate , or  the  progressed  and  perfected  essense  of  the 
Great  Eternal  Sun,  it  pervades  all  things  below  its  pre-eminent  state 
of  perfection,  — and  thus  is  a Negative  to  the  Internal  and  still  more 
perfected — the  perfection  of  inconceivable  purity  — the  Great  Pos- 
itive Mind! 

These  are  the  only  Principles  and  Elements  in  existence : 
and  all  other  things  are  mere  modifications  of  these  Principles. 
This  emanation  from  the  Great  Body  may  be  termed  an  atmo- 
sphere, a halo,  or  nebulous  zone,  that  surrounded  the  immensity  of 
space  with  brightness  and  beauty  inconceivable.  And  thus  was  ori- 
ginally established  the  eternal  Truth  and  real  reality,  that  everything 
has  its  own  peculiar  atmosphere,  and  consequently  its  specific  and 
necessary  association.  For  every  world  that  has  been  spontaneously 
breathed  forth  from  the  Great  Centre,  by  virtue  of  its  eternal  motion 
and  activity,  has  an  atmosphere  or  circle,  extending  to  the  extreme 
point  of  its  repelling  influence.  And  all  planets  and  satellites  have 
their  respective  atmospheres,  not  only  as  emanating  from  their  sur- 
faces like  all  others,  but  as  divided  into  strata  of  formations,  the 
character  and  extent  of  which  are  determined  by  the  density  and  cir- 
cumference of  the  respective  bodies  to  which  they  belong. 

An  atmosphere  is  a progression,  or  an  ascension  from  the  denser 
mass  of  particles,  seeking  association  with  that  of  like  nature ; and  it 
consists  of  substances  which  have  become  too  refined  and  unparti- 
cled to  continue  to  exist  in  that  of  a dense  or  gross  quality  and  com- 
position. The  stratified  atmosphere  that  is  formed  around  every 
body,  substance,  and  globe,  in  existence,  is  an  emanation  from  the 
body,  and  a perfection  of  the  particles  composing  it.  There  is  there- 
fore an  atmosphere  belonging  to  every  particle  in  being,  the  compo- 
sition of  which  is  finer  than  that  from  which  it  emanated.  And  ac- 
cording to  the  quality  of  such  emanation,  is  established  its  relative 
distance,  and  the  character  of  the  association  which  it  seeks.  Then 
from  the  Great  Centre  there  is  an  infinite  expansion  of  suns  and 
worlds  of  suns,  which  have  become  organized  and  condensed,  and 


~4S  nature’s  divine  revelations. 

act  and  react  upon  each  other ; and  their  incessant  motion  has  pro- 
duced each  planetary  formation  in  order  and  degrees  of  development 
and  association  of  particles,  and  each  of  these  was  a progression  of 
that  from  which  it  came,  until  an  infinity  of  systems  have  been 
brought  into  being.  By  the  virtue  of  inherent  qualities,  and  the 
incessant  action  of  immutable  laws,  the  sixth  circle  has  become 
established,  — the  suns  of  which  are  not  yet  fully  condensed  and 
organized  into  systems  like  others,  but  are  still  in  a condition  like 
unto  the  cometic  nuclei.  And  all  these  infinite  creations  were  pro- 
duced by  an  expansion  of  the  inherent  Principles  contained  in  the 
original  composition,  and  a natural  and  consequent  assuming  of  the 
forms  which  characterize  each  development ! 

§ 10.  There  is  to  the  observer  an  apparent  confusion  existing  among 
the  innumerable  visible  bodies  that  inhabit  the  ocean  of  space.  They 
do  not  appear  in  perfect  order.  They  do  not  assume  forms  and  be- 
come condensed  before  the  human  eye  : and  there  is  an  appearance 
of  irregularity  throughout  the  sidereal  heavens.  But  these  external 
appearances  are  deceptive  ; for  the  whole  structure  of  the  Universe 
is  but  a composition  of  particles,  sustaining  relative  points  and  loca- 
tions given  them  by  their  own  natural  compositions  and  associations. 
And  all  are  but  parts  composing  the  great  Whole,  the  whole  being 
but  one  particle  in  comparison  to  the  systems  that  are  existing,  and 
to  the  new  ones  that  are  putting  forth  as  new  particles,  in  the  further 
extremes  of  infinite  space ! And  all  are  existing  in  beauty,  order, 
and  harmony,  and  are  approximating  to  perfection.  There  is  no  in- 
terference with  each  other,  no  interruption  of  each  other’s  movements; 
but  all  move  onward  with  inconceivable  rapidity,  yet  in  the  most  calm 
and  peaceful  manner  that  can  be  imagined.  They  not  only  answer 
the  purpose  for  which  they  have  assumed  their  present  condition,  but 
are  almost  intellectually  reciprocating  particles  and  essences  with  each 
other,  and  disseminating  freely  heat,  light,  and  electricity,  — which 
give  new  and  living  energies  to  particles  and  substances  with  which 
they  come  in  contact. 

And  thus,  by  the  ever-controlling  influence,  and  the  inconceivably 
active  energies  of  the  Positive,  Divine  Mind,  are  all  these  effects 
brought  into  being.  And  by  immutable  and  eternal  laws  originally 
established,  it  will  continue  to  reproduce  and  recreate  new  worlds 
of  supreme  excellences  and  exalted  states  of  material  perfection,  until 
every  particle  that  composes  every  sun  and  every  system  of  suns  and 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


149 


World  of  worlds,  extending  infinitely  beyond  the  power  of  human 
thought,  and  infinitely  beyond  all  that  has  been  yet  produced  and  or- 
ganized— until  these,  and  all  their  particles,  become  the  very  essence 
of  vegetable  and  animal  existence  ! And  the  latter,  with  the  active 

O 

energies  inherently  apeompanying  it,  not  only  will  pass  to  the  perfec- 
tion of  spiritual  essence,  but  will  work  its  mighty  influence  upon 
everything  below  it,  until  all  things  arrive  at  an  exalted  state  of 
spiritual  and  celestial  perfection  ! 

Thus  all  matter  will  pass  through  the  multifarious  forms  and  stages 
that  are  existing,  and  all  will  ultimately  be  resolved  into  the  unparti- 
cled  state,  and  will  ascend  to  associate  with  higher  and  more  glorious 
spheres  — of  spiritual  composition.  Then  the  Great  Positive  Mind, 
around  whose  Centre  exists  this  exhaustless  fountain  of  materials, 
will  be  Positive  to  the  great  Negative  formed  by  the  perfection  of 
all  things  else  in  being.  And  then  Deity  and  Spirit  will  be  exist- 
ing only ! 

In  association  are  Positive  and  Negative.  In  quality,  the  last  of 
all  things,  or  spiritual  principle,  will  be  like  the  first  of  all  things,  or 
the  Great  Positive  blind  : only  there  can  not  be  an  association  ; for 
the  first  is  a mighty,  inconceivable  Whole,  the  Essence  of  Intelli- 
gence ; while  the  second,  or  last  of  all  things,  will  be  a Negative  in 
the  great  Sphere  or  Vortex  of  the  Divine  Mind.  The  same  will  be 
most  eminently  perfect,  because  it  will  have  arrived  at  the  degree  of 
refinement  which  the  inherent  and  immutable  laws  of  progression 
tend  ultimately  to  produce  in  all  things.  In  knowledge  it  will  be 
negative  ; but  in  affection  it  will  be  as  pure  and  inseparable  as  the 
System  of  worlds  that  are  swimming  in  the  realms  of  space. 

Therefore  the  spiritual  Principle,  or  the  destined  Ultimate  of  all 
things  in  existence,  will  be  a Negative  to  the  Great  Positive  Mind  ; 
and  between  the  two  will  emanate  new  worlds  — an  epoch  of  another 
Beginning  ! 

Before  this  sublime  and  glorious  end  will  be  consummated,  there 
will  be  formed  an  infinite  number  of  suns  and  worlds,  the  immensity 
of  some  of  which  will  pass  all  power  of  understanding  and  computa- 
tion, and  their  revolutions  on  their  axes  will  require  as  many  hours 
as  this  globe  requires  minutes.  And  all  the  labyrinths  and  chambers 
-of  uncontracted  infinitude  are  to  be  inhabited  by  corresponding  sys- 
tems of  worlds. 

And  after  animal  and  vegetable  existence  shall  have  been  equally 
disseminated  throughout  each  of  these  systems,  as  active  and  unfail- 


150 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


ing  agents  to  refine,  appropriate  to  themselves,  and  transfer  to  higher 
existences,  all  things  below  their  state  of  being  ; and  when  all  motion 
shall  have  become  so  perfected  as  to  result  in  Sensation;  and  when 
all  elements  shall  equally  and  reciprocally  attract  and  associate  with 
each  other ; and  when  all  worlds,  having  become  too  rarified  to 
form  dense  and  gross  bodies,  shall  ascend  and  gravitate  to  higher 
spheres, — ■ when  all  things  shall  have  arrived  at  this  state  of  exalted 
perfection^,  then  will  be  the  accomplishment  of  the  grand  and  glorious 
End  contemplated  ! 

And  here  the  thoughts,  together  with  time  and  space,  are  nearly 
lost  and  annihilated,  from  the  utter  impossibility  of  an  adequate  con- 
ception. And  the  tendency  of  the  human  mind  to  conceive  of  local- 
ity and  hounds,  and  the  impossibility  of  its  conceiving  of  ivjhiity, 
accounts  for  the  obscurity  and  indefiniteness  of  these  universal  gene- 
ralizations. If  the  mind  were  like  Space,  then  thought  ivould  have 
no  boundary ; and  if  the  mind  were  like  Time,  Space  would  have  no 
distance.  But  the  habitation  of  the  mind  being  thus  contracted,  all 
thoughts  of  necessity  give  a correspondingly  contracted  conception  of 
infinity,  or  else  there  is  no  definite  conception. 

The  thought  that  all  things  in  existence,  all  worlds  with  all  their 
diversified  compositions,  and  even  of  their  most  dense  and  gross  sub- 
stances, are  to  become  ultimately  a part  of  animal  organization  ; are 
to  become  a medium  of  Sensation,  and  to  constitute  a casement  in 
which  wall  exist  the  principle  of  spiritual  life,  — this  thought,  in  its 
magnitude,  is  beyond  the  grasp  of  all  minds  except  that  of  the  Great 
Actuator  ! And  the  accomplishment  of  the  ultimate  condition  of  the 
Positive  and  Negative  that  shall  then  alone  occupy  the  realms  of 
infinite  space,  is  equally  incomprehensible. 

And  the  utter  resolving  of  all  things  into  a higher  state  of  refine- 
ment, will  make  them  suitable  to  enter  into  the  composition  of  new 
worlds  and  systems  of  worlds,  that  may  be  born  into  existence  by  the 
spontaneous  pregnation  of  the  F ountain  in  which  nothing  exists  but 
what  is  everlastingly  pure  and  infinite  ! 

Thus  the  vast  Univercoelum  has  been  nearly  filled  with  congloba- 
tions  of  particles,  which  have  assumed  the  forms  of  mighty  Suns  and 
worlds.  It  still  will  be  perpetuated  through  eternity,  until  not  only 
every  particle  shall  compose  some  part  of  these  systems,  but  until  al) 
shall  sustain  and  control  by  their  specific  influence,  higher  spheres  , 
until  each  and  every  particle  existing  shall  occupy  an  important  sta 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


151 


tion  in  the  great  united  System,  thrown  into  existence  and  controlled 
by  the  almighty  fiat  of  internal  and  eternal  Power  ! Such  is  the  grand 
cosmogony  of  the  creations  in  universal  space  ! 

§ 11.  It  is,  therefore,  made  evident  to  the  mind,  that  the  great 
Internal,  Invisible,  is  the  real  Reality  of  all  producing 
causes ; that  this  is  Eternal  Truth ; and  that  such  is  the  essential 
and  specific  nature,  quality,  and  composition  of  the  Eternal  Mind! 

And  there  are  constantly  emanating  from  this  great  Source,  radia- 
tions of  inexpressible  and  inconceivable  Attributes,  the  first  of  which 
is  Power  and  Motion,  and  the  last,  and  the  highest  and  most  excel- 
lent  of  all  others,  is  Eternal  Truth  A _And  the  great  fiery  Ocean  of 
chaotic  Matter  that  has  breathed  into  being  the  grand  System  of 
worlds,  with  all  their  appendages  and  excellent  qualifications,  was  a 
universal  Exterior  or  Form,  and  a Vehicle  of  Power,  that  radiated 
from  the  Internal.  Tt  was  a Form  produced  by  the  Invisible,  yet 
real  existing  Principle — the  Infinite  Mind.  \ 

Therefore  the  Great  eternal  Interior,  and  the  Great  eternal  Exte- 
rior, constituted  the  only  Principle  and  Form  in  being.  And  as  an 
atmosphere  of  eternal  elements  was  gradually  and  perpetually  evolved, 
this  constituted  the  Great  Sun  — which  was  a Form  of  the  Interior. 
The  Great  Sun  may  be  called  an  atmosphere  or  Form  surrounding 
the  Great  Positive  Mind ; and  the  elements  emanating  from  it  again, 
may  be  called  an  atmosphere  of  that  indefinite  Mass  of  liquid. fire  ! 

Thus  all  things  have  an  interior,  and  a corresponding  external  form. 
There  is  likewise  an  aeriform  emanation  proceeding  from  every  form 
and  substance  in  universal  space.  \ Every  atom  in  existence  has  pre- 
cisely the  same  constituents  as  had  the  undeveloped  World  of  unpar 
tided  matter.  One  eternal  and  immutable  Law  pervades  all  matter 
in  existence  r^One  L aw,  equalled  with  Matter,  produces  all  things, 
and  gives  birth  constantly  to  new  worlds  by  its  progressive  unfoldings. 
Being  therefore  immutable,  it  can  not  react,  can  not  change  ; nor  can 
there  be  any  retrogression.  Progression  is  the  main  attribute,  the 
specific  effect  of  established  and  immutable  laws.  Activity  in  all 
things,  and  throughout  all  words  and  systems  in  immensity,  is  an  in- 
evitable result  of  the  same  Principle.  Adjustment  and  harmony,  re- 
finement and  purification,  are  also  the  necessary  effects  of  Nature’s 
established  laws.  And  as  in  the  beginning  there  were  but  two  Prin- 
ciples— two  real  Realities  — there  can  not  now  be  any  greater  num- 
ber in  the  universe.  Power  and  Matter,  Internal  and  External, 


152 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


Positive  and  Negative,  Cause  and  Effect,  were  the  only  coupled  ex- 
isting Principles  — the  only  real  realities  that  were,  or  ever  can  be, 
in  the  Universe.  There  are,  however,  unnumbered  millions  of  worlds, 
and  suns  incalculable  that  produced  them,  and  innumerable  kinds  of 
earth  and  £erra-compositions  in  being.  — And  there  are  also  numerous 
mineral  forms,  and  many  supposed  original  elements,  and  various 
species  of  plants,  animals,  and  intelligent  organizations,  disseminated 
upon  the  surfaces  of  these  worlds.  There  are  also  gases,  which,  in 
their  appearances  and  qualities,  and  in  the  relations  which  they  sus- 
tain to  each  other  and  to  the  bodies  that  are  found  to  contain  them, 
are  greatly  diversified;  and  they  are  extremely  dissimilar  in  their  ap- 
parent combinations  and  compositions.  And  finally,  there  appear  to 
be  in  the  Universe,  an  indefinite  number  of  directly  opposite  and 
antagonistic  substances,  essences,  qualities,  and  principles.  All  these 
are  but  peculiar  associations  of  bodies,  atoms,  and  elements,  contained 
in  the  great  Whole  ; and  are  but  modifications  of  the  inherent  quality 
contained  in  the  undeveloped  Sun  of  the  Univerccelum. 

And  as  the  Outer  must  be,  and  is,  an  emanation  from  the  Internal, 
or  Centre,  so  that  which  surrounds,  is  not  an  antagonist  of — is  not 
opposed  to  — is  in  perfect  harmony  with,  the  internal;  and  both 
united,  by  virtue  of  their  inherent  power,  and  acting  harmoniously 
and  reciprocally,  produce  Eternal  Motion.  Therefore  there  are  no 
opposites  — no  antagonistic  principles  existing  in  the  realms  of  in- 
finite space. 

Therefore  the  motions  of  all  worlds,  and  their  distances  from  each 
other,  and  these  all  from  the  Centre,  are  determined  — not  antago- 
nistically, but  by  reason  of  the  relative  internal  affinities  that  they 
sustain  to  each  other.  They  are  not  repulsed  — not  rejected  from 
any  antipathy,  but  are  harmoniously  and  reciprocally  given  off,  that 
they  may  gravitate  to  some  like  substance  or  principle  existing  in 
some  part  of  the  remote  regions  of  space. 

1 Thus  all  things  in  Nature  are  incessantly  and  harmoniously  seek- 
ing their  equilibrium.  And  throughout  the  vast  system  of  planetary 
formations,  there  is  constantly  a universal  reciprocation.  And  there 
will  eternally  exist  the  same  harmony  which  now  pervades  the  worlds 
of  undefinable  space/  And  all  Matter  and  Motion  will  finally  become 
what  they  originally  were  — will  be  resolved  into  one  grand  and  glo- 
rious Sun,' more  refined  and  perfected,  more  excellent  in  all  its  qual- 
ities and  compositions,  that  it  may  again  bring  forth  a new  System  of 
suns,  and  an  infinite  corresponding  creation  throughout  space  ! And 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


153 


as  there  is  in  all  things  a constant  evolving  and  emanation,  develop- 
ment and  progression,  from  the  Centre,  of  refined  essences  which 
, dispose  themselves  in  concentric  circles,  this  is  a representation  of 
the  great  Circles  that  surrounded  the  infinite  Sun,  — and  of  the  great 
Circle  of  development  from  the  beginning  of  time  (or  of  the  present 
formation)  to  the  final  arrival  of  every  particle  at  the  Great  Centre 
and  Parent  from  which  they  all  emanated  ! 

(This  may  be  termed  the  beginning  and  end  of  one  time  : for  this 
contracted  idea  is  the  most  extensive  one  that  the  mind  can  pos- 
sibly conceive  upon  this  subject.  Yet  this  is  one  grand  Circle  of 
united  and  harmonious  motion,  life,  and  activity.  And  the  final  reso- 
lution of  the  present  creations  in  infinite  space,  will  be  the  consum- 
mation of  the  glorious  End  contemplated.*..  And  then  the  Great  Sun, 
becoming  thus  more  perfected,  will  breathe  forth  new  and  more 
refined  elements,  and  roll  into  space  successively  a corresponding, 

yet  more,  far  more  perfect  Univerccelum  ! 

■■ 

§ 12.  The  endless  concatenation  of  causey  by  which  infinite  space 
has  been  filled  with  systems  of  unnumbered  worlds,  was  originally 
established  by  the  force  and  spontaneous  action  of  the  Will  of  the 
Eternal  Mind  ! His  Will  is  the  executive  Power,  actuating  all 
things  throughout  eternity  ; and  by  immutable  and  changeless  laws  it 
has  filled  immensity  with  motion,  life,  and  activity.  This  Will  (as 
an  Effect  of  the  Infinite  blind)  was  the  first  Cause  of  all  things  ; and 
being  balanced  by  proper  materials,  the  Whole  was  capable  of  being 
incessantly  developed.  And  this  development  has  been,  and  still  is, 
going  on  unceasingly  throughout  space  ! 

An  understanding  therefore  that  all  things  in  being  have  emanated 
from  this  exhaustless  Fountain  of  never-ending  materials,  and  a com- 
prehension of  the  nature,  quality,  and  essence,  of  the  First  Eternal 
Cause,  affords  to  the  human  mind  a proper  and  indestructible  basis 
on  which  it  may  rest  a correct  understanding  of  the  nature  of  all 
Effects.  The  innumerable  classifications  made  of  effects  throughout 
Nature;  the  very  different  sciences  that  have  been  erected,  both 
upon  appearances  and  unwarrantable  hypotheses  ; and  the  apparently 
extreme  opposites,  such  as  heat  and  cold,  light  and  darkness,  life  and 
death,  activity  and  repose,  and  all  their  intermediates,  should  be 
viewed  in  the  light  in  which  they  will  appear  from  having  the  change- 
less Law  of  the  eternal  Positive  Mind  impressed  distinctly  upon  the 
understanding.  And  then,  having  for  the  foundation  of  reasoning 


154 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


that  which  is  everlasting  and  infinite,  the  mind  would  be  led  to  a 
proper  understanding  of  all  appearances,  forms,  and  effects,  issuing 
therefrom.  ' 

Every  particle  in  being  is  constantly  passing  through  forms,  orders, 
and  degrees.  This  is  a universal  Law  of  Matter.  Every  particle  in 
existence  is  unceasingly  seeking  association  and  equilibrium.  This 
also  is  an  unchangeable  effect  of  the  immutable  laws  of  Causation. 
Every  form  or  association  of  atoms,  whether  in  a small  or  large  body, 
has  a previous  correspondent.  And  every  correspondent  is  a type, 
symbol,  and  representative,  of  higher  and  more  perfect  spheres  than 
that  which  it  occupies.  This  incessant  motion,  and  the  various 
stages  which  each  atom  is  destined  and  compelled  to  pass  through, 
are  only  means  used  to  produce  higher  states  of  refinement  and  per- 
fection. No  quality,  substance,  or  essence,  ever  occupies  a state 
below  that  which  it  previously  occupied  : but  the  space  that  it  pre- 
viously filled  is  supplied  by  some  kindred  substance  or  element  that 
has  become  fitted  to  occupy  the  same  place  ; while  the  substance  or 
principle  that  has  occupied  that  place,  progresses  onward  and  upward 
to  higher  spheres  of  purity  and  refinement. 

Therefore  by  properly  understanding  one  atom  with  all  its  constit- 
uents, the  mind  would  be  comprehending  a globe.  And  a proper 
conception  of  a globe  would  lead  to  a knowledge  of  the  Centre 
around  which  it  revolves.  And  an  understanding  of  the  Sun,  with 
all  its  appendages,  and  of  the  laws  governing  and  actuating  them  in 
their  motions  and  revolutions,  would  give  the  mind  a true  conception 
of  the  Great  Eternal  Sun  and  Centre,  with  all  systems  that 
are  controlled  by  its  mighty  power  and  influence  ! 

Therefore  the  lowest  of  all  things  contains  the  highest  and  most 
perfect,.  And  when  the  highest  becomes  thus  developed,  it  is  capa- 
ble of  pervading  and  comprehending  all  below  its  exalted  state  of 
perfection. 

Thus  the  grand  and  glorious  Univerccelum  displays  the  substances,- 
qualities,  and  essences,  existing  in  the  great  material  Fountain ; and 
likewise  the  pure  Intelligence  and  infinite  perfection,  contained  in  the 
great  Vortex  of  the  Eternal  Positive  Mind! 

Many  elements,  combinations,  and  principles,  appear  externally 
very  dissimilar.  Disorder  and  confusion  are  apparently  everywhere 
visible.  General  and  special  interferences  are  seemingly  existing, 
when  things  are  particularly  or  minutely  considered.  But  when  the 
grand  general  contemplation  of  the  great  System  of  eternal  forma- 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


155 


tions  with  their  attributes  and  characteristics,  is  presented  to  the 
mind,  it  carries  the  impression  of  Truth , and  of  the  superlative  har- 
mony and  calm  tranquillity  that  are  existing  in  every  department  of 
the  Universe  and  of  eternity!  All  things  are  energetically,  yet 
quietly  passing  from  a lower  stage  of  being  to  a higher  and  more 
perfect  one ; and  all  qualities  and  essences,  controlled  by  the  Om- 
nipotent Actuator,  are  likewise  performing  their  revolutions  with 
an  inconceivable  power,  yet  are  apparently  motionless,  calm,  and 
tranquil ! 

And  throughout  immensity  there  is  perfect  unity,  harmony,  and 
reciprocation.  There  is  no  unjust  absorption  ; no  unequal  and  un- 
necessary attraction ; no  destroying  or  annihilating  of  one  body  or 
particle  for  the  immediate  or  isolated  and  selfish  supply  of  another ; 
no  unequitable  drawing  from  any  parts,  qualities,  or  elements,  to  sus- 
tain others.  But  all  give  to,  and  take  from,  each  other,  only  that 
which  is  necessary  and  useful  to  each.  All  are  incessantly  changing 
and  exchanging,  acting  and  reacting,  organizing  and  reorganizing, 
mutually,  throughout  the  realms  of  infinite  space ! All  is  harmony, 
peace,  and  quietness.  All  things  were  eternally  established  with  the 
inexpressible  perfection  of  these  attributes  and  qualities,  and  conse- 
quently are  eternally  manifesting  the  same  throughout  the  multifa- 
rious forms  of  immensity  ! All  things  are  indices  of  the  great  Su- 
pernal Power  ! The  almighty  and  everlasting  Perfection  that  inhab- 
its the  Vortex  of  eternity,  is  constantly  and  eternally  breathing  forth 
these  inexpressible  excellences  ; whose  breath  is  as  a mighty  fiat, 
rolling  into  being  unnumbered  systems  of  worlds,  forms,  and  entities  ; 
and  the  character  of  whose  emanations  is  expressed  in  the  tranquil 
manifestations  that  are  observed  in  every  form  and  motion  in  the 
Universe  ! 

And  unspeakably  grand  and  glorious  is  the  End  contemplated  : 
for  while  considering  all  worlds  as  one  World,  and  the  great  Whole 
as  but  an  atom  in  comparison  to  that  which  shall  exist,  the  design  is 
manifest,  that  the  Whole  may,  by  virtue  of  inherent  attributes 
power,  and  motion,  ultimately  become  a substance,  a quality,  a prin- 
ciple, of  so  refined  and  perfected  a nature  that  it  may  associate  with 
the  celestial  forms  and  Spheres  — being  a counterpart  and  equal  asso- 
ciate of  the  Great  Power  that  forced  all  things  from  their  original 
condition  ! 

Such,  therefore,  is  the  magnificent  and  harmonious  System  insti- 
tuted by  the  Great  Positive  Mind;  — and  while  the  great  Universe 


156 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


presents  itself  to  the  mind,  its  grand  attributes  and  qualities  must  be 
equally  and  as  indelibly  impressed.  And  this  will  throw  a light 
upon  the  human  mind,  which  is  above  the  glory  and  brightness 
ol  all  lights,  — the  knowledge  of  perfect  and  eternal  hap- 
piness ! 

For  while  existing  in  forms,  as  mankind  now  are  existing,  they 
should  conform  to  the  immutable  laws  of  Mailer.  And  being  as 
'particles  composing  the  great  Whole,  they  should  be  governed  and 
actuated  by  the  exalted  and  most  perfect  principles  that  are  estab- 
lished in  the  Law  of  the  material  Universe.  And  conforming  to 
these  harmonious  and  immovably-established  laws,  they  would  form  a 
perfect  and  harmonious  System  — a true  correspondent  of  the  vast 
Universe!  Then  all  motion  would  be  such  as  to  produce  good 
results.  All  parts  would  equally  reciprocate  with  each  other,  as  a 
principle  of  universal  interest.  And  there  would  be  no  isolation,  no 
absorption,  no  extraneous  parts  and  forms  in  being  ; but  all  would  be 
necessarily  required  and  adapted  to  make  the  whole  a perfect  Sys- 
tem— of  never-ending  happiness  and  peace!  And  as  forms  would 
be  constantly  assuming  new  spheres  and  new  stations,  according  to  a 
progressive  ascension,  the  Whole  would  be  a united,  organized 
System,  a Circle,  a representation  of  all  else  throughout  the  Uni- 
verse ! And  as  all  these  things  would  occur  by  the  inevitable  and 
unchangeable  consequences  of  immutable  law,  the  great  Mass  would 
be  an  harmonious  Whole  — composed  of  parts  each  of  which  would 
be  absolutely  necessary  to  make  the  great  Whole  perfect. 

And  the  Whole  thus  existing,  would  receive  the  tranquillizing  in- 
fluence of  divine  Law,  whose  very  essence  is  the  perfection  of 
Goodness  and  Truth.  Then  opposites  would  not  be  known ; for 
Knowledge  and  Truth  wrnuld  annihilate  their  visible  appearance  and 
seemingly  destructive  influence  from  the  Universe  for  ever.  And 
then  the  Truth  of  all  truths  ; the  Real  of  all  realities  ; the  foundation 
of  all  happiness  and  peace,  — would  be  of  itself  a universal  balm  of 
tranquillity  ! And  the  whole  would  be  as  a great  Sun,  containing  the 
essences  of  all  else  ; and  it  would  develop  those  indestructible  attri- 
butes whose  foundation  is  eternal,  and  whose  nature  and  Parent  are 
everlasting  and  infinite.  Then  all  would  breathe  forth  that  sponta- 
neous reciprocation  which  would  banish  for  ever  from  the  face'  of  the 
earth,  every  quality  and  principle  of  a seemingly  opposite  nature. 
And  then  there  would  be  flowing  throughout  the  Universe  the  evi- 
dence of  the  eternal  Truth  that  opposites  do  not  exist:  and  all 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


157 


appearances  of  the  same  would  be  swallowed  up  in  the  great  floo-d  of 
light  and  knowledge  ! * 

§ 13.  The  original  state  of  matter  in  space,  and  its  general  combi- 
nations and  characteristics,  have  thus  been  presented  to  the  world  for 
consideration  and  investigation,  — together  with  the  general  laws  and 
principles  indivisibly  connected  with  the  Great  Mass.  And  the  gen- 
eral modus  operandi  of  the  Universe  ; the  formation  and  constitution 
of  worlds,  and  the  relations  that  they  sustain  to  each  other,  have  also 
been  presented  for  contemplation. 

The  basis  of  all  true  scientific  and  philosophical  investigations,  is 
the  original  Cause  and  beginning  of  all  things  (considered  as  a Uni- 
vercoelum  of  Power  and  Materials),  and  the  general  and  consequent 
effects  resulting  from  the  original  organization  of  Matter  and  Motion. 
And  the  thoughts  having  been  carried  back  to  the  Centre  of  infinite 
space,  where  existed  only  the  universal  Sun  from  which  all  things 
sprang  into  being,  the  mind  has  been  led  to  consider  the  successive 
formations  of  innumerable  suns  and  worlds  in  circles  of  development. 
In  attempting  to  follow  each  formation  of  worlds,  it  becomes  lost  in 
the  immensity  of  the  subject.  It  therefore  requires  nearer  and  more 
tangible  subjects  of  thought  than  those  which  have  been  in  this  gen- 
eral manner  considered. 

Evidence  may  he  received  in  favor  of  what  has  been  said,  from  all 
well-ascertained  truths  in  science  and  Nature.  Indeed,  the  convic- 
tion that  Nature  presses  upon  the  mind  is  irresistible.  And  evidence 
of  truth  has  its  foundation  only  in  the  unchangeable  manifestations  of 
Nature  ; for  all  truths,  being  eternal,  are  established  in  that  which  is 
also  eternal,  — and  are  consequently  therein  manifested.  The  various 
scientific  and  philosophical  facts  and  truths,  and  all  theories  that  are 
immovably  established,  will  converge  in  their  respective  conclusions 

* The  Clairvoyant  here  remarked  that  he  found  a crowd  of  thoughts  pressing  upon 
his  mind  which  language  was  utterly  inadequate  to  express.  But,  said  he,  “ these 
thoughts  and  sentiments  will  be  ultimately  known  and  felt ; and  then  they  will  be 
known  to  be  absolutely  inexpressible.”  In  view  of  the  harmony  and  just  and  benign 
reciprocation  that  pervade  the  whole  vast  Universe  of  worlds  and  systems,  Man,  he 
said,  should  feel  very  much  depressed ; inasmuch  as  he  is  the  only  being  who  has  pur- 
sued a course  of  isolated  and  selfish  action,  and  been  governed  by  laws  which  never 
did  and  never  can  exist  in  Nature,  or  in  the  plans  and  institutions  of  the  Great  Mind. 
Of  his  many  intensely  interesting  incidental  remarks,  the  world  must  for  the  most 
part  be  deprived.  We  may  print  some  faint  expressions  of  his  ideas,  but  we  can  not 
print  the  solemn  impressiveness,  and  celestial  purity  of  manner,  in  which  they  were 
presented.  — 


15S 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


and  form  a united  evidence  of  the  truth  of  the  things  herein  presented 
Still,  as  prior  causes  are  both  internal  and  invisible,  although  they 
produce  effects  visible,  these  are  not  always  correctly  manifested  to 
the  senses.  For  effects  are  exceedingly  changed  in  their  appearance 
by  incidental  and  surrounding  causes.  At  times,  however,  effects  are 
truly  visible  ; but  only  when  conditions  and  circumstances  are  ex- 
tremely favorable.  Still,  effects  constantly  occur ; and  these  again 
are  the  cause  of  others  ; so  that  all  things  are  developed  by  a concat- 
enation of  established  causes,j2ach  of  which  follows  the  specific  gui- 
dance of  an  immutable  Law.  Therefore  the  innumerable  causes  that 
produce  corresponding  effects*  are  all  referable  to  some  established 
Principle  that  is  demonstratively  known  by  its  results  to  be  un- 
changeable. \ 

This  knowledge  of  Nature  begets  a reposing  confidence  in  the 
minds  of  those  who  comprehend  it,  that  all  laws,  principles,  elements, 
and  compositions,  are  an  emanation  from  some  great,  unchanging, 
inexhaustible  Fountain  of  Truth!  Therefore  in  her  laws  — in  her 
attributes  and  manifestations,  are  based  the  confidence  and  the  firm 
and  deliberate  researches  of  all  true  investigators. 

In  contemplating  creations  of  such  indefinite  magnitude,  the  mind 
becomes  lost  in  the  realms  of  immensity  ; for  it  is  incompetent 
to  grasp  the  mighty  Universe  while  it  exists  in  the  present  sphere  of 
being.  Therefore  the  magnificent  Solar  System  with  which  our  own 
planet  is  immediately  connected,  shall  next  be  the  subject  of  investi- 
gation and  revealment.  And  as  it  has  been  shown  that  a proper  un- 
derstanding of  one  particle  composing  the  great  Universe,  would  lead 
to  a correct  knowledge  of  the  Universe  itself,  so  a revealing  of  the 
successive  creations,  from  the  sun  to  the  condensation  of  this  globe, 
will  lead  analogically  to  a proper  understanding  of  the  mighly  Uni- 
vercoelum  of  eternity  ! And  by  a course  of  mathematical  calcula- 
tions, and  astronomical,  geological,  and  physiological  explanations, 
will  be  revealed  the  order  and  condition  of  creations  in  the  solar 
system,  and  especially  as  relating  to  this  globe.  And  as  science  is 
partially  disseminated  and  generally  accessible  in  the  present  sphere, 
the  creation  will  be  considered  scientifically  and  philosophically , for 
the  especial  purpose  of  carrying  deeper  conviction  of  truths  heretofore 
proclaimed  ! 

And  as  Truth  alone  has  an  indestructible  basis,  nothing  is  to  be 
apprehended  from  its  inevitable  results  ; but  we  may  fearlessly  erect 
upon  its  foundation,  a Temple  of  the  utmost  magnificence.  The 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


159 


materials  of  which  this  is  to  be  composed,  are  the  universal  evidences 
flowing  through  every  indescribable  vein  and  avenue  of  creation.  Its 
parts  will  make  a whole  without  imperfection  ; its  pillars  will  be  the 
united  volumes  of  never-ending  Truth,;  and  its  covering  will  be  a 
mantle  of  eternal  peace  and  tranquillity.  Its  appearance  will  be  like 
the  infinite  light  and  grandeur  of  boundless  attributes  when  all  con- 
joined and  united ; and  it  will  indelibly  and  unchangeably  impress 
the  whole  world  with  the  glorious  brilliancy  and  splendor  of  the  Great 
Positive  Mind!  And  from  this  great  Temple  will  issue  forth  those 
all-subduing  and  tranquillizing  principles  that  will  establish  universal 
knowledge,  happiness,  purity,  and  perfection  ! This  Temple  will  be 
an  emblem  of  the  nature  and  attributes  of  the  Divine  Mind;  — and 
all  the  grandeur  and  magnificence  of  these  attributes  will  be  properly 
seen  and  felt  when  a knowledge  of  their  unchanging  essences  and 
principles  shall  be  obtained  by  a proper  and  unrestricted  investi- 
gation. v 

Thus  I leave  the  vast  Univerccelum  that  fills  all  space  (and  space 
is  annihilated  to  the  conceptions),  and  commence  revealing  the  crea- 
tion of  the  Solar  System  and  of  this  world. 

The  terms  World,  and  Universe,  and  Nature,  shall  hereafter  be 
applied  as  significant  of  the  present  Solar  System,  and  of  the  globes 
therein  existing.  F or  neither  of  these  terms  is  sufficiently  strong  to 
comprehend  in  its  meaning,  the  unnumbered  ivorlds  of  space  ! There- 
fore the  same  that  has  been  used,  must  be  still  applied  to  the  subjects 
of  the  forthcoming  investigations.  And  general  scientific  terms  and 
technical  expressions  will  be  employed  likewise. 


§ 14.  The  wonderful  Sun  or  Centre  to  which  our  Solar  System 
belongs,  is  but  a remote  planet  of  another  System  existing  prior  to  its 
formation.  And  in  accordance  with  the  general  classification  of  suns 
and  worlds  in  the  Universe,  its  planets  and  satellites  may  be  consid- 
eied  as  satellites  and  asteroids  belonging  to  a planet,  and  that  planet 
as  belonging  to  a sun.* 

* The  matter  contained  in  this  and  the  three  following  sections,  was  delivered  on  the 
16th,  17th,  and  20th  of  March,  1846.  The  statement  here  concerning  the  revolution 
of  the  Sun,  as  a planet,  around  a centre  in  the  depths  of  immensity,  is  verified  by  the 


160 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


The  sun  is  an  accumulation  and  agglomeration  of  particles  thrown 
from  other  spheres ; and  these  became  united  according  to  the  law 
of  mutual  and  inherent  attraction.  Its  igneous  composition  contains 
Heat,  Light,  and  Electricity,  the  successive  developments  of  all  pri- 
meval matter  existing  in  an  agglomerated  condition,  and  subjected  to 
the  general  law  governing  all  matter.  The  materials  constituting  the 
sun,  like  those  composing  all  other  bodies,  were  thrown  from  other 
bodies  during  their  revolutions  around  their  common  Centre,  by  a 
force  termed  the  centrifugal  force,  or  the  tendency  that  a revolving 
body  has  to  throw  particles  from  its  surface.  In  this  manner,  and  by 
a mutual  gravitation  and  consequent  congregation  of  particles,  the 
Sun  assumed  its  distinct  existence  and  form.  And  being  governed 
by  the  same  law,  it  has  the  same  motions  with  all  other  celestial 
spheres,  and  revolves  on  its  axis  with  wonderful  velocity,  and  in  an 
elliptic  orbit,  around  the  inconceivable  Centre  to  which  it  belongs. 

Thus,  the  Sun  has  two  original  motions  : one  upon  its  axis,  and 
the  other  in  its  orbit  around  a greater  Centre.  The  heavy  or  dense 
particles  composing  it,  took  the  lowest  point  in  the  great  Body.  The 
more  refined,  assumed  and  sustained  different  distances  and  stations 
from  the  lowest,  in  accordance  with  the  density  or  rarity  of  each  par- 
ticle. Its  inconceivable  igneous  centre  was  an  accumulation  of  those 
particles  whose  density  would  not  permit  them  to  occupy  higher 
stations. 

Therefore  the  great  internal  portion  of  the  Sun  is  an  immense  mass 
of  liquid  fire,  evolving  successively  heat,  light,  and  electricity,  as  de- 
veloped and  purified  particles  of  its  interior  composition.  The 
evolved  atmosphere  may  be  considered  as  a part  of  the  great  Body, 
— still  an  emanation  from  the  nucleus  as  resulting  from  its  own  spon- 
taneous action.  This  atmosphere,  or  immense  nebulous  zone  of  accu- 
mulated particles,  extended  to  the  orbit  that  the  extreme  planet  occu- 
pies, and  traverses  as  a cometary  body.  This  is  one  more  planet 
than  is  now  known,  and  has  not  yet  been  detected  by  the  observations 
made  through  the  medium  of  the  most  powerful  symbol  of  the  hu 
man  eye. 

The  existence  of  eight  planets  has  been  determined  upon  as  nearly 

recent  discoveries  of  Maedler,  a Russian  astronomer,  of  which  discoveries  the  clair- 
voyant in  his  normal  state  had  no  knowledge,  neither  had  either  of  his  associates, 
until  many  months  after  this  was  delivered  ! From  the  apparent  motions  of  the  fixed 
stars,  Maedler  has  deduced  the  conclusion  that  the  Solar  System  is  moving  around  a 
point  in  the  direction  of  Pleiades,  requiring  many  millions  of  years  to  complete  a single 
revolution ! 


nature’s  divine  revelations 


161 


beyond  all  doubt.*  Still  the  eighth  and  ninth  are  not  yet  recognised 
as  bodies  belonging  to  the  Solar  System.  But  the  orbit  that  the  last 
one  occupies,  was  the  extreme  circumference  of  the  atmospheric  em- 
anation from  the  sun. 

All  emanations  were  governed  by  the  law  of  centrifugal  force,  and 
the  natural  tendency  of  each  particle  to  seek  its  own  congenial  asso- 
ciation, or  the  equilibrium  of  its  dense  or  rare  composition.  And  the 
great  Whole  revolved  with  one  united  motion  on  its  own  axis,  and 
also  around  its  unimaginable  orbit  in  the  great  plane  observed  by  all 
suns  and  planets  from  the  first  stages  of  their  existence.  And  this 
was  elliptical , — rendered  so  by  virtue  of  the  primary  force  given  each 
atom  that  compose  the  great  Body. 

There  was  contained  in  this  great  Sun,  matter  to  compose  all  the 
planets  which  have  subsequently  been  formed,  with  all  their  satellites 
and  appendages;  likewise  all  the  forms  possessing  motion,  life,  and 
activity,  which  are  universally  disseminated  upon  their  surfaces.  And 
all  were  successively  developed  by  virtue  of  inherent  laws  established 
from  the  great  original  Source.  There  was  incessantly  passing  from 
the  great  Centre,  as  aided  by  both  of  its  motions,  particles,  atoms, 
and  substances  that  had  become  sufficiently  refined  to  assume  higher 
spheres  in  the  great  Mass. 

Its  magnitude  being  inconceivable,  and  its  diameter  not  to  be  cal- 
culated by  any  mathematical  process,  it  was  composed  of  stratifica- 
tions,, or  rather  of  different  bodies  developed  one  after  another. 
These  great  developments  maybe  generalized  as  follows:  From  the 
igneous  or  unformed  centre  was  developed  heat.  The  extreme  of 
this  was  the  commencement  of  light ; and  this  was  the  second  for- 
mation. Electricity  followed  next,  as  a consequent  development  of 
the  latter.  And  the  last  active  fluid  extended  to  the  utmost  extreme 


ius fire , heat,  light,  and  electricity,  were  the  general  elements 
composing  the  Sun.  Without  these,  it  would  not  have  been  a sun. 

* At  first  I did  not  understand  this  expression  ; and  it  is  but  recently  that  it  occur- 
red to  me  that  it  evidently  has  reference  to  the  conclusions  which  Le  Verrier  had 
already  established  in  his  own  mind  from  mathematical  calculations,  and  which  the 
clairvoyant  saw.  Numerous  witnesses  can  testify  that  what  is  said  about  an  eighth 
and  ninth  planet,  was  in  manuscript  in  March,  1846,  and  months  before  Le  Verriar’s 
calculations  and  conclusion  had  been  announced  in  this  country.  The  eighth  planet 
was  first  actually  observed  in  September,  1846.  These  facts  can  not  but  be  regarded 
as  important,  proving,  as  they  do,  the  ability  of  the  clairvoyant  to  obtain  knowledge  of 
things  beyond  the  reach  of  the  natural  senses,  and  hence  as  imparting  confidence  in 
his  revealments  which  can  not  be  verified  by  any  process  of  sensuous  investigation. 


( e whole  Mass  and  its  successive  radiations. 


11 


162 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


And  these  are  elements  the  nature  and  relations  of  which  lead  to  a 
proper  understanding  of  all  other  bodies,  forms,  substances,  and  ele- 
ments,— and  likewise  of  the  law  that  controls  them.^J1 

It  is  necessary  to  bear  in  mind  the  proposition,  that  the  circum- 
ference of  the  sun’s  atmosphere  extended  to  the  orbit  that  is  now 
occupied  by  the  ninth  planet  of  our  Solar  System.  And  it  is  also 
necessary  to  understand  the  two  great  motions  of  the  sun,  especially 
that  in  its  elliptic  orbit,  around  a more  inconceivable  Centre.  And 
then  it  will  be  conceived  that  by  virtue  of  the  throwing  off  or  cen- 
trifugal force  which  the  great  Body  generates  in  its  motion,  atoms 
will  pass  outward  from  the  centre,  in  the  direction  of  the  plane  that 
the  body  is  observing  in  its  motion.  Also,  the  accumulation  of  par- 
ticles at  the  extremes  of  its  elliptic  orbit  is  greater  than  at  any  other 
point  or  locality  around  the  great  central  body.  This  approximate 
agglomeration  of  particles,  in  becoming  condensed,  will  be  consid- 
ered as  following  the  general  law  which  governs  the  motion  of  all 
bodies  and  particles. 

And  it  will  be  perceived  that  according  to  the  law  of  eternal  recip- 
rocation and  gravitation  of  particles,  there  would  not  have  been  an 
accumulation  at  these  localities  had  not  the  particles  that  were  thrown 
off,  previously  become  suitable  to  associate  and  conjoin  with  particles 
that  were  there  already  existing.  Therefore  no  law  of  positive  at- 
traction actuated  them,  or  withdrew  them  from  particles  to  which 
they  previously  adhered,  — nor  did  any  law  of  positive  repulsion  repel 
them  from  their  original  station.  Neither  repulsion  nor  attraction  as 
a law,  and  as  these  are  generally  understood,  produced  any  effect 
upon  these  foreign  particles.  But  there  was  a mutual  gravitation  (or 
association)  of  suitable  materials  and  atoms  to  assume  such  a form. 

§ 15.  The  great  Centre  having  its  successively  developed  atmo- 
spheres, or  strata  of  elements,  extending  to  the  last  development  of 
electricity,  this  highest  of  all  material  refinements  pervaded  the 
lower,  entering  into  every  particle  where  it  had  been  originally  con- 
tained and  developed.  And  this  being  the  subtle,  active  agent  con- 
tained in  every  particle,  it  penetrated  to  the  lowest  depths  of  the 
great  Sun  thus  existing,  and  extended  to  an  undefinable  expanse 
throughout  space.  Being  thus  subtle,  active,  and  powerful,  it  be- 
came a pervading  agent,  operating  upon  every  particle  and  substance 
in  the  vast  composition,  — transmitting  and  interchanging  particles 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


163 


and  their  qualities  to  other  immediate  spheres  or  stations  which  they 
were  required  to  fill. 

And  this  being  the  active,  energetic,  and  all-pervading  fluid,  the 
ultimate  principle  of  the  great  Mass,  the  particles  that  accumulated 
and  agglomerated  at  the  extreme  point  of  the  elliptic  orbit  of  the 
Sun’s  revolution,  were  inherently  associated  by  virtue  of  this  fluid, 
and  by  the  specific  density  or  rarity  of  the  particles  that  were  thrown 
to  that  station  by  the  centrifugal  action  that  the  immense  Sun 
had  in  both  of  its  inconceivable  motions.  Electricity  was  the  me- 
dium and  active  agent  to  transmit  and  transfer  every  molecular  sub- 
stance to  new  stations.  It  may  be  considered  a mediator , or  an 
associating  principle  that  unites  antagonistic  particles.  It  is  no  less 
an  all-pervading  influence,  acting  upon  the  highest  and  lowest  parti- 
cles of  every  state  of  material  association.  And  it  gyrates  from  the 
lowest  to  the  highest,  uniting  and  associating  all  particles  according 
to  the  density  or  rarity  of  such,  until  it  reaches  the  highest  point,  or 
forms  an  association  with  principles  of  its  own  affinity. 

Such  is  the  invisible,  controlling  element,  whose  results  are  known 
as  laws.  It  is  an  energetic  principle  which  actuates  all  ultimate  mo- 
tion in  the  immense  Body  of  material  constitution.  And  by  this 
subtle  fluid,  and  the  motion  originally  given  to  the  Sun,  was  formed 
at  the  farthest  point  of  its  elliptic  orbit,  the  body  heretofore  de- 
scribed as  the  ninth  planet,  or  rather  the  cometary  body  that  traverses 
the  outermost  circle  of  the  Sun’s  atmosphere. 

The  magnitude  of  the  great  body’s  circumference  and  diameter, 
is  unnecessary  to  represent,  even  if  it  were  possible.  It  is  sufficient 
to  understand  that  the  great  Sun,  in  bulk  and  magnitude,  extended 
to  the  orbit  of  the  farthest  cometary  body.  And  a proper  compre- 
hension of  the  modus  ceternus  of  all  motion,  and  the  laws  which  it 
develops,  should  be  the  basis  on  which  all  scientific  investigations 
and  philosophical  researches  as  pertaining  to  subjects  of  this  nature, 
should  be  founded. 

All  that  is  known  as  motion  or  activity,  does  not  give  to  the  mind  . 
an  adequate  conception  of  the  laws  that  produce  such.  But  as  the 
mind  depends  upon  a proper  understanding  of  motion  to  conceive  of 
planetary  formations  in  the  Solar  System,  so  there  should  be  an  un- 
derstanding of  the  nature  and  cause  of  motion,  and  of  the  general 
law  which  such  inevitably  and  invariably  follows.  And  the  prin- 
ciples existing  in,  and  which  are  coeval  with,  Matter,  should  also 
be  permanently  settled  in  the  mind.  Then  general  causes  will  be 


164 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


expected  to  produce  invariable  corresponding  effects  ; and  cause  and 
effect  will  be  perceived  to  exist  as  one  general  Principle. 

Still  there  are  thousands  of  intermediate  motions  produced  by  inci- 
dental and  subordinate  causes.  But  if  such  motions  wfcre  innumer- 
able, and  if  all  their  minute  manifestations  and  results  were  differ- 
ent from  what  might  be  expected  from  the  general  law,  they  could 
not  be  considered  as  subverting  or  interrupting  the  action  of  the  ge?i- 
eral  and  established  principles  of  motion  in  Nature. 

Motion  is  the  effect  that  one  body  produces  upon  another.  If  a sub- 
stance or  body  be  dense , its  pressure  or  action  upon  another  substance 
will  beK^ijiroportion  to  its  density,  and  will  produce  proportionate 
effects.  All  particles  thus  act  on  each  other.,  both  separately  and 
combined.  Therefore  a universal  motion  exists : for  the  action  of 
one  'particle  will  set  in  motion  every  other  particle,  whether  single  or 
compound,  in  the  Universe  ! I The  movements  of  all  things  therefore 
are  graduated  in  accordance  with  the  station  of  the  substance,  and  its 
grossness  or  refinement.  And  the  very  moment  the  original  impetus 
was  given  to  Matter,  the  ceaseless  motion  of  all  bodies  throughout 
space  was  eternally  established  ! Motion  can  not  be  comprehended, 
or  adequately  accounted  for,  on  any  other  principle  known  to  char- 
acterize any  form  of  combined  elements  : and  on  this  ground  only 
may  be  rested  an  understanding  of  its  cause  and  manifestations. 
And  we  should  regard  motion  as  existing  in  primeval  matter,  or  in 
time  past  too  remote  for  conception,  as  constituting  the  general  Prin- 
ciple of  Matter,  and  as  being  the  highest  and  most  perfect  attribute 
of  interior  development. 

The  impetus  given  the  first  particle,  being  all-powerful,  is  the  cause 
of  all  subsequent  motion.  Therefore  Motion  is  an  eternal  Principle 
existing  in  Matter,  established  by  infinite  Power.  Then  in  consid- 
ering the  innumerable  movements  and  manifestations  of  Nature,  the 
basis  of  the  investigation  should  consist  in  this  originally-established 
Principle;  and  from  this  should  be  expected  general  developments 
of  motion  as  corresponding  to  the  universal  law. 

By  thus  considering  Motion  and  its  nature  and  Cause,  the  mind 
will  be  led  to  a proper  understanding  of  the  formation  of  the  Sun, 
and  of  the  law  that  controlled  its  mighty  movements.  The  grand 
and  most  important  motion  belonging  to  the  Sun,  is  the  one  it 
performs  in  its  orbit  around  a more  unimaginable  Centre.  The 
cause  of  this  established  motion  was  the  impetus  given  the  Sun  by 
the  powerful  throwing  off  of  particles  from  the  Centre  to  which  it 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


165 


belongs,  and  the  incessant  and  violent  force  that  accompanied  the 
reception  of  them. 

This  extensive  and  mighty  accumulation  constantly  going  on 
throughout  countless  ages,  produced  the  Sun,  of  such  mighty  dimen- 
sions as  have  been  described.  And  this  impetus  originally  given  it, 
produced  a corresponding  motion  in  an  elliptic  orbit,  at  a distance 
from  its  Sun  in  proportion  to  its  density  and  magnitude.  And  the 
motion  it  has  upon  its  own  axis  is  the  still  more  violent  motion  that 
was  given  it  by  the  reception  of  particles  which  came  with  such  ve- 
locity as  to  cause  it  almost  instantly  to  revolve.  The  motion  given 
it  was  thus  the  result  of  the  impulse  of  moving  particles,  the  ten- 
dency of  which  was  to  produce  like  motion.  This  motion  therefore 
was  a natural  consequence  of  a kindly  reciprocation  of  atoms.  And 
comparative  condensation  was  an  inevitable  result,  caused  not  only 
by  the  accumulation  at  the  centre,  of  dense  particles  that  associated 
more  closely  with  each  other,  but  by  an  escape  of  the  more  refined 
parts,  which  assumed  higher  stations  in  the  vast  body. 

§ 16.  The  ninth  planet  (or  cometary  body),  being  composed  of 
particles  accumulated  by  the  motion  of  the  great  Sun,  observed  the 
same  plane  by  the  same  specific  force  ; and  obeying  the  law  of  recip- 
rocal gravitation,  it  occupied  its  assumed  orbit  at  a distance  in  ac- 
cordance with  its  rarity  and  peculiar  constitution. 

The  eighth  planet  was  next  evolved,  observing  the  same  principles 
of  formation  and  the  same  general  law  of  motion,  and  was  situated 
within  the  orbit  of  the  former  merely  because  its  composition  was 
more  dense  than  the  first  one  evolved.  Its  occupying  the  sphere  thus 
described,  is  therefore  only  in  harmony  with  the  established  princi- 
ples of  gravitation,  and  of  orbicular  and  rotary  motions.  As  the 
eighth  and  ninth  planets  have  not  yet  been  recognised  as  belonging 
to  our  solar  system,  there  can  be  no  conception  of  the  original  mag- 
nitude and  diameter  of  the  Sun,  as  including  its  extended  atmosphere. 

But  while  a proper  understanding  of  the  law  and  nature  of  Motion, 
and  how  Matter,  in  large  portions,  agglomerates  and  takes  lower  or 
higher  stations  according  to  its  specific  gravity  or  levity,  — is  essen- 
tial to  a proper  investigation  and  comprehension  of  the  accumulation 
and  formation  of  matter  into  planets,  satellites,  and  asteroids, — this 
is  equally  necessary,  as  affording  a basis  on  which  the  mind  may  rest 
geological  researches,  — and  upon  which  latter,  again,  may  rest  a 
proper  conception  of  all  ulterior  effects  and  developments. 


166 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


There  are,  however,  elements  which  are  apparently  not  controlled 
by  the  same  general  law.  Various  observations  made  by  different 
persons  upon  the  subject  of  heat,  light,  and  electricity,  have  led  them 
to  different  opinions  and  speculations  in  reference  to  the  character, 
attributes,  and  governing  principle  of  each  of  these  elements.  It  is 
well  here  to  observe  that  those  who  have  formed  dissimilar  theories 
in  reference  to  heat  and  light,  have  done  so  while  these  elements 
were  manifested  under  incidental  and  modifying  circumstances.  And 
the  result  of  such  observations  has  been  to  obscure  to  the  mind  the 
operations  of  the  general  law  that  governs  all  elements  in  being. 
Heat  (or  caloric)  has  been  supposed  to  be  governed  by  a law  differ- 
ent from  that  governing  light : and  electricity , being  as  yet  an  unde- 
fined and  incomprehensible  principle,  has  also  been  designated  as  a 
different  substance,  and  supposed  to  be  governed  by  a different  law 
from  the  last  two  mentioned.  Hence  it  is  again  evident  that  detailed 
and  minute  observations  have  not  been  adequate  to  establish  a uni- 
versal real-reality  of  laws  as  governing  all  elements  in  being. 

It  has  been  heretofore  proved  by  indubitable  evidence,  that  the  great 
Centre  or  Sun,  as  one  substance,  develops  these  successively  as  at- 
mospheric elements,  according  to  the  law  of  refinement  and  progres- 
sion. However  this  theory  may  differ  from  previous  speculations, 
that  does  not  alter  its  truth,  nor  the  evidence  which  naturally  accom- 
panies the  same,  to  the  mind.  For  it  is  demonstrated  beyond  a 
doubt,  that  all  matter  and  elements  are  fundamentally  and  essentially 
the  same,  and  that  a different  law  can  not  govern  any  particle  or  ele- 
ment in  the  Universe,  from  that  inherent  Law  eternally  established. 

Still  the  manifestations  and  effects  of  these  different  principles  are 
exceedingly  dissimilar,  according  to  the  circumstances  under  which 
they  are  developed  to  the  observations  of  outward  investigators. 
For  particular  appearances  in  these,  as  in  all  other  things,  are  inev- 
itably dissimilar ; and  to  base  conclusions  upon  such  appearances, 
even  if  such  have  been  successively  observed  for  yeans,  would  be 
to  lose  sight  of  the  grand  general  Principle  of  the  Universe,  and 
to  endeavor  to  establish  a theory  upon  the  basis  of  corporeal  and  ex- 
terior manifestations.  But  properly  understanding  that  all  Matter  in 
its  primeval  state,  was  of  an  igneous  constitution,  it  follows  as  a con- 
sequence that  all  things  existing  must  partake  and  be  composed  of 
materials  from  the  same  great  Mass. 

Therefore  heat,  light,  and  electricity,  are  stdl  matter ; but  each 
occupies  a different  station,  lower  or  higher,  according  to  its  re- 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


167 


spective  degree  of  refinement.  And  the  constant  emanations  of 
each  are  governed  by  the  original  attributes  established  in  the  eternal 
law  of  motion  as  producing  progressive  development  in  all  things. 
This,  therefore,  constitutes  the  grand  general  Law  that  governs  all 
elements  in  space. 

But  let  it  be  distinctly  borne  in  mind,  that  the  peculiar  cir  cum  stan- 
ces and  conditions  under  which  these  elements  may  be  situated,  will 
correspondingly  modify  their  visible  effects.  This  observation  will 
lead  to  a proper  understanding  of  the  amount  of  heat  and  light  which 
the  eighth  planet  receives  from  the  Sun.  The  ultimate  discovery  of 
this  celestial  body,  and  its  revolution  and  diameter  being  specified, 
will  contribute  greatly  to  advance  the  interesting  science  of  as- 
tronomy, particularly  when  the  aberrations  and  refractions  of  light 
are  known  as  they  occur  between  it  and  the  Sun  around  which  it 
revolves. 

Its  density  is  four  fifths  that  of  water.  Its  diameter  it  is  unneces- 
sary to  determine.  Its  period  of  revolution  can  be  inferred  analogi- 
cally from  the  period  in  which  Uranus  traverses  its  elliptic  and  almost 
inconceivable  orbit.  The  atmosphere  of  the  eighth  planet  is  exceed- 
ingly rare,  containing  little  oxygen,  but  being  mostly  composed  of. 
fluorine  and  nitrogen.  No  organic  constitution  that  exists  upon  the 
earth,  could  exist  there  alive  for  one  moment.  The  human  eye 
would  be  a useless  organ  ; for  light  there  is  of  such  a nature  as 
to  render  its  darkness,  even  at  the  darkest  period,  several  hun- 
dred degrees  lighter  than  the  light  which  the  earth  receives  from 
the  sun  ! 

It  has,  like  Uranus,  six  satellites.  These  were  evolved  and  formed 
by  the  two  motions  given  this  planet ; the  farthest  from  the  primary 
being  the  extent  of  its  original  composition,  and  the  nearest  being  an 
accumulation  of  denser  atoms  from  the  planet.  Therefore,  the  plan- 
et itself  being  made  up  of  denser  materials  than  any  of  its  satellites, 
the  respective  distances  of  the  latter  from  the  planet,  with  their  diam- 
eters and  periods  of  revolution,  are  determined  by  their  respective 
compositions,  and  the  relations  they  sustain  to  each  other. 

The  period  of  time  that  elapsed  since  the  sun,  by  its  own  inherent 
tendency,  commenced  organizing  this  unimaginable  body,  could  not 
be  possibly  conceived  of.  And  the  time  in  which  the  satellites  were 
produced  and  developed,  is  also  beyond  the  computation  of  the  most 
erudite  mathematician.  Numbers  maybe  added  to  numbers  ; trillions 
may  be  multiplied  by  still  higher  numbers,  yet  the  amount  of  figures 


16S 


nature's  divine  revelations. 


produced  would  not  represent  the  number  of  years  or  even  centuries 
in  which  such  a formation  could  be  developed ! 

It  is  wholly  unfitted  for  the  habitation  of  any  organic  constitution 
yet  life  will  ultimately  cover  its  now  undisturbed  surfaces. 

§ 17.  The  planet  produced  as  next  in  order,  was  Herschel  or 
Uranus.  During  its  first  stages  of  formation,  it  was  an  accumula- 
tion of  inter-associated,  igneous,  rarified  particles,  whose  rarity  unfit- 
ted them  for  any  other  sphere  of  association.  The  diameter  of  the 
planet  previous  to  any  other  formation  now  belonging  to  its  system, 
was  nearly  three  millions  of  miles ! By  virtue  of  inherent  motion, 
six  satellites  were  successively  developed.  The  most  rarified  accu- 
mulation was  the  sixth  satellite  ; and  the  most  unrefined  and  dense, 
was  that  nearest  to  the  planet.  — And  each  satellite  was  gradually 
and  steadily  produced  by  the  established  laws  of  association  and  con- 
densation. 

The  diameter  of  the  planet  at  the  present  time  is  thirty-five  thou- 
sand one  hundred  and  twelve  miles;  the  farthest  satellite  being  nearly 
one  million  and  a half  miles  from  its  primary.  The  satellite  nearest 
the  planet,  is  not  much  further  than  the  moon  is  from  the  earth. 

The  revolutions  of  these  satellites  around  their  centre,  as  observed 
by  the  telescope,  are  very  unlike  those  of  any  other  satellites  belong- 
ing to  any  of  the  planets  of  the  Solar  System.  For  while  Uranus 
revolves  obliquely  on  its  axis,  its  satellites  observe  an  angular,  inclined 
rotation,  — this  apparent  dissimilitude  of  general  and  rotary  motions 
creating  wonder  and  astonishment  in  the  minds  of  astronomers  ! 

Uranus  also  is  often  apparently  eclipsed  by  her  extremely  eccen- 
tric appendages.  Thus  blue  and  dark  spots  are  occasionally  observed 
upon  its  surface, — its  light  being  slightly  intercepted  by  a bluish  or 
crimson  tint,  and  rarely  by  a dark  one.  Still  the  observations  that 
have  been  made  on  the  satellites  of  Uranus,  do  not  establish  the  abso- 
lute conviction  that  such  contra-eccentricities  do  really  exist  among 
them ; because  at  different  periods,  the  appearance  of  their  motions 
is  not  the  same.  And  this  fact  was  frequently  observed  by  its  dis- 
coverer ; but  he  afterward  became  convinced  of  the  angular  and  ellip- 
tic motions  of  this  planet’s  satellites. 

Being  fully  convinced  that  the  true  motions  will  yet  be  discovered, 
and  that  they  are  in  unison  and  harmony  with  those  of  the  satellites 
of  kindred  planets,  it  is  unnecessary  at  present  to  decide  respecting 
the  true  plane  and  form  of  the  orbits  observed  by  these  satellites  ; for 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


169 


such  would  tend  to  retard  astronomical  investigations,  and  to  destroy 
those  efforts  that  are  useful  and  necessary  to  the  unfolding  of  the 
mind  and  to  the  due  appreciation  of  scientific  truth.* 

The  rotation  of  this  planet  on  its  axis  has  not  as  yet  been  discov- 
ered ; especially  the  time  it  occupies  in  a single  revolution.  The 
velocity  with  which  it  revolves  is  absolutely  inconceivable.  It  is  for 
this  reason  that  it  has  not  as  yet  been  determined, — notwithstanding 
its  orbicular  and  almost  incalculable  revolution  has  been  established 
and  specified.  How  much  undisturbed  thought  and  deep  calculation 
has  this  computation  required ! And  how  ingenious  have  been  the 
inventions  of  man,  whereby  he  has  been  enabled  to  observe,  investi- 
gate, and  demonstrate,  the  works  of  Infinite  Power,  whose  harmo- 
nious and  peaceful  institutions  are  so  absorbing  and  attractive  to  the 
mind ! It  revolves  in  its  orbit  around  the  sun  once  in  eighty-four 
years ; its  distance  being  over  eighteen  hundred  millions  of  miles : 
and  it  moves  at  the  rate  of  fifteen  thousand  miles  an  hour  ! 

Such  is  Uranus  : and  its  magnificent  appendages,  being  a part  of 
its  own  composition,  they  attend  it  in  its  wonderful  revolutions  around 
the  inconceivable  Centre  of  our  Solar  System.  — And  the  harmony 
and  sublime  magnificence  that  this  planet  and  its  attendants  display, 
are  not  surpassed  by  any  other  body  yet  discovered. 

Its  atmosphere  has  a light  reddish  appearance.  Its  own  body  ap- 
pears extremely  opaque.  Its  general  manifestations  are  those  of  a 
dense  body,  having  a correspondingly  dense  atmosphere,  with  the 
color  before  mentioned ; and  it  is  characterized  by  an  inconceivable 
velocity  of  rotary  motion,  and  by  the  eccentricities  heretofore  described 
as  observed  in  the  motions  of  its  satellites.  The  real  density  of  the 
planet  is  a little  more  than  that  of  water ; and  the  constitutions  of  its 
appendages  are  correspondingly  rare. 

It  is  not  filled,  like  those  between  it  and  the  Sun,  with  life  and 
activity ; nor  has  its  surface  been  shaded  by  the  growth  of  plants  or 
trees.  No  life  of  any  kind  exists  there  ; nor  can  there,  until  further 
condensation  and  development  occur.  For  its  atmosphere  is  of  an 
igneous  and  carbonaceous  constitution,  having  one  three  hundred  and 
sixtieth  part  carbon  to  one  of  oxygen.  Still,  this  is  not  carbon  of  the 
nature  of  that  which  the  primary  formation  of  the  earth  developed, 

* The  author  here  appears  to  express  an  opinion  from  analogy  without  seeking  for 
a superior  impression.  This  may  he  explained  by  the  remark  that  it  is  contrary  to 
his  invariable  practice,  to  relieve  mental  effort  by  imparting  information  on  subjects 
accessible  to  the  mind  by  ordinary  processes.  The  same  remark  explains  the  reason 
Why  he  does  not  define  the  orbits,  diameters,  &c.,  of  the  eighth  and  ninth  planets. 


170 


nature’s  divine  revelations 


and  is  absolutely  unlike  any  element  or  gas  that  is  known  upon  the 
earth. 

It  has  no  geological  developments  further  than  the  igneous,  primary 
coating  or  crust  that  now  envelops  it.  But  according  to  the  laws  of 
progression,  reciprocation,  and  development,  condensation  of  parti- 
cles will  occur,  and  others  will  be  evolved,  and  thus  its  surface  will 
yet  become  suitable  for  the  habitation  of  plants  and  animals,  whose 
constitution  will  be  firm  and  powerful. 

Centuries  after  centuries  will  elapse  before  any  apparent  change 
can  be  visible  upon  the  surface  of  this  planet.  Generations  after 
generations  will  pass,  and  their  observations  and  explorations  will  be 
lost  and  forgotten,  and  their  thoughts  and  theories  will  be  but  little 
known,  before  mankind  shall  observe  different  appearances  in  Uranus 
and  its  appendages.  But  although  change  is  slow , it  is  inevitable. 
Even  if  it  is  not  observed  for  centuries,  this  affords  no  convincing 
proof  against  the  ceaseless  and  eternal  motion  in  Matter.  Observa- 
tion has  not  discovered  the  velocity  of  the  rotary  motion  of  this 
planet  (and  hence  it  appears  to  be  motionless ),  — for  the  reason  that  it 
moves  with  such  frightful  rapidity  and  inconceivable  force,  that  the 
human  vision  is  unable  to  distinguish  its  movements.  Such  is  the 
seventh  planet  belonging  to  the  great  Sun  of  the  Solar  System ! 

§ 18.  Many  objections  have  been  made  against  the  idea  of  uni- 
formity- and  progressive  development  in  the  formations  of  our  plan- 
etary system.  There  are  many  particulars  that  are  thought  to  be 
contradictory  of  the  truthfulness  of  the  present  theory.  The  science 
of  astronomy  has  progressed  according  to  the  improvements  made  in 
instruments  for  observation.  The  first  principles  of  this  science  were 
inductively  conceived  of  many  centuries  ago,  and  during  a period 
when  extreme  disunion  and  desolating  persecutions  were  on  the  earth. 
During  the  ages  when  man  had  lost  his  connexion  with  the  physical 
sciences,  the  knowledge  of  which  is  necessary  to  lead  him  to  a true 
understanding  of  Nature  and  his  inseparable  connexion  with  her  laws, 
— this  science,  among  others,  was  completely  concealed,  obscured, 
and  almost  annihilated,  from  the  minds  of  men.  But  since  this  time, 
there  have  been  many  important  discoveries ; and  opinions  and 
hypotheses  have  been  formed  as  corresponding  to  the  various  obser- 
vations that  have  been  made. 

Many  faint  and  imperfect  impressions  were  received  in  reference 
to  the  origin  of  the  materials  composing  the  Universe,  including  with 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


171 


them  a conception  of  the  primal  nebulous  existence  of  all  matter. 
There  were  numerous  appearances  of  Matter  in  nebulous  forms  re- 
mote from  other  bodies,  the  existence  of  which  the  most  powerful 
telescope  would  confirm.  But  according  to  the  perfection  of  these 
instruments,  have  these  nebulous  forms  been  resolved  into  stars,  or 
clusters  of  worlds.  Still,  not  being  able  to  resolve  into  stars  all  such 
forms  that  are  visible,  the  nebulous  hypothesis  remained  unmoved 
until  within  a short  period,  when  a still  more  powerful  instrument 
was  constructed,  and  which  resolves  still  more  of  these  supposed  neb- 
ulous compositions  into  apparent  stars.  And  at  this  moment  there  is 
hut  one  spot  that  remains  unresolved,  within  the  powerful  searchings 
of  this  useful  instrument. 

The  extensive  generalizations,  and  the  doctrine  of  progressive 
development  and  design,  that  are  herein  presented,  may  therefore  be 
questioned  : for  as  nebulous  appearances  become  resolved  into 
spheres,  the  confidence  in  the  above  theory  naturally  diminishes. 
And  as  the  eighth  and  seventh  planets  have  been  described,  together 
with  their  compositions  and  constituents,  it  would  be  appropriate  here 
to  mention  that  the  apparent  contradictions  which  exist  in  the  uni- 
formity of  this  plan,  may  be  explained  and  overcome  by  considering 
them  as  particulars  belonging  to  the  great  general  law  and  plan  upon 
which  the  whole  is  instituted. 

The  satellites  of  Uranus  apparently  observe  a different  direction  in 
their  orbicular  revolutions  from  that  observed  by  any  other  body  or  its 
appendages.  Also  the  planet  is  less  in  magnitude  relatively  than 
others,  according  to  the  law  of  progression.  And  its  motions, 
together  with  those  of  its  satellites,  are  in  the  above  particulars  dis- 
similar to  the  motions  observed  by  others  in  the  Solar  System.  And 
as  at  this  time  considerable  inquiry  is  being  instituted  in  reference  to 
these  apparent  anomalies  and  contradictions  ; and  as  these  particulars 
will  eventually  be  familiarly  understood,  it  is  not  absolutely  necessary 
to  discuss  them  here  ; for  they  have  no  possible  bearing  upon  the 
general , ordained  modus  operandi. 

I will  observe  that  generally  the  variations  in  the  densities  of  plan- 
ets receding  from  the  Sun,  are  uniform ; and  that  generally  their  or- 
bicular velocity  is  in  correspondence  with  the  order  and  distance  of 
each  planet  from  the  great  Centre.  Therefore  Matter  and  Motion 
being  generally  uniform  and  progressive  in  their  manifestations,  par- 
ticulars can  not  controvert  the  truthfulness  of  this  theory.  And  by 
understanding  the  universal  plan  of  the  planetary  formations,  these 


172 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


'particulars  and  apparent  contradictions  will  be  ultimately  found  tc  De 
intci'mcdiate  and  subordinate  manifestations  of  the  general  law,  and 
hence  perfectly  conformable  thereunto.  And  foreign  causes  which 
have  been  brought  to  bear  upon  this  planet,  and  not  upon  others 
within  its  comprehensive  orbit,  have  produced  these  dissimilar  mani- 
festations and  results.  And  the  effort  which  ambitious  investigators 
are  now  making,  will  result  in  the  discovery  of  these  incidental  causes, 
which,  comparatively  to  the  movements  of  the  whole  planetary  sys- 
tem, are  producing  only  incidental  effects. 

Therefore  in  questioning  the  truthfulness  of  the  foregoing  theory, 
it  is  positively  necessary  not  to  depend  upon  minute  and  detailed  ap- 
pearances ; for  such  can  not  be  taken  as  sufficient  to  counteract  a 
general  principle , which  is  demonstrated  by  universal  experience  and 
well-ascertained  truths.  Difficulties  of  this  character  must  not  be 
considered  as  interfering  with,  or  contradicting  any  general,  universal, 
and  immutable  laws  which  are  constantly  and  invariably  producing 
their  corresponding  general  effects.  And  being  aware  that  the  ulti- 
mate result  of  present  investigations  in  reference  to  Uranus  and  its 
revolving  satellites,  will  be  to  demonstrate  still  more  plainly  the  truth 
of  the  present  theory,  I find  it  not  particularly  necessary  to  make  fur- 
ther observations  upon  these  apparent  difficulties,  and  therefore  leave 
the  result  to  the  ambitious  efforts  of  astronomical  investigators. 

§ 19.  The  planet  next  developed  was  the  sixth , termed  Saturn. 
The  condensation  of  particles  existing  in  the  great  Sun  whose  circum- 
ference at  this  time  extended  to  the  orbit  of  Saturn,  and  a further 
accumulation  of  atoms  by  original  Motion  inherently  existing,  pro- 
duced this  planetary  body.  The  composition  of  this  planet  was  for 
many  ages  extremely  igneous  : still  a gradual  accumulation  of  parti- 
cles emanating  from  the  Sun,  ultimately  organized  it  with  matter  still 
more  dense  than  the  former  planet’s  composition. 

Innumerable  ages  elapsed  before  this  body  became  internally  and 
externally  condensed  by  the  chemical  action  and  evolution  of  ele- 
ments. The  constant  emanations  from  this  body  were  excessive  — 
the  cause  of  which  is  obvious.  Being  composed  of  denser  materials 
than  the  former,  and  possessing  a greater  magnitude,  its  power  of  ac- 
tion and  capacity  to  receive  particles,  were  greater  than  those  of  any 
other  planet  yet  existing.  Also  matter,  in  its  primeval  condition,  is 
incessantly  active,  conforming  to  the  law  of  universal  gravitation  ; and 
such  was  the  state  of  this  planet  primarily. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


173 


Its  igneous  composition  being  very  active,  in  receiving  particles 
suitable  for  its  association, . and  in  disengaging  the  non-associating 
parts,  the  planet’s  emanations  produced  the  nebulous  zones  or  belts 
that  now  surround  the  primary.  These  zones  (like  the  planet  itself) 
existed  for  many  ages  in  the  form  of  an  igneous  atmosphere,  at  a 
distance  from  the  primary  naturally  assumed  according  to  the  law  of 
association  and  centrifugal  force.  This  evolution  of  atmosphere  from 
Saturn  was  incidentally  influenced  by  the  existing  forces  of  the  pre- 
viously formed  planets,  and  the  Sun.  Thus  it  produced  an  active, 
agglomerated,  atmospheric  zone,  according  to  the  laws  of  mutual 
association  and  condensation.  And  the  formation  of  the  first  ring 
being  explained,  the  second  is  inferrible  as  being  a corresponding 
emanation  from  the  first , even  as  that  was  from  the  primary  ; and  it 
assumed  its  relative  distance  according  to  existing  exterior  and  inter- 
nal active  influences.  The  nebulous  rings  of  Saturn,  like  the  planet 
itself,  have  become  condensed  near  their  surface,  assuming  forms  ob- 
lately  spheroidal. 

The  centre  of  Saturn  is  still  an  igneous,  unstratified  substance,  the 
surface  having  become  chemically  condensed  by  the  escape  of  inter- 
nal heat,  and  by  the  production  of  organizing  and  vivifying  gases  : 
and  so  also  are  its  rings  existing,  their  condition  being  the  same  as 
would  have  been  produced  in  any  other  planet  by  the  same  causes 
and  under  the  same  circumstances. 

The  surfaces  of  these  rings  show  many  seemingly  uneven  portions, 
an  appearance  of  roughness  occasionally  contrasting  with  that  of 
smoothness  and  brightness.  These  appearances  are  produced  by  the 
reflection  of  its  satellites  upon  the  various  parts  of  these  belts  during 
their  revolutions,  and  by  frequent  eclipses ; also  by  their  own  situa- 
tion, which  at  times  is  very  unfavorable  for  proper  observation. 

At  this  present  moment,  those  rings  maybe  considered  as  but  just 
instituted  and  developed : and  having  been  formed  and  condensed 
from  the  different  combinations  in  which  they  have  existed,  in  previous 
ages,  they  will  ultimately  be  resolved  into  one  sphere , by  the  constant 
interchanging  of  atoms  that  is  now  going  on,  and  the  chemical  influ- 
ences that  are  at  work  universally  throughout  space.  And  thus  they 
will  associate  with  bodies  and  atoms  of  like  nature  and  will  produce 
another  planet ; while  Saturn  will  constantly,  like  other  bodies,  con- 
tinue to  produce  and  reproduce  materials  for  its  own  and  other  com- 
positions. 

But  as  the  human  organization  is  extremely  fleeting  in  comparison 


174 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


to  grosser  materials,  therefore  man  has  not  existed  long  enough  to 
observe  any  change  in  this  planet , or  in  any  other.  Centuries  after 
centuries  pass  away,  and  such  bodies  remain  to  the  vision  apparently 
unmoved.  Yet  this  very  body  is  ten  thousand  times  more  active  as 
a whole  than  the  body  of  man  ; but  man,  holding  dissimilar  relations, 
and  being  composed  of  less  durable  materials,  lives  and  sinks  into 
repose  before  an  apparent  change  takes  place  in  any  of  the  gross 
materials  existing  on  the  earth.  Hence  Saturn  will  change  ; and 
especially  its  nebulous  rings,  which  will  become  ultimately  organized 
into  globes,  according  to  the  established  law  of  ceaseless  action. 

This  planet,  being  situated  and  organized  differently  from  others, 
having  zones  which  others  have  not,  and  possessing  a greater  num- 
ber of  satellites  than  any  other  planet  belonging  to  the  solar  system, 
has  long  been  the  cause  of  much  wonder  and  admiration  among  sci- 
entific observers.  Its  diameter  being  about  seventy-nine  thousand 
miles,  greatly  exceeds  that  of  the  former  planet ; and  this  dissimi- 
larity has  produced  contention  against  the  law  of  uniformity  in  gen- 
eral development.  Its  distance  from  the  sun  is  more  than  nine  hun- 
dred millions  of  miles.  It  revolves  upon  its  axis  in  a little  less  than 
ten  hours  and  a half.  And  the  period  of  time  occupied  in  one  of 
its  revolutions  around  the  sun,  is  about  thirty  years.  The  inclina- 
tion of  its  orbit  to  the  ecliptic  is  about  two  and  a half  degrees ; and 
its  axis  also  inclines  to  the , plane  of  its  orbit.  This  inclination 
causes  the  light  of  the  sun  to  strike  it  vertically  for  several  degrees 
either  way  from  its  equator ; at  which  place  it  enjoys  twenty-five 
thousand  days  and  nights  in  one  of  its  years  ; while  at  the  poles, 
there  is  but  one  of  each.  It  revolves  with  the  enormous  velocity  of 
twenty-two  thousand  miles  an  hour ! 

The  breadth  of  the  first  ring  from  the  primary,  is  twenty  thousand 
miles.  A space  occurs  between  it  and  the  outer,  of  three  thousand 
miles.  The  breadth  of  the  outer  is  seven  thousand  miles  ; and  its 
diameter  is  two  hundred  thousand  miles.  Being  nearly  of  the  same 
density  of  Saturn,  the  rings  revolve  also  in  about  ten  hours  and 
a half. 

The  space  existing  between  the  outer  ring  and  the  first  satellite, 
is  twenty-nine  thousand  miles.  The  distance  from  the  primary  to 
its  first  satellite  is  over  one  hundred  and  seven  thousand  miles.  And 
the  mean  distance  from  the  outer  satellite  to  its  primary,  is  over  two 
millions  of  miles.  And  the  five  satellites  intermediately  existing, 
observe  relative  distances  and  situations  from  each  other,  according 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


176 


to  their  respective  densities  and  diameters,  and  therefore  may  be  con- 
sidered as  sustaining  positions  according  to  the  order  observed  by 
their  primary’s  development. 

Thus  the  computations  that  have  been  made  in  reference  to  Saturn 
and  its  appendages,  only  add  stronger  proof  of  the  law  of  uniformity 
and  progressive  development,  in  all  bodies  belonging  to  the  Solar 
System.  For  first,  the  planet’s  diameter,  velocity  of  motion,  and 
period  of  revolution,  are  in  exact  accordance  with  this  law,  as  might 
be  expected  from  its  density  and  comparative  distance  from  the  Sun. 
Secondly,  the  first  ring  sustains  a distance  from  the  primary  corre- 
sponding to  its  magnitude  and  density : and  the  second  ring  holds  a 
close  relation  with  the  first,  but  only  in  accordance  with  its  specific 
qualities  and  relative  magnitude.  And  the  diameter  of  the  whole 
evidently  comprehends  four  fifths  of  the  original  size  of  the  primary, 
or  its  size  previous  to  such  annular  developments,  considering  that 
its  satellites  were  developed  a long  period  before  those  rings.  And 
the  rings  now  existing  afford  proof  of  this,  and  also  of  the  source  of 
the  materials  composing  them,  seeing  that  their  revolutions  corre- 
spond (almost)  precisely  to  that  of  Saturn.  Thirdly,  the  mean  dis- 
tance occurring  between  Saturn  and  its  first  satellite,  and  the  outer 
ring  and  the  same,  demonstrates  more  evidently  the  relation  and  con- 
nexion that  this  satellite  sustains  to  its  productor  and  its  rings. 

And  the  specific  position,  distance,  and  magnitude  of  each  satel- 
lite, from  the  first  to  the  most  remote,  show  a beautiful  order  and 
harmony  of  arrangement.  And  the  density,  magnitude,  and  velocity 
of  the  outer  satellite,  with  its  orbitual  inclination  and  rotary  motion, 
harmonize  precisely  with  the  primary.  It  holds  its  relations  in  a 
minute  and  specific  manner,  yet  in  all  these  it  corresponds  to  the 
magnitude  and  all  the  motions  of  the  primary.  For  the  revolution 
of  the  outer  sphere,  and  its  density,  magnitude,  and  situation,  bear 
the  same  relation  to  each  other  as  do  the  same  things  in  Saturn 
itself — the  same  established  causes  operating  on  each  body  according 
to  its  relation  to  its  primary. 

Therefore  Saturn,  its  rings  and  satellites,  present  one  system  of 
progressive  development,  when  considered  in  a general  point  of  view, 
But  incidental  causes,  producing  like  effects,,  tend  in  some  degree  to 
present  an  appearance  contrary  to  the  uniformity  of  the  whole.  But 
on  investigating  the  universal  motions  and  developments  of  this  planet, 
the  thought  of  such  irregularities  will  at  once  be  banished  from  the 
mind. 


176 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


Human  conceptions  of  order  are  founded  upon  the  supposed 
reality  of  apparent  confusion;  and  when  apparent  confusion  and 
irregularities  are  observed,  the  mind  instantly  conceives  of  their  op- 
posite order.  Hence  if  confusion  were  not  apparent,  the  word  order 
would  be  widiout  meaning.  But  where  order  universally  exists,  and 
confusion  is  temporarily  and  minutely  apparent  to  the  mind,  there  the 
general  conception  of  order,  would  be  evidently  correct ; as  it  would 
be  derived  from  contrasting  the  order  of  a general,  with  the  disorder 
of  an  incidental  character.  Therefore  if  order  is  apparently  univer- 
sal, this  at  once  establishes  the  doctrine  of  uniformity  ; and  all  par- 
ricidal• and  apparent  confusion  must  be  referred  to  incidental  and 
local  causes.  But  the  great  Whole  being  correctly  comprehended, 
presents  a system  of  undisturbed  order  and  harmony ! 

Thus  I leave  this  most  wonderful  planet  to  the  discussion  of 
researchers  and  mathematical  observers,  and  commence  revealing 
the  most  wonderful  developments  that  it  has  produced.  And  a 
proper  conception  of  truths  and  facts  as  pertaining  to  this,  earth, 
will  by  analogy,  carry  an  inference  favorable  to  the  truthfulness  of 
the  present  revealment  in  reference  to  this  heavenly  body. 

^ 20.  The  geography  of  this  planet  is  very  beautiful,  it  being 
divided  into  two  thirds  water  and  one  third  earth.  And  being 
entirely  free  from  all  volcanic  and  catastrophic  occurrences,  it  pre- 
sents an  even  and  undisturbed  surface.  There  are  but  few  promi- 
nences, and  these  are  near  the  poles ; the  equator  being  perfectly 
free  from  these,  with  the  exception  of  a few  promontories,  connect- 
ing themselves  with  still  higher  land,  whose  dividing  chasm  forms 
the  bed  of  a very  extensive  body  of  water.  These  prominences 
were  formed  by  the  natural  developments  of  the  materials  in  motion 
during  the  planet’s  primary  and  subsequent  conditions. 

Concerning  the  vegetable  and  organic  formations  of  this  planet, 
much  might  be  said  in  an  abstract  dissertation.  Still,  the  strict  his- 
tory of  these  creations  could  not  possibly  be  given  minutely  ; and 
even  if  this  were  possible,  it  would  not  be  useful. 

Organic  beings  inha*bitcd  this  planet  many  thousand  years  before 
this  earth  had  an  existence.  Therefore,  according  to  the  law  of 
progressive  refinement,  the  organic  kingdoms  of  this  planet  have 
attained  to  a high  degree  of  perfection. 

There  are  four  general  classes  of  vegetable  developments  here 
existing.  One  class  assumes  high  and  bulky  forms,  but  it  is  pro- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


177 


duced  only  near  the  poles,  where  exist  the  minimum  amount  oflight 
and  heat.  These  do  not  exist  near  the  equator,  nor  in  the  vicinity 
of  water.  They  are  gigantic  vegetable  developments  in  the  form  of 
trees  ; but  the  kinds  of  materials  composing  them  are  not  to  be  found 
in  any  higher  order  of  vegetable  formation. 

The  second  class  has  a smooth,  slim  body,  and  the  branches  in 
length  are  twice  that  of  the  body;  and  they  cast  a deep  shade. 
They  are  in  appearance  similar  to  the  Upas , but  not  in  quality  or 
composition.  These  bring  forth  delicious  fruit,  which  is  long  in 
shape,  internally  white,  and  encompassed  with  a thick,  external 
coating.  The  branches  that  first  eject  themselves  from  the  body  are 
several  feet  from  the  earth,  but  not  quite  so  high  as  it  is  from  these  to 
the  top.  This  class  should  be  understood  as  the  second  in  the  order 
of  formation  — as  the  ultimate  and  perfection  of  the  former  class. 

The  third  in  order  presents  itself  as  a more  perfect  vegetable. 
This  rises  but  a few  feet  above  the  surface  of  the  ground.  It  has 
several  descending  boughs,  which  when  developed  act  as  new  bodies 
by  fastening  themselves  as  roots  in  the  earth.  This  vegetable  is 
much  complicated  in  its  parts.  Its  location  is  near  the  equator,  and 
to  this  fact  its  peculiarity  may  be  attributed.  This  brings  forth  a 
kind  of  pulse-fruit.  Being  exceedingly  nourishing,  it  enters  very 
frequently  into  the  composition  of  animal  forms. 

The  fourth  vegetable  formation  is  the  last  developed  and  most  per- 
fect. Being  a succeeding  development  of  all  beneath  it,  its  compo- 
sition is  much  more  perfect  than  that  of  others.  Therefore  it  stands 
as  an  ultimate  of  the  vegetable  kingdom,  comprehending  the  essences 
of  all  below  its  high  order  of  being.  Its  roots  and  trunk  are  very 
long  and  slender,  and  it  develops  from  the  bottom  of  the  trunk  to  the 
shooting  forth  of  the  branches,  codices  corresponding  to  the  petals  of 
the  bud  and  its  fruit.  It  is  not  high,  but  growrs  with  exceeding 
spontaneity  ; and  it  is  fitted  for  the  uses  of  the  animal  economy.  It 
is  produced  in  one  half  of  one  of  the  years,  at  the  equator — repro- 
duced twice  in  one  of  this  planet’s  years.  And  this  is  the  most 
useful  vegetable  upon  the  surface  of  Saturn. 

There  are  intermediate  formations,  from  the  lowest  to  the  highest, 
in  the  vegetable  kingdom.  But  it  would  be  impossible  to  classify 
these  intermediate  species  ; and  the  four  generalizations  give  a distinct 
conception  of  the  vegetable  developments  of  this  planet ; the  object 
being  only  to  establish  progressive  succession.  And  this  being  founded 
in  natural  and  invariable  laws,  analogy  confirms  this  revealment. 

12 


178 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


There  are  five  general  classes  of  animal  existences  on  this  planet. 
Tolygastric  monads  are  existing  in  various  forms,  from  the  articulata 
to  the  vcrtebrata.  There  is  not  existing  any  particular  species  of 
semi-vertebrated  animals.  There  are  but  few  articulated ; but  the 
general  animal  existences  of  this  planet  are  entirely  vertebrated. 
Reptiles,  saurians,  &c.,  do  not  exist  upon  its  surface,  the  cause  of 
which  is  that  the  materials  composing  this  body  are  of  too  high  and 
rare  a nature  to  enter  into  the  composition  of  any  gross  forms  or 
organizations. 

The  first  of  the  five  classes,  therefore,  is  of  a well-organized  form, 
having  very  fine  vascular  and  muscular  tissues.  This  animal,  being 
one  of  the  general  classes,  requires  a brief  description.  It  is  very 
large  and  very  strong,  having  joints  only  in  its  hind  legs.  Its  fore 
legs,  being  composed  of  a very  strong  muscular  and  osseous  sub- 
stance, are  elastic  and  pliable  when  occasion  requires,  but  exceed- 
ingly strong  and  immovable  whenever  operated  upon  by  its  positive 
will.  Its  length  is  proportionate  to  its  height.  Being  an  animal  of 
exceeding  power,  it  is  the  most  useful  of  any  others  to  its  governors. 
Its  eyes  are  small ; its  ears  are  narrow  and  short ; its  head  is  wide 
and  high  ; its  proboscis  and  mouth  are  closely  connected,  the  former 
serving  as  a nasal  organ  and  a useful  instrument  for  drinking,  and 
transferring  to  the  mouth  the  long,  hard-shelled  fruit  that  exists  upon 
the  complex  vegetable  form  which  has  been  described.  Its  disposi- 
tion is  firm,  and  yet  it  is  submissive.  It  has  exterior  developments 
corresponding  to  its  disposition  and  natural  attachments.  Its  head 
being  wide,  gives  it  an  inclination  for  self-protection  and  preserva- 
tion, insomuch  that  it  constructs  large  caves  and  places  of  conceal- 
ment in  which  it  resides  during  the  long  night  that  is  experienced  at 
the  pole.  And  during  the  long  day  that  is  also  experienced  at  the 
same  location,  it  leaves  its  place  of  repose  and  perigrinates  near  the 
shores  of  the  water,  and  to  places  where  grows  more  luxuriantly  the 
fruit  upon  which  it  subsists.  * 

The  second  in  order,  is  an  animal  of  much  less  complicated  forma- 
tion. Its  form  is  not  so  graceful  and  pleasing  as  the  former,  but  its 
composition  is  a degree  more  perfect.  It  consociates  with  the  former 
animal,  exists  in  the  same  region,  but  is  extremely  amphibious, 

•The  speaker  here  remarked  that  this  and  other  animals  were  designated  by  the 
inhabitants  of  this  planet  by  particular  sounds ; but  as  it  would  be  difficult,  as  well 
as  useless,  to  represent  these  sounds  to  an  inhabitant  of  the  earth,  he  would  not  make 
the  attempt. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


179 


insomuch  that  in  this  particular  point  it  is  very  dissimilar  to  the  other. 
Its  disposition  is  of  an  irritable  and  excitable  nature.  Its  muscular 
and  vascular  system  being  very  active,  causes  a great  amount  of  ner- 
vous activity  and  irritability.  This  is  caused  by  its  peculiar  shape, 
and  the  circumstances  under  which  it  exists.  In  form , it  typifies 
Saurian  species — but  in  this  particular  only. 

The  third  in  order,  is  composed  of  still  finer  materials,  and  its 
power  and  celerity  of  muscular  motion  are  not  equalled  by  any  other 
species  existing.  It  has  four  legs  or  extremities ; the  hinder  ones 
representing  slightly  the  human  foot,  and  the  foremost  typifying  the 
limbs  of  the  seal.  Still  these  are  perfectly  adapted  to  the  situation  in 
which  the  animal  exists.  Its  flesh  is  very  tender  in  comparison  to 
that  of  the  former,  and  its  skin  would  be  impenetrable  by  any  instru- 
ments that  are  on  earth  known.  It  is  of  an  osseous  structure,  com- 
posed chiefly  of  the  harder  materials  of  its  bone,  forming  a surface 
like  a complex  network  of  scales ; and  it  is  therefore  impenetrable, 
from  its  smooth  and  elastic  surface.  Its  length  and  height  corre- 
spond to  those  of  an  animal  that  previously  existed  upon  this  globe 
yet  its  disposition  and  phrenic  attributes  are  very  dissimilar  to  this 
species.  Having  great  strength,  it  moves  with  great  rapidity.  Though 
master,  by  its  subduing  power,  over  all  below  its  degree  of  being,  it 
still  manifests  no  disturbing,  destructive,  or  antagonistic  disposition. 
Having  peculiar  associations,  its  nature  corresponds  thereunto.  Its 
main  feature  is  a repulsive  and  tyrannical  appearance,  the  real  indi- 
cation of  which  is  firmness,  power,  and  activity. 

The  fourth  in  order,  is  a form  slightly  typical  of  the  natural  man. 
Its  composition  being  a progression  of  all  below  it,  it  exists  as  a dis- 
tinct species,  occupying  the  station  becoming  its  dignity  and  superior 
nature.  It  has  four  limbs,  two  of  which  serve  as  organs  of  motion 
and  navigation,  and  the  others  are  rather  arms  than  limbs  like  the 
former.  It  is  more  highly  vertebrated,  and  has  greater  elasticity  of 
muscles,  than  those  below  it.  Its  body  is  rather  wide,  and  not  per- 
fectly round.  The  sacral  bone  and  hips  being  much  distended,  gives 
it  great  strength  and  muscular  power.  Its  shoulders  being  high,  and 
its  neck  corresponding,  give  it  great  elasticity  in  the  movements  of  its 
trunk. 

Its  mental  organization  nearly  represents  that  of  the  human  being, 
with  the  exception  that  its  knowledge  and  power  of  exterior  under  ■ 

* The  lecturer  incidentally  remarked  that  the  animal  referred  to  was  the  Iguanodon, 
which  this  animal  nearly  resembles  in  species. 


ISO 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


standing,  surpasses  that  of  man  existing  on  the  earth  ! Its  head  being 
round  and  long,  still  bearing  the  general  shape  of  the  human  head, 
gives  it  a more  extensive  scope  of  mental  comprehension  than  man 
on  earth  possesses.  Its  general  disposition  is  characterized  by  strong 
attachments  and  social  desires.  It  has  great  power  of  concentration  ; 
and  its  sense  of  what  is  naturally  right  and  just,  is  very  prominent. 
Its  head  being  not  very  high  in  proportion  to  its  size,  causes  an  ab- 
sence of  veneration  for  the  invisible;  but  it  venerates  things  and 
truths  well  known  and  well  attested  by  the  evidence  of  its  senses. 
Hence  it  deduces  its  convictions  from  all  it  sees,  and  venerates 
according  to  the  nature  of  the  deductions  or  visible  truths  presented. 
It  has  a strong  passion  for  mirth  and  pleasurable  emotions,  insomuch 
that  its  communications  are  more  subtle  at  times  when  this  desire 
has  been  excited,  than  any  communications  of  man.  It  has  a power- 
fully retentive  memory  or  susceptibility  of  repetitions  of  previous  im- 
pressions. It  has  strong  intellectual  faculties,  insomuch  that  it 
governs  other  beings  below  it  by  its  mechanical  ingenuity.  It  is,  in 
general  terms,  a most  perfect  animal-intellectual  being. 

But  its  mental  and  physical  organizations  are  so  constructed  that 
the  individualization  of  the  inner  life  could  not  occur;  and  its  natural 
and  exterior  experience  are  but  instinct  to  man  there  existing.  And 
the  intuition  and  powers  of  perception  with  which  it  is  endowed,  are 
no  more  to  the  sweeping  intellect  of  the  human  inhabitants  of  that 
planet,  than  is  the  knowledge  of  the  orang-outang  on  this  earth  exist- 
ing, to  Man,  who  is  governor  of  all  below  his  exalted  state  of  organi- 
zation ! 


§ 21.  The  following  class  in  order,  of  animal  organization,  is  the 
ultimate  of  this  planet,  and  the  perfection  of  all  below  it ; and  this 
class  is  Man.  His  form  is  perfected  in  its  developments  and  adapta- 
tions to  its  uses.  His  limbs  are  very  straight  and  round.  His  joints 
and  their  appendages  are  composed  of  fine  materials,  and  display  in 
their  perfect  adaptation,  original  design.  The  body  is  of  perfect  form, 
and  is  characterized  by  a symmetry  unequalled  in  any  other  being 
there  existing.  The  sternum  is  oval  and  full,  joining  the  costals  with 
a kind  of  bracework,  which  gives  full  space  and  free  action  to  the 
viscera  system.  The  lungs,  which  are  divided  into  two  hemispheres, 
are  composed  of  an  adipose  and  elastic,  active  substance.  The  heart 
has  also  two  divisions,  and  observes  movements  which  correspond 
with  those  of  the  lungs.  The  ganglionic  system  is  very  freely  dis- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


181 


seminated  throughout  every  part  of  the  body,  almost  giving  imper- 
ceptible motion  to  the  motar  nerves  of  the  organs. 

The  head  corresponds  in  its  perfection  to  the  body.  The  cranium 
not  being  composed  of  a heavy,  thick  substance,  gives  great  activity 
to  the  senses  in  respect  to  external  objects.  The  cerebrum  is  very 
large  and  full ; and  the  cerebellum  and  its  divisions  are  still  larger. 
The  restiform,  medulla  oblongata,  and  medulla  spinalis,  are  composed 
of  substances  so  sensitive  (corresponding  to  the  substance  of  the  brain), 
that  the  whole  forms  a perfect  system  of  motion  and  sensation.  The 
brain  being  excessively  active,  sends  throughout  the  nervous  system 
a refined  ether  of  sensation.  The  brain  is  composed  of  innumerable 
cortical  glands,  each  of  which  attracts  and  repels,  performing  systolic 
and  diastolic  motions.  These  cortical  glands  are  the  reservoirs  from 
which  proceed  the  fibres  and  nerves  of  sensation ; for  these  glands 
conceive  and  produce  them.  Thus  the  nerves  of  sensation  are  con- 
nected with  the  corcula  of  the  brain,  as  the  arteries  and  veins  are 
connected  with  the  ventricles  of  the  heart.  Therefore  contraction 
and  expansion  of  these  cortical  glands  produce  the  involuntary  mo- 
tions of  the  system  ; while  by  the  same  forces,  the  heart  presses  the 
blood  throughout  the  body.  The  motions  of  the  Jungs  and  heart  are 
very  powerful.  The  motion  of  the  brain  corresponds  to  that  of  these 
organs,  and  the  motion  of  the  whole  corresponds  to  the  gigantic 
strength  of  the  body. 

The  form  of  the  system  has  great  beauty.  The  surface,  corre- 
sponding to  the  materials  composing  the  whole  system,  is  very  fine, 
and  almost  transparent.  The  main  motions  of  the  system  correspond 
to  those  of  the  human  body  upon  this  planet,  with  the  exception  that 
they  are  characterized  by  more  precision,  and  are  governed  by  more 
decided  judgment,  which  also  controls  their  actions  universally.  Their 
organization  is  of  the  most  perfect  kind,  both  mental  and  physical ; 
and  their  intellect  being  expansive  and  powerful,  judgment  controls 
them  entirely,  insomuch  that  weakness  and  disease  are  not  existing 
among  them. 

The  prominent  qualities  of  the  mind  are  of  a moral  and  intellectual 
nature.  They  have  strong  social  attachments,  but  these  are  governed 
strictly  by  a well-organized  intellect.  Their  force  of  character  is  ex- 
tremely great,  this  also  being  under  the  guidance  of  well-directed 
reason.  They  are  firm  in  will,  generally  submissive,  and  are  free 
from  all  superfluous  dispositions.  Veneration  in  them  is  very  deep 
and  impressive.  Nothing,  however,  is  revered  but  that  w’hich  the 


182 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


judgment  responds  to  as  being  true.  Their  causality  is  not  so  fully 
developed  as  comparison  or  the  power  of  analogical  reasoning.  Per- 
ception is  extremely  vivid  and  penetrating. 

Their  heads  are  very  high  and  long.  Power  of  generalization  and 
synthetical  investigation,  is  in  them  almost  unbounded.  They  reason 
from  the  infernal — receiving  truth  through  the  highly-sanctioned  con- 
victions of  their  interior  principles.  Their  physical  organization 
being  so  perfect,  admits  their  principles  or  beginning  causes*  to 
extend  throughout  the  body,  and  makes  them  very  susceptible  to 
impressions. 

They  are  governed  strictly  by  the  laws  of  their  nature.  Sensation 
exists,  and  the  laws  and  uses  of  this  they  understand.  From  sensa- 
tion arise  inclinations.  Sensation  being  a law  of  the  organization, 
exists  upon  the  fibres  and  nervous  system  with  them,  the  same  as 
with  man  on  earth.  The  inclinations  which  it  produces  are  either 
attractive  or  repulsive,  and  they  are  governed  in  respect  to  such 
strictly  by  the  interior  impressions  received  concerning  them. 

They  reason  inductively:  and  from  effects  and  forms  external, 
they  induce  an  original  principle,  and  then  reason  from  principles  to 
their  effects.  Subjects  are  thus  comprehended  by  one  grasp  of  their 
mighty  intellects. 

With  a telescopic  mind  they  familiarize  themselves  with  earths  ex- 
isting between  them  and  the  Sun,  and  also  with  the  inhabitants  upon 
them  existing.  They  contemplate  the  planets  of  space  with  no  more 
curiosity  than  we  do  those  of  the  Solar  System.  Their  minds  being 
free  from  imperfection — from  all  that  is  opposed  to  righteousness,  they 
associate  with  that  which  is  pure  and  good.  They  connect  their  minds 
with  first  principles,  and  with  the  internal  of  all  things.  Their  minds 
are  endowed  with  powers  so  penetrating  that  they  perceive  all  things 
in  a general  light,  and  as  being^good.  They  are  unlike  the  class 
mentioned  before  them,  tvhich  reason  from  externals  only;  which 
deduce  from  things  seen  their  knowledge  and  judgment,  knowing 
nothing  of  the  internal,  and  receiving  no  response  from  the  influx  of 
interior  principles.  But  man,  as  superior  to  these,  has  knowledge 
derived  from  internal  experience  and  consciousness,  and  from  this 
only.  They  follow  inclinations,  if  they  are  approbated  by  their  inte- 
riors ; but  if  they  are  disapproved,  they  repel  them  by  the  exercise  of 
a superior  judgment : and  thus  they  are  free  from  violation  and  disease. 

* That  is,  the  interior  essence  of  man  as  the  prior  cause  of  the  exterior  form,  with 
all  its  manifestations. 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


183 


The  perfection  of  their  internal  principle  far  exceeds  that  of  any 
class  of  human  beings  in  our  Solar  System.  They  associate  with 
the  knowledge  of  the  second  Sphere  ! They  receive  no  impressions 
but  those  which  flow  from  internal  realities.  They  are  physically, 
mentally,  and  morally  perfected. 

They  inhabit  buildings  of  an  ingenious  and  peculiar  structure, 
■which  are  also  beautiful  and  convenient.  These  are  very  large  and 
extensive,  covering  immense  areas  of  land,  like  an  extensive  city 
among  us.  There  are,  however,  but  few  of  these  large  and  united 
buildings  upon  the  surface  of  the  planet,  these  being  near  the  equa- 
tor, where  light  and  heat,  which  correspond  to  interior  truth  and  love, 
are  most  perfectly  enjoyed. 

They  form  associations  according  to  internal  desire.  They  are 
not  governed  by  the  inclinations  of  the  natural  man,  and  therefore 
take  unto  themselves  mates  according  to  mutual  inward  approbation, 
and  thus  they  are  united  in  the  bonds  of  spiritual  happiness  and 
peace.  There  is  no  repulsion  ever  existing  between  associated 
mates,  because  love  and  purity  abide  with  them  universally. 

Their  minds  are  sufficiently  expansive  to  comprehend  at  a single 
glance,  the  whole  surface  of  their  country.  Hence  they  are  con- 
scious of  the  movements  of  the  whole  nation.  All  are  united  as  one 
brotherhood,  harmonizing  in  all  their  interests,  though  existing  in 
different  locations  on  the  planet.  Undisturbed  connexion  exists 
between  nation  and  nation  ; and  that  which  constitutes  the  interest  of 
one,  constitutes  the  undivided  interest  and  peace  of  the  whole  race. 
This  is  perceived  by  internal  reasoning ; and  this  state  of  things  is 
sustained  by  the  approval  of  their  interior  principles.  Such  are  the 
inhabitants  of  Saturn ; and  thus  are  purity  and  goodness  manifested 
as  the  result  of  their  perfected  knowledge  and  highly  unfolded 
mental  powers. 

It  is  only  by  means  of  the  five  generalizations  made  upon  the  ani- 
mals of  Saturn,  that  these  could  be  understood  ; because  there  are 
existing  innumerable  species  of  animals  on  this  planet.  The  ani- 
mals inferior  to  man  are  in  nature  rodentia , with  the  exception  of  the 
fast,  which  is  ruminating  in  its  habits.  Millions  of  intermediate 
beings  exist,  and  have  existed,  between  these  general  classes.  But 
by  arranging  them  into  the  order  of  progressive  ascension  from  the 
lowest  to  the  highest,  each  assuming  a form  according  to  its  approx- 


184 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


imation  to  man,  the  mind  obtains  a general  conception  of  the  animal 
productions  of  this  planet. 

§ 22.  The  next  planet  evolved  from  the  Sun  was  the  fifth  in  the 
Solar  System,  and  is  named  Jupiter.  The  Sun  at  this  time,  inclu- 
ding its  atmospheric  emanation,  extended  to  the  orbit  observed  by 
Jupiter  in  its  revolution.  By  virtue  of  inherent,  and  active  energies 
still  existing  in  the  igneous  composition  of  the  Sun,  — and  of  the 
powerful  motions  which  it  and  every  particle  that  composed  it  had, 
the  fifth  planet  was  called  into  existence  according  to  laws  originally 
and  eternally  established. 

Laws  and  motions  as  heretofore  explained,  will  be  viewed  in  a 
general  light  by  observers  and  investigators  who  are  searching  for  the 
causes  or  living  principles  which  govern  all  matter.  Therefore,  un- 
derstanding the  motions  that  produced  former  formations,  nothing 
needs  here  to  be  added  in  reference  to  the  same  law,  as  producing 
this  planet.  By  a constant  association  and  agglomeration  of  atoms 
and  particles  repulsed  from  the  great  Mass,  and  seeking  association 
among  the  combinations  that  had  been  thus  formed,  the  accumula- 
tion at  length  became  qualified  to  assume  specific  motions,  and  a 
spherical  form,  the  magnitude  of  which,  including  its  atmospheric 
emanations,  extended  to  the  orbit  of  its  farthest  satellite. 

Such  was  the  original  condition  of  Jupiter.  According  to  the 
laws  of  evaporation,  gravitation,  and  consolidation,  the  planet  gradu- 
ally assumed  the  form  and  bulk  which  it  now  has.  Particles  perpet- 
ually emanating  from  this,  became  associated  in  other  and  smaller 
combinations,  and  condensation  of  these  produced  its  satellites  ; each 
of  which  sustained  a position  corresponding  to  its  relation  to  the 
planet  and  to  the  other  satellites,  and  according  to  its  magnitude  and 
density. 

The  materials  composing  Jupiter  and  its  satellites  were  more  dense 
than  former  planetary  productions.  The  materials  composing  the 
Sun  had  become  condensed  according  to  the  number  of  planets 
which  had  been  evolved  from  its  original  composition.  Therefore 
this  planet’s  materials  were  denser  than  the  former,  as  corresponding 
to  the  increased  density  of  the  materials  of  the  Sun.  The  whole 
was  an  agglomeration  of  igneous  atoms : but  following  the  laws  ori- 
ginally instituted,  it  became  gradually  consolidated.  Still,  innumer- 
able ages  elapsed  before  the  present  condition  was  attained. 

The  present  density  of  this  planet  is  one  and  a quarter  to  that  of 


nature’s  divine  revelations.  185 

water,  showing  an  increase  of  density  from  the  other  planets.  Its 
distance  from  the  Sun  is  at  this  time  four  hundred  and  ninety  mil- 
lions of  miles.  Its  diameter  is  eighty-nine  thousand  miles.  It  ie- 
volves  upon  its  axis  once  in  nearly  ten  hours,  and  around  the  great 
Sun,  in  nearly  twelve  years.  It  travels  therefore  with  great  velocity. 
The  nearer  planets  approach  the  great  Centre  from  which  they  ema- 
nated, the  greater  is  the  velocity  of  their  motion  in  their  orbits. 

The  inclination  of  its  orbit  to  the  plane  of  the  ecliptic  is  very  im- 
perceptible. In  consequence  of  its  unimaginable  velocity  of  rotary 
motion,  it  is  somewhat  flattened  at  its  poles  and  full  at  its  equator. 
Owing  to  the  inclination  of  its  axis  to  the  plane  of  its  orbit  being 
very  slight,  the  sun  strikes  it  vertically  unceasingly  at  its  equator,  at 
which  place  there  is  but  little  variety  in  the  seasons  or  changes  in  the 
length  of  its  days  and  nights. 

This  planet  having  four  satellites  which  are  three  less  than  the 
number  of  Saturn’s,  possesses  as  a consequence  greater  bulk  and 
magnitude.  It  is  fourteen  hundred  times  greater  in  bulk  than  the 
earth,  and  contains  nearly  three  hundred  times  the  amount  of  matter. 

This  planet  also,  being  the  largest  in  our  solar  system,  would  seem 
at  a superficial  view  to  refute  the  doctrine  of  uniformity  and  pro 
gression.  The  causes  which  were  brought  to  operate  upon  the  accu- 
mulation of  particles  composing  this  planet,  were  very  dissimilar  to 
those  that  acted  upon  Saturn.  There  was  a tendency  of  associated 
particles  to  adhere  more  closely  in  this  planet  than  in  the  former, 
because  they  possessed  greater  density  and  stronger  mutual  affinities. 
If  this  had  not  been  so,  particles  would  have  emanated  from  the  mass 
to  produce  another  satellite.  But  this  cause,  together  with  the  con- 
joined forces  that  existed  in  the  Sun  and  the  other  planets,  prevented 
the  farther  development  of  its  particles.  These  were  incidental 
causes,  and  acted  upon  the  body  merely  because  it  was  placed  under 
different  circumstances  from  those  attending  any  other  planet  before 
or  since  created.  In  all  its  general  conditions  it  manifests  a general 
uniformity  wdth  all  other  planetary  developments : but  in  this  and 
one  other  particular,  it  apparently  contradicts  the  great  law  estab- 
lished. Yet  understanding  that  all  such  discrepancies  owe  their  ex- 
istence to  foreign  and  incidental  causes  (these  being  mere  negations 
of  the  great  general  and  eternal  law),  they  may  properly  be  consid- 
ered as  not  refuting,  but  as  i absolutely  confirming  the  original  and 
universal  principles  and  forces  as  emanating  from  the  great  Vortex  or 
throne  of  infinite  Bower. 


1S6 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


The  mean  distance  of  the  first  satellite  from  the  primary  is  two 
hundred  and  sixty-six  thousand  miles ; and  its  period  of  revolution 
is  one  day  and  eighteen  hours.  This  body  is  more  dense  than  the 
succeeding  ones ; therefore  it  sustains  a position  nearest  to  its 
primary. 

The  second  satellite  exists  four  hundred  and  twenty  thousand 
miles  from  its  primary.  Its  period  of  revolution  is  three  days  and 
a half:  presenting  an  increase  of  distance,  period,  and  rarity  of 
particles. 

The  third  satellite  is  supposed  to  he  the  largest  one  belonging  to 
this  planet.  This  supposition  is  founded  upon  the  observations 
made  by  its  discoverer,  whose  instrument  was  not  so  much  perfected 
as  those  which  are  now  in  use.  It  is  the  largest  satellite,  but  the 
calculations  in  reference  to  its  magnitude  will  hereafter  be  found  to 
be  incorrect.  The  mean  distance  of  this  satellite  from  its  primary  is 
six  Hundred  and  seventy  thousand  miles ; and  its  period  of  revolu- 
tion is  seven  days.  And  here  again  is  seen  a perpetual  ascension  of 
accumulated  particles,  in  distance,  rotation,  and  rarity. 

The  fourth  and  last  satellite  is  over  one  million  of  miles  from  its 
productor,  and  revolves  in  sixteen  days  and  a half.  * 

Steadily  therefore  is  demonstrated  the  great  truth  of  uniform  ascen- 
sion from  the  lowest  to  the  highest ; the  highest  being  the  ultimate  of 
the  lowest,  and  each  particle  sustaining  a position  according  to  its  spe- 
cific quality  and  magnitude,  — their  mutual  association  being  called 
gravitation. 

Thus  was  produced,  and  thus  exists,  the  fifth  Planet  and  its  appen- 
dages, as  evolved  from  the  immense  Sun  which  is  yet  an  inexhausti- 
ble source  of  heat  and  light  to  the  evanescent  forms  that  exist  upon 
its  planets’  surfaces.  And  had  the  same  circumstances  been  existing 
in  respect  to  this  planet,  as  were  in  respect  to  Saturn  and  its  off- 
spring, the  same  effect  and  form  would  have  been  manifested.  But 
as  these  circumstances  were  incidental  as  connected  with  the  former 
planet,  so  were  those  also  which  determined  the  peculiarities  of  the 
latter.  The  modifying  influences  acting  upon  them  being  exceedingly 
dissimilar  (which  dissimilarity  is  always  a characteristic  of  that  which 
is  not  general  and  to  be  depended  upon),  these  caused  a corre- 
sponding difference  in  the  developments  of  these  planets. 

• In  speaking  of  the  distances,  magnitudes,  periods,  &c.,  of  the  planets  and  their 
satellites,  the  author  merely  uses  proximate  numbers,  without  descending  to  numerical 
niceties.  * 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


187 


Thus  the  generalization  of  this  planet,  in  respect  to  its  magnitude, 
density,  motions,  and  appendages,  leads  to  further  confirmation  of 
the  established  principle  of  uniformity  and  harmony,  throughout  the 
realms  of  undefinable  space.  And  what  has  been  said  respecting 
other  planets,  being  in  accordance  with  w'ell-attested  and  admitted 
truths,  precludes  the  necessity  of  further  discussion  to  prove  the  un- 
deniable fact  of  this  planet’s  relation  to  those  that  were  previously 
developed. 

Leaving,  therefore,  intermediate  considerations  for  the  work  of  sci- 
entific researches  (which  considerations  can  not  have  any  possible 
bearing  upon  the  main  'principles  established),  I commence  giving  a 
general  description  of  the  vegetable  and  animal  forms  abounding  upon 
the  surface  of  Jupiter.  By  abstract  dissertations  upon  these,  the  mind 
may  be  led  to  conceive  of  important  truths  by  analogy ; and  the  ap- 
plication of  these  truths  will  be  of  incalculable  value  in  promoting  the 
happiness  and  peace  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth.  And  that  such 
application  will  be  made,  is  by  no  means  improbable.  And  when 
these  things  are  impressed  upon  the  internal  principle  of  man,  man 
will  become  generally  enlightened  ; and  an  extensive  knowledge  of 
things  existing,  will  unite  his  affections  to  Truth.  And  in  proportion 
to  the  extent  of  intelligence,  will  benevolence  and  happiness  prevail. 

§ 23.  The  vegetable  productions  of  Jupiter  are  more  exten- 
sive than  those  of  Saturn.  Of  the  various  species  of  plants  existing 
upon  its  surface,  a detailed  description  is  not  necessary  to  be  given. 
But  a general  classification  will  be  made  of  the  prominent  kinds  ex- 
isting, in  order  that  the  perpetual  ascension  may  be  conceived  of  as 
here  preserved  in  order  and  harmony. 

There  are  on  this  planet  upward  of  three  hundred  thousand  species 
of  plants.  But  their  connexions  with  each  other  are  so  intimate,  that 
they  warrant  but  five  general  classifications. 

The  first  of  these  is  an  exceedingly  large  and  bulky  tree,  whose 
circumference  varies  in  size  according  to  the  circumstances  under 
which  it  is  produced.  It  is  formed  of  the  compositions  existing  in 
the  planet’s  materials ; and  being  the  strongest  production  of  the 
vegetable  kingdom,  it  is  consequently  the  most  imperfect.  It  has 
heavy  seams  formed  of  complex  fibres,  which  are  fully  developed 
about  the  branches  in  thin  ejected  limbs,  upon  which  exists  a spe- 
cies of  fruit.  This  fruit  is  of  a nature  suitable  to  enter  into  the  com- 


1S8 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


position  of  the  lower  order  of  animals,  but  is  exceedingly  deleterious 
to  the  higher  classes. 

The  second  species  of  plant  differs  from  the  other  in  height,  bulk, 
and  general  appearance.  It  is  encompassed  with  a thick  bark.  The 
productions  of  this  tree  are  limited.  It  brings  forth  a kind  of  juice, 
which  flows  freely  from  the  cups  existing  upon  its  exterior.  This 
is  useful,  as  it  is  very  nourishing  and  invigorating  to  the  animal 
economy. 

The  third  class  of  plants  slightly  typifies  the  Wheat,  — and  is 
more  homogeneous  with  the  constitution  of  the  higher  orders  of 
animals. 

The  fourth  class  approximates  still  nearer  to  animal  existence. 
Being  more  perfect  in  composition  than  the  others,  it  presents  a va- 
riegated foliage,  the  extracts  from  which  enter  essentially  into  the 
forms  of  the  first  animals. 

The  fifth  class,  being  an  ultimate  of  the  four  others  described,  is 
necessarily  more  exalted  in  composition.  This  species  is  a kind  of 
zoophyte, — which  may  be  considered  as  mediator  between  vegetable 
and  animal  existences.  F or  while  it  sustains  a close  connexion  with 
the  former  kingdom,  it  throws  feelers  of  sensation  into  the  latter;  and 
thus  it  partakes  of  both  vegetable  and  animal  life. 

The  animal  developments  of  Jupiter,  are  a degree  less  perfect 
than  those  of  Saturn.  There  are  a great  many  species  of  animals 
here  existing,  though  these  are  not  quite  so  generally  disseminated  as 
the  species  in  the  vegetable  kingdom.  These  will  admit  of  only  four 
general  classifications. 

The  first,  of  these  is  in  nature  both  rodentia  and  ruminating.  In 
size  and  stature  it  corresponds  to  the  animal  first  described  as  exist- 
ing in  Saturn ; but  in  disposition  and  habits,  it  is  greatly  dissimilar. 
Upon  the  surface  of  this  planet  there  are  many  convolutions,  it  hav- 
ing more  roughness  than  the  former.  And  this  is  manifest  about  the 
equator  more  than  at  the  poles.  The  igneous  substance  primarily 
existing  in  the  interior  of  the  planet,  was  incidentally  acted  upon  by 
expanding  elements,  the  result  of  which  was  some  volcanic  and  catas- 
trophic occurrences.  And  these  have  developed  mountains,  — about 
which  may  be  found  the  species  of  animals  above  mentioned. 

The  next  in  order  is  in  nature  nearly  digitigrade.  This  sustains 
a position  in  the  order  of  development  a little  above  the  former  class. 
Its  form  corresponds  nearly  to  that  of  the  seal.  It  has  limbs  in  a 


» , 

NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


189 


different  location,  and  moves  with  great  rapidity  both  on  land  and  in 
water,  it  being  also  amphibious.  Its  disposition  is  secretive,  retiring, 
and  apparently  submissive.  It  is  extremely  tyrannical  over  other 
animals  within  its  power. 

The  animal  following  this  is  of  a still  higher  and  more  perfect  or- 
der. Its  size  corresponds  to  that  of  the  natural  man,  and  it  is  com- 
posed of  more  active  materials  than  the  former  animals.  Its  strength 
is  almost  incredible ; but  being  characterized  by  an  ingenious  and 
retiring  disposition,  it  is  very  active  and  forcible  only  when  occasion 
requires.  This  animal  approximates  to  Man,  — being  the  one  that 
constitutes  the  connecting  link  between  the  animal  and  human  organ- 
ization. Its  disposition  is,  in  general  terms,  combative,  secretive,  and 
ingenious ; and  these  qualities  being  accompanied  by  great  self-will 
and  firmness,  it  hence  possesses  wonderful  force  and  energy.  It 
possesses  quick  and  intuitive  perceptions,  and  a retentive  memory  ; 
and  its  affections  are  as  pure  as  the  form  would  indicate.  Being  thus 
mentally  organized,  it  associates  with  all  things  that  are  agreeable  to 
its  inclination,  this  inclination  being  always  qualified  by  its  sense  of 
refinement.  And  inasmuch  as  its  mind  is  a result  of  its  organization, 
it  is  governed  by  its  natural  instincts ; and  of  these  its  habits  are  the 
result.  It  reasons  from  that  which  is  seen  ; and  this  reason  is  not 
such  properly,  but  rather  inclination  produced  by  foreign  substances 
acting  upon  the  sensation  of  the  body.  Therefore  this  animal  exists 
one  degree  below  man  on  Earth. 

<^24.  Concerning  the  human  inhabitants  of  Jupiter,  much  might 
be  said  that  would  be  of  interest ; for  their  relation  to  our  conceptions 
of  a perfect  being  is  much  closer  than  the  inhabitants  of  Saturn. 
Their  form  is  full,  and  well  sustained  by  inward  and  physical  forces. 
Their  size,  symmetry,  and  beauty  of  form,  exceed  those  of  the  earth’s 
inhabitants.  Their  mental  organization  corresponds  to  their  physical 
developments.  Smoothness  and  evenness  are  apparent  upon  their 
form  generally. 

They  do  not  walk  erect,  but  assume  an  inclined  position,  frequently 
using  their  hands  and  arms  in  walking,  the  lower  extremities  being 
rather  shorter  than  the  arms  according  to  our  standard  of  proportion. 
And  by  a modest  desire  to  be  seen  only  in  an  inclined  position,  they 
have  formed  this  habit,  which  has  become  an  established  custom 
among  them. 

Their  general  characteristics  are  of  a mechanical  and  intellectual 


190 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


nature,  accompanied  by  strong  affections  and  interior  love  for  each 
other.  They  have  great  moral  developments ; are  submissive,  and 
yet  firm  and  decided  in  all  their  intentions  and  dealings  with  each 
other.  Their  intelligence  greatly  excels  that  of  Earth’s  inhabitants. 
They  are  existing  in  a state  intermediate  between  the  first  and  second 
Spheres,  in  knowledge  and  refinement. 

Their  form  of  countenance  displays  the  qualities  and  workings  of 
their  inward  principle.  There  is  a peculiar  prominence  of  the  upper 
lip,  this  consisting  of  a complex  and  interwoven  mass  of  fibres,  the 
action  of  which  gives  great  expression  to  inward  thoughts  and  feel- 
ings ; which  expression  among  them  constitutes  the-  peculiar  mode 
of  conversation.  Therefore  they  can  not  think  one  thing  and 
speak  another ; for  their  expression  would  betray  their  inward  senti- 
ments. 

There  is  a great  deal  of  gentleness  and  amiability  manifested 
through  their  exteriors  : and  inasmuch  as  the  external  form  corre- 
sponds to  the  inward  principle,  all  their  external  communications 
with  each  other  are  inflowings  of  interior  affection.  And  as  they  are 
highly  susceptible  to  universal  love,  they  are  incessantly  expressing 
this  by  the  congenial  radiations  of  their  expressive  countenances. 

They  reason  inductively.  They  associate  with  the  internal  of  all 
things,  as  being  the  only  real  reality  in  the  Universe.  Their  associ- 
ations with  each  other  are  according  to  the  inward  affinity  of  spheres, 
— and  thus  are  they  governed  in  all  their  conjugal  and  national  rela- 
tions. For  by  an  influx  of  inward  desire  from  one  to  another,  which 
is  perfectly  spiritual,  they  become  attached  : and  thus  conjoined,  they 
exist  in  perfect  unity,  by  virtue  of  their  perfect  interior  natures. 

Knowing  these  indestructible  truths,  and  knowing  all  things  which 
are  unchanging,  they  submit  unresistingly  to  be  controlled  exclusively 
thereby.  Hence  they  observe  great  care  in  producing,  and  in  pre- 
serving the  health  of,  their  offspring.  Health  being  thus  indelibly 
enstamped  upon  their  constitutions  while  young,  strengthens  in  their 
growth,  and  they  become  enlightened  in  the  perfect  knowledge  of 
these  principles.  Therefore  disease  is  not  known  among  them  ; and 
being  free  from  this  imperfection  enables  them  to  generate  exces- 
sively fast. 

Their  constitutions  being  composed  of  light  and  changing  particles, 
they  soon  change  their  form  of  existence.  They  do  not  die,  but 
rather  sink  into  repose  by  an  expansion  of  their  interiors  which  seek 
more  agreeable  spheres.  And  regarding  this  as  a mere  metamor- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


191 


phosis,  they  escape  with  transports  of  delight;  and  they  are  hence 
pleased  with  the  evanescent  existence  of  the  body. 

Moreover  the  inhabitants  of  this  planet  look  upon  the  changes  and 
vicissitudes  of  their  physical  being,  as  natural  and  inevitable  conse- 
quences of  existing  causes.  These  vicissitudes  are  but  few  ; but  in 
proportion  to  the  refinement  of  particles  composing  their  body,  is  the 
brevity  of  their  existence.  F or  that  which  is  fine  and  delicate  ex- 
ists but  a little  while  in  any  form ; but  that  which  is  heavy  and 
imperfect,  continues  in  the  form  longer  in  consequence  of  being  less 
active  and  less  susceptible  to  foreign  action.  And  as  the  inhabit- 
itants  of  Jupiter  are  composed  of  finer  elements  than  those  compo- 
sing the  inhabitants  of  the  earth,  they  remain  in  the  form  but  a short 
period,  by  reason  of  its  active  and  changeable  composition.  Thirty 
years  is  the  average  duration  of  their  form’s  existence. 

Having  an  expansive  and  sweeping  intellect,  they  comprehend  the 
laws  and  relations  of  their  being  with  one  concentrated  thought. 
And  meditation  in  them  is  thrown  out  upon  their  countenances  with 
a sweet  expression,  which  would,  if  it  could  be  seen  by  an  inhabitant 
of  Earth,  bring  forth  an  ejection  of  tears  and  a gush  of  feeling  that 
could  not  be  expressed.  Their  mode  of  conversation  is  thus  dis- 
tinctly and  unequivocally  expressive  ; for  it  is  a mode  of  expressing 
the  impressions  existing  upon  their  interiors.  And  these  beam  forth 
with  such  perfect  brightness  and  affection,  that  they  are  responded  to 
by  the  interior  affections  of  every  other  being.  It  being  absolutely 
impossible  for  them  to  think  one  thing  and  speak  another ; to  have  a 
greater  amount  of  self-love  than  universal  affection ; to  think  im- 
purely, or  conceive  unrighteous  thoughts  ; and  being  thus  free  from 
all  the  imperfections  of  this  and  other  earths,  their  exteriors  are  open 
to  the  reception  of  light  and  truth,  which  correspond  to  the  fire  of 
spiritual  purification. 

They  inhabit  well-constructed  edifices,  whose  form  corresponds  to 
that  of  a tent,  rather  than  a house,  on  Earth.  These  are  lined  with 
a bluish  bark,  taken  from  a tree  of  the  second  class  ; and  they  are 
thus  rendered  impervious  to  cold,  water,  and  light.  They  receive' 
one  twenty-fifth  of  the  light  of  the  Sun  that  the  earth  enjoys.  But 
this,  striking  vertically  at  the  equator,  at  which  place  is  located  their 
extensive  habitations,  gives  them  the  enjoyment  of  as  much  light  as 
could  be  possibly  obtained  from  the  Centre  of  our  Solar  System. 

They  are  divided  into  families,  associations,  and  nations.  Their 
families  are  composed  of  such  individuals  as  have  a desire  for  the 


192 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


company  of  each  other  from  a congeniality  of  interior  affection. 
Families  grow  into  associations,  and  these  into  nations:  and  the 
whole  forms  one  perfect,  harmonious,  spiritual  brotherhood ! 

The  cause  of  this  state  of  things  is  the  intelligence  which  exists 
among  them ; and  this,  transcending  the  erudition  of  the  inhabitants 
of  Earth  to  an  infinite  extent,  enables  them  to  comprehend  the  uses 
of  all  things,  and  their  original  adaptations.  Therefore  they  make 
proper  application  of  these  uses ; the  result  of  which  is  their  glo- 
rious purification.  And  as  they  are  surrounded  by  various  vege- 
tables, birds,  and  animals,  they  are  also  capable  of  making  a proper 
application  of  these,  to  promote  their  greatest  happiness  and  peace. 

They  reason  so  perfectly  by  induction  and  from  correspondences, 
that  whatsoever  may  be  the  specific  quality  of  their  affections  and  de- 
lights, these  are  all  ultimately  centred  in  the  proper  comprehension 
of  all  that  is  connected  with  their  state  of  mental  association.  And 
all  affections  that  are  breathed  forth  from  their  interiors,  are  so  charm- 
ingly typified  upon  their  exteriors,  and  even  the  representation  itself 
is  such  an  emblem  of  love  and  purity,  that  an  unspeakable  appreci- 
ation of  their  mutual  interior  affections  is  reciprocally  established  in 
their  minds  ! 

Thus  is  the  physical  and  mental,  or  natural  and  spiritual  man, 
made  perfect.  And  by  conceiving  of  the  indestructible  relation 
which  exists  between  purity  and  truth,  the  minds  of  the  inhabitants 
of  the  Earth  will  be  led  to  recognise  their  institutions,  and  to  spurn 
with  the  utmost  abhorrence  all  things  that  are  opposed  to  righteous- 
ness. Thus  efforts  will  be  made  to  bring  about  a better  state  of 
things ; and  this  will  be  the  unfolding  of  interior  truths  and  princi- 
ples that  are  at  this  moment  considered  as  imaginary  and  chimerical. 
And  by  properly  conceiving  of  the  celestial  peace  and  purity  that 
flow  spontaneously  from  interior  truths,  the  minds  of  the  Earth  will 
become  relieved  from  their  external  bonds  of  corruption,  into  the 
inexpressible  light  and  liberty  of  celestial  love  and  peace ! 

Concerning  Jupiter’s  spiritual  inhabitants,  I will  hereafter  speak, 
when  the  knowledge  is  given  me  by  spiritual  influx  from  the  sixth 
Sphere.  But  for  the  present,  I leave  this  planet,  which  is  abounding 
with  all  that  attaches  the  affections  and  feelings  of  man,  as  the  ob- 
jects of  his  deepest  yearnings,  while  aspiring  to  higher  states  of 
purity  and  peace.  And  man’s  desires  for  celestial  magnificence,  are 
the  spontaneous  breathings  of  his  interior  principle.  And  his  aspi- 
rations and  anticipations  can  not  be  too  exalted  : for  he  may  rest 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


193 


assured  from  the  evidences  now  presented,  that  his  anticipations  are 
scarcely  as  a single  thought  in  comparison  to  the  destined  future  ex- 
pansion of  his  interiors,  and  to  the  celestial  light,  peace,  and  magnif- 
icence, that  await  not  only  the  spiritual  composition  of  mankind,  but 
every  particle  existing  in  infinite  space  ! 

^ 25.  Approaching  nearer  to  the  sun,  the  plan  of  uniformity  is 
apparently  confused,  by  the  appearance  of  four  spheroidal  bodies. 
These  have  been  the  cause  of  many  speculations  and  hypotheses  as 
to  their  origin,  and  probable  termination.  As  they  have  been  dis- 
covered within  the  present  century,  there  is  as  yet  no  established 
and  uniform  opinion  respecting  them.  They  exist  between  Jupiter 
and  Mars  ; and  are  very  similar  in  their  orbits  and  revolutions  around 
the  sun. 

Concerning  the  diameters  and  specific  constitution  of  these  bodies, 
little  needs  to  be  said.  But  a general  history  of  their  origin  and  for- 
mation would  satisfy  inquiring  minds,  and  also  lead  to  a proper  com- 
prehension of  their  relations  to  each  other,  and  to  the  planets  between 
which  they  exist. 

Ceres,  Pallas,  Juno,  and  Vesta,  are  the  names  applied  to  these 
bodies.  And  the  fact  that  their  orbits  are  exceedingly  elliptic  and 
constantly  intersecting  the  planes  of  each  other,  has  suggested  the 
hypothesis  that  they -were  formed  from  a comet  which  appeared  in  the 
year  1770  ; and  the  disappearance  of  which  was  so  very  mysterious 
that  no  other  conclusion  than  the  above  could  possibly  be  conceived 
of,  as  accounting  for  this  singular  phenomenon.  And  more  conclu- 
sive was  this  thought  to  be,  when  it  was  discovered  that  two  of  them 
had  each  a luminous  atmosphere,  rather  dense  and  changing.  And 
this  is  still  supposed  by  some  to  be  the  remnant  of  the  luminous 
trail  of  the  cometary  body  ! 

It  is  scarcely  necessary  to  say  that  the  above  conclusion  is  incor- 
rect : for  a thorough  knowledge  of  the  laws  of  matter  and  motion, 
and  the  relation  which  exists  between  every  particle  in  being,  would 
annihilate  in  a moment  the  above  hypothesis.  F or  as  comets  exist 
as  an  ultimate  of  a Solar  System,  they  observe  their  orbits  with  as 
perfect  precision  as  do  the  planets.  And  holding  a position  in  ac- 
cordance with  their  bulk  and  density,  they  travel  in  their  own  paths 
undisturbed,  and  beyond  the  possibility  of  disturbing  any  other  body 
in  the  Universe. 

It  is  known  also  that  comets  are  from  forty  months  to  five  hundred 

13 


\ 

194  nature’s  divine  revelations. 

years  in  accomplishing  their  revolutions  around  the  Sun.  They 
move  with  increased  velocity  as  they  approach  the  Sun.  But  the 
calculations  that  are  made  in  reference  to  the  speed  of  these  bodies 
are  not  to  be  depended  on.  F or  these  calculations  are  founded  on 
an  angle  formed  by  the  apparent  positions  assumed  by  such  bodies 
and  the  Sun.  Presuming  that  these  ajipcarances  vary  but  little  from 
time  to  time  in  their  relations  to  the  reality,  and  not  considering  the 
refractions  of  light,  involves  an  oversight  which  makes  the  above 
calculations  exceedingly  dubious,  as  have  also  been  the  calculations 
with  reference  to  the  speed  of  light.  But  by  understanding  that 
comets  travel  with  a velocity  in  proportion  to  their  density  and  mag- 
nitude, and  by  observing  the  appearance  of  one  of  these  bodies, 
calculations  may  be  made  in  reference  to  its  re-appearance,  inasmuch 
as  they  are  not  known  to  change  their  orbits,  or  to  be  any  more 
eccentric  in  their  motions  than  any  other  planet,  supposing  the  latter 
to  be  operated  upon  by  the  same  influences  that  are  brought  to  act 
upon  these  luminous  and  igneous  bodies. 

Comets  therefore  are  constituted  of  un stratified  particles,  an  ulti- 
mate of  the  Solar  System  ; and  they  are  governed  by  the  same  un- 
changing laws  of  gravitation  or  association  that  control  every  atom  in 
space. 

In  contemplating  the  asteroids  and  inquiring  for  their  origin,  the 
plan  that  was  first  instituted  in  all  planetary  developments  should  be 
distinctly  borne  in  mind.  And  considering  the  magnitude  of  Jupiter 
and  Mars,  and  the  combined  magnitudes  of  these  asteroids,  there 
will  at  once  be  seen  the  relation  existing  between  those  planets  and 
these  smaller  bodies  that  are  between  them  : for  the  diameters  of 
these  bodies  united,  would  conform  to  the  law  of  successive  devel- 
opment. 

Their  specific  diameters  have  not  as  yet  been  determined.  Their 
rotations  have  been  scarcely  decided  upon,  but  their  revolutions  have 
been  nearly  correctly  calculated.  They  are  supposed  to  vary  in  their 
diameters  from  eighty  to  two  thousand  miles.  And  the  first  exists 
two  hundred  and  twenty-five  millions  of  miles  from  the  sun,  and  the 
last  one,  two  hundred  and  sixty-six  millions.  The  others  sustain 
intermediate  distances.  The  first  revolves  around  its  primary  in 
about  three  years  and  eight  months,  the  second  in  about  four  years 
and  four  months,  and  the  last  two  in  about  four  years  and  seven 
months.  And  astronomical  calculations  in  reference  to  their  periods 
of  revolution  have  been  very  correct  ; but  the  calculations  respecting 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


195 


their  magnitudes  will  be  found  to  differ  greatly  from  the  calculations 
that  are  now  being  instituted,  when  the  latter  shall  be  made  known 
to  the  world. 

Their  density  increases  from  that  of  Jupiter,  being  more  than  two 
to  that  of  water.  Therefore  they  are  constituted  of  heavier  materi- 
als than  previously  formed  planets.  And  they  are  exceedingly 
elliptic  : an  effect  produced  by  their  density  and  relation  to  each 
other. 

Concerning  their  origin  I will  now  speak.  The  atmospheric  ema- 
nation of  the  Sun  extended  beyond  the  orbit  occupied  by  Mars,  its 
termination  being  at  the  orbit  now  occupied  by  Pallas.  And  accord- 
ing to  principles  previously  established,  the  association  of  particles 
produced  an  agglomerated  igneous  mass  of  matter.  The  density  of 
this  composition,  being  greater  than  that  of  any  other  body,  prevented 
it  from  ascending  to  a higher  station.  This  accumulation  of  atoms 
would,  if  properly  condensed  like  other  planets,  have  been  of  less 
magnitude  than  Jupiter,  and  exceeding  that  of  Mars  ; corresponding 
to  the  magnitude  of  the  present  bodies  as  combined. 

Inasmuch  as  there  was  not  a perfect  association  of  interior  mate- 
rials, great  convulsions  were  constantly  going  on  throughout  its  com- 
position. Interior  heat  being  excessive,  evaporation  could  not  take 
place  with  sufficient  rapidity  to  give  perfect  relief  to  the  expanding 
elements.  Nor  could  elements  chemically  associate ; nor  could 
unity  exist  in  the  partly  stratified  exterior.  But  being  internally  dis- 
united, and  the  whole  mass  being  not  as  yet  perfectly  under  the  influ- 
ence of  attraction  and  repulsion,  or  the  emanations  evolved  from  the 
Sun,  — the  whole,  by  an  incomprehensible  expansion  of  interior  ele- 
ments, was  thrown  asunder  ! 

Association  of  particles  being  a spontaneous  result  of  this  disorgani- 
zation, they  became  what  they  now  are,  four  asteroids.  And  being 
almost  instantly  brought  under  the  direct  influence  of  Jupiter  and 
Mars,  which  had  then  nearly  assumed  their  present  forms,  they 
were  thus  made  to  assume  a uniformity  of  motion,  which  motion  ex- 
isted in  the  primary  body  in  which  they  had  previously  existed. 
The  one  being  more  dense  than  the  other,  and  the  whole  being  denser 
than  Jupiter,  prevented  any  nearer  approach  toward  that  planet  than 
they  now  manifest.  And  foreign  causes  also  modified  somewhat 
their  movements  and  revolutions.  Therefore  the  orbit  of  Pallas  in- 
clines most  to  the  ecliptic,  this  body  being  the  one  sustaining  the 


196 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


highest  position,  and  the  one  also  whose  poles  are  much  flattened, 
and  equator  greatly  bulged. 

This,  therefore,  is  the  origin  of  these  asteroids.  Combined  they 
produce  one  planet ; which  may  and  will  be  confirmed  by  astronom 
ical  researchers,  who  are  at  liberty  to  test  the  truth  or  falsity  of  this 
revealment. 

As  they  have  not  developed  anything  beyond  the  vegetable  king- 
dom (although  an  era  is  now  approaching  that  will  call  into  existence 
a class  of  zoophytes),  an  examination  of  their  exteriors  would  be  un- 
necessary and  of  no  useful  application.  And  these  facts  being  now 
impressed,  I proceed  to  speak  in  reference  to  their  kindred  planet, 
which  was  developed  soon  after  their  inconceivable  disorganization. 

And  the  only  thought  concerning  these  asteroids  that  may  be  made 
useful  in  application  to  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth  is,  that  they  mani- 
fest the  natural  result  of  interior  elements  that  are  discordant  and 
opposed  to  each  other.  F or  being  disunited,  they  became  confused  ; 
and  they  are  now  reckoned  as  the  least  among  the  planets  in  our  So- 
lar System.  And  the  same  is  true  of  the  disunited  materials  existing 
among  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth  : for  inasmuch  as  order  and  har- 
mony are  the  natural  results  of  perfectly  associated  principles,  — so 
are  disorder  and  confusion  the  natural  results  of  the  commingling  of 
opposite  and  antagonistic  principles  and  elements.  And  as  these 
small  bodies  typify  the  present  condition  of  the  world ; so  will  the 
world  be  typical,  when  it  becomes  united,  of  what  these  asteroids  will 
ultimately  be,  a perfect  planet. 

^ 26.  The  planet  Mars  follows  the  latter  production,  by  virtue  of 
principles  heretofore  explained  ; and  this  also  requires  a general  de- 
scription. And  showing  a decrease  in  magnitude  from  all  the  rest, 
it  proves  distinctly  the  uniformity  of  the  order  of  successive  develop- 
ment. It  is  not  necessary  to  enter  into  the  particulars  of  the  motions 
and  actions  of  elements  interiorly  existing  in  this  planet,  when  its 
present  form  was  first  assumed  ; for  these  do  not  differ  in  any  essen- 
tial particular  from  the  operations  described  in  previous  formations. 
But  acceding  to  the  calculations  which  have  been  made  by  men 
of  perception  and  erudition  in  reference  to  this  planet  and  its  rela- 
tions, I speak  in  general  terms,  as  heretofore,  of  its  degree  and  station 
in  respect  to  planets  previously  evolved. 

It  is  in  density  about  three  times  the  density  of  water.  Its  mean 
distance  from  the  Sun  is  a little  more  than  one  hundred  and  forty- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


197 


four  millions  of  miles.  Considering  its  polar  diversified  appearance, 
its  diameter  is  about  four  thousand  two  hundred  and  twenty  miles. 
It  presents  a decrease  of  magnitude  from  other  planets,  and  an  in- 
crease of  density,  corresponding  in  a general  sense  to  its  relative 
position  in  the  Solar  System.  It  rotates  upon  its  axis  in  a little 
more  than  twenty-four  hours  and  a half ; and  its  period  of  revolution 
around  its  productor,  is  six  hundred  and  eighty-six  days,  nearly  two 
years. 

This  planet,  being  also  beyond  the  orbit  of  the  earth,  is  naturally 
of  a superior  quality  and  constitution.  Its  extremely  dense  atmo- 
sphere presents  an  illumination  of  a red  appearance.  The  cause  of 
this  is,  that  the  materials  composing  the  stratified  parts  of  this  planet 
are  greatly  attractive  to  the  particles  of  light  thrown  from  the  Sun. 
This  atmosphere,  extending,  as  it  does,  from  Mars’  surface  nearly 
twenty-five  miles  higher  than  is  the  earth’s  atmosphere,  prevents  the 
success  of  observations  upon  its  surface.  But  at  its  poles  there  are 
peculiar  changes  and  radiations  of  light  — an  indication  of  diversity 
of  seasons,  and  vicissitudes  about  the  frigid  zones. 

The  surface  presents  a great  deal  of  unevenness  and  appearance 
of  catastrophic  occurrences.  F or  there  are  several  parts  of  this  planet 
abounding  with  extreme  elevations  and  projections  of  rocks  from  its 
interior ; but  none  exceeding  those  of  Earth’s  mountainous  portions. 
These  do  not  exist  near  the  equator,  but  in  the  region  of  the  poles. 

Its  surface  abounds  with  extensive  vegetable  productions,  these 
being  still  more  numerous  than  those  of  Jupiter,  less  perfect,  but 
superior  to  those  of  Earth.  The  animal  formations  are  not  so  exten- 
sive ; but  they  ascend  from  the  lowest  up  to  man  in  successive  mod- 
ifications of  forms  which  correspond  generally  to  their  interior  prin- 
ciples. And  man  there,  is  in  a much  more  exalted  state,  both 
physical  and  mental,  than  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth ; but  he  does 
not  approach  the  high  state  of  exaltation  and  refinement  which  char- 
acterizes the  other  planets’  inhabitants. 

I will  mention  the  kinds  of  vegetable  productions  that  are  most 
used,  and  not  enter  into  a classification  of  the  general  species  of 
either  the  vegetable  or  animal  kingdom. 

There  is  a species  of  tree  existing  among  them  that  is  of  vast  use. 
It  germinates  and  gradually  develops  itself  into  a stout,  bulky  form, 
representing  the  spiral.  Its  branches  are  long,  and  extend  far  around 
the  trunk.  Its  leaves  are  very  broad,  with  a mixture  of  a bluish  and 
reddish  color,  with  more  prominence  of  the  green.  Its  blossoms  are 


198 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


very  beautiful,  and  its  fruit  is  esteemed  among  them  as  the  most  use- 
ful upon  their  planet.  The  form  of  this  fruit  is  very  round,  typifying 
slightly  the  cocoanut,  and  is  used  among  the  inhabitants  as  a kind  of 
bread  : and  its  action  upon  the  system  is  highly  invigorating.  The 
bark  of  this  tree  is  also  extensively  used  for  many  purposes,  with  a 
kind  of  glue  that  proceeds  from  another  tree.  It  is  used  in  the  con- 
struction of  their  habitations  and  in  the  formation  of  garments. 

But  there  is  another  vegetable,  of  a low  stature,1  that  produces 
very  fine  and  beautiful  fibres,  which  are  very  neatly  woven  together, 
and  used  generally  among  them  as  their  main  apparel. 

The  inhabitants  are  divided  into  associated  families,  and  this  is 
the  general  and  customary  mode  of  living  among  them.  There  are 
three  extensive  families,  or  nations,  upon  this  planet.  But  they  are 
governed  by  common  principles ; a result  of  a superior  knowledge 
and  sense  of  justice. 

There  is  a peculiar  prominence  of  the  top  of  the  head,  indicative 
of  high  veneration.  The  cerebrum  and  cerebellum  correspond  in 
form  and  size  ; and  the  latter  extends  upward  at  the  junction  of  the 
two  brains ; which  makes  them  very  susceptible  of  internal  and  true 
affection.  Their  form  approaches  nearly  to  that  of  man  on  earth, 
with  the  exception  of  its  more  perfect  symmetry.  They  exhibit  a 
peculiar  dignity  and  a peculiar  air  of  exaltation  in  all  their  motions ; 
and  these  appearances  are  the  reflux  and  configurations  of  an  inward 
reality.  They  are  not  large:  and  having  a different  countenance 
from  men  here  existing,  this  deserves  particular  attention. 

I find  that  the  upper  part  of  the  face  has  a lively,  yellowish  cast, 
and  that  radiations  as  it  were,  proceed  from  the  forehead,  the  eyes, 
and  the  flush  of  the  cheeks.  The  lower  part  of  the  face  is  of  a dif- 
ferent color,  being  rather  dark,  with  a mixture  of  the  above  radiations 
from  the  interior  of  their  physical  constitutions.  They  have  no 
beard  upon  their  face,  but  this  is  a representation  of  it.  And  en- 
compassing the  lower  part  of  the  face,  neck,  and  ears  (the  back  part 
of  the  neck  being  particularly  prominent),  this  darkish  substance  ex- 
tends around  to  the  back,  where  it  is  joined  with  the  hair  of  the 
neck ; the  top  of  the  head  being  entirely  free  from  any  such  ap- 
pearances. 

Concerning  their  laws  and  governments,  their  superior  love,  and 
the  affection  for  thoughts  which  characterizes  their  spiritual  principles, 

I will  speak  more  generally  when  the  application  of  these  things  is 
made  to  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


199 


As  to  their  physical  appearance,  its  beauty  is  to  them  inimitable  : 
while  the  same  to  us  would  appear  exceedingly  disgusting  and  un- 
dignified. But  the  idea  of  beauty  is  in  them  as  in  us,  a result  of 
habitual  modes  of  thought  rather  than  of  a knowledge  of  that  which 
is  intrinsically  fine  and  perfect.  Therefore  the  only  standard  of 
beauty  that  can  be  erected,  either  on  this  or  any  other  earth  in  the 
Universe,  is  that  which  meets  the  general  approbation  of  society. 

Their  attitude  is  modest  and  perfect : and  there  exists  great  deli- 
cacy and  beauty  of  form  among  the  females.  They  do  not  vary 
much  in  stature  from  the  males,  but  being  exceedingly  straight,  they 
display  perfect  symmetry : and  there  is  great  affability  and  courtesy 
in  the  manner  in  which  they  approach  and  address  each  other. 

There  are  beings  of  different  complexions  and  constitutions  existing 
upon  this  planet.  Like  the  forms  in  the  vegetable  and  animal  king- 
doms, they  are  very  dissimilar  in  materials  and  appearance,  according 
to  the  particular  part  of  the  planet  on  which  they  were  born.  I 
perceive  that  some  portions  of  the  inhabitants  are  darker  colored 
than  others ; but  I do  not  see  that  they  are  numerous. 

§ 27.  Their  habitations  and  plantations  are  near  the  equator. 
There  are  a great  number  of  settlements  upon  this  planet : but  all 
the  inhabitants  appear  joined  in  perfect  agreement  and  consociality. 

They  have  digressed  a little  from  the  natural  law  governing  their 
existence — consequently  some  imperfection  exists  among  them.  But 
disease,  either  of  the  moral  or  physical  system,  is  not  there  known. 
They  are  not  governed  by  arbitrary  or  conventional  laws  ; hence 
they  are  free  from  all  the  inequalities  and  imperfections  which  are  the 
natural  results  of  such  laws.  But  possessing  a high  moral  principle, 
they  obey  that  which  this  principle  dictates  ; and  their  obedience  to 
this  is  rendered  the  more  certain  by  all  their  interests  being  conjoined, 
and  by  all  their  affections  and  desires  being  centred  in  the  workings 
of  good  and  righteousness.  Hence  the  basis  of  all  their  good  ac- 
tions consists  in  the  interest-principle,  which  is  lecognised,  tending 
toward  good  results. 

Their  minds  are  constantly  open  for  the  reception  of  all  good 
things.  Light,  life,  and  purity,  are  to  them  the  highest  virtues. 
These  become  associated  with  their  interiors,  and  the  latter  are  con- 
sequently good. 

The  ideas  which  wTe  have  concerning  that  which  is  good,  have 
arisen  from  the  comparison  of  apparent  evil.  Our  ideas  of  light, 


200 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


life,  and  purity,  are  founded  upon  the  knowledge  that  we  have  of 
their  seeming  opposites.  For  if  these  representations  of  imperfec- 
tion were  not  visible,  how  would  we  be  capable  of  forming  a proper 
conception  of  what  is  good,  pure,  and  spiritual  ? The  inhabitants 
of  Mars,  in  their  physical  and  mental  constitutions,  are  as  many  de- 
grees more  perfect  than  we,  as  we  are  superior  to  the  inhabitants  of 
Venus  and  Mercury.  Hence  to  the  inhabitants  of  the  latter  planets, 
our  condition,  and  the  peculiar  and  comparatively  exalted  combina- 
tions that  exist  upon  the  earth,  would  seem  'perfection.  And  the  ex- 
alted condition  of  the  inhabitants  of  other  planets  would  be  perfection 
according  to  our  ideas.  Hence  conceptions  of  purity  and  refinement 
are  enlarged  in  proportion  to  the  knowledge  one  possesses  of  what 
is  impure  and  unrefined. 

An  exalted  state  of  intelligence  produces  correspondingly  exalted 
conceptions  of  perfection  : for  as  the  inhabitants  of  Mercury  have 
conceptions  of  perfection  far  below  those  which  we  possess,  so  are 
the  conceptions  — the  magnificent  conceptions  — of  the  inhabitants 
of  Saturn,  much  beyond  ours,  and  to  us  inconceivable.  For  that 
which  they  conceive  to  be  beautiful,  pure,  and  celestial,  is  far  beyond 
the  idea  of  the  celestial  spheres  as  conceived  by  us ; and  the  celes- 
tial spheres,  the  perfection  of  forms  are  so  inconceivably  magnificent, 
that  a description  of  them  would  be  considered  as  imaginative  and 
visionary.  And  the  conceptions  of  the  inhabitants  of  Saturn  come 
as  far  short  of  the  real  and  celestial  purity  of  the  higher  spheres,  as 
our  conceptions  are  below  theirs. 

In  speaking,  therefore,  of  the  inhabitants  of  Mars,  I say  they  are 
perfect  comparatively:  for  the  word  “perfect”  can  only  be  used  in  a 
comparative  sense,  though  the  strongest  meaning  that  can  be  applied 
to  it  would  no  more  than  give  an  adequate  conception  of  what  is 
revealed. 

Concerning  the  purity  and  goodness,  gentleness,  and  kindness,  that 
characterize  the  interior  principles  of  the  inhabitants  of  Mars,  and 
concerning  their  affection  for  thoughts,  I will  now  speak. 

Their  knowledge  of  internal  truths  is  founded  upon  the  knowledge 
which  they  possess  of  the  science  of  correspondences.  They  observe 
all  eternal  manifestations,  and  induce  truths  and  principles  by  anal- 
ogy. Thus  the  light  which  they  receive  from  the  Sun,  and  the 
knowledge  which  they  have  of  the  fixed  stars,  furnish  to  them  cor- 
respondences of  unchangeable  truth,  and  the  light  of  celestial  love 
and  peace.  The  growth  of  plants,  animals,  and  man,  corresponds 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


201 


generally  to  the  changeless  law  of  progression.  The  first  typifies 
the  second;  the  second  typifies  the  third,  &c.  ; and  each  form  is  a 
symbol  of  inherent  essences  and  qualities  as  forming  the  material 
composition.  Therefore  from  the  form  of  their  planet,  and  the  ma- 
terials therein  contained,  they  infer  a living  Principle  of  Motion. 
From  the  form  of  the  vegetable  they  infer  Motion  and  Life.  From 
all  the  monads  and  animal  existences,  from  the  lowest  order  to  the 
highest,  they  infer  Sensation  as  an  ultimate  of  that  which  is  existing 
prior  to  its  formation.  From  the  organization  of  man,  they  conceive 
of  Motion,  Life,  Sensation,  and  Intelligence.  And  from  these  they 
endeavor  to  comprehend  their  spiritual  principle ; but  although  this 
principle  is  the  foundation  of  all  thought,  it  is  incapable  of  self- com- 
prehension. . And  to  them,  as  to  us,  the  spirit  is  obscure,  and  as  yet 
undefined  ; for  the  reason  that  no  principle  contains  within  itself  the 
power  of  self-investigation.  Every  form  in  the  vegetable  kingdom, 
from  the  lowest  degree  to  the  highest,  typifies  refinement  and  pro- 
gression toward  the  animal  kingdom.  And  the  forms  in  the  animal 
creation,  from  the  lowest  to  the  highest,  correspond  to  the  perfec- 
tion of  their  internal  essences,  and  stand  as  representatives  of 
man.  Therefore  correspondences  are  to  them  the  basis  of  superior 
knowledge. 

This  knowledge,  being  pure  and  truthful,  begets  an  affection  ; and 
thoughts  constantly  flowing  out  from  their  interior  knowledge  of  truth 
and  reality,  unite  themselves  with  this  affection.  Hence  mind  corre- 
sponds to  knowledge,  and  knowledge  corresponds  to  thought  and 
affection  as  the  ultimate.*  Therefore  an  affection  for  thoughts  exists 
among  them.  And  the  conceptions  arising  in  their  minds  are  always 
inevitably  true.  And  from  their  high  veneration  arises  an  affection 
for  truths,  which  is  regarded  among  them  as  a celestial  affection. 
This  therefore  is  their  interior  condition. 

And  how  pure  and  high  are  their  aspirations ! And  the  highest 
conceptions  we  can  possibly  have,  do  not  transcend  the  spiritual 
peace  and  purity  that  exist  among  them.  In  speaking  concerning 
the  earths  in  the  universe,  and  concerning  the  celestial  purity,  spirit- 
ual refinement,  sublimity,  and  magnificence,  as  appertaining  thereunto, 

*In  order  to  properly  understand  this  phraseology,  it  is  necessary  that  the  reader 
should  apprehend  the  distinction  which  the  author  makes  between  mind,  knowledge , 
and  thought.  Mind  is  the  essence,  knowledge  is  its  condition,  and  thought  is  its  action. 
By  mind  corresponding  to  knowledge  and  knowledge  to  thought,  is  meant  that  mind 
implies  knowledge,  and  knowledge  thought,  each  as  a necessary  sequence  of  the 
preceding. 


202 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


our  conceptions  have  been  light  and  trivial.  Yet  all  our  most  exalted 
conceptions  can  not  possibly  transcend  the  unspeakable  beauty,  purity, 
and  refinement,  that  exist  among  the  inhabitants  of  this  planet.  Their 
affection  for  thoughts  is  so  pure  and  exalted,  that  man  here  existing 
would  associate  the  true  conception  of  it  with  the  celestial  spheres. 

Sentiments  arising  in  their  minds  become  instantly  impressed  upon 
their  countenances ; and  they  use  their  mouth  arid  tongue  for  their 
specific  offices,  and  not  as  the  agents  for  conversation.  But  that 
glowing  radiation  which  illuminates  their  face  while  conversing,  is  to 
us  inconceivable.  Their  eyes  are  blue  and  of  a soft  expression,  are 
very  full  and  expressive,  and  are  their  most  powerful  agents  in  con- 
versation. When  one  conceives  a thought,  and  desires  to  express 
it,  he  casts  his  beaming  eyes  upon  the  eyes  of  another ; and 
his  sentiments  instantly  become  known.  And  thus  do  their  coun- 
tenances and  eyes,  together  with  their  gentle  affability,  typify  the 
purity  and  beauty  of  their  interiors  ; and  in  their  social  relations  they 
display  the  deepest  attachment,  and  the  strongest  mutual  affection. 
Thus  peace,  truth,  and  love,  abound  with  them  universally  ; and  thus 
do  light,  life,  and  knowledge,  typify  and  serve  as  an  index  of  higher 
and  more  perfect  spheres. 

Such  is  the  condition  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  fourth  planet.  Con- 
cerning the  spiritual  associations  existing  among  them,  more  will 
hereafter  be  revealed ; but  the  useful  application  may  be  made  of 
what  has  been  said  in  reference  to  their  physical  and  mental  condi- 
tion, without  a further  description  of  them.  And  it  is  necessary  to 
have  their  condition  duly  impressed  upon  our  minds,  that  we  may 
profit  thereby. 

§ 28.  The  Earth  stands  next  in  order  and  degree,  in  relation  to 
Mars.  But  as  it  is  the  locality  upon  which  have  been  formed  all  the 
computations  relating  to  the  Solar  System,  and  also  is  the  locality 
upon  which  I reveal  these  truths,  it  must  be  left  unnoticed  until  the 
description  of  other  parts  of  the  Solar  System  is  completed.  And 
when  all  contemplations  relating  to  these  earths,  and  to  the  earths  of 
space,  shall  have  been  finished,'  I will  return  and  give  a description 
of  the  creation  of  the  Earth  progressively  up  to  the  highest  ultimate 
which  its  materials  have  produced. 

In  approaching  toward  the  Sun,  Venus  presents  itself  as  the  next 
planet  evolved  from  the  great  central  mass.  As  the  laws  that  pro- 
duced other  planets  have  been  heretofore  duly  explained,  the  same 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


203 


unchanging  principles  will  naturally  be  supposed  to  have  produced 
the  planet  Venus.  Therefore  it  is  unnecessary  to  speak  of  the  several 
stages  which  this  planet  passed  through  before  it  arrived  at  its  pres- 
ent form. 

Bearing  a closer  relation  to  the  Sun  than  other  planets,  it  manifests 
plainly  the  character  of  the  materials  composing  its  body,  as  being 
denser  in  their  composition  than  those  of  any  planet  previously  de- 
scribed. Its  density  is  six  times  that  of  water.  Its  diameter  is 
nearly  eight  thousand  miles.  It  exists  sixty-eight  millions  of  miles 
from  the  Sun.  It  rotates  upon  its  axis  in  twenty-three  and  a half 
hours ; and  its  period  of  revolution  is  two  hundred  and  twenty-four 
days.  The  plane  of  its  orbit  is  not  much  different  from  that  of  Earth. 
It  is  the  planet  known  as  the  morning  and  evening  star.  It  makes 
transits  across  the  disk  of  the  Sun,  the  recurrences  of  which  have 
been  accurately  and  confidently  calculated.  This  phenomenon  takes 
place  while  the  planet  is  passing  its  nodes. 

The  physical  appearance  of  Venus  is  less  beautiful  than  that  of  any 
planet  heretofore  described.  There  are  very  high  mountains  and 
ejected  rocks,  that  disturb  the  otherwise  smoothness  of  its  appear- 
ance. Some  of  these  are  several  miles  higher  than  any  upon  the 
earth ; especially  upon  the  side  this  way,  or  the  polar  hemisphere 
now  presented  to  the  earth.  The  other  side  has  more  smoothness, 
beauty,  and  fertility.* 

A great  portion  of  this  planet  is  covered  with  water ; and  the  at- 
mosphere that  surrounds  it  is  nearly  like  that  which  encompasses  the 
earth,  but  is  composed  of  less  rare  particles.  It  x-eceives  a great  deal 
more  light  from  the  Sun  than  any  planet  receding  from  it. 

There  are  many  species  of  plants  existing  upon  its  surface.  It  is 
unnecessary  to  classify  them ; for  it  would  be  of  little  importance  or 
use  to  the  world.  The  trees  are  generally  rather  low,  very  stout,  and 
very  extensively  branched.  From  these  to  the  most  delicate  plant, 
there  is  a constant  assuming  of  higher  stations,  according  to  the 
ascending  degrees  of  refinement.  Yet  there  is  much  variegated 
foliage,  and  many  useful  and  tender  plants  existing  upon  its  surface. 

The  animals  also  are  not  of  so  high  a degree  as  those  of  any 

•The  polar  hemispheres  of  each  planet,  the  axis  of  which  is  not  always  perpendicu- 
lar to  the  plane  of  the  ecliptic,  are  of  course  reversed  in  reference  to  the  earth  once 
during  each  revolution  of  the  planet  around  the  Sun.  The  author  in  thus  distin- 
guishing the  sides  of  the  planet,  as  he  does  in  the  text  and  in  two  or  three  subsequent 
instances,  must  of  course  found  his  expressions  upon  the  particular  position  of  the 
planet  at  the  time  this  was  dictated,  which  was  on  the  17th  of  April,  1846. 


204 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


planet  more  remote  from  the  Sun.  Yet  they  are  very  numerous, 
and  the  more  so  upon  this  side.  There  is  a class  of  animals  that 
are  very  strong  and  ferocious,  insomuch  that  in  this  respect  they  cor- 
respond to  the  lion,  though  they  are  of  a different  form  and  appear- 
ance. The  animals  that  inhabit  the  further  side,  are  of  a more  docile 
and  agreeable  nature  ; and  they  are  very  useful  as  assisting  agents  to 
the  inhabitants  thereof. 

The  inhabitants  upon  the  further  side  are  in  form  nearly  like  the 
inhabitants  of  Earth,  — with  the  exception  that  heavier  materials  enter 
into  their  composition.  Their  breasts  are  wide  and  full.  The  lungs, 
and  the  whole  viscera  system,  are  very  active  and  strong,  the  former 
being  adapted  to  inhale  the  invigorating  atmosphere  that  surrounds 
them.  Their  constitution  generally  is  very  good.  Their  mental  dis- 
positions are  very  dissimilar  to  others  there  existing.  They  have  a 
mild  and  gentle  smile  upon  their  countenances,  an  index  of  inward 
purity  ; and  their  association  is  to  us  very  agreeable.  And  all  their 
conjugal  affections  are  very  strong  and  good.  But  they  have  no 
high  conceptions  of  things  in  the  Universe.  They  reason  principally 
from  externals.  They  seek  for  knowledges  and  scientifics,  and  are 
very  much  enlightened  therein.  And  yet  they  have  but  a slight 
knowledge  of  higher  spheres  from  the  conceptions  which  their  scien- 
tifics afford  them.  Male  and  female  are  generally  purely  associated 
with  each  other.  But  there  are  existing  manifest  imperfections  in 
their  customs  and  national  privileges.  Their  general  disposition  is 
an  affection  for  each  other — a purely  instinctive  desire  as  proceeding 
from  the  law  of  sensation  ; and  whatever  interior  suggestions  and 
promptings  they  may  have  as  harmonizing  with  this,  are  to  them 
knowledge  and  refinement.  And  so  their  affections  and  knowledges 
conjoin  and  produce  a mental  organization  nearly  like  that  of  the  in- 
habitants of  Earth. 

The  inhabitants  upon  this  side  of  the  planet  are  exceedingly  dis- 
similar to  the  others.  They  are  very  tall,  stout,  and  physically  ener- 
getic, and  are  imperfect  when  compared  with  man  on  Earth.  They 
have  a savage  and  ferocious  disposition,  and  are  very  cruel  and  un- 
kind. They  are  destitute  of  all  conceptions  of  right ; they  do  not 
receive  the  spontaneous  promptings  and  approbations  that  naturally 
flow  from  the  spiritual  principles  of  man.  They  are  ignorant  of  higher 
states,  and  form  no  conception  of  the  beauty  of  goodness  and  refine- 
ment. They  are  in  a less  perfect  condition  mentally  than  any  inhab- 
itants upon  the  surface  of  the  earth  : physically,  they  are  several  times 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


205 


sponger  than  the  latter.  They  are  full,  heavy,  and  giant-like.  A 
barbarous  and  savage  disposition  is  displayed  in  all  their  actions. 
They  form  themselves  into  troops,  and  march  forth  to  plunder  the 
stores  of  other  nations.  They  cruelly  interfere  with  the  peace  and 
quietness  of  the  inhabitants  of  other  regions.  And  when  they  return  \ 
from  these  degrading  and  barbarous  expeditions,  they  rejoice  with  a 
beastly  gratification  in  devouring  the  booty  and  plunder  that  they  have 
so  unjustly  taken  from  others.  There  is  a constant  tendency  to  re- 
joice and  triumph  in  such  degrading  achievements.  And  the  booty 
which  they  carry  away  from  others,  is  sometimes  their  living  offspring : 
and  these  they  torment  and  torture,  and  finally,  cannibal-like,  greedily 
devour  them ! 

In  all  their  connexions  with  each  other,  they  manifest  an  entirely 
animal  disposition.  They  do  not  search  into  truths  — not  even  into 
those  which  relate  to  their  own  being ; but  they  come  into  existence 
and  pass  out  of  it  again,  without  the  knowledge  of  the  legitimate  uses 
or  privileges  of  life.  Therefore  they  lose  all  of  the  inward  consola- 
tion that  man  might  naturally  otherwise  enjoy,  because  of  their  unfa- 
vorable organizations.  They  merely  live  and  take  care  of  their  cattle 
and  other  things  that  are  compelled  to  submit  to  their  tyrannical  gov- 
ernment ; and  they  look  no  further  and  seek  no  higher  sphere  than 
that  wdiich  is  suited  to  their  beastly  inclinations. 

Thus  are  two  distinct  nations  inhabiting  the  surface  of  Venus. 
And  the  beauty  and  magnificence  of  other  planets  are  not  by  them 
conceived  of  or  imagined.  But  the  inhabitants  of  the  further  side 
approach  nearly  to  the  inhabitants  of  Earth,  both  in  their  physical 
and  mental  condition.  Their  institutions  and  forms  of  government 
far  exceed  those  upon  Earth,  because  they  agree  more  with  the  laws 
of  their  nature  and  of  the  Universe.  But  though  they  are  surrounded 
with  many  beauties  and  pure  associations,  they  are  not  in  a happy 
condition,  being  so  unfavorably  situated,  as  has  been  before  de- 
scribed. But  as  the  materials  of  Venus  are  less  perfect  than  those 
of  the  further  planets,  so  also  must  be  the  composition  and  situation 
of  all  its  ultimates. 

Concerning  the  spiritual  inhabitants  of  this  planet,  more  will  here- 
after be  said  ; but  in  reference  to  its  physical  and  material  condition, 
all  has  been  expressed  that  is  useful  in  its  appropriate  application. 
Therefore  I leave  this  planet,  and  commence  giving  a corresponding 
description  of  Mercury. 


206 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


<$>  29.  By  virtue  of  laws  and  principles  heretofore  explained, 
Mercury  has  assumed  its  present  existence  and  form.  This  planet 
is  nearer  the  Sun  than  any  other  body  in  the  Solar  System.  It  takes 
the  lowest  point  of  all  the  planets,  because  it  is  composed  of  grosser 
materials.  It  observes,  in  its  revolution,  a plane  similar  to  those  of 
Venus  and  the  Earth  ; but  its  orbit  is  more  elliptical. 

Calculations  that  have  been  made  in  reference  to  Mercury,  are 
nearly  correct : but  suppositions  in  reference  to  the  condition  of  its 
surface,  are  not  altogether  in  accordance  with  fact.  Its  diameter  is 
three  thousand  two  hundred  miles.  It  sustains  a distance  from  the 
Sun  of  thirty-seven  million  miles  ; and  the  period  of  its  revolution  is 
eighty-eight  days,  it  moving  about  one  hundred  thousand  miles  an 
hour.  It  revolves  upon  its  axis  in  about  twenty-four  hours.  Its 
density  is  nearly  nine  times  that  of  water ; and  it  receives  about 
seven  times  more  light  than  the  Earth.  Its  approximation  to  the  Sun 
therefore  is  corresponding  to  the  affinity  which  the  materials  compo- 
sing; it  sustain  to  those  of  the  Sun.  Presenting;  an  increase  of  den- 
sity,  and  also  of  motion,  it  confirms  the  truth  that  was  intended  to  be 
impressed,  That  all  materials  in  the  Universe  seek  association  ac- 
cording to  their  specific  gravity  and  quantity. 

Being  so  near  the  Sun,  the  planet  is  not  always  visible.  The 
intersecting  of  orbits  causes  it  to  pass  over  the  disk  of  the  Sun  about 
thirteen  times  in  a century.  The  atmosphere  surrounding  this  planet 
is  extremely  luminous,  though  the  light  and  heat  derived  from  the 
Sun  are  not  so  excessive  as  might  be  supposed : for  the  materials  of 
this  planet  have  not  much  affinity  either  for  light  or  heat.  Therefore 
it  rejects  that  which  would  otherwise  be  received,  and  retains  the 
quantity  suitable  to  sustain  life  and  action  among  the  forms  upon  its 
surface. 

Some  portions  of  this  planet  are  very  uneven  ; while  other  parts 
are  extremely  smooth  and  beautiful.  The  vegetable  productions  of 
this  planet  are  not  very  numerous,  and  are  not  so  refined  in  compo- 
sition as  those  upon  other  planets.  There  are  but  three  general 
classes  of  plants ; and  from  the  lowest  to  the  highest  of  these,  we 
find  upon  Earth  a correspondence.  But  as  to  form,  and  height,  and 
beauty,  they  do  not  equal  those  of  any  other  planet.  The  highest 
vegetable  productions  generally  rise  but  a few  inches  above  the  sur- 
face. There  are  no  flowers,  nor  foliage,  nor  trees  that  cast  pleasing 
shades ; but  all  vegetable  forms  are  full  and  gross,  rising  but  little 
from  the  surface  of  the  ground. 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


207 


And  there  are  two  great  barren  deserts  covering  almost  one  third 
of  this  planet,  upon  whose  surface  can  not  possibly  subsist  any  form 
possessing  life.  And  the  excessive  subterraneous  heat  existing  in 
this  planet,  produces  great  commotion  and  excitement  among  the 
watery  elements  near  the  borders  of  these  deserts,  some  of  the  vents 
ejecting  boiling  water,  which  is  very  scalding  to  any  form  possessing 
sensation.  And  by  a corresponding  excitement  of  the  atmospheric 
elements,  great  winds  are  sometimes  produced ; and  this  is  while 
these  elements  are  seeking  an  equilibrium.  And  so  extremely  severe 
are  these  winds,  that  the  plants,  animals,  and  man,  are  sometimes 
prostrated  under  their  powerful  action.  These  winds  generally  oc- 
cur near  the  region  of  these  deserts ; and  carrying  with  them  the 
excessive  heat  of  the  sand  and  water,  they  often  produce  great  de- 
struction among  the  habitations  and  plantations  of  the  inhabitants. 

The  animals  also,  are  very  imperfectly  formed.  There  are  not 
many  species  of  these,  and  those  that  are  existing,  would  be  to  us 
entirely  repulsive  and  disgusting.  Besides,  they  manifest  a com- 
bative and  retaliating  disposition  toward  all  things  they  meet,  and  a 
constant  preying  upon  each  other,  insomuch  that  their  very  active 
temperaments  are  sometimes  destroyed,  the  loss  of  which  results  in 
the  destruction  of  their  lives.  Generally  they  are  of  an  amphibious 
and  digitigrade  nature. 

The  human  inhabitants  of  this  pkmet  are  not  so  numerous 
as  exist  upon  others ; and  they  are  very  imperfect  in  their  material 
organization.  Still  they  manifest  the  same  incessant  activity  as  do 
the  animals.  And  they  have  a peculiar  mental  constitution,  the  gen- 
eral traits  of  which  are  strong  attachment^  great  concentration,  great 
highmindedness  and  self-respect,  with  a most  powerfully  retentive 
memory.  This  latter  is  the  strongest  faculty  belonging  to  them. 
They  manifest  great  promptitude  in  anything  depending  on  memory; 
for  in  the  memory  of  things  consists  their  knowledge.  Each  one 
has  a great  desire  to  be  thought  more  enlightened  than  any  other 
beings  in  existence : and  having  this  self-persuasion,  they  presume 
upon  their  memory  to  profess  the  intelligence  that  no  other  beings 
possess.  They  do  not  investigate  the  causes  of  things,  but  try  to 
conceive  of  the  uses  for  which  all  things  are.  intended.  Anything 
relating  to  memory , therefore,  is  to  them  the  essential  of  knowledge. 

And  they  do  not  depend  upon  their  sensualities  or  inclinations  as 
a source  of  knowledge,,  but  rather  seek  the  internal , caring  little  for 
the  shades  by  which  substances  are  oftentimes  concealed.  A per- 


20S 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


son  conversing  with  them  and  endeavoring  to  display  elegance  and 
beauty  in  his  expression,  would  be  altogether  disregarded : for  un- 
favorably as  they  are  situated,  they  dislike  to  have  their  ears  address- 
ed instead  of  their  understanding.  Therefore  in  conversing  with 
each  other,  the  shades  that  are  thrown  upon  any  subject  by  these 
affabilities,  are  altogether  rejected,  and  they  retain  only  the  substance 
of  the  conversation.  They  consider  that  words  and  technicalities 
are  too  often  mere  false  sheaths  to  conceal  a corrupt  and  imperfect 
interior.  They  admire  only  the  truth  and  the  goods  of  truth,  and 
not  the  deceptive  shades  that  are  often  thrown  upon  it  in  commu- 
nicating it  to  others,  and  to  the  world.  In  this  particular  they  excel 
the  inhabitants  of  Venus  or  the  Earth ; but  in  all  others  they  are  im- 
perfect in  correspondence  with  the  situation  that  their  planet  sustains 
in  reference  to  other  earths. 

They  have  no  well-organized  societies  or  communities  ; but  rather 
are  governed  by  an  ignorant  arbitration  that  has  been  instituted 
among  them.  But  this  planet  has  not  been  inhabited  longer  than 
about  eight  thousand  years ; while  the  other  habitable  planets  have 
been  peopled  for  innumerable  ages. 

War  and  persecution  have  prevailed  among  them  to  an  extreme 
extent ; and  strife,  and  malice,  and  all  things  that  result  from  igno- 
rance and  folly,  have  obstructed  their  progress  for  many  ages.  And 
at  this  moment,  one  of  those  destructive  battles  is  about  being  con- 
summated. They  manifest  all  the  characteristics  belonging  to  the 
most  ferocious  animals.  Their  implements  for  the  destruction  of 
one  another,  are  curiously  hewn  stones,  which  are  thrown  from  a 
sling  at  each  other,  and  ^vhich  when  they  strike,  cause  horrible 
incisions. 

Theirbody  is  covered  with  a kind  of  hair,  and  their  countenances 
are  very  full  and  dark  ; and  the  whole  appearance  of  the  body  would 
be  to  us  no  more  pleasing  than  that  of  the  orang-outang. 

And  as  they  are  now  existing,  they  show  forth  all  the  results  natu- 
rally arising  from  a degraded  situation  and  a depressed  intellect. 
They  are  in  a more  unfavorable  condition  than  the  inhabitants  of  any 
other  planet : but  still,  in  the  general  contemplation,  they  are  uses 
for  the  accomplishment  of  more  perfect  ends.  They  ate  rudimen- 
tal  materials  that  are  gradually  ascending  to  higher  stages  of  refine- 
ment ; but  only  as  elements  disunite,  the  highest  from  the  lowest, 
and  ascend  to  enter  into  new  and  more  perfect  forms. 

Thus  the  inhabitants  of  Venus  and  Mercury  are  in  some  'particu 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


209 


lars  above  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth ; but  generally , much  more 
gross  and  imperfect. 

§ 30.  Concerning  the  luminous  Centre  of  our  Solar  System,  and 
the  indescribable  results  of  its  inherent  pregnation,  much  has  been, 
and  much  more  might  be  said.  But  as  it  is  the  body  that  contained  all 
else  that  now  exists  within  its  powerful  influence,  it  was  spoken  of  in 
general  terms  before  the  descriptions  of  the  planets  were  given. 
Many  conceptions  have  been  formed  in  reference  to  the  condition  of 
the  Sun  at  the  present  time  ; but  as  these  have  been  formed  by  a 
process  of  analogical  reasoning  not  altogether  allowable,  it  is  proper 
that  I should  mention  some  of  the  general  features  of  this  great 
Centre. 

Its  diameter  has  not  been  as  yet  correctly  determined.  It  has 
been  calculated  as  being  eight  hundred  and  eighty-six  thousand  miles 
in  diameter,  and  the  results  of  calculations  have  varied  from  this  to 
that  of  a million  miles.  Also  its  exceedingly  luminous  atmosphere 
has  given  rise  to  the  opinion  that  it  is  surrounded  by  a phosphores- 
cent accumulation  of  particles,  the  decomposition  of  which  produces 
light.  And  also  the  dark  portions  that  are  occasionally  seen,  are 
thought  to  be  spaces  unoccupied  by  its  atmosphere.  But  as  the 
appearance  of  a substance  is  not  always  an  indication  of  its  real 
reality,  so  in  this  particular,  as  in  many  others,  external  observations 
have  failed  to  give  a true  conception  of  the  thing  observed. 

The  ^cQnceivable  quantity  of  materials  that  are  still  contained  in 
this  body,  may  be  inferred  from  the  previous  description  given  of  its 
primary  condition.  The  particles  still  existing  in  the  Sun,  are  of  a 
gross  nature  in  some  portions,  while  at  the  surface  it  is  constantly 
evolving  refined  elements,  in  the  form  of  heat,  light,  and  electricity. 
These  elements  are  constantly  emanating  from  its  interior,  and  their 
combination -.prevents  the  success  of  telescopic  observations. 

Concerrufig  the  ultimate  productions  of  this  body,  more  will  be 
said  hereafter;  but  inasmuch  as  they  have  no  possible  bearing  upon 
the  objects  of  the  present  generalization,  it  is  unnecessary  to  speak 
of  them  now. 

The  Sun  therefore  is  the  central  body  from  which  all  the  planets 
and  satellites  within  the  extreme  circumference  of  its  influence,  have 
been  formed.  It  is  yet  incessantly  giving  off  particles,  rarified  and 
refined,  and  exerting  an  orderly  influence  upon  all  forms  and  parti- 
cles in  the  planetary  system.  It  can  not  decrease  in  magnitude  ; for 

U 


210 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


it  has  become  a planet  of  the  requisite  degree  of  density,  belonging 
to  a more  interior  Centre.  Also  it  has  formed  all  that  its  substance 
can  well  produce  ; for  it  is  now  counterbalanced  by  the  magnitude 
of  the  whole  planetary  system  united ; while  the  Whole  is  conjoined 
harmoniously,  and  all  motions  are  in  accordance  with  the  general, 
established  law  of  gravitation  or  association. 

It  is  now  necessary  that  a general  contemplation  upon  these  crea 
tions  should  be  instituted,  in  order  that  the  mind  may  properly  con- 
ceive of  original  Design. 

It  has  been  established  incontestably  that  there  is  an  order  and  uni- 
formity manifested  in  the  formation  of  our  Solar  System  — that  from 
the  first  body  evolved,  to  the  last,  there  is  an  ascending  order  and 
degree  of  refinement  distinctly  evident  in  each.  For  Mercury  being 
the  last  in  formation,  is  consequently  composed  of  denser  materials 
than  any  other,  and  hence  takes  the  lowest  point,  and  observes  the 
greatest  velocity  of  motion.  And  it  has  been  established  by  astro- 
nomical observations,  that  as  we  recede  from  this  planet  toward  Ura- 
nus and  others,  a superior  refinement  is  observed  in  each  from  the 
nearest  to  the  most  remote,  and  a corresponding  modification  in  their 
motions  and  their  relations  to  each  other.  Also,  that  the  planets  that 
were  further  off  evolved  satellites,  while  those  which  were  nearer  did 
not : for  refinement  and  activity  are  consequent  results  of  each  other ; 
while  grossness,  imperfection,  and  comparative  rest,  are  the  results 
of  such  sluggish  materials  as  compose  the  nearer  planets.  Therefore 
there  is  a perfect  order  in  the  formation  of  the  planets,  and  in  their 
relations  to  each  other  and  to  the  Sun  ; and  there  is  a perfect  uni- 
formity in  the  connexion  of  the  Sun  with  them  all. 

The  law  of  ceaseless  'progression  is  also  established  : but  while 
Jupiter  and  Saturn  are  in  the  mind,  the  condition  of  planets  less  per- 
fect, and  which  were  subsequently  formed,  would  seem  to  indicate  a 
retrogression , — but  not  if  it  is  properly  borne  in  mind  that  the  lowest 
contains  the  highest,  undeveloped,  and  that  the  highest  pervades  the 
lower,  and  extracts  therefrom  all  particles  fitted  for  higher  degrees  of 
association.  For  the  composition  of  Mercury  has,  undeveloped,  all 
that  Saturn  has  manifested.  Therefore  Mercury  typifies  a higher 
formation  ; and  so  does  each  planet  represent  higher  degrees  of  per- 
fection. For  there  is  nothing  existing  in  the  Universe  so  low  and 
imperfect  that  it  does  not  represent  some  higher  spheres ; and  there 
are  no  forms  or  substances  in  being  so  perfect  that  they  are  not  the 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


211 


lowest  of  some  still  more  perfect.  Therefore  there  is  a constant  indi- 
cation of  transformation,  and  also  of  ceaseless  progression  ; for  it  is 
impossible,  as  has  been  proved  by  previous  investigation,  for  any  atom 
to  take  a lower  degree  than  that  which  it  at  any  one  time  occupies ; 
but  all  must  of  necessity  ascend  to  higher  conditions. 

Moreover,  the  Sun  is  a never-failing  symbol  and  Embryo  of  all 
material  formations.  It  is  the  Vortex,  the  great  Centre  that  pre- 
viously contained  all  that  has  been  since  breathed  into  existence  as 
connected  with  our  planetary  System.  And  the  materials  existing  in 
this  great  Centre  became  impregnated  and  active  by  virtue  of  inherent 
forces, — the  result  of  which  was  the  teeming  productions  which  are 
now  manifested.  Therefore  it  is  a body  corresponding  to  the  Sun 
of  the  Universe;  and  all  its  planets  correspond  to  the  great  planets 
which  the  original  Sun  breathed  into  being.  And  the  satellites  cor- 
respond to  the  planets  which  the  great  planets  or  suns  produced. 
Thus  our  Solar  System  typifies  slightly,  the  inconceivable  Solar  Sys- 
tem of  the  Univercoelum ! 


§ 31.  The  vegetable  formations  of  each  planet,  indicate  the  char- 
acter of  the  primary  particles  which  produced  them.  They  also 
represent  higher  stages  of  formation.  And  it  is  from  the  existence  of 
plants,  manifesting  Motion  and  Life,  that  the  animal  kingdom  is 
properly  conceived  of ; for  there  is  a close  connexion  existing  be- 
tween the  animal  and  vegetable  kingdoms.  And  as  the  animal  king- 
dom is  one  degree  more  perfect  than  the  vegetable,  it  is  characterized 
by  Sensation  as  a result  of  Motion  and  Life.  Therefore  these  three 
principles,  Motion,  Life,  and  Sensation,  have  combined  in  one.  And 
it  is  only  when  we  form  a proper  conception  of  Sensation,  that  we 
know  of  Instinct.  Then  again  the  animal  kingdom  typifies  still 
higher  stages  of  refinement ; and  an  unbroken  connexion  exists  be- 
tween the  animal  and  Man.  — And  Man  stands  as  an  ultimate  of  all 
the  materials  and  forms  upon  the  planet’s  surface,  showing  a combi- 
nation of  the  principles  of  Motion,  Life,  Sensation,  and  Intelligence. 
Motion  also  typifies  Life,  and  this  Sensation,  and  Sensation  Intelli- 
gence. 

Therefore  the  inhabitants  of  Mercury  represent  higher  forms  of  the 
same  species.  And  so  the  human  inhabitants  of  each  planet  typify 
and  signify  the  existence  of  some  more  perfect  forms,  and  some  higher 
stages  of  human  organization.  And  there  are  successive  links  of  con- 
nexion observed  between  the  vegetable,  animal,  and  man,  as  forma- 


212 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


tions  of  each  planet,  and  an  unbroken  chain  joining  the  inhabitants 
of  the  lowest  planet  to  the  comparative  spiritual  inhabitants  of  the 
highest,  for  one  represents  the  other,  and  none  of  them  represent  the 
least  ietrogrcssion. 

And  on  grounds  like  these  here  furnished,  have  we  based  our  ideas 
of  opposites ; for  when  meditating  upon  the  degraded  and  imperfect 
condition  of  the  inhabitants  of  Mercury,  and  contrasting  them  with 
the  inhabitants  of  Saturn,  whose  composition,  both  physical  and  men- 
tal, transcends  almost  our  highest  conceptions  of  the  celestial  forms ; 
and  when  considering  the  extreme  distance  between  them,  and  ob- 
serving all  things  so  apparently  disconnected,  — the  mind  at  once 
conceives  the  idea  of  positive  opposites.  For  what  can  be  more  en- 
tirely opposite  and  antagonistic  than  the  lowest  stage  of  physical  for- 
mation is  to  the  highest  degree  of  material  refinement?  — or  than 
ignorance  and  imbecility  are  to  the  sweeping  intellect,  and  to  the 
spontaneous  conceptions  flowing  from  the  interior  of  a perfected 
mental  constitution  ? Or  what  can  be  more  entirely  opposite  than 
death  and  life,  good  and  evil,  or  light  and  darkness  ? 

It  is  evident  that  to  conceive  properly  of  light,  life,  and  spiritual 
intelligence,  we  must  first  see  that  which  is  apparently  the  opposite. 
And  the  very  moment  that  we  see  the  lower  conditions,  we  form  a 
conception  of  higher  spheres ; but  this  we  do  not  do  until  the  former 
conditions  are  made  visible. 

It  is  now  manifest  to  every  enlarged  understanding,  that  the  lowest 
typifies  the  highest ; and  the  very  moment  you  conceive  of  such  a 
representation,  all  idea  of  opposites  is  annihilated.  And  as  the  first 
must  exist  before  the  ultimate , so  all  things  must  harmonize  perfectly, 
and  conform  to  the  established  law  of  universal  and  eternal  progres- 
sion. Therefore  opposites  do  not  exist ; but  that  which  is  gross, 
and  imperfect,  and  apparently  opposed  to  higher  developments, 
merely  has  not  progressed  to  the  standard  of  perfection  that  we  have 
erected. 

The  vegetable  formations  in  their  adaptations,  also  give  us  the  true 
conception  of'?zses  for  the  accomplishment  of  more  perfect  ends  or 
ultimates.  The  plants  not  only  receive  nourishment  from  the  min- 
eral kingdom,  but  also  from  the  atmosphere  ; and  they  more  percep- 
tibly give  to  the  atmosphere,  particles  and  elements  to  sustain  higher 
forms.  The  animal  kingdom  receives  its  nourishment  from  the  vege- 
table, and  from  the  atmosphere  that  it  partly  produces.  Therefore 
the  plants  are  uses  adapted  to  the  wants  of  the  animal  kingdom.  So 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


213 


likewise  are  these  two  kingdoms  adapted  to  the  uses  of  Man.  Herein 
again  is  the  general  law  made  manifest ; for  the  lowest  not  only  typi- 
fies and  represents  the  highest,  but  one  is  absolutely  necessary  to  the 
existence  of  the  other.  And  without  general  principles,  putting  forth 
general  uses,  to  produce  general  ends,  none  of  these  forms  would  have 
existed.  But  the  evident  truth  that  in  everything  cause  and  effect 
are  inseparable,  not  only  establishes  an  unbroken  connexion  between 
every  particle  in  the  Universe,  but  presents  to  our  minds,  and  to 
every  inductive  mind,  the  highest  representation  of  the  original  Design 
conceived  by  the  Great  Positive  Mind  ! 

Thus  in  our  Solar  System  all  things  in  the  Universe  are  repre- 
sented. And  as  it  is  impossible  for  the  mind  to  form  an  adequate 
conception  of  anything  beyond  the  harmonious  System  to  which  we 
belong,  this  is  the  appropriate  field  for  present  investigation.  For 
though  thought  is  unlimited  and  uncontrolled,  thought  is  not  knowl- 
edge. But  it  is  useful  to  investigate  that  which  sustains  so  close  a 
connexion  with  the  investigator  as  to  admit  of  comprehension ; and 
the  knowledge  thereof  will  promote  his  peace  and  happiness. 

The  description  that  has  been  given  of  the  order  in  which  the  plan- 
ets were  formed  by  an  evolution  from  the  Sun,  differs  exceedingly  from 
the  description  given  of  the  formation  of  the  Univercoelum.  For  our 
Sun  w'as  represented  as  originally  extending  its  substance  and  atmo- 
sphere to  the  orbit  of  the  outermost  planet ; and  it  has  been  shown 
that  by  a shrinking  and  condensation,  and  an  evolution  of  particles, 
the  Sun  and  the  planets  have  assumed  their  present  form  and  condi- 
tion : while  the  Sun  of  the  Univercoelum — the  inconceivable  Centre 
around  which  infinitude,  almost,  revolves  — was  described  as  origi 
nally  the  only  Form  in  being,  and  as  emanating  successive  and  con- 
centric Circles  of  Suns,  each  of  which  produced  other  suns,  planets, 
and  satellites,  until  the  sixth  Circle  was  formed.  As  one  and  the 
samd  Principle  must  produce  all  things  in  the  regions  of  space,  it  is 
evident  that  only  one  description  of  formations  can  be  correct.  Inas- 
much as  this  discrepancy  appears  conspicuous,  it  is  necessary  to 
mention  the  intention  of  the  previous  descriptions. 

The  object  of  describing  the  Univercoelum  as  it  has  been  described, 
was  to  enable  the  mind  to  form  a most  extended  conception  of  infinite 
space.  And  the  Great  Centre  being  inconceivable,  and  its  emana- 
tions still  more  so,  it  was  described  in  that  manner  so  that  an  obscure 
conception  might  be  formed.  But  as  the  Solar  System  is  more  im- 


214 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


mediately  connected  with  the  observations  and  investigations  of  man 
kind,  it  was,  in  speaking  of  this,  necessary  to  give  a correct  idea  of 
the  order  and  process  of  the  planetary  formations ; and  from  this  de- 
scription we  may  conceive  of  the  Univercoelum,  and  from  this  alone. 
The  general  correspondence  existing  between  all  things,  will  be  seen 
more  conspicuously  hereafter,  especially  when  the  description  of  the 
earth  and  all  things  therein  existing  shall  have  been  finished.  Then 
I receive  impressions  from  higher  spheres,  wherein  exists  the  knowl 
edge  of  all  interior  and  eternal  truths. 


§ 32.  I come  now  to  the  portion  of  this  revelation  that  is  most 
immediately  connected  with  the  curiosity  and  interest  of  every  en- 
lightened mind,  and  upon  the  subject  of  which  an  incalculable  amount 
of  thought  and  speculation  has  been  conceived.  It  is  a subject  that 
has  excited  the  wonder  and  inquiry  of  the  generations  of  all  ages,  and 
of  the  inhabitants  of  every  portion  of  the  earth ; and  it  still  involves 
a question  of  immense  interest  as  undecided.  It  is  a subject  in  re- 
spect to  which  philosophical  and  psychological  minds  have  put  forth 
all  their  powers  of  investigation,  and  concerning  which  there  has  been 
a constant  antagonism  between  philosophy  and  theology,  and  between 
chimeras  and  reason.  — This  subject  is  the  origin  and  begin- 
ning OF  THE  WORLD. 

Philosophy  has  endeavored  to  account  for  the  origin  and  formation 
of  this  globe  on  principles  of  Nature  and  Reason  ; while  theology  has 
put  forth  every  effort  to  sustain  the  opinions  entertained  by  primitive 
generations,  and  sanctioned  by  theological  authority.  Scientific  phi- 
losophy has  indisputably  demonstrated  the  immutability  of  natural 
laws,  the  immortality  of  Truth,  and  the  unchanging  nature  of  all  prin- 
ciples governing  the  Universe.  And  thought  has  partially  lifted  the 
veil  that  has  so  long  concealed  the  truth  from  the  minds  of  the  world ; 
and  this  has  been  done  by  thought  alone,  the  most  exalted  faculty 
belonging  to  the  human  mind. 

Nevertheless,  general  truth  has  been  arrived  at  by  pursuing  curved 
lines  through  the  mythology  and  superstition  of  every  age  and  nation. 
The  lines  that  lead  to  truth  unmingled  with  error,  however,  are  per- 
fectly straight;  and  these,  if  pursued,  lead  gradually  beyond  the 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


215 


realms  of  darkness  and  ignorance  that  may  have  environed  the  mind 
of  the  traveller ; and  every  step  that  is  taken,  ushers  him  into  a more 
beautiful  light.  And  thus  he  approaches  Truth  by  the  light  of  Rea- 
son and  the  unchanging  laws  of  Nature : and  when  he  arrives  at  the 
Truth,  he  finds  himself  surrounded  with  grandeur  and  magnificence 
that  can  be  conceived  of  and  appreciated  only  by  one  who  has  the 
supreme  love  of  eternal  Truth  dwelling  within  him. 

The  mythological  opinions  of  primitive  nations  have  been  gradu- 
ally and  imperceptibly  modified,  as  knowledge  has  been  unfolded  in 
the  minds  of  mankind.  And  these  modifications  have  been  so  im- 
perceptible to  each  subsequent  generation,  that  the  nineteenth  century 
only  unfolds  a true  conception  of  the  change,  by  its  contrast  of  truth, 
and  light,  and  knowledge,  with  the  ignorance  and  superstition  of  the 
extreme  ages  of  antiquity. 

Some  have  ignorantly  supposed  that  the  world  assumed  its  present 
form  and  condition  in  an  instant  of  time ; and  that  it  was  supported 
in  its  present  position  by  gigantic  beings,  each  of  which  was  supported 
by  others  still  more  powerful,  until  supposition  lost  the  foundation 
upon  which  they  all  stood,  amid  the  realms  of  fancy  and  imagination. 
And  the  opinion  reigned  from  this  period  up  to  a few  centuries  ago, 
that  the  world  was  perfectly  immoveable,  and  perfectly  flattened  at  its 
surface.  And  this  belief  prevailed  universally,  until  a mind  became 
enlightened  through  the  exercise  of  reason,  and  discovered  the  true 
position  and  figure  of  the  earth,  and  its  relation  to  other  planetary 
bodies.  And  having  philosophically  demonstrated  the  correctness 
of  his  position,  he  ventured,  with  an  unparalleled  audacity,  to  reveal 
it  to  the  minds  of  the  world.  Superficial  theology  was  at  this  time, 
reigning  with  all  the  power  and  authority  of  omnipotent  law.  The 
light  that  he  presented  to  the  world  wras  so  far  above  the  darkness 
that  prevailed,  that  the  human  mind  was  generally  dazzled  with  its 
brightness.  The  darkness  was  impenetrable,  and  therefore  the  light 
was  repulsed  ; and  the  discoverer  was  nearly  sacrificed  upon  the  altar 
of  ignorance,  superstition,  and  bigotry.  But  the  light  was  not  alto- 
gether concealed,  but  imperceptibly  flowed  into  the  minds  of  a few 
others ; and  by  emanations  from  these,  others  also  received  the 
truth  — until  the  whole  truth  became  light  and  dispersed  the  dark- 
ness : and  the  nineteenth  century  stands  as  an  evidence  of  the  intel- 
lectual resurrection. 

Others,  again,  have  supposed  that  from  an  incomprehensible 
Nothing,  a tangible  Something  was  created  ; and  to  admit  that  some- 


216 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


thing  always  existed,  was  contrary  to  the  assumptions  of  a mytho- 
logical theology.  And  by  a gradual  modification  of  these  opinions, 
a duration  from  the  creation  of  the  world  was  fixed  upon  by  many 
primitive  nations,  which  varied  from  six  thousand  to  forty  thousand 
years.  And  the  records  of  ancient  nations  are  brought  forward  to 
sustain  and  confirm  these  opinions  in  reference  to  the  world’s  origin 
and  duration. 

Yet  all  these  opinions  have  become  essentially  changed;  and  phi- 
losophical and  natural  investigations  have  served  to  erect  a more  sub- 
stantial doctrine  — one  that  does  conform  to  the  highest  suggestions 
of  Reason,  and  to  the  sanctions  of  immortal  Truth.  Yet  so  imper- 
fect have  been  the  endeavors  to  arrive  at  the  true  result,  and  the 
paths  through  which  the  mind  has  travelled  have  been  so  irregu- 
lar and  diversified,  that  it  has  taken  many  thousand  years  to  pro- 
gress to  the  point  which  the  present  age  has  attained. 

Theology  and  philosophy,  therefore,  have  been  apparently  op- 
posed to  each  other.  While  one  was  endeavoring  with  all  its  ener- 
gies to  discover  an  indestructible  basis  upon  which  a true  theory  of 
the  origin  of  the  world  could  rest,  the  other  was  putting  forth  all  the 
deplorable  obstructions  that  naturally  arise  from  ignorance  and  fanat- 
icism. And  so  universal  was  this  prevailing  enthusiasm,  that  philos- 
ophy for  a long  time  struggled  in  vain  to  overcome  the  obstacles 
which  it  threw  in  her  path.  And  the  philosophic  mind  has  been 
endeavoring  to  become  unchained  and  free  from  things  that  are  not 
true,  that  it  may  seek  those  which  are  unchangeably  and  eternally 
steadfast.  And  this  is  the  constant  yearning  of  a truth-loving  mind  ; 
while  the  constant  yearning  of  a narrow  and  undeveloped  mind  is  to 
conceal  the  light  and  truths  which  Nature  sets  forth,  and  to  erect 
in  its  stead  a superficial  chimera. 

Yet  the  question  how  the  materials  and  essences  that  compose  this 
world,  were  produced,  and  how  they  were  formed  into  their  present 
condition,  has  not  been  satisfactorily  answered.  And  as  it  is  so  inti- 
mately connected  with  the  aspirations  of  every  inquiring  mind,  it  is 
necessary  to  give  an  adequate  answer — one  that  will  be  distinctly 
comprehended  by  those  who  have  an  enlarged  conception  of  the 
physical  laws  of  the  Universe. 

For  this  world  has  given  birth  to  all  the  thoughts  that  have  been 
conceived  by  man  here  existing  concerning  the  constitution  of  things. 
It  is  the  theatre  of  human  action ; it  is  the  habitation  of  pain  and 
pleasure,  of  life  and  death,  of  knowledge  and  ignorance.  And  it  is 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


217 


this  world  that  has  given  birth  to  all  the  beautiful  and  variegated 
flowers  and  foliage  that  adorn  the  vegetable  kingdom.  It  is  the 
birthplace  of  the  innumerable  animal  existences  which  come  into 
being  and  sink  into  repose  before  the  eyes  of  man.  And  the  earth, 
and  Nature,  and  her  laws,  have  given  existence  to  Man , the  ultimate 
of  material  perfection.  It  has  endowed  him  with  faculties,  and 
powers,  and  sensibilities,  the  extent  of  which  is  not  yet  compre- 
hended. It  has  stamped  upon  every  particle  of  his  constitution  the 
impress  of  eternal  Design.  It  openly  manifests  the  immutable  laws 
by  which  his  organism  was  produced  : And  all  these  ineffable  truths 
yield  to  the  powers  of  an  enlightened  mind  ! 

And  the  mental  constitution  of  man  is  so  distinctly  symbolical  of 
higher  spheres  of  purity  and  refinement,  that  the  most  degraded  of 
all  beings  that  ever  have  existed  upon  the  earth,  have  formed  some 
obscure  conceptions  of  the  higher  spheres. 

But  instead  of  passing  off  in  sublime  peregrinations  into  the  fields 
of  Nature ; instead  of  cherishing  the  incessant  and  spontaneous 
inflowings  of  thought  respecting  the  foundation  and  magnificent  struc- 
ture of  the  Universe,  and  enjoying  the  steady  unfoldings  of  light  and 
truth,  the  mind  has  left  Nature  and  Reason,  and  gone  in  search  of 
that  which  is  altogether  unwarrantable,  and  exceedingly  destructive 
to  the  happiness  of  the  world.  And  thus  man  has  lost  sight  of  the 
true  relation  existing  between  Nature  and  science,  and  science  and 
himself.  And  so  depressed  and  degraded  has  been  the  condition  of 
the  world,  that  language  is  inadequate  to  describe  it,  and  thoughts 
and  feelings  can  only  supply  the  place  of  expressions. 

Such  has  been,  and  such  to  an  extent,  still  is,  the  condition  of 
things  which  this  world  has  borne  into  existence.  What,  then,  can 
be  of  more  value  and  importance  than  a knowledge  of  the  world’s 
original  condition,  and  of  its  ultimate  termination?  — a world  in 
which  Nature  has  put  forth  the  most  tender  efforts  to  yield  a happy 
race!  — a form  in  which  Nature  has  so  perfectly  adapted  all  things 
to  the  wants  and  requirements  of  each  other,  and  to  Man,  that  recip- 
rocal justice,  universal  happiness,  and  eternal  righteousness,  might 
prevail  throughout  all  its  diversified  avenues  and  recesses ! And  so 
pure,  so  good,  and  so  indescribably  magnificent,  have  been  the  pro- 
ductions of  this  world,  that  it  is  not  astonishing  that  all  the  interests 
of  man  are  centred  in  the  inquiry  concerning  its  origin  and  destination. 

Let,  then,  an  unprejudiced  and  philosophical  disposition  charac- 
terize your  minds,  so  that  you  may  be  enabled  to  follow  distinctly 


21S 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


the  lines  and  indices  of  the  immutable  principles  of  Nature,  to  their 
legitimate  terminations.  And  let  it  be  from  a profound  reverence — • 
from  an  interior  and  supreme  love  of  these  principles’  Author,  that 
jiou  adhere  to  their  legitimate  teachings.  Let  the  mind  be  deeply- 
impressed  that  all  principles  of  Nature  are  merely  breathings,  and 
emanations  from  a First  Principle  — from  a primitive  Essence  — from 
the  Great  Positive  Mind  ! And  let  Nature  be  considered  as  the 
thoughts  and  effects  of  this  great  Mind.  And  let  all  her  productions 
be  understood  as  the  highest  types  and  representatives  of  her  inhe- 
rent and  never-dying  energies,  having  their  origin  in  the  First  Prin- 
ciple of  all  things. 

In  entering  upon  generalizations  so  immense  and  stupendous 
as  the  subject  under  present  contemplation  requires,  it  is  necessary 
that  every  general  and  particular  as  connected  with  the  course  to  be 
pursued,  should  be  distinctly  understood,  so  that  nothing  may  bo 
misconceived  or  misinterpreted.  And  in  order  to  understand  these 
things  properly,  the  terms  used,  and  their  application,  should  be 
explained. 

When  speaking  of  Matter,  I have  reference  to  the  tangible  and 
material  combinations  of  the  earth  and  all  things  therein  contained, 
including  the  substances  and  essences  that  are  existing  in  the  material 
Universe.  When  speaking  of  the  Laws  of  Matter,  I have  reference 
to  the  visible  tendencies  of  matter,  such  as  have  been  termed  attrac- 
tion, repulsion,  gravitation,  chemical  affinity,  and  association.  When 
speaking  of  the  laws  of  the  Universe,  I have  no  reference  to  the  laws 
of  Sensation  or  Intelligence  ; for  to  Man  these  laws  appear  far  above 
any  other  laws  governing  matter.  For  the  mind  does  not  perceive 
the  connexion  between  the  lower  and  the  higher,  or  the  material  and 
the  spiritual,  though  in  reality  the  law  is  the  same  in  both.  But  it 
differs  only  as  the  composition  and  organization  differ ; for  the  mate- 
rial gradually  ascends  to  spiritual  composition  and  is  subjected  to 
spiritual  laws,  by  a chain  of  unbroken  and  ceaseless  development. 
But  this  thought  is  too  immense  for  the  mind  to  grasp,  and  especially 
to  comprehend  in  all  its  main  ramifications.  Therefore,  while  speak- 
ing of  Matter  and  Motion,  reference  will  be  had  to  the  general  physi- 
cal laws  of  the  Universe ; and  in  this  manner  should  the  terms  used 
be  understood.  F or  the  law  that  governs  exalted  compositions  will 
not  be  referred  to  in  speaking  of  the  formation  and  history  of  the 
earth.  


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


219 


§ 33.  At  a period  too  remote  for  computation,  there  was  an  accu- 
mulation of  an  inconceivable  and  incalculable  magnitude,  composed 
of  atoms  and  particles  that  previously  constituted  the  atmosphere  of  the 
Sun.  And  the  latter  was  an  inconceivable  time  in  producing  this  con- 
jugation of  particles  — whose  consentaneousness  was  such  that  they 
subsequently  became  condensed,  and  by  the  action  of  perpetual  ener- 
gies inherently  existing,  gradually  (and  so  gradually  that  the  lapse  of 
time  during  the  process  is  unimaginable)  produced  the  oblately  sphe- 
roidal form  of  the  earth  and  its  satellite.  The  primitive  diameter  of 
this  great  agglomeration  of  particles  could  not  be  well  determined  ; 
for  it  subsequently  and  continually  decreased  in  magnitude  according 
to  the  condensation  and  consolidation  of  the  whole  mass. 

Before  entering  into  any  particulars  concerning  the  formation  of 
the  crust  or  coating  of  this  great  mass,  it  is  necessary  to  contemplate 
its  condition  and  appearance  as  the  same  would  have  been  manifest 
to  the  senses.  The  v'hole  body  of  atoms  was  sustained  in  its  appro- 
priate po'sition  by  the  mutual  relations  existing  between  it  and  the 
Sun.  The  particles  thrown  from  the  Sun  became  associated  by  the 
natural  affinity  which  they  had  for  each  other  as  owing  to  the  similarly 
refined  condition  which  they  had  arrived  at  before  leaving  the  great 
central  Mass.  The  force  by  which  they  left  the  Sun  is  termed  repul- 
sion ; and  their  association  together  is  called  attraction:  and  the 
position  of  the  earth  in  reference  to  the  Sun  is  the  result  of  what  is 
supposed  to  be  the  law's  of  attraction  and  repulsion.  And  as  these 
are  terms  familiarly  applied  to  these  conditions  of  matter,  it  would  be 
necessary  to  use  them  if  they  were  not  evidently  incorrect,  and  em- 
ployed in  the  absence  of  a proper  understanding  of  the  natural  and 
mutual  laws  pervading  the  material  Universe. 

Particles  incessantly  emanating  from  the  Sun  as  suitable  to  enter 
into  the  composition  of  this  igneous  mass,  gravitated  to  it,  and  imme- 
diately established  an  association  with  it.  The  whole  mass  was  in  a 
state  of  igneous  fluidity,  and  was  of  inconceivable  magnitude.  It 
contained  heat  of  an  intensity  far  exceeding  any  that  is  known  to  the 
inhabitants  of  the  earth.  It  was  an  immense  liquid  sphere,  which 
was  agitated  from  the  centre  to  the  surface  with  indescribable  undu- 
lations, such  as  would  naturally  occur  in  so  great  a mass  of  uncon- 
densed and  molten  lava.  And  while  it  was  observing  the  impulse 
of  the  force  originally  given  it,  it  consequently  assumed  rapidly  forms 
ascending  from  the  angular  to  the  spherical,  gradually  developing 
diameters,  axes,  and  poles.  And  as  the  development  became  more 


220 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


perfect,  its  rotary  motion  became  established  and  improved.  Its  revo- 
lutions were  also  followed  by  the  assuming  of  proper  bulk  and  form, 
and  position  to  obey  its  original  impetus. 

But  before  this  condition  was  produced,  a greater  amount  of  time 
elapsed  than  can  be  possibly  imagined  ; for  in  speaking  of  the  gradual 
assumption  of  forms,  and  the  establishment  of  rotary  and  orbicular 
motions,  I have  reference  to  the  development  of  these  after  the  great 
mass  had  undergone  a great  condensation. 

The  rotary  motion  is  an  effect  produced  by  the  impetus  of  parti- 
cles and  atoms  rushing  to  the  great  body.  The  same  is  represented 
in  the  forces  by  which  motion  is  applied  to  any  round  body.  And 
its  revolutionary  motion  in  an  elliptic  orbit,  having  an  aphelion  and 
perihelion  in  contraposition  to  the  Sun,  is  an  effect  produced  by  the 
general  impetus  given  it — by  a perpetual  application  of  the  forces 
producing  the  rotary  motion.  And  inasmuch  as  its  orbit  is  elliptical, 
the  fevidence  is  manifest  that  the  whole  body  was  thrown  from  another 
body  more  immense,  having  the  same  motions,  which  were  in  accord- 
ance with  its  own  immensity. 

The  proposition  that  the  original  condition  of  the  materials  com- 
posing the  earth  was  that  of  igneous  fluidity  is  evidently  correct,  as 
is  manifest  from  the  condition  and  appearances  which  the  great  mass 
has  subsequently  assumed.  That  it  could  not  have  been  solid,  or 
elastic,  is  evident  from  the  form  of  the  earth  and  of  all  other  planets. 
It  would  be  impossible  for  any  solid  or  elastic  substance  to  assume  a 
spherical  form  ; for  the  extreme  density  of  solids,  and  the  adhesive 
and  repulsive  tendency  of  elastics,  would  exclude  the  possibility  of 
matter  in  either  state  assuming  a globular  form.  It  is  evident  from 
this  (and  there  are  other  general  and  well-ascertained  truths  to  sub- 
stantiate it),  that  the  primal  condition  of  the  earth  was  that  of  a kind 
of  fire-matter,  in  a state  of  active  fluidity. 

It  would  be  inappropriate  for  me  to  mention  the  experiments  that 
have  been  performed,  the  result  of  which  has  been  to  establish  this 
fact  beyond  the  possibility  of  refutation.  — And  while  I am  impressed 
to  speak  truthfully  concerning  the  original  and  subsequent  conditions 
of  the  Universe,  it  would  be  interfering  with  the  efforts  of  philosoph- 
ical minds  to  merely  repeat  old,  or  introduce  new,  illustrations  of  what 
is  now  nearly  incontestably  established.  For  let  it  be  remembered 
that  the  proposition  or  theory  is  a general  one  ; and  let  it  also  be 
duly  impressed,  that  the  evidence  presented  in  its  favor  is  as  general 
and  comprehensive.  Therefore  the  argument  takes  no  cognizance 


nature’s  divine  revelations.  221 

of  isolated  phenomena  or  opinions ; but  it  is  based  upon  general  ap- 
pearances as  conspiring  to  establish  the  proposition. 

The  fulness  at  the  equator,  presents  another  indication  of  the  same 
truth.  The  cause  of  this  fulness,  together  with  the  form  of  the  earth, 
could  not  be  accounted  for  upon  any  other  ground  than  the  admission 
that  the  Whole  was  originally  in  a state  of  fluidity,  and  subjected  to 
inherent  forces  that  incessantly  acted  upon  it  according  to  chemical, 
mechanical,  and  geometrical  principles. 

§ 34.  That  the  substance  composing  the  earth  originally  compre- 
hended the  orbit  now  observed  by  its  satellite,  and  that  there  was  an 
interchanging  of  particles  going  on  between  each  accumulation  of 
atoms ; and  that  they  sustained  the  position  that  they  do  to  the  Sun 
by  virtue  of  the  relative  affinities  of  particles  composing  the  Sun  and 
them — that  this  theory  is  correct,  can  not  well  be  disputed.  For 
how  could  the  particular  distance,  density,  motions,  and  velocity, 
which  they  manifest  be  determined  by  any  other  law,  or  condition  of 
primeval  matter?  And  by  what  other  process  could  the  earth  and 
its  satellite  assume  ah  identical  position  in  relation  to  other  planets 
and  the  Sun?  This  proposition  is  also  general,  and  the  evidences 
adduced  in  its  favor  are  equally  so. 

And  that  the  original  form  was  angular , ascending  rapidly  to  the 
circular,  is  also  a general  truth.  Representations  of  these  forms  are 
presented  in  the  first  forms  upon  earth,  as  subordinate  to  the  circular 
and  others.  The  trap  and  basalt  that  have  been  thrown  from  the 
interior  of  the  earth  (and  that,  too,  by  the  virtue  of  internal  heat), 
indicate  these  forms  especially,  inasmuch  as  they  are  the  most  prom- 
inent and  rugged  manifestations  in  Nature.  It  is  impossible  for  any 
substance  to  assume  any  form  above  the  angular,  as  the  first.  It 
matters  not  how  rapidly  this  form  is  modified  to  the  circular,  or  spi- 
ral ; for  the  first  must  exist  before  the  second  or  any  other  can. 
Notwithstanding  the  change  may  be  imperceptible  to  the  senses,  yet 
such  must  occur,  in  all  the  lower  states  of  material  composition. 
Forms  may  have  previously  ascended,  and  may  be  bringing  forth 
their  like ; but  their  origin  is  only  referable  to  the  angular,  as  the 
basis  of  all  forms. 

The  proposition  that  the  Whole  was  in  a state  of  undulating  agi- 
tation— of  inconceivable,  wave-like  motion,  caused  by  the  circum- 
stances under  which  the  whole  Body  was  existing,  is  distinctly 
evinced,  not  only  from  the  primitive  history  of  the  earth,  but  in  the 


222 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


fact  that  the  earth  displays  rugged  and  uneven  portions,  termed 
mountains  and  valleys.  These  appearances  are  known  to  exist,  more 
or  less,  in  various  portions  of  the  earth  ; and  it  is  impossible  to  ac- 
count for  their  existence  on  any  other  supposed  original  condition  of 
things.  F or  it  was  only  when  the  fluid  Mass  became  gradually  trans- 
formed near  its  surface  into  an  elastic  state,  that  this  roughness  could 
have  been  produced.  Still,  the  great  body  presented  no  more  rough- 
ness than  any  other  body  thus  subjected  to  the  action  of  the  different 
elements  would  have  presented.  If  this  does  not  prove  the  oceanic 
motion  of  the  whole  Mass,  it  is  left  to  the  investigations  of  other 
minds  to  prove  the  contrary. 

And  the  proposition  that  the  earth  observes  its  motion  as  the  trans- 
mitted and  hereditary  motion  given  it  by  its  Productor,  can  not  be 
well  disputed.  For  it  is  a known  law  among  all  elements,  and  all 
principles  exhibiting  the  relation  of  cause  and  effect,  that  the  object 
acted  upon  will  indicate  the  force  which  acts  on  it.  And  the  effect 
must  be  in  proportion  to  the  cause,  and  there  must  be  a perfect  cor- 
respondence between  the  two,  or  it  can  not  be  demonstrated  that  the 
effect  ever  had  a cause.  And  all  we  know  of  things  as  effects,  is 
dependent  upon  the  knowledge  we  have  of  the  cause  which  produces 
them.  And  the  satellite  manifests  precisely  the  effect  of  what  we 
have  asserted  were  the  forces  acting  upon  it : and  the  earth  in  its 
rotary  and  revolutionary  motions,  and  in  the  observance  of  its  elliptic 
path,  manifests  exactly  that  which  existed  in  what  we  claim  to  have 
been  the  Cause  or  Fountain  which  ushered  it  into  existence.  If  this 
is  not  substantially  and  philosophically  correct,  it  is  the  duty  of  spec- 
ulators to  explain  more  distinctly  the  cause  of  the  motions  of  the 
earth  and  other  planets. 

The  elements  and  constituents  that  were  involved  in  the  great 
earthy  Mass,  were  adequate  in  their  properties  and  qualities,  when 
subjected  to  favorable  conditions,  to  produce  all  forms  that  have  sub- 
sequently been  assumed,  not  only  in  the  mineral  but  in  the  vegetable 
and  animal  kingdoms.  And  the  indescribable  beauty  and  magnifi- 
cence that  were  sequestered  as  undeveloped  in  the  great  Whole,  are 
not  yet  conceived  of  or  comprehended.  F or  as  the  U nivercoelum  was 
the  Embryo  of  all  other  existences,  so  each  form  produces,  through 
successive  modifications  and  assimilations,  all  the  substances  that  gen- 
erate forms  and  entities,  whether  solid,  elastic,  or  fluid,  upon  every 
planet’s  surface.  And  deep  beneath  the  crust  of  this  great  mass, 
there  are  existing  undeveloped  beauties  and  magnificence  such  a3 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


223 


can  not  possibly  be  conceived  of  by  a comparison  of  anything  which 
has  been  developed.  Several  thousand  miles  of  molten  lava  and 
unimaginable  fire  rolls  through  the  subterraneous  abodes  of  the  earth. 
And  there  are  more  stupendous  wonders  contained  in  this  deep  ocean 
of  fire-matter,  than  have  been  ascribed  by  man  on  earth  to  any  of 
the  departments  of  the  Solar  System.  The  admission  of  this  truth 
(and  it  can  not  be  denied)  presses  upon  the  mind  contemplations 
which  transcend  the  power  of  expression,  and  which  almost  over- 
power its  own  energies. 

But  it  is  necessary  to  proceed  to  a description  of  the  formation  of  the 
early  coating  of  this  igneous  centre.  G eological  investigations  have 
done  much  to  familiarize  the  true  principles  of  Nature  to  the  mind ; 
and  they  also  have  done  much  to  establish  an  indestructible  basis  upon 
which  may  be  founded  the  investigations  and  analogical  reasonings  of 
this  and  future  generations,  so  that  by  known  truths  they  may  be  ena- 
bled to  arrive  at  those  which  are  not  so  distinctly  evident  to  the  senses. 
And  so  useful  have  been  the  discoveries  in  the  geological  depart- 
ment, that  they  have  contributed  to  promote  liberal  views  and  specu- 
lations, and  have  greatly  dispersed  the  darkness  that  has  so  long  con- 
cealed the  origin  and  primitive  history  of  our  earth.  Besides,  geol- 
ogy has  led  to  many  useful  classifications,  both  in  the  mineralogical 
and  zoological  developments,  insomuch  that  the  true  basis  of  the  lat- 
ter sciences  appear  to  have  been  discovered.  And  until  these  clas- 
sifications were  made,  and  the  connexion  between  one  science  and 
the  other  was  discovered,  the  mind  could  not  observe  the  adaptation 
of  one  composition  to  another,  nor  could  it  see  the  relation  harmo- 
niously existing  between  the  elements  of  all  sciences  and  of  the 
world.  Many  happy  conclusions  were  previously  arrived  at,  but  the 
bases  on  which  these  were  founded  were  not  altogether  allowable 
until  Geology  took  a conspicuous  position  as  pointing  out  that  which 
originally  existed,  and  as  demonstrating  the  connexions  and  relations 
of  all  other  developments. 

Geology  has  applied  definitive  terms  to  each  formation,  both  of  the 
earthy,  vegetable,  and  animal  kingdoms ; and  the  use  of  these  in  the 
following  revealment,  becomes  both  proper  and  expedient. 

§ 35.  Let  it  be  understood,  then,  that  the  whole  fluid  mass  was  in 
a state  of  motion  and  agitation,  and  that  the  whole  abounded  with 
inconceivable  heat,  the  first  development  of  fire.  While  in  this  con- 
dition, the  elements,  both  interiorly  and  exteriorly,  were  incessantly 


224 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


active.  The  surface  of  the  whole  mass  was  gradually  and  imper- 
ceptibly relieved  of  its  heat ; and  by  a consequent  shrinking  and 
condensation  of  particles,  the  whole  surface  became  united  together 
by  an  elastic  coating. 

It  is  impossible  to  compute  the  time  that  elapsed  after  it  assumed 
this  condition,  before  it  became  sufficiently  consolidated  to  produce 
the  primary,  granite  rock.  This  was  accomplished  by  the  constant 
relief  of  internal  heat — by  the  giving  off  of  that  element  which 
caused  the  fluidity  of  the  surface  previously.  And  as  heat  escaped 
from  the  internal,  so  did  particles  ascend  and  unite  with  the  consoli- 
dated parts.  And  thus  by  a constant  accumulation  and  dispersion 
of  molecular  substances,  the  primary,  or  granite,  was  developed. 

Notwithstanding  the  surface  was  exceedingly  uneven  already,  it 
became  more  so  by  the  catastrophic  and  volcanic  operations  that  fol- 
lowed this  closing  up  of  interior  heat.  The  inconceivable  agitation 
of  the  internal,  the  mighty  conflict  of  the  roaring  elements,  the  ex- 
pansion of  heat  and  particles,  and  their  constant  struggling  to  obtain 
relief,  produced  some  of  the  most  terrific  explosions;  and  rocks 
were  expelled  that  still  stand  as  an  evidence  of  the  original,  internal 
excitement  reigning  throughout  the  bowels  of  the  earth. 

The  whole  domain  of  the  earth’s  surface  was  free  from  the  exist- 
ence of  any  forms  possessing  life  or  sensation.  These  wonderful 
ejections  of  rocks  on  many  portions  of  the  earth’s  surface,  caused 
immense  valleys,  in  which  were  contained  seas  of  almost  bottomless 
depth.  Some  of  these  seas  extended  in  depth  from  the  highest 
points  of  land,  nearly  four  hundred  miles.  These  valleys  were  a 
necessary  accompaniment  of  such  stupendous  prominences. 

At  this  time  the  water  covered  nearly  the  whole  face  of  the  earth. 
This  element  being  an  active  agent,  and  a cause  of  action,  began  its 
powerful  workings  upon  the  sides  of  these  mountains  and  ejected 
rocks.  And  by  the  incessant  action  of  this  excited  element,  these 
rocky  portions  of  the  earth  were  gradually  and  imperceptibly  worn 
away.  And  the  same  cause,  producing  the  same  effect,  is  still  in 
action  throughout  the  watery  wastes  of  the  whole  earth. 

I mention  water  as  being  deposited  in  these  extensive  valleys,  and 
as  producing  such  effects  upon  the  portions  of  rocks  which  it  sur- 
rounded. The  element  known  as  water  was  not  then  existing  as  com- 
posed of  the  same  substantial  elements  with  the  water  now  upon 
the  earth’s  surface.  For  in  the  first  place,  it  was  impossible  for  oxy- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


225 


gen  and  hydrogen  to  have  been  developed,  especially  in  sufficient 
quantities  to  produce  in  combination  these  oceans  of  water. 

Nevertheless,  it  is  known  to  all  investigators  that  oxygen  composes 
a great  part  of  the  whole  crust  of  the  earth  ; and  that  nitrogen  greatly 
pervades  Nature  ; and  that  hydrogen,  intermediately  active  in  many 
substances,  also  enters  into  the  composition  of  water.  And  fluorine 
has  also  been  lately  discovered  ; which  is  rather  an  ultimate  of  nitrogen 
and  hydrogen,  in  the  combined  states  in  which  they  are  often  found. 
And  carbon  exists  in  some  forms,  though  not  so  extensively  as  the 
other  elements,  being  seldom  found  pure,  though  it  sometimes  occurs 
in  fine,  pure  forms,  as  those  of  diamond.  And  there  is  not  existing 
in  Nature  any  combination  of  particles  that  does  not  contain  some  or 
all  of  these  elements ; and  it  is  impossible  to  find  them  totally  dis- 
connected. 

However  inconsistent  the  above  proposition  may  appear,  it  is  nev- 
ertheless true,  — for  the  manifest  reason  that  at  this  stage  of  formation 
oxygen  and  hydrogen  could  not  have  composed  water  ; because  hav- 
ing no  attraction  from  without,  they  could  not  have  been  developed. 
They  therefore  remained  in  the  gross  form  that  will  soon  be  described, 
the  decomposition  of  which  produced  a most  dense  watery  liquid,  of 
one  fourth  the  specific  gravity  of  quicksilver.  It  would  have  been 
as  impossible  for  trap  and  basaltic  rocks,  and  recent  formations,  to  be 
ejected  by  the  action  of  interior  elements,  as  it  would  have  been  for 
these  simple  elements  to  be  developed. 

It  is  only  by  a proper  knowledge  of  the  physical  laws  governing 
Matter,  or  of  the  tendency  that  Matter  constantly  indicates,  that  a 
true  conception  can  be  formed  of  qualities  contained  in  any  composi- 
tion, whether  simple  or  compound.  And  with  a standard  of  density 
— one  that  has  become  conventional  and  established,  the  density  of 
all  bodies  is  defined  by  comparison.  Thus  water  has  been  agreed 
upon  as  having  the  density  of  1000 ; and  the  densities  of  all  other 
bodies  are  expressed  according  to  their  relations  to  this  standard. 

It  has  been  a subject  of  much  discussion  among  scientific  minds, 
whether  matter  is  ultimately  indivisible,  or  whether  it  is  infinitely  di- 
visible. So  far  as  instruments  and  experiments  have  succeeded,  they 
have  been  unable  to  determine  upon  the  possibility  of  an  unlimited 
division  of  particles.  Substances  have  been  divided  and  subdivided 
until  they  were  reduced  to  a fine  powder,  or  fluid,  or  gas,  and  still, 
the  imperfection  of  the  instruments  being  such  as  not  to  admit  of 
further  analyzation,  has  only  caused  the  subject  to  become  more  ob~ 

15 


226 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


scure  and  incomprehensible.  For  even  when  reduced  to  the  finest 
powder,  or  to  the  most  subtle  fluid,  it  has  been  manifest  to  the  exper- 
imenter that  each  particle  composing  these  elements  contained  a num- 
ber of  still  finer  particles  far  beyond  the  powers  of  multiplication. 
And  in  proportion  to  the  refinement  of  particles  has  the  wonder  in- 
creased ; and  the  conclusion  now  appears  irresistible,  that  instruments 
can  not  be  so  far  perfected  as  to  divide  the  elements  or  molecular 
atoms  pervading  immensity.  F or  composition,  and  decomposition, 
and  recomposition,  are  tendencies  which  matter  manifests  in  every 
department  of  the  Universe.  The  whole  Mass  of  Matter,  including 
all  elements  and  principles,  is  conjoined  by  association  ; and  this  fact, 
whether  as  relating  to  substances  gross  or  refined,  defies  all  power  to 
reduce  particles  composing  any  form  of  matter,  to  their  ultimate  state 
of  disconnexion. 

It  is  upon  this  foundation  that  rests  principally  the  proposition  that 
the  original  fluid,  or  watery  element  existing  upon  the  face  of  the 
world,  could  not  have  been  as  rare  as  the  water  formed  from  the 
combination  of  oxygen  and  hydrogen. 

The  substance  known  as  granite , is  of  itself  a combination  of  other 
substances  in  which  one  or  more  of  the  following  may  be  found. 
Mica  is  not  generally  very  prominent ; but  feldspar,  quartz,  and  horn- 
blende, are  more  conspicuous.  And  these  again  are  composed  of 
an  indefinite  number  of  elements  and  particles,  — and  these  also  of  still 
other  associated  molecules,  &c.  And  the  combination  of  the  whole 
produces  the  former  substances. 

Now  it  is  by  an  infinity  of  inconceivably  minute  particles,  which 
themselves  have  a far  more  interior  composition,  that  the  prominent 
substances,  or  rocks,  or  the  elements  contained  in  them,  are  organized 
and  established.  And  when  the  bases  of  compositions  incessantly 
occurring  throughout  all  Nature,  are  not  comprehended,  how  is  it 
possible  that  a conclusion  should  be  formed  as  differing  from  that 
which  the  proposition  sets  forth,  viz.,  that  the  density  of  the  watery 
element  covering  the  earth’s  surface  was  in  proportion  to  the  density 
of  the  composition  of  the  granite,  which  latter  bore  a similar  relation 
to  the  substances  entering  into  its  own  composition  ? 

Nor  is  it  proper  for  the  scientific  world  to  institute  questions  which 
they  themselves  can  not  answer,  as  a substitute  for  as  substantial  refu- 
tation of  any  theory.  Yet  this  is  the  way  in  which  men  have  gene- 
rally proceeded  to  throw  obstacles  in  the  way  of  new  theories  — they 
have  attempted  to  darken  and  mystify  the  whole  by  propounding  a 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


2217 


gieat  number  of  interrogatories,  such  as  the  human  mind  is  not  capa- 
ble of  either  answering  or  comprehending.  I would,  then,  merely 
remind  the  scientific  investigator  of  his  inability  to  pronounce  the 
proposition  erroneous,  especially  until  he  has  deliberately  investigated 
the  general  evidences  that  are  presented  to  sustain  it. 

§ 36.  Matter  is  a term  used  as  equivalent  to  the  substance  of 
everything  in  the  Universe  ; but  as  substances  are  changed,  so  are 
also  the  names  by  which  they  are  designated.  And  commencing  at 
granite,  as  being  originally  of  the  proximate  density  of  quicksilver,  we 
next  come  to  an  element  of  the  density  of  sulphuric  acid ; then  to 
water;  then  to  sulphuric  ether;  then  to  the  atmosphere;  then  to  its 
ultimate,  fluorine  ; then  to  the  imponderable  elements  known  as  mag- 
netism and  electricity. 

There  is  a diversity  in  the  attributes  and  motions  of  imponderable 
elements,  simple  and  compound,  that  is  not  as  yet  in  the  least  under- 
stood or  imagined.  For  it  was  only  after  these  principles  had  been 
for  ages  incessantly  producing  phenomena  before  the  eyes  of  the 
world,  that  the  dia-magnetic  principle*  was  discovered;  and  this  is 
but  an  index  of  more  extensive  discoveries.  By  a force  not  as  yet 
altogether  ascertained,  the  magnetic  needle  has  manifested  a general 
uniformity  in  its  position,  the  cause  of  which  has  not  been  thoroughly 
understood.  And  it  was  not  until  a scientific  mind  had  discovered 
the  dia-magnetic  or  intersecting  principle,  that  a proper  conception 
was  suggested,  and  which  will  lead  to  a true  solution  of  the  great 
problem.  And  thus  the  physical  laws  and  principles  of  the  Universe 
have  been  manifestly  obscured  to  all  previous  philosophical  investi- 
gators. 

* The  contents  of  this  section  were  delivered  on  the  29th  of  April,  1846.  What  Is 
here  said  of  the  “ dia-magnetic”  principle  was  entirely  new  to  me  at  the  time,  having 
never  heard  of  the  term.  On  subsequently  asking  the  speaker  for  a more  particular 
explanation,  he  replied,  in  substance,  that  an  imponderable  element  had  recently  been 
discovered,  the  motion  of  which  intersected  the  current  producing  the  direction  of  the 
magnetic  needle.  On  my  inquiring  the  name  of  the  discoverer,  the  clairvoyant  passed 
off  ( i . e.  spiritually,  the  body  assuming  the  inclined  position,  as  is  explained  on  page 
38),  and  on  returning  he  remarked,  “ It  sounds  like”  — (hesitating  and  passing  off 
again)  — “he  is  known  as  Professor  Faraday.”  I mention  this  phenomenon,  appa- 
rently unimportant  at  first  view,  as  one  which  establishes  the  fact  of  the  clairvoyant’s 
receiving  impressions  of  sounds  as  well  as  of  facts  and  things.  A paragraph  in  a 
newspaper  subsequently  fell  under  my  notice,  containing  a brief  statement  of  Faraday’s 
discovery  of  a principle  which  he  terms  “dia-magnetic;”  but  of  this  it  is  certain  that 
the  clairvoyant  had  no  knowledge  while  in  the  normal  state,  when  the  above  para- 
graph was  dictated. 


228 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


This  digression  from  the  main  subject  is  intended  as  an  appendix 
to  the  new  proposition  introduced,  in  order  that  hasty  minds  may 
thereby  be  induced  to  consider  before  pronouncing  a sealing  denun- 
ciation. 

At  the  period  last  contemplated,  the  whole  face  of  Nature  mani- 
fested the  most  inconceivable  convulsions,  the  result  of  which  was 
the  ejection  of  rocks  and  mountain  prominences,  the  interstices  be- 
tween which  were  filled  by  a fluid  element  of  one  fourth  the  density 
of  quicksilver,  or  exceeding  somewhat  the  density  of  sulphuric  acid, 
which  is  about  twice  the  density  of  water.  This  fluid  was  produced 
by  a development  of  the  grosser  forms  of  oxygen,  of  sulphurous  acid, 
of  alumina,  and  of  carbon.  The  gross  forms  of  these  elements  (the 
only  forms  that  could  possibly  have  been  at  first  developed)  were  un- 
folded by  the  action  of  the  envelope  of  the  whole  Mass,  and  by  the 
affinity  which  the  lighter  particles  had  for  the  atmosphere  that  then 
surrounded  the  world.  These,  when  conjoined,  produced  the  watery 
element  that  had  a specific  gravity  comporting  with  its  relation  to  the 
granite,  which  latter  also,  in  its  density,  sustained  a corresponding 
relation  to  the  interior  igneous  elements. 

The  atmosphere  that  then  enveloped  the  whole  Mass,  was  alto- 
gether qnlike  that  which  now  encompasses  the  earth.  A dense  atmo- 
spheric composition  was  emanated  from  the  internal  elements.  This 
in  specific  gravity  was  not  much  less  than  water  now  existing.  No 
form  possessing  life  could  have  existed  upon  the  earth’s  surface  while 
the  elements  were  in  this  state ; and  they  continued  in  this  state 
through  a number  of  ages  that  transcends  all  computation.  The  at- 
mosphere was  composed  of  a very  small  portion  of  nitrogen,  one  sixth 
of  carbon,  and  the  remainder  consisted  of  the  imperfect  developments 
of  hydrogen,  sulphur,  and  fluorine.  The  peculiar  affinities  which 
these  sustained  to  each  other,  have  since  become  greatly  modified  ; 
for  whereas  all  elements  were  tltcn  but  imperfectly  developed,  certain 
ones  have  now  ascended  to  the  perfected  form  of  our  atmosphere  ; 
while  carbon  and  other  simple  elements  have  gradually  become  se- 
questered among  the  mineral  and  vegetable  compositions  on  and  be- 
neath the  earth’s  surface.  Thus  the  refined  particles  have  ascended 
and  assumed  the  form  of  the  simple  and  compound  substances  that 
now  surround  the  world  and  pervade  immensity,  while  others  have 
gradually  ascended  to  fill  their  deserted  stations,  and  others  again 
have  descended  to  enter  into  the  mineral  substances  for  which  they 
have  had  an  affinity. 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


229 


Thus  at  this  epoch,  and  after  granite  had  been  formed  (this  being 
a composition  of  mica,  feldspar,  quartz,  and  hornblende),  the  conden- 
sation of  ultimate  particles  produced  the  watery  element,  the  ultimate 
of  which  produced  the  atmospheric  envelope.  At  this  period  there 
was  going  on  successive  developments  from  one  composition  to  an- 
other, as  one  became  able  to  produce  and  sustain  that  above  it.  And 
such  in  reality  were  the  only  elements  that  could  have  existed  at  this 
epoch  of  the  earth’s  formation. 

Another  evidence  of  the  density  of  this  watery  element,  consists  in 
the  fact  that  all  the  original  rocks  and  prominences  were  acted  on  and 
worn  away  by  the  water  then  surrounding  them.  The  force  ^f  the 
present  water  could  not  have  produced  this  result,  especially  in  any- 
thing like  the  length  of  time  in  which  these  rocks  were  reduced  by 
the  ceaseless  action  of  the  waves  and  currents.  True,  the  water 
produces  the  same  effects  still ; but  let  it  be  carefully  impressed  that 
it  is  connected  with  other  substances,  the  action  of  which  accelerates 
the  disintegration. 

A telescopic  view  of  the  earth  from  Mars  or  Venus  would  at  this 
cime  have  presented  the  same  appearance  that  is  sometimes  presented 
by  Mars  and  Mercury.  It  would  have  exhibited  a deep  red  appear- 
ance, encircled  by  a dark  ring  of  atmosphere  ; the  same  as  we  would 
naturally  expect  if  a planet  were  in  a state  of  fusion,  or  in  a burning 
condition. 

As  this  element  exerted  this  constant  action  upon  the  early  rocks, 
particles  were  gradually  carried  and  precipitated  to  the  bottom  of  the 
seas  in  the  form  of  sediment.  Depositions  were  thus  formed  in  every 
chink,  and  crevice,  and  vacated  portion,  of  the  sea-bottoms  through- 
out the  earth.  And  as  the  accumulation  increased,  so  the  heat  that 
was  beneath  the  whole  incrustation  ascended  through  the  portions 
deposited.  And  as  the  heat  ascended,  the  deposited  materials  be- 
came united ; and  thus  were  formed  the  primary  stratified  rocks 
known  as  gneiss  and  mica  slate,  interspersed  with  mica  schist,  &c. 
And  as  the  granite  was  an  index  of  the  watery  and  atmospheric  de- 
velopments, so  was  the  second  formation  an  index  of  elements  that 
must  then  of  necessity  become  purified  and  comparatively  refined, — 
inasmuch  as  every  succeeding  stratum  unfolded  new  principles,  the 
ultimation  of  which  tended  to  the  refinement  of  the  watery  and  atmo- 
spheric compositions. 


$ 37.  The  science  of  Chemistry  has  afforded  much  valuable  infor- 


230 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


mation  concerning  the  solids,  fluids,  and  aeriform  substances  in  being. 
It  has  not,  however,  been  able  to  discover  all  the  elements  that  are 
existing  in  the  composition  of  the  earth.  But  it  has  been  successful 
in  establishing  some  most  important  facts,  the  tendency  of  which  is  to 
enlighten  the  world. 

The  primitive  elements  are  supposed  to  be  fifty-five  in  number, 
about  forty  of  which  are  metallic,  and  the  rest  are  non-metallic. 
These,  in  various  modifications,  are  supposed  not  only  to  form  the 
substance  of  the  whole  earth,  but  also  its  gaseous  elements. 

One  very  important  fact  that  has  been  discovered  in  relation  to 
oxygen  and  carbon,  is  that  these  largely  pervade  the  substances  of 
the  crust  and  on  the  surface  of  the  earth.  Carbon  and  carbonic  acid 
gas  prevailed  more  extensively  during  the  period  of  early  stratifica- 
tion than  at  any  time  since  that  period.  Lime  contains  in  every 
cubic  yard,  ten  thousand  cubic  feet  of  carbonic  acid  gas  : and  carbon 
also  enters  into  the  composition  of  coal,  to  the  amount  of  from  sixty 
to  seventy-five  per  cent.  This  proves  evidently  that  these  sub- 
stances were  very  extensively  disseminated  throughout  the  surface  of 
the  earth  : and  if  they  had  ascended  into  the  form  of  atmosphere, 
the  very  first  phenomenon  would  have  been  the  extinction  of  every 
living  form,  if  any  such  had  existed. 

This  amounts  to  an  absolute  demonstration  of  the  proposition  in 
reference  to  the  density  of  the  elements  that  primitively  surrounded 
the  whole  igneous  mass.  For  a condensation  and  sequestration  of 
carbon  into  the  substance  of  lime  and  coal,  manifests  its  original 
state  of  development ; and  the  fact  that  it  descended  into  such  a state 
of  consolidation,  manifests  plainly  that  it  was  superseded  by  some 
more  rare  and  perfect  substance. 

Then  again,  the  accumulation  and  stratification  of  substances  which 
were  originally  contained  in  the  composition  of  granite,  distinctly 
proves  that  each  of  the  four  substances,  mica,  hornblende,  quartz, 
and  feldspar,  were  composed  of  particles  that  would  admit  of  a fur- 
ther subdivision.  Many  portions  of  the  primary  rocks  are  charac- 
terized by  one  or  more  of  these  compounds  as  distinguishing  them 
from  the  neighboring  portions.  Such  are  the  quartz  rock,  mica, 
schist,  &c.,  each  having  sometimes  the  same  position  in  the  order  of 
formation,  with  strata  composed  of  other  substances. 

My  object  in  impressing  this  upon  the  mind,  is  to  prepare  the  way 
for  the  admission,  as  being  probable,  of  that  which  characterizes  all 
subsequent  formations.  No  substance  has  as  yet  been  formed,  which 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS.  231 

contains  properties  and  elements  that  were  not  existing  in  the  primi- 
tive formations.  And  that  the  first  sedimentary  strata  followed  the 
latter  as  a sole  consequence  of  the  action  of  the  waters  against  the 
ejected  rocks,  is  plainly  manifest,  inasmuch  as  neither  this  nor  the 
previous  formation  manifests  any  infusoria  or  marine  polipi,  that  are 
so  largely  manifested  in  the  succeeding  formations.  The  granite  and 
sedimentary  rocks  may  therefore  be  considered  as  constituting  the 
first  coating  or  covering  of  the  igneous  mass  of  the  world. 

But  before  proceeding  further  in  our  researches  into  the  geological 
developments,  it  is  proper  to  understand  the  laws  of  crystallization. 
And  here  again  the  world  is  indebted  to  chemistry  for  some  very 
important  discoveries.  It  is  a well-estahlished  truth,  that  every  sub- 
stance in  a state  of  crystallization  possesses,  before  its  coherent  ele- 
ments are  reduced  to  a fluid  or  gaseous  state,  forms  that  it  never 
again  assumes  in  subsequent  condensation.  Crystals  may  be  pro-  ' 
duced  by  the  compression  of  substances  before  they  enter  into  any 
higher  state  than  that  of  fluidity.  And  crystallization  may  be  pro- 
duced by  other  processes,  the  most  perfect  of  which  is  the  sublima- 
tion of  particles  by  reducing  them  to  an  ultimate  or  gaseous  condi- 
tion. Corrosive  sublimate,  phosphorus,  platinum,  and  diamond,  all 
display  forms  produced  by  the  condensation  of  sublimated  and  gas- 
eous particles.  And  this  phenomenon  has  been  so  uniform  that  it  is 
now  exciting  the  attention  of  philosophic  minds,  the  result  of  which 
will  be  a new  theory  concerning  the  atomic  structure  of  the  Universe. 

The  first  stages  of  crystallization  in  any  substance  demonstrate  the 
angular  form  of  every  particle  engaged  in  the  process.  The  first 
congregation  of  particles  produces  the  least  perfect  form  of  crystalli- 
zation. And  by  dissolving  this  crystal,  and  causing  its  particles  to 
ascend  into  the  fluid  or  gaseous  condition,  and  to  become  again  con- 
densed, there  is  produced  a finer  and  more  perfect  form  of  the  crys- 
tal. This  therefore  proves  that  as  atoms  ascend  from  the  lowest 
state  toward  the  highest,  they  assume  more  perfect  forms.  They 
become,  in  passing  from  the  angular  toward  the  circular,  &c.,  so  per- 
fected that,  when  condensed,  they  compose  the  most  perfect  state  of 
crystallization.  The  observations  in  chemistry,  therefore,  have  led 
to  this  discovery,  the  tendency  of  which  is  to  establish  incontestably 
the  progression  and  perfection  of  forms  such  as  are  exemplified  in 
all  crystallized  bodies. 

The  element  of  silicon  combined  with  oxygen,  forms  the  substance 
known  as  silica,  which  is  found  in  granite.  And  so  similar  elements 


232 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


compose  other  substances,  the  combination  of  which  forms  the  pri- 
mary stratifications.  And  how  easy  it  is  to  discover  the  reason  why 
a formation  like  that  of  granite  should  have  been  the  first  produced ! 
It  is  because  the  original  atoms  were  angular.  These  being  the 
lowest  and  most  imperfect,  take  the  first  point  in  the  formation ; 
while  every  other  form  is  contained  in  these,  undeveloped.  There- 
fore more  recent  formations  display  new  compounds,  new  conditions, 
and  new  appearances ; but  they  contain  no  substances  that  granite 
does  not  contain.  Therefore  no  elements  have  been  brought  into 
being  during  the  successive  stages  of  formation,  that  did  not  exist  in 
the  beginning;  and  all  the  difference  existing  between  the  higher 
and  lower  substances  is  owing  to  a change  in  the  forms  and  compo- 
sition of  particles. 

The  earth  primitively,  then,  was  in  the  undeveloped  condition 
before  described.  And  the  first  condensation  produced  the  granite ; 
the  second  development  was  that  of  the  fluid  mass  referred  to,  and 
the  third,  being  the  ultimate  of  the  last  two,  was  the  atmosphere. 
The  whole  of  these  have  become  essentially  changed  as  circum- 
stances have  changed.  And  so  a constant  sublimation  was  then,  and 
is  still,  going  on,  the  evidence  of  which  is  plainly  manifested  in  every 
form,  high  or  low,  in  being. 

At  the  period  when  all  chemical  and  mechanical  causes  were  in  full 
operation,  of  which  the  formation  of  the  primary  rock  was  a result, 
this,  by  fusion  and  subterranean  agitation,  assumed  positions  ex- 
ceedingly fantastical.  Then  the  circumference  of  the  earth  was  a 
little  more  than  thirty  thousand  miles.  And  during  the  lapse  of 
innumerable  ages,  a coating  of  granite  was  formed,  of  nearly  one 
hundred  miles  in  thickness,  all  of  which  was  before  the  gneiss  and 
mica  slate  system  made  its  appearance.  This,  again,  assumed  a 
thickness  corresponding  to  its  position  and  relation  to  the  granite,  and 
the  powerful  action  of  the  watery  element,  which  latter  also  entered 
largely,  by  condensation,  into  its  composition. 

By  the  constant  workings  of  the  interior  and  external  elements, 
the  lower  strata  of  this  became  modified,  and  the  highest,  becoming 
partially  disintegrated,  formed,  by  constant  accumulation  of  sediment, 
the  clay  state  and  grauwacke  slate  system.  And  this  may  properly 
be  termed  the  transition  from  the  primary  to  the  fossiliferous  forma- 
tion ; for  in  it  are  fossil  remains,  almost  without  number.  Plants  are 
scarcely  visible  by  any  other  evidence  than  impressions  remaining 
upon  the  rocks.  In  this  formation  is  found  the  series  of  fossils 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


233 


known  as  crinoides,  conchiferae,  poliparia,  Crustacea,  and  indistinct 
traces  of  marine  polypi. 

It  is  evident,  then,  that  at  this  period  imperfect  plants  and  animals 
must  have  had  an  existence.  And  geologists  have  irresistibly  adopted 
the  conclusion  that  a modification  of  the  atmosphere  and  earth  was 
the  occasion  of  the  production  of  these. 

§ 38.  At  this  period  of  the  earth’s  history,  wonders  of  a still  more 
profound  and  interesting  nature  present  themselves  for  research  and 
steady  contemplation.  The  primary  coating  of  the  igneous  mass  has 
ascended  to  the  grauwacke  slate  system ; and  the  water  and  atmo- 
sphere have  become  essentially  changed,  having  one  more  degree  of 
refinement  than  they  possessed  during  the  formation  of  the  last  sys- 
tem. And  Motion  is  also  ascending,  and  entering  into  forms  pos- 
sessing Life.  At  this  period  plants  had  an  existence,  whose  indis- 
tinct remains  have  been  discovered.  These  were  forms  that  had 
not  progressed  to  the  flowering,  and  thus  are  called  flowerless  plants, 
crinoidians,  &c. 

In  contemplating  this  epoch,  an  unanswered  question  arises  for  so 
lution. — The  first  ascension  of  Motion , or  the  origin  of  Life , has  been 
a subject  of  much  speculation  in  philosophic  minds,  for  the  special 
reason  that  it  is  the  foundation  upon  which  must  rest  a proper  solu- 
tion of  the  question  concerning  the  creation  and  organization  of  all 
things  subsequent  to  this  phenomenon.  But  though  the  subject  of 
the  origin  of  Life  has  been  subjected  to  such  deep  investigation,  no 
powers  of  scientific  analysis,  or  human  speculation,  have  as  yet  been 
able  to  solve  the  great  mystery  involved  in  this  question.  It  has 
been,  and  still  will  be,  a subject  of  extensive  discussion,  whether  Mu- 
tion,  by  any  possible  means  or  modification  of  its  conditions,  can  pro- 
duce the  phenomenon  of  Life.  But  it  will  be  found  a subject 
susceptible  of  easy  demonstration,  if  it  is  properly  considered  that  the 
First  of  all  things  is  an  Embryo  of  all  other  existences ; that  it  is  a 
Germ,  containing  the  essential  qualities  to  produce  higher  states  of 
refinement ; and  that  when  subjected  to  favorable  conditions,  it  will 
usfold  its  real  nature,  and  expand  into  new  forms,  new  substances, 
new  elements  and  organizations.  And  (as  was  intimated  during  the 
process  of  the  Key  to  this  portion  of  the  Revelation),  Motion  is  the 
first  of  all  living  Principles  contained  in  living  matter,  — and  the 
ultimate  of  this,  together  with  that  of  its  vehicle,  Matter,  produces 
Spirit.  And  therefore  it  is  easy  to  understand  that  one  more  step  in 


234 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


the  order  of  ascension  from  the  condition  which  the  word  Motion  in 
dicates,  would  produce  the  phenomenon  of  Life,  — there  being  also 
a similar  ascension  of  materials  as  forming  a proper  vehicle  for  the 
same. 

The  opinions  generally  prevailing  upon  this  subject  for  many  ages, 
have  been  altogether  untenable  and  unphilosophical.  Causes  have 
been  conceived  of  which  have  had  no  existence  in  Nature,  as  being 
the  immediate  agent  of  breathing  the  first  breath  of  life  into  every 
form.  And  thoughts  that  have  originated  from  these  suppositions 
have  tended  much  to  restrict  the  general  inquiry  which  it  is  proper 
should  be  made  in  reference  to  this  particular  subject.  But  the  con- 
ditions that  were  required  for  the  development  of  Life,  have  been  by 
physiologists,  to  some  extent  investigated  ; and  these  have  endeav- 
ored by  known  laws  to  demonstrate  the  true  principles  and  process 
of  gestation,  and  the  materials  and  conditions  necessary  to  such  a 
process  of  development.  But  experiments  that  have  been  instituted 
have,  as  a general  thing,  failed  to  produce  the  phenomenon  of  gesta- 
tion ; and  the  conclusion  has  been  generally  adopted,  that  this  can 
not  take  place  under  any  circumstances,  save  through  the  ordinary 
instrumentalities.  Experiments,  however,  in  one  or  two  instances, 
have  to  a great  extent  succeeded  ; that  is  to  say,  by  a proper  com- 
pound being  placed  in  a favorable  position,  and  acted  upon  by  elec- 
trical forces,  life,  and  a singular  species  of  animal,  have  been  produced. 
But  experiments  of  this  character  can  not  have  any  possible  bearing 
upon  the  question  under  consideration ; for  if  life  and  activity  were 
the  results  of  such  experiments  in  innumerable  instances,  this  would 
not  lead  to  a proper  solution  of  the  question  respecting  the  origin 
of  Life. 

Nature  contains  all  the  forces  necessary  to  institute  all  the  condi- 
tions, and  to  produce  all  the  developments,  that  occur  in  the  earth 
and  on  its  surface.  And  by  properly  conceiving  of  a uniformity  in 
Nature’s  laws,  we  can  form  an  adequate  conception  of  the  successive 
developments  that  are  the  results  of  such.  On  this  basis  we  may 
establish  a law  of  teleology  ; and  upon  this  we  may  repose,  having 
the  most  perfect  confidence  in  the  workings  of  Nature’s  principles,  Jn 
suitable  combinations,  in  the  production  of  the  various  developments. 
And  thus  we  may  have  a steady,  unchanging,  and  unerring  guide, 
whereby  we  may  be  enabled  to  associate  6ur  thoughts  and  aspirations 
with  the  higher  states  of  the  ascending  laws. 

This,  then,  is  the  era  in  which  Motion  becomes  Life,  and  in  which 


nature’s  divine  revelations 


235 


materials  enter  into  combinations  suitable  for  its  development,  — of 
which  combinations  plants  are  the  types  and  indications.  By  what 
process  Life  could  have  been  developed,  is  a question  of  the  utmost 
magnitude,  inasmuch  as  it  involves  in  its  recesses,  the  ennobling 
powers  and  intellectual  endowments  of  Man.  For  the  very  moment 
that  one  particle  attained  life  upon  this  earth,  that  moment  Life,  Sen- 
sation, and  Intelligence,  were  determined  as  inevitable  and  endless 
results.  For,  as  it  was  before  remarked  that  if  motion  were  given  to 
one  particle  in  the  great  Mass  composing  the  Sun  of  the  Univercoe- 
lum,  this  would  establish  motion  in  every  atom  in  existence,  which 
motion  would  be  eternal , — so  if  one  particle  receives  the  essential 
quality  of  Life,  from  that  moment  is  established  the  endless  duration 
of  Life,  and  of  its  consequent  results  and  manifestations.  How  incon- 
ceivable, therefore,  is  the  importance  attached  to  the  plain  and  dis- 
tinct answer  which  the  question  demands  ! 

And  I am  aware  that  opinions  which  have  existed,  and  which  still 
are  in  being,  concerning  this  subject,  will,  on  due  investigation,  be 
rendered  to  some  minds  altogether  repulsive  and  unreasonable,  while 
by  other  persons  these  opinions  will  still  be  adhered  to  with  all  the 
energies  of  ignorant  and  misdirected  minds.  And  minds  of  the  latter 
class  have,  at  all  ages  of  the  world  up  to  this  moment,  wielded  more 
influence  and  power  than  all  the  powers  of  Thought  and  Intelligence. 
But  are  there  no  principles  upon  which  the  true  investigator  may 
rest  undisturbed?  — no  sanctions  of  Truth  and  Virtue  sufficiently 
powerful  to  sustain  him  in  his  positions?  — no  basis  upon  which 
Truth  and  Philosophy  may  remain  unshaken,  amid  the  conflicting 
elements  of  fanaticism  ? And  is  there  no  power  in  truth  and  good- 
ness to  sustain  the  investigator  against  the  encroachments  of  princi- 
ples which  Nature  and  its  Productor  have  never  instituted  ? Should 
a blind  and  enthusiastic  zeal  be  allowed  to  crush  the  efforts  of  the 
free  mind  — one  that  discovers  by  proper  induction,  the  Source  from 
which  all  principles  originated,  and  reveres  that  only  which  bears  the 
indestructible  signet  of  the  Eternal,  Positive  Mind?  Should  that 
mind  be  restricted  whose  meditations  are  the  pure  influxes  of  Nature’s 
principles  and  beauties  which  are  everywhere  extensively  manifested  ? 
And  it  has  been  a want  of  the  proper  knowledge  of  the  principles  upon 
which  Nature  and  Truth  exist,  that  has  obscured  this  great  subject 
so  long  from  scientific  minds. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  discuss  the  proposition,  yet  unrefuted,  that 
Life  is  a progressive  development  of  the  principle  of  Motion,  and 


236 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


that  the  marine  plants  were  the  first  forms  suited  for  such  develop 
ment.  For  animals  could  not  have  existed  before  vegetables,  because 
the  first  is  an  ultimate  of  the  second,  containing  one  more  principle, 
which  the  plant  only  typifies. 

§ 39.  Very  extensive  discussions  have  also  arisen  in  reference  to 
the  laws  of  mutation  of  species  and  progressive  development.  The 
general  opinion  existing  in  reference  to  this  subject,  has  arisen  from 
the  diverse  indications  of  the  first  and  subsequent  rocks  containing 
plants  and  animals,  and  from  the  general  classifications  into  which 
these  seem  naturally  to  arrange  themselves.  This  opinion  is,  that 
the  whole  creation,  from  the  lowest  to  the  highest  formation,  has  pro- 
ceeded in  an  order  of  succession,  so  as  to  exhibit  a general  corre- 
spondence as  existing  between  the  geological  and  zoological  creations. 
And  this  opinion  has  become  very  popular,  insomuch  that  other 
opinions  appear  to  stand  openly  attacked  thereby.  And  the  profes 
sors  of  these  have  in  return  endeavored  to  refute  the  previous  hy- 
pothesis, not  from  the  supreme  love  of  truth,  but  because  they  have 
been  previously  attacked.  And  to  ward  off  this  attack,  it  was  not 
necessary  to  investigate  with  a pure  desire  to  unfold  the  truth , but 
with  the  intention  to  sustain  preconceived  opinions.  And  efforts  to 
this  end  have  been  made  by  arraying  a multitude  of  counter  evi- 
dences, not  of  a general,  but  of  an  assumptive,  gratuitous,  and  inci- 
dental character,  so  that  the  theory  which  opposed  them  might  in 
return  be  itself  successfully  opposed.  By  such  procedure,  nothing 
has  been  gained  for  the  furtherance  of  science,  but  something  has 
been  lost  in  the  unceasing  efforts  of  different  persons,  to  refute  each 
other’s  opinions.  F or  becoming  lost  in  the  mist  of  contention,  the 
mind  loses  sight  of  the  rule  that  should  always  be  uppermost  in  the 
mind  of  man,  That  Truth  should  be  the  object  to  be  attained,  and 
not  the  establishment  of  opinions  or  hypotheses. 

Argument,  therefore,  is  not  required  in  the  present  instance  to  show 
the  truthfulness  of  this  or  any  other  proposition ; but  all  that  is 
required  is  a definite  explanation  of  the  origin  and  character  of  the 
first  forms  which  Nature  breathed  into  existence  previously  to  the 
carboniferous  formation. 

Abstract  experiments  and  observations  upon  the  laws  and  principles 
that  govern  the  sublime  works  of  Nature,  have  gradually  prepared 
the  way  for  the  unfolding  of  knowledge  concerning  the  mode  in 
which  each  particle  assumes  its  specific  and  destined  position.  And 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


237 


here  again  the  sciences  of  Chemistry,  Anatomy,  and  Physiology, 
take  a position  as  the  most  useful  and  important  among  all  others, 
especially  as  these  have  determined  upon  many  substances  between 
every  component  atom  of  which  there  exists  a demonstrable  chemi- 
cal affinity.  There  is  an  obstacle  to  the  full  and  complete  success' 
of  these  researches,  because  it  is  absolutely  impossible  for  man,  with 
his  present  knowledge  concerning  the  fundamental  principles  of  Na- 
ture, to  form  instruments  so  perfect  that  the  most  rare  particle  can  be 
subjected  to  a minute  analyzation. 

It  is  not  the  object  in  the  present  instance  to  make  the  known 
truths  in  science  conform  to  the  original  condition  of  the  earth ; but 
it  is  the  object  that  the  fundamental  principles  upon  which  Nature 
unfolds  her  stupendous  creations,  should,  by  progressive  develop- 
ment, ultimate  in  the  truths  which  these  sciences  have  unfolded  to 
the  world. 

Chemistry  will  unfold  the  fact  that  light  when  confined  in  a cer- 
tain condition,  and  condensed,  will  produce  water : and  that  water 
thus  formed,  subjected  to  the  vertical  influence  of  light,  will  produce 
by  its  internal  motion  and  further  condensation,  a gelatinous  substance 
of  the  composition  of  the  spirifer,  the  motion  of  which  indicates 
animal  life.  This  again  being  decomposed  and  subjected  to  evapo- 
ration, the  precipitated  particles  which  still  remain  will  produce  pu- 
trified  matter  similar  to  earth,  which  will  produce  the  plant  known  as 
th efucoides.  It  is  on  the  results  of  this  experiment  (the  truth  of 
which,  as  above  represented,  can  be  universally  ascertained),  that 
rests  the  probability,  though  not  the  absolute  certainty,  of  the  truth 
of  the  description  which  I am  about  to  give  concerning  the  first  form 
possessing  life. 

As  has  been  before  remarked,  all  the  elements  had  undergone  a 
material  and  substantial  modification,  at  the  close  of  the  transition 
rock,  or  grauwacke  system.  And  many  portions  of  the  sea-beds 
were  at  this  time  in  a state  susceptible  of  giving  birth  to  new  forms. 
The  change  in  the  watery  element  had  been  general ; for  carbon  had 
become  more  universally  disseminated,  while  oxygen,  in  compara- 
tively minute  portions,  was  imperfectly  assuming  its  present  gaseous 
state.  The  substance  in  granite  known  as  quartz,  the  most  perfect 
combination  of  oxygen  and  silicon,  was  combined  with  the  limestone 
in  which  carbon  was  so  extremely  condensed  ; and  a uniting  of  these, 
and  the  warmth  generated  thereby,  acting  with  the  favorable  affinities 
of  the  water  and  atmosphere,  created  in  some  portions  of  the  sea-beds 


23S 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


and  partially  protruding  rocks,  a composition  assuming  apparently  the 
state  of  rest,  while  in  reality  the  imperceptible  motion  existing  in  it 
was  decomposing  and  uniting  particles,  and  creating  a principle  of 
internal  vitality,  or  vis  vilce. 

Here  was  manifested  the  generating  power  of  motion,  and  the  phe- 
nomena of  life,  of  death,  and  of  reorganization.  For  the  decompo- 
sition of  any  one  atom  in  these  gelatinous  masses,  represented  the 
disorganization  of  all  bodies,  or  death ; while  the  recombination  rep- 
resents the  principle  whose  pregnation  residts  in  bringing  into  exist- 
ence new  forms  and  organizations.  And  the  constant  activity  exist- 
ing in  the  whole  mass,  united  by  forces  heretofore  explained  as  asso- 
ciation or  affinity,  not  only  manifests  the  unchangeable  laws  of  Motion, 
hut  clearly  represents  all  the  phenomena  (not  yet  properly  understood) 
that  are  presented  in  the  process  of  gestation.  Masses  of  the  above 
description  were  existing  in  various  parts  of  the  earth,  and  upon  the 
segregated  beds  formed  by  the  action  of  the  elements  upon  the  first 
stratified  portions  of  the  earth’s  crust.  These  breathed  into  exist- 
ence the  forms  termed  flowerless  and  marine  plants,  the  highest  type 
of  which  is  the  fncoides. 

Let  it  be  duly  impressed  that  the  basis  of  these  formations  con- 
sisted principally  of  mica,  quartz,  and  hornblende,  modified  by  the 
associated  particles  of  lime  — which  in  decomposition  produced  from 
their  inherent  elements  the  forms  above  described.  Let  it  be  furthei 
impressed  that  granite  and  limestone,  including  the  mica  slate,  had 
not  previously  entered  into  any  particular  organic  composition. 

Plants  of  this  period  were  not  very  perfectly  formed,  being  desti- 
tute of  ultimate  portions  (or  seeds,  flowers,  and  foliage),  and  being 
unsuited  for  any  other  purpose  than  that  of  producing  a higher  order 
of  forms  — the  former  merely  representing  the  latter. 

Here  Motion  and  Life  became  visible.  Motion  was  originally  and 
eternally  established  ; while  Life,  its  ascending  development,  was  first 
manifested  in  the  imperfect  forms  of  marine  plants.  All, conditions 
agreed  for  this  production.  No  artificial  energies  were  required  to 
bring  them  forth.  No  new  force,  quality,  or  principle,  was  necessary 
to  the  successful  development  of  that  which  is  known  to  us  as  Life. 
Nature  displayed  her  living  energies  in  the  first  forms,  though  imper 
fectly.  Yet  these  represented  and  typified  the  highest  process  of 
gestation  and  reproduction,  and  the  highest  organization  that  has  been 
subsequently  produced,  and  which  now  exists  as  these  first  types’ 
investigator. 


nature’s  divine  revelations.  239 

§ 40.  Ascending  in  the  scale  of  being,  the  radiata  and  polyparia 
stand  next  in  order,  — these  being  results  of  the  decomposition  of 
former  substances,  and  of  combinations  of  these  with  other  elements, 
the  whole  assuming,  as  a consequent  result,  the  form  next  in  the 
order  of  development.  The  term  “radiata”  is  improperly  applied; 
for  forms  which  this  term  implies  were  not  in  reality  existing.  But 
as  it  is  not  necessary  to  discuss  the  definitions  of  geologists  and  zool- 
ogists, or  the  generic  names  that  have  been  applied  to  forms  in  the 
animal  kingdom,  I will  proceed  directly  to  describe  the  nature  of  the 
animals  that  have  been  thus  named,  as  this  was  then  manifested, — 
both  of  those  upon  the  inland  portions,  and  of  those  which  then  were 
extensively  swarming  through  the  watery  waste, — with  the  opera- 
tions performed  by  the  latter. 

The  polypi  were  active  in  forming  from  the  solution  of  lime  and 
other  compositions  of  like  nature,  the  imperfect  coral  reefs,  which 
now  stand  as  an  evidence  of  the  ingenious  work  of  these  animals. 
The  radiata  were  below  these,  assuming  the  form  of  suspended  moss  ; 
having  an  interwoven  and  complex  membrane,  the  vehicle  of  trans- 
mitting imperfect  sensation,  more  properly  life,  that  was  exhibited  in 
the  radiating  feelers  that  were  thrown  out  from  every  portion  of  the 
united  substance.  So  perfect  were  these  feelers,  that  any  molecule 
or  substance  passing  near  them  would  be  suddenly  caught,  and  by 
an  active  decomposition  — that  which  is  known  as  digestion — they 
would  unite  these  with  their  own  substance ; and  from  this  cause 
their  nature  was  subjected  to  constant  change. 

Through  the  successive  modification  of  these,  the  articulata  were 
developed  as  next  in  the  order.  The  radiata  so  perfectly  typified 
the  ascending  form,  that  if  the  whole  were  cognizable  to  the  senses, 
the  whole  subject  would  be  plain  and  demonstrable.  This  class 
(which  may  yet  be  termed  plants ) were  constituted  with  innumerable 
chambers  and  multivalve  portions,  the  whole  mass  being  entirely 
ventral.  The  annelidans  and  serpula,  are  species  of  these.  Uniting 
with  these  successive  re-assumptions  of  forms,  were  the  univalve  and 
multivalve  shells,  so  termed  by  geologists.  Also  in  the  same  system, 
are  included  the  Crustacea  or  trilobites,  and  the  radiated  spirifer, 
which  species  soon  became  extinct,  as  they  could  not  be  permanent 
productions  in  consequence  of  bearing  such  an  inseparable  relation 
to  the  previous  type. 

As  a link  in  the  transition  from  the  radiata  to  the  articulata, 
the  productus  and  terebratula  occur.  And  these  are  composed 


24  0 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


chiefly  of  the  particles  that  were  floating  in  the  solution  of  lime,  mica 
slate,  and  gneiss,  after  these  had  become  modified  in  the  first  forms. 
Thus  the  productus  became  another  type,  and  an  active  agent  of 
incessant  transmutation,  inasmuch  as  the  forms  above  these  show  a 
correspondence  thereunto,  only  being  more  perfect  and  complicated 
in  parts,  — the  purpose  of  which  was  to  produce,  by  a still  further 
ascension,  the  succeeding  class  and  species  of  animals  which  the 
carboniferous  formation  so  extensively  exemplifies. 

In  the  present  class  of  vegetable  formation  (for  in  reality  no  other 
species  were  yet  existing),*  innumerable  shells  were  formed  as  the 
result  of  the  workings  of  the  existing  class  of  beings  possessing  the 
principle  of  vitality.  These  were  ventral,  valved,  and  chambered, 
and  interlined  with  a soft,  gelatinous,  moving,  living  membrane,  near 
the  osseous  portion  of  the  animal.  Many  of  the  above  species  be- 
came extinct  a long  period  before  the  completion  of  the  carboniferous 
strata. 

The  period  occupied  in  the  transition  of  the  whole  globe,  is  ti  us 
inconceivable ; for  Nature  at  this  period  manifested  no  impulsive  or 
catastrophic  occurrences,  but  was  calm  and  quiet,  and  to  us  would 
have  appeared  entirely  desolate,  inasmuch  as  no  objects  were  in 
existence  but  the  minute  marine  plants.  But  as  these  forms  repre- 
sent the  progressive  development  of  Motion  to  Life,  and  of  lower 
to  higher  species,  they  stand  in  analogy  to  the  mighty  developments 
of  the  earth,  water,  and  air,  — there  being  a constant  ascension  of 
each  to  higher  stations,  the  vacuum  caused  by  their  ascension  being 
supplied  by  particles  ascending  from  inferior  stations.  And  so  the 
whole  gradually  unfolded  conditions  for  the  introduction  of  a new 
era.  The  termination  of  the  era  in  being  is  distinctly  proclaimed  by 
the  more  exalted  organizations  which  a change  in  the  elements,  con- 
ditions, and  forces,  was  the  immediate  cause  of  developing. 

I join  all  the  vegetable  developments  of  the  grauwacke  and  clay 
slate  system  into  one  general  class,  that  of  the  avertebrated. 

The  reason  why  I denominate  all  the  living  developments  of  this 
period  vegetable  and  avertebrated , is  because  Sensation  has  not  as  yet 
become  a distinct  principle.  That  it  has,  can  not  be  proved  from 
any  class  or  species  of  productions  yet  discovered  by  geologists. 

* Tlie  clairvoyant  requested  the  insertion  of  a note  stating  that  the  reason  why  his 
classifications  of  the  organic  productions  of  the  ancient  periods  differed  slightly  in 
some  respects  from  those  made  by  geologists,  is  because  he  found  that  the  latter  did 
not  strictly  conform  to  Nature. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


241 


Animals  could  not  have  existed  previously  to  plants ; for  the  condi- 
tion of  the  earth  and  elements  was  altogether  inadequate  to  sustain 
animal  life  ; while  the  prevalent  carbon  and  kindred  elements  were 
capable  of  sustaining  the  minute  creations  and  developments  of  the 
vegetable  kingdom. 

The  term  “ sensation,”  as  applied  to  life,  vitality,  or  a minute  de- 
gree of  motion,  is  altogether  improper  ; for  sensation  is  as  distinct 
from  life  as  life  is  from  motion.  For  sensation  is  the  principle  that 
connects  the  inner  life,  or  spirit,  with  the  external  body.  Life  may 
exist,  where  sensation  does  not.  The  phenomenon  of  life  should  be 
understood  as  a mere  ascension  of  the  principle  of  Motion,  — this  de- 
veloping inherent  energies,  and  causing  an  imperceptible  transmuta- 
tion and  reproduction  of  the  substance  in  which  the  principle  exists. 
Such,  therefore,  was  the  character  and  condition  of  the  forms  devel- 
oped at  this  period. 

Before  ascending  to  the  carboniferous  formation,  it  is  necessary  to 
notice  the  subdivisions  that  are  made  of  the  ascending  strata.  The 
first  has  been  termed  the  “Silurian,”  — owing  to  the  manifestation 
of  this  rock  in  a portion  of  the  country  which  the  people  of  the  above 
name  first  inhabited.  The  next  in  order  above  this,  is  termed  the 
“old  red  sandstone  system.”  It  is  very  remarkable,  and  is  so  con- 
sidered by  geologists,  that  crystallization  is  not  visible  in  the  composi- 
tion of  the  sandstone  to  any  particular  extent.  It  is  very  evident  that 
this  formation  was  produced  by  the  congregation  of  ultimate  parti- 
cles of  the  mica  slate,  gneiss,  limestone,  and  shale  ; inasmuch  as  par- 
ticles of  these  had  become  so  essentially  modified  that  the  sandstone 
only  could  be  produced  thereby.  And%t  this  period,  the  trap  and 
basalt  were  existing  in  projecting  positions  in  various  parts  of  the  dry 
portion,  but  more  extensively  under  the  surface  of  the  water.  These 
rocks  contained  greater  quantities  of  crystalline  matter,  which  was 
prevented  by  circumstances  from  forming  in  the  sandstone  system. 
The  latter  formation  is  in  some  parts  of  the  globe  very  thick,  its 
thickness  varying  from  three  thousand  to  ten  thousand  feet. 

This  period  developed  a still  higher  order  of  animals,  which  the 
Silurian  system  ultimately  typified.  Fishes  now  became  extensively 
disseminated  throughout  the  waters  : and  corals  were  existing  in 
abundance.  The  terebratula  continues  but  little  modified  in  this  era. 
The  spirifer  and  the  ortho-spirifer  now  become  extinct,  and  few  traces 
of  them  continue  to  exist  in  the  upper  strata,  and  these  are  modified  : 
and  the  productus  ascends  in  genera.  From  the  lower  genera  of 

16 


242 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


molluscs,  the  gastropod  becomes  developed,  and  also  a still  higher  spe- 
cies, which  is  the  cephalopod.  The  radiata  and  articulata,  in  their 
progression,  now  begin  to  assume  the  form  of  the  scorpion  and  insect, 
between  which  the  fuci  determined  upon  by  geologists,  sustains  an 
intermediate  position.  The  seas  at  this  time  were  inhabited  by  an- 
nelidans  and  scarpion  fishes,  the  ultimate  of  which  represents  nearly 
the  shark  and  sturgeon.  The  annelidans  wrere  a species  of  sea-worm, 
still  to  be  found  upon  many  coasts  and  coves,  where  stones  and  other 
bodies  of  concealment  exist.  Of  this  class  there  are  two  kinds,  the 
white  and  red,  the  first  of  which  is  hermaphrodite,  sustaining  an  inter- 
mediate position  between  the  lower  type  and  the  higher,  in  which  the 
serpula  becomes  visible. 

§ 41.  Plants  at  this  period  have  ascended  to  the  sigillaria,  with 
but  little  modification,  although  the  same  subsequently  ascend  to  the 
class'  conifiercc,  which  the  carboniferous  formation  so  extensively  man- 
ifests in  the  slender,  beautiful  pines  of  which  remains  are  found.  The 
positive  distinction  between  the  vegetable  and  animal  creations,  does 
not  appear  before  the  carboniferous  stratification,  when  disintegration, 
decomposition,  and  segregation  of  the  primary  formations,  had  become 
very  extensive.  There  was  also  a corresponding  ascension  of  all  the 
elements,  the  same  being  plainly  exemplified  in  the  preceding  forma- 
tion containing  the  fish,  shark,  and  other  marine  productions,  the 
origin  of  which  can  be  traced  to  the  first  vegetable,  gelatinous  pro- 
duction. And  as  this  period  represents  the  two  kingdoms  in  a more 
distinct  manner  than  did  the  previous,  the  line  of  demarcation  can  be 
correctly  drawn  between  thep,  notwithstanding  many  interspersed  ma- 
terials from  the  Silurian  and  sandstone  systems  that  consist  almost  en- 
tirely of  shells,  the  species  of  which  are  identical  with  the  original  mol- 
luscs. These  representations  will  become  more  clear  when  a descrip- 
tion is  given  of  the  crust  of  the  earth  as  it  was  prior  to  the  change  of 
the  dense  element,  which  resulted  in  the  formation  of  the  limestone. 

This  era,  then,  shows  an  ascension  of  animals  to  one  degree  above 
the  avertebrated.  Yet  if  these  were  properly  arranged  in  order,  the 
highest  would  show  a great  dissimilarity  and  superiority  to  the  first 
species  of  the  same  classes  — the  species  which  I shall  designate  as  the 
osseous  fish  development.  For  the  convoluted  and  muscular  organi- 
zations of  the  sandstone  period,  of  which  fish  is  the  type,  have  not  as 
yet  assumed  the  posterior  portions  that  characterize  the  proper  ver- 
tebrates. For  none  of  the  species  of  fish  now  existing  ascend  in 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


243 


organization  much  beyond  the  gelatinous  composition  of  the  anneli- 
dans,  excepting  in  form  and  texture,  these  being  such  as  to  require 
a different  concatenation  of  forces  to  produce  muscular  activity  and 
marine  locomotion. 

By  the  deposition  of  particles  still  in  process  by  the  action  of  the 
elements,  and  by  the  tides  which  at  this  period  covered  nearly  the 
whole  jace  of  the  earth  — tides  which  were  of  excessive  magnitude 
and  force,  — and  by  other  local  causes,  which  will  soon  be  explained, 
the  extensive  solutions  of  lime  then  existing,  became,  when  conjoined 
with  other  substances,  deposited  to  form  the  great  series  of  strata 
known  as  the  carboniferous  limestone.  At  this  time  marine  animals 
and  land  plants  were  developed  ; and  the  latter  began  to  shade  a 
small  portion  of  the  earth’s  surface  that  had  for  ages  innumerable  been 
one  extensive  watery  waste.  Dry  land  now  became  manifest,  — and 
now  followed  a development  of  soil  as  resulting  from  the  decomposi- 
tion of  gelatinous  substances  previously  existing  upon  the  same  por- 
tions ; and  from  this  sprang  up  minute  vegetable  forms.  Existing 
mountains  then  became  still  more  prominent,  and  others  were  soon 
ejected,  by  the  unceasing  action  of  the  interior  of  the  earth,  which  be- 
came excited  at  this  time  by  the  change  of  the  elements  which  placed 
the  external  and  internal  in  altogether  unequal  conditions.  The 
equilibrium  had  been  gradually  destroyed  by  the  ascension  and 
constant  recombination  of  the  watery  element,  whose  previous  density 
had  balanced  the  expansive  force  of  the  interior.  Therefore,  to  re- 
store this  equilibrium,  the  internal  portions  must  have  vent ; and  this 
was  obtained  by  the  extensive  upheaving  of  those  mountains  now 
known  as  the  Apennines  and  the  Andes. 

But  the  description  of  the  mountains  previously  existing,  and  of 
those  ejected  at  this  period,  should  not  be  given  until  after  some 
preliminary  observations  upon  which  depends  a proper  conception 
of  the  inequalities  and  wonderful  catastrophic  occurrences  which  at 
this  time  apparently  confuse  the  general  order  of  Nature’s  laws,  and 
Iter  otherwise  harmonious  operations. 

The  earth  had,  by  condensation,  become  two  thousand  miles  di- 
minished in  circumference  since  its  magnitude  was  as  before  stated, 
which  was  during  the  elastic  state  of  the  primary  coating.  The  seas 
were  not  so  deep  as  before,  though  the  surface  of  the  water  was  more 
extensive.  This  change  was  caused  by  the  expansion  of  previously 
condensed  particles  composing  the  water ; for  it  is  a well-known  law 
in  chemistry,  that  as  particles  become  sublimated,  they  expand  and 


244 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


consequently  occupy  a greater  space  than  before.  And  this  period 
represents  the  condition  of  the  water  in  its  progressed  and  ascended 
state.  Being  therefore  higher  than  before,  there  was  visible  only  a 
small  portion  of  those  stupendous  mountains,  that  are  now  towering 
many  thousand  feet.  Therefore  innumerable  shells,  and  immense 
collections  of  all  kinds  of  plants  and  animals  then  existing,  were  con- 
veyed by  the  tides  almost  to  the  very  tops  of  these  and  other  mount- 
ains, and  there  deposited  in  the  crevices  and  undulated  portions  of 
the  rocks  that  compose  them.  And  portions  now  prominent  being 
previously  entirely  covered  by  the  waters,  and  constituting  the  bed 
of  the  sea,  became  strewed  with  various  plants  and  fossils  which  the 
water  and  other  substances  had  yielded,  and  when  ejected  to  such  an 
immense  height  they  retained  these  fossils  and  impressions.  — And 
these  have  in  many  cases  confused  and  destroyed  the  order  of  crea- 
tion in  the  minds  of  geologists,  because  previous  formations  and  suc- 
ceeding ones  are  alike  found  together.  But  as  these  are  'particulars 
and  details,  the  naturalist  and  geologist  should  not  array  them  against 
the  law  of  order  and  harmony  which  the  uniformitarian  endeavors  to 
establish  as  constituting  a system  of  progressive  development.  F ur- 
thermore,  tides  at  this  period  were  greater  than  any  which  are  noiv  in 
operation.  For  the  waters  were  accumulated  to  immense  heights 
every  fourteen  hours,  being  twice  elevated  during  the  period  of  the 
earth’s  revolution  upon  its  axis. 

The  theories  that  have  been  presented  to  the  world  concerning  the 
phenomenon  of  tides,  have  generally  been  very  incorrect.  It  has 
been  supposed  by  a conspicuous  astronomer,  that  tides  were  pro- 
duced by  the  law  of  attraction  — by  the  action  of  the  moon  upon  the 
earth.  This  can  not  be  true  ; for  attraction  is"  not  an  established 
principle,  especially  beyond  the  atmosphere  of  any  body  or  substance. 
To  show  plainly  the  impossibility  of  this  being  the  cause  of  tides,  I 
will  present  some  of  the  chief  considerations  which  have  an  important 
bearing  upon  the  subject. 

If  the  moon  has  any  attractive  influence  upon  the  earth  (more  than 
what  consists  in  the  natural  relation  existing  between  the  two  bodies), 
why,  when  the  moon  is  in  conjunction  with  the  sun,  does  not  the 
water  become  more  elevated  on  the  side  of  the  earth  next  to  these 
bodies,  as  might  naturally  be  expected  if  such  attraction  existed  ? 
Also,  substances  upon  that  side  of  the  earth  would  not  then  weigh 
near  so  much  as  when  the  moon  was  otherwise  situated.  Also  when 
the  moon  is  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  earth,  and  the  earth  sustains 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


245 


a position  between  it  and  the  sun,  why  is  not  the  elevation  of  the 
water  equal  at  all  portions  of  the  earth?  For  if  the  moon  and  sun 
exert  an  equal  influence,  the  result  should  be  equal  heights  of  water 
all  over  the  earth. 


§ 42.  It  does  not  become  the  character  of  this  book  to  discuss 
previous  opinions,  incorrect  hypotheses,  or  points  of  philosophy 
thought  to  be  established ; but  it  is  the  object  and  end  to  give  to  all 
investigators  equal  justice,  and  the  highest  approbation  so  far  as  their 
researches  have  been  for  the  furtherance  of  truth,  and  for  the  enlight- 
ening of  the  minds  of  the  world  concerning  the  principles  upon  which 
Nature  performs  her  energetic  and  sublime  workings.  F or  if  it  wrere 
the  intention  to  dispute  opinions  which  have  been  founded  upon  the 
appearances  which  things  have  presented,  then  the  discussion  would 
be  almost  without  end.  For  the  falling  to  the  earth  of  a substance 
previously  suspended  in  the  air.  has  been  termed  gravitation.  The 
tides  have  been  considered  as  the  result  of  the  same  principle.  All 
things  have  been  represented  as  possessing,  to  a greater  or  less  extent, 
the  principles  of  attraction  and  repulsion  — a perfect  and  established 
antagonism.  And  inasmuch  as  this  is  the  belief  now  extensively  pre- 
vailing, it  is  not  possible  that  a different  theory  or  hypothesis  can  be 
received  unless  it  addresses  the  understanding  of  man  with  more 
plainness  and  cogency  than  the  former  theory. 

It  is  a well-ascertained  truth  in  astronomy,  and  in  the  principles  of 
mechanics,  that  a body  rotating  like  the  earth  on  its  axis,  has  the 
greatest  tendency  to  throw  off  substances  in  the  direction  in  which  it 
revolves.  As  the  earth  revolves  from  west  to  east,  and,  at  the  pres- 
ent time,  once  in  twenty-four  hours,  it  must  of  necessity  produce  two 
elevations  of  water,  especially  as  the  water  surrounds  the  whole  globe. 
Every  twelve  hours,  the  water  would  be  elevated  at  the  extreme  east 
and  extreme  west,  or  in  other  words,  at  given  antipodes  of  the  earth. 
The  elevation  of  water  once  in  twelve  hours,  is  a result  of  the  cen- 
trifugal tendency  that  the  globe  creates  in  one  half  of  its  period  of 
rotation,  — corresponding  tides  being  thus  produced  on  the  opposite 
sides  of  the  earth. 

There  are  many  things  operating  incidentally  upon  the  water, 
which  produce  variations  in  the  periods  and  elevations  of  the  tides  in 
different  places  upon  each  portion  of  the  earth.  A correct  knowledge 
of  the  law  of  fluids  will  at  once  demonstrate  the  cause  of  the  whole 
phenomenon.  And  it  is  by  understanding  the  natural  tendency  of 


246 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


fluids,  and  that  of  all  other  substances,  when  subjected  to  a centrifu- 
gal force,  that  the  present  explanation  of  the  phenomenon  will  become 
established  beyond  the  possibility  of  refutation. 

Thus,  at  the  epoch  of  the  termination  of  the  sandstone  system,  and 
when  the  elements  had  become  thus  modified,  the  water  was  agitated 
by  such  wonderful  tides  that  fossils  of  every  description  were  carried 
by  it  and  deposited  in  the  clefts  and  crevices  of  mountains,  not  ex 
cepting  those  of  the  Andes.  And  as  was  before  described,  the  equi- 
librium had  been  nearly  destroyed  by  the  sublimation  of  particles 
composing  the  elements,  by  which  operation  the  exterior  became  un- 
equal in  pressure  to  the  expansive  force  of  the  internal.  The  result 
was  some  of  the  most  mighty  and  inconceivable  agitations  of  the  inte- 
rior molten  mass,  the  noise  of  which  would  have  shattered  to  atoms 
the  complicated  organization  of  man.  The  convulsions  that  occurred 
were  so  immense  as  to  present  the  appearance  of  utter  destruction, 
and  it  would  have  seemed  that  the  materials  of  the  whole  earth  had 
experienced  one  universal  clash  in  an  instant  of  time.  And  it  was 
by  these  paroxysms,  which  were  altogether  indescribable,  that  the 
crust  of  the  earth  was  broken,  and  inconceivable  masses  of  stone  and 
molten  mineral  substances,  together  with  the  remains  of  organic  be- 
ings previously  upon  the  surface,  were  thrown  to  an  immense  height. 
The  sudden  upheaving  broke  stratum  after  stratum  into  great  and  mi- 
nute masses,  while  other  strata  were  bent  and  twisted  into  every  pos- 
sible position,  exposing  trap,  basalt,  granite,  sandstone,  shale,  &c., 
which  were  apparently  deranged  and  confused  in  the  most  indescriba- 
ble manner. 

At  the  very  moment  this  terrific  occurrence  took  place,  a process 
commenced  by  which  the  great  mass  of  lava  thrown  from  the  interior, 
conjoined  with  the  previous  solution  of  lime  and  coral  reefs,  became 
soon  segregated  and  condensed  ; and  being  attractive  to  the  carbon 
generally  pervading  the  earth  at  this  time,  the  result  was  a condensa- 
tion of  a great  portion  of  the  whole  mass  into  the  carboniferous  lime- 
stone and  coal  formations.  The  element  carbon,  which  had  been 
previously  associated  with,  became  by  this  process  disunited  from, 
other  particles  in  the  atmosphere,  to  a great  extent. 

This  resulted,  again,  in  a modification  of  the  composition  of  water; 
the  result  of  which,  again,  was  an  ascension  of  the  primary  elements 
to  associate  with  the  envelope  formed  hy  the  new  and  more  congenial 
atmosphere  of  the  earth. 

Mountains  that  were  then  thrown  from  the  interior,  have  since  been 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


247 


named  by  allegorical  terms,  each  of  which  has  a signification  that  will 
hereafter  be  explained.  Among  the  mountains  then  developed,  are 
the  Altay,  Ural,  and  Himalayah  mountains  in  Asia ; the  Alps,  upon 
which  Switzerland  is  now  located  ; the  Apennines  in  Italy,  and  the 
Pyrenees  between  France  and  Spain;  — also  the  beautiful  chain  of 
mountains  that  now  borders  the  Euphrates,  with  other  mountains  in 
various  other  portions  in  Asia  (which  will  hereafter  be  described)  ;■ — 
also  the  Grampian  mountains  in  Scotland,  a small  line  of  which  ex- 
tends nearly  to  the  national  line  that  divides  what  is  now  known  as 
Russia  from  the  other  European  nations  ; — also  the  Andes  of  South 
America,  which  yet  answer  as  vents  to  relieve  the  internal  heat  abound- 
ing in  the  liquid,  fiery  mass,  which  still  constitutes  several  thousand 
miles  of  the  earth’s  internal  substance.  The  Rocky  mountains  had 
been  in  existence  for  many  ages  previous.  The  Alleganies  became 
enlarged,  and  there  was  a great  division  of  the  earth  into  what  are 
now  known  as  the  eastern  and  western  hemispheres,  or  continents. 
A quarter  of  the  earth  made  its  appearance  at  this  epoch  — a greater 
quantity  than  had  been  before  manifested,  owing  to  the  water  being 
still  elevated,  being  increased  in  bulk,  decreased  in  density,  and  ap- 
proaching in  composition  nearer  to  that  which  now  exists. 

Thus  the  world  and  all  things  therein  contained  became  essentially 
changed ; and  then  was  the  commencement  of  a new  Era.  And 
these  occurrences  established  those  divisions  and  features  of  the 
earth  that  have  not  as  yet  become  materially  changed. 

The  water  then  became  very  greatly  modified,  insomuch  that  it 
became  suitable  to  give  birth  to  more  perfect  organizations.  The 
atmosphere  encompassing  the  whole  globe  became  correspondingly 
perfected,  so  as  to  sustain  new  orders  of  terrestrial  and  marine  pro- 
ductions that  soon  followed  as  ultimate  results  of  what  had  preceded. 
Seas,  lakes,  and  rivers,  became  now  the  circulating  media  through 
various  parts  of  the  world,  transporting  particles  and  substances  from 
place  to  place.  Though  these  possessed  less  power  than  the  waters 
before  existing,  there  was  no  diminution  of  action  to  perform  the 
same  work  that  the  same  element  had  for  many  ages  before  been  ac- 
complishing. ^ The  water  acted  upon  substances,  and  deposited  par- 
ticles, generating  motion  and  life  in  all  the  gelatinous  compositions 
that  were  properly  situated  to  receive  it.  And  it  gave  fertility  to  the 
inland  portions,  and  to  places  which  were  previously  concealed  be- 
neath its  overflowing  waves,  but  which  now  constitute  most  beautiful 
meadows  and  extensive  territories, — whose  capabilities  of  unfolding 


24S  NATURE’S  DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 

such  beauties  as  they  now  display,  would  not  have  been  believed  or 
imagined  by  man,  had  it  been  possible  for  man  to  exist  during  the 
development  of  these  portions. 

Thus  earth,  water,  and  atmosphere,  became  correspondingly  per- 
fected ; and  their  united  action  was  such,  that  all  formations  which 
resulted  as  an  ultimate  of  prior  species,  must  necessarily  have  an 
organization  comparatively  exalted  and  refined. 

§ 43.  This,  then,  is  the  period,  after  the  lapse  of  incalculable 
ages,  when  dry  land  became  visible.  And  after  the  inconceivable 
movements  in  the  earth,  the  water,  and  the  atmosphere,  the  equi- 
librium was  re-established,  and  all  was  again  rendered  calm  and  quiet. 
The  earth  contracted,  and  the  water,  becoming  less  dense,  expanded  to 
a greater  volume.  The  atmosphere  became  fitted  for  the  ascension 
of  ultimate  particles.  Yet  carbon  was  existing  to  a great  extent, 
while  oxygen  was  almost  entirely  undeveloped,  and  nitrogen  formed 
a great  portion  of  the  air,  neutralizing  the  action  of  the  other  ele- 
ments. F or  had  it  not  been  that  the  tendencies,  either  of  carbon  or 
of  oxygen,  had  been  counteracted  by  an  associated  element,  all  things 
would  have  instantly  become  inflamed,  and  would  have  been  dissolved 
with  great  rapidity.  But  the  equilibrium  thus  established,  rendered 
the  atmosphere  congenial,  and  suitable  to  perform  its  uses. 

And  the  aspect  of  things  generally,  manifested  the  dawning  of  a 
new  Era.  It  plainly  indicated  the  adaptation  of  all  substances  to 
each  other,  and  to  the  whole  agglomerated  Mass.  It  clearly  revealed 
the  development  and  preparation  of  substances  for  more  perfect  or- 
ganizations, and  also  showed  the  establishment  of  more  equal  and 
harmonious  conditions  than  could  have  existed  without  the  change. 

Tims  were  all  Nature  and  all  her  elements,  laws,  and  principles, 
quieted  into  repose  for  the  steady  and  successive  creations  of  new 
species  of  land  and  sea  developments. 

And  this  is  the  era  when  Motion  transcends  Life  and  becomes 
Sensation,  — and  when  forms  transcend  plants  and  become  substan- 
tial species  of  animals:  — and  this  is  termed  by  geologists,  the  “Car- 
boniferous Formation.”  For  the  avertebrated  and  osseous  fish  spe- 
cies now  progressed  to  higher  degrees  of  perfection.  And  it  is  most 
tranquillizing  to  the  mind  to  contemplate  the  development  of  distinct 
types  and  infallible  indices  of  higher  forms,  and  to  meditate  upon  the 
perfect  mutual  adaptations  of  all  things  to  each  other,  and  to  the  pro- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


249 


gressive  unfolding  of  higher  forms,  which  Nature  indicates  with  evi- 
dences that  can  not  be  misconceived  or  misapprehended. 

All  things  had  been  thrown  into  a chaotic  condition,  the  confusion 
of  which  to  some  minds  would  appear  altogether  to  exclude  the  idea 
of  .any  order  or  law  as  being  concerned  in  the  creation  of  the  world. 
And  many  noble  and  enlightened  minds  have  endeavored  on  such 
grounds  to  refute  the  reasonings  of  those  who  have  investigated  the 
sublime  workings  of  Nature,  and  who,  by  observing  an  unlimited  con- 
catenation of  causes,  have  endeavored  to  establish  some  orderly  sys- 
tem, so  that  all  subordinate  things  might  be  conceived  of  by  analogy. 

The  opinions  of  geologists  are  in  some  particulars  very  dissimilar 
and  very  incorrect.  But  geologists  are  nevertheless  worthy  of  the 
approbation  of  the  world  for  endeavoring  to  unfold  truths  that  might 
lead  to  a proper  comprehension  of  the  origin  of  the  earth.  And  I 
do  not  therefore  feel  impressed  to  contradict  any  of  their  theories  or 
propositions,  but  merely  to  state  the  truth,  in  order  that  that  which 
they  have  not  discovered  may  be  correctly  inferred  from  the  evi- 
dences presented  in  this  course  of  generalization,  the  lasis  of  which 
they  will  not  dispute. 

They  have  considered  this  present  period  of  stratification,  the  third 
of  the  general  division,  including  the  primary.  But  I am  distinctly 
impressed  that  Sensation  did  not  before  this  period  become  an  un- 
folded principle  of  the  original  law.  And  as  the  earth  has  now 
assumed  established  divisions,  and  as  the  water  and  atmosphere  have 
ascended  to  a higher  state  of  refinement,  this  is  the  epoch  when  types 
were  ushered  into  being,  which  ascend  undisturbed  to  the  organiza- 
tion  of  mankind.  And,  according  to  a previous  declaration,  the 
inconceivable  periods  of  time  that  the  world  with  all  the  forms  it  had 
developed,  had  existed  before  this  era,  constituted  one  unimaginable 
night  or  “ evening ,” — the  unfolding  of  which  manifests  new  beauties, 
even  the  “ morning  ” of  a new  existence.  Therefore  “the  even- 
ing- AND  THE  MORNING  WERE  THE  FIRST  DAY.” 

This  is  a remarkable  era  in  the  geological  history  of  the  earth’s 
formation.  Although  it  is  impossible  for  geologists  to  determine  upon 
the  exact  chronological  period  of  these  occurrences,  from  any  indica- 
tions which  Nature  presents,  yet  natural  appearances  have  served  as 
a guide  to  a general  inference.  But  a truthful  conclusion  has  not  as 
yet  been  established. 

Dry  land  now  appears.  The  earth  is  divided  into  two  great  con- 
tinents, and  the  rivers,  lakes,  seas,  and  oceans,  commence  theii 


250 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


ceaseless  operations,  performing  the  work  of  decomposition  and  sedi- 
mentary segregation.  The  earth  now  assumes  the  rudimental  stage 
ot  its  future  development,  insomuch  that  all  things  now  manifested 
put  forth  evident  indications  of  a far  more  glorious  era. 

Before  this  period,  the  earth  was  apparently  “ without  form,  and 
void,  and  darkness  was  upon  the  face  of  the  deep  for  the  encompas- 
sing robe  had  not  been  illuminated  by  the  degree  of  light  which  now 
dispersed  the  utter  darkness.  This  was  accomplished  by  a change  of 
the  atmosphere,  which  in  becoming  more  refined,  became  also  more 
susceptible  to  the  action  of  the  sun’s  rays,  and  thus  clothed  the  earth 
in  a more  grand  and  sublime  robe.  The  earth  was  before  this  with- 
out form  or  order,  comparatively,  because  the  present  era  unfolds  the 
superior  beauty,  and  harmony,  and  order,  that  the  internal  elements 
were  designed  to  produce.  Therefore  order  becomes  now  a con- 
spicuous indication  of  Nature.  Animated  forms  now  dwell  upon  the 
dry  land,  whereas  before,  no  living  or  creeping  thing  existed  upon 
the  earth’s  bosom.  The  change  of  the  earth,  water,  and  atmosphere, 
was  a transformation  from  that  which  was  before  seemingly  a foun- 
tain of  chaotic  materials. 

All  the  evidences  which  geologists  and  naturalists  have  brought 
forward  as  proving  the  exact  conditions  and  circumstances  under 
which  the  coal  formation  was  produced,  do  not  in  reality  convey  a 
correct  idea  of  the  causes  that  produced  these  great  carbonaceous 
deposites.  In  many  portions  of  the  world,  coal  is  found  to  be  rest- 
ing upon  the  primary  coating  of  the  earth ; while  in  other  places  it 
lies  upon  the  various  strata  of  the  transition  rocks,  such  as  the  quartz 
and  slate,  and  especially  the  limestone.  These  formations  also  de- 
velop ironstone,  limestone,  sandstone,  and  various  other  kinds  of 
deposites.  Some  of  these  enter  into  the  composition  of  coal  itself, 
while  others  form  intervening  strata,  between  the  layers  of  coal.  It 
is  evident  from  this  that  the  substance  of  the  ironstone  and  other  com- 
positions, had  a peculiar  affinity  for  the  carbon  of  the  atmosphere ; 
and  this  being  thus  attracted  to  and  associated  with  the  former,  the 
whole  consequently  became  condensed  into  the  formation  of  which 
the  coal  is  a prominent  part.  Also  various  parts  of  the  sea-beds 
had  not  been  subjected  to  the  same  amount  of  abrasion  as  others  ; 
and  thus  they  became  proper  receptacles  for  the  formation  of  the  coal 
and  the  stratifications  that  are  associated  therewith.  In  those  places, 
dry  land  became  visible ; the  result  of  which  was  an  active  gelati- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


251 


nous  development,  occurring  from  the  assimilation  of  light  and  heat 
with  the  previously  decomposed  vegetable  substances,  and  which  still 
possessed  the  principle  of  vitality.  And  being  subjected  to  such 
favorable  circumstances,  a lively  impregnation  was  the  consequence, 
the  action  of  which  reorganized  the  parts  that  before  had  been 
assimilated. 


§ 44.  Therefore  vegetable  formations  became  very  thickly  dissem- 
inated upon  the  portions  of  land  that  were  thus  raised  from  the 
depths  of  the  sea.  Immense  masses  were  thus  formed,  and  trees 
towered  to  a great  height,  the  species  of  which  are  now  entirely  ex- 
tinct. These  were  existing  in  various  parts  where  moisture  pre- 
vailed, and  where  there  was  an  abundant  supply  of  the  requisite  ele- 
ments. And  so  exceedingly  fertile  were  these  vegetable  portions, 
that  the  plants,  in  their  rapid  growth,  extracted  the  strength  of  each 
other,  and  became  prostrated  ; and  decomposition  followed  as  a nat- 
ural result.  This  decomposition  formed  heavy  beds  of  moss ; and 
these  constantly  collected  substances  of  like  nature,  as  the  latter  were 
wafted  from  their  locations  by  the  excessive  tides  ; and  thus  immense 
masses  of  vegetable  substance  were  formed.  These  gradually  sank 
below  the  surface  upon  the  shale  and  limestone  substances  which 
formed  suitable  foundations  for  them.  Being  thus  below  their  origi- 
nal level,  these  masses  formed  a basis  for  the  deposition  of  other  dis- 
integrated and  floating  particles  (of  which  the  solution  of  lime  and 
shale  formed  a great  portion),  and  thus  in  process  of  time  would  be 
formed  an  overlying  stratum  of  shale. 

It  is  well  known  among  chemists  that  plants  emit  oxygen,  and 
attract  and  assimilate  with  their  composition,  nitrogen,  carbon,  and 
other  such  mineral  elements  as  constitute  a part  of  their  organized 
forms.  This  fact  applies  to  vegetables  now  existing ; but  it  gives 
but  a faint  idea  of  the  nature  of  the  vegetable  productions  that  ex-, 
isted  during  the  era  under  present  contemplation.  They  were,  it  is 
true,  forms  suitable  for  the  transformation  of  inherent  elements  into 
the  atmosphere  by  reflux,  but  they  were  still  more  perfectly  adapted, 
to  assimilate  with  their  own  composition  a very  large  amount  of  car- 
bon,— which  in  reality  entered  almost  purely  into  their  forms,  an# 
became  an  ingredient  dissimilar  to  any  now  known  upon  the  face  of 
the  earth.  Their  food  therefore  was  carbon;  their  soil,  the  pro- 
gressed, gelatinous,  vegetable  decompositions  of  the  primitive  ages. 
Hence,  when  these  masses  were  thus  decayed  and  condensed,  and 


252 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


finally  transformed  by  the  action  of  elements,  they  constituted  the 
carboniferous,  or  coal  formations. 

Geologists  have  accumulated  the  remains  of  plants  that  have  been 
found  in  the  intervening  strata  of  quartz,  lime,  and  shale,  which  occur 
in  the  coal  formation  : and  thus  it  is  proved  beyond  the  possibility  of 
a doubt,  that  as  each  of  these  immense  bodies  of  moss  became  con- 
cealed by  a coating  of  the  dissolved  substances  that  were  conveyed 
by  the  waters  and  deposited  over  them,  so  the  latter  deposites  became 
in  like  manner  the  receptacles  of  other  floating  substances,  like  unto 
the  gelatinous,  living,  germinating  substances  that  were  first  depos- 
ited. And  as  these  collected  upon  the  strata,  the  action  of  the 
carbon,  light,  and  heat,  soon  resulted  in  their  pregnation.  These 
then  germinated,  and  produced  an  immense  growth  of  vegetation. 
And  by  the  same  process  as  was  observed  in  the  previous  mass,  lux- 
uriant growth,  assimilation  of  carbon,  decay,  and  condensation, 
occurred  in  the  succeeding  masses  also.  And  they  became  likewise 
the  foundations  of  immense  beds  of  moss,  receiving  similar  sub- 
stances as  drifted  and  deposited  by  the  tides,  with  occasionally  a few 
infusoria  and  sea-shells:  and  the  whole  settled,  decayed,  and  con- 
densed, as  before,  forming  an  immense  mass  of  carbon.  This,  by 
the  action  of  other  existing  circumstances,  became  converted  into  the 
substance  of  another  stratum  of  coal. 

These  vegetables  would  not  have  become  transformed  into  the 
composition  of  coal,  had  other  conditions,  other  elements,  or  other 
circumstances  existed,  or  the  same  as  now  exist  upon  the  earth’s  sur- 
face. Thus  one  stratum  after  another  was  produced;  and  the  pro- 
cess would  have  continued  until  the  present  day,  had  it  not  been  that 
the  substances  in  solution  which  were  then  abundant  throughout  the 
waters,  became  exhausted,  and  had  not  the  elements,  the  conditions, 
and  all  things,  become  so  changed  as  to  render  it  no  longer  possible 
for  the  same  process  to  be  in  operation. 

Thus  was  the  coal  formation  consummated  ; and  thus  were  its 
intermediate  strata  required  and  adapted — designed — as  a basis  upon 
which  other  strata  of  coal  might  be  deposited  and  perfected.  If 
these  intervening  strata  of  shale,  limestone,  ironstone,  and  sandstone, 
fiad  not  settled  upon  each  succeeding  stratum  of  carbonaceous  mat- 
ter, the  substance  of  coal  would  not  have  been  in  existence,  espe- 
cially in  its  present  form.  Therefore  it  was  positively  necessary  that 
the  solutions  of  which  the  intervenin');  strata  are  formed,  should  first 
exist ; that  the  water  should  perform  its  circulating  functions  (the 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


253 


result  of  which  was  the  deposition  of  previously  suspended  particles), 
and  that  the  general  surrounding  elements  and  conditions  should  be 
thus  favorable,  so  that  all  conjoined  might  produce  and  condense 
both  the  vegetable  mass  and  its  concealing  stratum,  — and  that  one 
might  become  the  useful  substance  for  Man,  and  the  other  the  basis 
upon  which  the  former  might  be  formed.  And  if  these  things  had  not 
all  existed,  a substance  like  unto  coal  would  not  have  been  known  to 
the  inhabitants  of  the  earth. 

Coal,  therefore,  is  considered  the  first  of  the  secondary  formations. 
And  here  I would  remark  that  it  is  impossible  for  me  to  accede  to 
all  the  classifications  made  by  geologists  fin  either  of  the  kingdoms; 
but  so  far  as  classes  and  species  have  been  designated  by  appropriate 
terms,  it  is  proper  that  the  nomenclature  should  be  preserved,  instead 
of  substituting  in  its  place  terms  and  phraseology  not  altogether 
familiar  to  the  scientific  reader. 

The  coal  era  presents  indications  important  as  respects  a proper 
comprehension  of  geology,  and  also  furnishes  important  hints  in 
regard  to  the  process  of  creation.  For  the  withdrawing  from  the 
atmosphere  of  the  carbon  which  has  entered  into  the  composition  of 
coal,  and  into  the  carbonate  of  lime,  must  of  necessity  produce  a 
great  change  in  the  atmosphere,  and  consequently  in  the  earth  and 
water.  For  as  carbon  had  before  supplied  a great  portion  of  the 
atmosphere,  the  absence  of  this  element  must  now  of  necessity  be 
supplied  by  ascending  gaseous  particles  of  a different  nature.  And 
this  must  inevitably  work  a great  change  in  the  strata  above  the  coal, 
and  upon  the  dry  land  and  its  productions,  and  the  water  also  must 
become  changed  into  a different  combination  of  substances,  such  as 
had  not  before  ascended  to  higher  positions.  The  change  was  grad- 
ual and  imperceptible  from  the  commencement  to  the  consummation 
of  the  coal  era : but  when  this  period  was  closed,  the  whole  change 
was  comparatively  great ; and  the  elements  were  fitted  to  give  life, 
and  form,  and  texture,  to  the  inhabitants  of  the  sea  and  land,  of  alto- 
gether a different  character  from  any  before  existing  ; and  these 
ascended  from  lower  types,  and  assumed  a state  of  progression  cor- 
responding to  all  else  existing  in  sea,  earth,  and  atmosphere. 

The  chain  can  not  be  broken  as  extending  from  the  primary  for- 
mation to  the  coal  era ; from  the  first  to  the  ultimate  element  that 
surrounded  the  earth,  and  from  the  first  organization  possessing  Life, 
to  the  full  development  of  the  principle  of  Sensation.  For  the  very 
moment  the  existence  of  the  first  is  established,  that  very  moment, 


2-54 


nature's  divine  revelations. 


according  to  the  eternal  law  of  progressive  development,  the  future 
unfolding  of  the  latter  is  rendered  certain. 

§ 45.  It  is  not  proper  that  anything  should  be  considered  sacred 
and  holy,  merely  because  we  have  lost  the  period  of  its  origin  among 
the  revolutions  of  innumerable  ages.  Nor  should  an  enthusiastic 
veneration  be  cherished  for  the  idea  of  the  creation  of  anything, 
when  in  reality  the  term  “ creation”  has  no  signification,  inasmuch  as 
the  origin  of  every  form,  principle,  and  substance,  in  being,  is  owing 
to  some  prior  cause.  And  it  should  be  understood  that  cause  and 
effect  are  eternally  inseparable  ; that  is,  inseparable  from  the  com- 
mencement of  all  causes  to  the  accomplishment  of  all  effects  ; and 
thus  one  age  or  period  of  eternity  is  comprehended  within  the  cycle 
of  one  eternal  Cause,  and  one  eternal  Effect. 

Array  no  arguments,  therefore,  against  the  truthful  and  magnificent 
doctrine  of  progressive  development.  For  if  this  is  overthrown, 
that  very  moment  all  laws  and  principles  become  annihilated,  and 
Cause  and  Effect  can  no  longer  be  considered  as  the  agents  of 
breathing  into  being  the  grand  and  sublime  manifestations  that  beau- 
tify the  bosom  of  a tender  and  caressing  Nature  ! Upon  the  immu- 
table foundation  of  this  law  of  progression,  rest  all  arguments  and 
conclusions  that  can  be  legitimately  drawn  from  any  material  or  ex- 
ternal substance  that  exists  in  any  department  of  the  earth  or  the 
Universe.  Yet  if  there  should  be  any  inclination  to  dispute  the  fore- 
going classifications  of  the  geological  and  organic  developments,  let 
the  objection  not  be  arrayed  against  isolated  and  detached  phrases, 
sentences,  or  propositions;  but  let  the  attack  be  at  the  basis — the 
foundation  on  which  rests  all  that  has  been  and  shall  be  said  con- 
cerning those  indestructible  truths  which  are  greater  than  man  can 
comprehend  or  duly  appreciate. 

The  transformation  of  elements,  therefore,  into  new  forms  and 
combinations,  becomes  a matter  of  necessity  from  the  sequestration 
of  that  almost  all-pervading  element,  carbon,  into  other  substances. 
And  this  is  therefore  a conspicuous  and  decided  change,  and  there- 
fore a new  Era.  And  the  description  of  the  vegetable  and  animal 
productions  of  this  period  which  is  soon  to  follow,  will  manifest  more 
distinctly  the  truthfulness  of  this  proposition. 

During  the  process  of  this  and  previous  formations,  various  metal- 
lic substances,  whose  distinct  characteristics  designate  them  as  min- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


255 


erals,  became  deposited  in  various  parts  where  constant  segregation 
was  taking  place.  The  first  of  these  is  tin.  This  lies  nearer  the 
primary  than  most  of  the  others.  Subsequent  to  this,  lead,  zinc,  and 
copper,  were  developed.  These  are  interspersed  in  various  strata 
bearing  a close  relation  to  the  coal,  mountain  limestone,  and  new  red 
sandstone ; while  silver  and  gold  are  among  the  accompaniments  of 
iron-stone,  which  is  found  in  the  carboniferous  and  in  many  other 
subdivisions  of  the  secondary  formation. 

It  has  been  supposed  by  chemists  that  the  atmosphere  is  composed 
of  properly  elementary  substances.  This  is  true ; but  gaseous  ele- 
ments could  only  have  originated  from  the  minerals  of  the  earth. 
They  are  therefore  ascended  molecules,  which  may  be  considered  as 
the  perfection  of  mineral  bodies  like  unto  those  which  still  remain 
concealed  in  the  crust  of  the  earth.  Therefore  the  substances  known 
as  carbonate  of  lime  and  coal,  must  have  received  their  main  compo- 
nent ingredients  from  the  atmosphere  that  then  enveloped  the  earth. 
And  carbonic  acid  being  so  exceedingly  abundant,  this  rendered  the 
earth  fertile,  which  yielded  flowerless  vegetation  in  great  luxuriance. 

And  it  is  a truth  too  conspicuous  to  be  misconceived,  that,  from 
the  earliest  vegetable  forms  to  the  present  era,  there  is  a general  and 
progressive  ascension  of  each  species  to  higher  and  corresponding 
forms.  This,  however,  would  be  more  susceptible  of  demonstration 
if  the  kind  of  vegetation  that  was  produced  during  the  coal  formation 
could  now  be  seen  among  the  strata  of  that  period.  But  the  plants 
of  that  period  partook  greatly  of  the  nature  of  the  equisetacese,  which 
were  very  easily  decomposed  by  water  and  exposure  to  a tropical 
temperature.  A genus  of  this  class  is  existing  at  this  present  time. 

The  vegetable  productions  of  this  period  varied  from  the  moss  to 
the  stupendous  conifera-trees  that  then  existed  very  extensively  in 
marshes,  and  on  land  where  warmth  and  moisture  constantly  existed. 
And  the  sigillaria  and  monocotiledons  then  existed  and  flourished 
very  extensively. 

The  plants  of  the  first  species  existing,  were  composed  of  a gela- 
tinous cellular  tissue,  whose  fibres  and  complex  membrane  constituted 
the  medium  of  life,  where  the  power  of  assimilation  and  reproduction 
was  seated.  From  these  came  mosses;  from  these  the  ferns;  and 
from  these  the  conifers,  which  were  an  imperfect  type  of  the  pines 
that  now  exist  upon  the  earth’s  surface.  Some  of  these  trees  were 
exceedingly  large  and  beautiful.  Their  altitude  was  from  twenty  to 


256 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


sixty  feet.  Their  limbs  were  straight  and  fern-like,  and  their  leaves 
bore  a resemblance  to  those  of  the  palm.  They  approached  nearer 
to  the  pine  than  any  others  then  existing.  Some  of  the  plants  were 
flowerless,  while  others  brought  forth  flowers  of  a peculiar  and  varie- 
gated appearance.  Of  these  there  were  several  species,  the  highest 
of  which  represented  the  palm,  and  the  lowest  were  in  character  near 
the  endogenous  plants,  which  grow  by  a deposition  of  particles  upon 
the  inner  surface.  The  flowering  plants  brought  forth  a seed-vessel 
containing  seeds ; and  there  were  few  plants  existing  that  had  seeds 
with  two  lobes,  because  the  exogenous  species  were  not  fully  devel- 
oped until  the  close  of  the  carboniferous  era. 

The  various  kinds  of  animal  forms  that  had  previously  existed, 
became  now  entirely  extinct ; while  the  molluscs,  cephalopods,  &c., 
were  reproduced  in  abundance  ; and  these,  together  with  all  classes 
of  the  univalve,  bivalve,  and  multivalve  shells,  continued  their  upward 
tendencies  to  higher  species  of  the  same  classes.  The  spirifer  is  en- 
tirely extinct ; while  the  terebratula,  productus,  and  others  of  like 
nature,  continued  in  great  abundance  through  all  the  ages  of  the 
present  era.  The  seas  were  extensively  inhabited  by  species  of 
scorpion  and  saurian  fishes,  slightly  exemplified  in  the  sturgeon  now 
existing,  which  in  its  embryonic  state  has  no  vertebral  portions,  but 
rather  a gelatinous  cord  that  assumes  subsequently  the  form  of  ver- 
tebrae. And  such  characterized  all  the  species  of  fish  then  traversing 
the  watery  domain.  Therefore  osseous  and  unosseous  fishes  existed 
to  a great  extent ; and  also  the  plants,  both  of  the  sea  and  land,  were 
such  only  as  could  have  flourished  under  the  existing  conditions. 

These  inhabitants  of  the  watery  depths  were  very  differently  orga- 
nized from  those  existing  during  the  previous  periods.  They,  like 
the  plants,  possessed  a vascular  tissue  ; and  this  is  manifested  by  the 
conjoined  boxed  scales  and  the  interwoven  network  that  were  very 
much  existing  upon  the  class  of  sauroid  fishes  that  inhabited  the  seas 
at  this  period.  And  the  plants  manifested  the  same  by  their  exoge- 
nous nature,  which  is  distinguished  by  the  concentric  or  spiral 
arrangement  of  particles  from  their  outward  coating.  Still,  cotile- 
dons  were  not  existing,  except  the  monocotiledons,  which  sustained 
an  intermediate  position  between  the  cryptogamia  and  the  dicotile- 
dons  ; which  are  the  highest  type  of  the  vegetable  kingdom. 


§ 46.  The  fishes  being  progressed  from  those  previously  formed, 
whose  structure  was  wholly  cellular,  possessed  both  the  cellular  and 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


257 


vascular  tissues, — which  established  imperfect  serous  and  mucous 
surfaces,  upon  which  sensation  must  inevitably  exist.  Sensation  thus 
became  an  established  principle,  though  it  was  as  yet  but  imperfectly 
developed  from  Motion  and  Life.  Consequently  inclinations  must 
have  been  the  result.  These  developed  instinct,  or  living  desire. 
This  is  the  first  principle  that  corresponds  to  thought.  Therefore  the 
Motion,  Life,  and  Sensation,  that  these  sauroid  fishes  possessed,  repre- 
sent the  same  principles  far  more  perfected,  the  highest  degree  of  which 
corresponds  to  the  principle  of  Intelligence.  Thus  the  inhabitants  of 
the  seas  at  this  era,  manifested  for  the  first  time  the  unfolding  of  the 
law  of  Motion,  whereby  a more  perfect  exaltation  of  the  same  princi- 
ple could  be  naturally  inferred. 

So  likewise  with  the  land  plants  : the  cellular  were  flowerless,  con- 
sisting of  mosses,  ferns,  fungi,  and  others,  which  corresponded  to  the 
one-membrane  and  radiating  nature  of  the  first  animal  species.  And 
as  these  plants  gradually  became  unfolded,  developing  the  exogenous 
form,  they  brought  forth  beautiful  flowers  — an  indication  correspond- 
ing to  that  of  Sensation,  and  pointing  to  the  perfected  condition  of 
the  vegetating  principle.  Thus  the  plants  revealed  Life,  and  the 
fishes  Sensation  ; but  inasmuch  as  their  forms  were  yet  imperfect,  so 
likewise  were  their  endowments.  But  the  chain  is  unbroken  between 
the  previous  and  present  existing  species,  in  each  kingdom. 

It  must  be  observed  that  Nature’s  developments  are  exceedingly 
dissimilar  in  form,  essence,  and  quality,  as  the  conditions  change, 
both  as  regards  the  temperature  of  the  climate,  the  location,  and  the 
influences  of  incidental  causes.  Thus  dissimilar  forms  were  presented, 
which  it  is  almost  impossible  to  arrange  in  perfect  order,  because  the 
time  and  circumstances  are  beyond  natural  calculation.  Hence  the 
things  that  are  existing  during  this  era,  are  in  many  portions  of  the 
earth  rather  unlike,  and  seemingly  disconnected.  But  let  it  not  be 
forgotten  that  there  is  a correspondence  between  all  general  develop- 
ments and  the  specific  causes  that  produce  them.  For,  as  was  estab- 
lished in  the  key,  “ all  things  are  constantly  assuming  forms  ; and 
these  are  in  accordance  with  the  existing  exciting  causes.” 

The  experience  of  the  ichthyologist  can  be  appealed  to  in  proof  of 
the  existence  of  the  species  of  fishes  that  were  in  being  during  the 
carboniferous  era,  especially  so  far  as  his  knowledge  extends  into  the 
reality  of  these  creations,  from  his  observations  upon  the  vestiges  still 
indicating  the  classes  and  species  then  inhabiting  the  waters.  The 
botanist  can  arrange  in  an  order  of  general  development,  the  original 

17 


25  S 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


vegetable  productions,  up  to  the  classes  and  species  of  the  present 
era  ; and  geologists  are  acquainted  with  the  order  of  formation  of 
which  I speak. 

But  the  close  of  the  carboniferous  era  is  evidently  a great  consum- 
mation as  affecting  the  earthy,  mineral,  vegetable,  and  animal  forms. 
And  all  are  modified  and  brought  to  a degree  of  development  superior 
to  what  was  manifested  in  any  prior  age  ; and  hence  they  constitute 
one  of  the  most  perfect  and  decided  links  in  the  general  chain  of 
progression. 

Many  parts  of  the  dry  land  were  overshadowed  by  beautiful  palms, 
ferns,  and  sigillarias  ; and  the  atmosphere,  which  was  active  in  gene- 
rating rain,  contributed  greatly  to  their  luxuriance  of  growth.  And 
the  mountains  that  now  were  in  some  .parts  yielding  mosses  and  other 
species  of  vegetation,  gave  Nature  a very  splendid  and  beautiful  ap- 
pearance— more  so  in  some  localities  than  exists  at  this  present  age 
on  the  earth’s  surface. 

The  change  in  the  atmosphere  and  water,  occurring  from  the  con- 
sumption of  carbonic  acid  gas,  from  recombinations  of  the  main  exter- 
nal elements,  &c.,  now  rendered  the  previous  equilibrium  of  the 
interior  and  exterior  somewhat  disturbed.  External  pressure  was 
diminished  and  became  inadequate  to  counterbalance  the  expansion 
of  the  igneous  mass  within.  Consequently,  Nature  was  in  danger  of 
an  instantaneous  convulsion. 

The  face  of  the  earth  at  this  time  would  have  appeared  to  the  eye 
of  man,  as  if  Nature  were  clothed  in  a sombre  mantle,  and  had  sunk 
into  a death-like  sleep.  No  busy  insects  would  have  diverted  the 
mind  with  their  musical  hum  ; no  birds  were  flitting  through  the  air, 
or  perching  upon  the  branches ; and  all  forests  and  marshes  looked 
disconsolate  and  forsaken.  No  living  being  could  have  been  found 
with  whom  communications  or  pleasurable  emotions  could  have  been 
exchanged.  There  was  nothing  existing  which  the  mind  of  man 
would  not  have  looked  upon  as  being  altogether  uncongenial,  not- 
withstanding Nature  yielded  forth  her  best  forms  that  could  have  been 
developed  under  such  circumstances.  But  her  previous  living,  active 
energies,  were  now  sunk  into  repose.  All  interior  beauties  were  con- 
cealed, for  the  want  of  some  more  energetic  forces  to  call  them  forth. 
All  conditions  were  seemingly  immoveable,  and  some  more  active  en- 
ergies were  required  to  set  in  motion  those  paralyzed  substances  and 
forms  that  spread  over  the  earth.  Darkness  was  again  upon  the  face 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


259 


of  the  deep  ; and  the  waters  were  moved  with  ceaseless  agitation  — 
with  frightful  and  uncontrolled  waves  that  almost  lashed  the  mountain- 

O 

tops.  It  was  now  evident  that  inherent  forces  were  moving  upon  the 
face  of  the  waters,  causing  inconceivable  excitement  to  abound 
throughout  their  domain.  The  equilibrium  had  been  destroyed. 
The  water  and  atmosphere  were  unequal  in  pressure  to  the  interior 
expansion,  and  a change  must  inevitably  ensue.  Consequently  the 
igneous  fluid  assumed  impetuous  motions  at  various  parts  of  the  inte- 
rior of  the  earth’s  crust.  Violent  tremblings  and  paroxysms  occurred, 
followed  by  wonderful  breathings  of  lava  from  the  Andes  and  other 
mountains ; but  this  could  not  restore  the  equilibrium.  Therefore 
internal  elements  continued  to  rush  together  and  recede  with  incon- 
ceivable agitation.  The  result  was  an  expansion  of  interior  particles 
that  shook  the  earth  in  some  parts  to  its  very  centre,  upheaving  the 
rocks  primarily  formed,  together  with  trap,  slate,  shale,  sandstone, 
and  also  various  strata  of  the  carboniferous  formation.  These  were 
turned  and  twisted  from  their  original  beds  into  perpendicular  and 
inclined  positions,  several  miles  of  the  previously-formed  strata  being 
broken  and  contorted  into  every  conceivable  shape. 

The  surface  of  the  earth  subsequently  presented  a very  different 
appearance  from  what  it  had  at  any  previous  time.  Portions  of  the 
land  that  were  below  the  water,  wTere  raised  to  a great  height  above 
it,  and  other  portions  were  correspondingly  depressed.  Mountains 
and  prominences  that  were  previously  formed,  were  now  broken 
asunder  in  various  parts,  and  their  positions  and  appearances  became 
very  much  changed,  insomuch  that  new  valleys  and  coves  were 
formed,  which  now  constitute  the  beds  and  borders  of  large  seas. 
Chains  of  mountains  in  Asia,  in  Scotland,  and  Switzerland,  became 
now  permanently  established.  Among  those  in  Asia  was  Mount 
Ararat,  which  before  could  only  be  seen  a little  above  the  surface  of 
the  water.  The  convulsion  of  Nature  was  thus  universal,  though  it 
affected  some  parts  more  than  others,  because  vents  previously  ex- 
isted in  some  mountains. 


§ 47.  The  evolving  of  internal  elements  soon  quieted  the  agitation 
of  the  water  and  atmosphere,  the  density  of  which  became  very  much 
changed,  and  both  were  rendered  equal  to  the  expansive  tendency 
of  the  interior  elements  ; and  thus  the  equilibrium  was  again  restored. 
The  results  of  the  convulsion  were,  another  shrinking  of  the  crust  of 
the  earth  toward  its  centre,  a reorganization  of  the  watery  element,  a 


2G0 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


dissipation  of  still  more  of  the  carbon  in  the  air,  and  a replacing  of 
the  same  by  oxygen.  Thus  oxygen,  nitrogen,  and  a small  portion 
of  carbon,  together  with  the  particles  composing  the  water  that  were 
constantly  associating  themselves  with  the  ultimate  elements,  com- 
posed the  atmospheric  envelope  of  the  globe. 

The  earth  soon  generated  new  compositions  upon  its  surface  as  a 
result  of  the  emission  from  the  interior  substances.  Thus  a new 
stratification  was  formed  ; and  this  again  is  subdivided  by  geologists 
into  three  distinct  substances,  which  are  all  apparent  in  some  portions 
of  the  previous  stratification. 

It  is  well  known  that  the  limestone  contains  a great  amount  of 
carbon ; and  this  reveals  its  affinity  for  the  carboniferous  formation. 
And  the  quartz  and  other  substances  combining  with  the  metal  iron, 
and  this  with  oxygen,  the  whole  produced  a new  combination,  which 
is  termed  the  iron-stone  (oxyde  of  iron),  and  the  magnesian  limestone, 
— all  of  which  are  generally  covered  by  heavy  beds  of  marl.  And 
it  is  a well-ascertained  truth  in  chemistry,  that  each  of  the  original 
elements  contained  in  the  composition  of  the  earth  (which  are  sup- 
posed to  he  fifty-five  in  number),  combines  variously  with  others  by 
chemical  affinity  ; and  thus  compounds  change,  presenting  corre- 
sponding changes  in  form,  appearance,  and  properties.  And  it  is  by 
the  process  of  combination  and  recombination  alone  that  all  forms, 
from  the  angular  to  the  circular,  during  all  their  processes  of  crystal- 
lization, constantly  manifest  the  same  general  law  of  progressive 
ascension,  insomuch  that  new  and  higher  forms  and  compositions  are 
constantly  being  produced,  though  elements  and  essential  qualities 
remain  unchanged.  Therefore  the  formation  of  the  new  red  sand- 
stone only  unfolds  a new  substance,  which  resulted  from  the  previous 
occurrence,  and  from  the  entire  change  of  the  water  and  atmosphere 
surrounding  and  acting  upon  the  earth  at  this  time. 

Thus  the  whole  Mass  became  changed.  The  earth  became  less 
in  diameter,  the  water  less  in  density  and  bulk,  the  atmosphere 
lighter  and  more  refined,  — and  all  things  were  equally  and  perma- 
nently changed  into  new  forms  and  compositions.  And  the  elements 
were  now  prepared  to  bring  forth  new  substances,  both  in  the  sea 
and  on  the  land.  New  laws,  new  principles  and  elements,  were 
now  putting  forth  their  energies,  all  of  which  must  result  in  an  entire 
change  of  the  earth’s  creations.  Nature  was  revived  from  a long 
sleep.  New  light  and  new  beauties  were  now  to  be  breathed  into 


nature’s  divine  revelations.  ijGl 

existence.  For  the  firmament*  was  above,  and  divided  the  waters 
from  the  waters,  and  thus  comparative  darkness  was  dissipated.  And 
new  things,  concerning  which  more  will  hereafter  be  mentioned,  were 
now  in  embryo  for  ultimate  perfection.  Therefore,  what  was  before 
said  concerning  this  era,  is  now  entirely  verified  : for  everything  has 
now  assumed  a different  character  and  condition  from  what  had  existed 
in  any  other  era  in  the  creation  of  the  earth.  Therefore  the  expres- 
sion is  rendered  clear  and  forcible,  that  “ the  evening  and  the  morning 
were  the  second  day." 

So  far  as  the  researches  of  geologists  have  been  successful  in  ex- 
ploring the  fossil  remains  of  this  age,  they  give  a general  conception 
of  the  real  formations,  though  these  were  far  more  extensive  than 
discoveries  yet  made  have  indicated.  The  prevailing  idea  deduced 
from  geological  appearances  concerning  this  era,  is  that  fishes  and 
saurians  were  more  extensive  than  any  other  forms.  And  it  has  also 
been  supposed  that  the  original  forms  and  - species  of  land-plants 
were  entirely  destroyed  at  the  close  of  the  carboniferous  formation. 
Then  again,  the  belief  has  been  generally  acceded  to,  that  the  lepi- 
dodendron  still  exists  as  an  ultimate  of  the  lower  species ; and  it 
is  known  that  ferns,  mosses,  and  fucoides,  flourished  during  this  era, 
though  not  very  extensively.  And  the  marl  beds  have  been  very 
properly  supposed  to  be  the  result  of  a great  collection  of  the  lower 
orders  of  the  molluscs  : for  they  are  apparently  masses  of  shells, 
each  bed  of  which  represents  slightly  all  the  types  of  the  molluscs 
which  are  formed  from  the  crystallized  carbonate  of  lime.  And 
these  beds  have  yielded  a great  variety  of  the  lower  species  of 
mosses,  these  never  ascending  to  the  higher  ferns  or  the  corniferas 
which  represent  the  pine  of  the  present  day. 

The  plants  were  neither  very  thrifty  nor  abundant.  Few  flowers 
were  existing ; for  the  classes  of  plants  that  thrived  most  during  this 
era  were  the  more  substantial  land  and  marine  plants,  and  there  were 
not  so  many  of  the  flowering  and  tender  plants  that  were  existing  in 
such  abundance  during  the  last  formation.  The  only  progress,  there- 
fore, which  we  see  in  the  vegetable  kingdom,  consists  in  the  devel- 
opment of  a more  substantial  class,  which  the  pine,  oak,  birch,  and 
maple  now  existing,  represent. 

* By  way  of  note  the  clairvoyant  here  remarked,  that  although  the  word  shemayim 
(heaven),  called  “ firmament”  in  Genesis  i.  8,  was  in  the  plural  number,  its  meaning 
was  simply  the  atmosphere ; and  that  such  was  the  only  signification  of  the  words 
‘‘  heaven”  and  “ firmament,”  as  occurring  in  the  primitive  history  of  the  creation. 


262 


NATURE  S DIVINE  HE  VE  RATIONS. 


But  the  wonder  of  geologists  has  been  increased  by  the  discovery 
of  trucks,  apparently  those  of  immense  lizards  and  birds,  and  also 
of  the  tortoise.  And  from  collections  of  the  fossils,  the  specie's  that 
were  existing  have  in  several  instances  been  correctly  inferred. 

It  is  not  necessary  that  I should  give  a description  of  the  ammo- 
nites and  calamites  that  now  have  changed  their  nature  and  order  of 
being,  in  proportion  to  the  change  of  elements  and  circumstances. 
For  these  had  imperceptibly  changed  their  forms,  habits,  and  consti- 
tutions. It  must  not  be  supposed  that  the  order  of  progression  was 
interfered  with  by  a sudden  transition  of  any  class  or  species  to 
another ; for  this  is  unlike  any  principle  or  phenomenon  in  Nature. 
Although  Nature  manifests  at  periods  violent  paroxysms,  these  do 
not  disturb  the  order  of  existence ; but  as  all  other  things  have 
ascended,  and  the  equilibrium  is  destroyed  between  the  interior  and 
exterior  of  the  whole  mass,  a universal  convulsion  results  in  only  a 
static  condition.  It  does  not  change  the  order  and  harmony  of 
established  laws,  though  it  modifies  exceedingly  those  which  pre- 
viously acted  upon  the  forms  existing  upon  the  land  and  in  the  water, 
and  this  modification  only  fulfils  the  previous  requirements  of  the 
various  kingdoms  in  Nature.  And  thus  no  law  or  principle  is  altered  ; 
but  the  whole  operation  presents  a steadily-ascending  order  of  de- 
grees, from  the  lowest  type  in  existence' to  the  highest. 

Geologists  have  classified  the  species  that  have  been  discovered, 
but  have  not  succeeded  in  discovering  the  species  intermediate 
between  one  class  and  another,  or  any  cause  why  new  forms  should 
now  be  created.  But  in  unfolding  the  indications  which  this  forma- 
tion presents,  it  is  not  proper  that  I should  notice  all  the  living  forms 
then  existing  in  the  animal  kingdom.  But  I will  give  a description 
of  the  most  prominent  species,  from  the  lowest  saurian  to  the  highest 
type  determined  upon  by  geologists.  The  evidences  to  sustain  the 
description  given  are  to  be  found  among  the  classifications  already 
made,  and  in  the  existing  general  conditions  that  called  into  action 
new  energies  which  must  have  resulted  in  the  creation  of  forms  of 
altogether  a different  class  and  nature  from  those  of  any  previous 
formation. 


§ 4S.  A proper  knowledge  of  the  kind  of  animals  existing  during  this 
period,  depends  upon  a knowledge  of  the  density  of  the  atmosphere. 
As  its  density  at  the  present  time  has  been  correctly  ascertained,  at 
least  so  far  as  the  experiments  (which  have  been  limited)  have  been 


NATURE'S  DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


263 


adequate  to  decide,  I speak  comparatively  of  the  pressure  of  the  air 
upon  forms  and  things  existing  during  the  process  of  the  new  red 
sandstone  formation.  The  whole  weight  of  the  atmosphere,  that 
equalled,  together  with  the  pressure  of  the  water,  the  expansive  force 
of  the  interior  of  the  earth,  was  thirty-seven  quadrillions,  four  hundred 
and  six  trillions,  three  hundred  and  seventy  billions  tons;  or  more 
than  thirty-seven  pounds  to  the  square  inch.  Therefore,  from  this 
extreme  density  can  be  inferred  the  order  and  habits  of  the  land 
animals. 

The  ichthyosaurus  is  among  the  first  forms  of  this  period  that  have 
attracted  attention,  especially  as  its  spinal  column  represents  the  ossi- 
fication of  a previous  gelatinous  substance,  insomuch  that  it  is  not  al- 
together vertebrated,  only  near  the  neck  and  extremity;  the  centre  of 
the  back  being  entirely  ossified.  It  bears  the  character  of  the  sau- 
rian, or  lizard  ; is  slightly  represented  by  the  shark,  and  more  by  the 
modern  crocodile.  Its  nature  was  carnivorous.  It  could  live  either 
in  or  out  of  the  water;  and  this  can  be  inferred  from. the  shape  of 
its  thorax  and  posterior  sternum.  This  indicates  that  it  possessed 
an  adipose  branchae,  which  served  as  a respiratory  organ.  There- 
fore, it  could  both  subsist  under  water,  and  inhale  the  existing  ele- 
ment constituting  the  air,  which  was  carbon,  nearly  counterbalanced 
by  oxygen. 

This  animal  sustains  a position  between  the  previous  saurian  and 
the  lizard  proper ; for  the  lizard  is  represented  in  the  following 
order,  which  the  plesiosaurus  represents.  This  being  a higher  class 
than  the  previous,  its  habits  were  a little  different,  but  only  in  refer- 
ence to  its  element,  which  was  water.  And  being  exceedingly  car- 
nivorous, it  preyed  upon  the  lower  order  of  fishes,  and  other  infuso- 
rial- productions. 

The  following  order  is  represented  in  the  megalosaurus.  This 
animal  (for  it  should  be  termed  such)  is  very  different  in  form  and 
disposition  from  the  lower  orders.  For  an  account  of  the  remains 
of  this  animal,  whereby  the  following  description  may  be  rendered 
probable,  I would  refer  to  the  investigations  of  geologists,  especially 
as  these  afford  the  only  evidence  that  the  mind  can  now  receive 
concerning  it.  This  represents  the  fully  vertebrated  animal.  It  also 
has  a very  long  and  large  body,  with  peculiarly  formed  ribs,  which 
indicate  greatly  the  motion  generally  connected  with  the  locomotion 
of  the  whole  body.  It  also  has  two  legs,  which  have  been  termed 
wings,  from  their  spread  and  complex  form.  It  had  also  two  sets 


264 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


of  fins  ; these  being  connected  with  the  side  and  top  of  the  body, 
and  so  constructed  as  to  give  great  force  and  velocity  of  motion.  It 
also  possessed  great  power  of  contraction,  insomuch  that  it  could 
raise  itself  nearly  perpendicular  from  ten  to  fifteen  feet.  The  legs 
or  wings  served  to  direct  its  motions  and  gave  it  great  force  in  at- 
tacking other  species.  This  animal  has  been  termed  a lizard , and 
would  still  have  been  considered  such,  if  it  had  not  had  a tortoise- 
shell-like coating. 

This  order  is  modified  in  the  plcitheosaurus : and  this  differs  in 
habit  only  in  that  it  is  herbivorous.  Its  form  is  very  long,  and  full 
at  the  head,  being,  so  far  as  the  latter  particular  is  concerned,  slightly 
represented  in  the  young  whale  of  the  present  day.  Having  legs, 
and  power  of  great  motion,  it  travelled  very  extensively  over  portions 
of  the  dry  land  ; and  the  ferns  constituted  its  peculiar  food. 

An  order  of  animals  that  associated  greatly  with  this  species,  but 
which  was  very  differently  formed,  is  termed  the  Mastodonsawus. 
[t  possessed  the  general  habits  and  disposition  of  the  latter,  with  the 
exception  that  it  approached  nearer  to  the  cligitigrade. 

The  color  of  the  first  animal  was  dark,  with  an  intermixture  of  red 
and  green,  the  coating  being  hard  and  turtle-like.  The  second  was 
entirely  black,  the  surface  being  a little  more  elastic.  The  third 
possessed  a very  rough  and  complex  coating,  hard  and  shark-like. 
The  fourth  had  a surface  of  more  ordinary  appearance,  rather  elastic, 
and  corresponding  nearly  to  that  of  the  whale.  The  body  of  the  last 
animal  corresponded  nearly  to  that  of  the  elephant,  with  the  excep- 
tion of  its  being  very  dark  and  hairy ; and  its  length  varied  (in  the 
various  species,  from  the  lowest  to  the  highest)  from  five  to  sixty- 
six  feet. 

The  highest  type  of  the  latter  class  is  termed  the  Igua?iodo?i,- — 
whose  enormous  organization  has  been  the  cause  of  much  wonder 
and  speculation.  But  inasmuch  as  inference  can  not  at  all  times  be 
correct,  the  nature  and  disposition  of  the  Iguanodon  have  not  as  yet 
been  properly  understood.  Its  class  was  the  highest  on  earth  during 
the  deposition  of  the  new  red  sandstone ; and  it  was  superior  to  all 
others  in  size  and  power. 

Thus  the  present  era  represents  a progressed  condition  of  the  pre- 
vious sea-tribes,  and  of  the  vegetable  productions.  For  each  had 
imperceptibly  assumed  its  present  condition  by  virtue  of  the  change 
experienced  by  the  wdiole  earth,  water,  and  atmosphere.  The  lower 
species  still  swarmed  in  the  seas  in  great  abundance,  while  the  lapse 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


205 


of  innumerable  ages  had  produced  the  gigantic  forms  that  existed 
upon  the  land,  and  while  the  lower  vegetable  productions  could  not 
by  any  possible  means  preserve  their  order  and  species.  F or  it  is 
known  that,  at  the  close  of  the  carboniferous  era,  many  plants  became 
extinct.  But  the  substances  which  entered  into  their  composition 
still  existed,  and  these  were  unfolded  in  the  production  of  the  ascend- 
ing orders  of  the  vegetable  kingdom. 

Motion  was  first  existing  : and  as  forms  assumed  a proper  state, 
Lfie  became  visible,  until  at  the  close  of  the  last  era,  Sensation  be- 
came imperfectly  developed.  And  in  this  period,  Life  and  Sensation 
have  unfolded  new  principles,  new  forms,  'and  new  dispositions.  For 
the  animals  of  each  class  are  more  perfectly  organized,  and  each 
class  unfolds  new  attributes  of  Life  and  Sensation,  insomuch  that 
when  the  Ignanodon , with  its  disposition,  is  compared  with  the  first 
forms  of  the  radiata,  the  analogy  is  so  completely  lost  that  the  human 
mind  can.  not  conceive  that  there  is  the  most  distant  relation  existing 
between  them. 

However  disconnected  the  order  of  creation  appears  to  the  partic- 
ularizing mind,  this  can  not  alter  the  general  truth,  that  the  whole 
displays  an  harmonious  adaptation  of  parts,  the  succession  of  which 
represents  the  orders  and  degrees  of  creation.  For  it  was  proved  in 
the  key  that  particulars  are  not  to  be  depended  upon  as  leading  to 
general  truths  in.  respect  to  the  laws,  principles,  and  developments, 
of  the  Universe. 


§ 49.  The  orders  of  animals  that  have  been  described,  will  admit 
of  several  subdivisions ; and  there  is  a species  among  them  higher 
than  any  yet  discovered.  At  the  close  of  the  previous  formation,  the 
fish  became  a generally-abounding  class  ; and  on  the  opening  of  the 
present,  the  turtle  and  bird  are  in  order  developed  The  class  of 
animals  known  as  the  Ignanodon , has  several  species.  The  highest 
of  these  represents  the  Rhinocerosaurus,  and  also  the  Hippopotamus 
of  present  day.  Some  of  these  in  nature  were  digitigrade  ; whale- 
like in  habit,  and  elephant-like  in  disposition.  Above  the  class  of 
lizard-like  forms,  there  is  a description  of  flying  ornithosaurus  (ptero- 
dactyle).  These  have  two  legs,  with  very  wide-spread  and  complex 
feet,  and  a large  and  rather  low  body  ; and  they  were  very  ferocious. 
The  lower  orders  of  these  have  been  discovered  by  geologists  from 
their  impressions  left  upon  the  sandstone  rocks  during  the  middle  and 
near  the  close  of  the  present  era.  Some  of  these,  and  also  of  the 


S66 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


turtle-birds,  have  likewise  left  their  tracks  upon  some  inclined  shores, 
having  been  apparently  the  frequenters  of  the  waters.  An  inferior  ani- 
mal, of  a species  between  the  turtle  and  bird,  was  of  a bat-like  form 
and  of  these  the  indications  are  remaining  upon  the  higher  strata. 

The  marl-beds  represent  more  of  the  previously-described  animals 
than  any  prior  formation.  The  cause  of  this  is,  that  these  animals 
existed  a long  time  before  the  formation  of  the  marl-beds,  but  became 
changed  and  partly  extinct  at  the  close  of  the  latter  and  on  the  com- 
mencement of  the  oolite  period.  Geologists,  therefore,  have  discov- 
ered the  fossil  remains  of  these  animals  where  they  were  left  at  the 
expiration  of  their  period  of  existence.  The  largest  aniqial  repre- 
sented an  enormous  snake-lizard,  and  slightly  some  of  the  lower  ani- 
mals of  the  historical  period.  The  largest  birds  slightly  represented 
the  Ostrich,  but  more  the  Congener,  being  an  imperfect  type  of  the 
bird  creation.  There  are  several  classes  of  these,  ascending  from 
the  Iguana  to  the  Ornithosaurus,  or  highest  class.  And  the  discov- 
ery of  certain  fossil  remains  confirms  the  existence  of  these  distinct 
species,  each  of  which  was  of  enormous  bulk  and  stature. 

The  whole  animal  creation  at  this  period  properly  corresponds  to  two 
distinct  classes  — the  lizard-turtle,  and  the  turtle-bird ; neither  of  which 
is,  to  any  extent,  visible  to  us  in  the  animal  creation  of  the  present 
period.  The  lower  classes  were  exceedingly  carnivorous,  and  the 
higher  were  herbivorous.  The  constitutions  of  the  latter  correspond 
to  the  vegetable  productions  of  the  earth  ; while  the  lower  possessed 
the  gross  forms  ordinarily  accompanying  the  carnivorous  habit.  And 
it  is  to  he  remarked  that  there  was  no  anatomical  structure  amonv 

O 

these  classes  at  this  period  which  was  not  either  partially  or  wholly 
vertebrated  ; and  that  their  main  bones  were  'internally  filled  with  a 
heavy  marrow,  and  covered  with  a periosteum.  Therefore  we  see 
that  the  land  plants  and  animals  of  this  period  are  such  as  were  typi- 
fied at  the  close  of  the  carboniferous  period  ; and  the  same  is  true  of 
all  other  things,  ascending  in  the  scale  of  refinement  and  becoming 
suitable  for  the  proper  development  of  these  creations. 

The  reasons  why  such  forms  should  have  existed  at  this  period 
and  not  at  any  other,  either  before  or  since,  is  perfectly  obvious  and 
susceptible  of  demonstration.  First,  the  physical  condition  of  the 
earth,  both  as  respects  the  water  and  the  atmosphere,  admitted  of  no 
higher  productions.  The  extreme  density  and  peculiar  composition 
of  water  which  was  then  largely  impregnated  with  various  solutions, 
could  not  sustain  any  higher  type  of  organization.  The  atmosphere 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


267 


with  its  enormous  density  prohibited  the  formation  of  light  bone,  ac- 
tive muscle,  and  tender  nerve,  and  prevented  entirely  such  chemical 
combinations  of  the  solids  as  were  necessary  to  render  them  light  and 
active  For  this  reason  their  anatomy  was  heavy  and  extremely 
large.  They  were  sluggish  and  powerful,  and  their  dispositions  were 
ferocious  and  entirely  carnivorous,  such  being  results  of  the  lowest 
developments  of  the  principle  of  Sensation.  And  the  hones  of  the 
higher  classes  could  not  contain  air  instead  of  marrow,  because  the 
condition  of  the  elements  prevented  the  sublimation  of  the  internal 
osseous  substances.  Although  apparent  wings  were  developed,  these 
were  used  only  as  instruments  of  traversing  the  watery  deep,  and 
raisins;  themselves  a few  feet  from  the  surface  of  the  earth  ; such  be- 
ing  the  first  examples  of  flying.  Also  the  respiratory  organs  of  the 

whole  animal  creation  were  such  as  only  to  correspond  with  an  atmo- 
sphere very  dissimilar  to  that  of  the  present,  day. 

The  lowest  and  the  highest,  with  their  intermediates,  when  joined 
together  as  the  sublime  production  of  one  of  Nature’s  days,  presents 
a distinct  mirror  of  the  succeeding  creations.  And  they  present  dis- 
tinct types  of  the  higher  classes  that  were  soon  to  be  unfolded  in  their 
stead  by  virtue  of  changes  in  all  conditions  which  were  constantly  in 
progress. 

Thus  the  earth  manifests  at  this  time  a development  of  all  the 
types  of  the  previous  periods.  It  also  unfolds  new  laws,  new  ele- 
ments, and  new  principles.  It  has  the  appearance  of  an  entire  new 
creation. 

But  Nature  has  now  become  modified,  and  her  previous  essences 
and  principles  are  expended  in  the  yielding  forth  of  the  productions 
of  the  present  era.  The  previous  equilibrium  has  now  become  nearly 
destroyed.  Energies  are  exhausted,  and  new  exertions  can  not  be 
made.  The  whole  represents  a state  of  paralysis.  Darkness  is  be- 
ginning gradually  to  enshroud  the  aspect  of  things.  The  fertility  of 
,,  the  earth  has  become  partly  destroyed,  and  the  forms  that  reclothed 
the  bosom  of  Nature  on  the  morning’ of  the  second  day,  have  now 
sunk  into  deep  repose.  Thus  every  morning  becomes  an  evening. 
Thus  every  beauty  becomes  a type  of  some  ultimate  and  more  beau- 
tiful productions.  Thus  life,  and  beauty,  and  youthfulness,  become 
age,  repose,  and  death  ! Thus  every  substance  in  being,  no  matter 
how  exalted,  is  of  necessity  the  lowest  symbol  of  some  still  higher 
forms.  That  which  had  represented  one  of  the  most  beautiful  pro- 


2G3 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


cesses  in  all  Nature’s  elaborations,  now  yields  to  a final  consumma- 
tion ; and  all  things  bear  externally  the  impress  of  retrogression,  but 
internally  and  invisibly  signify  the  unfolding  of  interior  beauties  to 
produce  a more  exalted  state  of  physical  and  mental  organization. 

The  sublimation  of  the  internal  particles  of  the  earth,  of  plants,  of 
animals,  of  water,  and  of  atmosphere,  had  become  so  general  that  an 
epoch  distinguished  by  the  same  manifestations  as  was  the  close  of 
the  previous  age,  must  occur.  At  this  moment  the  whole  earth  is 
clothed  in  the  evening  mantle  of  a long-enduring  day.  And  the  fiery 
element  in  the  earth’s  interior  became  agitated.  This  was  not  ef- 
fected, as  has  been  supposed,  by  water,  or  sulphur,  or  electricity  ; 
but  by  the  insufficient  pressure  of  the  external  elements,  or  the  water 
and  atmosphere.  The  result  was  the  upheaval  of  many  more  por- 
tions of  the  earth.  The  convulsion  was  not  so  general  nor  so  violent 
as  the  former  ; but  the  hills  that  had  been  formed  by  the  previous 
undulations  of  the  great  Mass  became  much  elevated,  and  the  strata 
broken  and  contorted  in  various  places.  Many  beautiful  caves  and 
subterranean  passages  were  formed  in  the  interior  of  those  convoluted 
portions.  This  explosion  was  rather  gentle  in  comparison  to  the  for- 
mer catastrophic  occurrences,  and  was  felt  generally  south  of  the 
equator  and  at  the  poles. 

The  earth  diminished  instantly  in  hulk,  which  occurrence  was  ac- 
companied by  the  projection  of  various  islands  that  are  mostly  mani- 
fested in  the  south  seas.  Some  of  these  were  previously  sea-bottoms 
covered  with  immense  productions  of  animalcules.  Such  were  im- 
mense coral  reefs,  extending  from  twenty  to  sixty  miles,  and  being 
from  three  to  eight  miles  in  thickness.  These  vast  accumulations 
were  formed  by  animals  so  minute  that  two  hundred  of  them  could 
dwell  within  a drop  of  water ! Thus  the  saying  of  the  key  is  veri- 
fied : “ That  the  parts  compose  the  Whole ; and  that  the  Whole 
must  have  consisted  of  parts,  or  else  the  Whole  could  not  have 
existed.” 


§ 50.  All  Nature  now  assumed  a different  aspect.  Plants  and 
animals  that  had  previously  existed  upon  the  earth,  were  scarcely 
visible  : for  during  the  long  evening  of  the  previous  day,  they 
gradually  diminished  and  sunk  into  repose.  The  only  evidence 
then  remaining  of  their  existence  was  their  fossils,  which  at  the  pres- 
ent day  are  being  discovered  by  geologists.  The  earth,  water,  and 
atmosphere,  were  altogether  differently  combined  and  very  much  re- 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


269 


fined,  insomuch  that  the  dense  atmosphere  that  had  before  enveloped 
the  earth,  now  assumed  a condition  suitable  for  the  admission  of  more 
light  from  the  sun.  And  the  light  that  shone  before,  now  became 
darkness;  for  the  sun  emitted  much  more  light : and  the  air,  and 
water,  and  earth,  were  so  changed  as  to  cause  all  things  to  assume 
an  appearance  of  youthfulness.  And  not  until  this  period  could  the 
sun  have  generated  so  much  light  and  heat  among  the  associated 
particles  of  the  atmosphere. 

Thus  a universal  change  had  taken  place  throughout  the  elemen- 
tary combinations  of  Nature  : and  this  was  the  dawn  of  a new  era, 
the  indication  of  new  forms,  new  substances,  and  new  organizations, 
that  were  to  clothe  the  bosom  of  Nature  with  beauty  and  magnifi- 
cence. All  laws,  conditions,  and  circumstances,  therefore,  became  ac- 
tive agents  in  breathing  into  existence  new  productions.  And  as  this 
ushering-in  of  new  combinations  constitutes  the  beginning  of  a new 
era,  it  is  impossible  not  to  admire  the  forcible  passage  in  the  primi- 
tive history  of  the  earth,  which  declares,  with  the  exclusion  of  all 
particulars , and  with  the  comprehension  of  all  generals,  that  “ the 
evening  and  the  morning  were  the  third  day.” 

We  come  now  to  contemplate  the  youthful  productions  of  another 
morn  in  the  palaeontological  and  geological  history  of  the  earth’s  cre- 
ation— new  phenomena,  which  are  no  less  remarkable  than  the  cre- 
ations already  described. 

The  first  geological  development  that  follows  the  consummation 
of  the  new  red  sandstone,  is  the  chemical  oolite  leds.  The  first  of 
these  are  formed  of  the  aggregation  of  the  calcareous  substances  into 
great  masses,  the  whole  of  which  constitutes  one  stratum.  And  in 
it  are  found  the  substances  of  alumina-shale,  magnesian  limestone, 
coral-reefs,  and  various  species  of  the  lower  orders  of  infusoria  and 
molluscs.  In  various  places  these  materials  are  found  united  much 
below  the  sandstone,  or  the  carboniferous  formation,  and  in  other 
places  they  lie  directly  upon  the  new  red  sandstone,  as  produced  by 
the  chemical  combination  of  the  same  substances  associated  in  globules 
such  as  characterize  the  oolite  formation. 

The  previous  agitation  of  the  earth,  sea,  and  air,  and  the  restora- 
tion of  the  required  equilibrium,  constituted  the  cause  which  produced 
the  first  strata  above  the  sandstone.  The  substances  that  were  more 
calcareous  than  others  took  the  lowest  point  in  these  strata  ; whereas 
the  highest  are  composed  of  the  finer  materials,  the  whole  resulting 


270 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


from  the  circumstances  occurring  at  the  close  of  the  last  day.  By 
these  and  other  existing  causes,  the  oolite  stratification  became 
established  : and  the  whole  process  was  strictly'  chemical,  and 
was  accomplished  by  virtue  of  conditions  that  had  not  before  ex- 
isted. 

No  stratification  has  attracted  so  much  attention  among  geologists 
as  this.  For  it  represents  a formation  as  resulting  from  the  decom- 
position of  previously-existing  plants,  animals,  and  molluscs,  together 
with  the  deposition  of  solutions  of  existing  substances  upon  tbe  land 
and  in  the  water  ; and  the  whole  renders  this  stratification  altogether 
mysterious  and  incomprehensible.  It  is  known  that  lime  in  various 
proportions  enters  into  this  formation  ; but  the  cause  has  not  as  yet 
been  discovered,  which  could  possibly  unite  the  substances  of  the  pre- 
vious formations  with  the  living  substances  of  the  earth,  and  render 
the  whole  an  aggregated  stratification.  And  by  passing  the  sub- 
stances of  the  various  oolite  beds  through  chemical  processes,  alu- 
mina and  other  substances  will  be  discovered  ; not  as  naturally  inhe- 
rent ingredients,  but  as  a condensation  of  the  disssolved  particles  of 
previous  formations.  And  it  has  also  been  a source  of  extensive 
speculation,  how  innumerable  plants  and  animals,  yielded  forth  pre- 
viously to  this  era,  could  have  become  entirely  annihilated,  with  the 
exception  of  a few  fossil  remains  which  have  happily  escaped  unim- 
paired, by  being  shielded  from  the  decomposing  conditions  that  fol- 
lowed the  close  of  the  former  period.  But  as  it  has  been  proved  in 
the  Key  that  “ forms  are  constantly  changing,  and  all  particles  com- 
posing them  finally  compose  some  new  form  or  substance,”  so  by 
this  unchanging  law,  the  whole  animal  creation,  at  the  close  of  the 
third  day,  entered,  by  chemical  combination,  into  the  formation  of 
oolite  stratification.  Productions  previously  formed  contained  all  the 
qualities  and  elements  requisite  for  the  production  of  new  and  more 
perfect  forms  5 and  so  the  former  gross  types  were  exceedingly 
changed  by  this  new  aggregation.  Therefore,  as  a result  of  new  en- 
ergies and  elements,  new  conditions  and  circumstances,  a new  crea- 
tion now  followed  as  an  ultimate  of  the  last. 

At  this  time,  the  sea  was  abundantly  inhabited  by  fishes,  which 
ranged  from  the  lowest  type  to  the  most  gigantic  saurian,  such  as  ex- 
isted during  the  sandstone  system.  And  at  this  lime,  the  dry  land 
had  not  as  yet  yielded  any  new  vegetable  formations,  or  animal  or- 
ganizations. But  tbe  atmospheric  robe  of  the  earth  had  become  so 
far  suitable  to  breathe  life  into  new  forms,  that  Nature  must  of  neces- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


271 


sity  become  impregnated,  and  unfold  more  perfect  forms  of  vegetable 
existence. 

The  destruction  of  the  living  species  at  the  close  of  each  day,  is 
no  more  than  the  deposition  of  a living  germ  by  whose  gestation  far 
more  magnificent  productions  are  brought  forth.  Thus  every  con- 
dition is  a cause  to  unfold  higher  developments  — whereas,  each  day 
constitutes  a great  Cause,  and  also  a great  Effect  and  Use  ; and  these 
are  united  in  one.  And  the  whole  constitutes  a Cause  adapted  to 
the  unfolding  of  a more  perfect  state  of  things,  by  which  latter,  again, 
new  uses,  causes,  and  effects,  are  conceived  and  generated.  And 
here  Nature  manifests  one  of  her  most  refined  creations,  it  being 
far  more  perfect  than  any  previous  productions  of  internal  sub- 
stances. 

The  above  remarks  may  afford  suggestions  by  which  geologists 
may  hereafter  discover  the  existing  chain  of  development  and  the 
causes  of  the  new  effects  which  are  presented  in  this  period  of  the 
earth’s  history,  and  by  which  they  may  properly  understand  why 
fossils  are  discovered  in  some  portions  that  were  formed  after  the 
species  to  which  they  belonged  were  entirely  annihilated  — and  also 
how  such  stratifications  occurred.  For  in  the  knowledge  of  these 
things  consists  the  solution  of  the  great  mystery  of  universal  death 
and  universal  resurrection,  which  the  whole  earth  shows  to  have  oc- 
curred at  different  epochs  preceding  the  present  time. 

§ 51.  The  plants  that  now  became  visible  were  of  the  classes  of 
the  sigillaria  and  coniferse,  and  also  of  the  highest  class  of  ferns,  and 
of  the  lowest  of  Iceland  moss  ; and  the  vegetable  system  was  united 
with  one  chain  of  successive  ascension  from  the  lowest  type  of  the 
sea-plant  to  the  highest  and  most  perfect,  consisting  of  the  conifer®, 
oak,  and  birch,  such,  as  are  now  known.  During  the  middle  and 
toward  the  close  of  the  sandstone  period,  the  evaporation  of  the  wa- 
ters produced  frequent  rains  ; and  these  now  were  still  more  frequent, 
and  rendered  the  earth  very  fertile.  These  assisted  the  growth  of 
extensive  fields  of  grass,  varying  from  the  lowest  to  the  highest  type 
which  is  now  exemplified  in  the  rye.  But  the  grass  and  grain  were 
very  gross  and  imperfect,  insomuch  that  existing  thistles  became  their 
almost  immediate  associates,  more  from  nature  than  from  form. 

Thus  was  clothed  the  surface  of  the  earth,  especially  near  the 
equator,  where  the  temperature  was  subject  to  but  little  change.  And 
by  this  constant  and  natural  process  of  production,  the  face  of  the 


272 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


earth  became  generally  fertile  of  the  lower  and  higher  classes  of  the 
vegetable  kingdoms. 

And  the  earth  also,  by  its  living  energies,  yielded  spontaneously 
new  forms  in  the  animal  creation,  from  the  lowest  type  of  the  mol- 
lusc, to  the  imperfect  forms  of  the  marsupial  animals  — which  latter 
were  altogether  differently  constituted  and  organized  from  any  animal 
that  had  existed  before  that  period.  These  constituted  the  lower 
class  of  the  mammalia , which  class  are  very  dissimilar  in  their  form, 
habits,  dispositions,  and  manner  of  reproduction,  from  any  of  the 
oviparous  animals.  Thus  we  have  now  a new  class  — a new  type, 
such  as  had  not  been  before  developed.  And  this  requires  a more 
minute  description,  because  it  is  more  intimately  connected  with  the 
unfolding  of  higher  species,  of  which  it  may  yet  be  perceived  that 
Man  stands  as  a universal  representative. 

It  is  impossible  to  demonstrate  from  the  observations  of  geologists, 
or  by  the  indications  of  the  present  series  of  formations,  the  distinct 
type  of  every  class  of  terrestrial  animals  that  existed  upon  the  earth’s 
surface  previously  to  the  production  of  the  species  of  the  marsupial 
class  which  has  been  designated.  For  geologists  can  not  determine 
upon  the  period  when  the  mammifers  were  first  developed.  It 
is  by  their  nature  and  constitution  that  we  correctly  conceive  of  a 
true  type  wherein  is  first  displayed  the  principle  of  gelatinous  utero- 
gestation.  The  oviparous  types,  including  the  bird,  fish,  and  reptile, 
in  which  also  many  subdivisions  of  the  saurians  might  properly  be 
included,  were  very  different  as  respects  their  powers  and  processes 
of  reproduction,  insomuch  that  their  progeny  were  occasionally  ren- 
dered dissimilar  to  themselves,  partaking  both  of  their  own  nature 
and  of  that  of  the  higher  saurians,  according  to  the  conditions  under 
which  the  reproduction  was  accomplished. 

There  are  now  existing  upon  the  earth,  from  the  fertility  of  the 
calcareous  composition  of  the  oolite,  three  distinct  classes  of  forms 
in  the  vegetable  kingdom.  These  comprehend  the  classes  of  the 
previous  formation,  including  the  lower  order  of  the  fucoides,  and 
the  endogenous  and  exogenous  plants,  one  of  which  receives  sub- 
stances from  the  inward,  and  the  other  upon  the  outward.  And  there 
are  two  distinct  classes  of  animals  existing  : the  saurian  oviparous  and 
the  marsupial  mammiferous  — these  possessing  different  habits  and 
dispositions,  and  observing  very  different  processes  of  reproduction. 
And  among  the  latter  class  are  existing  the  rodentia,  ruminating,  and 
digitigrade.  The  highest  type  now  existing  ha.s  the  three  natures  com- 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


273 


bined,  though  imperfectly.  And  these  distinctive  characteristics  rep- 
resent the  different  conditions  to  which  each  of  these  was  subjected 
during  the  unfolding  of  the  species  — which  conditions  rendered  one 
type  more  perfect  than  the  other,  the  most  perfect  being  exemplified 
in  the  lower  mammlfers  that  have  existed  upon  the  earth  since  the 
historical  period. 

Before  entering  into  a minute  description  of  the  characteristics  of 
the  vegetable  and  animal  creations,  of  the  means  by  which  this  change 
in  the  mode  of  gestation  was  accomplished,  and  to  show  the  intimate 
connexion  which  the  latter  sustains  with  the  progressive  development 
of  the  same  species,  it  is  necessary  to  notice  more  particularly  the 
chemical  combinations  of  the  oolite  stratification. 

It  is  the  opinion  of  several  geologists  that  this  formation,  particu- 
larly the  part  of  it  which  is  termed  the  “ dirt-beds,”  must  have  been 
a result  of  the  agitation  of  the  seas  by  which  segregation  occurred, 
and  so  extensively  that  the  currents  of  the  seas  were  changed  from 
their  previous  to  various  other  directions  ; and  that  at  the  termina- 
tions of  these  currents,  the  accumulation  and  condensation  of  ve<re- 
table  substances  and  detritus  produced  one  stratum  or  more  of  coal. 
And  this  opinion  has  been  maintained  because  some  portions  of  the 
lower  oolite  beds  were  discovered  beneath  a stratum  of  coal.  Coal, 
however,  was  not  formed  (except  by  incidental  circumstances)  after 
the  consummation  of  the  general  carboniferous  era.  And  the  strata 
of  oolite  that  have  been  discovered  under  a formation  of  coal,  are  the 
associated  particles  of  marlstone,  iron-stone,  and  sandstone-shale  — 
the  same  being  represented  in  lower  strata  of  the  deposite  succeeding 
the  new  red  sandstone.  In  various  places  this  has  been  termed 
the  “lias,”  and  “marlstone.”  As  was  before  mentioned,  the  re- 
mains of  all  the  organic  beings  whose  dissolution  occurred  from  the 
general  change  of  the  earth,  water,  and  atmosphere,  entered,  by 
chemical  affinity,  into  the  oolite  formation.  Therefore  the  latter 
contains  in  substance  the  germ  of  higher  existences  ; and  the  deposi- 
tion of  previous  plants  and  animals,  whose  germinating  tendency  was 
assisted  by  the  congenial  existing  elements,  insured  the  unfolding  of 
new  forms  displaying  youth  and  beauty. 

And  it  is  to  be  remarked  that  the  present  era  exhibits  the  conden- 
sation of  the  ultimate  substances  of  all  the  previous  ages,  which  sub- 
stances, by  becoming  associated  with  higher  ones,  produced  the  fer- 
tile and  productive  soil  that  existed  upon  the  earth’s  surface  at  this 
period.  It  is  evident,  therefore,  that  there  could  not  have  been  pro- 

18 


274 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


duced  before  this  period  an  equally  perfect  type  of  formation  and 
development.  But  the  lowest  substance  typifies  the  highest ; and 
both  exist  equally  in  the  early  and  present  formation  of  the  earth,  in 
the  first  and  present  development  of  the  mineral,  in  the  lowest  and 
highest  of  the  vegetable,  and  in  the  least  perfect  of  the  animal  crea- 
tion, and  the  highest  mammifer,  such  as  manifests  the  perfection  of 
all  previously-existing  circumstances. 

§ 52.  The  lower  series  and  degrees  of  the  vegetable  and  animal 
kingdoms,  such  as  were  unfolded  in  previous  ages,  stand  in  striking 
correspondence  to  those  of  the  oolite  era.  And  from  the  most  mi- 
nute sea-plant  to  the  ascending  cryptogamia,  and  from  this  to  the 
imperfect  development  of  the  dicotiledons,  there  are  presented  no 
greater  degrees  of  distinction  than  there  are  from  the  lower  order  of 
the  infusoria  to  the  highest  species  of  the  marsupial  animals  now  in- 
troduced upon  the  earth.  And  it  is  known  by  the  indications  of  the 
previous  days  of  creation,  that  the  conditions  became  generally 
changed  as  each  ascending  law  assumed  new  modes  of  manifestation, 
by  the  whole  of  which  new  forms  were' breathed  into  existence.  In 
the  general  view,  the  whole  is  perfectly  connected  ; but  in  noticing 
particularly  the  incidental  changes  which  took  place,  the  mind  loses 
sight  of  that  universal  order  which  is  otherwise  manifest. 

The  inquiry  in  reference  to  the  processes  by  which  the  change  of 
form  occurred  which  established  the  marsupial  mammifers,  is  very 
difficult  to  answer  so  that  a distinct  evidence  may  be  manifest  from 
facts  observed.  And  it  is  to  be  impressed  that  the  species  of  this 
era  present  an  ascended  type  as  resulting  from  the  chemical  com- 
pound germ  deposited  in  the  whole  oolite  formation.  These  new 
conditions  therefore  unfolded  a new  type,  and  a representation  of 
higher  orders.  Then  the  oviparous,  the  lower  viviparous,  and  the 
higher  or  mammiferous,  present  three  general  processes  of  utero- 
development.  The  first  represents  the  rudimental  process  by  which 
the  deposited  ultimate  of  the  body  unites  with  particles  of  like  affinity 
and  assumes  the  globular  form.  And  by  constant  activity  of  the  por- 
tions surrounding  the  globule,  an  incrustation  or  shell  is  formed,  the 
whole  constituting  an  egg.  And  this,  by  processes  varying  accord- 
ing to  the  immediately  surrounding  conditions,  unfolds  its  rudimental 
properties,  and  displays  the  type  and  character  of  its  progenitor. 
The  ascension  of  this  process  presents  a different  mode  of  the  com- 
bination of  elements,  developing  new  organs,  and  unfolding  a higher 


nature’s  divine  reveeations. 


275 


order  of  interior  qualities.  And  this  ascension  establishes  the  ovary 
globules  — which  are  represented  in  the  lower  classes  of  the  vivipa- 
rous animals  and  visibly  developed  in  the  higher.  Therefore  the 
order  immediately  above  the  first  viviparous  are  the  marsupials  — 
whose  habits,  nature,  and  dispositions,  present  an  entire  change  : and 
their  organization  presents  a further  unfolding  of  the  undeveloped 
compounds  contained  in  all  the  lower  types  in  existence. 

Geologists  have  discovered  in  the  first  and  second  divisions  of  this 
formation  some  distinct  species  of  this  mammifer,  but  have  not  dis- 
covered any  connecting  links  between  these  species.  The  species 
that  have  been  discovered  bear  a relation  to  the  lowTer  marsupial  ani- 
mals of  th q present  day.  But  their  character  was  very  different,  and 
their  organization  much  more  gross  ; but  the  conditions  which  sur- 
rounded them  were  more  favorable  to  the  unfolding  of  the  higher 
orders,  than  those  of  any  previous  age.  But  the  connexion  existing 
between  each  class  can  not  be  seen  until  the  discoveries  which  will 
be  made  in  other  strata  are  such  as  to  fully  determine  the  whole  class 
of  animals  pervading  the  lower  secondary  formation. 

The  conditions  of  which  I speak  as  rendering  the  animal  kingdom 
at  this  time  so  far  superior  to  its  condition  in  previous  ages,  can  be 
generally  understood  by  considering  the  modifications  that  occurred 
in  the  elements  at  the  close  of  each  epoch  of  development.  The 
principles  that  were  required  for  a change  in  the  process  of  repro- 
duction, were  involved  in  the  lower  classes,  but  only  unfolded  hi 
the  higher.  Therefore  the  marsupial  animals  only  possessed  the 
three  principles,  Motion,  Life,  and  Sensation,  in  a more  perfect  state 
than  any  in  which  they  had  before  existed.  And  the  instrument 
upon  which  these  were  more  fully  active  must  have  been  correspond- 
ingly perfected.  The  whole  corresponds  to  the  dicolitedonous  forms 
and  functions  of  the  vegetable  kingdom,  the  animal  possessing,  as  it 
did,  the  serous  and  mucous  surfaces.  These  surfaces,  though  very 
imperfect  in  generating  the  living,  active  energies  of  the  body,  did 
perform  the  office  in  the  lower  and  higher  species  requisite  for  the 
development  of  the  seminal  secretions  induced  by  the  sensation  of 
coition.  As  these  surfaces,  like  the  heart  and  lungs,  perform  the 
systolic  and  diastolic  motions,  they  likewise  generate,  when  in  equal 
activity,  the  chemically-combining  sensation  whereby  the  whole  pro- 
cess of  utero-gestation  becomes  permanently  established.  And  at 
each  stage  of  the  unfolding  of  qualities,  new  adaptations  were  requi- 
site, so  that  the  species  might  live  after  being  brought  forth. 


S7G 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


The  marsupial  animals  display  principles  involved  in  the  positive 
and  negative  surfaces  in  a manner  more  perfect  than  any  other  ani- 
mal has  as  yet  done.  For  this  reason  they  could  not  continue  the 
oviparous  process  of  reproduction  : and  being  entirely  viviparous  and 
mammiferous,  they  displayed  the  law  of  progressive  development. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  give  a minute  description  of  the  process  by 
which  the  animal  creation  assumed  the  character  of  the  marsupial  ; 
for  this  will  be  more  extensively  revealed  hereafter,  when  it  becomes 
necessary  to  speak  more  immediately  in  reference  to  the  knowledge 
and  speculations  of  physiologists  upon  the  subject  under  considera- 
tion. For  the  principles  involved  in,  and  the  conditions  required 
for,  the  process  of  transmutation,  are  not  altogether  understood.  For 
the  animals  of  every  class  are  apparently  distinct  and  disconnected 
from  others,  and  every  class  sustains  its  own  types  ; and  none  are 
known  to  man  to  change  their  character  or  species  in  any  particular. 
Hence  the  conclusion  has  been  adopted  that  each  class  is  the  result 
of  an  immediate  creative  power,  and  that  all  types  of  each  specific 
creation  are  only  ’patterns  of  that  which  succeeds.  No  discovery  has 
yet  been  made  which  seems  to  indicate  distinctly  the  process  of 
transmutation.  Transmutation,  however,  is  a constant  manifestation 
in  Nature  ; and  nothing  exists  but  what  involves  the  principle  of 
ascension  and  progression. 

The  elements  which  surround  the  earth  owe  their  existence  to  an 
aboriginal  condition  of  the  whole  Mass.  The  stability  of  the  Mass 
now  becomes  dependent  upon  the  stability  of  those  elements.  The 
plants  require  for  their  production  a proper  condition  of  the  earth, 
and  of  the  existing  elements  ; and  without  these  they  could  not  ex- 
ist. The  animals  require  the  plants,  and  the  highest  of  the  latter  re- 
quire the  lower  species.  So  of  all  the  gigantic  carnivorous  saurians  : 
they  sustain  the  same  relation  to  the  lower  species  of  the  same  class, 
and  thus  all  those  that  were  first  and  herbiverous  become  adapted  to 
the  requirements  of  the  higher  orders. 

Therefore  each  kingdom  presents  a series  of  corresponding  steps 
and  degrees  of  development.  And  so  the  inarsupialia,  which  the 
oolite  period  presents,  constitute  also  an  ascending  step  or  degree 
above,  though  connected  with,  all  previous  organizations.  There  is 
no  violation  of  law  or  order  in  this  higher  development  ; but  there  is 
an  apparent  disconnexion  between  the  first  forms  developed  on  the 
earth,  and  the  marsupials,  when  the  two  are  compared  with  each 
other.  And  in  making  this  comparison  we  lose  sight  of  the  slow 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


277 


processes  of  change  which  all  forms  passed  through,  from  the  lowest 
ascending  to  the  highest  type  in  the  animal  kingdom. 

A strict  attention  to  the  general  Cause  and  general  Effect,  would 
relieve  the  mind  of  this  apparent  anomaly,  and  explain  these  won- 
derful steps  in  Nature’s  unfoldings.  The  organization  of  each  ani- 
mal requires  the  composition  of  the  earth  and  other  existing  elements 
to  be  in  accordance  with  the  conditions  which,  from  its  peculiar 
nature,  it  must  require.  And  as  the  particles  of  the  atmosphere 
plants,  and  animals,  and  all  particles  pervading  Nature,  assume  higher 
forms  than  the  angular,  the  form  of  the  animal  will  correspond  in 
perfection  to  the  forms  of  such  existing  particles.  Therefore,  as  will 
soon  be  shown,  the  whole  class  of  animals  which  the  secondary  for- 
mation presents,  ascends  to  the  first  type  wherein  we  may  recognise 
the  undeveloped  principles  composing  the  physical  and  mental  con- 
stitution of  mankind.  But  as  the  gradual  process  of  the  assumption 
of  successive  and  corresponding  forms  should  be  described,  I am  not 
impressed  to  speak  at  present  any  more  concerning  the  gestating 
principles  involved  in  the  marsupial  animals. 

§ 53.  I am  impressed  that  the  orders,  series,  and  degrees,  of  ani- 
mals that  existed  during  the  oolite,  cretaceous,  and  tertiary  eras,  are 
very  different  from,  and  of  a higher  nature  than,  those  designated  by 
geologists.  The  remains  of  the  plesiosaurus,  iguana,  and  sauridon, 
have  been  found  among  the  upper  strata  of  the  oolite,  and  the  com- 
mencement of  the  cretaceous  period.  These  in  reality  were  perpet- 
uations of  the  reptiles  that  existed  before  the  consummation  of  the 
new  red-sandstone  system.  Moreover,  the  general  elements  were 
not  so  favorable  in  many  portions  of  the  earth  for  the  production  of 
, the  marsupial  animals,  while  in  other  portions  these  animals  existed 
before  the  commencement  of  the  oolite  period  ; and  their  fossils  may 
there  be  discovered.  For  the  general  law  of  reproduction  had  be- 
come greatly  changed,  the  result  of  which  was  the  declension  of  some 
of  these  species,  and  the  perpetuation  of  the  higher  orders.  Geolo- 
gists have  distinguished  the  main  classes,  but  not  all  of  their  varieties 
and  modifications.  For  the  sauroccphalus  is  among  the  lower  orders 
of  the  species  that  existed  during  this  period.  This  is  remarkable  as 
being  the  first  animal  that  possessed  the  proper  division  of  the  larger 
and  smaller  brains,  whereby  systolic  and  diastolic  action  was  estab- 
lished as  governing  the  whole  vital  motions  of  the  body. 

Of  a connecting  link  and  species  of  this,  the  steptospondylis  is  an 


27S 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


example — this  having  the  nature  and  habits  both  of  the  carnivorous 
and  herbivorous,  representing  slightly  those  of  the  water-bird.  This 
animal  has  been  discovered  in  tbe  strata  of  the  miocene,  and  has 
been  supposed  to  be  a sauridon,  related  to  the  monitor  and  iguana. 
A higher  order  of  the  mejralosaurus  also  exists  and  forms  a connect- 
ing  link  between  the  lower  order  and  the  higher  classes  of  animals  : 
and  from  this  proceeds  many  species  of  the  class  mammalia. 

The  whole  animal  kingdom,  then,  at  this  period,  is  divided  into 
three  degrees  : the  saurian,  the  tortoise,  and  the  mammalia  — the  lat- 
ter comprising  the  rodentia,  the  ruminantia,  and  the  digitigrade.  The 
highest  of  these  unfolds  new  principles  and  new  forces,  the  whole  of 
which  appears  to  indicate  an  ascension  of  Motion,  Life,  and  Sensa- 
tion. Thus  the  highly  carnivorous  nature  existed  as  a pre-requisite 
to  the  unfolding  of  the  higher  class.  And  here  are  developed  the 
two  surfaces  distinctly,  and  consequently  the  contracting  and  expand- 
ing forces.  And  the  attribute  of  these  is  sensation  and  inclinations  ; 
and  the  passions  which  result  from  these  are  the  indications  by  which 
the  characters  and  dispositions  of  animals  are  known.  In  the  higher 
class  of  this  period,  therefore,  we  may  consider  that  Sensation  has 
become  an  established  law,  this  not  being  so  perfectly  unfolded  in 
the  constitution  of  the  lower  animals,  such  as  existed  before  this 
period.  For  it  is  by  the  perfection  of  this  principle,  for  which  the 
two  surfaces  and  two  forces  are  required,  that  the  first,  acting,  living 
energies,  were  produced,  by  which  the  marsupial  species,  and  the 
process  of  utero-gestation,  became  established. 

The  species  of  plants  were  not  very  numerous,  these  being  prin- 
cipally of  the  same  degree  and  type  as  those  existing  in  the  lower 
formation  : and  of  these  the  ferns  and  coniferse  were  the  most  abun- 
dant. No  law  is  more  certain  than  that  of  the  constant  progression 
and  ascension  of  all  rudimental  substances  ; and  no  period  in  the 
geological  history  of  the  earth  manifests  this  principle  more  thoroughly 
than  this.  For  near  the  close  of  the  secondary  period,  an  entire 
change  appears  evident  in  all  the  degrees,  classes,  and  developments, 
of  the  animal  and  vegetable  kingdoms.-  Geologists  have  not  fully 
discovered  this  : for  the  tertiary  period  appears  to  them  as  a very 
slight  ascension  from  that  of  the  oolite  and  cretaceous.  But  they 
will  discover  this  great  division,  and  especially  the  apparent  new  cre- 
ation, by  investigating  properly  the  chemical  combinations  of  all 
higher  earthy  compounds  formed  just  before  the  commencement  of 
the  tertiary  period. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


279 


It  has  been  supposed  also  that  the  cretaceous  formation  was  the 
result  of  the  solutions  and  detritus  contained  in  the  sea,  and  of  the 
motions  of  the  latter  whereby  deposition  occurred.  It  is  evident 
that  this  formation  could  not  have  thus  been  accomplished  ; for  it  is 
well  ascertained  that  all  the  solutions  from  which  it  is  supposed  to 
have  been  formed  existed  many  ages  previous  to  this  era.  And  as 
chalk  is  known  to  be  the  carbonate  of  lime  crystallized  and  subli- 
mated, intermixed  with  various  silicious  substances  existing  in  the 
coatings  of  the  molluscs  and  in  estuaries  — if  this  stratification  was 
formed  by  these  existing  solutions,  why  was  not  the  same  before  pro- 
duced? For  the  same  materials  existed  during  all  of  the  prior  for- 
mations. From  these  considerations  it  is  plain  that  the  formation 
of  this  and  the  upper  and  kindred  strata  must  have  resulted  from 
some  other  cause. 

Many  portions  do  manifest  the  drifting  of  the  detritus  existing  in 
the  seas.  Still  these  are  the  results  of  local  causes,  similar  to  those 
by  which  corresponding  deposites  occurred  in  the  lower  strata. 

The  substance  directly  over  the  oolite  is  a kind  of  sand  and  clay 
sliale.  Above  this  is  a bluish  and  clayey  stratum.  These  represent 
the  ultimate  substances  of  the  strata  beneath  them.  The  substance 
of  lime  transformed  into  corals  by  the  infusoria,  and  re-decomposed, 
formed,  by  condensation,  the  beds  of  chalk.  In  these  deposites,  and 
above  them,  is  frequently  found  the  silicious  flintstone.  This  is  a 
substance  composed  of  the  ultimate  particles  of  silica  or  quartz. 
These  substances  have  not  been  found  below  this  formation,  although 
they  are  existing  in  the  lower  strata  of  the  oolite,  where  the  subdivi- 
ding strata  are  wanting.  And  this  does  not  derange  the  order  of 
geological  development ; for  it  corresponds  to  all  the  discoveries  of 
fossils  in  each  department  of  the  animal  kingdom.  These  irregulari- 
ties in  each  formation  of  the  earth,  plants,  and  animals,  are  deter- 
mined by  the  peculiar  circumstances  attending  their  respective  de- 
velopments. 

The  weight  of  the  water  and  atmosphere  determines  in  part  the 
strength  and  character  of  the  two  living  kingdoms.  Therefore  the 
gigantic  saurian  tribes,  that  inhabited  the  earth  in  previous  ages,  cor- 
responded to  the  enormous  density  of  the  existing  fluid  and  gaseous 
elements  : for  these  were  very  different  in  quality  and  composition 
from  what  they  have  subsequently  been.  And  the  character  of  the 
organic  productions  of  each  period  were  in  accordance  with  the  laws 
and  forces  that  were  in  action  at  the  time  of  their  development.  And 


280 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


corresponding  to  the  recompositions  of  the  watery  and  atmospheric 
elements,  the  kingdoms  of  the  living  species  became  also  changed  , 
and  the  modification  of  orders  of  plants  or  animals,  which  required 
ages  to  be  accomplished,  is,  in  some  instances,  such  as  to  present  a 
very  different  species  from  the  first  forms  of  the  same  class  : and 
when  the  great  dissimilarity  is  observed,  the  mind  loses  the  connexion 
between  the  lowest  and  the  highest.  But  this  would  not  be  the  case 
if  the  mind  could  comprehend  the  eternal  truth  that  all  higher  things 
are  contained  in  the  lowest,  undeveloped.  And  the  lowest  being  the 
germ,  all  others  will,  if  subjected  to  proper  conditions,  ascend  through 
all  the  progressive  forms  until  it  becomes  a perfected  compound  of  the 
whole  previously-existing  mass.  And  the  cretaceous  formation  ex- 
hibits an  evident  ascension  of  particles  which  previously  existed  in  a 
grosser  form. 

54.  As  rivers,  seas,  and  oceans,  such  as  now  exist,  together  with 
various  prominences  upon  the  land,  were,  as  was  before  described, 
results  of  the  last  universal  volcanic  disturbance  — so  by  the  influ- 
ence of  this  disturbance,  exceeding  winds  and  immense  waves  were 
also  created,  accompanied  by  very  heavy  rains.  These  were  caused 
by  the  various  portions  of  the  atmosphere  being  suddenly  displaced 
by  the  ascension  of  vapor  into  the  atmosphere,  this  vapor  filling  a space 
corresponding  to  its  volume.  By  these  means  some  portions  of  the 
atmosphere  became  dense  and  others  rare ; and  the  result  of  this  was 
winds  to  restore  the  equilibrium.  And  these  were  very  strong  and 
enduring. 

The  bodies  of  water  that  were  thrown  into  agitation  by  these  forces 
produced  similar  commotions  in  the  uncondensed  beds  of  the  sea, 
acting  also  upon  the  low  surfaces  of  the  land  which  became  gener- 
ally overflown. 

At  this  period,  the  sea  abounded  with  innumerable  infusoria.  And 
by  the  activity  of  the  polyparia,  and  also  by  the  aggregation  of  the 
substances  transformed  by  other  classes  of  animalcules,  immense 
coral-reefs  were  formed.  These  were  destroyed  and  reduced  to  an 
entire  solution  by  the  constant  agitation.  And  there  was  a recession 
from  the  mass,  of  all  uncongenial  particles  that  were  floating  in  solu- 
tion throughout  the  watery  waste.  The  action  of  one  was  a cause 
of  similar  action  in  the  other.  And  thus  by  a constant  friction  and 
agitation,  a substance  was  formed  which,  when  thus  deposited  and 
condensed,  produced,  as  was  described,  the  upper  cretaceous  strata. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


281 


I have  been  particular  in  this  description,  because  it  represents  the 
general  process  by  which  all  subsequent  formations  occurred  : and 
also  because  this  formation  indicates  a decided  adaptation  to  the  de- 
velopment of  new  forms,  approaching  more  nearly  that  of  the  human 
organization.  And  this  will  be  discovered  by  analyzing  the  various 
portions  of  these  strata,  in  which  will  be  discovered  iron-stone,  tin, 
copper  (the  iron  being  above  them  all)  — and  the  same  composition 
that  is  contained  in  the  solids  and  osseous  substances  of  the  human 
system.  And  it  will  be  discovered  that  the  chalk  is  precisely  the 
substance  which  enters  into  the  formation  of  all  the  bones,  both  of 
die  bird  and  saurian  species  of  that  era.  Now  there  exists  a more 
perfect  form  of  the  same  substance,  characterized  by  a more  perfect 
form  of  particles. 

It  is  a truth  constantly  presented  in  all  analytical  investigations, 
that  the  compound  constituting  the  higher  form  is  a unity  of  the  lower 
and  rudimental  substances,  and  that  the  inherent  properties  of  these 
govern  the  higher  substances  as  to  their  properties  and  composition. 
These  rudimental  formations  or  stratifications  may  be  properly  termed 
beginnings,  or  principles,  in  which  are  conceived,  and  out  of  which 
flow,  the  higher  creations.  And  by  letting  this  fact  become  a stand- 
ard governing  all  our  investigations  of  the  sciences,  the  mind  would 
naturally  become  enlarged  : for  it  is  by  properly  conceiving  of  causes, 
of  which  forms  are  the  effects,  that  our  knowledge  of  Nature  and  hex 
productions  becomes  perfected. 

1 am  distinctly  impressed  that  the  parts  of  the  present  cretaceous 
formation  that  have  not  been  investigated  will  indicate  different  spe- 
cies of  animals,  the  types  of  which  are  still  existing.  This  period 
bears  a closer  relation  to  the  feline  tribe,  and  also  is  more  nearly 
allied  to  man  than  has  been  supposed  by  geologists. 

The  chalk  is  a substance  but  little  supposed  to  be  existing  in  al- 
most every  form  upon  the  earth  in  subsequent  periods.  And  the 
marsupial  mammifers,  of  which  the  pleilocotherium  and  phascolo- 
therium  are  examples,  have  been  discovered  in  some  parts  of  the 
upper  cretaceous  strata.  But  these  do  not  represent  the  character 
of  the  animal  kingdom  during  this  period. 

Concerning  the  general  condition  of  the  earth  at  the  close  of  the 
present  period  it  is  not  necessary  to  speak,  inasmuch  as  the  com- 
mencement of  the  tertiary  formation  almost  imperceptibly  follows  the 
chalk-beds.  This  in  some  portions  is  composed  of  disintegrated 
limestone  and  marine  lime-solutions,  interspersed  with  decomposed 


282 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


marly  substances.  The  whole  process  required  many  ages  for  its 
completion  ; for  the  disintegrating  power  was  not  so  general  nor  ac- 
tive until  a new  catastrophe  occurred,  of  which  more  will  hereafter 
be  said. 

It  is  apparent,  from  the  indications  of  the  strata,  that  many  species 
which  had  before  inhabited  the  sea  and  land,  now  became  extinct. 
These  it  is  known  gave  place  to  others,  corresponding  to  the  new 
formation  of  the  earth  and  elements. 

"W  hat  is  most  remarkable  as  connected  with  this  period  is  the  par- 
tial change  of  temperature,  the  falling  of  snow,  the  formation  of  large 
mountains  of  ice,  and  generally  a light  and  more  congenial  atmo- 
sphere as  encompassing  the  earth.  And  the  lines  of  variation  and 
no  variation,  which  govern  our  arctic  and  torrid  temperatures  (about 
which  more  will  be  said),  constantly  changed,  and  these  changes 
produced  corresponding  changes  in  the  atmosphere,  and  consequently 
the  temperature,  which  resulted  in  the  frequent  melting  of  these 
mountains  of  ice.  And  this  melting  was  always  followed  by  an  en- 
largement of  the  body  of  the  water  upon  the  face  of  the  earth. 

Not  until  this  period  did  the  seasons  become  properly  established. 
And  these  were  very  irregular  according  to  the  condition  of  the  ele- 
ments on  which  their  distinctions  were  dependent.  It  is,  then,  natu- 
ral to  conceive  that  the  atmosphere  yielded  more  light,  more  warmth, 
and  consequently  more  fertility,  in  the  equatorial  portions  of  the 
earth,  than  it  had  in  any  preceding  age. 

The  change  which  occurred  was  general.  Its  effect  upon  the  at- 
mosphere was  such  as  to  adapt  it  to  the  admission  of  more  heat  and 
light,  from  which  fact  more  activity  was  generated.  And  from  this 
it  is  evident  that  Nature  had  undergone,  during  the  lapse  of  innumer- 
able ages,  another  day  of  formation  ; and  the  period  had  arrived  con- 
cerning which  it  is  said,  “ The  greater  light  ruled  the  day , and  the 
lesser  the  night.''1  It  was  by  this  fact  that  the  seasons  were  properly 
established.  And  thus  all  the  lights  that  were  existing  in  the  heav- 
ens, consisting  of  the  innumerable  orbs  of  the  stellar  system,  gave 
light  upon  the  earth,  inasmuch  as  each  particle  of  light  that  emanated 
from  these  celestial  bodies  communicated  motion  to  every  other  par- 
ticle between  it  and  the  earth  ; and  thus  the  earth  and  its  atmospheric 
mantle  were  rendered  luminous  and  congenial. 

The  mind  will  now  receive  the  conviction  that  this  change  in  Na- 
ture and  her  elements  must  have  consisted  in  the  adaptations  of  con- 
ditions and  principles  to  the  ushering-ia  of  a new  era,  characterized 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


2S3 


by  developments  far  more  beautiful  and  perfect  than  any  which  had 
preceded.  Therefore  the  expression  in  a previous  historical  account 
given  of  this  consummation  is  substantially  verified,  that  “ the  evening 
and  the  morning  were  the  fourth  day .” 

§ 55.  It  is  now  presented  to  the  understanding  that  the  commence- 
ment of  the  tertiary  period,  with  its  productions,  is  the  morn  of  a new 
day  of  the  earth’s  creations.  It  is  not  necessary  to  describe  minute- 
ly the  process  by  which  the  tertiary  formation  was  produced  ; for  it 
has  been  discovered  that  it  consists  of  deposites  of  lime,  shale,  clayey 
lime,  marl,  and  sand,  with  the  solutions  then  existing  in  the  sea. 
The  constant  aggregation  of  these  various  substances  produced  the 
lower  and  intermediate  strata  contained  in  the  eocene  and  miocene 
deposites  ; after  which,  by  similar  means,  the  pliocene  with  its  upper 
division  was  formed. 

This  classification  has  not  been  made  in  reference  to  the  different 
earthy  strata  of  the  tertiary,  hut  rather  in  reference  to  the  vegetable 
and  animal  remains  which  they  contain.  Therefore  I proceed  di- 
rectly to  a consideration  of  the  physical  phenomena  presented  before 
and  during  this  period,  and  also  to  describe  the  ascension  and  devel- 
opment of  the  kingdoms. 

The  historical  period  manifested  at  its  commencement,  more  than 
it  has  at  any  subsequent  time,  marks  of  the  previous  and  long-con- 
tinued flowings  of  bodies  of  water  in  an  oblique  direction  from  the 
northwest  to  the  southeast.  These  are  also  constantly  represented, 
by  the  wearings  on  the  rocks,  to  have  taken  other  directions  during 
the  great  agitations  which  occurred  during  the  fifth  day  of  creation. 
The  enormous  mountains  of  ice  that  were  formed  by  the  change  of 
seasons  and  of  the  general  temperature  of  the  climate,  became,  as  was 
before  said,  frequently  reduced  to  their  fluid  state.  And  at  every 
season  in  which  this  phenomenon  occurred,  great  tides  were  also 
produced,  whereby  the  ice,  and  various  substances  that  were  imbed- 
ded in  it,  were  carried  to  various  parts  of  the  earth.  During  this 
process,  extensive  disintegration  occurred,  and  great  wearings  upon 
the  mountains  and  prominences  over  which  the  great  body  of  water 
passed. 

It  must  be  understood  that  the  oceans  had  not  exactly  the  same 
positions,  nor  were  they  so  much  contracted,  as  they  now  are.  And 
it  must  have  been  this  agitation,  created  by  the  powerful  winds  and 
consequent  storms  that  occurred  during  this  and  preceding  periods, 


2S4 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


that  produced  the  incisions  which  are  visible  on  the  rocks  and  mount- 
ains and  other  portions  that  now  are  dry  land,  but  which  then  were 
partially  or  wholly  covered  by  the  waters. 

During  the  seasons  when  the  water  was  congealed  to  ice,  the  great 
body  of  that  element  was  not  so  much  excited.  But  when  the  change 
from  a cold  to  a warm  temperature  occurred,  heavy  winds  were  as  a 
consequence  produced,  and  these  caused  the  great  agitation.  Other 
incidental  causes  were  constantly  producing  their  effects,  which  will 
be  more  plainly  understood  when  I speak  of  the  restoration  of  the 
equilibrium  of  the  water  and  atmosphere  at  the  close  of  the  pres- 
ent era. 

Some  portions  of  the  dry  land  became  now  very  fertile,  and  yield- 
ed forth  an  abundance  of  vegetation.  All  the  lower  species,  from  the 
sea-weed  to  the  cryptogamia,  and  also  the  higher  and  dicotiledonous 
orders,  were  now  produced.  All  the  classes  of  the  palm  and  con- 
iferte,  from  the  lower  up  to  the  intermediate  and  higher,  that  existed 
during  this  period,  are  exemplified  in  the  general  vegetation  of  the 
present  day  — with  the  exception  of  their  form  and  size,  they  being 
much  larger  — not  so  high,  yet  more  bulky,  than  any  now  upon  the 
fertile  portions  of  the  earth.  A species  of  tree,  like  that  known  as 
the  rock-oak,  was  most  extensively  developed  in  the  forests  of  the 
tertiary  period  — possessing  such  qualities  that  either  decomposition 
or  petrifaction  generally  followed  their  decline.  For  we  have  no  in- 
dications of  thp  existence  of  trees  of  this  class  except  the  petrified 
portions  that  still  remain  in  the  upper  strata  of  the  pliocene. 

The  lower  vegetable  formations  of  this  period  are  now  exemplified 
in  the  grains  below  the  rye  and  wheat,  and  in  various  common  vege- 
tables, though  no  species  belonging  to  tbe  historical  formation  then 
existed  with  the  exception  of  a small  plant  resembling  the  potato. 
And  the  higher  forest  vegetation,  such  as  the  oak,  the  birch,  and  the 
maple,  are  all  exemplified  in  the  tertiary  period.  The  whole  vegeta- 
tion of  this  era,  as  in  the  preceding  ones,  is  gross  and  bulky  in  com- 
parison to  the  orders  and  species  of  the  vegetable  kingdom  of  the  his- 
torical period. 

The  animal  kingdom  presents  throughout  a correspondence  with 
the  vegetable.  The  animals,  as  to  their  main  features  and  charac- 
teristics, were  strong,  and  gross  and  very  imperfect  in  form,  habit, 
and  disposition.  There  was  a species  of  the  megalosaurus  and  ple- 
siosaurus still  existing.  And  these  ascend  from  the  saurian  species 
in  form,  nature,  and  disposition,  up  to  the  semi-elephant  or  masto- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


2S  b 

don,  including  the  intermediate  species,  such  as  the  hippopotamus, 
rhinoceros,  unicorn,  walrus,  and  the  several  species  of  the  huge  sloth. 

It  has  been  supposed  by  geologists  that  this  period  presents  abso- 
lutely the  first  distinction  between  the  lower  orders  and  the  ruminan- 
tia  and  quadrupeds.  These  last  classes,  together  with  the  edentata, 
form  the  distinctive  features  of  the  animal  kingdom  at  this  period, 
each  of  which  presents  the  higher  order  of  utero-development.  In 
this  period  the  lower  marsupials  insensibly  become  almost  entirely 
extinct ; and  the  whole  animal  productions  of  the  present  era  repre- 
sent entirely  a new  creation. 

It  must  be  borne  in  mind  that  every  day  of  creation  presents  a new 
unfolding  of  rudimental  forms  and  substances  composing  in  their 
lower  states  the  lower  orders  of  animals  and  plants.  Therefore 
the  creations  of  each  succeeding  day  correspond  to  the  creations  of 
the  previous  ones,  and  to  the  orders  of  other  forms,  but  present  a 
new  development,  consisting  of  higher  species,  according  as  condi- 
tions were  rendered  favorable  by  the  progressive  unfolding  of  laws 
and  elements.  Therefore  in  this  day  the  quadrumana  stands  as  the 
highest  type  and  the  most  perfect  form  of  the  whole  creation.  And 
it  is  still  more  remarkable  that  the  highest  of  this  order  is  very  slightly 
represented  by  the  present  monkey. 

Geologists  have  no  means  to  arrive  at  an  absolute  knowledge  of 
the  form,  order,  and  character,  of  this  class.  For  it  was  many  thou- 
sand years  before  the  primitive  history  of  man  was  written  that  this 
class  represented  the  highest  order  of  Nature’s  productions  ; and  they 
subsequently  passed  into  new  forms,  the  old  type  becoming  entirely 
extinct. 


§ 56.  The  physical  condition  of  the  earth,  and  the  order  and  de- 
gree of  its  animal  developments  during  the  tertiary  formation,  are 
distinguished  by  more  remarkable  manifestations  than  the  same  things 
are  at  any  other  period.  The  change  of  climate  and  the  establish- 
ment of  seasons  have  changed  generally  the  productions  and  aspect 
of  the  whole  earth. 

And  it  is  a fact  altogether  overlooked  in  the  researches  of  meteor- 
ologists, that  the  condition  of  the  higher  degrees  of  the  imponderable 
elements  determines  entirely  the  temperature  of  the  atmosphere,  from 
its  minimum  to  its  maximum  decree  of  heat  or  cold.  For  it  must  be 
understood  as  an  established  axiom,  that  cold  is  the  absence  of  heat, 
and  that  heat  is  the  ultimate  condition  of  its  negative  or  unascended 

O 


2SG 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


temperature.  To  solve  the  phenomenon  of  the  variations  of  the 
temperature,  terms  are  requisite  that  are  not  in  reality  expressive  of 
the  true  conditions  or  meaning.  For  indeed  no  forms  of  expression 
nor  efforts  of  language  have  been  suitable  to  convey  a scientific 
knowledge  of  the  real  controlling  principles  of  Nature,  developing 
constantly  the  lower  and  higher,  or  cause  and  effect. 

At  this  stage  of  the  earth’s  geological  progress,  the  cold  in  arctic 
regions  was  greater  than  it  had  been  at  any  previous  time.  For  near 
the  close  of  the  new  red  sandstone,  and  during  all  the  subsequent 
ages  to  the  consummation  of  the  tertiary,  heavy  frosts  and  snows, 
and  enormous  mountains  of  ice,  prevailed  extensively  throughout  the 
polar  regions.  And  these  frequently  became  suddenly  melted  into 
water,  which  flowed  to  warmer  climates.  The  temperature  of  the 
seasons  was  also  varied  by  exceeding  storms  of  wind  and  rain,  fre 
quently  caused  by  the  disturbance  of  the  equilibrium  of  the  atmo- 
sphere. For  let  it  be  properly  impressed  that  the  heat  attracted  the 
particles  of  water  which  constantly  ascended  and  became  atmosphere 
of  a dense  character  ; and  when  these  particles  were  condensed  they 
formed  rain,  which  again  descended.  Clouds  are  the  result  of  the 
consociation  of  the  particles  of  atmosphere  of  equal  density  ; and 
these  becoming  entirely  too  dense  to  continue  in  the  atmosphere,  de- 
scend to  associate  with  their  former  element.  Such  is  the  cause  of 
the  common  phenomenon  of  rain ; and  this  never  would  occur  if 
the  temperature  were  always  equal,  and  the  equilibrium  of  the  air 
remained  at  all  times  undisturbed. 

Such,  therefore,  was  the  condition  of  the  elements  during  the  pe- 
riod under  consideration  ; and  the  consequence  was  the  frequent  and 
almost  entire  submersion  of  the  whole  face  of  Nature.  These  occur- 
rences are  termed  by  geologists  “ inundations”  — and  the  evidences 
of  such  are  received  from  the  manifestations  of  the  diluvial  de- 
posites. 

It  is  necessary  to  remark,  that  the  opinion  derived  from  the  visible 
effects  of  these  frequent  storms  as  manifested  in  these  formations  is 
not  altogether  true  so  far  as  it  respects  the  'period  when  these  inun- 
dations occurred.  For  on  the  fourth  day  of  creation  the  seasons 
u7ere  established  by  a proper  development  of  all  the  conditions  requi- 
site for  the  same,  this  constituting  a more  definite  and  formal  devel- 
opment of  Nature  than  could  have  occurred  at  any  previous  period. 
Aud  inasmuch  as  this  change  became  universal,  and  the  temperature 
the  seasons  was  more  intense  than  it  has  been  at  any  other  period, 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


2S7 


before  or  since,  the  storms  and  inundations  above  described  followed 
as  a consequence. 

Another  evidence  of  the  extreme  cold  toward  the  poles,  and  in- 
tense heat  toward  the  equator  (the  whole  being  produced  by  the  revo- 
lutions of  the  lines  of  no  variation,  and  the  radiation  from  the  poles 
of  the  earth),  consists  in  the  abundant  remains  of  calcareous  and  mi- 
nute infusory  shells  which  in  many  places  pervade  the  southern  seas 
and  beaches.  And  the  clialk-beds  are  greater  as  they  approach  the 
torrid  regions,  being'in  some  places  nearly  allied  to  the  strata  suc- 
ceeding those  of  the  carboniferous  era.  And  approaching  the  north, 
including  the  upper  part  of  both  continents,  the  marl,  shale,  and 
limestone,  are  very  much  more  conspicuous,  both  in  the  cretaceous 
and  tertiary,  than  is  the  chalk  or  its  other  kindred  substances. 

In  the  portions  of  the  earth  that  have  been  searched,  it  is  found 
that  the  calcareous  fossils  prevail  more  in  and  toward  the  tropical 
than  in  the  more  northern  portions  of  the  earth.  And  it  has  been 
discovered  (or  rather  inferred)  that  the  frosts  which  occurred  during 
the  sandstone  period  took  place  during  the  entire  absence  of  the  birds 
that  inhabited  parts  of  the  western  continent.  Their  tracks  are  dis- 
covered on  divisions  of  the  strata  where  no  frost-marks  are  visible  ; 
which  implies  that  they  migrated  at  the  change  of  the  seasons.  And 
their  fossils  have  not  been  found  where  their  tracks  have  been  dis 
covered. 

From  that  period  to  the  present,  the  seasons  have  gradually  be- 
come established  and  an  extreme  difference  is  now  presented  be- 
tween their  present  and  previous  character. 

And  as  has  been  before  remarked,  meteorologists  have  failed  to 
determine  the  cause  cf  the  frequent  variations  of  the  seasons  from 
the  commencement  of  these  inundations  to  the  introduction  of  the 
historical  period.  In  speaking  of  this  cause,  it  is  not  the  intention 
to  introduce  definite  calculations,  and  thus  relieve  inquirers  from  the 
efforts  of  mind  which  would  otherwise  be  necessary.  But  it  is  ne- 
cessary to  intimate  the  foundation  upon  which'  these  manifestations 
are  based,  and  in  a general  way  to  explain  them  ; and  the  minutice 
may  be  traced  by  existing  indications. 

§ 57.  The  dissimilarity  of  the  temperature  of  the  poles  at  different 
times  is  owing  to  the  varying  conditions  of  an  existing  element  in 
its  lower  and  higher  degrees  of  development,  and  which,  though  it 
is  not  generated  by  foreign  bodies,  is  assisted  by  them  to  sustain  a 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


2SS 

connexion  with  the  whole  envelope  of  the  earth,  from  the  lower  to 
the  higher  strata  of  the  atmosphere.  The  north  has  been  considered 
as  the  location  of  the  magnetic  pole,  evolving  incessantly  attractive, 
electric  fluid,  which  determines  the  direction  of  the  magnetic  needle. 
In  the  torrid  portions  of  the  earth,  the  particles  thrown  from  the  sun 
(which,  when  decomposed,  produce  light)  act  upon  the  water  and 
atmosphere,  which  action  results  in  a constant  sublimation  and  de- 
velopment of  heat,  or  the  magnetic  medium.  It  is  here  termed  mag- 
netic for  distinction  ; but  properly  it  is  the  unfolded  heat  contained 
in  the  previously-cold  medium.  The  imperceptible  rushing  of  this 
current  toward  the  north  determines  the  direction  of  the  magnetic 
needle. 

And  it  will  be  discovered  that  there  are  three  distinct  currents, 
corresponding  to  the  rays  proceeding  from  the  sun.  The  first  of 
these  rays  is  light  without  heat : this  produces  color.  The  second  is 
light  without  color  or  heat : this  produces  chemical  action  ; and  in  it 
the  white  muriate  of  silver  will  be  turned  instantly  black.  And  all 
kindred  bodies,  undergoing  like  chemical  action,  are  rendered  sus- 
ceptible of  the  same  by  this  particular  ray  of  light.  The  third  ray 
neither  produces  color  nor  chemical  action,  but  produces  ivarmtli  by 
causing  friction  between  all  particles  on  which  it  acts.  And  this  ray 
of  light  acts  upon  all  kindred  particles,  whereby  the  whole  are  trans- 
mitted to  the  particles  composing  the  envelope  of  the  earth,  and  there 
are  suitably  digested  for  the  nourishment  of  the  vegetable  and  animal 
kingdoms. 

The  first  of  these  rays  is  the  cause  of  all  color.  The  second  is 
the  ray  that  has  been  lately  supposed  to  be  magnetized.  It  produces 
the  chemical  action  whereby  color  and  other  properties  become  du- 
rable. And  the  third  comprehends  these  both  — and  is  the  active, 
communicative  substance,  that  generates  heat  by  friction  upon  the 
particles  of  the  atmosphere.  And  by  the  atomic  modification  which 
it  undergoes  in  passing  through  its  various  motions,  it  is  rendered 
suitable  to  reflect  forms  upon  the  retina,  and  thus  to  transmit  the 
knowledge  of  foreign  objects  to  the  brain  of  every  animal  in  being. 

Were  not  the  particles  of  light  thus  modified  in  the  great  atomic 
envelope  of  the  earth,  color  could  not  exist.  For  color  is  the  re- 
flection of  light;  and  without  light,  how  could  we  know  of  color? 
And  without  minute,  imperceptible  chemical  action,  how  could  the 
exhalation  of  the  vegetable  kingdom  become  suitable  for  the  inspira- 
tion of  the  animal  kingdom?  And  without  the  form  of  light  which 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


289 


conveys  the  images  of  foreign  objects,  the  eye  would  be  a useless 
organ. 

There  are  likewise  three  distinct  fluids  crossing  the  earth  from  the 
south  to  the  north,  and  from  the  north  to  the  south,  by  a mutual  ex- 
change of  elements  from  the  poles.  There  is  also  an  intersecting 
fluid  that  crosses  each  of  the  others  ; and  this  has  been  termed  the 
“ diamagnetic”  fluid.  The  former  fluids  are  in  relations  of  equality 
to  each  other.  Their  termination  at  the  north  is  the  nucleus  of  the 
magnetic  pole.  The  direction  of  these  fluids  establishes  the  lines  of 
no  variation.  The  motion  of  their  attending  fluids  determines  the 
lines  of  variation.  These  lines  revolve  from  east  to  west  half  way 
round  the  earth  while  the  sun  is  passing  through  one  of  the  signs  of 
the  zodiac.*  And  wherever  is  the  meridian  of  these  lines,  there  is 
the  greatest  degree  of  cold.  And  as  the  lines  approximate  to  any 
particular  longitude,  so  the  climate  of  that  portion  of  the  earth  be- 
comes gradually  changed  ; and  in  this  way  some  portions  formerly 
characterized  by  blooming  fertility  and  a congenial  atmosphere  have 
been  changed  to  barrenness,  and  are  now  concealed  from  the  light 
of  the  sun  by  a mantle  of  heavy  snow  and  mountains  of  ice. 

In  proportion  to  the  prevalence  of  the  substances  whose  motion 
constitutes  these  lines,  is  the  temperature  rendered  cold.  And  so 
every  portion  of  the  earth  that  is  subjected  to  extreme  and  severe 
winters  is  affected  by  these  lines  ; and  places  where  winters  are  most 
severe  are  directly  under  their  influence.  And  it  is  by  the  constant 
evolving  of  the  cold  at  the  north  that  the  heat  toward  the  equator  is 
rendered  more  intense  ; and  thus  are  established  two  counterbalancing 
conditions,  or  a positive  and  negative  — or  the  lowrer  or  first  circula- 
ting electric  substances,  and  the  higher  or  magnetic  medium. 

The  severe  storms  which  the  tertiary  period  indicates,  and  the 
flowing  of  great  bodies  of  water  and  ice  containing  other  substances 
were  the  results  of  the  established  seasons  known  as  winter  and  sum 
mer,  and  also  of  the  variations  of  temperature  as  owing  to  the  revo- 
lutions of  these  lines  of  no  variation.  A series  of  winters  rendered 
extremely  severe  by  the  presence  of  these  lines,  formed  these  large 
mountains  of  ice  in  the  polar  regions  : and  the  transition  of  tempera- 
ture caused,  as  before  stated,  the  immense  and  terrific  storms,  produ- 
cing great  bodies  of  water,  which  carried  with  them  the  enormous 
icebergs  that  crossed  the  surface  of  the  whole  earth  in  the  direction 


• Thai  is,  by  the  apparent  motion  called  the  precession  of  the  equinoxes. 

19 


200 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


before  described.*  The  diluvial  strata  were  formed  by  the  deposi- 
tion of  the  detritus  and  various  dissolved  substances  carried  by  these 
great  currents.  By  the  deposition  of  the  finer  materials,  many  por- 
tions were  also  formed  that  are  termed  alluvial , especially  along  the 
marine  coasts. 

These  almost  universal  submersions  were  followed  by  a great  dimi- 
nution of  the  whole  body  of  water  which  was  perceptible  during  ev- 
ery rigid  season.  And  during  the  process  of  many  ages,  within 
which  time  these  occurrences  were  frequent,  the  water  and  atmo- 
sphere began  to  lose  their  required  density,  and  this  must  result  in 
such  a catastrophe  as  those  previously  caused  by  like  conditions. 
Before  the  commencement  of  the  last,  or  historical  formation,  almost 
all  the  land  plants  and  animals  were  entirely  destroyed  : and  this  de- 
struction occurred  from  the  general  submersion  of  the  whole  face  of 
Nature  in  the  watery  element.  Many  caves  were  formed  previously 
to  this  period  ; and  in  them  are  still  found  the  remains  of  several 
extinct  species  of  animals. 

From  the  great  modifications  which  every  department  of  Nature  has 
undergone,  the  conditions  required  for  the  unfolding  of  the  subsequent 
productions  must  soon  occur.  And  this  will  establish  a geological  and 
elemental  condition  of  the  earth  that  may  be  termed  '■‘•very  good”  for 
the  requirements  of  the  subsequent  kingdoms.  And  this  is  to  be  the 
great  transition  of  the  earth  from  a state  of  comparative  barrenness 
and  inactivity  to  a substantial  and  long-enduring  condition  adapted 
to  the  existence  of  new  forms  with  more  perfect  and  exalted  com- 
pounds. And  the  geological  formations  of  the  earth  are  now  nearly 
at  an  end  — with  the  exception  of  artificial  formations  that  are  still  in 
progress.  And  the  new  energies  which  are  soon  to  be  unfolded  will 
establish  species  upon  the  face  of  the  earth  whose  types  are  in  exist- 
ence at  the  present  day.  And  then  there  will  be  a general  activity 
and  fecundity  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  sea,  and  of  the  creeping  things 
of  the  earth,  these  being  properly  situated  to  bring  forth  species  after 
their  kind,  and  to  multiply  exceedingly. 

And  the  coldness  of  the  earth,  water,  and  atmosphere,  at  this  pe- 
riod, rendered  them  more  suitable  to  the  development  of  the  lower 
orders  of  creation  than  they  have  been  at  any  other  period.  There- 
fore the  fruitfulness  indicated  by  the  command  to  these  creeping 
things  to  bring  forth  plentifully  their  like,  was  in  reality  a necessary 

* We  were  informed  incidentally  by  the  clairvoyant  that  these  accumulations  of  ice 
took  place  at  both  poles  of  the  earth. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


291 


accompaniment  of  the  then-existing  conditions.  And  the  conditions 
of  the  earth  and  of  the  animal  kingdom  are  not  to  be  compared  with 
the  conditions  existing  in  any  other  era. 

Therefore  the  original  history  of  the  steps  and  degrees  of  creation 
is  incontestably  verified : and  it  would  be  unjust  to  use  any  other  form  of 
expression  than  that  “ the  evening  and  the  morning  were  the  fifth  day” 

% 5S.  We  have  now  ascended  to  a period  in  the  creation  of  the 
earth  and  kingdoms  that  is  more  intimately  connected  with  the  scien- 
tifics  of  the  world,  and  which  abounds  with  more  distinct  representa- 
tions of  all  things  now  existing,  than  was  either  of  the  previous  pe- 
riods. No  history  is  extant  of  the  commencement  of  the  present 
period  of  time  : and  all  the  knowledge  that  is  existing  in  reference  to 
the  original  species  is  the  result  of  inferences  drawn  from  the  present 
condition  of  creation. 

Concerning  the  various  degrees  of  perfection  in  the  developments 
of  the  previous  days,  general  remarks  have  been  offered  ; but  a de- 
scription of  the  specific  changes  of  Nature  and  her  productions,  from 
the  first  conditions  to  the  present,  would  have  been  impossible.  And 
all  the  knowledge  existing  in  reference  to  the  laws  of  Nature  is  de- 
rived  from  their  general  and  universal  effects,  and  not  from  detailed 
manifestations.  And  by  comprehending  general  principles,  assisted 
by  an  enlarged  view  of  their  correspondences,  Nature  and  her  laws 
will  appear  as  one  vast  chemical  laboratory,  in  which  the  lowest  con- 
stituents of  the  whole  composition  are  constantly  being  developed 
and  purified.  And  the  whole  is  a compound  o ^ jpoly gastric  globules, 
whose  power  of  chemical  action  and  principles  of  progression  unfold 
all  the  forms  that  are  developed  from  the  great  Mass  — which  again 
produce  new  substances  and  new  modes  of  composition,  each  being 
unlike  the  first.  And  every  internal  quality  which  is  sequestered  in 
present  forms  is  becoming  unfolded,  and  will  ultimately  progress  to 
the  highest  possible  form  and  condition  of  being. 

The  first  types  that  are  presented  upon  the  face  of  the  earth  at  the 
commencement  of  the  sixth  day  are  of  an  inferior  organization,  yet 
the  superiors  of  all  previous  forms.  These  contain  all  the  qualities 
and  principles  of  the  previous  creations,  are  representatives  of  the 
highest  forms  of  the  animal  kingdom,  and  are  a significant  type  of  the 
organization  of  mankind.  But  they  are  as  much  below  man  in  his 
present  perfected  state  as  they  are  above  the  whole  creations  and 
productions  of  the  previous  ages. 


292 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


Comparative  an  atom)'  lias  been  very  useful  in  satisfying  the  scien- 
tific world  that  there  is  a relation  existing  between  all  forms  in  beino- : 
but  it  has  almost  established  in  some  minds  the  conclusion  that  every 
form  and  species  in  either  kingdom  has  a specific  origin  and  an  ex- 
clusive existence,  so  much  so  that  it  does  not  represent  a higher  de- 
gree of  lower  forms,  nor  run  into  any  of  the  more  perfect  degrees 
of  organization.  Anatomy  is  eminently  useful  as  a basis  of  induc- 
tion ; but  anatomists  have  considered  the  invariableness  manifested  in 
every  anatomical  form  in  being  as  substantial  evidence  that  they  are 
the  specific  productions  of  some  power  above  and  independent  of 
that  which  Nature  possesses,  and  therefore  they  have  disputed  the 
opinion  that  specific  forms  have  been  at  any  previous  time  the  con- 
stituent particles  of  lower  forms  in  creation. 

But  it  is  evident  that  an  organic  structure,  of  any  type  or  species, 
must  have  been  previously  in  a different  state  of  composition.  There- 
fore the  particles  composing  the  anatomical  structure  of  the  vegetable 
and  animal  kingdoms  must  have  been  derived  from  the  lower  orders 
of  formation,  and  must  have  ascended  to  enter  into  the  organizations 
in  which  they  are  now  imbodied.  It  is  therefore  a congregation  of 
atoms  of  suitable  nature  and  quality  that  produces  all  which  the  anat- 
omy of  the  animal  kingdom  represents.  For  a superstructure  could 
not  exist  before  the  materials  of  its  composition.  The  whole  of  Na- 
ture’s manifestations  are  therefore  a positive  result  of  the  inherent 
principles  contained  in  the  whole  composition.  Thus  anatomy  is  a 
monumental  demonstration  of  the  ultimate  perfection  of  lower  parti- 
cles. And  the  structure  of  any  organization  sustains  an  inseparable 
connexion  with  the  first  indication  of  a like  arrangement  of  particles, 
and  with  the  highest  organization  in  existence. 

The  subject  of  the  present  inquiry  comprehends  grounds  extend- 
ing far  beyond  the  knowledge  of  the  world  respecting  the  vegetable 
and  animal  kingdoms  ; and  hence  the  present  descriptions  will  be 
given  in  a more  detailed  manner.  Still  it  is  impossible,  from  a com- 
parison with  anything  now  known,  to  convey  a correct  knowledge 
concerning  the  original  forms  and  the  highest  form  existing  at  the 
commencement  of  the  sixth  day.  But  we  are  emerging  from  the 
previous  degrees  and  conditions  into  a state  where  exists  more  light 
and  more  facilities  for  research  and  investigation.  And  this  state 
also  presents  one  of  the  unfolding  beauties  in  the  magnificent  temple 
of  Nature. 

The  reflections  prompted  by  an  enlarged  understanding  of  Nature 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


293 


and  her  laws  can  not  be  too  deep,  or  be  extended  too  far  back  into 
the  period  of  animated  existence,  to  be  the  means  of  useful  instruc- 
tion. All  the  forms,  elements,  and  compositions,  abounding  upon 
tbe  face  of  the  earth  at  this  period,  can  be  made  useful  in  unfolding 
an  understanding  of  the  present  developments.  But  these  can  be 
of  use  in  this  way  only  as  we  conceive  of  the  law  of  correspond- 
ence. 

By  a rule  in  mathematics,  an  understanding  of  certain  parts  of  any 
form  gives,  by  induction,  an  absolute  knowledge  of  the  other  parts  ; 
and  from  a knowledge  of  the  base  and  bearings  of  two  angles  of  a 
triangle,  the  distance  of  tbe  apex  may  be  positively  determined. 
And  so  by  proving  absolutely  that  Nature  in  any  of  her  departments 
contains  certain  laws,  principles,  and  compositions,  we  may  arrive  at 
an  absolute  knowledge  of  Nature’s  previous  conditions,  and  her  future 
and  transcending  developments. 

It  is  to  be  remarked  (by  way  of  introduction  to  the  considerations 
respecting  the  sixth  period  of  creation)  that  the  descriptions  that  were 
formerly  given  have  been  addressed,  and  those  which  are  to  come 
will  be  addressed,  particularly  to  the  power  of  the  minds  of  the  world 
to  conceive  of  truths  by  analogy  or  correspondence.  And  if  such  a 
power  is  not  yet  unfolded  in  some  minds,  it  is  possible  that  they  will 
not  understand  the  truths  thus  presented  ; and  this  they  can  not  do 
until  they  assume  a degree  of  perfection  suitable  to  associate  with 
such  interior  and  universal  truths.  It  is  to  be  further  remarked  that 
it  is  only  by  the  science  of  mathematical  correspondence  that  a knowl- 
edge can  be  had  of  anything  in  Nature,  of  any  of  her  motives  and 
living  energies  or  their  effects,  or  of  the  progressive  tendency  of  all 
particles  in  being  to  higher  substances,  higher  qualities,  and  more 
perfect  interiors.  And  the  knowledge  obtained  by  any  other  process 
does  not  extend  beyond  the  conviction  of  external  form.  And  this 
conviction  is  not  absolutely  satisfactory  to  an  inductive  and  compre- 
hensive mind  ; for  such  a mind  must  first  know  by  what  power  and 
principle  it  is  enabled  to  associate  with  external  forms.  And  the 
mind  which  comprehends  no  more  than  that  which  is  visible,  under- 
stands but  very  little  of  Nature,  or  the  principles  of  being.  But  in  an 
expansive  mind,  the  question  arises,  “ What  is  the  cause  of  the  ex- 
istence of  any  external  form  ?”  And  by  properly  conceiving  of  the 
cause,  such  a mind  is  drawn  by  an  interior  affection  to  tbe  Cause  of 
all  causes,  by  analyzing  and  comprehending  the  general  causes  and 
effects,  both  visible  and  invisible,  and  then  observing  the  perfect 


294 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


adaptation  and  arrangement  of  all  these  to  the  Whole,  and  the  Whole 
to  its  ultimate  use. 

There  is  a grandeur  in  the  visible  forms  of  Nature  which  can  only 
be  seen  by  a mind  first  duly  impressed  with  their  interior  qualities. 

§ 59.  The  first  day  of  creation  unfolded  one  of  the  laws  or  attri- 
butes connected  with  the  great  Whole  ; and  that  is  Power : and  this 
power  was  manifested  in  ceaseless  Motion.  The  developments  of 
the  second  day  unfolded  the  attribute  of  Wisdom.  And  Goodness 
was  manifested  in  the  arrangement  and  adaptation  of  all  things  on  the 
third  day.  The  peculiar  conditions  and  circumstances  existing  on 
the  fourth  day,  and  their  results,  which  were  “ very  good,”  mani- 
fested Wisdom,  and  also  developed  Justice  and  Reciprocation.  The 
fifth  day  unfolded  a new  order  of  beings  — such  as  possessed  powers 
and  faculties  and  a degree  of  sensibility  not  before  existing;  and 
therefore  they  were  capable  of  feeling  the  difference  between  the 
lower  and  the  higher  forms.  — Hence  they  could  feel  a forbearance. 
For  from  the  knowledge  of  their  own  power  and  pre-eminence,  a re- 
gard is  always  manifested  by  the  more  perfect  forms  for  the  lower 
orders.  Thus  a spirit  of  mercy  and  forbearance  was  established 
among  the  animated  tribes.  The  beauties  which  were  unfolded  on 
the  sixth  day,  connected  as  they  are  with  all  previous  forms,  and 
being  a development  of  their  interior  qualities,  correspond  to  the  ulti- 
mate ascension  of  all  forms,  particles,  and  principles,  and  the  unfold- 
ing of  all  the  attributes  originally  involved  in  the  first  Type,  or  the 
Germ  of  all  subsequent  developments. 

And  while  the  last  attribute  unfolded  corresponds  to  all  others,  its 
grandeur  rises  above  the  highest  conceptions  of  the  minds  of  the 
world.  And  notwithstanding  the  arduous  efforts  that  have  been 
made  to  conceal  this  unfolding  principle,  it  is  gradually  becoming  more 
and  more  revealed  as  the  interior  qualities  of  mankind  are  capable 
of  receiving  it.  This  principle  comprehends  all  below  its  degree  of 
refinement,  and  contains  qualities  that  will  unfold  eternally  beyond. 
It  is  the  medium  of  association  between  all  spiritually-expanded 
minds.  It  encompasses  and  pervades  all  Nature  — the  whole  world 
— the  Universe.  It  is  the  essential  germ  of  more  perfect  beauties  — 
the  highest  attribute  of  the  present  sphere.  It  is  that  which  is  to  be 
admired  and  adored  above  every  other  thing.  It  should  illuminate 
the  interior  constitution  of  every  being,  and  should  give  character  to 
every  thought ; and  while  it  gradually  becomes  more  and  more  un- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


295 


folded,  it  will  beget  in  the  mind  an  affection  for  an  interior  knowl- 
edge of  present  and  ultimate  things.  And  this  is  therefore  the  high- 
est and  most  perfect  principle  unfolded  from  the  original  Germ  con- 
sisting of  Power ; and  such  is  the  attribute  of  immortal  Truth.  And 
while  this  is  the  highest  of  the  present  attributes,  it  is  a Germ  that 
will  ascend,  as  all  other  things  progress,  to  more  perfect  manifesta- 
tions in  higher  spheres. 

This,  then,  is  an  index  — an  introduction  to  the  revealment  of  the 
whole  creation  of  the  sixth  day.  And  its  object  is  to  prepare  the 
mind  to  associate  more  familiarly  with  the  tendencies  of  the  present 
era  to  a corresponding  day  of  a more  perfect  creation,  in  the  investi- 
gation concerning  which  all  the  science  of  the  world  should  be  prop- 
erly employed.  But  hitherto  that  which  has  been  termed  science 
has  only  been  a mode  by  which  the  world  has  attempted  to  arrive  at 
a correct  knowledge  of  external  forms,  and  barely  to  conceive  of  more 
interior  qualities.  Therefore  that  which  has  been  termed  “ science ” 
is  neither  knowledge  nor  understanding  ; but  has  a tendency  to  attract 
the  mind  from  the  beginning  principles  of  Nature,  and  from  all  the 
qualities  universally  pervading  her  composition,  and  to  enable  it 
merely  to  conceive  of  the  shadows  or  sheathings  of  truth.  And 
thus  the  interior  cause  of  every  external  form  has  been  obscured  and 
neglected. 

But  by  the  process  at  present  adopted,  Icnoidedgc  becomes  righ- 
teousness: for  by  it  we  conceive  of  all  in  a state  of  being  below  us, 
and  correspondingly  receive  impressions  of  that  which  shall  be.  It 
begets  energy  and  power,  and  unfolds  wisdom  and  beauty.  It 
breathes  the  spirit  of  goodness  and  benevolence,  universal  justice 
and  reciprocation.  It  generates  a dignified  forbearance,  unfolds  a 
pure  and  reverential  regard  for  all  eternal  truths,  and  establishes  and 
constitutes  a well-organized  mind.  Such  are  the  endowments  cre- 
ated by  that  knowledge  which  is  obtained  by  an  investigation  of  the 
composition  and  developments  of  Nature. 

Therefore  true  knowledge  consists  in  a true  conception  of  the  stu- 
pendous operations  of  the  immortal  principles  originating  in  the 
Fountain  of  the  Omnipotent  Mind  ! 

We  have  now  ascended  to  the  highest  geological  formation  of  the 

D DO 

earth,  all  the  deposites  of  which  have  been  wTell  comprehended  and 
classified.  It  is  only  proper  to  remark  that  the  conditions  existing 
previously  to,  and  during  the  time  of,  the  alluvial  deposites,  were 


296 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


essentially  different  from  those  now  existing;  though  particular  and 
incidental  formations  have  since  occurred,  which  have  been  properly 
termed  “ superficial .”  These  resulted  from  the  depositions  of  the 

detritus,  and  various  solutions  that  were  pervading  the  watery  ele- 
ment. 

The  formations  of  coral-reefs,  as  the  ingenious  work  of  the  infu- 
soria and  polyparia,  have  continued  to  the  present  era  — these  now 
presenting  more  neatness  of  texture,  and  a more  perfect  composition, 
than  before.  And  all  other  formations  which  have  since  been  inci- 
dentally accomplished  are  correspondingly  refined. 

In  the  foregoing  history  of  the  earth’s  crust,  I have  acceded  gener- 
ally to  the  classifications  made  by  geologists,  but  have  varied  in  some 


and  external  elements  as  occurring  at  the  termination  of  the  different 
periods. 

§ 60.  The  condition  of  the  earth  at  the  period  now  under  exami- 
nation is  again  very  different  from  what  it  was  at  any  previous  period. 
The  vicissitudes  of  the  seasons  were  numerous  and  extreme,  ren- 
dered so  by  the  influence  of  the  lines  of  variation  and  no  variation 
upon  the  fluid  and  ethereal  elements. 

Up  to  the  commencement  of  the  alluvial  deposites,  these  excessive 
floods  or  inundations,  caused  by  the  dissolving  of  the  mountains  of 
ice,  continued  to  be  the  same  : but  at  the  commencement  of  the  pres- 
ent day,  these  mountains  were  very  much  decreased  in  size,  and  their 
location  was  completely  changed.  It  is  well  to  remark  that  many 
centuries  elapsed  between  the  establishment  of  the  first  and  present 
conditions  both  in  reference  to  the  icy  formations  and  the  general 
aspect  of  the  whole  earth.  The  water  was  different  only  in  its  com- 
bination, the  change  in  this  element  being  the  result  of  an  ascension 
of  its  ultimate  particles.  Hence  the  weight  of  the  whole  Mass  was 
decreased.  The  atmosphere  had  given  a great  portion  of  its  carbon 
to  the  formations  of  the  earth,  which  resulted  in  the  perfect  develop- 
ment of  oxygen  and  nitrogen,  the  relative  proportions  of  these  being 
nearly  the  same  as  at  present. 

It  is  well  here  to  notice  that  the  particles  of  atmosphere  that  are 
found  in  the  envelope  of  the  earth  as  it  now  is,  are  atoms  which  have 
ascended  from  lower  conditions.  And  the  condition  of  every  earthy 
formation  is  represented  in  the  atmospheric  formation  : and  it  will  be 
observed  that  each  of  the  earthy  strata  has  an  ethereal  or  atmospheric 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


297 


stratum  which  is  in  direct  correspondence  thereunto.  And  the  atmo- 
sphere is  composed  of  as  many  strata,  both  as  to  its  general  divisions 
and  its  subdivisions,  as  are  found  in  the  earth’s  crust.  It  is  evident 
from  this  that  from  the  first  condensation  of  the  granite  coating,  up  to 
the  period  when  a new  substance  was  produced,  the  water  and  at- 
mosphere must  have  been  correspondingly  dense  and  gross  in  their 
composition.  And  the  formation  of  every  new  stratum,  which  con- 
sisted of  the  ascending  particles  of  the  lower,  must  have  resulted  in  a 
corresponding  ascension  of  the  grosser  particles  of  the  atmosphere  as 
evolved  and  developed  from  the  interior  elements  of  the  earth. 

Thus  at  every  epoch  or  day  of  creation,, all  things  became  essen- 
tially changed,  and  adapted  to  the  requirements  of  the  creations  of 
that  day.  The  earth  and  atmosphere  unfolded  their  interior  quali- 
ties, and  new  laws,  energies,  and  circumstances,  were  the  results. 
And  in  proportion  to  the  perfection  of  these  conditions  and  previ- 
ously-undeveloped  principles,  were  the  vegetable  and  animal  crea- 
ations  made  perfect. 

So  at  the  present  era  of  the  earthy  and  atmospheric  developments, 
the  parity  between  the  two  remains  the  same.  The  superficial  for- 
mations which  have  occurred  during  the  historical  period  of  the  earth 
correspond  precisely  with  the  upper  stratum  of  the  atmosphere.  This 
is  light,  rare,  and  unsuited  for  the  association  of  other  substances, 
but  comprehends  and  unites  all  below  its  degree  of  refinement.  So 
the  first  particles  of  atmosphere  have  in  reality  the  qualities  unfolded 
in  the  higher  formations  : and  the  first  gyrate  through  all  intermediate 
conditions  to  the  highest,  and  the  highest  unites  the  lower  and  all  in- 
termediate strata,  and  thus  perfects  the  atmospheric  envelope  of  the 
earth.  This  can  not  be  demonstrated  by  sensuous  observation, 
but  it  can  by  chemical  analysis,  and  by  absolute  analogy:  for  each 
condition  in  the  creation  of  the  earth  was  subjected  to  perpetual 
change,  and  so  by  degrees  ascended  to  the  present  condition,  which 
is  the  ultimate  of  the  earthy  deposites,  and  consequently  the  present 
must  be  the  ultimate  of  the  atmospheric  composition. 

And  in  this  connexion  it  is  well  to  remark  that  many  species  of 
birds  and  saurians  and  other  kindred  species  now  existing,  although 
changed  in  form  and  organization,  occupy  the  same  strata  of  atmo- 
sphere that  their  lowest  types  originally  occupied  upon  the  earth’s  sur- 
face; and  on  principles  herein  involved,  the  extinction  of  many  gigan- 
tic animals  that  dwelt  in  the  water  and  upon  the  earth  during  the  sec- 
ondary formation  maybe  accounted  for.  For  it  is  evident  that  if  the 


29? 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


same  conditions  were  still  existing,  the  same  forms  would  also  have 
an  existence. 

Therefore  the  modifications  of  the  vegetable  and  animal  kingdoms 
correspond  to  those  of  the  earth  and  atmosphere.  The  whole,  there- 
fore, forms  a perfect  system  — a consociated  unity.  The  whole  con- 
stitutes an  active,  living,  energetic  Form  — a source  which  yields 
forth  the  most  minute  productions,  which  gyrate  to  the  most  compli- 
cated organizations,  and  to  the  individualization  of  the  interior  prin- 
ciple of  Man. 

The  earth  and  atmosphere  are  in  proper  relations  to  join  each 
other  and  produce  chemical  actions ; and  the  atmosphere  is  so  far 
perfected  as  to  join  to  the  element  of  electricity.  Therefore  this 
higher  circulates  through  all  the  lower  substances,  and  sympathizes 
with,  unites,  organizes,  decomposes,  and  recomposes,  the  vegetable, 
animal,  and  atmospheric  substances,  existing  upon  and  near  the  surface 
of  the  earth.  And  it  unites  all  particles  in  being  from  the  igneous 
composition  of  the  interior  of  the  earth  to  the  highest  element  of  the 
atmosphere. 

It  is  known  to  chemists  that  water  is  only  a condensation  of  the 
same  elements  that  compose  a great  part  of  the  atmosphere,  and  which 
would  in  reality  be  very  inflammable  but  that  their  combined  condi- 
tion makes  them  unsusceptible.  Thus  water  is  but  a lower  degree 
of  the  atmosphere,  and  the  earth  is  but  a lower  condition  of  the  water 
and  atmosphere  — and  the  whole  is  but  the  imperfection  of  that  of 
which  electricity  is  the  perfection. 

These  general  observations  are  intended  as  a guide  to  an  under- 
standing of  the  descriptions  of  what  follows  the  present  dawn  of  a 
new  era  ; and  from  these  remarks,  the  more  minute  productions  of 
the  mighty  and  stupendous  operations  of  Nature  may  be  properly 
conceived  of  and  comprehended.  For  this  is  the  period  of  the  birth 
of  more  important  organizations,  leading  to  more  important  results, 
than  the  developments  of  any  other  period  of  the  earth’s  existence. 
These  conditions  breathed  into  being  all  that  composes  the  whole 
creation  as  this  is  now  manifested.  And  the  importance  and  gran- 
deur of  the  forms  and  essences  that  were  developed  at  this  period 
are  such  as  are  not  conceived  of  or  comprehended  bv  the  most  en- 
larged understanding. 

And  it  is  by  conceiving  of  the  form,  that  we  know  of  order  ; and 
by  order,  degrees;  and  by  degrees,  correspondences.  And  from  the 
coating  — the  external,  visible  form  — the  quality  and  essence  may 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


299 


be  inferred.  For  it  is  by  the  essence  — the  interior  real  reality  — 
that  all  things  assume  forms,  orders,  and  degrees,  of  tangible  reality. 
And  inasmuch  as  this  is  a proposition  set  forth  and  established  in  the 
Key,  it  is  proper  that  it  should  be  applied  in  respect  to  all  things 
that  have  been  unfolded  to  the  understanding  since  the  new  course 
of  reasoning  was  adopted.  And  then  we  may  test  the  external  by 
the  inward  reality,  and  say  whether  it  was  not  by  the  inherent  and 
latent  qualities  of  the  original  igneous  Mass  that  the  earth  was  formed 
— and  whether  by  the  inconceivable  combinations  as  forming  the 
outer  coating,  the  water  and  atmosphere,  an  ascended  form  and  sub- 
stance, were  not  produced  from  the  samp  original  Mass  ; and  whether 
the  atmosphere  does  not  contain  the  undeveloped  properties  of  the 
imponderable  element  of  electricity. 

Let  the  mind,  then,  infer  the  interior  essence  and  quality  by  the 
external  and  visible  form  ; but  let  it  not  judge  entirely  by  the  sheath 
or  external  of  that  which  is  in  the  interior,  undeveloped.  But  it 
should  rest  upon  the  inward  conviction  received  both  in  reference 
to  the  external  and  internal  of  anything,  and  thus  the  judgment  would 
be  proper  and  righteous.  And  as  it  is  absolutely  demonstrated  that 
the  cause  of  all  effects  exists  anterior  to  them,  it  now  devolves  upon 
the  properly-conditioned  mind  to  judge  of  the  interior  by  the  exter- 
nal form.  For  it  is  evident  that  if  essence  did  not  exist,  form  could 
not  : and  if  form  exists,  essence  must  of  necessity  be  the  cause  of  its 
existence.  Essence  therefore  produces  form  by  an  association  of  its 
own  qualities  ; and  thus  all  conspicuous  forms  become  unfolded. 
Thus  it  is  the  germ,  which,  when  subjected  to  suitable  conditions, 
becomes  impregnated  by  its  own  latent  qualities,  and  unfolds  all  the 
forms  and  manifestations,  in  the  external  world. 

It  is  therefore  a property  of  the  embryo  to  develop  a form  corre- 
sponding to  its  own  real  reality.  And  it  is  as  impossible  for  the 
perfect  to  exist  before  the  imperfect,  as  it  is  for  the  highest  of  any 
form  to  be  developed  before  the  germ  has  passed  through  its  many 
intermediate  stages  of  unfolding,  by  each  of  which  a subsequent  one 
is  typified.  And  the  highest  form  which  results  from  its  original, 
essential  quality,  is  in  reality  but  the  highest  production  of  the  forces 
and  principles  originally  involved  in  the  germinating  essence.  So 
Cor  respondence,  at  least  as  relating  to  these  and  kindred  subjects, 
becomes  now  an  established  science,  the  truthfulness  of  which  is 
perceived  from  its  being  founded  upon  the  nature  of  things. 


soo 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


§ 61.  The  transition  of  mineral  and  organic  substances  to  the  first 
and  lowest  of  organic  forms,  is  more  generally  exemplified  in  the 
present  era  than  at  any  anterior  period.  The  first  classes  of  these 
forms  consist  of  the  lower  marine  and  land  plants  : for  the  earth  was 
clothed  at  this  time  with  a great  abundance  of  vegetation.  Some 
parts  ot  the  dry  land  were  better  suited  to  sustain  the  higher  vegeta- 
ble fo  rms  than  others,  and  these  gave  birth  to  the  higher  dicotiledons  ; 
while  other  portions  of  the  earth  produced  the  class  cryptogamia,  and 
forms  beneath  these  descending  to  the  lowest  lichen. 

All  the  classes  of  vegetation  that  were  generally  typified  in  the 
previous  period,  are  now  exemplified  and  fully 'developed.  Various 
species  of  the  exogenous  plants,  and  of  the  ferns,  palms,  and  other 
kindred  orders,  have,  at  various  periods  during  the  last  day  of  geo- 
logical formation,  become  entirely  extinct  — and  others  have  been 
more  fully  developed,  and  have  assumed  higher  forms,  being  modi- 
fied by  the  conditions  to  which  the  vegetation  was  subjected.  All 
of  the  various  grains  and  barleys,  even  to  the  lowest  species,  have 
become  generally  changed  from  their  previous  state,  and  rendered 
more  prolific  and  useful,  by  the  influence  which  cultivation  has  ex- 
erted over  their  germinal  properties. 

It  might  thereWre  be  stated  that  in  the  morning  of  the  present  era 
the  vegetable  productions  of  the  earth  were  very  different  from  what 
they  are  at  the  present  time,  inasmuch  as  change  of  localities,  condi- 
tions, and  circumstances,  have  unfolded  their  more  interior  essences, 
so  that  now  there  are  in  existence  over  two  hundred  species,  from 
the  lowest  to  the  highest  orders,  that  are  very  distinct  from  each  other. 

In  the  southern  and  eastern  parts  of  the  earth,  the  conditions  were 
more  favorable  for  the  unfolding  of  the  vegetable  productions  than 
they  were  at  any  other  portion  of  the  earth,  or  have  been  at  any  other 
period.  The  eastern  portions  were  indeed  exceedingly  fertile,  and 
yielded  forth  nearly  all  the  floral  developments  which  have  since 
come  into  being  in  other  portions  adapted  to  their  production. 

In  giving  a general  view  of  the  kingdom  which  stands  as  a con- 
necting link  between  the  inorganic  and  animal  kingdoms,  it  is  neces- 
sary to  speak  of  the  general  ascension  of  vegetable  forms  only  as 
such  ascension  has  a distinct  bearing  upon  the  corresponding  forms 
in  the  animal  creation.  And  as  each  of  these  forms  in  the  vegetable 
creation  becomes  adapted  to  the  wants  of  the  higher  and  more  per- 
fect organizations,  mention  will  be  made  of  them  ; and  so  the  ad- 
vanccment  and  requirements  of  each  species  may  be  properly  com- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


301 


prehended  by  understanding  their  mutual  relations  to,  and  dependence 
upon,  each  other. 

One  fact  is  generally  manifested  in  the  vegetable  developments 
of  the  whole  creation  — and  that  is,  their  ascension  from  the  endoge- 
nous as  the  first  and  lowest.  The  latter  are  forms  with  but  one  sur 
face,  receiving  the  external  particles  to  the  internal,  both  by  atmo 
spheric  influx  and  general  assimilation.  This  exemplifies  the  one 
surface  characterizing  the  first  stage  of  actual  vegetation,  and  answers 
to  the  first  animal  forms  which  only  possessed  a cellular  tissue,  cor- 
responding to  a mucous  membrane.  The  ultimate  of  this  class  of 
plants  unfolds  a new  and  distinct  coating,  and  thus  becomes  the 
highest  form  in  the  vegetable  kingdom.  This  is  the  exogenous,  or 
that  with  an  external  coating  — a chemical  relation  existing  between 
this  and  the  inner  coating  whereby  the  inner  essences  are  transferred 
to  the  external,  and  the  work  of  regeneration  is  performed.  This  is 
a coating  that  is  only  found  in  the  higher  orders  of  the  animal  crea- 
tion, and  is  especially  developed  in  the  most  perfect  of  the  mammif- 
erte.  This  is  the  surface  corresponding  to  the  vascular  tissue. 

It  is  to  be  remarked  that  the  developments  in  respect  to  these  sur- 
faces are  subject  to  many  subdivisions,  and  in  each  division  is  repre- 
sented a new  type,  and  apparently  a new  class  of  plants.  But  all 
intermediate  vegetable  forms  are  only  stages  in  the  metamorphosis 
from  the  primitive  to  the  subsequent  developments.  And  each  of 
these  forms  observes  the  same  law  that  governs  the  rudimental  form. 
Thus  the  earth  has  progressively  unfolded  and  modified  the  primi- 
tive forms,  and  has  perfectly  adapted  the  essence  and  qualities  of 
one  plant  to  the  requirements  of  others. 

The  most  simple  plants  contain  but  little  of  the  poisonous  quali- 
ties ; but  as  each  succeeding  generation  combines  new  qualities,  so 
do  the  essences  of  the  plant  become  complicated  and  poisonous. 
Then,  again,  as  the  seed-bearing  properties  are  developed,  these 
qualities  become  so  changed  that  the  plant  at  the  period  when  the 
flower  is  unfolded,  sends  forth  a most  congenial  fragrance.  So  from 
the  sweet,  the  sour  qualities  are  developed  ; and  from  the  essence- 
of  one  of  these  plants,  the  essences  of  higher  and  more  perfect  plants 
are  unfolded. 

Every  form  in  the  vegetable  creation  contains,  in  some  peculiar 
state  of  combination,  the  essences  found  in  the  mineral  substances, 
and  which  are  developed  in  the  animal  kingdom.  It  is  therefore  evi- 
dent from  the  same  law  of  association  that  the  lower  orders  of  the 


302 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


vegetable  creation,  in  becoming  further  developed,  unfold  essences 
and  qualities  that  are  contained  in  their  seed.  As  the  flower  is  the 
ultimate  and  perfection  of  the  interior  substances  of  the  plant,  it  is 
also  the  medium  through  which  these  substances  are  modified  so  as 
to  assume  successively-ascending  forms,  joining  in  one  unbroken 
chain  the  simple  and  rudimental  to  the  higher  and  more  perfect  types  : 
and  these  possess  suitable  qualities  to  join,  when  properly  developed, 
the  lowest  of  the  animal  creation. 

The  present  epoch  gave  birth  to  many  new  animal  forms.  The 
classifications  that  have  been  made  of  the  animal  kingdom  as  consist- 
ing of  the  radiata,  the .articulata,  the  mollusca,  and  the  vertebrata,  are 
comprehensive,  and  in  a general  sense  true;  and  the  relations  of  any 
existing  subordinate  divisions  can  easily  be  conceived  of  by  the  en- 
larged understanding. 

The  present  day  ushers  in  more  perfect  forms  in  the  living  king- 
doms than  any  previous  day  of  creation.  The  lower  orders  are  not 
more  complicated  or  perfect,  but  the  higher  are  much  more  so.  For 
we  have  now  presented  in  Nature  an  external  manifestation  of  its  in- 
terior qualities  ; and  by  observing  the  present  form,  order,  and  de- 
gree, of  creation,  we  see  the  most  perfect  reflection  of  the  undevel- 
oped qualities  contained  in  her  interior. 

§ G2.  It  is  proper  to  understand,  then,  that  the  order  of  creation 
now  presented  for  investigation  is  an  ultimate  and  full  development 
of  all  the  lower  forms  such  as  were  produced  in  Nature’s  previous 
days.  The  watery  element  therefore  contains  all  forms  of  the  fish 
and  reptile  classes  generally  corresponding  to  those  previously  exist- 
ing. Although  some  of  these  have  been  exceedingly  modified  ac- 
cording to  the  change  of  surrounding  elements  and  circumstances, 
the  chain  is  distinctly  preserved,  from  the  lowest  gelatinous  form  to 
the  highest  of  the  fish  and  reptile  productions.  These  also  join  the 
land-productions,  preserving  an  equally  close  relation.  From  the 
fish  flowed  the  various  reptiles-— which  joined  the  bird-creation  ; and 
these,  by' change  of  form  and  constitution  caused  only  by  the  usher- 
ing-in  of  a new  era  of  existence,  run  into  and  establish  the  marsupial 
mammifers.  And  thus  the  radiata,  articulata,  mollusca,  and  verte- 
brata, are  forms  and  constitutions  marking  the  various  stages  of  the 
unfolding  and  establishment  of  these  distinct  species. 

It  is  well  to  remark,  also,  that  all  forms  primitively  manifest  an 
imperfect  state  of  development,  but  that  they  subsequently  ascend 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


303 


and  unfold  the  perfection  of  the  species  to  which  they  belong  ; and 
that  the  male  of  the  higher  orders  of  animals  manifests  the  most 
perfect  degree  of  development.  And  it  is  known  by  physiolo- 
gists who  have  inquired  into  the  laws  of  embryology,  that  the  foetus 
passes  through  as  many  distinct  forms  as  there  are  eras  or  periods 
of  the  geological  and  living  developments  of  the  earth,  up  to  the  time 
the  same  species  became  an  existing  form  in  the  animal  kingdom. 
Conditions  are  changed  in  the  surrounding  encasement  of  the  embryo 
only  in  the  same  order  of  succession  as  they  are  changed  in  the  ex- 
ternal world.  And  so  the  highest  perfection  of  foetal  development 
is  characterized  by  the  nature  and  constitution  of  the  male  ; while  the 
unascended  or  slightly-arrested  utero-development  establishes  the  fe- 
male. This  law  is  observed,  both  in  the  vegetable  and  animal  pro- 
ductions. It  is  a slight  arrest  of  the  process  of  development  that 
determines  the  imperfect  form  of  the  plant  or  animal. 

The  pollen,  or  ultimate  particles  of  the  flower,  are  communicated 
by  the  surrounding  elements  to  other  plants  of  kindred  species,  and 
are  received  into  the  composition  of  the  latter  through  the  medium 
of  the  two  surfaces,  and  by  this  process  impregnation  occurs.  And 
thus  by  an  imperceptible  and  mutual  association  of  particles,  plants 
are  rendered  prolific.  And  as  this  occurs  only  in  the  higher  degrees 
of  vegetation,  the  analogous  process  occurs  only  in  the  higher  stages 
of  animal  development. 

The  same  law  of  reproduction  pervades  the  earthy,  the  mineral, 
the  vegetable,  and  the  animal  creations.  And  in  the  elements  sur- 
rounding the  earth  the  same  is  also  exemplified,  though  the  process 
has  been  differently"  termed  in  the  arbitrary"  and  conventional  language 
of  chemists.  But  it  is  in  reality  by  chemical  action  that  all  things, 
whether  in  the  earthy,  mineral,  or  organic  kingdoms,  pass  through 
their  various  stages  of  formation  and  reproduction. 

Thus  the  sixth  day"  of  creation  evidently'  manifests  a perpetual  as- 
cension of  all  previous  forms,  tyrpes,  degrees,  and  series,  of  each 
kingdom  which  existed  upon  the  earth  at  different  periods  during  the 
lapse  of  innumerable  ages.  It  is  evident  that  conditions  are  not 
changed  suddenly",  nor  even  impulsively" ; but  they  are  gradually"  and 
imperceptibly  modified,  so  that  finally  a striking  difference  is  manifest 
between  the  first  and  ultimate  conditions.  Therefore  we  see  no 
newly'-created  law,  but  merely  an  indistinct  diminution  of  some  spe- 
cies, and  a change  in  the  nature  and  constitution  of  some  others. 
Thus  the  bird-creation,  the  marsupial,  the  quadrumana,  and  even  all 


304 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


that  is  above  these,  including  man,  apparently  sustain  their  distinct 
characters  and  types  without  any  change. 

But  it  must  be  admitted  (for  it  can  be  absolutely  proved)  that  ani- 
mal forms  of  every  species  now  upon  the  face  of  the  earth  have  de- 
creased in  size,  strength,  and  beauty  — that  there  is  seemingly  a 
general  retrogression.  The  mammoth,  for  instance,  is  an  animal  of 
the  present  day  — and  the  elephant  is  only  a diminished  form  of  the 
same  species.  And  the  unicorn,  the  camel,  and  all  similar  forms, 
are  but  diminutions  of  larger  and  more  gigantic  animals  of  the  same 
species.  So  the  lion,  the  tiger,  the  hyena,  and  similar  species,  pos- 
sess constitutions  very  dissimilar  to  the  same  species  that  were  exist- 
ing in  the  early  periods  of  the  present  era.  So  the  congener,  the 
ostrich,  the  giraffe,  the  zebra,  the  leopard,  and  the  lower  aquatic 
species,  are  in  reality  very  much  diminished  in  size,  and  are  different 
in  anatomy,  constitution,  and  endowments,  from  the  previous  forms 
of  the  same  species.  So  the  quadrumana,  including  all  the  species 
of  the  monkey,  ape,  and  orang-outang,  ascending  to  the  degree  of 
development  in  which  the  negro  anatomy  and  constitution  are  typi- 
fied, have  degenerated  absolutely  in  all  their  natures,  qualities,  habits, 
and  characters,  from  those  existing  during  the  early  dawn  of  the 
present  era.  So  likewise  from  the  anatomy  of  the  lower  order  of 
mankind  up  to  the  highest  degree  of  human  anatomy  and  constitution, 
there  has  been  a declination  — a lessening  of  form,  and  deterioration 
of  the  constitution,  rendering  the  whole  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth 
comparatively  weak  and  diminutive. 

This  indicates  and  absolutely  proves  the  approach  of  evening.  It 
demonstrates  the  comparative  exhaustion  of  previous  energies,  and 
presents  a world  of  disunited  and  disorganized  forms,  that  will  ulti- 
mately sink  into  repose,  and  give  place  to  the  more  perfect  develop- 
ments of  a new  day. 

I have  been  impressed  deeply  concerning  this  comparative  retro- 
gression : but  inasmuch  as  these  remarks  are  merely  incidental  to  an 
introduction  to  a full  and  general  description  of  the  productions  of 
the  present  era,  it  is  not  now  necessary  to  pursue  them  further.  • 

But  it  is  to  be  deeply  impressed  upon  the  minds  of  all  researchers 
that  there  is  in  Nature  a universal  Law  of  development,  of  reproduc- 
tion, and  of  progression  — and  that  this  law  has  been  established  by 
virtue  of  divine  Beginnings , or  Principles , of  which  more  will  here- 
after be  revealed.  And  let  it  be  further  impressed,  as  introductory 
to  the  present  analyzation  and  generalization  of  Nature  and  her  laws 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


305 


and  their  effects,  that  every  form  in  being  is  governed  by  its  corre 
sponding  interior  principle,  and  is  rendered  perfect  or  imperfect  ac- 
cording to  the  peculiar  association  of  its  inherent  essences  and  quali- 
ties. Such  are  the  laws  governing  the  material  world  which  is  com- 
posed of  forms  : and  the  forms  therein  contained  are  the  consequent 
and  inevitable  productions  of  their  more  interior  and  perfected 
qualities. 

Thus  let  the  philosophic  mind  observe  Nature  as  a reflection  of  her 
interior  principles,  but  let  not  the  reflection  — the  external  — be  con- 
sidered as  the  reality.  And  let  it  be  impressed  that  all  interior  es- 
sences tend  to  clothe  themselves  in  external  forms,  and  that  thus 
internal  and  external,  which  again  are  composed  of  innumerable 
parts,  compose  a perfect  Whole  — and  that  the  whole  thus  repre- 
sents some  higher  degrees  and  more  perfect  forms,  not  yet  compre- 
hended. 

Viewed  in  this  light,  Nature  demonstrates  her  own  principles, 
qualities,  and  interior  essences  ; and  that  demonstration,  too,  is  con- 
veyed by  a knowledge  of  interior  and  real  producing  causes, 

I am  impressed  by  this  knowledge  of  Nature  not  to  accede  to  the 
external  scientifics  of  the  world,  seeing  that  Nature. should  reveal  her  : 
own  interior  truths,  and  that  these  are  represented  in  every  motion, 
form  of  life,  and  development  of  sensation.  And  these  should  be 
the  external  indices  of  the  interior  reality.  I therefore  endeavor, 
from  the  impressions  thus  received,  to  convey  knowledge  to  others 
through  their  external  senses  by  using  the  various  knowledges  of  the 
world  as  instruments,  whereby  the  foundation  — the  real  reality  — the 
only  producing  cause,  of  all  external  effects,  may  be  apprehended. 
And  as  interior  cause  and  external  effect  are  manifested  in  all  Nature, 
it  is  no  more  than  proper  and  useful  to  prove  one  by  the  inseparable 
relation  which  it  sustains  to  the  other. 

By  these  observations  as  illustrating  general  and  universal  laws, 
the  minds  that  are  in  a proper  condition  will  be  enabled  to  receive 
the  interior  truths  herein  presented,  and  to  appreciate  their  grandeur 
and  magnificence  : and  therefore  these  remarks  become  generally 
useful. 


§ 63.  Having  established  and  made  plain  the  universal  law  that 
unfolds  and  controls  the  vegetable  and  animal  developments,  I now 
proceed,  by  a brief  mode  of  generalization,  to  describe  the  orders 
and  degrees  of  the  vegetation  existing  from  the  commencement  of 

20 


306 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


the  present  day  up  to  the  historical  era,  or  the  time  at  which  the  oo 
servations  of  mankind  commenced. 

The  earth  abounded  with  gigantic  trees,  such  as  were  larger  than 
any  now  upon  its  surface.  The  general  classes  of  these  ranged  from 
the  first  and  lowest  coniferas  to  the  highest  oak,  maple,  and  palm. 
The  eastern  part  of  the  earth  gave  birth  to  these  more  perfect  forms  ; 
but  generally  the  vegetation  of  the  whole  earth  was  heavy  and  imper- 
fect. There  were  none  of  the  higher  and  more  perfect  forms,  until 
the  succeeding  ages  unfolded  conditions  for  their  development.  I 
am  impressed  that  the  earth  yielded  these  huge  and  imperfect  de- 
grees of  vegetation  for  several  successive  centuries  before  they  be- 
came distinctly  modified  into  the  types  of  the  present  period.  Yet 
these  productions  indistinctly  typified  those  that  are  now  existing. 
And  huge  and  undeveloped  vegetation  must  of  necessity  have  been 
the  first  upon  the  earth,  as  corresponding  to  all  the  inorganic  and  in- 
animate bodies.  And  as  tbe  vegetation  becomes  more  perfect,  and 
its  forms  and  qualities  become  more  unfolded,  so  also  do  grosser, 
inorganic  bodies,  ascend  to  higher  degrees  of  exaltation. 

The  pine,  in  the  form  of  an  exogenous  plant,  existed  at  the  com- 
mencement of  the  present  era  ; and  this  at  subsequent  periods  as- 
sumed the  form  of  a more  perfect  pine,  with  its  modifications  of 
cedar,  hemlock,  spruce,  dogwood,  and  mountain  rock-oak.  These 
are  at  the  present  day  the  highest  and  permanent  types  of  the  lower 
and  huge  developments  of  the  first  ages  of  the  present  era. 

The  oak  was  then  scarcely  visible  ; for  it  appeared  more  like  the 
species  of  trees  known  as  the  boxwood,  and  species  between  it  and 
the  pine,  such  as  the  bass  and  others  of  like  nature.  But  the  oaks 
of  the  eastern  lands  were  exceedingly  unlike  those  of  any  other  por- 
tion. These  only  became  distinguished  as  the  black,  white,  and  red 
oaks,  as  the  climate  and  conditions  changed,  which  was  the  imper- 
ceptible. work  of  many  ages.  The  maple  also  is  a modification  of 
the  oak  : and  this  assumed  its  character  about  eight  hundred  years 
after  the  red  oaks  became  established.  These  pass  gradually  into 
the  higher  forms  of  the  same  class,  such  as  the  birch,  the  chestnut, 
the  butternut,  the  hickory,  the  sassafras  — and  into  the  simpler  trees, 
such  as  the  ferns  and  palms.  And  it  w’as  nearly  nineteen  hundred 
years  after  the  development  of  the  birch  and  its  associated  vegetation, 
that  the  ferns  and  palms  became  perfected  as  they  now  are.  Such 
were  among  the  vegetable  forms  of  the  eastern  lands. 

One  third  of  Asia,  which  joins  nearly  to  the  line  of  the  Himalaya!) 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


307 


mountains,  and  runs  in  a westerly  direction  to  the  Euphrates  (which 
then  did  not  exist),  and  extends  correspondingly  through  into  Africa, 
following  the  same  geological  formations,  produced  forms  of  the  vege- 
table kingdom  more  numerous  and  more  developed  than  existed  in 
any  other  portion  of  the  earth,  or  at  any  other  period  of  time.  The 
southern  portions  of  the  western  continent  also  were  very  fertile,  and 
yielded  forth  many  perfect  forms,  especially  about  the  portions  that 
are  now  known  as  Central  America,  and  near  and  about  the  vicinity 
of  Yucatan.  Many  portions  of  land  have  since  become  dry,  that 
were  then  completely  concealed  by  the  watery  element.  But  such 
portions  as  were  in  a condition  suitable  for  the  unfolding  of  vegeta- 
tion, gave  birth  to  the  general  classes  that  are  yet  existing  as  estab- 
lished types  upon  the  dry  land  of  the  earth. 

Many  ages  after  this,  the  grasses  and  grains,  such  as  the  clover, 
the  maize,  the  rye,  the  oats,  the  wheat,  the  barley,  and  the  rice,  be- 
came also  unfolded  upon  the  properly-adapted  and  most  fertile  por- 
tions of  the  earth.  These  were  also  in  a very  low  degree  of  de- 
formity and  imperfection,  insomuch  that  their  representatives  of  the 
present  period  would  appear  like  an  entire  new  creation.  For  these 
have  been  rendered  perfect  by  surrounding  and  superior  conditions, 
and  through  the  agency  and  efforts  of  intelligent  civilization  and  cul- 
tivation, assisted  imperceptibly  by  an  unfolding  of  the  internal  ele- 
ments of  Nature. 

From  these,  again  we  have  the  lower  forms  of  the  flowering  or 
radiating  class  of  the  vegetable  kingdom.  I say  radiating , because 
these  correspond  more  nearly  to  the  radiata  than  any  other  forms 
in  the  vegetable  creation — having  flowers  which  unfold  from  an  in- 
ferior  petal,  and  radiate  circumferently  from  the  axis  of  their  form. 
They  develop  therefore  a radiating  disk  — a perfect  flower  being  un- 
folded to  the  receptance  of  light  and  heat  from  the  surrounding  ele- 
ments. And  of  these  we  have  more  than  two  hundred  and  seventy 
species  at  the  present  period  : but  these  arranged  in  general  order, 
would  not  present  more  than  three  distinct  orders  or  series  of  devel- 
opment. 

It  is  to  be  remarked  that  many  trees  that  were  upon  the  face  of 
the  earth  in  previous  ages  of  the  present  day,  were  of  this  class  of 
the  flowering  forms.  And  one  class,  especially,  was  over  one  cen- 
tury and  a half  in  performing  one  revolution,  or  one  period  of  bloom- 
ing. And  the  only  representative  which  we  have  of  this  at  the 
present  period  is  the  one  known  as  the  “ century-ylant”  — which 


30S 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


accomplishes  its  revolution  in  a much  less  amount  of  time.  And 
from  this  there  is  a general  gradation,  down  to  the  fertile  vine  which 
(dooms  every  twenty-four  hours. 

The  general  characteristics  of  the  vegetable  kingdom  have  become 
exceedingly  modified  from  those  of  the  previous  ages.  But  it  would 
be  impossible,  in  our  descriptions,  to  enter  into  the  minutiae  of  this 
imperceptible  transition  ; for  there  would  be  no  means  of  demonstra- 
tion to  the  general  mind,  inasmuch  as  man  is  as  fleeting  in  compari- 
son to  the  duration  of  these  forms  as  the  ephemeron  is  to  the  duration 
of  man’s  form  upon  the  earth.  Man  thus  observing  the  unchange- 
ableness of  tbe  vegetable  kingdom  during  the  whole  of  his  life’s  pe- 
riod, arrives  at  the  conclusion  that  there  is  not  and  can  not  be  any 
change  in  the  established  orders  and  species  of  vegetation.  And  so 
generation  after  generation  passes  away,  and  the  vegetable  species 
still  apparently  remain  unchanged.  And  as  the  historical  and  tradi- 
tional accounts  of  the  earth  and  its  living  forms  present  no  evidence 
of  their  actual  modification,  so  the  ephemeron,  observing  man  in  its 
youthful  period,  and  finally  in  its  age  and  decline,  would  discover  no 
visible  changes.  And  generations  of  this  would  pass  away,  and 
would  leave  no  account  of,  nor  perceive,  any  visible  change  in  the 
peculiar  organization  of  man.  Therefore  they  would  adopt  the  con- 
clusion that  the  form  of  man  was  entirely  unchangeable. 

It  is  seen  by  this  exact  correspondence  that  sensuous  observation 
is  not  altogether  the  correct  process  of  seeking  for  truth.  For  the 
conclusion  of  the  philosopher  is  as  erroneous  as  the  conclusion  of 
the  fleeting  insect;  and  it  is  for  want  of  a knowledge  of  the  actual 
duration  of  the  forms,  that  they  have  failed  to  discover  the  truth  of 
the  perpetual  modification  of  the  more  sluggish  and  gross  substances 
and  forms  upon  the  face  of  Nature. 

§ 64.  The  vegetable  creations  have  perpetuated  their  orders,  de- 
grees, and  qualities,  from  the  commencement  of  the  present  era,  to 
the  present,  time  ; and  a classification  of  these,  different  from  and  more 
definite  than  the  one  received,  would  be  unnecessary.  And  a dili- 
gent investigation  and  analyzation  which  may  be  prosecuted  by  the 
energies  of  intelligence,  would  demonstrate  satisfactorily  the  account 
thus  given  of  tbe  earth’s  vegetable  development*. 

It  is  well,  however,  to  notice  the  exact  correspondence  existing 
between  the  mineral  and  vegetable  formations.  The  grosser  metals 
represent  the  huge  and  gigantic  trees  of  the  previous  ages.  And  as 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


309 


these  mineral  bodies  gradually  ascend  to  higher  and  more  perfect 
degrees  of  refinement,  so  on  the  same  principle  do  also  the  vegetable 
developments.  And  in  the  highest  degree  of  mineral  composition, 
we  observe  a parity  and  connexion  with  the  more  highly-perfected 
forms  of  vegetation.  And  as  it  is  impossible  for  bodies  to  be  entirely 
immoveable,  however  gross  and  imperfect  they  may  be,  so  it  is 
equally  impossible  for  the  lowest  and  grossest  forms  in  the  vegetable 
kingdom  to  remain  unmoved,  and  for  ever  in  an  undeveloped  state. 
And  as  the  earthy  formations  correspond  in  all  ages,  in  degrees  of 
refinement  and  perfection,  to  the  mineral  kingdom,  so  does  the  min- 
eral to  the  vegetable  kingdom.  And  these  three,  when  joined  to- 
gether, form  a perfect  unity  — a universe  of  vegetable  stomachs  to 
digest  higher  and  more  perfect  substances- — even  to  conjoin  their 
highest  natures  to  the  first  sensitive,  animal  organizations. 

The  earth,  when  comprehended  as  an  entire  whole,  is  a stomach  — 
an  organ  of  imperceptible  but  ceaseless  digestion  — of  which  the  min- 
eral substances  constitute  the  ultimate  and  excrement.  Thus  the 
gross  and  the  refined  are  the  result  of  a united  and  concerted  dwes- 
tion  performed  by  an  earthy  organization.  And  thus  the  minerals 
are  the  polygastric  bodies  by  which  the  vegetable  kingdom  receives 
existence  and  life.  And  the  vegetable  kingdom  is  a universe  of 
polygastric  parts,  by  which  a higher  creation  is  breathed  into  being. 

This  classification,  which  only  presents  a general  view,  from  the 
lower  productions  to  the  vegetable  formations  of  the  earth,  needs  not 
to  be  further  amplified  until  we  observe  the  higher  orders  of  Nature’s 
developments,  as  these  constitute  mainly  the  objects  of  the  present 
inquiry.  And  as  I progress  in  the  successive  revealment  of  these 
higher  forms,  the  science  of  correspondences,  which  was  partially  set 
forth  in  the  Key,  will  be  established  and  applied  — so  that  the  hu- 
man mind  can  receive  a clear  conception  of  the  uniformity  and  har- 
mony of  Nature’s  laws  and  productions.  And  it  will  be  a light 
never  yet  unfolded  to  the  world,  especially  when  it  exhibits  to  view 
Nature’s  interior  beauties  and  her  Productor’s  perfections.  And  in- 
asmuch as  knowledge,  and  truth,  and  beauty,  and  spirit,  and  heaven, 
all  mutually  correspond  to  each  other,  so  do  these  form  a perfect  and 
united  system,  to  which  the  truly-developed  mind  will  be  attract- 
ed by  interior  affection  and  love.  And  so  perfectly  will  all  these 
be  radiated  from  the  countenance  of  Nature,  that  the  mind  of  man 
can  not  but  thirst  after  an  association  with  her  interior.  Inasmuch  as 
the  whole  is  a Form  composed  of  an  infinite  number  of  forms,  so  are 


310 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


her  multifarious  and  stupendous  operations  the  infinite  exemplifica- 
tion of  her  interior  qualities  and  principles.  And  these  will  be  more 
distinctly  observed  as  we  ascend  in  the  scale  of  organic  development, 
observing  at  the  same  time  the  anatomic  and  physiological  truths  ac- 
cumulated by  the  unceasing  efforts  of  some  good  minds,  so  that  we 
may  not  lose  sight  of  our  external  or  sensuous  knowledge  while 
exploring  the  sublime  recesses  of  Nature’s  interior. 

By  these  universally-comprehensive  correspondences  is  demon- 
strated the  inseparable  unity  of  all  the  multifarious  departments  of 
Nature’s  productions.  And  I now  proceed  to  consider  a higher  de- 
gree in  the  order  of  forms  — not  with  the  intention  of  establishing  a 
speculative  hypothesis,  but  to  indicate  one  of  the  waves  of  develop- 
ment receding  from  the  interior  Fountain  of  all  life  and  activity.  In 
this  way  the  mind  is  wafted  onward  under  the  guidance  of  immortal 
Truth. 

The  first  animal  forms  of  the  present  day  are  the  simplest,  like 
those  of  the  previous  periods.  And  these  have  been  classified  into 
various  species,  the  whole  forming  one  group  or  order;  and  these  are 
similar  to  the  types  of  the  radiata,  articulate,  and  mollusca,  in  the 
lower  stages  of  creation,  such  as  the  infusoria,  p'olyparia,  Crustacea, 
conehiferae,  and  cephalopoda.  These  were  then,  and  still  are,  in 
being.  There  are  various  species  of  these  orders  that  have  been  mod- 
ified by  the  conditions  of  subsequent  periods  of  the  present  era. 
Those  of  the  lowest  order  possess  a form  which  radiates  in  a manner 
corresponding  to  that  of  the  flower,  having  a cellular  tissue,  and  a 
sensitive  substance  for  its  external  parts.  It  is  therefore  classed 
among  the  radiuta. 

The  articulata  is  a more  complicated  form  having  several  joints 
and  a heavier  tissue,  its  various  parts  performing  reciprocal  motions. 
This  is  the  class  of  the  animal  creation  whose  species  rise  from  the 
first  order  to  the  molluscs,  including  all  the  various  anelidans  and 
piceo-saurians — these,  however,  being  the  highest  types. 

The  eastern  and  tropical  parts  of  the  world  abounded  exceedingly 
with  these  forms.  And  contemporary  with  these  were  all  the  higher 
orders,  such  as  the  fish,  bird,  turtle,  rodentia,  ruminantia,  plantigrade, 
and  digiligrade,  and  the  inferior  orders  of  the  marsupialia  and  quadru- 
mana.  These  abounded  in  various  parts  of  the  east,  and  particularly 
in  Asia  and  Africa,  and  extended  toward  the  northern  regions  — 
with  the  exception  of  the  birds  and  turtles,  which,  with  other  similar 
species,  existed  more  in  the  tropical  portions. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


311 


There  were  many  huge  animals  upon  the  face  of  the  earth,  such 
as  the  mammoth,  and  kindred  species  : but  each  became  less  in  size 
and  more  refined  in  organization,  as  one  order  succeeded  the  other. 
There  were  also,  in  the  country  now  known  as  Arabia,  many  large 
herds  of  these  animals;  also  in  the  portion  now  known  as  Greenland, 
which  was  then  warm  and  fertile. 

There  were  many  animals  upon  the  earth  of  the  saurian  order,  and 
these  were  of  a very  repulsive  and  disgusting  nature  and  habit. 
Some  of  these  were  very  deeply  red,  and  very  poisonous.  These 
inhabited  alike  the  sea  and  land  : but  they  only  remained  upon  the 
earth  about  three  hundred  and  eighty  years  of  the  present  day,  being 
destroyed  by  a new  association  of  elements  which  were  as  destruc- 
tive to  them  as  they  were  adapted  to  the  requirements  and  uses  of 
higher  forms. 

The  mammoth  and  kindred  forms  did  not  remain  upon  the  earth 
after  the  first  two  thousand  years.  These  gradually  decreased  in 
number,  and  finally  the  whole  order  became  nearly  extinct,  a few 
only  remaining,  the  fossils  of  some  of  which  are  found  in  caves  and 
icebergs. 

There  was  a kind  of  animal  nearly  representing  the  elephant  in 
form  and  disposition,  but  which  was  very  much  larger,  and  formed  a 
link  between  the  mammoth  and  the  elephant.  A species  of  this  has 
been  discovered,  which  has  been  termed  the  mastodon.  These  ex- 
isted about  two  thousand  five  hundred  years,  and,  like  the  others, 
finally  became  extinct. 

§ 65.  I am  impressed  with  the  reason  why  these  higher  gigantic 
animals  passed  at  successive  periods  from  the  face  of  the  earth. 
They  were  many  ages  in  being,  especially  before  they  arrived  at  their 
higher  degree  of  formation  and  became  an  established  order  of  ani- 
mals. And  in  the  early  periods  of  the  sixth  day,  after  theyliad  ar- 
rived at  this  state,  they  migrated  to  various  parts  of  the  earth,  and  ■ 
thus  at  times  became  entirely  separated  from  each  other.  Repro- 
duction thus  became  limited,  and  finally  entirely  ceased.  And  so 
one  after  another  died,  and  the  order  became  extinct. 

I am  impressed  that  many  species  not  known  to  naturalists,  both 
of  this  and  other  orders,  were  also  existing  upon  the  earth,  and  like- 
wise became  extinct. 

The  opinion  which  has  been  nearly  universally  received  concerning 
the  destruction  of  these  lower  animals  is  altogether  unwarrantable  and 


312 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


unfounded.  These  were  not  swept  from  the  face  of  the  earth  by  any 
catastrophic  occurrence,  nor  by  any  circumstances  which  some  misin- 
terpretations of  the  primitive  history  have  led  the  minds  of  the  world 
to  suppose  existed.  But  the  cessation  of  their  existence  occurred 
from  the  causes  before  explained;  and  no  other  cause  can  be  demon- 
strated to  have  produced  this  effect. 

Therefore  the  lladiata,  Articulata,  Mollusca,  and  Vertebrata,  ex- 
isted, as  geologists  have  determined,  upon  the  earth  at  the  commence- 
ment of  the  present  era.  These  are  in  reality  the  four  great  classes 
in  the  animal  kingdom  — though  the  radiata  and  mollusca  might  be 
blended  together  as  forming  one,  which  might  be  termed  the  mollusco- 
radiata.  This  would  reduce  the  animal  kingdom  to  three  general 
classes,  which  would  constitute  a perfect  unity. 

Many  ages  elapsed  before  the  elephant  and  kindred  animals  as- 
sumed their  present  degree  and  form  of  organization.  They  were 
formerly  very  much  larger,  but  not  essentially  different  in  their  men- 
ml  constitutions.  One  species  after  another  of  these  also  passed 
from  the  earth,  and  gave  room  to  new  and  kindred  forms,  before 
they  assumed  anything  near  the  form  and  character  that  they  now 
possess. 

There  are  many  caves  now  in  the  eastern  and  southern  parts  of 
the  world  which  contain  the  remains  of  many  of  these  forms  of  which 
I speak.  The  mastodon  has  been  discovered  standing  in  an  erect  po- 
sition in  the  mouth  of  a cave  ; for  it  was  the  nature  of  this  and  other 
animals  to  conceal  themselves  in  such  places  when  they  were  becom- 
ing rather  diminished  in  numbers. 

There  was  a certain  condition  of  the  sea  at  one  period  in  which, 
by  a strange  and  peculiar  chemical  process,  substances  were  united 
together  and  ultimately  became  condensed,  and  were  thrown  by  the 
waves  uj>on  the  shores.  Such  substances  are  now  termed  amber. 
These  contain  many  minute  insects,  being  transparent  and  beautifully 
crystallized.  These  existed  upon  the  earth  at  one  time  in  great 
abundance.  Some  portions  of  dry  beach  land  were  entirely  covered 
with  these  crystallized  substances,  and  presented  a beautiful,  pearly- 
white  appearance.  They  gave  birth  to  no  vegetable  forms.  These 
amber  forms  remained  the  same  for  many  ages,  and  some  are  still  in 
being. 

About  this  time  there  were  various  animal  species  of  the  order 
quadrumana.  These  admit  of  various  subdivisions,  the  higher  being 
near  the  most  perfect  orang-outang  of  the  present  day.  The  in di- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


313 


viduals  of  the  whole  order  were  very  much  larger  than  any  similar 
forms  now  existing,  their  stature  even  exceeding  that  of  man.  These 
were  very  fond  of  the  water,  though  they  were  in  nature  equally 
adapted  to  the  land.  It  was  not  many  ages  before  these  nearly  all 
became  extinct;  and  it  is  remarkable  that  almost  every  one  of  these 
died  in  the  watery  element,  and  thus  deposited  its  fossils  on  the  bot- 
tom of  the  sea. 

There  were  but  very  few  types  which  represented  the  lion,  tiger, 
wolf,  and  bear,  these  being  a much  later  creation.  Some  of  the  sau- 
rian and  other  lower  tribes  of  the  eastern  countries  possessed  very 
much  of  their  dispositions,  but  they  did  not  in  the  least  present  a 
true  type  of  these  higher  forms.  The  various  animals  of  the  roden- 
tia  nature  dwelt  mostly  on  the  southern  islands,  and  where  the  fruit 
upon  which  they  subsisted  was  most  abundant. 

I am  impressed  with  many  and  various  changes  that  occurred  in 
the  two  kingdoms  in  the  beginning  of  the  present  era  — more  even 
than  geologists  have  conceived  of  in  considering  all  the  previous  days 
of  creation.  Many  distinct  orders  of  animals  dwelt  upon  the  face 
of  the  earth,  and  passed  quietly  away  without  even  leaving  a vestige 
of  their  existence  behind.  Each  of  these  became  extinct  because  of 
changes  in  surrounding  conditions,  which  also  were  the  immediate 
causes  of  their  frequent  migrations  from  each  other  to  various  parts 
of  the  earth. 

To  the  superficial  observer  there  would  have  been  a confusion  in 
creation  because  of  the  dissimilarity  of  forms,  natures,  dispositions, 
habits,  and  various  other  peculiarities,  which  characterized  the  ani- 
mal creation  in  the  early  periods  of  the  sixth  day.  Some  were  en- 
tirely herbivorous,  and  others  entirely  carnivorous  ; and  each  one 
pursued  its  own  peculiar  inclinations:  and  a world  of  huge,  gigantic 
animal  forms  was  presented,  devouring  each  other  and  the  vegetable 
productions. 

The  ruminating  animals  were  at  first  not  very  abundant ; but  they 
became  more  so  about  the  fourth  period,  which  was  about  the  third 
thousand  years.  Those  that  were  upon  the  earth  existed  mainly  in 
Switzerland,  but  extended  through  all  the  European  countries.  They 
did  not  form  a type  identical  in  any  particular  with  the  forms  of  the 
present  day. 

Thus  all  the  lower  and  first  animal  productions  were,  like  the  first 
of  the  vegetables,  huge,  gigantic,  and  undeveloped  — corresponding 
to  the  density  and  imperfect  state  of  the  water  and  air  which  then 


314 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


surrounded  the  earth.  These  species  were  so  numerous,  that  it 
would  he  impossible  to  reduce  them  to  any  definite  arrangement 
whereby  they  could  be  properly  comprehended.  For  there  are  none 
now  existing  that  bear  their  likenesses,  and  none  that  may  be  com- 
pared with  their  external  form.  Furthermore,  a definite  knowledge 
of  these  would  not  be  of  much  importance  to  the  world,  and  its  ap- 
plication would  be  of  no  benefit,  either  in  satisfying  the  requirements 
of  the  scientific  world,  or  assisting  the  minds  of  those  who  are  en- 
deavoring to  understand  the  more  perfect  interior  principles. 

§ 66.  I come  now  to  a stage  of  creation  in  which  the  lower  types 
of  Mankind  are  distinctly  exemplified.  And  of  these  I am  impressed 
to  speak  particularly,  and  to  trace  them  connectedly  and  with  rather 
more  minuteness  than  the  other  degrees  of  creation  have  been  traced. 
And  this  will  be  done  in  order  to  impress  the  understanding  with  the 
important  truth  displayed  in  the  first  ascension  of  interior  principles 
to  the  individualization  of  the  inner  man. 

Harmony  of  anatomical  structures  and  similarity  of  compositions 
are  principles  largely  pervading  the  animated  kingdoms.  It  has 
been  a subject  of  much  discussion  among  the  minds  of  the  world, 
whether  there  is  any  established  law  by  which  forms  are  recreated  by 
the  successive  modifications  of  the  original  form — and  whether,  by 
the  same  process,  the  species  reproduced  by  all  the  living  kingdoms 
become  modified  at  each  period,  according  to  prevailing  conditions. 
But  the  basis  of  reasoning  which  has  been  assumed  in  relation  to 
this  point  has  not  been  correct,  and  researchers  have  not  been  gen- 
erally fortunate  in  the  conclusions  which  they  have  deduced  from  the 
visible  appearances  of  Nature  at  the  present  day. 

Before  speaking  of  the  type  of  anatomy  that  exemplifies  partially 
the  form  of  man,  it  is  well  to  remark  that  Nature  is  like  the  human 
brain  — and  is  incessantly  producing  forms , as  the  brain  is  thoughts. 
And  each  form  and  peculiar  organization  in  Nature  is  determined  by 
the  existing,  controlling  circumstances,  which  were  the  cause  of  such 
form’s  creation.  It  is  therefore  impossible  for  any  order  of  animals 
to  remain  for  many  periods  the  same  as  its  original : for  they  are 
changed  in  accordance  with  the  existing  surrounding  circumstances. 
So  also  the  thoughts  to  which  the  mind  gives  birth  are  the  forms  of 
their  creating  causes.  And  it  is  no  more  impossible  for  the  brain 
to  produce  constantly  thoughts  in  every  particular  similar  to  each 
other,  than  it  is  for  Nature  to  produce  forms  similar  to  each  other. 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


315 


For  the  mind  is  acted  on  by  all  the  immediate  and  exciting  causes 
which  produce  thoughts  as  an  effect,  and  the  effect  always  varies  ac- 
cording: to  the  variations  of  the  cause.  So  forms  are  the  thoughts  of 
Nature,  as  thoughts  are  the  forms  of  the  mind.  Thus,  although  a 
general  law  governs  the  creation  of  thoughts,  this  does  not  produce 
invariableness  in  the  form  of  thoughts.  Here,  then,  it  is  well  to  rest 
the  present  discussion  : for  it  is  not  useful  to  enter  into  minutiae  con- 
cerning the  modifications  of  animal  forms  ; and  these  all  must  be  un- 
derstood  as  the  results  of  efficient  causes,  not  at  the  present  time 
manifest  to  the  sensuous  observation  of  mankind. 

At  the  present  period  of  creation,  which  is  the  first  part  of  the 
sixth  day,  the  quadrumana  that  existed  were  very  differently  formed 
from  those  now  existing,  and  their  stature  and  strength  exceeded 
those  of  man  at  the  'present  day.  They  resembled  very  much  those 
that  were  described  as  existing  upon  the  planet  Saturn.  Their  body 
was  short  and  heavy,  their  limbs  disproportionately  long,  and  their 
heads  of  a very  wide  and  low  form.  The  spinal  column  in  the  early 
species  resembled  more  nearly  that  of  the  fish  than  that  of  any  other 
form.  The  shoulders  were  of  great  width,  and  the  neck  u'as  very 
short  and  full.  The  whole  body  was  covered  with  thick,  heavy  hair, 
like  many  of  the  plantigrades  of  that  period.  Some  parts  of  the 
body  of  this  quadrumana  resembled  those  of  the  lower  animals,  such 
as  the  fore  limbs,  which  were  used  always  in  walking.  The  trunk  bore 
some  resemblance  to  those  of  the  lower  saurian  species,  and  the  head 
nearly  represented  a combination  of  forms  that  wrnre  then  existing 
upon  the  earth.  Some  of  the  fossils  of  these  animals  have  been  discov- 
ered, and  they  have  been  supposed  to  belong  to  a branch  of  the  sau- 
rian species  — also  to  some  of  the  marsupial  mammalia.  This  ani- 
mal was  the  first  type,  after  many  ages  of  regeneration,  which  resem- 
bled in  any  particular  the  form  of  man.  And  the  resemblance  was 
in  the  peculiar  form  of  the  shoulders,  back,  and  hips  ; but  it  resem- 
bled other  animals  in  its  extremities  and  main  features. 

This  animal,  like  the  classes  previously  mentioned,  developed  the 
positive  and  negative  forces  of  the  organs,  and  the  proper  functions 
of  each  organ  were  developed.  Its  lungs  wTere  very  full  and  large, 
and  were  divided  into  two  lobes.  The  heart  contained  four  cham- 
bers (these,  however,  being  imperfectly  formed)  ; the  brain  imper- 
fectly performed  a duality  of  corcular  motions,  but  it  consisted  of 
one  mass  without  divisions.  The  liver  in  them  was  that  which  is 
termed  spleen  in  the  human  form  ; and  the  stomach  more  represented 


31b 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


the  kidneys  than  the  stomach  of  man,  it  being  partly  an  organ  of  di 
gestion,  though  the  latter  office  was  performed  more  by  the  general 
action  of  all  the  visceral  organs. 

This  animal  also  had  the  internal  and  external  surfaces  of  every 
organ,  nerve,  and  muscle,  lined  by  the  mucous  and  serous  coatings 
which  generate  the  higher  forces  of  the  whole  body.  The  muscular 
system  was  very  powerful,  the  osseous  portions  were  very  gross  in 
composition,  and  the  cerebral  portions  were  such  as  are  connected 
with  an  undeveloped  mental  constitution.  It  possessed  no  thoughts 
that  were  not  caused  by  the  sensations  of  the  body.  Thus,  though 
motion,  life,  and  sensation,  were  all  unfolded  in  this  animal’s  organi- 
zation, the  higher  endowments  were  as  yet  unknown  ; for  there  was 
no  mental  organization  capable  of  developing  intelligence. 

I am  impressed  distinctly  that  this  class  of  animals  remained  upon 
the  earth  nearly  nine  hundred  years,  during  which  time  the  physical 
element^  experienced  many  changes,  which  at  length  resulted  in  the 
production  of  a higher  form  of  the  same  class. 

This  new  species,  that  now  fills  the  place  of  the  previous  one, 
ascends  one  degree  in  the  order  of  organic  development.  The  ani- 
mal of  this  species  had  a head  much  larger  than  that  of  the  former 
species,  though  it  was  but  little  differently  shaped.  It  possessed 
shoulders  of  similar  highness,  and  an  elongated  spine,  with  a sacral- 
bone  nearly  like  that  of  the  ichthyosaurus.  The  extremities  resem- 
bled partially  those  of  the  bear  and  partially  those  of  the  human  be- 
ing : but  they  used  them  all  in  walking,  which  made  them  like  the 
plantigrade  in  habit,  though  they  were  like  the  bimana  in  some  other 
respects.  This  form  could  not  have  existed,  except  as  a progressive 
unfolding  of  the  previous  form. 

After  many  physical  changes  had  occurred,  this  same  species  also 
gave  place  to  a new  form.  This,  like  the  other,  was  a very  dark, 
gigantic,  and  powerful  animal,  but  it  was  not  so  gross  as  the  previous 
species  of  the  same  order.  The  anatomy  was  somewhat  differently 
constructed,  and  was  adapted  to  a new  use.  The  action  of  the  whole 
visceral  system  wTas  very  perfect.  The  form  displayed  a full,  plump 
sternum,  head,  and  extremities,  as  are  observed  in  the  lower  order 
of  mankind.  The  spine  was  also  more  perfectly  formed  : it  was  not 
like  the  first  fish-like  spines,  but  fully  vertebrated,  and  gave  off,  at 
every  intermediate  portion,  ganglionic  nerves  as  receptacles  for  un- 
expended fluid  ; and  by  these  the  whole  body  was  kept  in  an  active 
condition.  The  bones  were  filled  with  marrow.  The  brain  was 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


317 


very  large  and  very  inactive.  The  heart  was  imperfectly  developed, 
but  acted  more  perfectly  upon  the  organs  which  were  in  close  rela- 
tion to  it  and  the  lungs  than  did  the  hearts  of  the  previous  species. 
The  brain,  by  its  heavy  and  sluggish  action,  gave  beginning  and 
birth  to  the  nervous  fluid  : and  by  its  contraction  the  system  was 
charged  with  nervous  energy  ; and  by  its  expansion,  imperfect  par- 
ticles that  were  existing  in  other  portions  of  the  system  were  drawn 
to  the  brain  to  be  modified,  and  thereby  new  life  in  each  portion  was 
constantly  generated.  This  animal  did  not  develop  the  forces  neces- 
sary for  the  full  unfolding  of  all  interior  qualities  ; but  inasmuch  as 
its  forces  had  ascended  from  those  of  the  primitive  species  of  the 
same  class,  so  they  were  adapted  to  unfold  themselves  and  to  give 
birth  to  new  and  higher  forms,  such  as  were  subsequently  created. 

§ 67.  The  creation  of  a new  species  soon  followed  the  destruction 
of  the  one  just  described.  This,  again,  assumed  a more  perfect 
form,  and  its  anatomy  more  resembled  that  of  the  lower  order  of  man- 
kind. Its  head  and  body  were  not  so  large.  The  spine  and  its 
appendages  were  very  differently  constructed,  and  the  extremities 
became  now  so  modified  that  it  used  but  two  of  its  limbs  in  walking. 
In  the  species  before  existing  the  hands  and  feet  were  nearly  alike  ; 
but  the  hands  of  this  resembled  those  of  a species  of  the  marsupials 
that  then  existed  — and  the  feet  still  those  of  the  digitigrade,  with  the 
exception  of  having  more  complicated  parts.  And  there  was  a de- 
cided distinction  thus  formed  between  the  habits  of  this  species  and 
those  of  the  lower  species  of  the  same  class.  The  whole  structure 
of  the  body  manifested  an  adaptation  of  parts  to  new  and  more  per- 
fect uses. 

There  is  a law  running  through  this  system  of  comparative  anato- 
my, not  perceived  in  a superficial  view  of  the  order  of  creation.  For 
the  historical  period  is  the  only  one  wherein  all  investigations  are 
made,  and  all  inductions  and  hypotheses  are  established.  The  in- 
quirer, therefore,  is  like  a person  standing  at  the  termination  of  a 
great  water,  and  questioning  its  origin  and  its  manner  of  forming  it- 
self into  so  large  a body.  But  if  the  mind  could  be  carried  back  to 
the  beginning  principles,  and  then  follow  each  law  and  order  of  de- 
velopment through  all  the  successive  changes,  the  connexion  between 
the  present  degree  of  organization  and  the  lower  animated  forms 
could  be  distinctly  seen.  And  then  each  form  would  be  to  the  mind 
an  index  of  its  own  origin,  and  from  it  the  future  development  of 


31S 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


higher  forms  and  more  perfect  qualities  could  be  inferred.  Then 
die  activity  of  creation  would  be  considered  as  a result  of  the  ener- 
gies contained  in  the  First  Principles,  which  have  been  heretofore 
explained. 

There  is  now  a decrease  in  the  species  of  the  quadrumana  ; and 
decrease  of  forms  indicates  a composition  of  more  refined  materials. 
Thus  the  present  class  has  less  hair  upon  the  surface  of  the  body; 
the  shoulders  are  not  so  high  ; the  spine  now  becomes  nearly  of  the 
same  form,  even  to  the  os-coccyx,  which  joins  more  perfectly  the 
sacral-bone  through  which  run  the  posterior  nerves  which  give 
strength  to  the  muscles  and  tendons  of  the  extremities.  Then,  again, 
all  the  systolic  and  diastolic  motions  are  much  more  in  harmony  with 
what  is  conceived  to  be  the  condition  of  a favorable  and  healthy  con- 
stitution. These  are  controlled  by  the  forces  generated  by  the  tnu- 
co,us  and  serous  surfaces,  which  are  adapted  to  the  digestion  and 
generation  of  a positive  and  negative  fluid,  and  which  also  develop 
the  most  perfect  mode  of  reproduction.  The  little  hair  that  was  upon 
their  surfaces  indicates,  as  does  their  general  composition,  more  re- 
fined ingredients.  Therefore  the  whole  body  constitutes  the  first 
type  of  a species  far  below  the  negro  inhabitants  of  the  earth  as  novV 
existing. 

Depreciation  of  this  species  was  a result  of  subsequent  periods, 
and  finally  this  gave  place  to  a new  species.  And  it  may  be  ob- 
served that  I only  mention  the  prominent  species  of  each  class,  and 
that  the  subdivisions  are  not  particularly  noticed,  inasmuch  as  if  mi- 
nutiae were  specified,  the  great  and  leading  characteristics  of  these 
orders  of  creation  would  be  rendered  less  conspicuous. 

The  species  that  we  now  have  upon  the  earth  may  be  properly 
termed  a quadrumana  also,  and  is  a progressed  succession  of  the  last 
species.  This  inhabited  the  eastern  lands,  especially  the  parts  of 
Africa  and  Asia  that  corresponded  in  latitude,  and  which  were  only 
divided  by  the  ocean.  It  inhabited  in  greatest  abundance  the  parts 
of  the  earth  where  the  marsupials  generally  dwell. 

We  have  now  a different  type  of  anatomy,  and  in  many  particulars 
a new  plan  of  organization.  The  head  is  not  so  large  as  in  the  pre- 
vious species,  but  assumes  a more  oblong  shape,  and  joins  very 
closely  the  medulla  oblongata.  And  the  medulla  spinalis  more  dis- 
tinctly proceeds  from  the  above  portion,  forming  four  cervicle  nerves, 
these  again  extending  into  dorsal  and  lumbar,  being  very  indistinctly 
ramified,  as  is  the  case  in  the  higher  order  of  the  bimana.  The  whole 


nature’s  DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


319 


vertebrated  column  was  seemingly  more  adapted  to  higher  uses  than 
any  form  previously  dwelling  upon  the  earth’s  surface.  The  jaw- 
bones were  of  great  length,  the  mouth  was  large  and  distended,  the 
cheek-bones  were  prominent,  and  the  head  greatly  represented  those 
of  several  of  the  feline  tribe.  The  nose  was  very  broad  and  flat,  the 
brows  were  full,  and  the  eyes  were  rather  inclined  to  the  top  of  the 
nose.  The  chest  and  the  whole  viscera  system  were  very  imper- 
fectly formed,  but  represented  in  their  main  features  the  body  of  the 
Caffers.  Their  limbs  were  long,  slender,  and  rather  bowed.  The 
feet  were  rather  more  oblong,  and  the  ankle  gave  off  parts  which 
better  adapted  the  feet  to  locomotion.  The  body  was  generally  very 
full  and  gross  in  appearance.  It  wras  nearly  free  from  the  heavy  hair 
which  grew  upon  the  previous  classes.  The  hair  upon  the  neck  and 
head  was  somewhat  more  heavy,  but  it  was  very  short  and  dark. 
Their  color  was  generally  an  inveterate  black.  This  class  existed 
upon  the  earth  nearly  seven  hundred  years,  during  which  time  the 
whole  of  the  animal  kingdom  assumed  imperceptibly  a higher  degree 
of  refinement. 

The  following  prominent  degree  of  organization  was  that  of  a large, 
gigantic  form,  ascending  to  within  one  degree  from  the  first  estab- 
lished human  inhabitants  of  the  earth.  It  is  well  to  remark  that  the 
portions  of  the  earth  where  these  existed  were  constantly  undergoing 
specific  modifications  according  to  the  condition  of  the  interior  of  the 
earth,  and  its  surrounding  physical  elements.  And  it  is  not  neces- 
sary to  discuss  the  transformation  of  colors  ; for  it  will  be  seen  by  an 
explanation  hereafter  to  be  given,  that  all  colors  are  homogeneous 
with  the  first  and  lowest  — and  that  if  the  first  is  subjected  to  proper 
conditions,  the  succeeding  colors  will  be  unfolded  (varying  only  as 
combinations  differ)  : and  thus  will  be  displayed  all  the  complexions 
in  the  animal  creation,  and  all  the  living  and  blooming  beauties  of 
the  vegetable  kingdom. 

This  next  class  ascends  to  a degree  in  the  scale  of  animal  forma- 
tion that  may  be  properly  termed  an  ultimate  representation  of  all 
living  things.  In  this  form  the  bimana  organization  becomes  more 
distinctly  visible.  The  heart  and  lungs  in  this  animal  assume  a 
higher  degree  of  development  than  those  of  any  of  the  previous  spe- 
cies. Being  well  formed  in  its  main  portions,  it  is  still  better  calcu- 
lated to  generate  active,  living  forces,  and  thereby  approaches  nearer 
to  the  capacity  of  mental  perception  and  intelligence  — although  its 
organization  is  a compound  — even  a transmuted  ascension  — of 


/ 


320  nature’s  divine  revelations. 

lower  forms.  And  however  indistinct  the  modifications  may  appear 
to  sensuous  observers,  this  does  not  alter  the  truth  of  the  general  law 
whereby  elements  and  forces  constantly  and  successively  unfold  more 
perfect  developments  and  higher  states  of  exaltation.  How  easy, 
therefore,  is  it  to  perceive  the  anatomical  and  physiological  corre- 
spondence which  seems  to  be  manifested  in  every  order  and  degree 
of  Nature’s  productions  ! 

Besides  a well-formed  viscera  system,  this  animal  possessed  a more 
perfect  form  of  the  spinal  column  — it  being  more  minutely  verte- 
brated,  and  giving  off  more  motor  nerves,  which,  by  entering  into  a 
portion  of  the  ganglionic  system,  contributed  to  the  perfection  of  the 
whole  internal  apparatus,  enabling  it  to  digest  more  perfect  substances 
as  constituting  its  food.  And  this  is  the  first  type  by  which  a true 
conception  is  conveyed  of  the  power  of  the  mutual  living  forces. 
For  it  must  be  discovered  that  the  animal  forms,  as  they  become  <. 
more  fully  developed,  combine  more  forces  within  their  organization. 
Thus  the  form  corresponds  to  the  interior  power  of  motion,  motion 
to  the  nervous  life,  and  this  to  the  active  and  susceptible  sensation  that 
pervades  the  serous  and  cellular  tissues  of  the  whole  body.  Thus 
these  three  forces  become,  when  properly  perfected,  the  first  indication 
of  intelligence,  termed  by  naturalists  “ the  instinct  of  animals.” 

The  form  of  the  head  in  this  animal  was  very  little  dissimilar  to 
that  in  the  previous  species.  Its  brain  was  smaller,  but  more  com- 
plicated, and  therefore  more  susceptible.  The  color  was  not  changed ; 
the  hair  upon  the  head  and  body  was  similar;  the  long  and  ill-shaped 
limbs  continued,  and  also  the  short,  full  body.  Various  species  of 
these  animals  inhabited  Asia  and  Africa.  Being  yet  animals,  they 
were  highly  susceptible  to  the  influences  of  external  circumstances  — 
more  so,  indeed,  than  any  other  order  of  animals.  They  were  of 
great  stature,  had  great  power  of  will,  and  possessed  strong  passions, 
as  owing  to  the  highly-susceptible  inclinations  inherent  in  their  con- 
stitutions. 

It  is  well  here  again  to  remark,  that  where  Sensation  becomes  per- 
fectly established,  passions,  inclinations,  and  susceptibility  to  all  ex- 
ternal influences,  become  greater  than  at  any  inferior  stage  of  animal 
development.  For  it  is  by  the  interior  sensibility  arising  from  the 
medium  existing  upon  the  serous  and  mucous  surfaces,  that  all  the 
interior  characteristics,  which  are  sensations  and  passions,  become 
strong,  and  therefore  more  extensively  manifested. 

These  animals,  to  the  present  inhabitants  of  the  earth,  would  ap- 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


321 


pear  like  giants  in  form  and  stature.  Indeed,  they  were  larger  than 
any  similar  forms  now  upon  any  portion  of  the  earth.  These  were 
the  first  that  displayed  any  indication  of  mental  activity.  They  were 
so  formed  that  it  became  convenient  for  them  to  use  distinct  sounds 
which  were  significant  to  the  minds  of  those  addressed.  These 
sounds  were  produced  by  the  throat ; but  they  did  not  yet  possess  a 
glottis  and  tongue  that  could  serve  as  vocal  organs.  The  sounds 
produced  were  somewhat  like  those  made  by  some  species  of  the 
feline  tribe,  but  in  no  particular  did  they  resemble  those  used  in  hu- 
man vocal  intercourse. 

These  animals  were  distinguished  from  all  others  in  habit  and  dis- 
position. They  even  had  a conception  of  rearing  artificial  structures 
wherein  they  might  reside  — and  they  often  inhabited  caves  : but  they 
generally,  like  the  lower  species  of  the  same  order,  dwelt,  upon  the 
surface  of  the  earth.  They  did  not  possess  any  of  the  aquatic  or 
amphibious  characteristics.  Therefore  it  is  manifest  that  they  were 
more  refined  in  form,  in  degree,  and  in  disposition,  than  any  of  the 
previous  classes  or  orders  in  the  animal  kingdom.  These  dwelt 
undisturbed  upon  the  earth  nearly  one  thousand  years. 

§ 68.  The  degree  of  organization  which  subsequently  took  their 
place,  was  the  first  form  that  approached  or  indicated  in  the  least  degree 
any  of  the  peculiar  characteristics  of  mankind  ; and  these  represented 
the  Jalofs  and  Mandingoes  in  their  lower  degree.  These  were  upon 
the  earth,  without  any  essential  modification,  nearly  eight  hundred 
years. 

After  this,  three  successive  and  distinct  orders  pressed  in  their 
stead.  The  highest  of  these  approached  in  every  particular  the  more 
perfect  form  of  the  human  organization.  These  inhabited  the  Asiatic 
continent,  while  the  other  portions  of  the  same  class  were  in  the 
south  of  these  regions.  Thus  the  three  continents  — the  southern, 
western,  and  eastern  — were  inhabited  by  three  distinct  tribes,  the 
highest  of  which,  existing  in  Asia,  came  nearer  to  the  unfolding  of 
intellectual  endowments.  And  this  brings  the  period  of  the  sixth 
day  of  creation  to  a point  three  thousand  and  eight  hundred  years 
before  the  commencement  of  the  race  as  referred  to  in  the  primitive, 
written  record. 

The  surface  of  the  earth,  particularly  in  Asia  and  Africa,  was  now 
much  more  progressed,  and  consequently  more  fertile  and  suitable 
to  the  requirements  of  the  animal  creation.  And  it  was  at  this  time 

21 


322 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


that  the  inhabitants  of  Asia  began  to  unfold  a distinct  and  sensuou3 
perception,  and  even  to  represent  their  perceptions  to  one  another. 
Having  no  proper  conception  of  higher  beauties  than  those  surround- 
ing them,  they  consequently  remained  in  their  unintellectual  state  for 
nearly  one  thousand  years,  during  which  time  the  earth  underwent  a 
material  change,  which  resulted  in  the  destruction  of  nearly  all  the 
various  tribes  of  the  bimana  type,  and  also  materially  altered  the  geo- 
graphical and  geological  condition  of  the  whole  earth. 

And  it  was  by  the  passing  away  of  the  old  conditions  that  new 
and  more  perfect  ones  came  into  being,  whereby  a new  order  of 
creation  was  produced,  the  highest  of  which  ascends  to  the  type  ex- 
emplified in  the  present  human  organization.  Until  this  period  vege- 
tation was  comparatively  imperfect  and  limited  ; but  after  this,  each 
portion  of  the  earth  was  rendered  fertile  and  fragrant  with  living 
beauty.  The  earth  at  no  previous  time  brought  forth  productions  so 
extensive!  or  yielded  so  many  delicate  forms  of  vegetation  ; for  now 
it  presented  an  external  expression  of  its  interior  excellences.  The 
whole  earth  was  fertile,  and  the  eastern  countries  abounded  with 
more  beauty  and  living  grandeur  than  they  do  at  the  present  day.  It 
may  be  supposed  that  these  beauties  could  not  have  existed  without 
the  agency  of  man  in  their  cultivation.  But  the  most  beautiful  and 
complicated  forms  in  the  vegetable  kingdom,  as  in  the  animal,  be- 
come developed  in  a more  perfect  degree  when  they  are  not  artifi- 
cially cultivated. 

And  it  uras  at  this  time  that  a new  tribe  was  introduced  upon  the 
earth  — rising  entirely  above  the  undeveloped  features  of  the  lower 
forms.  These  constituted  what  may  be  properly  termed  a transition 
from  the  animal  to  man  : and  these  were  the  first  forms  that  could  be 
properly  termed  Man. 

And  the  record  which  reveals  the  then-existing  condition  of  the 
earth  is  distinctly  proved  and  exemplified  ; for  the  beauties  of  crea- 
tion, displayed  in  all  the  parts  of  Asia  and  Africa  that  were  fertile, 
represented  not  only  the  interior  qualities  contained  in  the  earth,  but 
also  the  primitive  conception  of  the  garden  of  Eden. 

And  it  will  be  understood  from  this  that  all  the  vegetable  and  ani- 
mal productions  ascend  gradually  and  imperceptibly  with  the  unfold- 
ings of  the  law  of  Nature,  from  the  original  gelatinous  composition  to 
the  creation  of  man  at  the  present  period.  And,  again,  it  is  evident 
that  man  was  formed  “from  the  dust  of  the  earth” — was  rendered 
man  only  by  the  congregation  of  innumerable  living  forms,  which 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


323 


assumed  orders,  degrees,  species,  associations,  and  correspondences. 
And  thus  he  occupies  a degree  of  organization  pre-eminent  above  all 
the  other  departments  of  creation,  and  thus  is  a representation  of  all 
living  things  that  contained  the  germ  of  which  he  is  the  unfolding.  He 
is  thus  a combination  of  all  forms,  qualities,  and  essences,  in  Nature, 
sustained  by  all  kinds  of  motion,  life,  and  sensation,  that  characterize 
the  successive  steps  of  natural  progression.  Thus  it  is  that  man  is 
over  all  creation.  And  as  he  represents  the  developed  beauties  con- 
tained in  the  lower  forms,  so  is  he  a representative  of  the  interior 
world. 

The  written  history  speaks  of  the  multiplying  of  each  form  of  the 
sea,  land,  and  air.  And  all  these  were  subjected  to  the  control  of 
man,  while  man  was  actually  dependent  upon  all  below  and  around 
him  in  being.  For  while  he  is  the  unlimited  proprietor  of  his  own 
person,  the  whole  creation  below  his  exalted  degree  is  necessary  to 
his  subsistence  and  nourishment.  And  inasmuch  as  there  is  an  in- 
separable dependence  of  man  upon  every  form  in  being,  and  of  these 
mutually  upon  each  other  — so  are  the  harmony  and  perfection  of  all 
things  dependent  upon  the  reciprocations  of  the  vegetable  and  animal 
kingdoms  and  man,  and  of  man  and  the  interior  and  more  cono-enial 
world. 

Here,  then,  we  rest  satisfied.  Man  is  created,  and  exerts  a power 
over  all  creation.  And  the  present  developments  of  the  whole  Uni- 
verse are  in  accordance  with  all  the  associated  laws  that  How  spon- 
taneously from  the  Fountain  of  divine  and  living  Principles.  They 
are  even  the  breathings  of  the  Great  Positive  Mind  which  has  flowed 
through  the  ten  thousand  avenues  and  forms  of  animated  Nature,  until 
it  breathed  into  man  the  breath  of  life,  and  he  became  a living  soul ! 

§ 69.  Now  is  revealed  the  whole  use  of  Nature  ; and  now  can  be 
perceived  the  adaptation  of  every  part  belonging  to  the  whole  Mass, 
to  produce  a more  exalted  form  — which,  again,  is  adapted  to  the 
unfolding  of  far  greater  and  eternal  beauties.  And  all  the  laws  and 
forces  which  have  been  heretofore  explained,  are  now  plainly  under- 
stood as  converging  to  the  formation  of  man.  Man,  then,  represents 
the  universal  progressive  development  which  is  an  inherent  and  eter- 
nal law  of  matter : also  he  represents  a resurrection  of  every  gross 
material  in  being.  And  the  saying  that  is  contained  in  the  Key  is 
now  verified,  that  “ Nature  is  the  Cause  ; forms  are  the  Effects,  and 
man  is  the  Ultimate  production;”  and  that  “the  Great  Positive 


324 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


Mind,  as  a Cause,  uses  Nature  as  an  Effect,  to  produce  Spirit  as  an 
Ultimate.” 

These  things  are  represented  in  every  particle  in  being,  and  there- 
fore can  be  comprehended  by  a proper  investigation  of  the  rudimen- 
tal  laws  and  principles  of  the  Universe  — without  which  no  important 
truth  can  ever  be  unfolded  to  the  minds  of  the  world. 

The  work  of  the  present  day  of  creation  has  been  more  distinctly 
marked  by  unity  of  plan  and  composition,  and  the  appearance  of  a 
general  end,  cause,  and  effect,  than  that  of  any  previous  day.  A 
superficial  view  of  the  whole  plan  of  creation  of  mankind,  however, 
would  lead  to  many  erroneous  and  repulsive  impressions.  But  when 
viewed  with  a scientific  and  reverential  mind,  the  whole  presents 
a connected  plan  and  a sublime  and  magnificent  work,  inasmuch  as 
every  particle  is  a flowing  of  the  interior  qualities  of  previous  exist- 
ences : and  each,  again,  as  it  ascends  into  higher  forms,  displays  a 
higher  degree  of  the  same  interior  excellences.  And  so  from  one 
order  of  creation  to  another,  in  which  the  species  are  only  mediums 
of  transferring  inferior  qualities  to  higher  states,  there  is  to  be  seen 
the  same  united  activity,  the  same  potent  energies,  and  the  same 
teeming  beauties  ; and  as  the  confluence  of  all  these  establishes  and 
constitutes  the  organization  of  man,  man  becomes  the  perfection  and 
representative  of  them  all. 

So  by  these  harmonious  breathings  of  Nature,  the  work  of  the 
present  day  manifestly  becomes  a higher  example  of  omnipotent  and 
divine  Love  and  Wisdom.  And  this  is  the  closing  of  the  present 
era  — the  consummation  of  the  creations  of  the  whole  period,  and  of 
the  End  contemplated  ; and  thus  Nature  represents  a higher  beauty, 
a more  perfect  form,  and  a more  comprehensive  organization.  These 
things,  when  viewed  in  connexion  with  the  united  harmony  of  the 
Universe,  display  wisdom  which  transcends  the  powers  of  human  ex- 
pression. Indeed,  there  is  no  mind  adequate  to  appreciate  the  wis- 
dom here  displayed,  save  the  Great,  Comprehensive  Mind  whose 
Essence  pervades  every  particle  throughout  space  ! 

And  nothing  is  too  low  in  the  scale  of  being  to  be  of  indispensable 
importance  in  the  position  it  occupies.  Moreover,  nothing  is  so  low 
but  that  it  is  the  perfection  of  something  still  lower.  And  the  lowest 
particle  in  being  is  only  a representative  of  an  endless  use  and  adap- 
tation. Nothing  therefore  is  useless  : for  that  which  appears  gross 
and  imperfect  is  in  reality  the  only  substantial  source  of  subsequent 
unfoldings.  Thus  a condensation 'of  an  inconceivable  congregation 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


325 


of  atoms  produced  only  the  imperfect  form  of  the  <jarth.  And  it  is 
plain  that  if  this  condition  had  not  existed,  the  vegetable  kingdom 
could  not  have  been  developed.  And  so  the  vegetable  creation  is  a 
substantial  basis  for  the  animal  creation,  even  as  the  earth  is  for  the 
vegetable.  And  the  animal  kingdom  is  the  only  basis  upon  which 
man  could  have  been  created,  and  therefore  it  is  absolutely  necessary 
to  his  being. 

And  had  not  each  of  these  been  governed  by  the  unchangeable 
laws  of  Nature,  nothing  would  have  assumed  order  or  refinement. 
But  by  the  operation  of  these  laws  the  whole  creation  gradually  as- 
cends, by  imperceptible  steps,  to  the  perfect  development  of  its  own 
interior  nature.  Thus  the  germ  of  existence  is  in  Nature,  and  the 
fruit  thereof  is  Man.  Thus  the  vegetable  mirrors  the  undeveloped 
qualities  in  the  earth,  and  represents  the  animal  kingdom.  This, 
again,  reflects  the  beauties  of  the  vegetable  kingdom,  and  represents 
the  formation  of  Man.  And  man  exemplifies  the  perfect  unfolding 
of  Nature’s  interior  qualities,  and  represents  within  himself  the  united 
and  harmonious  Universe. 

From  these  correspondences  it  can  be  plainly  seen  that  all  things 
which  have  form  and  distinct  existence  have  an  interior  indepen- 
dence, but  that  externally  they  are  dependent  on  all  things,  and  dis- 
play a universal  use.  And  it  would  be  as  unjust  to  abhor  any  of  the 
lower  kingdoms  as  it  would  be  to  have  a prejudice  against  any  of  the 
imperfect  portions  of  the  human  organization.  For  forms  are  only 
the  temporal  combinations  of  material  substances  ; but  the  Cause  (of 
which  forms  are  the  effects)  is  the  invisible  and  therefore  is  eternal. 
And  as  forms,  the  uses  of  which  the  mind  does  not  always  compre- 
hend, are  the  constant  manifestations  of  Nature,  so  they  are  the  con- 
stant and  successive  productions  of  her  immutable  and  eternal  prin- 
ciples. 

And  the  first  and  most  comprehensive  attribute  that  is  manifested 
in  these  forms  is  divine  Wisdom.  And  their  unity  and  harmonious 
reciprocation  prove  that  Wisdom  is  the  higher  attribute  flowing  from 
the  Fountain  of  divine  Love.  Love,  therefore,  determines  the  univer- 
sal relationship,  and  Wisdom  the  universal  adaptation.  So  these  at- 
tributes are  the  highest  laws  of  Nature,  comprehending  within  them- 
selves various  modifications  of  the  same  principles  as  all  flowing 
from  the*' same  exhaustless  Fountain  wherein  exists  infinite  Intelli- 
gence. 

This  is  the  Vortex  from  which  are  unfolded  successively  the  re- 


326 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


ceding  waves  of  a united  Universe.  And  one  of  these  is  an  index 
to  the  expanding  sublimities  of  another;  and  so  their  ceaseless  flow- 
ings comprehend  the  whole  Univerccelum.  And  as  these  are  the 
flowings  of  the  general  materials  in  space,  so^  the  earth  constitutes  a 
similar  vortex  of  power,  which  rolls  forth  succeeding  waves  from  the 
mineral  to  the  vegetable,  to  the  animal,  and  to  man  : and  the  breath- 
ings of  inherent  qualities  transcend  Motion,  Life,  and  Sensation,  and 
form  a pure  and  exalted  Spirit.  The  wave  of  development  is  not 
arrested  here,  but  it  goes  on  throughout  the  unimaginable  spheres  in 
the  interior  world,  until  it  approximates  and  is  responded  to  by  the 
Great  Positive  Mind.  Thus  are  the  concentric  circles  of  material 
creation  unfolded  — which  correspond  to,  and  absolutely  prove,  the 
concentric  circles  of  spiritual  creation  and  spiritual,  endless  pro- 
gression ! 

§ 70.  Thus  the  great  Vortex  is  a living,  exhaustless  Fountain, 
wherein  dwell  infinite  Love  and  Wisdom,  and  from  which  flow  the 
undefinable  worlds  which  pervade  the  whole  Univerccelum.  And 
these  are  formed  by  succeeding  and  expanding  waves,  the  same 
principle  being  distinctly  manifested  in  every  department  of  animated 
Nature.  The  Universe,  therefore,  is  an  ocean  of  activity,  even  as 
the  Univerccelum  is  a boundless  ocean  of  infinite  Love  and  Wisdom. 

The  Thoughts  of  the  infinite  Mind,  therefore,  constitute  the  laws 
of  Nature  : and  the  results  of  these  thoughts  are  the  animated  forms 
in  being,  including  the  exalted  form  of  man  — which  again  form,  on 
a corresponding  principle,  the  interior,  spiritual  existence.  Nature, 
therefore,  is  merely  a Thought  of  the  divine  Mind,  as  forms  are  the 
thoughts  of  Nature.  Thus  the  universal  laws  are  merely  the  infinite 
expressions  of  the  Great  Positive  Mind.  — And  thus  are  we  brought 
to  associate  our  interior  principle  with  the  Thoughts  of  its  own  Pro- 
ductor. 

And  it  is  only  by  a clear  comprehension  of  Nature’s  creations  that 
we  can  form  any  correct  conception  of  even  a Thought  emanating 
from  the  divine  Mind.  The  laws  of  Nature  are  known  to  he  un- 
changeable ; and  these  are  merely  the  expressions  of  divine  Thoughts. 
These  laws,  therefore,  are  emanations  from  the  universal  Cause ; and 
by  resting  upon  their  immutable  and  harmonious  results,  we  would 
be  resting  our  interior  affections  upon  the  Thoughts  of  an  all-perva- 
ding, infinitely-perfect,  omnipotent  Mind. 

It  is  seen  by  this  that  universal  truth  displays  a universal  corre- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


327 


spondence.  All  things,  therefore,  are  existing  externally  in  forms, 
but  all  realities  are  dwelling  in  the  interior,  and  are  the  cause  of  the 
form’s  existence.  Thus  it  is  necessary  for  the  living  principle  of 
man  to  have  an  external  form  : for  the  two  mutually  depend  upon 
each  other.  Without  the  form,  the  spirit  could  not  be  ; and  without 
the  spirit,  there  could  be  no  form.  Therefore  the  interior  is  the 
reality,  and  the  form  is  a useful,  rudimental  instrument,  agent,  or 
medium,  by  which  the  spirit  forms  a connexion  with  the  material 
Universe. 

So  the  animal  and  vegetable  forms  are  necessary  for  the  unfolding 
of  their  interior  qualities.  . The  external  coating  of  the  earth  is  a form 
necessary  to  contain  the  interior,  livinJlMass ; and  without  it,  this 
Mass  would  be  in  a chaotic  condition.  So  it  is  necessary  for  the 
Sun  to  be  clothed  with  a form  like  the  planetary  system,  in  order  that 
one  body  may  balance  another,  and  that  the  whole  may  thus  be  in 
unity  and  reciprocation.  The  Sun  being  the  interior  and  producing 
cause,  its  evolved  forms  constitute  the  united  external  Form.  So  the 
whole  Univercoelum  is  necessary  as  a Form  — a Bodj* — of  the 
Great  Positive  Mind.  This  living  Principle  is  the  all-producing 
Cause,  and  the  Univercoelum  is  the  universal  Effect.  Thus  the  lat- 
ter forms  an  External,  which  is  necessary  for  the  existence  of  the 
Interior.  And  thus  the  whole  creations  of  boundless  space  are  only 
an  external  Form  assumed  by  the  interior  qualities  of  the  divine 
Mind. 

If,  then,  it  is  impossible  to  understand  the  uses  of  the  minute  forms 
in  Nature,  is  it  not  more  impossible  to  comprehend  the  extent  of  an 
infinite  thought?  — and  still  more  impossible  to  comprehend  that 
thought’s  Originator?  It  is  not  well,  then,  to  doubt  the  existence 
of  a use  in  any  department  of  Nature  ; for  this  would  be  evidence 
that  the  subject  is  not  yet  properly  understood.  And  it  is  only  when 
the  exalted  and  sweeping  intellect  puts  forth  all  its  powers  to  grasp 
the  whole  united  plan-work  of  Nature’s  creations,  that  a very  indis- 
tinct idea  is  obtained  of  that  which  infinitely  transcends  all  adequate 
conception.  So  nothing  is  inactive  — nothing  useless  — nothing  ab- 
solutely imperfect  ; but  everything  sustains  an  important  position  in 
the  great  architecture  of  the  Univercoelum. 

These  meditations  are  the  result  of  the  breathings  of  the  sphere  of 
Causes,*  in  which  my  mind  is  situated,  and  in  which  all  effects  are  made 

* What  is  meant  by  the  “ sphere  of  causes”  the  author  explains  in  his  spiritual 
revelations,  in  a subsequent  part  of  this  work. 


32S 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


present.  And  these  effects  are  exemplified  in  every  minute  particle 
constituting  an  inseparable  chain  of  correspondences  ascending  to  the 
highest  celestial  spheres,  which  are  illuminated  only  with  divine  Love 
and  \\  isdom.  All  that  is  around,  below,  above,  is  to  my  mind  an 
harmonious  congregation  of  forms  and  spheres,  of  laws  and  princi- 
ples, which  are  in  every  particular  displaying  the  original  design  of 
the  infinite  and  omnipotent  Mind.  So  no  thought  is  so  extensive  or 
so  profound  as  to  comprehend  the  infinite  expanse  of  divine  creations. 

Nature,  at  this  period  of  creation,  presents  a most  beautiful  reflec- 
tion of  all  anterior  creations.  And  it  is  now  evident  that  man  is  cre- 
ated from  the  dust  of  the  earth,  and  that  he  is  the  receptacle  of  one 
of  the  spontaneous  breathings  of  the  Great  Positive  Mind.  This 
rendered  him  a perfect  form  — a useful  agent  — a living  soul.  And 
thus  were  male  and  female  created  ; and  these  were  qualified  to  ex- 
ercise an  unlimited  control  over  all  the  lower  orders  of  being,  even 
as  man  feels  his  absolute  dependence  upon  them.  And  so  the  whole 
earth  at  this  time  represented  the  close  of  a distinct  and  pre-eminent 
creation,  even  the  peopling  of  the  garden  of  Eden.  As  this  repre- 
sents the  living  beauties  in  the  vegetable  kingdom  at  this  period,  so 
do  the  inhabitants  thereof  represent  the  perfection  of  animated  forms. 

Thus  the  grand  Work  is  finished  — the  great  End  is  accomplished. 
Nature  becomes  an  harmonious  Whole  — the  congregation  of  parts. 
And  so  the  original  expression  which  was  made  in  view  of  the  gen- 
eral consummation  of  the  present  period  of  creation,  is  absolutely 
verified.  — And  as  Nature  is  a mirror  wherein  are  seen  all  her  interior 
excellences,  so  this  ultimate  development  of  creation  is  a mirror 
wherein  is  reflected  the  truthful  expression  that  “the  evening  and  the 
morning  were  the  sixth  day .” 

§71.  The  germ  of  man  has  thus  been  discovered  in  the  lower 
forms  of  the  animal  kingdom,  and  traced  through  all  of  its  progres- 
sive stages  of  development,  rising  from  the  lower  degrees  through 
the  great  body  of  the  animal  creation,  with  its  many  and  diversified 
branches  and  their  modifications,  up  to  the  blooming  perfection  of 
the  living  tree  whose  fruit  is  the  organization  of  man.  And  as  man 
is  the  fruit  of  the  whole  living  creation,  so  is  he  the  rudimental  being 
possessing  those  undeveloped  endowments  which  have  subsequently 
civilized  many  portions  of  the  earth,  and  also  opened  to  the  mental 
view  the  reality  of  an  interior  and  more  perfect  world. 

The  present  existence  of  man  was  within  and  near  the  portion  of 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


329 


Asia  which  has  since  been  termed  Turkey,  extending  to  the  regions 
of  the  Euphrates  and  Tigris,  and  joining  in  two  distinct  lines  to  -the 
locality  whereupon  was  built  Jerusalem.  As  was  stated,  the  lower 
type  was  existing  in  some  portions  of  Africa,  but  these  were  as  infe- 
rior comparatively  as  were  the  felina  and  general  mammalia  of  those 
regions.  The  great  body  of  those  of  the  most  perfect  form,  and 
which  were  truly  man,  thus  dwelt  originally  upon  the  borders  and  in 
the  interior  of  Asia. 

Their  form  was  very  large,  their  strength  was  in  proportion  to  the 
great  density  cf  their  osseous  composition,  and  their  motions  were 
governed  by  the  peculiar  plan  of  their  anatomical  structures.  The 
spinal  column  was  perfectly  vertebrated.  The  sternum  and  intercos- 
tal portions  were  so  arranged  as  to  give  great  elasticity  to  the  interior 
and  depending  portions.  They  were  marked  by  a peculiar  gentle- 
ness and.  humiliation,  such  as  resulted  from  the  more  agreeable  in- 
stincts of  the  lower  and  kindred  forms. 

There  was  still  a slenderness  and  imperfect  form  of  the  limbs, 
these  being  somewhat  bowed  and  still  resembling  the  extremities  of 
the  previous  classes.  Their  mental  constitutions  (of  which  more  will 
hereafter  be  said)  were  not  intellectual  so  much  as  social,  but  they 
were  characterized  by  great  power  of  perception  and  memory.  They 
did  not  display  any  noble  moral  qualities  such  as  were  manifested 
in  the  subsequent  races.  . 

Male  and  female  thus  existed,  differing  only  in  stature  and  strength, 
in  accordance  with  the  plans  of  their  respective  organizations.  This 
U’as  the  first  class  of  beings  that  could  properly  be  termed  mankind  : 
for  they  now  exemplified,  though  imperfectly,  all  that  the  human  or- 
ganization has  in  subsequent  ages  unfolded. 

The  portion  of  the  earth  where  they  dwelt  was  at  this  time  very 
fertile,  yielding  forth  many  species  of  vegetation.  Thus  this  portion 
of  the  earth  was  more  adapted  to  the  requirements  of  man  than  any 
other  ; and  corresponding  to  its  advanced  condition  were  its  animal 
developments. 

This,  with  the  lower  and  kindred  races,  has  been  designated  by 
the  comprehensive  term  Adam  — as  was  their  associate  tribe  com- 
prehended by  the  term  Eve  — these  terms  representing  the  first  and 
the  basis  of  the  more  perfect- inhabitants. 

Their  dispositions  were  exceedingly  gentle  and  social,  varying  in 
some  particulars,  owing  to  the  imperfect  reproduction  of  their  spe- 
cies. Asia  was  thus  peopled  for  many  ages,  during  which  time  no 

I 


330 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


mechanical  improvements  were  made.  They  had  no  conceptions  of 
the  arts  and  sciences,  nor  of  the  intellectual  attainments  possessed  by 
the  subsequent  and  higher  orders  of  the  same  class. 

At  first,  and  for  many  continuous  ages,  they  communicated  their 
ideas  by  expressions  of  the  countenance  and  outward  physical  signs  ; 
and  while  they  remained  unsophisticated  bjr  the  art  of  clothing  their 
ideas  in  verbal  sounds,  they  were  free  from  all  cupidity  and  absolute 
deception. 

After  the  consummation  of  many  periods,  they  advanced  in  artful 
attainments,  and  began  to  exchange  thoughts  with  each  other  through 
the  medium  of  vocal,  rudimental  sounds,  consisting  of  monosyllables. 
At  this  age  they  were  not  acquainted  with  nouns,  adjectives,  and 
verbs,  and  therefore  their  language  displayed  no  distinct  inflections. 

It  is  well  to  observe  the  progress  of  their  intellectual  qualities,  and 
to  notice  the  distinct  results  arising  therefrom.  It  is  well  known  to 
the  nicely-critical  observer  of  natural  physiognomy,  that  thoughts, 
whether  they  arise  from  interior  or  external  exciting  causes,  must  of 
necessity  illuminate  the  eyes,  the  features,  the  whole  countenance, 
with  the  exact  expression  of  their  import.  Such  was  the  mode  of 
expression  among  the  first  inhabitants  of  the  earth  during  their  una- 
dulterated condition.  They  expressed  vividly  and  without  suppres- 
sion their  interior  thoughts  upon  their  countenances,  and  thus  com- 
municated with  each  other.. 

But  when  they  had  advanced  a little  further,  and  had  partaken  of 
a little  of  the  fruit  of  the  tree  of  Knowledge,  they  began  to  conceal 
their  true  sentiments,  and  to  clothe  them  with  an  arbitrary  vocal 
sound  — which  possessed  not  the  power  of  communicating  fhe  real 
reality  of  their  ideas  and  affections  to  each  other,  but  rather  was 
liable  to  convey  deceptive  impressions. 

It  is  well  to  understand  properly  the  origin  and  rudiments  of  vocal 
language  ; but  this  we  can  not  do  without  understanding  the  action 
of  sound  upon  the  atmosphere,  and  its  vibrations  among  the  intricate 
chambers  of  the  ear. 

The  first  inhabitants  did  not  possess  perfect  vocal  powers.  This 
arose  from  a deformity  of  the  trachea,  larynx,  and  glottis.  These, 
when  perfectly  arranged,  act  in  concert  to  produce  the  variations  of 
sound,  according  to  the  influence  of  the  will  upon  the  parts.  If  the 
atmosphere  had  not  been  chemically  so  constituted,  and  composed 
of  particles  of  superior  form  and  fineness  to  the  particles  of  water, 
sound  would  not  have  been  known  except  as  an  indescribable  sensa- 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


331 


lion.  This  is  established  by  the  fact  that  the  sound  communicated 
bv  the  particles  of  water  is  very  indistinct  in  comparison  to  that  com- 
municated by  the  atmosphere.  The  particles  of  water  are  not  so 
perfect  in  form  and  refinement  as  the  particles  of  the  atmosphere. 
Each  of  these  elements  has  ascended  above  the  angular  and  circular, 
and  holds  an  intermediate  position  between  the  spiral  and  vortical 
forms  — having  those  forms  that  are  adapted  to  the  transmutation  of 
the  lower  and  imperfect  to  the  higher  and  more  perfect  forms. 

The  water,  therefore,  is  a medium  by  which  gross  particles  are 
transferred  into  its  own  composition,  by  its  attractive  power  as  owing 
to  its  spiral  form.  And  the  atmosphere,  being  a higher  degree  of  the 
watery  element,  and  having  the  vortical  form,  possesses  a still  greater 
power  of  transferring  the  watery  element  into  its  composition.  Thus 
one  is  so  arranged  that  it  is  adapted  to  the  perfection  of  the  other. 
And  these  must  be  considered  as  owing  their  origin  to  the  rudimental 
forms. 

By  this  knowledge  of  the  constitution  of  the  atmosphere  may  be 
understood  the  phenomenon  of  vocal  sound.  It  is  evident  that  when 
the  will  excites  the  vocal  organs,  there  is  a communication  of  posi- 
tive power  constituted  of  more  perfect  particles  than  those  previously 
pervading  the  same  organs.  And  when  the  vocal  organs  are  thus 
excited,  they  become  mediums  for  the  descension  of  the  will.  This 
produces  a corresponding  action  upon  the  particles  of  the  atmosphere  ; 
and  the  first  particles  excited  communicate  their  excitement  to  the 
adjoining  ones,  and  thus  the  action  proceeds  from  one  particle  to 
another,  each  particle  modifying  the  same,  until  it  arrives  at  the  lab- 
yrinth of  the  ear,  where  it  becomes  suitably  modified  to  produce  a 
vibration  among  the  chambers  of  that  organ,  and  an  impression  is 
thereby  produced  upon  the  mind  of  another.  Thus  it  was  only  by 
the  delicate  modifications  of  sound,  which  is  at  first  only  an  excite- 
ment, that  such  a process  as  vocal  communication  was  ever  dis- 
covered. 


§ 72.  The  inhabitants  of  the  earth  thus  came  into  possession  of  a ' 
new  power,  only  in  consequence  of  the  unfolding  of  their  mental  fac- 
ulties. The  rudiments  of  vocal  language  are  thus  discovered.  Their 
sounds,  consisting  merely  of  monosyllables,  were  imperfect  — not  so 
considered  by  themselves,  but  by  subsequent  nations  which  have 
arranged  the  grammatical  laws  of  language. 

Language,  therefore,  is  a result  of  progressive  development ; and 


332 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


it  existed  in  an  imperfect  condition  ever  since  the  development  of 
the  law  of  Sensation.  From  that  moment  instinctive  signs  were  em- 
ployed by  the  animal  creations;  and  these  continued  to  grow  more 
and  more  perfect  until  the  establishment  and  present  condition  of  the 
human  inhabitants  of  the  earth.  Vocal,  verbal  communication,  could 
not  have  occurred  before  this  period  : for  previously  the  atmosphere 
was  too  grossly  constituted. 

Not  long  after  the  introduction  of  verbal  sounds  as  signs  of  impres- 
sions, the  inhabitants  became  disunited  in  social  affection  in  conse- 
quence of  the  misconceptions  conveyed  by  those  sounds.  They 
finally^  could  not  enjoy  each  other’s  society;  for  every  expression  of 
the  mind,  which  was  originally  pure  and  unadulterated,  was  now 
clothed  in  a false  sheath  ; and  this  created  disunity  and  confusion 
among  all  the  inhabitants. 

Previously  to  this,  mankind  were  in  an  innocent  and  pure  condi- 
tion ; but  by  the  constant  increase  of  these  causes,  they  became  dis- 
united and  repulsive  to  each  other.  This  has  been  distinguished  in 
the  original  history  as  a state  of  depravity.  It  was  in  this  manner 
that  their  eyes  were  opened  ; and  thus  they  were  enabled  to  see  their 
own  deceptions  and  imperfections.  And  having  'a  new  power  of 
conversing  with  one  another,  they  clothed  their  real  and  imperfect 
thoughts  by  false  sheaths  or  deceptive  aprons  of  obscurity. 

Thus  the  whole  race  became  dejected  and  depraved  : not  because 
they  had  violated  any  constitutional  faculty,  physical  or  mental,  but 
because  their  faculties  were  wrongly  and  imperfectly  developed. 
Such  is  the  origin  of  all  deception  — of  all  imperfection.  From  this 
moment  misery  and  impure  associations  had  their  origin.  By  con- 
tinued and  ill-directed  development  of  the  faculties,  vice  and  misery 
increased.  The  inhabitants  acted  more  and  more  against  each  oth- 
er’s interests,  and  thus  became  disorganized  and  rendered  entirely 
wretched  and  unhappy. 

At  the  period  when  this  wretchedness  prevailed  most  extensively, 
they  were  obliged  to  leave  the  happy  associations  of  their  former 
days,  even  the  beautiful  Eden  of  the  earth,  and  became  dispersed 
into  other  lands.  Three  distinct  nations  ultimately  became  estab- 
lished as  flowing  from  this  rudimental  fountain.  One  of  these  settled 
m the  interior  of  Asia  ; another  upon  its  eastern  borders  ; and  another 
in  the  lower  part  of  Africa. 

The  inhabitants  of  Asia,  which  were  then  divided  into  two  nations, 
consisting  of  the  original  and  the  branch,  sustained  a close  relation  to 


J 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


333 


each  other  and  to  the  nation  in  Africa.  Indeed,  they  were  all  the 
legitimate  children  of  the  original  inhabitants.  But  they  were  very 
different  in  constitutions  and  dispositions,  insomuch  that  they  could 
not  harmonize  consocially  wjth  each  other. 

There  was  existing  in  the  minds  of  one  nation  a disposition  to 
peace,  unity,  and  concert  of  action.  They  dwelt  harmoniously  to- 
gether; they  were  kind  and  gentle  to  each  other  and  to  their  brother 
nation,  insomuch  that  they  have  been  made  to  correspond  to  a shep- 
herd, and  their  amiable  and  gentle  dispositions  to  the  innocency  of 
sheep. 

The  opposite  nation,  which  dwelt  upon  the  borders  of  Asia,  pos- 
sessed the  various  dispositions  of  the  primary  inhabitants.  They 
were  imperfectly  organized  as  to  their  mental,  physical,  and  social 
constitutions.  They  manifested  the  passions  of  envy  and  retaliation. 
They  remained,  to  the  same  extent  as  were  the  previous  inhabitants, 
in  a misdirected  and  ill-developed  state.  From  this  cause  all  man- 
ner of  deception,  tyranny,  false  ambition,  and  impure  highminded- 
ness, arose  among  them.  They  were  an  imperfect  and  badly-organ- 
ized nation.  They  were  deceptive  and  universally  selfish  ; they  were 
haughty  and  uncongenial  in  all  their  social  and  intellectual  bearings 
and  relations.  And  there  was  such  a disunity  existing  among  them, 
that  they  were  compared  by  the  primitive  history  to  an  unholy  man, 
termed  Cain. 

And  the  opposite  branch  of  the  same  original  inhabitants  were,  as 
has  been  described,  entirely  dissimilar  in  all  their  natural  and  social 
characteristics,  and  more  perfect  in  their  general  constitutions.  These 
were,  in  the  language  of  correspondence,  compared  to  an  amiable, 
well-organized,  and  good  man,  named  Abel.  Thus  the  two  nations 
were  the  legitimate  children  or  branches  of  the  same  original  germ  ; 
and  these -were  designated  as  Cain  and  Abel. 

As  these  names  have  now  become  familiar,  it  can  not  be  inappro- 
priate to  use  them  in  designating  the  movements  of  these  two  nations. 
Cain  was  very  much  versed  in  scientifics.  He  claimed,  with  an  air 
of  self-sufficiency  and  false  dignity,  to  possess  the  knowledge  of  all 
things,  and  thus  felt  very  much  exalted  above, his  brother  Abel. 
Abel  was  an  unassuming,  kind,  and  gentle  being.  He  did  not  dis 
play  the  external,  deceptive  knowledges  which  characterized  all  of 
his  brother’s  actions.  He  was  a peaceful,  good,  and  honest  person, 
having  no  highmindedness,  but  felt  and  sustained  the  principle  of 
iustice  and  reciprocation  throughout  the  various  departments  of  his 


334 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


constitution.  His  whole  form  was  beautiful  and  reflective  of  interior 
beauty  : for  it  manifested  a general  symmetry  a'nd  a brilliant  expres- 
sion of  interior  principles,  which  rose  far  above  the  lofty  pretensions 
of  his  brother  Cain,  and  showed  that  he  associated  with  that  which 
was  more  pure  and  undefiled. 

This  peace  and  harmony  dwelt  within  the  bosom  of  Abel  ; while 
an  air  of  pomposity  and  polluted  selfishness  was  visible  in  the  person 
and  actions  of  Cain.  Thus  they  dwelt  together  for  a long  period  ; 
the  one  possessing  a meek  and  amiable,  and  the  other  a presumptive 
and  domineering  disposition.  And  after  dwelling  together  for  the 
period  spoken  of,  Cain,  as  a selfish  tyrant,  possessing  no  pure,  in- 
ternal sympathy,  rose  with  all  his  combined  forces  against  his  brother 
Abel.  And  the  latter,  being  so  meek,  gentle,  and  submissive,  yielded 
without  retaliation,  and  thus  fell  a sacrifice  to  a supercilious  and  self- 
exalted  bein<r  — even  his  brother! 

O 

Thus  the  two  nations  warred  together.  Devastation  was  the  re- 
sult: but  soon  the  terrific  combat  was  ended;  and  Cain,  the  over- 
powering nation,  usurped  the  wide  dominion  of  the  whole  earth  ! 

This  was  the  first  stage  of  imperfect  civilization.  It  corresponds 
precisely  with  the  second  and  third  orders  of  the  animal  creation. 
The  latter  were  gross  and  imperfectly  formed,  and  they  manifested 
an  impure,  ferocious,  and  repulsive  disposition.  They  were  in  the 
incipient  stages  of  animal  development,  even  as  these  two  nations 
were  in  the  incipient  stages  of  civilization  : and  they  varied  in  innu- 
merable respects,  even  as  the  different  nations  of  the  earth  have 
subsequently  varied. 

§ 73.  The  nation  (Cain)  which  superseded  the  other,  was  very 
well  versed  in  sensuous  knowledge,  and  retained  hereditarily  all  the 
imperfections  of  the  previous  inhabitants.  Its  people  soon  became 
sensible  of  their  defiled  condition.  They  became  extremely  de- 
praved and  wretched,  such  being  the  legitimate  fruit  of  physical, 
mental,  and  social  violations.  They  represented  a being  in  despair, 
suffering  as  they"  did  the  full  consequences  of  their  violations  : and 
thus  Cain  was  represented  as  saying,  “ My  punishment  is  greater 
than  I can  bear.”  This  was  an  humble  acknowledgment  — a true 
confession  of  depravity. 

And  it  is  thus  seen  that  the  unprogressed  and  incipient  stages  of 
civilization  erected  a monumental  demonstration  of  the  inevitable 
consequences  of  social  and  national  violation.  This  monument,  in- 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


335 


deed,  extends  its  turrets  above  the  nineteenth  century  And  that 
' violations  are  always  attended  by  corresponding  consequences,  is 
evident  in  every  department  of  Nature,  whether  organic  or  inorganic, 
animate  or  inanimate.  And  thus  the  germ  of  civilization  being  im- 
perfectly deposited,  unfavorably  situated,  and  imperfectly  developed, 
has  turned  the  true  faculties,  true  passions,  and  pure  associations  of 
man,  into  unholy  and  polluted  paths  ! 

Here,  then,  is  the  origin  and  cause  of  all  imperfection  : and  here 
was  the  monument  erected.  And  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth,  during 
the  many  ages  down  to  the  nineteenth  century,  have  not  been  able 
to  discover  the  cause  of  the  existing  imperfection,  or  to  remove  the 
foundation  of  this  fearful  monument,  and  erect  in  its  stead  a temple 
of  universal  peace,  harmony,  and  reciprocation.  Is  it  possible  that 
the  world  still  requires  kind  and  yet  positive  admonition  to  guide  and 
direct  them  into  the  peaceful  way  of  righteousness  ! 

After  the  nation  had  thus  conquered  all  that  was  good  and  amia- 
ble, it  removed  to  another  portion  of  the  earth,  which  was  further 
west,  and  almost  upon  the  European  continent.  Here  they  gradu- 
ally became  imperfectly  and  socially  organized  : and  as  it  was  a land 
not  fertile,  it  was  termed  “Nod  for  this  corresponds  to  barrenness. 

Here  they  gradually  multiplied  and  became  a great  nation.  They 
also  improved  as  to  their  internal  condition,  informing  themselves  to 
an  extent  upon  naturaEand  immutable  principles.  But  in  conse- 
quence of  their  previous  degraded  condition,  as  they  multiplied,  their 
hereditary  deceilfulness  also  increased.  They  thus  formed  an  ex- 
ternally-brilliant,  tyrannical  nation,  possessing  but  few  of  the  interior 
qualities  of  mind  in  any  high  degree  of  development. 

The  garden  of  Eden  literally  corresponds  to  peace  and  beauty. 
The  streams  of  water  that  were  described  as  flowing  through  the 
garden,  were  rivers  the  courses  of  which  have  since  been  changed  by 
the  volcanic  action  of  the  earth.  These  rivers  correspond  to  fertility. 
Adam  and  Eve  correspond  to  two  distinct  nations  — which  ultimately 
became  associated,  and  thus  formed  one,  in  the  interior  of  Asia. 
The  tree  of  knowledge  corresponds  to  the  undeveloped  embryo  of 
perfection  and  intelligence.  The  terms  good  and  evil  are  used  as 
expressive  of  the  legitimate  fruits  thereof : evil  being  the  gross,  im- 
perfect, and  undeveloped,  and  good  being  evil’s  perfection.  The 
animal  of  the  saurian  species  that  is  represented  as  being  more  subtle 
than  any  other  beast  of  the  earth,  corresponds  to  the  secret,  imper- 


336 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


ceptible  progress  of  an  unfavorable  and  unhappy  mental  development. 
And  eating  of  the  fruit  of  the  tree  of  knowledge  — of  good  and  evil 
— represents  an  experience  of  the  fruits  of  the  good,  which  at  once 
begets  a knowledge  of  evil.  Thus  it  is  that  experience  begets 
knowledge  : and  if  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth  had  not  seen  the 
very  lowest  degrees  of  evil  and  wretchedness,  the  subsequent  na- 
tions would  not  have  known  or  appreciated  that  which  stands  in  con- 
tradistinction. 

The  nations  (which  were  two  combined  as  one)  thus  obtained  the 
knowledge  of  good  and  evil  ; and  this  knowledge  corresponds  to  hav- 
ing their  eyes  opened.  And  becoming  thus  aware  of  their  evil  dis- 
positions, they  endeavored  to  conceal  them  by  making  external  gar- 
ments : thus  aprons  correspond  to  a fearful  secretiveness,  and  a dread 
of  having  their  corrupted  characters  openly  manifested.  This,  again, 
corresponds  to  depravity  : and  thus  they  conversed  deceitfully  with 
each  other. 

From  this  the  nation,  which  had  then  lost  their  high  degree  of  in 
nocence  and  purity  (merely  because  they  were  unfavorably  situated 
insomuch  that  their  situation  became  exceedingly  evil  and  vitiating), 
sank  to  a lower  degree  of  uncivilization.  From  them  sprang  the  two 
nations  designated  in  the  primitive  history  as  Cain  and  Abel  — the 
former  being  distinguished  for  external  show  and  highmindedness, 
and  the  latter  beingma  meek  and  unsophisticated  nation  whose  prin- 
ciples corresponded  to  the  innocence  of  sheep.  The  war  and  de- 
vastation that  arose  after  many  ages  (after  they  had  become  men  or 
great  nations)  correspond  to  the  predominance  of  ignorance  and  folly 
over  peace  and  goodness.  The  land  of  Nod  corresponds  to  barren- 
ness : and  the  multiplicity  of  the  nation  that  sojourned  in  that  portion 
of  the  earth  corresponds  to  the  prevalence  of  universal  artificiality 
over  all  that  is  naturally  pure  and  righteous. 

We  have  now  ascended  to  the  basis  of  all  theological  speculations 
of  the  nineteenth  century,  and  of  those  that  have  called  forth  the  en- 
ergies of  the  most  erudite  men  of  every  age  and  nation.  And  many 
speculators,  in  consequence  of  the  unsearchable  antiquity  of  the  doc- 
trines which  they  have  investigated,  have  become  entirely  deceived 
as  to  their  origin  and  the  foundation  on  which  they  rest. 

It  has  already  been  revealed  that  in  the  constitution  of  mankind 
there  existed  passions  and  principles  which  were  in  themelsves  good. 
But  after  the  advance  of  the  nations,  they,  by  misconceiving  the  true 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


337 


elements  of  their  nature,  created  unfavorable  circumstances,  by  which 
the  development  of  their  passions  and  principles  was  entirely  mis- 
guided ; and  consequently  they  became  a degenerate  and  wretch- 
ed race. 

Here,  then,  is  the  cause  of  the  present  imperfection  of  the  world. 
Being  misdirected  in  its  incipient  and  rudimental  stages,  civilization 
has  gradually  taken  various  courses,  and  these  have  been  subjected 
to  many  modifications,  until  at  the  present  period  the  disorganization 
is  so  radical  and  universal  that  no  inquirers  have  been  able  to  search 
out  its  foundation.  But  we  have  seen  that  this  consisted  in  the  va- 
rious conditions  that  were  incidentally  established  among  mankind 
in  consequence  of  the  uncultivated  state  of  their  mental  and  moral 
faculties,  and  of  these  being  improperly  directed.  From  these  causes 
arose  a universal  misunderstanding,  and  an  absolute  disorganization 
of  that  which  would  otherwise  have  been  well  sustained  and  con- 
trolled, and  which  also  constituted  the  very  essence  undeveloped  of 
pure  and  undefiled  nflorality.  Such,  then,  is  the  origin  of  evil ; and 
from  its  origin  many  dissimilar  consequences  have  followed,  varying 
according  to  the  civilized  or  uncivilized  condition  of  the  subsequent 
nations. 


§ 74.  Africa  at  this  time  contained  two  distinct  nations  — one  of 
these  being  the  original  branch  of  the  primitive  inhabitants,  and  the 
other  being  a part  of  the  same  nation,  only  disconnected  by  a dis- 
similarity of  disposition  and  government.  And  Asia  contained  three 
distinct  nations  — the  greatest  of  these  being  that  existing  in  the  in- 
terior, extending  its  dominion  to  Turkey;  another  being  upon  the 
border  of  the  continent ; while  the  third  existed  in  the  region  of  Jeru- 
salem. These  nations,  which  became  thus  disconnected,  endeavored 
to  live  apart  from  eacn  other’s  interests,  and  thereby  engendered  in 
their  own  communities  a mutual  hostility  toward  each  other.  This 
resulted  in  successive  and  destructive  wars  — not  carried  on  by  open 
combat  with  implements  of  destruction,  but  rather  by  devouring  each 
other  by  ingenious  and  fanatical  despotisms. 

It  would  not  be  proper  to  mention  the  descendant  nations  as  dis- 
tinct from  the  primitive  inhabitants  : for  in  reality  Africa  contained 
one  general  nation,  as  did  also  Asia  after  the  settlement  of  the  nation 
in  the  land  of  Nod.  These,  however,  divided  into  three  distinct 
branches,  one  of  which  located  in  a portion  of  the  earth  now  known 
as  China,  and  some  of  these,  again,  settled  in  Central  America. 

22 


338 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


They  became  disunited  in  proportion  to  the  dissimilarity  of  their 
dispositions,  being  from  the  first  rendered  variable  by  all  the  unfavor- 
able conditions  by  which  they  were  surrounded.  Some  of  these  na- 
tions (or  rather  parts  of  the  first  nation)  advanced  to  some  consider- 
able degree  of  social  and  intellectual  attainment  — these,  however, 
being  free  from  the  imaginative  conceptions  which  so  greatly  entered 
into  the  minds  of  the  succeeding  nations. 

They  had  not  as  yet  erected  any  houses  ; for  they  dwelt  in  in- 
geniously-constructed tents  made  of  the  foliage  that  was  so  abundant 
in  those  parts  of  the  earth.  They  had  not  as  yet  tilled  the  ground  : 
but  they  partook  of  such  vegetable  and  animal  forms  as  it  was  given 
them  to  know  by  instinctive  consciousness  were  suited  to  sustain 
their  physical  constitutions. 

Many  ages  elapsed  after  this  period  before  they  arrived  at  a suffi- 
cient degree  of  intelligence  to  erect  dwellings  made  from  the  very 
large  trees  of  those  continents.  But  there  could  be  observed  a steady 
advancement  in  natural  and  social  attainments  ; for  it  was  now  that 
they  began  to  arrange  their  vocal  signs  into  an  orderly  and  grammati- 
cal form.  Together  with  the  improvement  of  language,  the  intellec- 
tual faculties  became  gradually  unfolded  ; and  they  then  conceived 
the  rudiments  of  the  mechanic  arts,  and  were  soon  able  to  make  a 
useful  application  of  them. 

Not  long  after  this  the  nation  that  dwelt  in  Central  America  began 
to  improve  rather  more  extensively  than  any  of  the  older  and  kindred 
nations.  Having  ascended  to  a higher  degree  of  intellectual  devel- 
opment, they  began  to  till  the  previously-uncultivated  earth.  They 
could  see  a natural  adaptation  of  materials  to  the  unfolding  of  inte- 
rior principles,  such  as  would  redound  to  their  united  interests  ; and 
they  were  guided  partially  by  this  conviction  in  all  their  artificial 
and  mechanical  improvements.  Stones  were  soon  discovered  to  be 
useful  materials  for  the  building  of  more  convenient  and  agreeable 
dwellings. 

They  existed  in  this  condition  for  a few  centuries,  during  which 
time  there  was  a gradual  unfolding  of  knowledge  among  them.  And 
ultimately  there  existed  in  Central  America  a beautifully-constructed 
city,  formed  entirely  according  to  the  conceptions  of  beauty  which 
were  peculiar  to  their  then-uncultivated  intellects. 

The  inhabitants  of  Asia  and  Africa  remained  in  a degenerate  con- 
dition. Being  so  universally  disunited  in  consequence  of  their  im- 
perfect social  institutions,  it  became  necessary,  in  order  to  control 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


339 


the  people,  to  establish  over  them  an  arbitrary  government  — to  ap- 
point a ruler  who  might  exercise  despotic,  tyrannical  dominion;  and 
the  people  were  willing,  as  at  the  present  day,  to  submit  to  these 
unnatural  and  unholy  governments. 

These  inhabitants  began  gradually  to  decrease  in  stature  and 
strength,  according  to  the  change  of  the  elements  surrounding  them. 
They  were  previously  a large  and  athletic  people,  possessing  power- 
ful constitutions,  and  exercising  unlimited  control  over  all  the  lower 
species  in  the  animal  kingdom.  But  they  became  at  length  a degen- 
erate race  in  their  physical  as  well  as  social  organizations. 

The  inhabitants  of  the  earth  had  not  assumed  a lighter  color  than 
that  which  may  be  observed  in  the  Jalofs  and  Caffers.  The  condi- 
tion of  their  constitutions  was  owing  to  the  slow  unfolding  of  all  their 
essential  qualities  — which,  if  they  had  been  properly  directed,  and 
placed  in  the  path  of  prosperity  and  development,  would  have  ren- 
dered them  (as  the  same  would  have  rendered  the  world  of  mankind 
at  the  present  day)  a brilliant  and  harmonious  Brotherhood. 

§ 7-5.  The  present  degree  of  moral,  social,  and  intellectual  devel- 
opment, involves  subjects  of  deep  interest  to  the  most  profoundly- 
inquiring  minds,  among  which  class  theologians  sustain  a prominent 
position.  And  inasmuch  as  their  innumerable  opinions  are  generally 
the  subsequent  modifications  of  conceptions  of  the  primitive  and  un- 
cultivated inhabitants  of  the  earth,  they  will  feel  a decided  interest  in 
the  following  revealments  as  involving  the  truth  or  untruth  of  the  main 
features  of  their  psychological  theories.  For  as  we  have  now  as- 
cended to  the  origin  of  all  mythology,  of  all  heathenism,  of  all  civili- 
zation, and  truly-intellectual  development,  it  becomes  highly  neces- 
sary that  we  should  notice  distinctly  the  origin  of  all  important  con- 
ceptions which  have  led  the  minds  of  the  world,  through  successive 
generations,  into  many  unholy  and  imperfect  opinions. 

It  is  .distinctly  evident  to  the  observing  and  inquiring  mind  that  all 
dissimilarity  in  opinions  must  in  reality  be  owing  to  a difference  in 
the  degrees  in  which  different  minds  have  become  unfolded  to  the 
reception  of  truth.  All  minds  are  seemingly  converging  to  one  cen- 
tre, at  which  will  be  developed  the  perfected  knowledge  of  psycho- 
logical and  eternal  truth.  This  will  be  the  establishment  of  some 
vast,  comprehensive,  united  system  of  theology  — one  that  will  sus- 
tain an  inseparable  connexion  with  the  natural,  interior  elements  of 
man,  and  with  the  universal  laws  of  Nature,  and  likewise  will  unfold 


340 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


the  consoling  truths  in  reference  to  a future  and  interior  world.  It 
will  be  a theology  perfected  by  the  knowledge  of  scientific  truths, 
which  are  the  rudiments  of  higher  and  greater  truths,  and  by  the 
knowledge  of  the  unperverted  and  unpolluted  spiritual  nature  of  man 
as  being  the  representative  of  the  perfection  characterizing  the  uni- 
versal creations. 

In  the  subject  before  us,  then,  are  centred  the  inquiries  of  theolo- 
gians of  the  present  day.  And  the  discovery  of  the  source  from 
which  all  the  various  systems  of  theology  have  arisen,  will  prove  that 
the  many  paths  heretofore  travelled  by  theological  speculators  are 
only  so  many  degrees  of  mental  development,  each  being  determined 
by  the  peculiar  circumstances  to  the  influence  of  which  the  minds  of 
men  have  been  subjected.  And  these  paths  are  of  themselves  indis- 
tinct lines  of  truth  in  which  the  minds  of  all  previous  nations  have 
travelled  ; and  through  similar  lines  the  minds  of  all  subsequent  na- 
tions must  of  necessity  travel  in  order  to  arrive  properly  at  the  Fount- 
ain of  true  scientific  and  theological  knowledge. 

And  there  is  no  division  between  science,  philosophy,  metaphys- 
ics, and  religion.  For  the  first  is  the  rudiment  and  basis  of  the 
second.  The  second  illustrates  the  first,  and  typifies  the  third.  The 
third  unites  with  the  second,  and  flows  spontaneously  into  the  fourth. 
The  fourth  pervades  and  comprehends  them  all,  and  flows  as  spon- 
taneously to  a still  higher  degree  of  knowledge  and  perfection. 

Thus  nothing  is  natural  which  is  not  moral.  Thus  the  natural 
and  the  moral  are  conjoined  principles  dwelling  in  Nature  and  flow- 
ing out  of  truth.  All  things,  therefore,  are  good  in  themselves,  but 
consist  of  different  degrees  of  goodness,  and  each  is  necessary  to 
make  the  whole  an  harmonious  unity. 

The  metaphysician  has  entered  into  many  profound  investigations 
relating  to  the  mental  constitution  of  man.  He  has  endeavored  to 
discover  the  origin  of  passions  which  constitute  the  elements  of  the 
mind  ; the  origin  of  Sensation  (which  is  a principle  of  the  organiza- 
tion originating  in  its  inherent  essence) ; and  of  the  affections  and 
loves  (which  are  the  elements  of  all  interior  association) ; also  of 
Intelligence , which  consists  of  the  thoughts  of  the  substance  of  the 
mind.  And  in  endeavoring  to  search  out  the  existing  relations  be- 
tween these  variously-modified  elements,  he  has  arrived  at  various 
and  illegitimate  conclusions.  Not  being  able  to  discover  the  origin 
of  these  things,  or  the  nature  of  the  spiritual  composition,  metaphysi- 
cians have  reasoned  entirely  from  an  assumed  basis,  and  their  con- 


nature’s  divine  revelations.  341 

elusions  have  been  in  accordance  with  the  basis  on  which  they  were 
founded.  And  so  all  the  important  theological  inquiries  at  the  pres- 
ent time  are  involved,  as  to  the  legitimacy  of  their  results,  in  a proper 
unfolding  and  truthful  description  of  the  imaginative  imperfections 
originating  at  this  period  of  the  world’s  history. 

Some  of  the  inhabitants  of  Asia  had  not  improved  to  any  extent 
in  their  forms  of  vocal  communication.  Their  verbal  language  con- 
sisted merely  of  incoherent  sounds  made  by  the  concussion  of  the 
larynx  and  glottis;  and  these  not  being  varied  according  to  reason, 
they  became  socially  confused  and  ultimately  divided  into  many 
tribes.  These  settled  in  the  east  of  Asia,  in  the  interior,  and  on  the 
borders  joining  the  African  continent.  They  were  in  a very  unciv- 
ilized condition,  being  governed  generally  by  a sanguinary  discipline 
which  expressed  characteristics  but  little  above  the  higher  orders  of 
animals,  and  disconnected  them  completely  from  the  nations  in  the 
European  continent  and  in  Central  America. 

Here,  then,  is  manifested  all  the  disunity  legitimately  resulting 
from  a bad  organization  and  imperfect  situations  — a disunity  of  feel- 
ing, of  social  interests,  of  intellectual  attainment,  and  a destitution  of 
all  those  high  and  lofty  principles  that  characterize  a united  and 
happy  brotherhood. 

The  inhabitants  of  Central  America  had  advanced  more  than  the 
other  nations  in  the  arts,  sciences,  and  mechanical  inventions  ; but 
their  minds  were  yet  uncultivated  in  all  the  higher  branches  of  knowl- 
edge and  refinement.  They  had  advanced  also  in  language.  Every 
century  brought  a distinct  modification  in  their  form  of  vocal  com- 
munication: and  they  spoke  a tongue  so  primitive  that  no  analogy  to 
it  has  as  yet  been  discovered  in  the  elements  of  oriental  and  subse- 
quent languages.  It  possessed,  however,  some  inflections,  though 
these  were  more  imperfect  than  the  same  are  in  the  speech  of  the 
Sandwich-islanders. 

The  inhabitants  of  the  European  continent  (which  had  multiplied 
to  a great  nation)  had  not  ascended  to  any  important  degree  of  re- 
finement ; for  in  every  particular  they  were  far  below  the  condition 
of  the  nation  in  Central  America.  And  those  in  Africa  were,  if  pos- 
sible, in  a lower  degree  of  uncivilization  than  the  African  inhabitants 
of  the  present  day.  They  were,  however,  above  the  brutish  inhab- 
itants that  were  divided  into  castes  and  tribes  on  the  continent  of 
Asia. 

At  this  period  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth  all  lived  without  houses, 


342 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


with  the  exception  of  the  European  and  Central-American  nations. 
Vocal  sounds  were  as  dissimilar  as  their  social  and  intellectual  de- 
velopments. So  the  inhabitants  were  divided  into  every  degree  of 
physical  and  mental  disunity;  and  this  is  the  basis  of  the  disunity  yet 
existing  among  mankind  — though  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth  are 
now  perceptibly  converging  to  a higher  degree  of  unity  of  interests. 

About  this  period  the  imaginations  of  the  more  advanced  nations 
became  very  fertile,  and  were  of  a character  corresponding  with  the 
undeveloped  state  of  their  minds.  Imaginative  belief  began  in  this 
period  to  form  a conspicuous  feature  in  the  workings  of  the  human 
mind  ; and  it  is  well  to  mention  how  these  hallucinations  became 
established. 

After  the  first  inhabitants  of  the  earth  had  discovered  the  process 
of  expressing  thoughts  by  sounds,  the  confusion  of  understandings 
soon  became  permanently  established.  The  land  of  Asia  previously, 
and  indeed  up  to  this  time,  presented  a beautiful  landscape  of  bloom- 
ing fragrance,  inasmuch  as  that  geological  portion  of  the  earth  had 
advanced  in  rudimental  compositions  far  beyond  any  other  portions. 
After  this  confusion  of  longues,  the  inhabitants  became  disunited  in 
consequence  of  the  deceptions  practised  upon  each  other  — these 
arising  entirely  from  misconceptions  of  their  interior  relations  toward 
one  another.  Hence  arose  envy,  cruelty,  and  misery,  among  them. 
For  they  became  jealous  and  envious  of  each  other,  and  lost  entirely 
all  the  peaceful  principles  that  previously  united  them  instinctively 
together.  These  things  arise  from  a perversion  or  misdirection  of 
the  pure  passions  of  man,  and  from  an  unfavorable  development. 

As  a consequence  of  these  social  confusions,  and  of  these  adverse 
feelings  toward  each  other,  they  conceived  of  the  existence  of  an  im- 
perceptible enemy  which  they  supposed  to  be  instilling  into  their 
minds  a spirit  of  vengeance  and  retaliation,  and  generating  absolute 
evil.  This  belief  prevailed  among  them  to  a great  extent.  They 
attributed  the  evil  influence  to  the  peculiar  atmosphere  that  encom- 
passed the  earth,  believing  that  the  light  which  proceeded  from  the 
sun  possessed  the  power  of  imparting  to  it  these  malignant  influences. 
And  this  fancy  impressed  their  minds  the  deeper  from  the  fact  that 
they  always  abhorred  each  other  when  the  sun  apparently  rose  from 
the  depths  below  and  shone  upon  them.  Thus  was  engendered  a 
fear — to  the  existence  of  which  the  world  at  the  'present  day  can 
bear  witness. 

In  subsequent  periods,  after  the  nations  had  become  so  hostile  that 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


343 


they  warred  against  each  other,  the  conquering  ones,  settling  in  the 
west  of  Eden,  possessed  in  a still  more  definite  form  the  general 
opinions  of  their  ancestors.  But  these  opinions  now  became  modi- 
fied in  some  particulars.  Yet  all  the  inhabitants  feared  the  sun,  and 
more  especially  the  light  emanating  from  it.  Thus  arose  a dread  of 
]ight  — even  of  any  interior  or  mental  light,  which  might  otherwise 
have  illuminated  their  minds  and  ameliorated  their  social  condition. 
It  was  concerning  those  who  were  still  tinctured  with  this  feeling  that 
the  language  was  spoken  which  says,  “ Men  love  darkness  rather 
than  light,  because  their  deeds  are  evil.” 

Let  it  be  understood  that  the  inhabitants  feared  the  literal  light  of 
the  sun.  The  same  fear,  when  modified,  begat  a fear  of  the  sun 
itself.  And  this  corresponds  to  the  fear  of  receiving  too  much  mental 
light  — though  this  light,  if  it  had  been  properly  received,  would 
have  illuminated  the  interior  principle  of  man,  and  made  him  a prop- 
er representative  of  the  sphere  which  he  is  destined  ultimately  to 
occupy. 

The  succeeding  branches  of  this  nation,  which  required  many  gen- 
erations and  centuries  to  be  perfectly  established,  also  modified  ma- 
terially the  belief  of  their  ancestors. 

It  is  well  to  remark  that  this  is  the  very  basis  of  mythology  : yet  it 
is  too  remote  to  be  known  to  the  world  at  the  present  day. 

They  now  believed  the  sun  to  arise  from  an  indescribable  abyss, 
of  which  it  was  the  representative.  Clothed,  as  it  was,  with  a robe 
of  consuming  fire,  and  presenting  to  them  such  fearful  declarations, 
they  shuddered  at  the  contemplation  of  that  which  they  supposed  the 
sun  represented,  which  was  inconceivably  more  fiery.  Nothing  ex- 
cited such  deep  and  general  attention  among  the  first  inhabitants  of 
the  earth  as  the  sun  — appearing,  as  it  did,  to  rise  perpendicularly 
over  the  edge  of  the  ground  on  which  they  existed,  and  watching 
them  with  an  immoveable  and  fiery  eye  for  many  hours,  and  then 
sinking  correspondingly  on  the  opposite  side.  They  believed  that  it 
had  then  lost  all  its  fiery  garments,  and  was  returning  to  the  fountain 
of  fire  to  be  reclothed,  to  ascend  again  upon  the  opposite  side.  They 
therefore  believed  in  an  inconceivable  fountain  of  raging  fire.  For 
this  they  considered  absolutely  demonstrated  by  its  representative, 
the  sun,  which  had  been  a dread  to  all  previous  generations.  This, 
together  with  the  opinions  formerly  entertained,  constituted  the  faith 
of  the  nation  of  Central  America. 

It  is  well  to  remark  (and  the  remark  can  be  applied  to  the  present 


344 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


day)  that  a gross  and  imaginative  hallucination,  resulting  only  from 
the  disordered  and  confused  state  of  the  mental  faculties,  becomes 
modified  in  accordance  with  the  development  of  intelligence.  And 
in  proportion  to  the  fertility  of  the  conceptive  powers,  is  the  sublim- 
ity of  superstitious  imaginations.  Here,  then,  is  an  important  point 
for  the  consideration  of  the  theological  world. 

I am  distinctly  impressed  with  the  truthfulness  of  this  account  of 
the  original  condition  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth.  Thus  language, 
arts,  sciences,  consociality,  and  theological  theories,  advance  in  pro- 
portion to  the  advance  of  civilization. 

§ 76.  We  are  now  approaching  nearly  to  the  period  of  which 
records  are  contained  in  the  primitive  history  of  the  earth  and  its  in- 
habitants. And  before  there  was  a decided  change  in  the  condition 
of  ,the  world,  there  were  several  geological  transformations  and  vol- 
canic catastrophes,  which  altered  the  features  of  many  portions  of  the 
earth,  and  likewise  changed  the  courses  of  many  rivers  and  the  posi- 
tions of  many  seas.  And  as  this  is  the  last  that  has  occurred  in  the 
geological  history,  and  gave  rise  to  what  is  by  geologists  termed  the 
alluvial  formation , it  is  well  to  mention  the  important  occurrences  of 
this  period. 

The  change  was  evidently  necessary  for  the  requirements  of  the 
subsequent  inhabitants.  But  in  observing  a phenomenon  superfi- 
cially, the  mind  does  not  recognise  the  order  and  harmony  of  the 
workings  of  Nature’s  laws.  But  even  if  the  use  of  an  occurrence 
is  not  seen,  it  is  not  proper  to  question  the  wisdom  of  the  cause 
which  produced  it.  For  the  harmony  of  the  whole  grand  plan 
which  unites  in  one  Structure  a Univercoelum  of  Universes,  is  only 
seen  and  felt  when  viewed  in  its  general  aspect.  And  however 
plainly  an  occurrence  may  appear  to  us  as  the  result  of  a defect  in 
any  of  the  departments  of  the  general  plan,  this  does  not  prove  that 
it  is  so,  nor  is  it  in  reality  a sufficient  basis  on  which  to  found  any 
theory. 

Previous  to  the  period  under  contemplation,  the  earth  presented  a 
different  geographical  aspect  from  what  it  did  after  the  consummation 
of  the  volcanic  occurrences  referred  to.  The  north  of  England  and 
of  America  were  then  entirely  submerged  by  water,  as  also  were  the 
Australian  regions.  A great  portion  of  the  waters  of  the  Pacific 
ocean,  which  divides  the  continent  of  America  from  Asia,  then 
formed  the  seas  of  the  arctic  regions,  extending  toward  the  south  a 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


345 


narrow  strip  of  water  in  the  form  of  a river,  which  joined  the  gulf 
of  Mexico  and  the  Carribean  sea. 

Thus  the  inhabitants  of  Asia  could,  by  following  the  circuit  of 
narrow  strips  of  land,  reach  the  portion  of  the  earth  now  known  as 
Yucatan.  An  isolated  nation  also  extended  along  the  connected 
land  into  America.  And  from  these  originated  the  inferior  inhabi- 
tants that  have  been  found  upon  this  continent,  and  known  as  the 
American  Indians,  and  which  have  excited  so  many  queries  as  to 
their  origin. 

Many  of  the  islands  in  the  southern  and  western  portions  of  the 
earth  were  at  this  time  completely  concealed  by  the  sea  which  passes 
between  and  divides  the  eastern  and  western  hemispheres.  It  is  well 
to  remark  that  the  Sandwich  islands,  the  Friendly  islands,  and  the 
island  of  New  Holland,  are  the  three  prominent  ones  that  have  since 
become  dry  and  fertile. 

As  was  before  stated,  the  condition  of  the  atmosphere  was  such  as 
to  constantly  create  and  accumulate  extensive  icebergs,  these  exist- 
ing principally  in  the  northern  and  inundated  portion  of  the  earth. 
These  continued  for  many  centuries  after  the  previous  submersions 
which  occurred  at  the  close  of  the  cretaceous  and  during  the  tertiary 
period.  From  the  close  of  the  tertiary  period  up  to  the  present 
time,  there  did  not  occur  another  and  similar  inundation.  For  the 
changes  in  the  temperature  were  gradual,  and  the  great  mountains  of 
ice  were  as  gradually  melted  as  they  were  formed.  Thus  the  earth 
was  preserved  from  another  and  like  universal  submersion  until  the 
present  period,  which  is  marked  with  more  distinct  and  violent 
manifestations  than  any  of  the  previous  catastrophes. 

From  the  consummation  of  the  cretaceous  formation  to  the  present 
period,  there  have  elapsed  an  incalculable  number  of  ages  — during 
which  time  the  animal  kingdom  has  changed  its  main  forms  several 
times,  which  changes  were  marked  by  a complete  retiring  of  certain 
orders  of  animals,  and  a formation  of  new  and  more  perfect  organi- 
zations. These  modifications  occurred  among  the  lower  orders  of 
the  animal  creation,  and  from  these  there  was  a progress  upward  to 
the  production  of  the  quadrumana  ; and  from  these,  again,  through 
many  ascending  forms  to  the  ushering-in  of  the  lower  bimana  tribes ; 
and  from  these,  again,  up  to  the  creation  of  man  at  the  close  of  the 
sixth  day. 

It  is  well  to  understand  that  one  of  these  essential  changes  required 
nearly  a whole  century  — and  that  the  changes  were  innumerable, 


346 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


and  therefore  innumerable  ages  elapsed  during  the  ascension  of  the 
first  forms  of  the  fifth  day  to  the  organizations  of  the  period  under 
immediate  consideration.  It  is  therefore  beyond  the  ordinary  pow- 
ers of  computation  to  determine  the  exact  number  of  years  that 
elapsed  between  the  last  submersion  of  the  earth  and  the  present 
impending  changes. 

During  this  long  period  of  time,  the  atmosphere  and  water  became, 
as  in  previous  instances,  unequal  in  density  to  the  expansive  force 
of  the  igneous  materials  of  the  interior  of  the  earth.  This  is  purely 
an  effect  of  the  universal  law  of  progressive  ascension.  For  the 
water  and  atmosphere  together  constituted  the  fluid  and  gaseous  en- 
velope of  the  whole  earth.  The  action  of  one  determines  the  action 
and  constitution  of  the  other.  And  if  a change  in  these  elements 
occurs,  it  must  be  by  the  ascension  of  rudimental  particles  to  enter 
into  a higher  form  of  combination.  The  atmosphere  at  this  period 
had  been  modified  by  the  modifications  of  the  water  — and  this  by 
the  changes  experienced  by  the  earth,  and  this  by  the  modification 
of  its  interior.  So  it  is  well  to  understand  that  the  interior,  igneous 
composition  is  balanced  and  counteracted,  as  to  all  its  expansive  and 
eruptive  forces,  by  the  pressure  of  the  water  and  atmosphere.  The 
solid,  external  coating  of  the  earth  is  the  medium  by  which  the  two 
extreme  compositions  are  sustained  in  a state  of  equilibrium. 

Th  is  external  pressure  was  diminished  by  the, sublimation  and  re- 
composition of  each  element.  It  was  many  ages  before  the  whole 
Mass  entirely  lost  its  equilibrium  ; and  the  present  period  is  the  point 
of  time  when  this  inequality  occurred.  The  result  was  inevitable  : 
the  mass  in  the  interior  soon  became  confused  and  universally  dis- 
turbed. The  whole  fiery  ocean  was  in  a state  of  inconceivable 
agitation.  All  the  particles  assumed  impetuous  motions,  and  rushed 
to  different  parts  of  the  great  mass,  being  acted  on  by  the  expansive 
heat  of  the  interior  composition.  This  resulted  in  an  unimagina- 
ble expansion  of  the  particles  joining  the  crust  of  the  earth.  The 
result  was  the  mighty  catastrophe  of  which  the  whole  earth  now 
bears  evidence.  It  was  an  upheaval  of  the  entire  upper  portions 
of  England  and  America,  with  all  the  adjacent  parts.  Volcanoes 
that  had  before  given  vent  to  the  expanding  elements  of  the  inte- 
rior, were  at  this  time  rendered  entirely  useless  ; and  the  explosions 
which  followed  shook  the  earth  entirely  to  its  centre,  breaking  in 
some  parts  the  whole  combined  strata,  some  of  which  sank  and 
others  were  raised  to  an  immense  height.  Thus  geologists  have  no- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


347 


t*ced  many  prominences  in  which  the  upheaved  strata  seem  upon 
one  side  to  have  been  abruptly  broken,  while  upon  the  other  side 
they  are  gently  inclined.  These  may  be  observed  in  the  highlands 
of  Scotland  and  in  the  Grampian  mountains  ; also  in  the  upper  por- 
tions of  the  European  continent. 

§ 77.  The  changes  of  the  face  of  the  earth  at  this  time  established 
new  positions  for  the  water,  that  before  was  in  general  a united  body, 
extending  through  many  valleys  streams  that  joined  the  same  body 
of  water  in  other  portions.  But  the  great  change  that  occurred  at 
this  time  on  both  sides  of  the  equator  formed  new  islands,  new  lands, 
and  new  bodies  of  water.  At  this  time  the  Pacific  ocean  suddenly 
flowed  over  the  land  that  was  before  an  extended  valley,  which,  being 
sunk  lower,  gave  room  for  its  admission  ; and  since  that  time  this 
ocean  has  divided  the  two  continents.  Also  the  Mediterranean  and 
Atlantic  at  that  time  became  more  confirmed  in  their  present  forms. 
And  from  that  time  unto  the  present  period  the  earth  has  not  changed 
in  its  general  aspect  or  geographical  features. 

The  enormous  icebergs  that  were  existing  in  the  northern  portions 
of  the  earth  became  at  once  dissolved  by  the  evolution  of  heat  at 
.those  regions.  This  resulted  in  a general  inundation  of  all  the  low, 
dry  land  of  the  earth,  though  the  water  did  not  ascend  to  the  tops  of 
ordinary  mountains.  The  inhabitants  that  were  upon  the  continents 
before  described  were  partially  destroyed.  The  inhabitants  of  Eu- 
rope, as  settled  according  to  the  previous  descriptions,  were  almost 
entirely  destroyed.  The  inhabitants  of  Asia  and  Africa  were  gener- 
ally undisturbed,  although  in  some  parts,  as  for  instance  where  now 
exists  the  Caspian  sea,  there  dwelt  a multitude  which  were  swallowed 
up  by  the  great  convulsion  ; also  a small  nation  upon  the  mouth  of 
the  Ganges,  and  another  toward  its  upper  extremity.  This  river  did 
not  exist  to  any  great  extent  until  some  portions  near  its  then-existing 
borders  sank  with  their  inhabitants ; and  thus  the  river  was  formed  in 
its  present  condition. 

The  inhabitants  of  Yucatan,  which  then  extended  to  the  gulf  of 
Mexico,  were  likewise  partially  destroyed ; for  the  gulf  and  the  Car- 
ribean  sea  were  formed  by  the  sinking  of  inhabited  portions  ; while 
those  that  dwelt  entirely  in  Yucatan  were  undisturbed.  About  one 
half  of  the  inhabitants  of  Asia  and  Africa  were  buried  in  the  interior 
of  the  earth. 

Thus  about  two  thirds  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth  were  de- 


34S 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


stroyed  by  the  great  earthquake  and  inundation.  A few  remained  in 
Asia,  and  more  in  Africa;  and  these,  with  those  that  inhabited  Yu- 
catan, were  the  only  inhabitants  remaining  upon  the  earth,  with  the 
exception  of  three  isolated  tribes  in  North  America. 

This  occurrence  produced  a change  in  every  department  of  ani- 
mate and  inanimate  Nature.  The  water  and  atmosphere  became 
now  permanently  established,  composed  of  the  same  elements  in 
nearly  the  same  proportions  as  constitute  them  at  the  present  day. 
The  atmosphere  being  an  ultimate  of  the  water,  and  pervading  it, 
became  a useful  agent  to  transfer  the  same  into  its  own  composition, 
and  by  means  of  the  same  operation  the  earth  is  refreshed  by  rain. 
And  by  virtue  of  light  derived  from  particles  constituting  the  atmo- 
sphere of  the  sun,  the  atmosphere  of  the  earth  is  rendered  congenial 
to  all  living  forms  ; and  by  the  same  means  the  water  is  also  rendered 
suitable  to  sustain  and  nourish  its  living  inhabitants.  And  by  virtue 
of  the  united  whole,  the  earth  is  rendered  fertile  and  blooming. 

So  the  atmosphere  and  water  became  so  constituted  as  to  balance 
the  expansive  force  of  the  interior  substance.  And  so  the  earth  has 
remained  in  a stable  condition  ever  since  the  period  of  the  universal 
change. 

Many  forms  in  the  vegetable  kingdom  were  destroyed  ; but  theit 
places  were  soon  supplied  by  kindred  and  more  perfect  forms.  But 
it  is  not  necessary  to  enter  into  any  particular  description  concerning 
the  conditions  of  the  vegetable  and  animal  kingdoms  : but  attention 
is  directed  to  the  condition  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth.  This  pe- 
riod is  represented  as  the  cleansing  of  the  earth  of  all  its  impure  and 
unrighteous  forms.  The  flood,  however,  is  described  in  the  primi- 
tive history  as  rather  more  universal  than  it  actually  was.  It  is 
termed  a flood,  and  is  represented  as  a universal  one — -which  corre- 
sponded to  an  entire  geological  and  geographical  change  of  many  por- 
tions of  the  earth,  together  with  the  utter  destruction  of  many  inhab- 
itants that  were  very  unhappily  situated  and  very  imperfectly  developed. 

The  inhabitants  that  are  represented  as  being  saved  were  those 
that  dwelt  in  the  'land  of  Yucatan.  For  the  others  were  generally 
destroyed,  but  few  remaining  in  comparison  to  the  vast  population  of 
both  continents. 

The  original  description  of  the  flood  is,  however,  an  entire  spirit- 
ual correspondence — representing  in  an  imperfect  manner  this  great 
catastrophe,  which  was  the  basis  of  the  whole  illustration.  The  ex- 
act correspondence  will  be  discovered  and  related  hereafter : but  it  is 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


349 


well  to  mention  that  it  was  by  this  volcanic  occurrence  and  this  great 
inundation  that  the  correspondence  was  suggested,  having  an  internal 
meaning  ; for  it  is  impossible  for  the  account  to  have  a literal  signifi- 
cation. And  as  this  portion  of  the  history  of  the  earth  does  not  sus- 
tain a close  relation  to  the  meaning  of  the  language  in  the  primitive 
history,  it  is  not  necessary  that  I should  at  this  time  reconcile  the 
apparent  discrepancy  between  the  original  and  the  present  descrip- 
, tion.  I am  impressed  that  the  internal  meaning  of  many  sayings  that 
were  apparently  literal  has  not  as  yet  been  properly  and  generally 
understood  by  mankind,  notwithstanding  their  true  meaning  was  un- 
derstood by  those  who  wrote  them,  and  has  since  been  unfolded  to 
the  world  by  an  expanded  and  suitable  intellect. 

The  inhabitants  of  Yucatan  were  far  more  advanced  in  the  arts, 
sciences,  and  general  intellectual  attainments,  than  any  other  nations 
upon  the  earth.  This  land  was  not  the  first  inhabited,  but  was 
peopled  by  a branch  nation  that  came  from  Asia.  Those  that  existed 
in  Asia  were  yet  in  an  uncultivated  and  uncivilized  state.  So  like- 
wise were  those  in  Africa.  Those  that  dwelt  in  North  America 
were  also  very  uncultivated  as  to  their  physical,  mental,  and  social 
condition,  being  the  ancestors  of  the  subsequent  Indians.  These 
were  at  this  period  the  only  inhabitants  of  the  earth.  And  from  this 
period  it  is  well  to  date  the  early  history  of  the  human  race  — con- 
sidering all  the  previous  inhabitants  as  only  in  the  incipient  stages  of 
this  condition  of  mankind,  which  condition  represents  all  the  subse- 
quent conditions  of  the  race  throughout  the  whole  earth. 

§ 78.  Soon  after  this  period,  as  will  be  discovered,  the  nations  be- 
gan to  conceive  of  substantial  signs  as  representatives  and  correspon- 
dences of  things  and  thoughts.  These  are  the  hieroglyphics  ; and 
from  these  the  subsequent  historians  derived  their  knowledge  and 
impressions.  There  is  no  real  knowledge  to  be  obtained  from  hie- 
roglyphics or  history  concerning  the  earth  or  its  inhabitants  antece- 
dent to  this  period.  And  theological  and  mythological  impressions 
had  their  origin  nearly  as  far  back  as  this  period,  at  which  the  inhab- 
itants of  the  earth  at  the  present  day  date  their  origin. 

And  at  this  period  the  history  of  language  begins  ; and  from  this 
it  may  be  traced  through  the  various  and  successive  nations  to  its 
present  condition.  So  this  is  a period  in  the  earth’s  history  marked 
by  more  important  considerations  than  almost  any  other  period  : for 
we  have  now  ascended  to  the  basis  of  all  subsequent  conditions  of 


.350  nature’s  divine  revelations. 

the  world  down  to  the  present  day.  And  it  is  within  this  period  that 
man  has  become  so  far  perfected  as  he  now  is  in  all  his  powers  and 
faculties,  and  has  acquired  the  ability  to  understand  the  important 
truths  developed  in  the  gradual  progress  of  every  nation,  and  by 
which  he  can  understand  the  more  interior  truths  that  have,  up  to 
the  nineteenth  century,  remained  entirely  concealed  from  the  human 
mind. 

And  it  will  be  a universal  relief  to  mankind  from  their  present 
misconceptions,  to  understand  the  important  truths  concerning  the 
interior  and  ultimate  life.  It  will  then  be  discovered  that  our  ideas 
do  not  flow  from  the  external  to  the  internal,  but  rather  flow  sponta- 
neously from  the  interior  through  the  organization  into  the  external 
world,  there  to  perceive  and  reason  upon  the  stupendous  workings 
of  Nature,  rendered  prolific,  beautiful,  and  congenial,  by  the  reflux 
of  interior  principles.  Then  our  conceptions  will  be  from  the  inte- 
rior, and  not  created,  as  all  conceptions  have  been  supposed  to  be, 
by  the  intrusion  of  external  things.  For  let  this  idea  be  as  universal 
as  it  is  true,  That  thoughts  are  not  generated  by  external  things,  but 
that  they  are  evolved  from  the  living  principle  within.  And  thus  it 
will  be  made  plain  to  the  reasoning  faculties  of  man  that  all  external 
forms , from  the  smallest  insect  to  man,  to  Nature,  to  the  Solar  Sys- 
tem, to  the  Univerccelum,  are  merely  images  shadowing  forth  the 
interior  and  creative  causes  — the  essential  principles,  the  divine 
Mind  — and  that  all  forms  are  merely  receptacles  of  the  living,  active 
principles  that  generate  within  them  Motion,  Life,  Sensation,  and  Intel- 
ligence. F or  as  the  vegetable  kingdom  receives  nourishment  from  the 
light  and  heat  emanating  from  the  sun,  so  does  the  animal  kingdom,  in- 
cluding man,  receive  spiritual  light  and  life  from  the  Light  which  is 
the  Love  of  the  divine  Mind,  directed  by  Wisdom  : and  so  Love  is 
the  Life,  and  Wisdom  is  the  Organizer. 

When  we  conceive  of  an  organization,  we  are  at  once  impressed 
with  the  existence  of  parts  and  qualities  necessary  to  constitute  such 
properly.  The  whole  is  composed  of  parts,  and  the  parts  are  neces- 
sary to  the  whole  ; yet  these  do  not  of  themselves  constitute  a perfect 
organization.  For  an  arch  may  be  composed  of  an  indefinite  num- 
ber of  stones,  without  which  the  arch  could  not  exist ; but  suppose 
the  arch  to  be  disorganized,  this  would  not  alter  the  fact  that  the 
stones  are  the  parts,  and  remain  in  substance  unchanged.  In  order, 
therefore,  to  form  a perfect  organization,  it  is  not  only  necessary  to 
have  every  part  adapted  to  the  whole,  and  each  part  to  perform  a use 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


351 


and  fulfil  a purpose,  indicating  a final  cause,  but  it  is  necessary  that 
these  parts  should  have  life  and  motion,  and  enter  into  mutual  rela- 
tions with  each  other,  and  thus  form  a whole  or  combined  unity,  in 
which  a use  must  be  manifest.  And  the  use  accomplished  is  the  end 
of  the  organization. 

The  organization  of  man  is  of  itself  perfect.  In  every  department 
there  is  an  equal  adaptation  — an  endless  amount  of  uses  — which 
converge  to  as  many  ends  ; and  these  when  conjoined  display  one 
perfect  Use  and  End  for  which  the  whole  was  created. 

Thus  man  is  existing.  He  is  composed  of  an  infinite  number  of 
parts  ; he  is  a microcosm ; he  is  a united  Whole.  He  could  not  be 
so  if  there  were  not  a use  in  the  plan,  or  if  there  wrere  not  an  end  to 
be  accomplished.  He  is  therefore  rendered  a proper  receptable  of 
the  spontaneous  breathings  of  the  Great  Positive  Mind,  through  Na- 
ture, by  Wisdom,  to  form  and  individualize  the  immortal  spirit  to 
dwell  in  the  world  within. 

Thus  man  is  an  organization,  not  composed  of  a mutual  agreement 
of  parts  through  the  indefinite  workings  of  an  impetuous  Nature,  but 
is  rather  the  perfect  form,  the  highest  image,  the  designed  organiza- 
tion, of  the  divine  Mind  that  pervades  immensity ! 


§ 79.  It  now  becomes  necessary  that  I should  dismiss  all  reflec- 
tions concerning  the  use  and  end  of  the  human  organization,  and 
confine  my  descriptions  to  that  which  flows  legitimately  out  of  the 
perfected  physical  conditions  of  this  era.  I am  at  present  to  say 
nothing  concerning  the  moral  and  intellectual  developments  of  the 
human  race,  nor  concerning  the  conception  of  theological  opinions 
and  the  gradual  confirmation  of  them  in  the  minds  of  mankind,  nor 
concerning  the  modifications  of  these  opinions  by  each  nation  through 
^subsequent  periods,  until  the  identity  of  the  original  conceptions  was 
lost.  Matters  referring  to  the  general  deluge,  and  to  other  general 
occurrences,  will  now  be  dismissed  from  notice  until  a notice  of 
them  comes  in  as  a consequence  of  their  theological  originations. 
But  the  object  of  the  following  descriptions  will  be  to  present  to  view 
the  stream  of  mankind,  from  its  origin,  through  its  many  circuitous 
courses,  until  each  nation,  as  a branch  of  the  original  stream,  has 
contributed  to  establish  the  general  condition  of  the  world  in  the 
nineteenth  century.  I commence,  then,  at  the  birthplace  of  the 
lowest  types  of  mankind,  and  trace  them  through  their  various  de- 


352 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


velopments,  until  they  form  what  may  be  termed  a perfect  Man  of 
the  present  period. 

Asia,  as  all  mythological  traditions  truly  indicate,  cradled  the  first- 
born of  the  human  species,  and  nourished  them  from  the  lowest 
stages  of  infant  innocence  to  the  period  of  the  extension  of  their  pow- 
ers and  faculties,  and  until  the  change  of  their  local  habitations  to  vari- 
ous other  portions  of  the  earth.  To  describe  these  developments  and 
changes  in  a connected  way,  from  the  time  the  animal  assumed  the 
form  of  the  human  at  a period  before  mentioned,  it  will  be  necessary 
to  commence  at  the  first  evolving  from  one  germ  of  the  forms  and 
properties  of  a subsequently-distributed  race. 

In  the  beginning,  there  was  existing  in  the  interior  of  eastern  Asia 
an  association  composed  of  the  first  human  beings  who  dwelt  upon 
the  face  of  the  earth.  On  a parallel  with  this  family  was  subsequently 
located  another  one  of  similar  type,  hut  of  a weaker  and  more  effemi- 
nate nature  ; and  they  were  not  so  large  in  stature,  or  so  numerous, 
as  were  the  former.  These  gradually  became  acquainted  with  each 
other  by  following  out  the  inclinations  of  their  constitution,  which  led 
them  to  seek  association  one  with  another. 

1 am  impressed  with  the  reason  why  two  families  were  thus  con 
gregated  in  different  places,  at  first  without  the  knowledge  of  each 
other’s  existence.  It  will  appear  from  research  respecting  the  mam- 
miferous  species  approaching  to  man,  that  there  were  originally  two 
distinct  moulds  or  forms  of  these,  ascending  at  the  same  time  nearly 
to  the  human  type  of  organization.  One  had  existed  in  the  arctic 
regions,  and  in  the  upper  portions  of  Asia,  ever  since  the  great  revo- 
lution in  the  types  of  the  animal  kingdom  at  the  close  of  the  fifth  day 
of  creation.  From  that  period  these  gradually  ascended  to  the  hu- 
man type  which  characterized  those  who  were  existing  in  the  interior 
of  eastern  Asia.  By  a corresponding  modification,  the  mammiferae 
that  were  existing  in  the  interior  portion  of  western  Asia  ascended  to 
the  effeminate  type  previously  described.  These  located  in  western 
Asia,  and  the  former  in  eastern  Asia. 

But  they  did  not  discover  each  other’s  locality  until  they  had  by 
industry  accumulated  social  wealth  in  abundance.  The  ease  which 
then  occurred  in  their  social  condition  gave  to  the  elder  members  of 
each  family  a desire  to  discover  new  and  more  congenial  portions  of 
the  land  upon  which  they  lived.  And  I am  distinctly  impressed 
that  it  was  this  undeveloped  and  effeminate  race  that  originally  dis- 
covered the  location  of  the  older  and  more  matured  inhabitants  of 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


353 


the  interior  of  eastern  Asia.  The  period  of  time  that  elapsed  is  pre- 
sented to  me  indefinitely : but  it  was  not  more  than  one  century  and 
a half  from  the  time  that  they  became  individually  located  before 
they  became  conjoined  one  with  another.  Then  the  two  formed  one 
family. 

During  the  lapse  of  another  century,  two  branches  sprang  from 
this  family  and  flowed,  the  one  into  the  lower  portion  of  Asia  now 
known  as  Egypt,  and  the  other  into  the  interior  of  Africa.  In  fifty 
years  from  this  period,  these  offshoots  grew  into  large  families,  and 
one  of  them  ultimately  grew  into  a powerful  nation.  Those  that 
were  in  Egypt,  however,  sprang  from  the  father  more  matured  stock 
of  the  primitive  family,  and  thus  retained  all  the  peculiar  characteris- 
tics of  their  gross  constitutions,  which  were  powerfully  energetic,  and 
the  strength  of  which  was  determined  by  the  great  development  of 
muscular  fibres  and  solids  in  their  physical  systems.  They  also 
possessed  great  nervous  power,  which  was  sustained  by  a strict  ad- 
herence to  the  requirements  of  their  bodies  and  an  abstinence  from 
organic  violation  ; from  which  cause  also  they  were  undiseased.  But 
they  were  unlike  those  that  settled  in  Africa,  and  who  continued  to 
possess  all  the  imperfect  and  delicate  characteristics  of  the  more  un- 
developed portions  of  the  original  family. 

And  about  this  period  (that  is,  about  one  half  a century  from  the 
time  they  became  permanently  located)  the  inhabitants  that  dwelt  in 
Egypt  rose  against  the  other  nation,  in  Africa,  with  all  the  vengeance 
of  infuriated  brutality,  and  warred  with  them  until  they  destroyed 
nearly  three  fourths  of  their  number,  and  dispersed  the  remaining 
few  to  various  portions  of  the  same  continent.  This  battle  is  repre- 
sented almost  perfectly  by  the  battle  which  was  spoken  of  as  being 
nearly  consummated  on  the  planet  Mercury  : for  they  fought  with 
the  same  kind  of  implements  (that  is,  sharply-hewn  stones),  and  man- 
ifested all  the  ferocious  dispositions  which  are  displayed  by  some 
classes  of  animals,  but  which  are  modified  and  rendered  a little  more 
perfect  in  man.  And  these  were  at  this  time  displayed  with  all  the 
ingenuity  of  which,  their  mental  faculties  were  capable,  and  with  all 
the  force  of  their  powerful  physical  constitutions.  Those  that  became 
scattered  upon  the  continent  of  Africa  I lose  all  trace  of,  because  they 
evidently  became  extinct. 

^ 80.  Now,  again,  are  only  two  nations  existing  upon  the  face  of 
the  earth  — the  one  in  Egypt  and  the  other  in  eastern  Asia.  My 

23 


354 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


impression  now  leads  me  to  a period  one  century  in  advance  of  tins 
period.  And  now  the  nation  which  dwelt  in  Egypt  became  located 
upon  the  southern  portion  of  Europe.  At  this  period  they  had  ad- 
vanced so  far  in  civilized  life  that  they  constructed,  in  a most  eccen- 
tric form,  a beautiful  city.  They  did  not  employ  stones,  but  rather 
trees,  which  they  arranged  one  above  another  against  huge  trees  al- 
ready matured.  The  tops  of  these  they  broke  or  bent  to  each  other, 
and  then  thatched  them  in  a singular  manner;  and  thus  they  formed 
the  roofs  of  their  dwellings.  In  this  manner  did  they  construct  resi- 
dences of  sufficient  number  to  contain  every  person  belonging  to 
their  nation  ; and  this  I am  impressed  was  the  first  conception  of  ar- 
chitecture in  the  uncultivated  minds  of  the  original  inhabitants. 

At  this  period  Europe  yielded  a low  type  of  the  oats  and  rye, 
which,  however,  may  not  be  termed  such,  as  it  bore  no  resemblance 
to,  the  present  forms  of  those  grains.  But  I use  these  terms  merely 
in  order  to  convey  to  the  mind  the  article  of  food  which  was  at  that 
time  yielded  upon  many  portions  of  the  European  continent. 

This  nation  increased  in  numbers  excessively,'  and  finally  grew 
into  such  a mass  of  uncultivated  intellects,  that,  being  unguided,  and 
incapable  of  directing  themselves,  they  became  disunited.  And  in 
nearly  one  century  more  from  this  period,  branches  of  this  same 
people  established  in  Central  and  South  America  two  still  more 
beautiful  cities. 

Meanwhile  those  that  dwelt  in  Asia  set  about  another  voyage  of 
discovery  : at  which  time  the  Pacific  ocean  was  unformed,  which  fact 
rendered  it  possible  for  them  to  pass  from  the  eastern  to  the  western 
hemisphere,  or  to  gain  safely  the  upper  portions  of  America.  It  has, 
however,  been  supposed  that  the  aboriginal  inhabitants  of  this  conti- 
nent must  have  crossed  Behring’s  straits  : but  this  hypothesis  requires 
no  direct  refutation,  as  it  is  evident  that  those  who  suggested  it  did 
this  in  endeavoring  to  conceive  of  the  possibility  of  the  migration  of 
this  people. 

But  I will  proceed  to  notice  the  inhabitants  of  the  southern  portion 
of  this  western  hemisphere,  as  it  at  this  time  contained  an  advanced 
nation  of  the  original  family.  The  portions  upon  which  the  whole 
nation,  dividing  into  various  branches,  became  located,  are  now 
known  as  Spain  and  Yucatan,  extending  their  more  minute  branch- 
es to  the  portion  now  occupied  by  the  gulf  of  Mexico,  and  also 
to  Brazil  and  Buenos  Ayres.  They  constructed  here,  according  to 
the  previous  description,  their  cities  of  stone  and  other  durable  ma- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


355 


terials,  building  very  low  and  extensive  dwellings,  with  apartments 
similar  to  those  which  are  constructed  for  habitations  at  the  present 
day.  They  had  not  as  yet  attained  to  the  conceptions  of  architecture 
which  were  possessed  by  the  inhabitants  of  those  portions  after  the 
lapse  of  five  centuries,  during  which  time  portions  of  South  America 
suffered  much  from  volcanic  catastrophes,  which  formed  the  Mexican 
gulf,  Caribbean  sea,  and  Pacific  ocean.  During  these  appalling  oc- 
currences, nation  after  nation  was  destroyed  ; and  there  was  a de- 
population of  almost  every  portion  of  these  regions.  But  from  the 
time  of  which  I have  spoken  as  the  commencement  of  the  existence 
of  these  cities,  down  to  the  fifth  century  afterward,  the  inhabitants 
became  very  much  advanced  in  external  information,  scientific  attain- 
ment, and  hieroglyphical  architecture. 

At  this  time  became  founded  the  cities  of  Herculaneum,*  Yucatan, 
and  a primary  city  near  the  site  of  Pompeii.  But  as  details  concern- 
ing the  social  and  physical  conditions  of  these  inhabitants  would  be 
unimportant  in  respect  to  the  object  of  my  present  impressions,  I will 
say  in  reference  to  them  at  the  present  time  no  more  — but  will  pur- 
sue the  general  subject  as  before  marked  out,  noticing  the  upbuild- 
ing, flourishing,  and  advancement,  of  each  nation,  city,  and  kingdom, 
together  with  the  subsequent  downfall  thereof.  So,  then,  I proceed 
to  the  period  of  the  upbuilding  of  the  city  of  Pompeii,  and  to  the 
permanent  establishment  of  five  nations  that  arose  upon  the  face  of 
the  earth  about  this  period. 

The  inhabitants  of  Yucatan  extended  their  rights  of  possession  al- 
most to  the  islands  now  known  as  the  West  Indies,  a portion  of  the 
same  nation  being  established  in  Herculaneum.  And  Pompeii  peo- 
pled various  portions  existing  southeast  and  north  of  this  city,  and 
sent  forth  a branch  which  peopled  Brazil,  extending  to  its  extreme 
boundaries.  But  Pompeii  as  a great  city,  and  her  inhabitants  as  a 
great  nation,  yielded  all  their  beauty,  grandeur,  and  magnificence  — 
ignorance,  pride,  and  arrogance  — to  the  annihilating  hand  of  volcanic 
action.  And  by  such  agency  she  and  her  possessions  were  buried 
— the  tops  of  the  highest  dwellings  being  covered  to  the  thickness 
of  many  feet  by  the  contents  of  a bursting  crater.  I call  this  Pompeii 
for  the  sake  of  distinction  ; hut  in  reality  a city  that  was  subsequently 
founded  near  the  same  spot  assumed  for  the  first  time  the  name  of 

* The  speaker  directs  me  here  to  say  that  these  modern  names  of  cities  and  terri- 
tories are  used  simply  to  designate  localities,  and  for  the  sake  of  distinction ; but  that 
no  places  of  those  names  existed  at  the  time  spoken  of. 


356 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


Pompeii.  And  the  city  of  which  I speak  can  only  be  known  to  have 
existed  by  discoveries  of  some  of  its  still-existing  materials,  which 
may  be  made  by  seeking  at  a place  a little  north  of  the  city  that  has 
subsequently  been  destroyed  in  a similar  manner.  But  I have  not 
yet  arrived  at  the  period  of  the  city  known  as  Pompeii  to  mankind 
of  the  nineteenth  century. 

But  I come  now  to  speak  of  various  other  portions  that  were  simi- 
larly depopulated,  and  also  of  Yucatan.  And  it  was  in  this  portion 
of  the  world  that  the  greatest  ingenuity  and  refinement  existed  in  the 
art  of  architecture  and  in  various  other  ornamental  and  hieroglyphical 
arts  that  ever  existed,  either  before  the  founding  of  these  cities,  or 
since  that  period.  Let  it  be  distinctly  understood,  however,  that 
these  vast  conceptions  and  attainments  continued  to  flourish  in  an 
equal  manner  for  nearly  seven  centuries. 

I will  now  advance  one  more  century,  and  describe  new  branches 
of  the  human  family  — inhabitants  that  passed  from  Asia  toward 
America  — some  of  which  reached  this  continent,  and  others  of  which 
settled  upon  intermediate  fertile  portions  which  were  suited  to  their 
fancy  and  inclinations.  And  I am  distinctly  impressed  that  while 
they  were  thus  forming  families  and  associated  nations  on  these  por- 
tions, the  Pacific  ocean  became  established  in  its  present  form,  form- 
ing the  islands  known  as  the  Philippine  islands,  Society  islands, 
Sandwich  islands,  &c.  And  the  population  of  these  islands,  thus 
surrounded  by  a body  of  water  impassable  by  any  means  of  naviga- 
tion which  they  then  possessed,  were  unable  to  change  their  habita- 
tion. But  happily  these  portions  were  fertile,  and  yielded  produce 
suitable  to  sustain  their  existence.  And  these  very  inhabitants  grad- 
ually became  modified  into  those  at  present  existing  upon  these  isl- 
ands, and  whose  character  and  dispositions  will  be  understood  by 
perusing  the  pages  of  modern  geography. 

Those  that  remained  upon  the  continent  of  Europe  settled  at  this 
time  in  some  portions  of  northern  France.  And  those  that  remained 
in  Asia  had,  as  1 have  described,  begun  distributing  themselves  to 
other  portions  of  the  earth  ; and  a type  of  them  is  slightly  visible  in 
the  aboriginal  inhabitants  of  America,  and  also  of  the  Sandwich  and 
Philippine  islands.  And  at  the  consummation  of  the  period  which 
I have  last  mentioned,  a distinguished  and  powerful  tribe,  detaching 
themselves  from  the  southern  nations,  proceeded  along  the  European 
continent,  along  Africa  and  Asia,  and  settled  precisely  where  pre- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


357 


viously  existed  the  Indo-Europeans,  and  on  the  portion  that  has  been 
modernly  termed  Egypt. 

§ 81.  I now  pass  to  the  close  of  another  century.  And  this  cen- 
tury is  characterized  more  distinctly  by  the  rapid  advancement  of 
civilization  and  intelligence.  Egypt  became  founded,  settled,  and 
confirmed,  as  it  was  known  to  subsequent  historians.  From  Egypt  a 
branch  or  tribe  sprang  which  settled  Jerusalem  and  Jericho  ; and 
from  these  and  Egypt  sprang  a colony  which  discovered  Greece  and 
founded  and  upbuilt  a city.  From  Greece  other  portions  of  Europe 
were  permanently  peopled. 

Th  us  after  Egypt  became  settled,  Jericho  and  Jerusalem  were 
founded,  together  with  Greece  and  other  nations,  all  of  which  sprang 
entirely  from  the  original  settlers  of  Egypt.  From  other  parts  of 
Europe  flowed  a stream  into  the  portion  now  known  as  Spain  ; and 
thus  Spain  was  re-inhabited. 

At  the  close  of  the  previous  century,  hieroglyphics  became  suffi- 
ciently perfect  to  shadow  forth  intelligibly  the  thing,  substance,  or 
thought,  which  the  inhabitants  desired  to  represent : and  it  was  not 
before  the  close  of  the  last  century  and  the  introduction  of  the  pres- 
ent, that  the  records  commenced  from  which  the  world  has  received 
any  correct  or  definite  information  concerning  the  primitive  inhabi- 
tants of  the  earth  and  their  early  history.  I find  it  impossible,  ac- 
cording to  my  present  correct  impressions,  to  discover,  by  examining 
all  written  records  of  every  age  and  generation,  even  one  single  inti- 
mation of  the  true  condition  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth,  of  their 
social  advancements  and  intellectual  attainments,  or  of  any  of  their 
early  history,  extending  further  into  the  recesses  of  primitive  ages 
than  the  close  of  the  last  century,  or  the  period  of  the  permanent  es- 
tablishment of  various  cities  in  the  eastern  hemisphere.  Still  I dis- 
cover an  unbroken  connexion  between  the  actual  previous  conditions 
and  those  of  which  we  are  informed  by  hieroglyphical  and  mytho- 
logical tradition. 

So,  then,  at  the  close  of  the  century  of  which  I have  last  spoken, 
we  find  the  earth  inhabited  in  this  manner  : An  uncultivated  and  un- 
civilized tribe  existed  upon  the  western  or  American  continent ; two 
large  and  flourishing  cities  existed  in  the  southern  portion  of  the  same 
continent,  or  in  Central  and  South  America,  their  dependencies  com- 
prehending the  West  Indies,  upon  which  islands  a few  tribes  are 
existing  ; also  Spain  and  Portugal  were  inhabited  by  a small  tribe 


358 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


proceeding  from  the  Grecians  of  the  European  continent ; north 
France  and  Britain  sustained  a small,  detached  nation  from  the  Gre- 
cians ; and  Greece,  Jerusalem  and  Jericho,  and  Egypt,  were  inhab- 
ited as  before  stated  ; and  China,  Japan,  Denmark,  Sweden,  Prussia, 
Russia,  Norway,  and  Siberia,  each  sustained  detached  communities 
from  various  portions  of  the  earth.  These  various  countries,  cities, 
kingdoms,  and  empires,  which  I have  designated  by  their  modern 
names,  were  in  this  way,  one  after  another,  discovered,  founded,  and 
settled,  by  the  various  and  heterogeneous  tribes  that  were  then  exist- 
ing upon  the  face  of  the  earth. 

It  was  owing  to  the  dissimilarity  of  constitutions  as  adapted  to  cli- 
mate and  food,  to  the  difference  in  their  habits  and  modes  of  life,  to 
the  difference  in  their  degrees  of  advancement  in  science  and  archi- 
tecture, to  their  different  degrees  and  kinds  of  ambition,  and  to  the 
general  superficial  development  of  their  qualities,  that  the  inhabitants 
of  the  whole  earth  became  thus  distributed.  And  thus  the  whole 
race  at  this  time  was  much  diversified  in  appearance  and  constitution. 
And  they  have  subsequently  been  classified  and  reclassified,  according 
to  each  modification  of  the  original  type  : and  at  the  present  time,  even 
the  antiquarian  and  philologist  who  has  searched  most  deeply  into  all  the 
palaetiological  sciences,  is,  as  I am  distinctly  impressed,  unable  to  form  a 
correct  conclusion  respecting  the  earth’s  history  previous  to  the  pe- 
riod last  contemplated.  But  some  have  made  powerful  exertions  to 
reconcile  supposed  previous  conditions  with  the  a priori  hypothesis 
that  each  of  these  species  must  of  necessity  have  had  an  exclusive 
original  type,  of  which  those  that  are  existing  are  the  unchanged 
representatives. 

But  as  this  is  the  period  when  commenced  the  first  historical  rec- 
ords concerning  the  early  state  of  the  earth  and  its  inhabitants,  I am 
impressed  to  speak  more  particularly  concerning  all  subsequent  con- 
ditions, circumstances,  and  developments,  that  flowed  out  of  the 
conditions  of  this  period  and  characterized  the  human  race  through 
all  subsequent  ages  down  to  the  nineteenth  century.  Yet  I am 
not  directed  to  recapitulate  that  already  known  to  the  world,  but 
merely  to  present  that  which  is  not  correctly  obtained  from  oriental 
tradition,  and  to  classify  distinctly  the  human  species  so  that  we  may 
properly  conceive  of  the  origin  of  language.  And  when  we  cor 
rectly  conceive  of  the  origin  of  language,  an  understanding  of  the 
origin  of  theological  conceptions  will  legitimately  flow  out  there- 
from. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


359 


The  traditional  records  of  the  primitive  nations  of  Asia  are  among 
the  first  historical  accounts  we  have  of  the  original  nations.  And  it 
is  known  that  China  possesses  a record  of  the  world  which  extends 
forty  thousand  years  back  of  the  nineteenth  century.  And  various 
parts  of  Asia  bear  evidence  of  the  long  and  steady  development  of 
science  and  civilization,  although  other  portions  indicate  the  most 
uncultivated  and  barbarous  conditions  of  the  human  race.  But  re- 
liable historical  information  as  concerning  the  arts  and  refinements 
of  the  primitive  nations,  and  their  mechanical  and  architectural  knowl- 
edge, extends  no  further  back  than  the  peopling  of  Egypt.  But  the 
marks  of  distribution  and  civilization  since  then  are  distinctly  discov- 
erable in  the  historical  records  of  each  nation,  from  the  period  under 
review  down  to  the  nineteenth  century  — though  these  appear  in  a 
connected  form  among  some  nations,  and  among  others  they  are  en- 
tirely traditional,  indefinite,  and  mythological. 

But  it  was  given  me  to  know  that  South  America  and  Mexico 
were  inhabited  many  centuries  before  Spain  became  inhabited  as 
known  to  historians.  And  these  southern  inhabitants  highly  cul- 
tivated the  powers  of  mechanical  construction  ; and  these  acquire- 
ments were  retained  by  subsequent  generations,  when  a branch  of 
the  inhabitants  migrated  to  Egypt,  and  there  became  a large  and  ad- 
vanced nation.  Then  from  Egypt  sprang  Greece  ; and  from  Greece 
many  portions  of  Europe  were  settled  ; and  from  these,  again,  Rome, 
and  also  other  cities  within  its  once  vast  and  extensive  empire,  be- 
came founded  and  inhabited.  And  the  settlers  of  Rome  continued 
to  flourish  in  all  the  mechanical  and  architectural  attainments,  as  did 
the  ancients  of  Greece  ; but  they  left  uncultivated  all  those  high 
and  lofty  faculities  from  which  arise  the  most  sublime  and  truthful 
thoughts  and  sentiments,  and  which,  if  properly  applied,  would 
have  redeemed  the  race  from  the  then  despotic  dominions  of  external 
artificiality. 

In  this  manner,  the  various  portions  of  the  European  continent  of 
which  we  have  spoken  became  inhabited  and  settled. 

$ 82.  It  is  unnecessary  to  mention  the  devastating  wars,  famines, 
and  pestilences,  and  the  desolating  invasions  by  deception,  fraud,  and 
stratagem,  that  ultimately  came  upon  each  nation  throughout  the  east- 
ern hemisphere,  arising  from  the  uncultivated  and  barbarous  disposi- 
tions which  characterized  the  people  of  each  nation,  and  which  ele- 
vated the  potentate  of  each  to  the  highest  degree  of  arrogance  and 


360 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


selfishness.  And  a false  direction,  and  an  unnatural  envy  which 
sank  deep  into  the  bosom  of  each  nation,  poisoned  the  tender  affec- 
tions of  each  to  the  highest  possible  degree,  and  diffused  among  them 
hatred  and  wretchedness.  And  thus  wars  innumerable  pervaded  the 
eastern  kingdoms  — all  resulting  from  the  misdirection  of  human 
thought  and  judgment.  The  result  of  these  peace-destroying,  deso- 
lating wars  was,  that  the  nations  that  were  compelled  to  yield  became 
dispersed  among  other  nations,  and  thus  the  identity  of  many  tribes, 
and  even  types,  of  the  human  species,  have  become  entirely  de- 
stroyed. 

Some  of  these  invasions  and  persecutions  continued  for  nearly  a 
century,  during  which  time  nightly  incursions  were  made  upon  each 
other,  in  accordance  with  their  usual  mode  of  warfare.  And  during 
these  wars  many  cities  that  displayed  beauty  and  grandeur,  owing  to 
the. high  cultivation  of  the  fine  arts  and  mechanical  inventions,  were 
destroyed.  Not  only  have  cities  been  thus  swept  from  the  face  of 
the  earth,  but  whole  nations  have  fallen  a sacrifice  to  overpowering 
nations.  And  somewhat  in  the  same  manner  were  these  wars  con- 
tinued for  a long  time. 

But  there  was  a period  when  the  nations  became  settled  into  a 
more  harmonious  and  united  condition,  which  for  a time  quieted  the 
unnatural  dispositions  to  war,  and  breathed  general  sympathy,  peace, 
and  reciprocation.  But  soon  after  this  period,  nation  after  nation 
again  became  involved  in  war,  some  of  which  were  successful,  and 
others  were  nearly  banished  from  the  earth. 

There  is  an  event  now  presented  for  description  which  will  illus- 
trate the  character  of  those  impetuous  wars.  After  Judea  had  be- 
come peopled,  the  inhabitants,  not  possessing  judgment  sufficient  to 
govern  themselves,  chose  a presuming  chieftain  as  their  head,  and 
placed  him  in  their  city  to  exert  power  and  influence  over  the  whole 
nation.  After  this  chieftain  had  warred  with  parts  of  his  own  king- 
dom, and  incited  hostility  and  bloodshed  in  many  before-undisturbed 
portions  thereof,  he  died.  And  so  likewise  Saul  ascended  the  throne 
of  Judea  ; and  he  assumed  the  character  of  a tyrannical  king,  and 
warred  with  the  Jebusites  in  Palestine,  which,  after  being  dispersed, 
became  mingled  with  other  nations.  And  ultimately  David  usurped 
the  throne,  and  changed  the  seat  of  government  to  Jerusalem,  which 
had  at  this  lime  grown  into  a beautiful  and  magnificent  city.  Here 
he,  assisted  by  others,  warred  with  the  Syrians,  Chaldeans,  Amalek- 
ites,  Edomites,  Ammonites,  and  Persians,  and  succeeded  in  destroying 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


361 


the  identity  of  some  of  these  nations,  and  of  those  tribes  that  were 
existing  along  the  borders  of  the  Euphrates,  and  soon  extended  his 
kingdom  from  the  Euphrates  to  the  Mediterranean,  and  from  the 
Phoenician  territory  to  the  Arabian  gulf.  This,  then,  is  an  example 
of  the  results  of  misdirected  human  judgment,  characterized  as  it 
is  by  all  the  features  of  tyranny,  arrogance,  despotism,  and  enthu- 
siasm. 

And  when  the  people  of  England  were  governed  by  King  Alfred 
the  Great,  the  Danes  or  Normans  rose  against  the  Saxons  with  feel- 
ings of  bitterness  and  persecuting  hostility.  And  they  succeeded  in 
overpowering  the  Saxons,  and  held  for  a time  the  dominion  over 
them.  But  Alfred,  being  in  possession  of  a more  cultivated  judg- 
ment as  well  as  a higher  sense  of  honor  and  justice,  invented  means  to 
regain  his  kingdom  by  dispersing  the  Normans  who  then  had  pos- 
session. In  this  undertaking  he  was  eminently  successful,  insomuch 
that  he  gained  power  over  the  Danes  or  Normans,  and  they  were 
compelled  to  sue  for  deliverance.  For  a knowledge  of  this  occur- 
rence peruse  the  early  history  of  the  Saxons. 

I am  impressed  to  describe  these  dissimilar  events  in  order  to 
show  the  great  difference  between  the  inhabitants  of  early  periods 
and  those  of  the  present  day.  The  Saxons,  when  they  were  invaded, 
did  not  possess  the  art  and  implements  of  war  in  so  high  a state  of 
perfection  as  did  the  Israelites  when  they  fought  against  and  subdued 
those  neighboring  nations.  So  a difference  is  manifest  between  the 
uncultivated  and  unnatural  passions  of  primitive  nations  and  the  more 
advanced  but  still  more  corrupted  passions  which  characterize  the 
nations  of  subsequent  periods. 

A large  portion  of  Asia  has  at  different  periods  been  in  the  posses 
sion  of  the  Assyrians,  Chaldeans,  Persians,  Mongols,  Syrians,  Tar- 
tars, and  Turks.  And  so  Asia,  and  likewise  other  portions  of  the 
earth,  have  been  at  different  periods  subject  to  the  struggles  and  wars 
of  successive  nations  for  the  ascendency  over  each  other,  and  to  the 
outbreaks  of  all  the  unnatural  and  unholy  passions  excited  by  these 
wars ; and  the  whole  resulted  entirely  from  the  misdirection  of  the 
minds  of  the  youthful  generations.  Thus  various  changes  have  oc- 
curred in  the  social  and  moral  conditions  of  the  early  inhabitants  of 
our  earth.  And  they  have  changed  and  rechanged  local  habitations 
until  the  eastern  hemisphere  has  become  peopled  as  it  is  known  to 
be  at  this  present  period. 


362 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


§ S3.  I am  now  directed  to  speak  concerning  the  western  hemi- 
sphere, or  the  portion  of  the  earth  that  was  unknown  to  any  of  the 
inhabitants  of  the  world  a few  centuries  ago,  except  to  those  \vho 
dwelt  upon  it  from  the  time  they  immigrated  from  the  interior  of 
Asia.  This  portion  of  the  earth  was  in  early  periods  fertile  in  many 
of  the  lower  types  of  the  vegetable  kingdom,  and  gave  birth  in  its 
northern  and  southern  regions  to  many  huge  and  ferocious  forms  of 
the  animal  kingdom,  and  some  of  which  also  traversed  the  forests  of 
the  interior  of  the  continent.  I am  not  impressed  with  the  number 
of  inhabitants  that  dwelt  upon  this  land,  but  it  appears  distinctly 
clear  that  there  were  three  tribes,  occupying  different  portions  of  the 
land.  All  of  these,  however,  preserved  the  general  type  and  charac- 
teristics of  the  original  inhabitants,  who,  as  it  is  given  me  to  know, 
crossed  from  Asia  into  America  about  the  period  that  a tribe  de- 
scended into  the  southern  portions.  This  appears  to  have  been 
about  nine  thousand  years  antecedent  to  this  day. 

And  thus  they  lived  (having,  soon  after  they  became  settled,  been 
divided  from  the  rest  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth  by  the  submer- 
sion of  the  land  or  forming  of  the  Pacific  ocean),  cultivating  such 
vegetable  forms  as  have  since  been  termed  rye  and  corn.  And  other 
kinds  of  fruit,  which  have  since  been  named,  formed  also  a part  of 
their  food.  They  multiplied  and  formed  three  distinct  tribes  or  semi- 
nations, in  about  one  century  and  a half. 

Subsequently,  tribe  after  tribe  was  formed  ; and  each  possessing 
the  same  constitutional  desire  for  discovery,  would  travel  to  various 
portions  of  the  hemisphere.  But  being  disunited  from  the  nations 
that  were  civilized  and  enlightened  in  the  intricacies  of  the  arts  and 
sciences,  they  retained  all  the  grossness  of  their  unadvanced  progeni- 
tors, with  the  exception  of  the  slight  improvement  resulting  from  the 
gradual  experience  which  each  tribe  and  generation  accumulated  from 
the  conditions  and  circumstances  to  which  it  was  subjected,  and  from 
the  limited  manifestations  of  natural  genius  which  occasionally  oc- 
curred among  them. 

And  thus  they  dwelt,  encouraging  the  spontaneous  conceptions  of 
a more  truthful  theology  than  existed  among  any  other  of  the  nations 
of  the  earth  — deriving  the  same  from  the  imposing  grandeur,  loveli- 
ness, beauty,  and  majesty,  of  all  things  in  Nature,  and  from  the  mag- 
nificent stellar  architecture  under  which  they  lived,  and  upon  which 
they  could  gaze  with  wonder,  awe,  and  adoration.  I am  impressed 
that  they  came  nearer  to  a truthful  conception  concerning  the  higher 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


363 


spheres  than  the  inhabitants  of  any  other  portion  of  the  earth,  in  that 
or  any  other  age  or  generation.  But  as  this  subject  is  connected 
with  our  theological  researches,  it  is  not  proper  to  reveal  more  on  it 
at  present. 

Thus  did  the  aboriginal  inhabitants  of  this  continent  exist  for  many 
centuries,  advancing  very  imperceptibly  in  any  of  the  natural  and  su- 
perficial attainments  of  other  nations.  And  thus  were  they  existing 
when  this  portion  of  the  earth  was  discovered  and  settled  by  a colony 
which  came  from  the  north  of  Europe.  After  this  time,  the  popula- 
tion of  European  origin  increased  rapidly  ; and  as  they  increased  in 
numbers  and  power,  the  original  inhabitants  fled  from  their  presence. 
They  felt  that  those  who  came  from  Europe  were  of  a nature  and 
disposition  antagonistic  and  repulsive  to  them ; and  thus  at  first  they 
were  afraid.  But  on  becoming  more  habituated  to  the  customs  and 
manners  of  the  colonists,  they  became  settled,  and  admired  their 
goods,  but  retained  the  same  repulsive  awrn  on  coming  into  their 
presence. 

But  the  European  inhabitants,  soon  discovering  that  they  could,  by 
exercising  their  superior  force  and  skill,  obtain  the  crops  and  stores  of 
food  within  their  possession,  rose  up  against  the  Indians  and  dispersed 
them  to  other  portions  of  the  land.  This  incited  for  the  first  time 
within  their  breasts,  the  feeling  of  hostility,  vengeance,  and  retaliation  ; 
and  this  impelled  them  to  indefatigable  perseverance  in  bloodshed 
and  invasion.  Many  tribes  thereby  lost  their  identity.  Thus  the 
aboriginal  and  European  inhabitants  were  hostile  to  each  other. 

At  a subsequent  period,  the  inhabitants  of  the  eastern  hemisphere 
immigrated  to  this  portion  of  the  earth  in  abundance,  and  thus  found- 
ed and  established  cities  displaying  a high  degree  of  all  the  arts  and 
sciences,  which  the  inhabitants  had  fortunately  imbibed  from  early 
impression  and  cultivation.  By  these  means  the  people  were  ena- 
bled to  accumulate  wealth,  and  to  render  their  condition  far  superior 
in  a social  point  of  view  to  that  of  the  rude  inhabitants  which  prece- 
ded them  ; and  these  advantages  flowed  from  a high  degree  of  just 
action,  of  proper  judgment,  of  economy,  industry,  and  magnanimity. 

But  in  proportion  to  the  blessings  which  flowed  from  the  much 
happier  conditions  and  circumstances  in  which  the  inhabitants  of  this 
land  were  placed,  did  the  passion  of  envy  and  jealousy  inspire  the 
nation  from  which  they  sprang.  They  could  not  rest  tranquil  in 
view  of  the  great  contrast  between  despotic  and  liberal  government. 
And  by  the  feelings  thus  created,  they  were  incited  to  demand  a 


364 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


surrender  of  the  rights  of  this  people,  and  to  seek  to  neutralize  their 
then-existing  privileges  by  depositing  in  their  midst  the  germ  of  tyr- 
anny and  usurpation,  and  thus  to  subject  the  whole  nation  to  pain, 
poverty,  wretchedness,  and  despotic  bondage. 

But  the  latter  people  had  increased  to  a great  nation,  though  this 
was  small  in  comparison  to  that  from  which  they  sprang.  However, 
their  facilities  and  natural  advantages  transcended  entirely  those  of 
the  nation  that  came  against  them  ; and  being  impelled  by  the  in- 
spiring thought  of  freedom,  they  fought  against  the  unjust  invasion 
of  their  own  parent-country,  and  gained  triumphantly  the  victory  over 
potential  despotism. 

In  this  manner  have  nations  warred  with  nations  — even  nations 
which  have  given  birth  to  other  nations  have  thus  risen  up  in  violent 
hostility  against  their  own  legitimate  offspring  ! And  each,  posses- 
sing the  sentiment  of  natural  dignity,  has  resented  the  invasion.  And 
thus  have  men  poured  out  the  living  blood  of  one  another,  reaping 
no  lessons  from  the  undisturbed  tranquillity  of  their  parent  Nature 
which  breathed  them  into  being  ; recognising  no  high  principles  of 
justice  and  reciprocation  ; but  rather,  at  the  sacrifice  of  all  these  es- 
sential principles,  they  have  fought  one  with  another  as  if  Nature  had 
in  them  misconceived,  and  mis-adapted  her  harmonious,  divine,  and 
immortal  principles  ! 

The  western  hemisphere  became  thus  peopled,  the  minutiae  of 
the  history  of  which  may  be  traced  in  the  writings  of  modern  histo- 
rians. So  also  is  the  national  history  of  other  countries  on  record, 
and  speaks  but  too  plainly  of  the  errors  of  bygone  ages. 

Who  now  can  read  with  undisturbed  feelings  the  records  of  the 
barbarous  massacres,  inhuman  persecutions,  and  unnatural  and  cor- 
rupt conditions,  that  are  contained  in  the  history  of  every  nation  upon 
the  face  of  the  earth  ? Who  can  contemplate  the  persecutions  of 
centuries  past  with  feelings  of  pleasure  or  complacency  ? Who 
among  the  inhabitants  of  the  whole  earth  can  with  feelings  of  pleasure 
peruse  the  records  of  the  destructive  and  immoral  proceedings  of 
chieftains,  potentates,  kings,  popes,  and  emperors,  who  were  uplifted 
in  their  own  minds  and  wielded  the  almost  omnipotent  influence  of 
a superficial  and  chimerical  theology  ? Have  not  ingenious  and  de- 
signing men  appealed  to  the  mythological  gods  of  their  respective 
nations  to  sanctify  their  despotic  governments?  Has  not  one  chief- 
tain after  another  proceeded  in  the  same  manner  to  carry  out  his 
misdirected  and  unnatural  desires,  at  the  absolute  sacrifice  of  all 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


365 


morality,  and  of  all  natural  and  divine  principles  ? O Man,  whom 
Nature  by  her  immortal  energies  has  created  ! can  you  not  now  see 
the  towering  monuments  erected  from  the  materials  of  past  history, 
to  remind  subsequent  generations  of  the  results  of  the  misdirection 
of  man’s  faculties  and  the  pollution  of  his  internal  possessions  ? Doi 
you  not  now  see  that  these  monuments  will  be  reared  still  higher  by 
generations  yet  unborn,  if  you  do  not  exert  your  powers  to  remove 
their  foundations,  and  to  erect  in  their  stead  the  temple  of  light,  lib- 
erty, peace,  and  righteousness  ? Remain  unmoved,  and  the  great 
ocean  of  ignorance,  folly,  and  imbecility,  will  rise  to  its  highest  tide, 
and  you  will  be  but  floating  particles  upon  its  surface.  But  exert 
your  powers  as  truth  and  duty  require,  and  the  sparkling  rill  of  hu- 
man progress  will  glide  onward  through  the  many  recesses  of  social 
existence,  and  its  many  tributaries  will  all  converge  to  form  one  grand 
stream  of  natural  thought  and  affection,  and  this  will  flow  onward 
until  it  is  merged  in  the  great  ocean  of  universal  knowledge  and 
peace.  And  this  ocean  will  flow  onward  with  a tide  that  shall  never 
ebb,  throughout  the  realms  of  the  immortal  spheres  ! 

The  germ  of  purity  and  goodness,  of  love  and  wisdom,  of  morality 
and  happiness,  is  in  man.  Become  instructed,  therefore,  concerning 
its  existence  and  essential  qualities,  so  that  it  may  be  caressed,  fos- 
tered, and  cultivated  — so  that  it  may  send  forth  roots  that  will  gather 
nourishment  from  the  congenial  elements  around  it,  and  spontane- 
ously unfold  a substantial  body,  one  that  can  not  be  shaken  or  re- 
moved. Let  this,  again,  put  forth  tender  branches  that  will  extend 
throughout  the  avenues  of  Nature;  and  let  these  branches  unfold  the 
buds  of  innocence  and  the  blossoms  of  beauty  and  righteousness  that 
will  breathe  forth  a fragrance  of  celestial  love  and  wisdom  ascending 
to  the  highest  pom  of  perfection. 


34.  The  whole  world  is  now  peopled  by  beings  of  the  most 
diversified  characters  and  dispositions,  each  nation  and  tribe  differing 
from  others  in  habits,  customs,  and  government  — each  partaking  of 
different  particles  of  food,  breathing  a different  atmosphere,  display- 
ing different  features  of  anatomical  structure  and  physiological  devel- 
opment, having  different  complexions,  speaking  different  languages 
and  dialects,  possessing  different  primitive  traditions,  endeavoring  to 
sustain  different  opinions,  political  and  theological,  and  being  actu- 
ated by  different  motives  and  different  conceptions  of  the  just  and 


366 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


good.  Tims  is  the  earth  peopled  : and  thus  has  Nature  “ put  forth 
her  most  tender  efforts  to  yield  a.  happy  race.” 

But  as  the  history  of  every  nation  will  set  forth  its  own  experience, 
I am  not  impressed  to  enter  into  the  minutiae  thereof.  But  in  order 
to  present  a glance  at  the  vast  field  of  human  history,  I have  thus 
generalized  the  race  from  the  period  it  assumed  the  form  of  the 
human,  and  was  properly  termed  Man,  to  the  present  distribution  of 
the  branches  of  the  original  family  over  the  face  of  the  earth. 

They  have  been  properly  classified  into  five  distinct  varieties, 
though  it  is  not  true  that  there  are  five  types  of  the  human  family. 
"*For  it  can  be  demonstrated  upon  anatomical  and  physiological  prin- 
ciples, that  the  human  race  as  now  existing,  with  all  the  diversified 
conditions  and  developments  which  distinguish  its  five  classible  vari- 
eties, has  ascended  from  one  original  type. 

The  varieties  of  mankind  have  been  classified  in  the  following 
manner  : First,'  the  Caucasians , which  extended  from  India  into 
north  Africa  and  into  Europe  (and  hence  are  termed  Indo-Europeans)  > 
secondly,  the  Mongolians,  which  exist  in  eastern  Asia,  extending 
also  toward  Africa;  thirdly,  the  Malayans,  which  exist  in  India,  Af- 
rica, and  other  portions  of  the  eastern  hemisphere,  extending  into  the 
southern  islands  ; fourthly,  the  Negroes,  which  are  confined  to  Africa  , 
and  fifthly,  the  American  Indians.  This  classification  is  very  proper, 
and  needs  no  modification,  as  these  are  indeed  the  exemplifiers  of  all 
existing  features  and  complexions.  For  the  Indians  are  red,  the 
Malayans  brown,  the  Mongolians  yellow,  the  Negroes  black,  and  the 
Caucasians  white. 

It  needs,  however,  but  little  argument  to  establish  the  common  ori- 
gin of  these  dissimilar  colors.  The  original  inhabitants  were  black 
the  subsecjuent  nations  were  brown  ; the  branches  of  these  were  red  ; 
from  these  sprang  the  yellow,  and  from  these  the  white.  White  and 
black,  then,  it  will  be  observed,  are  apparent  opposites.  There  nevet 
was  known  an  instance  in  which  that  which  was  perfectly  white  brought 
forth  its  opposite,  black.  There  have  been  instances  known  of  the 
black  bringing  forth  white,  or  a color  approaching  thereunto.  There 
are  several  accounts  on  record  of  the  white  bringing  forth  dark  or 
black  offspring  ; but  these  accounts  will  not  admit  of  analyzation. 
The  alleged  facts  of  this  nature  did  not  occur  under  the  immediate 
cognizance  of  an  investigator ; but  the  accounts  of  them  were  re- 
ceived from  the  mouth  of  the  parents,  and  hence  are  not  allowable. 
Meanwhile  let  it  be  observed  that  such  an  occurrence  would  be  op- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


367 


posed  to  every  law  of  development.  Such  instances  have  occurred 
partially , from  an  arrest  of  utero-gestation,  which  caused  the  ultimate 
portions  of  the  blood  to  become  so  assimilated  with  the  cellular  and 
serous  tissues  of  the  foetus,  as  to  render  the  body  variously  colored, 

black,  brown,  red,  or  copper  color  — according  to  the  advancement 

of  the  period  of  gestation  at  which  the  arrest  occurred.  Whatever 
facts,  then,  may  have  been  observed  in  the  Jalofs,  Mandingoes,  Caf- 
fers,  and  Albinoes,  these  can  not  possibly  have  any  weight  when 
brought  against  the  universal  testimony  of  Nature  in  her  varied  de- 
partments of  natural  development. 

But  I will  describe  the  process  of  the  transformation  of  color,  the 
means  required  and  the  conditions  necessary  for  this  transformation, 
and  the  local  circumstances  upon  which  color  is  dependent.  To 
understand  this  properly,  we  must  first  understand  the  laws  govern- 
ing copulation  and  the  reproduction  of  the  human  form.  As  it  does 
not  become  the  character  of  this  work  to  enter  into  the  particulars  of 
this  department  of  Nature’s  operations,  I am  compelled  to  speak  on 
this  subject  briefly  and  in  general  terms. 

In  the  first  place,  let  it  be  understood  that  conception  never  occurs 
unless  there  exist  a mutual  sympathy  and  a unity  of  purpose.  This, 
then,  is  the  first  condition  required  for  a proper  impress  of  the  human 
type,  and  for  the  production  of  a corresponding  organization.  The 
parts  that  are  excited  receive  at  once  the  conjugated,  assimilated  par- 
ticles evolved  from  every  department  of  the  human  system  — and 
this  by  virtue  of  the  sympathy  which  also  determines  the  quality  of 
the  assimilation.  These  particles  contain  not  only  the  sympathetic 
impress  of  the  human  organization,  but  of  all  its  essential  parts,  even 
to  complexion.  This  complexion  is  only  a more  perfect  manifesta- 
tion of*  what  is  known  to  physicians  as  the  ncevus  maternus.  It  is 
dependent  altogether  upon  the  condition  last  mentioned.  In  this 
way,  therefore,  is  the  human  type,  and  even  its  color,  reproduced. 

These  facts  holding  good  with  regard  to  the  original  inhabitants 
of  the  earth,  the  black  impress  could  of  course  grow  no  blacker.  But 
during  the  process  of  nearly  two  centuries,  the  complexion  of  the 
generation  then  existing  became  essentially  modified,  so  much  so  that 
it  was  permanently  brown,  owing  to  the  change  of  atmosphere,  cli- 
mate, food,  and  local  conditions.  In  like  manner  was  one  color 
after  the  other  permanently  established  by  changes  of  a dissimilar  but 
of  an  equally  effectual  nature.  The  complexions  thus  established 
are  not  unchangeable,  yet  they  will  remain  as  they  are,  in  each  of 


36S 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


the  various  classes,  until  new  and  remodifying  conditions  are  pro- 
duced, both  as  to  their  local  existence,  habits,  and  customs,  and  in 
the  earth  and  atmosphere,  upon  which  stature,  symmetry,  strength, 
and  complexion,  are  to  an  extent  dependent. 

Such  is  the  present  form  of  the  race  ; and  such  are  the  classifica- 
tions under  which  it  may  be  comprehended.  And  I am  directed  to 
speak  concerning  these  things  no  more  — at  least  until  it  becomes 
expedient  to  do  so  in  correcting  some  misconceptions  of  these  modes 
of  progressive  development  by  those  who  may  be  inclined  to  inves- 
tigate Nature’s  stupendous  manifestations  by  their  powers  of  sensuous 
perception. 

§ S5.  The  reason  is  now  made  manifest  why  the  palaffiological 
sciences  and  the  science  of  correspondences  were  introduced  and 
dwelt  upon  in  the  Key.  For  it  becomes  now  the  office  of  these  sci- 
ences to  unfold  the  primitive  physical  condition  of  the  race,  and  to 
illustrate  its  advancement  and  progress  by  correspondences  and  sym- 
bolic representations. 

In  analyzing  the  essential  elements  of  speech,  it  is  necessary  to 
descend  to  the  conditions  from  which  sprang  the  first  conception  of  a 
process  of  communicating  ideas.  And  in  connexion  with  what  has 
been  said  upon  the  subject,  I will  proceed  to  analyze  language,  and 
to  unfold  its  origin  and  progress. 

The  word  language  is  derived  from  the  Latin  lingua , which  sig- 
nifies tongue.  I am  impressed,  however,  that  this  does  not  convey 
the  essential  idea  of  mental  or  vocal  communication.  For,  as  has 
been  stated,  the  original  inhabitants  conceived  thoughts,  and  these 
were  expressed  upon  their  countenances,  by  the  eye,  by  configura- 
tions of  the  face,  by  manual  manifestations,  and  by  outward  si£ns  and 
symbols  that  were  suggested  by  the  character  of  the  thoughts  con- 
ceived. Impressions  were  made  upon  their  senses,  which  impres- 
sions were  correspondingly  transferred  to  the  internal  principle  which 
evolves  thought.  This  thought,  in  order  to  be  conveyed  to  the  mind 
of  another,  must  be  distinctly  expressed,  typified,  or  exemplified, 
by  the  eye,  countenance,  gestures,  or  by  symbolical  representation. 
This,  therefore,  is  the  philosophy  of  the  vocal  or  physical  expression 
of  the  thoughts,  feelings,  sentiments,  or  affections,  of  the  internal, 
living  principle. 

In  this  way  the  original  inhabitants  began  to  convey  their  crude, 
confused  thoughts  to  one  another.  Their  internals  being  imperfectly 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


360 


developed,  this  prevented  the  spontaneous  evolving  of  those  perfect 
and  distinct  thoughts  which  are  expressed  by  uniform  and  substantial 
outward  representatives.  Hence  there  soon  arose  a disunity  among 
them,  because  of  the  dissimilarity  of  verbal  and  physical  expression. 
But  1 will  not  dwell  upon  the  effects  which  were  thus  produced,  but 
proceed  to  state  connectedly  the  advancement  and  modification  of 
the  internal  language  of  correspondences. 

Mankind  began  first  to  express  their  thoughts  by  the  configurations 
of  their  countenances.  When  they  loved,  their  countenance  indicated 
a smile  of  pleasure  approximating  to  a brilliant  illumination.  When 
their  thoughts  descended  into  things  hidden  from  their  senses  and 
powers  of  comprehension,  they  would  cast  their  eyes  downward  ; and 
when  they  were  elevated,  they  would  cast  their  eyes  upward.  And 
their  countenances  would  also  indicate  pleasure,  dread,  and  anger. 
To  describe  speed,  they  would  run  with  a corresponding  speed.  To 
express  apathy  and  ennui , they  would  repose  in  a manner  correspond- 
ing to  the  thought  which  suggested  the  external  expression.  When 
desirous  of  having  food,  they  would  express  weakness  and  prostra- 
tion. And  so  in  like  manner  did  they  converse  by  signs  naturally 
suggested  by  the  thought  that  wTas  excited,  either  by  the  action  of 
outer  objects  through  the  senses,  or  by  the  influence  of  internal  con- 
sciousnesses. 

While  this  form  of  language  remained  unchanged  by  the  inventions 
of  the  ingenious  faculties,  they  were  peacefully  united  ; but  when  ar- 
tificial signs  began  to  assume  the  ascendency  over  these  modes  of 
expression,  then  it  was  that  their  expressions  became  deceptive  and 
unreal  : and  thus  were  greatly  dissolved  the  unity  of  thought  and  the 
harmonious  social  relations  which  previously  subsisted  among  them. 
From  this  period  the  branch  nations  began  to  construct  objects  cor- 
responding to  the  ideas  they  intended  to  impress.  They  formed 
figures  and  symbolical  representations,  to  express  in  a distinct  man- 
ner the  general  thoughts  they  conceived,  making  no  effort  as  yet  to 
use  their  vocal  powers  in  expression.  Thus  language  proceeded 
from  manual  and  corporeal,  to  instrumental  representation. 

But  they  soon  experienced  an  inconvenience  from  the  want  of  a 
more  perfect  mode  of  expressing  the  many  minor  thoughts  that  were 
constantly  being  suggested  when  they  were  in  the  presence  of  each 
other,  and  by  their  social  conditions  and  general  physical  require- 
ments. And  being  thus  perplexed,  they  began  to  represent  their 
minor  thoughts  by  making  certain  distinct  sounds,  governed  entirely 

24 


370 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


by  the  natural  suggestion  of  the  thought  intended  to  be  impressed. 
In  order  that  these  sounds  might  in  all  instances  convey  the  same 
thought  or  idea,  they  endeavored  to  establish  a rule  by  which  each 
should  be  governed  in  his  vocal  expression.  This  was  the  rudimen- 
tal  conception  of  grammatical  principles  ; for  any  given  sounds  or 
words  are  by  these  principles  made  to  convey  to  the  mind,  under  all 
conditions  and  circumstances,  the  same  thoughts  or  ideas.  This 
rule  which  was  adopted  among  the  early  nations,  in  order  that  their 
vocal  sounds  might  express  the  same  thoughts  under  all  circumstan- 
ces, was  soon  discovered  to  be  of  great  use  in  preserving  the  unity 
of  their  existence  and  in  affording  the  pleasure  of  distinctly  commu- 
nicating minor  thoughts  vocally  one  with  another. 

After  this,  and  when  the  nations  had  become  distributed  into  other 
portions  of  the  earth  according  to  previous  descriptions,  these  sounds 
were  represented  by  hieroglyphical  characters,  or  minute  figures  and 
strokes.  The  same  rule  still  determined  the  meaning  of  the  sound  ; 
and  the  impress  of  the  sound  was  made  upon  some  material  sub- 
stance, in  order  that  the  ideas  thus  rapidly  expressed  might  be  pre- 
served for  the  instruction  of  succeeding  generations.  Such  was  the 
condition  of  language  at  the  time  of  the  settlement  of  Yucatan  and 
the  adjoining  portions. 

For  an  indefinite  period  after  this  time,  symbolical  and  correspon- 
dential  language  remained  unchanged  among  the  inhabitants  of  the 
earth.  There  was  no  perceptible  advancement  in  this  for  many  cen- 
turies. But  the  next  development  of  language  was  among  the  in 
habitants  of  Spain  and  Asia.  The  first  modified  the  existing,  exter- 
nal representations  of  ideas  that  were  conceived  by  the  previous 
nations,  into  more  perfect  hieroglyphical  forms,  which  were  rendered 
beautiful  by  the  perfection  of  mechanical  attainment  to  which  they 
had  arrived.  They  also  drew  figures  on  smooth  substances,  which 
was  the  first  suggestion  of  the  art  of  'painting.  And  they  carried 
this  to  such  a degree  of  perfection  in  Spain,  that  their  representations 
might  properly  be  termed  picture-language. 

But  the  nations  which  dwelt  in  Asia  preserved  the  verbal  and 
grammatical  form  of  expression,  and  by  improvements  rendered  it  so 
permanent  that  some  remains  of  the  same  language  are  still  existing 
among  various  nations  of  Asia  at  the  present  day.  The  inhabitants 
of  China  became  more  confirmed  in  the  monosyllabic  language  of 
the  southern  nations  than  did  any  other  people.  They  also  ex- 
pressed thoughts  in  the  language  of  correspondences,  or  representa- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


371 


tions  in  the  form  of  pictures  and  hieroglyphics.  The  Chinese  have 
remained  unchanged  as  to  their  manner  of  vocal  communication  ; 
while  other  languages  were  formed  by  the  branch  and  distributed 
nations  of  other  portions  of  the  eastern  hemisphere. 

§ S6.  It  is  impossible  to  trace  the  etymologies  of  each  tongue,  in- 
asmuch as  there  are  so  many  varieties  of  idioms  and  dialects,  and 
even  of  conceptions  and  thoughts  by  which  etymologies  have  been 
determined.  And  it  would  be  of  no  utility  to  refer  to  the  researches 
of  glossologists  and  etymologists  ; for  each  of  these,  in  all  his  in- 
vestigations, has  only  accumulated  local,  external  facts,  with  the  in- 
tention of  establishing  some  particular  hypothesis.  And  deductions 
made  from  facts  thus  accumulated  are  not  warrantable  nor  useful  as 
a guide  to  inquiries  respecting  the  origin  and  primitive  form  of  lan- 
guage, and  the  process  by  which  it  has  assumed  its  present  innumer- 
able modifications. 

Let  it  be  observed,  then,  that  the  first  elements  of  rudimental, 
monosyllabic  language,  were  contained  in  the  hieroglyphic  represen- 
tations that  were  given  of  those  sounds  that  were  used  among  the 
previous  inhabitants  as  an  advancement  in  the  form  of  expression. 
From  this  source  sprang  the  Chinese  language.  While  this  nation 
was  becoming  confirmed  in  its  form  of  expression  derived  from  the 
original  hieroglyphics,  other  nations,  improving  upon  the  original 
style,  adopted  an  entirely  new  form  of  grammatical,  mechanical,  and 
vocal  communication.  Thus  from  the  impression  of  sounds,  the  or- 
thography of  the  Greek  language  became  established  — which  lan- 
guage was  characterized  by  a form  of  synthetical  expression  unlike 
that  of  any  other  language,  and  was  governed  by  entirely  dissimilar 
grammatical  rules.  Nouns,  verbs,  and  adjectives,  by  the  ascending 
grammatical  rule  of  the  Greeks,  were  formed  into  syntax  ; and  thus 
these  became  established  as  distinct  parts  of  speech. 

So,  then,  the  classification  of  sounds  determined  the  classification 
of  nouns,  verbs,  adjectives,  and  prepositions,  among  the  Greeks. 
Each  sign  suggesting  a vocal  sound  according  to  primitive  usage, 
they  could,  by  associating  them  together,  according  to  these  gram- 
matical forms,  make  them  convey  to  the  minds  of  each  other  distinct 
ideas  of  any  objects,  substances,  qualities,  actions,  or  motives,  con- 
cerning which  they  might  have  a desire  to  communicate  their  knowl- 
edge or  impressions.  Thus  the  Greek  language  is  nothing  more 
than  an  assemblage  of  minute  symbols  or  distinct  characters,  the 


372 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


combination  constituting  the  word,  the  word  associating  itself  with 
the  sound,  and  the  sound  calling  up  the  idea  intended  to  be  im- 
pressed. And  what  is  the  utility  of  the  sense  of  hearing,  if  it  is  not 
to  receive  impressions  from  sound  corresponding  to  the  impression 
received  from  the  form  of  a word,  object,  or  substance,  through  the 
sense  of  vision  ? 

Another  distinct  nation  originated  from  their  hereditary  custom  of 
verbal  intercourse,  another  distinct  language  or  style  of  expression. 
This  was  the  Hebrew.  Then  followed  in  like  manner  the  Latin , 
and  likewise  all  analogous  tongues,  dialects,  and  modes  of  corporeal 
and  hieroglyphical  expression,  that  distinguish  the  various  nations 
upon  the  face  of  the  earth. 

It  is  well  now  to  speak  concerning  the  aboriginal  inhabitants  of 
America.  They  imbibed  the  early  form  of  expression  after  they  had 
journeyed  to  this  portion  of  the  earth  ; but  it  was  then  imperfect, 
having  no  grammatical  rules  to  govern  the  sound,  the  gesture,  or  the 
representation.  So  they  subsequently  formed  a class  of  sounds  into 
figures,  which  they  would  mark  upon  trees,  bark,  stones,  and  other 
suitable  materials.  These  figures  they  subsequently  abandoned  for 
the  successful  invention  of  more  minute  characters,  which,  from  an 
undeveloped  intellect  and  imperfect  faculties  of  individualization,  they 
formed  into  compound  expressions,  which  are  exemplified  in  the 
present  polysyllabic  speech  of  the  Indians.  For  they  accumulate 
many  of  these  minute  figures  into  an  enormous  compound  expression 
to  convey  a single  thought  to  the  mind  — while  one  of  the  parts  ot 
these  compounds  would  not  convey  any  thought,  or  represent  any 
thing,  to  their  own  or  any  other  mind. 

In  contradistinction  to  this,  every  character  of  the  Chinese  language 
is  a substantial  representative  of  a thought : and  thus  their  language 
is  composed  only  of  monosyllabic  characters ; while  the  Greek,  He- 
brew, and  Latin,  employ  compound  figures,  letters,  or  characters,  to 
write  or  express  a thought,  and  which  are  different  from  those  em- 
ployed by  either  of  the  other  nations. 

All  this  goes  to  prove  that  the  external  expression  of  thought,  feel- 
ing, and  sentiment,  originated  in  the  natural  and  corporeal  configu- 
rations of  the  primitive  inhabitants,  and  who,  after  being  disunited 
and  entirely  separated  from  each  other,  retained  the  early  correspon- 
dences, and  from  them  originated  the  various  dissimilar  modes  of 
expression  that  now  prevail  in  the  earth. 

Primitive  history  conveys  no  reliable  account  of  the  language  of 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


373 


the  inhabitants  of  the  earth  anterior  to  the  confirmation  of  that  of  the 
inhabitants  of  China.  Nevertheless,  it  was  once  supposed  by  some 
that  the  Greek  was  the  first  tongue  spoken,  as  all  the  sacred  writings 
originally  in  possession  of  the  Jews  were  in  the  Greek  language.* 
After  this  came  the  Jewish  writings  in  Hebrew;  which  afterward,  as 
will  hereafter  be  seen,  were  translated  into  Latin,  and  subsequently 
into  the  Indo-European  and  English  languages. 

It  is  well  to  observe,  that  notwithstanding  the  conclusions  of  mod- 
ern philologists  and  linguists  who  have  searched  profoundly  into  the 
subject,  that  the  hieroglyphics  were  intended  as  alphabetical  repre- 
sentations, and  not  separately  to  convey  thoughts,  the  hieroglyphics 
did  express  substantial  thoughts  in  the  earlier  ages : but  they  subse- 
quently assumed  the  form  of  alphabetical  representations,  which  are 
nothing  more  than  synthetical  or  compound  forms  of  expression. 

It  is  plain,  therefore,  that  language  is  an  external,  artificial  inven- 
tion, and  is  nothing  more  than  a hieroglyphical  mode  of  expressing 
sounds  by  compound  signs.  From  the  minute  characters  came  let- 
ters. Letters  began  to  be  used  as  such  on  the  ground  of  their  con- 
veying dissimilar  sounds,  before  which  time  letters  were  words,  but 
since  which,  letters  conjoined  constitute  a syllable  or  word,  which 
conveys  a single  or  compound  idea  by  the  sound  which  is  associated 
in  the  mind  with  the  thought. 

Verbal,  physical,  hieroglyphical  expression,  is  externa],  superficial, 
deceptive,  and  injurious  to  the  human  race.  The  present  languages 
and  dialects  of  the  various  nations  of  the  earth  have  arisen  entirely  as 
a consequence  of  the  misdirection  of  the  sentient  faculties  and  of  the 
judgment,  which  so  unhappily  befell  the  first-born  of  the  human  spe- 
cies. But  as  language  is  connected  inseparably  with  the  origin  of 
thoughts,  it  will  be  further  considered  connectedly  as  I proceed  to 
notice  the  origin  of  the  very  many  superficial,  unnatural,  misdi- 
rected thoughts  which  are  at  the  present  time  obstructing  the  rising 
tide  of  human  progress.  And  in  this  connexion  will  the  origin  of 
language  and  its  improper,  unholy,  and  corrupting  tendencies,  be 
further  explained. 

§ 87.  I would  have  all  minds,  the  material  senses  of  which  will 
commune  with  the  thoughts  and  principles  set  forth  in  these  sayings, 
to  understand  properly  the  character  of  all  my  impressions.  I would 

* The  reader  is  requested  to  suspend  his  judgment  in  respect  to  this  striking  para- 
dox until  he  peruses  the  sequel. 


374 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


have  the  whole  world  apprehend  me  aright,  so  that  they  may  view  in 
their  proper  light  the  exposures  which  1 give  of  all  external,  superfi- 
cial, and  chimerical  sheathings  of  truths.  That  the  reader  might  un- 
derstand the  source  from  which  my  impressions  flow,  an  explanation 
would  be  required  which  would  be  in  advance  of  the  subject  under 
present  consideration.  But  I will  briefly  unfold  the  nature  of  the 
impressions  themselves,  so  that  no  misunderstanding  may  arise  from 
the  unreserved  generalizations  of  things  which  I term  unreal,  chi- 
merical, superficial,  and  opposed  to  the  divine  principles  which  per- 
vade the  Universe. 

It  will  be  perceived,  by  perusing  what  has  been  said  as  relating  to 
the  physical  and  palaetiological  history  of  our  earth,  that  I descend 
to  the  germ  of  human  existence,  and  proceed  to  speak  of  the  succes- 
sive waves  of  development  in  each  age  and  generation.  I do  not 
commence  at  the  present  established  order  of  material  forms  and  ex- 
ternal creations,  and  collect  facts  as  evidences  of  things  antecedent 
to  the  present  time,  with  the  intention  of  establishing  any  precon- 
ceived hypothesis.  My  descriptive  remarks  and  arguments,  there- 
fore, must  necessarily  differ  more  or  less  from  those  of  any  writer, 
and  from  the  pre-established  opinions  of  the  present  generation. 
Men  have  only  been  able  to  trace  from  the  external  of  the  present 
order  of  creation  the  things  that  have  existed  in  the  interior  of  the 
world’s  history  ; and  therefore  the  history  of  the  world,  of  mankind, 
of  the  various  sciences,  and  of  theology,  are  all  understood  only  in 
the  light  of  superficial  evidence.  For  it  is  impossible  for  them  to 
descend  into  the  interior  of  the  early  history  of  the  world  and  obtain 
the  knowledge  of  the  things  of  which  1 speak,  because  the  historical 
accounts  of  all  these  things  are  limited,  ambiguous,  indefinite,  and  on 
many  points  entirely  unprofitable.  But  I am  impressed  with  a knowl- 
edge of  the  interior  and  germinal  history  of  each  thing  of  which  I 
speak.  I descend,  therefore,  to  the  lowest  points  of  the  particular 
subjects  on  which  I speak,  and  proceed  in  my  descriptions  accord- 
ing to  the  ascending  developments  of  the  same  as  necessarily  flowing 
out  of  the  germ,  and  which  finally  come  within  the  scope  of  histori- 
cal knowledge  and  actual  experience. 

And,  as  was  intimated  in  the  Key,  I am  not  impressed  to  descend 
into  the  particulars  of  any  subject,  inasmuch  as  “ particulars  are  the 
unreal  ramifications  of  general  principles , unfolded  to  the  external 
observation  of  mankind.”  Minutice,  therefore,  are,  according  to  my 
impressions,  unreal  and  excrescent,  though  these  are  often  collected 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


375 


as  evidences  to  establish  metaphysical  hypotheses.  And  as  they  are 
unreal,  I am  compelled  to  disregard  them;  and  thus  I am  labor- 
ing to  establish  general  principles  only  by  appeals  to  universal  evi- 
dences. 

Such  are  the  promptings  of-  the  interior  impressions  or  directions 
which  I receive.  And  whatever  may  be  the  likes  or  dislikes  of  any 
of  the  many  persons  who  may  peruse  these  sayings,  these  can  not 
possibly  have  any  influence  upon  the  nature  or  expression  of  my  im- 
pressions, which  are  demonstrated  to  me  as  real,  and  are  consequent- 
ly righteous. 

I have  thus  introductively  prefaced  my  general  remarks  on  hagai- 
ography,  bibliography,  archaeology,  and  other  dissimilar  branches  of 
theology,  an  unfolding  of  which  subjects  will  require  a direct  ap- 
peal to  the  teachings  of  that  science  which  I term  Correspondences. 
I am  compelled  to  descend  into  the  subordinate  departments  of  mis- 
directed human  thought  and  erroneous  theology  ; and  in  doing  this  I 
will  describe  the  effects  which  have  arisen  out  of  the  latter  subject, 
and  which  have  been  such  as  tend  in  a great  degree  to  dissipate  that 
deep  veneration  which  is  wont  to  pervade  the  mind  in  contemplating 
this  subject,  and  to  show  that,  after  all,  it  is  unworthy  the  name  of 
theology. 

Innumerable  works  that  have  been  written  upon  this  subject  — 
works  that  have  engaged  the  time  and  talents  of  many  enlightened 
men  — demand  great  cautiousness  and  gentleness  of  treatment,  yet 
require  to  be  revered  only  according  to  their  interior  purity  and  truth- 
fulness. But  the  subject  itself  is  one  that  has  sacrificed  more  human 
forms  than  it  has  ever  benefited  to  the  least  extent.  It  is  a subject 
that  has  disunited  the  thoughts,  feelings,  and  affections,  of  children 
and  parents,  and  breathed  the  elements  of  folly,  imbecility,  and  su 
perstition,  into  the  bosom  of  families,  associations,  and  of  once-united 
and  peaceful  kingdoms.  It  is  a subject  interwoven  with  the  very 
elements  of  imperfection';  and  as  these  elements  have  become  de- 
veloped, folly  and  internal  darkness  have  pervaded  every  mind  within 
the  circle  of  its  influence.  And  the  folly  and  envy  thus  arising  have 
diffused  in  the  world  unutterable  wretchedness.  Hence,  too,  have 
arisen  sentiments  of  anger  and  other  corrupt  and  corroding  passions. 
And  anger  has  breathed  vice  and  universal  transgression  of  the  prin- 
ciples of  morality.  T‘ms  transgression  has  clothed  the  whole  race 
with  a mantle  of  sectarian  bigotry,  degrading  ignorance,  and  judg- 
ment-revolting superstit:r,n.  Superstition  has  inspired  chieftains  with 


376 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


the  spirit  of  tyranny  and  despotism,  sustained  potentates,  .elevated 
theological  shepherds,  and  plunged  the  uninformed  inhabitants  of  the 
earth  into  the  lowest  depths  of  poverty,  mental  darkness,  imbecility, 
and  fanaticism.  The  whole  world,  thus  disunited  in  social  and  the 
ological  relations,  has  manifested  only  the  extreme  of  misdirected 
thought  and  unnatural  imagination.  Every  natural  tendency  of  the 
mental  organization  of  mqn  to  breathe  forth  an  element  of  universal 
love,  unity,  peace,  and  harmony,  has  thus  been  checked  and  arrested. 
The  spiritual  elements  within  man  have  not  even  yet  unfolded  their 
gentle  teachings,  save  in  the  minds  of  some  noble  beings,  causing 
these  to  proclaim  “ peace  on  earth,  and  good-will  to  men.”  But 
most  of  these  have  been  arrested  in  their  career  of  purity  and  refor- 
mation, and  compelled  to  yield  to  the  ineffable  injustice  of  the  infu- 
riate and  enthusiastic  governors  that  held  within  their  grasp  the  all- 
devouring  sword  of  persecution  ! 

In  later  times,  most  worthy  and  gigantic  intellects  have  descended 
into  the  realms  of  primitive  history,  and  unfolded  the  wild  and  hor- 
rible admonitions  contained  in  the  experience  of  generations  past,  and 
presented  these  to  the  world.  These  men  were  actuated  by  the 
promptings  of  spiritual  sympathy  and  universal  benevolence.  They 
endeavored  to  present  truth  by  displaying  the  tendency  of  its  oppo- 
site. But  their  intellects  were  trammelled  by  hereditary  errors,  by 
improper  education,  and  by  unreal,  external,  and  superficial  impres- 
sion. The  influence  of  their  historical  and  metaphysical  productions 
was  thus  impaired,  and  was  diminished  still  more  by  coming  in  con- 
tact with  local,  national,  and  universal  prejudices,  which  prejudices 
to  a great  extent  even  yet  clothe  the  freeborn  minds  of  mankind  ! 

These  men  presented  in  their  productions  a heterogeneous  mixture 
of  about  five  parts  error  and  three  parts  truth.  Yet  they  felt  a decided 
interest  in  the  banishment  of  error,  and  in  the  upbuilding  and  advance- 
ment of  truth  and  virtue.  As  this  is  a strong  indication  of  innate 
goodness,  it  deserves  proper  admiration  and  sympathy  from  all  who 
are  engaged  in  the  common  work  of  reformation.  Such  was  the 
character  of  the  early  reformers. 

In  pursuing  the  investigation  of  the  subject  upon  which  I am  about 
to  enter,  therefore,  the  deepest  veneration  is  demanded  for  those  pro- 
found, misdirected  intellects,  and  a suitable  attention  should  be  given 
to  all  their  thoughts,  whether  written  or  unwritten.  And  it  is  on 
this  account  only  that  I am  impressed  to  speak  of  the  general  sub- 
ject on  which  they  wrote,  in  a reverential  manner  ; but  not  on  the 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


377 


ground  of  its  containing  the  least  particle  of  intrinsic  purity,  or  the 
slightest  element  of  practical  utility. 


§ 88.  I now  descend  to  the  birth  of  mythological  theology — which 
theology  is  at  the  present  day  obscuring  the  highest  and  purest  prin- 
ciples of  the  internal  nature  of  man,  destroying  all  elements  of  true 
and  natural  morality,  and  absolutely  driving  men  into  every  species 
of  vice,  folly,  disunity  of  interests,  and  consequent  wretchedness. 

Let  us  first  analyze  the  word  theology , as  an  understanding  of  this 
lies  at  the  basis  of  a proper  investigation  of  the  subject  before  us. 
The  word  Theos  is  a Greek  word  signifying  the  same  as  the  Latin 
Deus,  and  is  intended  to  represent,  as  may  be  discovered  in  the  Zend 
Avesta  of  Zoroaster,  the  Supreme,  moving  Spirit  that  pervades  the 
Universe,  whom  we  call  God.  The  Greek  Theos,  and  Latin  Deus , 
are  words  derived  from  sounds  destitute  of  signification,  and  the  origin 
of  which  is  impure. 

Here,  then,  is  manifested  the  imperfection  and  injurious  tendency 
of  vocal  or  written  expression.  For  there  never  was  a sound  formed 
'•r  a word  uttered  that  could  convey  the  least  conception  of  that  all- 
pervading  Essence,  that  Great  Spiritual  Principle,  that  Great 
Positive,  Omnipotent  Mind,  which  dwells  in  the  Vortex  from 
which  flow  millions  on  millions  of  Suns,  of  Systems,  of  Universes, 
that  extend  out  into  undefinable  space  almost  to  the  filling  of  space 
itself — and  yet  all  constituting  nothing  more  than  an  expression  of 
one  shigle  Thought  emanating  from  the  inexhaustible  Vortex  of  in- 
finite Purity  and  Perfection  ! No  word  or  phrase  has  ever  been 
uttered  — and  I do  not  except  the  phrase  which  I have  been  directed 
to  employ — that  has  ever  conveyed  to  the  mind  of  man  in  this,  its 
first  sphere  of  existence,  the  least  possible  conception  of  the  infi- 
nite, Divine  Principle.  I associate,  therefore,  with  the  words 
Theos  and  Deus  no  lofty  thought  which  gushes  from  the  spirit  within, 
as  an  element  of  veneration. 

Concerning  the  many  conceptions  which  sprang  from  the  youthful 
and  misguided  intellects  of  the  first-born  of  the  human  species,  much 
might  be  related  if  we  were  to  enter  into  particulars.  But  as  the  ob- 
ject is  to  relate  the  origin  of  mythological  theology,  I must  speak  in 
general  terms  : but  I will  notice  specifically  the  birth  of  the  most 
prominent  conceptions,  such  as  have  been  perpetuated  in  various 
forms  to  the  present  day,  and  are  now  trammelling  and  paralyzing 


37S 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


the  powers  of  man,  embarrassing  his  social  relations,  and  obstructing 
his  spiritual  development. 

When  the  first  inhabitants  were  in  a youthful  state  (or  when  they 
were  uninstructed  concerning  the  principles  governing  their  existence), 
their  tender  and  uncultivated  intellects  rendered  them  susceptible  to 
the  direful  influence  of  misunderstanding,  and  of  consequent  decep- 
tion and  disunity.  In  connexion,  then,  with  what  has  been  previ- 
ously related,  I will  now  speak  of  the  social  condition  of,  and  un- 
happy physical  circumstances  that  surrounded,  the  youthful  family. 

They  dwelt  a long  period  peacefully  and  harmoniously  united 
one  with  another,  and  continued  thus  so  long  as  they  observed  the 
natural  language  of  the  principle  within,  by  figures,  motions,  gesticu- 
lations, and  configurations  of  the  countenance,  which  were  so  real 
and  so  truly  expressive  of  the  actual  thoughts  and  affections  of  the 
mind.  But  when  they  discovered  their  ability  to  produce  vocal 
sounds,  they  took  advantage  of  this  discovery,  and  began  communi- 
cating their  thoughts  in  that  manner  : for  they  felt  that  it  was  novel, 
pleasing,  and  expedient.  They  soon  lost  their  primitive  habit  of  ra- 
diated expressions,  and  with  it  the  perfect  purity  of  their  interior 
thoughts.  Misunderstanding  each  other’s  thoughts  and  intentions 
from  the  dissimilarity  of  sounds  that  were  employed,  they  became 
envious,  cruel,  and  deceptive ; because  sounds  were  capable  of  ex- 
pressing thoughts  of  altogether  a different  nature  from  those  that  were 
dwelling  in  the  interior  of  the  individuals  conversing.  They  were 
unlike  the  inhabitants  discovered  upon  the  planet  Mercury  : for  they, 
as  has  been  related,  despise  the  externals  of  thought  (which  are  words), 
as  they  dislike  the  clothing  and  concealing  of  truths  by  false  and  de- 
ceptive expressions. 

And  after  the  inhabitants  became  thus  socially  miserable  because 
of  disunity  of  feeling  and  disorganization,  they  wondered  as  to  the 
cause  of  this  evil.  They  were  not  advanced  sufficiently  in  intellec- 
tual discernment  to  discover  the  actual  cause  within  their  midst,  and 
so  one  who  was  more  intelligent  than  the  rest  began  to  proclaim  a 
pretended  discovery  of  the  cause,  and  thus  was  looked  upon  by  his 
extensive  relations  as  an  inspired  chieftain.  He  had  discovered  (as 
he  related  to  them  with  countenance  becoming  his  assumed  position) 
that  the  “ breaths ” (winds),  which  came  from  above,  breathed  among 
tli^m  a malignant  element.  — And  this  was  the  first  conception  of  the 
origin  of  evil.  This  was  a prevailing  opinion  for  many  ages,  during 
which  time  the  inhabitants  became  distributed  as  has  been  described. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


379 


But  in  other  settlements  of  the  original  family,  advanced  intellects 
began  to  search  a little  further , and  to  inquire  for  the  cause  of  these 
“breaths.”  Not  being  acquainted  with  the  disturbances  constantly 
occurring  in  the  equilibrium  of  the  atmosphere,  they  consequently 
attributed  the  cause  of  these  “ breaths”  to  an  unseen,  undefinable  evil 
spirit,  which  they  supposed  hovered  over  the  whole  landscape  or 
disk  on  which  they  dwelt.  They  supposed  the  atmosphere  to  con- 
stitute this  spirit.  So  this  was  an  advance  of  one  step  in  the  pre- 
vailing theology  among  them. 

The  subsequent  generations  could  not  let  the  cause  of  the  evil  re- 
main here  (for  envy,  war,  and  deception,  had  evidently  increased) : 
so  they  abandoned  the  impression  given  them  by  their  forefathers 
that  the  atmosphere  was  the  cause,  for  the  belief  that  (as  a philosopher 
among  them  endeavored  to  demonstrate  by  hieroglyphical  illustrations) 
the  Sun  was  the  face  of  an  angry,  unholy,  and  evil-disseminating 
being,  and  that  he  caused  the  atmosphere  to  breathe  this  evil  into 
their  minds.  This  philosopher,  therefore,  was  adored  as  being  the 
inspired  son  of  previous  generations.  They  began  to  fear  his  pres- 
ence. They  trembled  at  the  images  which  he  shadowed  forth  in 
hieroglyphical  characters  ; they  fell  before  and  worshipped  him  with 
all  the  expressions  of  veneration  that  characterized  the  ceremonies 
of  subsequent  idolatry.  They  built  a large  and  massive  edifice,  with 
apartments  constructed  to  his  will,  and  elevated  him  to  the  highest 
seat  in  this  temple,  and  he  became  the  chieftain,  prophet,  emperor, 
and  god,  of  all  the  nations  and  tribes  within  the  circle  of  his  influ- 
ence. For  he  had  discovered  their  great  enemy,  their  fiery  deus, 
their  angry  and  consuming  antagonist,  which  would,  as  he  instructed 
them,  consume  the  disk  upon  which  they  lived  — consume  their 
bodies  and  swallow  up  their  spirits  in  the  invisible  envelope  that  sur- 
rounded the  globe.  This  he  taught  them  would  all  transpire,  were 
it  not  for  his  almost  omnipotent  presence.  And  there  is  a passage 
which  applies  to  them  as  appropriately  as  to  the  inhabitants  of  the 
earth  at  the  present  era,  and  which  was  uttered  in  contemplation  of  a 
similar  condition,  saying,  “ The  priests  bear  rule,  and  the  people  love 
to  have  it  so.” 


§ S9.  And  now  it  would  be  well  to  suspend  our  archaeological  in- 
vestigations for  a brief  space,  to  notice  the  physical  and  social  ad- 
vancement of  the  race,  together  with  the  progress  of  the  primitive 
mode  of  expression.  It  will  be  understood  from  that  already  related, 


380 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


that  they  had  cultivated  the  powers  of  mechanical  construction.  They 
invented  instruments  to  facilitate  the  labors  in  which  they  engaged  : 
and  in  proportion  to  the  perfection  of  their  instruments,  were  they 
enabled  to  produce  mechanical  and  architectural  creations.  And, 
being  assisted  by  camels  and  other  animals,  they  built  large  cities, 
constructed  elegant  mansions,  majestic  edifices,  and  lofty  temples  — 
together  with  all  degrees  of  minor  buildings  that  were  suggested  by 
their  desires. 

And  what  is  most  remarkable  is  that  their  buildings  represented 
their  thoughts.  In  this  manner  were  they  instructed  by  correspon- 
dences in  the  history  of  previous  families,  and  concerning  the  novel 
disclosures  made  by  their  supreme  potentate.  The  little  buildings 
corresponded  variously  to  desires  for  certain  species  of  wood,  and 
for  vegetables,  animals,  and  birds,  of  various  descriptions,  which  con- 
stituted the  food  of  their  forefathers,  and  the  appetite  for  which  they 
still  inherited.  So  one  building  would  represent  the  external  form 
of  a delicious  fruit  which  they  admired  ; and  when  any  one  desired 
this  fruit,  he  would  point  to  its  representative.  So  with  the  other 
minor  buildings,  which  corresponded  to  other  specific  objects  for 
which  they  might  have  a desire.  Edifices  were  so  constructed  as  to 
represent  the  precise  theological  impressions  that  were  existing  among 
the  previous  inhabitants.  Thus  edifices  were  constructed  with  vault- 
ed interiors  and  huge,  frightful  forms,  with  mouths  extended,  repre- 
senting the  breathing  of  evil  and  its  controlling  influence.  Their 
mansions  were  made  in  a vortical  style,  with  portions  open  through 
which  could  be  seen  in  the  interior  a representation  of  the  face  of  the 
supposed  invisible,  evil  spirit  which  represented  the  atmosphere. 
Their  lofty,  aspiring  temples  corresponded,  both  in  their  interior  and 
external  structure,  to  the  inconceivable  and  consuming  vengeance  of 
the  Sun,  which  was  the  being  they  so  much  abhorred.  Around 
these  temples  were  placed  brazen  images,  and  the  heads  of  the  most 
frightful  monsters  conceivable  : and  the  greatest  of  the  temples  con- 
tained their  great  chieftain,  to  whom  they  bowed  with  fearful  dread 
and  with  the  external  appearance  of  humiliation.  The  minor  temples 
contained  the  subordinate  officers,  or  the  chosen  of  the  potentate,  to 
ascend  to  his  presence  and  convey  mandates  to  the  weak,  imbecile, 
and  uneducated  inhabitants  within  his  government. 

This  was  the  first  of  hieroglyphical  language  ; for  their  cities  were 
their  history,  school,  and  creed.  And  everything  was  constructed 
to  represent  some  external  object,  or  some  conception  of  the  mind 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


381 


which  was  as  unreal  and  evanescent  as  the  particles  of  stone  and  clay 
which  constituted  their  huge  cities.  Thus  it  was  with  the  original 
inhabitants  of  Central  America  and  Pompeii. 

At  length  their  governor,  finding  it  possible  to  conceive  of  the 
resting-place  of  the  Sun  their  deity,  began  to  improve  on  the  long- 
established  opinion,  by  putting  forth  a discovery  which  he  professed 
to  have  made,  that  the  Sun  was  merely  a representative  of  an  incon- 
ceivable fountain  of  fire  which  existed  in  the  realms  below  the  huge 
animal  on  whose  back  he  said  they  dwelt.  This  idea  in  succeeding 
ages  became  confirmed  in  the  following  form  : That  the  Sun  arose 
after  the  spirit  of  darkness  had  passed  away,  and  represented  to  them, 
during  many  hours,  the  great  fountain  from  which  it  sprang,  and  into 
the  depths  of  which  they  must  inevitably  descend,  if  they  did  not 
obey  all  the  mandates  and  requirements  of  their  potential  governor. 
After  having  spoken  to  them  in  such  fiery  language,  it  was  believed 
that  it  descended  to  become  reclothed  with  the  contents  of  the  fiery 
abyss,  that  thus  it  might  be  enabled  to  disseminate  among  the  inhabi- 
tants, on  the  succeeding  day,  the  atmosphere,  the  heat,  the  invisible 
spirit,  or  “ breath,”  that  proclaimed  to  them  inevitable  destruction 
for  ever,  if  they  dared  but  once  to  violate  the  despotic  commands  of 
their  potentate. 

Thus  it  will  be  seen  that  as  the  intellect  improves,  even  though  it 
be  at  first  misdirected,  true  or  untrue  research  and  investigation  will, 
as  a consequence,  ensue. 

Behold,  now,  the  overawing  aspect  of  a gross  and  unmeaning 
error ! See  the  improved  faculties  of  later  generations  composing, 
from  the  gross  materials  of  the  primitive  family,  a most  gigantic  and 
imperative  belief — even  one  claiming  authority  to  govern  the  free- 
born minds  of  mankind!  First  the  wind,  then  the  atmosphere,  and 
finally  the  warmth  and  light  of  the  sun,  were  charged  with  producing 
that  which  resulted  merely  from  a disunity  of  the  social  interests  and 
consequently  of  the  feelings,  affections,  and  intentions,  of  the  first  inhab- 
itants of  the  earth  ! And  as  intelligence  advanced,  it  became  necessary 
to  remove  the  fount  of  evil  from  the  Sun  to  some  inconceivable  realms 
below,  where  human  eyes  and  human  knowledge  could  not  demon- 
strate its  non-existence  ! The  Sun  was  too  plain  an  object  to  con- 
tinue as  of  itself  the  supposed  originator  of  evil : for  if,  by  the  investi- 
gations of  some  persons  who  were  living,  it  had  been  discovered  that 
the  Sun  was  not  in  reality  the  source  of  evil,  and  that  it  did  not  in- 
spire the  mind  with  evil  and  deceptive  thoughts,  then  the  great  error 


3S2 


nature’s  divine  revelations 


would  have  been  exploded  for  ever,  and  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth 
would  have  been  delivered  from  their  bondage  of  corruption  into  the 
glorious  light  and  liberty  of  the  children  of  purity  and  innocence. 

But  the  potentate,  who  was  sufficiently  shrewd  and  learned  in  the 
art  of  deception,  discovered  that  this  would  be  the  inevitable  result 
of  such  an  exposure.  And  feeling  that  his  power  would  diminish, 
that  his  influence  would  be  lost,  bis  government  overthrown,  and 
his  empire  ruined,  he,  impelled  by  a desire  to  prevent  this  misfor- 
tune, removed  the  source  of  evil  to  a place  so  low,  so  deep,  and  so 
obscure,  that  it  was  impossible,  as  he  felt  assured,  for  the  deception 
to  ever  be  discovered  or  exposed.  And  thus  he  succeeded  in  es- 
tablishing a sublime  chimera,  the  modified  elements  of  which  enter 
largely  into  the  theological  opinions  of  the  present  day. 

I am  impressed  to  speak  with  distinctness  on  this  subject,  in  order 
that  the  germ  of  error  which  was  deposited  in  the  world  by  the  early 
inhabitants,  may  not  still  continue  to  grow  in  such  luxuriance  in  the 
minds  of  mankind. 

§ 90.  I now  proceed  to  describe  the  mental  culture  of  the  inhabi- 
tants of  the  interior  of  Asia,  and  of  those  existing  upon  the  borders 
of  the  African  continent.  It  is  well  to  remark  that  it  is  impossible 
for  me  to  employ  names  or  words  which  can  possibly  designate  more 
definitely  to  the  reader  those  tribes  of  which  I speak.  For  this  is  a 
period  in  the  world’s  history  when  cities,  localities,  nations,  tribes, 
and  other  specific  things,  had  not  as  yet  received  names,  at  least 
such  names  as  would  now  be  known.  It  will  be  remembered  that 
the  primitive  family  dwelt  in  Asia,  and  that  from  their  minds  sprang 
the  unreal  conception  of  the  origin  of  evil.  And  I will  now  relate 
the  progress  of  that  mis-impression  among  the  eastern  tribes  and 
nations. 

After  the  distribution  to  other  locations  of  the  more  advanced  por- 
tions of  the  original  family,  those  who  remained  were  not  sufficiently 
developed  in  their  faculties  to  improve  on  the  original  conception  — 
until  a subsequent  generation  (which  continued  to  imbibe  the  early 
idea)  produced  a mind  who  was  capable  of  improving  upon  their  he- 
reditary impressions.  But  his  mythology  proceeded  in  an  opposite 
direction  to  that  of  the  European  nations.  Knowing  not  of  each 
other’s  doctrines,  and  being  so  separated  from  one  another,  it  was 
impossible  for  the  nations  to  commune  with  each  other,  or  to  modify 
by  this  means,  to  any  possible  extent,  the  features  of  the:r  advancing 


nature’s  divine  revelations 


3S3 


theology.  So  the  subsequent  eastern  tribes  originated  a doctrine 
dissimilar  to  that  of  other  nations,  from  the  opinions  ascending  to 
them  through  the  successive  generations,  from  the  primitive  family. 

Tradition  was  at  that  time  the  medium  of  historical  information. 
By  tradition  I mean  the  vocal  mode  of  expression  by  which  the  first 
inhabitants  communicated  their  opinions  and  experience  to  each  suc- 
ceeding generation.  This  enlightened  mind  of  which  I speak,  among 
the  eastern  tribes,  conceived  of  a doctrine  which  he  taught  the  people 
was  impressed  upon  his  mind  by  some  good-influencing  spirit  that 
dwelt  in  one  of  those  “ breaths”  which  their  forefathers  had  been 
tauvht  to  believe  were  the  origin  of  evil. 

Concerning  the  social  condition  of  these  tribes,  some  things  might 
with  profit  be  said  ; and  these  things,  it  will  be  seen,  were  manifestly 
the  reason  why  a different  theology  sprang  up  in  their  midst.  Three 
tribes  dwelt  in  Asia,  respectively  on  the  locations  now  occupied  by 
the  Japanese,  Malayans,  and  Indo-Persians.  The  first  of  these  tribes 
journeyed  in  the  direction  of  the  African  continent,  and  soon  discov- 
ered a beautiful  valley,  which  has  since  been  named  Shinar.*  And 
they  sent  messengers  to  their  kindred  tribes,  which  resulted  in  the 
journeying  also  of  these  tribes  to  this  valley,  where  they,  united, 
formed  a youthful  nation,  and  dwelt  together  for  many  generations, 
in  the  most  perfect  peace  and  harmony. 

It  would  be  well  to  notice  the  causes  of  this  happy  consociality. 
Surrounding  portions  of  Africa  and  Asia. were  very  fertile  in  useful 
productions  of  the  vegetable  kingdom.  Also  many  trees  yielded  a 
kind  of  milk,  of  which  they  made  extensive  use.  And  with  their 
hunting-implements  they  would  often  succeed  in  slaying  certain  spe- 
cies of  animals,  which  also  composed  a great  portion  of  their  food. 
Being  thus  conditioned,  and  all  their  physical  wants  being  supplied, 
they  turned  their  attention  to  the  cultivation  of  their  faculties,  and 
became  expert  in  the  construction  of  some  very  beautiful  and  delicate 
things.  It  would  be  well  to  mention  that  the  Chinese  of  the  present 
day  display  the  perfection  of  all  the  delicate,  eccentric,  and  fantastic 
inventions  such  as  were  first  the  work  of  these  people.  They  began 
by  forming  many  articles  of  embroidery  from  grass  and  the  fibres  of 
a certain  kind  of  tree.  Among  other  things,  they  formed  singular 
coverings  for  the  head,  and  also  garments  consisting  of  closely-inter- 
woven grass  and  fibres,  and  lined  with  the  skin  of  animals.  Such 
were  the  arts  which  they  cultivated. 


See  Genesis  xi.  2. 


384 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


Their  social  condition  being  favorable,  this  as  a consequence  pro- 
duced  a more  perfect  degree  of  mental  tranquillity  ; and  as  a result 
of  this,  higher  and  better  theological  ideas  sprang  up  among  them. 
So  while  things  were  thus  situated,  the  mind  of  which  I have  spoken 
put  forth  a new  opinion.  I will  repeat  his  thoughts,  although  they 
are  unrecorded  : — 

“ The  great  waters,”  said  he,  “ contained  the  spirit  of  which  your 
forefathers  have  spoken.  And  at  that  time  water  alone  was  existing. 
The  great  spirit  formed  this  ground,  and  these  many  things  about  us, 
and  the  many  gods  above  us  and  their  grounds,  and  the  grounds  that 
extend  further  than  the  great  spirit  can  see.  This  spirit  was  then, 
while  in  the  waters,  asleep.  And  they  called  him  Parana.  But 
when  he  desired  to  have  some  living  objects  to  worship  him,  he 
awoke  from  his  repose,  and  breathed  forth  a spirit  throughout  all  the 
waters,  and  the  waters  moved  from  their  great  depths.  And  this 
spirit  which  moved  the  waters  was  called  NarasayanaP  Nar,  in 
the  original  Indian  language,  means  water,  and  sayana  signifies  power 
to  move  ; and  thus  the  two  conjoined  mean  moving  waters.  In  the 
depths  of  the  waters,  he  taught  them,  was  created  a great  egg.  This, 
by  the  moving  of  the  waters,  finally  expanded,  unfolded  its  con- 
tents, and  formed  instantaneously  the  ground  upon  which  they  lived. 
Thus,  he  taught  them,  the  world  was  created. 

Together  with  the  earth,  he  said  the  spirit  Vishnu  (which  was  the 
second  spirit)  created  the  human  form  — which  he  placed,  as  their 
forefathers  taught,  in  a beautiful  garden  abounding  with  many  deli- 
cious fruits,  and  from  which  went  forth  a stream  that  was  divided 
into  three,  corresponding  to  the  great  spirits  Parama,  Narasayana, 
and  Vislinu.  He  then  said  that  the  great  spirit  left  the  waters  (for 
the  waters  had  then  become  land),  and  ascended  into  realms  beyond 
the  extent  of  their  knowledge,  and  would  only  make  his  appearance 
to  him  (the  inspired  chieftain),  whenever  the  people  would  consent 
to  have  one  of  their  much-admired  females  sacrificed  to  his  glory. 

The  spirit  which  proceeded  from  Parama  (which  was  Vishnu) 
still  remained  near  the  earth,  and  was  not  so  good  a spirit  as  the  one 
who  sent  him  forth  to  create  man.  And  the  third  spirit,  or  the  spirit 
which  dwelt  in  those  “ breaths,”  was  the  most  evil  of  them  all,  and 
was  endeavoring  to  produce  an  eternal  separation  between  the  spirit 
that  dwelt  within  man  and  the  great  spirit  Parama.  “And,”  said  he, 
“ it  is  I who  preserves  you  from  the  wrath  of  this  spirit.  And  if  you 
will  consent  to  offer  sacrifices,  it  will  assist  me  to  appease  his  wrath, 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


385 


and  you  will  not  sink  into  the  bowels  of  the  earth,  where  another 
egg  still  remains,  and  where  the  spirit  that  produces  these  ‘ breaths,’ 
of  whom  we  have  been  told  by  our  forefatherss,  shall  be  compelled 
to  live  for  ever,  among  the  spirits  which  he  has  persuaded  and  cap- 
tured.” Thus,  he  instructed  them,  they  would  live,  according  to 
the  manner  in  which  they  had  lived  before,  either  near  the  throne  of 
Parama,  or  in  this  great  egg  with  the  spirit  which  caused  their  fore- 
fathers to  become  evil  by  breathing  evil  into  their  minds. 

1 would  request  those  who  desire  to  be  instructed  concerning  the 
truthfulness  of  this  statement,  to  peruse  the  writings  of  subsequent 
and  more  matured,  yet  no  less  misdirected  minds,  such  as  Hesiod 
(whom  Homer  speaks  of*  extensively,  and  from  whom  he  received 
many  of  his  ambiguous  and  allegorical  comparisons),  Thales,  Py- 
thagoras, and  also  the  Zend  Avesta  of  Zoroaster,  who  received  from 
the  tradition  of  these  nations  the  rudiments  of  his  philosophy. 

§ 91.  Notwithstanding  it  is  in  advance  of  the  subject  under  con- 
sideration, I will  briefly  state  the  system  of  Zoroaster,  in  which  the 
same  ideas  may  be  perceived,  with  the  exception  of  being  more 
thoroughly  systematized  and  more  clearly  expressed. 

The  great  spirit  recognised  by  the  eastern  tribe  under  the  name 
of  Parama  (subsequently  termed  Brahma ),  is  named  by  Zoroaster 
Ormuzd.  This  being,  he  taught,  was  the  one  who  existed  in  realms 
beyond  the  conception  of  man.  This  was  a good  being  ; and  there 
were  constantly  ascending  to,  and  descending  from,  his  presence, 
subordinate  good  spirits  (elohims).  These  occupied  a sphere  or 
station  somewhat  beneath  Ormuzd.  Below  these  still  was  another 
circle  of  angels  or  spirits  that  were  still  less  good  than  those  above 
them.  These  were  the  first  or  lower  elohims ; and  the  higher  and 
superior  ones  were  amshaspands,  or  angels  that  were  permitted,  on 
account  of  their  being  superior  in  goodness  to  the  former  ones,  to 
ascend  to  the  presence  of  Ormuzd.  The  latter,  being  a good  spirit, 
was  an  eternal  hater  of  evil. 

In  contradistinction  to  this  being,  Zoroaster  elevated  the  Vishnu 
and  Narasayana  spirit  of  the  eastern  theologian  to  a position  as 

• When  subsequently  questioned  concerning  this  passage,  the  author  stated  that 
Homer  and  Hesiod  were  contemporary,  and  that  Hesiod  collected  traditions  of  the 
demonology  of  the  ancients,  and  Homer  poetized  them.  The  phrase,  “whom  Homer 
speaks  of,”  I suppose,  therefore,  means  simply  “whom  Homer  refers  to  or  quotes 
though  I preserve  the  expression  as  I find  it  in  my  notes.  Allusion  is  again  made 
to  this  subject  in  the  sequel. 


25 


3SG 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


lofty  and  commanding  as  Ormuzd.  Him  he  named  Ahriman.  He 
was  an  evil  spirit,  and  an  eternal  hater  of  all  goodness.  In  a sphere 
or  circle  beneath  this  spirit,  Zoroaster  also  placed  a legion  of  subor- 
dinate spirits  — and  also  another  sphere  of  evil  spirits  beneath  these, 
according  to  their  degree  of  wickedness. 

By  the  power  of  Ormuzd,  the  earth  and  man  were  made.  By  the 
power  of  Ahriman,  the  world  and  mankind  were  made  sinful  and 
disgusting  in  the  sight  of  the  good  spirits  : and  he  also  prevented  the 
spirit  within  man  from  being  pure  and  good,  as  was  desired  by  the 
good  being.  Zoroaster  also  conceived  that  these  two  beings,  to- 
gether with  their  mighty  hosts,  were  engaged  in  a mighty  war.  And 
he  prophesied  that  finally  the  wicked  spirit  and  his  kingdom  would 
be  destroyed  for  ever,  and  that  the  world  and  the  race  would  then 
be  made  good  in  the  sight  of  Ormuzd,  who  would,  after  the  whole 
race  had  become  amshaspands,  exult  in  view  of  the  conquest  for  ever 
and  ever. 

Peruse  also  the  sayings  of  Xenophon,  Socrates,  and  Plato,  and 
learn  from  these  the  demonology  of  the  primitive  inhabitants  of  the 
earth.  Learn  from  these  also  the  subsequent  modifications  of  theo- 
logical idealism,  as  a result  of  intellectual  advancement.  But  I am 
impressed  to  return  and  continue  the  previous  description. 

The  subsequent  tribes  became  confirmed  in  the  opinion  advanced 
by  this  instructed  chieftain  — who  did  very  much  better  in  putting 
forth  his  ideal  conceptions  to  his  brethren,  than  have  a great  many 
studious,  erudite,  and  well-meaning  theologians,  of  the  'present  day. 
And  there  is  a prominent  point  in  this  oriental  theologian’s  doctrine 
which  is  more  productive  of  good  consequences  than  many  opinions 
of  subsequent  ages. 

They  had  advanced  but  little  in  the  art  of  writing  or  impressing 
their  thoughts  upon  external  objects.  So  he  could  only  promulgate 
his  opinions  vocally,  and  could  not  write  them  and  hand  them  down 
to  subsequent  generations.  And  indeed  it  is  to  be  lamented  that 
writing  has  been  subsequently  employed  as  a medium  to  transfer  crude 
and  gross  conceptions  to  the  minds  of  generation  after  generation,  and 
that  these  have  thus  been  perpetuated  even  unto  the  present  time. 

Error  began  with  man  — because  of  his  innocent  and  uninstructed 
faculties  ; because  he  did  not  observe  those  conditions  which  were 
required  for  his  happiness  ; and  because  he  cultivated  a deceptive  ar- 
tificiality instead  of  interior  purity  and  refinement.  And  from  a mi- 
oute  rill,  human  error  increased  to  a vast  ocean,  the  many  nations  of 


nature’s  divine  revelations.  387 

the  earth  being  its  tributaries.  The  contaminations  and  sophistica- 
tions of  these  flowed  into  the  great  stream  of  human  iniquity.  This 
has  covered  the  whole  face  of  the  earth  ; it  has  washed  every  bosom 
of  peacefulness,  and  left  only  the  dregs  of  wretchedness  and  imbe- 
cility. It  has  prostrated  and  desolated  nations  ; it  has  consumed  and 
swallowed  up  the  principles  of  morality  and  refinement  which  are 
man’s  by  nature.  And  the  present  generation  also  is  partly  immersed 
in  the  great  ocean  of  iniquity  and  misdirection.  Their  true  condition 
is  to  them  unknown  ; but  they  are  in,  and  upon  the  margin  of,  the 
great  sea  of  vice  and  misery,  and  will  be  overwhelmed  in  the  waves 
of  wretchedness,  if  they  do  not  now  receive  instruction,  and  endeavor 
to  gain  the  ark  of  truth  and  everlasting  protection  which  is  still  float- 
ing upon  the  tide. 

From  these  things  it  can  be  distinctly  seen  that  the  origin  of  evil 
was  in  the  errors  of  human  association,  and  not  in  those  “ winds,” 
spirits,  gods,  demons,  or  supreme  potentates,  whom  man,  from  the 
beginning  to  this  present  time,  has  been  falsely  accusing. 

But,  as  I have  related,  these  eastern  tribes  still  continued  to  exist 
in  unity  of  feeling  and  interest,  and  they  imbibed  and  cherished  the 
new  doctrines  of  their  leader.  However,  affairs  were  not  always  to 
continue  thus  : for  about  the  middle  of  the  fourth  generation,  this  na- 
tion became  divided  by  some  social  discrepancy,  and  one  tribe  jour- 
neyed to  the  east  and  located  where  China  now  is ; another  to  the 
east  of  Asia  ; another  to  where  Egypt  is  ; and  the  remainder  con- 
tinued as  before. 

I am  impressed  that  the  theology  of  the  southern  European  nation, 
and  also  that  of  these  tribes,  remained  about  the  same  until  transpired 
the  event  in  the  physical  history  of  the  earth,  known  as  the  deluge. 

As  we  proceed,  I will  mention  the  origin  of  the  “primitive  history ,” 
of  which  I have  heretofore  spoken.  But  it  is  necessary,  before  I 
describe  the  deluge  now  impending,  to  notice  the  origin  of  some  say- 
ings in  the  same  history  recorded  previously  to  the  account  of  the 
deluge.  And  I am  deeply  impressed  that  the  world  should  make 
their  acknowledgment  to  the  writer  of  the  book  of  Genesis  for  con- 
veying to  them  a distinct  and  truthful  history  of  all  early  traditional 
theology  and  mythological  impressions. 


§ 92.  It  is  well  to  mention  that  the  book  of  Genesis  was  written 
by  the  Jews  in  Persia,  at  which  time  a branch  of  this  people  were 


3S8 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


held  in  captivity.*  And  the  accounts  therein  contained  are  exceed- 
ingly truthful,  as  they  present  a general  reflection  of  the  theology  of 
the  Persians  as  received  from  traditional  history  and  systematized  by 
Zoroaster. 

That  the  parallelism  may  be  observed  between  the  previous  con- 
ception of  the  chieftain  of  the  eastern  tribe,  and  the  ultimate  general- 
ization of  the  same  account  contained  in  the  first  chapter  of  Genesis, 
it  will  be  remembered  that  this  chieftain  proclaimed  to  his  people 
that  Parama  dwelt  in  the  great  waters,  and  had  there  reposed  for 
many  ages  : which  corresponds  to  the  passage  in  the  “ primitive  his- 
tory” which  reads  as  follows  : “ And  the  earth  was  without  form  and 
void,  and  darkness  was  upon  the  face  of  the  deep  ; and  the  spirit  of 
God  moved  upon  the  face  of  the  waters.”  The  eastern  philosopher 
said  that  “ Brahma  breathed  forth  a spirit”  (which  was  Narasayana, 
meaning  moving  waters).  And  the  passage  which  reads,  “And 
darkness  was  upon  the  face  of  the  deep,”  was  derived  from  the  pas- 
sage in  the  Sanscrit  language,  which  reads,  “And  Brahma  was  within 
the  great  waters  and  was  asleep the  word  “ asleep”  being  rendered 
“ darkness”  in  the  other  passage. 

In  the  eastern  mythology  the  account  continues,  “ And  Brahma 
moved  from  off  the  waters,  and  the  egg  formed  the  grounds  and  the 
breaths ;”  while  in  connexion,  the  “ primitive  history”  relates  it  in 
this  manner:  “ In  the  beginning  God  (meaning  Brahma)  created  the 
heaven  and  the  earth.”  — “ Heaven”  is,  in  the  Sanscrit  language, 
rendered  “breaths:”  in  the  Hebrew,  “ shemayim”  — meaning  the 
atmosphere.  And  according  to  the  Sanscrit  version  of  the  eastern 
myth,  “ the  spirit”  which  was  sleeping  (meaning  darkness)  “ left  the 
waters,  and  light  appeared  : and  Brahma  saw  that  it  was  good.” 

Moreover,  this  chieftain  of  the  east  retained  the  early  impressions 
of  the  race,  which  came  to  him  by  tradition  through  the  previous 
generations,  in  an  imperfect  manner.  So  having  lost  a part  of  the 
original  impression  concerning  the  condition  of  the  early  inhabitants, 
he  related  it  in  a modified  form,  as  he  received  it,  in  the  account  of 
his  deity’s  creation.  And  it  then  suggested  these  thoughts  to  his 
mind  ; That  after  Parama  had  moved  the  waters,  and  they  had 

* In  answer  to  an  inquiry,  the  author  subsequently  stated  that  this  was  a captivity 
of  a small  portion  of  one  Jewish  tribe,  which  occurred  a long  period  before  the 
Babylonish  captivity,  but  of  which  we  have  no  historical  record.  The  reader  should 
also  bear  in  mind  that  he  is  here  speaking  of  the  origin  particularly  of  the  first  pari 
of  the  book  of  Genesis,  containing  the  history  of  the  creation,  the  deluge,  &c.,  &c. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


389 


brought  forth  the  world  by  the  development  of  the  qualities  of  the 
egg,  they  at  the  same  time  formed  man,  and  located  him  in  a beau- 
tiful and  fertile  place,  according  to  the  knowledge  they  had  of  their 
forefathers’  history  : and  he  appealed  to  the  knowledge  of  the  genera- 
tion then  existing,  which  confirmed  in  their  minds,  not  only  the 
truthfulness  of  his  cosmogony,  but  also  of  the  account  related  by 
their  forefathers. 

And  the  account  in  the  “ primitive  history”  merely  exhibits  a 
change  from  the  crude  and  particular  manner  in  which  he  related  his 
theory,  to  that  of  a general  description  — which  is  as  follows  : “Let 
us  make  man ” (“us”  meaning  Brahma  and  Vishnu,  the  good  and 
the  subordinate  spirit).  “ So  God  made  man,  and  breathed  into  his 
nostrils  the  breath  of  life,  and  man  became  a living  soul.”  This  is 
rendered  from  the  eastern  mythology  into  the  Sanscrit  language  in 
the  following  manner  : “ With  the  earth,  man  was  formed  ; and  the 
‘breaths’  awoke  him,  and  he  was  evil.” 

“And  God  planted  a garden,  and  placed  in  it  the  man  whom  he 
had  created.”  This  is  rendered  in  the  Sanscrit  language  from  the 
tradition  of  this  eastern  nation,  “And  he  [meaning  man]  was  placed 
on  a portion  of  the  ground  where  grew  trees,  and  flowers,  and  deli- 
cious fruits  ; which  made  our  fathers  happy,  and  pleased  the  great 
spirit  Brahma.” 

Again,  the  “ primitive  history”  relates  that  “ God  saw  that  it  was 
not  good  for  man  to  be  alone.  So  he  caused  a deep  sleep  to  fall 
upon  Adam,  and  took  one  of  his  ribs  and  closed  up  the  flesh  instead 
thereof.  And  of  the  rib  made  he  a woman,  and  gave  her  unto  the 
man.”  This  the  eastern  chieftain  taught  in  the  following  manner, 
and  thus  is  it  written  in  the  Sanscrit : “ And  while  their  fathers  were 
pleased  with  the  beauty  of  the  good  spirit  about  them,  they  felt  lone- 
ly ; and  while  they  felt  thus,  Parama  caused  them  to  be  asleep.  And 
while  they  were  still  as  the  great  waters,  the  good  spirit  sent  them 
from  his  hand  a weaker  number  of  mothers  and  other  brethren.  And 
the  good  spirit  caused  the  fathers  to  awake  : and  they  beheld  each 
other,  and  our  fathers  loved  them.  And  then  they  lived  together, 
one  with  another  : and  the  good  spirit  Parama  was  pleased.” 

According  to  previous  description,  these  two  tribes  or  families  be- 
came located  in  separate  places  without  knowing  of  each  other’s 
existence.  The  people  of  one  tribe  being  matured,  strong,  and  gi- 
gantically constituted,  were  called  by  the  eastern  chieftain  “ their 
fathers.”  These  were  in  eastern  Asia.  And  the  other  tribe  was  an 


390 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


imperfectly-constituted  and  effeminate  one  ; and  they  ultimately,  as 
has  been  related,  discovered  the  more-matured  tribe,  and  the  two 
became  conjoined  as  one  family.  From  that  family  sprang  all  the 
traditional  impressions  which  the  eastern  chieftain  received ; and 
upon  these  he  improved  and  established  his  theology,  until  became 
established  the  Sanscrit  language,  and  the  Pracrit  and  Magadhi,  the 
rudiments  of  which  enter  into  the  Indo-Chinese  language.  From 
the  same  common  source  came  the  rudiments  of  the  Greek  ; at  which 
time  the  Hebrew  was  almost  as  perfectly  established  — and  the  Latin 
also. 

So  these  traditional  demonological  impressions  were  preserved  in 
characters  up  to  the  establishment  of  the  Sanscrit  language  — were 
translated  by  some  Germanic  tribes*  into  the  Greek  — and  those  that 
were  translated  fell  into  the  possession  of  the  Jews  — were  compiled 
and,  transcribed  into  Hebrew  — then  were  carried  by  a detached  por- 
tion of  a tribe  into  the  Persianic  kingdom  — remained  there  for  sev- 
eral centuries,  until  Zoroaster  finally  systematized  the  crude  theology 
of  the  original  manuscripts,  and  which  was  the  prevailing  theology 
among  other  nations  as  well  as  the  Persians.  And  by  the  Persian 
army  besieging  some  parts  of  the  Jewish  nation,  they  became  exas- 
perated against  the  Persians,  which  terminated  in  the  sacrifice  of 
their  liberty,  and  they  were  held  under  the  Persian  government  in 
captivity.  At  this  time  the  Jews  re-transcribed  the  contents  of  these 
manuscripts  into  their  own  language,  and  carried  the  same  with  them 
at  the  expiration  of  their  term  of  bondage.  Then  the  Greek  received 
it  from  the  Hebrew  ; and  the  Latin  from  the  Greek  ; and  the  English 
from  the  Latin. 

So  the  “primitive  history”  should  be  very  deeply  respected  for 
the  truthfulness  it  has  preserved  in  the  relation  of  oriental  tradition, 
mythology,  and  theology,  considering  that  it  has  been  transferred  from 
one  generation  to  another ; that  some  passages  have  been  altered  and 
others  expunged  ; that  there  has  been  some  imperfect  compilation, 
and  that  so  many  interested  persons  have  been  engaged  in  handing 
it  down  in  the  manner  described,  to  the  subsequent  generations  ! 

§ 93.  It  should  be  distinctly  understood  that  we  have  now  ascend- 
ed in  the  hagaographical  and  archaeological  history  of  the  early  tribes 
of  mankind  to  the  period  of  an  event  in  the  physical  history  of  the 

* By  “ Germanic  tribes,”  Ihe  author  means  those  original  tribes  some  or  all  of 
which  subsequently  emigrated  to,  and  peopled,  Germany. 


nature’s  divine  revelations.  391 

• 

earth  known  as  the  flood  or  deluge.  I have  described  the  primitive 
ideas  of  the  inhabitants  of  southern  Europe  and  of  South  America, 
with  their  ascending  modifications.  I have  also  given  a view  of  the 
condition  and  progress  of  the  early  tribes  of  the  Asiatic  and  African 
continents,  which  in  their  advancement  established  a different  theology 
from  that  of  other  nations.  They  conceived  of  no  new  and  important 
mythological  opinions  after  the  establishment  of  those  of  which  I have 
spoken.  And  so  things  remained  until  occurred  the  physical  trans- 
formation termed  the  deluge. 

This  term  is  taken  from  the  Latin  diluvio,  to  overflow,  and  dilu- 
vium, an  inundation.  It  becomes  necessary  to  glance  at  the  various 
impressions  which  this  mighty  occurrence  produced  upon  the  minds 
of  mankind. 

By  those  who  depend  upon  superficial  history  for  their  knowledge, 
the  deluge  is  believed  to  have  been  a universal  submersion  of  the 
face  of  creation.  Many  have  employed  the  same  noble  powers  and 
faculties  to  promulgate  this  misconception  as  should  be  employed  if 
it  were  divine  truth.  But  the  reason  is  plain  to  every  person  who 
possesses  interior  perception  and  discernment,  why  such  men  have 
through  all  ages,  down  to  the  present  time,  depended  for  their  faith 
upon  superficial  evidence,  and  in  such  reposed  the  deepest  confi- 
dence. Therefore  such  noble  and  well-meaning  minds  should  be 
beloved  and  gently  treated  : for  they  are  only  the  subjects  of  miscon- 
ception ; and  in  the  theories  they  have  imbibed  they  have  become 
highly  enlightened. 

But  there  is  another  class  of  minds,  who,  having  become  dissatis- 
fied with  early  impressions  and  unreal  philosophy,  have  discarded 
them,  and  proceeded  to  investigate  the  natural  operations  of  all  physi- 
cal laws  and  principles  of  the  Universe.  These  minds  have  discov- 
ered, according  to  the  divine  and  ever-unchanging  teachings  of  these 
principles,  that  a universal  inundation  was  a physical  impossibility  : 
because  the  atmospheric  envelope  would  not  sustain  watery  vapor  in 
sufficient  quantity  to  cover  the  whole  earth  on  its  becoming  con- 
densed. 

Geological  investigations  also  unfold  evidence  against  such  a pos- 
sibility. Besides,  there  is  no  substantial  reason  why  a universal 
deluge  should  occur.  It  would  be  unreasonable  to  suppose  that 
Nature  has  put  forth  her  efforts  to  produce  the  highest  type  of  physi- 
cal organization,  which  is  Man,  and  this,  too,  by  the  operations  of 
her  immutable  laws,  her  living,  divine  Essence,  and  by  her  un 


392 


nature’s  .divine  revelations. 


changing  obedience  to  the  Great  Positive  Mind  — and  then,  after 
having  created  all  things,  swept  them  out  of  existence.  For  man  is 
not  accountable,  in  a manner  in  which  this  supposition  would  imply, 
for  his  original  or  present  imperfections  ; for  these  sprang  necessarily 
from  his  uncultivated  social  and  moral  situation.  Indeed,  it  is  only 
by  the  aid  of  this  imperfection  that  man  can  properly  know  and  ap- 
preciate purity  and  perfection.  So  this  imperfection  is  an  indispen- 
sable use  to  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth  at  the  present  period,  whereby 
they  may  obtain  instruction,  and  be  induced  to  press  onward  to  the 
organization  of  a more  truthful  physical  condition,  and  to  the  attain- 
ment of  a higher  spirituality. 

So  physical  and  moral  evidences  are  against  the  possibility  of  a 
universal  inundation.  And  minds  properly  constituted  and  directed 
will  repose  entire  confidence  in  these  immutable  teachings  of  Nature, 
of  the  Universe,  of  the  Divine  Mind. 

Yet  those  who  have  been  educated  to  believe  otherwise  have  op- 
posed the  promulgation  of  these  evidences  with  as  much  vehemence 
as  they  have  manifested  in  the  dissemination  of  their  own  views. 
Men  who  are  thus  instructed  from  youth,  imbibe  hereditarily  the 
opinions  of  their  forefathers,  and  venerate  them  because  they  were 
the  first  upon  the  mind  — which  circumstance  produces  in  the  mind 
a conviction  of  their  truthfulness.  Such  minds  should  be  admired 
for  all  the  noble  qualities  and  faculties  which  they  possess  : but  if 
those  faculties  are  compassed  about  by  a wall  of  prejudice  and  secta- 
rian affection,  then  evidence  should  be  presented  appealing  to  their 
more  interior  and  unsophisticated  qualities  ; and  then  their  minds 
would  become  expanded  and  free  from  all  bigotry,  superstition,  and 
unnatural  prejudice.  Make  men  love  truth  by  causing  their  interests 
to  correspond  to  truth,  and  then  truth  will  be  received  by  a natural 
influx  from  their  superior  situation.  But  leave  men  inferiorly  condi- 
tioned as  to  their  social  and  external  affairs,  and  all  their  opinions 
will  correspond  precisely  to  the  inferior  state  in  which  they  are  ex- 
isting. 

So  men  should  not  criticise  each  other’s  thoughts  with  a superficial 
judgment ; but  instead  of  this,  they  should  present  truth  in  all  its  na- 
tive simplicity,  and  leave  error  and  all  the  depressing  influences  ex- 
isting in  the  physical  and  mental  world  to  themselves  : for  the  best 
antidote  for  error  is  the  presentation  of  truth.  Marvel  not,  then,  con- 
cerning the  superficial  things  of  which  I have  spoken,  nor  falsely 
accuse  each  other’s  sentiments.  Instead  of  this,  respect  the  affection 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


393 


for  thoughts,  flow  these  from  whatsoever  mind  they  may ; but  do  not 
imbibe  those  thoughts  or  sentiments  unless  they  are  truthful,  and 
congenial  with  the  deepest  interior  promptings  of  the  living  prin- 
ciple within. 

§ 94.  Before  I proceed  to  speak  of  the  origin  of  the  opinion  con- 
cerning the  universality  of  the  flood,  I will  speak  of  the  flood  itself, 
in  connexion  with  what  has  already  been  said  on  the  same  subject. 

In  previous  remarks  upon  the  formation  of  the  Pacific  ocean,  Ca- 
ribbean sea,  gulf  of  Mexico,  and  Guatemala  — also  on  the  confirma- 
tion of  the  Atlantic  and  Mediterranean  waters  in  their  present  forms 
— I spoke  of  the  valley  which  now  forms  the  bed  of  the  Pacific 
ocean  ; of  the  inhabitants  of  those  portions  now  known  as  the  Sand- 
wich and  Philippine  islands  ; and  also  of  those  of  the  fertile  portions 
now  known  as  the  West-India  islands,  of  the  portion  which  now 
forms  the  Mexican  gulf,  and  of  the  extent  of  the  tribes  into  the  inland 
fertile  locations.  I have  in  general  terms  described  how  these  por- 
tions became  populated  ; and  a more  particular  relation  is  not  neces- 
sary. Keeping  in  memory,  then,  all  the  conditions  of  which  I have 
previously  spoken,  I proceed  to  some  general  considerations  con- 
cerning the  phenomenon,  cause,  and  result  of  the  deluge  which  was 
at  this  period  about  transpiring. 

It  is  unnecessary  here  to  explain  the  primary  physical  causes  en- 
gaged in  producing  this  awful  catastrophe : I have  before  spoken  at 
length  concerning  the  transformation  of  particles  of  inferior  substances 
into  the  watery  element  and  into  the  atmosphere,  and  of  the  equilib- 
rium between  the  external  and  internal  portions  of  the  earth.  I have 
also  spoken  of  the  stupendous  icebergs  that  were  formed  in  the  arctic 
regions.  And  I have  intimated  that  the  upper  portions  of  the  two 
hemispheres  were  as  yet  concealed  by  the  water,  because  the  land 
there  was  lower  than  at  any  other  portion  of  the  earth,  with  the  ex- 
ception of  the  beds  of  the  Atlantic  and  Mediterranean  which  then 
were  partly  formed,  according  to  the  level-seeking  tendency  of  the 
watery  element.  So  about  these  things  I relate  no  more. 

It  was  by  the  loss  of  the  equilibrium  between  the  interior  and  ex- 
terior forces  that  the  molten  contents  of  the  centre  of  the  earth  be- 
came excited  in  an  inconceivable  manner.  And  as  was  the  case  in 
previous  instances,  the  Andes,  Vesuvius,  and  the  many  other  reliev- 
ing vents,  were  inadequate  now  to  restore  the  equilibrium.  So  the 
voice  of  the  earthquake  thundered  through  the  bowels  of  the  earth. 


394 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


It  was  mightier  than  the  mightiest  earthquake,  and  louder  than  the 
loudest  thunder.  It  burst  forth,  and  the  earth  trembled  to  its  centre. 
Fire,  smoke,  mist,  and  rain,  surrounded  the  whole  earth.  The  tribes 
that  were  existing  on  the  portions  intermediate  between  what  are  now 
called  the  eastern  and  western  hemispheres  were  nearly  all  destroyed  ; 
and  those  that  survived  fell  stupified,  as  if  dead,  to  the  ground. 
Thought  can  not  clothe  itself  in  words  sufficiently  expressive  to  de- 
scribe the  sufferings  and  exclamations  of  the  inhabitants.  And  about 
three  days  elapsed  before  the  equilibrium  was  restored  — at  the  end  of 
which  time  the  northern  portions  being  elevated,  and  other  portions 
depressed,  the  water  rushed  from  the  former  regions  and  filled  val- 
leys which  had  previously  been  dry  land,  and  the  oceans,  seas,  lakes, 
gulfs,  and  rivers,  became  established  as  existing  at  the  present  day. 

I am  now  impressed  to  notice  the  surviving  inhabitants,  and  the 
effect  which  this  great  occurrence  produced  upon  their  minds. 

The  tribe  which  remained  up  to  this  time  in  the  valley  of  Shinar, 
together  with  five  small,  detached  tribes,  were  destroyed  : but  those 
that  separated  from  the  former,  and  located  in  China  and  Japan,  re- 
mained unharmed.  They  retained  the  theology  and  doctrines  taught 
them  by  the  chieftain  of  whom  I have  spoken.  And  I will  proceed 
to  notice  the  effect  which  this  event  produced  upon  them,  and  the 
interpretation  of  the  occurrence  as  given  by  their  head  and  ruler. 

Soon  after  all  things  became  quiet,  they  sent  messengers  to  ascer- 
tain how  it  had  fared  with  their  elder  brethren  in  the  valley  of  Shinar 
But  discovering  them  not,  and  seeing  a river  where  once  they  had 
lived,  they  returned  and  related  this  to  their  governor.  And  as  they 
knew  of  no  other  nations  existing  upon  the  earth,  they  concluded 
that  they  were  the  only  people  saved  from  the  great  catastrophe.  So 
the  chief  began  to  instruct  them  that  as  the  others  had  not  been  good, 
and  had  not  offered  sacrifices  to  satisfy  the  demands  of  Brahma  — 
“ Brahma  seeing  that  the  wickedness  upon  the  earth  was  great,  and 
the  imaginations  of  the  thoughts  of  their  hearts  were  only  evil  con- 
tinually, began  to  repent  that  he  had  directed  Vishnu  to  create  their 
forefathers  and  them.  And  seeing  that  the  earth  was  filled  with  wick- 
edness and  abomination  in  the  sight  of  Brahma,  he  said  he  would 
cause  the  great  waters,  of  which  he  had  made  the  ground  and  them, 
to  sweep  them  off  the  face  of  the  land.” 

So  the  governor  and  prophet  of  this  eastern  tribe  gave  the  impres- 
sion that  it  was  because  he  himself,  and  his  tribe,  were  better  than 
their  forefathers,  that  Brahma  let  them  live.  He  represented  these 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


395 


ideas  by  sounds  and  hieroglyphics.  He  instructed  them  to  build  a 
brazen  image  that  would  represent,  as  he  said,  the  god  of  the  Sun. 
The  head  of  this  being  was  very  much  like  that  of  the  unicorn,  and 
the  body  like  that  of  a fish  ; and  they  placed  it  within  a stone  tent, 
and  every  year  visited  it  and  offered  up  sacrifices.  To  this  they 
were  prompted  because  they  had  been  preserved.  And  from  this 
time  they  began  to  worship  the  sun,  the  moon,  the  stars,  and  the 
milky  way,  which  they  supposed  were  the  habitations  of  spirits,  the 
number  of  which  they  represented  as  being  thirty-three  thousand, 
each  one  of  these  being  a god  to  its  respective  sphere  or  planet. 

They  as  yet  did  not  designate  each  other  by  names , but  merely  by 
families  or  states  of  association.  But  the  person  who  was  their  gov- 
ernor and  prophet,  yet  unnamed,  was,  by  subsequent  writers,  named 
Fold.  This  may  be  verified  in  the  Chinese  record  of  the  present 
day.  And  this  person  has  been  supposed  by  still  more  modern 
writers  to  be  the  Noah  spoken  of  in  the  “ primitive  history.” 

The  Chaldeanic  Persians,  or  the  Japan  tribe  of  which  I have 
spoken,  preserved  in  their  mythology  the  whole  account,  with  very 
little  modification.  But  the  father  of  the  family  who  was  permitted 
to  live  by  Brahma,  they  named  Xisuthrus.  This  also  has  been  sup- 
posed by  modern  historians  to  be  the  person  named  in  the  Jewish 
account  of  the  deluge. 

The  sects  known  as  the  Budhists  and  Jaina  preserved  with  great 
care  the  same  traditional  account,  and  the  same  ultimately  became  a 
portion  of  the  Greek  oriental  history  and  theology  : and  in  this  the 
same  being  is  named  Deucalion.  This  is  the  termination  of  the  tra- 
dition concerning  the  deluge  as  the  account  and  interpretation  of  it 
were  given  by  the  leader  of  the  eastern  isolated  tribe  of  which  we 
have  spoken. 

§ 95.  I now  proceed  to  speak  of  the  aborignal  inhabitants  of 
America,  and  of  the  effect  produced  upon  their  minds  by  the  same 
catastrophe. 

By  the  formation  of  the  Pacific  ocean  they  were  separated  from, 
and  lost  all  communication  with,  the  tribes  that  were  existing  upon 
the  present  Sandwich  islands  : and  they  knew  not  of  the  tribes  and 
nations  in  the  southern  continent.  And  there  were  but  few  Indians 
who  escaped  the  inundation,  which  was  by  them  supposed  to  be  uni- 
versal ; for  they  dwelt  more  upon  the  portions  now  covered  by  the 
Pacific  than  they  did  east  of  the  present  limits  of  that  ocean.  So 


39G 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


they  believed  that  they  were  the  only  tribes  that  were  saved,  and  that 
they  dwelt  upon  the  only  land  in  the  earth,  supposing  that  all  other 
portions  had  sunk  beneath  the  great  waters. 

And  now  I have  occasion  to  speak  of  their  original  conceptions  of 
the  Great  Spirit. 

They  were  unlike  their  brethren  in  disposition  and  social  condi- 
tion ; for  they  were  united  by  a well-directed  affection,  and  by  a unity 
and  harmony  in  all  their  plans  and  proceedings.  They  were  exceed- 
ingly fond  of  hunting,  and  this  employment  they  supposed  was  right, 
or  else  their  forefathers  who  followed  it  would  not  have  dwelt  in  such 
a beautiful  garden.  So  they  invented  instruments,  and  cultivated 
the  disposition  to  roam  and  hunt  through  the  wilds  of  the  forest,  and 
would  pitch  their  bark  tents  wherever  they  pleased. 

Being  thus  socially  united,  they  were  not  led  to  conceive  of  gross 
errors  : for  errors  spring  from  social  disunity  and  disorganization,  and 
from  a misapprehension  of  the  cause  of  existing  evil.  Having  im- 
bibed and  retained  the  impression  received  by  their  early  forefathers, 
they  proceeded  to  reconcile  this  impression  with  the  manifestation  of 
all  things  about  and  above  them.  So  they  saw  that  the  “breaths” 
were  not  evil  to  them  as  their  fathers  had  taught,  but  instead  of  this 
they  supposed  that  they  proceeded  from  a good  spirit,  who  desired 
to  fan  their  heated  brows  after  they  had  toiled  and  travelled  exces- 
sively in  the  light  of  the  Good  Spirit.  So  when  fatigued  and  ex- 
hausted by  toilsome  travels,  they  would  rest  confidingly  under  the 
protection  of  the  Great  Spirit  who  had  formed  their  world,  and  would 
joyously  receive  his  refreshing  breath,  that  came,  as  they  supposed, 
from  some  of  the  good  subordinate  spirits.  They  saw  that  these  # 
“ breaths”  were  generally  good  for  them  ; and  this  manifestation  of 
goodness  unfolded  the  tender  dispositions  of  their  nature,  and  they 
dwelt  in  love  one  with  another.  And  these  truthful  conceptions,  and 
their  tranquillizing  influences,  descended  through  all  the  succeeding 
generations  of  this  people  down  to  the  present  time. 

They  believed  that  the  eye,  the  tongue  — that  plants,  animals,  and 
all  the  celestial  orbs  — had  spirits  in  attendance.  They  believed  that 
the  power  of  speaking  was  communicated  to  them  by  the  spirit  of  the 
tongue,  and  so  also  the  power  of  seeing  by  the  spirit  of  the  eye. 
They  loved,  adored,  and  worshipped,  the  Sun  : for  it  made  their 
earth  fertile  in  all  the  things  which  they  cultivated.  They  wor- 
shipped the  Moon  : for  it  was  a good  spirit  to  give  them  light  while 
the  warm  and  better  spirit  had  gone  to  rest.  They  beheld  the  stars 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


397 


with  awe  and  admiration  : because  they  were  little  lights  held  out  by 
the  good  spirits  to  give  them  light,  and  to  make  their  earth  look  beau- 
tiful when  the  sun  and  the  moon  had  retired  to  rest.  They  believed 
that  when  they  should  lie  down  and  die,  the  spirit  of  their  eyes  and 
tongue  would  convey  the  spirit  that  was  within  thfem  to  the  beautiful 
habitations  of  the  spirit-land.  They  felt  conscious  that  the  spirit- 
land  was  analogous  to  the  one  on  which  they  dwelt,  in  all  its  pro- 
ductions, so  that  there  they  might  hunt,  adore  the  good  spirits,  and 
love  one  another  ; and  it  was  therefore  to  them  a land  of  transcendent 
beauty  and  grandeur.  There  they  would  not  see  any  more  the 
spirit  of  the  waters.  And  there  they  would  not  die  any  more,  nei- 
ther dislike  nor  injure  one  another;  but  would  be  near  the  placid 
waters,  and  the  meandering  streams,  and  in  the  forests  and  gardens 
of  beauty  and  delight.  There  they  would  see  the  shining  fish,  the 
gilded  birds,  and  the  gentle  animals,  that  would  not  resist  their  grasp. 
There  they  would  behold  the  Good  Spirit,  while  the  vaulted  cham- 
bers above  would  be  illuminated  by  all  the  grandeur  and  magnificence 
possible  to  conceive. 

This  truthful  conception  and  its  accompanying  influences  became 
established  immoveably  in  the  minds  and  affections  of  each  succeed- 
ing generation  down  to  the  present  time.  Here  is  the  first  instance, 
from  the  moment  the  human  form  first  obtained  an  existence,  in  which 
human  thought  took  a proper,  truthful,  and  natural  direction.  It  was 
the  spontaneous  teaching  of  Nature  about  them,  and  the  correspond- 
ing prompting  of  the  principle  within,  that  taught  them  of  the  spirit- 
land.  Disunity  was  not  in  their  midst ; and  therefore  wickedness 
and  abomination  were  to  them  unknown.  Their  thoughts  were  nat- 
ural, spontaneous,  true,  and  celestial.  Learn  from  this,  ye  men  of 
erudition,  and  let  your  lofty  aspirations  sink  to  the  lowest  degree  of 
abasement.  Learn  from  this,  ye  theologians,  philosophers,  and  meta- 
physicians, and  let  your  now-ambitious  thoughts  sink  so  low  that 
generations  yet  unborn  will  be  unconscious  of  their  existence.  Learn 
from  this,  ye  traditional  historians,  ye  governors,  chieftains,  prophets, 
and  potentates,  and  promptly  discard  all  that  has  been  and  begin 
again,  and  travel  the  path  of  wisdom  and  virtue.  Learn  from  this, 
ye  classifiers,  ye  commentators,  ye  external  and  unnatural  teachers, 
and  let  the  ink  which  has  been  wasted  in  penning  your  thoughts  be 
naught  in  comparison  to  the  abundance  of  tears  shed  by  you  in  the 
act  of  humiliation  ! Let  external  pride  and  consequent  arrogance 
fall  for  ever.  Let  highmindedness  and  pretended  enlightenment 


39S 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


cease  to  trammel  your  spiritual  principle,  and  let  this  then  seek  true 
wisdom,  derivable  from  the  inexpressible  beauties  of  a smiling  Na- 
ture 1 

The  Indians  supposed  that  none  but  themselves  were  preserved 
upon  the  earth  ; and  they  believed  that  the  spirit  of  the  great  waters 
had  swallowed  up  their  brethren  because  of  their  wickedness,  and 
left  them  because  they  were  good,  and  favored  in  the  sight  of  the 
Good  Spirit.  They  named  the  chief  existing  among  them  at  the 
time  of  this  occurrence  SoUavnrata.  This  tradition,  with  a very 
little  modification,  has  descended  through  the  minds  of  every  sub- 
sequent generation.  And  this  person  has  been  supposed  by  some 
modern  chronological  and  biblical  writers  to  be  the  Noah  of  the 
“ primitive  history.” 

I will  now  proceed  to  speak  of  the  nation  and  collateral  tribes  that 
dwelt  in  Central  America  and  southern  Europe.  Inasmuch  as  they 
had  advanced  more  in  all  the  arts  and  sciences  than  any  other  nation, 
their  language  and  theology  were  necessarily  more  sublime.  I am 
now  speaking  of  the  fleeting,  evanescent  sublimity  that  is  always  con- 
nected with  an  unreal  idealism.  It  will  be  remembered  that  they  had 
removed  the  origin  of  evil  to  an  abyss  below,  of  which  the  sun  was 
a representative : but  it  now  became  necessary  for  their  inspired 
chieftain  to  interpret  and  account  for  this  wonderful  catastrophe  by 
the  theological  materials  in  his  possession.  I am  now  speaking  of  a 
chieftain  who  superseded  the  one  of  whom  I last  spoke.  He  said 
(as  the  inhabitants  of  the  city  wherein  they  dwelt  were  the  only  ones 
known  to  be  preserved,  with  the  exception  of  three  tribes  that  dwelt 
on  the  more  inland  portions)  that  the  angry  being  who  had  made  that 
great  fiery  gulf  was  exasperated  because  of  the  short-coming  and 
wicked  transactions  of  their  brethren,  the  tribes  that  dwelt  upon  the 
gulf  of  Mexico  and  other  portions  leading  to  the  West-India  islands. 
And  he  said  this  angry  being  had  conversed  with  their  previous  gov- 
ernor, for  the  sake  of  whose  presence  the  tribes  had  long  been  saved. 
And  as  he  was  the  only  good  person  among  all  the  tribes,  he  was 
permitted  to  converse  with  the  spirit  who  was  opposed  to  these 
abominations.  And  he  entered  into  a covenant  with  this  angry  be- 
ing (for  the  latter  lamented  that  he  had  created  so  many  tribes)  to  let 
that  tribe  and  himself  live,  because  it  was  necessary  that  the  earth 
should  be  peopled  by  those  who  were  as  good  as  he  and  they  were. 
So  one  of  their  vortical  edifices  contained  the  hieroglyphical  promise 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


399 


or  covenant  made  with  the  potentate  of  whom  I have  spoken,  and 
which  was  confirmed  by  the  one  of  whom  I am  now  speaking.  It 
is  well  to  remark  that  I am  now  speaking  of  a chieftain  who  taught 
and  established  the  traditions  of  three  generations  before  him  — the 
one  living  when  occurred  the  deluge.  For  the  theology  was  not 
definitely  confirmed  and  promulgated  until  the  third  generation  after 
the  occurrence.  But  this  vortical  edifice  contained  hieroglyphical 
representations  which  the  then-present  chieftain  interpreted  into  a 
demonstration  that  the  forefather  had  conversed  with  the  angry  being. 
And  it  was  owing  to  this,  he  taught,  that  they  were  saved  ; while 
their  brethren,  who  were  wicked  in  the  sight  of  their  god,  descended 
into  the  burning  realms  below.  I will  now  trace  this  idea  until  it 
makes  its  appearance  in  modern  days. 

It  will  be  remembered  that  this  nation  believed  that  they  were  the 
only  human  beings  saved,  because  they  knew  not  of  any  other  inhab- 
itants— and  believed  that  their  god  had  repented  of  making  so  many 
tribes,  because  of  their  wickedness,  and  destroyed  them  on  that  ac- 
count. The  chieftain  who  transferred  this  traditional  account  from 
the  time  of  the  deluge,  was  not  named  until  many  generations  after 
him.  And  I find  no  absolute  trace  of  a name  until  I trace  these 
ideas  into  the  manuscripts  of  which  I have  spoken,  in  the  Jews’  pos- 
session : and  there  he  is  named  Noah. 

I have  thus  traced  the  Chinese  mythology  to  the  Greek  — and  the 
mythology  of  these  southern  tribes  to  the  Jews  ; and  I find  the  ac- 
counts in  this  manner  : The  good,  saved,  and  favored,  of  the  Chinese, 
were  Fohi  and  his  family  ; of  the  Chaldeanic-Persians,  Xisuthrus  and 
his  family  ; of  the  Greeks,  Deucalion  and  his  family.  In  the  Indian 
mythology,  the  saved  were  Sottavaraia  and  his  family : and  each 
believed  that  the  whole  world  was  drowned,  with  the  exception  of 
themselves.  In  the  Jews’  manuscripts,  I find  that  the  saved  were 
Noah  and  his  family. 

And  in  the  writings  of  modern  commentators  upon  oriental  and 
heathen  mythology,  these  various  traditions  are  generally  referred  to, 
to  establish  the  truthfulness  of  the  relation  as  contained  in  the  “ prim- 
itive history” — it  being  supposed  that  the  account  in  the  possession 
of  each  nation  originated  from  one  source,  and  from  the  actual,  tra- 
ditional experience  of  a man  and  family  as  is  therein  related!  Such 
a supposition  is  not  warrantable  ; for  all  the  traditions  that  are  in 
possession  of  the  different  nations  can  not  be  traced  to  one  source. 

In  the  Jewish  record,  the  general  account  is  as  follows  : “ And 


400 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


the  wickedness  of  man  was  great  upon  the  earth,  and  the  imagination 
of  the  thoughts  of  his  heart  was  only  evil  continually.  And  God  re- 
pented that  he  had  peopled  the  earth  ; — but  Noah  found  favor  in  his 
sight.”  And  the  latter  was  directed  to  construct  an  ark  of  gopher- 
wood,  with  specific  and  required  dimensions:  and  Noah  and  his 
family,  and  the  beasts  of  the  earth,  and  the  fowls  of  the  air,  entered, 
sexually  conjoined,  into  the  ark,  and  were  saved.  After  this,  dry 
land  appeared,  as  Noah  inferred  from  evidence  conveyed  by  a dove. 
And  soon  the  ark  rested  upon  Mount  Ararat,  and  the  animals  therein 
contained  went  forth  to  multiply  and  reanimate  the  face  of  Nature  ; 
and  Noah  and  his  family  went  forth  to  multiply,  and  to  populate  the 
whole  earth. 

In  the  Chinese  mythology,  or  rather  in  that  of  the  more  recent 
tribes  of  that  nation,  the  following  account  may  be  found  : “And 
Brahma  seeing  the  wickedness  of  the  forefathers,  did  lament  because 
they  did  not  sacrifice  their  offerings,  and  began  to  lament  that  he  had 
directed  Vishnu  and  Narasayana  to  awake  them  from  the  depths  of 
the  great  waters.  ButFohi  could  speak  with  Brahma  because  of 
his  goodness.  And  he  directed  Fold  to  journey  to  that  high  land 
and  live.  Then  Vishnu  broke  up  the  bottom  of  the  great  deep,  and 
opened  the  places  above  : and  the  great  waters  covered  all  the  land, 
together  with  our  forefathers,  who  were  taken  by  the  evil  spirits.” 

I have  related  the  mythology  of  the  southern  tribes,  together  with 
the  modification  of  the  Chinese  into  the  Chaldeanic-Persian  and 
Greek.  And  the  impression  that  was  conveyed  to  the  early  Jewish 
tribes,  and  the  account  contained  in  the  Persian  tradition,  were  blend- 
ed together  ; and  being  afterward  written  and  re-written,  compiled 
and  re-compiled,  through  the  successive  languages,  it  has  appeared 
in  the  English  version  as  it  may  be  found  by  perusing  the  “ primitive 
history.”  The  account  is  well  preserved,  considering  the  innumer- 
able contingencies  which  govern  all  circumstantial  things.  And  it 
is  only  an  exaggerated  and  poetical  representation  of  that  which  is 
substantially  true  : and  for  its  truth  the  history  demands  the  highest 
respect. 

§ 96.  I am  impressed  to  proceed  to  another  class  of  ideas  and  to 
speak  of  their  origin  and  successive  modifications  until  they  appear  in 
their  present  form.  The  first  of  these  may  be  found  in  the  early  man- 
uscripts of  the  “ primitive  history,”  clothed  in  the  following  words  : 
“And  God  said,  Let  us  make  man  in  our  own  image  and  likeness.” 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


401 


In  establishing  a superficial  interpretation  of  this  subject,  many 
noble  and  highly-cultivated  intellects  have  been  engaged.  Time, 
talents,  and  wealth,  have  been  employed  in  disseminating  such  su- 
perficial opinions,  sufficient  to  have  instructed  and  cultivated  the 
moral  and  intellectual  powers  of  many  a nation.  The  desires  and 
prejudices  of  men  have  warred  against  the  promptings  of  their  judg- 
ment, and  have  circumscribed  the  range  of  their  own  and  others’ 
reasoning  powers  to  the  limited  circle  of  a sectarian  and  hereditary 
belief.  In  endeavoring  to  establish  preconceived  opinions,  men  have 
severed  the  affectionate  ties  of  congeniality,  which  should  unite  man- 
kind as  one  vast  brotherhood  ; and  they  have  established  a deep- 
seated  impression  that  only  breathes  sectarian  contention  and  local 
hostility.  They  have  not  proceeded  to  investigate  the  interior  origin 
of  thoughts,  of  which  words  are  merely  sheaths  ; but  they  have  pre- 
sumed upon  the  divineness  of  the  sheathings  themselves,  and  warred 
against  the  teachings  of  judgment,  of  Nature,  and  of  her  Author  ! 

But  let  the  mind  search  well  into  the  cause  of  thoughts,  and  then 
it  will  be  able  to  judge  of  the  external  clothing  of  these,  whether  it 
be  of  man,  or  of  that  Divine  Principle  which  speaks  only  by  mani- 
festing, at  a single  expression,  millions  of  systems,  decked  with  life, 
beauty,  and  grandeur  ! Let  it  search  well  into  the  internal  real  re- 
ality of  all  things  : and  if  qualities  and  principles  are  found  that  are 
good,  divine,  and  indestructible,  then  such  will  be  approbated  by  the 
judgment,  and  Nature  will  seal  their  truth  with  her  universal  con- 
currences. 

I am  deeply  impressed  that  volume  after  volume  has  been  written 
upon  this  and  similar  subjects,  without  producing  the  least  relief  to  a 
depressed  and  ignorant  world.  Thoughts  like  unto  the  ones  under 
consideration,  clothed  in  words,  have  occupied  the  attention  of  an 
innumerable  host  of  theological  writers.  Their  labor,  time,  and  tal- 
ents, have  thus  been  employed  in  building  upon  a superficial  foun- 
dation a theological  superstructure  which  has  not  in  the  least  degree 
ameliorated  the  unhappy  social  and  national  condition  of  mankind 
their  brethren  ! The  many  theories  of  this  nature  that  are  in  the 
world  are  external,  interruptive,  and  unholy  invasions  upon  the  hu- 
man affections  and  judgment.  They  are  unprofitable  and  injurious 
to  the  race  ; they  are  local,  isolated,  sectarian,  and  entirely  opposed 
to  the  highest  good  of  every  living  creature.  They  are  unreal,  im 
pure,  wicked.  They  are  corrupting  and  vitiating  to  all  the  pure  af- 
fections of  man’s  nature.  They  are  the  foundation  of  universal 

26 


402 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


sectarian  hostility  and  superstition.  They  are  at  war  with  all  the 
pure,  social,  and  moral  interests  of  man,  that  would,  if  undisturbed, 
join  in  one  the  whole  race  of  intelligent  beings.  In  the  promulga- 
tion of  these  external  and  evanescent  thoughts,  the  physical  world 
has  been  left  uncared  for,  and  still  remains  a comparative  wilderness. 
If  those  men  who  have  been  thus  engaged  had  been  employed  ac- 
cording to  the  design  and  intention  of  an  unchangeable  Governor, 
the  uninhabited  deserts  would  have  been  rendered  fertile,  blooming, 
and  fragrant ; and  then  would  their  talents  and  powers  have  been  ap- 
preciated. And  then  the  peace  and  unity  of  feeling  which  would 
have  pervaded  the  whole  race  of  mankind,  would  have  spoken  to 
them  with  a voice  of  thankfulness,  and  great  would  have  been  their 
reward. 

The  tribes  that  had  become  consociated  in  the  valley  of  Shinar, 
according  to  previous  description,  received  the  early  impression  of 
their  forefathers  concerning  the  creation,  and  also  the  improvements 
that  were  made  upon  it  by  their  supposed  inspired  chieftain.  In  his  cos- 
mogony, he  called  to  his  assistance  from  the  depths  of  the  water,  the 
deity  of  whom  I have  spoken,  subsequently  named  Parama,  Vishnu, 
and  Siva.  This  chieftain  first  conceived  of  an  original  spirit.  This 
conception  suggested  the  idea  of  a second  spirit ; and  this  of  a third. 
The  first  he  supposed  to  be  the  great  good  spirit  that  had  reposed 
from  the  remotest  period  of  eternity  to  the  time  of  the  creation,  in  the 
bosom  of  the  great  waters.  And  he  conceived  that  as  this  spirit 
awoke  to  activity,  he  breathed  forth  another  spirit  to  do  the  work 
which  he  (Parama)  had  designed.  Vishnu  was  the  subordinate  spirit 
thus  created  ; and  he  was,  according  to  the  chieftain,  a part  of  Para- 
mo’s sotil.  He  moved  the  waters,  and  continued  to  do  so  until  he 
created,  from  the  superior  materials  of  the  egg,  the  earth  and  man. 
Then  he  supposed  that  the  spirit  Siva  was  the  cause  of  those 
“breaths”  which  inspired  the  bosoms  of  themselves  and  their  elder 
brethren  with  envy,  hatred,  and  deception.  Here,  then,  originated 
the  thought  which  has  clothed  itself  in  the  word  Trinity. 

I do  not  discover  any  essential  change  in  this  part  of  the  oriental 
mythology  for  many  centuries  ; and  it  ultimately  fell  into  the  posses- 
sion of  the  Persianic  tribes,  who  preserved  it  until  Zoroaster  sys- 
tematized it  and  other  existing  traditions,  in  his  Zend  Avesta.  He 
changed  the  deities  into  the  characters  of  Ormuzd,  Amshaspands, 
and  inferior  spirits.  Thus  he  formed  from  the  three,  a trinity  of 


NATURE  3 DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


403 


good,  celestial,  and  holy  spirits,  among  which  was  Ormuzd  su- 
preme. 

Seeing  so  much  evil  and  wretchedness  among  the  inhabitants  of 
the  earth,  and  seeing  war,  persecution,  and  tyranny,  existing,  he  be- 
gan to  reason  upon  their  causes.  And  this  suggested  to  his  mind  a 
corresponding  trinity  of  infernal  spirits.  The  greatest  of  these  was 
Aliriman;  and  he  was  attended  by  subordinate  and  inferior  spirits, 
and  millions  of  deevs. 

Thus  Zoroaster  presented  the  trinity  in  a new  form  ; and  from 
this  it  was  transplanted  into  the  Jewish  manuscripts,  in  the  brief  and 
comprehensive  expression  which  reads,  “ And  God  said,  Let  us 
make  man  in  our  own  image.”  It  was  also  subsequently  expressed, 
“ Father,  Son,  and  Spirit.”  The  expression,  “ Let  us  make  man,” 
is  derived  from  the  early  myth  in  which  the  “ ws”  means  Brahma, 
Vishnu  or  Narasayana,  and  Siva.  It  corresponds  also  to  the  Greater, 
the  Lesser,  and  the  Least;  Father,  Son,  and  Spirit;  Ormuzd,  Am- 
shaspands,  and  superior  subordinates. 

In  the  original  conception,  the  characters  were  distinct  and  singu- 
lar ; but  they  were  classified  and  divided  by  Zoroaster  into  plurals. 
And  they  were  comprehensively  expressed  in  the  primitive,  Jewish 
transcript,  according  to  the  original  conception. 

§ 97.  But  it  is  given  me  to  know  through  the  medium  of  superior 
impressions  that  the  expression,  “ in  our  image  and  likeness ,”  does 
really  shadow  forth  a substantial  and  truthful  idea,  verified  in  the 
natural  and  spiritual  spheres.  The  terms  “image  and  likeness”  have 
suggested  to  a most  exalted  intellect*  a conception  in  which,  after 
spiritual  research  and  investigation,  he  became  confirmed  ; and  the 
general  features  of  his  impressions  were  correct.  This  will  appear 
as  I proceed  to  a comprehension  of  the  spiritual  spheres  — from 
which,  I am  deeply  impressed,  flowed  high  and  truthful  impressions 
into  the  expanded  internal  of  this  Swedish  philosopher.  But  it  is 
impossible  to  find  in  these  words,  as  originally  employed  in  the 
“ primitive  history,”  one  particle  of  spiritual  signification.  It  is  not 
true  that  he,  with  all  his  enlightenment,  unfolded  an  interior  truth  as 
expressed  in  these  primitive  sayings.  Instead  of  this,  he  unfolded  a 
stupendous  correspondence  — not  from  their  interior,  but  from  their 
external  suggestions.  And  it  is  now  demonstrated  by  the  unreal 
external  of  things,  which  he  so  deeply  opposed,  that  these  primitive 

* Swedenborg. 


404 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


records  do  not  contain,  as  divinely  originated,  a minute  spiritual 
meaning  or  application.  It  is  absolutely  demonstrated  in  his  philo- 
sophical and  analytical  investigations,  that  externals  are  the  mere  su- 
perficial and  evanescent  indications  of  the  interior,  and  therefore  are 
to  be  regarded  only  as  the  deceptive  garments  or  sheathings  of  truths. 
Therefore  to  give  an  internal  signification  to  a passage  which  the  ex- 
ternal of  the  same  does  not  indicate,  is  indeed  to  fabricate  that  which 
is  unreal  and  absolutely  unprofitable.  The  external  of  the  written 
record,  when  viewed  by  a purely  spiritually-exalted  intellect,  shows 
not  the  least  indication  of  a spiritual  signification.  And  if  the  exter- 
nal gives  evidence  of  the  interior,  why  endeavor  to  give  to  a passage 
a different  signification  from  that  which  the  external  manifests? 

The  external  clothing  of  the  “primitive  history”  interprets  its  own 
internal  signification.  It  professes  to  be  a truthful  and  comprehen- 
sive history  of  opinions  concerning  creation  before  the  flood,  and  of 
the  customs,  manners,  dispositions,  and  movements,  of  subsequent 
nations  ; of  the  repopulation  of  the  earth,  and  the  distribution  of  the 
early  tribes  ; of  their  leaders,  chieftains,  prophets,  kings,  and  empe- 
rors. It  professes  to  give  the  history  of  wars  ; of  the  subjugation 
and  captivity  of  tribes  ; of  the  upbuilding  and  downfall  of  kingdoms 
and  empires  ; of  the  vice,  misery,  and  imaginations,  of  many  nations 
of  the  earth.  These  things  are  therein  recorded  in  the  usual  style 
of  the  early  writers,  the  forms  of  expression  employed  being  such  as 
were  adapted  to  the  education  of  the  early  inhabitants  of  the  earth. 
It  professes  to  be  this  ; its  external  proves  its  profession,  and  its  in- 
terior is  its  own  expositor.  If  more  is  professed,  then  such  profes- 
sion has  arisen  from  its  promulgators,  and  is  not  in  accordance  with  its 
own  intentions.  So  while  I am  deeply  impressed  to  venerate  the  truth- 
fulness of  those  historical  traditions,  I am  at  the  same  time  impressed 
to  expose  and  discard  all  untrue  theological  interpretations,  and  all 
unreal  and  unholy  pretensions.  Things  of  this  nature  should  be  loved 
according  to  the  truthfulness  of  their  professions,  and  not  according 
to  the  misinterpretations  of  their  pretensions,  such  as  have  clothed 
those  simple  mythological  and  primitive  writings  with  a mysterious 
and  impenetrable  garment. 

The  next  in  the  class  of  ideas  the  origin  of  which  is  to  be  traced, 
is  the  traditional  opinion  concerning  Cain  and  Abel.  It  will  be  rec- 
ollected that  I have  spoken  comprehensively  concerning  the  branch 
tribes  as  the  offspring  of  the  early  family,  and  have  related  that  one 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


405 


conquered  and  destroyed  the  other — the  triumphant  nation  subse- 
quently journeying  to  the  European  continent.  The  history  of  this 
was  transferred,  with  other  and  similar  impressions,  through  succes- 
sive generations  and  centuries,  until  we  find  it  first  expressed  by  a 
writer  among  the  early  Egyptians.  A correspondence  was  connect- 
ed with  this  tradition,  which  was  of  the  following  import  (for  the 
early  inhabitants  knew  things  by  their  obvious  correspondences  and 
representatives) : The  younger  and  weaker  tribe  (which  was  Abel) 
corresponded  to  light,  purity,  and  innocence.  Cain  (which  was 
the  stronger  and  grosser  nation)  corresponded  to  darkness,  wick- 
edness, and  abomination.  For,  according  to  the  early  theology, 
darkness  was  the  first  principle  in  being,  and  therefore  was  the  oldest 
and  most  powerful  ; while  light  was  subsequently  created,  and  was 
consequently  weak  and  unmatured.  And  thus  the  comparison  was 
written  among  the  Egyptians  as  follows  : — 

“ And  from  the  forefathers  sprang  two  children,  whose  names  were 
Osiris  and  Typhon.  Osiris  was  a good  and  gentle  brother,  and  was 
loved  by  Brahma.  Typhon  was  a strong  brother,  and  cultivated  the 
things  of  the  earth.  For  Typhon  is  the  child  of  darkness  which  was 
over  all  and  for  ever  : but  Osiris  was  a child  of  light,  because  light 
was  permitted  by  Vishnu  the  good  spirit.”  But  Typhon,  which  is 
darkness,  was  represented  as  attacking  and  overpowering  Osiris, 
which  is  light  and  innocence.  This  is  the  first  written  correspon- 
denlial  account  of  this  primitive  tradition. 

I find  that  this  was  admitted  into  other  manuscripts,  and  appeared 
among  the  Chaldeanic  writings.  Afterward  it  was  transcribed  into 
Greek,  and  ultimately  into  the  Hebrew  oracles  and  manuscripts ; and 
through  this  medium  it  was  conveyed  to  subsequent  generations  who 
admitted  it  into  the  “ primitive  history  and  in  this  the  characters  are 
named  Cain  and  Abel. 


% 98.  The  next  idea  to  be  analyzed  and  traced  to  its  origin  is 
concerning  the  seven  days  that  are  represented  as  elapsing  during  the 
formation  of  the  earth  and  all  things  therein,  the  seventh  day  being 
spoken  of  as  smiling  on  the  consummation  of  the  grand  work,  and 
giving  rest  to  Brahma,  who  blessed  it. 

Many  centuries  elapsed  before  the  early  inhabitants  began  to  make 
astronomical  observations.  But  from  the  indications  of  the  winds, 
atmosphere,  heat,  light,  sun,  moon,  stars,  and  all  visible  objects  which 
were  supposed  to  be  gods,  they  at  length  began  to  learn  to  enumerate, 


406 


nature's  divine  revelations. 


to  determine  upon  the  seasons,  to  know  their  approach,  and  also  to 
know  when  to  visit  one  another.  The  first  inhabitants  knew  well 
when  to  expect  darkness,  by  the  periodical  recession  of  the  sun  be- 
hind the  western  lands.  They  also  knew  when  to  expect  light,  by 
the  illumination  of  the  eastern  hills.  They  were  uncertain  for  a time 
whether  these  things  would  continue  so  or  not ; but  they  were  soon 
confirmed  in  the  opinion  that  they  would  continue,  by  the  unvarying 
appearance  and  disappearance  of  the  sun.  Hence  they  made  one  of 
the  first  detached  tribes  to  represent  darkness,  and  the  other  light. 
So  far,  then,  they  had  advanced  in  astronomical  knowledge  — they 
knew  the  periodicity  of  days  and  nights. 

But  they  could  as  yet  only  perceive  general  correspondences,  and 
these  they  represented  in  hieroglyphical  characters.  And  so  they 
continued  for  several  centuries,  until  they  discovered  a new  and  val- 
uable truth  — that  the  moon  was  made  and  destroyed  twelve  times 
while  the  sun  was  passing  once  through  the  circle  of  the  zodiac.  This 
established  in  their  minds  the  first  idea  of  a year  with  its  subdivisions. 
And  they  had  a god  constructed  to  represent,  and  to  correspond 
precisely  to,  this  occurrence  : and  at  the  end  and  beginning  of  this 
period  they  had  great  festivities,  and  offered  up  to  the  god  of  the 
year  innumerable  sacrifices. 

The  twelve  periods  of  the  moon’s  destruction  and  reproduction 
corresponded  to  months  — though  these  divisions  were  the  work  of 
generations  subsequent  to  the  discovery  of  the  year.  And  thus  they 
continued  for  many  seasons,  until  their  faculties  of  discernment  be- 
came improved  and  they  discovered  that  the  moon  was  large,  dimin- 
ished, half  destroyed,  nearly  destroyed,  entirely  annihilated,  at  regu- 
lar periods,  which  were  afterward  found  to  be  just  seven  days  and 
nine  hours.  But  the  hours  were  unnoticed,  as  they  could  only  dis- 
tinguish bold  numerals.  This  gave  the  conception  of  weeks ; and 
thus  this  division  of  lime  became  established  among  the  Egyptians, 
Chinese,  Persians,  and  Jews. 

Succeeding  generations  reduced  weeks  to  days,  because  there 
were  seven  of  these  in  one  of  the  periods  of  the  moon’s  transition. 
Days  became  classified  into  hours,  by  the  changing  shadow  of  an  im- 
moveable object  situated  in  the  light  of  the  sun.  In  this  manner, 
years,  months,  weeks,  days,  and  hours,  became  established. 

And  Sunday  is  a name  of  more  recent  date,  and  was  instituted  by 
the  Danes,  adopted  by  the  Saxons,  and  transplanted  to  the  English 
language.  In  the  Saxon,  the  word  was  Sunned ag : sunne  signifying 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


407 


the  sun,  and  dag  signifying  day.  In  the  Danish,  it  is  written  Sonc- 
dag,  meaning  day  of  the  sun.  And  this  was  applied  to  the  first  day 
of  the  changed  moon,  in  glorification  of  the  sun.  And  the  next  day, 
the  moon  having  advanced,  was  called  Moon's- day  — it  being  a day 
attributed  to  the  moon.  And  Tuesday  received  its  name  from  the 
god  Tuisco ; and  Wednesday  from  the  god  Wednos ; and  Thursday 
from  the  god  Thursco : and  the  remaining  days  were  in  like  manner 
allegorically  named. 

In  a similar  manner  the  division  of  days  became  introduced  into 
the  Jewish  historical  writings  — where  the  days  were  only  designated 
by  the  phrase,  “ the  evening  and  the  morning.”  And  as  the  seventh 
day  was  the  last,  or  the  great  Sun-day,  it  was  looked  upon  by  the 
Jews  as  being  of  divine  origin.  And  they  imbibed  the  impression 
that  the  light  on  that  day  was  peculiarly  pure  and  serene.  So  six 
days  were  observed  as  times  for  labor,  and  the  seventh  was  appropri- 
ated to  rest — as  had  reposed  the  good  spirit  Parama,  after  he  had 
finished  the  creation  of  the  world  and  man,  according  to  oriental 
mythology. 

But  I was  impressed  in  describing  the  geological  epochs  of  the 
creation  of  the  globe,  and  of  the  plants  and  animals,  to  use  the  ex- 
pression “ evening  and  morning,”  &c.,  because  the  correspondence 
between  the  expression  and  the  physical  reality  was  complete. 

In  the  manner  above  related,  the  inhabitants  in  all  early  and  sub- 
sequent ages  made  the  starry  heavens  their  field  of  observation  ; and 
they  received  from  it  unfailing  instruction  and  wisdom,  which  im- 
bodied  itself  in  the  language  of  correspondences.- 

So  likewise  has  the  system  of  enumeration  become  established. 
All  nations  and  tribes  upon  the  face  of  the  earth  manifest  a sameness 
in  their  rules  of  counting,  their  highest  number  of  the  unit  series 
never  exceeding  ten.  The  reason  why  this  became  so  general  and 
confirmed  among  all  nations  is  manifest : for  it  appears  that  the  early 
tribes  counted  their  fingers,  which  were  for  a long  time  their  only 
arithmetic.  And  the  same  rule  being  subsequently  recognised  in  the 
written  records  of  all  nations,  formed  the  established  mode  of  enu- 
meration among  all,  and  is  perfectly  universally  recognised  by  the 
nations  of  the  present  day. 


99.  The  next  idea  in  the  class  before  mentioned  is  that  of  the 
origin  of  language  as  intimated  in  the  mythological  tradition  con- 


40S 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


tained  in  die  “ primitive  history,”  that  “ the  whole  earth  was  of  one 
language  and  of  one  speech.”* 

When  the  early  family  perceived  that  they  possessed  the  power 
of  vocal  communication,  and  began  to  convey  their  thoughts  to  one 
another  through  that  medium,  they  supposed  that  this  power  was 
given  to  them  by  the  “ breaths,”  and  that  therefore  it  should  be  used 
and  cultivated.  But  succeeding  generations,  discovering  that  this 
faculty  had  produced  a disunion  among  their  forefathers,  believed, 
according  to  the  tradition  transmitted  from  their  previous  brethren, 
that  the  “ breaths”  were  evil  spirits , and  had  given  to  the  world  one 
language  and  one  speech  so  that  they  might  deceive  and  dislike  one 
another.  This  was  the  prevailing  opinion  for  many  ages,  both  be- 
fore and  after  the  deluge,  and  among  all  the  tribes  of  the  earth.  All 
admitted  this  as  a part  of  their  sacred  theology,  because  it  was  told 
by  their  forefathers,  and  was  confirmed  by  the  sacredness  which  their 
minds  associated  with  its  age. 

This  opinion  continued  to  prevail  until  they  had  gained,  from  hie- 
roglyphics  and  terrestrial  and  astronomical  correspondences,  instruc- 
tion sufficient  to  enable  them,  according  to  previous  description,  to 
construct  a language  which  was  the  parent  of  the  subsequent  San- 
scrit. 

At  this  time  they  used  the  soft  bark  of  trees,  and  palm-tree  leaves, 
as  materials  whereon  to  impress,  in  this  language,  their  thoughts. 
This  art  continued  in  this  condition  for  a long  period,  and  mean- 
while was  mostly  in  possession  of  governors,  chieftains,  and  lawgiv- 
ers, who  believed  and  taught,  according  to  early  impression,  that 
their  language  was  of  divine  origin. 

I find  the  next  development  of  this  idea  (which  is  strictly  mytho- 
logical) among  the  Chinese,  Chaldeans,  Brahmins,  and  other  Hin- 
dostanic  tribes.  They  believe  that  the  Vedas  and  Brahmanas  in 
their  possession  are  sacred  oracles,  written  by  celestial  beings  in  di- 
vine language  : and  these  collectively  are  known  as  the  Shaster.f 
The  Vedas  compose  the  first  part  of  the  Shaster — which  signifies 
and  represents  life,  light,  truth,  fire,  wit,  law,  ordinance,  and  celestial 
knowledge.  And  the  Brahmanas  are  the  second  part,  and  are  com- 
posed of  Orphic  hymns,  which  they  believe  to  be  heavenly,  and 
which  are  like  the  poetical  songs  of  the  early  Egyptian  tribes.  These 
they  would  sing  to  the  deities,  raising  their  voices  in  thanksgiving 
and  praise  to  the  great  and  good  spirit  who  had  formed  the  Sanscrit 
• Genesis  xi.  1.  f This  is  the  Hindoo  Bible. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


409 


language.  For  a clearer  idea  of  the  character  of  these  Orphic  hymns, 
it  would  be  well  to  read  the  Psalms,  and  the  book  of  Job,  as  these 
were  an  imitation  of  the  Orphic  hymns  of  the  Shaster,  which  were  in 
manuscript  among  the  Egyptians  and  Chaldeanic-Persians.  The 
early  Hindostanic  tribes  believed  that  their  language  was  given  to 
Brama#  from  heaven,  by  the  Deity  : and  hence  their  supposition 
that  the  Shaster,  which  is  composed  of  the  Vedas  and  Brahmanas, 
was  an  emanation  from  heavenly  spheres,  and  was  an  embodiment 
of  the  thoughts  of  the  celestial  beings. 

For  many  continuous  ages,  the  Sanscrit  was  the  most  perfect  lan- 
guage known  among  mankind.  Being  so  nearly  perfected  by  earlier 
generations,  it  was  afterward  improved,  cultivated,  and  rendered  co- 
pious, by  successive  chieftains,  and  finally  it  was  perfected  by  Brama 
their  lawgiver  and  holy  prophet,  who  was  supposed  to  hold  intercourse 
with  the  deities. 

A further  development  of  this  theological  tradition  is  found  among 
the  Persians.  I am  obliged  to  pass  over  many  centuries,  during 
which  time  other  tribes  migrated  from  the  southern  portions  of  the 
earth  into  Asia  and  Africa,  bringing  with  them  a different  mode  of 
expression.  For  the  Chaldean  or  Persian  language  is  from  a root 
consisting  of  a different  form  of  speech,  and  this  afterward  became 
perfected  and  established  by  uniting  with  its  rudimental  form  a dia- 
lect of  the  Sanscrit.  And  about  the  time  this  language  became  thus 
established  and  confirmed,  those  who  employed  it  were  equally  con- 
firmed in  the  belief  that  it  was  of  a spiritual  origin,  according  to  the 
sacred  tradition  of  their  forefathers.  Zoroaster  now  lived,  and  was 
the  Persian  lawgiver.  He  wrote  the  Zend  Avesta,  which  he  said 
was  a gift  from  the  gods  : and  the  people  believed  that  this  was  given 
to  Zoroaster,  as  the  Brahmin  believes  of  the  Shaster,  by  a commu- 
nication with  the  Deity.  They  supposed  that  their  language  originated 
in  the  same  way. 

The  Jews  also  believed  that  the  knowledge  and  direction  received 
by  Moses,  their  lawgiver,  was  directly  from  the  Deity.  So  likewise 
the  followers  of  Mohammed  supposed  that  the  Koran  was  written  in 
celestial  spheres  by  God,  and  was  given  to  Mohammed  while  in  a 
cave. 

So  in  giving  an  opinion  concerning  the  original  state  of  language, 
it  is  said  that  “ the  whole  earth  was  of  one  language  and  of  one 

* This  Brama  was  a lawgiver  among  the  ancient  Hindoos,  and  the  founder  of  the 
sacerdotal  order  known  as  Brahmins.  So  said  the  author  in  an  incidental  remark. 


410 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


speech.  And  it  came  to  pass  that  as  they  journeyed  from  the  east, 
they  discovered  a plain  in  the  valley  of  Shinar,  where  they  dwelt.”* 
It  is  well  to  remark  that  this  is  from  a manuscript  the  substance  of 
which  sustains  a position  in  the  “ primitive  history”  after  the  relation 
of  the  flood.  But  the  account  should  not  be  thus  placed,  as  it  relates 
a circumstance  that  occurred  before  the  flood  some  ages. 

And  I feel  deeply  impressed  that  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth  at 
the  iircscnt  day  are  not  generally  any  better  informed  concerning  the 
origin  of  language  than  were  the  early  tribes  of  China,  Egypt,  and 
Hindostan.  For  they  are  believing,  like  the  Brahmin,  the  Egyptian, 
the  Chaldean,  the  Persian,  the  Jew,  and  the  Greek,  that  language 
was  communicated  to  the  forefathers  by  the  Deity  himself.  Very 
many  learned  and  enlightened  men  still  maintain  this  heathen  and 
unadvanced  idea.  They  can  not,  because  of  their  early  education, 
properly  conceive  of  natural  and  progressive  development.  But  if 
they  could  only  recognise  and  understand  this  divine  and  unchange- 
able principle  of  tbe  Universe,  they  would  discard  all  further  belief 
in  the  mythological  idea  of  direct  instruction  from  the  Deity. 

Instead  of  exerting  your  powers  to  sustain  these  superficial  chime- 
ras, investigate  the  interior  reality  of  which  all  natural  endowments 
and  developments  are  the  representatives.  Suspend  your  precon- 
ceived opinions,  and  ask  the  more  interior  and  rational  element  of 
your  being  whether  language  is  of  celestial  origin,  or  whether  it  does 
not  naturally  unfold  itself,  commencing  in  a rudimental  form  in  the 
animal  kingdom,  and  being  perfectly  developed  by  man  ? Consider 
whether  effects  do  not  always  correspond  to  their  interior  and  inciting 
causes  ; and  then  deeply  consider  the  question,  “ If  language  was  an 
effect  of  a celestial  cause,  and  if  its  origin  is  divine,  should  not  lan- 
guage be  pure,  celestial,  and  undeceptive  ?” 

The  nature  of  the  mental  and  physical  constitution  of  mankind  is 
divine,  perfect,  and  harmonious.  This  never  will  deceive.  It  is 
perfectly  good,  and  represents  the  divineness  of  its  great  Origin  and 
Cause.  Deception,  however,  exists  in  the  world,  and  all  descrip- 
tions of  dissimulation.  But  these  things  do  not  flow  from  the  inte- 
rior of  man’s  nature,  but  arise  merely  as  a consequence  of  his  unholy, 
imperfect,  and  vitiated  situation,  in  reference  to  his  fellow-beings. 
Unholy  situations  produce  unholy  effects.  But  the  interior  princi- 
ple, which  is  of  divine  origin,  can  not  be  made  evil,  nor  can  it  be 
contaminated.  And  all  evil  is  of  external  and  superficial  origin,  and 


* Genesis  xi.  2. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


411 


is  felt  by  all  as  external ; and  hence,  in  order  to  banish  evil  from  the 
earth,  a change  must  occur  in  the  social  condition  of  the  whole  world. 
Among  other  superficial  things,  language  is  existing  ; and  as  its  effects 
are  manifestly  imperfect,  it  is  evident  that  it  must  have  originated 
from  a source  correspondingly  imperfect. 

§ 100.  The  next  idea  in  the  series  is  the  mythological  theory  of 
the  origin  of  evil.  I have  spoken  at  length  concerning  the  general 
and  natural  cause  of  the  existence  of  evil  in  the  world.  But  as  what 
I have  said  does  not  correspond  with  the  prevailing  theological  con- 
ception of  its  origin,  it  becomes  necessary  to  speak  of  the  early 
conception,  and  to  briefly  notice  its  subsequent  developments. 

The  first  inhabitants  believed  that  the  “ breaths”  inspired  them 
with  evil  thoughts  ; which  suggested  and  confirmed  a belief  in  the 
existence  of  a malignant  deity  who  was  opposed  to  them,  and  who 
destroyed  their  social  love  and  breathed  among  them  a spirit  of  envy, 
hatred,  and  deception.  This  conception  was  modified  by  the  south- 
ern tribes,  by  transferring  the  origin  of  evil  to  the  light  and  warmth 
of  the  atmosphere,  and  even  to  the  sun  itself — and  also  by  conceiv- 
ing that  the  sun  was  the  representative  of  a corresponding  fount  of 
undiminishing  fire.  But  the  idea  proceeded  no  further  than  this 
among  these  nations. 

But  the  eastern  tribes  conceived  that  a spirit  was  existing  between 
them  and  the  good  deity,  which  prevented  their  having  divine  com- 
merce. This  belief  existed  in  a similar  form  among  all  the  tribes  of 
the  east  up  to  the  time  of  Zoroaster,  who  established  in  the  world  a 
belief  in  two  antagonistic,  eternal,  unconquerable  deities  : one  the 
god  of  evil,  and  the  other  the  god  of  goodness.  The  throne  of  each 
of  these  beings  was  surrounded  by  subordinate  spirits  of  a character 
corresponding  to  the  deity  to  which  they  were  respectively  attached. 
So  he  conceived  of  an  innumerable  host  of  deevs', 'which  were  asso- 
ciated with  the  evil  deity,  and  were  his  agents  to  disseminate  evil 
imaginations  and  unrighteous  thoughts  and  desires  in  the  minds  of 
all  mankind. 

The  Jewish  rabbinical  writers  are  no  more  free  from  these  mytho- 
logical imaginations  : for  they  adopted  the  Persianic  opinion  and  put 
it  forth  in  their  writings.  Hence  the  origin  of  the  passage  in  the 
“ primitive  history”  which  speaks  of  the  appearance  of  an  evil  spirit 
in  the  form  of  a serpent  in  the  garden  of  Eden,  and  asserts  that  the 
woman,  being  gentle  and  unsophisticated,  became  deceived  thereby, 


412 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


and  was  induced  to  partake  of  the  fruit  of  the  tree  of  evil ; that  she 
transmitted  the  forbidden  fruit  to  her  associate  Adam,  who,  being 
equally  delighted  and  enchanted,  partook  thereof — and  that  they 
were  thus  both  made  sinful,  whereas  before,  they  were  pure  and  un- 
polluted. 

These  rabbins  also  have  conveyed  the  idea  that  God  planted  the 
garden  of  Eden,  and  made  man  and  placed  him  there,  and  then  di- 
rected him  not  to  eat  of  the  fruit  of  the  tree  of  evil,  without  telling 
him  the  full  consequences  which  would  result  from  a participation 
thereof.  They  represented  the  Deity  as  placing  before  the  youthful 
minds  of  the  first  pair  an  irresistible  temptation,  without  giving  them 
constitutional  strength  to  resist  its  captivating  influence.  They  have 
represented  the  Deity  as  saying,  “ In  the  day  thou  eatest  thereof, 
thou  shalt  surely  die,”  and  represented  one  of  the  deevs  of  Zoroas- 
ter’s infernal  deity  as  contradicting  the  words  of  the  Divine  Being, 
saying  to  them,  “Ye  shall  not  surely  die.”  Notwithstanding  the 
promises  of  this  evil  spirit,  they  are  represented  as  falling  from  a 
state  of  innocence  to  the  depths  of  evil,  from  which  it  is  supposed 
that  the  world  at  the  present  day  has  not  experienced  a resurrection. 
They  are  also  represented  as  being  driven  out  from  the  beautiful 
garden  and  from  the  Deity’s  presence,  to  roam  uncared  for  through- 
out the  wilds  of  an  uncultivated  earth.  This  is  a comprehensive 
description  of  the  contents  of  the  Zend  Avesta  of  Zoroaster,  and 
does  not  much  transcend  the  mythology  of  the  first  oriental  and 
heathen  tribes. 

The  word  diabolos*  is  only  another  name  for  Zoroaster’s  deevs; 
and  deevs  is  another  name  for  “ breaths.”  In  the  English  version 
the  same  is  expressed  by  the  words  darJcness,  death , sin,  devil,  Satan, 
and  evil. 

It  is  to  be  deeply  lamented  that  this  simple  history  of  the  oriental 
mythology  has  bdhn  the  foundation  of  so  vast  an  amount  of  improper 
theological  speculation.  Men  have  not  investigated  the  origin  of  the 
ideas,  and  their  internal  signification,  but  have  descended  into  the 
foreign  languages  to  ascertain  the  original  application  of  the  mere 
words.  And  thus  the  ideas  of  “ temporal  death,”  “ moral  death,” 
and  “ spiritual  death,”  have  been  recognised  in  all  theological  spec- 
ulation growing  out  of  that  simple  verse  of  the  traditional  account, 
which  says,  “Ye  shall  not  surely  die”  — and  its  opposite  declaration 
by  the  Deity. 


* Devil. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


413 


By  a law  governing  all  organized  substances,  every  particle  com- 
posing these  must  of  necessity  undergo  a specific  change  and  decom- 
position. And  when  matter  forms  an  organization  in  any  depart- 
ment of  Nature,  that  organization  is  supported  and  perpetuated  by 
the  law  of  association,  or  by  a reciprocal  change  of  particles  with 
other  substances.  Therefore  the  particles  which  flow  into  an  organi- 
zation must  be  extracted  and  received  from  other  substances,  of 
which  these  particles  previously  formed  a part.  And  when  they  en- 
ter into  the  new  organization,  they  receive  new  life,  according  to  that 
contained  in  the  body  of  which  they  then  become  a part.  Thus  bod- 
ies or  organizations  are  incessantly  produced,  sustained,  developed, 
and  perpetuated,  in  every  department  of  the  Universe.  Therefore 
there  is  no  such  thing  in  existence  as  natural  death : for  an  exchange 
of  particles  from  one  form  of  life  to  another,  is  nothing  more  than  the 
necessary  requirement  of  every' organized  substance  in  being.  So 
what  is  called  natural  death,  is  not  death,  but  a mere  change  of  or- 
ganization. Why  have  ye  not  analyzed  the  interior  workings  of 
Nature  and  her  immutable  laws,  and  from  them  learned  to  discard 
for  ever  all  chimerical  and  unnatural  theological  speculations  ? Nat- 
ural death  has  been  the  basis  of  many  a controversy  : but  now  it  is 
made  plain  to  a demonstration  that  such  discussions  were  based  on 
a misapprehension,  and  were  unprofitable,  because  such  a thing  as 
natural  death  never  occurred  in  any  of  the  recesses  of  the  great  Uni- 
verse. 

I now  proceed  to  speak  of  moral  death.  The  idea  of  moral  death 
has  arisen  from  a superficial  view  of  social  disunity,  and  of  disunity 
of  thought  and  action.  The  innate  divineness  of  the  spirit  of  man 
prohibits  the  possibility  of  spiritual  wickedness  or  unrighteousness. 
The  desires  and  affections  of  the  spirit  proceed  from  within  and  from 
without.  Desires  spring  from  the  material  relation  which  man  sus- 
tains to  his  brother  and  the  Universe.  These  desires-  proceed  from 
sensation,  which  creates  inclination,  which  demands  gratification. 
Then  there  is  another  class  of  desires,  which  are  affections  springing 
up  within  and  directing  and  controlling  the  outer.  These  affections 
are  the  elements  of  the  spirit,  which  desires  purity  and  perfection 
It  is  the  principle  within  that  illuminates  the  external,  whenever  any 
pure  and  divine  thought  or  principle  is  presented  for  contemplation 
This  is  the  element  that  recognises  goodness,  gentleness,  and  purity  ; 
it  is  the  element  of  love  ; it  is  the  immortal  principle.  Its  workings  and 
effects  are  the  morals  and  affections  of  man,  and  they  are  immortal 


414 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


and  can  not  die.  Morality,  then,  is  a consequence  of  the  unchanging 
divinity  of  the  spirit,  and  is  as  undying  as  the  immutable  laws  that 
govern  all  subordinate  organizations.  “ Moral  death”  is  therefore  a 
manufactured  expression,  meaning  nothing. 

Spiritual  death  is  only  another  form  of  the  latter  expression  : and 
it  never  had  and  never  can  have  the  least  particle  of  signification. 
The  word  death  may  he  used  as  corresponding  to  the -conventional 
idea  of  darkness,  and  the  figure  is  good.  But  natural,  moral,  or  spir- 
itual darkness,  is  impossible  : for  darkness  is  an  expression  presup- 
posing the  existence  of  light.  ( And  man  has  not  retrograded  from 
perfection  in  his  spiritual  and  natural  organization  toward  the  lowest 
point  of  imperfection  ; for  this,  again,  would  he  an  absolute  impossi- 
bility. Retrogression  is  a word,  like  death,  having  no  meaning.  Ev- 
erything is  unfolding  life  and  beauty,  according  to  the  law  of  pro- 
gressive and  eternal  development. 

Let  Nature,  then,  be  heeded  as  she  proclaims  her  divine  instruc- 
tions, though  all  artificiality  be  sacrificed  by  her  omnipotent  authority. 
Love  that  which  is  lovely,  and  deal  gently  with  that  which  has  been 
misdirected  or  imperfectly  developed.  At  the  same  time,  love,  adore, 
and  express  the  truth,  because  Truth  is  a principle  which  unites  and 
harmonizes  an  entire  Universe  ! 


§ 101.  I now  proceed  to  consider  the  origin  of  the  ideas  concern- 
ing oracles  and  prophets,  as  these  are  spoken  of  in  the  “ primitive 
history,”  and  understood  by  the  theological  writers  of  modern  days. 

The  reasoning  faculties  of  the  early  inhabitants  were  for  many 
ages  uncultivated,  undisciplined,  and  undeveloped  ; while  their  pow- 
ers of  imagination  and  love  of  the  marvellous  were  highly  susceptible 
of  influence,  and  consequently  became  very  prolific.  The  products 
of  their  imaginations  have  afforded  materials  for  speculation  among 
all  sacred  and  theological  writers  who  have  bestowed  any  attention 
on  mythology.  Their  imaginative  and  conceptive  powers  were  ex- 
ceedingly susceptible  to  impressions  from,  and  liable  to  misconstrue, 
all  remarkable  physical  occurrences  and  manifestations  within  the 
sphere  of  their  observation.  They  believed  that  each  external  ap^ 
pearance  was  either  a good  or  bad  indication,  and  that  all  such  ap- 
pearances were  produced  by  the  invisible  yet  innumerable  spirits  and 
deities  which  they  believed  to  be  existing.  From  the  time  the  opin- 
ion became  established  that  the  “ breaths”  were  evil  spirits,  they  con- 
ceived that  all  other  manifestations  were  ominous  of  evil,  or  indicative 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


415 


of  good.  Their  imaginative  powers,  and  the  rudimental  elements  of 
their  judgment,  were  excited  and  developed  by  all  things  about  them  ; 
and  their  very  perfect  powers  of  memory  enabled  them  to  form  almost 
any  description  or  chimerical  conception.  Whatever  became  im- 
pressed upon  their  susceptible  imaginations  sank  deeply  into  the 
recesses  of  their  memory,  and  from  this  general  source  sprang  all 
traditional  mythology. 

Thus,  among  the  primitive  family,  as  has  been  stated,  one  whose 
organization  qualified  him  for  the  office  of  a governor  and  admonisher, 
conceived  that  the  cause  of  the  disunity  and  contention  existing  among 
them  was  the  influence  of  the  evil  spirits  of  the  “ breaths.”  He  be- 
lieved that  he  received  this  information  through  the  medium  of  an 
impressive  dream.  Believing  that  this  was  made  known  to  him  be- 
cause he  was  better  and  wiser  than  any  other,  he  promulgated  the 
same  to  the  pre-impressed  minds  of  the  people.  He  was  at  once 
elevated  by  his  brethren,  and  was  thought  to  be  a person  of  superior 
holiness,  holding  intercourse  with  the  deities. 

Dreaming,  then,  was  believed  to  be  the  medium  of  celestial  inter- 
course and  communication.  And  whoever  dreamed  an  important 
dream  was  called  upon  to  relate  the  same,  and  this  was  then  inter- 
preted by  their  governor.  They  also  beheld  the  various  objects  in 
the  vegetable  and  animal  kingdoms  either  as  omens  of  appalling  ca 
tastrophes  or  as  indications  of  great  good.  And  the  character  of  the 
omen  was  always  determined  by  the  governor,  by  inquiring  of  those 
who  beheld  the  animals,  in  what  direction  they  were  going,  in  what 
position  they  were  seen,  what  were  their  color,  size,  general  appear- 
ance, &c.  The  flight  of  huge  birds  they  believed  to  portend  evil, 
and  this  was  to  be  in  accordance  with  the  direction,  manner,  height, 
and  distance,  of  their  flight.  So  also  the  internal  organs  of  animals 
were  supposed  to  represent  various  good  or  evil  things  that  would 
ultimately  occur.  Also  they  believed  that  the  clouds,  sun,  moon, 
and  stars,  were  all  evident  indications,  and  the  things  which  they  rep- 
resented were  decided  upon  by  their  chieftain  and  governor.  Their 
reasoning  faculties  were  not  employed,  and  they  admitted  into  their 
minds  precisely  that  which  was  promulgated  by  their  leader.  Ev- 
rything  to  them  was  a correspondence  or  representation  ; and  by  the 
means  of  correspondences  and  representations,  they  became  acquaint- 
ed with  the  thoughts  and  intentions  of  one  another,  and  with  the  in- 
terpretations of  their  governor  concerning  all  physical  manifestations. 

For  many  ages  this  mode  of  interpretating  physical  appearancces 


416 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


continued  ; and  it  would  be  proper  to  consider  this  as  the  age  of  im- 
agination. 

After  this,  in  various  portions  of  the  earth,  men  of  highly-cultivated 
powers  discovered  that  these  things  were  unreal  : but  they  could  not 
instruct  the  world  concerning  this  important  discovery.  And  thus 
general  ignorance  continued  to  prevail  among  all  the  nations  of  the 
earth  ; and  the  governor  and  chieftain  of  each  nation,  possessing  more 
intelligence  than  the  rest,  could  exert  any  amount  of  power  and  in 
fluence  over  the  people. 

And  at  this  time,  kings  were  in  the  habit  of  having  persons  who 
professed  to  interpret  dreams,  as  their  counsellors ; and  these  persons 
were  also  believed  to  be  in  communication  with  celestial  beings,  and 
enabled  thereby  to  foretell  events,  and  interpret  all  occurrences. 
This  was  a general  custom  among  the  eastern  tribes  and  families  ; 
and  they  also  still  retained  all  the  traditional  impressions  of  early 
generations.  The  persons  who  claimed  to  be  in  possession  of  these 
peculiar  powers  were  not  deceiving,  but  were  deceived,  concerning 
the  extent  of  their  knowledge,  and  the  reliableness  of  their  imagina- 
tive impressions. 

Each  king  had  counsellors,  who  would  prophesy  favorably  in  re- 
gard to  the  prosperity  and  perpetuation  of  his  kingdom,  and  the 
peace  and  happiness  of  his  dominions.  If  there  were  strong  indica- 
tions of  war  and  hostility,  they  would  indefinitely  prophesy  concern- 
ing the  conflict  and  its  termination.  When  any  of  the  kings  dreamed, 
these  counsellors  or  prophets  were  called  to  reveal  the  signification 
of  his  dream.  And  they  were  very  indefinite  in  their  interpretations, 
but  sufficiently  distinct  to  have  the  generals  of  their  remarks  establish 
in  the  minds  of  those  seeking  their  services,  the  probability  of  soon- 
occurring  events. 

Subsequently  many  prophets  arose  among  the  Persians,  Chinese, 
Chaldeans,  and  Egyptians,  who  recorded  their  pretended  communi- 
cations with  the  deities  upon  impressible  substances,  and  these  were 
safely  preserved  for  the  sake  of  their  divine  and  celestial  contents. 
This  state  of  things  continued  for  many  ages,  and  may  properly  be 
termed  the  era  of  oracles. 

§ 102.  But  the  world  at  length  became  generally  more  enlight- 
ened, and  more  confirmed  as  to  the  unceasing  manifestations  of  Na 
ture.  They  therefore  began  to  discard  many  of  their  original  con- 
ceptions, and  to  exercise  their  reasoning  faculties,  which  led  them  to 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


417 


a more  truthful  and  exalted  conception  of  the  Great  Spirit  which  cre- 
ated and  controls  the  Universe.  At  this  time  some  very  noble  and 
expanded  minds,  availing  themselves  of  the  improvements  in  the  art 
of  writing,  reasoned  profoundly,  and  recorded  their  thoughts ; and 
their  productions  afford  the  first  indication  of  a mental  resurrection. 
Many  Chinese,  Egyptian,  Persian,  and  Greek  philosophers,  con- 
ceived and  promulgated  pure  principles  of  morality,  and  high  and 
truthful  conceptions  concerning  the  great  first  and  essential  Cause 
of  the  Universe  — arid  also  believed  and  taught  the  doctrine  of  im- 
mortality. These  minds  were,  however,  trammelled  by  early  im- 
pressions derived  from  their  forefathers,  and  it  was  with  exceeding 
difficulty  that  they  unfettered  their  faculties  and  followed  their  natural 
judgments  to  the  extent  which  their  productions  indicate. 

At  the  same  time,  in  other  portions  of  the  earth,  persons  were  still 
existing  who  pretended  to  prophesy,  and  to  be  divinely  instructed. 
And  it  was  at  this  time  that  the  Egyptians  and  other  eastern  tribes 
discovered  the  power  and  art  of  inducing  abnormalness , by  various  ges- 
tures and  manipulations.  Persons  who  were  very  susceptible  of  being 
thus  influenced,  were  selected  and  brought  into  the  presence  of  the 
king’s  counsellors,  who  would  affect  them  physically,  and  make  them 
appear  as  if  dead — inducing  the  sleep  which  they  supposed  was  ne- 
cessary in  order  that  they  might  have  direct  intercourse  with,  and 
receive  advice  from,  the  deities.  For  they  could  not  always  dream 
when  they  chose  : and  so  in  order  that  a dream  might  be  had  when- 
ever desired,  they  would  throw  these  persons  into  a state  correspond- 
ing to  death,  and  receive  from  their  lips  while  in  that  state  the  indefinite 
expression  of  their  dreams,  which  would  be  interpreted  by  those 
counsellors  or  prophets,  and  sent  forth  as  being  true  and  divine. 
This  custom  continued  until  they  discovered  that  they  were  employ- 
ing these  agents  to  no  good  purpose.  For  the  visions  and  concep- 
tions of  the  persons  in  that  condition  were  unreal  and  unprofitable, 
because  these  persons  were  improperly  used  ; and  thus  the  povVer 
and  sympathy  (which  were  real)  were  made  the  agents  of  perpetual 
deception.  Thus  dreams,  visions,  and  prophecies,  were  the  agents 
and  causes,  in  early  generations,  of  an  immense  amount  of  disunity, 
deception,  and  wickedness. 

I am  impressed  that  some  of  these  oriental  prophecies  have  been 
immersed  into,  and  at  the  present  time  form  a part  of,  the  Primitive 
History.  And  it  is  well  to  remark  that  the  urim  and  thummim 
among  the  Egyptians  was  nothing  more  than  a modified  medium  of 

27 


41S 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


obtaining  knowledge  of  the  future,  and  was  thus  a means  of  sustain- 
ing those  whose  lives  and  talents  were  spent  in  the  occupation  of 
prophecy. 

All  physical  manifestations  in  Nature  were  understood  by  the  prim- 
itive nations  (according  to  the  interpretation  given  them  by  their 
prophets)  to  he  indications  of  future  occurrences  according  to  the 
pleasure  or  displeasure  of  the  deities.  Not  understanding  that  light 
possessed  the  property  of  refraction  and  of  resolving  itself  into  differ- 
ent colors  when  subjected  to  certain  conditions,  they  conceived  that 
the  rainbow  was  the  expression  by  the  Deity  of  a promise  that  the 
land  should  not  again  be  overflown  with  water.  So  they  looked 
upon  the  rainbow  as  an  unfailing  indication  and  everlasting  promise 
that  the  race  should  never  again  be  drowned. 

Notwithstanding  all  the  deeply-seated  opinions  concerning  the 
truthfulness  of  this  original  conception,  it  is  clearly  demonstrated 
to  those  in  possession  of  knowledge  concerning  the  qualities  and  prop- 
erties of  light,  that  the  rainbow  has  no  signification,  but  is  merely  a 
meteoric  phenomenon.  And  it  is  also  evident  that  the  early  inhabi- 
tants, not  comprehending  these  things,  would  have  been  very  likely 
to  account  for  this  phenomenon,  and  interpret  its  signification,  on 
some  imaginary  hypothesis.  For  the  human  mind  will  investigate 
all  manifestations,  and  attribute  every  physical  occurrence  to  some 
cause  ; and  if  it  can  not  discover  the  real,  it  will  ascribe  to  the  phe- 
nomenon an  unreal  cause.  Hence  the  word  “ supernatural”  has  had 
its  origin.  But  as  those  original  conceptions  are  without  the  least 
interior  truth,  so  this  word  is  without  the  least  signification. 

Another  species  of  prophecy  is  also  derived  from  the  same  source  ; 
and  this  is  exemplified  in  the  saying  that  “ summer  and  winter,  seed- 
time and  harvest,  shall  never  fail.”  In  order  that  we  may  have  a 
foresight  of  the  future,  it  is  necessary  that  we  should  understand  the 
immutable  laws  governing  Nature  and  all  things  which  are  unfailing. 
So  in  order  to  prophesy  that  summer  and  winter,  seedtime  and  har- 
vest, shall  never  fail,  it  is  necessary  for  the  mind  to  be  perfectly  fa- 
miliar with  the  unvarying  principles  on  which  depend  the  vicissitudes 
of  the  seasons.  This  prophecy,  therefore,  is  true  and  perfectly  nat- 
ural, being  the  decision  of  a convinced  judgment  that  that  which  is 
now  and  has  been  from  time  immemorial,  will  be  perpetuated  through 
out  eternity 

There  are  several  other  species  of  prophecy,  some  of  which  are 
faithfully  represented  in  the  “ Primitive  History.”  Some  of  the 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


419 


authors  of  these  were  engaged  in  protecting  kings  and  kingdoms 
from  the  invasions  constantly  expected  from  other  nations.  They 
would  prophesy  evil  and  discomfiture  as  the  fate  of  the  opposing  na- 
tion, while  they  would  stimulate  their  own  with  flattering  prospects  of 
prosperity  and  by  promises  of  ultimate  triumph.  Others  were  en- 
gaged in  performing  various  marvellous  works  in  order  to  inspire  con- 
fidence in  the  minds  of  kings  and  nations,  by  convincing  them  that 
they  were  assisted  by  the  deities,  and  that  they  possessed  unsurpassed 
wisdom.  Others  would  lead  families  and  nations  on  tedious  and 
protracted  expeditions,  prophesying  for,  and  governing  and  control- 
ling them,  until  they  at  length,  by  the  direction  of  their  prophet, 
would  fall  upon  other  nations  and  tribes,  and  destroy  or  disperse 
them,  and  then  make  their  city  and  home  the  place  of  their  own  habi- 
tation. Other  prophets  or  chieftains  would  prophesy  against  and  for 
kings  and  kingdoms,  and  incite  war  and  bloodshed,  all  for  the  sake 
of  praise  and  emolument.  Some  who  were  sufficiently  ingenious, 
would  only  prophesy  that  which  was  within  their  power  to  fulfil  and 
make  true.  Others  would  consign  all  disbelievers,  or  persons  whose 
minds  were  too  well  organized  to  be  governed  by  them,  to  the  fires 
of  that  gulf  of  which  the  sun  was  the  representative.  But  sheol,  hades , 
tartarus,  and  gehemia,  were  originally  used  by  them  to  express  death, 
darkness,  the  grave,  pain,  wretchedness,  and  sepulchrous  abodes. 
And  as  these  words  now  stand  in  the  Primitive  History,  they  ex- 
press merely  the  things  to  which  they  were  applied  by  the  Jews  and 
Greeks,  and  who  would  represent  by  them  a dark  and  loathsome 
valley,  impassible  and  dreadful  gulfs,  the  dark  and  gloomy  grave,  and 
darkness,  death,  ignorance,  and  wretchedness.  Prophets  would  con- 
sign unbelieving  and  refractory  persons  to  the  hideous  and  dreadful 
valley  of  gehemia,  and  also  to  the  pit,  sepulchre,  or  hades.  And 
some  prophets  continued  to  speak  of  the  gulf  that  was  conceived  of 
and  promulgated  by  the  potentate  of  those  southern  tribes  which  were 
*he  origin  of  the  Jews. 

§ 103.  All  prophecies  that  are  contained  in  the  Primitive  His- 
tory are  such  as  have  been  retained  from  the  innumerable  manu- 
scripts of  the  ancient  prophets,  and  which  seemed  to  have  a connex- 
ion with  one  another  and  with  the  doctrines  which  the  Jews  felt  very 
anxious  to  sustain,  so  that  the  Gentiles  might  be  entirely  overcome 
by  the  influence  of  their  preconceived  mythology.  More  than  are 
now  contained  in  the  Primitive  History  were  rejected  as  useless 


420 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


and  irrelevant ; and  this  occurred  before  those  which  now  form  the 
record  were  collected  for  arrangement.  And  the  second  part  of  the 
Bible,  some  of  which  has  no  connexion  whatever  with  the  primitive 
records,  is  also  composed  of  a selection  of  manuscripts  made  by  the 
councils  of  bishops  convened  at  Nice  and  Laodicea. 

The  sacred  writings  of  each  nation  during  the  era  of  oracles  were 
almost  innumerable.  And  after  the  age  of  prophecy,  selections  were 
made  from  these  materials  by  the  various  nations,  and  each  nation 
thus  formed  its  own  sacred  records.  And  from  all  of  them  the  Jews 
copied  extensively  ; and  such  writings  as  were  in  perfect  unity  with 
their  own  preconceived  mythological  theology,  they  preserved  ; and 
those  that  were  not,  were  thrice  rejected  and  consigned  to  the  flames. 
Those  manuscripts  were  without  name  and  date,  and  disconnected 
from  all  circumstances  indicating  their  origin.  They  were  written 
upon  the  soft  bark  of  trees,  and  in  hieroglyphical  and  pictorial  char- 
acters. 

The  Jewish  rabbins  are  well  informed  concerning  the  origin  of 
the  Talmud  ; the  Mohammedans  are  well  aware  of  the  origin  of  the 
Koran  ; the  Brahmins  know  the  origin  of  the  Shaster  ; the  Persians 
know  the  origin  of  the  Zend  Avesta  : but  modern  theological  specu- 
lators do  not  know  of  the  origin  of  the  “ history”  which  they  have 
defended  by  the  pen,  the  stake  and  flame,  and  most  powerfully  and 
effectually  by  the  potency  of  the  sword. 

For  many  centuries  the  Primitive  History  was  uncondensed  into 
its  present  form  ; and  there  were  manuscripts  collected  sufficiently 
numerous  to  form  a volume  three  times  as  large  as  the  present  book. 
Each  of  these  was  without  name,  but  nearly  all  were  written  by  dif- 
ferent persons  ; and  the  periods  at  which  they  were  written  vary 
from  six  thousand  to  fifteen  hundred  years  anterior  to  the  present 
time. 

The  original  manuscripts  in  possession  of  the  Jews  were  written 
in  the  Greek  language.  In  addition  to  these,  manuscripts  of  oth^r 
nations  and  writers  were  collected,  and  their  contents  were  in  like 
manner  transcribed.  And  it  was  at  this  period  that  many  portions 
of  the  Primitive  History  were  conveyed  into  Persia ; and  they 
were  there  retained  for  several  centuries,  until  the  Jews  were  taken 
into  captivity,  at  which  time  the  latter  transcribed  some  of  them,  and 
the  remainder  they  brought  with  them  when  they  returned  to  their 
own  country.  This  was  the  period  of  which  I have  spoken,  when 
many  of  the  original  writings,  being  opposed  to  their  peculiar  opinions, 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


421 


were  rejected.  And  those  that  were  saved  constituted  the  last  will 
and  testament  of  the  Deity  as  recognised  by  the  Jewish  rabbinical 
writers. 

This  collection  remained  unchanged  for  nearly  one  century  and  a 
ha]f — after  which  a new  revision  occurred,  which  resulted  in  a rejec- 
tion of  some  of  the  then-existing  manuscripts,  and  also  in  the  divis- 
ion of  those  which  were  retained,  into  books.  These  were  subse- 
quently divided  into  chapters,  each  book  being  named  according  to 
the  person  who  was  supposed  to  have  written  the  manuscript.  Chap- 
ters were  subsequently  divided  into  verses ; but  all  these  divisions  are 
the  work  of  recent  date. 

And  in  some  passages  in  the  Old  Testament  which  seem  to  be 
prophetical,  and  appear  to  correspond  to  that  which  actually  did  oc- 
cur, the  compilers  occasionally  changed  the  tense,  to  make  the 
prophecy  appear  more  definite.  Many  instances  might  be  shown  in 
which  the  present  tense  has  been  changed  to  the  past,  and  where  the 
future  tense  is  used  both  instead  of  the  past  and  present.  This  may 
be  properly  termed  an  era  of  heterogeneous  theology,  interspersed 
with  folly,  ignorance,  prejudice,  and  fanaticism. 

The  origin  of  oracles  and  prophets  is,  then,  plainly  understood. 
They  are  an  effect  of  ignorance,  and  uncultivated  judgment,  and  im- 
agination. I have  been  impressed  to  speak  briefly  concerning  them, 
as  they  are  unimportant  in  respect  to  the  great  end  which  these  say- 
ings are  designed  to  accomplish. 

§ 104.  But  it  is  proper  that  I should  speak  briefly  concerning  the 
possibilities  and  probabilities  of  truthful  prophecy. 

The  mode  of  oriental  prophecy  was  to  interpret  signs  as  indica- 
tions of  future  occurrences.  But  their  signs  seldom  corresponded 
to  the  thing  anticipated.  The  sign  must  always  correspond  to  that 
which  it  is  made  to  signify,  or  else  it  is  no  sign.  The  prophets  and 
dreamers  were  in  the  habit  of  producing  simple  and  unmeaning 
signs  to  represent  great  and  glorious  occurrences,  or  terrific  and 
appalling  catastrophes.  Therefore  their  prophecies  were  unreal 
even  if  the  thing  foretold  occurred  : for  there  was  not  and  could 
not  be  any  connexion  between  the  occurrence  and  its  represen- 
tative. Many  prophecies  were  apparently  substantially  fulfilled  ; 
— but  these  were  particular  and  occasional  occurrences,  and  did 
not  necessarily  follow  the  prophecies  in  the  form  of  fulfilments. 
Things  prophesied  according  to  existing  probabilities,  did  sometimes 


422 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


occur;  but  there  is  no  evidence  of  the  actual  fulfilment  of  all  those 
ambiguous  prophecies,  many  of  which  are  contained  in  the  Prim<- 
tive  History.  Besides  this,  many  of  their  prophecies  were  impure 
and  unholy,  destructive  to  the  morals  and  happiness  of  their  own  na- 
tion, and  tended  to  excite  hostility,  envy,  and  sectarian  vengeance, 
in  the  bosoms  of  those  to  whom  their  prophecies  were  unfavorable. 
They  breathed  forth  no  celestial  purity  and  refinement,  but  all  their 
deeds  and  expressions  were  blackened  by  sectarian  fanaticism.  They 
were  not  deceiving,  but  were  deceived.  They  should  not  be  con- 
demned, but  it  should  be  regretted  that  the}'  were  not  delivered  from 
the  bondage  of  sectarian  corruption  into  the  congenial  atmosphere  of 
light,  reason,  and  happiness. 

To  prophesy  or  foretell  truly  an  event,  the  person  must  be  in  com- 
munion with  the  original  design  of  the  Divine  Creator,  and  with  the 
laws  which  are  fulfilling  design.  The  mind,  in  correctly  appre- 
hending these,  is  enabled  to  foretell  occurrences  throughout  eternity. 
There  can  be  no  truthful  prophecy  unless  the  laws  fulfilling  design 
are  familiarly  comprehended  by  the  person  prophesying.  It  is  im- 
possible to  foretell  an  occurrence  absolutely  by  the  indications  of  any 
external  event  or  circumstance.  It  is  a thing  which  never  has  been 
done,  and  can  not  be  done  by  any  being  in  the  Universe.  All  things 
that  are  truly  foretold,  occur  as  the  result  of  immutable  laws,  and  not 
of  any  mere  fleeting  and  evanescent  circumstances. 

I am  impressed  to  briefly  appeal  to  the  character  of  my  own  pro- 
phetical impressions  as  these  are  presented  to  my  mind  by  being  in 
communion  with  the  interior  reality  and  producing  causes  of  all 
things.  When  I speak  of  that  which  shall  be,  I adduce  no  sign  or 
external  evidence  in  confirmation  of  my  prediction.  I present  no 
indication  in  order  that  the  prophecy  may  be  believed  by  those  hear- 
ing it.  The  reason  is  plain  why  I do  not : I can  not  conceive  of  any 
external  sign  as  demonstrating  the  thing  or  occurrence  prophesied. 
For  it  is  impossible  for  an  external  sign  to  be  in  being  as  correspond- 
ing to  the  thing  foretold  ; and  the  only  external  indication  of  the  truth- 
fulness of  any  prophecy,  must  be  its  own  actual  accomplishment. 
Prophecies  are  truly  made  concerning  the  movements  of  the  plane- 
tary system,  and  concerning  eclipses  that  are  to  occur;  but  there  can 
be  no  sign  to  demonstrate  the  occurrence  of  an  eclipse  before  it  ac- 
tually takes  place  : and  when  it  occurs,  it  is  its  own  external  demon- 
stration. But  the  prophecy  is  governed  by  unvarying  laws  ; and  it 
is  for  this  reason  alone  that  it  is  infallibly  true. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


423 


Moreover,  it  is  impossible  for  any  mind  to  be  enlightened  from  the 
higher  spheres  concerning  incidental,  external  circumstances  ; for  all 
incidental  and  external  circumstances  are  evanescent  and  changeable, 
connected  with  no  design,  produced  by  no  interior  cause,  and  gov- 
erned by  no  general  principles.  Hence  they  are  alike  unknown  to 
the  expanded  powers  of  mind  existing  in  higher  spheres,  and  to  the 
uninformed  minds  of  the  present  state  of  existence.  To  definitely 
foretell  war,  an  accident,  or  any  incidental  circumstance,  is  positively 
an  impossibility  ; for  it  is  not  in  the  power  of  any  internal  and  gen- 
eral principle  to  foreshadow  to  the  mind  a merely  incidental  circum- 
stance. It  is  upon  interior  principles  alone  that  a prophecy  can  be 
made  with  an  absolute  certainty  of  its  accomplishment ; and  there- 
fore if  it  were  possible  for  these  to  foreshadow  external  and  inciden- 
tal circumstances,  then  prophecy  concerning  such  might  be  relied 
upon.  But  as  this  is  not  in  the  nature  of  general  principles,  and  is 
beyond  the  power  of  individual  influence,  it  is  impossible  for  any 
being,  either  in  this  or  higher  spheres,  to  proclaim  the  particular  cir- 
cumstances of  an  event,  with  the  absolute  certainty  of  their  occur 
rence. 

I am  not  impressed  to  speak  concerning  the  innumerable  volumes 
that  have  been  written  on  this  subject ; because  these  have  sprung 
from  an  understanding  of  the  prophecies  contained  in  the  Primitive 
History  still  more  superficial  than  the  character  of  the  prophecies 
themselves. 


§ 105.  Before  I speak  concerning  many  true  prophets  and  truth- 
ful prophecies,  I will  briefly  appeal  to  the  truths  unfolded  in  the 
Key,  concerning  immutable  laws  and  their  effects  as  the  unvarying 
manifestations  of  Nature  and  the  Universe  — and  also  concerning  the 
artificial  causes  which  are  continually  producing  unreal  effects,  which 
latter  are  the  fleeting  and  evanescent  circumstances  connected  with 
social  and  physical  existence. 

By  immutable  laws,  I mean  that  universal  tendency  of  all  things, 
which  can  not  by  any  possible  means  be  interrupted,  changed,  or 
frustrated. 

The  process  by  which  man  may  become  acquainted  with  these 
laws,  is  by  analyzing  external,  physical  manifestations,  and  discover- 
ing their  interior  cause  and  governing  principle.  It  has  been  estab- 
lished that  external  and  visible  effects  can  not  be  depended  upon  as 
indicating  their  own  interior  cause  ; but  that  to  become  acquainted 


424 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


with  the  cause,  the  effect  or  form  must  be  analyzed.  By  becoming 
acquainted  with  the  interior  and  moving  principles  of  Nature,  we  be- 
come acquainted  with  the  elements  of  the  Divine  Mind,  and  also 
with  the  universal  designs  of  the  latter.  These  designs  are  the  ef- 
fects and  developments  constantly  manifested  throughout  Nature. 

By  becoming  acquainted  with  the  cause,  we  become  correspond- 
ingly familiar  with  the  effect ; and  if  it  is  upon  laws  that  the  mind 
rests,  effects  and  external  manifestations  may  be  prophesied  with  the 
utmost  certainty,  millions  of  years  in  advance.  For  laws  and  prin- 
ciples are  the  producing  causes  of  all  effects;  and  all  physical  effects, 
developments,  and  manifestations,  are  the  real  and  inevitable  conse- 
quences of  the  interior,  divine,  and  creative  Cause.  Thus,  in  the 
beginning,  a Cause  produced  an  Effect,  which  became  the  cause  of 
another  ; and  so  cause  and  effect  became  universal  and  eternal,  ac- 
cording to  the  promptings  of  the  interior  or  divine  Cause,  which  will 
produce  one  general,  external,  celestial  Effect.  I have  been  im- 
pressed to  speak  thus  much  on  this  point,  so  that  theologians  may 
know  the  only  basis  upon  which  rests  all  truthful  and  infallible 
prophecy. 

Many  conditions  which  surrounded  the  first  types  of  mankind  were 
unfavorable  to  the  proper  unfolding  of  their  mental  faculties.  The 
consequence  was,  an  improper  tendency  of  those  faculties  and  incli- 
nations which  otherwise  would  have  been  perfect  and  righteous  in 
their  operations.  From  this  youthful  tenderness  sprang  all  the  gross 
and  imaginative  impressions  which  are  at  the  present  day  clothing 
the  minds  of  mankind  with  a most  unreal  and  unfortunate  garment. 
The  first  misdirection  sprang  from  unfavorable  conditions,  and  was 
connected  with  no  law,  design,  or  principle,  which  governs  the  Uni- 
verse. 

Therefore  those  things  which  I term  unreal  and  superficial  are 
circumstances  which  are  created  by  prior  and  corresponding  condi- 
tions, such  as  are  within  the  power  of  mankind -to  produce,  control, 
and  annihilate.  If  superficial  effects  and  circumstances  such  as  mark 
the  incidental  movements  of  society  and  the  vicissitudes  of  govern- 
ment, or  if  any  other  exterior,  obtrusive  circumstances  that  have  pro- 
duced so  much  poverty  and  wretchedness  in  the  world,  were  the 
results  of  Law,  Design,  and  established  Principles  — then  the  world 
of  mankind  would  for  ever  be  in  bondage,  because  these  deleterious 
influences  would  be  beyond  the  possibility  of  human  control.  But 
the  truth  is,  Man  has  created  these  circumstances,  and  he  has  the 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


425 


power  to  remove  them.  Therefore,  as  these  circumstances  happen 
only  as  thousands  of  contingencies  -conduce  to  their  development,  it 
is  positively  impossible  to  foretell  them  with  an  absolute  certainty  of 
their  fulfilment. 

What  I mean  by  circumstances,  then,  are  those  contingent  occur- 
rences which  are  entirely  disconnecte^-from  Design  or  Law,  being 
created  and  developed  by  man!  And  what  I mean  by  external 
physical  manifestations  are  the  unvarying  effects  and  consequences 
of  an  interior  divine  and  unchangeable  Cause. 

Many  of  the  early  prophets  did  pretend  to  foretell  wars,  famines, 
and  pestilences,  and  would  produce  simple  signs,  which  they  taught 
corresponded  to  and  foreshadowed  the  occurrence  prophesied.  Oth- 
ers would  in  the  same  manner  foretell  the  destruction  of  cities  and 
downfall  of  nations,  and  speak  of  many  things  that  were  to  occur  in 
future,  and  that  would  conduce  to  the  advancement  and  emolument 
of  themselves  and  of  those  for  whom  they  prophesied.  Many  of  these 
prophecies  are  contained  in  the  Primitive  History.  Some  of  them  were 
fulfilled  ; but  this  affords  no  evidence  of  the  divine  instruction  of  their 
authors  : for  all  external  circumstances,  which  are  dependent  upon 
favorable  contingencies,  are  entirely  beyond  the  reach  of  all  propheti- 
cal minds  or  divinely-instructed  persons,  because  these  things  are  not 
destined,  but  flow  from  the  corrupted  and  evanescent  tendencies  of 
human  society  and  of  physical  existence.  Therefore  I am  deeply 
impressed  with  the  truthfulness  of  the  proposition,  that  it  is  absolute- 
ly impossible  for  any  being,  either  in  this  or  any  higher  sphere,  to  be 
instructed  concerning  evanescent  contingencies,  so  as  to  foretell  their 
occurrence  with  certainty. 


§ 106.  The  object  of  making  these  things  plain,  is  to  establish  the 
probability  of  truthful  prophecy,  and  to  defend  the  Primitive  His- 
tory against  the  many  false  and  imaginative  interpretations  that  have 
been  imposed  upon  it.  The  latter  gives  a very  simple  and  concise 
account  of  the  prophecies  of  men  who  lived  antecedent  to  its  compi- 
lation, but  many  of  these  made  no  pretensions  to  prophecy  beyond 
the  limits  of  their  own  era.  Another  object  in  making  these  things 
plain,  is  to  establish  a division  between  real  and  unreal  prophecy. 
For  there  are  prophecies  contained  in  the  Primitive  History  that  are 
true,  divine,  and  righteous  ; and  those  who  prophesied  thus  were  in- 
structed concerning  the  interior  workings  and  tendencies  of  Nature, 


42G 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


and  proclaimed,  upon  the  unchanging  principles  of  cause  and  effect, 
many  grand  and  holy  truths  — occurrences  which  will  transpire — • 
effects  that  will  be  accomplished.  These  men  had  their  internal, 
thinking  principles  so  expanded  that  they  were  able  to  recognise  the 
interior  workings  of  all  divine  law,  and  thus  could  with  certainty  pro- 
claim great  and  glorious  truths.  Some  of  the  teachings  of  these  men 
have  been,  by  modern  commentators  and  theologians,  most  unrigh- 
teously misrepresented.  For  the  latter,  being  misdirected  in  their 
religious  education,  have  not  been  able  to  discover  the  real,  simple, 
and  unadulterated  truths  which  are  contained  in  many  of  the  prophe- 
cies gracing  the  pages  of  the  Primitive  History. 

But  these  prophecies  have  been  misplaced  and  imperfectly  appre- 
hended ; while  among  them  are  interspersed  many  unholy  sayings, 
and  records  of  many  unrighteous  deeds  that  transpired  among  the 
early  inhabitants  of  the  earth.  There  are  very  many  interpolations, 
though  these  were  not  introduced  with  any  evil  intentions,  but  be- 
cause the  compilers  seriously  supposed  that  those  additions  should 
be  made  in  order  that  the  whole  history  might  present  a connected 
and  comprehensive  account  of  the  things  to  which  it  contained 
allusions. 

Another  object  in  making  this  clear  is  that  the  mind  may  thus  be 
freed  from  unnatural  affection  and  sectarian  prejudice  (which  is  the 
first  necessary  step  toward  a reorganization  of  society  and  the  world), 
and  be  inspired  with  the  love  of  truth  and  truth  only. 

This,  then,  it  is  well  to  understand  : that  many  local  prophecies 
which  are  to  be  found  in  the  Primitive  History  concerning  circum- 
stances some  of  which  were  fulfilled,  do  not  necessarily  afford  any 
evidence  of  the  celestial  instruction  of  their  authors,  or  of  their  supe- 
rior theology.  And  inasmuch  as  they  are  external  and  superficial, 
they  should  be  disregarded  by  those  who  are  pressing  forward  to  the 
attainment  of  a higher  order  of  things.  And  it  is  well  to  understand, 
also,  that  many  prophecies  of  this  nature  which  are  true,  have  their 
own  proof,  and  further  than  that  they  are  positively  useless. 

Then,  on  the  other  hand,  it  is  well  to  remark  that  those  prophe- 
cies which  are  founded  upon  the  principles  of  Nature,  and  will  be 
fulfilled,  should  be  regarded  as  substantial  evidence  of  an  enlightened 
judgment  and  lofty  spirituality  on  the  part  of  their  authors,  and  these 
should  be  admired  and  appreciated.  And  it  is  proper  that  these 
prophecies  should  be  proclaimed  to  the  world  : but  only  as  mankind 
are  brought  to  a comprehension  of  the  causes  to  bring  about  the 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


427 


event  predicted,  and  as  they  are  disposed  to  put  forth  powerfu  exer- 
tions for  its  accomplishment. 

When  those  noble  and  enlightened  intellects  proclaimed  that  “ an 
end  shall  be  made  of  sin  and  transgression,  and  everlasting  righteous- 
ness shall  be  brought  in,”  they  were  inspired  with  the  grand  and 
brilliant  truth  of  a universal  resurrection  from  all  immorality  and  from 
all  unnatural  social  conditions.  And  that  mind  which  foresaw  that 
“ death  would  be  destroyed,  and  he  that  hath  power  over  death,  which  is 
the  evil,”  was  inspired  with  a high  and  truthful  conviction,  of  the  truth 
of  which  Nature  everywhere  contributes  evidence.  And  that  mind  also 
conceived  that  this  mortal  and  evanescent  corruption  which  mars  the 
happiness  and  peace  of  society,  would  be  exchanged  for  the  genuine 
principles  of  Nature,  and  that  mankind  would  thus  be  made  incor- 
ruptible. He  also  saw  that  there  would  be  a time  when  those  cor- 
rupting and  vitiating  influences  that  shroud  the  whole  mental  and 
social  world,  would  be  done  away,  and  when  society  and  the  world 
would  be  clothed  with  happiness  and  immortality. 

And  these  things  were  proclaimed  by  all  the  pure  and  inspired 
prophets  since  the  world  of  social  disunity  began  — even  the  final 
restitution  of  all  intelligent  beings  to  primitive  innocence  and  univer- 
sal harmony.  And  they  plainly  saw  that  when  this  occurred,  there 
would  be  no  more  sorrow  nor  pain,  for  the  old  and  corrupted  things 
that  destroyed  the  peace  of  society  would  have  passed  away,  and  all 
things  would  have  become  new.  And  they  saw  that  this  great  reno- 
vation would  constitute  “a  new  heaven  and  a new  earth,  wherein 
would  dwell  righteousness.”  They  saw  the  evils  of  society  — the 
immoral  and  corrupt  situations  of  mankind  — and  proclaimed,  accord- 
ing to  the  unchangeable  law  of  progressive  development,  that  evil 
would  ultimately  be  banished  from  the  earth,  that  the  “ sun  of  righ- 
teousness would  rise  with  healing  in  his  wings,”  and  that  goodness 
and  brotherly  kindness  would  reign  universally.  These  minds  asso- 
ciated with  the  interior  of  all  things,  and  received  divine  impres- 
sions of  eternal  truths.  They  spoke  not  of  higher  spheres,  because 
the  world  was  not  yet  sufficiently  enlightened  to  receive  the  truth 
concerning  these.  But  they  spake  concerning  present  evil  and  mor- 
tality, and  concerning  future  goodness  and  the  permanent  restitution 
of  the  whole  race  to  peace  and  harmony. 

They  foresaw  that  a great  Exemplifier  of  the  true  moral  and  spir- 
itual qualities  of  man  would  ultimately  appear.  They  saw  that  he 
would,  because  of  his  superior  qualifications,  manifest  all  that  purity 


42  S 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


and  gentleness  of  disposition,  and  all  that  loving  kindness  and  con- 
sociality,  that  would  be  to  the  world  a type  of  social  harmony  and 
spiritual  perfection.  They  saw  that  he  would  possess  all  the  natural 
abilities  and  superior  endowments  to  which  the  whole  race  would  ul- 
timately progress.  They  saw  that  in  him  would  be  developed,  all 
that  high  moral  purity  and  spirituality  which  every  human  being  pos- 
sesses undeveloped.  He  was  to  be  a simple  type  of  spiritual  good- 
ness and  perfect  social  qualification.  This  theyr  proclaimed  to  the 
world,  because  they  were  impressed  thus  to  do  by  the  teachings  of 
their  internal  principles  which  communed  with  the  divine  Principles 
that  sustain  and  control  the  Universe,  and  which  emanate  from  the 
inexpressible  Vortex  of  celestial  Love  and  Wisdom. 

These  prophecies  show  that  their  authors  had  a truthful  knowledge 
of  the  Principles  of  Nature,  and  of  the  divine  Design  which  those 
principles  are  constantly  manifesting.  They  prove  that  their  minds 
were  maturely  developed,  and  were  fit  receptacles  for  the  influx  of 
wisdom  and  knowledge. 

It  was  thus  that  they  foresaw  that  which  has  been  fulfilled,  and  that 
which  shall  be  in  future.  And  their  prophecies  are  susceptible  of 
demonstration,  because  they  are  based  upon  those  unerring  laws  that 
must  of  necessity  ultimate  in  the  effects  predicted.  They  saw  (what 
was  spoken  of  in  the  Key)  that  Truth  is  a positive  principle,  and 
that  Error  is  negative  and  superficial;  and  they  saw  that  that  which 
is  positive  and  eternal  must  transcend  and  subdue  that  which  is  merely 
fleeting  and  superficial. 

§ 107.  I now  proceed  to  consider  another  idea  in  the  series,  which 
is  concerning  the  birth  and  use  of  that  being  who  was  the  highest 
personification  of  virtue,  purity,  and  goodness.  But  before  I pro- 
ceed to  speak  of  the  prophecies  and  accounts  concerning  this  noble 
personage  which  are  given  in  the  Primitive  History,  I will  introduc- 
tively  insert  some  highly-important  reflections  concerning  the  divine 
origin  of  Truth,  and  its  unchangeableness  and  omnipotence. 

It  must  be  distinctly  evident  to  every  mind  that  man  did  not  create 
himself,  nor  the  vegetable  and  animal  kingdoms  : and  also  that  he 
did  not  plan  and  execute  the  creation  of  the  earth  or  solar  system. 
Nor  was  he  in  any  way  connected  with  the  production,  and  the  es- 
tablishment of  the  harmony,  of  the  Universe.  Nor  is  he  engaged  in 
developing  any  new  divine  Principle,  or  unfolding  from  the  Vortex 
of  the  Divine  Mind,  laws  or  principles  which  never  before  existed. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


429 


i&cnuutei,  he  can  not,  with  all  his  pride  and  presumption,  annihilate 
or  change  one  feature  or  quality  of  a single  particle  that  enters  into 
the  composition  of  an  harmonious  Universe.  Nor  is  he  competent 
to  alter  Truth  by  reposing  confidence  in  its  opposite.  And  while 
he  is  capable  of  believing  or  disbelieving,  and  exercising  an  affection 
for,  pre-impressions  and  all  ideas  which  he  considers  truth,  Truth 
itself  remains  the  same,  and  is  not  affected,  either  favorably  or  unfa- 
vorably, by  the  fleeting  opinions  of  Man. 

L Truth  is  an  element  of  the  Divine  Mind,  and  is  developed  by  the 
wisdom,  uniformity,  and  harmony,  which  characterize  and  render 
perfect  all  that  is  created^  It  is  therefore  of  divine  and  celestial  ori- 
gin, and  is  made  manifest  to  the  mind  of  man  by  the  manifold  ex- 
pression of  Nature  and  the  Universe.  Being  an  internal  and  con- 
trolling element,  it  pervades  alike  every  department  of  the  Univer- 
ccelum.  It  is  therefore  a necessary  and  unchangeable  Principle,  and 
hence  also  is  eternal.  And  while  all  created  forms  dwell  in  unity 
and  harmony  as  arranged  in  their  respective  spheres  of  existence ; 
while  all  rudimental  productions  are  continually  breathed  forth  and 
perpetuated  by  Nature  and  her  laws  ; and  while  all  the  celestial 
spheres  and  systems  of  life,  beauty,  and  perfection,  continue  to  man- 
ifest and  develop  the  same  order  and  harmony,  Truth  will  continue 
to  proclaim  her  divine  and  eternal  omnipotence.  When  all  things 
that  are  created  are  restored  to  unity  and  stand  in  their  proper  and 
reciprocal  relations,  then  may  man  perceive  'the  full  manifestation 
of  that  Truth  which  emanates  from  the  celestial  Vortex  of  Love  and 
Wisdom. 

Thus  Truth  is  divine  in  its  origin,  eternal  and  unchangeable  in  its 
nature,  and  omnipotent  in  its  constitution. 

The  early  inhabitants  of  the  earth  conceived  that  they  lived  upon 
a flattened  sphere,  sustained  by  as  many  huge  living  monsters  as  im- 
agination could  well  conceive.  They  endeavored  to  comprehend, 
as  the  human  mind  is  wont  to  do,  the  causes  of  things  manifested. 
So  they  formed  these  chimerical  conceptions  ; for  they  were  not  en- 
lightened sufficiently  to  comprehend  the  truth,  or  to  understand  the- 
principles  upon  which  they  and  the  Universe  existed.  So  it  became 
a universal  belief  that  the  earth  was  entirely  motionless,  not  only  be- 
cause all  external  evidences  seemed  to  demonstrate  that  conclusion, 
but  because  they  could  not  believe  that  such  a sphere  could  possibly 
revolve,  and  still  remain  in  the  same  position,  sustained  by  nothing. 

Many  writers  of  the  books  of  the  Primitive  History  believed  this 


430 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


conception  most  sincerely,  and  occasionally  imbodied  it,  in  poetical 
descriptions,  in  their  sacred  compositions.  It  was  an  opinion  that 
was  not  for  a moment  doubted,  until  a Grecian  and  an  Egyptian 
philosopher  expressed  their  conviction  publicly  that  the  earth  re- 
volved. This  opinion  gained  many  advocates;  but  they  were  few 
in  comparison  to  those  who  sacredly  believed  in  all  the  traditions  of 
their  forefathers. 

So  the  same  impression  continued  to  prevail  almost  universally 
for  many  generations,  until  a well-known  philosopher  of  modern  times 
discovered  those  interior  moving  principles  which  were  to  his  mind 
an  incontestable  demonstration  that  the  earth  and  all  kindred  bodies 
revolved  unceasingly  in  harmony  around  the  sun,  their  parent.  He 
thus  discovered  the  truth  ; but  that  truth  had  existed  the  same  from  all 
eternity  ! 

The  nations  of  the  earth  opposed  him  ; for  they  had  sacred  ora- 
cles and  prophets  who  taught  a different  doctrine.  All  the  ecclesi- 
astics and  potentates  of  the  land,  incited  by  an  unreal  and  superficial 
abhorrence  of  his  heresy,  opposed  his  efforts,  and  came,  near  con- 
signing him  to  the  flames.  These  men  were  believing  what  they 
supposed  to  be  sacred  truth,  and  felt  that  as  truth  sustained  them, 
they  should  in  return  sustain  truth.  This  false  impression  clothed 
their  minds  with  a fanatical  hostility  against  all  new  theories  and  dis- 
coveries, which  might  in  any  way  attract  the  attention  of  mankind 
from  those  things  which  they  were  so  firmly  defending. 

It  is  well  to  remark  that  the  earth  revolved  before  any  being  be- 
lieved it,  and  that  a discovery  of  the  fact  did  not  make  it  any  more 
true.  The  information,  however,  was  profitable,  inasmuch  as  a 
knowledge  of  Nature  and  her  laws  inspires  in  the  enlightened  un- 
derstanding confidence  in  the  Universe  and  her  Creator.  At  the 
present  time,  the  modes  and  habits  of  thinking  among  mankind  are 
changed  in  many  particulars  and  upon  various  important  subjects ; 
but  the  people  in  general  have  improved  in  their  intellectual  attain- 
ments very  little  beyond  those  who  opposed  the  promulgation  of  the 
new  astronomical  discoveries. 

Then  while  I am  impressed  to  speak  of  the  Primitive  History  with 
caution  and  gentleness,  I am  also  impressed  that  it  deserves  no  more 
veneration  than  do  the  teachings  of  many  other  good  minds  that  have 
lived  and  written.  And  while  I discover  interior  and  immortal  truth 
in  many  of  the  expressions,  precepts,  and  examples,  therein  recorded, 
I am  impressed  that  they  should  be  loved  and  admired  for  their  reality 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


431 


and  usefulness  — not  merely  because  this  truth  is  found  in  those  writ- 
ten or  printed  pages,  but  because  it  is  Truth,  and  always  was,  and 
always  will  be. 

§ 108.  The  reason  why  I am  impressed  to  speak  concerning  this 
“ history”  particularly,  is,  that  there  have  arisen  from  its  existence  in 
the  world,  huge  monuments  of  ignorance,  superstition,  and  misap- 
prehension. For  this  reason  I have  shown  that  some  of  its  parts  are 
compendiums  of  oriental  mythology  — Jewish,  Egyptian,  and  Per- 
sianic  poetry  — and  of  the  productions  of  the  brilliant  imaginations 
of  minds  uninformed.  There  are  many  noble  and  enlightened  per- 
sons represented  in  those  written  pages,  whose  powers  of  thought 
and  capabilities  of  imagination  justly  demand  the  deepest  esteem  and 
admiration.  Many  allegorical  and  symbolical  representations  therein 
contained  are  exceedingly  beautiful,  and  are  capable  of  being  inter- 
preted in  a most  brilliant  and  magnificent  manner.*  But  the  world 
clothes  this  history  with  more  divinity  than  it  itself  claims,  and  thus 
shrouds  the  whole  in  a garment  of  gloom  and  impenetrable  mysti- 
cism, which  does  violence  to  the  judgment,  and  distorts  the  faculties 
of  the  mind  from  their  natural  condition  and  mode  of  action. 

When  good  and  enlightened  men  put  forth  their  thoughts  to  the 
world,  and  when  their  noble  works  appeal  to  mankind  for  respect 
and  approbation,  a due  distinction  should  be  made  between  these 
and  the  unrighteous.  But  men  should  love  only  that  which  they  are 
compelled  to  love  from  the  force  of  truth,  and  repulse  that  which  is 
repulsive  and  uncongenial  to  their  nature  and  mental  susceptibilities. 
The  Primitive  History  makes  us  acquainted  with  some  of  the  former 
class  of  men  and  teachings  : and  these  should  be  admired  according 
to  that  which  is  intrinsically  worthy  of  approbation. 

But  good  men  and  deeds  should  be  as  much  beloved  out  of  those 
pages  as  in  them.  And  no  distinction  of  a superficial  character 
should  be  established  between  any  members,  classes,  or  nations,  of 
the  human  family.  Therefore,  for  those  writers  to  be  respected  more 
than  is  allowable  according  to  the  universal  principles  that  govern 
Nature  and  Man,  would  be  to  violate  the  plainest  laws  of  equity,  and 
to  forsake  the  divine  principles  of  harmony  for  that  which  is  disunited, 
unreal,  and  confused. 

While  I am  in  a situation  to  recognise  the  causes  of  things,  I can 
not  let  that  escape  notice  which  is  sowing  the  seeds  of  disunity  and 
‘■orruption  throughout  the  world.  And  when  I investigate  the  origin 


432 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


of  allegorical  and  mythological  theology,  I am  compelled  to  speak 
of  the  same  in  a style  agreeing  with  the  nature  of  my  impressions. 
And  while  I am  conscious  that  the  feelings,  affections,  and  judg- 
ments of  men,  are  deeply  involved  in  this  subject,  and  that  for  this 
book  men  exercise  love  and  admiration  as  if  it  were  far  more  true 
than  the  very  Elements  and  Body  of  the  Divine  Mind,  I am  never- 
theless constrained  to  speak  seriously  and  unreservedly  concerning 
the  truth  or  falsity  of  many  parts  of  the  same.  Yet  notwithstanding 
these  affections  for  erroneous  principles  are  created  only  by  early  im- 
pressions, it  is  proper  that  they  should  be  gently  appealed  to,  so  that 
the  judgment  may  be  brought  to  recognise  the  important  truth  that 
if  all  those  prophecies  and  sayings  are  divine  and  eternal,  they  will 
remain  unchanged,  and  be  perpetuated  through  all  generations  ; 
while  all  invasive  theories  and  hypotheses  will  be  destroyed  to  be 
knovyn  no  more. 

Let  what  I am  impressed  to  state,  then,  be  received  as  true  or  re- 
jected as  false,  according  to  its  appeals  to  your  judgments.  And  if 
what  I relate  is  not  true,  it  will  not  injure  that  which  is  truth.  Be 
not  afraid,  then,  that  truth  will  suffer  from  these  investigations,  but 
repose  confidence  in  its  immortality  and  omnipotence,  and  be  assured 
of  the  weakness  and  evanescence  of  error.  Be  cautious,  however, 
in  your  decisions,  and  do  not  receive  that  which  does  not  address 
your  affections  and  judgment  in  the  voice  of  reason,  and  which  does 
not  receive  spontaneous  approbation  from  your  interior  principles. 

If  the  Primitive  History  is  an  Oracle  of  Truth,  no  assistance  from 
man  can  render  it  more  so.  Fear  not,  then,  that  truth  may  suffer 
from  the  invasions  of  error  and  unrighteousness.  Those  who  are 
strenuous  to  defend  the  sayings  contained  in  that  book  are  persons 
who  have  an  affection  for  early  impressions,  more  than  they  have  for 
progressive  discoveries  in  the  unexplored  labyrinths  of  wisdom  and 
righteousness.  Such  as  are  apprehensive  concerning  the  results  of  a 
strict  investigation,  not  only  of  this  subject,  but  of  many  others,  and 
are  not  seeking  to  know  what  truth  is,  but  are  merely  anxious  to  have 
their  present  convictions  prevail. 

In  view  of  these  considerations,  I find  it  proper  to  enforce  the  ne- 
cessity of  investigating  all  things,  without  entertaining  the  least  doubt 
as  to  the  incorruptibility  and  immortality  of  truth.  And  it  is 
proper  to  forsake  all  denunciation  ; though  it  may  be  that  the  world 
will  oppose  the  truth  now  presented  with  the  same  ungrounded  hos- 
tility and  prejudice  as  was  manifested  by  those  who  opposed  the 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


433 


distinguished  and  venerable  astronomical  philosopher.  But  remem- 
ber that  the  earth  continued  to  revolve,  though  the  fact  was  wholly 
disbelieved  by  mankind.  Remember  also  that  truth  will  always  con- 
tinue to  live,  whether  believed  or  disbelieved,  either  by  the  educated 
or  uneducated  classes  of  mankind.  And  let  those  who  tremble  for 
the  truth,  whether  this  be  such  as  is  supposed  to  exist  in  the  Primi- 
tive History,  or  in  any  other  department  of  the  Universe,  arrest  their 
agitation  and  excitement  for  one  moment,  and  behold  their  own  folly 
and  imbecility  — while  Truth  itself  illuminates  its  features  with  a 
smile  of  undying  beauty  ! Let  Nature,  the  Universe,  and  the  Divine 
Mind,  then,  be  the  source  of  your  instruction.  But  if  you  desire  to 
behold  examples  of  human  weakness,  read  this  History’s  commen- 
tators. 

Search,  explore,  and  discover  truth,  then,  and  place  your  affec- 
tions upon  it,  because  it  is  an  element  of  Divine  Wisdom.  Place 
not  your  affections  upon  that  which  judgment  disapproves,  or  against 
which  your  spiritual  sensibilities  revolt.  Believe  not  a truth  because 
it  was  believed  and  taught  before  you  lived,  but  because  it  is  truth, 
leading  the  mind  omvard  and  upward  to  higher  spheres  of  grandeur 
and  beauty.  Remember  that  the  mind  in  its  true  state  is  free  to  think 
and  act  — free  from  all  sectarian  bondage  and  superstition.  Mean- 
while consider  that  the  mind  does  not  now  act  freely,  or  express  its 
serious  convictions,  because  it  has  fettered  itself,  and  seems  to  have 
no  desire  to  become  entrammelled. 

Mythology  has  resulted  from  prior  ignorance  and  misconception  , 
and  superstition,  sectarian  affection,  and  prejudice,  have  arisen  out 
of  mythology.  All  these  have  affected  the  uninformed  minds  of 
generations  past,  and  are  inherited  by  millions  of  the  freeborn  minds 
of  the  present  era.  Hence  your  strenuous  adherence  to  early  im- 
pressions ; to  what  your  parents  have  taught  ; to  the  sectarian  inter- 
pretation of  the  Primitive  History  ; and  to  sanctimonious  and  un- 
meaning ceremonies  all  of  which  have  been,  and  are  at  the  present 
time,  establishing  walls  of  distinction  between  husband  and  wife, 
parent  and  children,  brothers  and  sisters,  nation  and  nation,  and  Na- 
ture and  theology,  and  destroying  the  happiness  of  mankind.  And 
these  effects  afford  living  evidence  to  the  enlightened  understanding 
that  whatever  system  has  caused  them  is  not  divine  — is  not  born  of 
Nature  or  of  her  Creator,  and  is  consequently  injurious  and  positively 
unrighteous.  Learn  from  these  things,  then,  to  modify  your  early" 
affections,  so  that  reason  may  bring  forth  good  and  truthful  sentiments, 

2S 


434 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


and  that  you  may  be  rendered  suitable  receptacles  of  the  spontane- 
ous breathings  of  the  Divine  Mind,  which  is  Love  and  Wisdom, 
and  is  incessantly  evolving  the  Omnipotent  Principle  of  Eternal 
Truth. 

These  reflections  are  presented  as  an  appeal  to  your  interior  affec- 
tions, and  more  especially  to  that  divine  principle,  Reason,  which 
constitutes  the  interior  nature  of  every  man. 

§ 109.  I now  proceed  to  communicate  my  impressions  concerning 
the  prophecies  and  opinions  relating  to  that  lovely  personage  who 
existed  upon  the  earth,  and  whose  history  is  so  imperfectly  and  un- 
righteously related  by  many  writers.  His  birth  and  life  have  been 
clothed  with  many  unjust  descriptions  — unjust  because  they  are  not 
true.  The  writers  spoke  as  men  speak  at  the  present  day,  from 
earl'y-imb'ibed  convictions.  Many  accounts  that  are  given  of  him 
are  interspersed  with  plain  contradictions  of  the  fundamental  princi- 
ples of  Nature.  It  is  well  to  elucidate  the  origin  of  these  many  ac- 
counts before  I proceed  to  consider  specifically  the  superior  purity 
and  majestic  greatness  of  him  who  came  to  enlighten  the  world. 

In  order  that  we  may  properly  understand  the  origin  of  many  doc- 
trines relating  to  this  subject  that,  have  been  derived  from  the  teach 
ings  of  men  called  prophets,  it  is  necessary  to  institute  some  consid- 
erations concerning  the  five  books  ascribed  to  Moses,  and  also  con- 
cerning other  writings  that  have  a connexion  with  the  subject. 

The  first  book,  called  Genesis,  was  not  written  by  Moses,  but 
the  first  part  of  it  consists  of  traditional  allegories  of  primitive  ages, 
and  which  existed  in  the  world  before  Moses  lived.  The  description 
of  the  formation  of  the  world,  of  the  creation  of  Adam,  of  the  garden 
of  Eden,  and  the  tree  of  knowledge,  are  figures  that  were  used  by  the 
previous  eastern  nations.  This  book  bears  external  evidence  of  its 
own  origin. 

But  theologians  have  supposed  that  Moses  must  have  been  in- 
structed in  the  knowledge  of  these  things  many  ages  after  they  tran- 
spired. Some  have  supposed  that  the  eardi  is  no  older  than  is 
indicated  by  the  chronology  of  the  Primitive  History.  They  also 
have  believed,  and  have  endeavored  to  prove,  that  the  allegories  re- 
corded in  the  book  of  Genesis  were  actual,  literal  truths.  It  is  well 
to  bear  this  in  mind  ; for  on  this  supposition  all  Christian  writers 
have  based  their  interpretations  of  accounts  in  Genesis  as  relating  to 
the  birth,  life,  and  office  of  Jesus,  the  great  Moral  Reformer.  They 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


435 


have  thus  endeavored  to  form  a connexion  between  the  fall  of  man 
in  the  garden  of  Eden,  as  related  in  Genesis,  with  a restitution  which 
they  suppose  was  to  be  accomplished  by  the  ultimate  triumph  of  the 
divine  principles  taught  by  Jesus  of  Nazareth. 

It  is  distinctly  evident  that  this  idea  could  not  have  been  enter- 
tained by  those  who  wrote  the  books  of  either  of  the  Testaments. 
The  apostles,  in  giving  an  account  of  the  birth,  life,  and  preaching 
of  Jesus,  did  not,  in  all  their  writings,  even  once  intimate  any  such 
idea.  They  do  not  speak  of  the  original  purity  of  man,  and  of  his 
fall,  in  connexion  with  the  use  of  the  birth,  life,  and  preaching,  of  the 
one  t h ey  so  much  loved.  They  do  not  even  intimate  that  Jesus  was 
a means  by  which  the  race  would  be  restored  to  any  degree  of  re-? 
fmement  which  they  once  possessed.  They  say  nothing  of  the  gar- 
den of  Eden,  of  the  fall  of  man,  nor  of  any  of  the  allegorical  sayings 
contained  in  the  book  of  Genesis.  Those  who  wrote  concerning 
Jesus  must  have  known  the  object  of  his  birth  and  preaching,  and 
therefore  if  the  “ plan  of  redemption”  manufactured  by  theologians 
represents  the  truth,  it  would  have  been  mentioned  by  them  as  one 
of  the  first  and  most  important  points  to  be  understood  when  speak- 
ing of  the  birth  and  life  of  him  who  labored  for  a moral  resurrection. 

O 

It  is  clear,  from  many  expressions  in  Genesis,  that  this  book  could 
not  have  originated  with  Moses.  But  it  was  written  by  a man  who 
sacredly  compiled  the  traditional  mythology  of  the  forefathers.  I am 
perfectly  convinced,  from  the  nature  of  my  impressions,  that  the 
other  books  which  are  ascribed  to  Moses  were  in  reality  written  by 
him.  The  history  as  contained  in  those  four  books  is  generally  very 
true;  and  for  their  truthfulness  the  books  should  be  esteemed  and 
appreciated. 

An  account  is  given  of  the  birth  of  Moses,  or  rather  of  the  circum- 
stances of  his  infancy.  This  account,  whether  true  or  untrue,  has 
no  possible  bearing  on  the  general  history  contained  in  these  books. 
It  appears  that  the  romantic  account  of  his  birth,  and  of  his  singular 
position  in  early  life,  is  true.  And  the  fact  of  his  being  discovered 
in  that  novel  situation  excited  among  the  inhabitants  of  the  land  a. 
great  deal  of  astonishment ; and  as  the  account  thereof  was  related 
in  a marvellous  manner  by  those  who  discovered  him,  he  soon  be- 
came a distinguished  youth  : and  the  marvellous  things  that  were  told 
of  him  were  believed  and  improved  upon  by  many  tribes  of  the  east, 
including  the  Egyptians.  He  thus  became  notorious  among  all,  and 
he  was  consequently  inclined  to  endeavor  to  sustain  the  general  ini' 


436 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


pression  which  prevailed  concerning  his  superior  abilities.  He  was 
thus  led  to  form  a studious  habit,  which  unfolded  and  greatly  im- 
proved his  mind.  It  was  for  him,  indeed,  a happy  circumstance  that 
those  marvellous  things  were  connected  with  his  birth  ; for  as  all  be- 
lieved he  was  destined  for  some  high  and  sacred  office,  he  had  ro 
desire  to  forfeit  the  regards  bestowed  upon  him  on  that  account,  and 
he  was  also  led  finally  to  believe  as  much  as  others,  the  idea  of  his  high 
destiny.  So  these  things  operated  upon  his  self-love,  and  he  conse- 
quently pressed  forward  to  the  attainment  of  wisdom  and  knowledge, 
transcending,  if  possible,  that  of  any  other  man  living  in  those  times. 

It  is  well  to  remark  that  the  expression  was  in  those  tubes  almost 
universally  prevalent  among  the  eastern  nations,  that  “ the  Lord  di- 
rected”— “the  Lord  spake,”  &c.,  and  that  they  employed  this 
phrase  to  express  the  evolution  of  a thought.  The  early  inhabitants 
believed  that  the  “ breaths”  created  their  thoughts  ; and  so  they  would 
say  that  the  “breaths”  taught  them  to  do  thus  or  so,  to  accomplish 
this  or  that,  or  to  undertake  a journey  — all  of  which  promptings 
they  implicitly  obeyed  if  they  were  distinct  and  forcible.  This  ex- 
pression was  modified  by  the  subsequent  generations  into  many 
forms,  until  it  became  a cant  phrase;  and  owing  to  the  common- 
ness of  its  usage,  it  became  abundantly  dispersed  throughout  the  sa- 
cred writings.  The  early  inhabitants  of  the  earth,  and  indeed  the 
nations  existing  upon  the  earth  for  many  hundred  years  after,  could 
not  possibly  conceive  how  thoughts  could  exist  within  them  without 
an  influx  of  some  exterior  but  invisible  spirit.  The  phenomenon  of 
thought  led  them  into  more  imaginative  speculations  than  any  other 
thine:  which  attracted  their  attention.  So  also  it  became  a universal 
expression  among  the  prophetical  writers,  that  the  Lord  spake  unto 
them  — constructed  plans  — instituted  questions  — suggested  signs 
&c.  : for  these  they  supposed  came  by  direct  influx  from  the  thoughts 
of  the  Divine  Mind.  The  conception  of  the  invisible  origin  of 
thoughts  was  a natural  result  of  the  uninformed  state  of  their  minds 
concerning  the  causes  of  mental  phenomena.  They  used  the  term 
“ Lord”  in  the  same  sense  as  I use  the  term  “ impression  for  their 
thoughts  were  caused  by  associations  with  similar  truths  to  those  with 
which  I associate.  So  if,  instead  of  using  the  expression  “ the  Lord 
spake,”  they  had  said,  “I  am  impressed  with  such  or  such  a thought,” 
hen  would  theologians  of  the  present  day  have  comprehended  the 
mystery. 

Moses,  ascending  to  manhood  with  a healthy  and  athletic  constitu- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


437 


tion,  and  in  possession  of  many  suj. erior  intellectual  endowments, 
soon  began  to  teach  learnedly,  attributing  bis  impressions  to  the  in- 
fluence of  the  Lord’s  invisible  spirit,  in  accordance  with  the  general 
conviction  of  those  times.  This,  in  fact,  was  the  first  opinion  that 
was  enstamped  upon  his  mind  in  youth  ; and  in  manhood  the  same 
became  fully  developed.  Notwithstanding  this  error,  he  was  far  more 
intellectual  than  almost  any  other  person  at  those  times. 

§ 110.  It  is  unnecessary  for  me  to  enter  into  details  concerning 
bis  long  and  protracted  expedition  at  the  head  of  the  Israelites,  or  to 
consider  particularly  the  accounts  given  of  his  many  miraculous  per- 
formances. But  my  main  object  is  to  notice  some  theological  opin- 
ions that  have  been  derived  from  his  writings. 

Whether  he  was  designed  to  be  a leader  and  governor  of  the  Is- 
raelites, is  a question  that  should  not  excite  discussion,  as  it  neither 
involves  any  important  truth  nor  any  principle  of  useful  application. 
But  there  are  many  erroneous  impressions  received  from  the  miracles 
which  he  is  said  to  have  accomplished  while  journeying  with  the  Is- 
raelites. The  account  of  his  passing  with  the  hosts  of  Israel  through 
the  Red  sea  on  dry  land,  is  very  truthful.  But  what  is  said  concern 
ing  the  causes  which  produced  the  separation  of  the  waters,  is  entirely 
figurative,  only  expressing  an  external  form  of  procedure  which  Moses 
observed  in  praise  to  the  Origin  of  the  impressions  which  led  him 
onward,  believing  as  he  did  that  the  Lord  was  the  suggester.  The 
passage  of  the  Red  sea  on  dry  land,  the  waters  being  upon  each  side, 
was  not  only  effected  by  the  Israelites  under  Moses,  but  was  accom- 
plished before , and  has  been  since  Moses  lived.*  For  at  that  time  the 
water  had  merely  receded  from  the  elevated  portion  of  the  sea-bottom 
over  which  they  crossed  : for  when  the  tide  ebbed,  this  place,  being 
a sandbar,  was  left  dry,  like  a beach,  and  therefore  it  was  possible  to 
effect  a safe  passage  across. 

It  was  a custom  to  wave  a rod  over,  or  to  kiss,  or  to  smite  any- 
thing from  which  assistance  was  desired.  These  formalities  were 
also  intended  to  express  obligation  and  gratitude.  The  account  in- 

* The  author  here  remarked  to  those  present  when  this  was  delivered,  that  he  per- 
ceived that  this  passage  of  the  Red  sea  had  been  effected  in  the  same  manner  as  it 
was  by  the  Israelites,  by  one  of  the  five  Icings,  accompanied  by  his  army,  spoken  of 
in  the  fourteenth  chapter  of  Genesis.  He  also  stated  that  Bonaparte,  in  a similar 
manner  and  at  the  same  place,  crossed  the  dry  bottom  of  the  sea  on  the  recession  of 
the  tide.  Since  that  period,  however,  the  sea-bottom  at  the  same  locality  had  mate- 
rially altered  by  the  shifting  of  the  sand. 


/ 


43S 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


dicates  nothing  more  than  this ; as  the  rod  was  waved,  and  the  waters 
were  smitten  witli  the  garment,  because  the  beach  was  dry  so  that 
they  could  pass  over  in  safety. 

The  account  of  their  being  followed  by  Pharaoh  and  his  hosts  is 
also  true,  as  is  likewise  that  of  the  destruction  of  his  army  : for  in  at- 
tempting to  cross,  they  were,  because  of  their  numbers,  very  much 
impeded  ; and  when  they  were  nearly  all  upon  the  passage,  the  tide 
returned,  and  they  were  drowned.  Moses  ascribes  this  deliverance 
from  their  enemy  to  a direct  interposition  of  the  Divine  Mind  ; and 
so  the  event  has  been  considered  by  many  theological  writers. 

Other  remarkable  things  are  also  related,  such  as  obtainin'!  water 
by  the  smiting  of  a rock  ; the  rod  being  changed  into  several  forms  ; 
their  being  fed  by  manna  which  fell  from  above  ; and  also  many  other 
things  of  like  marvellous  nature.  Whether  any  of  these  accounts 
are  true  or  untrue,  is  a question  which  should  not  engage  the  time 
and  talents  of  mankind,  inasmuch  as  a solution  of  this  question  would 
not  produce  the  least  possible  good  toward  promoting  a physical  and 
moral  renovation  of  the  human  race.  — 

Moses  also  speaks  of  receiving  some  divine  commandments  while 
upon  Mount  Sinai,  and  of  receiving  instructions  from  the  Lord  from 
a dark  and  immoveable  cloud.  He  relates  that  a voice  came  out  of 
the  cloud  to  him  while  on  the  mount,  which  spake  those  stern  com- 
mandments which  were  to  constitute  the  law  to  govern  the  Israelites. 
There  are  many  very  beautiful  figures  and  allegorical  representations 
that  have  been  suggested  by  the  account  of  this  very  novel  and  mys- 
terious interview  ; but  it  is  my  object  at  the  present  time  to  speak 
concerning:  the  origin  of  this  account,  which  in  its  general  features  is 
substantially  true. 

Moses,  after  having  been  with  the  Israelites  for  many  years,  and 
finding  that  many  of  them  were  exceedingly  desirous  of  changing 
their  situation  and  government,  conceived  it  proper  that  they  should 
have  some  specific  and  rigid  laws.  Finding  it  impossible  to  inspire 
their  minds  with  any  real  and  substantial  moral  principles,  he  con- 
ceived it  proper  to  obtain  by  some  means  a code  by  which  they 
might  be  governed,  derived  from  a source  not  known  to  them.  For 
as  they  were  fanatical  and  superstitious,  he  could  not  instruct  them 
as  he  desired  ; for  they  were  believing  every  species  of  phantasy  — 
and  in  these  they  reposed  more  confidence  than  they  subsequently  at 
times  reposed  in  their  leader  himself. 

Moses,  in  view  of  these  things,  felt  that  he  was  divinely  impressed 


t 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


439 


Jo  leave  the  people  for  a time,  and  find  some  solitary  and  sequestered 
place  in  the  mount  that  was  near  them,  where  he  might  listen  to  the 
influx  from  the  Divine  Being,  of  such  principles  as  would  form  a law 
to  those  he  was  leading.  He  obeyed  the  suggestion,  and  repaired  to 
the  mount  in  silence.  In  ascending  he  would  occasionally  arrest  his 
steps,  and  meditate  upon  the  proper  requirements  of  those  whom  he 
saw  spread  over  the  plains  below ; and  before  he  arrived  at  the  top 
of  the  mountain,  many  important  thoughts  were  suggested  to  his  mind 
by  the  impressiveness  of  the  scene  that  lay  before  him.  So  he  sat 
down  and  was  absorbed  in  contemplation  for  many  hours,  at  the  end 
of  which  time  the  ten  commandments  were  framed  in  his  mind,  and 
he  wrote  them  upon  stones  such  as  could  be  conveyed  to  the  valley 
below,  and  such  as  were  easily  impressible.  At  the  time  he  began 
to  write,  a cloud  was  seen  on  the  mount,  which  moved  not,  because 
of  the  stillness  of  the  atmosphere,  until  he  completed  the  ten  com- 
mandments. Believing  from  youth  that  thoughts  were  caused  by  an 
influx  from  invisible,  celestial  beings,  he  supposed  that  at  this  time 
all  these  suggestions  proceeded  from  the  Lord,  who  was  clothed 
with  the  cloud.  He  accordingly  wrote  his  opinion  concerning  the 
whole  divine  instruction,  and  concerning  the  means  by  which  he  ob- 
tained the  commandments.  Moses,  being  more  enlightened  than  any 
other  person,  was  capable  of  conceiving  and  forming  those  command- 
ments, from  the  knowledge  he  had  of  the  wants  of  those  whom  he 
governed. 

Some  theological  writers  conceive  that  these  commandments  must 
have  divinely  originated  ; and  in  support  of  this  opinion,  they  say 
that  had  these  laws,  which  are  of  the  very  highest  morality,  been  in- 
stituted by  Moses  alone,  or  forged  in  those  books  by  any  other  wri- 
ter, they  would  not  have  been  so  just  or  so  severe  : because  if  they 
had  been  composed  by  man,  they  would  have  consisted  of  the  easy 
rules  that  man’s  inclinations  always  invent  for  his  own  government. 
This  reasoning  is  not  conclusive.  For  it  is  well  known  that  nations 
often  create  laws  that  are  severely  binding  and  compulsory,  and  that 
the  Hindoo  tribes  have  codes  and  legal  requirements  eminently  more 
severe  than  those  instituted  by  Moses. 

It  was  the  prevailing  policy  of  the  nations,  before  Moses  lived,  to 
have  the  most  severe  and  stringent  laws,  the  violation  of  which  was 
punished  with  death  as  a sacrifice  to  the  gods,  whom  they  supposed 
to  be  their  lawgivers.  Moses  also  imbibed  hereditarily  the  opinion 
that  these  arbitrary  forms  of  government  were  necessary  ; and  his  was 


440 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


the  most  judicious  and  appropriate  code  of  laws  that  eve>-was  framed 
by  any  governor  in  those  times.  So  the  account  which  Moses  has 
written  is  truthful,  and  it  is  written  precisely  according  to  his  belief. 
It  was  the  very  best  code  of  moral  and  social  laws  that  could  possibly 
have  been  invented  under  the  existing  circumstances  of  those  times, 
and  the  potency  of  those  commandments  has  been  exemplified  in  all 
subsequent  ages. 

§ 111.  Many  writers  have  supposed  that  the  law  of  Moses  was 
instituted  to  govern  the  world  until  the  great  Moral  Reformer  should 
make  his  appearance.  This  opinion  is  in  one  sense  true  — though 
the  two  systems  of  moral  government  are  not  so  intimately  connected 
as  many  are  led  to  believe.  I do  not  perceive  that  it  was  the  inten- 
tion of  the  Divine  Mind  to  call  into  being  a purer  spirit  for  the  pur- 
pose of  doing  away  with  the  old  law,  and  to  establish  the  new.  In- 
stead of  this,  it  was  by  the  progress  of  refinement  and  intellectual 
attainment  that  the  new  reformation  was  determined.  It  would  have 
been  unnecessary  to  have  higher  or  more  refined  principles  to  govern 
the  Israelites  than  those  instituted  by  Moses  ; because  if  his  com- 
mandments had  been  mild,  gentle,  and  highly  refined,  the  gross  and 
imperfectly-developed  intellects  of  those  times  would  have  disregarded 
their  teachings  : and  disunity  and  disorganization  would  have  been 
the  consequence.  But  the  principle  requiring  “an  eye  for  an  eye, 
and  a tooth  for  a tooth,”  they  could  readily  apprehend,  and  could 
obey  its  requirements  without  misunderstanding  its  meaning  ; and 
this  was  a high  moral  law  compared  to  that  by  which  they  had  previ- 
ously been  governed.  So  this  was  one  more  step  in  the  progress  of 
intellectual  development,  and  was  an  improvement  in  the  mode  of 
government  which  before  that  period  was  grossly  imperfect. 

The  law  of  Moses,  therefore,  has  no  real  connexion  with  any  the- 
ological system,  except  so  far  as  it  indicates  a steady  moral,  intellec- 
tual, and  social  progression  in  the  condition  of  man.  I can  not  con- 
ceive of  any  other  use  that  it  has  accomplished  besides  that  it  has 
served  as  a curved  line  to  lead  past  generations  to  more  truthful  and 
righteous  government ; and  it  should  even  now  be  to  the  world  a 
lesson  of  instruction.  It  is  merely  a chart  in  which  are  represented 
various  courses  of  social  policy,  some  of  which  led  to  evil  and  others 
to  good  results  — all  of  which  have  been  pursued,  and  should  not  be 
a<rain.  Therefore  the  writings  of  Moses  are  useful  to  the  world  at 
the  present  day  : yet  only  as  a means  of  enlightening  the  uninformed 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


441 


and  preventing  improper  adventures  in  the  establishment  of  arbitrary 
moral  laws  and  government. 

The  ancients  were  in  the  habit  of  understanding  all  things  by  cor- 
respondences and  allegories  ; and  in  relating  accounts  of  things  and 
occurrences,  they  would  often  speak  as  if  their  correspondents  and 
allegorical  representatives  were  themselves  true.  This  custom  is 
evidently  observed  by  the  writers  of  the  Primitive  History,  and  par- 
ticularly by  the  writer  of  the  book  of  Genesis  ; for  the  writings  of  the 
Old  Testament  are  much  characterized  by  allegorical  and  highly- 
figurative  descriptions,  the  figures  being  related  as  though  they  them- 
selves were  true,  instead  of  being  said  to  represent  things  according 
to  the  intention  of  their  writers. 

This,  then,  is  my  impression  concerning  Moses  : that  being  dis- 
covered as  he  was  among  the  rushes  ; being  believed  by  all  to  be 
destined  to  some  high  office,  and  growing  up  in  the  knowledge  of 
these  things,  in  order  to  make  good  the  opinions  that  were  entertained 
of  him,  and  which  he  himself  believed,  he  obtained  great  intellectual 
acquirements.  His  natural  faculties  being  thus  developed,  he  was 
capable  of  conceiving  more  truths  than  others,  and  thus  became  the 
chieftain  and  governor  of  the  tribes  of  Abraham.  These  he  led  out 
of  Egypt,  crossing  the  pass  of  the  Red  sea  into  the  wilderness,  where 
one  generation  passed  away  ; and  the  subsequent  generation,  imbi- 
bing all  the  opinions  of  their  fathers,  became  fanatical  and  enthusias- 
tic. Moses  being  inspired  with  more  brilliant  and  truthful  thoughts 
than  others,  owing  to  his  natural  capabilities,  produced  the  law  and 
ten  commandments,  supposing  that  he  was  assisted  by  a divine  in- 
flux. He  was  also  capable  of  foretelling  some  occurrences  (which 
capacity  was  surprising  to  his  brethren),  because  he  was  sufficiently 
enlightened  to  infer  the  same  with  accuracy,  from  the  tendencies  of 
existing  circumstances.  He  also  received  information  from  his  as- 
sistant Joshua,  on  whom  he  would,  by  manipulations,  produce  ab- 
normalness, so  that  he  might  dream  and  relate  his  visions. 

In  general,  Moses’s  prophecies  were  true,  and  he  did  that  which  . 
he  seriously  felt  to  be  his  duty;  although  many  of  his  wars,  persecu- 
tions, and  invasions,  are  repulsive  to  the  more  refined  feelings  of  an 
enlicrhtened  mind.  He  wrote  the  four  books  in  a laniruaote  suited  to 
the  customs  of  that  age,  and  intended  no  forgery  or  imposition,  but 
believed  he  was  inspired  with  divine  teachings  emanating  from  the 
fire,  smoke,  and  thunder,  on  Mount  Sinai.  And  for  his  historical 
and  prophetical  relations,  he  should  be  approved,  admired,  and  ap- 


442 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


predated,  because  they  are  substantially  true.  But  further  than  this,, 
bis  writings  are  disconnected  from  any  theological  system  that  has 
been  subsequently  invented.  Therefore  he  who  would  be  wise, 
should  free  his  mind,  if  possible,  from  all  theological  systems  that 
have  been  founded  upon  a basis  thus  absolutely  unallowable. 

These  writings,  then,  so  far,  have  no  use  in  common  with  the 
birth  and  teachings  of  the  Great  Reformer,  of  whom  I shall  here- 
after speak. 

Moses  used  the  forms  of  expression  and  the  singular  modes  of 
allegorical  representation  which  were  customary  among  the  Egyptians 
and  other  eastern  tribes.  And  what  should  be  particularly  remarked 
is,  that  this  custom  was  to  relate  the  allegory  in  such  a manner  as  to 
convey  the  impression  that  that  itself  was  the  thing  signified.  He 
also,  as  was  the  case  with  other  writers,  was  accustomed  to  use  the 
third'  person,  which  would  naturally  convey  the  impression  that  it 
was  not  Moses  who  wrote,  but  some  other  person.  Also  there  are 
many  instances  in  the  book  of  Deuteronomy  where  the  pronoun, 
first  person  singular,  has  been  stricken  out  by  compilers,  and  the 
third  person  singular  inserted  in  its  stead.  Also,  the  present  tense 
has  in  some  instances  been  changed  to  the  future  ; and  so  from  the 
present  English  version  it  is  impossible,  according  to  our  grammatical 
rules,  to  decide  whether  Moses  was  the  writer,  or  whether  the  books 
were  originally  anonymous,  and  subsequently  named. 

I find  upon  investigation  that  the  last  chapter  of  Deuteronomy  was 
written  by  another  person,  who  intended  to  relate  the  traditions  con- 
cerning Moses’s  discovery  of  the  promised  land,  his  divine  instruc- 
tions, and  his  death  and  burial.  The  generals  of  this  account  are 
strictly  true,  and  need  no  qualification. 

Aaron,  who  was  a contemporary  and  assistant  of  Moses,  was,  ac- 
cording to  the  relation  given,  nearly  as  useful  a functionary  as  Moses 
himself,  in  leading  and  governing  the  children  of  Israel.  But  the 
account  given  of  Moses,  as  written  by  himself,  displays  more  magna- 
nimity than  was  possessed  by  any  other  person  then  living  ; and  he 
was  declared  to  be  the  greatest  prophet  that  ever  arose  in  Israel,  and 
that  the  Lord  knew  him  face  to  face.  (Dent,  xxxiv.  10.)  Notwith- 
standing this  is  an  exaggerated  description  of  his  powers  of  mental 
conception,  and  susceptibility  of  internal  prompting,  he  was  the  most 
enlightened  person  then  existing,  either  among  the  Egyptians  or  Is- 
raelites. 

So  Moses  led  the  children  of  Israel  through  innumerable  vicissi- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


443 


tudes  and  deep  afflictions,  until  they  came  near  to  the  land  of  their 
contemplated  future  abode.  But  before  he  realized  all  of  his  pro- 
phetical anticipations,  he  ceased  to  live  ; and  Joshua,  who  was  pre- 
qualified, advanced  to  his  position  as  prophet  and  governor. 

§ 112.  Joshua  was  naturally  well  constituted,  both  physically  and 
spiritually  ; and  his  mind  was  rendered  the  more  fertile  and  suscep- 
tible of  correct  instruction  by  his  being  influenced  by  the  manipula- 
tion of  Moses.  This,  I find,  is  clearly  expressed  in  the  last  chapter 
of  Deuteronomy,  and  ninth  verse,  which  speaks  of  Joshua,  the  son 
of  Nun,  as  being  “ full  of  the  spirit  of  wisdom,  because  Moses  had 
laid  his  hands  upon  him.”  He  wras  therefore  rendered  capable  of 
discharging  the  duties  of  his  new  station  with  as  much  exactness  and 
promptitude  as  characterized  the  proceedings  of  his  predecessor. 
So  Joshua  now  became  the  chieftain  and  governor  of  that  expedition. 

An  account  is  given  concerning  the  attacks  made  upon  the  inhabi- 
tants of  the  promised  land,  and  how  the  Israelites  felt  convinced  that 
as  the  Lord  sustained  them  and  their  movements,  they  would  be  em- 
inently successful.  Actuated  by  this  unholy  belief,  they  fought  des- 
perately, and  apparently  at  the  sacrifice  of  all  natural  sensibilities, 
brotherly  kindness,  and  affection.  This  spirit  characterized  their 
movements  while  with  Moses,  and  was  still  persisted  in  under  the 
sanction  and  jurisdiction  of  Joshua. 

The  object  of  referring  to  this  account  is,  to  exhibit  to  a class  of 
men  who  are  supposed  to  be  true  theologians,  the  absurd  and  de- 
structive tendency  of  that  doctrine  which  supposes  that  these  bloody 
and  inhuman  invasions  were  sanctioned  by  that  Divine  Intelligence 
which  knows  no  thought  contrary  to  the  indestructible  indications  of 
Nature.  It  is  also  to  impress  the  conviction  that  such  plans  and 
means  as  were  employed  to  obtain  the  promised  land,  could  only 
have  originated  in  the  imperfectness  of  the  uneducated  intellects  and 
in  the  false  direction  of  the  affections  of  men.  It  is  blasphemous  to 
believe  and  preach  that  these  inhuman  proceedings  were  sanctioned 
by  a Divine  intention . 

By  some  expressions  used  by  Moses,  Joshua,  and  other  writers  of 
the  Old  Testament,  one  would  be  led  to  suppose  (admitting  their  di- 
vine origin)  that  these  wars,  persecutions,  and  devastations,  were  not 
only  incited,  but  were  pronounced  good,  by  the  Omnipotent  Mind. 
But  this  idea  has  arisen  from  a misinterpretation  of  the  peculiar  form 
of  expression  contained  in  those  books.  And  it  is  proper  that  men, 


414 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


should  not  presume  upon  that  which  is  doubtful,  or  endeavor  to  es- 
tablish a system  of  theology  without  even  inquiring  whether  the  basis 
is  competent  to  sustain  the  superstructure. 

Josh  ua  being  rendered  susceptible  to  interior  impressions  by  being 
subjected  to  abnormalness,  could  with  ease  and  precision  prophesy 
many  things  that  would  and  did  occur,  for  and  against  the  children 
of  Israel.  I discover  no  use  that  would  arise  from  a further  account 
of  the  doings  of  Joshua  and  those  whom  he  governed. 

But  as  there  exists  an  apparent  uniformity  in  the  prophetic  succes- 
sion, it  is  proper  to  glance  generally  at  each  one  in  the  order  in  which 
they  occur  in  the  Old  Testament. 

Whether  Joshua  wrote  the  book  ascribed  to  him  is  not  at  this  time 
clear;  but  that  the  things  therein  related  as  appertaining  to  Joshua 
and  the  Israelites  are  true,  appears  evident,  and  the  account  requires 
no  comment.  In  those  days  the  Israelilish  nation  had  no  king.  So 
after  Joshua  died,  they  were  governed  by  a number  of  Judges  ; and 
hence  the  Book  of  Judges,  which  follows  Joshua. 

It  appears  that  there  existed  great  animosity  of  feeling  among  the 
Canaanites,  Ammonites,  Edomites,  and  others,  toward  the  children 
of  Israel.  This  was  the  cause  of  frequent  wars  between  the  former 
tribes  and  the  latter.  Notwithstanding  the  usurpation  of  the  Judges, 
and  the  advice  of  many  prophetical  counsellors,  the  tribes  were  not 
adequately  defended  against  invasion,  but  instead  thereof,  suffered 
some  of  the  most  inconceivable  afflictions.  1 perceive  that  nothing 
occurred  during  the  reign  of  the  Judges  that  is  remarkable,  with  the 
exception  that  the  Israelites  became  idolatrous  and  enthusiastic,  which 
led  to  a fanatical  hostility  between  the  governors  and  various  portions 
of  the  nation.  And  the  tribes  were  subsequently  compelled  to  admit 
that  they  had  been  worshipping  gods  that  were  not  true,  but  false  and 
imaginary.  It  was  the  general  belief  among  the  Israelites  that  only 
one  God  existed,  whom  they  called  the  God  of  Abraham,  Isaac,  and 
Jacob  ; but  where  or  how  he  existed,  was  to  them  a profound  mys- 
tery. 

Moses  had  taught  them  that  it  was  by  the  assistance  of  the  Deity 
that  he  turned  the  waters  into  blood,  and  that  his  rod  assumed  the 
form  of  a serpent,  which  was  to  be  to  Pharaoh  a sign  of  power. 
And  he  taught  that  the  magicians  were  assisted  by  the  same  Deity  to 
perform  the  wonders  which  he  for  a time  accomplished.  The  de- 
sign of  the  magicians  was  that  Pharaoh  might  disbelieve  Moses’s 
superior  power,  seeing  that  they  performed  the  same  things  by  magic, 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


44-5 


which  he  professed  to  perform  by  the  assistance  of  Divine  power. 
But  in  order  to  display  his  pre-eminence,  his  rod,  while  a serpent, 
was  made  to  swallow  all  the  serpents  of  the  magicians,  with  the  ut- 
most ease  and  convenience  ! By  what  principles  of  motive  power 
the  rod  assumed  life,  is  not  explained  ; and  how  the  serpent  of  Moses 
could  swallow  and  digest  all  the  other  serpents,  is  likewise  a mystery 
not  unfolded  to  the  rational  mind  by  theological  speculators.  And 
how  water  was  decomposed  and  transformed  into  blood,  is  also  a 
physiological  problem  yet  remaining  unsolved. 

Moses  also  taught  that  he  conversed  with  the  God  of  Abraham, 
Isaac,  and  Jacob,  face  to  face  ; that  God  manifested  himself  in  a 
burning  bush  ; that  be  was  enveloped  in  the  cloud  on  Mount  Sinai ; 
and  that  he  was  always  at  his  command,  whenever  he  desired  his 
Divine  Presence.  Aaron  continued  to  give  the  same  kind  of  in- 
struction, which  was  subsequently  promulgated  by  Joshua,  and  be- 
lieved by  the  Judges  and  all  the  children  of  Israel. 

Here,  then,  are  striking  examples  of  allegorical  expression.  The 
relation  concerning  the  serpents,  and  the  manifestation  of  Divine 
power  in  turning  water  into  blood,  were  representations  which  Moses 
conceived  of  the  pre-eminence  of  his  own  position  and  qualifications 
over  those  of  all  others  ; and  of  his  supposed  supernatural  assistance 
and  Divine  instruction  which  established  his  authority  over  the  peo- 
ple. But  in  writing  these  things,  he  related  the  figure  as  being  a 
literal  truth,  which  was  the  universal  custom  among  the  eastern 
nations. 

It  was  a belief  also  among  the  Jews  and  Israelites  that  good  and 
evil  both  proceeded  from  the  same  Divine  source.  Hence  in  their 
expressions  they  would  convey  the  idea  that  the  Lord  would  say  that 
they  should  do  so  and  so,  and  then  afterward  would  repeal  the  com- 
mand, as  if  he  had  repented  for  what  he  had  before  said.  So  they 
would  say  that  “when  a prophet  is  deceived,  it  is  the  Lord  that  de- 
ceiveth  him.”*  And  they  would  also  at  times  lose  all  confidence  in 
the  Lord  because  of  their  oppressive  afflictions,  and  burst  out  in  a 
flood  of  exclamations,  saying  unto  the  Lord  — “ Wilt  thou  be  unto 
us  altogether  false,  deceiving  us,  and  leading  us  into  deep  afflictions?” 
So  they  would  represent  the  Lord  as  instituting  laws  on  one  day,  and 
repealing  them  with  sorrow  on  the  next.  They  would  charge  all 
their  weaknesses,  afflictions,  persecutions,  and  disconsolations,  to  the 
Lord,  believing  that  all  evil  proceeded  from  the  same  Fount  from 


* Ezekiel  xiv.  9. 


446 


nature's  divine  revelations. 


which  all  goodness  also  flows.  And  they  supposed  that  the  Lord 
was  the  originator  of  all  thoughts,  feelings,  and  sentiments,  whether 
good  or  evil,  pure  or  impure  ; for,  as  I have  stated,  they  could  not 
account  for  the  evolution  of  thought  upon  any  other  conceivable  hy- 
pothesis. It  was  very  natural,  therefore,  for  Moses,  Joshua,  and  the 
Judges,  to  have  the  history  of  their  afflictions,  proceedings,  and  ex- 
peditions, interpersed  with  all  descriptions  of  allegorical  language 
and  conventional  forms  of  expressions.  Further  than  these  remarks 
would  indicate,  no  instruction  that  would  be  of  any  use  at  the  present 
day  could  possibly  be  derived  from  the  theology  and  movements  of 
the  Jews,  or  children  of  Israel,  and  their  governors. 


§ 113.  The  book  that  follows  Judges  appears  to  have  been  written 
by  the* 'same  person  who  wrote  Judges  and  Joshua  : because  the  con- 
nexion is  clear,  and  the  composition  uniform  and  historical.  As  to 
its  truthfulness,  nothing  needs  to  be  said  ; fori  find  no  such  discrep- 
ancies in  the  expressions  and  punctuation  between  the  original  man- 
uscripts of  this  book  and  our  present  mutilated  versions,  as  appear  so 
conspicuous  in  other  books. 

The  Book  of  Ruti-i  is  useful,  inasmuch  as  it  contains  some  very 
beautiful  manifestations  of  devotion,  kindness,  and  refined  affection. 
It  represents  the  peculiar  customs  relating  to  matrimonial  engage- 
ments which  then  prevailed  universally,  but  which  were  subsequently 
reformed  and  essentially  modified.  It  represents  also  the  custom  of 
maidens  gleaning  the  fields,  together  with  the  customs  of  the  husband- 
men, which  prevailed  in  those  days.  It  gives  a description  of  the 
separation  and  affliction  of  the  mother  and  daughters;  of  the  marriage 
of  Ruth  to  Boaz  ; and  of  the  unity  and  affectionate  friendship  which 
subsisted  between  the  mother  and  her  daughters-in-law. 

The  object  of  this  book  appears  to  be,  not  only  to  illustrate  these  cus- 
toms of  the  eastern  nations,  but  to  establish  the  genealogy  of  David 
and  his  successors  down  to  the  Babylonish  captivity.  This  is  contin- 
ued in  the  first  book  of  Chronicles.  It  is  clear  that  the  compilers  mis- 
placed those  books,  and  also  their  chronology;  for  the  book  of  Ruth 
is  nothing  more  than  an  introduction  to  the  book  of  Chronicles.  It 
speaks  of  circumstances  connected  with  chronology  and  genealogy, 
and  seems  to  have  been  intended  as  an  introduction  to  a concise 
history  of  the  Jews,  from  David  to  Nebuchadnezzar,  who  overpow- 
ered Jerusalem,  and  led  the  Jews  captive  into  Babylon. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


447 


After  Ruth,  is  the  book  ascribed  to  Samuel.*  Samuel  was  also 
a child  of  Jewish  birth,  and  was  much  beloved,  because  he  was  sup- 
posed to  be  the  chosen  of  the  Lord,  who,  it  was  supposed,  strength- 
ened and  caressed  him  during  his  childhood  and  youth.  During  his 
life,  the  Judges  gave  room  to  the  establishment  of  Kings,  like  unto 
those  who  reigned  in  various  other  portions  of  the  eastern  hemisphere. 

The  transition  of  Samuel  from  infancy  to  youth  appeared  surpri- 
sing; and  so  he  was  soon  elevated  to  a high  degree  of  honor,  and  his 
position  conduced  not  only  to  his  pleasure,  but  to  his  emolument. 
Samuel,  however,  was  a refined  person,  because  he  possessed  a 
combination  of  high  moral  and  social  qualities.  But  I discover  noth- 
ing important  to  relate  concerning  him,  save  that  he  was  one  of  those 
who  are  supposed  to  belong  to  a perpetuated  line  of  prophets.  This, 
however,  is  unimportant,  as  the  book  of  Samuel  is,  like  Ruth  to  the 
book  of  Chronicles,  a mere  introduction  to  the  book  of  Kings  and  a 
continuation  of  historical  information  closely  following  the  book  of 
Judges. 

The  book  of  Kings  is  indeed  an  index  that  points  all  human 
governors  to  the  fount  of  terrible  wretchedness  as  the  result  of  tyr- 
anny and  oppression,  or  to  the  pure  and  silvery  streams  of  well- 
ordered  social  government,  and  a pure  and  refined  morality.  The 
book  of  Kings  bears  distinct  evidence  of  being  a compilation  from 
abundant  materials,  among  which  were  existing  the  book  of  Isaiah. 
For  the  thirty-seventh  chapter  of  Isaiah  is  perfectly  identical  with  the 
nineteenth  chapter  of  the  second  book  of  Kings  ; which  latter  appears 
to  have  been  copied  from  Isaiah,  who  must  have  written  previously, 
and  whose  writings  must  have  been  associated  with  those  that  pre- 
cede his  book. 

I discover  that  the  book  of  Kings  is  a confused,  though  concise 
description,  of  the  movements  and  jurisdictions  of  the  kings  of  the 
Israelites  and  Jews  ; and  was  written  by  the  same  person  who  wrote 
Joshua  and  Judges.  The  thirty-seventh  chapter  of  Isaiah  is  not  de- 
rived from  Kings,  but  is  inserted  as  the  nineteenth  chapter  of  second 
Kings,  from  a serious  conviction  of  the  compiler  that  it  belonged 
there  ; and  it  appears  that  the  books  were  originally  compiled  at  the 
time  the  Jews  were  under  Babylonish  bondage. 

There  are  no  prophecies  contained  in  the  books  of  Samuel  and 

* It  -will  be  observed  that  the  author  in  speaking  of  the  books  of  Samuel,  and  also 
of  Kings,  employs  the  singular  number,  intending  in  each  ease  to  include  the  two  books 

in  one. 


44S 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


Kings  that  can  be  of  any  possible  use  as  applying  to  the  world  at  the 
present  day  ; for  all  the  prophecies  therein  contained  are  confined  to 
the  age  in  which  they  were  made,  and  relate  to  the  movements  of 
kings  and  nations,  and  to  wars,  devastations,  famines,  and  pestilences. 
All  of  these  prophecies  were  true,  because  of  their  authors’  superior 
power  of  interior  perception  and  understanding  ; and  they  were,  as  I 
have  intimated,  an  advancement  of  those  gross  and  imperfect  prophe- 
cies that  were  common  among  eastern  nations,  many  accounts  of 
which  were  contained  in  those  books  that  were  rejected  at  the  coun- 
cils of  Nice  and  Laodicea  as  being  undivine  and  uncanonical.  How- 
ever, as  the  books  display  truth,  they  can  be  read  with  profit  by 
those  desiring  information  on  the  subjects  to  which  they  relate. 

Next  follow  the  books  of  Chronicles,  which  explain  themselves, 
and  therefore  require  few  remarks.  The  things  therein  chronicled 
are  also  generally  true,  with  the  exception  of  some  particular  and  iso- 
lated expressions  which  are  so  insignificant  and  unimportant  that  it  is 
not  necessary  to  pursue  a general  investigation.  It  however  appears 
that  the  last  verses  of  the  second  book  of  Chronicles  have  an  intimate 
connexion  with  the  book  of  Ezra,  which  follows. 

The  writings  of  Ezra  contain  some  very  valuable  instruction. 
The  book  bearing  his  name,  as  presented  in  the  Primitive  History, 
is  devoted  particularly  to  a relation  of  events  and  occurrences  con- 
nected with  the  return  of  the  Jews  from  Babylon,  and  the  rebuilding 
of  their  city  and  temple.* 

♦ It  will  be  recollected  that  the  author  in  previous  pages  speaks  of  his  being  in  the 
“ sphere  of  causes,”  or  in  a condition  to  recognise  the  “ internal  reality”  or  “ germi- 
nal principles”  of  the  things  on  which  he  speaks.  Accordingly,  in  speaking  of  the 
various  books  of  which  the  Bible  is  composed,  the  most  forcible  tendency  of  the  au- 
thor’s mind  was  to  observe  the  original  manuscripts,  rather  than  the  writings  in  the 
form  in  which  they  are  now  presented  in  the  Bible.  Hence  his  remarks  on  the  primi- 
tive records  and  traditions  from  which  the  first  part  of  the  book  of  Genesis  was  com- 
piled. For  the  same  reason,  in  speaking  of  the  book  of  Ezra,  and  of  those  of  three 
or  four  of  the  minor  prophets,  the  author’s  attention  was  attracted  to  the  writers 
themselves  with  whom  these  books  originated  : and  in  speaking  of  these,  he  has  spoken 
briefly  of  some  things  which  they  wrote  which  are  not  recorded  in  the  Bible  in  its 
present  form.  Some  intimations,  for  instance,  were  given  concerning  the  produc- 
tions of  Ezra,  which  can  only  be  verified  by  a reference  to  the  books  of  Esdras, 
which  claim  to  be  written  by  the  same  author.  But  on  reviewing  the  manuscripts 
previously  to  committing  them  finally  to  my  charge  for  publication,  the  author  re- 
marked in  substance  that  although  he  saw  the  object  of  his  being  impressed  to  speak 
as  he  did  concerning  three  or  four  of  the  less  important  writers  of  the  Old  Testa- 
ment, he  saw  that  it  would  not  be  necessary  to  publish  anything  he  had  said  of  their 
productions,  except  what  had  reference  to  their  books  in  their  present  form  as  recorded 
in  the  Bible.  He  therefore  only  authorizes  me  to  publish  such  remarks  as  appear  : 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


449 


§ 114.  Next  follows  the  book  of  Nehemiah.  This  is  a continu- 
ation of  the  Ezraite  history  which  speaks  of  the  rebuilding  of  the 
temple  and  other  national  occurrences,  and  sustains  the  character  of 
profane  and  ecclesiastical  history.  Nehemiah  was  a good  and  amia- 
ble man,  and  was  beloved  by  the  people,  notwithstanding  his  un- 
happy situation.  And  he  was  also  interiorly  enlightened  concerning 
many  events  and  occurrences  which  in  reality  transpired  many  years 
after  he  ceased  to  live. 

But  as  the  book  of  Nehemiah  is  connected  only  with  the  circum- 
stances of  the  times  in  which  it  was  written,  it  is  unnecessary  that  I 
should  enter  into  further  explanations  concerning  it,  or  point  out  the 
interpolations  which  it  subsequently  underwent  from  the  hands  of  the 
compilers  of  sacred  books.  And  had  it  not  been  for  the  meditations 
and  history  contained  in  Nehemiah,  I am  distinctly  impressed  that  it 
never  would  have  been  seen  by  subsequent  generations  : for  as  it  was, 
it  barely  escaped  the  same  fate  that  many  of  its  associate  manuscripts 
experienced. 

For  a truthful  understanding  of  the  contents  of  some  of  the  previ- 
ous books,  this,  and  following  ones,  I would  refer  the  reader  to  the 
theological  writings  of  Swedenborg,  the  enlightened  philosopher  — 
especially  to  a valuable  work  entitled  “ Surnmaria  Expositio  Sensns 
Prophetici.”  I will  remark,  however,  that  in  reading  the  above  work, 
in  order  to  comprehend  properly  the  meaning  of  the  author,  great 
caution  should  be  observed  in  distinguishing  the  prominent  principles 
which  he  develops.  For  there  will  be  observed  an  apparent  discrep- 
ancy between  the  things  I relate  and  those  written  by  this  Swedish 
philosopher : and  this  discrepancy  will  appear  conspicuous  when  the 
external  of  the  account  only  is  viewed,  but  not  when  his  interpreta- 
tions and  correspondences  are  properly  comprehended.  His  wri- 
tings do  not  unfold  a germ  of  spiritual  truth  in  those  primitive  pages, 
because  it  is  impossible  for  them  to  contain  such,  inasmuch  as  they 
are  only  historical  accoimts,  and  not  spiritual  revelations.  So  he 
does  not  unfold  an  interior  meaning  from  these  writings,  but  develops 
a novel  exterior  application  and  signification,  which  robs  the  Old  and 
New  Testaments  of  their  present  garb,  and  clothes  them  in  a garment 
of  spiritual  beauty  of  which  they  are  unworthy.  So  apprehend  the 
things  which  I relate,  and  know  that  I am  speaking  concerning  the 

and  the  main  object  of  this  explanatory  note  is  to  exclude  any  idea  of  unlawful  sup- 
pression that  might  otherwise  possibly  arise  in  the  minds  of  those  who  may  new,  or 
may  hereafter,  be  but  partially  informed  in  reference  to  the  above  facts. 

29 


4o0 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


origin  of  certain  biblical  accounts,  and  not  concerning  the  thousands 
of  creeds,  doctrines,  and  commentations,  that  have  been  based  upon 
a still  more  superficial  view  of  the  subject. 

Then  follows  the  book  of  Esther.  This  is  also  connected  with 
the  national  history  of  the  times  to  which  it  relates.  But  as  it  is  con- 
nected with  no  theological  system,  and  affords  no  prop  or  foundation 
for  the  support  of  any  theological  speculation,  it  is  proper  that  1 
should  forbear  further  remark  upon  it. 

Next  comes  the  hook  of  Job.  This  book  presents  conspicuous 
examples  of  hope,  praise,  and  worship,  together  with  distrust,  discon- 
solation,  and  oppressive  afflictions.  The  book  bears  external  evi- 
dence of  Egyptian  origin  ; for  in  it  a distinction  is  made  between  the 
evil  spirit,  or  tempter,  and  the  Lord,  which  distinction  is  not  recog- 
nised in  books  preceding.  This  was  according  to  the  traditional 
Egyptian  theology  — Osiris  being  the  spirit  or  Lord  of  light,  goodness, 
and  prosperity,  and  Typhon  the  spirit  of  darkness,  evil,  and  adversity 

The  book  of  Job  presents  a character  suffering  inexpressible  afflic- 
tions. With  this,  many  other  characters  are  introduced,  who  play 
respectively  the  parts  of  consolers,  tempters,  and  persecutors  — some 
endeavoring  to  add  more  pain  and  create  more  distress,  while  others 
would  act  as  moderators,  manifesting  sympathy  and  spiritual  affection, 
and  endeavoring  to  console  the  sufferer. 

This  book  is  imperfectly  derived  from  the  original  manuscript, 
yet  it  answers  the  purpose  for  which  it  was  intended,  which  was  to 
represent  allegorically  the  great  afflictions  and  oppressions  to  which 
man  was  liable,  and  how  he  must  look  to  the  Good  Spirit,  or  the 
Divine  Mind,  for  succor  and  consolation.  It  teaches  submission, 
purity,  and  humiliation.  It  also  advises  affectionate  devotion  to  truth 
and  virtue,  and  an  immoveable  confidence  in  that  Divine  Mind  who 
breathed  into  being  the  earth,  plants,  and  animals,  as  well  as  Man 
and  the  starry  heavens.  It  teaches  the  evil  consequences  of  vitiated 
and  unholy  situations  ; the  horribleness  of  unrighteous  thoughts  ; and 
the  slavery  and  imprisonment  of  that  mind  and  conscience  which 
know  no  good.  Meanwhile,  it  teaches  a devotional  resignation  to  the 
Divine  Love  and  Wisdom  universally  prevailing,  and  to  the  Divine 
Design,  or  laws  and  principles,  that  create,  govern,  and  control,  all 
things.  It  teaches  that  meekness,  charity,  patience,  perseverance, 
and  virtue,  should  characterize  the  disposition  and  actions  of  every 
being  who  is  susceptible  to  the  pains  and  pleasures  ordinarily  con- 
nected with  human  life. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


451 


Such  evidently  was  the  intention  of  the  book  of  Job.  Its  instruc- 
tions are  pure  and  good  ; its  style,  though  forcible,  is  gentle  and 
attractive,  and  its  tendency  is  evidently  proper  and  useful.  The 
book  of  Job,  however,  introduces  some  characters  into  notice  that 
are  subsequently  neglected  and  forgotten  ; while  others  are  retained 
throughout  the  historical  and  allegorical  relation.  Viewed  in  this 
light,  the  book  of  Job  may  be  made  useful.  But  this  book  is  inco- 
herent with  every  other  part  of  the  Old  Testament. 

I do  not  discover  in  any  of  these  books  any  prophetic  sayings  that 
have  the  slightest  allusion  to  him  who  came  to  inform  the  world  con- 
cerning their  sins,  and  to  bring  peace  on  earth,  and  good-will  to  men. 

§ 115.  Should  I proceed  further  with  the  present  subject  without 
presenting  some  reflections  in  review  of  previous  sayings  and  primi- 
tive customs,  the  matter  would  be  left  in  some  obscurity. 

It  will  be  remembered  that  in  speaking  concerning  the  nations  that 
existed  upon  the  earth  about  the  time  of  the  deluge,  and  especially 
those  that  dwelt  in  Central  and  South  America,  I stated  that  they 
conceived  the  sun  to  be  the  face  of  a deity  who  disseminated  evil 
among  them  because  of  their  abominations.  They  believed  the  sun 
to  be  the  great  vortex  of  central  power,  around  which  the  Universe 
revolved  ; and  this  constituted  their  peculiar  conception  of  the  great 
Creative  Cause.  It  is  not  necessary  that  I should  enter  into  details 
concerning  the  various  movements  of  this  nation,  or  concerning  their 
division  into  tribes  and  families  — and  how,  after  their  discovery  of 
the  art  of  navigation,  they  migrated  to  the  eastern  hemisphere,  where 
(as  I am  distinctly  impressed)  they  formed  settlements  in  Egypt  and 
also  near  ancient  Jerusalem. 

The  Bible  does  not  give  a connected  account  of  the  origin  of  the 
Jewish  nation  after  the  flood,  but  simply  speaks  of  Abraham  being 
instructed  by  the  Lord  in  a dream,  to  journey,  with  his  wife,  to  anoth- 
er portion  of  the  land,  whence  sprang  the  various  tribes  of  the  Isra- 
elitish  nation.  This  account  is  generally  correct:  for  it  speaks  of 
one  of  those  tribes  which  came  from  the  south  and  settled  in  the 
east  near  Egypt,  of  which  Abraham  was  a distinguished  member. 
From  him  forward,  the  history  is  correct  in  all  its  essential  partic- 
ulars. 

The  first  account  of  building  and  architecture  after  the  flood,  and 
when  the  earth  had  become  dry,  was  that  concerning  the  building 
of  the  tower  of  Babel.  This  account  represents  the  descendants  of 


452 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


Noah  as  congregating  upon  a beautiful  plain,  where  all  materials  for 
building  and  establishing  a city  were  abundant  and  accessible.  Re- 
taining their  impression  concerning  the  flood  and  all  its  horrors,  they 
conceived  the  idea  of  building  a tower  so  high,  if  possible,  that  the 
waters  could  not  ascend  to  their  exalted  habitation.  It  seems  from 
this  that  they  wtere  not  altogether  convinced  of  the  unchangeableness 
of  the  promise  which  Noah  believed  to  be  indicated  by  the  bow  in 
the  heavens.  The  world  was  represented  as  being  “ of  one  language 
and  of  one  speech and  so  among  these  tribes  there  was  a unity  of 
intention,  and  this  was  easily  communicated  vocally  to  each  other. 
They  are  represented  as  saying,  “ Go  to,  let  us  build  a tower  whose 
top  may  reach  unto  heaven  and  it  is  supposed  that  the  object  of 
this  tower  was  to  protect  them  from  being  again  destroyed.  The 
accpunt  represents  that  the  Lord  sanctioned  this  movement  by  prom- 
ising that  whatsoever  they  desired  and  undertook  should  not  be  pro- 
hibited, and  that  there  should  be  no  interference  in  the  accomplish- 
ment of  their  intentions.  The  building  then  progressed,  and  massive 
stones  were  conveyed  to  the  spot,  and  were  adjusted  with  a uniform- 
ity characterizing  a superior  order  of  architecture.  And  while  they 
were  pleased  and  elated  with  their  progress,  and  exulted  in  the  prob- 
ability of  the  fulfilment  of  their  anticipations,  the  account  represents 
the  Lord  to  say,  “ Go  to,  let  us  confuse  their  language”  ! 

Thus  the  account  makes  the  Lord  to  sanction  their  proceedings, 
and  to  promise  that  they  should  not  receive  from  him  the  least  inter- 
ruption ; and  then  represents  him  as  repealing  his  promise,  and  send- 
ing forth  his  power  to  destroy  their  means  of  vocal  communication  ! 
And  this  is  understood  by  theologians  and  their  followers  to  be  the 
origin  of  the  great  variety  of  tongues  and  languages  among  man- 
kind. 

Those  who  have  perused  the  theological  writings  of  Zoroaster, 
are  aware  that  six  thousand  years  are  spoken  of  in  his  Zend  Avesta, 
in  connexion  with  his  Cosmogony,  in  such  a manner  as  to  render 
the  affinity  plainly  visible  between  his  account  and  the  account  of  the 
six  days  of  creation  spoken  of  in  the  book  of  Genesis.  Among  the 
writings  of  the  Grecians,  the  Persian  magi,  and  the  Egyptian  priests 
of  the  sun,  may  be  found  allegorical  allusions  to  an  oriental  tradition 
concerning  the  building  of  a Jaina  temple,  and  how  it  was  construct- 
ed in  order  that  the  inhabitants  might  escape  another  inundation.  I 
am  now  distinctly  convinced  that  the  account  of  the  building  of  this 
tower  is  derived  from  an  oriental  allegory  ; for  I can  not  find  in  all 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


453 


my  researches  a single  indication  that  such  an  occurrence  as  the  lit- 
eral account  would  represent,  actually  took  place. 

After  the  time  ©f  the  building  of  the  tower  of  Babel,  as  spoken  of 
in  the  book  of  Genesis,  many  cities  and  temples  are  spoken  of  in 
various  portions  of  the  books  upon  which  I have  briefly  commented. 

My  object  is  now  to  show  the  origin  of  the  sect  called  the  Zends, 
or  the  fire  and  sun  worshippers. 

It  was  the  theology  of  those  southern  nations,  after  they  became 
thus  subsequently  settled,  that  the  sun  was  not  only  the  centre  of  the 
whole  Universe,  but  that  it  was  the  throne  and  habitation  of  the  Om- 
nipotent Governor  of  all  things.  Such  was  the  theology  of  the  Egyp- 
tians, Jews,  Chaldeans,  and  some  of  the  Persians.  In  confirmation 
of  these  statements  I would  refer  the  reader  to  the  historical  works 
of  Herodotus. 

There  was  generally  much  antipathy  existing  between  the  Israel- 
ites and  the  Egyptians,  because  of  the  dissimilarity  of  their  beliefs  : 
one  believing  that  the  Lord  resided  in  one  place,  and  the  other  in 
another;  while  the  Zends  and  other  sects  were  worshipping  the  sun, 
and  paying  homage  to  the  various  celestial  bodies.  There  was  also 
a sect  of  Druids  who  were  similar  to  the  Druids  of  the  Germanic 
tribes  which  were  originally  called  Teutons.  This  sect  had  much 
formality  in  their  mode  of  worship  ; for  they  wore  badges,  and  were 
appareled  with  clothing  bearing  representations  of  the  sun,  moon, 
and  stars,  together  with  the  signs  and  characters  of  the  zodiac. 
These  would  secretly  worship  the  sun  in  their  temples  or  the  se- 
questered sanctuaries  in  which  they  would  congregate.  Their  form 
of  compact  and  mode  of  recognition  were  made  up  entirely  of  alle- 
gorical representations  of  the  tower  of  Babel,  of  the  various  materials 
employed  in  its  construction,  and  of  the  various  degrees  of  mechani- 
cal and  masonic  labor.  So  each  member  of  the  sect  or  association 
was  made  to  correspond  to  the  men  who  were  engaged  in  building 
the  temple  (or  tower)  and  the  institution  corresponded  to  the  temple 
itself.  And  after  the  building  of  Solomon’s  temple,  the  associations 
of  this  sect  changed  their  institution  to  a representation  of  the  temple 
built  by  Solomon.  This  sect,  then,  arose  upon  a foundation  entirely 
allegorical.  Bat  as  time  will  sacredize  any  institution,  they  were 
finally  led  to  suppose  that  their  origin  was  of  a divine  nature. 

It  may  be  seen,  in  the  fifth  chapter  of  the  first  book  of  Kings,  that 
the  Jews  were  not  of  themselves  capable  of  building  the  temple  ac- 
cording to  the  desire  of  Solomon  ; and  that  he  was  obliged  to  send 


454 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


to  Hiram,  king  of  Tyre,  for  some  of  the  Sidonians  to  come  (for  they 
were  skilled  in  masonry)  and  build  the  temple.  Solomon  declares 
that  the  Jews  were  not  skilled  in  the  art  of  architecture,  and  were 
unfit  to  construct  the  temple  as  he  desired. 

So  it  was  by  tbe  assistance  of  the  Sidonians  that  Solomon  had  his 
temple  built.  The  interior  of  this  temple  displayed  all  the  grandeur 
and  magnificence  which  the  art  of  man  could  possibly  produce  from 
the  sublimest  conceptions  of  architecture.  In  the  dome  or  centre 
was  a resplendent  sun,  glittering  with  the  finest  gold,  and  throwing 
out  radiations  of  the  most  exquisite  beauty.  Also  the  interior  repre- 
sented the  moon  and  stars,  and  the  signs  and  constellations  of  the 
zodiac.  Together  with  this,  there  was  a general  representation  of 
the  most  gigantic  and  pusile  animals  that  were  then  known  and  wor- 
shipped ; also  of  such  portions  of  the  vegetable  and  floral  kingdom 
as  were  most  esteemed  by  the  forefathers  of  Solomon,  and  of  those 
who  built  the  temple.  So  it  may  be  said,  according  to  the  account 
of  Herodotus,  that  the  temple  was  a complex  representative  of  the 
whole  creation,  and  of  the  sun,  as  the  central  power  of  the  Universe. 

In  the  twenty-third  chapter  of  second  Kings,  it  may  be  read  that 
Josiah  commanded  that  all  the  abominations  of  the  temple  and  its 
builders,  and  of  those  who  worshipped  the  sun  and  moon,  should  be 
destroyed  and  abolished.  All  this  he  did  because  he  had  no  sym- 
pathy with  the  sects  of  the  Druids  and  Zends,  or  with  any  other 
heathenish  abominations. 

My  object  in  speaking  of  these  things,  as  related  in  the  Primitive 
History,  is  to  make  plain  the  affinity  existing  between  tbe  opinions 
of  those  southern  tribes  whose  origin  I have  revealed,  and  the  modi- 
fications of  the  same  opinions  as  existing  among  the  Jews  and  Egyp- 
tians. Of  this  the  Primitive  Plistory  itself  affords  a confirmation. 

§ 11G.  While  Josiah  reigned,  the  law  of  Moses  is  said  to  have 
been  discovered,  and  its  rules  adopted  and  applied  to  the  nation  over 
which  Josiah  was  king.  Hilkiah  and  others  were  engaged  in  estab- 
lishing and  promulgating  the  law  of  Moses.*  In  the  books  of  Kings, 
mention  is  frequently  made  of  tbe  heathen  worship  and  abominations 
that  prevailed,  and  also  concerning  the  worship  of  the  sun.  The 
Pleiades  (mentioned  in  the  book  of  Job)  were  also  in  those  days  the 
object  of  worship  and  adoration.  For  a classification  and  concise 
application  of  numbers,  as  anciently  suggested  by  the  movements  of 
* See  Second  Kings  xxii.  8,  10,  et  seq. ; also  chap,  xxiii.  4,  5. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


455 


the  heavens,  it  would  be  well  to  consult  a work  published  by  Scali- 
ger,  a writer  who  discovered  the  J Lilian  period. 

All  these  sects  were  existing,  and  consequently  their  innumerable 
correspondences  and  allegorical  representations,  before  Homer  or  any 
other  Grecian  poet  imbodied  any  of  their  thoughts  in  verse.  But 
Hesiod,  who  was  a contemporary  of  Homer,  conveyed  many  of  those 
demonic  personages  to  the  prolific  imagination  of  Homer,  and  hence 
the  demonology  and  allegory  so  much  interspersed  throughout  the 
writings  of  that  poet.  I would  also  refer  to  the  account  given  by 
Josephus  concerning  Solomon’s  temple  and  the  magnificence  of  its 
exterior  and  interior.  So  it  is  clear  to  a demonstration,  that  very 
many  of  the  things  related  in  the  books  that  have  been  examined, 
must  have  been  derived  from  oriental  tradition  and  demonology, 
which,  at  the  time  those  books  were  written,  formed  the  foundation 
and  theology  of  many  sects,  and  were  consequently  alluded  to  by 
Moses,  Joshua,  Solomon,  Hezekiah,  Josiah,  and  others. 

In  confirmation  of  what  has  been  said  upon  this  subject,  I would 
refer  explorers  of  the  labyrinths  of  antiquity  to  the  images  and  hiero- 
glyphics of  Egypt,  and  also  to  their  primitive  records,  which  descend 
into  the  interior  of  time  many  ages  antecedent  to  the  chronology  of 
the  Primitive  History.  I would  also  refer  to  the  traditions  and  wri- 
tings of  the  Chinese,  and  to  their  records,  which  extend  in  an  un- 
broken manner  thirty-four  thousand  years  beyond  the  chronology  of 
the  Bible.  I would  also  recommend  a close  observation  of  the  mat- 
ter and  style  of  the  writings  of  the  Old  Testament,  which  will  be  found 
to  exhibit  undeniable  indications  of  figurative  and  allegorical  concep- 
tion, which  fact  accounts  for  the  many  indefinite  and  ambiguous  ex 
pressions  which  occur  among  the  writings  of  those  books. 

It  is  also  clear,  from  various  external  evidences  which  all  point  to 
the  same  conclusion,  that  the  accounts  contained  in  those  books  are 
generally  founded  upon  actual  historical  facts,  notwithstanding  the 
vast  amount  of  skepticism  which  has  arisen  from  the  ambiguous  style 
in  which  these  books  are  written.  But  it  is  no  wonder  that  skepti- 
cism has  existed  in  reference  to  such  a combination  of  impossibilities 
as  a literal  view  of  these  writings  would  present.  And  it  would  be 
equally  natural  to  expect  that  an  immense  amount  of  superstition  and 
theological  speculation  would  grow  out  of  a superficial  view  of  such 
marvellous  revelation.  The  skepticism  has  arisen  because  some 
minds  are  superiorly  enlightened,  and  can  not  repose  confidence  in  that 
which  neither  addresses  their  judgment  nor  their  affections.  And  by 


456 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


being  led  to  discard  these  teachings,  they  have  also  become  incredu- 
lous concerning  the  great  truth  of  immortality.  This  is  unwarrantable  : 
and  that  mind  which,  from  such  premises,  rushes  to  such  a conclu- 
sion, is  as  much  devoid  of  reason  as  he  who  believes  in  immortality 
merely  because  it  was  taught  by  his  forefathers.  And  minds  of  the 
latter  class  have  been  led  to  believe  in  the  divinity  and  sacredness  of 
every  word  recorded  in  those  ancient  writings  which  now  compose 
the  Bible.  And  they  believe  this  not  from  reason  or  understanding , 
but  from  early  education  and  from  the  sacredness  which  antiquity  has 
thrown  around  these  records.  More  believe  in  the  divine  origin  of 
these  writings  from  education,  than  do  for  any  other  reason  ; and 
more  thus  believe  who  can  not  comprehend  the  contents  of  a single 
chapter,  than  there  are  believers  of  the  same  things  among  those  who 
are  superficially  enlightened.  Such  implicitly  believe  in  all  the  say- 
ings of  this  book  and  in  the  many  doctrines  which  it  appears  to  them 
to  teach,  together  with  the  flattering  scenes  of  immortality  which  they 
imagine  to  be  therein  set  forth,  without  being  competent  to  give  a 
substantial  reason  for  their  hope.  So  persons  of  one  class  have  rea- 
soned improperly  and  arrived  at  illegitimate  conclusions,  and  have 
no  hope  for  which  to  give  a reason  ; while  others  have  not  reasoned 
at  all,  but  implicitly  receive  the  whole,  which  is  beyond  the  capacity 
of  the  mental  powers  to  digest,  and  hence  have  no  reason  whereon 
•may  be  founded  a hope.  I would,  then,  refer  to  the  Key,  for  a 
proper  exposition  of  the  true  course  of  reasoning  ; and  the  correct- 
ness of  this  may  be  perceived  by  observing  the  superiority  of  its  ten- 
dency and  application. 

When  passages  occur  in  the  Old  Testament  which  make  the  Lord 
say  one  thing  and  do  another  ; when,  as  in  the  case  of  Saul,  an  evil 
spirit  is  represented  as  proceeding  from  the  Divine  Mind  , and  when 
many  expressions  of  like  character  occur,  some  of  which  are  found 
in  Jeremiah,  it  is  well  to  know  that  these  have  their  explanation  in 
the  fact  that  the  different  tribes  and  nations  originally  supposed  that 
the  evolution  of  thoughts  proceeded  from  an  influx  of  the  spirit 
of  the  Lord.  Therefore  they  would  in  their  writings  use  the  ex- 
pressions, “ The  Lord  spake”  — “ The  Lord  directed,”  &c.,  to  sig- 
nify this  opinion,  and  would  always  write  as  if  they  actually  believed 
in  this  manner  of  receiving  instruction. 

When  Saul  desired  the  presence  of  the  vviteb.  of  Endor,  he  merely 
desired  to  have  an  experiment  performed  that  would  surprise  and 
terrify  those  who  would  hear  of,  or  witness,  the  occurrence.  It  U 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


457 


clear  to  every  reflecting  mind,  that  neither  Samuel  nor  any  other 
physical  organization,  after  it  had  given  forth  its  interior  moving  prin- 
ciple or  spiritual  essence  to  associate  with  higher  spheres,  could  ac- 
tually experience  a resurrection,  with  a return  of  those  vital  powers 
and  mental  faculties  that  before  characterized  the  organization.  It 
may  be  inquired,  “How  does  any  one  know,  from  his  limited  ac- 
quaintance with  natural  laws,  that  such  an  occurrence  never  took 
place  ?”  In  answer  to  this,  I would  remark  that  the  laws  of  Nature 
and  the  Universe  are  the  mediums  by  which  designs  are  accom- 
plished— and  that  each  law  which  exists  at  the  present  time,  must 
have  always  existed  : for  otherwise  the  unity  of  plans  and  designs 
would  not  have  been  complete.  Therefore,  if  such  an  event  ever 
did  occur,  it  must  have  been  designed , and  therefore  was  a result  of 
an  eternal  law.  And  if  that  law  in  that  instance  accomplished  an 
eternal  design,  other  instances  of  like  nature  would  have  subsequently 
been  numerous,  according  as  all  things  in  Nature  gradually  assumed 
higher  degrees  of  refinement.  And  that  law  which  was  impregnated 
with  any  ultimate  intention  of  this  kind,  would  produce  unceasing 
developments  of  like  nature,  as  the  consequent  and  inevitable  result. 

I have  presented  these  reflections  with  the  design  that  they  should 
serve  not  only  as  a commentary  upon  the  things  spoken  of,  hut  as  an 
interpretation  of  all  things  that  may  follow  in  the  course  of  my  re- 
marks in  connexion  with  these  writings  and  with  the  speculations  of 
theologians. 

This  account  of  Saul,  Samuel,  and  the  witch  of  Endor,  was  de- 
rived from  an  occurrence  which  is  distinctly  presented  to  my  mind, 
but  which  it  would  be  useless  to  explain.  But  I will  say,  by  per- 
mission of  my  impressions,  that  the  account  of  the  transformation  of 
sand  in  Egypt  into  a certain  insect  which  infested  the  whole  nation, 
and  of  many  other  things  as  being  accomplished  by  the  intervention 
of  the  Divine  Power,  should  be  attributed  only  to  the  style  of  expres- 
sion and  to  the  prevailing  opinions  of  the  nations  and  writers  whose 
thoughts  are  communicated  in  the  Primitive  History. 

§ 117.  I now  proceed  to  a consideration  of  the  book  succeeding 
Job,  entitled  “ The  Psalms  of  David.” 

It  appears  that  soon  after  the  decline  of  King  Saul,  David  be- 
came the  chosen  of  the  people,  and  was  generally  beloved.  David 
possessed  many  superior  social  and  moral  qualifications.  He  was 
generally  inclined  to  ideal  and  sublime  thoughts,  which  proceeded 


458 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


from  his  high  moral  and  spiritual  goodness,  and  social  affection  and 
friendship.  His  meditations  were  entirely  a reflux  of  his  moral  sus- 
ceptibilities. He  possessed  much  of  the  spirit  of  wisdom  and  under- 
standing. His  interior  faculties  were  very  much  expanded,  and  he 
was  thus  rendered  a suitable  receptacle  of  pure  sentiment  and  pro- 
phetical knowledge.  He  loved  the  silent  and  undisturbed  groves, 
wherein  he  could  retire  and  commune  with  those  more  interior  and 
truthful  associations  of  thought  and  sentiment  which  breathed  praise 
to  the  Divine  Intelligence.  He  esteemed  it  a great  privilege  to  be 
alone,  and  at  such  times  he  would  compose  and  address  his  psalms 
of  praise  and  thanksgiving  to  the  Divine  Mind.  These  psalms  were 
wafted  upon  the  serene  air  of  the  shady  forest  by  his  selected  and 
favorite  musicians.  He  saw  that  the  heavens  proclaimed  the  wisdom 
of  the  Lord,  and  that  day  unto  day  showed  forth  his  handy-works. 
He  loved  man,  and  adored  and  worshipped  Nature,  the  Universe, 
and  the  Creator.  He  was  a good  man,  and  was  an  exemplifier  of 
good  and  proper  deeds.  His  goodness  imparts  instruction,  and  is 
worthy  of  imitation. 

Thus  I am  impressed  to  speak  of  David,  because  he  uttered 
many  truthful  prophecies  concerning  the  prosperity  of  Zion,  and  tlfe 
ushering  into  the  world  of  a great  Reformer,  who  would  possess 
combined  all  the  physical  and  spiritual  perfections  contained  in  this 
rudimental  sphere. 

I would  direct  the  reader’s  attention  to  a prophecy  contained  in 
the  second  psalm,  seventh,  eighth,  and  ninth  verses.  It  can  be 
proved  to  an  absolute  demonstration,  that  a prophecy  like  unto  this, 
concerning  the  birth,  preaching,  and  spiritual  kingdom  of  Jesus,  was 
made  before  the  chronological  period  of  creation  as  set  forth  in  the 
book  of  Genesis,  and  consequently  more  than  four  thousand  years 
before  Jesus  was  born.  But  before  I speak  further  of  David’s 
prophecies  concerning  this  exalted  personage,  I will  say  that  many 
portions  of  the  Psalms  are  very  imperfect,  irrelevant,  and  unprofita- 
ble ; and  that  the  present  book  of  Psalms  contains  but  a very  small 
portion  of  those  Orphic  hymns  that  were  composed  by  David.  The 
Egyptian  Orphic  praises  are  all  similar  to  those  of  David,  but  are 
not  so  grand.  And  that  David  composed  much  poetry  and  many 
Orphic  praises,  can  be  clearly  proved  by  research  among  primitive 
manuscripts.  Many  of  David’s  sayings  were  not  procured  by  the 
Jews  : and  some  that  were,  were  voted  uncanonical,  and  committed 
to  the  flames. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


459 


There  are  some  things  related  in  the  books  of  Kings  and  Chroni- 
cles concerning  the  life,  government,  and  deeds  of  David,  which  are 
inconsistent  with  the  superior  goodness  that  is  related  of  him  in  other 
places.  He  was  said  to  be  a type  of  the  heart  of  the  Deity,  and  yet 
the  purity  of  his  character  is  destroyed  in  the  minds  of  many  readers 
by  some  deeds  which  are  ascribed  to  him.  He  was  at  times  unfortu- 
nately situated ; and  this  fact  led  to  a development  of  some  gross  sensu- 
alities that  would  not  have  occurred  under  superior  circumstances. 

David  alludes  more  definitely  to  the  birth  and  kingdom  of  Christ 
than  any  previous  writer  in  the  Old  Testament,  and  therefore  he  de- 
mands more  attention  ; for  his  allusion  is  distinct  and  obvious,  and  it 
could  not  have  had  reference  to  any  king  who  arose  subsequently  in 
Israel.  When  David,  in  the  seventh  verse  of  the  second  psalm, 
declared  the  decree,  he  himself  (in  language  supposed  to  be  uttered 
by  the  Divine  Mind)  impersonates  the  Son  that  was  to  be  born.  And 
he  goes  on  to  state  that  his  kingdom  would  comprehend  the  heathen, 
who  would  come  into  his  possession,  and  that  he  would  inherit  the 
uttermost  parts  of  the  earth.  He  relates  this  in  an  ambiguous  man- 
ner, but  the  language  is  sufficiently  distinct  to  apply  only  to  the  spir- 
itual kingdom  of  Jesus,  which  was  peace  and  righteousness.  David 
also  alludes  to  this  period  in  subsequent  chapters,  although  with  less 
distinctness  ; yet  his  allusions  afford  decided  evidence  of  his  own 
spiritual  love  and  wisdom. 

David  was  a man  given  to  devout  meditation,  and  possessed  the 
most  refined  and  exquisite  feeling,  affection,  and  friendship.  His 
meditations  in  the  last  three  chapters  of  the  Psalms  are  concerning 
the  praise  that  should  ascend  from  every  heart  to  Him  who  rules  with 
a Divine  majesty,  the  Universe.  He  calls  upon  all  things  to  praise 
the  Lord.  He  considered  the  heavens  as  presenting  evidence  of 
His  great  goodness  and  everlasting  endurance.  He  contemplated 
the  sun  as  displaying  His  wonderful  works  to  the  children  of  men. 
He  would  sing  of  the  silvery  moon  ; for  it  was  to  his  mind  evidence 
of  the  greatness  and  indulgence  of  the  Creator.  The  stars  of  the 
firmament,  and  all  visible  objects,  proclaimed  to  his  mind  that  the 
Lord  was  good  to  all,  and  that  his  tender  mercies  were  over  all  his 
works.  In  his  songs  of  praise  and  adoration,  he  would  also  sing 
concerning  the  temple  and  the  spiritual  Zion.  He  calls  emphatically 
upon  all  to  praise  the  Lord,  because  He  is  abundantly  righteous,  and 
his  mercy  endureth  for  ever  ; and  he  closes  by  exclaiming  with  the 
deepest  emotion,  “ Praise  ye  the  Lord  !” 


460 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


When  David  spoke  concerning  the  mercy  of  the  Lord  enduring 
for  ever,  it  was  from  an  unavoidable  conviction  that  rested  upon  his 
mind  from  his  serious  and  truthful  contemplation  of  Nature  around 
him.  He,  like  others,  had  been  led  to  suppose  that  the  apparent 
evil  existing  in  the  world  had  been  disseminated  by  an  evil  spirit  pro- 
ceeding from  the  Divine  Mind  — the  result  of  an  obedience  to  which 
would  banish  the  transgressor  from  His  presence  for  ever.  But  he 
was  constrained  to  acknowledge,  from  the  ten  thousand  voices  arising 
from  every  department  of  Nature,  that  this  opinion  could  not  be  en- 
tirely true  : so  he  frequently  proclaimed  with  great  fervency  that  “ the 
mercy  of  the  Lord  endureth  for  ever.” 

The  book  of  Psalms  contains  many  imperfections ; but  in  general 
it  is  of  useful  application.  There  is  no  importance  to  be  attached 
to  it  beyond  the  truthful  prophetic  instructions  it  contains,  its  superior 
expressions  of  thanksgiving  and  praise,  and  its  well-directed  and  use- 
ful contemplations.  Viewed  in  this  light,  the  book  of  Psalms  may 
be  read  with  profit.  But  it  is  a book  void  of  all  general  principles, 
such  as  are  necessary  to  create  a confidence  in  the  mind  of  man  in 
the  unchangeableness  of  Nature,  of  her  laws,  and  of  their  Creator. 

§ 118.  Following  the  book  of  Psalms,  are  the  very  useful  and 
wise  Proverbs  of  Solomon.  This  writer  had  experience  of  the 
most  diversified  and  instructive  nature,  reflection  upon  which  created 
knowledge  and  rendered  him  wise.  He  was  a man  of  superior  abili- 
ties, having  a perfect  organization,  which  was  characterized  by  health 
and  physical  energy.  He  did  not  possess  those  refined  and  elevated 
qualities,  that  characterized  his  father  David,  to  any  very  high  de- 
gree. But  some  of  his  faculties  were  greatly  unfolded,  which  gave, 
him  great  power  of  discernment,  and  disposed  him  to  meditation. 
His  social  and  natural  affections  were  fully  unfolded  and  exercised. 
This  fact,  together  with  his  peculiar  temperament,  rendered  him  sus- 
ceptible to  all  influences  that  arose  from  his  peculiar  and  in  a meas- 
ure vitiating  situation.  He  had  great  powers  of  construction,  which 
enabled  him  to  plan  and  direct  the  building  of  the  temple;  and  also 
great  highmindedness,  which  was  displayed  in  the  exceeding  grandeur, 
perfectness,  and  magnificence,  which  characterized  the  temple,  from 
the  very  base  to  the  dome,  and  rendered  it  a work  of  superior  design 
and  architecture. 

It  was  necessary  for  him  to  experience  all  that  he  did,  in  order  to 
unfold  that  wisdom  and  understanding  which  he  possessed  beyond 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


461 


any  other  king  existing  either  before  or  since  he  lived.  Taking  into 
consideration,  therefore,  the  particular  temperament  and  organization 
of  Solomon  — his  elevated  and  vitiating  situation,  the  physical  influ- 
ences with  which  he  was  surrounded,  and  the  vast  experience  which 
he  possessed  — he  should  be  considered  truly  an  enlightened  man 
in  social  and  general  affairs,  the  study  of  which  is  profitable  to  all 
men. 

His  proverbs  are  concerning  the  attainment  of  wisdom,  and  the 
advantages  of  sobriety,  both  in  early  and  advanced  life.  He  gives 
much  proper  and  truthful  advice,  the  gqod  results  of  which  will  be 
experienced,  but  only  when  the  world  discards  all  arbitrary  and  su- 
perficial government,  and  becomes  reorganized  upon  the  principles 
governing  Nature  and  mankind  with  an  unerring  government. 

It  is  scarcely  possible  for  any  one  to  obtain  the  same  wisdom  and 
understanding  that  Solomon  possessed  ; because  that  would  require 
the  same  situation,  influences,  and  physical  constitution,  that  sur- 
rounded and  characterized  him.  All  men  are  differently  constituted, 
and  their  external  experiences  are  exceedingly  dissimilar;  but  all  ex- 
perience the  promptings  of  their  internal  principle  alike,  and  all  would 
cheerfully  obey  its  teachings  if  it  were  possible.  Ask  not,  then,  why 
all  are  not  righteous,  but  search  for  the  reason  among  the  thousands 
of  vitiating  and  wretched  situations  occupied  by  the  various  classes 
of  the  human  family.  In  order  to  remove  these  destructive  influ- 
ences with  their  unholy  effects,  learn  from  Solomon  to  be  wise  ; for 
thus  alone  the  world  may  become  sensible  of  the  causes  that  are 
productive  of  so  many  direful  and  unrighteous  results. 

In  the  book  of  Proverbs  there  are  one  or  two  very  slight  intima- 
tions concerning  the  time  when  wisdom  and  goodness  shall  become 
universal ; but  this  is  spoken  of  in  an  ambiguous  and  indefinite  man- 
ner, and  therefore  no  comment  or  application  is  required. 

The  book  of  Proverbs  is  a concise  embodiment  of  the  results  of 
the  experience  of  Solomon  ; and  being  a compendium  of  practical 
thoughts  and  teachings,  it  is  useful  to  be^read  as  such,  and  its  teach- 
ings should  be  applied  to  the  human  race.  Further  than  this,  I dis- 
cover no  use  to  be  derived  from  this  book.  And  that  this  is  its  in- 
tention is  made  evident  from  its  style  of  expression,  from  the  nature 
of  its  contents,  and  from  its  position  among  the  books  of  the  Old 
Testament. 

Then  follows  Ecclesiastes,  or  the  Preacher.  This  book 
displays  a vast  amount  of  erudition  and  absolute  knowledge.  It  ap- 


4G2 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


pears  to  be  a continuation  of  the  book  of  Proverbs.  It  contains  mtfich 
important  and  valuable  instruction,  and  may  be  read  with  profit  and 
pleasure  ; and  the  scraps  of  truthful  expression  which  it  contains  are 
worthy  of  serious  consideration.  But  I observe  nothing  in  this  book 
especially  applicable  to  the  ushering-in  of  the  great  Reformer,  or  as 
relating  to  his  spiritual  teachings  or  kingdom.  The  use,  then,  of  this 
book,  consists  in  some  valuable  instructions  and  admonitions  that  will 
be  fulfilled  when  society  is  reformed. 

The  book  following  this  consists  of  poetical  meditations  similar  to 
those  contained  in  the  book  of  Psalms,  with  the  exception  of  their 
imperfectness  and  sensual  character.  The  Songs  of  Solomon  are 
supposed  to  have  some  slight  reference  to  the  beauty  and  harmony 
that  would  result  from  the  principles  of  Jesus  and  from  the  establish- 
ment of  his  spiritual  kingdom.  I do  not,  however,  discover  any 
such  Reference  ; for  Solomon  possessed  not  the  spirit  of  prophecy. 
There  are  many  ambiguous  and  inflated  expressions  contained  in 
this  book,  which  neither  involve  any  useful  figure,  nor  any  principle 
of  truth  or  morality.  Some  of  the  songs  are  well  composed,  parta- 
king greatly  of  the  Orphic  style  of  David,  and  also  displaying  the 
spirit  of  wisdom.  The  book,  however,  is  useless,  for  it  is  void  of 
any  exalted  principles  which  can  instruct  the  race  and  lead  them  to 
a more  perfect  degree  of  social  unity  and  mental  refinement.  There- 
fore the  Songs  of  Solomon  might  have  shared  the  fate  that  many 
kindred  books  did,  without  being  the  least  loss  to  the  world. 

§ 119.  Following  these  is  the  book  of  Isaiah.  I experience  an 
influx  of  higher  veneration  for  this  writer,  and  am  attracted  to  him 
more  strongly  than  to  any  other  whom  I have  examined.  I feel 
constrained  to  speak  of  him  with  the  highest  respect.  He  possessed 
naturally  a good  and  well-constituted  organization.  His  tempera- 
ment was  warm,  and  he  possessed  affectionate  social  feelings  ; and 
all  bis  moral  and  intellectual  faculties  were  also  highly  developed. 
His  endowments  were  of  such  a character  as  to  render  him  a fit  re- 
ceptacle of  the  spirit  of  prophecy.  His  mind  was  so  constituted  that 
be  was  not  only  able  to  receive  knowledge  of,  but  to  associate  with,  the 
principles  of  the  Divine  Mind  existing  in  Nature,  which  are  the  agents 
and  mediums  through  which  eternal  Design  is  accomplished.  By 
being  thus  spiritually  qualified,  he  could  and  did  prophesy  that  which 
was  fulfilled  only  when  the  Messiah  came  to  breathe  purity,  social  unity, 
and  consequent  righteousness.  Isaiah  spoke  not  concerning  the  day 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


463 


and  hour  of,  or  the  circumstances  that  would  he  connected  with,  the 
birth  and  the  establishment  of  the  spiritual  reign  of  this  noble  per- 
sonage. He  spoke  not  concerning  any  contingent,  external,  and 
circumstantial  events,  that  would  serve  as  an  indication  of  this  occur- 
rence ; because  it  would  have  been  impossible  for  him  or  any  other 
human  being  to  speak  with  certainty  concerning  these.  But  he  could 
speak  with  the  utmost  confidence  concerning  any  event  that  would 
result  from  the  manifestations  of  Divine  intention  respecting  the  na- 
ture of  which  he  became  enlightened. 

He,  then,  like  all  other  prophets,  was  fitted  for  the  use  for  which 
he  was  intended.  It  was  not  a merit  in  him  or  in  any  other  person 
to  be  at  times  in  possession  of  the  spirit  of  prophecy,  inasmuch 
as  an  influx  of  Divine  intention  is  a result  of  a superior  organization, 
not  rendered  so  by  the  person  himself,  but  by  the  superior  influ- 
ences, both  internal  and  external,  that  have  governed  and  developed 
him  from  birth.  Considering  the  inseparable  connexion  which  is 
sustained  between  the  Universe  and  the  Deity,  the  whole  forming 
one  grand  System,  it  is  impossible  for  any  rational  mind  to  conceive 
of  such  a thing  as  free  will,”  or  independent  volition.  For  if  such 
a thing  existed,  then  would  the  Universe  he  disunited,  and  the  Di- 
vine Mind  would  be  incapable  of  communicating  life  and  animation 
to  its  various  recesses  and  labyrinths.  The  chain  of  cause  and  ef- 
fect, and  the  bond  of  unity,  harmony,  and  reciprocation,  would  be 
broken,  and  the  Universe  would  be  no  longer  an  organized  system 
of  beauty  and  grandeur,  but  an  incomprehensible  ocean  of  chaos  and 
confusion. 

The  Universe  must  be  animated  by  a Living  Spirit,  to  form, 
as  a Whole,  One  Grand  Man.  That  Spirit  is  the  Cause  of  its 
present  organized  form,  and  is  the  Disseminator  of  motion,  life,  sen- 
sation, and  intelligence,  throughout  all  the  ramifications  of  this  one 
Grand  Man.  That  Spirit  is  the  Spirit  of  Truth,  of  Love  and 
Wisdom,  and  of  inexpressible  Knowledge  ; and  this  is  the  Great 
Positive  Mind.  Then,  again,  this  interior  Spirit  must  have  a 
Form,  through  which  its  attributes  may  be  developed,  in  order  that 
it  may  be  called  a perfect  Organization  ; and  that  Form  is  the  ex- 
panded Universe.  Therefore,  there  are  only  two  Principles  exist- 
ing : one  the  Body,  the  other  the  Soul  ; one  the  Divine  Positive 
Mind,  the  other  the  Univerccelum.  Man  is  a part  of  this  great 
Body  of  the  Divine  Mind.  He  is  a gland,  or  minute  organ,  which 


464 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


performs  specific  functions,  and  receives  life  and  animation  from  the 
interior,  moving,  Divine  Principle. 

Here,  then,  is  the  result  of  these  considerations  : that  Man  is  an 
organ  produced  and  developed  by  a law  pervading  the  whole  organi- 
zation of  the  Divine  Mind,  which  law  will  therefore  continue  to  gov- 
ern him  throughout  eternity.  And  if  it  were  possible  to  conceive  of 
a gland  or  any  organ  of  tbe  human  form  as  existing  independently  of 
other  parts,  then  it  would  be  possible  to  conceive  of  the  propriety  of 
the  term  independence  as  applied  to  man,  viewing  him  in  connexion 
with  the  vast  Organization  of  the  Divine  Mind.  If  it  can  be  proved 
that  there  are  organs  in  the  human  form  not  dependent  on  the  form 
for  motion,  life,  or  existence,  then  it  may  be  proved  that  man  is  an 
independent  being,  and  exercises  what  has  been  termed  “free  will.” 
But  if  the  first  can  not  be  proved,  then  the  conclusion  is  irresistible 
that  the  Divine  Mind  has  created  the  universal  organization  of  His 
Own  Essence,  and  instituted  laws  to  govern  the  same,  with  the  posi- 
tive design  that  every  particle  should  have  a dependence  upon  the 
whole,  that  all  particles  should  sustain  reciprocal  relations,  and  that 
the  whole  should  thus  form  one  united,  harmonious  System.  If 
this  conclusion  is  denied,  it  would  be  well  for  the  one  who  denies  it 
to  prove  the  existence  of  an- actual  independence  in  any  part  of  the 
human  form.  When  this  is  done,  the  great  question  may  be  consid- 
ered as  everlastingly  decided  respecting  the  doctrines  of  indefinite 
free  will  and  of  absolute  necessity. 

The  many  high  and  noble  qualities  of  which  Isaiah  was  in  posses- 
sion rendered  his  mind  suitable  for  tbe  influx  of  prophetic  knowl- 
edge, which  he  proclaimed  with  great  perspicuity  to  the  world.  But 
this  was  not  a merit  of  his,  but  a natural  consequence  of  tbe  relations 
which  he  sustained  to  those  laws  which  he  felt  impressed  would  de- 
velop the  event  he  was  constrained  to  prophesy.  I would  that  all 
ideas  of  merit  were  for  ever  dissipated  from  the  human  mind,  and  that 
the  mind  might  become  rationalized  on  this  subject.  Then  much 
knowledge  concerning  the  Laws  of  Nature,  and  the  Designs  of  the 
Divine  Mind,  would  be  unfolded  ; and  this  would  elevate  the  gen- 
eral mind,  and  produce  a concert  in  the  human  family  sanctified  by 
Nature  as  being  in  accordance  with  her  immutable  laws. 

§ 120.  Isaiah  being  superiorly  enlightened,  was  enabled  to  speak 
with  prophetic  assurance  concerning  the  beauties  that  will  arise  from 
a social  and  spiritual  elevation  of  the  race  as  determined  by  the  tri- 


nature’s  divine  revelations.  465 

umph  of  moral  and  natural  principles.  He  was  convinced,  from  his 
prophetical  meditations,  that  the  world  of  mankind  would  undergo 
such  a change,  as  that  unity,  peace,  and  righteousness,  would  spread 
over  the  whole  earth.  His  thoughts  were  not  circumscribed  by  any 
sectarian  dogma,  or  any  outward  form  of  worship,  but  were  as  ex- 
pansive as  the  wide-spread  fields  of  Nature  and  the  unfolded  heavens. 
He  spoke  concerning  the  mountain  of  the  house  of  the  Lord,  and  the 
holy  magnificence  that  will  characterize  the  great  temple  of  Mankind, 
after  goodness  and  virtue  shall  have  become  fully  developed.  He 
saw  that  the  germ  of  righteousness  was  deposited  in  Nature,  and  ex- 
isted also  in  Man.  He  saw  that  this  would  unfold  its  divine  qualities 
into  roots,  and  that  these,  again,  would  produce  a body,  whieh  would 
ascend  and  put  forth  branches  throughout  the  world  — which,  again, 
would  bud  and  blossom  on  the  mount  of  the  Lord,  on  the  hill  of 
Zion.  Thus  would  be  unfolded  the  beauty  of  the  tree  of  righteous- 
ness whose  everlasting  branches  would  ascend  through  all  the  celes- 
tial spheres,  with  continually-increasing  beauty,  until  they  became 
immersed  into  the  celestial  Fount  wherein  dwell  unbounded  Love 
and  Wisdom. 

He  saw  that  one  would  come  who  would  “judge  among  many  na- 
tions,” and  who  would  deposite  a germ  whose  growth  would  pro- 
duce a social  and  moral  resurrection  of  all  the  world  to  harmony  and 
righteousness.  He  saw  that  one  would  come  who  would  “ rebuke 
many  people,”  unfolding  the  proper  principles  that  belong  to  the  na- 
ture of  man,  on  the  full  accomplishment  of  which,  error  and  false  in- 
struction would  be  for  ever  annihilated.  He  saw  that  this  would 
cause  all  nations  to  “beat  their  swords  into  ploughshares,  and  their 
spears  into  pruning-hooks  ;”  and  that  then  would  exist  peace  on  earth 
and  universal  industry.  He  saw  that  when  this  would  be  accom- 
plished, “ nation  would  not  again  rise  up  against  nation,  and  that  they 
would  learn  war  no  more.”  He  saw  that  error  and  ignorance,  which 
are  the  causes  of  the  various  systems  that  exist,  would  be  banished 
from  the  earth,  and  that  all  sectarian  and  local  hostility  would  be  an- 
nihilated. He  saw  that  when  this  unity  of  intention  and  action  be- 
came universal,  “ the  wilderness  and  the  solitary  places  would  be 
made  glad,  and  that  the  deserts  would  be  made  to  blossom  as  the 
rose.”  He  saw  that  the  world  would  be  no  longer  dreary  and  un- 
congenial from  the  prevalence  of  sectarian  artificiality,  but  that  it 
would  be  converted  into  an  Eden  whose  fragrance  -would  diffuse  uni- 
versal happiness.  He  saw  that  this  would  be  accomplished  as  an  in- 

30 


46G 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


evitable  result  of  the  moral  and  spiritual  teachings  of  those  principles 
which  have  existed  in  Nature  ever  since  the  Universe  had  a being-. 
He  saw  that  social  unity  would  unfold  spiritual  righteousness,  which 
would  become  as  a great  mountain,  a sanctuary  in  which  the  whole 
world  might  congregate,  and  where  the  true  worshipper  might  wor- 
ship the  Divine  Mind  in  spirit  and  in  truth.  He  saw  that  the  time 
would  come  when  neither  Jerusalem  nor  any  other  city  nor  temple 
wherein  sectarian  teachings  are  promulgated,  would  he  the  sanctuary 
of  the  true  worshipper,  but  that  his  sanctuary  would  he  the  expanded 
earth  and  the  unfolded  heavens.  He  saw  that  man  would  worship 
because  every  flower  would  invite;  and  saw  that  every  countenance 
would  he  illuminated  with  brotherly  kindness;  such  as  would  cause 
the  aspiring  elements  of  the  soul  to  ascend  to  that  Divine  Spirit  who 
seeketh  such  to  worship  him.  He  saw  that  Nature  would  sanction 
the  then-existing  social  government  and  spiritual  condition  of  the 
world,  and  that  in  the  excellency  of  her  superior  beauties  all  men 
would  be  united  and  happy. 

Isaiah  spoke  kindly  of  the  kings  and  kingdoms  that  then  existed, 
and  of  those  that  would  exist  upon  the  earth,  and  meanwhile  admon- 
ished them  to  be  wise,  with  all  gentleness,  meekness,  and  humilia- 
tion. For  he  saw  that  one  would  come  who  would  “ neither  fail  nor 
be  discouraged,”  but  would  “ exercise  judgment  among  the  nations, 
and  that  the  isles  would  wait  for  the  fulfilment  of  this  law.”  He  saw 
that  this  great  moral  Reformer  would  “see  the  travail  of  his  soul,” 
that  is,  the  development  of  his  social  and  spiritual  government,  and 
“ would  he  satisfied.”  And  he  saw  that  the  time  would  come  when 
unto  these  divine  principles  “ every  knee  should  how,  and  every  tongue 
confess  that  in  them  they  had  righteousness  and  strength.” 

Isaiah  exerted  his  influence  to  console  kings,  as  many  nations  then 
anticipated  invasion  and  destruction.  He  was  considered  by  all  as 
a general  consoler,  and  would  endeavor  to  convince  their  minds  by 
external  representations,  which,  though  having  no  connexion  with 
the  thing  prophesied,  satisfied  them  of  the  truthfulness  of  his  consola- 
tory assurances.  All  such  signs  were  considered  by  Isaiah  merely 
as  external  representations,  but  not  as  confirmations  of  the  occur- 
rence foretold.  But  being  in  possession  of  the  spirit  of  prophecy, 
because  of  the  influx  of  divine  principles,  he  knew  that  the  many 
occurrences  of  which  he  prophesied  would  inevitably  be  accom- 
plished. He  foresaw  the  birth,  the  life,  and  the  preachings  of  Christ, 
and  the  ultimate  triumph  of  the  principles  which  he  would  inculcate, 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


467 


but  was  unable  to  speak  of  time,  or  any  incident  or  circumstance  that 
would  be  connected  with  the  occurrence  of  the  things  which  he  ab- 
solutely foresaw. 

§ 121.  Highly  enlightened  indeed  must  have  been  that  mind  which 
amid  all  the  artificialities  of  the  world,  and  all  the  sectarian  hostility 
and  local  and  national  wretchedness  which  then  prevailed,  could  see 
that  all  this  would  be  destroyed  to  be  known  no  more  for  ever,  and 
that  then  the  earth  and  the  Universe  would  be  the  great  worshipping 
Temple,  in  which  there  would  be  but  one  Eternal  Preacher  and  Ad- 
monisher,  and  He  — the  Divine  Mind  ! He  saw  that  this  great  and 
unfailing  Shepherd  would  disseminate  through  the  world  by  his  teach- 
ings, the  principles  of  love,  unity,  and  reciprocation  ; and  that  he 
would  make  every  silent  stream  eloquent ; every  flower  inviting  ; ev- 
ery grove  a sanctuary  of  prayer  and  devotion  ; and  the  whole  earth  a 
fold  of  peace  and  safety  in  which  all  might  be  gathered,  and  from 
which  no  one  could  possibly  go  astray. 

Nature  breathes  forth  her  interior  and  immortal  teachings,  because 
she  is  a child  of  the  great  Divinity.  She  communicates  these  teach- 
ings to  man,  who  feels  them  as  the  inexpressible  promptings  of  his 
internal  being,  because  he  is  a child  of  Nature,  even  as  she  is  of  the 
Divine  Mind.  The  spirit  thus  receives  the  truth,  because  of  its  sus- 
ceptibility to  divine  influx.  And  yet  in  the  world  the  spirit  has  be- 
come encompassed  with  every  species  of  gross  materiality,  and  there- 
fore has  not  as  yet  unfolded  its  deep  internal  qualities,  as  it  ultimately 
will  when  new  and  superior  influences  are  unfolded  in  the  social 
wor:d.  Nature,  according  to  the  prophecies  of  Isaiah,  is  performing 
the  ultimate  design  of  the  Divine  Mind  through  her  eternal  laws,  the 
accomplishment  of  which  will  conspicuously  display  the  infinite  per- 
fection of  the  Divine  attributes. 

Thus  I am  constrained  to  speak  of  the  prophecies  of  Isaiah  : for 
they  are  true  and  steadfast ; and  if  the  world  will  receive  wisdom, 
they  will  all  be  accomplished.  Will  you  not,  then,  abandon  all  sec- 
tarian affection  and  impure  highmindedness  ? Will  you  not  seek  to 
become  enlightened,  and  strive  to  banish  all  ignorance,  superstition, 
and  hostility,  from  the  earth?  Do  you  not  desire  to  become  suita- 
ble receptacles  for  the  influx  of  Divine  intention,  so  that  this  may  un- 
fold your  interior  nature,  and  enable  you  to  associate  with  the  knowl- 
edge of  higher  spheres,  and  be  for  ever  happy?  Will  you  not  dis- 
card the  unholy  and  vitiating  influences  that  are  now  connected  with 


468 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


your  social  relations,  so  that  swords  and  spears  rnay  become  imple- 
ments of  industry  by  which  the  physical  requirements  of  mankind  may 
be  supplied,  and  that  the  world  may  thus  be  elevated  to  the  highest 
degree  of  social  unity  and  spiritual  goodness  ? Ye  who  are  defend- 
ers of  the  prophecies,  will  you  not  put  forth  powerful  exertions  to 
verify  their  teachings,  and  thus  prove  your  defence  to  be  pure  and 
genuine,  by  an  actual  manifestation  ? Ye  who  wield  the  pen  of  the- 
ological discussion  and  the  sword  of  sectarian  bigotry  — will  you  not 
forsake  these  useless  instruments,  and  go  forth  into  the  world  and 
preach  the  doctrine  of  the  Divine  Theologian,  and  thus  become  use- 
ful instruments  in  accomplishing  the  designs  of  the  Creator  as  mani- 
fested in  his  unchangeable  laws  ? 

Here,  then,  is  a test : He  who  loves  and  appreciates  the  prophe- 
cies of  Isaiah  (or  any  others  of  similar  nature),  will  no  longer  endeavor 
to  sustain  sectarian  institutions,  or  to  perpetuate  that  state  of  things 
which  is  necessarily  productive  of  disunity,  sorrow,  and  social  wretch- 
edness— but  will  go  forth  and  preach  universal  redemption  from 
mental  poverty,  imbecility,  and  social  disunity,  so  that  the  prophecy 
may  he  fulfilled. 


% 122.  The  book  following  Isaiah  is  Jeremiah’s  prophecies  and 
historical  records.  Jeremiah  was  very  unlike  Isaiah  in  his  physical 
and  mental  organization  ; for  he  did  not  possess  so  much  of  that  spir- 
itual refinement  and  devotedness  to  truth  and  knowledge  as  did  the 
latter.  Yet  his  social  qualities  were  very  active,  and  his  attachments 
were  exceedingly  strong.  His  affections  comprehended  the  whole 
race,  but  his  prophecies  referred  mostly  to  the  events  of  that  era,  and 
contain  but  little  allusion  to  the  great  and  glorious  period  of  which 
Isaiah  so  feelingly  prophesied.  His  moral  powers  were  not  so  un- 
folded as  that  truth  of  a very  elevated  character  might  enter  ; but  his 
powers  of  observation  were  full,  and  adequate  to  the  fulfilment  of  the 
office  which  he  sustained. 

His  time  and  talents  were  chiefly  employed  in  admonishing,  in- 
structing, and  consoling,  the  Jews,  whose  bondage  he  very  correctly 
foretold.  As  may  be  perceived  by  various  expressions  found  in  his 
book,  he  felt  constrained  to  prophesy  of  the  invasion,  subjugation, 
bondage,  and  suffering,  of  the  Jews,  under  the  severe  and  powerful 
administration  of  Nebuchadnezzar.  Jeremiah  lived  until  the  time 
this  awful  occurrence  took  place,  and  was  consequently  involved  in 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


469 


the  trials  and  sufferings  of  the  Jews  incident  thereunto  ; and  this  cir- 
cumstance of  necessity  confined  his  prophetic  visions  mostly  to  then- 
transpiring  occurrences. 

I find  only  one  allusion  in  this  book  to  the  great  Moral  Reformer 
and  his  social  and  spiritual  kingdom,  and  this  is  very  brief.  It  is 
sufficiently  definite,  however,  to  demonstrate  his  prophetic  knowledge 
and  power  of  spiritual  perception.  This  maybe  found  in  the  twenty- 
third  chapter,  fifth  and  sixth  verses.  The  allusion  here  to  the  things 
that  were  to  occur  in  future,  was  not  perceived  by  Matthew,  or  any 
of  the  other  historians  of  Jesus.  There  is  a passage  in  the  thirty- 
first  chapter,  fifteenth  verse,  which  has  been  supposed  to  refer  dis- 
tinctly to  the  coming  and  reign  of  the  Messiah.  Even  Matthew 
quotes  this  in  speaking  of  the  children  said  to  have  been  destroyed 
under  the  reign  of  Herod,  intending  to  convey  the  impression  that 
this  occurrence  was  referred  to  by  the  prophet  Jeremiah  in  the  above 
chapter,  where  he  speaks  of  “ a voice  being  heard,  and  lamentations 
and  weeping  ; Rachel  weeping  for  her  children,  and  could  not  be 
comforted,  because  they  were  not.”  Matthew  must  have  mistaken 
the  allusion  made  by  Jeremiah  to  the  return  of  the  Israelites  to  their 
own  land,  for  the  occurrence  said  to  have  taken  place  under  Herod 
the  king. 

In  this  book  I discover  no  useful  or  expansive  principles,  nor  any 
absolute  allusion  to  the  great  and  glorious  era  now  before  the  world 
in  anxious  anticipation.  Jeremiah,  however,  speaks  very  plainly 
concerning  false  prophets  and  prophetesses.  And  this  may  be  of- 
fered as  a confirmation  of  what  I have  stated  concerning  the  practice 
that  was  general  in  those  days,  of  kings  having  counsellors  who  could 
prophesy,  and  these  having  in  their  charge  persons  who  were  suscep- 
tible to  abnormalness , and  who  would  utter  in  the  name  of  the  Lord 
many  false  and  deceptive  prophecies.  For  a confirmation  of  this, 
read  chap.  xiv.  14-16,  and  xxiii.  25— 35.  These  passages  will  show 
that  Jeremiah  became  very  much  exasperated,  and  felt  constrained  to 
speak  and  prophesy  against  false  and  deceptive  prophets  which  were 
engaged  in  promulgating  and  perpetuating  vice  and  wretchedness. 
Each  would  prophesy  in  the  name  of  the  Lord,  believing  as  they  did 
that  the  Lord  spake  unto  them  by  the  influx  of  his  spirit.  Read  also 
other  portions  of  Jeremiah  : and  then  bear  in  mind  that  many  of  these 
prophecies  became  immersed  into  the  Bible,  and  that  they  are  at  the 
present  time  interspersed  throughout  various  books  of  the  Old  Testa- 
ment. No  one  certainly  will  disbelieve  what  I have  related  concern- 


470 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


ing  matters  of  this  kind,  when  he  can  find  the  same  confirmed  in  the 
book  of  Jeremiah. 

This  book  contains  many  expressions  of  deep  and  heartfelt  sorrow 
for  the  afflictions  imposed  upon  the  Jews  and  oilier  tribes  by  wars, 
persecutions,  famines,  and  captivity.  He  speaks  very  feelingly  con- 
cerning the  destruction  of  Jerusalem,  typifying  its  downfall  by  many 
significant  and  striking  representatives,  which  most  certainly  proves 
bis  prophetical  pre-vision.  He  in  like  manner  prophesied  concern- 
ing the  Babylonish  captivity,  and  also  the  ultimate  restoration  of  the 
Jews  to  liberty  and  their  own  land. 

Many  parts  of  this  book  were  revised  by  subsequent  writers,  and 
the  future  tense  was  exchanged  for  the  past,  which  would  seem  to 
convey  the  impression  that  many  things  in  this  book  were  written 
after  the  Jews  were  restored  to  freedom. 

Nebuchadnezzar,  the  great  king  of  Babylon,  was  to  Jeremiah 
one  of  the  most  uncongenial  and  disagreeable  of  men  on  earth. 
Therefore  he  spoke  indignantly  concerning  him  and  his  kingdom  ; 
while  he  manifested  great  social  affection  toward  the  Jews,  for  which 
nation  he  possessed  an  hereditary  affection  and  friendship. 

The  book  following  is  named  Lamentations  of  Jeremiah  — 
being  occasioned  by  the  realization  of  anticipated  captivity,  and  con- 
taining contemplations  of  relief  to  be  given  the  Jews.  These  lamen- 
tations sprang  mostly  from  Jeremiah’s  social  sympathies,  which  were 
exceedingly  excited  by  the  sufferings  and  afflictions  then  being  expe- 
rienced by  his  brethren  and  nation.  In  view  of  the  many  horrible 
occurrences  which  had  befallen  the  Jewish  nation,  he  could  only 
utter  his  lamentations  and  weep  in  sympathy.  And  being  much  de- 
pressed in  view  of  these  scenes  of  desolation,  he  endeavored  to  chase 
away  sorrow  by  indulging  in  prophetic  hope,  which  is  expressed  in 
different  places  in  the  book  of  Lamentations. 

The  writings  of  Jeremiah  are  not  useful  or  important  in  respect  to 
the  object  contemplated  in  this  book.  They  relate  mainly  to  the 
wars  and  sufferings  of  the  Jews,  to  their  captivity  in  Babylon,  to  the 
fall  of  Babylon,  and  to  many  shocking  catastrophes  that  would  befall 
various  kingdoms  and  nations  of  the  east.  They  are  written  in  a 
figurative  and  indefinite  style,  nearly  in  the  imperfect  language  of 
correspondences.  They  are  connected  with  no  theological  system, 
and  are  absolutely  unimportant  to  the  world  at  the  present  day,  with 
the  exception  of  a few  figurative  historical  records  contained  in  them, 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


471 


which  are  true,  and  which,  if  read  understanding^,  may  not  be  un- 
profitable. 

§ 123.  We  next  come  to  the  book  of  Ezekiel.  This  writer  was 
similarly  situated  from  youth  to  manhood  with  Jeremiah,  and  with 
him  possessed  very  many  of  the  same  physical  and  spin'ual  qualifi- 
cations. He,  however,  possessed  but  little  of  the  true  spirit  of  proph- 
ecy ; yet  in  a few  instances  he  bursts  forth  under  the  excitement  of 
spiritual  elevation,  and  utters  many  indefinite  yet  truthful  sayings  con- 
cerning the  Zion  of  the  Lord,  and  the  Tree  of  Righteousness  whose 
germ  would  be  deposited  by  Jesus  — the  fair  Example  of  purity  and 
refinement  — and  whose  qualities  and  principles  would  be  unfolded 
by  generations  to  come,  even  by  those  of  the  nineteenth  century. 

The  things  written  in  this  book  also  appertain  mostly  to  the  period 
during  which  they  were  written,  and  to  the  period  just  preceding.  I 
am  not  attracted  to  the  contents  of  this  book  ; for  it  contains  many 
gross  and  blasphemous  sayings  — more  than  would  be  permitted  in 
any  other  book  so  generally  read.  In  the  ninth  chapter  some  things 
are  expressed  which  are  very  repulsive  to  any  mind  of  refinement,  or 
to  any  person  who  has  an  affection  for  spiritual  edification. 

And  Ezekiel  also  exhibits  what  has  been  before  stated  : that  those 
who  prophesied  were  in  the  habit  of  making  the  Lord  say  what  they 
themselves  said  and  wrote;  and  that  they  would  attribute  false  and 
deceptive  prophecy  to  the  prompting  influence  of  the  Divine  Mind. 
Ezekiel  speaks  in  the  fourteenth  chapter  concerning  prophets  real 
and  unreal,  and  says,  “If  a prophet  be  deceived  in  a thing,  I,  the 
Lord,  deceive  that  prophet.”  Ezekiel  also  writes  as  if  he  received 
instruction  from  the  Lord  concerning  the  baking  of  bread  — and 
how  they  should  procure,  boil,  and  eat  a lamb  — and  how  they 
should  choose  the  color,  cut  the  cloth,  and  make  garments,  for  the 
priests,  &c. 

It  is  well  to  remark  that  there  is  to  be  attached  no  blame  to  the 
writer  of  this  book  for  these  unprofitable  expressions,  as  he,  like  oth- 
ers, was  habituated  to  such  modes  of  speaking.  But  what  is  unjust 
and  unwarrantable,  is  the  arbitrary  interpretations  of  those  sayings, 
and  the  unreal  garment  of  divinity  which  has  been  imposed  upon 
them  by  speculative  theologians,  and  which  conceal  their  meaning 
from  the  mind.  This  book  professes  to  be  nothing  more  than  a col- 
lection of  figurative  descriptions,  prophetic  allusions,  and  historical 
records,  concerning  the  numerous  afflictions  experienced  by  the 


« 


472 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


Jews,  both  in  Babylon  and  at  Jerusalem.  This  book  is  also  useful 
so  far  as  it  presents  a truthful  history  of  occurrences  and  afflictions 
experienced  by  bygone  generations,  and  of  the  mode  of  prophecy 
and  expression  that  was  then  universally  customary. 

The  book  of  Daniel,  which  succeeds,  contains  more  historical, 
allegorical,  and  mythological  representations  and  prophetical  visions, 
than  either  of  the  books  on  which  we  have  commented.  Daniel  was 
very  eccentrically  organized.  He  possessed  some  good  social  quali- 
ties, but  wras  characterized  more  by  the  perceptive  and  moral  facul- 
ties, which  latter  were  highly  developed.  Pie  was  but  little  above 
the  rudimental  state  of  mental  development,  and  thus  perceived  and 
taught  only  that  which  was  external  and  material.  His  visions  were 
of  the  most  eccentric  and  ambiguous  character,  some  of  which  were 
sufficiently  definite  not  to  apply  to  things  then  transpiring,  and  others 
were'  sufficiently  indefinite  to  apply  to  almost  any  material  catas- 
trophe— corresponding  in  this  respect  to  various  portions  of  the 
Apocalypse. 

Daniel,  whose  powers  of  analogy  and  comparison  were  strong, 
prophesied  concerning  the  rise  and  downfall  of  various  kings  and 
kingdoms,  representing  the  things  of  which  he  spoke  by  very  singular 
animals,  some  of  which  would  resemble  the  ichthyosaurus  and  the 
iguanodon  more  than  any  other  species.  Some  of  his  metaphorical 
beasts  had  more  horns  than  any  animal  that  ever  existed  upon  the 
earth.  Nevertheless  the  comparisons  were  true,  though  grotesque.  He 
symbolized  some  vast  monarchies  that  should  subsequently  extend 
over  the  earth,  by  an  image  composed  of  various  metals,  which  sig- 
nified the  character  of  as  many  kings,  and  the  different  ages  in  which 
they  would  reign.  His  prophecies  all  related  to  kings  that  were  to 
arise  and  pass  away,  and  new  ones  that  would  arise  in  their  stead. 
These  prophecies  are  very  true,  inasmuch  as  they  have  been  actually 
fulfilled  in  the  successive  tyrannical  governments  that  subsequently 
existed  upon  the  earth. 

The  prophecies  contained  in  this  book  are  so  exceedingly  ambigu- 
ous and  superficial  that  they  do  not  demand  that  high  and  spiritual 
interpretation  which  has  been  given  them  by  many  biblical  commen- 
tators and  spiritualizers.  They  are,  however,  capable  of  being  in- 
terpreted as  representatives  of  almost  anything  that  may  suit  the  fancy 
of  the  commentator.  There  are  some  rather  beautiful  yet  terrific 
figures,  which  have  indeed  a great  deal  of  signification  ; but  they  can 
not  be  made  to  represent  those  grand  and  divine  principles  which 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


473 


alone  can  produce  a resurrection  of  mankind  to  social  unity  and  spir- 
itual happiness.  Therefore  they  are  unprofitable  so  far  as  the  knowl- 
edge is  concerned  which  the  world  requires  for  the  accomplishment 
of  this  great  and  desirable  end. 

It  is  humiliating  to  reflect  upon  the  very  many  false  and  imagina- 
tive interpretations  that  have  been  placed  upon  the  crude  images  and 
imperfect  correspondences  contained  in  the  book  of  Daniel.  Many 
have  been  led,  even  in  the  present  century,  to  suppose  that  a general 
conflagration  of  this  terrestrial  sphere  is  therein  typified  and  abso- 
lutely asserted.  They  have  believed  this,  too,  when  Nature,  her 
lawrs,  and  the  immutable  teachings  of  the  Divine  Mind,  have  pro- 
mulgated a different  truth,  of  which  everything  is  d demonstration. 
It  is  not  to  be  wondered  that  persons  not  understanding  the  structure 
of  the  Universe,  nor  perceiving  the  unchangeable  laws  that  govern 
her  in  harmony,  should  be  imbued  with  this  imaginative  belief  as  de- 
rived from  theological  interpretations  of  the  book  of  Daniel,  in  con- 
nexion with  others  in  which  sayings  of  like  nature  -are  contained. 
But  Divine  Love  and  Wisdom  have  developed  the  still  more  exalted 
Principle  of  Truth  — which  will  outlive  all  errors  and  imperfections 
of  the  outer  world,  and  preserve  its  omnipotence  for  ever  and  ever. 
Let  him,  then,  who  is  capable  of  receiving  the  consoling  truths  which 
Nature  everywhere  manifests,  rest  confidingly  : and  he  may  thus  rest, 
because  that  upon  which  he  reposes  confidence  is  divine,  celestial, 
and  eternal.  Such  principles  are  not  derived  from  the  books  last  com- 
mented upon  ; and  hence,  though  these  books  should  be  regarded  as 
true  considered  in  an  historical  point  of  view,  they  should  not  be  con- 
sidered as  developing  the  celestial  purity  and  greatness  of  Him  who 
reigns  eternal  and  omnipotent. 

Much  time  and  talent  has  been  expended  in  elucidating  the  vast 
number  of  figures  and  correspondences  contained  in  the  books  of 
Jeremiah,  Ezekiel,  and  Daniel.  The  latter  book,  however,  contains 
more  local  and  figurative  prophecy,  and  more  ambiguous  and  un- 
profitable matter,  than  either  of  the  others.  Nevertheless  there  are 
some  very  conspicuous  and  positive  assertions  in  this  book,  which 
have  been  rendered  more  so  by  revisers  and  compilers  than  the  as- 
sertions of  any  other  writers  upon  which  I have  thus  far  been  im- 
pelled to  speak.  I need  not  mention  any  particular  figures  therein 
recorded,  or  proceed  to  prove  their  non-allusion  to  the  “ Sun  of 
Righteousness,”  so  brilliantly  spoken  of  in  Malachi,  and  so  per- 
fectly exemplified  in  the  life  and  teachings  of  Jesus.  For  it  is 


474 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


unnecessary  to  prove  that  which  has  no  opposers  : and  when  these 
sayings  are  opposed,  then  it  will  be  time  to  verify  them  by  further 
considerations. 


§ 124.  I now  proceed  to  speak  concerning  the  book  following 
Daniel,  entitled  Hosea.  This  book  commences  with  an  account 
of  a command  of  the  Lord  to  Hosea  to  choose  him  a conjugal  asso- 
ciate. The  representation  here  recorded  concerning  the  Lord’s  di- 
rection how  he  should  many,  and  how  his  children  should  be  named, 
is  very  unprofitable,  and  is  indeed  revoking  to  the  feelings  of  every 
person  of  true  refinement.  It  will  appear  in  the  highest  degree  im- 
probable to  every  person  of  interior  and  truthful  reflection,  that  Hosea 
ever  received  an  influx  of  Divine  instruction  to  choose  a wife  as  is 
herein  recorded,  or  concerning  the  names  bv  which  his  children 
should  be  known.  For  these  things  would  tend  to  withdraw  from 
the  exalted  character  of  the  Divine  Mind  much  of  that  veneration 
which  it  is  proper  for  every  being  to  entertain,  and  for  every  child  to 
be  instructed  in.  From  these  considerations,  it  is  clear  that  these 
expressions  must  have  been  untrue,  or  rather  must  have  corresponded 
to  the  primitive  mode  of  written  expression. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  speak  particularly  concerning  Hosea,  as  he 
makes  no  pretensions  to  prophecy,  but  was  only  a general  observer, 
contemplator,  admonisher,  and  instructor.  He  observes  the  depres- 
sion and  disconsolation  that  were  then  enshrouding  many  kingdoms 
within  the  circumference  of  his  knowledge,  and  especially  the  Jews 
and  the  house  of  Israel,  which  were  within  his  immediate  observation. 
He  saw  the  gloomy  forebodings  of  vengeance  from  the  Medes,  Per- 
sians, and  Babylonians,  upon  the  Jewish  nation  : and  on  seeing  ev- 
ery tie  which  had  previously  united  one  nation  with  another  ex- 
changed for  vengeance  and  retaliation,  he  trembled  in  prospect  of 
what  was  to  follow.  From  these  things  he  felt  constrained  to  speak 
against  the  idolatries  of  his  nation,  and  their  many  eccentricities, 
which  were  opposed  to  the  commands  of  the  Divine  Mind,  and 
were  against  their  future  peace  and  prosperity.  He  felt  also  that 
it  was  his  duty  to  speak  indirectly  and  comparatively  concerning  the 
Jews  and  Israelites,  and  to  endeavor  to  enforce  upon  their  minds  a 
deep  and  serious  conviction  that  if  they  did  not  leave  the  worship  of 
idols  and  the  practice  of  abominations,  they  would  be  ultimately  sub- 
dued, their  nation  dispersed,  and  their  beautiful  city  overthrown.  In 
confirmation  of  these  things  he  offered  many  typical  illustrations,  and 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


475 


spoke  parables,  as  he  professes  to  be  commanded  to  do,  in  order 
that  their  minds  might  be  duly  impressed  with  the  awful  catastrophe 
that  was  then  hovering  over  their  nation.  In  contemplating  these 
things,  he,  as  all  minds  are  wont  to  do  under  similar  circumstances, 
prophesied  ultimate  amelioration,  such  as  was  suggested  by  the  yearn- 
ings of  hope. 

There  are  some  indefinite  allusions  in  this  book  to  the  Zion  of 
righteousness  that  was  thereafter  to  exist;  but  they  are  so  much  in- 
termingled with  the  occurrences  then  impending,  that  they  are  unim- 
portant. Besides,  they  are  disconnected  from  the  general  chain  of 
prophecy  under  special  review.  So  I find  nothing  in  this  book  ca- 
pable of  a decided  application  to  anything  beyond  the  period  in 
which  the  book  was  written.  For  the  writer’s  feelings  were  involved 
in,  and  his  judgment  exceedingly  trammelled  by,  the  many  unhappy 
circumstances  of  the  times,  and  this  fact  prevented  the  development 
of  higher  and  more  spiritual  qualifications. 

The  book  of  Joel,  which  succeeds,  is  mainly  a recapitulation  of 
things  contained  in  Hosea,  with  the  exception  of  the  introduction  of 
new  figures,  and  a dissimilarity  of  expression.  Joel  also  exhorted 
the  children  of  Israel  to  repentance,  and  enforced  upon  them  the 
necessity  of  being  reformed  in  order  to  escape  the  direful  judgments 
of  the  Lord  of  Israel,  who,  he  taught,  would  visit  their  land  with  a 
consuming  vengeance,  and  disperse  their  nation  even  to  the  lands  in 
possession  of  the  heathen.  He  introduced  new  and  convincing  rep- 
resentations of  the  great  and  awful  day  when  the  land  that  was  then 
fertile,  yielding  beauty  and  abundance,  would  be  a forsaken  and  un- 
inhabited wilderness  ; and  when  their  city,  along  whose  streets  and 
in  wrhose  well-constructed  edifices  happiness  dwelt,  and  no  fear  or 
consternation  was  indicated,  would  be  destroyed  and  left  desolate. 
It  was  to  be  an  awful  revolution,  and  therefore  many,  like  Joel,  felt 
it  a duty  to  speak  and  prophesy  concerning  the  best  and  most  expe- 
dient means  to  escape  the  terribleness  of  the  calamity,  and  also  to 
speak  concerning  the  great  and  glorious  day  when  bondage  would 
be  unknown  to  them,  and  the  nation  would  be  restored  again  to  pros- 
perity, unity,  and  brotherly  affection. 

He  presents  descriptions  also  of  some  very  appalling  manifesta- 
tions of  Divine  judgment,  which  are  calculated  to  operate  strongly 
upon  the  sentiments  of  fear  and  marvellousness,  and  to  excite  super- 
stition to  the  highest  possible  degree.  Thus  he  spoke  of  a day 
which  should  come  when  the  Lord  would  pour  out  his  Spirit  upon 


476 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


them,  and  their  sons  and  daughters  should  have  visions,  and  their 
aged  men  should  dream  dreams  ; when  the  sun  would  cease  to  give 
its  light,  and  the  moon  be  darkened  and  changed  into  blood,  and  the 
stars  refuse  to  shine,  and  the  earth  shake  to  its  centre,  and  darkness 
reign  universally. 

This  very  indefinite  yet  powerful  representation  bears  all  the  ap- 
pearance of  a literal  prophecy  yet  to  be  fulfilled.  But  it  will  be 
perceived  by  any  enlightened  understanding  that  all  these  physical 
transformations  are  entirely  opposed  to  all  law  and  to  the  harmony 
of  the  Universe  ; and  therefore  if  understood  in  a literal  sense,  the 
figures  are  untrue  and  insignificant.  But  this  was  a mode  of  expres- 
sion only  intended  to  awaken  the  apprehensions  of  the  Jewish  nation, 
and  to  impress  them  with  the  terribleness  of  the  calamities  which  then 
evidently  awaited  them. 

Joel  also  says,  “ The  Lord  will  show  forth  wonders  in  the  heav- 
ens and  in  the  earth  — blood,  and  fire,  and  pillars  of  smoke.”  It  is 
indeed  unprofitable  to  consider  these  sayings  as  ever  having  pro- 
ceeded from  the  Divine  Mind  ; for  it  is  infinitely  beneath  his  supreme 
dignity  and  divine  majesty  to  condescend  to  present  to  man  such  ter- 
rific figures  and  sublime  panoramas.  I find  nothing  in  this  book 
absolutely  relating  to  or  foretelling  the  coming  of  the  great  Reformer. 

The  book  of  Amos  is  a prophetic  document  concerning  various 
kingdoms  and  cities  which  are  prophesied  against  in  the  book  of 
Daniel.  This  book  also  may  be  considered  as  a collection  of  pri- 
vate meditations  and  reflections  on  historical  events  intimated  in 
previous  books,  which  books  existed  at  the  time  this  was  written. 
And  as  it  is  connected  with  subsequent  records  and  prophecies,  it  is 
unnecessary  to  remark  further  upon  it. 

Therefore  I proceed  to  the  book  entitled  Obadiah  — which  con- 
tains the  impressions  and  prophecies  of  a herdsman,  who,  evidently 
being  excited  by  the  then-existing  circumstances,  could  not,  because 
of  his  peculiar  mental  constitution,  refrain  from  uttering  his  opinions 
and  contemplations  also.  He  also  spoke  symbolically,  but  very 
briefly  and  comprehensively,  concerning  things  referred  to  in  previ- 
ous books.  So  as  there  exists  no  apparent  use  in  these  sayings,  or 
capability  of  a profitable  application,  it  is  not  necessary  that  I should 
remark  further  upon  this  book. 


^ 125.  The  succeeding  book  is  entitled  Jonah.  This  book,  in 
an  abrupt  and  broken  manner,  commences  speaking  of  Jonah  as 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


477 


being  commanded  by  the  Lord  to  go  to  Nineveh  and  preach  against 
it,  denouncing  its  destruction.  It  represents  the  inhabitants  of  Nin- 
eveh as  being  ignorant,  idolatrous,  and  wicked,  insomuch  that  the 
Lord  became  exasperated  because  of  their  continual  abominations, 
and  determined  in  his  vengeance  to  destroy  the  city.  To  prophesy 
concerning  them,  Jonah  was  selected.  It  appears  that  the  Lord 
spake  to  Jonah,  and  gave  him  his  directions  ; and  Jonah,  to  escape 
him,  proceeded  to  the  seaside,  where  he  beheld  a ship,  in  which  he 
took  passage  for  Tarshish. 

It  appears  from  this  that  Jonah  was  much  opposed  in  heart  and 
affection  to  the  thing  commanded  by  the  Lord  : and  this  would  ap- 
pear to  convey  external  evidence  that  the  Lord  was  incapable  of 
selecting  a proper  person  to  do  his  will.  After  Jonah  had  paid  his 
passage  and  embarked,  he  fell  asleep  under  the  weight  of  a heavy 
conviction  of  transgression.  After  this  followed  an  interference  of 
the  Lord,  which  is  represented  as  destroying  the  equilibrium  of  the 
atmosphere,  and  causing  a most  severe  and  tempestuous  storm.  Jo- 
nah is  represented  as  being  the  one  who  occasioned  this  terrible 
storm,  on  which  discovery  he  was,  at  his  own  request,  cast  upon  the 
agitated  waves. 

The  relation  also  represents  the  Lord  as  preparing  a fish,  the  ca- 
pacity of  whose  stomach  would  admit  Jonah,  in  order  that  his  life 
might  be  preserved.  How  the  fish  was  caused  to  move  near  the 
ship  where  Jonah  was  cast  into  the  sea,  is  not  made  plain  ; for  it  is 
only  by  desire  arising  from  the  sensation  of  the  body,  that  any  form 
possessing  sensation  is  attracted  toward  the  thing  desired : and  there- 
fore the  fish  must  have  had  a knowledge  of  Jonah’s  immersion,  to  have 
been  there  at  the  time,  and  to  have  swallowed  him  so  deliberately. 

Several  things  are  related  concerning  the  conscientious  convictions 
of  Jonah  while  in  the  “ belly  of  hell,”  or  hades,  and  also  how  he  was 
finally  landed  unharmed  upon  the  beach.  After  passing  through  so 
many  trials  and  transitions,  he  felt  persuaded  that  he  had  better  pro- 
ceed on  his  three  days’  journey  to  Nineveh,  and  there  preach  what 
he  was  commanded,  which  was,  “ Yet  forty  days,  and  Nineveh  shall 
be  destroyed.” 

Such  a novel  declaration,  not  the  least  anticipated  by  the  inhabi- 
tants, excited  their  fear  and  superstition  to  such  a degree,  that  they, 
at  the  command  of  their  king  and  rulers,  forsook  all  labor,  and  while 
fasting,  deeply  repented  in  sackcloth  and  ashes.  Meanwhile,  Jonah 
withdrew  to  a short  distance  from  the  city,  and  reposed  under  a 


478 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


bootli  with  the  greatest  self-complacency,  and  with  the  prospect  of 
witnessing  a beautiful  display  of  Divine  vengeance,  such  as  would  be 
to  him  a gratification,  because  of  the  sublimity  of  the  spectacle.  But 
it  was  not  long  before  his  prophecy  was  proved  untrue,  and  he  raged 
with  anger  and  disappointment.  He  was  very  much  vexed  that  the 
Lord  had  repented,  and  indeed  was  absolutely  angry  at  his  relenting 
weakness.  So  a gourd  was  created  and  destroyed  before  his  eyes, 
which  typified  the  forgiveness,  and  this  led  to  a discussion  between 
Jonah  and  the  Lord.  But  the  latter  is  represented  as  soothing  the 
disordered  feelings  of  Jonah,  and  leaving  him  to  learn,  from  what  he 
had  seen,  submission  and  forgiveness. 

The  book  represents  the  Divine  Mind  as  repenting  — and  as  curs- 
ing a people  who,  as  he  afterward  acknowledged,  knew  not  tl^eir  right 
hand  from  their  left.  It  represents  his  incompetency  to  judge  of  the 
propel-  agents  to  execute  his  commands,  and  makes  Jonah  desire  to 
have  his  prophecy  and  opinions  prove  true  — for  the  fulfilment  of 
which  he  had  a heart  to  see  that  city,  filled  with  ignorance,  and  yet 
with  beauty  and  animation,  absolutely  annihilated  ! 

I am  not  impressed  that  such  a being  as  Jonah  ever  existed.  I, 
however,  distinctly  perceive  the  origin  of  the  book  ; but  as  this  is 
not  particularly  necessary  to  reveal,  I let  it  pass,  and  proceed  to 
some  useful  considerations  concerning  the  spirit  which  is  said  to 
have  actuated  Jonah  in  his  preaching,  and  to  the  application  of  the 
account. 

Mankind  at  the  present  day  are  much  like  the  citizens  of  Nineveh. 
They  are  ignorant,  not  knowing  the  interior  from  the  outward,  or 
their  right  hand  from  their  left.  They  have  a most  idolatrous  super- 
stition, and  a most  distorted  imagination.  They  are  existing  among 
grand  and  beautiful  external  things.  They  have  beautiful  and  well- 
constructed  cities.  They  have  arbitrary  and  vitiating  laws  and  gov- 
ernments, which  require  of  man  that  which  his  nature  and  the  consti- 
tution of  the  Universe  absolutely  prohibit.  They  have  temples  for 
the  worship  of  imaginary  beings,  not  transcending  those  of  Zoroaster. 
They  have  idols  and  graven  images,  such  as  convey  to  the  mind  su- 
perstitions and  mythological  thoughts  not  much  above  the  worship 
of  the  Ganges  or  of  the  Juggernaut.  They  have,  because  of  this 
ignorance  and  disorganization,  sinks  and  dens  of  loathsome  iniquity, 
wherein  dwells  every  species  of  abomination  and  wretchedness  ; and 
thus  the  whole  race  is  most  dangerously  diseased  — even  like  the 
inhabitants  of  Nineveh. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


479 


There  are  those  who  proclaim  in  these  outward  sanctuaries,  day- 
after  day  and  year  after  year,  “ Repent,  or  you  will  be  speedily  vis- 
ited with  Divine  and  consuming  vengeance  and  if  they  are  told 
that  the  Lord  repenteth,  and  will  save  the  race  because  of  their  want 
of  proper  instruction,  they  show  by  their  expressions  of  indignation 
that  they  would  rather  have  the  whole  race  sink  to  the  lowest  depths 
of  eternal  darkness,  than  to  have  their  preaching  and  proclamations 
prove  untrue  ! Behold,  then,  ye  who  thus  preach,  your  own  insig- 
nificance ! Behold  your  dark  and  unnatural  ingratitude  to  that  Di- 
vine and  Unchangeable  Mind  who  breathes  in  every  department  of 
his  united  System,  forgiveness  and  reconciliation  ! Behold,  also, 
your  likeness,  by  observing  Jonah  in  his  self-complacency  and  in  his 
disappointment,  for  he  is  a correct  mirror  to  convey  the  reflection  of 
your  insignificance. 

These  teachers,  then,  are  like  Jonah  : they  would  rather  have 
the  great  Nineveh  of  the  world  and  the  inhabitants  thereof  experi- 
ence all  the  calamities  which  they  have  been  led  to  preach,  than  to 
have  their  prophecy  prove  false,  or  their  present  impressions  demon- 
strated to  be  unfounded.  So  much  instruction,  then,  may  be  de- 
rived from  the  book  of  Jonah  ; and  thus  far  it  is  a most  perfect  rep- 
resentation of  the  mental  condition  of  the  race  in  the  nineteenth 
century.  But  further  than  this  the  book  is  unprofitable,  and  might 
have  been  destroyed,  like  many  of  its  kindred  books,  without  the 
least  injury  or  loss  to  the  world. 

§ 126.  Next  follows  the  book  of  Micah  — which  is  devoted  to 
meditations  similar  to  those  contained  in  previous  books,  concerning 
the  immense  afflictions  that  were  about  being  imposed  upon  the 
Jews  and  Israelites,  who  had  by  frequent  idolatries  been  contami- 
nated. This  book  is  written  in  the  style  of  lamentation,, is  slightly 
figurative,  and  very  little  prophetical.  It  professes  to  speak  of  no 
occurrence,  except  what  was  expected  to  befall  the  Jewish  nation 
and  cities  connected  therewith.*  It  refers  to  the  vast  amount  of  evil 
and  wretchedness  that  was  continually  pressing  more  and  more  upon  ' 
the  Jews  and  the  house  of  Israel.  I discover  no  principles  or  figures 
as  contained  in  this  book  that  will  admit  of  a useful  application. 

I proceed,  then,  to  the  book  entitled  Nahum,  which  succeeds. 

* The  prophecy  recorded  in  chap.  iv.  1-4,  concerning  what  should  happen  in  the 
latter  days,  appears  to  be  extracted,  almost  word  for  word,  from  Isaiah  ii.  2-4.  It  is 
for  this  reason,  I suppose,  that  the  author  appears  not  to  consider  this  prophecy  as 
belonging  to  the  book  of  Micah. 


4S0 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


The  foreboding  calamities  of  the  times  were  also  the  subject  of  this 
writer’s  meditations.  He  speaks  very  briefly  concerning  the  things 
upon  which  he  felt  impressed  to  prophesy.  His  book,  as  it  now 
stands,  relates  particularly  to  the  evils  that  were  coming  upon  Nine- 
veh, which  city  appeared  to  him  to  be  under  the  direct  curse  of  an 
exasperated  and  revengeful  Deity. 

Next  comes  the  book  of  Habaickuk.  This  writer  spoke  con- 
cerning previous  and  present  abominations  that  pervaded  the  Jewish 
nation,  even  to  an  adulteration  of  their  temple  and  forms  of  worship, 
which  idolatrous  corruptions  seemed  to  his  mind  to  be  the  very 
stepping-stones  to  destruction.  He  recapitulated  in  substance  the 
sayings  of  other  writers  concerning  the  destruction  that  was  to  be 
experienced  by  the  Jewish  nation,  and  concerning  an  ultimate  ame- 
lioration. Yet  in  this  book,  as  in  previous  ones,  I perceive  no  allu- 
sion to  a period  when  would  live  the  great  Reformer  : but  the  book 
is  confined,  like,  former  ones,  to  allusions  to  events  and  circumstances 
occurring  within  the  limits  of  that  exciting  era. 

Then  follows  the  book  of  Zephaniah.  The  style  of  this  book 
is  more  symbolical,  and  it  contains  some  severe  denunciations  against 
prophets  and  priests  who  prophesied  untruly,  and  who  had  defiled 
their  sanctuaries  of  devotion.  In  Zephaniah’s  visions  there  are  some 
indefinite  allusions  to  a period  when  happiness  would  again  bless  the 
Jews,  and  when  the  house  of  Israel  and  the  Lord’s  house  would  be 
cleansed,  and  the  latter  rendered  once  more  pure  and  suitable  to  re- 
ceive a congregation  of  worshippers.  But  I discover  no  allusion  to 
the  period  when  the  kingdom  of  Christ  should  be  established  on 
earth,  and  when  the  Tree  of  Righteousness  should  bloom  with  beauty 
and  send  forth  a fragrance  of  harmony  and  happiness.  But  the  same 
reflections  concerning  the  Jews  and  their  unhappy  condition  that  are 
found  in  previous  records,  are  presented  also  in  this  book,  though 
they  are  expressed  in  different  language.  There  are,  however,  some 
pleasing  and  beautifully-expressed  sentences  in  this  book,  which  may 
be  read  with  profit,  though  they  are  not  altogether  worthy  of  being 
made  the  basis  of  a long  theological  discourse.  For  they  refer  to 
then-existing  circumstances,  and  it  would  be  an  act  of  injustice  to 
make  them  refer  to  anything  different. 

The  following  book  is  entitled  Haggai.  This  is  composed 
mainly  of  admonitions  and  remarks  concerning  the  rebuilding  of  the 
temple  after  the  Jews  had  returned  from  Babylonish  bondage,  and  is 
of  no  importance. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


481 


§ 127.  But  I am  impressed  to  speak  of  the  following  book,  enti- 
tled Zechariah,  with  more  caution  and  gentleness,  because  of  the 
author’s  very  beautiful  and  truthful  vision  concerning  Him  who  was 
to  come.  It  appears  that  Zechariah  was  generally  beloved  because 
of  his  amiable  character  and  superior  judgment.  He  nevertheless 
had  all  his  feelings  and  affections  involved  in  the  sufferings  of  his 
countrymen.  He  records  his  prophetical  reflections  with  great 
warmth  of  feeling,  and  displays  peculiar  force  in  his  expressions. 
He  appears  to  have  written  under  the  influence  of  a sanguine  spirit, 
characterized  by  a peculiar  positiveness  apd  determination,  the  same 
being  modified  by  a kind  and  affectionate  disposition.  He  also  re- 
lates a variety  of  visions  ; but  these  are  of  a local  nature,  though  they 
are  of  such  a character  that  they  can  be  applied  to  more  than  the 
then-existing  circumstances. 

About  one  third  of  this  book  is  closely  connected  with  the  sub- 
jects dwelt  upon  in  previous  ones  ; and  the  other  two  thirds  are  de- 
voted to  meditation,  and  to  prophetical  allusion  concerning  the  birth 
of  Jesus,  which  pure  and  perfect  personage  was  ultimately  to  arise 
among  the  Jewish  nation,  but  whose  teachings  would  be  applied  and 
fulfilled  only  in  subsequent  generations,  even  near  the  present  time. 
I would  refer  the  reader  to  the  sixth  chapter  and  twelfth  verse,  where- 
in are  recorded  some  brief  thoughts  concerning  him  and  this  era.  I 
would  also  refer  to  the  ninth  chapter,  ninth  and  tenth  verses,  which 
intimate  quite  as  strongly  the  ultimate  relief  of  the  Jews,  Gentiles, 
and  all  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth,  from  ignorance,  mental  slavery, 
and  physical  disunity. 

It  would  be  well  for  tbose  who  have  speculated  upon  the  subject, 
to  very  cautiously  read,  and  reflect  upon^the  expression  here  made 
use  of,  to  represent  Jesus  and  his  social  and  spiritual  government. 
He  is  here  called  “ The  Branch”  — which  is  indeed  one  of  the 
most  perfect  and  truthful  expressions  contained  in  the  Primitive 
History. 

Many  theologians  have  conceived,  from  observing  superficially 
other  isolated  passages  in  the  Bible,  that  Jesus  was  a being  expressly 
destined  and  created  for  the  purpose  of  redeeming  the  race  from  a 
fallen  and  degenerate  condition.  Others  have  supposed  that  he  came 
merely  to  establish  a connexion  between  the  spiritual  nature  of  man 
md  the  Divine  Mind,  and  thus  to  serve  as  a medium  through  which 
spirits  from  this  rudimental  sphere  might  approach  the  presence  of 
Him  who  made  from  internal  Essence,  the  Universe.  Others  have 

31 


1S2 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


upposed  that  lie  was  a material  organization  capable  of  receiving 
he  Divine  Mind  itself,  and  that  as  such  he  came  to  reconcile  and 
elevate  the  spiritual  nature  of  man  to  a degree  whereby  perpetual 
communion  with  holiness  and  righteousness  might  be  established. 

The  first  opinion  is  in  a measure  true.  He  was  a destined  me- 
dium and  agent  to  unfold  a higher  degree  of  perfection  than  had 
been  before  possessed  by  man  ; but,  for  this  purpose,  he  was  cre- 
ated, as  all  the  human  family  are  created,  by  the  workings  of  the 
laws  and  elements  of  Nature.  But  the  supposition  that  he  came  to 
redeem  the  world  of  mankind  from  a fallen  condition  is  exceedingly 
contrary,  both  to  the  laws  of  Nature  and  the  teachings  of  the  Primi- 
tive History,  and  is  derogatory  to  the  unspeakable  perfection  of  that 
Essence  which  has  breathed  life  and  animation  throughout  space. 
By  the  word  redemption , the  mind  is  instantly  led  to  conceive  of 
something  being  lost,  or  forfeited.  I am  impressed  that  nothing  has 
been  forfeited  as'  pertaining  to  the  spiritual  nature  of  man,  so  as  in 
the  least  degree  to  require  a supernatural  restoration  to  a position 
which  man  once  occupied.  If  mankind  had  once  been  socially  united 
by  an  understanding  of  the  laws  which  breathe  unity,  harmony,  and 
consequent  happiness,  then  would  they,  by  means  of  that  knowledge, 
have  perpetuated  that  unity  through  all  generations  down  to  the  pres- 
ent day.  But  mankind  have  not  pre-occupied  the  position  they  now 
sustain  : and  therefore  the  race  has  not  fallen  and  degenerated,  but 
was  merely  misdirected  in  youth,  and  now  only  requires  gentleness 
of  instruction,  and  the  attainment  of  a pure  and  useful  knowledge,  to 
effect  its  elevation.  Therefore  the  opinion  is  without  foundation, 
■that  the  race  was  once  pure,  perfect,  and  united,  and  that  it  after- 
ward degenerated,  because  man  partook  a little  of  the  fruit  of  the 
tree  of  Knowledge.  Nor  is  the  opinion  any  more  true  that  a being 
was  expressly  designed  and  adapted  to  destroy  the  deleterious  effects 
of  this  transgression,  and  to  restore  mankind  to  the  position  they 
once  sustained. 

The  second  opinion,  namely,  that  Jesus  is  a medium  through 
which  mankind  may  ultimately  receive  forgiveness,  and  be  admitted 
to  higher  spheres,  is  also  unprofitable  to  entertain.  We  can  not  con- 
ceive of  any  work  planned  and  formed  by  Divine  Love  and  Wisdom 
being  so  incomplete  as  to  lose  all  connexion  with  the  law  of  progres- 
sive development. 

The  thud  opinion  is  exceedingly  derogatory  to  the  character  of 
.the  Divine  Mind,  and  absolutely  charges  him  with  a want  of  fore- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


4S3 


knowledge  and  predetermination,  when  his  living  energies  were  en- 
gaged in  creating  and  organizing  the  Univercoslum.  For  the  sup- 
position that  he  ever  instituted  laws  ( which  are  the  very  elements  of 
his  Will,  and  which  are  as  unchangeable  as  his  Divine  Essence), 
and  afterward  found  himself  incompetent  to  carry  them  out,  and  to 
perfect  the  System  he  had  erected  — is  a supposition  exceedingly 
unrighteous,  and  altogether  opposed  to  his  celestial  dignity  ; and 
therefore  it  should  be  discarded  and  never  more  promulgated  to  the 
children  of  men. 

But  Zechariah  has  spoken  the  truth,  and  calls  him  a Branch  — 
that  is,  of  the  Great  Tree,  whose  Body  is  composed  of  the  whole 
world  of  Mankind.  He  is  a Branch  of  the  great  Creation,  and  a 
putting-forth  and  development  of  its  interior  qualities.  And  what 
the  world  should  be  thankful  for  and  delighted  in,  is,  that  this  Branch 
has  produced  such  delicious  fruit.  It  does  not  follow  that  this  Branch 
originated  and  controlled  the  Great  Tree  of  Human  Existence,  but  it 
was  produced  from  the  qualities  contained  in  the  germ  of  the  world, 
which  were  absorbed  by  the  roots  of  this  Great  Tree,  and  thus  the 
latter  became  developed  through  all  the  successive  stages  of  its 
growth,  until  it  became  prepared  to  unfold  a Branch  which  would 
bloom  with  the  immortal  fragrance  of  interior  purity  and  exterior  gen- 
tleness. And  this  Branch  is  Jesus,  the  elements  of  whose  soul 
breathed  peace  on  earth  and  good-will  to  men. 

This,  then,  is  the  Branch  alluded  to  with  so  much  feeling  and  ele- 
vation of  thought  in  the  book  of  Zechariah.  And  this  should  be 
considered  the  most  truthful  and  significant  expression  that  can  be 
applied  to  the  great  moral  Reformer. 

§127.  Succeeding  Zechariah  is  the  book  of  Malachi.  In  this 
is  contained  some  superior  prophecy  concerning  this  Branch,  which 
was  unfolded  upon  the  Tree  of  Mankind,  whose  roots  extend  through 
all  lower  creations  down  to  the  incomprehensible  Vortex  from  which 
Love  and  Wisdom  perpetually  flow.  This  great  Branch  is  by  Mal- 
achi called  “ The  Sun  of  Righteousness  and  truly  might  have 
been  called  the  flower  of  material  and  spiritual  perfection  that  would 
bloom  with  healing  qualities,  the  application  of  which  would  exalt 
and  make  happy  the  whole  Body  of  Mankind. 

Such  expressions  found  in  this  book  as  “ The  day  cometh  that 
shall  burn  as  an  oven,”  &c.,  are  ambiguous  comparisons  designed  to 
typify  the  great  calamity  that  was  to  befall  the  Jewish  nation  at  the 


4S4 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


destruction  of  Jerusalem.  These  very  severe  and  indefinite  denun- 
ciations have  conveyed  to  the  world  many  unprofitable  impressions ; 
for  they  have  been  interpreted  in  a most  unrighteous  manner.  The 
expressions  — “ The  day  of  the  Lord”  — “ the  visitation  of  the  Lord” 
— “ the  day  of  judgment”  — “ the  vengeance,”  and  the  “consuming 
fire  of  the  Lord,”  and  many  similar  ones  — were  used  by  ancient 
writers,  and  especially  the  writers  of  the  manuscripts  now  composing 
the  Bible,  in  a very  unguarded  and  indefinite  manner.  The  Jews 
had  been  so  long  in  bondage,  and  had  experienced  so  many  devas- 
tating invasions,  that  they  were  unable  any  more  to  repose  confidence 
in  their  own  power  of  ever  procuring  relief.  So  they  fled  for  refuge 
to  the  God  of  Abraham,  Isaac,  and  Jacob,  who,  they  believed,  pos- 
sessed sufficient  power  and  spirit  of  retaliation  to  revenge  them  of 
their  enemies.  Hence  occur  those  frequent  expressions  throughout 
the  Old  Testament,  and  especially  in  various  passages  in  Malachi. 

Malachi  intimates  that  one  was  to  be  created  who  would  be  king 
over  all  the  nations,  and  thus  would  relieve  the  then-enslaved  inhab- 
itants from  their  extreme  suffering  and  wretchedness.  Him  he  calls 
Elijah — who  has  been  supposed  to  represent  the  great  Reformer  of 
whom  I have  spoken.  I discover  no  use  in  this  application,  nor  do 
I discover  any  such  interior  meaning  in  the  passage. 

I forego,  then,  all  further  comment  upon  the  books  of  the  Old 
Testament.  I have  noticed  particularly  all  prophetical  allusions  to 
the  birth  and  teachings  of  Jesus,  and  shown  that  they  were  all  general 
and  anticipatory,  but  not  particular,  isolated,  or  circumstantial.  To 
have  made  them  so  would  have  been  beyond  the  reach  of  prophetic 
powers. 

It  is  well  to  remark,  also,  that  all  intimations  of  the  coming  of  the 
Messiah  were  suggestions  developed  from  the  then-depressed  situa- 
tion of  the  various  nations  of  the  earth.  And  it  was  in  order  to  con- 
sole minds  laboring  under  the  prevailing  affliction  that  this  event  was 
generally  appealed  to  : and  the  prospect  in  some  measure  restored 
confidence  and  energy,  and  inspired  their  minds  with  hope  and  bril- 
liant anticipations.  Aside  from  this,  the  writers  of  the  Old  Testa- 
ment professed  mostly  to  relate  mere  historical  truths  ; and  many  of 
their  expressions  and  illustrations  are  strictly  mythological,  being  de- 
rived, as  has  been  shown,  from  prior  and  early-imbibed  theological 
opinions.  We  have  seen  also  that  many  books  in  the  Old  Testa- 
ment are  absolutely  useless,  because  they  rather  promulgate  immoral 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


485 


and  unrighteous  principles  than  that  purity  and  celestial  refinement 
which  would  naturally  be  expected  as  coming  from  the  Divine  Mind. 
In  some  books,  however,  there  are  very  many  beautiful  conceptions 
— figures  that  admit  of  literal  or  spiritual  correspondences,  in  the 
language  of  which  the  ancient  inhabitants  spoke  of  themselves  and 
all  things  created.  To  this  style  of  communication  they  became  uni- 
versally habituated;  and  they  would  express  all  their  thoughts  in  an 
allegorical  manner,  always  relating  the  representative  as  though  it  were 
true,  instead  of  the  thing  or  thought  represented. 

If,  however,  all  the  sayings  in  the  Old  Testament  were  clothed  in 
a spiritual  interpretation,  it  would  not  be  of  any  possible  use  to  the 
world,  inasmuch  as  the  world  needs  new  and  elevating  instructions 
which  will  produce  corresponding  results,  as  affecting  their  physical 
and  spiritual  relations.  A spiritual  interpretation  of  these  sayings 
would  be  positively  useless,  because  it  would  be  incapable  of  a prof- 
itable application.  The  Bible,  thus  robed,  would  not  supply  the 
physical  requirements  of  the  human  race,  neither  would  it  soothe  the 
affliction,  of  the  suffering,  nor  be  fit  food  for  the  widow  or  the  father- 
less. Nor  would  it  reform  the  arbitrary  and  unholy  governments 
that  now  exist  in  various  portions  of  the  earth.  It  could  not  wipe 
tears  from  off  all  faces,  nor  banish  pain  and  sorrow  from  the  earth  ; 
nor  could  it  produce  a social  resurrection,  the  superior  results  of 
which  would  be  spiritual  happiness  and  exaltation. 

Moreover,  a literal  interpretation  of  all  the  sayings  of  the  Old 
Testament,  for  the  purpose  of  collecting  materials  to  sustain  a very 
unrighteous  theology,  would  not  have  any  tendency  to  produce  the 
good  results  which  are  called  for  from  every  department  of  the  civil- 
ized and  uncivilized  world.  Yet  the  voices  and  supplications  of 
Nature  can  not  be  hushed,  until  the  things  called  for  are  given  in 
abundance  ; and  Nature,  dwelling  within  living  forms,  speaks,  and 
loudly  calls  for  amelioration  from  ignorance,  vice,  imbecility,  and 
every  species  of  social  iniquity,  transgression,  and  disorganization. 
She  has  unfolded  her  choicest  qualities  in  some  noble  forms  of  the 
human  family,  which  breathe  the  very  elements  of  charity  and  phi- 
lanthropy. They  exercise  a benevolence  unbounded  — an  affection 
and  sympathy  comprehending  the  many  requirements  of  all  who 
suffer  in  pain  and  poverty. 

As  the  Old  Testament,  then,  pretends  only  to  be  a history  of  cir- 
cumstances and  events  of  the  ages  in  which  it  was  written,  and  as  the 
men  called  prophets  pretended  to  nothing  more  than  expressing 


486 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


hope  and  anticipation  of  relief,  some  of  which  expressions  can  be 
distinctly  applied  to  the  life  and  character  of  Jesus;  and  as  the 
books  have  been  collected  and  arranged  by  the  agency  of  interested 
compilers  ; and  as  the  fixing  of  the  chronology,  the  positions  of 
the  books,  and  the  division  of  the  same  into  chapters  and  verses, 
have  all  been  merely  the  work  of  those  who  were  commanded 
by  rulers  to  collect  and  arrange  them  ; and  as  they  can  not,  though 
generally  true,  essentially  benefit  the  race,  in  any  particular,  it  would 
be  well  to  consider  the  Primitive  History  in  its  primitive  meaning , 
and  thus  let  it  repose.  Mankind  should  forsake  all  dogmatism  — all 
sectarianism  — all  mythology  — all  unrighteousness  — and  become  at 
once  associated  branches  of  the  great  Tree  of  Righteousness.  Then 
the  whole  world  of  mankind  may  fully  experience  the  ennobling 
consequences  arising  from  a proper  development  of  their  inherent 
qualities.  Then,  indeed,  will  the  earth  bring  forth  her  choicest 
beauties  ; and  then  will  man  be  competent  to  appreciate  the  excel- 
lency of  her  productions,  and  thus  be  happy. 


§ 129.  Among  the  Hindoo  and  other  eastern  tribes,  the  Shaster 
is  supposed  to  be  of  divine  origin.  They  consequently  venerate  its 
contents,  strictly  adhere  to  its  teachings,  and  endeavor,  by  all  kinds 
of  persuasion,  to  inspire  faith  in  the  minds  of  those  who  disbelieve, 
and  also  to  spread  widely  its  doctrines  and  precepts.  They  entertain 
the  highest  respect  for  the  writers  of  their  religious  book,  and 
believe  that  they  were  inspired  by  good  spirits  to  communicate  such 
a divine  revelation.  They  suppose  that  the  world  refuses  to  accept 
it  because  the  world  is  alienated  from  the  favor  of  their  deities,  and 
therefore  is  not  permitted  to  enter  into  the  enjoyment  of  their  holy 
religion,  which  they  venerate  with  the  highest  devotion. 

Such  also  is  the  case  with  the  Persians  with  reference  to  their 
religious  book  ; with  the  Mohammedans,  and  with  the  portions  of 
the  civilized  world  who  have  received,  and  reposed  confidence 
in,  the  superficial  interpretation  of  the  Primitive  History.  All  sects 
that  base  their  origin  upon  things  contained  in  this  history,  sup- 
pose that  the  reason  why  all  are  not  as  they  are,  is,  because  they 
have  ascended  to  a higher  degree  of  knowledge,  and,  therefore,  are 
permitted  to  enjoy  these  divine  teachings,  exclusively,  while  others 
are  groping  in  darkness  of  the  most  degrading  character,  unstrength 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


487 


ened  and  unassisted  by  that  Mind  who  created  them  ahd  the  Uni- 
verse. All  sects  see  the  superiority  of  their  own  religious  posses- 
sions, and  suppose  that  their  light  so  far  transcends  that  of  all  others, 
as  to  render  the  latter  absolute  darkness.  It  has  been,  therefore, 
most  seriously  believed  and  promulgated  by  the  adherents  of  every 
sect  and  system  of  religion,  that  the  reason  why  all  are  not  as  they 
are,  is,  because  all  besides  themselves  are  under  the  indignation  of 
that  Mind  who  instituted  their  own  peculiar  sect  or  religion. 

It  is  improper,  therefore,  as  is  manifest  from  these  considerations, 
to  regard  believers  in  the  Primitive  History  with  any  more  esteem 
and  affection  than  those  who  seriously  believe  the  Shaster,  the  Ko- 
ran, or  the  Zend-Avesta,  for  all  ar^  alike  devoted  to  the  faith  early 
impressed  upon  their  minds,  and  therefore  are  alike  subjects  of  cus- 
tom, education,  and  misdirection. 

I now  proceed  to  a consideration  of  many  principles  and  sayings 
recorded  in  the  New  Testament  which  have  been  most  unjustly 
interpreted,  and  the  interpretations  of  which  are  sowing  the  seeds  of 
error  and  sectarian  dissension  throughout  the  civilized  and  uncivil- 
ized portions  of  the  earth. 

The  first  opinion  that  is  well  to  investigate  is,  that  the  New  Tes- 
tament was  suggested  by  the  Old — that  the  prophets  foresaw  and 
prophesied  of  it,  and  that  it  came  to  do  away  with  the  old  law,  and 
to  establish  a new  one  in  its  stead. 

In  searching  among  the  writings  of  the  Old  Testament,  there  will 
not  be  found  one  slight  intimation  in  favor  of  this  idea.  The  proph- 
ets nowhere  speak  of  a new  law  that  was  to  be  thus  written  and 
placed  before  the  world,  and  by  which  mankind  were  to  be  univer- 
sally directed.  They  nowhere  intimate  that  such  a thing  was  ever 
intended,  or  that  it  would  he  of  the  least  possible  use  to  subse- 
quent generations  upon  whose  amelioration  from  bondage  of  a social 
and  mental  nature  they  so  feelingly  and  explicitly  prophesied.  When 
they  alluded  to  the  dawnings  of  a new  era,  and  the  establishment  of 
the  spiritual  Zion  upon  whose  summit  would  bloom  the  Tree  of 
Righteousness,  they  in  no  case  intimated  that  this  would  be  a result 
caused  by  any  such  written  record  as  the  New  Testament. 

Moreover,  it  is  neither  correct  nor  profiitable  for  mankind  to  be- 
lieve that  the  Divine  Mind  ever  instituted  laws  that  he  subsequently 
repealed.  There  exists  no  evidence  to  convince  the  discerning  mind 
that  a single  law  which  once  controlled  and  actuated  Nature,  has 


4SS 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


ever  been  repealed  or  in  any  way  changed : but  there  exists  univer- 
sal and  unequivocal  testimony,  both  in  the  general  manifestations  of 
Nature,  and  in  the  united  experience  of  all  mankind,  that  no  estab- 
lished law,  physical  or  mental,  has  ever  changed  in  the  least  possible 
particular.  It  would  be  as  consistent  and  as  righteous  to  believe  that 
the  Divine  mind  had  created ' plnysical  laws  to  govern  generations 
past,  that  he  afterward  discovered  to  be  incapable  of  performing  all 
he  at  first  intended,  and  that  he  therefore  annihilated  them,  and  crea- 
ted new  ones  to  govern  the  same  beings.  It  would  be  as  proper  to 
suppose  that  the  physiological  laws  actuating  and  governing  man’s 
physical  constitution,  are  now  entirely  different  from  those  controlling 
the  forms  of  previous  generations  — that  the  law  governing  digestion 
was  originally  gross  and  imperfect,  while  food  corresponded  there- 
unto; and  that  now  the  same  law  is  changed  to  an  exquisite  degree 
of  delicacy  to  perform  the  same  office,  because  food  is  differently 
compounded  and  transmitted  to  the  stomach.  If  these  things  had 
ever  happened,  they  would  present  unequivocal  demonstration  that  a 
law  once  instituted  by  the  Divine  Mind,  can  be  changed,  and  a new 
and  different  one  occupy  its  position  to  perform  the  same  office. 

Therefore  the  belief  that  the  law  given  by  Moses  to  govern  the 
Israelites  was  of  divine  origin,  and  was  to  be  to  them  a constant  and 
unfailing  code  of  government,  and  that  afterward  this  law  was 
repealed  and  annihilated  to  give  place  to  a new  and  different  combi- 
nation of  actuating  principles  — is  a belief  in  that  which  is  contradic- 
tory of  the  celestial  purity  of  that  Divine  Creator,  who,  like  his  laws, 
is  unchangeable.  Nothing  is  more  unrighteous  than  limiting  the  ex- 
tent of  divine  knowledge,  and  circumscribing  the  movements  of  Him 
who  communicates  life  and  animation  to  the  whole  Universe. 

Moreover,  if  the  laws  instituted  by  Moses  had  been  of  celestial 
origin,  then  their  effects  would  have  absolutely  corresponded.  It  is 
well  to  inquire  of  those  who  are  familiar  with  the  early  ecclesiastical 
history  of  the  world,  whether  such  effects  were  universally  ex- 
perienced and  manifested?  If  those  laws  originated  in  the  Vortex 
from  which  Nature  sprang,  then  their  effects  would  have  been  in 
accordance  with  the  divinity  of  the  Cause,  even  as  Nature  unequivo- 
cally shows  to  be  the  case  with  herself.  Again,  if  those  laws  were 
of  liuman  and  imperfect  origin,  then  their  effects  would  manifest  im- 
perfection. It  is  well  to  inquire  of  those  who  reflect,  whether  this  is 
not  according  to  the  unvariable  experience  of  all  who  are  governed 
by  arbitrary  and  human  laws? 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


4S9 


The  proposition,  therefore,  that  the  code  of  laws  contained  in  the 
Old  Testament  was  instituted  by  the  Lord,  and  that,  being  no  longer 
useful,  it  suggested  the  establishment  of  new  laws,  which  are  given 
in  the  New  Testament,  is  founded  only  upon  a metaphysical  specu- 
lation upon  the  relation  which  these  Testaments  sustain  to  each  other, 
and  upon  a superficial  apprehension  of  their  teachings.  F urthermore, 
the  partial  knowledge  relative  to  the  teachings  of  the  Bible  is  very 
much  against  the  soundness  of  the  proposition  under  review.  For 
while  theologians  have  defended  the  doctrine  of  the  Divine  origin  of 
the  primitive  code  of  laws,  they  have  at  the  same  time  limited  the 
application  of  those  laws  to  the  favored  nations  of  the  Jews  and  the 
Israelites,  while  at  the  same  time  the  great  majority  of  the  inhabitants 
of  the  earth  were  influenced  and  governed  by  an  entirely  different  set 
of  principles.  An  admission  of  these  views  would  circumscribe  the 
Love  and  Wisdom  of  the  Divine  Mind  to  a very  narrow  sphere  ; 
while  on  the  contrary,  Nature  positively  forbids  such  teachings  and 
such  a belief. 

Many  have  supposed  that  these  arbitrary  laws  and  customs  were 
established  by  the  Divine  Mind  among  those  only  who  were  capable 
of  receiving  their  teachings  and  obeying  their  requirements,  while  all 
the  Asiatic  world  (which  contained  over  two  hundred  millions  of  the 
earth’s  population)  were  left  in  ignorance  and  imbecility,  and  were 
therefore  excluded  from  the  Divine  favor.  But  it  is  manifest  to  ev- 
ery person  of  discernment,  that  any  system  of  worship  producing 
such  effects,  and  being  enjoyed  with  such  marked  exclusiveness, 
must  have  originated  in  the  human  and  not  in  the  Divine  Mind. 
Those  who  enjoy  such  supposed  celestial  privileges,  believe  that  it 
is  because  of  partiality  to  them  in  the  Divine  favor,  that  they  are  thus 
enlightened  and  blest.  It  is  plain  that  if  these  laws  came  to  man 
from  the  Deity,  they  would  flow  directly  among  those  who  need  in- 
struction, and  therefore  the  portion  of  the  world  that  are  not  enlight- 
ened would  soon  become  the  receptacles  of  wisdom  and  Divine 
government,  the  results  of  which  would  correspond  in  their  purity 
and  perfection. 

Neither  is  it  righteous  to  believe  that  the  Deity  would  breathe 
forth  thoughts  to  a select  number  on  earth,  with  the  intention  that 
those  thoughts  should  be  universally  believed  and  made  useful,  and 
meanwhile  leave  their  distribution  to  be  governed  by  the  ten  thou- 
sand contingencies  controlling  all  circumstantial  things,  and  which, 
though  Man  may  generally , he  can  not  individually  control.  Nor  is 


490 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


it  right  to  believe  that  any  system  of  Divine  teaching  can  exist  in  one 
land,  and  be  entirely  unknown  and  unenjoyed  in  another;  or  that  if 
it  ever  extends  to  other  lands,  it  will  depend  for  its  dissemination 
upon  paper,  accuracy  of  printing,  prudence  of  men,  well-constructed 
ships,  favorable  weather,  or  upon  any  contingencies  which  are  capa- 
ble of  preventing  any  artificially-embodied  teachings  from  extending 
any  further  than  to  the  small  portion  of  the  earth’s  inhabitants  among 
whom  they  may  now  exist.  Those  who  have  an  exalted  conception 
of  the  Divine  character  and  government,  repose  confidence  only  in 
that  which  is  beyond  the  influence  of  contingencies  or  circumstan- 
ces, and  which  even  the  constitution  of  Nature  can  not  oppose  or 
reject.  And  such  believe  that  all  laws  emanating  from  the  Divine 
Creator  are  such  as  comprehend  all  living  intelligences,  such  as  know 
no  bounds  and  manifest  no  exclusiveness  in  their  application,  but 
breathe  a universal  security  and  Divine  benevolence. 

§ 130.  Again,  it  has  been  supposed  that  the  Primitive  History  is 
divinely  originated,  and  is  the  centre  of  all  moral  and  righteous  truth, 
to  which  even  Reason  — the  pure  promptings  of  the  judgment  — 
Nature,  and  all  things,  should  be  considered  as  subordinate  ; and 
that  the  truth  therein  contained  is  not  universally  taught  and  believed, 
because  the  greater  portion  of  the  world  is  yet  in  ignorance.  This 
supposition  is  also  founded  upon  a want  of  due  confidence  in  the  po- 
tency of  Truth.  For  any  law,  substance,  or  organization,  that  is  di- 
vinely originated,  will  be  the  same  under  all  circumstances  and  con- 
ditions, and  also  will  be  manifested  alike,  universally.  Remember 
the  earth  revolved,  though  the  whole  world  of  mankind  was  at  the 
same  time  in  ignorance  of  the  fact.  But  with  the  same  propriety 
might  it  be  said  that  the  earth  revolved  not  until  man  ascended  to  a 
proper  degree  of  mental  refinement  to  receive  this  truth,  as  that  any 
other  truths  have  been  concealed  in  the  same  way  for  want  of  mental 
capacity  to  receive  them. 

It  is  useful  to  remark,  also,  that  the  productions  of  the  vegetable 
and  animal  kingdoms  are  constant  and  unfailing,  and  are  not  affected 
by  trie  mental  convictions  of  man  in  the  least  particular.  Nor  has 
one  physiological  law  been  arrested  in  its  operation  by  a universal  ig- 
norance of  its  nature  and  mode  of  action.  For  the  Laws  governing 
the  Solar  System,  developing  the  vegetable  and  animal  kingdoms, 
and  perpetuating  physiological  operations  in  the  human  constitution, 
are  Divine  and  Eternal,  not  affected  by  belief  or  disbelief;  and  thus 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


491 


they  proclaim  the  universal  and  immutable  principles  emanating  from 
the  bosom  of  the  unchangeable  Creator.  If  any  system  of  religion 
has  the  same  Origin  with  these  laws,  then  will  its  effects  be  as  pure 
as  unfailing,  and  as  universal. 

All  arbitrary  laws  that  ever  existed  upon  the  earth  originated  in 
die  human  mind.  And  I do  not  exclude  the  laws  of  the  Hindoos 
derived  from  the  Shaster,  the  laws  of  the  Mohammedans  derived 
from  the  Koran,  the  laws  of  the  Medes  and  Persians  derived  from 
the  Zend  Avesfa,  or  the  laws  of  Moses  derived  from  the  Primitive 
History.  Nor  is  it  proper  to  exclude  any  of  the  diversified  modifica- 
tions of  these  existing  in  any  other  portions  of  the  earth  : because 
their  influence  is  partial,  and  their  tendency  is  to  restrict  the  teachings 
of  the  Universal  Law  as  displayed  in  Nature  and  in  man,  and  they 
are  therefore  unholy,  imperfect,  and  positively  unprofitable. 

From  these  considerations  it  becomes  equally  just  to  suppose  that 
all  religions  and  superficial  systems  of  worship  have  originated  also 
in  the  human  mind.  And  I do  not  exclude  the  system  of  the  Chi- 
nese, of  the  Hindoos,  of  the  Mohammedans,  of  the  Persians,  of  the 
Jews,  or  of  any  who  derive  all  their  distinctive  impressions  from  the 
teachings  of  the  Primitive  History.  Any  belief  that  has  a tendency 
to  destroy  the  natural  benevolence  of  a noble  mind,  or  to  restrict  its 
movements  and  circumscribe  its  sympathies  and  affections  ; or  any 
belief  which  infringes  upon  the  high  moral  susceptibilities  of  man- 
kind, and  compels  man  to  forsake  the  pure  and  divine  promptings 
of  Nature,  or  those  manifestations  of  the  Divine  Mind,  which  are  gen- 
eral and  unrestricted  — is  evidently  demoralizing,  retarding  to  mental 
and  spiritual  progress,  and  tends  to  generate  sectarianism  and  un- 
righteousness, and  is  indeed  not  worthy  of  the  most  contracted  place 
in  the  human  affections,  or  among  the  approved  tenets  of  the  judg- 
ment. 

Those  who  have  speculated  upon  the'  imaginary  relation  which  the 
teachings  of  the  Old  Testament  sustain  to  those  of  the  New,  should 
reflect  seriously  upon  all  the  grounds  upon  which  this  speculation  is 
founded.  They  should  also  consider  that  if  the  Bible  is  of  celestial 
origin,  its  effects  would  have  been  pure  and  celestial.  And  if  it  is  of 
human  origin,  its  effects  must  have  been,  and  will  continue  to  be,  in 
exact  correspondence.  Let  these  reflections  always  constitute  a step 
to  be  taken  before  the  affections  are  bestowed  upon  any  system, 
and  before  the  judgment  assents  to  the  truth  or  falsity  of  any  pro- 
duction. 


492 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


It  will  be  seen  from  past  investigations  that  the  Old  Testament  is 
without  a single  intimation  concerning  the  production  and  reveal- 
ments  of  the  New  ; that  the  prophets  never  intimated  that  such  a book 
would  he  written,  or  once  mentioned  the  name  of  Jesus,  or  referred 
to  the  account  of  him  which  would  he  given  to  the  world  in  the  New 
Testament.  Nor  is  there  any  allusion  to  the  proposition  urged  by 
theologians,  that  the  law  of  Moses,  given  by  the  Lord  of  Abraham, 
Isaac,  and  Jacob,  was  to  govern  the  children  of  Israel  only  until  a 
new  law  and  a different  set  of  principles  were  given  to  take  its  place. 

This,  therefore,  is  the  inevitable  and  legitimate  conclusion  of  these 
investigations  : that  the  Divine  Mind  never  institutes  a law  in  one 
age,  to  be  superseded  in  another,  and  by  a different  law ; that  Nature 
everywhere  proclaims  and  demonstrates  this  truth,  and  that  even  the 
Bible  makes  no  pretensions  to  the  contrary.  The  prevailing  opin- 
ion, therefore,  must  have  arisen  from  a misdirection  of  the  human 
mind  by  early  impressions  and  education,  and  from  misinterpretations 
and  falsifications  of  the  Primitive  History. 

§ 131.  The  first  book  of  the  New  Testament  professes  to  be  ac- 
cording to , though  not  written  hy,  Matthew.  This  fact,  however, 
involves  no  useful  consideration,  though  in  connexion  therewith  it 
may  be  stated  that  the  sayings  of  Matthew  were  subsequently  trans- 
posed and  modified  materially  by  revisers  and  compilers. 

Th  is  book  commences  with  a genealogical  history  of  the  succeed- 
ing generations  from  Abraham  to  the  birth  of  Jesus.  It  then  pro- 
ceeds in  a very  serious  and  unsophisticated  manner  to  relate  the  birth 
of  Jesus.  I am  not  impressed  to  enter  into  particulars  in  relating 
the  history,  or  in  quoting  the  account ; but  it  is  necessary  only  to 
consider  the  internal  manifestations  of  truth  in  speaking  of  the  things 
here  related. 

It  is  well  to  refer  to  Ecclesiasticus  for  a proper  and  truthful  decla- 
ration concerning  the  importance  of  dreams.*  And  with  this  on  the 
mind,  it  is  well  to  observe  that  Joseph  is  said  to  have  received  in- 
struction while  in  a dream , from  an  angel,  concerning  the  holy  and 
immaculate  conception  — which  surprised  Joseph,  because  it  was 
opposed  to  his  experience.  And  he  was  also  directed  in  the  same 
manner  in  his  future  movements.  If  Joseph  had  presented  his  own 
testimony  that  he  had  bad  this  influx  of  Divine  instruction,  then 
it  would  be  more  proper  for  confidence  to  be  placed  in  the  relation. 

* Ecclesiasticus  xxxiv.  1-7. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


493 


But  the  book  was  not  written  until  long  after  this  alleged  occurrence, 
and  after  the  death  of  Jesus. 

Moreover,  it  is  not  proper  to  believe  that  a dream  would  have  been 
the  only  medium  of  the  declaration  of  such  a wonderful  and  incom- 
prehensible occurrence.  If  the  Divine  Mind  had  intended  to  pro- 
duce a conviction  in  the  world  that  this  child  was  of  his  Spirit,  some 
more  grand  and  noble  manifestations  would  have  occurred  — such  as 
would  have  been  convincing  from  their  very  nature  — such  as  would 
have  been  lofty,  sublime,  and  magnificent,  becoming  the  character  of 
the  Omnipotent  Parent.  The  whole  world  would  have  received  a 
thrill  of  conviction  — and  of  such  a nature,  too,  that  the  judgment 
would  approve,  and  Nature  everywhere  sanction.  Instead  of  this 
being  the  case  in  the  instance  before  us,  a portion  of  the  world  is  led 
to  believe  that  a violation  of  physiological  law  must  have  occurred, 
and  that  the  reproductive  principles  established  in  Nature  were  en- 
tirely set  aside  : moreover,  such  believe  that  the  conception  was  pro- 
duced and  determined  by  an  invisible  and  unknown  Cause. 

And  thus  the  occurrence  is  called  a miracle , because  of  the  strange 
and  incomprehensible  causes  and  violations  that  were  engaged  in  its 
accomplishment.*  Mankind  believe  this  because  it  is  related  in  the 
first  book  of  the  New  Testament,  and  because  it  has  been  believed 
by  their  forefathers  and  confirmed  by  commentators.  And  it  is  at 
the  present  time  immersed  into  the  hereditary  affections  of  men,  but 
is  not  in  the  least  degree  sanctioned  by  a well  constituted  and  devel- 
oped judgment.  It  is  a speculative  hypothesis,  but  not  a well-ground- 
ed conviction. 

Philosophical  researchers  and  investigators  do  not  believe  in  any 
law  as  governing  Nature,  the  planetary  system,  or  the  Universe,  be- 
cause their  forefathers  believed  it,  but  because  their  judgments  are 
convinced,  and  Nature  incessantly  exhibits  demonstration  of  the  truth 
of  the  conviction.  If  this  were  the  case  with  theological  investiga- 
tors, then  would  hereditary  affection  for  peculiar  modes  of  faith  be 
banished,  and  the  judgment  would  receive  and  cherish  only  that  of 
which  all  things  around  and  above  contribute  evidence. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  appeal  to  the  united  experience  of  mankind 
to  prove  that  such  a preternatural  conception  is  not  true  : it  is  only 
necessary  to  contemplate  upon  the  celestial  majesty  of  the  Divine 
Mind,  and  upon  his  unchangeable  laws,  to  know  that  he  would  never 

* The  author  remarked  incidentally  in  this  connexion  that  the  “ virgin”  simpl) 
meant  young  woman  in  the  language  of  these  writings. 


494 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


be  engaged  in  such  a positive  transgression  of  his  own  nature  and 
dignity,  or  condescend  to  produce  such  a trivial  evidence  of  his  Di- 
vine purpose  and  of  the  superior  character  of  his  Son. 

The  prevalent  ideas  concerning  this  conception  can  not  possibly 
be  received  by  every  mind  ; and  it  must  he  plain  to  all  who  possess 
any  high  degree  of  spiritual  discernment,  that  whatever  opinion  can 
not  enter  the  universal  mind,  and  be  sanctioned  by  the  sublime  fac- 
ulty of  Reason,  must  he  an  untruth. 

The  human  mind  will  admit  all  things  that  agree  with  its  nature, 
and  are  congenial  to  its  requirements.  But  no  man  (mark  the  asser- 
tion) ever  really  believed  the  miraculous  conception  as  related  in  the 
first  book  of  the  New  Testament.  But  mankind  have  cherished  the 
opinion,  not  from  a conviction  of  judgment,  but  merely  from  an  af- 
fection for  hereditary  impressions.  Thus  faith  in  this  idea  has  never 
ascended  the  throne  of  Reason  : and  when  the  reasoning  faculties 
turn  their  attention  to  the  faith  of  the  affections,  they  inevitably  dis- 
cover an  unreal  and  imaginary  belief,  and  retreat  from  the  view  as  by 
a positive  repulsion.  The  faculty  of  Reason  is  a flower  of  the  Spirit : 
it  blooms,  and  its  fragrance  is  liberty  and  knowledge.  But  the  affec- 
tions flow  merely  from  sensation,  upon  which  is  impressed  hereditary 
faith.  This  faith  exists  only  as  an  unreal  direction  of  the  desires  and 
affections  ; and  from  the  workings  of  these,  some  are  led  to  believe 
that  the  judgments  are  convinced.  This  is  only  supporting  faith  by 
faith,  and  endeavoring  to  deceive  the  judgment.  It  is  standing  in 
awe,  fearing  that  Reason  may  break  her  fetters,  discover  the  decep- 
tion, and  discard  all  hereditary  belief  for  ever. 

The  proposition  should  be  well  considered,  That  no  judgment  ever 
has,  or  ever  can  be,  convinced  of  the  truth  of  the  miraculous  concep- 
tion. And  this  is  presumptive  evidence  upon  which  to  predicate  the 
conclusion  that  the  idea  in  question  is  untrue.  For  the  reasoning 
faculty  is  unfolded  as  a result  of  an  immutable  law,  a law  that  is  pure 
and  divine.  Consequently,  the  judgment  — the  reason  — the  intel- 
lect of  man  — must  be  correspondingly  divine  ; and  therefore  what- 
ever it  can  not  sanction,  the  Divine  Mind  never  created. 

The  account  given  of  the  birth  of  Jesus  by  Matthew  (16es  not  indi- 
cate any  intention  on  the  part  of  Joseph  and  Mary  to  have  it  under- 
stood and  believed  that  he  was  the  legitimate  Son  of  the  Deity,  thus 
deposited  and  developed  in  a material  form,  as  is  claimed  by  theo- 
logians. If  this  account  of  the  birth  was  to  be  the  basis  upon  which 
all  evidence  should  rest,  of  the  Divine  incarnation,  then  would  Joseph 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


495 


have  proclaimed  these  facts  in  a tangible  form  to  the  world,  as  also 
would  Mary  have  proclaimed  her  absolute  knowledge  of  the  same ; 
and  this  would  have  established  the  truth  in  the  minds  of  many  who 
dwelt  within  the  neighborhood  where  the  occurrence  took  place. 
This  knowledge  would  not  have  been  withholden  from  the  world  for 
the  space  of  many  months,  while  the  actual  indication  of  the  con- 
ception existed,  during  which  time  thousands  of  testimonies  would 
have  transpired  to  produce  universal  conviction  and  knowledge. 

§ 132.  Matthew,  after  having  related  the  account  as  he  received  it 
traditionally,  closes  by  saying — “And  all  this  was  done  that  the 
prophecy  of  Esaias  might  be  fulfilled,  saying,  ‘ A virgin  shall  conceive 
and  bear  a son.’  ” This  passage  is  entirely  disconnected  from  the 
subject  on  which  Matthew  was  speaking,  and  can  not  possibly  be 
made  to  represent  an  intention  on  the  part  of  Isaiah  to  prophecy 
concerning  this  circumstance,  nor  as  in  any  way  affirming  its  truth,  al- 
though the  occurrence  is  said  to  be  a fulfilment  of  the  prophecy. 

Again,  such  a Divine  manifestation  of  original  design,  would  not 
have  been  inculcated  by  an  appeal  to  such  superficial  evidence  as 
proving  a foreknowledge  of  the  occurrence,  or  as  demonstrating 
its  accomplishment.  This  quotation  is  entirely  derived  from  the 
seventh  chapter  and  fourteenth  verse  of  Isaiah,  and  is  used  for  a 
purpose  for  which  it  was  manifestly  not  designed.  It  is  well  to 
understand  the  origin  of  this  expression  in  Isaiah,  and  thus  to  see 
how  utterly  disconnected  the  passage  is  with  the  circumstance  related 
by  Matthew.  After  the  death  of  Solomon,  the  Jewish  nation  became 
divided  into  two  kingdoms  or  monarchies.  The  kingdom  of  Juda 
possessed  Jerusalem  as  its  centre  and  capital,  and  at  the  time  this 
passage  was  written,  Ahaz  was  their  king.  The  other  nation  was 
called  the  kingdom  of  Israel,  whose  capital  was  in  Samaria,  and  Pekah 
was  at  this  time  their  king.  The  nation  of  Juda  followed  the  line 
of  David,  but  the  nation  of  Israel  that  of  Saul.  At  this  time,  also, 
Resin  was  the  king  of  Syria.  Pekah  and  Resin  fought  many  battles 
against  each  other,  each,  meanwhile,  entertaining  hostile  intentions 
toward  Ahaz  and  his  kingdom,  which  was  then  at  peace.  Subse- 
quently, Resin,  king  of  Syria,  and  Pekah,  king  of  Israel,  joined 
their  armies  and  marched  into  the  kingdom  of  Juda,  against  Ahaz. 
Isaiah  (according  to  previous  delineation)  was . generally  beloved 
because  of  his  strong  social  affections,  and  for  the  abundant  sympathy 
which  he  ever  manifested  toward  those  who  were  under  trials  and 


496 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


afflictions,  of  whom  he  was  a general  consoler.  Being  a resi- 
dent of  the  city  of  Jerusalem,  and  possessing  much  popularity,  he 
was  requested  by  King  Ahaz  to  come  and  prophesy  ^concerning  the 
result  of  his  anticipated  contention  with  the  two  kingdoms  that  were 
then  against  him.  After  having  some  conversation  with  Isaiah,  he 
called  for  a sign  as  evidence  of  the  truth  of  Tsaiah’s  prophecy ; to 
which  the  latter  said,  “ Behold,  a virgin  is*  with  child,  and  beareth  a 
son.  Butter  and  honey  shall  he  eat,  and  before  he  shall  know  to 
refuse  the  evil  and  choose  the  good,  these  kingdoms  shall  be  relieved 
of  both  their  kings.” 

According  to  biblical  chronology  it  was  over  seven  hundred  years 
after  this  prophecy  that  the  birth  of  Christ  related  by  Matthew  took 
place.  But,  as  has  been  shown  by  previous  remarks,  the  signifier 
must  precede  the  thing  signified,  or  else  there  is  no  signification. 
Therefore,  if  Isaiah  had  reference  to  the  birth  of  Christ,  then  the  sign 
was  no  evidence  nor  signification  to  Ahaz,  inasmuch  as  it  happened 
after  the  thing  to  be  signified.  It  is  plain  that  Isaiah  had  no  such  refer- 
ence ; and  it  is  not  right  to  look  upon  such  superficial  evidence  as 
sustaining  that  which  has  been  supposed  by  commentators  to  be  of 
divine  origin  and  design.  When  Isaiah  prophesied  concerning  the 
establishment  of  the  kingdom  of  peace,  and  the  growth  of  the  Tree 
of  Righteousness,  he  employed  general  and  unlimited  expfessions. 
He  presented  no  sign,  with  the  exception  of  those  signs  existing  in 
the  tendency  of  things,  and  in  the  nature  of  his  interior  promptings 
and  intuitions. 

Nothing  could  be  so  much  against  the  character  and  dignity  of  any 
individual  as  such  unjust  and  unrighteous  accounts  as  are  given  con- 
cerning the  birth  and  life  of  Jesus.  Such  things  as  are  related  are 
indeed  derogatory  to  the  purity  and  refinement  of  the  character  of 
this  personage,  in  the  minds  of  those  who  reflect  understandingly. 
The  account  also  derogates  from  the  character  of  the  Divine  Mind, 
and  removes  from  him  his  celestial  dignity. 

Matthew  proceeds  to  relate  an  account  concerning  a star  that  was 
seen  in  the  east  by  the  wise  men  who  came  from  the  east  to  Jeru- 
salem ; and  these  were  instructed  by  Herod  to  go  and  search  out 
the  residence  of  the  child,  that  he,  with  them,  might  go  and  worship 
him.  He  relates  that  they  followed  the  star,  which  was  a silent 
indicator  of  the  place  where  the  child  was. 

* The  speaker  incidentally  remarked,  in  conversation,  that  the  present  tense  was 
employed  by  Isaiah. 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


497 


It  is  well  to  remark,  that  it  is  not  easy  to  behold  a star  in  the 
daytime,  nor  is  it  probable  that  any  solar  system  could  be  so  dis- 
concerted, or  its  movements  so  deranged,  as  that  a star  belonging 
to  it  could  perform  the  office  of  a messenger.  This  account, 
however,  is  only  related  as  a traditional  impression  received  by 
Matthew. 

After  the  wise  men  found  the  child,  they  presented  beautiful  gifts 
of  gold,  myrrh,  and  frankincense,  and  departed,  by  interior  direction, 
to  another  portion  of  the  land  that  they  might  not  be  compelled  to 
inform  Herod  of  the  child’s  locality. 

Again,  it  is  said  that  Joseph  dreamed,  and  by  impressions  thus 
received,  was  led  to  depart,  with  his  wife  and  child,  into  Egypt.  It 
is  well,  however,  to  remark,  that  Herod’s  proclamation  to  put  to 
death  all  the  male  children,  was  generally  circulated  before  Joseph 
departed  into  Egypt ; and  it  does  not  evince  much  capacity  of 
discernment  for  a man  under  any  perilous  circumstances,  to  rest 
when  in  danger  until  prompted  by  a dream  to  escape. 

They  departed  into  Egypt,  and  remained  there  until  the  death  of 
Herod.  This  Matthew  endeavors  to  confirm  by  quoting  a passage 
from  the  eleventh  chapter  of  Hosea  and  first  verse.  It  is  only  neces- 
sary to  read  the  passage  quoted  to  discover  its  non-allusion  to  that 
to  which  it  is  here  applied,  and  the  uselessness  of  the  application.  It 
will  be  seen  that  the  chronology  of  Matthew,  and  his  account  given 
of  the  death  of  Herod,  contradict  entirely  the  record  of  the  same  cir- 
cumstance in  the  book  of  Luke.  For  Luke  in  the  third  chapter  and 
twenty-third  verse,  says  that  “Jesus  began  to  be  about  thirty  years  of 
age”  before  he  began  to  preach,  “being  as  was  supposed  the  son  of 
Joseph  and  afterward,  viz.,  in  the  thirteenth  chapter  and  thirty-first 
verse,  he  relates  that  one  came  to  Jesus  and  said,  “Get  thee  out  and 
depart  hence,  for  Herod  will  kill  thee.”  The  language  which  fol- 
lows is  exceedingly  unlike  the  kind  spirit  of  Jesus.  He  is  repre- 
sented as  calling  Herod  a fox,  and  sending  a message  which  could 
not  have  been  prompted  by  his  refined  soul.  Thus,  Luke  repre- 
sents Jesus  as  being  thirty  years  of  age  before  he  began  to  preach, 
and  that  at  that  time  Herod  sought  his  life  : while  Matthew  relates 
that  Herod  died  before  he  returned  from  Egypt.  This  discrepancy 
has  been  overcome  by  commentators,  by  referring  Luke’s  account  to  a 
king  who  succeeded  Herod,  of  the  same  name.  But  evidence  of  the 
independent  origin  of  the  two  accounts  is  not  derived  from  any  reli- 
able profane  or  ecclesiastical  history,  inasmuch  as  these  manuscripts 

32 


498 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


were  uncollected  and  uncompiled  for  more  than  three  hundred  years 
after  the  birth  and  life  of  Jesus. 


§ 133.  Matthew  then  proceeds  to  speak  of  the  prophecy  in  the 
book  of  Hosea,  eleventh  chapter,  first  verse,  which  says,  “ out  of 
Egypt  have  I called  my  Son.”  This  passage  has  no  significa 
tion  except  in  connexion  with  the  verses  preceding  and  following  it. 

Then,  again,  in  connexion  with  the  account  of  Herod’s  putting  to 
death  all  the  male  children,  he  quotes  from  the  thirty-first  chapter  of 
Jeremiah  and  fifteenth  verse,  which  says  : “ In  Rama  a voice  was 
heard,  weeping  and  lamentation,  Rachel  weeping  for  her  children, 
and  would  not  be  comforted,  because  they  were  not.”  It  will  be 
remembered  that  Jeremiah  was  a pathetic  describer  of  suffering,  and 
a sympathizer  with  those  who  were  of  his  brethren  and  nation,  and 
also  that  he  himself  suffered  many  afflictions,  of  which  his  lamenta- 
tions evidently  bear  testimony.  This  passage  is  derived  from  one 
of  his  pathetic  strains  while  meditating  upon  a subject  sustaining  no 
connexion  whatever  with  the  destruction  of  the  children  by  Herod. 

Then,  again,  Matthew  speaks  in  connexion  with  the  return  of 
Joseph  from  Egypt,  and  his  going  to  the  city  of  Nazareth,  saying 
that  this  was  done  “that  it  might  be  fulfilled  which  was  spoken  by 
the  prophet,  He  shall  be  called  a Nazarene.”  (Matt.  ii.  23.)  At  the 
time  this  passage  was  recorded,  this  expression  existed  in  one  book 
of  the  Psalms,  but  this  was  subsequently  voted  uncanonical;  and 
hence  at  the  present  time  there  is  no  such  book  in  the  Bible. 

Further  on  (chap.  viii.  16,  17),  there  is  a quotation  from  the  proph- 
ecies of  Isaiah,  fifty-third  chapter,  fourth  verse,  which  Matthew  cites 
in  connexion  with  the  healing  of  the  sick  and  casting  out  of  devils, 
saying  that  “ himself  took  our  infirmities  and  bore  our  sicknesses.” 
This  is  in  no  way  applicable  to  the  doings  of  Jesus  in  casting  out  dev- 
ils and  healing  the  sick  ; for  notwithstanding  Isaiah  mentions  no  name, 
his  remarks  are  distinctly  and  only  applicable  to  the  sufferings  and 
afflictions  of  one  Jeremiah,  who  lived  at  the  time  this  was  written.* 
Although  the  allusion  is  indefinite  and  obscure,  yet  it  is  decidedly  to 
him  that  the  passage  alludes.  It  could  not  have  applied  to  Jesus  or 
his  kind  and  gentle  treatment  of  the  sick  and  diseased  ; for  he  neither 

* In  answer  to  a question,  the  clairvoyant  informed  us  that  this  Jeremiah  was  a 
friend  and  associate  of  Isaiah,  was  a man  of  very  amiable  disposition,  and  a general 
sympathizer  with  human  suffering  — but  still,  from  various  causes,  was  subjected  to 
persecutions  and  afflictions. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


499 


took  upon  himself  their  infirmities  nor  bore  their  sicknesses,  but  was 
merely  active  in  relieving  persons  of  those  afflictions  which  neither 
they,  himself,  nor  any  other  person  afterward,  possessed. 

Matthew  also  quotes  a prophecy  as  referring  to  Christ’s  dwelling 
in  Capernaum.*  This,  again,  upon  examination,  appears  to  bear  no 
distinct  evidence  of  being  intended  for  the  purpose  for  which  it  is 
employed  by  Matthew. 

A vain,  Matthew  relates  that  Peter  drew  his  sword  and  cut  off  an 
ear  of  one  of  the  high-priest’s  followers.  He  was  commanded  to 
desist  from  any  defence,  and  permit  the  enemies  of  Jesus  to  proceed 
in  their  own  way,  that  another  prophecy  in  the  Scriptures  might  be 
fulfilled  (Matt.  xxvi.  51,  56).  But  the  verification  is  not  discovera- 
ble in  any  prophecy,  when  the  same  is  duly  analyzed.  Neither  is  it 
just  to  associate  the  deeds  of  charity,  purity,  and  benevolence,  per- 
formed by  Peter,  w’ith  such  an  act  as  is  here  ascribed  to  him  ; for 
Peter  was  a much-engaged  disciple  of  the  great  Reformer.  Swords, 
and  their  use,  have  no  possible  connexion  with  charity,  purity,  and 
righteousness. 

Again  : a quotation  from  Zechariah  (xi.  12,  13)  is  made  to  refer  to 
the  thirty  pieces  of  silver  with  which  a potter’s-field  was  bought  for 
the  burial  of  strangers  (Matt,  xxvii.  5,  9).  This,  however,  is  not  the 
intention  of  the  original  text,  where  the  whole  account  is  distinctly 
given  as  having  no  reference  to  a potter’s-field,  but  merely  to  a 
potter : while  Matthew  makes  the  account  affirm  the  thirty  pieces  of 
silver  in  possession  of  Judas  to  have  been  expended  for  a potter' s- 
jield. 

He  also  (chap.  xxi.  1-5)  relates  the  account  of  Jesus  riding  into 
Jerusalem  upon  an  ass  as  fulfilling  another  prophecy  (in  Zechariah 
ix.  9).  Commentators  have  supposed  that  this  was  an  act  evincing 
the  gentleness  and  humility  of  the  character  of  Jesus.  But  there 
exists  no  manifest  reason  for  this  conclusion,  inasmuch  as  asses  were 
the  animals  usually  employed  for  such  purposes,  and  camels  and 
dromedaries  were  engaged  in  more  oppressive  labors. 

Then,  again,  he  quotes  (chap,  xxvii.  35)  from  the  prophecies  (Ps. 
xxii.  18)  in  speaking  of  the  casting  of  lots  for  the  garments  of  Jesus, 
in  order  to  determine  to  whom  they  should  belong.  This  can  not 
sustain  or  confirm  this  prophecy;  neither  can  the  allusion  or  the  quo- 
tation be  of  any  use  in  proving  prior  knowledge  of  the  occurrence 


* Matthew  iv.  15,  16,  as  taken  from  Isaiah  ix.  1,  2. 


500 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


for  the  casting  of  lots  for  garments  in  similar  cases  was  a universal 
custom  of  those  clays. 

In  all,  Matthew  makes  twelve  quotations  from  the  prophecies  of 
the  Old  Testament,  each  of  which  is  as  disconnected  from  the  sub- 
ject to  elucidate  which  it  was  quoted,  as  the  birth  of  Christ  was  dis- 
connected from  the  fact  that  the  kingdom  of  Ahaz  should  not  be  in- 
vaded or  overthrown.  These  are  collateral  and  abstract  sentences 
contained  in  various  hooks  of  the  Old  Testament,  from  which,  if  dis- 
connected, they  have  no  signification.  And  it  must  be  indeed  un- 
righteous for  any  history,  record,  or  system,  to  urge  such  superficial 
and  evanescent  evidences  to  sustain  it.  And  nothing  can  convey 
stronger  and  more  unequivocal  evidence  against  any  system,  history, 
or  alleged  occurrence,  than  the  discovery  that  it  is  sustained  by  a 
number  of  superficial  and  merely-apparent  proofs,  all  of  which,  when 
analyzed,  are  not  worthy  the  serious  reflection  of  any  mind,  to  say 
nothing  of  the  character  of  that  Divine  Being  who  rules  omnipotent 
in  higher  spheres.  I find  no  allusion  in  the  Old  Testament  to  any 
isolated  circumstance  that  happened  at  the  birth  or  during  the  life  of 
Jesus.  And  even  if  those  passages  quoted  by  Matthew  appear  in 
their  form  of  expression  applicable  to  any  circumstance  that  did  occur, 
this  does  not  prove  that  they  are  divine  or  genuine.  F or  these  occur- 
rences recorded  by  Matthew  were  minor  and  isolated  circumstances, 
having  no  connexion  with  general  law,  and  could  not  therefore  have 
been  truthfully  foretold  by  any  person  receiving  interior  or  divine  in- 
struction. To  understand  the  force  and  application  of  former  re- 
marks upon  the  probabilities  of  truthful  prophecy,  it  would  be  well 
to  compare  the  superficial  quotations  made  by  Matthew,  with  the  ex- 
planation which  has  been  given  of  the  nature  and  province  of  all 
prophecy  or  interior  instruction. 

§ 134.  Having  briefly  spoken  concerning  the  superficial  evidences 
accumulated  by  Matthew  to  verify  his  traditional  history,  I will  now 
proceed  to  speak  of  the  origin  of  many  important  doctrines,  at  least 
esteemed  as  such  by  theologians,  as  derived  from  the  book  of  Mat- 
thew. This  book,  contains  many  sayings  which  it  is  righteous  and 
profitable  to  analyze  and  explain,  these  holding,  as  they  do,  a close 
relation  to  real,  transpiring  facts,  from  which  the  materials  of  the 
record  have  been  superficially  collected. 

Matthew  proceeds  to  relate,  in  a promiscuously  historical  manner, 
the  selection  of  the  apostles  who  were  to  follow  Jesus  and  assist  his 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


501 


workings,  and  also  to  promulgate  his  existence,  character,  and  teach- 
ings, to  various  nations  of  the  earth.  He  also  gives  an  account  con- 
cerning the  sermon  that  was  preached  upon  the  mount,  the  influence 
it  had  upon  the  auditors,  the  observations  which  the  multitude  made 
upon  its  prominent  features,  and  concerning  the  principles  therein 
inculcated.  He  also  relates  the  prophecy  of  Jesus  concerning  the 
destruction  of  Jerusalem,  and  the  end  of  that  era,  age,  world,  or  dis- 
pensation. On  the  question  as  to  the  origin  and  truth  of  these  rela- 
tions, I am  not  at  the  present  time  intending  to  speak  ; but  the  object 
is  to  analyze  some  of  the  most  prominent  theological  speculations  that 
have  been  based  upon  this  merely-historical  narrative  of  Matthew. 

The  first  of  these  is  the  opinion  concerning  the  use  and  intention 
of  the  birth  and  teachings  of  Christ.  It  has  been  supposed  that  he 
was  a designed  instrument,  possessing  in  spirit  the  Divine  qualities 
of  the  Creator,  to  redeem  the  race  from  a low  degree  of  physical 
wretchedness  and  spiritual  death,  so  that  they  might  thus  be  restored 
to  a position  they  once  occupied,  and  become  subjects  of  the  favor 
and  goodness  of  the  Divine  Mind. 

This  speculation  is  founded  upon  the  assumption  that  man  at  one 
time  was  pure  and  unsophisticated,  and  far  more  advanced  in  physical 
and  intellectual  attainment,  than  at  the  present  period.  It  is  plain 
that  this  is  founded  upon  a very  equivocal  and  unwarrantable  basis, 
because  it  is  strictly  mythological  — an  opinion  that  arose  from  the 
early  conception  of  the  origin  of  evil.  It  was  entirely  imaginary,  and 
was  handed  down  through  each  succeeding  generation,  undergoing 
successive  modifications,  until  it  was  historically  introduced  into  the 
Old  Testament,  from  which  it  has  been  extensively  disseminated  by 
theologians.  Moreover,  the  belief  in  such  a defect  in  the  human  race 
• — in  such  an  absolute  retrogression  — is  a virtual  denial  of  the  su- 
perior harmony  of  Creation,  and  of  the  perfection  and  the  universal 
knowledge  of  the  Divine  Cause  ; and  the  Deity  is  thereby  charged 
with  a want  of  Wisdom  — with  an  incompetency  to  produce  an  Effect 
(which  is  the  Universe)  corresponding  to  himself,  who  is  the  Cause. 
From  this,  it  is  made  unequivocally  evident  that  this  speculation  con- 
cerning the  design  of  Christ’s  advent  is  only  attributable  to  the  fertile 
imaginations  of  those  who  confined  their  spiritual  and  natural  ob- 
servations to  the  superficial  inconsistencies  consequent  on  human 
existence. 

Again,  it  is  supposed  that  Jesus  came  to  inform  the  race  of  princi- 
ples never  before  taught,  by  and  from  which  mankind  might  be  re- 


502 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


stored  to  primitive  innocence  and  spiritual  perfection.  This  is  a 
proposition  equally  unfounded  : for  it  can  not  be  proved  from  his 
teachings,  or  from  any  ecclesiastical  history,  that  any  principles  were 
by  him  promulgated  that  had  not  an  existence  in  the  minds  of  many 
enlightened  men  in  previous  ages.  Furthermore,  this  is  giving  him 
power  to  create  that  which  could  not  be  created,  and  of  unfolding 
that  which  had  no  connexion  with  the  nature  and  constitution  of  man, 
nor  even  with  the  pre-knowledge  of  the  Great  Positive  Mind.  If  he 
came  to  teach  that  the  germ  of  which  was  never  before  deposited  in 
the  human  mind,  then  would  his  teachings  have  been  unprofitable 
and  beyond  the  possibility  of  any  human  practice.  If  they  were  new — 
disconnected  from  the  teachings  of  Nature— then  would  man  be  in- 
capable of  conceiving  of  their  importance,  because  they  would  have 
no  affinity  with  any  principles  dwelling  in  his  constitution. 

Again  : it  is  supposed  that  he  came  to  be  and  act  as  a mediator 
between  the  Divine  Mind  and  his  children.  That  is,  to  be  a creator 
of  a mutual  affinity,  such  as  might  join  together  the  universal  crea- 
tions and  their  Creator  ! to  form  a connexion  between  Cause  and 
Effect,  so  that  a relation  might  exist  between  them  which  never  had 
before  existed  ! If  he  was  designed  as  a mediator,  then  he  was  en- 
tirely incapable  of  performing  the  office  for  which  he  was  set  apart. 
For  how  is  it  possible  for  a medium  to  be  added  to  any  already-united 
system,  the  relations  of  which  are  the  relations  of  Cause  and  Effect? 
This  proposition  is  also  superficially  founded  ; and  its  tendency  is  to 
destroy  in  the  mind  the  order  and  uniformity  of  the  vast  creations  of 
the  Universe,  all  of  which  sprang  spontaneously  from  an  inconceiv- 
able Vortex  by  the  impulse  of  an  Eternal  Cause. 

The  belief  that  Christ  was  to  be  a medium,  by  and  through  which 
man  might  ultimately  ascend  to  higher  spheres,  is  a belief  which  is 
most  unrighteous,  and  has  a tendency  to  create  hostility,  exclusive 
sectarianism,  and  presumptive  arrogance.  It  elevates  one  person 
above  another,  and  tends  to  establish  exclusive  privileges.  It  tends 
to  impress  deeply  upon  the  uninformed  of  mankind  that  they  are  by 
nature  exceedingly  sinful,  depraved,  and  despised  of  Him  who  is 
called  their  Creator.  It  breathes  envy,  bigotry,  and  superstition,  into 
the  heart  of  man,  into  the  bosom  of  society,  and  almost  causes  the 
human  judgment  to  sanction  the  same.  It  is  a belief  that  depreci- 
ates the  constitution  of  Nature,  of  man,  and  of  his  spiritual  principles, 
together  with  that  Cause  who  breathed  them  all  into  being.  It  is 
indeed  a belief  unworthy  the  human  affections  ; it  is  too  unholy  to 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


503 


be  entertained  even  by  the  uncivilized  of  the  earth  ; it  should  be 
banished  from  the  world  for  ever,  because  it  is  destructive  to  a 
proper  knowledge  of  the  cause  of  human  existence,  of  the  charac- 
teristics of  man,  of  his  spiritual  possessions,  and  of  his  immortal 
destination. 


§ 135.  Again  : it  is  supposed  that  Jesus  came  to  bring  life  and 
immortality  to  light ; and  that  by  revealing  these  to  man,  and  em- 
ploying means  to  produce  conviction  of  their  truth,  the  race  became 
instructed,  and  thus  knew  of  spiritual  life  and  an  immortal  existence. 
This  proposition  can  not  be  legitimately  derived  from  the  New  Testa- 
ment ; for  there  it  stands  as  a mere  incidental  and  impassioned  remark, 
and  not  as.  designating  an  important  feature  in  the  nature  of  Christ’s 
mission.  If  the  revealment  of  this  truth  was  the  intention,  and  Christ 
was  the  means  employed  for  that  purpose,  then  the  means  has  been 
inadequate  to  the  end  ; for  life  and  immortality  are  neither  demon- 
strated, nor  clearly  taught  in  any  of  the  books,  either  of  the  New  or 
Old  Testament.  A conviction  of  life  and  immortality  flows  only 
from  a knowledge  of  the  nature  and  constitution  of  matter,  and  of  the 
Divine  Essence  which  animates  it  and  all  forms  in  being  : also  from 
the  spontaneous  teachings  of  the  Spirit,  and  the  corresponding  sanc- 
tions of  Nature,  of  the  Divine  Mind,  and  of  the  immutable  principles 
which  control  and  make  of  the  Universe  a perfect  and  harmonious 
Whole.  He  did  not  unfold  the  knowledge  of  these  things ; and 
therefore  it  can  not  be  truthfully  said  that  he  was  designed  to  bring 
life  and  immortality  to  light.  Besides  this,  the  doctrine  of  immor- 
tality and  a belief  in  spiritual  life  existed  in  the  world  long  before 
either  the  New  or  the  Old  Testament  was  written. 

Then  it  might  be  argued  that  he  came  to  confirm  and  develop  that 
which  had  already  been  implanted  in  the  human  mind.  Even  this 
can  not  be  true  : for  he  neither  confirmed  nor  developed  the  previ- 
ous convictions  of  men  on  this  subject  : nor  have  the  teachings  of 
any  portion  of  the  Bible  done  this;  but  instead  thereof  they  have,  as 
interpreted,  drawn  a darkening  mantle  between  the  natural  yearnings 
of  the  spirit  and  the  blooming  beauty  of  the  celestial  home.  The 
Bible  has  even  darkened  the  pathway  that  once  was  illumined  by  the 
spiritual  promptings  of  mankind.  It  has  obstructed  the  progress  of 
physical  and  spiritual  development,  and  has  therefore  operated  against, 
its  alleged  design,  which  was  to  inform  man  of  the  relations  of  his 
present  existence,  and  to  illustrate  and  demonstrate  future  and  im- 


504 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


mortal  life.  It  has  failed  to  do  this,  and  hence  the  proposition  under 
review  is  more  a child  of  the  imagination  than  of  the  properly-unfolded 
human  spirit. 

Again  : it  is  supposed  that  Christ  was  designed  as  a medium  by 
and  through  whom  man  might  escape  eternal  condemnation.  This 
is,  indeed,  an  opinion  not  transcending  the  theology  of  the  early 
inhabitants.  And  what  is  more  notorious  still,  is,  that  it  is  believed, 
and  flourishes  to  the  greatest  extent,  where  folly,  ignorance,  and  su- 
perstition, exist  in  abundance.  It  is  no  less  notorious  that  as  the 
human  mind  discards  preconceived  opinions,  and  becomes  intelli- 
gent, this  horrible  and  unrighteous  dogma  recedes  ; and  it  is  as  far 
from  an  enlightened  judgment,  as  intelligence  is  from  ignorance.  It 
originated  in  darkness-r-it  develops  darkness  — and  is  itself  so  ex- 
ceedingly dark,  that  it  can  not  approach  the  serene  and  brilliant  light 
that  surrounds  the  throne  of  an  enlightened  reason.  Men  have  been 
led  to  believe  in  the  existence  of  an  ocean  of  unceasing  flame,  where 
one  wave  of  fire  succeeds  another,  sustained  by  the  fuel  of  discarded 
and  condemned  human  spirits,  whose  sufferings  would  add  to  the 
glory  and  majesty  of  the  Divine  Mind,  who,  with  all  complacency, 
receives  the  perfumes  thereof,  as  the  fragrance  from  an  open  flower  1 
By  him  this  burning  abyss  is  thought  to  have  been  created;  and  that 
from  him  also  proceed  the  fiery  darts  aimed  by  the  omnipotent  ven- 
geance, of  dark  and  terrible  damnation.  Indeed,  it  is  supposed  that 
he  is  the  great  Fire  Kindler , and  that  he  fans  the  flames  by  his  own 
breath,  and  consumes  innumerable  spirits  of  his  own  creation,  in  the 
bosom  of  that  terrible  gulf,  that  has  so  divinely  and  so  properly 
originated  ! 

There  is  no  truth,  nor  can  it  be  said  that  there  is  one  particle  of 
pure  thought,  in  the  proposition  that  Christ  came  to  pay  a debt  that 
mankind  contracted.  If  this  were  true,  then  even  the  fiery  gulf 
supposed  to  have  been  created,  would  be  ultimately  robbed  of  its 
possessions  ; and  thus  the  Creator  would  be  involved  in  the  charge 
of  instituting  that  which  is  absolutely  useless,  and,  consequently,  in 
the  charge  of  absolute  imperfection.  As  this  popular  and  imagina- 
tive belief  originated  in  the  very  bosom  of  darkness,  ignorance,  and 
imbecility,  it  is  not  proper  to  dwell  upon  its  hideousness  and  absurd- 
ity, because  it  will  die  in  the  habitation  of  its  birth,  and  thus  ba 
sacrificed  on  the  altar  of  pure  Reason  and  Intelligence. 

Christ,  in  foretelling  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem,  according  to 
the  record  of  Matthew,  made  use  of  many  metaphorical  illustrations 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


505 


and  expressions  to  elucidate  the  subject  on  which  be  was  prophesy- 
ing. He  makes  use  of  heathen  parables  and  fearful  illustrations, 
because  these  were  in  use,  and  his  hearers  could  comprehend  their 
meaning  This  is  conclusive  evidence  that  his  auditors  were  not  far 
beyond  the  superstitious  theology  of  previous  and  long-forgotten 
ages.  He  makes  use  of  the  terms  “hell,”  “angels,”  “darkness,” 
“weeping  and  gnashing  of  teeth,”  “ye  cursed,”  “the  undying 
worm,”  “ the  fire  that  is  fiot  quenched,”  and  in  connexion  with  pun- 
ishment, uses  the  word  “for  ever,”  “everlasting,”  etc.  These  were 
customary  phrases,  and  were  sometimes  applied  to  the  great  abyss 
of  which  the  Sun  was  a representative.  At  other  times  they  were 
applied  to  darkness,  death,  grave,  pain,  wretchedness,  and  a valley 
near  Jerusalem  which  was  used  emblematically  to  represent  filth, 
loathsomeness,  disease,  perpetual  pain,  death,  and  evil  spirits  or 
actions.  The  term  sheol  was  synonymous,  originally,  with  the  first 
of  these  expressions  ; and  hades  is  a Greek  term  of  the  same  signifi- 
cation. Gehenna  is  an  entirely  insignificant  term,  and  is  a total  cor- 
ruption of  two  disconnected  words.  It  is  derived  from  Gai,  the 
name  of  the  valley  near  Jerusalem,  and  Himiom , its  owner.  Thus 
joined,  it  forms  in  the  Greek,  gehenna  ; and  it  is,  therefore,  a word 
whose  origin  is  as  corrupt  as  the  valley  which  suggested  it,  and  as 
that  imaginary  abyss  (hell)  to  which  it  is  applied  at  the  present  day. 

Those  who  urge  the  antiquity  of  a belief  in  hell  in  proof  of  its 
sacredness  and  truth,  should  pause  one  moment  and  reflect,  that  the 
further  research  is  made  into  the  depths  of  antiquity,  the  deeper  and 
darker  grows  the  folly,  ignorance,  superstition,  and  imbecility,  of  the 
human  mind  as  then  existing.  And  it  may  well  be  said  that  this 
doctrine  is  of  so  great  an  age,  that  it  defies  all  skepticism  on  that 
score,  and  all  investigation  as  to  its  origin.  It  is  not  in  the  least  degree 
surprising,  that  such  a doctrine  should  be  of  so  early  a birth,  inas- 
much as  all  the  most  repulsive  superstitions  originated  about  the  same 
time,  and  have  existed  from  the  remotest  periods  of  national  antiquity. 
More  developed  and  consistent  views,  which  originated  only  in  the 
pure  teachings  of  the  judgment,  are  not  regarded  with  the  same  ven- 
eration, nor  as  being  equally  sacred,  because  they  have  so  recently 
commenced  their  destructive  work  against  all  long-established  super- 
stitions and -crude  theological  systems. 

Christ,  then,  in  dealing  so  extensively  in  oriental  allegories,  and 
the  customary  expressions  of  those  days,  has  been  understood  as 
teaching  this  doctrine ; and  it  is  supposed  that  the  inculcation  of  this 


5 06 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


constituted  a part  of  his  peculiar  mission  to  mankind.  Notwithstand- 
ing the  terms  which  he  used  were  originally  applied  to  an  actual 
abyss  of  burning  flame,  and  are  in  some  instances  thus  applied  in  the 
Bible,  the  doctrine  is  as  false  as  the  superstition  of  generations  past. 
Indeed  it  is  so  obviously  and  absolutely  inconsistent,  that  the  en- 
lightened judgment  can  scarcely  conceive  of  so  gross  a belief  having 
an  actual  existence. 

Here,  then,  is  another  theological  proposition  based  upon  mere 
imagination,  and  for  which  there  is  no  rational  foundation. 

§ 136.  Theologians  are  in  the  habit  of  manufacturing  most  inge- 
nious and  cunningly-devised  creeds,  and  of  claiming  them  to  be 
founded  on  the  Bible.  These  are  put  forth  to  the  world,  accompa- 
nied with  most  severe  and  imperative  demands  that  they  should  be 
believed.  To  enforce  these  demands,  theologians  will  quote  a pas- 
sage from  the  New  Testament  which  says:  “He  that  believeth  and 
is  baptized,  shall  be  saved  ; but  he  that  believeth  not,  shall  be 
damned.”  This  policy  somewhat  resembles  that  of  Matthew,  who 
labored  to  confirm  the  truthfulness  of  his  record  by  quoting  promis- 
cuously from  the  prophecies. 

People  of  many  nations  will  bow  in  silence  when  their  potentate 
exclaims,  “ I am  your  king.”  Others  will  tremble  when  their  king 
exclaims,  “You  shall  be  beheaded.”  The  Medes  and  Persians 
shudder  when  recurrence  is  made  to  the  immutable  laws  and  require- 
ments derived  from  the  Zend  Avesta.  The  Chinese  are  in  a simi- 
lar state  of  fear,  bondage,  and  depression.  The  Hindoos  will  fall 
and  worship  the  Shaster,  and  will  greatly  'tremble  as  the  Brahmin 
points  to  it,  and  then  to  a flash  of  vivid  lightning,  in  enforcing  faith 
and  submission.  And  what  is  still  more  to  be  regretted  is,  that  the 
whole  Christian  world  can  be  made  to  tremble,  and  to  discard  the 
dictates  of  their  judgment,  and  almost  to  renounce  proprietorship 
over  their  own  persons,  when  the  theological  teacher  points  to  the 
Bible  and  exclaims,  “ He  that  believeth  not  shall  be  damned!"  It  is 
to  be  deeply  lamented,  even  unto  tears,  that  a portion  of  the  world 
should  be  thus  called  Christianized , while  public  teachers  are  exam- 
ples of  folly,  ignorance,  and  fanaticism,  unworthy  of  an  existence  in 
the  nineteenth  century. 

Thus  an  evanescent  and  unreal  theology  is  in  the  world,  because 
men  have  been  so  situated  and  influenced  as  to  become  superficial 
expounders  and  commentators.  These  men  are  indeed  most  un- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


507 


justly  called  theologians  ; for  it  is  absolutely  demonstrated  that  the 
Universe  or  Nature,  is  the  Great  Revelation  of  the  Divine  Mind,  and 
is  the  universal  and  eternal  Expounder,  Commentator,  and  Preacher. 
In  order  that  a man  may  be  properly  termed  a theologian,  he  should 
take  his  text  in  the  universal  book  of  Nature  ; and  his  sanctuary 
should  be  the  expanded  earth,  and  the  unfolded  heavens. 

From  the  foregoing  considerations,  it  is  made  evident  that  not  one 
of  these  propositions  concerning  the  mission  of  Christ,  can  possibly 
have  the  least  foundation  in  truth.  The  universal  testimonies  of 
Nature  and  her  laws,  justify  any  strength  of  assertion  to  this  effect. 

Again  : it  is  said  that  Christ  had  a Divine  commission,  to  prove  and 
establish  which,  he  performed  many  incomprehensible  miracles.  How 
such  an  opinion  can  be  derived  from  the  literal  teachings  of  the  New 
Testament,  it  is  impossible  to  conceive  ; for  although  Matthew  and 
the  apostles  seriously  believed  in  the  miracles,  they  have  not  in  all 
their  writings  intimated  that  these  were  designed  as  a confirmation  of 
Christ’s  mission,  nor  do  they  represent  him  as  ever  making  any  such 
a declaration. 

Matthew  relates  some  miracles  that  were  performed  by  Christ  after 
descending  from  the  mount,  and  while  travelling  through  various  por- 
tions of  the  land.  It  is  well  to  mark  the  reading  of  those  records. 
Those  miracles  would  apparently  never  have  been  performed,  had 
not  Christ  been  earnestly  solicited  by  those  desiring  relief  and  assist- 
ance. He  is  represented  as  rewarding  their  faith  and  confidence  in 
him  by  complying  with  their  desires.  But  if  the  miracles  had  ever 
been  designed  as  a means  by'  which  the  exalted  character  of  his  mis- 
sion might  be  demonstrated,  then  would  they  have  been  performed 
under  different  circumstances,  and  at  other  times  besides  when  he 
was  prompted  by  his  own  sympathy"  for  the  suffering,  and  by  their 
earnest  solicitations  for  relief. 

So  far,  then,  biblical  interpretation  has  transcended  the  meaning 
of  the  expressions  interpreted,  and  is  therefore  void  of  all  proper  and 
truthful  suggestion,  and  has  its  foundation  only  in  imagination  and 
misconception. 

Again  : it  is  said  that  no  system  of  religion  is  sustained  by  miracles, 
with  the  exception  of  that  found  in  the  Bible.  This  is  not  true. 
Mohammed,  who  wrote  the  Koran,  appeals  to  the  authority  of  mira- 
cles to  establish  a belief  in  his  revelation  — miracles,  too,  which  he 
says  he  himself  performed.  He  says  that  he  was  transfigured,  and 


503 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


thus  passed  through  ninety  heavens  in  one  night  — had  a long  con- 
versation with  the  Deity,  and  returned  again  to  the  earth  early  on  the 
subsequent  morning!  Surely,  a greater  miracle  than  this  has  never 
been  recorded.  Zoroaster  also  constantly  appealed  to  the  marvel- 
lous faculty  of  the  human  mind  for  credence  in  relation  to  his  very 
strange  and  miraculous  conversation  with  the  gods.  Moreover,  the 
doctrines  of  miracles,  like  the  doctrine  of  endless  suffering  and  con- 
demnation, can  boast  of  a very  early  origin  ; and  hence  the  claims  of 
theologians,  as  based  upon  this  ground,  are.worthy  of  at  least  as  much 
veneration,  because  of  their  antiquated  birth. 

Again  : it  is  said  that  miracles  were  not  only  intended  to  demon- 
strate and  establish  the  Divine  commission  of  Jesus,  but  also  to  es- 
tablish incontrovertibly  the  Christian  system  of  theology,  and  that  his 
mission  and  the  Bible  were  established  by  supernatural  evidences  and 
manifestations.  Thus  the  miracles  are  considered  works  accom- 
plished by  supernatural  potency.  It  is  perfectly  clear  that  nothing  ' 
is,  and  nothing  can  be,  but  the  Divine  Mind,  which  is  the  Cause,  and  / 
the  Universe,  which  is  the  Effect.  Cause  and  Effect  thus  uniting  and 
harmonizing  in  one  sole  System,  it  follows  that  whatever  occurs  in 
any  of  the  innumerable  departments  of  the  Universe,  must  occur  be- y 
cause  it  is  caused  by  a natural  instigation.  Nothing,  therefore,  can 
occur  in  the  vast  empire  of  universal  creation  opposed  to,  or  tran- 
scending, the  principles  of  Nature.  All  things,  then,  whether  organ- 
ized or  unorganized,  developed  or  undeveloped,  must  be  strictly  and 
unequivocally  natural.  If  anything,  therefore,  transcends  Nature 
or  the  natural  movements  of  the  Universe,  it  must  be  an  effect  of  ab- 
solutely nothing.  The  term  supernatural,  then,  indicating  something 
above  Nature,  is  a solecism  ; and  nothing  is  more  distinct  than  the 
untruth  of  the  theological  proposition  that  miracles  were  accomplished 
by  supernatural  power  : for  that  is  clearly  teaching  that  they  origina- 
ted from  nothing,  and  consequently  never  existed.  It  is  indeed  re- 
markable that  any  system  of  religion  could  have  been  so  effectually 
established  by  manifestations  in  evidence  of  its  truth,  caused  by  an 
Omnipotent  Nothing  ! On  the  other  hand,  it  would  indeed  be  a 
miracle  if  such  systems  of  belief  did  not  exist  where  folly  and  igno- 
rance universally  prevail,  and  where  have  existed  circumstances  fa- 
vorable to  the  development  of  so  many  superstitious  ideas. 


§ 137.  Again,  it  is  alleged  that  the  apostles  were  selected  to  wit- 
ness these  miraculous  displays,  and  to  communicate  the  facts  to  the 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


509 


world.  This,  it  is  supposed,  they  would  truthfully  do,  because  they 
were  good  and  disinterested  men.  This  is  a proposition  scarcely 
worthy  of  comment.  If  these  apostles  were  chosen,  did  they  not  be- 
come at  once  deeply  interested  ? And  if  they  were  such  good  and 
righteous  men  as  they  are  represented  to  have  been,  would  they  not 
have  been  so  pure  and  harmless  in  disposition  as  not  to  carry  with 
them  swords  ? for  it  is  plain  to  every  mind  that  swords  and  goodness 
have  not  a very  close  affinity.  And  what  prevented  Peter,  when  he 
drew  his  sword  and  cut  off  an  ear.  of  the  servant  of  the  high-priest, 
from  cutting  off  his  head  also,  is  not  clearly  explained.  It  is  plain 
that  whatever  spirit  prompted  the  first  act,  could  have  severed  the 
head  with  as  little  compunction. 

If  the  apostles  were  chosen  to  communicate  the  knowledge  of 
those  miracles  and  the  teachings  of  Christ  to  the  world,  wrnuld  they 
not  have  drawn  up  a voluminous  account  of  the  miracles  performed, 
such  as  would  have  flowed  through  all  the  channels  of  the  Christian 
dispensation  ? And  would  not  this  account  stand  at  the  present  day 
as  a monumental  evidence  of  a Divine  intention  as  connected  with 
the  display  ; of  the  absolute  truth  of  the  Christian  religion,  and  also 
of  the  unequivocal  knowledge  of  those  who  were  eye-witnesses  of 
the  things  related?  Instead  of  this,  they  make  no  announcement  of 
any  such  intention  of  Christ,  or  of  any  such  conviction  in  their 
own  minds.  In  their  writings  in  the  New  Testament,  they  relate  the 
miracles  as  being  acts  merely  incidental  to  their  journeyings  ; and 
those  performed  by  Christ  were  not  regarded  by  any  of  the  apostles, 
nor  by  Christ  himself,  in  any  other  light  than  as  promiscuous  and 
incidental  occurrences  of  his  life. 

Matthew  was  certainly  not  capable  of  being  an  eye-witness  to  those 
miraculous  works  of  which  he  speaks,  because  he  was  an  officer  un- 
der the  Roman  government  many  years  after  the  death  of  Jesus,  and 
did  not  become  an  apostle  until  he  was  greatly  advanced  in  life.  He 
then  only  wrote  a few  accounts,  and  at  last  died  a martyr  in  Persia. 
Ecclesiastical  historians  have  striven  to  make  it  appear  that  he  wrote 
the  first  chapters  in  the  book  ascribed  to  him ; but  they  have  failed, 
merely  because  it  is  not  true.  Besides  this,  no  information  is  given 
of  Matthew  by  any  historian  who  lived  in  those  days,  because  he 
deserted  the  Jewish  and  adopted  the  Christian  religion  in  the  latter 
part  of  his  life,  and  did  not  become  in  any  degree  popular,  except 
from  the  fact  that  he  suffered  martyrdom  under  the  government  of 
Persia. 


510 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


Then  the  proposition  under  review  can  not  be  proved,  either  from 
ecclesiastical  or  profane  history.  Besides,  this  proposition  was  never 
taught  by  Jesus,  scarcely  intimated  by  the  apostles,  and  entirely  dis- 
believed by  the  whole  Jewish  nation,  who  were  in  a condition  to  be 
eye-witnesses  of  the  occurrences  ; and  if  these  had  been  convincing, 
they  would  have  been  convinced. 

Again  : it  is  said  that  as  the  miracles  were  designed  to  confirm  and 
establish  the  Christian  religion,  and  as  they  really  were  performed 
and  actually  witnessed  eighteen  hundred  years  ago,  it  is  absurd  and 
even  unrighteous  to  entertain  a suspicion  concerning  their  original 
intention  or  actual  occurrence.  This  proposition  bears  no  evidence 
of  consistency,  inasmuch  as  it  arbitrarily  demands  universal  faith.  It 
is  impossible  for  the  divine  principle  of  reason  to  be  convinced  of 
anything  without  a positive  knowledge  of  some  foundation  whereon 
its  truth  may  rest.  Faith  may  exist  as  an  evanescent  conviction  of 
the  affections  ; but  {he  judgment  knows  of  no  faith,  no  belief,  but  that 
which  flows  from  the  basis  of  absolute  and  unequivocal  knowledge. 
Then  in  order  to  justify  the  demand  for  universal  faith  in  this  propo- 
sition, equal  evidence  must  be  presented  to  every  mind,  in  every  age  : 
for  otherwise  mankind  can  not  be  convinced. 

But  the  proposition  as  it  stands  is  equivalent  to  saying,  that,  as  the 
sun  gave  forth  its  light,  heat,  and  fertilizing  atmosphere,  six  thousand 
years  ago  — at  which  time  it  ceased  to  shine  ; and  as  those  who  were 
then  living  recorded  that  occurrence,  together  with  a description  of 
all  the  fertility  produced  by  the  sun’s  congenial  influence  ; therefore 
man  must  believe  that  it  once  shone  ; and  then  to  him  the  productions 
of  the  earth  will  continue  the  same.  This  would  be  as  consistent  as 
to  demand  faith  of  the  human  mind  in  a thing  or  occurrence  which 
all  probabilities  and  possibilities,  and  the  universal  testimonies  of  Na- 
ture, are  against.  It  would  be  like  calling  upon  man  to  enjoy  the 
light  and  heat  of  the  sun  now,  because  it  was  enjoyed  six  thousand 
years  ago  ; or  to  believe  that  the  earth  continues  to  be  fertile,  because 
it  was  so  when  blessed  by  the  smiles  of  the  sun.  Belief  in  the  mira- 
cles must  cease  with  the  cessation  of  the  evidence  — the  same  as  the 
earth  would  be  rendered  barren  should  the  sun  cease  to  shine.  An  ap- 
proval of  the  proposition  under  contemplation  would  be  as  impossible 
to  the  enlightened  judgment  (because  ot  the  universal  evidence  against 
it)  as  it  would  be  to  believe  that  the  sun  had  been  arrested  in  its 
course,  while  Divine  harmony  continues  to  pervade,  and  join  insepa- 
rably, all  created  things. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


511 


§ 138.  The  miracles  as  recorded  in  the  New  Testament  are  of 
such  a nature  as  only  to  create  fear  and  marvellousness  in  the  minds 
of  those  who  might  witness  them,  and  also  in  the  minds  of  those  who 
hear  or  read  the  accounts  of  them.  They  are  not  represented  in  a 
manner  becoming  the  object  for  which  they  are  supposed  to  have 
been  intended,  and  are  entirely  void  of  all  that  high  and  celestial  dig- 
nity which  they  would  naturally  be  expected  to  possess  if  they  were 
of  Divine  origin.  Nothing  can  be  more  unjust  than  to  interpret  those 
relations  in  the  New  Testament  as  having  an  important  bearing  upon 
the  question  as  to  the  truth  or  falsity  of  Christ’s  Messiahship  ; for 
they  are  entirely  destitute  of  those  high  and  exalted  manifestations 
which  are  constantly  and  unvaryingly  displayed  in  the  mighty  archi- 
tecture of  the  Universe.  There  exists  in  them  no  grand  and  elevated 
principles  — no  intrinsic  beauty  or  excellency  which  can  or  will  have 
any  tendency  to  benefit  or  reorganize  Mankind.  It  is  well  to  inquire 
what  possible  good  can  arise  from  a little  experiment  like  that  of 
turning  water  into  wine,  or  from  any  of  similar  nature?  Besides 
this,  all  who  are  acquainted  with  the  chemical  relations  of  substances, 
and  the  laws  of  their  combination,  will  at  once  conceive  that  such  an 
occurrence  would  be  entirely  opposed  to  those  laws,  and  could  not, 
therefore,  have  taken  place. 

Another  account  is  related  of  two  men  “ possessed  of  devils”  pre- 
senting themselves  to  Jesus  for  relief.  The  devils  are  represented 
as  at  that  moment  beseeching  Christ  to  let  them  depart  from  the  hu- 
man form,  and  enter  into  a herd  of  swine  at  a short  distance  from 
them.  Jesus  is  represented  as  granting  their  solicitation  ; and  at 
once  they  left  the  persons  and  entered  into  the  swine  — which,  being 
exceedingly  deranged  by  this  very  unjust  intrusion,  ran  over  a steep 
place,  and  were  destroyed.  It  appears  from  this,  that  man  in  that 
instance  was  but  little  superior  in  his  nature  and  organization  to  these 
animals  whose  lives  were  destroyed  : for  the  “ devils”  would  not  have 
desired  to  change  their  habitation  thus  immediately  and  directly  from 
the  forms  of  the  men  to  the  forms  of  the  swine,  had  not  some  close 
relation  existed  between  the  two.  And  there  could  not  possibly  have 
been  instituted  a better  and  wiser  plan  to  accomplish  the  destruction 
of  a multitude  of  such  annoying  and  intrusive  devils  than  the  plan 
here  carried  into  execution.  For  there  exists  no  account  whether 
they  evacuated  the  interior  of  the  swine  on  their  way  down  the  preci- 
pice to  the  water,  or  whether  they,  with  the  swine,  most  effectually 
“ perished.”  Certainly  no  one  will  presume  to  say  that  this  is  not 


512 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


one  of  the  most  useful  and  important  miracles  that  is  recorded  in  the 
New  Testament. 

Further,  this  wonderful  performance  astonished  and  excited  the 
inhabitants  of  the  place  to  such  a degree,  that  they  are  represented  as 
persuading  Jesus  to  depart  out  of  their  coast.  Indeed,  nothing  can 
be  more  just  and  natural  than  this  ; for  what  man  or  community 
would  not  apprehend  a great  deal  of  injury  and  injustice  from  the 
existence  of  a person  among  them  so  effectually  engaged  in  destroy- 
ing their  herds  ? It  is  a most  happy  reflection  that  this  is  a mere 
record  of  Matthew,  but  was  not  an  actual  occurrence. 

The  character  and  tendency  of  the  miracles  related  prohibit  com- 
pletely the  possibility  of  their  Divine  intention  as  apprehended  by 
theologians,  because  they  were  exceedingly  limited,  and  their  use 
was  confined  exclusively  to  the  persons  receiving  such  medical  as- 
sistance as  they  afforded.  Such  deeds  of  charity,  sympathy,  and 
benevolence,  are  to  be  admired  in  the  character  of  any  person  who 
ever  has  lived  or  ever  will  live  on  earth  ; but  further  than  this,  they 
are  of  no  importance,  and  demand  no  veneration  nor  approbation. 
For  they  are  simply  the  good  and  just  deeds  which  may  be  per- 
formed by  any  person  who  is  naturally  qualified  for  their  accom- 
plishment. 

But  there  has  arisen  a vast  amount  of  misapprehension  concerning 
these  miracles,  from  the  style  of  the  written  record.  Matthew,  and 
all  the  other  apostles,  record  the  cause  and  effect  as  occurring  in  rapid 
succession  — almost  simultaneously.  Such  expressions  frequently 
occur  as  — “He  laid  his  hands  upon  him,  and  he  was  healed.” 
So  in  all  the  cases  mentioned  of  palsy,  lameness,  blindness,  deafness, 
and  other  physical  infirmities,  cured  by  Jesus,  the  effect  is  related  as 
though  it  followed  the  cause  immediately.  All  who  are  acquainted 
with  physiological  principles,  and  with  the  calm,  gentle,  and  ener- 
getic movements  of  the  human  organization,  are  persuaded  — even 
positively  convinced  — that  no  cause  can  be  brought  to  act  so  as  to 
produce  health  as  an  immediate  result,  in  case  of  any  established  dis- 
ease. Therefore,  notwithstanding  the  things  recorded  were  performed, 
they  were  effected  by  causes  agreeing  with  the  nature  of  the  human 
system  ; and  the  re-establishment  of  health,  which  actually  occurred, 
was  effected  gradually,  and  by  means  adapted  to  the  temperament  of 
the  individual,  and  the  nature  of  the  disease. 

But  Matthew  and  others  have  conveyed  a wrong  impression  by 
relating  those  circumstances  in  such  an  unqualified  manner.  Their 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


513 


form  of  expression  was  similar  to  saying,  “ The  sun  retired  behind 
the  western  hills,  and  all  was  involved  in  darkness  or,  “ One  ap- 
plied such  a medicine,  and  was  cured or,  “ I deposited  a germ 
in  the  earth,  and  behold  this  beautiful  tree  !”  or,  “ We  sowed  the 
seed,  and  we  gathered  the  harvest.”  This  would  be  leaving,  as  Mat- 
thew did,  the  intermediate  period  between  cause  and  effect  entirely 
unnoticed,  and  recording  the  occurrence  in  general  terms,  and  in  a 
comprehensive  manner  ; and  the  same  style  of  narrative  is  frequently 
exemplified  in  the  writings  of  the  apostles.  I do  not  make  this  re- 
mark to  relieve  those  passages  of  their  inconsistency  (though  the 
writers  of  them  evidently  believed  as  they  wrote),  but  merely  for 
the  purpose  of  revealing  the  cause  and  origin  of  those  expressions. 

If  thousands  of  such  experiments  were  performed  as  the  casting 
out  of  devils,  or  transforming  water  into  wine,  or  destroying  the  lives 
of  a number  of  undeserving  swine,  or  the  withering  of  a verdant  fig- 
tree — what  possible  use  — what  grand  design  — what  celestial  result 
would  be  accomplished  ? Would  not  such  means  be  altogether  in- 
adequate to  the  fulfilment  of  the  end  for  which  they  are  supposed  to 
have  been  originally  designed  ? Are  they  not  useless  and  insignifi- 
cant manifestations,  such  as  have  a tendency  to  corrupt  a just  faith  in 
the  workings  of  the  Great  Divine  Mind  ? Are  they  not,  indeed,' 
most  unworthy  the  dignity  of  any  human  being,  to  say  nothing  of  the 
Great  Cause,  which  is  the  very  Essence  of  Infinite  Perfection? 
Have  they  any  tendency  to  extirpate  evil  from  the  earth  ? It  is  dis- 
tinctly evident  that  the  race  of  mankind  were  not  benefited  when 
they  were  performed,  nor  prevented  from  subsequently  becoming 
most  unrighteously  disorganized.  And  have  not  the  very  existence 
of  those  accounts  caused  war,  persecution,  martyrdom,  and  death  ? 
Have  they  not  divided  nation  from  nation,  by  establishing  an  antago- 
nism in  those  personal  and  national  interests  which  should  unite 
them  as  a brotherhood  ? Nay,  has  not  even  the  whole  Christian 
world,  so  called,  been  divided,  and  each  person  drawn  the  sword  of 
sectarian  hostility  against  another  ? Are  these  celestial  effects,  in- 
dicating that  the  cause  was  divine  intention,  and  born  from  the 
bosom  of  celestial  Perfection  ? If  such  is  the  cause,  do  the  effects 
correspond?  If  these  things  were  designed  to  produce  conviction 
of  the  Messiahship  of  Christ,  could  it  have  been  possible  for  the 
efforts  of  Divine  Wisdom  and  Power  to  be  thus  completely  deranged 
and  baffled?  And  if  they  were  designed  to  convince  mankind,  why 
does  skepticism  go  on  increasing  as  knowledge  advances? 

33 


•514 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


It  is  distinctly  clear,  that  they  have  produced  precisely  the  effects 
which  might  naturally  have  been  expected  from  their  operation  upon 
the  minds  of  the  superstitious  and  uneducated  generation  which  so 
earnestly  believed  them.  They  were  written  under  the  promptings 
of  misguided  judgment;  and  having  thus  originated,  their  effects 
have  fully  corresponded  in  every  generation,  even  to  the  unfolding 
and  ripening  of  the  human  mind  in  the  nineteenth  century. 

The  theological  propositions,  founded  upon  the  supposed  perform- 
ance of  supernatural  miracles,  are  so  completely  transparent,  that  the 
discerning  mind  can  not  fail  to  see  their  utter  nothingness.  And  though 
volume  after  volume  has  been  written  to  elucidate  these  opinions 
metaphysically,  I am  constrained  to  leave  them  all  unnoticed,  because 
they  appear  to  me  as  the  shadows,  and  not  the  substance  of  things. 

§ 139.  I now  proceed  to  an  investigation  of  the  fundamental  and 
essential  principles  of  what  is  claimed  to  be  a pure  and  celestial  the- 
ology, or,  rather,  of  the  four  pillars  upon  which  the  theological  super- 
structure is  sustained.  And  I would  bespeak  particular  attention  to 
this  attack,  because  it  may  be  that  it  will  demolish  the  whole  system, 
and  leave  nothing  of  it  but  a mass  of  disgusting  rubbish.  The  first 
point  is  “Original  Sin;”  the  second,  “ the  Atonement ;”  the  third, 
“Faith;”  and  the  fourth,  “Regeneration.” 

1st.  Original  Sin.  To  dissect  this  proposition  in  all  its  numer- 
ous forms  and  modifications,  would  be  to  interfere  with  that  which  is 
not  capable,  because  of  its  unsoundness,  of  receiving  any  interfe- 
rence. But  there  is  one  principle  involved  in  the  subject,  by  which 
the  human  mind  has  been  most  unjustly  perverted,  and  this  principle 
demands  a brief  notice.  It  represents  man  as  being  originally  pure 
as  to  his  physical  and  spiritual  nature,  even  as  a flower  from  the  bud 
of  the  divine  creation  ; and  that  he  possessed  nearly  all  the  charac- 
teristics of  a celestial  being,  pure,  spotless,  unsophisticated.  While 
thus  existing,  temptations  were  placed  before  him,  of  so  captivating 
a nature  that  he  was  unable  to  resist  them.  Oh,  how  unjust,  to 
charge  the  Divine  Mind  with  creating  man,  and  endowing  him  with 
all  the  attributes  of  purity  and  goodness,  and  at  the  same  time  with- 
holding from  him  a competency  to  resist  temptation  ! How  unholy 
to  accuse  him  of  constituting  man  a perfect  being,  and  at  the  same 
time  instituting  a most  destructive  plot  to  injure  him  for  life,  and  per- 
haps for  ever  ! a plot,  too,  which  would  implicate  an  unborn  race  for 
thousands  of  years ! 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


515 


Original  sin,  then,  is  based  upon  this  grand  but  most  unrighteous 
impeachment  of  the  Wisdom  and  Love  of  the  Creator.  It  assumes 
that  man  was  tempted,  that  he  yielded,  and  that  spiritual  death  en- 
sued ; a death  so  terrible  in  its  influence,  that  an  unborn  and  inno- 
cent creation  were  necessarily  involved  in  its  inconceivable  horrors  ! 
Nay  more,  it  disconnects  the  whole  world  of  mankind  from  any 
spiritual  communication  with  that  Holy  Essence  which  breathed 
them  into  being — even  totally  banishes  them  from  all  parental 
favor,  and  presses  them  to  the  very  brink  of  an  awful  burning 
gulf!  Still  more  horrible,  it  teaches  that  millions  on  millions  are, 
owing  to  this  divine  curse,  destined  to  writhe  in  the  waves  of  dark- 
ness— in  the  bosom  of  a burning  abyss,  whose  dissolving  fires  were 
blown  into  a flame  by  the  very  breath  of — Divine  Love! 

Th  us,  according  to  the  doctrine  under  review,  an  innocent  man, 
who  had  no  experience  — who  was  pure  and  undefiled  — came  under 
the  wrath  and  curse  of  that  Being  whose  very  essence  is  Love,  Wis- 
dom, and  celestial  Perfection.  In  this  his  posterity  are  also  una- 
voidably implicated,  and  thus  are  charged  with  a debt  which  they 
bad  no  agency  in  contracting,  and  which  was  incurred  before  they 
were  born  ! Here  is  a most  unjust  and  impious  charge  ; and  the 
proposition  involving  it  is  too  corrupt  and  vitiating  to  the  moral  sen- 
sibilities of  men,  to  have  an  existence  even  in  the  darkest  recess  of  a 
distorted  imagination. 

This  great  debt,  caused  by  spiritual  death,  the  whole  race  is  said 
to  owe  to  Him  who  spoke,  and  they  lived  ! The  Divine  Mind  is 
said  to  have  assumed  the  human  form , in  which  he  calls  himself  the 

I ^ # 

Son,  for  the  purpose  of  relieving  the  race  of  this  debt,  which  he  him- 
self created  — by  living  on  earth,  suffering  all  descriptions  of  perse- 
cution, and  at  last  dying  an  ignominious  death  ! He  himself  thus 
suffers  innocently  to  remove  effects  that  must  have  originated  in  his 
own  Infinite  Wisdom!  And  this  is  called  “The  Atonement.” 
All  this  is  equivalent  to  saying  that  the  Creator  instituted  a celestial 
plan  to  deceive  and  implicate  mankind,  of  which  he  subsequently 
repented,  and  could  not  annihilate  its  awful  consequences  without  his 
Son  — even  himself — dying  the  death  of  a persecuted  martyr!  Na- 
ture, retain  thy  complacency!  Continue  to  unfold  thy  charms! 
Perpetuate  thy  undying  beauty  and  grandeur,  even  though  man  in 
his  audacious  folly,  has  clothed  thee  in  a mantle  of  darkness,  terrible 
as  the  vengeance  of  an  exasperated  Deity  ! 

Ye  theologians,  behold  now  your  speculations  ! Your  “ original 


516 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


sin,”  is  discovered  to  be  a repulsive  blasphemy  ; and  your  “ atone- 
ment” to  be  the  very  climax  of  a deranged  imagination,  and  one  that 
is  of  the  most  unrighteous  and  immoral  character.  The  first  is  dia- 
metrically opposed  to  all  distributive  justice  — annihilates  all  concep- 
tion of  wisdom  — banishes  from  the  soul  of  man  all  appreciation  of 
celestial  Love  — dissipates  all  thirst  for  knowledge  and  progress  — 
and  shuts  the  very  portals  of  reason  by  the  hand  of  omnipotent  ven- 
geance, and  by  pointing  to  a fount  of  infernal  fires  ! More  terrible 
darkness  — a more  soul-revolting  conception  — a more  wretched  dis- 
play of  human  folly,  could  not  possibly  occur  in  any  of  the  wide  fields 
and  spheres  of  creation.  The  second  proposition  involves  a charge  of 
injustice  unworthy  the  deeds  of  and  character  of  a heathen  potentate. 
Its  tendency  is  to  generate  absolute  immorality  in  the  world,  and  so 
far  it  is  absolutely  a curse  to  man.  But  its  deleterious  power  is 
limited^  for  it  can  not  arrest  the  sublime  workings  of  established  and 
immutable  laws. 

The  third  essential  element  in  the  received  theology,  is  called 
Faith.  This,  like  many  other  alleged  Christian  virtues,  is  not  capa- 
ble of  manifesting  itself,  nor  is  it  even  known  to  be  existing  until  its 
possessor  verbally  makes  the  fact  known  to  the  world.  It  is  like 
many  Christian  principles,  so  called,  that  are  never  manifested  by 
deeds  or  proper  actions,  but  are  only  known  to  exist  when  the  world 
is  told  of  them. 

Faith  — what  is  it  ? Certainly  it  is  a conviction  of  the  judgment, 
resulting  from  appropriate  and  adequate  evidence.  Then  it  is  an 
effect  derived  from  knowledge.  It  is  therefore  void  of  all  merit  or 
demerit,  inasmuch  as  it  is  a natural  consequence  of  known  facts,  and 
not  a voluntary  acquirement  of  the  mind.  Is  it  proper  to  call  upon 
man  to  believe  an  inconsistency  in  order  that  he  may  escape  an  irre- 
trievable condemnation  ? This,  indeed,  is  the  most  unnatural  de- 
mand that  folly  can  possibly  urge.  Is  a man  to  be  approbated  be- 
cause he  has  faith  in  the  existence  of  any  external  things  received 
through  the  channels  of  the  senses  ? Is  it  to  be  considered  a merit 
for  a man  to  believe  that  the  sun  shines,  and  that  the  earth  is  ren- 
dered fertile  thereby  ? or  that  the  earth,  together  with  the  whole 
solar  system,  revolves  ? Is  faith  to  be  considered  a merit , when  it 
is  a result  of  a conviction  of  the  judgment?  It  is  plain,  then,  that 
the  common  religious  requirement  of  faith  is  unjust,  untrue,  immoral 
— because  it  is  opposed  to  all  laws  of  causation,  and  all  teachings  of 
the  interior  and  external  world. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


517 


The  fourth  point  is  Regeneration.  This  is  founded  upon  the  as- 
sumption of  Regeneration,  and  therefore  the  doctrine  is  only  an  evan- 
escent and  unreal  effect,  proceeding  from  a cause  equally  unreal  and 
unsubstantial.  Regeneration  is  considered  as  an  effect  resulting  from 
faith;  the  latter  results  from  — it  is  impossible  to  tell  what!  And 
it  is  entirely  useless  to  dwell  upon  a term  containing  no  interior 
meaning,  and  which  has  generated,  and  will  continue  to  do  the  same 
unless  abandoned,  every  species  of  superstition  and  unrighteous 
thoughts. 

Such,  then,  are  the  substantial  and  inherent  elements  which  con- 
stitute and  sustain  the  great  theological  superstructure.  Their  quali- 
ties are  impure,  their  composition  is  decayed,  they  are  performing 
the  work  of  their  own  destruction  ; and  behold  the  temple  falls  : and 
who  shall  stand,  subsequent  generations  will  testify. 

§ 140.  No  class  or  series  of  expressions  have  been  associated  in 
the  enfeebled  mind  of  man  with  more  fear  and  depressing  dread,  than 
some  of  those  said  to  have  been  used  by  Christ  while  preaching  and 
prophesying.  It  has  been  a source  of  wonder  and  extreme  perplex- 
ity that  a being  represented  as  possessing  so  much  spiritual  refine- 
ment and  brotherly  kindness,  should  have  employed  such  violent  and 
unkind  terms  in  speaking  of  those  who  were  merely  opposed  to  the 
doctrines  he  promulgated  ! For  it  is  plain  to  every  pure,  benevolent, 
and  philanthropic  mind,  that  the  mental  constitution  of  that  person 
must  be  impure  indeed,  who  could  look  abroad  upon  the  face  of  cre- 
ation and  mark  the  weakness  of  erring  humanity,  and  then  say  to  his 
own  brethren  — “Ye  serpents,  ye  generation  of  vipers;”  or,  “Ye 
scribes  and  Pharisees  — hypocrites!”  for  these  were  merely  misdi- 
rected brethren,  whose  condition  of  mind  was  not  caused  by  them- 
selves, but  by  inferior  and  unpropitious  circumstances.  The  well- 
informed  mind  is  personally  conscious  that  the  causes  of  evil  lie  not 
in  man,  but  about  him  ; and  this  knowledge  at  once  creates  a uni- 
versal forgiveness,  and  forbids  the  application  of  any  harsh  terms  to 
a brother — much  more  to  a brotherhood.  Persons  who  are  not  ac- 
quainted with  the  cause  of  moral  evil,  are  in  the  habit  of  accusing  each 
other  falsely,  and  applying  to  each  other  terms  no  less  unjust  than 
such  as,  “ Ye  serpents,  ye  generation  of  vipers  ! how  can  ye  escape 
the  damnation  of  hell?”  Surely  a more  unrighteous  sentence  could 
not  proceed  from  an  ignorant  devotee  of  the  Juggernaut  ! 

If  it  is  said  that  these  expressions  as  ascribed  to  Christ  have  an 


618 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


interior  signification  which  is  not  discoverable  upon  the  surface,  then 
still  more  should  the  language  be  discarded  : for  it  no  longer  answers 
the  purpose  for  which  it  was  designed.  If  the  expressions  have  a 
meaning  which  is  not  perceptible,  then  should  they  not  be  uttered, 
because  they  are,  to  say  the  least,  entirely  useless. 

Perhaps  no  terms  have  oppressed  the  mind  with  more  gloom  and 
dread  than  the  terms  “ hell-fire,”  “ everlasting  fire  prepared  for  the 
devil  and  his  angels,”  “ weeping,  wailing,  and  gnashing  of  teeth,” 
&c.  It  will  be  remembered  that  it  is  the  expression , and  not  the 
meaning , which  terrifies  the  weak  and  uninformed  mind  : for  sheol 
being  a Hebrew  word,  has  no  specific  application,  but  was  used  pro- 
miscuously among  the  early  inhabitants  in  application  to  almost  any- 
thing they  disliked.  And  hades  is  a Greek  word  applied  in  the  same 
way.  And  as  gehenna  is  a Greek  word  derived  from  two  Hebrew 
expressions,  it  can  not  be  truthfully  said  that  either  of  these  words  is 
worthy  of  the  least  regard,  much  less  that  they  should  be  productive 
of  fear,  and  thus  circumscribe  the  movements  and  lofty  aspirations  of 
the  human  spirit.  I am  deeply  impressed,  and  that,  too,  by  an  influx 
of  superior  information,  that  if  these  remarks  will  assist  the  efforts  of 
others  to  rend  the  dark  curtain  of  superficiality  from  off  the  windows 
of  the  soul,  one  great  and  glorious  achievement  will  be  accom- 
plished, and  light  will  illuminate  the  spiritual  possessions  of  every 
human  form. 

A most  remarkable  and  conspicuous  personage,  who  may  be  con- 
sidered as  an  inmate  of  this  theological  temple,  I have  not  as  yet 
specifically  noticed.  I allude  to  the  being  called  the  devil.  This 
potent  personage  has  been  as  active  in  establishing  his  portion  of  the 
kingdom  as  any  influence  which  we  have  as  yet  considered.  But  it 
is  well  to  analyze  the  term  “ devil,”  so  that  we  may  arrive  at  a more 
familiar  acquaintance  with  his  origin  and  disposition.  This  term  is 
synonymous  with  satan,  which  latter  is  derived  from  shailan.  This 
originally  signified  almost  nothing , but  was  generally  used  in  a loose 
and  unguarded  manner,  meaning  spritely,  godly  man,  deified  spirit, 
disease,  monomania,  evil-doer,  &c.  All  of  these  significations  are 
comprehended  in  various  expressions  in  the  Bible,  such  as  satan, 
death,  devil,  &c.  But  even  in  the  Bible,  devil  signifies  evil,  wicked- 
ness, abomination.  And  when  this  evil  deity  is  represented  as  “ go- 
ing up  and  down  the  earth,”  or  “ going  about  like  a roaring  lion  seek- 
ing whom  he  may  devour,”  the  word  “ devil”  is  nothing  more  than  a 
figurative  personification  of  evil.  As  a proof  of  this,  every  discerning 


nature’s  divine  revelations.  519 

person  can  see  that  he  creates  the  most  tumult  and  disturbance  where 
ignorance  and  superstition  abound  to  the  greatest  extent. 

It  is  well  known  to  biblical  commentators,  or  at  least  to  those  who 
have  investigated  the  early  application  of  terms,  that  the  ancient  ma- 
gicians deified  an  Evil  Principle,  and  that  their  theology  was  system- 
atized by  Zoroaster,  who  possessed  all  the  materials  existing  prior 
to  his  life,  from  which  he  erected  his  supernatural  revelation.  As 
the  word  shaitan  meant  only  a little  more  than  nothing,  certainly  the 
deified  imaginary  evil  principle  to  which  it  is  now  applied  can  not 
mean  a great  deal  more. 

But  the  terms  “ hell,”  “ devil,”  “ satan,”  &c.,  have  created  more  fear 
and  superstitious  apprehension  than  any  others  contained  in  the  whole 
Primitive  History.  But  as  has  been  shown,  they  were  intended  to 
express  only  that  which  the  uncultivated  inhabitants  of  the  earth  cre- 
ated by  false  conceptions  of  the  manifestations  of  Nature,  and  of  the 
character  and  attributes  of  man.  Therefore  they  should  be  regarded 
with  at  least  as  much  respect  as  any  oriental,  poetical  mythos,  merely 
because  of  the  imaginative  and  marvellous  conceptions  which  they 
exemplify. 

While  I am  speaking  thus,  I feel  a constant  and  insuppressible 
yearning  for  the  elevation  of  every  mind  to  that  degree  of  mental  dis- 
cernment in  which  these  things  which  I relate  might  be  equally 
known  to  them,  and  equally  discarded  by  them.  This  would  be  a 
benefit  to  man,  because  he  would  then  be  restored  to  communion 
with  the  sublime  teachings  of  his  nature  within,  and  of  Nature  with- 
out, the  happy  results  of  whick  would  not  only  be  experienced  in  the 
present,  but  more  perfectly  in  higher  spheres. 

It  is  also  supposed  by  the  majority  of  mankind,  especially  by  those 
acquainted  with  the  teachings  of  the  Old  and  New  Testaments,  that 
the  resurrection  and  general  judgment  were  never  presented  to  the 
world  before  the  life  and  disclosures  of  Jesus  ; and  that  the  “golden 
rule”  was  then  for  the  first  time  promulgated  by  Jesus,  and  was  never 
conceived  of  or  expressed  by  any  previous  mind.  That  is  not  true. 
It  is  well  known  to  some  who  have  explored  the  pages  of  antiquity, 
that  Confucius,  the  Chinese  philosopher,  expressed  the  golden  rule 
nearly  six  hundred  years  before  Christ  lived  — about  which  time 
Zoroaster  also  flourished,  who  succeeded  in  establishing  through- 
out the  whole  eastern  world  the  doctrine  of  a physical  resurrection 
and  general  judgment.  Zoroaster  even  prophesied,  with  a great  deal 
of  perspicuity,  ingenuity,  and  truthfulness.  Notwithstanding  his  con- 


520 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


ceptions  of  a general  resurrection  and  judgment  were  derived  from 
the  many  conceptions  of  earlier  ages,  they  are  presented  in  a more 
systematic  and  rational  form  than  those  which  are  contained  in  the 
New  Testament,  and  which  the  apostles  endeavored  to  promulgate 
on  the  authority  of  the  teachings  and  martyrdom  of  Christ. 

$ 141.  Matthew,  after  having  related  the  prophecy  of  Jesus  con- 
cerning the  destruction  of  Jerusalem,  and  many  other  promiscuous 
sayings,  closes  by  giving  a description  of  the  trials,  sufferings,  con- 
demnation, and  crucifixion  of  Christ,  who  was  a person  of  remarka- 
ble excellence  in  all  his  physical  and  spiritual  possessions.  But  as 
I shall  speak  concerning  this  subject  hereafter,  I dismiss  it  for  the 
present,  and  proceed  to  notice  some  remarks  of  Matthew  upon  this 
very  unjust  crucifixion. 

He  relates  that  Christ  was  exceedingly  disliked  by  the  Jewish  na- 
tion, and  that  he  was  accused,  arrested,  and  conveyed  to  the  pres- 
ence of  Pontius  Pilate  — who  was  not  over-anxious  to  condemn,  but 
was  compelled  by  the  vociferous  multitude  to  yield  his  assent  and 
seal  the  condemnation.  After  this,  a cross  was  prepared,  which  Je- 
sus was  enforced  to  carry,  and  which  he  did  with  a great  deal  of 
gentleness  and  humiliation,  until  he  arrived  at  the  spot  where  his 
noble  and  dignified  person  was  to  be  sacrificed.  They  placed  a 
crown  of  thorns  upon  his  head,  and  gave  him  impure  and  bitter 
drink  to  quench  his  thirst ; and  what  is  still  more  to  be  lamented  is, 
that  they  nailed  him  to  the  cross,  and  then  perforated  his  body  with 
their  spears,  that  his  sufferings  might  be  increased,  and  their  exas- 
peration gratified  ! Pie  is  represented  to  have  had  but  a few  follow- 
ers, and  these  came  and  wept  beneath  his  body. 

After  he  was  taken  from  the  cross  and  deposited  in  the  sepulchre, 
before  whose  mouth  a stone  was  placed,  he  is  represented  as  being 
guarded  for  three  days,  and  then  coming  forth  and  appearing  to  three 
of  his  disciples.  After  this,  he  was  seen,  it  is  said,  by  upward  of 
five  hundred  souls  ; and  not  long  afterward  he  ascended  amid  the 
clouds  and  disappeared,  to  occupy  a position  as  Judge  on  high. 

This,  as  it  will  be  remembered,  is  recorded  by  Matthew,  Mark, 
Luke,  and  John.  The  record  is  not  a demonstration  of  its  actual 
occurrence,  although  those  who  wrote  were  pure  and  undesigning 
men,  whose  testimonies  are  worthy  of  the  highest  respect  and  con- 
sideration. I will  explain  hereafter  how  this  opinion  was  created, 
the  causes  engaged  in  producing  it,  and  why  these  persons  wrote 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


521 


with  so  much  pure  simplicity.  But  at  present  I am  only  investiga- 
ting the  theological  speculations  based  upon  these  records. 

This  martyrdom  of  Jesus  is  called  the  “Vicarious  Atonement;” 
that,  is,  his  suffering  for  the  sins  of  the  world — suffering  an  innocent 
and  ignominious  death  for  that  which  his  death  could  not  alter,  and 
that  which  the  Divine  Creator  is  represented  as  having  instituted  ! 
Why  should  the  Jews  be  persecuted  for  crucifying  Jesus,  if  indeed 
it  was  originally  designed  that  the  latter  should  thus  suffer  for  the  re- 
demption of  mankind  ? The  merit  did  not  consist  in  his  death  in- 
dependently, because  he  would  not  have  been  persecuted  nor  put  to 
death  had  not  the  Jews  performed  that  office.  Then  why  not  say 
that  the  Jews  were  essential  means  employed  in  the  accomplishment 
of  this  vicarious  atonement?  and  why  should  the  whole  be  ascribed 
to  the  object  sacrificed?  The  Jews,  however,  are  charged  with  ex- 
ceeding cruelty,  injustice,  and  unholy  persecution.  They  are  ac- 
cused in  every  possible  way,  and  with  a degree  of  virulence  which 
is  much  against  their  accusers  ; but  how  could  they  be  guilty  when 
they  were  made  agents  of  the  Divine  Mind  to  fulfil  one  of  his  origi- 
nal designs  ? Then  the  Jews  should  receive  a great  share  of  the 
adoration  and  praise  : for  it  was  by  them  that  this  great  end  was  ac- 
complished, and  not  so  much  by  the  sacrifice  or  vicarious  atonement, 
which  was  merely  the  effect  of  their  united  efforts.  Why,  then,  place 
merit,  adoration,  and  praise,  where  they  do  not  belong?  — for  it  is 
manifestly  unjust  to  adore  and  venerate  an  effect  more  than  its  cause. 

But  the  death  of  Christ  had  no  possible  connexion  with  the  sins 
of  the  world,  nor  with  the  cause  of  sin.  Sin,  indeed,  in  the  common 
acceptation  of  that  term,  does  not  really  exist ; but  what  is  called  sin 
is  merely  a misdirection  of  man’s  physical  and  spiritual  powers,  which 
generates  unhappy  consequences.  The  death  of  no  being  will  ex- 
tirpate these  evil  consequences.  Nothing  short  of  a general  knowl- 
edge of  the  causes  of  these  evils,  and  of  the  general  capabilities  of 
mankind,  will  restore  permanent  harmony  and  happiness  to  the  race. 
Nor  is  it  possible  for  any  principles  involved  in  the  idea  of  a vicari- 
ous atonement,  to  produce  the  work  of  general  reorganization  ; but  a 
rejection  of  this  doctrine  will  be  one  of  the  mightiest  steps  toward 
ultimate  amelioration  and  consequent  happiness. 

Further:  there  is  no  law  governing  any  composition,  that  will  ad- 
mit of  its  ascension  above  the  forms  of  Nature,  before  each  part  of 
that  composition  becomes  fitted  for  ascension.  Then  the  body  of  a 
person  can  not  be  made  to  ascend  while  the  law  of  association  exists 


522 


nature’s  divine  revelations 


and  governs  Nature  universally.  Nevertheless,  it  has  been  supposed 
that  the  composition  constituting  the  body  of  Christ  might  have  un- 
dergone a process  of  refinement  suitable  to  render  an  ascension  pos- 
sible. But  then  it  must  have  become  completely  intangible , and 
could  not  have  been  seen  by  those  who  were  present  at  the  ascen- 
sion. But  this  supposition  is  not  founded  upon  a knowledge  of  gen- 
eral laws,  or  of  their  unvarying  effects  as  manifested  in  every  depart- 
ment of  Nature.  Such  an  ascension  would  indeed  have  been  im- 
possible : because  there  could  not  have  been  such  an  accelerated 
process  of  refinement  as  to  perfect  any  composition  in  the  space  of 
three  days. 

Moreover,  the  term  anastasis,  rendered  resurrection  in  the  New 
Testament,  does  not  originally  express  any  such  an  ascension.  It 
there  signifies  a rising  up,  an  elevation,  a progressive  reform,  a res- 
urrection, a gradual  and  steady  improvement.  It  may  be  added  that 
the  doctrine  of  a general  resurrection  is  founded  only  upon  the  sup- 
position that  the  Bible  teaches  it,  which  it  can  not  be  proved  to  do  ; 
nor  is  there  any  such  meaning  attached  to  the  original  expression 
anastasis.  It  is  well  to  remark,  however,  that  Paul,  who  philoso- 
phized upon  the  subject,  really  believed  in  a general,  corporeal  res- 
urrection. Still,  all  his  expressions,  as  well  as  those  of  the  other 
writers,  will  admit  of  a different  signification  ; for  terms  have  become 
greatly  modified  since  language  has  become  so  copious  and  super- 
fluous, and  therefore  what  they  mean  now  is  not  always  what  they 
meant  originally 

Then,  again,  Matthew  relates  a most  marvellous  phenomenon  con- 
cerning the  temple  being  rent,  the  earth  quaking,  graves  opening, 
and  their  tenants  being  quickened  into  life,  and  appearing  unto  many 
in  the  city.  (Matt,  xxvii.  51-53.)  This  would  not  have  been 
believed  for  one  moment,  had  it  been  related  in  any  portion  of  the 
Zend  Avesta  — although  there  are  more  remarkable  things  therein 
recorded  than  this.  When  such  things  are  presented  for  credence, 
it  is  always  proper  to  reflect  upon  the  probable  origin  of  such  rela- 
tions— their  use , if  true,  and  then  to  inquire  whether  they  are  suscep- 
tible of  an  a-pjfiication.  If  these  questions  were  urged  with  reference 
to  this  account,  its  truth  or  untruth  would  not  be  regarded  as  of  any 
importance;  for  it  is  manifestly  a confusion  of  the  order  of  Nature, 
and  void  of  all  practical  utility. 

As  to  a 3ay  of  general  Judgment,  not  much  comment  is  required; 
for  it  is  neither  taught  in  the  Scriptures,  nor  believed  by  any  biblical 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


523 


investigator  of  a superiorly-enlightened  mind.  A remark  heretofore 
made,  will  answer  instead  of  a protracted  argument : “ Whatever  the 
judgment  can  not  sanction,  the  Divine  Mind  never  created.” 

§ 142.  As  the  book  of  Matthew  comprehends  all  that  is  related  in 
the  succeeding  books,  I have  given  attention  to  its  contents  to  the 
exclusion,  as  yet,  of  all  the  collateral  evidences  found  in  the  other 
books  for  or  against  the  propositions  touched  upon  and  analyzed. 
But  I will  proceed  to  a general  reflection  upon  each  of  these  books,  in 
the  order  in  which  they  are  placed,  speaking  also  of  their  origin  and 
prominent  principles.  Before  doing  so,  however,  I will  state  a few 
facts  in  the  history  of  Matthew. 

Matthew  became  an  officer  under  the  Roman  government  some 
time  previous  to  the  death  of  Christ,  in  which  occupation  he  contin- 
ued for  a long  period,  even  until  old  age,  at  which  time  Paul,  Dio- 
nysius, and  others,  were  preaching  the  important  doctrines  of  Christ. 
Matthew  deserted  the  Jewish  and  embraced  the  Christian  religion, 
not  long  after  Paul’s  conversion,  and  he  then  soon  began  to  write 
concerning  the  things  heard  and  seen  as  appertaining  to  Christ 
and  his  teachings.  It  will  be  seen  by  a review  of  his  book,  that 
he  apparently  grouped  the  sayings  of  Christ,  not  in  the  order 
in  which  they  occurred,  but  merely  as  they  were  presented  to  his 
mind  ; for,  in  many  places,  he  evidently  comprehends  in  one  sen- 
tence an  historical  account  of  the  miracles  and  sayings  of  Jesus  which 
seemingly  occupied  many  months.  Besides  this,  his  manuscripts 
have  never  been  known  to  the  world.  The  only  remains  of  them 
are  contained  in  a Greek  manuscript.  But  they  were,  as  commenta- 
tors admit,  originally  written  in  Hebrew , and  for  the  express  use  of 
some  Jewish  converts.  There  evidently  existed  no  intention  on  his 
part,  nor  on  the  part  of  those  who  transcribed  his  writings,  to  ever 
have  them  merged  into  a canonical  book.  Certainly  he  was  never 
directed  by  Christ  to  write  and  present  this  manuscript  to  the  world 
for  this  purpose.  Nor  can  it  be  proved  that  he  ever  had  such  an 
intention  himself,  either  from  the  nature  of  his  record,  or  from  the 
very  unsatisfactory  manner  in  which  the  same  has  been  compiled, 
received  as  canonical,  and  voted  as  the  first  book  of  the  New  Testa- 
ment. Nothing  could  be  more  proper  than  the  title  of  this  book, 
which  designates  it  as  “according  to,”  though  not  as  written  by,  Mat- 
thew. They  who  prefixed  this  tide  were  themselves  doubtful  as  to  its 
origin.  Ecclesiastical  history  proves  that  its  chronology  is  discrepant 


524 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


with  that  of  the  preceding  and  subsequent  writings  ; and  very  many 
even  admit  that  the  first  two  chapters  are  exceedingly  doubtful,  while 
none  are  very  anxious  to  vouch  for  their  truth. 

After  Matthew  had  written  a few  manuscripts,  he  was  captured  by 
two  officers  of  the  Persian  customs,  carried  to  the  governor,  pro- 
nounced guilty  of  heterodoxy,  and  was  condemned,  and  died  a 
martyr. 

Some  wise  men  have  written  profound  criticisms  upon  the  con- 
tents of  the  Old  and  New  Testaments,  and  seem  to  have  mistaken 
evidence  to  be  against,  rather  than  in  favor  of,  the  writings  of  the 
apostles  , especially  where  unguarded  expressions  occur,  or  quota- 
tions from  the  Old  Testament,  or  historical  relations  which  do  in 
reality  oppose  the  records  of  other  writers.  The  book  of  Mark  con 
tains  many  things  that  are  discrepant  with  the  contents  of  the  book 
of  Matthew.  But  this  is  no  evidence  that  they  intended  imposition 
upon  the  world.  Nor  is  it  in  any  respect  against  the  moral  purity 
and  rectitude  of  their  historical  writings;  but  it  rather  manifests  a 
pure  design  in  giving  to  the  world  that  which  they  seriously  believed, 
and  which  was  equally  believed  by  others.  It  proves  that  there 
existed  no  designing  plot  — no  collusion,  whereby  all  things  therein 
related  might  be  joined  and  confirmed  in  such  a manner  as  to  exclude 
the  possibility  of  detection  and  exposure.  It  proves,  also,  that  they 
wrote  merely  from  an  influx  of  external  impressions;  and  the  reflux 
of  these  gave  rise  to  the  manuscripts  of  the  New  Testament.  It 
proves,  also,  that  they  wrote  with  an  entire  unacquaintance  with  each 
other’s  private  opinions  or  concurrent  views;  and  that  they  wrote 
free  from  any  intention  except  that  of  presenting  a pure  and  truthful 
account. 


§ 143.  The  book  of  Mark  commences  unlike  that  of  Matthew; 
for,  instead  of  introducing  a genealogy,  it  begins  by  quoting  from  the 
book  of  Malachi,  third  chapter  and  first  verse,  a prophecy  concerning 
one  who  would  (and  did)  come  to  prepare  the  way  for  the  introduc- 
tion of  the  teachings  of  Christ  to  the  world.  It  will  be  seen,  by  read- 
ing the  quotation  in  Malachi,  that  it  is  in  the  first  person,  and  has  no 
connexion  whatever  with  the  future.  But  the  expression  is  applica- 
ble to  the  fact  that  John  preached  and  prepared  the  way  for  the  in- 
troduction of  the  gospel.  Considered  as  a prophecy,  however,  the 
expression  is  not  applicable. 


nature’s  divine  revelations.  525 

This  book  contains  fewer  references  to  the  prophecies  than  Mat- 
thew, and  is  confined  particularly  to  a comprehensive  relation  of 
many  things  which  are  also  recorded  in  Matthew,  and  with  a very 
little  dissimilarity.  Mark  makes  mention  of  the  colt  on  which  Jesus 
rode  to  Jerusalem,  adding  to  the  account,  what  Matthew  did  not 
mention,  that  it  was  a colt  “ upon  whose  back  man  never  before  sat,” 
with  the  exception  of  this  slight  variation,  which  was  supposed  to 
make  the  occurrence  nearer  a miracle  than  the  simple  relation  of 
Matthew,  the  two  accounts  coincide.  He  mentions,  also,  the  casting 
of  lots,  to  ascertain  who  should  possess  the  garments  of  Jesus.  This, 
also,  is  related  differently  from  what  we  find  it  in  Matthew.  For  Mat- 
thew, in  connexion,  makes  a quotation,  which  he  appears  to  have 
considered  as  a confirmation  of  the  idea  concerning  the  preknowl- 
edge of  the  early  writers.  Such  quotations  consist  of  incidental 
expressions  occurring  in  the  Old  Testament,  having  in  all  cases  a 
connexion  with  the  historical  events  or  circumstances  referred  to  in 
those  books. 

Mark  then  proceeds  to  quote  from  the  fifty-third  chapter  of  Isaiah, 
the  words,  “ And  he  was  numbered  with  the  transgressors.”  This 
he  applies  to  the  crucifixion  of  Christ  with  the  two  thieves.  It  is 
well  to  remember,  again,  that  it  was  the  expression  which  they  quo- 
ted, and  that  in  order  to  relate  the  circumstance  in  the  language  of 
others,  instead  of  employing  their  own  — the  same  as  one  at  the 
present  day  would  quote  from  the  poetical,  theological,  or  philosophical 
productions  of  any  previous  writer,  when  passages  are  found  which 
are  applicable,  in  order  to  embody  or  confirm  his  own  reasonings  or 
impressions.  If  Mark  and  the  other  New  Testament  writers  had 
used  the  phrase,  “ that  the  expression  might  be  verified,”  instead  of, 
“ that  the  prophecy  might  be  fulfilled,”  the  reader  would  not  be  led 
to  believe  so  many  unwarrantable  ideas  concerning  the  foreknowl- 
edge of  those  prophets. 

The  expression  that  occurs  in  Isaiah,  “ He  shall  be  numbered 
! with  the  transgressors,”  applies  only  to,  and  was  originally  intended 
to  represent,  the  sufferings  and  trials  of  Jeremiah.*  For  although 
he  was  a very  affectionate  and  amiable  man,  and  was  generally  be- 
loved, he  was  nevertheless  numbered  with  the  transgressors  many 
times,  and  was  thus  as  often  despised.  It  is  true  that  Isaiah  mentions 
no  name,  but  a careful  reading  will  decide  that  the  allusion  was  to  some- 
thing of  this  kind,  though  made  in  an  indefinite  and  obscure  manner. 


52G 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


The  book  of  Mark  contains  no  distinct  doctrines  that  are  not  con- 
tained in  Matthew.  It  is  written  in  a more  condensed  and  perspicu- 
ous manner  than  the  book  of  Matthew.  It  is  generally  regarded 
favorably  for  its  brevity  and  plainness  of  historical  and  biographical 
details. 

The  writer  closes  the  book  by  relating  a command  given  to  the 
apostles  to  go  forth  into  all  the  world  and  preach  the  Gospel ; and, 
according  to  what  follows,  their  testimony  was  to  be  offered  to  the 
world  on  terms  most  severe  and  absolute.  It  does  not  seem  possi- 
ble that  any  being  possessing  a very  high  degree  of  spiritual  knowl- 
edge, could  have  uttered  such  a sentence  as,  “He  that  believeth  not 
shall  be  damned.”  This  declaration  is  contrary  to  the  teachings  of 
all  laws  of  cause  and  effect.  He  who  believes  any  principle,  faith, 
or  philosophy,  must  believe  it  as  the  result  of  a deep  and  immovable 
conviction  of  the  judgment.  Certainly  the  mere  fact  of  the  ajiostles 
preaching  could  not  have  been  sufficient  to  produce  such  a faith  as 
wras  demanded.  Faith  could  not  be  expected  when  there  did  nof 
exist  sufficient  cause  to  produce  it. 

Again  : the  reward  for  faith  was  to  be  a salvation — a saving,  per 
haps,  from  sin,  from  skepticism,  from  destruction  by  moral  or  physi- 
cal death,  or  from  an  abode  of  suffering  and  wretchedness.  Neither 
of  these  is  distinctly  mentioned  ; but  whether  it  was  to  he  a salvation 
from  one  or  all  of  these  calamities,  it  would  be  well  to  inquire,  How 
is  it  possible  for  faith,  by  any  natural  process,  to  produce  such  an 
effect  as  is  herein  stated  ? The  effect  of  faith  is  merely  a tranquil- 
lity of  mind,  from  which  flow  bright  hopes  and  anticipations.  There- 
fore faith  can  not  save  from  sin,  or  pain,  or  wretchedness,  or  moral 
oi  spiritual  death.  For  the  world  to  be  saved  from  such  direful 
evils,  the  laws  of  society  and  the  arbitrary  governments  of  nations 
must  be  changed,  so  as  to  coincide  with  the  principles  of  Nature, 
with  the  constitution  of  man,  and  with  all  his  physical  and  spiritual 
requirements. 

The  blessings  that  would  follow  such  an  harmonious  organization 
of  Mankind  could  not  properly  be  considered  as  a reward  or  effect 
of  faith  ; because  faith  is  merely  an  involuntary  assent  of  the  judg- 
ment, and  produces  that  calmness  and  tranquillity  of  mind  which 
constitute  happiness.  This  happiness  is  confined  to  the  mind  whose 
judgment  is  thus  decided,  and  it  is  not  capable  of  being  communi- 
cated to  another,  nor  can  it  even  supply  the  physical  or  spiritual  ne- 
cessities of  its  possessor.  How,  then,  can  salvation  be  a result  of 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


527 


faith  ? And  what  can  be  more  unjust  than  the  severity  and  posi- 
tiveness of  that  declaration  which  says,  “ He  that  believeth  not 
shall  be  damned”  ? A man  can  not  believe  or  disbelieve  at  will. 
He  can  not  control  the  convictions  of  his  own  judgment,  but  is 
obliged  to  submit  to  be  controlled.  He  can  no  more  have  faith  upon 
any  subject  at  will,  than  he  can,  by  the  exercise  of  will,  have  a warm 
or  cold  feeling,  or  a love  or  hatred,  or  a delight  or  displeasure.  How 
unjust  is  it,  then,  to  call  upon  man  to  do  that  which  is  so  entirely 
beyond  his  power  ! It  would  be  as  proper  and  consistent  to  cast  a 
man  upon  a burning  pile,  and  bid  him  live,  under  the  penalty  of  being 
for  ever  damned  if  he  did  not  comply  ; or  to  cast  a man  into  the 
waters  of  a foaming  ocean,  and  bid  him  preserve  his  existence,  while 
at  the  same  time  all  means  of  salvation  are  beyond  his  reach  ; or  to 
place  a man  under  the  keen-edged  guillotine,  and,  at  the  moment 
appointed  for  the  severing  instrument  to  drop,  to  exclaim  — “ Resist 
and  prevent  the  blow,  or  you  shall  be  for  ever  lost  in  the  depths  of 
a burning  abyss  !”  Any  being  who  w'ould  do  these  things  would  be 
called  by  the  world  a tyrant,  a heathen,  a being  not  worthy  of  the 
human  form  or  of  its  sublime  possessions. 

Listen,  then,  ye  who  admire  the  sentiment  expressed  in  the  book 
of  Mark,  while  I inquire,  “ How  can  the  least  degree  of  justice  exist 
in  the  absoluteness  of  that  demand  which  attaches  the  penalty  of  dam- 
nation to  the  non-performance  of  that  which  is  beyond  the  powers  of 
man’s  nature  to  accomplish?”  If,  then,  this  expression  was  ever  ut- 
tered by  Christ,  it  bears  all  the  marks  of  cruelty  and  heathenish  un- 
righteousness. This  is  no  less  the  case  if  it  proceeded  from  the 
mouth  of  any  other  being.  But  I am  happy  to  relate  that  although 
this  is  in  the  book  of  Mark,  it  was  not  uttered  in  the  preaching  of 
Jesus. 


§ 144.  The  next  passage  states  a number  of  evidences  to  he  mani- 
fested by  those  who  truly  believed.  It  reads  as  follows  : “ And 
these  signs  shall  follow  them  that  believe  : In  my  name  shall  they 
cast  out  devils  ; they  shall  speak  with  new  tongues  ; they  shall  take 
up  serpents  without  harm  ; and  if  they  drink  any  deadly  thing,  it  shall 
not  hurt  them  ; they  shall  lay  hands  on  the  sick,  and  they  shall  re- 
cover.” This  is  one  of  the  most  unfortunate  passages  that  could 
possibly  occur  for  theologians  and  the  followers  of  their  philosophy 
and  teachings.  It  can  not  be  truly  said  that  any  possess  the  power 
of  casting  out  devils,  in  the  sense  in  which  the  phrase  is  here  used. 


528 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


If  the  passage  had  said,  “ They  shall  cast  in  devils”  (or  evils J,  then 
would  it  have  been  verified  throughout  the  whole  heathen  and  Chris- 
tian world  ; for  nothing  is  clearer  than  that  the  very  believers  and 
promulgators  of  this  system  of  theology  have  cast  evils,  or  devils, 
into  the  bosom  of  man,  and  into  the  heart  of  society,  to  an  extent  that 
is  beyond  estimation.  Believers,  then,  cast  devils  in,  not  out,  by 
preaching  the  doctrines  supposed  to  have  been  taught  by  Christ.  But 
it  can  not  be  said  with  the  same  degree  of  truth  that  they  ever  suc- 
ceeded in  effectually  banishing  one  devil,  or  evil,  from  the  world. 

The  sentence  which  immediately  follows  has  been  fully  verified, 
viz. : “ They  shall  speak  with  new  tongues.”  It  has  appeared  in 
the  course  of  past  investigations,  that  theologians  (at  least  many  of 
them)  do  frequently  employ  words  in  which  neither  they  nor  any 
other  person  can  discover  the  least  particle  of  signification.  There- 
fore'they  truly  speak  in  new  tongues.  For  the  terms  “satan,” 
“ hell,”  “ reward,”  “ punishment,”  “ involuntary,”  “supernatural,” 
“ disinterested,”  &c.,  are  terms  which  express  as  near  the  shadow  of 
no  substance  as  it  is  possible  for  the  mind  to  conceive.  And  I do 
not  hesitate  to  venture  any  strength  of  assertion  that  these  terms,  with 
a vast  number  of  others,  are  significant  of  no  real  thought,  and  are 
incapable  of  being  applied  to  any  real  principle,  phenomenon,  or  de- 
velopment, in  any  department  of  Nature  or  the  Universe.  Any  per- 
son, then,  entertaining  the  least  particle  of  doubt  concerning  the 
truthfulness  of  the  above  sentence  from  Mark,  should  reflect  on  these 
things,  and  banish  all  doubt  immediately  ; for  it  is  evident  that  these 
theologians  do  speak  in  new  tongues,  inasmuch  as  they  are  scarcely 
comprehended  either  by  themselves  or  any  other  being. 

I can  not  let  this  opportunity  pass  without  observing  some  late 
developments  among  the  followers  of  new  faiths.  These  have  oc- 
curred within  the  last  century,  and  therefore  no  particular  historical 
detail  is  required.  So  I proceed  to  mention  the  performances  of  the 
sect  known  as  the  Mormons.  The  founder  of  this  sect  presented 
to  the  world,  not  only  his  own  testimony,  but  that  of  many  others,  in 
relation  to  his  and  their  religious  faith  and  miraculous  performances. 
They  professed  to  heal  the  sick  by  the  “ laying-on  of  hands,”  to  cast 
out  devils,  and  to  converse  in  unknown  tongues.  They  can  pro- 
duce evidence  of  an  artificial  character  of  these  things,  and  of  their 
actual  occurrence.  But  there  exists  no  interior  evidence,  probability, 
or  use,  in  any  such  performances,  and  therefore  they  should  not  re- 
ceive the  credence  of  any  rational  mind.  One  thing,  however,  in 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


529 


evidence  of  the  possession  of  the  right  faith,  they  could  produce  in 
abundance  ; and  that  is,  they  could  converse  in  unknown  tongues. 
Strictly  true  is  this  statement,  for  some  of  the  dissenters  from  that 
faith  do  not  hesitate  to  acknowledge  that  they  could  and  did  converse 
in  a language  unknown  either  to  themselves  or  to  anybody  else!  The 
followers  of  Ann  Lee,  also,  whose  history  is  well  known,  make  the 
same  pretensions,  and  produce  the  same  evidence  ; and  their  dissent- 
ers make,  without  hesitation,  precisely  the  same  acknowledgment. 

Therefore  beware  of  superficial  testimony,  external  appearances, 
visible,  tangible,  sensual  evidences,  because  such  are  invariably  liable 
to  deceive,  and  are  oftentimes  unrighteous.  Beware,  too,  of  the 
character  of  every  external  testimony.  Search  well  the  cause  of  its 
existence.  Reflect  well  upon  the  external  means  employed  to  pro- 
duce credence  in  respect  to  any  phenomenon  — any  marvellous  cir- 
cumstance— any  miraculous  development,  either  in  Nature  or  in 
man,  and  also  upon  the  uses  made  of  such ; because  there  exists  a 
strong  probability  that  there  are  latent  intentions  connected  with  such 
evidences  that  constitute  the  very  elements  of  deception. 

§ 145.  Many  in  past  ages  believed  that  the  elephant  was  a prodigy 
or  miracle  of  Nature.  Some  of  the  ancients  supposed  that  he  was 
not  only  the  result  of  a miraculous  conception  of  Nature,  but  that  he 
possessed  a spirit,  and  reasoning  powers,  equal  if  not  superior  to 
those  possessed  by  man.  Besides  this,  his  social  habits  were  be- 
lieved by  some  to  be  established,  directed,  and  controlled,  by  spirits 
of  the  mountains,  forests,  and  other  places,  which  they  frequented. 
The  ancients  had  also  an  opinion  that  spirits  communed  with  ele- 
phants, and  instigated  their  thoughts  ; and  that  spirits,  ghosts,  witches, 
angels,  devils,  and  many  similar  personages,  existed  in  great  abun- 
dance. Is  there  not  testimony  in  favor  of  the  most  marvellous 
transactions  of  angels,  devils,  ghosts,  witches,  and  other  active,  in- 
visible beings?  — testimonies,  too,  of  the  most  unexceptionable  char- 
acter ? 

There  are  also  now  persons  who  believe  that  man  is  in  constant 
communion  with  spirits,  either  of  a good  or  evil  character  ; the  first 
being  the  cause  of  all  good  thoughts,  and  the  latter  of  all  evil  ones. 
They  also  believe  that  men  possess  the  power  to  move  toward  the 
gulf  of  evil,  or  the  throne  of  goodness.  This  power  is  termed  “free 
will”  They  thus  make  man  an  independent  and  self-existent  creature, 
and  endeavor  to  impress  upon  his  mind  that  if  he  is  sinful,  it  is  the 

e 34 


530 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


result  merely  of  his  will,  or  his  affection  for  evil ; a quality  which  he 
need  not  possess  if  he  desires  to  be  free  from  it.  Moreover,  it  is  said 
that  he  can  approach  the  throne  or  sphere  of  celestial  goodness  by 
the  same  exercise  of  his  own  will-power.  Such  an  attribute  would 
give  man  unlimited  control  over  the  laws,  forces,  and  actuating  prin- 
ciples, of  the  Universe.  It  would  make  him  possess  the  requisite 
power  to  resist  all  temptation,  and  all  influences  of  eternal  laws.  It 
would  give  him  power  to  command,  and  teach  him  that  he  existed 
uncommanded.  It  would  give  him  power  to  control,  while  he  is 
not  at  all  capable  of  being  controlled,  influenced,  or  actuated  ! 

But  it  may  be  said  that  he  has  “ free  will”  only  in  a qualified  sense. 
But  the  very  moment  a qualification  is  needed,  the  doctrine  is  proved 
to  be  unsound,  and  man’s  power  is  shown  to  be  limited.  If  he  can 
not  under  ~:-eumstances  and  conditions  resist  being  influenced  or 
actuated,  t.^n  the  philosophy  under  notice  is  not  true  ; because  the 
fact  of  man’s  being  once  influenced,  establishes  the  truth  that  he  is 
actuated  by  adequate  forces,  and  governed  throughout  eternity  by 
immutable  laws. 

Others  believe  that  man  may  reproduce  in  himself  the  power  of 
working  miracles,  and  say  they  have  succeeded  in  presenting  a dem- 
onstration. Others  at  the  present  day  believe  that  man  possesses  no 
spiritual  principle  which  will  retain  its  identity  after  the  physical  dis- 
solution. These  reason  deductively,  but  not  analytically  ; hence  the 
conclusion  is  illegitimate  and  unsound.  And  there  are  existing  in- 
numerable sects,  entertaining  as  many  different  opinions  ; and  each 
sect  is  anxious  to  sustain  its  own  particular  creed. 

The  followers  of  Ann  Lee  seriously  believe  and  teach  that  select 
persons  among  them  commune  with  the  spirits  that  inhabit  celestial 
spheres.  They  frequently  induce,  by  excitement,  a cataleptic  con- 
dition of  the  body,  and  then  are  said  to  be  in  heaven,  walking  among 
and  conversing  with  the  angels.  And  when  they  return  to  outward 
consciousness,  they  relate  these  marvellous  peregrinations  with  all 
the  seriousness  and  solemnity  of  truth  — because  they  believe  them. 
Surely,  then,  miracles  exist  in  our  midst,  of  the  same  character  as 
those  which  are  mentioned  in  the  book  of  Mark  as  following  all  true 
believers. 

Is  it  not  as  reasonable  to  esteem  heathen,  ancient,  Chinese,  Per- 
sianic,  or  Mohammedan  credulity,  as  the  credulity  of  those  who  im 
plicitly  believe  and  teach  the  doctrines  of  the  Primitive  History  ? Is 
it  not  just  to  regard  the  Mormon  and  Shaker  evidences  and  credulity 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


531 


that  exist  in  our  midst,  with  the  same  degree  of  veneration  as  the 
things  merely  related  in  the  books  of  the  New  Testament,  and  be- 
lieved by  many  in  the  world  ? Certainly  modern  credulity  is  as  much 
to  be  respected  as  ancient.  Then  why  confine  belief,  when  external 
evidences  of  true  faiths  exist  about  and  among  us  in  abundance  ? 

The  sentence  which  follows  the  last  one  commented  upon,  refers 
to  the  handling  of  serpents  without  harm.  Unfortunately,  there  ex- 
ists much  actual  danger  in  this  experiment ; and  hence  it  is  not  so 
frequently  attempted  as  the  former  ones.  There  exists  evidence 
that  more  men  who  have  possessed  scarcely  any  faith,  have  handled 
serpents  with  perfect  safety,  than  there  have  been  persons  who  have 
performed  the  same  things  among  those  possessing  faith  sufficiently 
powerful  almost  to  remove  a light  mountain. 

Furthermore,  it  is  said,  “ They  shall  drink  any  deadly  thing  with- 
out injury.”  It  is  strange  how  deadly  things  can  be  drunk  without 
injuring  life  ! It  is  unnecessary  to  speak  of  the  action  of  the  human 
system  in  repulsing  or  yielding  to  that  which  is  opposed  to  its  nature 
or  composition.  Poison  can  be  taken  into  the  system  in  minute  'por- 
tions without  injury  ; but  if  too  great  a portion  is  taken,  it  is  incapa- 
ble of  assimilating  with  the  elements  of  the  body,  and  thus  constitutes 
a violation  (though  not  a suspension)  of  natural  law,  the  inevitable 
result  of  which  would  be  a cessation  of  life.  A true  believer,  then, 
may  take  a small  portion  without  receiving  harm  ; but  then  this  would 
not  be  taking  a deadly  thing  in  the  sense  implied  in  the  passage.  Be- 
sides this,  an  unbeliever  could,  without  injury,  take  the  same  quantity. 
But  it  is  plain  that  the  handling  of  serpents  and  the  drinking  of  poison 
is  an  experiment  that  is  rather  too  personal  to  be  often  attempted. 

Alas  for  theologians,  and  those  who  think  they  are  unerring  be- 
lievers ! for  the  evidences  which  they  can  produce  are  so  few  and 
so  intangible,  that  the  human  mind  is  incapable  of  discerning  their 
existence.  Remember  these  external  evidences  are  not  to  be  in  any 
case  relied  upon  as  proving  anything  to  which  they  are  applied.  If 
what  I reveal  requires  external  testimony  to  prove  its  truth,  then  in- 
deed its  truth  might  with  propriety  be  doubted.  But  if,  while  it  pos- 
sesses the  external  clothing  of  sensuous  and  superficial  testimony,  it 
sinks  deep  into  the  recesses  of  the  judgment,  even  to  the  interior  of 
the  human  spirit,  and  there  receives  a response,  its  truth  is  at  once 
placed  beyond  doubt,  and  is  established  to  a demonstration.  In  this 
manner  should  all  things  be  tested  ; and  then  truth,  goodness,  and 
tranquillity,  will  be  the  legitimate  consequences. 


532  nature’s  divine  revelations. 

With  these  remarks,  I leave  the  contents  of  the  book  of  Mark,  to 
speak  of  the  writer  personally.  His  name  was  John  Mark.  He 
was  born  and  brought  up,  and  resided  through  his  life,  in  the  city 
of  Jerusalem.  He  lived  at  the  time  John  the  Baptist  and  Jesus 
were  preaching.  He  was  a believer,  and  felt  anxious  to  have  the 
new  faith  promulgated  and  believed  ; but  he  can  not  be  properly 
termed  an  apostle.  He  had  a small  family,  and  was  pleasantly  situ- 
ated, both  as  to  the  capacity  of  his  residence  and  his  financial  affairs. 
He  was  accustomed  to  keep  open  his  house  as  a place  of  entertain- 
ment and  resort  for  Jesus  and  the  apostles;  and  this  continued  du- 
ring the  whole  public  life  of  Jesus,  and  especially  from  about  the 
time  he  began  to  preach  until  his  crucifixion.  After  this  event,  John 
Mark  compiled  some  of  the  remarks  of  Jesus,  and  some  impressions 
concerning  him,  from  a few  registered  notes  which  he  had  kept,  into 
the  form  of  a manuscript,  which  he  designed  and  intended  only  for 
the  reading  of  some  converts,  mainly  from  paganism. 

But  it  should  be  remembered  that  manuscripts  written  in  those 
days,  upon  bark  or  some  similar  substance,  were  never  copied  as 
writings  are  copied  in  modern  days.  So  he  alone  possessed  this  rec- 
ord, and  it  was  scarcely  read  or  known  to  be  existing  by  any  other 
persons  than  those  for  whom  it  was  immediately  designed,  until  a 
long  period  after  his  death.  And  what  right  Constantine  and  the 
bishops  assembled  at  Nice  and  Laodicea  had  to  vote  the  book  of 
Mark  as  canonical,  is  not  very  easily  explained  ; inasmuch  as  many 
similar  manuscripts  and  epistles  were  rejected  and  burned  according 
to  the  decision  of  their  misdirected  judgments.  Mark  never  intimated 
that  he  desired  or  intended  that  the  world  at  the  nineteenth  century 
should  read  his  registered  historical  impressions  ; nor  was  he  ever 
directed  by  Jesus  to  even  write  or  publish  them.  Whence,  then, 
this  superstitious  veneration  for  that  which  was  never  intended  by 
those  whom  you  love  most,  even  Jesus  and  the  apostles,  to  be  thus 
superstitiously  believed  and  sanctified  by  subsequent  generations? 

^ 146.  I now  proceed  to  a brief  consideration  of  the  book  of 
Luke,  which  follows  : — 

Luke  was  a very  candid,  worthy,  and  well-instructed  author.  His 
writings  manifest  a great  deal  of  perspicuity,  candor,  and  intended 
truthfulness.  He  is  serious  in  every  respect,  and  worthy  of  the 
deepest  regard  ; and  confidence  should  not  be  withholden  from  his 
historical  relations.  He  prefaced  his  remarks  with  a very  clear  and 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


533 


lucid  description  of  the  character  of  his  impressions  concerning  Je- 
sus and  the  apostles,  speaking  particularly  of  the  source  of  the  infor- 
mation from  which  he  wrote.  He  intimates  that  he  penned  that 
which  himself  and  many  others  “ most  surely  believed.”  He 
attaches  no  inspiration  to  his  knowledge.  He  courts  the  favor  of  no 
person.  He  does  not  claim  to  be  believed  because  he  writes  ; but 
his  whole  introduction  displays  a beautiful  simplicity  and  candor 
which  can  not  fail  to  commend  the  author. to  respect  and  esteem. 
And  what  is  still  more  remarkable  is,  that  he  discards  that  which  is 
claimed  for  him  by  commentators,  and  all  who  profess  to  believe  that 
he,  in  common  with  his  associate  writers,  was  supernaturally  inspired. 
How  unrighteous,  how  injurious  to  the  race  it  is,  for  men  to  claim 
for  the  Bible  that  fear,  that  superstitious  and  unreal  veneration,  which 
the  Bible  does  not  demand  for  itself! 

Some  may  consider  these  sayings  as  derogatory  to  the  holy  purity 
of  the  Bible,  especially  to  that  purity  which  interpreters  attach  to  it, 
but  which  can  not  be.  found  in  that  book.  But  instead  of  opposing, 
I am  defending  the  writers  of  the  New  and  Old  Testament  against 
the  superstitious  falsifications  that  are  imposed  upon  their  writings  by 
those  who  profess  to  be  their  expounders.  I feel  impressed  to  say, 
that  the  Bible,  like  all  other  books,  should  be  respected  for  the  in- 
trinsic worth  and  truthfulness  which  may  characterize  it;  but  for  no 
other  reason.  Moreover,  in  speaking  of  superstitious  and  false  inter- 
pretations, I refer  to  the  fact  that  it  is  taught  with  a great  deal  of 
sanctimoniousness,  that  its  contents  are  an  influx  from  the  Divine 
Mind  into  the  minds  of  those  who  wrote  it.  I am  distinctly  im- 
pressed wdth  the  conviction  that  no  book,  or  any  other  superficial 
production  of  man,  can  legitimately  and  truthfully  claim  such  inspira- 
tion. For  nothing  can  be  of  divine  origin  which  is  not  inseparably 
connected  with,  and  incessantly  developed  by,  the  laws,  qualities,  and 
principles,  contained  in  the  great  Tree  of  universal  causation.  And 
I have  shown  that  that  which  man  creates  or  invents  merely  by  his 
evanescent  imagination,  can  not  be  anything  more  than  a mass  of 
imperfection.  Thus  those  books  may  contain  truth,  yet  no  book  is 
worthy  the  veneration  which  the  Mohammedan  pays  to  the  Koran, 
the  Brahmin  to  the  Shaster,  the  Persian  to  the  Zend  Avesta,  or 
the  Christian  to  the  Bible. 

I'have  made  these  remarks  wdth  distinctness,  so  that  there  may  be 
no  misapprehension,  concerning  that  of  which  I am  impressed  to 
speak,  and  that  there  may  not  exist  any  obscurity  or  discrepancy  in 


534 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


the  minds  of  those  who  seriously  reflect,  who  candidly  investigate,  and 
who  fear  not  to  read,  untrammelled  by  sectarian  prejudice. 

The  book  of  Luke  is  very  free  from  quotations  from  the  prophe- 
cies. Those,  however,  that  are  made,  are  similar  to  those  which  T 
have  previously  noticed.  This  hook  advances  no  particular  doc- 
trine which  in  any  way  needs  an  explanation  or  comment.  Nor  do 
I discover  that  its  teachings  are  in  any  particular  different  from  those 
of  the  previous  books,  with  the  exception  of  some  new  parabolical 
illustrations,  some  change  in  the  expression,  and  also  in  the  group- 
ing of  the  historical  accounts  of  the  life,  preaching,  and  crucifixion 
of  Jesus.  And  those  things  which  are  in  it  advanced,  have  been,  in 
a general  manner,  commented  upon  in  reviewing  the  several  propo- 
sitions, derived  from  the  book  of  Matthew.  So  I will  conclude  all 
reflections  on  this  book,  and  offer  a few  remarks  concerning:  its 
author. 

Luke  also  was  of  Jewish  birth  — was  educated  in  the  Jewish  reli- 
gion, and  in  this  continued  nearly  to  the  time  of  Paul’s  conversion 
from  the  Jewish  to  the  Christian  religion.  Luke  in  his  early  life 
learned  a trade,  which  was  the  custom  among  the  Jewish  people, 
whether  the  parents  of  the  young  were  or  were  not  wealthy.  He 
succeeded  eminently  in  his  profession,  which  was  that  of  an  artist, 
He  is  said  to  have  painted  the  first  portrait  of  Christ,  which  is  to  be 
seen  at  the  present  day  in  the  Roman  Academy  of  Design.  After 
Luke  embraced  the  Christian  religion,  he  was  a constant  co-worker 
with  many  of  the  apostles  and  believers  in  various  portions  of  the 
eastern  world.  He  obtained  his  information  principally  from  com- 
munications received  from  those  who  were  eye-witnesses  of  the 
things  related  concerning  Jesus.  He  wrote  not  from  actual  knowl- 
edge, but  from  that  which  he  received  from  others.  One  of  his  par- 
ticular friends  was  Theophilus,  whom  he  felt  very  anxious  to  con- 
vince of  the  truth  of  Christianity.  To  him  he  wrote  this  gospel  and 
the  Acts  of  the  Apostles  ; and  these  books  were  written  for  no  other 
purpose  than  to  produce  a conviction  in  the  mind  of  his  friend,  cor- 
responding to  that  in  his  own.  And  it  is  well  to  inquire  on  what 
authority  were  these  writings  voted  canonical,  when,  at  the  same 
time,  many  as  worthy  manuscripts  were  deprived  of  their  existence. 
Meanwhile,  consider,  reader,  that  Luke  intended  merely  to  convince 
his  friend  by  writing  and  transmitting  his  thoughts  in  a connected 
manner,  and  had  no  design  that  the  whole  world  should  be  taught  to 
believe  that  of  which  he  desired  only  to  convince  Theophilus.  It  may 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


535 


be  that  he  desired  that  such  might  be  the  case,  because  all  who  are 
firmly  convinced  of  any  faith,  desire  to  have  it  become  universal. 
But  one  thing  is  absolutely  certain  : he  neither  pretended  to  inspira- 
tion nor  even  anticipated  being  classed  as  he  has  been,  in  a standard 
cyclopedia  of  theology.  Nor  did  he  even  once  intimate  that  he  en- 
tertained any  thought  as  to  the  distinction  which  his  writings  have 
subsequently  received. 

Luke  also  wrote  concerning  the  origin  of  the  Ephesian  church; 
how  it  was  established  ; what  teachings  and  ceremonies  were  adopted, 
and  how  he  and  the  brethren  of  the  church  exulted,  and  congratula- 
ted each  other,  in  the  possession  of  their  new  faith.  ’ His  books  are 
full  of  information,  and  they  demand  respect  and  approbation  for 
their  simplicity  and  fluency  of  expression  — at  least  as  much  respect 
as  the  writings  of  any  other  good  and  worthy  man. 

§ 147.  I next  proceed  to  the  book  of  John.  This  book  displays 
great  warmth  of  feeling,  affection,  and  social  and  religious  attachment 
It  manifests  a great  deal  of  veneration,  and  aspiring  and  noble  senti- 
ment ; and  these  characterized  the  life,  disposition,  and  spiritual 
constitution  of  its  author.  Its  contents  are  mostly  a repetition  of 
things  recorded  in  the  former  books  ; and  it  contains  but  few  appeals 
to  promiscuous  expressions  among  the  prophecies.  It  establishes 
no  proposition  that  differs  from  those  heretofore  noticed,  and  hence 
needs  no  further  comment. 

I can  not,  however,  very  well  avoid  one  remark  upon  a casual  and 
unguarded  sentence  at  the  close  of  this  book,  in  which  John  expres- 
ses the  supposition,  that  if  all  the  things  which  Christ  performed  were 
written,  “ even  the  world  itself  could  not  contain  the  books  that 
would  be  written.”  Notwithstanding  there  were  thousands  of  things 
said  and  done  by  Jesus  which  neither  John  nor  any  other  writer  re- 
corded, it  is  plain  to  every  mind  that  if  those  things  were  written,  the 
world  would  hold  them.  This  is  an  evidence  of  John’s  unbounded 
and  sanguine  love  for  the  faith  which  he  had  embraced.  And  even 
a little  exaggeration  on  the  part  of  the  apostles,  in  writing  their  im- 
pressions, forbids  at  once  the  possibility  of  their  minds  being  under 
the  controlling  influence  of  inspiration  from  the  Divine  Mind.  What- 
ever is  divine  — strictly  of  celestial  birth  — must  bear  unexceptionable 
evidence  of  its  holy  origin. 

John  was  born,  and  resided  the  greater  portion  of  his  life,  in 
Ephesus.  His  early  religious  impressions  were  few : and  when 


536 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


these  things  were  presented  to  his  mind,  he  exercised  a great  deal 
of  judgment  and  reflection  upon  their  merits,  and  afterward  adopted 
and  promulgated  them  with  a great  deal  of  sanguine  confidence  and 
energy.  His  manuscripts,  like  Mark’s,  were  a long  time  concealed 
from  public  observation,  but  were  subsequently  translated  into  the 
Hebrew  language,  were  sanctioned  by  the  council  of  Nice,  sealed  as 
canonical  by  Constantine,  and  thus  were  presented  to  the  world  as 
constituting  the  fourth  book  of  the  New  Testament. 

The  fifth  book,  which  follows,  entitled  “ Acts  of  the  Apos- 
tles,” is  an  historical  commentary  and  registral  production  of  Luke. 
It  contains  only  a record  of  circumstances,  experiences,  travels,  dis- 
cussions, and  vicissitudes,  of  the  apostles ; an  account  of  the  forma- 
tion and  establishment  of  the  church  ; and  descriptions  of  the  unity, 
peace,  quietness,  and  brotherly  love,  which  prevailed  among  the  be- 
lievers. It  does  not  contain  any  principles  requiring  comment  or 
elucidation.  And  inasmuch  as  it  is  a book  of  historical  information, 
it  claims  for  itself  only  this  character.  If  any  other  claims  are  set  up 
as  to  its  origin,  contents,  or  importance,  then  these  claims  are  un- 
warrantable ; and  Luke,  its  writer,  completely  overthrows  them.  It 
certainly  contains  many  beautiful  and  forcible  expressions  of  senti- 
ments, but  no  new  principles ; and  hence  I pass  on  to  the  considera- 
tion of  the  following  books. 

§ 148.  I come  now  to  reflect  upon  the  birth,  life,  preachings,  ex- 
perience, disposition,  and  death,  of  a very  highly-educated  and  much- 
beloved  writer.  Indeed,  I can  not  resist  the  attraction  toward  so 
worthy  a mind  — one  possessing  so  much  purity  of  soul  and  so  much 
lofty  magnanimity. 

Before  I speak  of  his  many  friendly  epistles  to  associated  brethren 
and  established  churches  in  various  portions  of  the  east,  I will  dwell 
upon  his  birth,  life,  disposition,  and  experiences. 

Ecclesiastical  historians  have  collected  some  very  truthful  informa- 
tion concerning  the  birth  and  life  of  Paul  ; and  to  their  historical 
accounts  much  credit  should  be  given.  Paul  was  born  in  Tarsus. 
He  dwelt  during  the  early  portion  of  his  life  in  the  city  of  Rome, 
and  was  there  much  esteemed  as  a highly-talented  and  respectable 
citizen.  After  receiving  a very  superior  education  through  various 
means  of  instruction,  he  subjected  himself  to  a long  and  protracted 
course  of  studies  under  the  guidance  and  instruction  of  Gamaliel  in 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


537 


Jerusalem.  Gamaliel  was  a professor  of  ancient  literature,  natural 
philosophy,  and  traditional  science,  and  was  recognised  as  a superior 
teacher  of  the  various  languages.  He  was  a Jewish  rabbin.  From 
him  Paul  received  many  doctrines  and  religious  hypotheses,  which 
afterward  in  a measure  gave  direction  to  his  religious  meditations  and 
writings.  After  Paul  had  completed  his  education,  he  was  truly  an 
enlightened  man,  so  far  as  a knowledge  of  external  science  and  phi- 
losophy is  worthy  to  be  termed  enlightenment. 

He  was  also  familiar  with  the  Grecian  poets  and  philosophers, 
and  from  them  received  much  of  his  sublime  thought  and  rational 
philosophy.  Indeed,  this  is  plain  from  a part  of  his  writings  con- 
tained in  the  New  Testament ; for  many  of  his  expressions  as  con- 
nected with  his  moral  philosophy,  evince  a striking  similarity  of 
views  and  style  to  those  of  the  Grecian  poets  and  metaphysicians. 

Paul  cultivated  many  useful  social  accomplishments.  His  social 
life  was  of  an  exceedingly  complex  character,  for  it  was  extensively 
interwoven  with  various  experiences  both  of  a pleasing  and  disap- 
pointing nature.  These  were  of  such  a character  as  tended  con- 
stantly to  modify  and  develop  in  him  new  traits  of  mental  constitu- 
tion. He,  like  Luke,  learned  a very  useful  trade,  namely,  that  of 
tent-making , which  he  subsequently  discovered  to  be  of  great  advan- 
tage and  importance  to  him.  Being  a Roman  citizen  for  a great 
portion  of  his  life,  his  character,  religion,  philosophy,  and  deport- 
ment, were  very  much  like  those  with  whom  he  familiarly  associated  ; 
and  therefore  he  can  not  he  said  to  have  possessed  a predisposition 
to  become  what  he  subsequently  did  become.  Nor  can  it  be  said 
that  he  required  a spiritual  influx  of  superior  truths  to  write  his  moral 
philosophy  ; for  he  was  superiorly  enlightened  in  all  important  branch- 
es of  knowledge,  such  as  the  arts,  science,  logic,  metaphysics,  and 
physical  and  religious  philosophy.  But  this  much  can  be  said  — and 
the  assertion  is  fully  attested  by  his  own  productions  — that  he  was  a 
most  pure,  worthy,  benevolent,  and  devotional  man,  characterized  by 
all  those  superior  qualifications  that  are  required  to  constitute  a truly 
great  and  good  mind. 

During  the  time  that  Jesus  lived,  and  while  his  doctrines  were 
being  disseminated,  Paul  was  a most  violent  opposer,  and  unquali- 
fiedly rejected  and  despised  the  doctrines  that  he  afterward  so  rap- 
turously embraced.  This  opposition  continued  for  many  years  after 
the  death  of  Christ,  during  which  period  he  embraced  the  Pharisai- 
cal philosophy,  which  contained  some  truth,  though  that  truth  was 


53S 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


entirely  concealed  by  a superabundance  of  error  arising  merely  from 
external,  material  observation.  And  after  Paul  joined  this  sect,  he 
assumed  the  position  of  commander,  at  the  head  of  a band  or  army 
composed  of  the  same  sect,  and  marched  against  and  persecuted  the 
Christian  believers  to  an  unjust  and  unwarrantable  extent.  Thus 
was  he  employed  for  a long  period.  He  manifested  in  all  cases  the 
most  violent  and  sanguinary  intentions  against  the  Christians.  All 
his  movements  were  characterized  by  a great  degree  of  firmness,  and 
an  eager  and  positive  determination  to  have  his  own  opinions  and 
principles  prevail. 

It  is  related  that  while  on  his  way  to  Damascus,  he  experienced  a 
sudden  change  in  his  actuating  motives  and  intentions;  and  this  oc- 
currence has  been  related  in  such  a manner  as  to  convey  the  impres- 
sion that  it  proceeded  from  a miraculous  or  supernatural  interposition 
of  the  Divine  Mind.  I am  fully  aware  of  the  circumstance,  and  also 
why  such  an  ocular  impression  was  received  ; and  an  acquaintance 
with  the  fact  as  it  occurred  dissipates  immediately  all  superstitious 
ideas  of  a miraculous  interposition. 

From  this  period,  the  faculties  of  Paul  took  a different  direction, 
and  he  became  devoted  to  the  Christian  religion  ; the  consequence 
of  which  was  a violent  denouncement  of  the  doctrines  and  persecu- 
tions of  his  past  life.  Thus  were  displayed  the  extremes  in  the 
workings  of  a nervous-sanguine  temperament:  for  he  then  rejected 
the  Pharisaical  and  exerted  his  powers  to  sustain  the  Christian  re- 
ligion, with  the  same  degree  of  ardor  and  positiveness  that  he  had 
before  manifested  in  defence  of  the  Pharisaical  religion  against  the 
Christian. 

He  now  devoted  his  life  and  talents  to  the  promulgation  of  the 
gospel.  In  this  he  was  employed  for  thirty  years,  during  which  time 
he  travelled  and  preached  in  Arabia,  Greece,  Asia  Minor,  and  on 
many  islands  of  the  Mediterranean.  Fie  was  active  in  establishing 
societies  and  religious  associations,  in  order  to  bring  more  closely 
together  those  who  believed  the  new  faith,  so  that  they  might  con- 
gregate and  worship  in  accordance  with  the  doctrines  which  they  had 
embraced.  In  this  work  he  manifested  much  zeal,  devotion,  and 
activity.  Fie  likewise  adopted  the  custom  of  epistolary  correspon- 
dence, which  had  previously  been  introduced  by  other  converts  and 
apostles.  His  epistles  were  generally  directed  to  the  prominent  mem- 
bers of  the  churches,  and  were  also  addressed  indirectly  to  the  whole 
congregation  in  each  vicinity  where  he  had  labored  to  deposite  a 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


539 


germ  of  Christianity.  Hence,  some  of  those  epistles  were  preserved, 
collected,  compiled,  and  immersed  into  the  New  Testament,  in  the 
following  order : — 

1.  Paul's  Epistle  to  the  Romans.  — This  was  addressed  to  the 
Roman  church  or  congregation  that  had  associated  to  enjoy  the  faith 
which  both  he  and  they  had  embraced.  2.  Paxil's  Epistles  to  the 
Corinthians,  or  to  the  congregation  of  associated  brethren  in  the  faith 
at  Corinth.  3.  Paul's  Epistle  to  the  Galatians ; being  a letter  of 
exhortation,  expressive  of  friendship  and  brotherly  kindness,  to  the 
worshipping  brethren  in  the  church  of  Galatia.  4.  Paul's  Epistle  to 
the  Ephesians ; being  a kind  and  friendly  letter  to  those  who  had  em- 
braced the  faith,  and  who  desired  the  encouragement  and  approba- 
tion of  Paul,  at  Ephesus.  5.  Paul's  Epistle  to  the  Philippians ; 
being  a kind  letter  of  encouragement  and  congratulation  to  the  church 
of  Philippi  on  the  possession  of  their  new  faith.  6.  Paul's  Epistle 
to  the  Colossians  ; which  is  a letter  expressing  spiritual  sympathy  and 
congeniality  of  affection  for  the  brethren  in  Colosse,  together  with 
earnest  desires  for  the  success  of  the  gospel  among  them.  7.  Two 
of  the  many  epistles  written  by  Paul  to  the  Thessalonians ; consisting 
of  prayerful  and  devout  exhortations,  and  expressions  of  approbation, 
sympathy,  affection,  and  love,  to  the  whole  congregation  of  worship- 
pers at  Thessalonica.  S.  Paul’s  epistles  to  his  much-admired  friend 
Timothy,  who  was  a private  correspondent  and  a general  co-worker 
with  Paul.  This  Timothy  sustained  an  office  in  the  church  modern- 
ly  called  deacon,  and  in  this  capacity  presented  Paul’s  much-admired 
advice  to  the  congregation  of  which  he  was  a member.  9.  Paul’s 
epistle  to  Titus,  who  was  in  a similar  office,  and  who  was  equally 
beloved  as  a brother  and  correspondent,  by  Paul.  10.  Paul's  Epis- 
tle to  the  Hebrews ; in  which  he  expresses  all  his  devotional  sympathy 
for  the  doctrines  cherished  in  his  memory,  and  also  manifests  all  that 
loving-kindness  and  perseverance  which  characterized  all  his  efforts 
in  the  propagation  and  establishment  of  the  Christian  faith. 


§ 149.  Thus  Paul’s  letters  occupy  and  compose  a large  portion 
of  the  New  Testament.  On  investigation  of  these  letters,  it  appears 
plain  that  they  never  were  intended  or  expected  by  Paul  to  be  uni- 
versally read.  Not  only  is  the  internal  evidence  sufficient  to  warrant 
this  conclusion,  but  the  historical  evidence  is  such  as  entirely  to  de- 
monstrate its  truth.  What  I mean  by  the  internal  evidence  or  sig- 


540 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


nification  of  written  thoughts,  is  that  connected  with  the  source  or 
origin  from  which  they  sprang — the  basis  upon  which  the  thought 
or  the  dement  of  the  expression  reposes. 

Some  suppose  that  an  interior  meaning  is  discoverable  in  every 
expression  in  the  Bible  ; but  that  this  can  be  perceived  only  by  those 
who  have  a high  degree  of  spiritual  discernment  — while  others, 
whose  knowledge  is  confined  to  the  sphere  of  sensuous  observation 
and  impression,  are  constantly  interpreting  the  contents  of  the  Bible 
in  a gross  and  literal  manner.  Giving  to  any  book  or  its  contents  a 
“ spiritual  signification,”  is  not  to  unfold  an  interior  origin  or  cause 
of  tbe  ideas  expressed  ; but  it  is  merely  setting  aside  its  literal  signifi- 
cation, and  clothing  its  teachings  with  a spiritual  garment.  This  is 
manifestly  covering  or  concealing  expressions,  which  are  sometimes 
loose,  unguarded,  and  even  unrighteous  and  insignificant,  with  a bril- 
liant external  and  ornamental  garment.  But  it  is  distinctly  clear  that 
in  order  to  search  into  the  interior  or  germ  of  a thought,  the  mind 
must  become  acquainted  with  the  causes  engaged  in  developing  that 
germ  into  the  form  of  a written  expression.  And  it  is  absolutely 
impossible  to  give  a real  signification  to  expressions  the  soul  or  cause 
of  which  originated  merely  in  the  theology  and  mythology  of  an  age 
when  misdirection  and  unreasonable  hallucination  had  possession,  to 
a great  extent,  of  the  mind  of  every  human  being. 

Language  may  and  has  changed.  When  the  inhabitants  of  early 
ages  used  the  terms  Mercury,  Venus,  Mars,  Jupiter,  Saturn,  Juno, 
Pallas,  &c.,  their  thoughts  became  directly  associated  with  various 
gods  that  were  supposed  to  be  existing  in  the  invisible  world,  the 
history  of  whom  they  had  preserved  in  hieroglyphics.  But  now 
when  these  terms  are  used,  the  mind  does  not  revert  to  these  heathen 
deities,  but  becomes  directly  associated  with  the  various  planets  and 
asteroids  of  our  solar  system.  Thus  it  is  that  language  has,  in  its 
application,  become  exceedingly  changed.  Therefore,  what  Mat- 
thew, Mark,  Luke,  John,  Christ,  Paul,  or  any  of  the  writers  of  the 
Bible,  have  written,  may  have  signified  at  that  time  what  at  the  pres- 
ent day  can  not  be  understood  by  the  same  terms.  Inasmuch,  then, 
as  the  application  of  many  terms  has  ceased  to  be  as  it  was  in  former 
ages,  whatever  signification  may  now,  by  conventional  usage,  be  given 
to  terms  employed  by  oriental  writers,  can  not  possibly  change  the 
positive  fact  that  their  writings  were  conceived  and  brought  forth 
amid  various  causes  which  it  is  necessary  to  analyze  and  comprehend, 
before  there  can  be  such  a thing  as  understanding  what  the  germ, 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


541 


soul,  or  element  of  any  expression,  would  indicate  as  its  real  and 
original  signification. 

I am  particularly  desirous  of  being  apprehended  aright  in  speaking 
of  this  important  distinction  between  the  interior  signification  of  a 
term  or  expression,  and  that  spiritual  application  which  has  been 
called  an  interior  meaning.  In  order  to  be  distinctly  understood,  I 
again  repeat  that  no  mind  can  search  into  and  analyze  the  interior 
meaning  or  origin  of  words  or  expressions,  without  arriving  irresisti- 
bly at  the  conclusion  which  has  been  heretofore  attained  — that  the  con- 
tents of  the  Bible,  like  those  of  all  other  books,  have  originated  among 
a number  of  productive  causes,  all  of  which  must  be  taken  into  con- 
sideration before  any  validity  or  importance  can  be  attached  to  the 
records  therein  contained.  No  analytical  mind  can  by  any  possible 
means  arrive  at  conclusions  contrary  to  those  which  are  here  estab- 
lished. And  be  it  further  understood  that  I stay  not  on  terms,  or  on 
the  thousands  of  sermons  and  commentaries  that  have  grown  out  of 
a supposed  hidden  signification  of  expressions  in  the  Bible.  For  to 
dwell  upon  these  would  be  only  to  analyze  the  shadows,  the  intangi- 
ble unrealities,  which  consist  of  the  innumerable  interpretations  of 
the  Bible  — which  latter  is  assumed  to  be  what  it  does  not  itself  pro- 
fess to  be,  and  what  it  in  reality  is  not,  and  never  was.  Know,  then, 
reader,  that  I am  analyzing,  dissecting,  and  investigating  the  germ  of 
all  these  superfluous  productions.  And  this  is  the  result  of  the  strict 
and  severe  analysis  : that  the  elements  and  qualities  contained  in  the 
Bible,  or  the  germ  of  this  great  theological  tree,  are  positively  impure, 
and  unworthy  of  the  interpretations  and  veneration  which  they  have 
received  in  the  form  of  the  book  to  which  they  have  given  origin. 
And  this  book  can  not  by  any  possible  means  be  proved  to  contain 
those  pure  and  celestial  qualities  that  dwell  in  Divine  Love  and  Wis- 
dom, which  constitute  the  germ,  the  development  of  which  is  a grand, 
sublime,  and  harmonious  Universe,  of  which  Man  is  a branch  and  a 
perfect  representative.  As  this  latter,  therefore,  constitutes  the  true 
theology,  certainly  a theology  can  not  be  unlike  it  and  at  the  same 
time  true. 

These  considerations  (the  truth  of  which  certainly  can  not  be  dis- 
proved without  some  investigation)  show  that  it  is  impossible  to  give  an 
interior  signification  of  a spiritual  character  to  that  which  does  not 
already  contain  a Divine  and  celestial  element.  Hence  the  doctrine 
which  I discover  in  the  world  as  resulting  from  a spiritual  commen- 
tation upon  the  Bible,  is  not  a revealment  or  development  of  the  in- 


542 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS 


terior  possessions  of  that  book,  but  on!}'  a new  and  attractive  garment 
in  which  the  whole  confused  collection  of  matter  is  concealed  from 
the  mind,  both  of  the  casual  and  the  reflective  reader.  This  much, 
however,  may  be  said  for  the  consolation  of  him  who  reads  under- 
standing!)', and  with  the  yearnings  of  a philanthropic  bosom  : that 
Reason  and  Wisdom,  like  the  sun,  will  shine  and  bring  forth  all  de- 
sirable and  congenial  results,  when  the  clouds  of  obstruction  and  mis- 
conception are  dissipated  for  ever ! 

§ 150.  In  the  ten  books  or  epistles  of  Paul,  I discover  no  dis- 
tinct doctrine  that  I have  not  in  a general  way  noticed  and  commented 
upon  in  previous  remarks.  My  object  at  present  is  to  make  it  clear 
to  the  mind  of  the  reader  that  Paul  was  a good  man  — worthy  of 
great  esteem  and  confidence,  and  that  he  embraced  bis  faith,  and 
wrote  concerning  it,  as  any  other  man  would  have  done,  who  felt 
convinced  that  the  faith  which  he  had  adopted  ought  to  be  exten 
sively  believed. 

Paul  is  the  only  writer  in  the  whole  Bible  who  attempts  to  prove 
his  faith  by  an  appeal  to  Nature.  His  philosophy  was  evidently  im- 
pressed upon  his  mind  prior  to  his  embracing  Christianity ; and  he 
appealed  to  external  and  visible  manifestations  to  illustrate  or  demon 
strate  his  peculiar  doctrines.  These  he  presented  to  the  brethren 
with  whom  he  familiarly  and  frequently  corresponded.  But  he  never 
wrote  a system  of  moral  philosophy  to  be  taught  and  believed  by 
subsequent  generations  of  the  earth  ; and  that  he  did,  there  exists  no 
evidence  in  his  epistolary  correspondence. 

The  doctrine  of  the  resurrection  — of  a literal  rising  of  the  natural 
body  — is  supposed  by  some  to  be  positively  taught  and  clearly  de- 
monstrated by  Paul.  This,  however,  is  not  true,  though  the  form  of 
expression  evinces  a belief  in  such  a doctrine.  Thus  he  says, 
“ We  are  sown  in  a natural  body,  and  raised  in  a spiritual  body;  we 
are  sown  in  dishonor,  and  raised  in  glory.”  (1  Cor.  xv.)  It  is 
clear,  from  these  expressions,  that  Paul  uses  the  terms  natural  and 
spiritual,  dishonor  and  glorxj , in  contradistinction  to  each  other  ; so 
that  the  superior  would  be  rendered  more  beautiful  by  being  placed 
in  contrast  with  the  inferior.  Thus  his  thoughts  were  elevated  by  a 
high  degree  of  hope  and  anticipation.  But  it  will  be  admitted  by 
those  who  carefully  reflect  upon  the  preceding  remarks,  that  these 
illustrations  and  appeals  to  natural  phenomena  by  Paul,  are  of  a very 
superficial  character  ; for  although  we  are,  in  one  sense,  sown  in  a 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


543 


natural  and  raised  in  a spiritual  body,  these  terms  are  more  an  ex- 
pression of  the  act  than  of  the  principle  of  a resurrection.  So,  also, 
being  sown  in  dishonor  and  raised  in  glory,  represents  the  external 
phenomenon  of  death,  and  the  elevation  of  the  real,  or  internal  man, 
to  a higher  sphere.  It  was  but  the  fact  that  he  related,  not  the  inte- 
rior moving  and  productive  principles  which  effect  the  rising,  refine- 
ment, anastasis,  or  resurrection.  Therefore,  I say,  Paul’s  external 
philosophy  of  the  resurrection  possesses  none  of  that  elaborateness, 
or  of  those  appeals  to  the  laws  governing  Nature  and  man,  which 
would  he  necessary  to  satisfy  any  rational  mind  of  the  reality  of  a 
future  or  interior  existence. 

Again : Paul  was  given  to  great  internal  meditation,  especially  so 
far  as  his  peculiar  temperament  and  disposition  would  admit.  At 
times  his  cogitations  were  of  a very  instructive  and  useful  character. 
But  he  sometimes  became  confused  in  endeavoring  to  make  a dis- 
tinction between  the  intrusions  of  the  outer  world  upon  the  senses, 
affections,  and  passions,  and  the  promptings  and  monitions  of  the 
internal  sense  of  purity,  justice,  refinement,  and  righteousness. 
Hence  he  says,  “ While  I would  do  good,  evil  is  present  with  me.” 
When  forced  to  this  exclamation,  he  was  endeavoring  to  distinguish 
the  characters  and  causes  of  the  two  suggestive  influences,  the  one  to 
evil  and  the  other  to  good.  Theological  speculators  have  derived 
from  this  and  similar  expressions  of  Paul,  a smoothly-woven  theory, 
that  a pervading  evil  spirit,  or  his  agents,  are  incessantly  affecting 
man’s  internal  purity  through  the  outer  ; and  that  the  good  is  pre- 
served by  the  Divine  Mind  ; and  proceeding  upon  this  hypothesis, 
they  say  that  man  should  distinguish  the  good  from  the  evil  — the 
broad  road  which  leads  to  a burning  abyss  of  everlasting  destruction, 
from  the  narrow  path  leading  as  far  from  that  dreadful  abode  as  one 
extremity  of  the  Universe  can  be  from  another.  Thus  they  throw 
the  responsibility  upon,  and  accuse  man,  of  immorality,  and  at  the 
same  time  teach  him  that  ten  thousand  influences  are  actuating  and 
even  controlling  him,  either  for  good  or  for  evil.  It  is  plain  that  such 
not  only  misunderstand  the  writings  and  teachings  of  Paul,  but  are 
exceedingly  uninformed  as  to  the  nature,  constitution,  and  character- 
istics of  mankind. 

Paul,  gfter  having  preached  for  thirty  years,  and  consoling 
himself  orr  the  reflection  that  he  had  declared  the  whole  gospel  with- 
out reservation,  was  captured,  brought  before  a Roman  consul, 
and  at  length  before  Festus;  who,  being  moved  by  Paul’s  elo- 


544 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


quence,  absolved  him  from  the  charge  brought  against  him.  Paul, 
however,  having  appealed  to  Cassar,  was  sent  to  Rome,  where  he 
finally  died,  a martyr  to  Christianity. 

Following  the  epistles  of  Paul,  are  the  similar  letters  of  James, 
Peter,  John,  and  Jude.  The  contents  of  these  are  very  similar  to 
the  letters  of  Paul,  pertaining,  as  they  do,  to  the  establishing  of  the 
same  general  principles  in  the  minds  of  the  persons  and  congrega- 
tions to  whom  they  were  respectively  addressed.  They  introduce 
no  new  principle  which  requires  comment ; and  their  teachings  have 
no  important  bearing  upon  the  proposition  advanced  in  or  derived 
from  the  preceding  books. 

§ 151.  After  these  epistles,  follows  tire  Apocalypse  or  Reve- 
lation of  St.  John.  The  contents  of  this  book  have  appeared 
to  all  commentators  as  being  completely  enigmatical,  beyond  the  pos- 
sibility of  receiving  a useful  application,  and  so  exceedingly  indefi- 
nite and  obscure  as  almost  to  defy  any  attempt  at  analysis.  It  bears 
truly  every  mark  of  a revelation  ; nor  can  this  fact  be  doubted  when 
it  is  carefully  read  and  as  carefully  reflected  upon.  Its  prominent 
features  are  obscurity,  ambiguity,  and  all  kinds  of  fantastic  and  figu- 
rative expression.  Nevertheless,  some  of  its  figures  are  well  applied, 
though  their  application  is  scarcely  discoverable.  Indeed,  nothing 
can  be  more  obscure  than  this  revelation  ; for  its  contents  defy  inter-, 
pretation,  though  they  at  the  same  time  severely  demand  the  most 
unreserved  faith.  The  book  even  forbids  the  erasure  or  interpola- 
tion of  a single  sentence,  under  the  most  imperative  command,  for  a 
disobedience  of  which  condemnation  is  denounced.  Such  a demand 
of  itself  removes  from  it  all  that  celestial  purity  which  should  be  ex- 
pected to  characterize  a spiritual  influx  of  heavenly  truth  ; for  the 
demand  is  strictly  dogmatical,  and  unjustly  imperative.  This  book 
ends  the  New  Testament. 

It  should  be  remarked  that  the  books  of  James  and  Jude  have 
been  received  with  a great  deal  of  doubt  as  to  their  authenticity,  by 
those  who  have  ventured  to  inquire  into  the  origin  of  the  manuscripts. 
Moreover,  let  it  be  remembered  that  they,  together  with  the  Revela- 
tion of  St.  John,  were  not  received  into  the  New  Testament  as  pure 
and  canonical  until  nearly  three  hundred  years  after  the  council  of 
Nice.  The  Apocalypse,  and  the  books  of  James  and  Jude,  together 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


545 


with  the  second  chapter  of  the  second  epistle  of  Peter,  were  voted 
pure  and  canonical  in  the  year  633,  at  the  council  of  Toledo  ; when 
they,  in  their  seventeenth  canon,  decided  unanimously  that  the  Reve- 
lation was  written  by  John,  and  that  the  books  of  James  and  John 
should  be  compiled  and  immersed  into  the  New  Testament,  and 
stamped  with  the  holy  seal,  and  considered  the  Word  of  God  ! 

It  would  indeed  have  been  fortunate  for  many  a profound  theolo- 
gian, had  this  council,  like  the  councils  of  Nice  and  Laodicea,  rejected 
this  book  as  not  being  the  word  of  God  ; for  then  much  time  and 
noble  talent  would  very  probably  have  been  expended  on  something 
that  would  have  been  of  use  and  importance  in  the  way  of  ameliora- 
ting the  condition  of  a suffering  and  ignorant  humanity.  Inasmuch, 
however,  as  the  Apocalypse  was  decided  to  be  the  word  of  God  in 
633,  it  is  proper  to  institute  a few  considerations  concerning  its  teach- 
ings, and  enigmatical,  fantastical,  and  spiritual  contents. 

It  is  a truth  worthy  of  notice,  that  many  things  therein  contained 
are  susceptible  of  being  verified  by  appealing  to  the  actual  appear- 
ances and  manifestations  of  the  interior*  or  spiritual  world.  Panora- 
mas and  dissolving  representations  such  as  this  book  presents  may 
be  observed  in  the  spirit-world  by  spirits  whose  internal  perception 
is  not  opened,  and  when  their  exteriors  are  clothed  by  an  aerial  man- 
tle of  imagination.  Such  are  witnessed  in  what  may  be  termed  a 
transition  state  between  the  external  and  internal  spheres  of  the  spir- 
itual constitution. 

For  a very  truthful  solution  of  the  many  grand  displays  of  phan- 
tasm recorded  in  the  Apocalypse,  and  conveying  an  impression  of 
their  being  real,  I would  refer  the  reader  to  a well-written  Latin  pro- 
duction of  Emanuel  Swedenborg,  entitled  “ Apocalypsis  Reve- 
lata also  to  another  by  the  same  author,  appertaining  to  the  same 
subject,  and  entitled  “Apocalypsis  Explicata ” — which  will  clearly 
elucidate  his  views  of  the  use  and  application  of  this  book.  I would 
again,  however,  guard  the  reader  against  the  danger  of  misconcep- 
tion while  reading  the  works  referred  to.  For  it  is  distinctly  clear 
that  their  author  was  in  the  same  general  condition,  both  physically 
and  mentally,  with  the  writer  of  the  Apocalypse.  It  will  be  seen  that 
he  verifies  their  general  contents  by  appeals  to  spiritual  disclosures 
and  manifestations  occurring  in  an  intermediate  or  transition  state 

* By  the  “ interior  world,”  the  lecturer  said  he  intended  <here  to  represent  that 
which  is  invisible  — rather  above  hut  not  perceptible  to  the  natural  senses  ; but  not 
he  second  sphere  of  human  existence  in  its  real  state. 

35 


546 


nature's  divine  revelations. 


between  the  rudimental  and  the  spiritual  spheres.  By  this  I would 
be  understood  that  both  writers  had  a perception  of  that  which  was 
between  the  real  and  the  unreal.  I may  remark,  however,  that  the 
author  of  the  “ Apocah/jisis  Mevelata ” was  at  times  in  a condition  of 
spiritual  elevation  which  enabled  him  to  arrive  accurately  at  the  most 
important  truths  as  pertaining  to  the  spiritual  states,  or  the  spheres 
of  the  inner  world.  But  it  is  proper  to  state  distinctly  that  the  con- 
clusions at  which  he  at  such  times  arrives,  though  true,  are  not  the 
legitimate  results  of  his  philosophy.  It  appears  that  his  mind  received 
its  direction  from  an  impression  originally  received  concerning  an  in- 
terior signification  of  the  Word,  or  Bible.  The  result  of  this  was  to 
lead  his  mind  into  a correspondential  mode  of  philosophizing  con- 
cerning the  thoughts,  desires,  passions,  affections,  and  the  states  of 
the  judgments  of  men,  considering  these  as  being  represented  by  va- 
rious species  of  animals,  vegetables,  and  even  minerals.  According 
to  his  philosophy,  the  animal  kingdom  was  merely  a transcript  or  uni- 
versal representation  of  the  various  thoughts,  desires,  passions,  and 
judgments  of  mankind.  He  applies  this  mode  of  philosophizing  in 
interpreting  the  contents  of  the  Old  and  New  Testaments,  and  rep- 
resents the  figures  therein  contained  as  holding  an  inseparable  con- 
nexion with,  and  as  corresponding  to,  the  various  truths  in  the  exte- 
rior as  well  as  to  those  in  the  interior  world.  He  teaches  that  in  the 
spiritual  world,  in  like  manner,  exist  representatives,  both  such  as  are 
and  such  as  are  not  within  the  power  of  infernal  spirits  to  render  ap- 
parently real  and  substantial  to  the  uninitiated  and  uninformed  spirits. 

Thus  his  mind  flowed  from  the  Bible  into  the  natural  world,  not 
for  the  purpose  of  testing  its  truth  by  instituting  a disinterested  inquiry 
into  the  teachings  of  Nature,  but  more  for  the  purpose  of  interpreting 
physical  or  external  manifestations  in  such  a way  as  to  make  the 
Bible  and  Nature  mutually  confirm  each  other.  Then,  in  like  man- 
lier, his  mind  flowed  from  the  Word  or  Bible  into  the  spiritual  or 
interior  world,  where  the  same  direction  of  mind  produced  a desire 
to  make  each  manifestation  accord  with  his  prepossessions  in  favor 
of  the  Bible  as  being  the  great  Centre  and  Fount  of  Truth.  Thus 
he  made  the  Word,  or  Bible,  the  focus  or  centre  of  Divine  truth,  to 
which  the  teachings  of  Nature  should  be  considered  as  subordinate ; 
and  he  supposed  that  her  productions  were  nothing  more  than  par- 
ticular correspondences,  or  rather  were  verifications  of  the  truth  of 
the  Bible  — and  likewise  representatives  of  the  thoughts  and  spirit- 
ual characteristics  of  man.  So,  according  to  him,  the  material  world 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


547 


is  only  a reflection,  a microcosm,  a representation  of  the  Bible,  of  its 
truths,  and  of  the  interior  or  spiritual  world.  And  while  the  natural 
world  should  be  considered  as  below,  inferior,  and  subordinate  to  the 
Bible,  the  spirit-world  should  be  considered  as  no  more  than  a re- 
sponse to  this  biblical  philosophy.  Thus  he  joins  the  natural  and 
spiritual  world,  by  making  “the  Word”  the  fulcrum,  the  mediator, 
the  centre  and  source,  from  which  proceeds  all  the  natural  and  spir- 
itual knowledge  worthy  of  being  attained,  and  to  which  the  two 
worlds  converge  : so  that  around  the  Bible  the  whole  natural  and 
spiritual  world  may  be  said  to  revolve. 

I shall  have  occasion  hereafter  to  recur  to  the  main  spiritual  teachings 
of  this  author,  which  in  their  prominent  features  are  substantially  true, 
though  they  need  the  same  kind  of  interpretation  to  make  them  corre- 
spond with  the  mighty  movements  of  the  universal  principle  of  the  Di- 
vine Mind,  which  he  has  given  to  the  Bible,  Nature,  and  the  spirit-world. 

§ 152.  I have  already  related  the  manner  in  which  those  three 
books  in  the  New  Testament  were  decided  as  canonical,  and  as  be- 
ing the  word  of  God.  In  connexion  with  what  I have  said  on  this 
subject  I would  ask,  “ Why  were  they  not  as  much  the  word  of  God 
as  other  manuscripts  of  a similar  character  — and  why  were  they  not 
received  as  canonical  in  the  year  325,  when  assembled  the  council 
of  twro  thousand  ferocious  and  exasperated  bishops  ?”  Let  it  also  be 
remembered  in  connexion  with  this  important  inquiry,  that  the  bishops 
were  so  much  interested  in  having  their  peculiar  theological  opinions 
prevail,  as  to  come  near  having  a general  quarrel  ; and  over  fifteen 
hundred  of  them  were  as  a consequence  disqualified  from  having  a 
vote  ! Only  a few  more  than  three  hundred,  together  with  Constan- 
tine, at  last  remained  ! 

I would  now  propose  another  question,  to  which  I am  not  anxious 
to  receive  a personal  answer,  but  I desire  that  the  answer  should  be 
fully  and  truthfully  presented  to  the  world  : “ Why  were  not  those 
fifieen  hundred  bishops  who  were  discarded,  as  well  qualified  to  de- 
cide which  books  were  the  word  of  God,  as  those  who  remained  ? 
For  those  who  did  vote  were  under  the  imperative  command  of  Con- 
stantine— at  least  not  to  transgress  the  rules  of  the  council.  Did 
justice  prevail  when  foul  fanaticism,  folly,  and  unrighteousness,  took 
possession  of  the  minds  of  those  bishops?” 

Also  remember,  reader,  that  when  you  read  the  encyclopaedia  of 
religious  knowledge  called  the  Bible,  you  are  merely  reading  a book 


548 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


pronounced  the  word  of  God  by  three  hundred  exasperated  bishops, 
and  sealed  by  their  emperor  Constantine  ! Moreover,  reflect  that 
nearly  as  many  manuscripts  as  are  now  embodied  in  the  Old  Testa- 
ment, suffered  martyrdom  ! And  why,  or  how,  or  by  whose  impera- 
tive command,  shall  we  believe  that  those  which  are  saved  are  the 
word  of  God,  any  more  than  those  which  were  destroyed  ? 

I will  close  these  comments  upon  the  books  of  the  Bible  by  pre- 
senting a few  considerations  that  should  govern  every  mind  in  its 
love  for  the  many  truths,  and  its  dislike  for  the  many  falsities,  that 
exist  in  the  world.  When  I was  first  impressed  to  reveal  my  con- 
victions concerning  the  Primitive  History,  I was  led  to  consider  this 
one  important  query : “ What  is  the  use  that  such  a book  may  sub- 
serve in  accomplishing  the  end  for  which  mankind  were  created  ? 
Suppose  that  every  sentence,  for  instance,  in  the  Apocalypse,  is  true, 
and  can  be  verified  in  the  third  sphere  of  spiritual  existence,  what 
possible  use  or  benefit  can  be  derived  from  truths  that  are  only  truths 
in  spheres  beyond  the  comprehension  of  any  human  being  on  earth?” 
I am  distinctly  impressed  that  the  sayings  of  the  Apocalypse,  and 
also  that  the  sayings  of  many  men  at  the  present  day,  may  be  veri- 
fied, and  can  be  proved  true.  That,  however,  is  not  conclusive 
evidence  that  even  those  who  uttered  these  sayings  were  themselves 
conscious  of  their  truth,  or  of  their  susceptibility  of  being  verified  in 
higher  degrees  of  development.  Then  all  minds  should  be  influenced 
by  the  inquiry,  “ What  possible  good  can  a revelation  of  any  kind  do 
for  mankind  in  their  rudimental  sphere,  when  the  principles  presented 
in  such  revelation  are  beyond  the  possibility  of  human  practice  ? The 
truth  or  falsity  of  the  contents  of  the  Apocalypse  can  not  in  the  least 
particular  accelerate  the  movements  of  mankind  toward  the  goal  of 
social  happiness,  or  the  elevation  of  the  spiritual  constitutions  of  men 
to  a high  degree  of  refinement  and  knowledge.  Anything  that  has 
not  a use  of  a practical  nature,  is  not  worth  the  room  it  occupies  in 
the  world  ; for  all  such  things  are  productions  of  the  misconceptions 
of  men,  and  are  thus  unreal  as  well  as  impracticable.  Therefore  the 
importance  of  a truth  should  be  determined  by  the  inquiry  as  to  its 
use,  and  by  its  capability  of  a beneficial  application. 

^ 153.  In  conclusion  to  my  previous  remarks  on  the  contents  and 
teachings  of  the  Primitive  History,  I discover  a use  in  inserting 
some  important  synthetical  remarks,  commending  the  same  to  uni- 
versal thought  and  consideration. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


549 


1.  As  to  the  origin  of  the  conceptions  of  Adam  and  Eve,  the 
Garden  of  Eden,  the  Fall  of  Man,  and  Original  Sin.  The  first  inti- 
mation of  these  conceptions,  I find  in  my  impressions  concerning  the 
early  inhabitants  of  the  earth.  They  were  not  believed  or  imbibed 
to  a great  extent  until  several  generations  after  the  tradition  was  fully 
established.  It  continued  to  be  a tradition  for  several  ages,  without 
any  particular  modification,  until  finally  it  became  a part  of  the  reli- 
gion of  the  Hindoos,  and  especially  of  the  Persians,  who  wrote  the 
same,  and  preserved  it  in  manuscript.  It  was  scarcely  taught  or  be- 
lieved among  the  Jews  until  those  Persian  manuscripts  were  transla- 
ted into  Hebrew,  during  their  captivity  at  Babylon.  After  this  it 
was  considered  as  an  allegory,  and  much  venerated  by  the  Jews  and 
others,  as  being  a symbolical  representation  of  something  substan- 
tially true  : but  what  its  meaning  was,  they  knew  not.  Still,  the  an- 
tiquity of  the  tradition  sacredized  it  in  their  minds ; and  hence  it  is 
presented  in  the  book  of  Genesis.  Since  its  introduction  into  this 
book,  it  has  been  interpreted,  and  clothed  with  all  the  seriousness 
and  veneration  which  should  properly  be  connected  with  the  beau- 
ties of  Nature,  with  man,  and  with  heaven.  Since  that  period,  suc- 
cessive modifications  of  this  supposed  divine  relation  have  so  far 
concealed  its  original  simplicity  from  mankind  generally,  that  they 
are  incapable,  through  fear,  dread,  and  prejudice,  of  instituting  a 
proper  investigation  respecting  its  real  merits.  Thus  it  is  entirely 
within  the  power  of  those  who  present  it  to  the  world  for  credence, 
and  is  entirely  removed  from  the  mass  of  mankind. 

2.  The  conception  of  an  evil  spirit  or  devil,  may  also  be  traced  to 
the  interior  history  of  mankind.  At  first  it  was  called  “ breath ,”  and 
was  attributed  to  the  heat  and  light  of  the  sun.  This  continued  to 
be  believed  in  various  forms  by  each  subsequent  generation,  until  it 
was  systematized  as  I have  related,  when  it  received  the  name  of 
Siva.  This  was  promoted  by  the  magi  of  Persia  to  the  office  of  a 
deified  principle  of  evil,  and  was  elevated  by  Zoroaster  to  a position 
as  high,  as  great,  and  as  mighty,  as  the  Creator,  at  which  time  it  was 
named  Ahriman.  It  was  not  believed  by  the  early  Christian  writers 
to  be  anything  more  than  an  influx  of  evil,  or  of  a spirit  of  wicked- 
ness ; which  was  similar  to  the  belief  of  mankind  in  the  early  ages. 
And  when  the  early  Christians  used  the  term  Satan,  they  used  it  un- 
guardedly, and  not  as  signifying  any  definite  and  established  princi- 
ple of  being.  The  same  thing  was  also  named  Shaitan,  which  is 
rendered  “ satan,”  “ devil,”  “ darkness,”  “ evil,”  and  by  similar 


550 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


indefinite  terms,  meaning  in  no  case  an  evil  being  or  fallen  angel,  but 
representing  that  only  which  interfered  with  their  peace  and  tranquil- 
lity of  mind. 

3.  The  conception  of  a hell  originated  among  the  inhabitants  of 
central  America,  and  became  established  by  a very  ingenious  and  en- 
lightened chieftain.  The  tradition  of  this  ultimately  run  into  the  Jew- 
ish nation,  and  was  strongly  entertained  by  various  sects  among  them, 
though  by  others  as  strenuously  discarded,  until  the  meaning  of  the 
original  term  was  changed  from  that  of  a local,  burning  abyss,  to  a 
condition  of  darkness,  the  grave,  sepulchre,  death,  and  similar  things, 
which  are  expressed  by  the  Hebrew  word  sheol,  and  by  the  Greek 
words  hades  and  gehenna.  These  terms  bore  a synonymous  signifi- 
cation, but  all  of  them  were  employed  in  the  sacred  writings  of  the 
Jews  in  a metaphorical  manner,  as  signifying  no  more  than  the  terms 
previously  mentioned.  In  no  case  are  those  words  in  the  Bible  sig- 
nificant of  a fount  of  evil,  sin,  or  burning,  such  as  has  been  supposed 
to  be  meant  by  the  word  “ hell.”  This  word  itself,  in  its  strictest 
sense,  signifies  concealment,  invisible,  darkness,  underground,  abyss, 
sepulchre,  and  all  things  that  are  opposed  to  the  light  of  investigation. 

4.  The  doctrine  of  a General  Resurrection  and  Judgment,  was 
believed  among  various  sects  of  the  Jews  and  Persians,  over  fifteen 
hundred  years  before  Christ  lived,  and  was  firmly  established  all 
over  the  eastern  world  by  Zoroaster,  the  Persian  Bible-maker,  six 
hundred  years  before  Christ  began  to  preach.  In  the  New  Testa- 
ment, these  doctrines  of  Zoroaster  are  used  in  a symbolical  manner, 
by  Christ  and  others,  to  represent  states  of  mind,  and  various  other 
things,  in  order  that  his  hearers,  and  the  eastern  world  generally 
might  understand  the  teachings  presented.  A general  resurrection 
and  judgment  is  not  taught  in  one  page  of  the  Bible  ; and  even  if  it 
were,  that  fact  would  not  be  proof  of  its  truth,  so  long  as  Nature  con- 
tinues to  exist  and  to  unfold  and  manifest  her  immutable  laws. 

5.  The  conception  of  Prophecy  existed  among  the  Egyptians  and 
eastern  tribes,  many  centuries  before  either  the  Old  or  New  Testa- 
ment had  an  existence;  and  then  the  word  prophecy  did  not  neces- 
sarily, as  it  does  not  even  in  the  Bible,  imply  the  announcement  of 
a future  occurrence,  or  the  revealment  of  anything  foreseen  by  those 
impressed  to  speak  or  write,  and  which  afterward  was  fulfilled.  In 
this  sense  the  word  “ prophecy”  does  not  occur  in  the  Bible.  It 
was  then  used  in  the  sense  of  terms  modernly  employed,  such  as,  to 
“ speak,”  “ relate,”  or  to  express  one’s  opinion  ; and  the  phrase, 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


551 


“prophesy  unto  us,”  simply  meant,  “let  us  hear  your  reasons”  — 
“ what  is  your  mind  ?”  — “ express  your  thoughts  freely,”  &c. 
Hence  1 Samuel,  x.  5,  speaks  of  a company  of  prophets  who  “ proph- 
esied” on  various  musical  instruments  ; “ prophesying”  meaning,  in 
this  instance,  as  in  all  others,  nothing  more  than  a delivery  or  an- 
nouncement of  any  thought,  sound,  action,  or  a relation  of  any  tradi- 
tional occurrence.  In  modern  days,  commentators  have  supposed 
that  the  term  prophecy  was  employed  to  express  knowledge  (derived 
from  inspiration)  of  some  great  occurrence  to  transpire  in  future. 
Hence  they  have  changed  the  term  from  its  original  meaning  to  a 
signification  which  it  never  was  intended  to  bear.  When  the  writers 
of  the  New  Testament  quote  from  the  writings  of  the  Old,  they 
merely  appeal  to  expressions  which  seem  applicable  to  the  occur- 
rence which  they  are  recording,  in  the  same  way  as  an  author  at  the 
present  day  would  quote  a sentence  from  Homer,  Cicero,  Xeno- 
phon, Confucius,  Pope,  or  any  poetical  or  theological  writer,  using 
language  which  seemed  to  correspond  to  or  verify  the  thoughts 
which  he  might  be  expressing.  Therefore  I positively  affirm,  without 
going  into  the  details  of  evidence,  that  the  term  prophecy,  in  its  ori- 
ginal meaning,  applies  only  to  the  mere  act  of  expressing  or  an- 
nouncing thoughts  ; and  in  no  case  was  it  used  to  represent  a 
preknowledge  of  a future  occurrence. 

6.  The  term  Atonement  is  entirely  a manufactured  expression, 
having  no  connexion  with  the  pure  and  reforming  principles  of  Jesus, 
or  of  any  other  good  and  philanthrophie  being.  It  is  impossible  for 
any  mind  to  conceive  of  any  propriety  in  its  present  application'. 

7.  The  words  “Faith”  and  “ Regeneration ” are  words  suggested 
by  tenets  previously  and  unwarrantably  assumed.  Hence  they  ap- 
ply only  to  a system  of  man’s  invention,  but  not  to  the  grand  con- 
stitution of  a Divine  creation,  of  which  man  is  a flower  and  a per- 
fected organization. 

§ 154.  Thus  I discover  that  the  opinions  in  the  world  concerning 
Adam  and  Eve,  the  garden  of  Eden,  the  fall  of  man,  the  devil,  hell, 
and  many  such  subjects  referred  to  in  the  Bible,  are  more  or  less 
mythological  and  parabolical,  and  were  traditional  among  the  eastern 
inhabitants  until  they  became  introduced,  in  a very  modified  form, 
into  the  writings  of  the  Primitive  History,  where  they  are  now  sup- 
posed by  many  good,  but  misdirected  and  uneducated  minds,  to  be 
the  revealed  thoughts  of  that  Great  Divine  Essence,  whose  very  life 


552 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


animates  man  and  Nature,  and  makes  of  all  things  one  grand,  sub- 
lime, and  harmonious  System  ! So  also  I discover  that  the  opinions 
concerning  a general  resurrection  and  judgment  are  likewise  mytho- 
logical in  the  strictest  possible  sense  — containing  not  the  least  par- 
ticle of  useful  or  substantial  truth,  and  hence  they  can  have  no  ten- 
dency to  elevate  and  purify  the  race. 

The  original  conception  of  the  Trinity  arose  from  the  three  sup- 
posed beings  called  Parama,  Vishnu,  and  Siva,  which  are  no  more 
nor  less  than  what  are  named  by  some  theologians  “Father,”  “Son,” 
and  “ Spirit.”  This  trinity  was  not  established  in  the  world  until 
the  Egyptian  priests  of  the  Sun,  and  the  Persian  magi,  promoted  the 
three  beings  to  a higher  degree  of  potency  than  they  originally  pos- 
sessed ; and  the  conception  was  grasped  by  Zoroaster,  who  imme- 
diately converted  them  into  three  united  beings,  equal  and  infinite  in 
power,  and  the  same  in  essence  and  constitution.  Subsequently, 
these  were  introduced  into  the  sacred  writings  of  the  Jews,  or  the 
Bible,  more  as  symbolic  representatives  than  as  real  doctrines  to  be 
taught  and  believed.  But  the  Athanasian  creed  erected  of  them  three 
infinite  Gods,  equal  to  those  of  Zoroaster.  In  this  they  are  termed 
“ Father,  Son,  and  Holy  Ghost and  it  is  said  that  the  Father  is 
infinite  — the  Son  is  infinite  — the  Holy  Ghost  is  infinite  : yet  these 
are  not  three,  but  one.  But  in  the  first  place,  persons  who  are  ac- 
quainted with  arithmetical  calculation  will  perceive  that  this  is  a vio- 
lation of  all  numerical  rules  : for  tlcree  can  in  no  case  be  made  to 
count  one , nor  can  one  ever  be  made  to  equal  three.  Therefore  the 
creed  in  this  particular  must  transcend  all  ordinary  minds! 

It  may  be  further  remarked  that  three  Infinites  can  not  possibly 
exist,  because  One  Infinite  comprehends  the  Whole.  And  if 
one  being  is  greater  than  another,  then  the  creed  must  be  false  — 
however  such  a conclusion  may  interfere  with  the  tranquillity  of  those 
who  at  present  repose  confidence  in  its  truth. 

The  doctrine  of  the  trinity  was  thus  derived  from  the  early  con- 
ception of  three  original  beings  that  were  supposed  to  have  been 
engaged  in  creating  the  earth  and  man  — the  earth  being  supposed  in 
those  days  to  be  the  centre  of  the  whole  Universe.  And  as  I clearly 
perceive  the  origin  of  this  doctrine,  I hesitate  not  to  declare  that  it  is 
strictly  a mythos  ; and  it  is  rendered  no  more  sacred  or  worthy  of 
veneration  because  the  original  fantastic  conception  has  in  modern 
days  been  so  beautifully  sublimated. 

Furthermore,  I am  happy  to  be  in  a condition  to  know  that  what 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


553 


ever  things  in  the  Bible  are  not  historical,  are,  with  few  exceptions, 
entirely  allegorical  and  mythological,  and  are  not  worth  the  time  that 
has  been  employed  in  their  investigation  by  so  vast  a number  of  good 
and  righteous  theologians  who  might  have  been  much  better  em- 
ployed, and  thus  have  merited  and  received  the  thanks  and  approba- 
tion of  an  improved  and  benefited  race. 

I descend  not  into  details  to  collect  external  proofs  of  the  seemingly 
mere  assertions  that  have  been  made  ; for  this  would  not  comport 
with  the  use  and  object  of  these  revealments  concerning  the  laws  and 
requirements  of  Nature.  But  be  it  distinctly  understood  that  I am 
impressed  to  maintain  the  responsibility  of  the  statements  herein  pre- 
sented ; and  at  a future  period  I shall  descend  into  the  minutiae  of 
the  various  subjects  generalized  in  this  book,  for  the  sole  purpose  of 
giving  forth  an  incontestable  encyclopaedia  in  which  every  unreal 
and  erroneous  conception  may  be  exhibited  in  its  proper  light,  and  in 
which  may  be  established  every  important  truth  that  is  not  at  the 
present  day  known  or  comprehended  by  the  generality  of  mankind.* 

* Several  times  during  the  period  in  which  this  hook  was  in  process  of  dictation, 
the  author  incidentally  remarked  in  substance,  that  inasmuch  as  this  work  was  merely 
intended  to  establish  general  principles,  it  would  be  inappropriate  to  enter  into  mi- 
nutiae ; for  that  would  not  only  be  to  swell  this  volume  to  an  unreasonable  size,  but 
to  divert  the  mind  of  readers  from  great,  leading,  and  essential  points,  by  a multiplicity 
of  particulars  which,  whether  true  or  untrue,  can  be  of  little  consequence,  until  the 
great  general  Truths  are  properly  established,  which  constitute  the  Foundation  of  all 
particulars,  and  the  Basis  of  all  true  reasoning.  It  will  be  observed  that  in  the  fore- 
going pages,  the  author  promises  a revealment  or  discussion  of  the  particulars  of  sev- 
eral things,  which,  after  all,  are  not  subsequently  mentioned  in  this  book.  His  pro- 
phetic impressions  taught  him  that  he  was  to  be  the  instrument  of  revealing  to  the 
world  the  things  referred  to  ; but  according  to  explanations  which  he  has  given  in 
foregoing  pages,  such  impressions  take  no  cognizance  of  times  or  circumstances.  He 
did  not,  therefore,  know  what  specific  points  in  his  proposed  revelation  were  to  be 
embodied  in  this  book,  and  what  were  to  be  reserved  for  another,  until  this  hook  was 
completed.  He  does  not  even  profess  to  know  how  soon  the  next  book  will  be  given  : 
but  says  he  knows  that  he  will  be  impressed  to  commence  it  at  the  proper  time,  and 
that  it  will  be  before  the  world  as  soon  as  it  is  needed.  He  has  promised  us  in  the 
next  book  a more  thorough  and  minute  discussion  of  all  the  important  subjects  intro- 
duced in  this,  particularly  of  the  subjects  of  cosmogony,  geology,  archaeology,  ethnol- 
ogy, language,  mythology,  hagiography,  theology,  and  the  spiritual  spheres.  The 
structure  of  the  Universe,  for  instance,  will  be  more  particularly  unfolded  to  the 
mental  view,  and  calculations  in  regard  to  distances,  magnitudes,  numbers,  periods, 
&e.,  will  be  introduced.  Also  the  laws  of  nebulous  agglomeration  and  planetary 
motion  will  be  more  thoroughly  explained ; the  inhabitants  of  the  planets  of  our 
Solar  System,  with  their  institutions  and  customs,  will  be  more  minutely  described; 
and  other  subjects  will  in  like  manner  be  enlarged  upon.  Also  the  details  of  the 
new  Social  System  proposed  in  the  third  part  of  this  book  (and  which  is  the  grand 
object  of  the  whole  work),  will  then  be  given,  and  all  further  necessary  rules  will 


554 


NATURE'S  DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


§ 155.  In  concluding  my  remarks  upon  the  Bible,  I will  speak 
historically  concerning  its  origin  and  formation.  Let  it  first  be  ob- 
served that  a great  deal  of  veneration  is  attached  to  the  word  bible 
— more,  indeed,  than  should  be  attached  to  a large  portion  of  its 
contents.  The  word  bible  signifies  merely  a boolc.  It  is  derived 
from  the  Greek  biblos,  which  signifies  the  soft  bark  of  a tree  upon 
which  the  ancients  wrote  their  thoughts.  To  this  was  subsequently 
prefixed  the  word  “holy,"  which  term  was  employed  by  the  Jews 
to  express  excellence.  Thus  the  terms  “Holy  Bible”  might  be 
rendered  “ excellent  soft  baric;"  and  then  the  world  would  understand 
their  original  signification. 

The  books  that  compose  the  Old  Testament  were  originally  man- 
uscripts written  by  various  Jewish  and  Egyptian  authors.  Each 
book  bears  the  name  of  its  writer,  with  the  exception  of  the  books  of 
Genesis,  Kings,  Chronicles,  Jonah,  and  a portion  of  the  Psalms. 
These  were  originally  written  on  soft  bark,  palm-tree  leaves,  soft  and 
impressible  stones,  and  various  compositions,  among  which  were 
those  of  which  the  Egyptians  made  their  hieroglyphical  figures  and 
cornice  work,  such  as  were  displayed  in  the  interior  of  their  temples 
and  of  the  temple  of  Solomon.  There  were  very  many  more  manu- 
scripts written  than  are  preserved,  or  than  those  of  which  any  knowl- 
edge is  to  be  had  at  the  present  day.  The  manuscripts  composing 
the  New  Testament  were  produced  and  preserved  in  a similar  man- 
ner, and  the  whole  of  them  were  collected  about  three  hundred  years 
after  Christ  lived. 

There  was,  however,  before  Christ,  a council  of  Jewish  rabbins, 
by  whom  it  was  decided  that  all  manuscripts  of  a sacred  and  tradi- 
tional character  that  might  be  found  in  possession  of  any  nation, 
should  be  immediately  collected.  At  that  time  the  interest  taken  in 
manuscripts  of  a sacred  character  was  such  as  has  never  met  with  a 
parallel,  excepting  at  one  subsequent  period,  when  there  existed  an 
actual  mania  upon  the  same  subject,  and  which  period  has  been  dis- 
tinguished by  some  writers  as  the  age  of  bibliomania.  The  Jews 
succeeded  in  collecting  a vast  number  of  writings,  which  they  pre- 
served for  several  centuries.  To  these  was  superadded  a collection 
of  about  fifty  gospels,  or  books  relative  to  Christ  and  the  apostles, 
together  with  other  historical  and  sacred  records.  Some  of  these 
are  now  found  in  the  New  Testament.  They  were  thus  preserved 

be  laid  down,  the  observance  of  which  xvill  insure  the  permanent  establishment  of  the 
Kingdom  of  heaven  upon  earth. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


555 


until  the  year  325,  when  at  the  command  of  Constantine  two  thou- 
sand and  forty-eight  bishops  assembled  at  Nice. 

It  is  well  to  remark  in  this  connexion,  that  these  bishops  were 
nothing  more  than  organized  hitman  beings,  nor  were  they  sufficiently 
refined  to  merit  many  very  high  encomiums.  After  they  had  assem- 
bled, they  were  so  violent  and  vociferous,  that  had  it  not  been  for 
the  emperor’s  presence,  they  would  have  engaged  in  open  battle. 
For  each  one  had  prejudices  so  strong  in  favor  of  certain  peculiar 
doctrines,  and  all  were  so  anxious  to  have  their  pre-convictions  pre- 
vail, that  justice  and  purity  were  entirely  excluded  from  their  pro- 
ceedings, and  were  as  far  from  their  deliberations  as  mythology  is 
from  the  truths  of  the  Divine  Mind.  Constantine  was  obliged  to 
disqualify  seventeen  hundred  and  thirty  from  having  a voice  in  deci- 
ding which  books  were  and  which  were  not  the  word  of  God  : and 
only  three  hundred  and  eighteen  were  left.  These  decided  that  the 
books  which  composed  the  Bible  as  subsequently  known,  were  the 
word  of  God.  Several  books,  however,  have  since  that  time  been 
rejected.  Out  of  fifty  gospels  then  extant,  they  decided  that  those 
only  of  Matthew,  Mark,  Luke,  and  John,  were  worthy  of  being  pre- 
served ; while  they  rejected  entirely  the  books  of  James,  Jude,  and 
the  Apocalypse.  After  this  decision,  Constantine  arose  and  solemnly 
declared  that  the  same  should  be  considered  as  sanctioned  by  the 
Divine  Will  ; and  that  the  books  thus  fixed  upon  should  thereafter 
be  implicitly  believed  as  the  word  of  God.  Those  manuscripts  that 
were  rejected  (among  which  were  three  well-written  gospels)  were 
committed  to  the  flames. 

In  this  general  condition  the  Bible  remained  until  the  year  633. 
During  the  interval  there  were  frequent  councils  called,  which  fre- 
quently annulled  the  decisions  of  each  other  — each  establishing  new 
propositions  and  passing  new  rules  to  be  observed  until  the  assem- 
blage of  another  council.  Thus  were  produced,  from  time  to  time, 
modifications  in  the  form  of  the  Bible,  as  well  as  in  the  number  of 
books  that  were  to  be  considered  as  composing  it. 

At  the  council  of  Toledo,  in  the  year  633,  the  books  of  James, 
Jude,  and  the  Revelation  of  St.  John,  were  received  into  the  canon. 
Then  the  Old  and  New  Testaments  were  established  in  nearly  the 
same  form  in  which  they  exist  at  the  present  day.  They  continued, 
however,  for  many  centuries  unread  and  unknown  by  the  mass  of 
mankind  ; and  it  was  not  until  the  fourteenth  century  that  the  first 
English  version  was  made.  During  the  intermediate  period,  portions 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


i >56 

of  the  Bible  were  copied  into  the  German,  Danish,  and  Saxon  lan- 
guages. A thousand  years  elapsed  after  the  council  of  Nice,  before 
the  Bible  became  much  known  ; and  probably  it  would  have  sunk 
into  oblivion  had  not  the  art  of  printing  been  established  in  the  four- 
teenth and  fifteenth  centuries.  This  at  once  afforded  a means  by 
which  those  who  were  anxious  for  its  circulation,  and  to  have  its 
doctrines  prevail,  could  accomplish  their  desires. 

It  is  well  known,  however,  that  the  priests  of  the  Roman  Catholic 
church  held  this,  what  may  be  properly  called  “ excellent  soft  bark,” 
in  their  personal  possession,  and  were  very  actively  engaged  in  pro- 
mulgating its  teachings  to  the  world,  many  of  them  seriously  believing 
these  to  be  inspired.  They  believed  that  they  themselves  were  the 
designed  apostles  of  this  great  faith  ; and  they  taught  their  followers 
to  consider  them  as  the  instruments  to  perpetuate  apostolic  power, 
prophetic  wisdom,  and  heavenly  teaching.  Hence  they  claimed  the 
power  to  cure  diseased  persons,  and  to  be  authorized  to  make  be- 
lievers, if  not  by  preaching,  yet  by  the  sword,  the  stake,  the  rack,  or 
in  a more  honorable  way,  by  their  sacred  inquisitions  ! Thus  these 
doctrines  continued  to  prevail  until  a Reformer  arose. 

And  I would  here  remark,  that  had  the  pope  been  disposed  to 
grant  this  Reformer  one  simple  request,  the  Reformation  would  not 
have  proceeded  far,  or  interfered  to  any  extent  with  the  sacredness 
of  Catholicism.  But  by  the  occurrence  of  a simple  circumstance, 
this  dissenter  or  protestant  was  raised  up,  who  succeeded  in  estab- 
lishing his  cause  by  a peculiar  decision  of  character,  and  perseve- 
rance, arising  more  from  wrath  and  indignation  than  from  a solemn 
conviction  of  the  justice  of  the  work  in  which  he  was  engaged.  Thus 
arose  the  first  Reformer,  who  openly  protested  against  the  iniquities 
of  the  then-prevailing  system  of  religion. 

After  him  sprang  up  another,  who  differed  slightly  from  the  faith 
and  creed  of  the  former,  and  interpreted,  according  to  his  conceptions 
of  truth,  the  teachings  of  the  admitted  sacred  oracles.  He  also  sue 
ceeded  in  establishing  his  beloved  faith,  which  in  some  respects  is 
true,  especially  in  those  relating  to  the  knowledge  and  wisdom  of  the 
Divine  Mind,  to  his  original  design,  and  to  predestination.  But 
that  he  was  mistaken  on  some  points  is  clear  to  every  enlightened 
mind. 

Thus  Luther  and  Calvin  embraced  doctrines  essentially  differ- 
ent from  the  religion  so  long  established,  so  tenaciously  believed,  and 
so  ingeniously  promulgated  by  the  Catholic  priests.  Since  the  time 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


557 


of  Luther  and  Calvin,  many  very  important  modifications  have  been 
made  in  Christian  opinions,  rules,  customs,  ordinances,  ceremonies, 
and  ecclesiastical  organization,  and  these  have  most  effectually  oper- 
ated in  destroying  the  harmony  and  peace  of  mankind,  and  in  cast- 
ing a shroud  of  sectarianism  over  the  world  that  is  almost  the  last 
indication  of  the  death  and  burial  of  rational  intelligence  ! The  whole 
world,  physically,  morally,  and  spiritually,  appears  to  me  at  this 
moment  as  being  immersed  in  the  dark  and  turbid  waters  of  sectari- 
anism, into  which  the  light  of  reason  and  of  divine  truth  scarcely 
casts  one  relieving  ray  ! The  whole  is  gloomy,  desolate,  and  un- 
congenial ! Man,  it  is  true,  is  the  lord  of  creation,  the  flower  of 
Nature ; but  alas,  how  poorly  he  sustains  his  position,  and  how 
humiliating  to  reflect  upon  the  present  state  of  his  mental  possessions  ! 

§ 156.  Thus,  reader,  you  are  believing  a book  voted  as  being  the 
word  of  God  by  three  hundred  and  eighteen  bishops,  and  sealed  as 
true  by  the  emperor  Constantine  ! You  understand,  now,  the  origin 
and  formation  of  what  is  called  the  “ Holy  Bible,”  which  means  ex- 
cellent soft  baric.  You  understand,  now,  how  that  which  can  boast 
of  antiquity,  can  assume  the  ground  of  being  sacred,  and  how,  being 
defended  by  a multitude  of  interested  promulgators,  it  can  defy  the 
yearnings  of  your  thoughts  to  be  free,  and  set  at  naught  all  your 
attempts  at  investigation.  You  will  now  be  able  to  bear  it  in  mind, 
that  the  Hindoo  has  a Bible  which  he  venerates  as  much  as  you  do 
yours.  So  also  has  the  Mohammedan,  and  the  Persian.  Each 
equally  impelled  by  prejudice  and  hereditary  affection,  will  inquire, 
“ If  you  deprive  us  of  our  Bible,  what  shall  we  have  in  its  stead?” 
Beloved  reader,  there  is  a Book  in  which  beauties  and  divine  truths 
are  inexhaustible  ; a Book  filled  with  texts  that  no  Egyptian,  Jewish, 
Persian,  or  Hindoo  priest  or  theologian  can  counterfeit;  a Book 
which  can  not  be  concealed  — whose  teachings  can  not  be  misappre- 
hended, and  whose  results  will  be  purity,  virtue,  morality,  and  celes- 
tial righteousness  ; a Book  from  which  the  whole  wTorld  may  derive 
indestructible  consolation,  and  learn  of  that  Divine  Essence  which  is 
the  Cause  and  Parent  of  human  existence.  It  will  at  the  same  time 
unfold  the  unspeakable  grandeur  of  your  celestial  habitations,  each  of 
which  will  be  only  a sphere  or  step  in  the  grand  and  magnificent 
gallery  that  leads  to  the  Flower  of  celestial  Beauty,  whose  fragrance 
is  the  perfection  of  an  unchangeable  Universe.  Will  you  ask,  then, 
reader,  what  will  be  given  you  instead  of  a material  book,  composed 


558 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


of  paper  and  impressed  with  type,  when  a Universe  is  open  to  the 
researches  of  your  aspiring  mind?  Certainly  nothing  can  be  more 
unreasonable  than  the  superstitious  claims  that  are  in  the  world  for  the 
teachings  of  a simple  boolc , that  can  be  altered  in  a thousand  ways  in 
going  through  the  operations  of  a press  ! But  there  exists  a Book 
that  teaches  purity,  morality,  and  immortality,  and  demonstrates  the 
loveliness  of  the  Great  Creator  — a Book,  too,  that  is  as  inde- 
structible and  unvarying  as  the  constitution  and  divine  qualities  of 
Nature. 

I have  but  a few  more  remarks  to  offer  concerning  the  Bible,  and 
these  are  as  follows  : It  does  not  teach  that  pure  morality  which  be- 
longs to  the  nature  of  man,  and  which  will  result  from  a superior 
condition  of  the  race.  From  this  remark  must  be  excepted  a few 
incidental  expressions  said  to  have  been  used  by  Jesus  — such  as 
“ the  Golden  Rule,”  — which  was  comprehensively  taught  six  hun- 
dred years  before,  by  Confucius,  the  Chinese  philosopher.  Again  : 
it  does  not  prove  immortality  ; neither  does  it  teach  the  mighty  truths 
contained  in  the  successive  spheres  or  degrees  of  future  existence. 
Nor  does  it  even  present  any  substantial  proof  of  the  transition  from 
this  rudimental  condition,  to  a higher  degree  of  material  and  physical 
organization  ; or  in  other  words,  it  does  not  demonstrate  a resurrec- 
tion to  a future  life.  Nor  does  it  present  one  proper  conception  of 
the  constitution,  character,  greatness,  omnipotence,  and  majesty  of 
the  Divine  Mind.  Nor  does  it  do  justice  to  his  works,  except  in 
those  meditations  upon  which  I have  heretofore  commented.  Nor 
does  it  contain  one  substantial  proof  of  an  unvarying  law  upon  which 
to  found  a hope  of  ever  being  regenerated,  or  of  ascending  to  a sphere 
of  more  perfect  and  harmonious  existence.  Nor  does  it  teach  that 
holy  virtue,  morality,  and  refinement,  which  should  receive  the  name 
of  religion. 

This  term  religion , however,  is  quite  inexpressive,  and  needs,  in 
order  to  be  understood,  a brief  definition.  The  term  ligo  is  a Latin 
word,  signifying  to  tie  or  bind.  Re- ligo  is  to  ?-e-tie  or  bind  over 
again,  and  make  still  stronger.  The  n being  attached,  forms  the  word 
religion , which  means  to  bind  and  rebind,  and  make  secure.  It  is 
well  to  say  that,  understood  in  this  sense,  it  has  performed  its  office 
most  effectually.  For  the  term  “religion,”  indeed,  implies  little 
more  than  being  sacredly  bound  to  sectarianism.  The  word  as  used 
by  commentators  is  very  potent,  and  very  expressive  ; and  it  may  be 
seen  by  these  remarks  that  it  is  very  applicable. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


559 


Thus  the  “ Primitive  History”  is  useful  as  a history  of  mythology, 
ancient  theology,  false  and  imaginary  deities  — as  containing  accounts 
of  wars,  pestilences,  persecutions,  desolations  of  cities,  false  prophe- 
syings,  long  and  tedious  expeditions,  most  unjust  assassinations,  mur- 
ders, adulteries,  abominations,  trials,  afflictions,  imagination,  phantasm, 
rebellion  ; as  presenting  information  concerning  oriental  customs, 
expressions,  ordinances,  prejudices,  religious  wars,  martyrdoms,  and 
all  kinds  of  injustice,  immorality,  and  unrighteousness.  Viewed  in 
the  light  of  a history,  I say,  its  writers  should  be  respected,  and  its 
contents  preserved.  But  as  a theological  book  it  should  not  be  read  ; 
for  it  contains  no  absolute  doctrine  — and  all  those  doctrines  which 
are  supposed  to  be  taught  therein,  are  merely  the  false  interpretations 
given  of  it  by  various  commentators  in  all  ages  since  the  book  was 
compiled  for  the  exclusive  use  of  the  adherents  of  Catholicism. 
From  falsifications  I would  rescue  its  teachings.  I therefore  say, 
the  book  is  good  as  a history,  and  would  not  have  done  the  least 
harm  in  the  world,  had  not  forced  interpretations  been  given  of  its  con- 
tents, and  had  not  claims  been  preferred  in  its  behalf  to  a sacredness 
which  it  does  not  claim  for  itself,  and,  as  I can  positively  say,  which 
it  does  not  inherently  possess. 

But  the  objection  may  arise,  that  some  tribes  and  nations  of  the 
earth  know  nothing  of  this  book,  and  yet  they  are  miserable,  ignorant, 
and  wretched,  in  the  extreme.  The  answer  to  this  will  be  hereafter 
given  and  comprehended  in  the  third  part,  or  the  Application, (of  this 
portion  of  the  work. 


0 

§ 157.  I now  proceed  to  give  a true  history  of  Jesus,  from  his 
birth  to  his  death,  and  to  state  the  causes  of  so  many  unjust  sayings 
contained  in  the  New  Testament  concerning  him  and  others. 

In  Nazareth  in  Galilee,  there  dwelt  a family  but  little  known  to 
the  world,  or  to  the  inhabitants  of  the  town  in  which  they  resided. 
The  father,  whose  name  was  Joseph,  was  a very  active  and  indus- 
trious mechanic.  He  was  a carver  and  sculptor,  and  was  frequently 
engaged  in  various  branches  of  carpentry.  His  associate,  Mary, 
was  a very  gentle  and  kindly-disposed  woman.  They  lived  gen- 
erally unknown,  because  of  their  domestic  retirement,  and  love  of  the 
quietude  pervading  an  undisturbed  and  happy  home.  They  neither 
possessed  an  affection  for  literature,  nor  for  the  study  of  any  science 


560 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


or  philosophy  that  was  then  cultivated  among  the  inhabitants,  as  de- 
rived from  the  Grecians  and  other  enlightened  nations.  It  was  in 
this  family  that  that  little  personage,  about  whose  birth,  life,  and 
death,  so  man)'  marvellous  accounts  have  been  written,  was  born. 

Not  long  after  his  birth,  Joseph  and  his  wife  were  disinherited  from 
the  house  they  occupied,  because  of  an  unfavorable  report  that  be- 
came extant,  through  the  agency  of  some  designing  and  evil-disposed 
persons.  Before  they  left  the  house,  however,  Joseph  dreamed  that 
it  was  proper  for  him  and  his  family  to  journey  into  Egypt. 

Previous  to  this  journey,  a necessary  circumstance  compelled 
Mary  to  lay  her  child  in  a manger,  in  which  place,  as  I am  distinctly 
impressed,  he  lay  not  over  forty  minutes.  Joseph,  not  knowing 
what  else  to  do,  obeyed  the  suggestion  of  his  impressive  dream,  and 
departed  into  Egypt.  They  were  not  long  there  before  a suitable 
relief  was  procured  for  them,  which  induced  their  return,  and  estab- 
lished them  again  comfortably  in  their  previous  habitation. 

It  is  well  that  all  should  bear  in  mind  that  dreams  were  supposed 
in  those  days  to  be  something  more  than  the  workings  of  the  ele- 
ments and  imaginations  of  the  mind,  and  the  suggestions,  especially, 
of  those  dreams  which  were  highly  impressive,  were  obeyed  as  a 
voice  from  an  angel  of  the  Divine  Mind. 

This  much  is  related  in  the  New  Testament,  in  a truthful  manner; 
and  the  account  there  given  is  correct,  with  the  exception  of  the  in- 
terpretation that  was  given  to  these  simple  occurrences,  by  people 
generally,  and  especially^  by  the  writers  of  this  history. 

But  the  New  Testament  leaves  two  chasms  in  the  life  of  Christ, 
which  are  of  great  importance,  inasmuch  as  they  are  periods  in  hu- 
man life  that  as  much  as  any  other  require  attention.  Matthew  and 
others  speak  of  his  birth,  and  then  are  silent  until  they  introduce  him 
into  the  presence  of  learned  doctors  and  philosophers,  in  the  temple. 
And  no  account  is  given  of  him  after  this,  again,  until  he  became 
thirty  years  of  age  ; and  then  he  is  said  to  have  begun  his  preaching. 
It  is  plain,  that  from  birth  to  the  age  of  twelve  years,  and  also  from 
the  age  of  twelve  to  thirty,  many  most  important  occurrences  might 
have  transpired,  of  which  the  world,  through  these  sacred  historians,' 
have  not  the  least  intimation. 

After  Joseph  returned  with  his  family,  all  his  secular  and  domes- 
tic affairs  were  rendered  agreeable  and  easy  ; and  he  was  likewise 
restored  to  the  bosom  of  society,  and  was  beloved  as  a worthy  citizen. 
No  particular  impression  existed  among  the  inhabitants  concerning 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


561 


their  young  and  beautiful  son,  with  the  exception  that  he  was  gener- 
ally admired  for  the  perfect  symmetry  of  his  form  and  cerebral  struc- 
ture. I am  presented  with  no  such  an  occurrence  as  the  command 
related  by  Matthew  to  have  been  issued  by  Herod.  But  as  I pro- 
ceed, the  origin  of  this  account  will  distinctly  appear.  The  child 
was  named  Jesus  — which  was  a name  occasionally  occurring,  but 
seldom  admired,  because  of  its  association  in  the  mind  with  the  sup- 
posed spirit  of  an  Egyptian  deity,  much  worshipped  by  the  priests 
of  the  Sun,  and  spoken  of  in  various  portions  of  the  second  book  of 
Kings.  His  physical  constitution  was  beautifully  proportioned,  and 
he  possessed  a corresponding  beauty  of  the  mental  faculties. 

His  general  organization  was  indeed  remarkable,  inasmuch  as  he 
possessed  combined  the  perfection  of  physical  beauty,  mental  pow- 
ers, and  refined  accomplishments.  He  was  generally  beloved  during 
his  youth,  for  his  great  powers  of  discernment,  his  thirst  after  knowl- 
edge, and  his  disposition  to  inquire  into  the  causes  of  mental  phenom- 
ena, of  the  conditions  of  society,  and  of  the  visible  manifestations  of 
Nature.  He  was  also  much  beloved  for  his  pure  natural  sympathy 
for  all  who  were  suffering  afflictions  either  of  a physical  or  mental 
character.  His  benevolence  and  love  toward  all  without  distinction  ; 
his  constant  yearning  for  the  companionship  of  those  who  were  con- 
sidered good  and  righteous  ; his  marked  respect  and  affection  for 
those  who  were  much  older  than  himself ; his  constant  visits  to  those 
who  required  relief  from  their  afflictions  ; and  his  kind  words  of  con- 
solation to  those  who  were  depressed  either  by  disease  or  unhappy 
social  circumstances  — all  contributed  to  render  him  an  object  of  gen- 
eral love  and  attachment.  These  were  the  peculiarities  which  dis- 
tinguished him  from  all  other  persons  then  living. 

It  is  true  that  at  the  age  of  twelve  years  he  was  admitted  to  the 
presence  of  the  learned  doctors.  There  he  manifested  some  of  his 
powers  of  discernment,  interior  and  natural  philosophy,  unsophisti- 
cated love,  simplicity  of  expression,  kindness  of  disposition,  and  uni- 
versal sympathy  and  benevolence.  These  he  displayed  with  all  the 
naturalness  and  spontaneousness  resulting  from  the  promptings  of  an 
uncorrupted  and  purely-organized  spiritual  principle.  He  answered 
their  pertinent  interrogations  with  great  benignity,  promptitude,  and 
freedom  of  conception  and  expression.  What  most  astonished  the 
doctors  was  the  demonstration  of  his  philosophical  conceptions  and 
mathematical  powers  — all  of  which  were  blended  into  a perfect  sys- 
tem by  the  pervading  element  of  his  mind,  which  was  love. 

36 


562 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


^ 15S.  I would  have  the  reader  understand  the  reason  why  these 
things  were  to  be  expected  from,  and  were  manifested  by,  him.  I 
have  related  that  Jesus  was  perfectly  constituted,  both  as  to  his  physical 
and  spiritual  organization.  This  being  the  case,  his  mental  faculties 
were  early  developed  to  a degree  even  transcending  the  capacities 
of  those  philosophers  in  whose  presence  he  showed  forth  his  won- 
derful mental  qualifications.  Even  at  the  present  time  there  is  a youth 
whose  mind  is  in  a similar  manner  prematurely  developed,  especially 
his  faculties  of  perception  and  causality,  and  his  powers  of  mathematical 
calculation.  He  is  in  one  of  the  eastern  states  — and  is  already  sur- 
prising the  learned  doctors  and  philosophers  by  his  astronomical  and 
mathematical  powers.  Frequently  there  are  persons  who  have  one 
or  more  of  the  mental  faculties  fully  developed  while  they  are  as  yet 
in  a youthful  state.  Many  also  have  the  power  of  perceiving  mate- 
rial'substances  or  colors,  or  reading,  without  employing  the  natural 
organs  of  vision.  Others  are  capable  of  having  the  interior  faculties 
of  their  minds  opened  by  being  thrown  into  an  abnormal  condition, 
which  relieves  the  mind  of  much  of  its  burdensome  obstruction,  and 
renders  it  suitable  for  the  influx  of  superior  knowledge.  This  fact  is 
at  the  present  day  arresting  the  attention  of  many  observing  doctors 
and  philosophers  of  the  land. 

Jesus  while  in  youth,  and  especially  at  the  age  of  twelve,  pos- 
sessed.all  those  superior  qualifications  which  many  scarcely  possess 
when  their  interiors  are  expanded  by  the  modern  discovery  of  mani- 
pulations. Hence  I discover  that  he  became  noted,  because  of  his 
superior  and  highly-refined  powers  of  discernment,  together  with  his 
gentleness,  kindness,  and  sweetness  of  disposition. 

After  he  had  manifested  his  marvellous  powers  to  the  learned  doctors 
in  this  instance,  he  courted  no  longer  their  presence,  and  lived  prin- 
cipally among  his  brethren,  spending  a large  portion  of  his  time  in  the 
visitation  of  the  diseased,  depressed,  disconsolate,  and  suffering  in- 
habitants in  various  portions  of  the  land.  He  seemed  to  possess  an 
intuitive  knowledge  of  the  medicinal  properties  of  plants,  of  mineral 
and  animal  substances  — of  their  use,  and  of  the  proper  time  and 
manner  of  their  application  in  the  curing  of  various  diseases.  This 
qualification,  however,  he  acquired  during  the  period  which  elapsed 
from  the  age  of  fifteen  to  thirty-three.  He  also  possessed  a great 
physical  soothing  power  over  the  disordered  or  disconcerted  forces 
of  the  human  system.  This  was  because  of  his  superior  physical 
endowments.  Hence  it  is  related  in  various  places  in  the  New  Tes 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


563 


tament,  that  he  laid  his  hands  upon  persons,  and  they  were  cured. 
When  relieving  the  palsy,  he  is  reported  as  having  said,  “ Thy  faith 
hath  cured  thee  : rise,  take  up  thy  bed,  and  walk.”  Also  he  is  said 
to  have  laid  wet  sand  or  clay  upon  the  eyes  of  the  blind,  and  thus  to 
have  restored  sight.  And  in  various  other  instances  he  is  represented 
as  having  made  use  of  physical  means  to  produce  the  cures  which  are 
by  his  biographers  and  others  insignificantly  termed  “ miracles.” 

The  reason  is  clear  why  those  sacred  historians  employed  expres- 
sions so  mysterious  and  ambiguous  — expressions  which  often  did 
violence  to  the  human  judgment  by  conveying  ideas  which  reason 
can  never  sanction.  It  was  the  general  impression,  after  he  became 
so  noted  for  his  many  benevolent  and  charitable  deeds,  that  he  must 
either  be  actuated  by  the  Spirit  of  the  God  of  Abraham,  Isaac,  and 
Jacob,  or  by  the  Evil  One  whom  their  imaginations  had  promoted  to 
an  equal  degree  of  almightiness.  Finally,  it  became  so  general  a 
belief  that  he  was  actuated  by  the  first , that  they  designated  him  by 
the  title  of  “ the  Son  of  God.”  Then  the  ignorant  and  uninformed 
bowed  with  a trembling  veneration  at  the  mere  mention  of  the  name 
of  “Jesus,  the  Son  of  God,”  although  many  of  them  had  never 
beheld  him. 

The  inhabitants  in  those  days  were  greatly  inclined  to  extremes  of 
faith  and  incredulity.  If  any  particular  theory,  principle,  or  philoso- 
phy, were  presented  for  their  consideration,  they  were  accustomed  to 
embrace  or  combat  it  violently.  Thus  it  was  that  most  of  the  Jews 
despised  Jesus,  while  others  worshipped  him , and  believed  all  the 
marvels  that  had  been  related  of  him.  It  is  well  to  remark  that  Jesus 
never  professed  to  be  what  they  make  him  to  say  he  was.  He  was 
a kind,  amiable,  and  unassuming  being,  discarded  by  many  because 
of  his  superior  and  benevolent  traits,  and  as -much  beloved  by  those 
whom  he  immediately  benefited  by  the  smiles  of  his  loving-kindness 
and  by  his  soothing  power. 

He  often  during  his  youth,  and  also  after  ascending  to  manhood, 
preached  for  the  purpose  of  consoling  and  instructing  multitudes  of 
those  who  were  depressed  in  spirit,  and  unfortunately  situated  in  the 
world.  One  of  those  beautiful  lessons  of  consolation  and  exhortation 
is  recorded  in  the  fifth,  sixth,  and  seventh  chapters  of  Matthew  — 
where,  with  all  the  simplicity  of  a confiding  disposition,  he  consoles 
the  multitude  by  saying,  “Happy  are  they  that  mourn,  for  they  shall 
be  comforted  ; happy  are  the  poor  in  spirit,  for  they  shall  see  God  ; 
happy  are  the  peace-makers,  for  "heirs  is  the  kingdom  of  heaven ;” 


564 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


and  in  like  manner  he  proceeds  with  his  expressions  of  kindness  and 
of  all  those  sentiments  that  might  be  expected  from  the  workings  of 
such  a well-constituted  mind.  In  his  preaching  he  employed  the 
terms  that  were  then  in  use,  and  he  professed  to  be  nothing  more 
than  a teacher  of  pure  and  unadultered  love,  and  also  a general  sym- 
pathizer with  all  who  needed  relief,  consolation,  and  sympathy. 

I am  exceedingly  attracted  by  the  purity  of  his  life,  disposition, 
teachings,  and  spirit  of  reform.  He  saw  distinctly,  and  realized  fully, 
the  unhappy  situation  of  his  fellow-men  ; and  he  yearned  for  the  time 
to  come  when  there  would  be  a new  heaven  and  a new  earth,  wherein 
might  dwell  righteousness.  He  was  anxious  for  the  prevalence  of 
a general  harmony  of  interests  and  action,  such  as  would  join  in  one 
the  whole  race  of  mankind.  He  desired  that  prudence  and  industry 
should  so  reign  throughout  this  material  sphere,  as  that  the  desert 
might  blossom  as  the  rose,  and  the  wilderness  bloom  with  a smiling, 
inviting  beauty.  Thus  he  delighted  to  contemplate  the  establishment 
of  the  spiritual  Zion  — the  great  Temple  of  Knowledge  and  Righ- 
teousness so  feelingly  spoken  of,  and  so  earnestly  desired  by,  that 
good  and  worthy  writer,  Isaiah.  Such  are  the  yearnings  of  all  nat- 
urally-philanthropic  bosoms.  Such  are  the  aspirations  of  those  ex- 
alted minds  who  behold  the  human  race  as  a Whole,  and  in  their 
superior  benevolence  cherish  no  selfishness  or  pride. 

§ 159.  Thus  Jesus  lived,  doing  good  to  those  who  came  and  re- 
quired assistance,  exhorting  those  who  were  uneducated,  and  preach- 
ing to  multitudes  — not  in  the  temple  or  the  synagogue,  because 
those  places  were  too  pure  for  his  deeds  and  his  philosophy  — but  on 
the  mountain  and  by  the  wayside  ; thus  lifting  up  his  voice  in  what 
has  before  been  termed  “the  sanctuary  of  the  expanded  earth  and 
the  unfolded  heavens.”  He  taught  thus  because  he  felt  it  an  impera- 
tive duty  devolving  upon  him  to  instruct  the  ignorant,  and  to  depos- 
ite  if  possible  that  pure  spirit  of  reform  in  the  social  world  that  might 
result  in  establishing  the  beauties  of  the  spiritual  Zion-,  and  in  per- 
fecting the  qualities  of  the  Tree  of  Righteousness.  He  felt  prompted 
to  preach,  what  had  been  before  conceived,  that  men  should  do  unto 
others  as  they  would  have  others  do  unto  them  ; and  he  desired  that 
the  simple,  good,  and  tranquillizing  influence  of  this  principle  might 
be  deposited  and  developed  in  the  bosom  of  every  human  form.  He 
desired  that  the  day  of  righteousness  should  be  ushered  in,  when 
there  would  be  no  more  pain,  sorrow,  or  crying,  for  the  old  things 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


565 


would  all  have  been  passed  away,  and  all  things  would  have  become 
new.  And  in  the  accomplishment  of  his  desires,  sin  would  be  de- 
stroyed, together  with  that  which  hath  the  power  of  sin,  that  is  dark- 
ness, ignorance,  folly,  imagination,  imbecility,  and  every  species  of 
sectarianism  and  unholy  philosophy. 

Jesus  continued  to  obey  those  beneficent  monitions  of  his  mind 
(which  were  to  cure  the  diseased,  to  visit  the  fatherless  and  widows 
in  their  afflictions,  and  to  preach  peace  on  earth  and  good-will  to 
men)  until  prejudice  became  so  strong  against  him,  that  he  was  un- 
able to  proceed  any  further  in  his  career  of  purity  and  benevolence. 
He  was  censured  by  various  learned,  and,  as  they  were  thought  to 
be,  very  great,  theologians,  and  was  persecuted  to  a great  extent  by 
the  multitudes,  who  were  exasperated  from  the  workings  of  religious 
prejudice  against  him.  So  he  was  captured,  brought  before  a coun- 
cil of  judicature,  who  were  all  disposed  to  condemn  him  without  a 
hearing,  for  disturbance  of  the  peace,  for  interference  with  their  long- 
cherished  religious  faiths,  their  social  organization,  their  modes  of 
worship,  their  rites  and  ceremonies,  their  long  and  loud  prayers  to 
Him  whom  they  supposed  to  be  the  Lord  of  Abraham,  Isaac,  and 
Jacob,  for  blasphemy,  and  for  doing  deeds  that  were  good  on  the 
sabbath-day.  All  these  and  many  similar  accusations  were  brought 
against  him  ; and  they  exhibited  a spirit  of  persecution  that  will  be 
ere  long  fully  exemplified  in  this  nineteenth  century.  On  these  ac- 
cusations they  condemned  him  to  die  the  death  of  a martyr  ! And 
as  was  the  custom  in  cases  of  similar  accusations  in  those  days,  they 
crucified  him,  two  others  sharing  the  same  fate  with  him.  During 
the  infliction  of  this  most  unjust  penalty,  the  Jews  manifested  the 
same  spirit  of  sectarian  vengeance,  and  the  same  desire  for  the  de- 
struction of  all  invasive  philanthropy  and  purity  of  principle,  that 
will  ere  long  be  exhibited  again.  Thus  will  be  demonstrated  the 
existence  of  precisely  the  same  spirit  as  that  which  characterized  the 
Jews  of  old,  and  the  influence  of  this  will  clothe  the  rising  and  un- 
born generation  in  the  armor  of  prejudice,  hostility,  and  fanaticism  ! 

Thus  Jesus  was  a good  man,  a noble  and  unparalleled  Moral 
Reformer,  considering  him  as  disconnected  from  all  those  unjust 
things  that  are  in  the  New  Testament  recorded  of  him.  He  did  not 
profess  to  be  the  Son  of  God  in  any  other  sense  than  that  of  a branch, 
as  all  are,  of  the  great  Tree  of  universal  and  eternal  Causation.  He 
did  not  profess  to  be  directed  and  impelled  by  any  other  spirit  than 
that  of  Divine  love,  the  germ  of  which  dwells  in  every  other  being 


566 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


undeveloped.  And  to  this  principle,  as  existing  in  others,  he  ap- 
pealed so  feelingly,  in  order  that  its  qualities  might  be  unfolded,  and 
that  they  might  advance  to  the  degree  of  refinement  in  love  and  wis- 
dom then  occupied  by  himself.  He  was,  then,  a type  op  a per- 
fect man,  both  in  physical  and  spiritual  qualifications.  But  those 
representations  which  make  him  more  than  this,  I discover  are  all 
untrue , and  -express  that  only  which  was  professed  for , but  never 
hj  him. 

Thus,  then,  he  died  a martyr  to  the  principles  of  truth,  reason, 
and  virtue.  So  likewise  did  Matthew,  Paul,  and  others.  And  it  is 
lamentable  to  reflect  that  the  world  has  been  guilty  of  such  flagrant 
injustice  that  even  many  in  subsequent  generations  have  been  sub- 
jected to  the  torturing  rack,  to  the  stake,  and  to  the  dissolving  flames  ! 
Men  have  even  rushed  to  the  field  of  battle,  and  there,  impelled  by 
envy  and  sectarian  prejudice,  they  have  poured  out  each  other’s  life’s 
blood,  thereby  causing  Nature  to  blush  for  shame  for  the  degradation 
of  her  children  ! Brethren  have  joined  in  open  hostility,  actuated 
by  no  other  cause  than  the  terrible  and  fiery  elements  of  sectarian 
envy,  prejudice,  and  local  affection  ! How  fearful,  indeed,  is  the 
gloom  of  the  dark  thought,  that  man  has  died  a martyr  to  the  natural 
promptings  of  the  spirit  within,  and  to  the  principles  of  virtue,  mo- 
rality, and  love  ! 

I behold  Jesus,  then,  as  a great  and  good  Reformer;  as  connected 
with  no  marvellous  or  mysterious  aristocracy,  but  as  being  born  of 
lowly  parents,  and  fostered  in  the  bosom  of  their  domestic  habitation  ; 
as  possessing  intelligence  to  a surpassing  degree  ; as  manifesting 
unbounded  love,  benevolence,  and  sympathy;  as  healing  the  sick, 
restoring  the  blind,  curing  the  lame,  and  visiting  the  disconsolate  in 
their  afflictions  ; as  preaching  love,  morality,  peace  on  earth  and  good 
will  to  men  ; as  instructing  the  multitudes  in  the  paths  of  pleasant- 
ness and  peace  ; and  as  loving  all  and  disliking  none.  I behold  him 
as  being  condemned,  nailed  to  the  cross,  and  dying  a martyr  to  the 
cause  of  love,  wisdom,  and  virtue  ! Such  is  one  of  the  parts  in  the 
great  monument  which  an  ignorant  and  misdirected  world  have 
erected  to  their  own  shame  and  folly  ! 

^ 160.  I now  proceed  to  account  for  the  origin  of  those  unjust 
Statements  in  relation  to  him  recorded  in  the  New  Testament. 

First,  however,  it  is  proper  to  introduce  some  considerations  con- 
cerning the  habits,  customs,  laws,  ordinances,  and  states  of  society 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


567 


then  existing:  for  it  must  be  plain  to  every  mind  that  language  and 
forms  of  expression  are  governed  by  the  general  habits,  ordinances, 
and  circumstances  of  any  nation  or  society,  and  that  the  former  are 
changed  to  correspond  with  the  changes  of  the  latter. 

It  was  a custom  in  those  days  to  obey  the  main  suggestions  of  any 
impressive  dream,  with  great  carefulness.  Dreams  were  considered, 
among  all  classes,  as  an  inflowing  of  the  thoughts  of  angels  or  invisi- 
ble beings,  who  were  monitors  and  prompters  to  those  who  dwelt  on 
the  earth.  Hence  they  believed  that  dreams  were  induced  and  de- 
signed by  God  for  the  purpose  of  having  men  obey  his  will.  Of  these 
things  I have  spoken  in  different  places  before  : still,  I would  refer 
the  reader  to  the  older  manuscripts  of  the  Bible  as  containing  many 
illustrations  upon  this  point.  Besides  this,  it  was  the  custom  to 
write  or  express  a figure,  parable,  or  representative,  as  being  itself 
true,  instead  of  the  thought  which  suggested  the  figure  or  representa 
tive  to  the  mind. 

Moreover,  it  was  a rule  in  those  days,  especially  among  the  Jews 
and  Samaritans,  always  to  admit  a proposition  or  statement  when  the 
same  appeared  to  be  demonstrated  by  appeals  to  a number  of  inci- 
dental and  known  facts  ; and  if  any  different  account  or  proposition 
were  presented  by  a different  person,  it  would  be  rejected  without 
investigation.  For  a proof  of  this  I would  refer  the  reader  to  a very 
valuable  work  written  by  Plutarch,  in  which  lie  says,  that  if  any  per- 
son presents  a proposition  contradicted  by  another,  the  first  should 
in  all  cases  be  considered  as  true  and  valid,  and  the  latter  rejected, 
because  it  was  not  the  first  presented  for  consideration.  This,  Plu- 
tarch says,  was  the  rule  recognised  by  the  Stoics,  whenever  they 
were  called  upon  to  investigate  conflicting  accounts  or  propositions. 
It  is  well  to  add,  that  this  is  precisely  the  course  pursued  by  many 
at  the  present  day.  T^ey  assume  and  believe  that  their  first  impres- 
sions, or  hereditary  opinions , are  true,  and  reject  all  new  ones,  un- 
heard ; at  the  same  time  making  their  previous  opinions  the  standard 
by  which  all  subsequent  propositions  should  be  tested.  So  it  is 
scarcely  necessary  to  refer  to  early  historians  for  the  truth  of  this 
relation,  when  the  same  is  fully  verified  in  every  department  of  the 
theological,  scientific,  and  philosophical  world  at  the  present  day. 

Another  custom  wras  to  consider  the  universally-prevailing  impres- 
sion concerning  any  person  or  thing,  as  being  created  and  sanctioned 
by  the  will  of  the  Deity.  This  belief  at  once  unchained  their  mar- 
vellousness and  credulity  for  an  unlimited  exercise  upon  any  subject 


56S 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


which  appeared  thus  fully  sanctioned  ; and  such  they  felt  it  their 
duty  to  venerate  and  promulgate  without  restriction. 

Tt  was  also  a prevailing  belief  in  those  days,  especially  among  the 
lower  classes,  that  the  earth  was  the  centre  of  the  Universe,  and  that 
the  stars,  moon,  and  sun,  were  necessary  appendages  to  the  earth, 
and  that  no  other  earth  was  in  existence  besides  this.  On  this 
ground  they  accounted  for  so  much  attention,  prompting,  and  gui- 
dance, as  they  supposed  to  be  bestowed  upon  them  by  the  Deity ; 
for  the)"  supposed  that  he  invisibly  occupied  a position  in  the  firma- 
ment for  the  purpose  of  guiding  them  into  all  proper  ways,  whether 
such  appertained  to  peace  or  to  war. 

Moreover,  there  were  many  sects  existing  in  those  days,  each  ot 
which  was  distinguished  by  some  peculiarity,  either  as  to  speech, 
garments,  habits  of  living,  or  some  other  mark,  which  served  in  all 
castes  to  designate  them,  and  to  establish  their  exclusiveness.  The 
Druids*  were  known  by  their  peculiar  simplicity  of  dress,  and  by 
their  holding  their  meetings  in  sequestered  places.  The  worshippers 
of.the  Sun,  and  typifyers  of  the  tower  of  Babel  and  of  the  temple  of 
Solomon,  distinguished  themselves  by  wearing  garments  that  were 
indicative  of  the  degree  of  masonry  or  of  mechanical  perfection  to 
which  each  had  arrived.  The  Samaritans  were  distinguished  by  the 
length  of  their  beards,  and  the  style  of  wearing  their  hair,  and  also 
by  their  peculiar  religious  sentiments.  The  Jews  were  distinguished 
by  their  countenances,  their  dress,  and  by  the  mark  of  the  covenant, 
called  the  circumcision.  Thus  exclusive  classes  were  established  ; 
and  each  nation,  and  especially  the  Jews,  earnestly  desired  to  be 
considered  as  the  favorites  of  God  — the  latter  class  claiming  to  be 
the  descendants  of  Abraham,  Isaac,  and  Jacob,  in  proof  of  which 
circumcision  was  presented.  They  also  desired  to  monopolize  the 
general  favors  supposed  to  be  directly  transferred  from  God  to  man- 
kind on  earth. 

Such  was  the  condition  of  things  when  Jesus  was  born  ; and  the 
same  continued  during  his  life,  and  for  many  generations  after  his 
death.  And  it  was  owing  in  a measure  to  the  customs  of  society  — 
the  rules  and  ordinances  of  nations,  and  the  modes  aifd  habits  of  think- 
ing, that  so  many  very  mysterious,  unjust,  and  unreasonable  things 
were  believed,  propagated,  and  written,  concerning  Jesus,  and  his  pe- 
culiar manifestations  of  physical  energy  in  the  healing  the  diseased,  and 

• The  lecturer  incidentally  remarked,  that  these  were  of  the  same  stock  with  the 
Druids  of  Gaul  and  Britain. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


569 


also  concerning  Ins  superior  love  and  wisdom  which  were  expressed 
with  so  much  gentleness,  kindness,  and  humiliation.  I am  exceed- 
ingly desirous  to  impress  on  the  reader’s  mind  the  importance  of 
these  considerations,  inasmuch  as  they  constitute  the  key  by  which 
may  be  unlocked  the  great  mystery  so  long  clothing  the  birth,  life, 
and  death  of  Jesus. 

§ 161.  A long  time  elapsed  after  Jesus  became  noted  for  his 
moral  teachings  and  benevolent  acts,  before  any  inquiries  were  insti- 
tuted concerning  the  peculiarities  of  his  birth  and  early  life,  or  con- 
cerning the  circumstances  attending  the  same.  It  is  well  to  say,  that 
the  chief  inquiries,  and  the  collection  of  facts,  relative  to  the  birth, 
life,  and  deeds  of  Jesus,  were  not  made  until  many  years  after  his 
death.  Therefore  the  general  impressions  of  his  early  followers  were 
assumed  as  a basis  whereon  his  subsequent  historians  and  followers 
predicated  their  faith  and  doctrine.  The  unfavorable  report  con 
cerning  Joseph  and  Mary,  heretofore  mentioned,  gave  rise  to  the  first 
impression  as  to  the  illegitimacy  of  Jesus.  It  was  in  consequence 
of  this  report  that  Joseph  was  disinherited  for  a season  ; but  after  the 
report  subsided,  he  returned  to  his  former  home,  and  all  the  previous 
impressions,  were  obliterated  entirely,  and  no  more  wTas  thought 
upon  the  subject. 

When  the  first  inquiries  were  made  concerning  the  birth  of  Jesus, 
the  conclusion,  as  derived  from  superficial  testimony,  was  as  follows  : 
That  Jesus,  doing  good,  performing  many  cures,  and  manifesting 
great  powers  of  intellect,  must  necessarily  be  supposed  to  be  the  Son 
of  the  Good  Spirit,  or  God.  In  confirmation  of  this,  proof  wras  sup- 
posed to  exist  in  the  report  referred  to  ; and  Mary,  the  mother  of 
Jesus,  was  supposed  to  have  conceived,  in  her  virginity,  by  the 
breathing  influence  of  the  Holy  Ghost.  And  it  was  known  that  Jo- 
seph had  a dream  which  caused  his  departure  into  Egypt ; and  this 
was  believed  to  be  angelic  instruction.  Jesus,  it  was  thought,  could 
not  have  been  so  perfect  as  he  was,  without  having  an  origin  unlike 
that  of  others.  And  as  he  had  manifested  brotherly-kindness,  and 
accomplished  benevolent  acts,  this  was  deemed  conclusive  evidence 
that  his  origin  must  have  been  pure.  The  conclusion,  then,  was 
irresistible,  that  Jesus  was  begotten  of  the  Holy  Spirit,  and  born  of 
the  Virgin  Mary,  and  therefore  was  the  Son  of  God.  And  they 
supposed  that  he  was  named  Jesus  because  he  was  sent  to  save  his 
people  from  their  sins.  All  these  things  were  retrospectively  viewed 


570 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


by  the  generation  succeeding  the  death  of  Jesus,  and  were  consid- 
ered undeniable  evidences  of  bis  miraculous  conception,  of  bis  im- 
maculate purity,  and  that  be  must  have  been  the  Son  of  God.  All 
this  was  in  perfect  harmony  with  their  prepossessions  of  mind. 

Here  the  New  Testament  leaves  the  history  of  Jesus  until  he  ar- 
rives at  the  age  of  twelve  years.  But  surely  some  things  must  have 
been  said  to  have  occurred  as  connected  with  his  life  during  this  pe- 
riod. But  the  accounts  which  were  collected  seemed  too  crude  and 
imperfect  to  receive  a canonical  sanction  ; and  they  were  hence  re- 
jected on  account  of  their  inconsistency  and  the  unsound  manner  in 
which  they  were  recorded.  Some  of  the  rejected  books  are  still  in 
existence,  and  are  full  of  marvellous  relations  concerning  the  child- 
hood of  Jesus,  and  the'  peculiarities  which  distinguished  his  whole 
life.  Some  of  these  stories  are  not  worthy  a moment’s  consideration, 
inasmuch  as  they  are  derived  from  the  marvellous  and  exaggerated 
impressions  hereditarily  received  by  the  persons  who  wrote  them. 
Among  other  things,  it  is  related  that  while  Jesus  was  a little  boy, 
and  associated  with  other  children,  the  stars  were  seen  to  follow  his 
course,  while  his  companions  were  not  in  the  least  thus  honored  ; and 
that  the  moon  appeared  to  trace  and  retrace  her  steps,  following  the 
various  movements  of  the  boy  Jesus:  also  that  a peculiar  illumination 
was  visible  on  his  countenance,  which  would  blind  the  eyes  of  those 
near  him  : also  that  while  a very  little  boy,  he  would  with  other  boys 
approach  the  streams,  and  of  the  moistened  clay  make  birds  and 
other  small  forms  ; and  it  is  related  that  those  which  were  made  by 
the  other  boys  would  remain  inanimate,  while  those  formed  by  Jesus 
would  be  immediately  animated  and  transformed  into  beautiful  birds! 
It  is  also  related  that  seeds  which  were  deposited  in  the  earth  by  his 
hand  would  germinate  and  grow  up  in  the  space  of  thirty  hours  to 
full  maturity.  Much  is  also  said  concerning  many  visions  and  dreams 
that  he  had,  all  of  which  tended  to  confirm  the  opinion  that  he  was 
the  Son  of  God. 

The  account  concerning  Jesus  being  introduced  among  the  learned 
doctors  is  strictly  true,  but  it  was  not  written  until  after  his  death. 
All  the  things  accomplished  by  him  which  are  called  miracles,  were 
related  as  such  mainly  by  those  who  received  the  traditions  from 
those  who  were  the  immediate  followers  and  companions  of  Jesus. 
It  was  a general  belief  that  be  was  the  person  whom  many  of  the 
earlier  historians  and  prophets  foretold.  Hence,  in  various  instances, 
quotations  are  made  from  their  writings  which  seemed  to  have  an  im- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


571 


mediate  bearing  upon,  or  connexion  with,  the  things  they  had  heard 
concerning  the  birth,  life,  and  deeds  of  Jesus. 

The  writers  of  the  books  in  ^he  New  Testament  could  not  resist 
the  conviction  that  Christ  was  thus  miraculously  born  ; and  that  in- 
asmuch as  he  accomplished  so  many  miracles,  discoursed  so  elo- 
quently, harmed  no  one,  but  did  good  to  all,  and  died  ignominiously 
for  his  cause,  he  must  have  been  the  Son  of  God  — the  application 
of  this  title  being  in  accordance  with  the  general  mode  of  expression 
and  belief.  They  likewise  cherished  the  conviction  that  he  must 
have  been  foreseen  by  the  prophets  of  previous  generations.  Hence 
by  research  among  their  writings,  passages  were  found  which  seem- 
ingly had  a connexion  with  the  prominent  circumstances  in  the  life 
of  Christ,  which  they  were  recording.  Therefore  they  made  those 
quotations  with  a serious  conviction  that  they  had  immediate  refer- 
ence to  the  things  which  they  were  employed  in  relating. 

§ 162.  The  history  of  the  deeds  accomplished  by  Jesus  from  the 
age  of  twelve  to  thirty,  was  registered  promiscuously  in  various  books, 
some  of  which  are  now  called  the  Apocrypha  of  the  New  Testa- 
ment. These  relate  more  miraculous  manifestations  of  the  physi- 
cal and  mental  powers  of  Jesus  than  are  recorded  in  the  New  Testa- 
ment. Yet  they  were  written  more  from  hearsay  than  from  actual 
knowledge.  And  I am  impressed  to  say  that  the  account  of  the  as- 
cension was  also  transmitted  by  others  to  those  who  wrote  it,  with  the 
exception  of  one  account  preserved  on  bark,  and  said  to  have  been 
written  by  Mark,  who  was  present  as  an  eye-witness  of  the  occur- 
rence. For  be  it  remembered  that  the  art  of  writing  was  then  un- 
derstood only  by  a very  few,  and  that  paper,  ink,  and  the  art  of 
printing,  were  to  them  unknown.  Hence  the  accounts  impressed  on 
bark  and  other  substances  would  in  some  instances  remain  untran- 
scribed for  one,  two,  or  three  centuries.  Some  of  these  were  pre- 
served until  a species  of  paper  was  invented  upon  which  their  con- 
tents were  transcribed.  Very  few  persons  were  able  to  write  ; while 
the  vast  multitude  were  only  capable  of  conveying  their  thoughts 
verbally  : and  the  constant  verbal  delivery  of  these  accounts  subjected 
them  to  constant  modifications.  Yet  from  impressions  thus  tradi- 
tionally transmitted,  the  subsequent  writers  produced  those  records 
of  which  the  world  is  in  possession  at  the  present  day. 

Still  more  emphatically  am  I impressed  to  say  that  the  birth  of 
Christ  as  related,  the  correspondingly-inconsistent  stories  of  his 
youth,  the  accounts  of  the  instantaneous  cures  effected  by  him,  the 


572 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


pretensions  that  are  made  in  his  behalf  in  respect  to  his  mediatorsbip, 
and  of  his  being  in  a superior  sense  the  Son  of  the  Deity  — and  also 
the  account  of  his  literal  ascension  are  all  strictly  the  traditional  im- 
pressions imbibed  and  written  of  him,  none  of  which  are  true  as  they 
are  related.  It  is  impossible  to  be  in  communion  with,  and  possess 
a knowledge  of,  the  unerring  and  unchangeable  principles  of  the  Di- 
vine Mind,  and  at  the  same  time  admit  the  truth  of  these  traditional 
records.  And  it  is  given  me  to  know  that  he  who  believes  fully  in 
their  truth  is  not  in  communion  with  the  laws,  purposes,  and  Essence 
of  the  Great  Positive  Mind.  But  he  who  is  interiorly  enlightened 
concerning  these,  hesitates  not  to  declare,  from  a serious  conviction 
of  the  judgment,  that  such  things  can  not  be  true;  for  their  very  na- 
ture precludes  their  possibility. 

While  I am  thus  compelled  to  speak,  I am  none  the  less  con- 
scious of  having  myself  supposed  these  things  to  be  true,  and  of  hav- 
ing believed  them  with  a vast  degree  of  veneration,  while  my  mind, 
like  others,  was  trammelled  by  sensuous  opinions  and  philosophy. 
Yet  now,  having  the  external  senses  closed,  and  the  perceptive  pow- 
ers of  the  internal  opened,  I am  acquainted  with  those  things  which 
in  outward  life  appeared  unaccountable  mysteries.  These  historical 
accounts,  concerning  which  I in  common  with  others  have  had  mys- 
terious impressions,  now  appear  entirely  transparent,  even  to  their 
origin,  and  their  confirmation  in  the  minds  of  mankind.  And  I now 
rejoice  to  know  that  this  superficial  theology  has  not  the  least  con- 
nexion with  the  Divine  Essence,  or  Great  Creative  Cause,  with  his 
laws,  or  with  the  great  system  of  material  and  spiritual  worlds.  And 
the  belief  in  these  things  forms  no  part  of  the  theology  which  every 
department  of  Nature  and  the  Universe  unequivocally  demonstrates 
and  establishes. 

Now  my  affections  are  directed  entirely  by  that  wisdom  which 
discards  a theology  so  impure  and  superficial.  Yet  when  I return 
again  to  the  exterior  world,  and  know  things  only  by  sensuous  im- 
pressions, then  also  will  my  affections  return  and  control  my  super- 
ficial wisdom  ; and  these  affections  will  at  once  connect  me  again 
with  all  those  superficial  views,  theories,  and  philosophies,  that  at  this 
present  moment  occupy  no  tangible  position  in  my  conceptions  of 
the  structure  of  the  Universe,  or  of  the  character  of  the  Great  Posi- 
tive Mind.  Hence,  while  I am  in  this  condition,  I am  knowledging 
that  which  is  opposed  to  the  present  affections  of  men,  in  the  depart- 
ments of  theology  and  philosophy.  But  it  is  nevertheless  proper — 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


573 


nay,  it  is  an  imperative  duty  — for  me  to  develop  that  which  I now 
perceive  is  seriously  interfering  with  all  social  happiness  and  mental 
progression.  Let  it  be,  then,  the  serious  effort  of  all  vigorous  minds, 
to  learn  soon  to  modify  their  affections  for  supposed  truths,  so  that 
their  reason , and  not  their  prejudices,  may  in  all  cases  be  the  govern- 
ing principle  of  their  minds.  These  developments  will  then  lose 
their  apparent  irreverence,  and  become  at  once  a vehicle  to  convey 
to  the  judgment  truth  and  wisdom.  I will  have  occasion  to  speak 
on  this  point  again,  when  treating  on  the  physical  and  spiritual  con- 
stitution of  man  ; but  at  the  present  time  it  is  necessary  still  further  to 
confine  the  attention  to  those  things  heretofore  investigated. 

§ 163.  The  men  who  are  called  prophets  were  reformers  and  phi- 
losophers in  respect  to  subjects  appertaining  to  the  sufferings  of  hu- 
manity. Hence,  while  situated  among  those  sufferings,  they  consoled 
themselves  and  others  by  endeavoring  to  forget  the  past,  or  by  con- 
sidering it  as  an  index  to  a new  and  more  desirable  era.  Their  wri- 
tings,  then,  are  prophetical  on  the  same  principle  that  all  inductive 
reasonings  are  ; and  on  this  principle  they  anticipated  a day  of  human 
industry,  of  righteousness,  and  of  general  knowledge.  And  as  they 
were  subject  to  the  tyranny  of  despotic  rulers,  their  minds  sought 
refuge  in  the  hope  that  a new  king  of  the  Jews  would  appear,  whose 
reign  would  give  them  relief,  and  change  their  physical  condition. 
Hence  the  king  of  the  Jews  of  whom  they  spoke,  and  whose  genera- 
tion Isaiah  indulged  great  hope  of  beholding,  was  exemplified  in  the 
great  Reformer,  Jesus.  But  they  saw  him  not,  nor  the  distinct 
period  of  the  amelioration  ; but  they  were  interiorly  enlightened  suf- 
ficiently to  recognise  the  progress  of  those  laws  which  would  as  a 
necessary  consequence  usher  in  the  King  or  Reformer  whom  they 
contemplated,  and  the  era  which  they  so  ardently  desired.  Christ, 
then,  in  the  New  Testament,  is  called  “ the  King  of  the  Jews but 
the  latter  believed  not  that  he  was  their  predicted  king.  Yet  the 
writers  of  the  New  Testament  supposed  that  Christ  should  be  thus 
designated  and  promoted,  because  no  other  being  had  ever  lived 
among  them  who  had  displayed  all  those  righteous  qualities  and 
those  manifestations  of  supreme  love  that  in  any  way  corresponded 
to  the  predictions  or  impressions  of  the  earlier  generations. 

Understand,  then,  that  the  New  Testament  was  written  in  such  a 
manner  as  to  convey  the  impression  that  Jesus  was  the  being  actu- 
ally foreseen  by  previous  writers  — in  confirmation  of  which  the 


574 


NATURES  divine  revelations. 


words  of  those  writers  are  quoted.  Meanwhile  remember  that  the 
men  called  prophet^  knew  not  of  the  person,  nor  the  period,  but 
knew  of  a person  and  a period,  which,  according  to  the  progress  of 
all  things,  must  inevitably  be  ushered  in.  And  distinctly  does  it 
appear  that  Jesus  possessed  those  reforming  characteristics  which 
constituted  him  a perfect  man  ; and  that  he  well  represents  the 
King  or  Reformer  spoken  of  by  the  prophets  as  being  the  Tree  of 
Righteousness,  and  the  founder  of  the  Spiritual  Zion.  But  the  era 
when  were  to  be  developed  those  principles  which  he  exemplified, 
was  not  when  he  lived,  but  is  to  be  in  future.  And  only  can  this 
occur  when  society  has  attained  to  that  perfect  symmetry  of  form  and 
structure  which  was  exemplified  in  the  body  of  Jesus,  as  then  alone 
will  the  spiritual  possessions  thereof  be  correspondingly  perfect. 

According  to  the  custom  of  those  days,  Jesus  spoke  parables, 
which  appeared  to  have  allusion  to  occurrences  thereafter  to  take 
place  in  a manner  corresponding  to  the  letter  of  the  parables.  The 
prediction  recorded  in  Matthew  concerning  the  destruction  of  Jeru- 
salem and  the  temple,  contains  many  ambiguous  expressions  and 
illustrations.  These  clothe  the  prophecy  in  a very  mysterious  gar- 
ment, which  to  the  general  mind  is  rendered  the  more  so  because  it 
is  recorded  in  the  New  Testament.  The  parables  of  the  sheep  and 
goats,  the  rich  man  and  the  poor  on<^  the  gehenna  of  fire,  &c.,  are 
all  related  as  being  spoken  by  Jesus  to  represent  literal  occur 
rences  as  affecting  man  in  the  material  and  spiritual  world.  And 
they  do  convey  this  impression,  merely  because  they  are  expressed 
in  a style  as  if  the  parable  or  illustration  was  itself  the  actual  occur- 
rence referred  to.  This  was  a customary  mode  of  representing  an 
occurrence  or  discoursing  upon  any  principle  in  those  days. 

But  this  much  is  clear,  that  no  good  and  well-informed  mind  will 
ever  draw  lines  of  demarcation  between  any  human  beings.  There- 
fore it  is  doing  great  injustice  to  the  loving-kindness  and  unbounded 
sympathy  of  Jesus,  to  believe  that  he  employed  such  expressions  in- 
tending them  to  be  literally  understood  ; for,  as  has  been  before 
stated,  he  was  one  of  those  well-developed  beings  whose  sympathy 
and  benevolence  gushed  forth  spontaneously,  and  flowed  irrespec 
tively  throughout  every  recess  of  human  existence. 

Herein,  again,  is  the  test  of  knowledge  and  righteousness  : He 
who  is  ignorant,  and  whose  sympathies  are  contracted  by  prejudice; 
whose  benevolence  is  circumscribed  by  the  circle  occupied  by  any 
sect  or  institution  ; whose  feelings,  being  perverted  by  local  affec- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


575 


tion  and  prejudice,  are  unmoved  by  the  calls  of  mankind  for  ameli- 
oration— will  fix  the  line  of  eternal  distinction  between  mankind,  and 
presumptuously  calls  one  class  “the  wicked,”  “the  sinful,”  “the 
abandoned,”  and  the  other  “ the  righteous,”  “ the  children  of  God,” 
“ the  elect.”  All  but  the  latter  class  he  will  call  hypocrites,  deceiv- 
ers, and  all  kinds  of  unholy  names,  which  naturally  are  conceived  by 
an  ignorant  and  misdirected  mind. 

But  he  whose  movements  in  the  world  of  thought  are  unrestricted ; 
whose  sympathy  flows  to  all,  without  distinction,  excited  by  a knowl- 
edge of  human  weakness  and  misdirection  ; whose  feelings  and 
affections  are  but  gushing  aspirations  for  universal  peace  and  indus- 
try ; whose  energies  of  soul  are  concentrated  upon  the  great  era  of 
physical  and  mental  freedom  and  exaltation  — he  it  is  that  is  truly  and 
purely  enlightened.  Such  a one  knows  no  aristocracy,  no  distinc- 
tion, no  condemnation  as  a punishment,  no  bliss  as  a reward;  but 
recognises  tbe  truth,  that  all  causes  do  inevitably  produce  corre- 
sponding effects.  Therefore  he  makes  no  distinction  except  that 
which  Nature  establishes  by  her  laws  of  association.  The  mind 
which  recognises  all  these  things  is  the  highest  development  of  Na- 
ture, and  should  be  admired  because  of  its  purity  and  unsophistica- 
tion. Then,  I say,  if  Jesus,  from  a conviction  of  his  judgment,  made 
any  actual  distinction,  such  as  the  language  attributed  to  him  would 
indicate  if  literally  understood,  he  must  be  numbered  with  the  igno- 
rant and  uneducated,  who  occupy  no  very  high  position  in  the  sphere 
of  thought  and  wisdom.  On  the  other  hand,  if  he  uttered  not  those 
expressions  which  are  ascribed  to  him,  except  for  the  purpose  of 
illustration , then  he  may  have  been  that  pure  and  truly  enlightened 
being  whom  the  world  at  the  present  day  is  striving  to  know,  to 
appreciate,  and  to  follow. 

§ 164.  To  speak  still  more  plainly  : All  impure,  ignorant,  and 
improperly-instructed  minds,  can,  without  hesitation,  condemn  a 
portion  of  the  race,  and  presume  to  stigmatize  them  as  Pharisees, 
hypocrites,  evil-doers,  and  workers  of  unrighteousness.  But  that 
mind  which  is  pure,  and  properly  educated  in  the  ways  of  wisdom, 
can  only  recognise  mankind  as  a Brotherhood;  and  he. will  consider 
their  imperfections  as  owing  only  to  the  misdirection  of  their  physi- 
cal and  mental  powers.  A knowledge  of  this  truth  breathes  a uni- 
versal sympathy  and  forgiveness  ; and  the  mind  possessing  it  can  not 
but  recognise  the  principle  of  doing  good  unto  all,  and  loving  one 


576 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


another.  Whoever  says,  then,  that  Jesus  ever  used  such  expres- 
sions in  a literal  sense,  as  is  generally  taught  by  theologians,  virtually 
charges  him  with  being  an  impure  and  unrighteous  man.  But  he 
who  believes  not  these  things,  may  consistently  admit  Jesus  to  have 
been  a good  man,  and  a natural  philanthropist. 

I discover,  however,  that  these  things  were  not  recorded  until 
sometime  after  the  death  of  Jesus,  and  then  were  written  according 
to  the  traditional  accounts  received  b}r  the  writers  ; and  they  were 
expressed  in  a manner  correspondirig  to  the  customs,  beliefs,  and 
modes  of  expression,  prevalent  in  those  days.  I perceive  it  is  proper 
to  affirm,  that  this  language  was  employed  by  Jesus  to  convey  his 
conceptions  in  a style  suitable  to  be  understood  by  the  multitudes 
who  listened  to  his  preaching.  The  language  presents  no  particular 
principles  capable  of  being  applied  to  the  world  at  the  present  day. 
And  it  would  indeed  be  a mark  of  wisdom,  and  a good  sign  of  a 
mental  resurrection  from  ignorance  and  superstition,  if  theologians 
and  commentators  would  discard  all  further  effort  to  draw  instruction 
from  those  illustrations  that  were  only  useful  nearly  two  thousand 
years  ago. 

In  respect  to  the  origin  of  the  account  concerning  the  ascension  of 
Jesus,  it  is  at  the  present  time  not  important  that  I should  enter  into 
particulars  ; especially  as  former  comments  lead  to  a solution  of  this 
question,  and  also  exclude  the  possibility  of  such  an  actual  occur- 
rence. I will  refer,  however,  for  a detailed  consideration  of  these 
and  kindred  subjects,  to  a work  that  will  hereafter  be  given,  as  devo- 
ted to  a discussion  of  minor  and  general  opinions  and  principles. 

Here,  then,  follows  a summary  of  that  which  has  already  been  rela- 
ted concerning  Jesus  : The  account  given  of  his  birth  sprang  from 
an  unfavorable  report  in  the  neighborhood  where  Jesus  was  born, 
concerning  his  illegitimacy.  This  is  its  origin ; but  the  style  in 
which  it  is  recorded,  is  a creation  that  arose  from  those  general  im- 
pressions concerning  him  entertained  by  those  who  wrote.  The  alleged 
prophecies  concerning  him,  quoted  from  the  Old  Testament,  were 
not  originally  intended  to  be  thus  applied  ; but  they  were  cited  by 
the  biographers  of  Jesus  because  they  had  a seeming  appositeness  to 
some  of  the  circumstances  of  his  life.  They  were  suggested  to  the 
writers  of  the  New  Testament  as  having  an  allusion  to  Christ,  be- 
cause they  believed  that  past  and  present  revealments  formed  one 
perfect  system  of  inspiration  and  theology,  as  derived  from  the  Di- 
vine Being.  This  was  merely  a conviction  of  their  minds  caused  by 


nature’s  DIV.AE  REVELATIONS. 


577 


the  seeming  evidence  afforded  by  every  external,  superficial,  and  tra- 
ditional indication.  The  accounts  given  of  miracles  also  derived 
their  character  from  the  customary  use  of  language  in  those  days, 
which  was  to  associate  cause  and  effect  in  one  sentence,  without 
alluding  to  the  intermediate  period  which  elapsed  between  the  appli- 
cation and  the  result.  Of  this,  also,  I have  spoken  before. 

Those  passages  which  speak  of  Jesus  as  being  the  Son  of  God, 
and  of  his  making  those  vast  distinctions  between  men,  are  merely 
expressions  employed  by  those  who  wrote  their  convictions  concern- 
ing him,  and  are  worthy  of  no  more  attention  than  may  arise  from  the 
fact  that  they  embody  the  opinions  of  men  who  lived  many  hundred 
years  ago. 

Moreover,  it  becomes  necessary  to  mark  the  very  great  injustice 
that  such  accounts  do  to  the  character  and  life  of  Christ.  It  is  cer- 
tainly doing  no  good  to  any  being  to  claim  for  him  an  illegitimate  or 
supernatural  origin.  Nor  does  it  do  any  credit  to  his  character  to 
relate  the  many  inconsistent  things  that  are  reported  concerning  his 
youth,  his  deeds,  his  preaching,  and  his  death.  Besides,  it  is  abso- 
lutely inconsistent  with  the  high  moral  sensibilities  of  an  enlightened 
judgment,  to  clothe  the  life  and  preachings  of  Jesus  with  the  things 
that  are  now  known  to  be  believed  only  by  those  who  are  ignorant, 
misdirected,  or  prejudiced. 

A belief  of  many  things  related  of  Jesus,  not  only  does  injustice 
to  his  birth,  life,  wisdom,  and  benevolence,  but  it  removes  the  Great 
Moving  Principle  of  the  Universe  from  his  exalted  position  to  a grade 
only  worthy  of  an  ignorant  and  capricious  potentate.  It  depre- 
ciates the  character  of  the  Divine  Mind,  by  making  him  institute  a 
system  of  theology  merely  to  change  that  which  he  himself  created 
imperfect  in  the  beginning  of  human  existence.  It  makes  the  Uni- 
verse an  inconsistent,  disorganized,  and  unholy  mass  of  creations.  It 
destroys  the  harmony  of  the  Divine  Plans,  by  teaching  that  the  Deity 
has  interfered  with  his  established  laws,  instituting  new  ones  to  de- 
stroy those  which  he  previously  established. 

It  likewise  teaches  that  the  Divine  Mind  and  his  Son  have  both 
failed  to  accomplish  the  End  to  attain  which  they  are  represented  as 
having  made  active  efforts.  For  the  “ miraculous  conception”  can 
never  be  believed  so  long  as  Nature  continues  her  unvarying  mani- 
festations ; and  this  doctrine  can  never  be  of  the  least  possible  use  in 
effecting  a physical  or  mental  elevation  of  the  race.  It  rather  has  a 
contrary  tendency,  inasmuch  as  it  inspires  feeble  minds  with  awe, 

37 


57S 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


fear,  and  superstition.  And  if  the  “miracles”  were  intended  to 
prove  the  divine  power  of  Christ,  and  to  establish  a divine  theology- 
in  the  world,  then  have  they  proved  ineffectual ; because  in  the  en- 
lightened mind  they  neither  establish  a belief  in  a Divine  power  as 
possessed  by  Christ,  nor  convey  any  conviction  in  favor  of  what  is 
supposed  to  be  the  true  theology.  And  if  Christ  was  what  they 
represented  him  to  be,  and  if  all  the  contents  of  the  New  Testament 
are  true,  the  miracles  can  not  make  them  more  so.  On  the  other 
hand,  if  they  are  not  true,  no  miracles  nor  anything  else  can  ever 
make  them  true.  And,  moreover,  if  all  those  things  related  of  him 
are  literally  true,  then  he  is  proved  to  have  been  an  impure  and  un- 
developed being,  even  from  his  birth  upward.  Moreover,  if  they 
are  true,  that  which  I am  now  saying  can  not  possibly  affect  their 
intrinsic  truthfulness. 

This  much,  however,  it  is  well  to  know  : that  that  which  Reason 
and  Nature  sanction,  should  be  believed  in  preference  to  that  which 
is  contradictory  of  all  known  laws,  and  is  incompatible  with  the  har- 
mony which  pervades  the  Universe.  Therefore  it  would  be  doing 
Christ  injustice  to  believe  concerning  him  all  that  is  related  in  the 
New  Testament.  Yet  those  who  wrote  these  things  were  perfectly 
honest,  and  were  impelled  only  by  a sense  of  duty  and  zeal  to  write 
their  serious  convictions,  and  present  them  to  those  who  wished  to 
know  what  they  believed,  and  from  what  source  sprang  their  convic- 
tions. But  there  is  no  evidence  connected  with  the  origin  of  these 
records  to  justify  the  belief  that  they  were  ever  intended  for  universal 
reading  and  comment. 

§ 165.  There  exists  no  history  or  account  of  the  birth  and  teach- 
ings of  Jesus  corresponding  to  that  which  is  recorded  in  the  New 
Testament,  with  the  exception  of  the  account  in  Josephus  ; and  that 
occupies  no  conspicuous  position,  but  is  merely  recorded  as  a pas- 
sing remark  of  no  very  great  importance.  Some  have  supposed  that 
this  passage  is  an  interpolation.  I do  not  discover  that  this  suppo- 
sition is  true  ; for  the  record  is  genuine,  although  not  contained  in 
some  of  the  early  versions  of  Josephus.  Yet  it  is  clear  that  this  his- 
torian attached  no  such  importance  to  the  life  and  character  of  Christ 
as  was  attached  thereunto  by  those  who  wrote  the  gospels.  It  is 
reasonable  to  suppose  that  if  the  birth  and  life  of  Christ  had  been 
of  such  a supernatural  character,  more  historians  would  have  re- 
ceived conviction  accordingly,  and  would  have  devoted  considerable 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


579 


portions  of  their  writings  to  a relation  of  his  miraculous  manifesta- 
tions, setting  forth  the  importance  of  his  birth,  death,  and  resurrec- 
tion. But  as  no  more  historians  devoted  themselves  to  this  work, 
the  conclusion  inevitably  follows  that  few,  if  any,  firmly  believed 
these  things,  except  those  who  wrote  the  primitive  manuscripts  of 
the  New  Testament ; and  that  the  latter  believed  because  they  re- 
ceived a mass  of  apparent  evidence  which  no  others  were  in  a situa- 
tion to  receive. 

The  object  of  speaking  concerning  these  things  is  to  free  the  minds 
of  men  from  all  superstitious  prejudice  as  connected  with  a belief  in 
the  same,  which  prejudice  has  a tendency  to  retard  the  physical  and 
spiritual  development  of  mankind.  Society  can  not  be  reorganized 
in  harmony  with  the  laws  and  requirements  of  Nature,  until  all  ob- 
stacles are  removed  which  obstruct  the  unfoldings  of  the  general 
mind,  and  stand  in  the  way  of  universal  action  : and  this  superstitious 
belief  in  an  unreal  theology  is  one  of  those  obstacles  that  are  to  be 
of  all  others  the  most  dreaded  and  the  most  repulsed  from  the  bosom 
of  mankind.  Such  obstacles  can  be  removed  only  by  cautiously  re- 
vealing; the  causes  eng-a^ed  in  their  creation  ; and  a knowledge  of 
these  will  cause  the  mind  to  repulse  and  discard  their  effects  as 
these  are  existing  at  the  present  time  in  every  portion  of  the  world. 

Therefore  I have  descended  to  the  causes  that  were  engaged  in 
creating  the  book  that  is  now  called  the  Bible;  and  a knowledge  of 
these  removes  at  once  all  that  superstition  concerning  it,  and  all 
those  ideas  of  its  supernaturalness,  that  have  preserved  it  in  the  bo- 
som of  fanaticism  from  the  period  of  its  origin  to  the  present  day. 
The  effects  of  these  causes  have  been  folly,  ignorance,  prejudice, 
bigotry,  superstition,  injustice,  wretchedness,  immorality,  and  aristo- 
cratic distinctions,  among  the  various  nations  of  the  earth.  Now  he 
who  can  sympathize  with  these  effects , may  still  continue  to  cherish 
their  parent  causes ; but  he  who  feels  an  inward  repulsion  at  the  very 
thought  of  their  existence,  will  most  certainly  display  his  nobleness 
of  mind  in  discarding  for  ever  those  unholy  causes  which  produced 
them,  as  well  as  the  effects  themselves,  and  begin  to  live  a new  life 
in  the  physical  and  mental  world,  and  thus  be  fitted  to  ascend  to  the 
highest  point  in  the  second  sphere  of  knowledge  and  understanding. 

Still  nothing:  should  be  venerated  more  than  the  beautiful  and 
truthful  prophetic  meditations  of  the  early  writers  concerning  a uni- 
versal deliverance  from  tyranny,  bondage,  and  wretchedness.  And 
the  many  useful  and  beautiful  moral  precepts  contained  in  the  New 


5S0 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


Testament,  as  spoken  by  Jesus,  demand  equal  reverence.  All  such 
moral  teachings  should  be  regarded  with  deep  veneration,  especially 
when  that  veneration  is  an  offspring  of  the  judgment,  and  not  of  the 
affections  ; for  the  affections  are  not  the  developed  principles,  but 
merely  the  elements  of  the  judgment. 

And  it  will  be  perceived  that  the  nobleness  of  those  early  writers, 
and  the  superior  physical  and  mental  endowments  of  Jesus,  are  still 
preserved  as  a source  of  instruction,  and  that  they  even  shine  forth 
with  a brilliancy  they  never  have  before  displayed,  because  they  have 
been  so  much  obscured  beneath  a heterogeneous  mass  of  unjust  and 
useless  materials.  And  what  has  been  preserved  of  their  characters 
and  teachings  is  capable  of  being  applied  to  the  great  subject  of 
Moral  Reform,  which  is  only  to  be  affected  by  first  reforming  the 
physical  and  social  conditions  of  men.  The  beauty  of  their  lives 
and ' characters,  the  perseverance  which  distinguished  their  efforts, 
and  their  adherence  to  the  principles  of  virtue,  goodness,  and  righ- 
teousness, even  unto  martyrdom  — all  stand  forth  as  conspicuous 
examples  by  which  all  men  may  profit. 

And  let  it  be  known  that  Jesus  was  the  greatest  of  them  all  in  this 
great  field  of  labor  — in  this  great  vineyard  of  natural  (not  wranatural) 
culture.  He  possessed  pre-eminently  those  ennobling  attributes 
which  are  worthy  a living  imitation  in  the  lives  and  deeds  of  all 
men.  I therefore  place  Jesus  and  these  early  writers  or  prophets  in 
the  same  category  with  those  worthy  and  noble  philanthropists  who 
have  lived  since  their  time,  and  those  who  still  live  to  adorn  the 
world.  They  were  general  sympathizers  with  the  afflictions  of  men, 
general  actors  for  the  public  good,  general  relievers  of  the  widows 
and  fatherless,  general  preachers  of  the  great  principles  controlling 
the  Universe  and  Man  with  an  unerring  government,  and  general 
relievers  of  despondency  and  mental  wretchedness,  by  unfolding  to 
the  minds  of  men  the  great  and  glorious  era  when  would  exist  uni- 
versal peace,  industry,  and  righteousness. 

And  it  is  an  honor  to  the  human  race  to  become  now  acquainted 
with  the  pure  characters  of  former  days,  as  disconnected  from  all  the 
extraneous  obscurities  that  have  shut  out  their  real  characters  from 
the  mental  perceptions  of  the  world.  It  is  an  honor  now  to  know 
and  appreciate  the  trueness,  goodness,  brotherly-kindness,  and  be 
nevolence  of  Jesus,  as  disconnected  from  all  the  falsifications  here 
tofore  obscuring  his  intrinsic  physical  and  spiritual  qualifications. 

Thus  I close  all  reflections  on  the  character  and  application  of  th 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


5S1 


principles  of  the  early  writers,  and  of  Jesus,  until  the  delivery  of  the 
third  part  of  this  work. 


§ 166.  The  foregoing  considerations  in  reference  to  theology,  and 
the  misconceptions  that  exist  in  the  world,  have  so  far  advanced  the 
subject  as  to  render  necessary,  as  next  in  order,  some  reflections 
upon  many  revelations  that  have  been  made  in  past  ages,  by  various 
persons  who  were  qualified  for  the  inflowing  and  the  outward  ex- 
pression of  truths.  In  all  ages  of  the  world,  revelations  of  various 
degrees  of  importance  have  been  made,  though  in  many  instances 
the  world  knew  it  not.  I discover  that  more  have  been  given  than 
are  recorded  in  the  Bible  ; and  some  of  these,  too,  were  of  the  most 
important  and  instructive  nature : although  in  the  Bible  are  con- 
tained many  that  have  scarcely  ever  been  excelled  in  any  previous  or 
subsequent  age. 

It  is  proper  for  every  mind  to  venerate  revelations  of  every  kind, 
in  proportion  to  their  congeniality  with  the  uniform  teachings  of  Na- 
ture, and  the  highest  sanctions  of  a well-constituted  judgment.  And 
in  connexion  with  this  remark,  I would  again  enforce  the  absolute 
importance  of  not  bestowing  veneration  upon  any  revealments  that 
are  to  be  found  in  the  Bible,  more  than  upon  those  found  among  the 
productions  of  other  writers. 

The  most  useful  revelations  contained  in  the  Bible  are  those  given 
by  David,  Isaiah,  Jeremiah,  Zechariah,  Malachi,  and  Jesus.  Isaiah’s 
mind  was  so  expanded,  that  a knowledge  of  ultimate’allevialion  from 
physical  and  social  wretchedness  flowed  into  it  with  a natural  ease, 
with  which  also  he  expressed  the  same  to  the  world.  But  as  the 
application  of  his  revelations  will  be  made  in  the  sequel,  it  is  unne- 
cessary at  present  to  dwell  upon  them.  He  should,  however,  be 
recognised  in  this  place  as  one  of  those  spiritually-enlightened  men 
whose  teachings  to  the  social  world  have  not  as  yet  been  appreciated 
or  justly  interpreted. 

And  David,  too,  instituted  prophetical  meditations  that  are  wor- 
thy of  the  deepest  attention  and  the  highest  respect.  And  Jere- 
miah, and  likewise  Zechariah,  revealed  many  things  pertaining 
to  the  same  social  resurrection,  and  to  the  grand  and  sublime  results 
in  the  moral  world  as  flowing  so  naturally  and  spontaneously  from 


5S2 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


the  harmony  and  unity  of  action  that  will  ultimately  pervade  the  whole 
'physical  world.  And  Malachi  also  spoke  briefly,  yet  truthfully, 
concerning  the  greit  and  glorious  era  yet  unrealized  by  the  inhabi- 
tants of  the  earth,  but  which,  according  to  progressive  law,  may  be 
had  in  bright  anticipation. 

It  is  well  to  remark,  in  order  to  prevent  misunderstanding,  that  I 
use  the  terms  revelation  and  development  as  synonymous ; fora  revela- 
tion is  nothing  more  than  an  outward  development  of  truths  flowing 
into  the  mind. 

No  being  ever  existed  before  Jesus,  who  possessed  the  same  de- 
gree of  spiritual  elevation  and  refinement : for  he  possessed  the  high- 
est development  of  the  physical  and  mental  powers.  And  it  is  plain 
that  no  being  ever  revealed  so  much  pure  and  substantial  truth  so  ca- 
pable of  receiving  an  immediate  and  useful  application.  His  mind, 
as  I have  before  intimated,  was  properly  constituted  for  the  inflowing 
of  truths,  both  from  the  natural  and  spiritual  world.  Therefore  his 
superior  judgment  taught  him  to  reveal  only  useful  and  natural  truths, 
relating  to  the  social  conditions  and  material  constitutions  of  men. 
For,  as  has  been  shown,  he  taught  not  the  doctrine  of  immortality, 
but  only  incidentally  made  mention  of  that  truth  when  endeavoring 
to  inspire  the  human  mind  with  hope  and  confidence.  Jesus  is  to  be 
more  respected  and  appreciated,  and  his  principles  more  practised, 
than  they  have  as  yet  been.  The  beauty  of  his  natural  principles 
have  never  as  yet  been  duly  recognised,  because  they  have  not  es- 
caped the  darkening  influence  of  theological  interpretations.  And  I 
feel  it  proper  to  affirm  that  the  beauty  of  his  life  and  character  never 
has  been  nor  never  will  be  known,  and  fully  exemplified  in  the  lives 
of  men,  until  all  speculation,  both  of  a psychological  and  theological 
nature,  as  connected  therewith,  is  abandoned.  For  the  more  this  is 
persisted  in,  the  further  his  life,  character,  and  principles,  become 
removed  from  the  understanding  and  practice  of  mankind.  The  dis- 
tinction must  be  made  between  natural  truth  and  spiritual  imagina- 
tion, before  there  can  exist  universal  peace  on  earth  and  good-will  to 
men.  If  no  more  were  revealed  by  Jesus  than  this  consummation, 
the  high  illumination  of  his  mind  would  be  sufficiently  demonstrated  •, 
because  he  spoke  not  of  that  which  was,  but  of  that  which  shall  be 
yet  in  future. 

The  use,  therefore,  of  his  principles,  has  not  been  comprehended 
by  those  who  profess  to  have  the  most  knowledge  of  their  utility  and 
application.  And  it  now  becomes  important  that  men  should  discard 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


583 


previous  interpretations  of  his  teachings,  and  press  onward  to  the 
consummation,  when  their  truth  will  be  triumphantly  demonstrated 
I recognise  the  revelations  made  by  Jesus  as  more  useful,  more 
truthful,  and  more  natural,  than  any  of  those  who  have  presented 
different  or  higher  truths  to  the  world.  What  I mean  by  higher 
truths  is,  such  as  are  involved  in  many  of  those  metaphorical  allu- 
sions in  the  Apocalypse  — which  are  incapable  of  benefiting  the  world 
of  mankind,  though  they  are  susceptible  of  being  fully  verified  in  the 
third  sphere  of  spiritual  habitation.  Notwithstanding  their  truth,  they 
are  impracticable,  and  therefore  they  demand  not  that  attention  and 
veneration  which  have  been  given  them  by  many  erudite  commenta- 
tors. It  has  been  proved  that  the  Apocalypse  contains  no  principles 
that  are  intimately  connected  with  any  other  revelation,  with  the  ex- 
ception of  that  made  by  Emanuel  Swedenborg. 

§ 167.  Many  revelations  have  been  made  by  persons  among 
the  Chinese,  Hindoos,  and  Persians.  Confucius  revealed  many 
moral  principles  which  have  not  an  equal  in  any  revealment  except 
that  of  Jesus.  Also  Brama  revealed  many  interior  truths  that  have 
not  as  yet  been,  but  will  be,  verified,  both  in  the  social  and  spirit 
world.  Many  truths  are  obtained  even  unconsciously  to  the  person 
who  receives  them,  by  implication,  induction,  and  progressive 
thought.  And  in  like  manner  do  men  sometimes  become  subjects 
or  agents  to  reveal  truths  altogether  unknown  and  unbelieved  by 
themselves,  but  which  are,  nevertheless,  in  subsequent  ages,  discov- 
ered to  be  truths  of  the  most  astounding  character  and  the  greatest 
intrinsic  worth.  Thus  it  was  with  Zoroaster  — who  revealed  and 
taught  to  the  whole  eastern  world,  that  sin  would  ultimately  be  abol- 
ished, and  everlasting  righteousness  brought  in  ; and  that  then  the 
Deity  (Ormuzd)  would  rejoice  with  joy  unspeakable  for  ever  and 
ever.  Never  was  a greater  truth  proclaimed  to  the  inhabitants  of  the 
earth  : and  for  the  accomplishment  of  the  end  which  it  contemplates, 
the  most  active  efforts  should  be  employed.  Yet  this  is  not  venera- 
ted, merely  because  it  was  presented  by  Zoroaster  — he  being,  not- 
withstanding, an  agent  or  subject  by  and  through  which  this  most 
important  revelation  was  made. 

Also  Mohammed  declared  many  spiritual  truths — truths  that  have 
been  verified  by  psychological  research,  and  also  by  the  spiritual  de- 
velopments of  Swedenborg.  Yet,  again,  these  truths  are  not  revered, 
merely  because  the  revelation  has  proceeded  from  Mohammed,  and 


5 84 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


because  hereditary  impression  and  education  preclude  all  affection 
from  the  truths  and  their  reVealer. 

A few  centuries  ago,  many  physical  truths  were  revealed  by  G a 
len  — truths,  too,  that  are  susceptible  of  the  most  useful  application. 
These  relate  to  the  trinity  of  principles  or  substances  as  forming  any 
'one  compound  or  organization.  This  trinity  is  discoverable  in  every 
department  of  Nature  and  the  Universe.  This  does  not,  however, 
in  any  way  demonstrate  the  supposed  spiritual  Trinity  that  has  been 
so  seriously  defended,  so  ably  discussed,  and  so  reverentially  cher- 
ished. Galen,  then,  revealed  that  which  no  other  physician  or  physi- 
cal researcher  ever  did  ; and  he  is  worthy  of  being  classed  with 
those  revelators  who  occupy  the  highest  position  in  the  departments 
of  useful  and  natural  truths. 

I find  also  many  important  discoveries  and  revelations  among  the 
Germans  — owing  very  much  to  their  peculiar  habits  of  thinking,  and 
of  investigating  all  seen  and  unseen  laws  and  operations  of  Nature; 
and  among  them  have  been  persons  whose  interior  perceptions  were 
so  unfolded  as  to  enable  them  to  recognise  the  reality  of  the  spirit 
world,  and  its  close  connexion  with  this  rudirnental  sphere.  One 
should  be  noticed  particularly,  because  her  mind  was  in  a condition 
occupied  by  all  at  the  period  of  death  or  transformation.  She  is 
known  as  the  Seeress  of  Prevorst  — and  has  revealed  many 
truths  concerning  the  connexion  between  the  natural  and  spiritual 
world,  and  between  the  soul  and  the  body  ; and  concerning  the  pow- 
ers of  spiritual  perception,  and  the  medium  by  which  the  spirit  is 
united  with  the  form.  These  things  are  loo  important  to  escape  the 
attention  of  any  inquiring  mind  ; for  they  manifestly  involve  eviden- 
ces such  as  mankind  at  present  need  to  satisfy  them  of  the  powers 
of  the  soul,  and  of  other  physiological  truths. 

Martin  Luther  likewise  revealed  some  truths  that  are  very 
useful,  practical,  and  important.  Yet  error  preponderates  in  his  pro- 
ductions, and  these,  therefore,  are  not  worthy  of  so  high  a degree  of 
attention  and  esteem.  His  mind,  like  that  of  Calvin,  was  changed 
by  a very  sudden  conception  that  what  he  was  educated  to  believe 
was  not  all  true.  This  conception  at  once  inspired  new  faculties  of 
the  soul,  and  the  whole  resulted  in  the  development  of  many  truths, 
which,  though  mingled  with  errors,  deserve  the  title  of  revelations. 

§ 168.  The  French  have  also  produced  unfolded  minds,  whose 
revelations  demand  equal  attention  and  respect.  The  system  of 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


5S5 


Nature  and  philosophy  of  human  social  existence  and  harmony,  by 
Baron  D’Holbach,  is  a production  worthy  of  attention  and 
respect,  because  of  its  beauty  of  expression,  sublimity  of  sentiment, 
and  expansiveness  of  philosophy.  And  I hesitate  not  to  affirm,  that 
he  is  the  author  of  many  revelations  too  capable  of  a beneficial  appli- 
cation to  be  ever  lost  or  forgotten.  His  conceptions,  however,  are 
not  all  true,  nor  are  his  conclusions  all  perfectly  legitimate  as  deduced 
from  the  basis  assumed,  which  is  true.  Hence  his  production  con- 
tains a mixture  of  error  and  truth.  Yet  the  truth  preponderates;  and 
this  should,  therefore,  be  recognised,  appreciated,  and  duly  acknowl- 
edged. 

France  has  produced  many  very  learned  men  in  the  superficial 
attainments  of  life.  And  their  philosophies  are  not  of  the  purest  and 
highest  order,  merely  because  they  partake  so  much  of  the  external 
and  sensuous  in  their  processes  of  investigation.  Such  a mode  of  in- 
vestigation is  not  to  any  great  extent  calculated  to  unfold  those  moral 
truths  and  progressive  principles  that  will  harmonize  the  human 
family,  and  unfold  the  beauties  of  the  spirit  world. 

There  is  one,  however,  whose  teachings  I can  not  fail  to  recognise 
as  the  most  useful,  most  truthful,  and  most  exceedingly  sublime, 
even  as  seeking  a level  with,  and  being  confirmed  by,  the  teachings 
of  Jesus.  This  is  the  great  and  noble  Reformer,  Charles  Fourier 
— whose  capacity  of  soul  and  extent  of  revelation  have  not  as  yet 
been  perceived  to  any  great  extent  by  mankind.  His  mind  was 
superiorly  constituted  and  developed  ; for  a proof  of  which,  see  his 
unparalleled  disclosures  concerning  the  unspeakable  harmony  that 
pervades  the  Universe,  and  concerning  the  reciprocal  action  of  all 
bodies,  which,  to  express  it  in  his  own  language,  “ breathe  a melody 
of  harmonious  sounds,  like  an  instrument  well  tuned,  and  every  note 
touched  in  unity  by  wisdom.”  And,  says  he,  the  harmony  of  the 
Universe  is  developed  and  displayed  in  the  planetary  system  ; for 
each  planet  occupies  a position,  and  plays  a part  in  the  great  system 
of  united  action,  as  the  notes  of  a well-tuned  instrument.  And  as  a 
tune  can  not  be  played  unless  each  note  is  properly  adjusted,  and 
occupies  a position  in  reference  to  the  rest  suitable  to  produce  har- 
mony and  melody,  when  a tune  is  thus  played,  the  Universe  is  at  the 
same  time  represented. 

Then  he  proceeds  to  reveal  the  all-important  truth,  that  as  harmony 
exists  among  all  the  bodies  of  the  Universe,  so  can  it  prevail  among, 
and  join  inseparably,  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth.  And  he  proceeds 


5S6 


NATURE  S DIA'TNE  REVELATIONS. 


to  assure  the  world,  by  mathematical  demonstration,  that  every  note 
exists  in  this  animated  sphere  ; and  that  each  note  needs  only  to  be 
properly  placed,  in  order  that  the  whole  race  may,  like  a peifectly- 
tuned  instrument,  move  in  harmony,  melody,  happiness,  and  unity 
of  action. 

Behold,  mankind,  these  sublime  and  eternal  truths  crushed  and 
almost  entombed  in  the  dark  mass  of  prevailing  ignorance,  prejudice, 
and  fanaticism  ! Hear  ye  not,  when  a noble  and  expansive  mind, 
like  that  of  Charles  Fourier,  demonstrates  the  interior  truth,  even 
to  your  senses,  that  the  world  of  mankind  is  composed  of  the  requisite 
notes  to  play  a perfect  tune  of  peace  and  harmony?  And  observe 
how  gently,  seriously,  and  cautiously,  he  informs  the  world  that  these 
notes  can  only  be  properly  placed  by  following  the  light  of  wisdom 
and  knowledge  ! 

He  also  mathematically  analyzes  the  developments  of  each  planet 
in  our  solar  system,  and  proves  that  the  mental  advancement  of  the 
inhabitants  of  each  must  necessarily  constitute  such  a Brotherhood 
and  such  an  association  of  congenial  parts  as  to  render  the  whole  an 
harmonious  existence,  such  as  he  expended  his  powers  to  have  ac- 
complished on  earth.  And  I have  the  means  of  knowing  that  his 
general  conceptions  were  strictly  true  as  regards  the  inhabitants  of 
the  planets  belonging  to  our  solar  system.  And  it  becomes  me  in 
justice  to  sanction  and  confirm  that  which  he  proved  true  by  the  dis- 
similar process  of  mathematical  induction.  I therefore  affirm  that 
his  statements  concerning  the  harmony  and  unity  existing  among  the 
inhabitants  of  the  planets,  as  to  their  social  condition  and  mental  cul- 
ture, are  decidedly  and  unequivocally  true  — being  in  no  essential 
particular  discrepant  with  those  things  which  I have  revealed  concern- 
ing the  world,  Nature,  and  the  Universe. 

1 am  drawn  to  that  person  whose  whole  physical  and  spiritual 
powers  were  devoted  to  the  great  work  of  moral  reform.  Such  was 
Charles  Fourier  : and  those  things  which  he  revealed  are  capa- 
ble of  being  applied  in  improving  the  social  condition  of  man,  and 
their  truth  will  be  demonstrated  in  the  moral  consequences  of  the 
perfect  restitution  to  peace,  harmony,  and  pure  principles,  for  which 
he  labored. 

Concerning  this  very  noble  personage,  and  his  philosophy,  more 
will  hereafter  be  related,  especially  when  the  principles  of  his  micro- 
cosmogony make  their  appearance  prominently  in  the  third  part,  oi 
application,  of  this  work. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


-5S7 


§ 169.  I am  also  impressed  to  recognise  the  important  revelations 
made  by  and  through  Emanuel  Swedenborg,  the  Swedish  philos- 
opher and  psychologist. 

His  mind  possessed  many  superior  endowments,  and  he  presented 
to  the  world  many  pure  and  healthy  principles.  Some  of  his  reveal- 
ments,  however,  will  be  capable  of  an  application  only  when  the  race 
advances  to  a high  degree  of  social  and  mental  refinement.  His  mind 
was  interiorly  expanded,  which  fact  enabled  him  to  receive  and  ex- 
press many  interior  truths  connected  both  with  the  material  and  spir- 
itual world. 

I discover  more  practical  utility  in  his  scientific  and  philosophical 
reveahnents  than  in  any  other  of  his  productions.  No  work  should 
be  more  esteemed  and  generally  read  than  a book  written  by  him 
entitled  “ Tlte  Economy  of  the  Animal  Kingdom ,”  in  two  volumes. 
The  first  volume  presents  a close  and  severe  analytical  investigation 
of  the  three  functions  performed  by  all  animated  bodies  ; in  which 
he  develops  that  order  of  “ end,  cause,  and  effect,”  which  are  alike 
observable  in  all  portions  of  the  creations  of  the  Divine  Mind.  He 
plainly  reveals  that  the  end,  or  ultimate  design,  is  the  primary  cause 
of  all  movement.  A knowledge  of  the  end  prompts  and  procures 
the  means,  which  are  the  secondary  causes  : and  the  action  of  these 
produce  the  effects,  which  are  the  ends  predetermined  to  be  accom- 
plished. The  end  or  object  to  be  accomplished  is  in  every  instance 
the  creator  of  the  causes  and  effects  that  are  instituted  — or  of  the 
means  and  effects  combined  as  one  in  accomplishing  that  which  was 
the  original  cause  of  the  institution  of  both.  This  much  is  clearly 
revealed  in  the  first  part  of  his  work  ; and  is  true,  useful,  and  will  be 
acknowledged  and  applied  to  the  necessities  of  human  existence. 

The  second  part  is  devoted  to  a consideration  of  the  three  func- 
tions of  the  animal  kingdom  — their  interior,  mediatorial,  and  exterior 
qualities,  as  performing  their  respective  offices  and  manifesting  their 
peculiar  spiritual  forces,  with  a mutual  dependence  upon  each  other. 
Indeed,  his  revealments  concerning  the  beginnings  of  power  in  the 
human  system  are  beyond  all  general  comprehension  at  the  present 
day.  He  discourses  deeply  upon  the  cortical  composition  of  the 
brain,  describing  the  glands  or  “little  hearts”  (as  he  calls  them),  as 
constituting  the  cause  of  all  motion  or  spiritual  exercise  in  the  mate- 
rial form,  and  describes  how  they  expand  and  contract  like  the  move- 
ments of  the  chest  and  heart.  And  he  demonstrates  the  reciprocity 
of  the  systolic  and  diastolic  motions  of  the  cortical  glands  of  the  brain, 


5SS 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


and  that  they  are  the  beginnings  and  causes  of  all  corresponding 
movements  belonging  to  the  animal  economy. 

The  last  portion  of  this  valuable  work  is  devoted  to  some  very  ra- 
tional and  truthful  intimations  of  a psychological  character,  and  con- 
cerning the  powers  of  the  human  soul.  It  contains  a very  clear  and 
lucid  explanation  of  the  distinction  between  the  nature  and  powers 
of  the  soul  and  spirit  as  connected  with  the  human  form  ; and  it  like- 
wise exhibits  a very  gentle  emergement  from  the  material  into  the 
spiritual  sphere  of  thought  and  investigation. 

I am  led  also  to  notice  a still  higher  spiritual  development  of  the 
same  kind  which  is  presented  in  the  latter  portion  of  his  “Animal 
Kingdom  and  that  is  found  in  his  production  entitled  “ True 
Worship  and  Love  of  GodT  Nothing  can  evince  more  substantial 
purity  of  meditations  and  superior  conceptions  of  the  mind  than  this 
very  impressive  and  well-constructed  work.  It  flowed,  as  it  were, 
spontaneously  from  his  high  reverence  for  those  unspeaking  truths 
contained  in  the  animal  creations.  And  this  work  is  indeed  a re- 
vealment  much  to  be  read,  appreciated,  and  practised. 

After  the  period  which  was  occupied  in  writing  these  works,  his 
mind  became  exceedingly  exalted,  and  all  its  powers  of  conception 
were  absorbed  completely  in  the  phenomena  and  truths  of  the  spirit 
world.  The  truths  that  he  thus  reveals  concerning  these  things  are 
in  very  many  particulars  susceptible  of  benefiting  the  human  race  — 
though  this  can  not  be  said  of  every  general  feature  of  his  psycho 
logical  system.  He  revealed  those  spiritual  truths  that  will  be  veri 
fled  in  subsequent  lectures  : but  only  in  a general  and  corresponden 
tial  manner.  For  I now  discover  that  many  of  his  interior  disclosures 
are  not  in  the  least  particular  comprehended  even  by  those  who  at 
the  present  time  are  most  actively  engaged  in  their  advocacy.  And 
I am  impressed  to  say  that  if,  instead  of  conveying  the  idea  that 
he  unfolded  the  spiritual  and  interior  teachings  of  the  Bible,  he 
had  said  that  he  unfolded  the  spiritual  and  interior  teachings  of  Na- 
ture, the  world  would  sooner  have  approached  his  sphere  of  reason 
and  knowledge  : because  then  the  connexion  would  have  been  more 
distinctly  observed  between  the  material  and  spiritual  world.  But  I 
am  not  able  to  discover  any  such  interior  meaning  in  any  portion  of 
the  contents  of  the  Word  as  he  represents.  And  if  objection  is  made 
to  any  of  these  sayings,  as  based  upon  the  want  of  interior  perception 
which  may  here  seem  to  be  acknowledged,  I would  request  the 
reader  to  reconsider  the  explanation  I have  given  of  the  interior 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


5S9 


qualities  of  the  Bible.  If,  however,  the  objection  be  persisted  in, 

I refer  for  future  demonstration  to  the  Encyclopaedia  that  will 

# 

succeed  this  book. 

I am  much  drawn  to  the  pure,  gigantic,  and  powerfully-intellectual 
spirit  of  Swedenborg.  His  philosophical  revelations  are  of  vast 
importance,  because  of  their  truth  ; and  his  spiritual  and  psychologi- 
cal revelations  are  also  qualifiedly  true,  and  are  susceptible  of  being 
verified  in  the  spiritual  spheres,  and  will  be  in  the  disclosures  soon 
to  follow. 

I recognise,  however,  too  much  profuseness  of  expression  — too 
much  repetition  of  correspondences  and  established  principles  — in 
various  portions  of  his  works.  There  is  too  much  intensity  of  ardor, 
and  too  much  obscurity,  ambiguity,  and  spiritually-inflated  conception, 
in  his  psychological  works,  for  them  to  be  of  any  particular  utility  to 
the  social  world  at  the  present  time.  But  a proper  and  abundant  supply 
of  the  social  requirements  of  mankind  will  so  elevate  their  moral  and 
spiritual  perceptions,  that  they  will  readily  discover  the  signification 
of  his  spiritual  teachings,  which  at  present,  to  the  mass  of  mankind, 
seem  like  the  wildest  hallucinations  of  a misdirected  and  inflated 
mind.  Then  in  view  of  these  considerations,  it  is  impossible  to  con- 
ceive of  the  practical  utility  of  his  spiritual  revelations  to  the  disor- 
dered world  at  this  present  time.  The  fact  that  they  are  not  capable 
of  being  comprehended  is  at  least  presumptive  evidence  that  they  are 
not  such  truths  as  are  at  present  required  to  benefit  the  social  world. 

Therefore  I observe  this  gigantic  mind  as  in  its  conceptions  tran- 
scending completely  the  ordinary  powers,  even  of  all  interiorly  en- 
lightened men,  and  consequently  as  being  removed  from  the  natural 
into  spiritual  spheres.  Hence  some  of  his  mighty  revelations  will 
only  be  known  to  be  true  when  man  ascends  to  a higher  degree  of 
wisdom  and  knowledge.  And  as  these  things  are  so,  I notice  those 
things  only  in  his  revelations  that  are  adapted  to  the  wTants  of  the 
social  world,  in  order  that  mankind  may  be,  as  Fourier  has  expressed 
it,  organized  according  to  the  melodious,  harmonious  reciprocations 
of  a Brotherhood. 


§ 170.  Many  revelations  have  been  made  in  previous  ages,  which 
I can  not  now  stop  to  notice.  And  all  these  are  in  a greater  or  less 
degree  important  and  profitable  as  contributing  to  the  general  stock 
of  wisdom  that  mankind  require. 

It  is  proper,  however,  to  briefly  reflect  upon  the  revelations  of 


590 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


Plato  concerning  the  spiritual  identity  of  man,  and  a future  life  . 
It  can  not  be  doubted,  when  bis  whole  philosophy  is  taken  into  con- 
sideration, that  he  revealed  some  very  important  laws  in  Nature,  and 
many  psychological  truths.  These,  however,  were  much  obscured 
by  the  mingling  of  external  and  internal  evidences  : the  first  being 
mostly  the  developments  of  circumstances,  and  the  latter  the  unva- 
rying movements  presented  in  all  parts  of  Nature  that  he  investigated. 
His  mind  was  much  clouded  and  his  perceptions  much  darkened  by 
a vast  number  of  hereditary  impressions.  Yet  his  psychological  re- 
vealments  make  their  appearance  even  through  the  many  superficial 
evidences  which  he  accumulates  in  their  favor. 

Also  those  things  unfolded  by  the  interior  reflections  of  Xenophon 
possess  a high  degree  of  beauty,  truth,  and  profitableness.  No  mind 
ever  was  more  deeply  impressed  with  the  truths  of  immortality  than 
his,  because  his  convictions  proceeded  from  the  gushing  aspirations 
of  the  living  principle  within.  And  his  philosophy  contains  more 
substantial  reasons  for  this  doctrine  than  are  to  be  found  in  any  por- 
tion of  the  Old  or  New  Testament.  His  writings  are  therefore  use- 
ful and  important  to  the  world,  because  of  their  many  truthful  inti- 
mations, these  suggesting  higher  truths. 

In  the  revealments  of  Socrates  I do  not  discover  so  much  inte- 
rior perception  of  principles,  but  more  comprehensiveness  in  the 
observance  of  superficial  evidences  ; and  the  ideas  deduced  from 
these  are  in  many  instances  true,  though  illegitimate. 

Cicero  was  also  a defender  of  those  unvarying  principles  that 
govern  the  Universe,  a consciousness  of  the  truth  of  which  compelled 
him  to  discard  all  superficial  theories  that  then  pervaded  the  general 
mind,  in  the  form  of  a mythological  theology.  And  he,  like  the  for- 
mer writers,  should  be  very  deeply  esteemed  and  appreciated  for 
his  pure  and  important  revealments,  of  which  confirmation  may  be 
derived  from  the  interior  perceptions  of  every  enlightened  judgment. 

I discover  a harmony  in  the  revelations  of  each  age,  from  the  first 
decided  conception  and  expression  of  truth,  to  the  unfoldings  of  the 
present  generation.  I discover,  however,  that  each  revelator  has 
presented  truth  in  proportion  to  the  favorable  situations  in  which  his 
mind  was  placed,  and  the  favorable  developments  to  which  it  at- 
tained. Yet  that  truth  which  is  discoverable  among  the  writings  of 
each,  is  confirmed  with  great  simplicity  in  the  moral  and  social 
teachings  of  Jesus,  and  in  the  corresponding  teachings  of  Charles 
Fourier,  who  systematized  those  pure  principles  in  order  that  they 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


591 


might  be  reduced  to  practice,  and  thus  produce  a moral  renovation 
of  the  race. 

Then,  again,  I discover  the  more  superficial  modifications  of  these 
principles  in  the  writings  of  Swedenborg,  who  proceeds  to  the  in- 
terior, not  so  much  of  principles,  as  of  their  detailed  parts.  Thus  in 
his  writings  are  set  forth  the  innumerable  ramifications,  both  of  things 
and  principles  belonging  to  the  natural  world,  and  of  the  correspond- 
ing literal  possessions  of  the  spirit-world.  And  as  I have  stated,  I 
do  not  discover  sufficient  distinctness  or  naturalness  in  the  writings 
of  this  philosopher  to  render  them  susceptible  of  a practical  applica- 
tion to  the  social  requirements  of  the  human  race.  It  is  no  more 
than  just  in  all  such  instances  to  enforce  the  question,  “ Of  what  pos- 
sible use  can  any  revelation  he,  that  can  neither  be  understood  nor 
applied  ?”  A revelation  developing  no  practical  principles  existing 
in  the  natural  world  as  adapted  to  social  life,  can  not  be  of  any  pos- 
sible utility  to  the  social  or  moral  world. 

From  these  considerations,  the  object  of  glancing  at  the  writings 
of  e'ach  philosopher  becomes  apparent.  It  is  to  point  out  the  good 
and  practical  parts  of  each,  that  they  may  be  preserved  for  future  ap- 
plication ; and  if  these  are  duly  distinguished  and  preserved,  all  the 
unreal  and  excrescent  parts  of  each  revelation  and  philosophy  will 
at  once  be  disregarded,  because  of  their  non-importance. 

Since  the  existence  of  those  men,  many  new  and  dissimilar  theo- 
ries, hypotheses,  and  revelations,  have  made  their  appearance,  both 
in  the  scientific  and  theological  world.  These  have  been  of  such  a 
nature  as  to  disunite  the  modes  of  natural  and  social  life  from  the 
moral  principles  of  man.  This  fact,  again,  demonstrates  the  non- 
utility of  such  revelations,  inasmuch  as  they  are  destructive  to  the 
social  harmony  of  mankind,  and  to  that  pure  morality  which  is  in- 
separably connected  therewith. 

Again  : Any  theory  or  hypothesis  having  a tendency  to  disunite 
the  material  from  the  spiritual,  or  the  social  from  the  moral,  or  to  dis- 
unite in  any  way  the  human  race,  is  entirely  unprofitable,  and  should 
be  for  ever  discarded.  F or  it  is  made  plain  from  past  investigations,  that 
a perfect  morality  can  not  be  developed,  unless  the  rudimental  and 
social  condition  of  the  race  is  first  made  suitable  for  its  spontaneous  de- 
velopment. It  is,  therefore,  absolutely  useless  to  promulgate  theologi- 
cal systems  of  morality,  when  the  causes  relating  to  such  are  in  direct 
opposition  to  the  required  result.  Then,  in  order  to  benefit  the 
world,  instead  of  being  engaged  in  psychological  investigations,  men 


592 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


should  turn  their  attention  immediately  to  the  establishing  of  those 
superior  conditions  in  the  social  world,  the  effects  of  which  will 
greatly  transcend  their  present  anticipations.  It  is  clear  to  every  mind, 
that  the  latter  must  be  accomplished  before  the  moral  results  so  much 
admired  can,  as  a consequence,  be  permanently  obtained.  In  other 
words,  the  social  and  natural  must  be  superiorly  situated  and  orga- 
nized, before  the  moral  and  spiritual  elements  of  man  can  possibly  be 
developed  to  a proper  degree.  The  many  revelations  that  are  now 
existing  in  the  scientific  and  theological  departments,  are  of  minor 
importance  compared  to  the  great  and  essential  principles  which 
must  be  discovered  and  acknowledged  before  that  social  and  moral 
condition  of  the  race  can  be  attained  for  which  all  should  strive. 

It  is  proper  to  understand  that  the  influx  of  principles  into  the 
mind  of  a person  or  persons,  is  a result  of  the  peculiar  constitution 
and  development  of  such  minds  ; and  not  that  revelations  of  any 
character  proceed  directly  from  a Divine  Source.  Therefore,  he 
whose  mind  is  unfolded,  or  whose  spiritual  perceptions  are  extended 
to  a higher  sphere  of  knowledge,  comprehends  more  than  ordinary 
minds,  because  he  perceives  that  which  exists  below  his  exalted 
sphere  of  investigation.  Such  see,  also,  that  which  would  be  of  use 
and  importance  to  the  world,  and  reveal  it  in  order  that  it  may  be 
applied.  Thus  every  mind  conceives  and  expresses  truth  in  propor- 
tion to  its  degree  of  development,  or  of  spiritual  elevation.  Then 
such  revelations  as  the  Apocalypse  and  those  contained  in  many  other 
portions  of  the  New  Testament,  together  with  many  portions  of  Swe- 
denborg’s writings,  can  not,  though  true,  be  of  any  possible  use  to 
mankind  in  their  natural  state.  Whether  they  are  or  are  not  true, 
therefore,  they  are  unimportant.  Hence  it  is  proper  for  every  theo- 
logian and  commentator,  before  devoting  much  lime  to  such,  to  in- 
quire their  use,  even  admitting  them  to  be  of  the  purest  origin  and 
the  highest  truth. 

There  are  many  worthy  persons  who  have  distinguished  them- 
selves in  various  departments  of  thought,  whom  I am  obliged  to 
leave  unnoticed,  for  the  reason  that  their  cogitations  are  subordinate 
to  the  object  of  these  present  considerations.  I am  impressed  to 
say,  however,  that  those  who  have  been  active  in  unfolding  the  teach- 
ings of  others  will  be  specifically  noticed  hereafter. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


593 


§ 171.  These  revealments  having  proceeded  thus  far,  a different 
though  connected  subject  may  now  be  introduced.  I have  descended 
into  the  interior  history  of  mankind,  discovered  the  origin  of  social 
disunity,  false  impressions,  unreal  theology  and  consequent  mytholo- 
gy, and  have  specifically  considered  the  successive  modifications  of 
each,  until  the  whole  presents  itself  to  the  generations  of  the  present 
century.  I have  spoken  of  man,  physically  and  mentally,  only  as  it 
was  necessary  in  order  to  elucidate  the  many  causes  of  conditions 
existing  in  the  world.  I have  not  spoken  particularly  of  the  physi- 
cal production  and  constitution  of  man,  nor  of  those  peculiar  ele- 
ments, qualities,  and  essential  principles,  that  elevate  him  above  the 
animal  creation,  and  that  constitute  and  characterize  that  anima- 
ted principle  known  as  the  Soul,  Spirit,  or  Mind . I find  it  necessary 
to  generalize  these,  in  order  to  establish  the  connexion  between  Na- 
ture, with  its  various  lower  forms,  and  Man,  and  between  man  and 
the  higher  spheres.  An  inseparable  unity  and  reciprocation  of  action 
must  be  discovered  and  established  between  these,  and  then  the  whole 
social  world  may  hereafter  become  a true  representative  of  the  grand 
and  harmonious  movements  of  Nature  and  the  Universe. 

I have  ascended,  then,  to  the  important  question,  What  is  Man 
materially?  And  the  answer  is,  He  is  the  wisdom,  head,  and 
King  of  all  animated  forms. — He  is  a perfection  of  matter.* 

I proceed  to  prove  this  proposition  by  descending  to  the  interior 
forms  and  substances  that  constitute  the  rudiments  of  all  organic  be- 
ings, and  tracing  them  connectedly  until  they  ascend  and  become 
perfected  in  the  human  organization. f 

The  first  forms  or  particles  that  made  their  appearance  after  the 
condensation  of  the  matter  composing  the  earth,  were  those  constitu- 
ting the  mineral  kingdom.  This  is  composed  of  particles  of  matter 

* The  word  “ perfection ” is  here  used  in  the  absolute  sense,  though  relatively, 
f Note  by  the  author.  For  a demonstration  of  the  things  I now  relate,  refer- 
ence is  made  to  the  truths  established  in  the  department  of  geology,  upon  which  sub- 
ject I have  more  minutely  treated.  And  herein  is  developed  the  use  of  the  truths 
revealed  in  the  geological  portions  of  this  work ; for  they  are  now  applied  as  a means 
by  which  my  present  revealments  may  be  elucidated  and  demonstrated  as  true.  I 
will  also  institute  illustrations  and  comparisons  of  a very  familiar  nature,  in  order 
that  the  main  principles  to  be  presented  may  be  easily  conceived  and  comprehended. 
It  will  be  seen,  also,  that  the  following  sustains  a close  relation  to  the  scientific  parts 
of  this  work;  and  they  will  mutually  explain  and  confirm  each  other.  I would, 
therefore,  have  the  reader’s  memory  duly  impressed  with  the  previous  philosophical 
investigations,  so  that  he  may  perceive  the  connexion,  and  readily  apprehend  the 
things  now  to  follow. 


3S 


594 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


in  their  rudimcntal  forms.  These  are  angular,  amorpho-angular,  and 
multi-angular.  These  forms,  when  associated,  compose  the  various 
mineral  bodies  in  the  earth.  The  first  of  these  particles  are  the  most 
perfectly  angular ; the  ascending  forms  are  the  amorpho-angular,  and 
the  perfect  forms  among  these  are  the  multi-angular.  The  first  is  the 
parent  and  measure  of  the  second,  and  this  again  is  the  beginning  of 
the  third,  which  completes  a trinity  and  also  pervades  the  lower 
forms.  Thus  the  second  and  third  forms  are  each  higher  degrees 
of  development  from  the  first.  The  highest  proceed  from  the  lowest, 
and,  when  developed,  pervade  and  comprehend  the  whole  body, 
which  thus  forms  a mineral  compound. 

Then,  again,  Scries  are  established  by  the  successive  unfoldings  of 
forms.  These  series  are  strata  of  associated  particles,  such  as  are 
exemplified  in  the  strata  of  the  earth,  and  of  various  bodies  which  pos- 
sess successive  coatings,  all  of  which  are  necessary  to  form  one  body, 
substance,  or  compound.  These  series  are  three ; and  these  char- 
acterize the  various  compounds  in  the  mineral  kingdom. 

Then,  again,  Series  develop  Degrees.  These  are  the  successive 
states  of  purity  of  particles,  and  of  their  approach  to  perfection,  both 
in  form,  series,  and  association.  The  highest  degree  in  the  mineral 
kingdom  approaches,  and  inseparably  flows  into,  the  vegetable  king- 
dom. For  the  highest  degree  of  mineral  substance  exemplifies  both 
the  lower  particles  of  its  own  nature,  and  the  first  particles  of  the 
•successive  compound,  which  is  the  vegetable  creation.  The  highest 
form , also,  in  the  mineral,  which  is  the  multi-angular,  flows  directly 
into,  and  becomes  the  origin,  parent,  and  measure  of  the  first  forms 
in,  the  vegetable  kingdom.  So  also  do  the  highest  Series  flow  into 
the  vegetable  formation,  through  the  degrees  of  association  deter- 
mined by  the  ascending  forms,  the  sequence  of  series,  and  the 
unfolding  of  the  same. 

So  the  forms  in  the  mineral  world  are  of  three-  degrees  of  devel- 
opment. Thus  they  form  one  compound  — which  develops  series, 
associations,  and  degrees,  all  of  which  are  necessary  to  establish  the 
various  mineral  bodies,  to  designate  their  degree  of  refinement,  and 
to  determine  with  what  order  of  particles  or  elements  they  are  capa- 
ble of  being  assimilated.  The  forms,  series,  and  degrees  in  the 
mineral  world,  are  thus  developed  in  the  most  perfect  harmony.  The 
highest  of  each  in  all  cases  pervade  the  lower ; and  at  the  same  time 
they  become  the  parent  and  measure  of  the  rudimental  productions 
iu  the  vegetable  world. 


'nature’s  divine  revelations. 


595 


In  the  vegetable  compounds  there  exist  circular  forms  — which 
are  the  unfolded  forms  of  the  perfected  angular.  Then  the  rudi- 
mental  circular  develops  diameters,  and  ascending  circulars  which 
very  slightly  approach  the  spiral.  Thus  three  different  forms  are 
also  discoverable  in  the  vegetable  world  : that  is,  the  perfected  angu- 
lar (or  multi-angular) ; the  first  circular,  which  develops  diameters  ; 
and  both  of  these  ascend  toward,  and  very  slightly  represent,  the 
spiral  forms,  which  flow  directly  into  the  animal  world.  In  the 
vegetable  creation  also  are  the  three  Series,  or  the  three  degrees  of 
perfection  in  forms.  These  Series  also  represent  the  Degrees  that 
are  unfolded  by  the  ascending  series  of  forms  that  flow  from  the 
parent  or  measure  consisting  of  the  lower  forms.  Meanwhile,  they 
make  a perfect  compound,  the  whole  of  which  forms  the  Vegetable 
Creation. 

The  highest  form,  which  is  the  ascending  circular,  becomes  the 
connecting  form  between  the  vegetable  and  animal ; and  in  the  latter 
it  becomes  the  perfect  spiral.  Also  the  highest  Degrees  of  vegetable 
compounds  become  the  first  degrees  of  animal  organization.  And 
each  series  and  association  of  forms,  in  like  manner  progressively 
ascends  to  the  first  series  and  degrees  of  the  animal  forms  ; and  all 
pass  into,  and  become  the  germ,  parent,  measure,  and  substance  of, 
the  whole  Animal  World.  The  first  forms  discovered  in  the  animal 
are  the  spiral  or  progressive  particles  which  develop  the  reciprocal 
motions  of  the  whole  frame.  The  second  forms  are  the  unfolded 
spiral,  which  are  the  spiritual  forms  or  active  particles  that  become 
the  receptacles  of  all  progressive  movement.  The  highest  forms  in 
the  animal  creation  are  the  perfected  spiritual  — which  join  the  ani- 
mal compound  to  the  material  organization  of  Man. 

Here,  then,  the  spiritual  forms  introduce  the  particles  to  compose 
the  organization  of  Man  — which,  when  perfected,  develops  the 
highest  or  celestial  forms  in  matter.  Thus  the  perfect  spiritual  be- 
come the  first  celestial  forms',  the  perfection  of  which  establishes  the 
human  organization.  What  I mean  by  celestial  forms  are  those  par- 
ticles of  matter  that  contain  in  themselves  perfected  every  species  of 
form  in  the  subordinate  kingdoms,  and  meanwhile  become  the  recep- 
tacles of  all  degrees  of  spiritual  life,  whicn  are  not  only  contained  in, 
but  are  developed  by  them,  in  such  a perfect  and  corresponding 
manner  that  all  the  lower  forms  in  the  animal,  vegetable,  and  min- 
eral worlds,  are  by  them  governed,  mirrored,  and  vividly  repre- 
sented. 


596 


nature's  divine  revelations. 


Then,  again,  the  highest  series  or  strata  of  forms  in  the  animal 
world,  flow  directly  into  the  rudimental  forms  of  mankind.  These 
establish  the  various  series,  strata,  or  associations,  of  the  human  fam- 
ily. Also  the  highest  degree  in  the  animal,  by  which  I mean  the 
most  perfect  structure,  not  only  typifies,  but  becomes  the  parent, 
measure,  and  germ,  of  the  Human  World. 

§ 172.  Thus  in  Man  are  these  lower  forms  fully  developed  and 
perfected  : for  in  him  are  the  spiritual,  the  perfect  spiritual,  and  the 
celestial  forms  of  the  particles  of  matter.  The  celestial  are  the  high- 
est and  most  minute  particles  in  the  human  organization  — such  as 
exist  in  the  lower  kingdoms  only  in  an  imperfect  and  undeveloped 
state. 

Man  also  possesses  the  three  degrees  of  the  ascended  forms. 
These  degrees  establish  and  preserve  the  individuality  of  every  Form 
in  the  human  world  ; while  at  the  same  time  every  Form  develops 
in  perfect  harmony,  series,  degrees,  associations,  and  representations, 
which  are  in  ever}r  particular  in  the  most  perfect  unity,  harmony,  and 
mutual  dependence  upon  each  other. 

It  will  be  seen  by  this  that  the  angular  particles  of  matter  develop 
the  circular — which  in  their  turn  unfold  rectilinear  planes,  diame- 
ters, axes,  and  poles  — all  of  which  are  imperfectly  discovered  in 
the  Vegetable  World. 

Then,  again,  the  progressive  circular  forms  unfold  and  become 
the  spiral,  which  is  a more  important  stage  in  the  process  of  progres- 
sive development.  The  spiral  contains  the  circular  and  all  its  prop- 
erties ; and  all  these  are  discoverable  in  the  Animal  World.  Then, 
again,  the  successive  spiral  forms  unfold  the  spiritual  — which  latter, 
in  like  manner,  unfold  the  celestial  or  perfect  forms  of  rudimental 
matter.  Thus  the  angular  develops  the  circular,  this  the  spiral, 
this  the  spiritual,  and  this  the  celestial — all  of  which  are  contained 
in  the  perfect  Forms  of  the  Human  World. 

From  this  it  is  seen  that  the  angular  is  the  parent  of  all  higher 
forms,  and  contains  them  all  undeveloped  : while  the  highest  when 
developed  pervades  all  the  lower  forms,  and  unites  them  as  one  per- 
fect Whole.  Therefore  the  celestial  forms  of  matter  which  compose 
the  human  organization  are  the  j flower  of  the  germinal  form,  or  seed, 
which  is  the  angular.  For  the  seed  of  all  material  compounds  is 
involved  in  the  lowest  stage  of  matter,  which  germinates  and  pro- 
duces the  Mineral  World.  This,  again,  adds  to  the  body  of  the 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


597 


great  Tree  of  Creation,  whose  next  stage  of  development  is  in  the 
form  of  the  Vegetable  World.  The  next  expansion  of  the  body  of 
this  great  Tree  develops  the  Animal  World.  It  now  puts  forth 
branches,  which  bud,  and  the  flower  is  the  Human  World.  Thus  it 
is  that  the  material  Tree  of  Causation  has  successively  yielded  new 
forms,  which  correspond  in  every  general  feature  to  germ,  body, 
branches,  buds,  and  blossoms. 

It  is  made  evident  from  these  considerations,  that  matter  is  the 
same  in  every  department  of  the  Universe  — but  that  it  forms  dis- 
similar organizations  only  as  it,  in  various  degrees  of  development, 
becomes  differently  combined.  I find,  then,  that  all  things  are  con- 
stituted of  the  same  materials,  but  that  these  are  combined  in  differ- 
ent forms  and  proportions.  Thus  are  developed  successively,  uni- 
formly, and  progressively,Forms,  Series,  and  Degrees  ; and  these  are 
all  necessary  in  order  that  each  compound  and  each  animated  or- 
ganization may  perform  the  office  of  an  organ  to  transfer  that  which 
is  below  it  to  a higher  degree  of  material  association.  It  is  by  this 
diversity  of  forms  that  the  various  Degrees  of  creation  are  rendered 
perfect,  reciprocal,  and  harmonious. 

The  dissimilar  combinations  of  matter,  then,  are  the  designed 
means  by  which  all  the  various  forms  may,  in  series  and  degrees,  be 
progressively  developed.  And  the  moment  such  development  is 
completed,  a combined  Form  of  the  same,  capable  of  preserving  its 
identity,  is  at  once  established,  as  is  also  its  absolute  dependence 
upon  the  lower  forms  for  its  existence. 

Thus  Man  is  the  highest  and  most  perfect  combination  of  organ- 
ized matter.  He  therefore  exercises  an  unlimited  proprietorship 
over  all  below  his  exalted  position,  and  is  the  governor,  director,  and 
lord  of  all  subordinate  creations.  He  in  this  sense  pervades  all  be- 
low him.  At  the  same  time  he  is  dependent  upon  the  perfect  fulfil- 
ment of  every  office  which  is  sustained  by  the  subordinate  kingdoms  ; 
and  without  them  and  their  perpetual  contributions,  he  could  not 
possibly  exist.  Man,  then,  is  not  only  the  highest  form,  but  compre- 
hends likewise  the  lowest ; and  without  the  lowest,  the  highest  could 
not  be.  He  therefore  should  practically  acknowledge  his  dependence 
accordingly  ; and  in  properly  doing  this,  he  would  so  perfect  his 
wisdom  as  that  he  might  be  truly  the  director,  governor,  and  lord  of 
all  things. 

The  mineral,  vegetable,  and  animal  compounds,  all  enter  into 
the  composition  of  the  human  form  — though  these  are  essentially 


59S 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


modified  in  the  process,  according  to  the  law  of  progression.  And 
man  is  thus  a representative  of  all  subordinate  forms  ; for  in  him 
their  properties  and  essential  principles  exist,  but  are  developed  and 
modified  in  a manner  dissimilar  to  their  original  state.  He  is,  there- 
fore a perfect  microcosm  — and  is  the  perfection  of  all  material  com- 
pounds. 

The  mineral  formation  is  to  the  great  Form  or  structure  of  Nature, 
what  the  bone  is  to  the  human  organization  — a basis  or  frame  upon 
which  the  superstructure  may  rest  and  be  perfected.  The  forms  in 
the  vegetable  kingdom  are  to  Nature,  what  the  absorbing  vessels  are  to 
the  human  body  ; that  is,  receptacles  for  the  influx,  and  organs  for 
the  reflux,  of  circulating  and  ascending  particles.  The  forms  in  the 
animal  kingdom  are  to  Nature,  what  the  visceral  system  is  to  the 
human  body  ; that  is,  organs  by  and  through  which  rudimental  parti- 
cles may  be  secreted,  decomposed,  recombined,  and  sublimated  : — 
and  they  are  thus  necessary  parts  to  perform  the  various  functions  of 
one  harmonious  Structure.  Man  is  to  Nature,  what  the  head  is  to 
man  ; that  is,  a throne  from  which  proceeds  wisdom,  power,  direc- 
tion, government,  and  distributive  justice,  to  all  the  lower,  useful,  and 
subordinate  departments  of  the  same  perfect  Whole. 


§ 173.  It  is  seen  from  these  considerations,  that  a trinity  consist- 
ing of  three  degrees  of  forms,  is  existing  in  one  substance,  the  same 
being  necessary  to  constitute  such  substance  a perfect  creation.  Let 
it  be  duly  impressed,  that  every  form  in  the  mineral,  vegetable,  and 
animal  world,  is  determined  and  established  by  the  peculiar  forms  of 
the  atoms  or  particles  of  matter  which  enter  into  and  compose  such. 
It  is  to  this  specificness  of  atomic  forms  that  the  mineral,  vegetable, 
animal,  and  human  worlds,  owe  their  respective  existences.  For  if 
particles  of  matter  did  not  become  in  form  essentially  modified,  by 
uniform  ascension  through  successive  series  and  degrees  of  develop- 
ment, these  various  worlds  of  creation  could  not  possibly  be  unfolded. 
Let  this,  then,  be  the  standard  formula  exhibiting  the  relative  degrees 
of  perfection  in  matter,  in  order  that  the  mind  may  conceive  of  the 
relation  that  exists  between  the  lowest  and  the  highest  developments 
of  Nature.  And  by  knowing  this  much,  the  first  principles  involved 
in  the  material  creation  of  Man,  are  clearly  impressed  upon  the  un- 
derstanding ; and  from  this  the  mind  will  be  led  to  higher  and  corre- 
sponding degrees  of  the  same  species  of  knowledge. 

A trinity  exists  in  every  substance,  and  in  every  possible  manner, 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


599 


both  as  to  forms,  series,  and  degrees,  and  their  relations  to  subse- 
quent creations.  First,  in  the  mineral  world  there  exist  interior,  me- 
diatorial, and  exterior  forms  : that  is,  the  lower,  transition,  and  per- 
fected bodies  or  particles  of  matter.  The  lowest  contains  the 
highest ; and  until  the  highest  is  developed,  a mineral  compound  is 
not  formed.  But  when  the  highest  is  perfectly  unfolded,  it  forms 
the  seal  and  crown,  and  is  the  governing  property  which  forms  of  the 
whole  a perfect  composition. 

Then  there  are  Series,  and  these  are  three  in  number.  The  first 
series  comprehends  the  lower  angular  forms,  until  they  progressively 
change  and  flow  into  the  transition  or  mediatorial  forms.  Then  the 
second  series  in  like  manner  comprehends  these  intermediate  forms, 
until  they  flow  into  the  highest  or  multi-angulars.  The  third  series 
comprehends  these  higher  forms,  and  also  pervades  and  acts  on  the 
lower  forms,  and  unites  the  whole  as  one  compound.  Then  in  like 
manner  do  the  lower  forms  and  lower  series  form  one  degree,  or  de- 
cided part  — which  also  explains  the  second  degree,  which  compre- 
hends the  second  form  and  second  series.  And  the  third  degree, 
which  is  the  highest  of  the  mineral  kingdom,  includes  the  third  form 
and  third  series.  The  degrees  in  every  department  of  Nature  deter- 
mine the  states  of  perfection  which  are  exemplified  in  exterior  and 
manifest  forms.  By  presenting  the  descriptions  in  this  form,  the 
mind  is  enabled  to  perceive  the  rationale  of  the  whole  subject.  As 
it  is  in  the  Mineral  World,  so  it  is  in  every  possible  particular  with 
the  Vegetable  and  Animal  Worlds. 

To  render  the  subject  still  more  familiar,  I will  explain  it  differ- 
ently. The  interior  or  first  form  is  the  soul  or  moving  principle  of 
the  compound,  containing  in  itself  all  the  forms  and  properties  dis- 
played in  the  higher  degrees  of  the  same  substance.  The  mediato- 
rial form  is  a connecting  link  between  the  soul  and  the  exterior  form, 
which  is  the  perfected  body.  Thus  the  exterior  is  the  perfectly  man- 
ifest form,  displaying  minutely  the  qualities  that  were  contained  un- 
developed in  the  first  or  rudimcntal  forms,  which  now  are  known  to 
be  the  creator  of  the  external.  Thus  a perfect  Whole  is  formed, 
composed  of  Soul  and  Body. 

When  ascending  to  the  vegetable  world,  we  find  the  same  forms, 
series,  and  degrees,  unfolded  and  manifested  in  a most  perfectly- 
corresponding  manner.  And  again,  were  it  not  for  a change  in  the 
forms  of  the  particles  of  matter,  the  vegetable  creation  could  nor  be, 


600 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


because  it  would  not  have  bad  a uniformly-actuating  creator,  such  as 
is  the  mineral  world  with  its  present  laws. 

In  ascending  to  the  animal  kingdom,  we  find  new  external  forms 
presenting  similar  varieties  to  those  in  the  mineral  kingdom.  And 
in  the  animal  are  not  only  manifested  new  forms,  but  new  scries  and 
degrees.  Again  : the  animal  world  could  not  have  existed  had  not 
the  vegetable  world  ascended  to  such  a degree  of  perfection  as  to 
become  the  creator  and  measure  of  a higher  development. 

Thus  it  is  that  the  mineral  kingdom  when  perfected  becomes  the 
soul,  measure,  and  creator,  of  the  vegetable  ; and  this  latter,  when 
perfected,  becomes  the  parent,  soul,  and  creator,  of  the  animal.  So 
likewise  does  the  animal  become  the  soul,  measure,  and  creator,  of 
the  human  organization. 

It  is  now  made  clear  that  the  form,  size,  and  symmetry,  of  the 
specific  creations  of  each  kingdom,  including  Man,  are  determined 
only  by  the  perfection  of  prior  creations  on  which  they  are  depen- 
dent. And  it  is  from  the  lower,  inferior,  gross,  and  unseemly  forms, 
that  the  human  organization  has  been  established,  with  all  its  beauty, 
symmetry,  and  perfection  of  constitution.  I desire  to  call  special 
attention  to  this  fact,  as  it  shows  that  the  mind  can  only  know  of 
perfection  by  viewing  forms,  series  of  forms,  and  degrees  of  these, 
comparatively  — these  pervading  alike  the  lower  and  higher  depart- 
ments of  animated  Nature. 

Thus  we  have  an  irresistible  demonstration  that  the  lowest  form  is 
the  interior  or  soul,  parent,  and  measure*  of  all  higher  forms,  even  to 
the  perfect  and  symmetrical  organization  of  Man  ; and  that  lie  is  the 
grand  effect  or  ultimate  design  of  Nature.  This  is  manifest  from  the 
fact  that  all  forms  flow  progressively  into,  and  are  comprehended  by, 
the  human  organization.  This  makes  man  the  flower  of  creation, 
possessing  all  the  essences,  properties,  and  characteristics,  of  the 
lower  creations,  while  these  at  the  same  time  contribute  to  his  neces- 
sities, and  he  insensibly  performs  a similar  office  toward  them. 

Again  : the  angular  forms  correspond  to  the  mineral  ; the  circular 
forms  correspond  to  the  vegetable;  the  spiral  forms  correspond  to 
and  represent  the  animal  world  ; and  the  spiritual  and  celestial  forms 
typify  and  correspond  to  the  human  world  — while  it  in  return,  typi- 
fies, represents,  and  corresponds  to,  every  subordinate  form  in  this 
whole  rudimental  sphere  of  successive  developments. 

Again  : the  mineral  world  is  the  interior,  the  vegetable  world  is 
the  mediatorial,  and  the  animal  world  is  the  perfect  Body,  of  the 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


601 


whole  system  of  creation.  That  is,  the  mineral  is  the  soul  or  crcatoi 
from  which  flows  spontaneously  the  transition  link,  which  is  the  vege- 
table ; and  this  flows  onward  to  the  completion  of  the  'perfect  Body, 
which  is  the  whole  animal  kingdom. 

Thus  it  is  made  manifest  that  the  three  degrees  of  creation  (which 
are  the  Mineral,  Vegetable,  and  Animal)  flow  into,  and  as  it  were 
spontaneously  unfold,  the  whole  human  creation  ; and  that  the  three 
are  necessary  in  order  to  unfold  a complete  and  symmetrica]  organi- 
zation. And  this  is  the  great  Head,  Flower,  and  lord  of  creation, 
and  is  called  Man. 


§ 174.  A Trinity  is  now  unfolded  in  every  department  of  Nature  : 
for  it  is  discovered  in  the  form  of  particles,  in  the  series  or  associa- 
tions of  these,  and  in  the  degree  of  each  form  and  series  ; and  all  may 
be  discovered  in  any  established,  organized  substance.  This  truth 
is  also  exemplified  in  the  three  great  worlds  of  formation,  viz.,  the 
mineral,  vegetable,  and  animal  kingdoms.  For  these,  when  generally 
comprehended,  form  a perfect  Trinity  ; and  all  are  engaged  in  the 
development  of  Man. 

It  is,  however,  proper  to  introduce  a few  more  illustrations.  The 
first  of  these  is  to  be  found  in  the  Key,  and  is  established  in  the  sub- 
sequent scientific  considerations  : and  that  is,  “ The  interior  is  the 
real  reality,  and  the  productive  cause  of  all  external  effects.”  And 
here  this  proposition  is  demonstrated  even  beyond  the  possibility  of 
a doubt  or  refutation.  For  now  we  discover  that  the  interior  and 
real  cause  of  the  mineral,  vegetable,  and  animal  creations,  is  found 
only  in  the  rudimental  forms  or  first  particles  in  each  specific  degree 
of  formation  and  development.  Hence  it  is  impossible  to  discover 
the  causes  of  visible  effects  in  as  visible  a manner  as  the  effects  them- 
selves are  manifested.  But  in  order  to  understand  the  nature  and 
cause  of  effects,  the  substance  constituting  the  effect  must  be  ana- 
lyzed, and  its  actuating  principle  discovered.  In  no  other  way  can 
there  be  any  absolute  knowledge  obtained  concerning  the  nature  and 
cause  of  any  of  the  effects  made  manifest  to  the  natural  senses  in  the 
outer  world. 

The  bones  in  the  human  system  correspond  in  their  functions  to 
the  mineral  structure.  The  secreting  and  absorbing  vessels  of  the 
human  body  correspond  to,  and  perform  a similar  office  with,  the 
vegetable  structure.  The  viscera  or  internal  organs  of  the  human 
body  perform  an  office  analogous  to  that  of  the  animal  structure  in 


G02 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


(lie  outer  world,  in  relation  to  the  great  System  of  divine  organiza- 
tions. The  head,  or  seat  of  government  belonging  to  the  human 
system,  corresponds  in  the  office  it  performs,  to  the  human  creation 
in  its  connexion  with  the  whole  Body  of  animated  Nature.  In  other 
words,  the  mineral,  vegetable,  and  animal  degrees  of  creation,  com- 
pose one  perfect  human  Form.  For  they  are  situated  harmoniously 
one  with  reference  to  another,  and  so  connectedly  that  they  perform 
all  the  functions,  possess  all  the  parts,  display  all  the  distributive  jus- 
tice and  harmony,  develop  all  the  reciprocal  motions,  exemplify  all 
the  symmetry  of,  and  finally  absolutely  represent  and  correspond  to, 
the  human  organization.  There  is  more  sublimity  in  this  view  of  the 
great  actuating,  governing,  and  productive  forms  in  Nature,  than  can 
be  possibly  perceived  in  any  superficial  system  that  now  prevails  in 
the  world. 

I have  proved  that  man  possesses  a form  so  beautful  in  symmetry 
and  perfect  in  constitution  merely  because  all  subordinate  forms  of 
particles  of  matter  have  progressively  ascended  to,  and  finally  devel- 
oped, the  form  of  the  human  being.  And  I have  proved  also  that 
series  or  associations  of  forms  likewise  spontaneously  unfold  all  the 
innumerable  parts  displayed  in  the  constitution  of  Man  ; and  likewise 
that  degrees  of  forms,  or  of  perfection  in  substances,  have  in  a corre- 
sponding manner  created  and  developed  Man.  Then  in  view  of 
all  this,  I repeat  the  question,  “ What  is  man  materially?”  — and  I 
affirm  the  answer,  that  “ he  is  the  'perfection  of  matter,  the  flower  of 
creation,  and  the  lord  over  all  animated  things .” 

From  the  unvarying  teachings  of  these  truths,  it  is  proved  that 
Man  is  a united  Whole  — a congregation  of  perfected  forms  that 
exist  in  the  material  world.  By  this  I mean,  that  all  the  lower  and 
inferior  forms  of  the  particles  of  matter  have,  by  progressive  degrees 
of  ascension,  passed  into  the  human  organization.  And,  as  has 
been  stated,  the  most  perfect  forms  in  the  atomic  universe  are  the 
celestial.  These  are  the  last  forms  of  rudimental  matter — be- 
cause another  change  would  immerse  them  into  another  sphere  of 
material  existence  and  composition.  For  a proof  of  these  things,  I 
would  request  the  reflecting  mind  to  reconsider  the  interior  and  exter- 
nal forms  that  now  exist  upon  the  earth,  the  highest  of  which  is  Man. 

It  is  seen  from  this,  that  if  matter  in  a rudimental  state  proceeded 
any  higher  than  the  celestial  forms,  which  constitute  the  human  form, 
new  forms  would  inevitably  be  developed,  even  above  man,  and  would 
be  existing  as  organized  beings.  But  as  there  are  no  organized  be- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


603 


ings  higher  than  man  in  the  rudimental  state,  this  amounts  to  no  less 
than  a demonstration  that  there  are  no  higher  forms  than  the  celestial , 
in  the  rudimental  world.*  And  as  composed  of  them,  man  stands  as 
a representative,  correspondent,  and  governor  of  all  material  things. 

This  much  is,  then,  established  — That  Man  is  the  perfection  of 
all  forms,  and  degrees  of  these  : and  that  they  all  have  ascended  in 
a uniform  and  progressive  manner,  to  the  human  form,  which  is  the 
grand  result  of  all  the  subordinate  creations. 

Again  : the  mineral  world  is  like  a stomach , whose  office  it  is  to 
receive,  digest,  and  transfer  particles  from  the  still  more  imperfect 
substances  of  the  earth.  The  mineral  kingdom,  then,  as  soon  as 
established,  commenced  its  work  of  unceasing  activity.  It  is  a 
receptacle  for  the  influx  of  particles  still  inferior,  and  is  an  agent  to 
modify  and  transfer  them,  by  a process  of  refluxation,  into  the  form 
of  the  first  particles  capable  of  associating  with  the  vegetable  world. 
This,  in  its  turn,  performs  the  same  office,  receiving  particles  into  its 
composition,  modifying  them  by  its  own  qualities  and  properties,  and 
transferring  them  to  the  animal  world.  This  in  like  manner,  digests, 
recombines,  and  prepares  substances  to  enter  into  tbe  human 
world.  Then  tins  world  comprehends  all  the  lower  departments  of 
creation,  and  is  a receptacle  for  the  influx  of  the  essences  and 
properties  of  all  subordinate  organizations.  It  is  likewise  a mi- 
crocosm of  the  whole  united  energies  and  creations  of  Nature.  Mean- 
while, it  stands  as  an  indestructible  representative  of  the  original 
intention  of  the  Divine  Mind,  by  which  unchangeable  laws  were 
instituted  to  govern  materials,  with  a view  to  the  production  of  this 
end.  Thus  Law  and  Matter  have  accomplished  the  first  end  for 
which  they  were  inseparably  created. 

Further:  the  various  kingdoms  and  forms  in  this  rudimental 
sphere,  are  all  organs  for  the  purpose  of  transferring,  advancing,  per- 
fecting, and  sublimating  all  particles  in  the  lower  forms  of  matter,  so 
that  they  may  all  conjoin  in  harmony,  and  produce  Man.  Still  fur- 
ther: the  subordinate  kingdoms  are  forms  indispensable  for  the  pur- 
pose of  communicating  a proper  energy  and  quality  to  each  particle 
of  matter,  in  order  to  render  it  suitable  to  associate  and  assimilate 
with  the  human  form.  All  particles  must  be  modified,  recomposed, 

• I am  directed  to  say,  that  the  terms  “ angular,”  “ circular,”  “ spiral,”  &c.,  are 
employed  comparatively,  owing  to  the  imperfection  of  language ; and  that  for  dis- 
tinction, the  same  classifications  might  be  made  of  the  various  forms  above  those 
belonging  to  the  rudimental  world. 


604 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


and  brought  to  a proper  degree  of  perfection,  or  else  the  human  form 
could  not  receive  nourishment  from,  and  be  sustained  by,  the  lower 
forms  in  Nature.  This,  again,  is  proof  that  man  is  a perfection  of 
matter  in  all  its  forms  and  degrees  of  sublimation,  and  that  he  is  the 
great  Flower  of  the  living  Germ  of  this  rudimental  sphere,  and  is  a 
centre  to  and  from  which  flow  spontaneously  favors,  from  and  to  all 
the  lower  forms. 

Herein  are  displayed  the  order,  harmony,  and  perfection  of  the 
movements  of  Nature,  even  to  such  a degree  of  beauty  and  grandeur 
as  the  human  mind  is  incapable  of  comprehending  by  exterior  sight. 
But  man  can  do  this  when  the  more  interior  qualities  of  his  mind  are 
opened.  Thus  it  is  again  proved,  that  man  is  a perfect  organization 
of  all  the  atomic  forms  in  Nature  and  the  Universe.* 


§ 175.  It  is  now  made  distinctly  clear,  that  Man  materially  is  the 
lord  and  governor  of  animated  Nature.  And  this  being  clearly  estab- 
lished, the  all-important  and  as  yet  undecided  question  next  comes 
up,  What  is  man  spiritually  ? 

I answer : He  is  the  perfection  of  Motion , or  of  the  first  great  mo- 
ving Principle  of  the  Universe.  In  other  words,  He  is  the  Wisdom 
of  Love. 

I have  hitherto  considered  Nature  and  her  forms  and  develop- 
ments, only  in  a physical  point  of  view,  and  have  not  associated 
with  them  the  moving  or  living  Soul  that  actuates  each  particle  in  all 
its  progressive  movements  toward  perfection.  But  now  we  come 
directly  to  a consideration  of  those  life-giving  principles  that  are  the 
souls  of  every  form  in  being. 

We  begin,  then,  at  the  germ  of  all  life,  or  the  rudiments  of  Mo- 
tion. Motion  flows  into  every  particle  of  primeval  matter,  creates  an 
incessant  activity,  generates  new  qualities,  tendencies,  and  spheres  of 
association,  and  finally  enters  into,  and  becomes  the  living  Soul  of 
the  whole  Mineral  World. 

Motion  primarily  was  in  form,  angular ; that  is,  it  displayed 
eccentric  variations,  passing  from  one  extreme  to  another  in  an  im- 
pulsive and  unorganized  manner.  Its  irregularities  were  very  incon- 
sistent with  a uniform  order,  but  still  it  displayed  all  the  active  proper- 
ties that  could  then  by  any  possible  means  be  developed.  Motion  had 
not  suitable  forms  to  unfold  more  perfect  living  principles  neither 


* That  is,  the  material  Universe. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


605 


had  the  forms  of  matter  motion  to  give  them  new  characters  and  new 
tendencies  to  refinement. 

The  second  form  of  Motion  was  similar  to  the  angular  forms  in 
matter  which  have  been  termed  mediatorial.  Motion  likewise  as- 
cended to  the  multi-angular;  and  this  constituted  Motion  the  perfect 
Soul  of  the  mineral  kingdom. 

Motion,  like  the  particles  of  matter,  has  series  of  forms,  and  de- 
grees of  forms  and  series  — all  of  which  are  displayed  in  the  atomic 
constitution  of  substances.  After  Motion  had  thus  ascended  to  one 
perfect  degree,  it  began  to  unfold  new  powers,  forces,  tendencies, 
and  actuating  laws.  That  is,  it  unfolded  the  circular  motion  — 
which  passed  through  all  the  degrees  of  this  form  until  it  became  the 
perfect  circular  — during  which  time  it  developed  diameters,  axes, 
poles,  rectilinear  movements,  and  centripetal  and  centrifugal  forces. 
Having  all  these  attributes,  Motion,  in  the  three  united  degrees  of  this 
form,  became  a new  principle,  which  was  Life : and  this  is  the  Soul 
of  the  Vegetable  World. 

Life,  therefore,  is  a development  of  Motion.  This  life,  which  is 
now  exemplified  in  the  vegetable  creation,  proceeded  from  the  circu- 
lar into  the  spiral  form.  And  after  it  had  ascended  through  all  the 
modifications  of  this  form,  it  developed  a new  tendency  — a new 
principle  — and  one  which  was  differently  manifested.  This  was 
Sensation  ; and  this  is  the  Soul  of  the  Animal  World. 

It  is  thus  made  clear  that  Motion  was  only  organized  as  such  after 
it  had  fully  developed  the  properties  of  the  Mineral  Kingdom  ; and 
then  it  became  the  abiding  soul  and  actuating  principle  of  this  king- 
dom. So  likewise  Motion  passed  through  the  successive  stages  of 
the  circular  form  ; and  until  it  became  perfected  in  this  peculiar  form, 
it  could  not  have  developed  that  essential  principle  which  became 
the  Soul  of  the  Vegetable  Creation.  So  likewise  did  Life,  thus  es- 
tablished, ascend  through  all  of  its  subsequent  forms,  which  were  the 
spiral,  and  unfold  that  new  principle  of  life  and  energy,  which  is 
Sensation,  and  which  became  the  Soul  and  moving  principle  of  the 
Animal  World.  And  it  is  made  also  clear  that  Motion,  Life,  and 
Sensation,  which  form  one,  as  included  in  the  latter,  progressed  to 
the  spiritual , and  through  this  into  the  perfect  spiritual,  which  is  the 
celestial  form.  Sensation,  becoming  thus  perfected,  constitutes  the 
Soul  of  Man,  which  is  Intelligence. 

Thus  Motion  contained  in  germ  all  the  essential  parts  and  forms, 
which,  when  ascended  and  perfected,  constitute  the  Soul  of  the  Hu- 


606 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


man  World,  which  is  the  Wisdom  and  Intelligence  of  this  whole 
rudimental  system  of  creations.  Thus  Motion  is  the  Soul  of  the 
Mineral  World,  Life  is  the  Soul  of  the  Vegetable  World,  Sensation 
is  the  Soul  of  the  Animal  World,  and  Intelligence  is  the  Soul  of  the 
Human  World. 


§ 176.  It  would  be  well  for  the  reader  to  keep  in  memory  the  re- 
marks concerning  the  external  forms  of  matter,  in  order  that  he  may 
recognise  the  relation  that  exists  between  the  moving  principles  of 
each  form,  and  understand  how  they  determine  and  confirm  one  an- 
other’s individual  existence.  It  has  been  shown  that  Motion  is  only 
established  as  such,  in  an  order  which  is  indestructible,  after  it  has 
passed  through  all  the  innumerable  forms  in  the  angular  developments 
of  matter.  For  when  Motion  and  Matter  ascend  alike  to  a degree 
that  confirms  their  organized  existence,  and  can  not  ascend  any  higher 
without  changing  completely  their  mode  of  existence  and  order  of 
form  — it  is  then  that  Matter  and  Motion  become  perfectly  and  inde- 
structibly organized,  never  to  change  their  rudimental  structure  and 
power  of  external  development.  Let  it  be  deeply  impressed  that 
Motion  becomes  a perfectly-organized  and  individualized  principle, 
when  Matter  has  assumed  a form  of  existence  from  which  it  is  never 
knowm  to  change  : and  this  is  fully  exemplified  in  the  Mineral  World. 
Then  it  is  that  Motion  becomes  the  undying  Soul  of  this  mineral 
structure.  Though  continually  changing  the  elements  of  its  being, 
it  never  changes  in  its  essential  constitution. 

So  when.L?ye  has  become  similarly  established,  it  has  likewise 
become  an  indestructible  organization.  And  Life  is  developed  only 
as  the  particles  of  matter  correspondingly  ascend  to,  and  fully  de- 
velop, the  vegetable  structure.  Then  it  is  that  Life  is  established  as 
Life,  for  ever.  It  undergoes  no  constitutional  change,  but  preserves 
its  identity  throughout  all  time. 

And  Sensation  is  only  known  as  such  after  Life  has  ascended 
through  all  the  successive  forms  in  the  animal  world  to  the  highest 
of  them  ; and  when  this  is  accomplished,  Sensation  becomes  also  an 
unvarying  and  unchangeable  principle.  It  assumes  an  identity  which 
it  for  ever  preserves.  And  then  Sensation  becomes  the  immortal 
Soul  of  the  animal  structure. 

Intelligence , in  like  manner,  becomes  such  only  after  Sensation 
has  ascended  through  all  the  forms  in  the  Human  World  to  the  high- 
est type  and  most  perfect  organization  ; and  then  it  becomes  an  or- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


607 


ganized  and  immortal  principle.  It  assumes  an  identity  which  can 
not  be  destroyed,  and  it  continues  thus  for  ever.  Then  it  is  that 
Intelligence  becomes  the  unchangeable  Soul  of  the  Human  struc- 
ture. ~ 

After  Motion  has  ascended  to  Intelligence,  Intelligence  compre- 
hends all  the  subordinate  degrees  of  the  same  living  principle.  It 
pervades  alike  all  the  interior  moving  principles  that  actuate  all  forms 
of  matter  in  their  various  degrees  of  activity,  force,  refinement,  and 
animation.  Intelligence,  therefore,  is  the  perfection  of  the  principle 
of  Motion  : and  this  answers  the  question,  “ What  is  man  sjtir- 
itually  ?” 

Motion  is  the  Germ,  Life  the  Body,  Sensation  the  Branches,  and 
Intelligence  the  Flower.  Or,  Motion  is  the  parent  and  soul  of  Life  ; 
Life  is  the  parent,  measure,  and  creator,  of  Sensation  ; and  Sensation 
is  the  parent  and  creator  of  Intelligence.  Thus  each  one  becomes 
the  creator  of  another.  In  other  words,  from  the  interior  posses- 
sions of  Motion  is  unfolded  Life  ; and  from  its  interior  properties  is 
unfolded  Sensation  ; and  out  of  its  inconceivable  attributes  flows 
spontaneously  the  perfection  of  all  the  rest,  which  is  Intelligence. 

Again  : Motion  corresponds  to  the  Mineral  ; Life  corresponds  to 
the  Vegetable  ; Sensation  corresponds  to  the  Animal ; and  Intelli- 
gence corresponds  to  the  Human  World.  Once  more  : the  rudi- 
ments of  Motion,  which  are  eccentric  movements,  are  the  interior ; 
the  transition  or  more  uniform  movements  are  the  mediatorial ; and 
the  exterior  or  perfect  movement  is  the  Form  or  Body.  This  com- 
pletes the  organization  ; and  this  constitutes  of  the  whole  a principle 
of  undying  Motion.  The  rudimental  circular  is  the  interior  ; the 
transition  is  the  mediatorial  or  ascending  movement  ; and  the  exte- 
rior is  the  Body,  which  confirms  of  Motion  a principle  of  undying 
Life.  So  are  the  interior,  mediatorial,  and  exterior  movements,  dis- 
covered in  the  organized  form  of  Sensation  ; and  likewise  are  they 
discoverable  in  that  individualized  principle  of  man  which  is  termed 
Intelligence. 

To  speak  in  more  general  terms,  the  spirit  of  man  is  constructed 
as  follows  1 The  interior  or  Soul  is  Motion  ; the  transition  or  media- 
torial is  Lne;  the  exterior  is  the  perfect  Body,  which  is  Sensation  ; 
the  elements  of  the  whole  of  these  combined,  constitute  the  spiritual 
form  of  man,  which  is  Intelligence."^  And  as  the  subordinate  devel- 
opments of  these  principles  are  not  known  to  change  in  the  least 
possible  particular,  this  is  conclusive  evidence  that  the  highest  of 


60S 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


them  all,  which  is  the  spiritual  form  of  Man,  can  not  possibly  change 
its  essential  constitution,  or  lose  its  absolute  identity. 

§ 177.  The  all-important  truth  to  be  established  in  the  mind  is, 
that  the  interior  essence  is  the  soul  and  creator  of  all  external  forms, 
which  forms  determine  and  demonstrate  the  mode  of  such  soul’s  ex- 
istence. The  form  which  every  particle  of  matter  assumes,  is  that 
created  and  determined  by  the  peculiar  essence  which  is  latent  in 
the  particle  itself.  A knowledge  of  this  truth  conveys  to  the  mind  a 
perfect  conception  of  the  interior,  creative  Cause  of  all  things,  and 
its  attributes  as  displayed  and  developed  in  its  external  form.  Mo- 
tion being  the  first  all-pervading  principle,  as  derived  from  the  Great 
Positive  Mind,  becomes  the  creator  of  all  rudimental  and  elementary 
substances.  Therefore  Motion  is  the  principle  which  gives  to  the 
mineral  compounds  their  peculiar  form,  texture,  and  mode  of  ex- 
istence. 

Motion  thus  develops  material  forms,  which  are  merely  the  effect 
of  the  essence,  and  its  use  in  relation  to  higher  degrees  of  its  own 
constitution.  Forms , then,  are  the  mode  by  which  Motion  in  the 
lowest  degrees  of  Nature  comes  in-contact,  and  forms  a relation  with, 
the  higher  degrees  of  external  development.  In  like  manner  Life  is 
the  essence,  soul,  and  creator,  of  the  whole  vegetable  formation  ; and 
this  displays  the  use  of  Life,  and  manifests  its  relation  to  the  lower 
and  higher  degrees  of  organic  structure.  So  Sensation  is  the  soul, 
essence,  and  creator,  of  the  Animal  World;  and  in,  by,  and  through 
this,  all  the  qualities  and  essential  attributes  of  its  interior  are  made 
manifest  to  the  outer  world.  Moroever,  it  here  establishes  a relation 
to  the  lower  and  the  higher  structures  of  the  same  combinations  of 
matter.  So  Motion,  Life,  and  Sensation,  as  three,  flow  into,  and 
become  one  established  essence  and  creator,  of  and  by  which  the 
human  organization  is  developed  ^nd  perfected.  And  the  high- 
est attribute  of  this  form  is  Intelligence ; and  this  was  contained  in, 
and  is  unfolded  from,  the  germinal  properties  that  exist  in  the  peculiar 
essence  from  which  the  whole  human  structure  is  developed  as  a per- 
fect Form.  Thus  all  things  are  unfolded  to  the  outer  world  by  the 
incessant  activity  of  the  qualities,  attributes,  and  unchangeable  ten- 
dencies of  the  internal  essence  or  soul,  which  is  the  interior  or  life 
of  all  external  and  material  existences. 

I perceive  that  metaphysicians  and  theologians  have  confined  their 
attention  to,  and  based  their  theories  upon,  the  superficial  manifesta- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


609 


lions  of  the  human  mind  ; and  thereby  they  hare  unavoidably  mis- 
conceived the  true  relation  which  exists  between  the  interior  or 
prompting  cause,  and  the  form  through,  by,  and  upon  which,  the 
effects  of  the  human  mind  become  visible.  They  have  in  almost 
every  instance  confounded  the  effect  and  cause,  and  have  as  often 
misconceived  the  real  cause,  upon  a knowledge  of  which  must  rest 
the  soundness  of  all  metaphysical  and  psychological  theories.  No 
one  among  such  investigators  has  been  able  to  demonstrate  the  exist- 
ence of  the  soul  or  essence  of  the  human  form  as  disconnected  from 
the  form  itself.  All  philosophy  that  directs  the  attention  to  the  ex- 
ternal only , takes  from  the  human  mind  those  evidences  that  are  ne- 
cessary to  direct  the  enlightened  perception  to  a more  interior  under- 
standing of  the  real  essence,  which  unfolds  itself  to  the  outer  world, 
in  the  shape  of  the  human  structure. 

Motion,  being  the  soul  of  the  Mineral  World,  becomes,  as  has 
been  related,  an  established  an  unchangeable  principle  as  confined 
in  a specific  manner  to  that  mode  of  external  existence.  By  this  I 
would  be  understood  to  mean  that  the  whole  mineral  creation  is  the 
external  inode  and  form  by  which  Motion  exists,  and  is  manifested  to 
the  outer  world.  Motion  being  the  creative  principle,  unfolds  the 
essence  in  a material  Body,  which  Body  is  composed  of  innumerable 
and  dissimilar  combinations  of  atoms,  all  of  which  enter  into  the 
whole  constitution  with  inconceivable  varieties  of  affinities  or  affec- 
tions, one  particle  for  another.  Meanwhile  it  renders  the  whole 
structure  suitable  to  develop,  and  communicate  its  interior  posses- 
sions to,  as  many  analogous  forms  in  the  higher  plane  of  creation. 
It  is  well  to  keep  in  mind  that  I am  speaking  of  the  whole  mineral 
world  as  one  Body,  whose  soul  is  Motion,  or  that  incessant  and  in- 
visible principle  whose  attributes  are  only  known  by  effects  percep- 
tible in  the  physical  constitution  of  Nature.  The  first  unfolded  at- 
tribute of  Motion  is  discoverable  in  the  first  degree  of  mineral  forms. 

Then,  in  like  manner,  Life  is  an  essence  that  unfolds  to  the  outer 
world  its  inner  possessions  ; and  this  unfolding  is  the  whole  Vegeta- 
ble Creation  — the  whole  being  as  one  perfect  Form.  Understand, 
then,  that  all  knowledge  which  can  be  obtained  of  the  interior  quali- 
ties of  Life,  is  only  to  be  derived  from  its  outward  mode  of  exist- 
ence. For  as  Life  is  the  soul  and  creator  of  the  whole  vegetable 
Form,  so  this  Form  becomes  the  mode  of  the  material  existence  of 
Life.  The  innumerable  varieties  of  form  that  constitute  the  vegeta- 
ble kingdom  are  only  the  successive  degrees  of  modified  develop- 

39 


CIO 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


ment  — each  form  at  the  same  time  being  elaborated  as  an  outward 
existence  by  the  interior  energies  and  promptings  of  the  essence  of 
Life.  This  whole  vegetable  world,  as  a perfect  form,  is,  then,  a 
material  mode  of  the  existence  of  Life  ; for  by  this  mode  of  material 
development,  Life  can  communicate  its  unfolded  possessions  to  higher 
degrees  of  matter,  which  become  the  receptacles  of,  and  at  once  de- 
termine, a new  mode  of  existence,  for  a new  element  of  life,  which 
is  Sensation. 

Keeping  in  mind,  then,  the  uniform  developments  from  the  inner 
to  the  outer  world,  a knowledge  is  received  concerning  the  corre- 
sponding development  of  the  animal  world.  For  as  by  understand- 
ing one  particle  of  matter,  with  all  its  properties,  tendencies,  and  ca- 
pabilities, a corresponding  knowledge  is  obtained  concerning  the 
structure  of  the  whole  Universe  — so  by  understanding  the  mode  of 
the  existence  of  Life,  an  understanding  is  at  once  established  concern- 
ing the  higher  degrees  and  similar  modes  of  existence,  as  determined 
by  their  Soul  or  essence.  And  as  by  knowing  the  measurement  of  one 
inch , a rule  is  obtained  by  which  may  be  measured  the  length  and 
breadth  of  all  material  existence  — so  it  is  equally  plain  that  if  the 
existence  of  Life  and  Sensation  is  understood,  the  same  laws  and 
principles  which  govern  these  will  introduce  the  mind  into  higher 
degrees  and  planes  of  corresponding  exterior  development. 

The  mode  by  which  Sensation  exists  in  its  relation  to  the  outer 
world,  consists  only  in  the  structure  of  the  whole  animal  creation. 
The  mode  by  which  Motion,  Life,  and  Sensation,  exist  as  one  united 
essence  and  Soul  in  its  relation  to  the  material  world,  consists  only 
in  the  perfect  structure  of  the  human  organization.  Then  it  is  not 
the  body,  the  form,  the  material,  that  develops  and  organizes  the 
spiritual  principles  : for  if  this  were  true,  then  indeed  the  human 
mind  could  not  sustain  its  identity  as  disconnected  from  the  instru- 
ment by  which  it  was  developed.  This  would  likewise  be  unfail- 
ingly true  of  all  material  organizations  and  their  living  principles. 

§ 178.  The  mineral,  vegetable,  and  animal  worlds,  bodies,  or 
forms  of  existence,  each  have  as  their  essence,  a general,  living  Soul, 
which  unitedly  appertains  to  the  whole  Body,  and  only  exists  in  the 
outer  world  as  the  Body  is  unfolded.  Hence  when  I say  that  Mo- 
tion became  an  organized  Soul,  or  an  unchangeable  principle,  I have 
reference  to  its  connexion  with  the  whole  Body  or  Form  of  the  min- 
eral world.  So  also  with  the  vegetable  and  animal  worlds.  Not 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


611 


that  each  individual  form  in  the  vegetable  and  animal  structure  has 
a distinct,  organized,  and  immortal  soul,  but  that  the  whole  of  each 
kingdom,  as  a Body,  has  for  its  Soul  the  prompting  essence,  the 
one  of  Life,  and  the  other  of  Sensation. 

But  the  Inman  world  constitutes  a degree  of  material  existence  ex- 
ceedingly superior  to  the  lower  forms  which  each  general  living  soul 
has  developed.  And  it  is  in  the  human  world  that  Motion,  Life, 
and  Sensation,  become  united  and  perfected  as  one  living,  organized 
essence  — an  individualized  Soul,  by  and  from  which  every  human 
form  is  created.  Each  individual  human  structure  also  possesses  an  or- 
ganized soul,  composed  of  the  subordinate  attributes  existing  in  the 
lower  planes  of  material  forms.  Therefore  this  essence  unfolds  and 
displays  its  interior  qualities  in  the  human  form,  which  is  Man.  Thus 
the  exterior  form  of  man  is  the  perfect  representative  of  the  peculiar 
constitution  and  qualities  of  his  spiritual  essence  or  soul.  In  other 
words,  it  is  an  exact  correspondent  of  all  the  tendencies,  attributes, 
qualities,  and  possessions  of  his  interior  soul,  essence,  and  creator. 

The  truth  of  this  principle  is  manifested  in  every  department  of 
the  material  Universe,  and  especially  in  the  various  departments  of 
material  life.  The  mineral  Body  or  world,  displays  the  perfect  com- 
plexion of  its  prompting  essence.  The  vegetable  displays,  corre- 
sponds to,  and  represents,  the  character  and  quality  of  its  Soul, 
which  is  Life.  So  with  the  whole  animal  Form;  and  so  it  is  with 
Man.  The  interior  or  inner  essence,  in  every  instance,  and  without 
variation,  is  the  soul,  substance,  creator,  and  cause,  of  all  effects, 
which  are  the  forms  visible  in  the  outer  world.  The  external  evi- 
dence of  this  truth  consists  in  the  appearances  of  all  external  forms ; 
in  the  relations  which  they  sustain  to  one  another  ; in  their  invaria- 
ble manifestations  and  developments,  and  in  that  general  relation 
which  they  all  sustain  to  the  great  structure  of  the  material  Universe. 

The  evidences  of  Motion  are  in  the  mineral  compounds  of  the 
earth  ; for  by  and  through  them,  Motion  is  represented  and  made 
manifest  to  the  outer  world.  Yet  Motion  is  not  an  organized  Prin- 
ciple in  every  individual  compound;  for  the  individuals  are  imper- 
fect in  their  structure,  and  mode  of  existence.  But  Motion  is  a 
living  principle  and  actuating  cause  to  the  whole  plane  of  mineral 
creation,  because  the  whole  united  forms  a perfect  Body  — though  an 
imperfect  one  in  its  relation  to  higher  combinations  of  matter.  The 
evidence  of  Life  is  in  the  external  structure  of  the  vegetable  world  : 
yet  Life  is  not  a perfected  and  organized  soul  in  individual  forms 


612 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


composing  the  great  Form,  because  these  invariably  display  imper- 
fection. But  when  considering  the  whole  structure  of  the  vegetable 
creation,  we  have  displayed  one  'perfect  Form,  which  is  the  evidence 
that  Life  is  the  cause  and  actuating  principle ; and  of  this,  the  whole 
is  a perfect  external  representation.  The  evidence  of  Sensation  is 
confined  to,  and  discoverable  only  in,  the  vast  Form  of  animal  exist- 
ence. Yet  an  individualized  existence  of  this  principle  is  not  estab- 
lished by  the  perfectness  of  any  isolated  organization  ; for  all  such 
display  the  most  eccentric  and  irregular  forms,  inclinations,  and  hab* 
its.  But  when  observing  the  whole  animal  world,  as  united,  we 
behold  a perfect  Form  — which  is  an  evidence  of  the  perfect  structure 
of  the  principle  of  Sensation:  for  by  it  the  external  is  developed. 

But  when  we  ascend  to  the  Human  World,  the  evidence  which 
conveys  to  the  mind  a corresponding  though  indefinite  perception 
concerning  the  interior  and  creative  essence,  is  essentially  changed  : 
because  every  individual  human  form,  is  of  itself  a perfect  organiza- 
tion, not  in  the  least  particular  transcended  by  any  other  forms  — but 
instead  thereof,  consists  of  a combination  of  all  the  lower  and  subor- 
dinate material  forms  and  structures  in  Nature.  And  as  each  human 
form  is  thus  a congregation  of  all  subordinate  ones,  so  each  becomes 
a perfect  organization  of  the  material  Universe,  a receptacle  of  the 
lower  degrees  of  matter,  and  a microcosm  in  which  the  Universe  is 
seen  in  miniature.  Thus  the  human  form  is  a perfect  representation 
of  all  material  existences.  And  it  is  a reflection,  fulfilment,  and 
demonstration  of  the  ultimate  design  of  the  Divine  Mind,  which  was 
conceived  and  established  in  the  depths  of  that  inconceivable  Vortex 
from  which  incessantly  flows  an  infinity  of  perfected  things. 

Here,  then,  is  the  sensuous  evidence  that  the  human  form  is  a 
form  determined  by  a corresponding  creative  essence,  which  is  man’s 
organized  and  immortal  soul.  Not  only  in  viewing  the  whole  Human 
World  as  one  Form,  is  Intelligence  discovered  as  an  interior  quality 
and  essence,  but  in  every  individual  structure  are  all  the  required 
qualities  to  demonstrate  an  absolute  individualization  of  the  interior, 
creative  essence.  The  whole  Human  Form  or  World,  is  of  itself 
the  perfect  creation  of  Nature.  This  can  not  be  said  of  the  subordi- 
nate kingdoms.  Moreover,  a single  human  form  is  a perfect  organi- 
zation, representative,  and  reflection,  of  all  the  lower  compounds  in 
Nature.  And  thus  man  is  the  perfect  flower,  being  progressively 
developed  from  all  the  lower  parts  of  the  same  great  Tree  of  cease- 
less causation.  Herein,  then,  lies  the  external  evidence  that  man 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


613 


possesses  an  actuating  and  organized  essence  which  no  other  form 
possesses.  And  this  will  continue  to  retain  its  individuality,  because 
it  is  the  perfect  form  and  perfect  soul  of  all  the  lower  degrees  of  Mo- 
tion, Life,  and  Sensation,  these  being  only  the  elements  of  the  germ 
which,  when  perfected,  flow  into  and  form  one  perfect  and  inde- 
structible Whole,  which  is  the  soul  or  spiritual  essence  of  man. 

§ 179.  As  has  been  stated,  if  the  human  form  were  the  instrument 
by  and  through  which  the  mind  is  created,  then  it  wmuld  be  impossi- 
ble for  the  mind  to  exist  as  disconnected  from  the  form  which  pro- 
duced it.  The  opinion  that  the  mind  is  thus  produced,  has  for  a 
long  time  prevailed  in  the  world,  because  sensuous  observation  has  been 
made  the  basis  of  metaphysical  speculation.  But  those  who  have 
believed  thus  have  been  misimpressed ; and  it  is  owing  to  such  a 
conviction  that  too  little  belief  has  been  entertained  concerning  the 
spiritual  identity  of  man  when  the  form  is  no  more.  Such  impres- 
sions have  resulted  from  deep  investigation,  but  from  that  investiga- 
tion which  is  confined  to  the  superficial  evidences  of  the  laws  of 
Nature  and  of  Man.  Another  class  has,  by  a superficial  interpreta- 
tion of  theological  writings,  believed  more  strongly  in  the  identity 
of  the  spirit  of  man,  after  the  body  is  by  it  rejected,  than  their  prem- 
ises have  warranted.  All  this  is  consequent  of  the  uninstructed 
state  of  the  mind,  and  of  the  direction  of  its  faculties  more  in  favor 
of  those  things  which  are  imaginary  than  of  those  which  are  real. 

But  instead  of  the  body  creating  and  developing  the  spirit,  the 
spirit  is  first  organized,  individualized,  and  potentialized.  From  it 
is  unfolded  the  outer,  or  the  organization.  The  latter  thus  becomes 
an  instrument  by  and  through  which  the  interior  principle  or  form, 
communicates  with  the  material  world.  Therefore,  the  body  is  only 
a mode,  a form,  by  and  through  which  the  spirit  or  essence  displays 
itself  to  the  outer  world.  Thus  it  is  that  the  body  is  in  constant 
subordination.  While  the  spirit  enfolds  itself  in  a material  form,  it 
likewise  exerts  the  most  absolute  power  over  every  portion  of  its 
outward  form,  and  is  perpetually  distributing  motion,  life,  and  sensa- 
tion, throughout  all  the  avenues  and  recesses  of  the  same. 

Motion  is  the  lowest  and  first  attribute  of  the  human  soul.  This 
has  flown  through  all  the  kingdoms  uniformly,  up  to  and  into  the  hu- 
man form  ; and  there,  as  a subordinate  element  of  the  spirit,  it  per- 
forms all  the  corresponding  motions  that  are  displayed  in  the  human 
body.  Life  is  a higher  element  of  the  spirit,  and  in  like  manner 


614 


nature' s divine  revelations. 


communicates  to  its  outer  form  all  the  incessant  and  reciprocal  mo- 
tions to  which  every  minute  particle  of  the  body  is  subjected,  and  in 
which  are  manifested  precision  and  perfection  of  action  not  discover- 
able in  any  other  material  constitution.  Sensation  also  flows  sponta- 
neously out  of  Life,  as  Life  does  out  of  Motion.  This  is  a still  higher 
element  of  the  spirit.  It  exists  upon  the  external  surfaces  of  the  vis- 
ceral and  muscular  systems,  and  pervades  the  serous  surfaces  of  every 
organ  throughout  the  whole  body;  and  it  serves  as  the  mediator  to 
connect  the  material  form  to  material  and  foreign  substances.  Like- 
wise it  serves  as  a lever  upon  which  the  spirit  acts  to  produce  its  va- 
rious manifestations  to  the  outer  world.  In  other  words,  Sensation 
being  the  highest  of  the  subordinate  elements  of  the  spirit,  becomes 
the  connecting  link  between  the  material  and  spiritual  constitution. 
For  were  it  not  for  a conscious,  pervading  medium  that  penetrates 
alike  every  particle  of  the  human  form,  the  spiritual  organization 
could  not  by  any  possible  means  sustain  a connexion  with  a material 
constitution,  like  the  body  of  man. 

Thus  it  is  made  manifest  why  Sensation  is  the  highest  Soul  of  the 
subordinate  kingdoms  : for  by  sensation  the  spirit  is  connected  with 
the  inanimate  particles  of  matter,  which  constitute  its  body  and  its 
external  form.  Sensation  is  the  universal  medium  between  spirit 
and  matter  : and  matter  would  display  no  motion,  no  life,  no  sensa- 
tion, were  it  not  for  the  indestructible  and  ascending  elements  of 
which  the  individualized  spirit  of  man  is  an  ultimate  result. 

Thus  Motion  animates  the  Mineral  World,  in  which  it  creates,  de- 
termines, and  manifests,  its  own  material  mode  of  existence.  So 
Life  is  the  creator  and  animator  of  the  Vegetable,  and  Sensation  is 
the  creator  and  animator  of  the  Animal  World  : and  all  of  these  com- 
bined and  perfected,  develop  Intelligence  ; and  this,  as  the  soul,  the 
essence,  the  creator,  of  Man,  animates  the  whole  Human  World. 

Here,  then,  is  the  demonstration  that  essence  determines,  and  un- 
folds itself  into,  its  material  form  ; and  this  displays  the  use  and  end 
for  which  the  form  is  created.  And  inasmuch  as  essence  is  the  parent 
and  animator  of  material  organizations,  it  therefore  follows  that  each 
body  is  an  external  representation  of  its  interior  essence  and  crea- 
ting cause.  Man,  then,  in  his  material  or  outward  form,  is  a perfect 
representation  of  the  essence,  quality,  and  individual  structure  of  the 
spirit  within.  Thus  the  body  is  merely  a coating,  a garment,  a 
sheathing  of  the  spiritual  principle,  whereby  the  latter  is  enabled  to 
communicate  with  all  material  things  within  its  plane  of  existence, 


/ 


nature’s  divine  revelations.  615 

and  meanwhile  is  the  unchangeable  type  of  the  great  End  deter- 
mined upon  by  the  Divine  Mind. 

So  the  spirit,  or  soul,  or  essence,  which  are  here  considered  as 
one,  is  not  dependent  upon  the  physical  organization  for  its  identity 
and  existence.  But  the  body  is  subordinate  to  the  spirit,  and  is  de- 
pendent for  its  motion,  life,  energies,  animation,  and  even  for  its  ex- 
istence, upon  the  immortal  spirit  within,  whose  continuous  identity  is 
determined  by  eternal  law,  according  to  which  matter  in  all  cases 
stands  only  as  its  representative  and  external  development. 

§ 180.  Form,  then,  is  the  only  external  mode  by  which  all  es- 
sences exist,  and  is  the  state  which  they  assume  in  reference  to  all 
material  things.  The  most  delicate  plant  puts  forth  its  tendrils, 
fibres,  and  finely-intenvoven  substances,  only  by  virtue  of  the  essence 
which  develops  itself  from  the  inner  to  the  outer  world  in  that  form. 
And  the  rose,  with  all  its  beauty,  delicacy,  and  fragrance,  is  a perfect 
representative  of  the  interior  essence  that  developed  it.  All  such 
forms,  however  complicated  and  varied  in  appearance  they  may  be, 
manifest  only  the  essential  qualities  of  their  own  creative  soul.  The 
outer,  in  every  instance,  is  a perfect  type,  image,  and  correspondent, 
of  the  inner,  from  which  it  proceeded.  The  most  delicate  animal 
form  is  also  a representation  of  its  interior,  living  essence  and  actua- 
ting principle  : and  the  most  gigantic  animal  form  is  only  a higher 
degree  of  development  and  a higher  representative  of  corresponding 
qualities  which  are  its  soul  and  creator. 

Yet  the  whole  animal,  vegetable,  and  mineral  worlds,  are  as  one 
Form  to  the  body  of  Man  ; for  they  collectively  only  possess  what  the 
human  organization  individually  is  composed  of.  Thus  it  is  that  the 
human  form  is  the  perfection  of  all  forms.  And  as  this  is  estab- 
lished, it  is  made  equally  clear  that  its  soul  or  essence  is  a corre- 
sponding structure,  of  which  the  exterior  is  the  manifest  mode  of 
being,  and  the  exact  representative. 

And  it  is  necessary  that  it  should  be  well  understood  and  borne  in 
mind  that  form  is  not  the  creator  of  life,  or  of  its  attributes,  but  that 
the  form,  in  every  department  of  Nature,  is  the  exterior  mode  of  every 
living  soul’s  existence.  Butin  neither  of  the  lower  kingdoms  have 
the  forms  an  organized  principle  of  interior  life  individually , but  they 
have  collectively,  as  constituting  one  perfect  plane  of  form  and  crea- 
tion. The  human  form  has  an  organized  principle  individually,  be- 
cause every  human  organization  is  a congregation  of  all  subordinate 


616 


nature’.s  divine  revelations. 


forms  and  substances  in  matter,  and  is  likewise  an  indestructible  rep- 
resentation of  all.  Thus  the  human  body  is  a Universe,  subsisting 
and  existing  upon  all  lower  forms  of  organic  life,  and  is  of  itself  a 
whole  creation,  in  and  by  which  the  labors  of  Nature,  and  the  ultimate 
design  of  the  Great  Eternal  Cause,  are  typified  and  absolutely  ful- 
filled. And  the  human  form  is  of  all  this  a clear  and  living  demon- 
stration. 

The  use  of  every  organized  substance  is  displayed  in  its  external 
relations  to  all  inferior  and  superior  constitutions  of  matter ; and  it 
depends  upon  them  for  its  existence  and  its  capacity  to  fulfil  the  use 
and  accomplish  the  end  for  which  it  was  designed.  Forms  of  all 
series  and  classifications  contain  in  themselves  evidences  of  their  use 
to  the  material  world  ; and  they  also  determine  the  specific  degrees 
of  uniform  and  ceaseless  progression.  A series  of  forms  is  merely  a 
congregation  of  organic  beings  of  one  type,  from  the  lowest  form 
through  the  successive  modifications,  to  the  highest;  all  of  which 
compose  one  full  and  decided  degree  of  organization. 

The  uses  of  all  things  to  the  outer  world  are  discoverable  only  in 
the  inseparable  relations  which  they  sustain  to  all  things,  and  in  the 
offices  which  they  are  incessantly  fulfilling.  Thus  there  is  a use  in 
the  mineral,  vegetable,  and  animal  creations  ; and  their  external  modes 
of  existence  demonstrate  their  offices,  and  also  prove  that  they  are 
indispensable  developments  for  the  purpose  of  unfolding  and  per- 
fecting the  human  form.  This  latter  is  to  all  of  them  a seal,  crown, 
and  throne  of  power  ; and  it  is  a centre  around  which  the  whole  cre- 
ations of  Nature  revolve  in  their  ascending  progress. 

Three  distinct  uses  are  discoverable  in  the  forms  in  the  outer 
world.  Their  first  and  subordinate  use  is  to  establish  the  mode  in 
and  by  which  all  essence  may  exist,  and  preserve  its  identity  of  un- 
ceasing life  and  energy  : also  to  constitute  of  the  material  world  a 
grand,  perfect,  and  harmonious  System,  the  whole  of  which  is  an  ex- 
terior demonstration  of  the  interior  harmony  contained  in  all  essen- 
tial elements  of  Divine  Love,  Divine  Life,  and  Divine  Wisdom. 

The  second  use  consists  in  the  fact  that  each  form  is  a recipient  for 
the  influx  of  inferior  particles  of  matter,  for  the  recombination  of  these, 
and  for  the  effluxation  of  the  same  into  the  first  degree  of  higher 
forms.  So  each  form  in  each  kingdom  of  creation  is  a polygastric 
composition  that  subserves  the  purpose  of  receiving,  digesting,  and 
transferring  particles,  to  become  the  constituents  of  higher  organiza- 
tions. Every  form  is  of  itself  a perfect  stomach,  and  every  particle 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


617 


that  flows  into  established  forms  in  Nature,  assumes  the  likeness  and 
qualities  of  the  form  which  thus  receives  it.  Therefore  every  parti- 
cle of  matter  proceeds  by  and  through  the  medium  of  forms  in  Na- 
ture, to  the  highest  degree  of  organic  matter,  by  an  unceasing  gyra- 
tion. And  every  change  of  form  in  matter  is  to  the  outer  world 
death  or  disorganization  : for  death  is  nothing  more  than  a change  of 
any  organized  form  or  composition,  as  to  its  mode  of  existence 
But  speaking  in  relation  to  the  whole  System  of  organized  creation, 
a death  of  form  or  principle  can  not  possibly  occur  : for  a change  in 
the  form  of  matter  is  neither  death  nor  annihilation,  but  is  only  an 
ascension  and  recombination,  and  consequently  a new  organization, 
such  as  can  only  be  constituted  of  the  ascending  forms  in  Nature. 

Therefore  the  use  of  forms  in  their  second  degree  of  external  being, 
is  to  convey  the  inferior  particles  of  matter,  constituting  their  own 
and  lower  compositions,  to  higher  planes  of  organic  development. 
Forms,  in  every  case,  are  mediums  of  communication  between  the 
lower  degrees  of  matter  and  the  highest  organization  in  Nature,  which 
is  Man.  And  forming,  as  they  do,  this  medium,  they  constitute 
of  the  whole  system  of  the  outer  world  an  harmonious  and  insepa- 
rable creation,  all  parts  of  which  are  mutually  dependent  upon  each 
other. 

The  third  use  of  forms  is  discoverable  in  their  perpetual  tendency 
to  perfect  and  sublimate  all  inflowing  particles  of  matter.  All  forms, 
then,  are  the  established  organs  by  which  gross  and  inferior  particles 
are  purified  and  refined,  in  order  that  they  may  become  suitable  to 
enter  into,  and  create  and  sustain,  the  highest  form  of  matter,  which 
is  Man.  Thus  the  mineral  assists  to  perfect  particles  by  which  the 
vegetable  is  created,  sustained,  developed,  and  perfected.  So  also 
the  latter,  in  its  turn,  purifies  and  recombines  atoms  of  matter,  which 
thus  become  unsuited  to  remain  in  the  vegetable  world,  and  ascend 
immediately  to  the  animal  creation,  which  is  thus  produced,  sustained, 
and  perfected.  So  with  the  whole  animal  plane  of  creation  : this  in 
like  manner  performs  its  specific  office,  rendering  particles  of  matter 
suitable  to  enter  into,  and  to  compose,  the  human  organization.  Then 
the  latter  Form  comprehends  and  subsists  upon  them  all,  receiving 
constantly  into  its  composition  the  particles  of  purified  and  refined 
matter  that  flow  through  all  the  subordinate  forms  up  to  itself. 

Another  department  of  this  use  in  animated  forms  is,  that  they  es- 
tablish a perfect  principle  of  affinity,  of  affection,  of  association,  of 
reciprocation,  of  harmony,  and  unity  of  action*  and  display  an  insep- 


61S 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


arable  relation  to  each  other,  all  of  which  united  binds  together  the 
whole  system  of  Nature  as  one  grand  and  stupendous  Whole. 


§ 1SI.  Thus  it  is  made  manifest  that  all  material  things  are  forms, 
each  of  which  is  merely  an  external  mode  by  which  its  interior  es- 
sence establishes  a communication  between  itself  and  the  outer  world, 
the  form  being  only  a medium  of  communication  between  the  inner 
and  the  outer.  Nature,  then,  is  composed  of  these  innumerable 
combinations  of  matter,  and  is  a manifest  type  of  tbe  whole  Universe. 
The  Great  Positive  Mind  is  the  Interior  and  Divine  Essence  — is 
the  creative  Cause  of  all  external  effects.  The  Great  Divine  Mind 
is  a Soul,  existing  as  a perfect  organization  of  essential  properties, 
pssences,  and  attributes  ; and  tbe  Mode  by  which  this  Essence  or 
Soul  exists,  is  the  Form  or  outward  development  of  the  whole  Uni- 
verccelum.  The  Divine  Essence  being  the  Soul,  the  Univerccelum 
is  the  Body.  Moreover,  the  latter  is  a perfect  representative,  or,  in 
other  words,  is  a bold  and  clear  expression  of  tbe  interior  possessions 
of  the  D ivine  Mind.  The  Universe  is  the  Mode  by  which  the  Di- 
vine Essence  exists  : and  the  latter  could  not  exist  as  an  Organiza- 
tion without  being  made  perfect  by  a corresponding  exterior  Form, 
such  as  is  displayed  in  the  mighty,  grand,  and  inexpressibly-harmo- 
nious  Universe. 

Thus  it  is  that  form  is  the  express  image  of  its  interior  or  first 
principle  of  life  and  being.  And  tbe  use  of  everything  is  determined 
by  the  specificness  of  its  own  interior  possessions,  and  especially  by 
its  relation  in  form,  in  series,  and  in  degrees  of  perfection,  to  all  other 
living  essences  in  Nature  and  the  Universe. 

It  is  on  the  same  principle  that  the  human  form  is  an  express  like- 
ness of  the  quality  of  its  interior  soul.  And  it  has  been  absolutely 
demonstrated  that  man  materially  is  a perfection  of  all  matter  in  Na- 
ture, and  that  man  spiritually  is  a perfection  of  all  Motion.  There- 
fore man  as  a whole,  constitutes  a complete  system  of  organized 
spirit  and  matter ; and  thus  it  is  that  the  spiritual  principle  of  man  is 
individualized,  and  is  expressed  by  the  human  form,  to  the  outer 
world.  And  thus  likewise  is  the  body  unfolded  by  the  specific  and 
potential  essence  of  its  interior  soul.  Man  is  above  all  forms  in  be- 
ing, and  all  congregations  of  forms  ; for  he  is  the  point,  centre,  and 
goal,  to  which  all  other  forms  flow  and  are  perfected,  refined,  and 
made  useful  to  the  whole  constitution  of  Nature  and  the  Universe. 


nature’s  divine  revelations.  619 

Meanwhile  man  in  reality  is  invisible  to  the  material  senses  ; but  all 
that  sensuous  observers  know  of  man  is  derived  only  from  his  exterior 
representative  and  express  likeness,  which  is  the  outward  form  that 
his  inward  being  assumes. 

From  these  considerations  it  is  made  clear  that  every  human  form 
possesses  an  organized  interior  principle  by  which  the  exterior  is  de- 
termined and  developed.  And  as  the  body  performs  its  use  consid- 
ered as  a medium  by  which  the  inner  man  communicates  with  the 
outer  world,  so  does  the  inner  principle  perform  a use  in  establishing 
a>  connexion  with  the  interior  world.  So  the  human  body  individu- 
alizes the  spirit  in  its  relation  to  the  outer  world,  while  the  spirit  now 
connected  with  the  body  determines  the  perpetuity  and  identical  ex- 
istence of  the  spirit  in  its  connexion  with  the  inner  world,  the  spirit- 
ual form  being  also  an  expression  of  its  interior  soul.  Thus  it  is  that 
the  soul  is  a prior  organization  ; and  when  unfolding  itself  to  the  outer 
world,  it  only  assumes  a coating,  a body,  a form,  suited  to  its  exist- 
ence in  this  rudimental  sphere  of  material  and  spiritual  creation. 

As  everything  is  constantly  assuming  form , which  is  an  express 
likeness  of  its  interior  cause,  so  the  soul  is  constantly  evolving 
thoughts , which  are  suggested  by  influences  proceeding  from  the 
outer,  or  from  the  promptings  of  its  own  internal  principles  : and  the 
thought  is  the  form  of  these  suggestions.  The  forms  of  thoughts  are 
words  — these  always  being  the  express  likeness  of  the  thought 
evolved.  Not  that  any  form  in  being,  especially  the  huma ^ form,  is 
an  exact  expression  in  aspect  or  feature,  of  the  form  and  constitution 
of  its  soul  — but  the  general  form  is  always  the  express  image  of  the 
soul  that  produced  it.  The  aspect  or  features  of  a form  are  not  the 
form  itself;  but  these  are  the  collateral  appendages,  which  of  them- 
selves are  no  decided  expression,  only  as  they  are''  animated  and 
configurated  by  the  active  suggestions  of  the  spirit  within.  But 
what  is  well  to  understand  is,  that  the  exterior  form  of  man  is  the 
express  representation  of  its  productive  essence,  the  soul.  Hence 
form  is  not  the  shape  or  aspect  of  any  substance  whose  general  form 
is  uniformly  manifested.  For  while  form  is  the  mode  by  which 
essence  exists,  and  is  the  type  of  the  essence,  the  aspect,  shape,  and 
features  of  the  form,  are  merely  the  external  particulars  of  the  estab- 
lished structure,  and  are  in  no  case  decidedly  expressive  of  the 
image  of  the  interior  essence. 


62  0 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


§ 1S2.  We  have  now  ascended  in  these  psychological  researches 
to  a consideration  of  the  specific  attributes  of  the  soul  of  man,  their 
relations  to  each  other,  and  their  modes  of  manifestation  from  the 
inner  to  the  outer  world.  For  the  question  is  now  fully  and  irrefu- 
tably answered,  What  is  man  spiritually  ? Likewise  it  is  proved,  that 
the  soul  of  man  is  a decided  and  established  organization,  preserving 
its  identity  by  virtue  of  the  peculiar  character  of  its  own  constitution, 
and  by  the  absence  of  all  affinities  which  could  absorb  it  in  anything 
else.  It  has  been  made  clear  that  every  soul  is  differently  constructed, 
this  being  manifest  from  the  varieties  and  peculiarities  of  the  human 
species.  Every  soul  is  thus  individually  organized,  and  can  not  by 
any  possible  means  become  blended  or  inter-associated  with  others  in 
such  a way  as  that  the  soul’s  individual  existence  would  be  annihila- 
ted or  immersed  in  the  great  ocean  of  moving  and  intangible  sub- 
stances. The  law  of  association  determines  the  perpetuity  of  every 
soul’s  identity,  in  both  the  material  and  spiritual  world  : for  being 
in  constitution  dissimilar  to  each  other  and  to  all  things,  they  can  not 
become  annihilated  or  disorganized. 

The  law  of  eternal  progression  also  governs  the  constant  develop- 
ment of  all  forms,  both  of  a material  and  spiritual  nature.  And  from 
the  tendencies  of  this  law  flow  all  affinities,  affections,  relations, 
forms,  and  degrees  of  refinement.  So  each  law  develops  forces  and 
tendencies  corresponding  to  the  peculiarities  of  the  forms  that  need 
to  be  actuated  and  governed  unchangeably.  Then  it  is  proved  that 
the  soul  «f  man  (which  is  himself),  with  its  form  (which  is  its  body), 
is  an  organized  essence,  such  as  can  not  be  annihilated  or  lost- as  to 
its  identity.  For  the  dissimilarity  of  men  not  only  establishes  their 
identity  in  respect  to  the  outer , but  also  in  respect  to  the  mner. 
And  being  thus  differently  combined,  they  can  not  associate  with 
each  other  in  such  a manner  as  to  become  individually  lost  in  a gen- 
eral commingling  mass : but  each,  according  to  the  law  of  eternal 
association,  must  necessarily  preserve  his  own  identity.  And  men 
will  approach  each  other’s  spheres  only  as  they  are  mutually  conge- 
nial on  the  outer,  in  all  worlds  of  spiritual  existence,  as  well  as  in  the 
physical  world. 

Everything  is  developed  in  Order  and  Form,  and  all  things 
united  form  one  mighty  external  expression  of  Infinite  Wisdom,  one 
of  the  essential  attributes  of  the  Divine  Mind.  Everything  is  actu- 
ated primarily  by  Light  and  Life;  which  are  also  an  outward  ex- 
pression of  Divine  Thought,  or  of  that  potential  essence  which  is 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


621 


Love.  Thus  Light  and  Life  are  Love,  and  Order  and  Form  are 
Wisdom. 

These  considerations,  I repeat,  advance  the  subject  to  another 
train  of  thought,  which  is  to  be  confined  exclusively  to  the  human 
soul  itself.  And  it  will  be  found  that  the  previous  revealments  con- 
tain within  themselves  latent  arguments  whose  strength  and  tendency 
are  not  as  yet  perceived. 

It  has  been  said  that  sensation  is  the  highest  subordinate  element 
of  the  soul,  and  hence  becomes  the  medium  of  communication  be- 
tween the  soul  and  the  form,  and  through  the  form,  with  the  material 
world.  This  truth  is  fully  exemplified  in  the  animal  creation  ; for 
the  highest  element  of  their  constitution  is  this  principle  or  medium 
of  sensation.  Thus  all  animals  are  governed  according  to  the 
promptings  of  Nature  ; that  is,  they  have  suggestions  from  the  outer 
only,  which  they  invariably  obey.  All  their  movements  are  strictly 
mechanical , being  in  every  instance  created  by  outward  influences 
which  affect  the  sensation.  This  being  affected,  creates  inclination  ; 
and  this  operates  upon  the  ivill  to  accomplish  its  gratification.  The 
animal,  however,  possesses  a decided  will,  which  serves  as  a mode- 
rator, and  acts  very  much  upon,  and  modifies  the,  external  sugges- 
tions that  are  presented  for  gratification  : and  this  will,  combined 
with  their  mechanical  ingenuity  displayed  in  escaping  danger  and  in 
procuring  gratification,  has  been  termed  instinct,  and  sometimes  ab- 
solute wisdom.  The  animal,  however,  has  no  mental  possessions 
sufficient  of  themselves  to  be  a governor;  for  all  the  causes  of  move- 
ment, ingenuity,  experience,  instinct,  and  wisdom,  perceptible  in 
animals,  are  situated  on,  and  proceed  from,  the  outer.  They  are 
influences  that  operate  upon  the  sensation,  and  thus  create  a desire 
for  gratification  : and  this  desire  may  be  called  the  ruling  love  of  ani- 
mals. For  whatever  they  desire  or  choose  to  indulge  in,  is  such 
only  as  gratifies  the  element  of  sensation,  which  is  the  actuating  soul 
and  prompter  of  all  their  external  movements. 

The  vegetable  possesses  motion  and  life.  Thus  its  particles  are 
constantly  changing,  and  the  whole  structure  is  constantly  passing 
through  various  stages  of  development.  But  the  animal  possesses 
motion,  life,  and  sensation,  combined.  Motion  governs  the  constant 
action  of  the  constituent  particles  of  its  body : life  is  displayed  in  the 
energy  and  animation  of  the  form ; and  sensation  is  the  soul  or  mo- 
ving principle  by  which  it  is  made  to  act,  and  from  which  are  evolved 
all  inclinations  and  desires.  Motion  can  exist  where  life  and  sensa- 


622 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


tion  do  not;  but  life  can  not  exist  where  motion  is  not,  nor  can  sen- 
sation exist  where  life  and  motion  are  absent.  This  makes  it  clear 
that  one  is  unfolded  from  the  other;  and  sensation,  being  the  highest 
of  them  all,  and  connected  with  the  human  soul,  forms  the  actuating 
principle  of  the  animal,  and  establishes  a perfect  adaptation  between 
its  organization,  with  its  ruling  loves  and  passions,  and  all  things  in 
which  it  habitually  indulges. 

As  sensation  is  the  highest  property  of  the  animal’s  spiritual 
essence,  it  becomes  the  lowest  of  the  spiritual  essence  of  man. 
Thus,  as  has  been  related,  it  establishes  a communication  between 
the  inner  principle  of  man  and  external  Nature.  Hence,  I say,  sen- 
sation is  the  lowest  element  of  the  human  soul,  and  is  the  animating 
principle  which  flows  spontaneously  from  the  animal  into  the  human 
form. 


§ 1S3.  It  now  becomes  necessary  to  classify  the  parts  of  the  soul, 
in  order  to  conceive  of  the  relation  which  they  sustain  to  each  other, 
and  of  the  three  great  essential  parts,  which  correspond  to  end,  cause, 
and  effect.  The  end  or  ultimate  design  in  prospect,  is  always  the 
cause,  which  cause  institutes  an  effect ; and  both  of  these  are  engaged 
in  accomplishing  the  end. 

I discever,  then,  that  the  soul  is  composed  of  three  distinct  parts; 
and  these  are  Love,  Will,  and  Wisdom. 

Love  is  the  first  or  rudimental  element  of  the  human  soul.  It  is 
that  liquid,  mingling,  delicate,  inexpressible  element  which  is  felt  in 
the  depths  of  every  human  spirit,  because  it  is  its  germinal  essence. 

Will  is  a living  force  which  serves  as  the  connecting  medium 
between  Love  and  Wisdom,  being  subject  to  the  influence  and  sug- 
gestions of  each.  It  is  the  innate  consciousness  of  energy,  or  force  ; 
and  it  has  been  supposed  to  be  an  absolutely-independent  element 
of  the  mind,  beyond  the  possibility  of  being  influenced  by  external 
captivations. 

Wisdom  is  the  perfection  of  Love.  It  is  the  sealing  element  of 
the  human  soul ; it  is  the  establishment  of  the  soul’s  perfect  constitu- 
tion. Wisdom  flows  from  love,  is  directed  by  experience,  modified 
by  will,  and  rendered  perfect  by  knowledge.  Wisdom  is  the  thinking 
principle,  the  faculty  that  cogitates,  investigates,  searches,  and  ex- 
plores, the  fields  of  terrestrial  and  celestial  existence.  It  is  the  faculty 
that  analyzes,  calculates,  and  imperatively  commands  obedience 
from  all  the  subordinate  possessions  of  Will  and  Love. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


623 


These  three  parts  of  the  human  soul,  then,  being  designated,  I 
will  descend  into  some  considerations  relative  to  their  mode  of  mani- 
festation through  the  body  in  the  outer  world,  in  order  that  the  great 
question  respecting  the  powers  and  actuating  principles  of  the  human 
soul  may  become  settled,  and  equally  comprehended  by  all. 

Love  being  the  first  element,  or  the  essence  of  the  soul,  is  accord- 
ingly imperfect,  unguided,  and,  like  the  lower  forms  in  Nature,  is 
developed  angularly.  It  is  the  parent  of  eccentricity,  impulse,  fan- 
tasy, imagination,  and  inflated  conceptions  of  all  things  invisible,  in- 
tangible, and  unreal.  Also  Love  is  the  element  of  tenderness,  kind- 
ness,  affection,  attachment,  and  of  all  kinds  of  pure  and  unsophisti- 
cated sentiments,  such  as  gush  spontaneously  from  the  depths  of 
the  soul,  and  are  expressed  in  music,  in  language,  in  paintings,  in 
foliage,  in  embroidery,  and  in  all  the  indescribable  beauties  that  line 
the  vaulted  chambers  of  the  expanded  heavens.  Love  is  the  element 
that  conceives  of  all  loveliness,  of  gentleness,  of  sweetness,  of  fra- 
grance, and  of  beauty,  in  all  their  various  modes  of  exterior  manifes- 
tation. 

Love  gives  rise  to  an  affection  for  other  forms,  or  for  manJcind 
generally.  To  gratify  this  affection,  men  form  societies,  associations, 
communities,  brotherhoods,  sects,  and  congregations,  as  these  are 
exemplified  in  the  outer  world. 

Love  also  manifests  itself  in  conjugal  attachment ; which  is  out- 
wardly expressed  in  individual  association  and  matrimony.  And  this 
same  love  is  modified  into  a love  for  mankind  generally  : and  this 
begets  families,  sects,  and  associations. 

Love  has  also  an  affection  for  music.  This  is  outwardly  expressed 
even  in  the  confusion  of  sounds  that  are  invented  by  the  uncultivated 
inhabitants  of  the  earth,  and  which  they  endeavor  to  express  by  em- 
ploying instruments  of  the  most  imperfect  and  discordant  character. 
The  sounds  created  are  always  in  accordance  with  the  wisdom  of. 
this  love ; and  thus,  on  the  other  hand,  this  insuppressible  affection 
for  musical  harmony  has  also  led  to  the  invention  of  delicate  and 
finely-constructed  instruments,  by  which  it  expresses  itself  outwardly 
in  the  most  delicate  and  harmonious  sounds,  which  have  a corre- 
sponding influence  upon  the  thoughts  and  conceptions  of  the  soul. 

Love  involves  an  affection  for  the  beautiful.  This  is  expressed 
in  the  outer  world  by  the  construction  of  forms  of  the  most  perfect 
symmetry,  and  by  ideal  embodiments  of  what  is  angelic  and  celes-  ' 
tial  : also  by  beautiful  expressions,  or  superior  combinations  of  words 


624 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


expressive  of  the  eloquence  of  the  soul,  and  likewise  of  the  inward 
conceptions  of  the  beautiful.  Statuary  and  symmetrical  forms  of  ev- 
ery variety  are  constructed  ; mansions,  edifices,  and  temples,  are 
erected  according  to  the  most  perfect  conceptions  of  the  grand,  the 
beautiful,  and  the  magnificent.  Gardens  of  shrubbery  and  flowers 
are  planned  according  to  a conception  of  perfect  order  and  beauty. 
— And  all  of  these  are  but  expressions  of  love  as  it  assumes  this  spe- 
cific direction. 

Love  has  also  an  affection  for  the  invisible  and  the  sublime — the 
outward  expressions  of  which  are  the  many  ideal  conceptions  that 
clothe  themselves  in  words,  and  which  also  infuse  into  all  the  other 
affections  an  element  of  chastity,  refinement,  and  amiability.  This 
affection  of  the  love  imparts  grace,  ease,  and  elegance,  to  every  ex- 
ternal expression  of  the  other  affections  of ‘love. 

, Love  has  an  affection  for  self — which  is  expressed  by  the  inge- 
nious, secretive,  and  unrighteous  plans  that  are  invented  for  purposes 
of  self-emolument ; by  the  many  disturbances  that  occur  in  society; 
by  the  destruction  of  life ; by  the  employment  of  deceptive  expres- 
sions ; and  by  all  those  unreal  and  unsanctified  forms  and  corrupt 
inventions,  which,  through  the  misdirection  of  this  affection,  prevail 
throughout  the  whole  human  brotherhood. 

Love  involves  the  affection  of  unbounded  benevolence.  This  is 
openly  expressed  by  the  formation  of  societies  and  institutions,  and 
by  all  those  great  and  mighty  movements  that  are  so  much  admired 
by  all  expanded  minds,  for-  their  tendency  to  an  amelioration  of  the 
condition  of  mankind,  and  to  the  ultimate  establishment  of  distribu- 
tive justice  and  universal  righteousness. 

Love  has  an  affection  for  the  just.  This  is  openly  expressed  by 
all  the  conscientious  relations  that  exist  between  man  and  man,  and 
by  those  exchanges  which  are  just  and  reciprocal.  This  love  is  the 
Jove  of  the  moral,  of  the  holy,  and  of  the  righteous.  It  is  the  love 
which  conceives  of  all  Divine  perfection,  and  which  creates  all  yearn- 
ings for  purity,  refinement,  and  distributive  goodness.  It  is  that 
which  breathes  an  affection  for  all  that  is  of  the  Divine  Mind,  and 
for  all  those  exalted  and  moral  sentiments  which  constitute  the  high- 
est attributes  of  man. 

Another  affection  of  love  gives  rise  to  hope.  This  clothes  itself 
in  an  aerial  garment  of  contemplation,  anticipation,  and  expectation, 
of  all  that  which  is  desired  by  the  other  affections  of  love. 

Love  also  embraces  an  affection  for  the  food  which  enters  into 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


626 


man’s  material  form.  This  love  expresses  itself  outwardly  in  pro- 
curing and  delicately  combining  food,  and  committing  it  to  the  stom- 
ach. It  leads  to  the  cultivation  of  those  portions  of  the  vegetable 
and  animal  kingdoms  which  contribute  most  to  its  gratification.  It 
leads  also  to  a great  variety  of  preparations  of  food,  and  it  is  con- 
stantly expressing  itself  by  imparting  delicious  flavors  to  the  vegetable 
and  animal  substances  that  are  agreeable  to  its  desires  and  suitable  to 
the  requirements  of  the  human  body. 

Thus  it  is  seen  that  Love,  as  the  germ  of  the  human  soul,  has 
various  modes  of  manifestation  ; and  these  consist  in  the  external  and 
ingenious  inventions  and  structures  that  are  existing  in  the  world. 
A more  definite  understanding  will  hereafter  be  obtained  concerning 
Love,  when  I proceed  to  consider  the  modifying  tendency  of  Wis- 
dom, which  is  the  proper  controlling  influence  of  all  the  affections 
embraced  in  the  love-principle. 


§ 184.  From  the  faculty  of  Love,  as  the  basis  of  the  soul,  flows 
the  faculty  of  Will.  This  then  becomes  the  mediatorial  faculty 
of  the  human  mind,  and  is  the  means  employed  by  Love  to  accom- 
plish whatever  end  it  desires.  Herein  are  made  plain  the  three  mo- 
ving principles  engaged  in  accomplishing  any  end  conceived  of  and 
desired.  Love  perceives  and  conceives  that  which  is  congenial  to 
its  affections.  The  end  to  be  attained  is  the  cause  of  Love’s  prompt- 
ing the  Will  to  act  upon  the  body  in  order  to  accomplish  it.  In 
other  words,  Will  is  employed  as  a means  by  Love  to  attain  the  end 
for  which  it  has  an  affection. 

Will  in  all  cases  is  subject  to  the  promptings  of  the  element  of 
Love,  and  its  acts  in  all  cases  originate  in  the  suggestions  thence  de- 
rived. Will  is  the  faculty  employed  to.  move  the  body  in  the  per- 
formance of  any  external  work  for  the  accomplishment  of  which  the 
Love  has  conceived  an  affection.  Love  conceives  of  the  end  or 
object  which  would  be  suited  to  its  affection,  and  gratifying  to  its. 
desires  ; and  the  perception  of  this  is  the  primary  cause  of  the  Love’s 
prompting  the  Will  to  act  for  its  accomplishment.  The  Will,  how-~ 
ever,  is  a living  force,  a perfect  faculty,  and  a decided  portion  of  the 
soul.  By  its  inherent  possessions  and  influence,  the  body  is  made 
to  move  ; and  all  the  changing  attitudes  of  the  latter  are  the  exterior 
forms  and  projections  of  the  faculty  of  Will.  In  other  words,  Will 
evolves  thoughts,  as  they  are  suggested  by  the  workings  of  Love  and 

40 


G2G 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


Love’s  affections  ; and  these  thoughts  of  the  Will  are  expressed  in 
manifest  forms  to  the  outer  world  — that  is,  in  the  assumed  appear- 
ances and  movements  of  the  body,  and  in  all  external  actions  that  are 
put  forth  by  it.  All  these  are  the  exterior  forms  of  the  thoughts 
evolved  by  Will.  The  latter  being  a means  employed  by  Love  to 
institute,  construct,  or  create,  any  form  for  which  the  Love  has  con- 
ceived an  affection,  it  is  therefore  a mediator  and  means  by  which 
all  motion,  all  construction,  and  all  exterior  manifestations,  are  pro- 
duced. 

Will  has  no  independent  action,  and  can  not  institute  a movement 
of  itself : but  it  moves  only  as  it  is  excited  and  prompted  by  the 
Love.  Love , therefore,  is  the  primary  cause  of  external  action  ; and 
Will  is  the  effect  produced  : and  the  effects  of  this,  again,  are  the 
exterior  things  which  it  accomplishes.  In  other  words,  Will  is  em- 
ployed by  Love  to  develop  externally  the  expression  of  its  own 
thoughts. 

If  a man  has  in  view  the  construction  of  a beautiful  edifice,  the 
exterior  and  interior  portions  of  which  are  perfectly  defined  in  the 
mind,  it  is  because  he  has  first  conceived  of  the  uses  which  the  edi- 
fice with  its  various  portions  may  fulfil.  And  as  it  is  the  use  that 
plans  and  arranges  the  whole  construction,  it  may  be  said  that  the 
plan  of  the  edifice,  as  to  proposed  form  and  appearance,  precisely 
corresponds  to,  and  represents,  the  use,  the  conception  of  which  was 
the  cause  of  the  plan’s  being  instituted. 

Again,  it  may  be  said  that  the  use  to  which  the  edifice  is  adapted 
corresponds  precisely  to  the  form  of  his  affections,  or  the  prompting 
desires  of  his  love.  Having  the  use  and  plan  properly  impressed 
upon  the  mind,  his  love  for  the  attainment  of  the  end  prompts  the 
Will  to  action,  which  implicitly  obeys,  and  external  movements  are 
at  once  instituted  for  the  construction  and  completion  of  the  edifice. 
Then  the  edifice  in  its  parts  also  corresponds  to  the  isolated  move- 
ments of  the  Will  among  the  materials  which  are  adapted  to  its  struc- 
ture, and  which  serve  to  form  the  perfect  Whole. 

As  the  use  perceived,  suggested  the  form  and  structure  of  the 
building,  so  the  building  corresponds  to  the  use  to  which  it  is  adapt- 
ed ; and  the  building  and  its  use  connectedly  represent  the  affection 
or  conception  of  the  Love.  Thus  the  Love  has  openly  expressed 
its  thought ; and  this  expression  consists  in  the  edifice  which  has 
been  erected.  It  is  thus  seen  that  the  cause  of  the  building  is  in- 
volved in  the  use  to  which  it  is  adapted.  This  operates  upon  the 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


627 


Love  ; and  this,  again,  prompts  the  Will : and  thus  the  end  is  ac- 
complished. 

§ 185.  The  third  faculty  of  the  soul  is  evolved  from  Will  and 
Love,  and  is  the  highest  and  most  perfect  one  ; and  this  joins  and 
pervades  the  others,  so  that  the  three  form  a perfect  Whole.  This 
faculty  is  Wisdom. 

The  office  of  Wisdom  is  to  listen  silently  to  the  suggestions  of 
Love  and  Will,  and  to  modify  these  according  to  reason,  form,  or- 
der, and  perfect  harmony.  Love  without  Will  would  be  eccentric, 
impulsive,  disorderly,  and  confused,  even  to  such  an  extent  that  the 
whole  system  of  Nature  would  be  nothing  more  than  a vast  con- 
gregation of  disorganized  forms.  Everything  would  be  misplaced, 
misformed,  misconstructed,  and  rendered  useless  to  the  requirements 
of  man.  But  Love  being  modified  by  Will,  becomes  at  once  lim- 
ited as  to  its  circle  of  movement,  arid  confined  in  its  conceptions  to 
a definite  sphere.  Yet  Love  and  Will  would  both  be  eccentric  and 
ungoverned  in  their  movements  among  material  things,  were  it  not 
for  the  presence  of  Wisdom,  which  presides  over  and  directs  them 
both.  Wisdom  is  contained  in  the  germ  of  the  soul,  which  is  Love 
— is  developed  in  the  body,  which  is  Will  — and  perfected  in  the 
flower,  which  is  itself.  Wisdom,  then,  pervades,  directs,  modifies, 
and  governs  them  all,  because  it  is  the  crowning  faculty  of  the  soul, 
and  the  most  perfect  of  all  its  attributes. 

Will,  then,  is  the  perfection  of  Love,  and  hence  receives,  con- 
tains, and  continually  manifests,  all  the  qualities,  thoughts,  affections, 
and  desires  of  Love.  And  Wisdom  is  the  perfect  form  of  them 
both,  because  Wisdom  is  an  ultimate  progression  of  them  ; and  it  is 
a representation  of  all  their  latent  qualities  and  unexpressed  affec- 
tions. Wisdom  is  that  faculty  of  the  soul  which  gives  order  and 
form  to  all  things  in  the  outer  world  ; and  Love  gives  to  order  and 
form  light,  life,  taste,  grace,  and  elegance.  And  Will  is  the  execu- 
tive faculty  between  Wisdom  and  Love,  and  obeys  perpetually  the 
suggestions  of  Love  as  these  are  sanctioned  by  Wisdom. 

The  eccentricity  of  Love  and  Will  is  very  much  modified  by  the 
pervading  and  controlling  influence  of  Wisdom,  which  becomes  their 
director,  governor,  and  lord.  Were  it  not  for  Wisdom,  order,  form, 
and  adaptation,  would  not  be  known,  either  in  the  natural  or  artifi- 
cial world.  So,  then,  the  outward  form  of  Wisdom  is  the  perfect 
order  and  uniformity  displayed  in  the  outer  world.  The  perfect 


628 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


form  of  Love  is  the  use  for  which  all  external  things  are  designed 
and  adapted.  Love  is  also  expressed  in  the  life,  grace,  and  elegance, 
which  render  every  exterior  form  lovely  and  admirable. 

Thus  it  is  seen  that  Wisdom  is  the  great  head  and  flower  of  the 
human  soul,  and  that  it  is  perpetually  engaged  in  the  evolution  of 
thoughts  which  clothe  themselves  in  material  things  in  the  outer 
world.  The  more  Wisdom  is  permitted  to  act,  the  more  its  sphere 
of  action  is  extended,  and  the  more  will  the  natural  and  artificial 
world  display  beauty,  order,  and  harmony.  But  the  more  it  is  re- 
stricted in  its  action,  and  the  less  its  teachings  are  heeded,  the  more 
will  Nature  and  the  artificial  creations  of  man  become  a disorganized 
and  useless  system,  instead  of  displaying  peace,  order,  beauty,  and 
universal  reciprocation.  Love  is  only  the  life  of  things;  Will  is  the 
means  employed  to  obtain  a desired  end  ; but  Wisdom  is  the  order, 
beauty,  harmony,  and  perfection  of  them  all. 

The  Great  Divine  Mind,  in  essence,  is  Love  : this  is  the  light  and 
life  of  the  Universe.  The  Universe  itself  is  the  Body  of  Love,  and 
its  perfect  Form.  But  Wisdom  is  the  highest  attribute,  and  the 
great  ultimate  of  eternal  Design.  And  Wisdom  gives  to  Light  and 
Life  a Body  — and  to  this  Body,  Order  and  Form.  The  whole  is 
rendered  thereby  an  harmonious  System,  each  outward  form  being  a 
perfect  representative  of  its  creative  cause. 

Tbe  following,  then,  are  the  three  Parts  of  the  great  and  universal 
System  : The  Divine  Mind,  or  Love,  which  is  the  Soul  ; the  Uni- 
verse, which  is  the  Form,  Means,  Mediator,  and  Body  ; and  Spirit, 
which  is  the  Order,  the  Form,  the  Wisdom,  and  the  Grand  Design 
of  the  whole  System  of  the  Univercoelum.  The  End  primarily  de- 
signed to  be  accomplished  was  the  individualization  of  the  human 
spiirit ; and  for  the  attainment  of  this,  Cause  and  Effect  were  brought 
into  requisition.  The  Divine  Mind  is  the  Cause,  the  Universe  is  the 
Effect,  and  Spirit  is  the  ultimate  Design.  The  truth  of  this  is  de- 
monstrated in  every  department  of  this  terrestrial  sphere,  and  is  par- 
ticularly exemplified  in  the  nature  and  developments  of  the  human 
soul,  which  are  in  exact  correspondence  with  the  great  System  of 
the  Universe.  Everything  is  perpetually  displaying,  in  its  inward  and 
outward  movements,  End,  Cause,  and  Effect;  and  Light  and  Life 
are  Love,  and  Order  and  Form  are  Wisdom.* 

* It  may  be  well  here  to  remark,  once  for  all,  upon  these  expressions,  that  “ Light 
and  Life”  mean  simply  the  conception  of  the  end  desired,  and  the  activity  which  en- 
sues as  tending  toward  its  accomplishment.  The  two  combined  constitute  the  prin- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


629 


It  is  highly  necessary,  then,  that  the  human  mind  should  compre- 
hend the  great  truth  that  nothing  exists  in  the  outer  world  except  as  it 
is  produced  and  developed  by  an  interior  essence,  and  that  of  this 
essence  the  exterior  is  the  perfect  representative.  Among  all  the 
various  arts  and  sciences  that  now  exist  in  the  world,  may  be  found 
demonstrations  of  this  truth,  and  also  of  its  vast  importance.  Forms 
do  not  exist  with  the  mechanic  or  with  the  artist,  merely  as  produc- 
tions of  the  outer  combinations  of  matter  ; but  every  form  invented 
by  man  is  a precise  representative  of  the  interior  thought  which  is 
the  cause  of  its  creation.  Every  form  is  such  as  corresponds  to  the 
inward  suggestion  of  Love,  and  is  created  by  the  living  effort  of 
Will,  and  modified  and  rendered  perfect  by  the  admonitions  and 
directions  of  Wisdom. 


§ 186.  Metaphysicians  have  devoted  much  time  to  discussing 
questions  concerning  the  innate  consciousness  of  the  soul,  “ free 
will,”  “ necessity,”  and  the  nature  and  relations  of  the  faculties.  The 
faculties  thought  to  compose  the  various  portions  of  the  soul,  have 
been  minutely  classified  under  the  general  divisions  of  propensities, 
sentiments,  and  intellectual  faculties.  The  first  of  these  are  repre- 
sented as  relating  to  self  and  to  things  in  the  outer  world  ; the  second 
as  giving  rise  to  moral  conceptions  and  the  sense  of  justice  ; and  the 
third  as  comprising  the  powers  of  reason,  analysis,  and  investigation. 
Many  such  classifiers  have  given  to  the  soul  the  faculty  of  absolute 
free  will,  or  a power  to  act  or  not  to  act  in  any  specified  manner, 
uninfluenced  by  any  interior  or  external  thing.  They  have  also 
given  to  the  soul  innate  faculties  perpetually  disposed  to  wickedness 
and  abomination,  delighting  to  indulge  in  every  species  of  evil  and 
licentiousness,  thirsting  to  injure  mankind,  to  destroy  life,  and  seek- 
ing, by  a sacrifice  of  all  moral  principles,  one’s  own  emolument. 
Meanwhile,  such  metaphysicians  have  believed  the  human  mind  to 
be  possessed  of  absolute  independence  as  to  its  powers  of  action, 
and  have  disconnected  it  from  the  influence  of  every  material  thing. 

I now  discover  why  all  these  opinions  have  arisen,  and  why  they 
have  become  embodied  in  all  the  philosophical  and  metaphysical 

ciple  of  Love,  which  is  nothing  more  than  an  operative  attraction  toward  an  end  or 
object  first  definitely  conceived  in  the  mind.  “ Order^and  Form”  mean  the  perfect 
organization  and  arrangement : and  as  Wisdom  alone  can  prescribe  a consistent 
organization  and  arrangement,  and  such  as  would  be  permanently  gratifying  to  the 
Love,  so  the  Order  and  Form  displayed  when  the  organization  and  arrangement  are 
completed,  are  considered  as  a perfect  e-inbodimcnt  or  expression  of  Wisdom. 


630 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


systems  which  most  prevail.  It  is  because  the  mind  can  not  analyze 
and  comprehend  itself.  I moreover  discover  that  the  soul  has  no 
such  inherent  propensities  and  desires  for  evil  and  unrighteousness 
— that  it  has  no  desire  to  injure,  or  to  dissemble,  or  to  be  deceptive. 
Moreover,  I discover  that  it  has  no  absolute  independence,  and 
that  all  those  metaphysical  theories  are  decidedly  untrue  — merely 
because  they  have  sprung  from  the  superficial  conceptions  of  the 
mind,  and  not  from  a knowledge  of  its  interior  and  divine  essence. 
It  is  given  me  to  know  that  the  human  soul  is,  in  a low  degree, 
an  express  image  and  likeness  of  the  Great  Positive  Mind,  and  that 
it  is  an  offspring  of  the  incessant  and  successive  developments 
of  those  mighty  attributes  which,  connectedly,  are  the  cause  of  all 
things. 

The  cause  of  these  metaphysical  misconceptions,  I repeat,  lies  in 
the  fact  that  no  substance,  or  compound,  or  mind,  possesses  within 
itself  the  power  of  self-investigation.  The  germ  can  not  understand 
its  own  qualities,  but  the  perfect  development  can  ; because  it  is  a 
higher  and  unfolded  state  of  the  qualities  of  the  germ,  and  is  thereby 
enabled  to  comprehend  all  below  its  exalted  state  of  being.  So 
the  human  mind  can  comprehend  all  that  is  below  it,  but  can  not 
either  comprehend  itself  or  any  higher  degrees  or  spheres  of  anima- 
tion. And  thus,  were  it  not  that  I am  permitted  to  occupy  a higher 
sphere  of  thought  and  observation,  the  soul  would  also  appear  to  me 
as  an  indefinite  and  ambiguous  consciousness  which  is  neither  to  be 
comprehended  as  embracing  any  form,  order,  or  substance,  tangible 
to  the  senses. 

Man,  when  investigating  the  faculties,  propensities,  and  tendencies, 
of  the  soul,  inquires  outwardly  — and  thus  the  evidence  on  which 
legitimate  conclusions  might  be  based  necessarily  escapes  his  atten- 
tion. This  evidence  would  otherwise  gush  from  the  promptings  of 
his  own  interior  self  and  proclaim  truthful  conclusions  and  their 
demonstration.  Herein,  then,  is  found  the  reason  why  man  has  not 
as  yet  understood  his  own  nature  and  composition.  The  reason 
why  all  these  evil  propensities  have  been  attributed  to  man  as  inhe- 
rent in  the  nature  of  his  soul,  is,  that  men  have  confined  themselves 
to  the  outer  plane  of  observation,  and  have  there  beheld  the  fantastic 
misdirections  of  the  human  love  — of  love  unguided  and  unmodified 
by  the  admonitions  of  Wisdom.  They  judge  merely  from  the  exter- 
nals or  clothings  of  things,  and  from  these  accuse  the  affections  of  the 
soul  of  being  degenerated,  degraded,  and  absolutely  evil.  By  he- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


631 


holding  the  inconsistent  movements  of  men,  the  mind  conceives  at 
once  of  the  misdirection  of  Love  and  Will,  and  of  their  misapplica- 
tion as  respects  the  individual  and  general  benefit  of  the  race.  And 
in  order  to  create  harmony  in  all  things,  and  beauty  and  utility  in  all 
external  forms,  it  is  necessary  to  inform  and  develop  the  human 
Wisdom;  and  this  will  immediately  dissipate  all  confusion  and  dis- 
order in  the  outer  world,  and  make  all  things  useful,  harmonious, 
and  reciprocal. 


§ 187.  Remember  that  the  outer  forms  will  correspond  to  the 
condition  of  the  interior  man.  Remember,  too,  that  Wisdom  is  the 
grand  faculty  of  the  human  soul,  and  that  it  must  occupy  a position 
commanding  and  pre-eminent.  It  should  exert  an  influence  over 
all  the  subordinate  faculties  and  affections  of  the  soul,  and  they 
should  (and  will  ultimately)  bow  in  obedience  to  its  mandates. 

Wisdom  is  the  lord  of  creation  : for  by  it  the  fields  of  the  vegeta 
ble  kingdom  are  rendered  fertile  and  useful,  and  the  forms  in  the  ani- 
mal world  are  made  to  fulfil  the  office  for  which  they  were  designed, 
and  to  benefit  and  administer  to  the  happiness  of  the  human  race. 
By  it  Love  is  directed,  and  all  its  affections  are  modified  and  ren- 
dered useful.  By  it  the  various  objects  that  are  created  by  Love, 
are  all  adapted  to  uses  and  made  beneficial  to  mankind. 

Love  enjoys  intercourse  with  the  outer  world  by  and  through  the 
medium  of  sensation.  Were  it  not  for  this  latter,  commerce  would 
not  exist;  for  it  is  by  this  only  that  the  human  soul  can  sympathize 
with  things  on  the  outer,  and  conceive  of  uses  adapted  to  its  nature 
and  constitution  ; and  it  is  by  this  that  the  soul  is  enabled  to  enjoy 
the  incessant  inflowings  of  the  elements  of  all  material  things.  It  is 
by  this  medium  that  Love  breathes  forth  an  affection  for  external 
things;  and  it  is  by  this  that  the  inner  and  the  outer  are  enabled  to 
associate  with  each  other.  Therefore,  by  Wisdom  should  Love  be 
directed  ; and  notwithstanding  its  conceptions  and  affections  are  am- 
biguous, eccentric,  and  imaginative,  a well-developed  Wisdom  never- 
permits  an  action  of  the  Will  before  those  affections  are  essentially 
modified,  according  to  principles  of  utility. 

Will  is  likewise  under  the  potential  direction  of  Wisdom. 
Whenever  the  faculty  of  Will  is  instigated  by  Love  to  perform  an 
external  act,  Wisdom  perceives  the  suggestion,  conceives  of  its  use, 
and  directs  the  Will-force  to  its  accomplishment.  Will  is  some- 


632 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


times  actuated  by  Love  alone;  and  this  is  when  the  faculty  of  Wis 
dom  is  undeveloped  — and  then  the  exterior  manifestations  of  Will 
are  impulsive,  unreasonable,  and  often  injurious  to  the  well-being  of 
man.  When  Will  is  thus  acted  on,  the  consequences  are  injurious 
to  the  general  harmony  and  required  unity  of  all  things.  A knowl- 
edge of  this  fact  shows  the  importance  of  a universal  elevation  of  the 
human  mind,  and  of  its  being  properly  instructed  concerning  its  own 
interior  nature,  and  also  concerning  its  relation  to  the  outer  world. 
It  shows  that  the  form  or  body  should  he  superiorly  situated  in  order 
to  cause  a proper  development  of  the  intellect ; and  this  can  only  be 
accomplished  by  following  the  dictates  of  a well-constituted  and  well- 
developed  Wisdom. 

The  cause  of  disunity  in  the  actions,  feelings,  and  affections,  of 
men,  is  to  he  found  in  the  uneducated  condition  and  misdirection  of 
the  faculties  of  the  human  soul,  and  not  in  their  innate  depravity,  or 
tendency  to  sin.  The  cause  of  every  species  of  licentiousness  and 
immorality,  and  of  the  unrestrained  action  of  what  are  now  called  the 
baser  passions  of  the  soul,  is  found  only  in  the  ignorance,  folly,  and  im- 
becility, of  minds  unguided  by  the  faculty  of  Wisdom.  Then,  again,  it 
is  clear  that  these  things  would  not  exist  were  the  human  race  spiritu- 
ally elevated,  and  their  faculties  so  expanded  as  that  nothing  would 
exist  hut  the  perfect  Order  and  Form  of  Wisdom.  This  would  (and 
will ) he  universal  harmony,  distributive  justice,  equal  love  to  the 
neighbor,  and  brotherly  kindness  and  charity.  Let  every  one,  then, 
desist  from  proclaiming  metaphysical  hypotheses  derogatory  to  the 
innate  divineness  of  the  human  soul,  and  rise  to  the  plane  of  interior 
and  natural  thought  — and  then  let  all  their  external  movements  cor- 
respond, not  to  the  hereditary  affections  and  belief  of  the  Love,  hut 
to  the  unrestricted  sanctions  of  a well-instructed  and  well-developed 
Wisdom. 

Here,  then,  is  the  reason  why  men  have  so  long  adhered  to  the 
imaginative  beliefs  of  their  Love,  and  not  listened  to  the  spontaneous 
teachings  of  their  judgment.  Hereditary  opinions  of  every  kind  are 
merely  the  early  impressions  made  upon  the  Love.  But  men  who 
discard  all  hereditary  affection  for  thought  are  those  in  whom  is  de- 
veloped the  highest  faculty  of  the  soul,  which  is  Wisdom.  From 
this  they  receive  and  impart  instruction  ; by  it  all  their  external  move- 
ments are  governed  ; and  all  their  constructions  and  inventions,  which 
are  prompted  by  the  Love,  are  by  it  made  perfect  in  Order  and 
Form. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


633 


§ 188.  Men  in  general  believe  that  they  have  power  to  act  inde- 
pendently of  all  influences,  either  from  interior  promptings  or  the 
suggestions  of  the  outer  world.  Of  the  truth  of  this  they  suppose 
they  have  an  internal  consciousness  — feeling,  as  they  do,  a sense  of 
a self-existent  power  to  move  according  to  a desire  of  the  Will, 
which  appears  to  be  born  of  and  governed  by  itself.  The  reason  of 
this  conviction  is  plain  : No  man  has  the  power  within  himself  to 
perceive  the  relation  and  connexion  existing  between  each  portion 
of  the  soul  ; and  therefore  all  the  conceptions  which  man  can  have 
of  himself  internal  are  only  shadowy,  intangible,  and  unsatisfactory. 
He  feels  a conviction  that  he  exists  and  moves  independently  of  ev- 
ery other  tangible  form,  and  uninfluenced  by  any  apparent  cause. 
He  feels  that  he  has  the  power  to  do  or  not  to  do  anything  which 
presents  itself  to  the  mind.  He  feels  that  he  possesses  strength  and 
independence  to  receive  or  reject,  to  act  or  not  to  act;  and  he  has 
been  taught  to  believe  that  he  is  a “free  agent”  unacted  on,  uninflu- 
enced, ungoverned,  and  unrestrained,  in  any  of  his  actions. 

The  cause  of  this  inward  conviction  lies  in  the  individual  workings 
of  the  three  parts  of  the  soul,  which  are  Love,  Will,  and  Wisdom. 
It  has  been  shown  that  Love  prompts  action,  both  from  its  own  inte- 
rior workings  and  also  by  its  desires  excited  by  material  things  hold- 
ing a close  relation  to  the  sensation  of  the  body.  Love  is  thus  the 
primary  cause  of  all  action,  of  all  will,  and  of  all  thought,  in  the  hu- 
man soul.  The  transition  of  thought  from  Love  to  Will  is  imper- 
ceptible ; and  at  the  moment  thought  arouses  the  Will  to  volition,  a 
man  feels  conscious  that  he  has  power  to  withstand  the  impulse,  and 
remain  unmoved.  This  conviction  is  truthful ; but  this  does  not 
establish  the  independence  of  the  will-force  of  the  soul  : for  Will  in 
all  cases  is  a passive  faculty,  never  acting  unless  prompted  by  foreign 
influences  or  interior  causes. 

Furthermore,  a man  can  not  be  conscious  of  the  transition  of 
thought  from  the  faculty  of  Will  to  Wisdom  ; and  the  moment  this 
latter  faculty  is  brought  into  requisition,  he  apparently  experiences  an 
additional  strength,  and  the  conviction  of  an  independent  power  of 
action.  The  reason  of  this  is  equally  plain  : the  will-force  seldom 
acts  without  first  receiving  approbation  from  the  faculty  of  Wisdom  ; 
and  the  hesitation  which  occurs  in  the  mind  between  the  periods  of 
the  suggestion  of  Love  and  the  sanction  of  the  Wisdom,  impresses 
the  conviction  upon  the  mind  that  there  is  a choice  or  independence 
of  action  residing  within  the  Will  itself  Man  feels  an  impulse  to 


634 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


move,  but  hesitates  ; and  this  is  an  indication  of  the  workings  and 
deliberations  of  the  Wisdom.  And  when  it  sanctions,  the  mind  feels 
consciously  impelled  onward  ; and  the  person  manifests  great  force 
and  firmness,  and  presses  forward  with  an  innate  conviction  of  pru- 
dence, justice,  and  truth,  and  thus  feels  an  interior  approbation. 
This  always  occurs  with  minds  well  constituted  and  superiorly  de- 
veloped. 

But  the  Wisdom  itself  is  not  a faculty  self-instructed  and  uninflu- 
enced by  interior  or  external  things  ; for  the  judgment  is  developed 
by  interior  and  outward  experience,  from  which  it  learns  policy,  pru- 
dence, order,  harmony,  and  propriety,  as  to  its  movements  in  refer- 
ence to  its  associate  faculties,  and  its  interior  direction  in  respect  to 
outward  action. 

When  the  Will  is  impressed  with  an  irresistible  impulse  from  the 
Love,  it  sometimes  acts  without  consulting  or  listening  to  the  admo- 
nitions of  the  Wisdom.  When  this  is  the  case,  a man  feels  an  in- 
nate consciousness  of  violation,  and  an  unnerving  sense  of  impropri- 
ety and  injustice.  He  experiences  an  inward  conviction  of  guilt, 
and  of  ingratitude  to  the  silent  hut  constant  promptings  of  the  Wis- 
dom. And  the  internal  condemnation  which  he  feels  results  from 
the  disapprobations  of  the  judgment ; and  the  workings  of  a violated 
conscience  are  expressed  in  the  configurations  of  the  countenance. 

Thus  it  is  seen  that  the  Will  is  a passive  faculty,  subject  to  the 
command  and  action  of  the  Love  and  Wisdom.  There  exists  a 
perpetual  strife  between  the  suggestions  of  the  Love  and  the  appro- 
bations of  the  judgment.  This  would  not  exist  if  men  would  turn 
their  attention  to  the  cultivation  of  their  interior  faculties,  so  that  they 
might  recognise  the  great  principles  of  the  Universe,  and  thus  learn 
to  live  in  their  external  sphere  of  movement  in  a correspondingly- 
harmonious  manner.  Then  the  judgment  would  always  be  the  su- 
preme and  governing  faculty  among  the  other  departments  of  the 
human  soul  ; and  then  would  all  things  in  the  outer  world  precisely 
correspond  to  its  dictates.  When  Wisdom  assumes  an  immoveable 
position  on  the  throne  of  the  interior  world  or  the  soul,  then  will  all 
other  faculties,  as  subjects,  be  influenced,  directed,  and  governed  with 
a righteous  government. 

Thus  the  conviction  of  the  soul’s  independence  arises  from  an  in- 
sufficient development  of  the  faculty  of  Wisdom,  from  the  misdirec- 
tion of  all  the  faculties,  and  especially  from  the  very  superficial  modes 
of  educating  them  which  prevail. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


635 


Will,  T repeat,  is  a passive  faculty.  It  is,  however,  not  only  the 
receptacle  of  thought,  but  a faculty  of  thought  itself ; and  it  is  also  a 
medium  of  communication  between  the  Love  and  Wisdom.  Hence 
it  is  that  when  thoughts  are  evolved  from  the  will-force,  man  feels 
that  he  has  an  independence  of  action  and  a “ free  will”  uninfluenced. 

I say  it  is  when  the  thoughts  are  evolved  from  the  Will,  and  not  when 
the  Will  prompts  the  system  to  outward  movement,  that  a man  con- 
ceives of  the  freedom  of  his  own  Will.  For  when  volition  is  pro- 
duced, the  judgment  takes  cognizance  of  the  operations  of  the  Will. 

Then,  again,  a man  sometimes  feels  a conviction  of  “ free  will” 
when  his  judgment  evolves  the  thought,  and  while  the  Will  is  en- 
gaged in  perpetual  volition. 

The  combinations  of  the  soul  are  of  themselves  an  enigma  beyond 
the  possibility  of  any  mind  to  solve.  And  it  is  the  evanescentness 
of  the  action  of  each  faculty  that  gives  rise  to  the  interior  conviction 
of  “ flee  will.”  Another  cause  of  this  conviction  is  that  man  does 
not  individualize  the  specific  promptings  and  suggestions  of  the  in- 
ternal. He  therefore  becomes  confused  in  the  general  evolution  of 
thought,  and  rushes  to  erroneous  conclusions,  and  adopts  unsound 
principles  of  metaphysical  speculation. 

And  man  is  incessantly  subject  to  the  suggestions  of  Love  and  the 
promptings  of  thoughts  which  the  judgment  disapproves.  Thus  he 
feels  a constant  antagonism  within  his  own  being  ; that  is,  between 
the  lower  affections  and  desires  of  Love,  and  the  approbations  of  the 
Wisdom.  Meanwhile  Will,  as  the  mediator  between  the  two  other 
faculties,  is  passive.  A man  may  feel  impressed  to  act  in  a given 
way,  yet  he  obeys  not  the  impulse,  and  says,  “ I will  not,  until  my 
mind  is  convinced  of  the  propriety  of  so  doing.”  This  certainly  is 
a most  truthful  acknowledgment  of  absolute  dependence,  and  is  an 
expression  flowing  from  an  undecided  judgment.  Man  always  makes 
himself,  or  the  pronoun  I,  the  subject  of  action,  or  the  acted  on, 
whenever  the  judgment  directs  or  approves  an  external  action.  In 
the  expression,  “I  will  not  act  until  my  judgment  approves  the  ac- 
tion,” the  pronoun  I represents  the  Will  or  passive  faculty;  while 
the  terms  “my  judgment”  represent  the  higher  faculty,  which  is  the 
Wisdom.  And  as  the  Wisdom  is  dependent  for  its  judgment,  its 
development,  or  its  capabilities  of  discernment,  upon  the  character 
of  the  thoughts  within,  and  the  influences  and  experiences  without, 
it  can  not  be  truthfully  said  that  this  possesses  an  independent  power 


63G 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


of  commanding  action,  which  could  with  any  propriety  be  termed 
“ free  will.” 

Hence  the  idea  of  the  existence  of  “ free  will”  proceeds  from  an 
indistinct  consciousness  that  pervades  the  whole  workings  of  the  soul. 
The  belief  arises  also  from  a confounding  of  the  actions  of  the  indi- 
vidual faculties,  without  perceiving  the  relations  which  they  sustain 
to  outward  things,  to  the  forms  which  they  inhabit,  or  to  one  anoth- 
er. Hence  there  exists  no  law,  principle,  or  fact,  which  affords  of 
this  belief  the  least  particle  of  proof. 

It  has  been  said  by  some  metaphysicians,  and  especially  by  Locke 
and  Plato,  that  the  “ free  will”  of  man  is  proved  by  his  superiority 
over  all  the  other  forms  in  Nature  ; that  the  animal  is  governed  by  an 
instinctive  impulse,  and  by  influences  that  proceed  from  surrounding 
things  — while  Man  is  prompted  to  act,  and  is  at  liberty  to  positively 
refuse.  Thus  it  is  said  that  he  moves  under  a manifest  freedom  of 
the  will. 

The  discerning  mind  will  perceive  instantly  that  this  indicates  a 
very  superficial  view  of  the  cause  of  action  in  the  animal  and  human 
form  ; and  the  hypothesis  is  assumed  without  analyzing  the  individual 
faculties  of  the  human  soul,  and  their  specific  modes  of  action.  Man 
is  only  an  elevated  form  among  all  the  forms  in  Nature  ; and  from 
the  variety  of  which  he  is  a part,  the  whole  is  made  a complete  sys- 
tem, in  which  may  be  observed  series,  degrees,  and  states  of  progres- 
sion, both  as  relate  to  the  essence  and  the  form,  or  the  soul  and  the 
body.  But  there  exists  no  proof  in  the  perceptible  superiority  of 
man  over  the  lower  creations  that  he  possesses  an  independent  power 
of  action,  while  all  other  things  in  the  Universe  are  inseparably  and 
unchangeably  united. 

It  certainly  is  evident  that  there  is  a species  of  independence  pos- 
sessed by  every  particle  of  matter  in  existence ; and  that  consists 
only  in  the  fact  that  forms  have  an  individual  being.  In  this  sense 
the  term  independence  can  be  applied  to  all  things.  But  speaking 
in  reference  to  the  whole  System  of  divine  creation,  it  can  not  be 
said  that  there  is  any  such  thing  as  absolute  independence  ; for  ah 
things  are  but  parts  of  one  stupendous  Whole  — and  from  this  is 
demonstrated  the  unity  and  dependence  of  all  things. 


The  numerous  classifications  that  have  been  made  of  the  phrenic 
development  of  the  soul,  have  no  direct  bearing  upon  the  principles 
herein  advanced,  inasmuch  as  they  are  founded  upon  the  anatomi- 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


637 


cal  constitution  of  the  brain,  and  are  therefore  external , an  i not 
decidedly  connected  with  any  of  the  real-realities  of  the  interior  or 
thinking  principle. 

§ 189.  I next  proceed  to  consider  the  spiritual  and  material  Sen- 
ses, and  their  relations  to  the  outer  world.  But  I discover  that  two 
have  been  given  to  man  which  he  does  not  possess  except  in  a quali- 
fied sense,  and  then  only  as  branches  of  others. 

Feeling  (or  touch ) is  a distinct  sense,  and  sustains  a close  rela- 
tion to  the  faculty  of  Love. 

Hearing,  or  the  sense  of  external  sound,  is  also  a distinct  sense, 
and  is  conjoined  with  the  united  action  of  Love  and  Will,  and  espe- 
cially with  the  Will,  for  it  is  by  this  faculty  that  this  sense  is  rendered 
a delicate  medium  of  communication  between  the  inner  and  outer 
world. 

The  sense  of  Seeing  is  related  to  the  faculty  of  Wisdom  ; and 
hence  it  is  subject  to  the  Will.  Seeing  is  always  an  act  of  the  Will, 
approved  or  permitted  by  the  Wisdom  ; for  a person  may  or  may 
not  employ  his  organ  of  vision  to  behold  material  things. 

But  Hearing  is  a sense  related  to  Love  and  Will;  and  hence 
Will  has  no  power  to  prevent  the  inflowing  vibrations  of  sound.  And 
Touch,  is  a sense  related  to  Love  alone,  and  is  a connecting  link 
between  the  human  faculties  and  the  instincts  of  the  animal  creation. 
Hence  it  is  that  the  Will  and  Love  have  no  power  over  it,  and  can 
not  govern  the  sensation  produced  by  it,  or  modify  the  intrusions  of 
external  things  upon  its  susceptibility. 

Two  other  senses  have  been  recognised  as  belonging  to  man,  and 
these  are  Taste  and  Smell.  But  this  classification  can  not  be  true; 
for  taste  and  smell  are  confined  to  the  sense  of  Touch,  and  their  or-  - 
gans  are  only  avenues  through  which  peculiar  sensations  are  received. 
Smelling  is  subject  neither  to  the  judgment  nor  to  the  Will ; nor  is 
the  sense  of  Taste  ; for  each  of  them,  unlike  the  others,  is  subject  to 
be  acted  on,  but  has  not  power  to  resist  external  invasions. 

It  can  be  proved  that  the  sense  of  Hearing  depends  upon  the 
medium  of  Touch  only  pri?narily,  for  its  power  of  communicating 
sound  to  the  internal,  and  that  the  details  of  its  action,  and  its  effects 
upon  the  internal,  are  for  the  most  part  governed  by  the  influence  of 
the  Will  and  Wisdom.  That  is,  sound  is  governed  not  so  much  by 
the  structure  of  the  ear,  as  by  the  operation  of  the  Will  and  Wisdom 
upon  it.  Thus  sound  is  rendered  by  the  judgment,  gentle,  conge- 


G33 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


nial,  or  repulsive  ; and  that  too  by  calling  into  action  of  the  will- 
force.  I say,  then,  that  this  can  be  proved  ; and  this  will  establish 
the  position  of  this  sense  between  that  of  Touch  and  Vision  : for 
Hearing  is  a mediatorial  sense. 

Man,  then,  has  three  distinct  senses  : — the  subordinate  or'sugfves- 
five  sense,  which  is  Touch;  the  passive  or  modifying  sense,  which 
is  Hearing  ; and  the  superior  or  protective  sense,  which  is  above  and 
over  them  all,  and  this  is  Seeing.  Seeing  is  related  especially  to  the 
Wisdom  ; and  both  are  watchful  and  careful  to  protect  all  the  sub- 
ordinate possessions  of  the  interior  and  exterior  form.  Hearing  is  a 
medium  sense,  related  to  the  Will  and  Love,  and  is  passive.  There- 
fore it  is  subject  to  receive  all  sounds  created  or  courted  by  love, 
and  to  admit  them  into  the  interior,  according  to  the  modifying  ten- 
dency of  the  Wisdom.  And  Touch  is  the  germinal  or  rudimental 
sense,  subject  to  the  suggestions  of  Love,  and  the  influence  of  outer 
things  upon  the  body. 

It  is  now  made  manifest  why  man’s  external  form  corresponds  to 
and  represents  his  interior  being.  For  it  is  now  perceived  that  there 
is  a trinity  in  everything,  and  that  there  is  a perfect  likeness  between 
the  external  form  of  man  and  the  form  and  structure  of  the  soul. 
The  soul  of  man  is  thus  proved  to  he  a tangible  reality ; for  it  has 
been  made  distinctly  clear,  even  to  the  sensuous  observer,  that  forms 
are  created  and  determined  only  by  their  essence.  This  all-important 
truth  applies  to  .man  and  to  the  whole  Universe.  To  behold  the  soul 
or  spirit  of  man,  then,  observe  his  material  mode  of  being.  Mean- 
while consider  that  the  real  man  is  the  internal , this  only  animating 
the  material  form,  in  order  that  it  may  perfect  its  constitution  and 
preserve  its  identity,  and  also  establish  an  inseparable  connexion  be- 
tween the  material  and  spiritual  world.* 

* It  may  not  be  improper  to  note  a phenomenon  which  here  occurred.  Having 
spoken  for  about  three  hours,  and  the  fatigue  incident  to  the  protracted  sitting  pos- 
ture of  those  present  having  become  somewhat  severe,  the  lecturer  paused  and  re- 
marked to  his  magnetizer  as  follows  : “ I perceive  that  I shall  now  have  to  be  absent 
(that  is,  from  the  body)  about  six  or  seven  minutes,  during  which  time  the  scribe  and 
others  of  you  may  relieve  your  muscles  by  taking  exercise.”  He  then  assumed  his 
usual  inclined  position,  and  remained  rigid  and  statue-like,  breathing  very  slightly, 
tor  about  seven  minutes,  at  the  end  of  which  period  he  returned  with  rather  unusual 
muscular  convulsions,  and  under  mental  emotions  which  he  could  not  entirely  sup- 
press. Said  he,  “ I see  I have  but  little  more  to  say  before  speaking  of  a totally 
different  and  altogether  higher  subject ; and  as  my  impressions  flow  easily,  I will  now 
proceed  to  give  all  that  will  precede  the  revelations  on  the  spiritual  spheres.”  He 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


639 


§ 190.  From  past  considerations  it  is  made  clear  that  man  materi- 
ally is  a perfection'  of  all  Matter  in  Nature  ; and  that  man  spiritually 
is  a perfection  of  all  Motion  in  the  Universe,  QtL.of  the  First  Great 
Principle  of  Motion,  which  is  the  Divine  Mind;  whose  Essence  is 
Love  : and  that  man  spiritually  is  constituted  ofTfie  wisdom  of  Love. 
It  has  also  been  shown  that  every  form  is  unfolded  by  progressive 
stages  from  the  lower  particles  of  matter  to  the  perfect  symmetry  of 
the  material  organization  of  man  ; and  that  the  form  or  essence  has 
in  like  manner  advanced  through  successive  degrees  of  development, 
to  the  perfect  spiritual  organization.  Moreover,  it  has  been  shown 
that  the  exterior  or  the  form  is  the  express  likeness  of  its  interior 
essence,  which  latter  has  unfolded  itself  from  the  inner  to  the  outer 
on  the  principle  of  end,  cause,  and  effect. 

And  I am  desirous  of  enforcing  that  great  spiritual  and  eternal 
truth  which  it  is  necessary  for  man  to  know  and  appreciate  before  he 
can  know  himself  and  be  happy:  and  that  is,  that  all  manifest  sub- 
stances, forms,  compositions  — indeed,,  that  all  things  visible,  are 
expressions  of  an  interior  productive  cause,  which  is  the  spiritual  es- 
sence : that  the  Mineral  Kingdom  is  an  expression  of  Motion,  the 
Vegetable  an  expression  of  Life,  the  Animal  an  expression  of  Sensa- 
tion, and  that  Man  is  an  expression  of  Intelligence ; that  the  planets 
in  our  solar  system  are  a perfect  expression  of  the  Sun  from  which 
they  sprang;  that  the  various  combined  bodies  and  planetary  systems 
in  the  Universe  are  a perfect  expression  of  the  Great  Sun  of  the 
Univercoelum  ; that  the  Great  Sun  is  a perfect  expression  of  the 
Spiritual  Sun  within  it ; and  that  the  Spiritual  Sun  is  a perfect 
expression  of  the  Divine  Mind,  Love,  or  Essence.  The  Spiritual 
Sun  is  thus  the  Centre  and  Cause  of  all  material  things.  It  is  a diver- 
ging or  radiating  Sphere  or  Atmosphere  of  the  Great  Eternal  Cause. 
It  is  an  aroma  — a garment  and  a perfect  radiation  of  the  more  inte- 
rior Essence,  the  Divine,  Creative  Soul. 

Behold  the  truth  — that  the  material  Universe  is  a perfect  repre- 
sentation of  the  spiritual  Universe,  in  which  nothing  exists  but  what 
is  everlasting  and  infinite  ; that  the  whole  material  System  is  the  Body 
of  the  Creative  Soul  ; and  that  the  Spiritual  Essence  has  unfolded 
and  manifested  itself  in  a material  Form!  And  this  Form  is  the 
Order  and  Wisdom  of  the  Divine  Mind. 

then  proceeded  to  give  in  a prompt  and  unhesitating  manner  all  that  precedes  his 
remarks  on  the  process  of  death,  the  whole  duration  of  the  sitting  being  upward  o.f 
four  hours. 


G40 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


Light  and  Love  constituted  the  first  development  of  the  Spiritual 
Sun  ; and  that  was  Light  and  Life  inconceivable  — a brilliancy  that 
extended  throughout  the  height,  and  depth,  and  length,  and  breadth 
of  space  — that  became  illuminated  space  itself ; and  yet  space  is  not 
limited,  nor  could  it  transcend  the  expansive  illuminations  of  the 
Great  Spiritual  Sun.  And  when  the  Universe  was  completed,  Order 
and  Form  reigned  omnipresent  throughout  the  whole  Univerccelum  ! 
And  such  was  the  grand  and  stupendous  Development  of  the  Great 
Spiritual  Sun  — this  having  developed  the  Material  Sun,  and  this  the 
expanded  Universe  ! 

All  things  that  man  creates  are  such  as  represent  his  thoughts. 
They  are  merely  the  outward  expressions  of  the  thoughts  of  his  soul. 
He  creates  nothing  but  what  is  a living  evidence  and  representation 
of  a thought  previously  conceived.  This  truth  is  useful  as  a guide 
to  the  mind  ; for  now,  when  the  inquiry  is  made  as  to  what  the  soul 
is,  where  it  is,  how  it  exists,  and  what  are  the  evidences  — the  tangible 
evidences  of  its  existence  — this  truth,  which  is  now  proved  to  be  a 
universal  one,  should  be  recalled  to  the  mind  : that  all  things  tangible 
are  in  reality  the  living  evidences  of  the  soul  within,  made  manifest 
to  the  material  senses,  and  useful  to  the  requirements  of  the  outer 
world. 

Every  mind  must  conceive  of  the  existence  of  a Cause  as  the 
parent  of  any  effects  visible  to  the  senses.  And  the  cause  must  be 
admitted  as  corresponding  to  the  effect,  or  else  the  effect  can  not  be 
attributed  to  any  producing  cause.  Hence  it  follows  that  all  external 
and  visible  things  are  effects,  prompted,  created,  and  unfolded  to  the 
outer  world,  by  a corresponding  interior  cause  ; and  that  the  cause 
must  be  the  real  reality,  or  else  such  tangible  effects  could  not  have 
been  produced.  So  all  material  things  created  by  man  are  the  forms 
of  his  thoughts ; and  these  are  the  offspring  of  the  soul.  The  form 
of  man  is  a likeness,  a type,  a representative  of  the  cause  or  soul 
which  animates  and  unfolds  it  to  the  outer  world.  The  outer  senses 
are  typical  of  the  inner  ones  ; for  they  are  unfolded  from  the  corre- 
sponding parts  of  the  interior  essence. 

And  I feel  authorized  to  affirm,  from  the  nature  of  my  impressions, 
.hat  if  man  were  differently  situated  and  superiorly  educated,  he  would 
not  be  so  far  removed  from  the  spiritual  ivorld  as  he  now  is  in  his 
sphere  of  thought.  And,  moreover,  he  would  recognise  the  proper 
use  of  all  things,  and  apply  them  to  his  wants,  as  directed  by  the 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


641 


governor  of  all  things,  which  is  Wisdom.  And  he  would  recognise 
the  relation  existing  between  the  natural  and  the  spiritual  world  ; and 
that,  too,  without  experiencing  a metamorphosis  or  transformation  of 
the  real  man  from  the  outer  to  the  inner  world. 

Furthermore,  I now  discover  that  man,  as  to  soul  and  form,  be- 
comes individualized  in  this  sphere,  and  preserves  his  form  hence- 
forward, and  knows  no  change  ; and  that  man  exists  in  the  other 
world  in  a perfect  human  form,  and  among  as  many  expressed  forms 
of  essence,  and  as  many  projections  of  thought,  as  are  existing  in 
this  sphere  of  being.  I discover  that  the  Second  Sphere  is  unfolded 
from  this,  the  first,  and  that  it  is  the  perfect  form  of  this  its  parent 
and  creator. 


§ 191.  I would  have  the  reader  apprehend  the  manner  in  which 
I employ  words  to  express  thought ; for  it  is  proper  to  guard  against 
all  obscurity  and  indefinite  and  imaginative  thoughts.  Know,  then, 
that  I use  the  terms  “essence,”  “spirit,”  “soul,”  and  “interior  be- 
ing,” as  synonymous  — signifying  the  form  which  animates  the  body, 
which  body  is  of  it  an  outward  expression.  I use  the  terms  “ spirit- 
ual,” “ celestial,”  and  “ heavenly,”  as  representing  distinct  degrees 
of  material  refinement.  I employ  language  in  a relative  sense,  though 
I intend  every  expression  to  be  understood  in  its  absolute  sense,  being 
relative  only  in  reference  to  the  whole  System  of  the  Universe,  of 
which  this  philosophy  is  intended  to  be  a tangible,  verbal  expression. 
In  using  the  terms  “ spirit ” and  “soul,”  I am  adapting  myself  to  the 
forms  of  expression  imposed  on  philosophy  by  speculative  minds  in 
order  to  convey  their  ideas. 

I would,  moreover,  have  all  understand  that  I consider  (because 
I perceive)  that  all  things,  whether  tangible  or  intangible,  are  mate- 
rial; that  there  exists  no  such  thing  as  “ immaterial”  or  “ impon- 
derable” elements,  gases,  or  pervading  mediums  ; and  that  there 
exists  no  such  a thing  as  absolute  perfection,  save  that  Divine  Essence 
which  is  composed  of  Love  and  infinite  Perfection  itself.  There- 
fore, when  I speak  concerning  the  spiritual  Spheres,  I will  speak  as 
if  all  things  were  visible  to  the  material  senses ; for  they  are  so  to 
the  senses  unclothed  and  free  from  outward  obstructions. 

I shall  preserve  a sameness  in  the  mode  of  expression,  and  a natu- 
ralness in  all  my  descriptions  of  the  things  which  I shall  hereafter 
know  and  be  enabled  to  relate.  And  many  things  which  I have  not 
explained  concerning  the  various  manifestations  of  the  soul,  will 

41 


642 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


hereafter  be  spoken  of  as  collateral  with  the  general  descriptions.  I 
shall  employ  the  terms  “ man ” and  “form”  throughout  all  the  forth- 
coming relations,  in  order  that  there  may  not  exist  any  confusion  in 
terms  ; and  these  I shall  use  synonymously. 

I now  perceive  the  objections  that  will  be  raised  against  the  prece- 
ding relations,  and  those  which  are  to  follow.  The  first  of  these  is 
embodied  in  the  question,  “ What  proof  have  we  that  this  account 
of  the  spirit-world  is  true?”  I perceive  the  answer:  and  that  is, 
Recognise  the  unchangeable  tendency  of  the  universal  laws  and 
principles  that  govern  the  whole  System  of  creation  ; and  by  them 
and  their  unvarying  teachings  the  mind  may  decide  upon  the  truth 
or  falsity  of  all  assertions  beyond  the  possibility  of  sensuous  demon- 
stration. If  they  are  recognised  as  immutable , then  a sameness  in 
their  tendency  must  be  manifested  in  all  parts  of  the  general  structure 
of  the  Universe  ; and  all  philosophy  that  is  truthful  must  correspond 
thereunto.  If  they  proclaim  universal  association,  then  the  same 
principle  should  be  considered  as  holding  alike  in  every  department 
of  Nature  and  the  Univerccelurn.  Tf  they  proclaim  universal  develop- 
ment, then  the  same  must  inevitably  be  perpetuated  from  the  lowest 
point  of  time  to  the  highest  point  in  eternity.  Upon  these  universal 
and  eternal  principles  of  progression,  rests  the  truth  of  that  which 
will  hereafter  be  asserted. — And  that  which  has  been  asserted  will,  in 
the  main,  receive  the  approbation  of  the  most  enlightened  judgments, 
and  is  analogically  demonstrated  in  the  visible  fields  of  creation. 

The  second  objection  is,  “ That  it  is  impious,  presumptuous,  and 
inconsistent  with  the  nature  of  things,  for  any  being  to  pretend  to 
a knowledge  of  heavenly  things.  Therefore  what  is  said,  must  be  an 
ingenious  invention,  or  a systematized  fabrication  of  unreal  and  chi- 
merical things.”  This  objection  flows  only  from  a misdirected  and 
uneducated  judgment,  and  therefore  requires  the  most  unbounded 
forgiveness  : for  it  is  plain  that  no  enlightened  mind  would  make  an 
objection  based  upon  such  a mere  superficial  presumption.  The  evi- 
dence that  it  is  not  a fanciful  and  ingenious  invention  is  contained  in 
the  exterior  form  of  the  work,  and  the  irrespective  presentation  of 
truth,  without  courting  the  prejudices  or  beliefs  that  at  present  pre- 
vail in  the  world.  And  that  it  is  not  imaginary,  evidence  may  be  de- 
rived from  the  order  of  the  whole  revelation,  and  from  the  naturalness 
of  the  expressions,  of  the  applications,  and  of  the  conclusions,  which 
are  irresistible  to  the  higher  perceptions  of  any  expanded  intellect. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


643 


The  third  objection  is  the  most  powerful  of  them  all,  and  is  to  be 
feared  more  than  any  other  enemy,  however  formidable,  that  will  be 
arrayed  against  the  truth  — and  that  is,  “ I do  not  believe  it.”  This, 
certainly,  is  an  objection  which  no  argument  or  reason  can  reach, 
because  it  flows  from  the  depths  of  ignorance.  And  to  such  object- 
ors I would  only  say,  Abandon  all  such  insignificant  expressions, 
or  your  ignorance  will  become  imbecility  ; and  press  onward  to 
attain  that  degree  of  knowledge  that  will  enable  you  to  understand 
whether  these  things  are  true  or  chimerical. 

I hereafter  employ  no  arguments  to  prove  the  things  which  I 
relate  ; but  I shall  be  prompted  to  employ  illustrations  to  make  the 
relations  intelligible  to  the  mind  in  its  present  plane  of  thought. 
With  these  remarks,  then,  I am  prepared  to  venture  the  assertion 
of  truths  hereafter  without  fear  as  to  their  rightful  apprehension.  I 
will  now,  therefore,  ascend  to  the  second  world  of  human  existence. 
Meanwhile,  I shall  recognise  the  truthfulness  of  the  saying,  that 
“ Light  and  Life  are  Love,  and  Order  and  Form  are  Wisdom ;” 
that  man  internally,  is  constituted  of  the  “ Wisdom  of  Love;”  and 
that  he  is  the  ultimate  design  of  Nature,  of  the  Universe,  and  of  its 
Eternal  Cause.* 


§ 192.  Thoughts  that  are  associated  with  the  process  of  dying,  and 
with  the  state  of  death,  are  to  some  minds  dark,  doubtful,  cheerless, 

* After  having  been  in  the  abnormal  state  for  upward  of  four  hours,  and  closing 
his  lecture  at  this  place,  the  author  remarked,  that  he  perceived  on  the  mind  of  one 
of  the  witnesses  present  (Mr.  Theron  R.  Lapham)  a desire  that  he  should  examine 
his  wife,  who  was  ill  (a  fact  which  had  not  been  previously  stated).  He  accordingly 
passed  off,  and  on  returning  to  outward  consciousness  he  remarked,  that  it  was  very 
singular  that  all  the  inflowings  of  those  exalted  truths  of  which  he  had  been  speak- 
ing had  now  entirely  ceased,  and  that  his  perceptions  of  them  now  were  but  little  more 
expansive  than  they  would  be  if  he  were  in  the  normal  state ! This  we  understood 
him  to  attribute  to  the  fact  that  the  spiritual  light  governed  by  the  associated  minds 
of  the  second  sphere  had  now  ceased  to  shine  upon  his  understanding  to  the  same 
degree  as  while  lecturing.  He  said  his  mind  then  rested  on  altogether  a lower  plane 
of  thought,  and  that  he  was  at  that  moment  only  qualified  for  the  examination  and 
treatment  of  the  diseased.  He  then  proceeded  with  the  examination  of  the  patient 
(who  was  absent),  and  to  give  a prescription,  the  results  of  which,  it  is  scarcely 
necessary  to  say,  were  precisely  accordant  with  facts,  and  attended  with  the  relief 
sought  by  the  patient. 


644 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


and  disconsolating  ; while  to  others  death  seems  a welcome  state, 
productive  of  peace,  quietness,  blessing,  and  elevation.  It  is  in  a 
degree  terrifying  to  all,  and  to  many  it  seems  of  all  things  the  most 
to  be  dreaded  and  shunned.  It  is  generally  feared  by  the  brave  and 
the  timid,  the  wise  and  the  foolish,  the  old  and  the  young.  It  is  to 
all  a fearful  process,  rendered  much  more  so  by  the  prospect  of  a 
cold  and  unrelenting  grave  ! This,  I perceive,  is  in  consequence 
of  wrongly  apprehending  the  process  of  dying,  and  of  not  knowing 
the  ineffable  beauties  that  surround  the  living  man  when  it  escapes 
the  outer  form. 

As  soon  as  the  human  organization  is  perfected  in  its  form,  size, 
and  general  developments,  and  as  soon  as  the  period  has  arrived 
when  the  spirit  exercises  its  full  control  over  the  body,  the  process 
of  transformation  commences.  The  change  is  imperceptible,  yet  it 
is  incessant  and  progressive.  The  body  is  not  dying  for  a few 
hours  only,  but  for  many  years  — during  which  time  the  faculties  and 
powers  of  the  inner  being  gradually  release  their  proprietorship  over 
the  form,  and  the  soul  continues  its  aspirations  toward  the  higher 
spheres. 

When  the  form  is  yet  a child,  it  manifests  all  the  angular,  eccen- 
tric, and  irregular  traits  of  character,  inclinations,  and  movements. 
When  childhood  advances  to  youth,  the  eccentricity  gives  way  to 
more  uniformity,  and  then  is  displayed  the  circular,  in  every  pos- 
sible modification  of  that  form.  When  youth  ascends  to  manhood, 
the  perfect  circular  and  spiral  make  their  appearance,  and  are  uni- 
formly displayed  in  the  inclinations  and  characteristics  of  that  pro- 
gressed stage  of  development.  At  this  period  the  process  of  dying 
or  transformation  commences.  The  spirit  is  continually  developing 
and  expanding  its  faculties,  and  putting  them  forth  as  feelers  into  the 
higher  spheres.  The  tendencies  of  the  spirit  are  no  more  descend- 
ing, but  ascending,  and  that,  too,  to  an  immensity  beyond  the  power 
of  language  to  express,  or  the  most  exalted  intellect  to  comprehend. 

And  as  manhood  progresses  to  old  age,  the  body  gradually  be- 
comes incapable  of  performing  the  office  required  by  the  spirit. 
Hence,  when  people  are  aged,  their  faculties  seem  buried  beneath 
the  wornout  and  useless  materials  of  the  body.  They  appear  weak 
in  intellect,  imbecile,  and  unconsociable  to  all  around  them  that  is 
youthful,  blooming,  and  seemingly  perfected.  One  faculty  after  an- 
other withdraws  from  the  material  form,  and  their  energy,  brilliancy, 
and  susceptibility,  seem  to  decline.  The  body,  finally,  is  almost 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


645 


disconnected  from  the  spirit  which  gives  it  animation  ; and  then  the 
body  is  a dweller  in  the  rudimental  sphere,  and  the  spirit  is  an  in- 
habitant of  the  inner  life,  or  the  spiritual  world.  And  when  the  mo- 
ment of  dissolution  occurs,  the  sensation,  or  clothing  medium  of  the 
body,  is  attracted  and  absorbed  by  the  spirit,  of  which  it  then  be- 
comes the  material  form.  At  this  instant  the  body  manifests  faint 
and  almost  imperceptible  movements,  as  if  it  were  grasping  for  tire 
life  which  had  fled  ; and  these  are  contortions  of  the  countenance, 
spasmodic  contractions  of  the  muscles,  and  seeming  efforts  of  the 
whole  frame  to  regain  its  animating  soul. 

Such  are  the  visible  appearances  connected  with  the  process  of 
death.  But  these  are  deceptive  : for  the  process  occurring  in  the 
interior  is  far  more  beautiful  than  it  is  possible  to  describe.  When 
the  body  contracts  its  muscles  and  apparently  manifests  the  most 
agonizing  and  writhing  efforts,  it  is  merely  an  open  indication  of  joy 
unspeakable  in  the  inner  being,  and  of  ecstasy  unknown  to  all  but 
itself.  When  the  countenance  is  contorted,  pain  is  not  experienced  ; 
but  such  is  an  expression  of  ineffable  delight.  And  when  the  body 
gives  forth  its  last  possession,  a smile  is  impressed  on  the  counte- 
nance, which  of  itself  is  an  index  of  the  brightness  and  resplendent 
beauty  that  pervade  the  spirit’s  home  ! In  the  last  moments  of  outer 
life  the  spiritual  perceptions  are  greatly  expanded  and  illuminated, 
and  the  spirit  is  thus  rendered  competent  to  behold  the  immense  pos- 
sessions of  its  second  habitation. 

It  is  given  me  to  know  these  truths  by  daily  experiencing  them, 
and  having  them  verified  in  the  frequent  transitions  that  occur  within 
my  being,  from  the  outer  to  the  inner  world,  or  from  the  lower  to 
the  higher  spheres.  I speak,  therefore,  from  personal  experience, 
which  is  knowledge  fully  confirmed  by  the  unvarying  sensations  and 
phenomena  that  occur. 

The  butterfly  escapes  its  gross  and  rudimental  body,  and  wings 
its  way  to  the  sunny  bower,  and  is  sensible  of  its  new  existence. 
The  drop  of  water  that  reposes  on  the  earth  is  rendered  invisible  by 
the  absorbing  invitations  of  the  sun,  and  ascends  to  associate  with, 
and  repose  in,  the  bosom  of  the  atmosphere.  The  day  that  is  known 
by  its  warmth  and  illumination,  dispenses  its  blessings  to  the  forms 
of  earth,  and  sinks  into  repose  in  the  bosom  of  the  night.  Night  is, 
then,  an  index  of  a new  day,  which  is  first  cradled  in  the  horizon, 
and  afterward  perfected  in  its  noontide  light,  beauty,  and  animation. 
The  flower,  being  unfolded  from  the  interior  by  virtue  of  its  own 


646 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


essence  and  the  sun,  is  variegated  in  every  possible  manner,  and  thus 
becomes  a representative  of  light  and  beauty  ; but  having  attained  its 
perfection,  it  soon  begins  to  change  its  form,  its  color,  and  its  beauty 
of  external  being.  Its  fragrance  goes  forth  and  pervades  all  congenial 
and  suitable  forms,  and  its  beauty  is  indelibly  impressed  upon  the 
memory  of  its  beholder  and  admirer,  when  the  flower  itself  is  no 
more.  The  foliage,  tinted  with  the  breath  of  winter,  no  longer  re- 
tains its  outward  beauty  : but  this  is  an  index  of  new  life  and  anima- 
tion, which  is  perfectly  exemplified  in  the  return  of  foliage  in  the 
youthful  season.  As  it  is  with  these,  so  it  is  with  the  spirit.  The 
body  dies  on  the  outer,  or  rather  changes  its  mode  of  existence, 
while  the  spirit  ascends  to  a higher  habitation,  suited  to  its  nature  and 
requirements.  And  as  it  is  with  these,  so  it  is  with  me,  and  the 
transitions  which  I continually  experience. 

The  transition  of  my  being  from  the  outer  to  the  inner  world  is 
produced  by  the  action  of  forces  contained  in  another  body,  upon 
the  similar  forces  contained  in  my  own  material  form.  The  process 
is  that  of  destroying  the  sensation  of  the  outer,  or  rather  of  changing 
it  to  the  sensation  of  the  spirit — at  which  lime  the  medium  that  con- 
nects my  body  with  another  is  sustained  by  a mingling  of  the  forces 
of  the  two  bodies,  while  the  actual  sensation  leaves  the  body  and  be- 
comes the  Form  of  my  spirit.  This  Form,  then,  is  the  body  which 
■ I possess  while  occupying  higher  positions  in  material  existence. 
Inasmuch,  then,  as  the  body  is  thus  deserted,  I am  enabled,  by 
causes  unrelated,  to  behold  the  possessions  of  the  Second  Sphere, 
and  to  commune  with  the  knowledge  there  existing,  together  with 
that  of  earth.  This  elevation  assists  me  to  penetrate  with  spiritual 
perception  the  whole  arcana  of  the  various  earths  in  the  Universe. 

Thus  I am  constantly  experiencing  a transition  from  the  outer  to 
the  inner  sphere  of  thought,  existence,  and  investigation.  This 
change  will  be  experienced  by  all,  though  the  means  by  which  it  will 
be  accomplished  may  seem  in  some  instances  painful,  terrifying,  and 
disconsolating.  Death,  or  the  transition  so  termed,  is,  however,  of 
all  things  the  most  to  be  admired,  and  its  prospect  is  the  first  thing 
to  be  cherished  and  appreciated. 

In  these  relations  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth  may  repose  confi- 
dence ; and  they  should  meanwhile  strive  to  have  all  the  faculties  and 
powers  of  the  spirit  so  developed  as  to  be  able  to  perceive  and  ap- 
preciate the  grandeur  of  that  superior  existence  to  which  all  must 
inevitably  ascend. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


647 


§ 193.  I now  behold  the  forms  of  earth  and  the  bodies  of  men, 
including  my  own,  in  a light  and  with  a degree  of  perception  never 
before  presented.  I discover  that  I can  only  see  the  forms  by  judg- 
ing what  and  where  they  are,  by  the  light  of  the  spirit:  for  the  outer 
body  is  beyond  my  perception,  and  I only  see  well-constituted  and 
living  spirits.  By  possessing  this  perception,  I am  enabled  to  com- 
mune with  all  the  possessions  of  this  Second  Sphere,  and  now  be- 
hold the  extended  fields  and  living  habitations  of  this  elevated  ex- 
istence. 

There  are  to  be  observed  three  specific  degrees  of  form  and  de- 
velopment: the  young  and  unmatured  ; the  advanced  stages  of  these 
up  to  the  mediatorial  degree  of  manhood  ; and  the  highest  of  them 
all,  which  is  the  perfect  form  and  most  highly  developed  of  all  the 
spirits  there  existing. 

I perceive  that  whenever  an  infant  dies  on  any  of  the  earths,  the 
germ  or  undeveloped  body  of  its  spirit  becomes  deposited  in  this 
Sphere,  and  is  fully  unfolded  in  intellect,  and  highly  enlightened  con- 
cerning all  of  its  own  existence  and  prior  situation.  The  infant  that 
has  had  life,  and  dies  in  infancy,  is,  I perceive,  in  this  Sphere,  fully 
developed  and  perfected.  So  it  is  with  all  uninformed  spirits  who 
escape  the  body  on  any  earth  : for  each  is  here  educated  in  the  truths 
and  beauties  of  the  whole  existence.  So  it  is  also  with  the  intelligent 
and  highly  cultivated  ; for  they  are  here  more  advanced,  and  occupy 
a position  more  elevated  and  refined. 

Moreover,  I discover  three  distinct  societies  or  associations  of  men 
and  females,  each  occupying  a position  determined  by  their  degree 
of  cultivation,  sympathy  for  one  another,  and  power  of  approaching 
each  other’s  sphere  of  knowledge  and  attainment.  And  what  is  well 
to  relate  is,  that  each  society  is  encompassed  by  a peculiar  sphere  or 
atmosphere,  which  is  an  exhalation  from  the  specific  quality  of  their 
interior  or  spiritual  characters.  Every  spirit  has  a peculiar  sphere  of 
its  own,  and  also  a general  one  in  which  it  can  with  pleasure  exist. 
And  spirits  know  and  . associate  with  each  other  according  to  the 
quality  of  the  sphere  which  is  exhaled  from  their  interiors.  They 
associate  only  as  spheres  are  agreeable,  and  as  they  are  capable  of 
approaching  each  other  with  pleasure. 

So  it  is  also  with  mankind  on  earth.  — They  dwell  in  each  other’s 
society  only  as  they  can  coalesce,  and  approach  each  other  with 
pleasure.  So  also  are  existing  on  earth  the  three  specific  degrees  of 
development,  which  are  youth,  manhood,  and  mature  age.  But  they 


648 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


are  in  a rudimental  condition,  and  not  situated  in  order  as  they  are 
in  the  Second  Sphere. 

I perceive  that  spirits  approach  each  other  according  to  the  rela- 
tive degrees  of  brilliancy  which  surrounds  and  encompasses  their 
forms.  Thus  association  is  determined  and  made  perfect  by  the  law 
of  congeniality  and  affinity,  or  affection.  They  have  an  affection  for 
one  another  in  proportion  to  the  similarity  in  the  degrees  of  love  and 
purity  to  which  they  have  attained.  Thus  are  the  three  states  or 
societies  established. 

In  the  first  society  are  an  immense  number  of  infant  and  uncultiva- 
ted spirits,  which  are  in  various  degrees  of  advancement  and  cultiva- 
tion, according  as  such  have  proceeded  from  the  earth.  In  the  second 
group  or  society,  are  those  who  have  become  highly  instructed  in  the 
principles  and  truths  of  the  Divine  Mind.  And  into  this  society  all 
who  die  on  earth  with  minds  properly  unfolded,  are  immersed,  be- 
cause here  they  can  associate  agreeably.  In  the  third  society  I 
discover  spirits  of  the  most  enlightened  character.  The  most  of 
them  proceed  from  the  planets  Jupiter  and  Saturn,  and  also  from 
planets  in  other  solar  systems.  This  society  is  so  highly  illumina- 
ted with  wisdom,  that  it  is  almost  impossible  for  the  spirits  of  the 
lower  societies  to  approach  it.  If  they  make  an  effort  to  enter  their 
midst,  this  is  immediately  overcome  by  the  strong  repulsion  arising 
from  the  non-affinity  existing  between  them  and  their  respective 
spheres. 

The  atmosphere  that  flows  from  and  encompasses  and  protects  the 
first  society,  is  of  a mingled  and  rather  unilluminated  appearance. 
Its  brilliancy  is  rather  faint  in  comparison  to  that  of  those  above  it. 
It  appears  gloomy,  dark,  and  rather  uncongenial,  because  it  is  an 
emanation  from  uncultivated  intellects.  Yet  there  is  a purity  — an 
exceeding  purity  among  them,  viewrnd  comparatively  with  that  exist- 
ing on  earth. 

The  second  society  is  enveloped  with  an  atmosphere  of  far  more 
congenial  variegations,  presenting  a resplendent  brilliancy  which  in- 
dicates purity  and  elevation.  It  appears  like  the  mingling  of  many 
colors,  such  as  are  not  known  on  earth.  And  these  are  all  so  per- 
fectly conjoined,  and  are  blended  together  in  such  harmony,  that  the 
whole  aroma  is  of  itself  a representation  ’of  purity  and  refinement. 
Yet  it  is  a sphere  emanating  from  the  whole  body  of  the  society,  in- 
dicating the  wisdom  of  the  spirits  composing  it.  Their  wisdom  con- 
sists in  a knowledge  of  truths  and  principles  concerning  material  and 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


649 


rudimental  things ; and  in  them  they  are  highly  enlightened.  And 
the  inconceivable  variety  of  colors  surrounding  them  arises  from  their 
dissimilar  stages  of  intellectual  advancement.  Yet  they  are  all  in  thu 
same  plane  of  wisdom,  and  thus  form  one  society,  enveloped  by  this 
beautiful  and  refined  atmosphere. 

The  third  society  is  also  clothed  with  an  aerial  garment,  which 
is  a perfect  representation  of  the  character  and  perfection  of  their  in- 
teriors. I behold  in  it  all  colors,  and  a variety  of  reflections  proceed- 
ing from  the  subordinate  societies  ; and  these  reflections  render  their 
spiritual  emanation  so  very  beautiful  that  language  is  inadequate  to 
describe  it. 

Those  of  the  first  society  are  in  the  plane  of  natural  thought ; that 
is,  they  are  just  emerging  from  the  instructions  and  impressions  of 
earth,  into  the  wisdom  of  the  higher  societies. 

The  second  society  is  in  the  plane  or  sphere  of  causes ; that  is, 
they  are  just  emerging  from  a superior  knowledge  of  visible  effects 
presented  on  earth,  to  a perception  of  the  interior  causes  of  them  : 
and  their  wisdom  extends  to  the  lowest  and  first  cause  of  all  material 
things.  Therefore  they  have  a knowledge  of  all  interior  causes,  es- 
sences, and  their  modes  of  external  manifestation  : but  they  are  not 
in  the  possession  of  superior  wisdom  concerning  the  uses  for  which 
causes  and  effects  were  instituted. 

The  third  society  is  in  the  plane  of  effects  ; and  those  composing 
it  have  a perception  of  all  ultimate  design,  and  of  the  universal 
adaptation  of  things  to  each  other.  Their  minds  are  exceedingly 
luminous.  With  their  powers  of  penetration,  the  externals  of  things 
are  laid  open,  and  they  perceive  only  the  character  and  quality  of 
the  interior.  Their  vision  extends  to  every  recess  of  their  own  habi- 
tation, and  their  knowledge  comprehends  all  subordinate  material 
existences.  They  have  a most  unlimited  presentation  of  all  created 
things  below  their  elevated  position  ; and  their  wisdom  is  light,  and 
love,  and  brilliancy,  and  even  ecstasy,  to  a degree  that  transcends 
description.  With  their  unfolded  spiritual  powers,  they  behold  the 
vast  landscapes  of  the  spirit-home,  too  extensive  to  be  comprehended 
by  men  on  earth,  and  too  beautiful  to  be  appreciated  or  enjoyed  by 
them. 

The  third  society  are  not  only  in  a state  of  emergement  from  the 
plane  of  causes  to  that  of  effects,  but  also  from  their  sphere  to  the 
third  world  of  human  existence. 


650 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


§ 194.  And  what  is  well  to  relate  is,  that  notwithstanding  the  dis- 
similitude that  exists  between  the  three  societies,  there  is  a perfect 
unity  among  them,  and  a mutual  dependence  one  upon  another;  and 
there  is  a continual  aspiring  affection  that  gyrates  from  the  infant  in- 
tellect to  the  high  and  superior  wisdom  of  the  third  society.  There 
is  a unity  of  action,  an  agreeableness  of  situation,  and  a propriety  of 
position,  which  cause  them  all  to  live  for  one  another,  like  a broth- 
erhood. 

And,  moreover,  it  is  profitable  to  remark  that  each  society  or  group 
is  well  situated,  well  conditioned,  and  well  cultivated,  in  reference  to 
the  specific  state  which  each  is  compelled  to  sustain.  The  situations 
are  perfect  in  proportion  to  the  degree  of  wisdom  and  refinement  to 
which  each  has  attained.  The  lowest  appears  inferior  in  comparison 
to  the  higher  and  superior ; though  even  the  first,  to  man  on  earth, 
would  appear  to  be  a high  state  of  perfection.  By  the  varieties  of 
condition  and  development,  the  societies  are  made  perfect.  They 
are  thus  as  one  brotherhood,  joined  by  mutual  affections  and  actions, 
and  perpetuated  in  goodness  by  the  benign  and  gentle  influences  that 
proceed  from  the  highest  society  to  the  lower  ones,  and  from  these 
to  it  again. 

The  societies  in  the  Second  Sphere  are  very  much  to  be  admired, 
because  of  the  perfect  harmony  which  pervades  them,  and  the  per- 
fect melody  and  concert  of  rudimental  and  perfected  knowledge 
which  they  manifest.  In  a corresponding  manner  does  there  exist  a 
concert  of  action,  a unity  of  feeling,  and  a universal  love,  one  for 
another. 

The  inhabitants  do  not  converse  vocally,  but  immerse  their  thoughts 
into  one  another  by  radiating  them  upon  the  countenance.  And  I 
perceive  that  thought  enters  the  spirit  by  a process  of  breathing , or 
rather  it  is  introduced  by  influx  according  to  the  desires  of  those  con- 
versing. They  perceive  thought  by  and  through  the  eyes,  inasmuch 
as  these,  like  the  general  countenance,  are  an  index  to  the  quality  and 
workings  of  the  interior.  They  seemingly  hear  each  other  converse  ; 
but  that  is  owing  to  a previous  knowledge  of  sound  by  which  words 
are  distinguished  and  their  meaning  apprehended. 

They  perceive  things  without  them  by  their  sense  of  vision;  but 
they  are  conscious  that  it  is  the  reflection  which  they  perceive,  and 
not  the  substance.  Therefore  they  exercise  judgment  concerning  all 
they  perceive  — not  judging  from  sensuous  observation,  but  from  the 
character  of  the  substance  observed. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


651 


I also  discover  that  spirits  in  this  Sphere  approach  and  associate 
with  each  other  according  to  the  mutual  affinity  subsisting  between 
them,  even  as  do  the  inhabitants  of  earth  ; but  the  difference  is  in  the 
mode  of  associating.  Men  on  earth  associate  with  one  another  by 
the  guidance  of  their  gross  and  rudimental  senses,  as  these  are  pro- 
ductive of  inclination  and  desire.  Instead  of  this,  men  associate  in 
this  higher  Sphere  by  a knowledge  of  each  other’s  inherent  purity, 
and  the  state  of  each  other’s  affections. 

Moreover,  I perceive  that  the  former  experience  of  every  person, 
both  male  and  female,  is  treasured  up  in  the  memory,  from  which 
they  can  extract  representations  of  that  which  they  previously  knew 
or  experienced.  Everything  appears  indelibly  impressed  upon  the 
memory,  and  is  mirrored  forth  with  a vividness  in  proportion  to  the 
strength  of  the  impression.  Therefore  whatever  thought  enters  the 
human  mind  on  earth,  becomes  a resident  in  the  memory,  and  is 
here  brought  forth  with  the  appearance  of  newness  that  makes  it  both 
interesting  and  instructive.  Those  things  experienced  which  are 
disagreeable  to  the  memory,  are  deposited  in  its  depths  and  con- 
cealed from  the  view  of  any  other  being,  by  the  prevalence  of  those 
events  and  experiences  which  it  pleases  the  mind  to  remember,  and 
which  the  mind  takes  delight  in  contemplating.  Hence  it  is  proper 
for  all  men  on  earth  to  do  and  think  only  that  which  pleases  them 
most  (according  to  wisdom),  and  which  they  would  most  earnestly 
desire  to  remember;  and  not  to  do  those  things,  or  encourage  those 
thoughts,  which  are  opposed  to  the  superior  delights  of  the  mind. 
If  this  can  not  be  done  in  the  present  social  and  mental  condition  of 
the  world,  then  it  is  proper  to  change  those  conditions,  so  that  even 
this  great  good  and  pleasure  may  be  obtained. 

When  spirits  conversing  appeal  to  each  other’s  memory,  the  mem- 
ory mirrors  forth  a perfect  representation  of  the  thing  remembered, 
which  is  perceived  and  understood  by  the  conversing  spirit.  I be- 
hold beautiful  representations  in  the  memory  of  those  in  the  higher 
societies.  These  representations  are  of  the  most  exquisite  charac- 
ter, because  they  proceed  from  the  memory  of  highly-enlightened 
intellects  ; and  they  are  therefore  delightful,  inviting,  and  instructive. 

I perceive  that  everything  in  this  Sphere  is  created  and  manifested 
only  by  and  through  the  exercise  and  direction  of  Wisdom.  Hence 
the  perfect  order  and  uniformity  that  subsist,  and  the  inexpressible 
happiness  that  flows  as  a consequence  from  such  exquisite  harmony 
and  unity  of  action.  Everything  is  appreciated  as  a blessing  con- 


652 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


ferred  upon  them  by  the  light  and  life  of  Divine  Love,  and  the  order 
and  form  of  Divine  Wisdom. 

It  is  pleasing  to  behold  these  heavenly  societies  : for  I see  them  at 
this  moment  existing  in  the  most  perfect  degree  of  brotherly  love, 
and  joined  inseparably  together  by  constant  ascending  and  descend- 
ing affections.  How  very  clear  and  bright  are  their  countenances 
and  expressions  ! They  are  unblemished  by  artificiality,  and  un- 
spotted by  rudimental  and  gross  intrusions  — for  they  are  above  and 
superior  to  these,  and  highly  developed.  The  first  society  is  indeed 
low  in  comparison  to  the  highest ; but  the  variety  and  the  degrees 
nevertheless  form  of  the  whole  a complete  brotherhood.  The  diver- 
sity consists  in  the  different  degrees  of  development  ; and  the  lowest 
can  not  approach  the  highest,  because  of  the  dissimilarity  of  quality 
and  spheres.  But  the  lowest  contains  and  involves  the  highest, 
while  the  latter  in  return  comprehends  and  pervades  the  whole 
Sphere,  manifesting  a grace  and  beauty  beyond  the  power  of  language 
to  describe.  And  there  exists  almost  an  infinite  variety  of  disposi- 
tions, of  loves,  of  affections,  and  of  wisdom,  among  them  ; yet  each 
modification  of  previous  conditions  of  mind  is  only  an  ascending  de- 
gree of  refinement  toward  perfection. 

The  whole  is  beautiful  — surpassingly  beautiful  and  sublime  ! — for 
there  exists  that  continual  emanation  of  love  and  wisdom  from  soci- 
eties and  individual  forms,  displaying  a brilliancy  of  illumination  be- 
yond any  light  or  color  on  earth.  It  is  even  so  very  bright  and 
beautiful  that  those  in  the  lower  societies  who  approach  are  almost 
thrown  into  ecstasies  of  delight.  They  become  prostrated,  and  ap- 
parently fall  on  their  faces,  because  of  the  beauty  and  brilliancy 
of  the  aroma  that  encompasses  the  superior  societies  of  the  spirit- 
home. 

Thus  it  is  that  all  preserve  an  order  in  their  lives  and  situations  ; 
and  thus  it  is  that  their  approach  to  each  other  is  graduated  accord- 
ing to  the  unfolding  of  the  spiritual  senses  and  faculties  to  the  exter- 
nal. They  represent  the  circular  and  spiral  forms  ; for  there  exists 
among  them  a uniform  and  also  an  ascending  movement.  And  one 
is  continually  unfolding  the  possessions  of  another,  even  as  from  the 
germ  are  unfolded  the  body  and  the  flower.  And  even  as  the  flower 
perpetuates  the  species  of  the  plant,  so  does  the  superior  society  per- 
vade the  lower  ones,  and  is  constantly  introducing  them  into  its  own 
vast  possessions  ; and  thus  all  go  onward  to  a still  higher  Sphere  of 
spiritual  and  intellectual  elevation. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


653 


§ 195.  I now  proceed  to  relate  the  external  beauties  that  appertain 
to  this  Second  Sphere  of  human  existence.  For  it  is  necessary  that 
the  whole  aspect  of  the  spirit-home  should  be  vividly  represented  to  the 
inhabitants  of  the  earth,  so  that  it  may  be  an  inducement  for  them  to 
advance  in  their  social  and  spiritual  condition. 

I behold  the  spiritual  Sphere  as  containing  all  the  beauties  of  the 
natural  Sphere  combined  and  perfected.  And  in  every  natural 
Sphere  these  beauties  are  represented,  though  in  the  first  and  rudi- 
mental  degree  ; so  that  every  earth  is  of  itself  an  index  and  an  intro- 
duction to  the  beauty  and  grandeur  that  are  existing  in  the  Second 
Sphere.  For  from  the  natural  the  spiritual  is  unfolded,  or  made 
manifest. 

The  extended  surface  of  this  Sphere,  I perceive,  presents  regular 
and  gentle  undulations,  which  render  the  whole  diversified  and  ex- 
ceedingly inviting.  And  very  extensive  plains  are  presented,  which 
are  clothed  with  great  fertility,  and  with  innumerable  varieties  of  forms 
such  as  deck  the  bosom  of  the  earth  when  all  things  are  favorable  to 
a thrifty  production.  In  those  vast  plains  is  represented  the  most 
perfect  order.  They  are  gardens,  typical  of  purity,  unity,  and  celes- 
tial love.  Their  diversified  paths  continually  lead  to  new  and  in- 
structive portions,  all  of  which  are  useful  as  displaying  Divine  Love 
and  Wisdom,  which  generate  unity  and  affinity  in  all  created  things. 
All  flowers,  and  even  their  leaves , are  observed  as  so  many  voices 
proclaiming  the  beauty  of  interior  perfection,  and  the  infinite  Source 
from  which  they  sprang.  Every  plant,  flower,  bird,  and  tree,  is  per- 
ceived and  appreciated  as  the  express  creation  of  Divine  love  and 
Divine  action. 

And  there  is  a beauty  in  the  external  of  each  created  thing,  which 
is  ol  itself  an  open  expression  of  celestial  love  and  wisdom.  The 
flowers  and  foliage  are  of  the  most  variegated  appearance  ; and  their 
variety  renders  them  instructive  and  impressive,  insomuch  that  they 
act  as  enchantments  upon  the  minds  of  those  who  behold  them,  and 
induce  thoughts  beautiful,  elevating,  and  edifying.  A fragrance  per- 
petually ascends  from  those  vast  plains  of  creation,  giving  life  and 
brilliancy  to  the  atmosphere,  which  is  thereby  rendered  suitable  to  be 
inhaled  as  the  breath  of  love  and  exhaled  as  the  thoughts  of  wisdom. 
Every  created  thing  possesses  within  itself  a living  love  and  affection  ; 
and  this  is  communicated  from  one  thing  to  another,  all  things  thus 
becoming  as  it  were  electrified  and  illuminated.  The  beauty  of  one 
flower  is  imparted  to  another,  which  in  its  turn  communicates  an  equal 


654 


nature’s  DIVINE  REVELATIONS.' 


bestowment  upon  others.  And  thus  those  plains  are  a living  repre- 
sentation of  Divine  Love  and  Wisdom. 

There  exists  among  the  many  inviting  things  of  this  Sphere  a pe- 
culiar blending  of  inherent  affections  that  different  forms  possess. 
T his  remark  applies  to  all  things  in  the  spiritual  Spheres.  The  be- 
ginning and  ending  of  things  appear  not ; but  their  actual  existence 
is  made  manifest  with  all  their  living  beauties. 

Wisdom  here  existing  consists  not  in  words,  nor  in  the  depths  of 
the  memory  ; but  in  the  actual  manifestation  that  everything  vividly 
displays.  In  other  words,  instruction  and  admonition  are  not  derived 
from  speech,  but  from  action  and  representation.  And  everything 
here  is  profitable  and  practical  — nothing  is  useless  or  imaginative. 

Those  of  the  first,  society  dwell  much  in  the  delights  of  these  plains 
and  their  variegated  foliage,  from  a sense  and  susceptibility  of  love, 
but  not  with  an  appreciation  of  wisdom  : and  they  are  thereby  in- 
structed, developed,  and  rendered  pure.  Herein  is  displayed  a per- 
fect adaptation  ; for  while  they  are  irresistibly  drawn  to  the  beauties 
thus  presented,  those  beauties  in  return  breathe  into  them  the  breath 
of  living  love,  enkindling  the  flame  of  perfect  wisdom,  which  then 
burns  to  purity.  All  things  are  adapted  to  the  necessities  of  man  ; 
and  this  they  feel,  both  from  an  inherent  consciousness,  and  also 
from  a living  desire  to  become  instructed  in  the  ways  of  goodness, 
which  are  those  paths  that  lead  throughout  the  many  portions  of  this 
Sphere. 

Those  of  the  second  society  enjoy  very  much  the  unity  displayed 
among  those  of  the  first  group,  and  also  the  delights  courted  by  the 
first.  Besides  this,  they  are  continually  investigating,  analyzing,  ex- 
ploring, and  cultivating,  those  many  things  which  are  within  their 
sphere  of  comprehension,  and  thus  producing  living  evidences  of 
their  wisdom  and  united  ingenuity. 

Those  of  the  third  society  are  to  the  rest  ministering  angels,  di- 
recting spirits,  and  perfect  examples  of  exalted  wisdom.  By  their 
knowledge  the  lower  societies,  and  even  the  spiritual  possessions  of 
the  whole  Sphere,  are  illuminated  and  made  bright,  beautiful,  and 
enchanting. 

There  are  also  flowing  through  these  gardens  rivers  of  clear  and 
placid  waters  ; and  even  in  these  are  exemplified  the  ceaseless  flow- 
ings of  Love  and  Wisdom,  that  are  breathed,  not  only  into  heaven, 
but  into  the  Universe,  and  become  the  light  and  life  of  all  created 
things.  The  Love  of  each  society,  like  the  still  water  agitated  by  a 


nature’s  divine  revelations.  655 

falling  pebble,  expands  and  waves  throughout  all  the  lower  and  higher 
spheres  until  the  wave  has  almost  reached  the  bounds  of  space,  which 
is  then  filled  with  love.  There  is  no  limiting  the  extension  of  the 
wave  of  water,  nor  can  the  unfoldings  of  love  be  circumscribed.  And 
as  the  waters  will  roll  gently  against  the  shore,  so  Love  flows  forth 
and  unfolds  itself  until  it  becomes  merged  into  Wisdom,  which  then 
is  rendered  surpassingly  beautiful,  because  Love  is  its  creative  soul 
and  living  principle. 

Those  rivers  are  representations  of  Divine  creation.  They  also 
represent  Life:  for  as  the  river  flows  from  the  rill,  so  Life  flows  from 
the  germ  that  is  deposited  deep  in  the  interior  of  the  Universe  ; and 
as  the  rill  flows  into  and  becomes  an  immense  ocean,  so  Life  flows 
into  and  becomes  the  animating  soul  of  all  things.  These  rivers  are 
so  very  clear  and  translucent,  that  the  brilliancy  of  the  azure  heavens 
is  in  them  vividly  reflected.  And  as  night  makes  the  stars  appear, 
so  do  these  waters  represent  the  whole  celestial  scenery  above  them. 

These  rivers  flow  through  valleys  abounding  in  the  most  beautiful 
and  varied  creations,  and  in  every  species  of  variegated  foliage  that 
also  adorns  those  vast  plains;  and  the  whole  presents  the  most  ex- 
alted representation  of  life  and  Wisdom. 

I behold,  also,  groves  that  are  of  the  most  charming  and  enchant- 
ing character.  It  is  impossible  to  behold  them  without  being  im- 
pressed with  new  and  beautiful  thoughts,  such  as  they  naturally 
suggest.  In  these  groves  are  reposing  those  who  investigate  and 
who  love  wisdom  and  the  Divine  Mind  supremely.  And  those 
that  are  in  the  first  society,  or  in  Love  only,  court  the  refreshing 
shades  of  those  groves,  and  learn  with  docility  and  yet  with  dignity, 
of  the  beauties  that  are  around  and  above  them,  and  are  instructed  by 
these  beauties’  expounders. 

^ 196.  I perceive  that  all  spirits  are  engaged  in  loving  their  neigh- 
bors, and  advancing  their  welfare  ; and  here  is  good  will  without  dis- 
tinction. I perceive  that  spirits  are  engaged  in  exploring  the  fields  of 
Thought,  and  searching  deeply  into  the  causes  of  things  ; and  thus 
they  learn  of  love  and  accumulate  wisdom.  And  there  is  no  inertia, 
no  stagnation,  but  activity  and  industry  are  visible  in  every  depart- 
ment of  this  heavenly  Sphere.  And  it  is  well  to  relate  that  every 
one  is  engaged  in  that  for  which  he  has  an  affection,  and  there  is, 
therefore,  no  confusion.  Nor  are  there  any  disqualifying  conditions, 
but  every  one  is  qualified  to  labor  in  that  for  which  he  has  an  affec- 


6-5G 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


tion.  Affections  are  varied  according  to  the  degrees  to  which  each 
spirit  from  the  first  to  the  highest  society,  has  advanced  in  the  stages 
of  development.  Hence  industry  is  equal,  useful,  harmonious,  and 
reciprocal ; for  every  one  gravitates  to  the  situation  which  accords 
with  his  predisposing  desire. 

Moreover,  I behold  here  some  of  the  most  magnificent  creations 
of  Will  and  Wisdom.  It  is  well  to  remark,  that  everything  created 
in  this  sphere  is  suggested  by  Love  and  perfected  by  Wisdom  — and 
is,  therefore,  a living  projection  from  their  minds.  Things  are  crea- 
ted by  Will  ; and  these  I discover  are  distributed  in  a uniform  man- 
ner throughout  the  plains,  valleys,  rivers,  and  groves  of  the  spirit- 
home.  I discover  constructions  of  the  most  grand  and  magnificent 
character,  each  having  a brilliancy  and  illumination  according  to  the 
advanced  state  of  the  society  in  which  it  is  found.  The  first  society 
have  creations  which  are  representations  of  their  Love,  and  Will, 
and  uncultivated  Wisdom  ; and  these  they  behold  as  representations 
of  their  interior  thoughts.  The  creations  of  the  second  society  dis- 
play more  uniformity,  order,  and  usefulness  ; and  thus  they  subserve 
the  purposes  of  the  first  society  and  themselves.  The  third  society 
have  splendid  constructions,  too  vast  and  elegant  to  describe,  and  the 
most  ambitious  imagination  could  not  transcend  them  in  its  concep- 
tions. For  they  are  in  reality  too  perfect  and  too  magnificent  to  be 
conceived  of  by  any  mind  in  its  rudimeUtal  state  of  being. 

And  there  exists  among  them  a pervading  happiness  ; a soothing 
and  tranquillizing  element  of  forgiveness  and  universal  love  ; a cordi- 
ality in  the  bestowment  of  inherent  love  upon  each  other,  and  a min- 
gling, and  yet  perfect  harmony,  of  thoughts,  all  of  which  it  is  delightful 
to  contemplate.  These  manifestations  all  proclaim  the  divinity  of 
the  life  and  love  that  flow  into  and  animate  all  the  heavens. 

The  vvaftings  of  thought  from  one  mind  to  another,  are  such  as 
can  be  felt,  and  yet  no  spirit  receives  thought  uncongenial  with  its 
quality  and  being.  These  waftings  are  breaths  that  are  inhaled  by 
unfolded  spirits  willing  to  receive  them.  It  appears  as  if  thoughts 
were  continually  descending  into  the  recesses  of  less  advanced  spir- 
itual existence,  and  also  ascending  through  all  the  higher  Spheres 
even  to  the  highest,  which  is  the  seat  and  Throne  of  the  Divine 
Mind. 

There  are  truths  here  known  of  the  most  novel  and  mysterious 
character ; but  these  I am  not  permitted  to  relate  at  this  time  ; for 
they  are  unimportant  to  the  human  race.  Yet  there  is  a class  of 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


657 


truths  which  it  is  profitable  to  mention  — and  these  are  concerning 
the  experiences,  opinions,  and  beliefs,  that  exist  among  the  inhabi- 
tants of  this  spiritual  Sphere. 

I perceive  that  when  infants  are  introduced  from  the  human  races 
into  the  first  society,  they  are  believed  to  be  born  among  them:  for 
appearances  to  them  are  the  same  as  to  families  in  the  human  race. 
After  the  infant  is  ushered  into  their  midst,  they  behold  and  admire 
it;  for  it  teaches  tenderness,  kindness,  and  immaculate  purity.  In- 
fants, therefore,  are  caressed,  nourished,  guided,  and  admonished  by 
them,  according  to  the  high  degree  of  love  and  wisdom  that  exists 
arnons  the  various  societies.  The  infant  is  beheld  as  constituted 
only  of  love,  and  as  possessing  inherent  qualities  that  will  unfold  and 
lead  to  perfection.  Their  whole  object  is  to  produce  a proper  de- 
velopment of  the  germinal  qualities  contained  in  love  ; and  this  they 
do  by  processes  of  the  most  simple  and  gentle  character. 

And  so  it  is  also  with  spirits  from  the  human  race  that  are  imper- 
fectly developed  while  in  the  human  body,  and  with  such  as  have 
had  their  faculties  and  spiritual  principles  misdirected,  obstructed,  or 
disconcerted.  Thus,  I perceive  that  imbecile  persons,  especially  if 
they  have  become  so  by  accident  or  disease,  are  received  into  this 
Sphere  as  ivfant  spirits,  and  are  then  unfolded  and  rendered 
beautiful. 

I moreover  perceive  that  those  who  are  interiorly  deformed  from 
birth,  have  no  identity,  or  even  birth  in  the  higher  Sphere.  And  so 
it  is  with  all  unorganized  bodies ; for  such  are  not  capable  of  devel- 
oping the  qualities  and  faculties  of  the  spirit,  and  hence  do  not  pre- 
serve their  identity. 

Spirits  from  the  human  race  who  have  been  from  birth  dejected 
and  disconsolated,  and  who  have  suffered  trials  and  afflictions  of  the 
most  severe  character,  are  received  to  the  bosom  of  the  first,  or  sec- 
ond, or  third  society,  with  exceeding  great  joy  — so  great  is  the 
fondness  of  love  for  them,  and  the  desire  to  make  them  happy. 
They  are  received  to  the  bosom  of  their  affection,  and  to  the  life 
of  their  love,  as  the  mother  receives  and  embraces  her  child.  They 
are  cherished  and  loved  with  all  the  combined  affection  that  dwells 
in  the  depths  of  each  spirit.  How  joyful  it  is  to  see  those  welcomes, 
and  those  soothing  and  tranquillizing  affections  breathed  into  that 
spirit  who  has  suffered  trials  and  afflictions  in  the  human  race  ! 

The  quality  of  a spirit  is  at  once  perceived,  and  what  is  better 
than  all,  is,  the  dwellers  in  this  sphere  judge  not  by  external  or  su- 

42 


65S 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


perficial  manifestations,  such  as  passions  or  impulses  of  the  soul,  but 
by  the  quality  and  advanced  state  of  the  spirit  itself;  and  it  is  accord- 
ing to  this  that  they  love  the  spirit  introduced  into  their  midst.  Yet 
the  strength  of  their  love  is  in  proportion  to  the  capability  of  the  in- 
troduced spirit  to  appreciate  and  enjoy  it.  Love  is  not  bestowed  too 
abundantly,  nor  is  any  privilege  granted  which  is  not  useful  ; but 
everything  of  this  nature  is  graduated  according  to  capabilities.  Thus 
it  is  that  “ to  whom  much  is  given,  of  him  is  much  required.”  This 
is  a truth  which  angels  know  ; and  these  are  the  words  of  superior 
wisdom. 

And  what  may  appear  strange  is,  that  often  when  a spirit  leaves  the 
human  form,  and  is  introduced  into  this  Sphere,  it  for  a moment  can 
not  realize  the  change,  for  it  is  imperceptible.  Spirits  retain  the 
same  bodily  form  in  the  spiritual  Sphere  ; and  at  first  they  feel  as  if 
they  were  only  transferred  to  a country  they  knew  not.  It  is,  how- 
ever, not  long  after  the  transition  before  their  interior  senses  are 
opened;  and  then  they  behold  and  appreciate  the  change,  and  the 
beauties  with  which  they  are  surrounded.  And  some  spirits  appear 
to  wonder  that  they  did  not  see  it  before,  and  that  they  did  not 
believe  it  while  in  the  body  ; for  now  it  appears  so  tangible,  and  so 
perfectly  agreeable  with  the  universal  teachings  of  natural  law. 

Men  who  have  been  impressed  on  earth  with  certain  doctrines 
concerning  the  other  life,  seem  to  smile  at  themselves,  and  marvel 
because  they  were  so  misled,  and  so  easy  to  be  misdirected.  Some 
who  have  believed  in  the  literal  resurrection  of  the  material  body,  are 
so  ashamed  of  this  conviction  that  they  strive  to  hide  their  memory 
of  it  from  the  perception  of  others.  And  some  strive  to  modify  their 
previous  beliefs  so  as  to  make  them  harmonize  with  what  they  now 
experience  and  know  to  be  true.  And  such  is  the  case  with  those 
who  have  imbibed  gross  doctrines  while  on  earth,  and  which  are  still 
impressed  upon  their  memory  ; for  immediately  after  the  transition, 
they  recognise  the  falsity  of  their  previous  convictions,  and  for  a little 
while  strive  to  conceal  and  modify  them.  This  desire,  I discover, 
continues  only  for  a little  season  ; for  being  penetrated  by  the  per- 
ceptions of  others  with  ease,  they  are  led  to  discard  with  pleasure  the 
impressions  of  the  memory,  and  their  hereditary  affection  for  doc- 
trines ; and  they  then  become  enlightened  by  the  light  and  love  of 
heaven,  and  begin  their  ascending  progress  toward  the  higher  socie- 
ties of  their  new  home. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


659 


§ 197.  The  first  society  is  in  Love,  the  second  is  in  Will,  and  the 
third  is  in  Wisdom.  These  societies  are  composed  of  families, 
groups,  and  associations.  And  these  live  in  an  harmonious  manner 
one  with  another,  displaying  perfect  order,  form,  and  series  of  devel- 
opment and  position.  And  all  are  thus  as  one  Brotherhood. 

Even  one  of  these  societies  is  composed  of  more  individuals  than 
are  existing  upon  all  the  planets  in  the  solar  system,  and  even  upon 
all  the  earths  belonging  to  the  fifth  Circle  of  Suns.  Their  numbers 
transcend  computation.  And  I discover  that  the  first  Sphere  of 
spiritual  existence  is  unfolded  from  the  last  Sphere  of  material  crea- 
tion, which  is  the  Circle  of  Suns  above  referred  to.  It  appears  now 
a little  strange  to  me  that  men  have  not  conceived  this  truth  before. 
But  when  man  is  in  the  human  body,  with  his  material  senses  opened, 
he  perceives  material  things , because  he  is  animated  from  the  inner 
to  the  outer  world:  but  when  he  escapes  the  body,  at  death,  though 
the  form  is  not  changed,  nor  any  of  its  qualities  or  properties,  yet  in- 
stead of  seeing  with  his  material  he  perceives  with  his  spiritual 
senses  ; and  the  spirit-world  is  unfolded  to  his  view.  The  transition 
is  imperceptible. 

I discover  that  most  of  the  inhabitants  of  Mercury,  Venus,  the 
Earth,  and  Mars,  are  dwelling  in  the  first  society  of  the  Second 
Sphere  ; and  that  those  of  the  other  planets  occupy  higher  positions 
in  the  plane  of  thought  and  wisdom. 

And  a holy  quietness  pervades  the  whole  spirit-world.  There  is 
happiness  of  the  most  inexpressible  character  — and  ecstasies,  and 
exultations,  and  glorifications,  are  continually  ascending.  There  is 
so  much  purity  and  holiness  that  my  mind  is  scarcely  capable  of 
withstanding  its  moving  influence,  such  as  would  instantly  annihilate 
all  speech.  Yet  I have  now  a strength  which  I have  not  before 
known.  I can  receive  the  inflowings  of  these  truths,  and  behold 
these  holy  and  celestial  beauties,  without  becoming  disconcerted  or 
incapable  of  declaration. 

They  have  a sense  of  music:  but  it  proceeds  not  from  hearing,  for 
they  perceive  harmony,  and  the  soul  of  harmony,  which  is  music. 
Such  floats  along  the  strata  of  the  atmosphere,  and  is  wafted  into  the 
soul  as  the  fragrance  of  a flower  into  the  senses.  I do  not  hear  but 
see  music.  I see  it  in  the  united  voices  of  flowers,  that  speak,  yet 
make  no  sound  — in  the  shrubbery  and  foliage  that  proclaim  truths, 
yet  speak  not — and  in  the  harmony  of  each  heavenly  society  : for 
that  harmony  is  heavenly  music.  Music  is  perceived  by  the  unfold- 


660 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


ed  senses,  and  appreciated  by  the  Wisdom.  It  is  the  soul  of  order, 
the  creator  of  all  celestial  harmony  and  melody.  The  music  thus 
perceived  sinks  into  the  depths  of  the  soul,  and  unfolds  sentiments 
of  which  the  spirit-home  alone  is  worthy.  There  is  not  a labyrinth 
or  avenue  of  the  spirit-land  that  is  not  penetrated  by  the  vibrations 
and  silent  echoings  of  this  heavenly  harmony.  There  is  not  a 
thought  concealed  in  the  soul  which  is  not  quickened  into  life  and 
awakened  into  the  act  of  glorification  thereby.  There  is  not  a recess 
in  the  material  or  spiritual  Universe  that  is  not  quickened  with  life 
and  illuminated  with  light,  even  Divine  Love  ; and  wherever  this  ex- 
ists, music  flows  and  is  congenial.  Hence  everything  loves  and  ap- 
preciates music  ; and  this  is  perfected  only  in  the  Second  Sphere. 

There  is  a translucent  beauty,  and  glory,  and  holiness,  and  happi- 
ness, that  pervade  and  quicken  into  life  the  spirit-home,  that  defy  all 
verbal  expression.  There  is  such  a specificness  manifested  in  all 
things,  and  yet  such  an  inseparable  unity  and  brotherly  love,  as  can 
not  be  described,  but  is  to  be  known  only  when  experienced.  It  is 
impossible  to  portray  the  delights,  the  ecstasies,  and  the  enchant- 
ments, which  flow  into  the  mind  as  it  is  immersed  into  this  beautiful 
Sphere  of  spiritual  existence. 

I can  read  from  the  memory  of  any  spirit,  either  in  the  human 
form  or  in  this  spiritual  Sphere,  with  as  much  ease  as  one  can  read 
from  a book.  I can  converse  with  the  spirits  distinctly,  and  learn 
from  them  the  peculiar  impressions  and  affections  of  their  souls  ; and 
this  I can  communicate  to  any  person  in  the  human  form.  But 
this  I am  not  permitted  to  do  at  all  times,  inasmuch  as  it  would  be 
revealing  that  which  the  human  race  should  not  know. 

One  more  important  truth  it  is  well  to  relate  ; and  that  is,  that 
those  who  form  a mutual  attachment  while  on  earth,  which  is  pure 
and  true,  continue  to  preserve  an  affection  for  one  another  through- 
out the  spiritual  Spheres.  If  the  attachment  is  pure,  it  will  be  their 
conjugal  affection,  of  the  highest  degree  of  refinement.  And  if  one 
leaves  the  form  before  the  other,  this  will  make  no  difference  : for 
when  they  are  both  out  of  the  form,  they  recognise  each  other  in  the 
same  manner  as  friends  do  in  the  human  race.  And  if  one  has  pro- 
gressed further  than  the  other,  the  one  possessing  wisdom  will  per- 
vade and  cultivate  the  love  of  the  other,  until  their  natures  become 
assimilated,  and  they  become  fully  suited  to  associate  with  one 
another.  All  attachments  are  of  the  Love ; and  all  love  is  modi- 
fied and  perfected  by  Wisdom.  Hence,  while  all  conjugal  affection 


NATURE  S DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


661 


on  earth  is  of  the  Love,  all  conjugal  affection  in  heaven  is  of  the 
Wisdom,  strengthened  and  quickened  into  life  by  the  Love  which 
gave  birth  to  the  prior  attachment. 

And  also  little  children  are  recognised  and  loved  here  as  they  are 
on  earth.  Parents  who  love  their  children  while  in  the  form,  con- 
tinue to  love  them  in  this  Sphere;  and  their  love  is  here  strengthened 
by  superior  wisdom.  If  a child  leave  the  form  while  very  young, 
and  the  parents  when  aged,  the  child  must  of  necessity  be  far  ad- 
vanced, both  in  its  outward  size  and  its  inward  developments.  But 
when  the  parents  are  introduced  into  the  same  Sphere,  they  know 
their  child  by  a peculiar  sense  of  rudimental  love  — by  a relation  of 
a constitutional  character  which  they  instantly  perceive  ; and  they 
rush  (with  wisdom)  into  each  others  embrace. 

All  are  joined  according  to  the  purity  and  realness  of  their  attach- 
ment. Degrees  of  refinement  do  not  determine  the  attachment  so 
much  as  the  quality  of  the  spiritual  constitution  ; and  this  is  according 
to  a law  pervading  all  material  and  spiritual  things. 

Such  is  the  Second  Sphere  of  human  existence  ; and  such  sub- 
stantially are  its  truths.  The  relation  between  it  and  the  earth,  and 
all  earths,  may  be  perceived  by  the  similitude  of  external  manifesta- 
tions, these  differing  only  in  degrees  of  purity  and  development. 
And  it  is  proper  and  advantageous  that  the  human  race  should  know 
and  appreciate  these  truths,  so  that  they  may  be  induced  to  press  on- 
ward and  upward  in  the  ascending  scale  of  progress  toward  the  great 
Fount  of  Love  and  Happiness.  This  is  the  object  of  the  present 
relation,  and  it  can  not  well  fail  to  perform  its  office  : and  when  this 
is  fulfilled,  the  race  will  be  elevated  to  a high  degree  of  social  and 
moral  culture,  and  thus  all  as  one  will  be  holy,  happy,  and  perfect. 

§ 19S.  Inasmuch  as  on  the  various  earths  there  are  born  several 
millions  of  spirits  in  one  second  of  time,  from  which  fact  there  neces- 
sarily occur  also  as  many  deaths,  so  an  equal  number  at  every  second 
are  being  introduced  into  the  spiritual  Sphere.  And  as  there  is  this 
incessant  influx  from  the  natural  into  the  spiritual  Sphere,  so  there  is 
also  an  equal  refluxation  from  the  Second  Sphere  into  the  Third, 
which  is  the  Celestial  Sphere.  Thus  the  movements  that  are  inces- 
santly and  imperceptibly  going  on,  are  in  number  beyond  the  com- 
prehension of  any  except  that  mighty  Mind  who  moved,  and  they  all 
sprang  into  being  ! 

There  is,  then,  an  incessant  transition  from  the  Second  to  the 


662 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


Third  Sphere  ; but  the  darkness  incident  thereunto  is  light,  and  the 
death  is  life  inconceivable.  Pain  is  a living  index  of  pleasure,  and 
love  is  the  first  indication  of  superior  wisdom.  The  highly-cultivated 
spirits  of  the  Second  Sphere  contemplate  this  transition  with  delight 
that  surpasses  all  human  speech.  There  is  no  more  death  to  them, 
for  death  is  life,  and  this  springs  up  and  blooms  in  the  Sphere  above, 
with  a brighter  beauty  and  a more  lovely  wisdom.  It  is  impossible 
to  describe  the  sensations  of  delight  which  exist  in  the  interior  of  that 
spirit  who  lies  down  to  repose  in  the  Second  Sphere,  to  be  quickened 
into  newness  of  life  in  the  first  society  in  the  third  heavens.  They 
experience  ecstasies  which  none  but  spirits  know ; and  what  is  more 
beautiful  than  all  is,  that  they  govern  their  delights  with  the  most 
transcending  wisdom.  They  only  migrate  from  the  habitation  of  the 
second  state,  into  the  more  congenial  climes  of  the  Sphere  above. 
“ The  sting  of  death”  is  lost  in  the  pleasures  of  life  and  beauty,  and 
herein  is  that  passage  fully  verified  which  speaks  of  this  consumma- 
tion.* Such  are  the  views  of  the  spirits  in  the  Second  Sphere  con- 
cerning their  flight  to  higher  habitations,  which  takes  place  according 
to  the  workings  of  natural  law. 

In  this  Sphere  I perceive  also  three  distinct  societies,  and  three 
aromas  of  the  most  inexpressible  brilliancy  : and  I perceive  that  they 
correspond  to  perfected  Love,  to  perfected  Wisdom,  and  to  celestial 
purity. 

The  first  society  is  composed  of  those  whose  last  stage  of  being 
was  in  the  third  society  in  the  Sphere  below.  They  have  Love, 
Will,  and  Wisdom,  combined,  and  to  a degree  of  perfection  that 
transcends  all  human  thought.  Their  love  is  so  pure  that  there  is  a 
visible  radiation  from  their  countenances,  and  a halo  of  purity  sur- 
rounding them  that  possesses  inexpressible  attractions.  Yea,  it  is 
like  the  electric  fire  : for  it  is  instantaneously  communicated  from  one 
to  another  ; and  thus  all  send  forth  smiles  of  delight,  until  the  whole 
society  is  exceedingly  delighted.  It  is  attractive  to  behold  their  per- 
fect Will,  or  the  holy  passiveness  of  that  faculty,  which  is  not  prompt- 
ed to  an  improper  act,  or  to  do  one  thing  derogatory  to  the  general 
welfare.  And  it  is  more  than  beautiful  to  behold  their  highly-culti- 
vated Wisdom  ; for  it  blooms  and  sends  forth  a fragrance  that  no 
flower  can  more  than  faintly  imitate.  And  this  fragrance  makes  glad 
every  spirit  in  heaven. 

The  second  society  are  still  more  advanced,  insomuch  that  they 
* “ Death,  is  swallowed  up  in  victory,”  & c.,  1 Cor.  xv.  54-57. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


663 


transcend  all  human  description.  They  are  so  perfectly  conjoined 
one  with  another,  and  their  mutual  affections  are  so  absorbing  and 
penetrating,  that  it  requires  a high  degree  of  discernment  to  make  a 
distinction  between  them. 

And  the  third  society  is  the  highest  of  the  Third  Sphere  ; and  they 
have  celestial  purity.  So  exceedingly  pure  are  they  that  every  sub- 
ordinate spirit  is  repelled  with  an  innate  consciousness  of  non-asso- 
ciation. Their  purity  gives  forth  a radiation  brighter  than  the  bright- 
est sun.  It  is  even  a light  of  love,  of  wisdom,  and  of  celestial  purity, 
that  gives  life  to  every  spirit  in  the  lower  societies.  They  are  guar- 
dian angels  to  those  below  them,  to  whom  they  are  constantly  de- 
scending, with  no  other  end  in  view  than  to  gratify  their  thirstings 
for  purity,  and  their  desires  that  are  holy  and  celestial. 

I perceive  here  also  those  plains  that  are  undulated  as  the  gentle 
waves  of  the  ocean.  T perceive  a celestial  fragrance  arising  from 
every  flower  that  blooms  in  the  garden  of  the  living  Mind  with  an 
immortal  beauty.  I behold  those  diversified  creations  ; and  each  one 
is  as  an  angel  proclaiming  immortal  truths  in  the  sanctuary  of  the 
Divine  Mind. 

It  is  well  to  relate  that  everything  has  a use  and  design , to  which  it 
is  with  promptness  applied  : and  there  are  thereby  ends  of  the  most 
inconceivable  importance  accomplished.  These  advance  the  condi- 
tion and  quality  of  each  spirit ; and  each  created  thing  is  only  a step 
to  perpetuate  infinite  progression.  Everything  is  as  an  act  of  the 
Divine  Mind,  and  every  representation  is  as  a word  fitly  spoken. 
These  things  are  all  perceived  by  their  expanded  powers.  Thus  it 
is  that  hearing  is  transformed  into  seeing , and  seeing  is  correspond- 
ingly elevated,  and  includes  all  the  powers  of  the  other  senses  com- 
bined. 

I behold  also  those  valleys.  Their  termination  can  not  be  seen, 
and  their  excellences  can  not  be  appreciated,  except  by  those  who 
dwell  among  them.  Each  valley  is  as  a volume  whose  contents  are 
sublime  beyond  conception,  and  each  plain  is  as  an  unbounded  field 
of  knowledge. 

And  I behold  also  those  very  placid  rivers  — whose  power  of  re- 
flection seems  only  fitted  to  represent  the  unspeakable  grandeur  that 
pervades  the  atmosphere  of  the  celestial  heaven.  A holy  pensive- 
ness seems  to  be  manifested  by  those  rivers  and  the  atmosphere  ; and 
they  seem  to  welcome  and  embrace  each  other.  The  still  waters 
seem  to  spring  up  unto  everlasting  life ; and  they  seem  to  play  and 


664 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


sport  with  the  brilliant  atmosphere,  as  if  there  were  a mutual  and 
lively  sympathy  between  them. 

Again,  I see  those  groves  — and  how  they  extend  to,  and  line  the 
surfy  margin  of  those  living  rivers:  and  their  roots  and  foliage  are 
baptized  in  them,  and  purified  to  the  glory  of  the  Infinite  Mind. 
There  is  a precision  in  every  form,  in  every  bud,  and  leaf,  and  flow- 
er, that  garland  and  render  beautiful  those  heavenly  groves.  Indeed, 
their  shade  casts  a freshness  which  inspires  every  living  form  that  re- 
poses therein  with  vigor  and  vivacity  ; and  thus  are  they  means  em- 
ployed by  the  Divine  Mind  to  refine  the  faculties  of  his  spirit-children, 
and  prepare  them  for  a home  in  the  highest  Spheres. 

§ 199.  Inasmuch  as  the  knowledge  of  this  Sphere  is  entirely  above 
the  comprehension  cf  the  human  race,  I am  not  permitted  to  dwell 
upon  it  to  any  extent.  For  I perceive  that  all  these  relations  are 
only  permitted  as  a means  to  elevate  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth,  and 
to  purify  all  their  spiritual  sentiments.  But  I now  perceive  the  truth 
of  a passage  in  the  Primitive  History,  by  one  of  the  lovely  spirits 
that  dwell  in  the  celestial  Sphere,  and  also  its  application.  For  here 
are  beauties  innumerable,  all  of  which  are  means  employed  by  Di- 
vine Wisdom  to  perpetuate  infinite  progression,  and  whereby  his 
spirit-children  of  all  earths  and  all  Spheres  may  dwell  in  the  “Fa- 
ther’s house  not  made  with  hands,  eternal  in  the  heavens.”  And  I 
perceive  that  “in  the  Father’s  house  there  are  many  mansions,”  all 
of  which  are  illuminated  by  Divine  Love,  animated  by  perfected 
spirits,  and  send  forth  an  expanding  brilliancy  throughout  all  space, 
which  is  the  order,  and  form,  and  soul,  of  Divine  Wisdom. 

The  inhabitants  of  the  Third  Sphere  impart  knowledge  and  ex- 
press love  to  each  other,  as  the  sun  imparts  life  and  beauty  to  the 
forms  on  earth.  And  in  this  Sphere  are  also  imparted  a grace,  ease, 
and  elegance,  that  beautify  and  sublimate  every  spirit. 

It  is  charming  beyond  description  to  behold  the  stately  palms,  and 
how  they  by  every  movement  proclaim  humiliation  — and  to  see  with 
what  grace  they  bow  their  majestic  tops  to  the  breaths  of  divine  Wis- 
dom ! And  while  spirits  are  seeking  repose  under  their  wide-spread 
branches,  they  learn  a lesson  of  grace,  and  meekness,  and  gentle- 
ness, which  is  indestructible.  It  is,  moreover,  enchanting  to  behold 
the  fertility,  so  expressive  of  divine  Love,  and  to  perceive  the  fra- 
grance so  typical  of  celestial  purity. 

Every  spirit  has  an  exhalation  or  bodily  atmosphere  which  is  an 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


66-5 


exact  indication  of  the  quality  and  purity  of  its  interiors';  and  thereby 
are  all  distinguished.  For  spheres  are  of  every  possible  variety  of 
color,  according  to  the  qualities  of  the  spirits  from  which  they  ema- 
nate. Some  have  mingled  colors,  and  some  have  only  one.  And 
it  is  also  given  me  to  know,  that  every  natural  earth,  and  that  every 
mineral,  vegetable,  animal,  man,  and  spirit  — yea,  that  every  particle 
of  matter  in  the  universe,  has  a peculiar  sphere,  by  which  it  may  be 
designated  and  recognised:  — also,  that  every  spiritual  sphere,  from 
the  lowest  to  the  highest,  has  a spherical  emanation  that  describes  its 
interior.  It  is  surpassingly  delightful  to  see  those  aromas  and 
haloes  of  purity  that  surround  every  spirit. 

So  true  is  it  that  all  things  have  a language , that  even  the  spirits 
learn  as  children  in  a hook,  from  the  united  voices  coming  from 
everything  created.  The  whole  forms  a Volume  whose  contents  are 
celestial,  and  whose  philosophy  is  the  Divine  Creator’s.  Every  pas- 
sage which  it  contains  proclaims  goodness  infinite,  and  every  page 
unfolds  volumes  of  immense  love.  The  whole  Book  is  an  offspring 
of  Wisdom.  Yea,  it  was  written  in  the  great  temple  of  Truth,  and 
in  the  home  of  many  mansions.  The  spring,  the  rill,  the  stream, 
and  the  river,  are  introductions  to  this  great  Volume.  The  groves, 
ravines,  and  forests,  are  margins  that  cast  a reflection  on  its  contents, 
and  speak  only  of  harmony  and  inherent  affection.  The  valleys, 
plains,  and  beautiful  gardens,  abounding  in  all  the  luxuriant  and  im- 
mense creations  of  the  spirit-home,  are  the  impressed  words  on  the 
leaves  of  this  divine  Book.  And  angels  are  the  recipients  of  the  in- 
struction thereof,  through  which  their  interior  powers  are  expanded 
to  the  glory  of  the  Divine  Mind  for  ever  and  ever.  They  drink  at 
the  fount  of  Wisdom,  and  walk  in  the  fields  and  gardens  of  celestial 
Love.  They  are  incessantly  employed  in  imparting  blessings  to 
those  who  need,  and  meanwhile  they  receive  in  return  the  smiles 
and  approbations  of  a delighted  heaven.  Yea,  in  this  the  angels 
rejoice,  and  give  forth  songs  of  thanksgiving  and  praise  that  ascend 
through  all  the  Spheres,  to  be  recognised  by  Him  who  spake,  and 
all  things  became  alive  ! 

Such  are  the  combined  beauties  of  the  Celestial  Sphere  : but 
what  has  been  said  concerning  Nature,  Man,  the  Second  Sphere,  and 
the  Universe,  is  as  nothing  in  comparison  to  that  which  might  be 
related  concerning  this  one  state  of  spiritual  existence.  We  have 
only  as  yet  entered  the  vestibule  that  introduces  the  mind  into  the 
great  Temple  of  divine  Truth,  whose  foundation  is  in  the  depths  of 


666 


nature’s  divine  REVELATIONS.  ' 


the  Universe,  whose  immensity  fills  all  space,  and  whose  aspiring 
domes  are  lost  in  the  heights  of  infinity ! Nay,  the  heights,  and 
depths,  and  lengths,  and  breadths,  thereof,  can  be  known  only  by 
its  Maker  and  Builder,  who  is  the  Living  Soul  of  all  things.  This 
Temple  has  splendor  and  gorgeous  magnificence  that  no  mind  can 
conceive  or  appreciate  save  that  Divine  Architect  who  fills  and  ani- 
mates it  by  the  living  fire  of  his  own  Love,  and  beautifies  it  by  the 
living  energies  of  his  own  Wisdom  ! 

What  has  been  said  concerning  the  Third  Sphere,  and  all  previ- 
ous ones,  is,  then,  as  but  one  particle  compared  to  that  which  is,  and 
shall  for  ever  remain,  unrelated.  Expand  the  Universe  to  an  extent 
that  will  outdo  space,  and  make  spheres  so  numerous  as  to  defy  all 
computation  — and  yet  there  is  a Univerccelum  about  which  not  one 
word  can  be  spoken,  or  one  thought  can  be  conceived.  If  all  the 
sublimest  thoughts  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth  were  combined, 
their  magnitude  would  be  naught  in  comparison  to  the  extent  of  the 
beauty,  greatness,  and  grandeur,  of  the  celestial  heaven.  Nay,  all 
thoughts,  save  the  thoughts  of  that  Being  whom  these  things  repre- 
sent, would  be  as  one  atom  in  comparison  to  that  which  is  above, 
beneath,  and  around  those  things  of  which  I have  spoken.  The 
human  race  can  not  conceive  of  this  immensity;  but  O!  how  beau- 
tiful, how  pure,  and  how  enduring,  are  these  truths  ! 

Yet,  the  restless  mind  of  man  leaves  earth  and  soars  off  into  the 
regions  of  the  celestial  spheres  ; it  strives  to  familiarize  itself  with 
all  the  creations  thereof,  and  brings  into  its  employ  all  the  mathe- 
matical skill  that  can  be  of  service  in  marking  out  and  mapping  out 
the  structure  of  the  Universe  ; and  while  it  is  striving  to  comprehend 
these  things,  the  thoughts  expand  to  their  utmost  tension,  and  doubt 
and  dread  repulse  it  back  to  earth.  It  finds  no  resting-place,  and 
returns  to  its  narrow  encasement  unsatisfied.  Hence,  again,  I say,- 
were  all  thoughts  of  this  nature  that  ever  have  been  conceived  by 
man,  combined  together,  they  would  not  be  adequate  to  a comprehen- 
sion of  the  grandeur  even  of  the  Third  Sphere  of  human  existence. 

I perceive,  then,  that  we  have  just  entered  the  vestibule  that  leads 
to  apartments  too  vast  and  immense  to  ever  be  described.  Yet  I am 
permitted  to  ascend  to  the  Fourth  Sphere,  and  observe  the  com- 
parative perfection  that  there  exists,  in  reference  to  that  of  the  subor- 
dinate habitations.  Thus  I ascend  to,  and  am  immerged  into,  the 
fourth  habitation  of  the  spirits  and  angels  that  were  once  of  the 
human  race. 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


667 


§ 200.  I now  perceive  the  order  of  the  spheres  ; which  is  in  this 
wise  : The  first  Sphere  is  the  Natural  ; the  second  is  the  Spiritual ; 
the  third,  the  Celestial;  the  fourth,  the  Supernatural;  the  fifth,  the 
Superspiritual ; and  the  sixth,  the  Supercelestial. 

I am  now  permitted  to  speak  of  matters  pertaining  to  the  Super- 
natural Sphere. 

In  this  sphere  are  also  three  societies  and  three  distinct  degrees  of 
Love,  Will,  and  Wisdom  — each  society  being  unfolded  from  the 
one  next  below. 

I perceive  that  an  incessant  transition  is  also  occurring  from  the 
Third  to  this  Sphere,  and  also  an  as  immense  transferation  from  this 
to  a still  higher. 

In  this  Sphere  everything  is  still  more  lovely  : and  even  here  all 
things  appear  to  have  attained  the  highest  possible  loveliness  and  ex- 
altation. So  true  is  this,  that  the  inhabitants  of  the  sphere  next  below, 
in  all  their  sparkling  purity,  appear  even  as  undeveloped.  The  beau- 
tiful emanation  that  surrounds  and  clothes  each  society,  is  of  such  an 
intense  light  that  it  is  impossible  to  approach  it,  or  to  search  into  the 
interiors  of  the  inhabitants.  Colors  of  every  conceivable  description 
surround  their  local  habitation,  each  being  a bright  indication  of 
purity,  goodness,  happiness,  and  wisdom.  Every  form  and  thing  is 
constantly  growing  lovelier  and  lovelier,  and  every  sphere  more 
beautiful  and  pure.  Each  indicates  a spiral  progression,  and  that 
they  are  ascending  nigh  unto  the  throne  of  the  Alpha  and  Omega. 
Each  thing  shows  forth  its  own  purity,  and  speaks  its  own  celestial 
language.  Each  object  is  distinct  in  its  proclamations,  and  every 
lesson  of  instruction  is  as  a word  of  the  Most  High  ! 

The  first  society  is  in  numbers  almost  infinite  : and  from  them 
flows  spontaneously  an  element  of  love  that  is  clearer  than  the  clear- 
est water,  and  brighter  than  the  brightest  crystal ; and  its  reflection 
clothes  the  higher  societies  with  a garment  of  whiteness  pure  as  the 
jewels  that  adorn  the  crown  of  the  King  of  kings  and  the  Lord  of 
lords. 

And  from  the  mediatorial  society  flows  a constant  stream  of  pas-  ■ 
sive  and  active  Will,  subject  at  all  times  to  the  life-giving  promptings 
of  Love,  and  receiving  the  high  approbations  of  Wisdom.  This  is 
constantly  descending  and  ascending,  as  the  light  goeth  forth  from  the 
sun  to  enliven  the  earth,  and  returns  to  he  revivified. 

Wisdom  in  this  supernatural  Sphere,  is  as  a fount  that  is  constantly 
springing  up  and  flowing  over  all  the  subordinates.  It  is  like  a great 


CCS 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


receptacle  in  which  are  deposited  the  choicest  thoughts  and  memo- 
ries of  the  angels  and  spirits  of  this  exalted  Sphere.  It  is  like  a 
treasury  whose  contents  are  depositions  for  the  lower  angels,  who 
ascend  to  and  unlock  it,  and  extract  from  its  depths  beautiful 
thoughts,  and  upon  them  ponder  and  meditate.  They  have  contem- 
plations so  exceedingly  immense,  that  the  Love  and  Life  of  the 
Universe  appear  open  to  their  thoughts,  and  they  drink„,of  their 
depths  and  thirst  not. 

In  a more  exalted  degree  I behold  those  plains — decked  with 
life  and  beauty  inconceivable  ; and  over  them  is  diffused  an  omni- 
prevalent  element  of  purity  that  appears  as  life,  and  by  this  they  live 
and  bloom  in  beauty. 

In  a different  and  higher  degree,  also,  I perceive  those  ceaseless 
streams  of  living  ivatcr.  Their  gentle  flowings  speak  only  of  tran- 
quillity and  unending  happiness;  while  the  inexhaustible  Fount 
from  which  they  spring  proclaims  the  constitution  and  infinity  of  the 
Divine  Mind. 

Also  those  undulating  valleys , or  wave-like  variations,  appear,  pre- 
senting grandeur  and  loveliness  indescribable.  They  transcend  all 
possible  conceptions  of  the  lovely  and  beautiful  ; and  their  united 
voices  sink  into  the  recesses  of  the  soul,  yet  they  are  silent  and  un- 
heard. They  are  penetrating  as  the  electric  fire,  yet  gentle  as  the 
mountain-air.  They  are  dignified  in  their  tone,  and  are  withal  im- 
pressively pensive.  They  do  not  compel,  but  cause  a voluntary  sub- 
mission to  their  undying  teachings. 

And  again  those  groves  are  presented  — and  appear  in  a more  ex- 
alted degree  of  loveliness.  They  are  as  the  tree  of  Righteousness, 
budding  and  blossoming  as  the  rose.  They  proclaim  glory  and 
honor  even  in  their  refreshing  shade,  and  inspire  the  reposer  therein 
with  thoughts  worthy  of  such  a celestial  home. 

And  the  inhabitants  are  of  the  most  exquisite  purity  and  loveliness  ; 
and  they,  with  one  united  voice  — a voice  that  arises  not  from  speech, 
but  from  action ■ — proclaim  glory,  honor,  immortality,  and  eternal  life. 
They  are  wending  their  way  up  to  the  city  of  the  living  God.  They 
are  illuminating  the  vestibule  of  truth  and  the  archway  that  leads  to 
immortal  life.  They  are  pervading  all  below  them  with  the  holy  in- 
fluences of  wisdom,  and  with  the  most  simple  love.  Gentle  as  the 
unsophisticated  dove,  they  send  forth  a welcome  to  all  below  their 
exalted  state  ; and  with  a kind,  peaceful,  and  inviting  smile,  they  call 
all  to  come  away,  and  go  with  them  to  the  Fount  of  purity  on  high  1 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


6G9 


The  atmosphere  of  this  spirit-home  is  rainbowed  and  clothed  with 
resplendent  brightness,  such  as  reflects  the  goodness  of  all  things, 
and  the  use  to  which  they  are  applied.  Yea,  it  is  a mirror  in  which 
are  represented  the  living  beauties  of  heaven  and  earth  — even  of 
all  things  beneath  this  exalted  state  of  perfection. 

Such  is  the  loveliness,  goodness,  and  wisdom  of  the  Divine  Mind, 
that  nothing  is  made  in  vain  ; but  everything  is  as  a living  thought, 
and  every  thought  is  as  a representative  of  perfect  Wisdom.  Every- 
thing is  thus,  admired,  appreciated,  and  applied,  in  every  degree  of 
material  and  spiritual  existence  ; and  in  this  Supernatural  Sphere 
this  truth  is  especially  and  perfectly  manifested. 

§ 201.  Inasmuch  as  life  is  universal,  death  can  not  mar  the  divine 
constitution  of  things  ; and  by  virtue  of  this,  the  inhabitants  of  the 
Fourth  Sphere,  like  those  of  others,  repose  for  a moment  in  silence, 
and  awake  as  beings  of  the  Fifth  Sphere  or  Superspiritual  habi- 
tation. And  by  and  through  this  process,  I am  enabled  to  behold 
the  vast  possessions  of  the  fifth  department  of  the  great  Temple  of 
Truth. 

It  is  almost  impossible  to  approach,  yet  I draw  nigh  and  behold 
with  humility  the  extended  landscape  and  living  happiness,  which  are 
here  so  exceedingly  enchanting,  that  all  I have  previously  beheld 
appears  clouded  with  comparative  imperfection.  The  vast  land- 
scape of  this  spiritual  habitation  is  reflected  on  the  perceptions  of  my 
spirit  with  an  impressiveness  that  renders  all  speech  inadequate  to 
express  the  beauties  thereof. 

The  first  society,  as  in  the  third  and  fourth  Spheres,  is  a child  of 
the  highest  society  in  the  Sphere  below.  And  here  Love,  Will,  and 
Wisdom,  present  a more  attractive  loveliness.  Love  appears  as  the 
perfection  of  Wisdom,  while  Wisdom  appears  greater  and  more  ex- 
tensive than  all  the  Love  and  Wisdom  heretofore  described,  com- 
bined. 

And  it  is  well  to  relate,  that  as  the  Spheres  approach  the  Divine 
Mind,  they  become  more  simple,  more  lovely,  more  unassuming,  and 
more  pure.  The  nearer  they  approach  the  Fount  of  purity,  the 
more  transparent  they  become,  and  the  more  do  their  inhabitants 
appear  to  exist  as  it  were  without  body  and  without  external  and  ar- 
tificial habiliments.  They  appear  unclothed,  and  eminently  purified. 

There  is  an  exhalation  from  each  society  that  forms  an  encompas- 
sing halo  of  glory,  which  surpasses  all  brightness  of  the  material  sun 


G70 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


and  all  brilliancy  that  illuminates  any  portion  of  the  material  Uni- 
verse. 

Each  spirit  seems  so  pure,  and  the  thoughts  of  all  seem  so  celes- 
tial, that  it  is  almost  impossible  to  resist  the  attraction  thus  presented. 
There  is  such  a commingling  of  thoughts,  and  such  an  affection 
manifested  for  each  other,  as  seems  beyond  all  captivations  imagina- 
ble. Every  mind  is  like  an  opening  flower,  and  every  thought  is 
like  the  fragrance  thereof.  Every  love  is  like  a hud,  and  its  expres- 
sion is  like  the  rose.  Their  wisdom  is  as  the  fountains  of  heaven 
which  dry  not,  and  which  perpetually  flow  to  all  that  thirst,  and  heal 
all  that  are  wounded,  and  cleanse  all  that  are  not  purified.  I behold 
their  Wisdom  in  every  thought,  in  every  movement,  and  in  every 
expression  of  Will  and  Love.  It  is  indeed  beautiful  ! — and  what 
is  to  he  lamented  is,  that  language  must  be  employed  to  speak  of 
that  .which  defieth  utterance.  O may  expressive  silence  breathe  forth 
an  eloquence  that  will  penetrate  the  souls  of  men,  and  duly  elevate 
their  understandings;  and  may  they  be  induced  to  abandon  expres- 
sion where  speech  is  vain,  and  extend  their  conceptions  to  the  bright 
spheres  of  everlasting  love  ! 

Here,  in  the  Superspiritual  Sphere,  the  scenery  possesses  a re- 
doubled grandeur  and  loveliness.  Still  more  perceptibly  are  the 
thoughts  of  the  Divine  Mind  impressed  on  all  created  things.  The 
plains,  and  valleys,  and  groves,  and  streams  of  living  water,  are  all 
instrumental  in  the  great  work  of  purification  and  refinement.  They 
are  all  bright  representatives  of  spiritual  industry  and  universal  love, 
and  are  also  living  advocates  of  the  perfection  of  Him  who  breathed 
them  and  all  living  creations  into  being. 

The  spirits  here  are  so  lovely  and  attractive,  that  it  requires  an 
effort  to  prevent  being,  as  it  were,  absorbed  into  and  becoming  a 
part  of  them.  Here  I perceive  another  truth  vividly  manifested,  and 
that  is,  that  all  things  possess  mutual  affinities,  and  that  things  differ 
only  as  to  degrees  and  states  of  development.  Thus  is  established, 
what  has  been  before  declared,  that  opposites  or  antagonistic  princi- 
ples can  not  exist ; that  all  things  were  created  and  are  animated  by 
one  living  Essence  ; and  that  it  is  injustice  to  the  character  of  that 
Divine  Essence  for  men  on  earth  to  say  or  believe  that  there  is  a 
principle  or  habitation  existing  opposed  to  the  general  happiness,  or 
to  that  celestial  purity  which  joins  in  one  all  created  things. 

This  Sphere  is  so  closely  allied  to  the  Spiritual  Sun,  that  it  be- 
comes incomprehensible  to  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth  — whose 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


671 


sphere  of  existence  is  nothing  more  than  one  atom  in  the  great  Body 
of  material  and  spiritual  constructions. 

§ 202.  As  has  been  related  of  the  transition  of  the  spirits  and  an- 
gels of  the  Spheres  below,  so  do  those  of  the  Fifth  Sphere  ascend 
to,  and  become  inhabitants  of  the  Sixth,  or  the  Supercelestial  habi- 
tation. 

Here  is  the  consummation  of  all  conceivable  perfection  ! Here 
is  the  sublimation  of  all  purity,  of  all  goodness,  and  of  all  refinement, 
as  appertaining  to  the  spirits  of  every  human  race  in  the  Universe. 
All  spirits  and  angels  are  of  the  human  races,  and  these  occupy  earths 
innumerable,  from  which  they  ascend  through  all  the  Spheres  to  this, 
the  Supercelestial  habitation.  Here  they  have  combined  all  the  per- 
fections that  have  been  uniformly  unfolding  while  passing  through 
the  ascending  Spheres  or  stages  of  eternal  progression.  This  Sphere 
is  the  great  ultimate  of  all  beauty,  and  the  crown  of  all  loveliness 
and  purity.  Yea,  it  is  the  highest  point  of  angelic  loveliness. 

Countless  millions  dwell  in  each  society  in  each  Sphere  — more 
than  numbers  can  express.  Yet  the  combined  numbers  dwelling  in 
all  subordinate  Spheres  would  not  form  any  comparison  with  one  half 
of  one  society  that  dwells  in  this  supercelestial  home ! How  incon- 
ceivable, therefore,  must  be  the  immensity  of  each  society  in  this 
Sphere,  inasmuch  as  the  half  of  one  society  comprises  more  individ- 
uals than  all  the  created  forms  that  animate  all  the  subordinate 
Spheres  of  universal  space  ! Yet  creation  has  just  begun:  Love  is 
just  born,  Will  is  just  conceived,  and  Wisdom  is  in  the  germ  yet 
undeveloped  ! 

Here  are  the  fields  of  Paradise  ; and  on  them  is  erected  the  house 
of  many  mansions.  Interior  splendor  and  gorgeousness  is  pene- 
trating to  all  the  spirits  and  angels  thereof,  and  shines  through  them 
with  a brilliancy  of  celestial  light,  as  the  light  of  the  Divine  Mind 
penetrates  his  whole  material  Structure.  And  the  exterior  beauty, 
grandeur,  and  magnificence  of  this  celestial  mansion,  express  in  un- 
equivocal language  that  it  was  not  made  by  hands,  yet  is  eternal  in 
the  heavens.  It  is  the  great  Asylum  where  all  are  taken  in,  and 
loved,  and  breathed  upon,  and  made  perfect.  It  is  the  home  of  all 
celestial  things. 

All  things  are  divine,  both  in  the  material  and  spiritual  Universe; 
and  all  become  celestial.  So  every  created  spirit  is  invited  by  the 
progressive  law  of  the  Father  to  its  home;  and  when  it  enters  and 


672 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


becomes  sensible  of  the  loveliness  and  purity  thereof,  it  glorifies  the 
Father,  not  in  prayer,  but  by  thought  and  deed  for  ever  and  ever. 
Each  one,  then,  is  an  undying  child  of  the  Eternal  One,  who  is  the 
Father  of  all  : and  no  one  is  so  low  but  that  it  is  the  highest  of  some 
still  lower,  and  no  one  is  so  high  but  that  it  is  the  lowest  of  some 
yet  undeveloped.  One  spirit  can  not  say  unto  another,  “ I need 
thee  not for  each  one  is  the  sustainer  of  another,  and  the  mutual 
dependence  constitutes  the  harmony  and  wisdom  of  all  things. 

In  this  Supercelestial  home  are  all  the  beauties  of  earth  and  heaven 
combined,  developed,  and  perfected.  It  is  thus  removed  from  hu- 
man comprehension,  and  it  can  not  therefore  with  profit  be  dwelt 
upon,  or  impressed  on  the  memory  for  meditation.  Notwithstanding 
what  might  be  said  concerning  it  are  legitimate  truths,  they  are  too 
high  and  refined  to  be  comprehended  by  the  human  race  — nay,  even 
by  those  in  the  Third  Sphere  of  wisdom  and  knowledge.  No  one 
can  say  with  propriety,  “ Why  not  tell  us  all  ?”  if  he  will  but  con- 
sider his  incompetency  to  comprehend  that  which  has  already  been 
related. 

The  brightness  in  this' state  of  celestial  purity  exceeds  all  concep- 
tion— and  the  elegance,  majesty,  power,  grandeur,  goodness,  and 
happiness,  transcend  all  human  thought.  And  here  spirits  and  an- 
gels rejoice  with  exceeding  joy  and  thanksgiving  : and  this  by  action, 
and  not  by  speech  — by  Wisdom,  and  not  by  Love.  Still  Love  is 
the  all-animating  and  life-giving  element. 

Such,  then,  is  the  immensity  of  these  things,  and  such  the  great- 
ness and  glory  of  the  Supercelestial  habitation.  And  it  is  proper  not 
to  confide  in  that  which  is  opposed  to  this  high  degree  of  angelic 
purity,  but  to  encourage  hope  when  born  of  Wisdom,  and  belief 
when  well  conceived  ; and  then  those  things  will  descend  to  and  illu- 
minate the  human  mind,  and  give  eternal  life  to  that  which  now  seems 
mortal  and  changeable. 

§ 203.  From  the  position  now  occupied  I can  perceive,  and  in  a 
degree  comprehend,  the  Seventh  Sphere,  or  the  Infinite  Vortex 
of  Love  and  Wisdom,  and  the  great  Spiritual  Sun  of  the  Divine 
Mind  that  illuminates  all  the  spiritual  worlds.  — And  behold,  the 
natural  sun  is  the  sun  of  the  natural  Universe,  while  the  Spiritual 
Sun  was  and  is  the  Sun  of  the  spiritual  Universe  ! The  material 
can  only  illuminate  the  natural,  and  the  spiritual  illuminates  the  spir- 
itual. Of  the  Body  and  constitution  of  the  material  sun,  the  Univer- 


nature's  divine  revelations. 


673 


coelam  was  born  into  being,  and  caressed,  nourished,  illuminated, 
and  perfected,  in  universal  order  and  harmony.  From  the  constitu- 
tion of  the  Spiritual  Sun,  all  the  heavens  were  created  ; and  by  it  they 
are  sustained,  controlled,  purified,  perfected,  and  illuminated  : and 
every  spontaneous  breath  of  light  and  love  is  as  a smile  of  the  all- 
pervading  Father  and  Creator  of  all  that  is,  and  of  all  that  is  not,  de- 
veloped. 

Thus  the  Spiritual  Spheres  are  allied  to  the  Spiritual  Sun,  while  the 
natural  spheres  approach  the  material  sun.  Thus  the  spiritual  is  as  a 
soul,  and  yet  a garment,  to  the  natural,  while  the  two  are  joined  together 
as  one  creation.  And  the  second  or  Spiritual  Sphere  sustains  a relation 
to  the  fifth  Circle  of  Suns,  and  their  innumerable  planets  — and  is  as 
a soul  to  it,  and  comprehends  the  whole  as  one  creation.  So  the 
third  Sphere  is  allied  to  the  fourth  Circle  ; and  the  fourth  Sphere  to 
the  third  Circle  ; and  the  fifth  Sphere  to  the  second  Circle;  and  the 
sixth  Sphere  to  the  first  Circle  : and  the  Seventh  Sphere  is  the 
Great  Sun  and  Centre  of  all  power,  and  the  Vortex  of  all  creations  ! 

This  displays  the  order  and  harmony  of  the  Divine  Mind,  and  this 
is  one  Body  of  one  Immortal  Soul  !* 

Much  might  be  said  of  the  Seventh  Sphere,  or  the  Spiritual  Sun 
of  the  Universe  — yet  all  would  be  inconsistent  with  the  order  and 
power  of  the  human  mind.  For  speech  is  vain,  and  all  that  might 
be  said  of  the  incomprehensibility,  the  magnitude,  and  the  infinitude 
of  the  truth  centred  in  the  Spiritual  Sun,  would  consist  only  of  words; 
and  these  it  wrould  be  useless  to  speak  and  impress  upon  the  human 
mind.  Neither  would  it  be  proper  to  speak  of  the  essences,  quali- 
ties, and  attributes,  dwelling  within  the  Vortex  from  which  rolled 
forth  the  Universe,  inasmuch  as  each  possible  atom  comprehends 
more  than  the  human  mind  is  able  to  grasp.  More,  then,  would  be 
superfluous  and  unprofitable.  For  the  word  “ incomprehensible"  falls 
far  short  of  conveying  a definite  idea  of  the  immensity  thereof ; and 

* On  the  next  morning  after  the  above  was  delivered,  the  clairvoyant  was  thrown 
into  the  abnormal  state  for  the  purpose  of  examining  some  patients  who  were  under 
his  medical  treatment : but  after  the  manipulations  were  completed,  he.  remained 
motionless  and  speechless  for  some  fifteen  minutes,  when,  in  a faint  whisper,  he  ut- 
tered the  words  “ It  is  painful.”  He  was  then  speedily  restored  to  the  normal  condi- 
tion. At  the  close  of  the  subsequent  lecture  he  alluded  to  this  circumstance,  and 
said  that  owing  to  the  excitement  remaining  o.n  his  mind  from  the  previous  lecture, 
his  mind  was,  on  the  occasion  referred  to,  elevated  to  such  close  proximity  to  the 
Sphere  of  the  Spiritual  Sun,  that  the  light  was  beyond  endurance  ; and  that  had  lie 
not  been  quickly  relieved  from  his  condition,  his  faculties  would  have  been  for  a 
time  deranged. 

43 


C74 


NATURE'S  DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 


even  this  word  implies  the  impossibility  of  human  understanding. 
This  much  only  can  ho  said  : It  is  an  inexhaustible  Vortex  of  Life 
and  Light  which  are  Love,  and  of  Order  and  Form  which  are  Wis- 
dom— which  flow  not  only  into  Heaven,  but  into  the  material  Uni- 
verse : and  everything  is  thereby  breathed  into  being.  And  the 
Great  Centre  and  Spiritual  Sun  is  the  habitation  and  throne  of  the 
Divine  Mind,  the  Great  Positive,  Central  Power  of  the  Universe, 
and  of  all  eternal  movement  ! And  it  is  a Fountain  in  which  noth- 
ing exists  but  what  is  pure,  divine,  everlasting,  and  infinite  ! 

* 

§ 204.  The  natural  Universe  corresponds  to  the  spiritual ; and 
one  is  related  to  the  other  as  intimately  as  the  body  is  to  the  soul. 
For  every  spiritual  Sphere  is  the  creator,  sustainer,  and  pervader,  of 
a natural  Sphere ; and  this  order  is  preserved  in  every  department  of 
creation. 

A mind  was  sufficiently  illuminated  to  have  an  actual  knowledge 
of  the  relation  and  affinity  existing  between  the  natural  and  spiritual 
Spheres,  and  of  the  Spheres  to  one  another,  and  this  was  Emanuel 
Swedenborg.  Fie,  however,  employed  terms  to  express  the  same 
things  that  I have  endeavored  to  impress  by  terms  of  a different  and 
more  congenial  character.  He  put  forth  the  truth  that  there  were 
different  degrees  of  goodness,  and  that  the  lowest  was  so  imperfect 
when  compared  with  the  highest,  that  the  one  seemed  evil  and  the 
other  good  ; the  one  perfect  and  the  other  imperfect.  Hence  he 
describes  the  first  three  Spheres  as  three  hells,  inhabited  by  lower 
spirits  and  angels  ; while  the  three  higher  Spheres  were  the  three 
heavens  in  which  the  higher  spirits  and  angels  dwelt.  He  repre- 
sented the  first  Spheres  as  being  under  the  disapprobation  of  the  all- 
wise  Judge,  yet  as  being  loved  with  an  unfailing  affection  — while  the 
higher  Spheres  were  near  the  Great  Spiritual  Sun,  and  their  inhabi- 
tants dwelt  under  the  smile  of  Divine  approval.  And  he  also  related 
the  truth  that  the  inhabitants  of  these  Spheres  could  not  approach 
each  other,  because  of  the  dissimilitude  in  their  positions  and  degrees 
of  refinement  — any  more  than  evil  can  approach  goodness,  or  dark- 
ness can  approach  light. 

All  this,  I can  affirm,  is  true,  not  in  the  absolute , but  rather  in  the 
comparative  sense.  There  is  a seeming  difference  between  the  lower 
and  the  higher  in  all  things  ; yet  the  highest,  as  has  been  proved,  is 
an  unfolded  representative  of  what  the  lowest  has  in  substance,  un- 
developed. It  is,  then,  the  use  of  terms,  and  their  particular  appli- 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


675 


cation,  that  presents  the  apparent  discrepancy  existing  between  bis 
relations  and  these.  And  I can  with  assurance  affirm,  that  the  concep- 
tions are  the  same  in  substance,  and  true  — as  is  demonstrated  by  the 
order  and  harmony  of  all  visible  things  ; and  that  a unity  of  thought 
has  arisen,  by  independent  processes,  from  no  other  cause  than  the 
influxations  of  the  truths  of  visible  and  invisible  Nature.  From  this, 
as  a common  source,  and  from  an  illumination  of  the  same,  has  the 
relation  of  each  been  derived  ; and  the  two  accounts  from  this  cause 
mutually  substantiate  each  other.  Concerning  this,  then,  I say  no 
more. 


§ 205.  The  spirits  of  the  various  planets  in  our  solar  system  are 
in  different  stages  of  refinement.  And  those  that  are  on  the  higher 
have  the  privilege  of  descending  to  the  lower  planets,  and  immersing 
their  thoughts  into  the  spirits  of  the  inhabitants  at  will,  though  the 
latter  in  many  cases  know  it  not.  In  this  manner  do  spirits  descend 
to,  and  dwell  on,  the  earth,  when  they  have  a peculiar  attraction  to 
some  relative  or  friend  ; and  they  are  ever  ready  to  introduce  into 
his  mind  thoughts  of  higher  things,  and  suggestions  that  are  pure, 
though  these  may  seem  to  the  person  to  flow  independently  from  the 
workings  of  his  own  spirit.  Spirits  from  any  sphere  may,  by  'per- 
mission, descend  to  any  earth  in  the  Universe,  and  breathe  senti- 
ments into  the  minds  of  others  which  are  pure  and  elevating.  Hence 
it  is  that  there  are  times  when  the  mind  appears  to  travel  in  the  com- 
pany of  those  it  knows  not,  and  has  visions  in  its  dreams  that  are 
actually  true,  and  sometimes  come  to  pass  with  remarkable  accuracy. 
At  other  times,  dreams  are  incited  by  the  influx  of  thoughts  from 
spirits,  but  are  not  defined,  because  they  are  not  duly  directed. 
There  is,  however,  a species  of  dreaming  which  is  uncaused  by  any- 
thing except  an  excitement  of  the  nervous  medium  or  consciousness 
of  the  body.  Such  dreams  are  only  unquieted  thoughts,  and  wild 
and  fantastic  formations  of  thoughts  pre-impressed  into  visions  and 
fancies. 

It  is  a truth  that  spirits  commune  with  one  another  while  one  is  in 
the  body  and  the  other  in  the  higher  Spheres  — and  this,  too,  when 
the  person  in  the  body  is  unconscious  of  the  influx,  and  hence  can 
not  be  convinced  of  the  fact  ; and  this  truth  will  ere  long  present 
itself  in  the  form  of  a living  demonstration.  And  the  world  will  hail 
with  delight  the  ushering  in  of  that  era  when  the  interiors  of  men 
will  be  opened,  and  the  spiritual  communion  will  be  established  such 


676 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


as  is  now  being  enjoyed  by  the  inhabitants  of  Mars,  Jupiter,  and 
Saturn,  because  of  their  superior  refinement.  Concerning  these 
tilings  and  their  details,  a knowledge  can  be  bad  by  perusing  the 
relations  made  by  Swedenborg  during  the  period  of  bis  mental  illu- 
mination. 


§ 206.  The  structure  of  the  Universe  is  now  presented  to  the 
mind,  and  all  its  living  beauties,  together  with  the  Divine  Essence 
that  gives  it  life  and  animation.  It  presents  an  indestructible  basis 
of  hope  and  faith,  and  a corresponding  foundation  of  human  action. 
It  is  as  a mirror  in  which  are  reflected  all  corresponding  beauties  yet 
uncreated,  but  proved  to  be  in  embryo  by  the  universal  teachings  of 
natural  law.  The  whole  is  beautiful.  The  whole  is  as  one 
Body,  and  God  the  Soul  and  Father  of  all  living  and  unliving 
things.  Everything  is  perfect  in  its  way  and  state  of  being.  Every- 
thing is  necessary  — even  indispensable.  Everything  is  pure,  even 
divine  and  celestial.  Everything  teaches  harmony,  and  universal 
reciprocation  by  an  unfailing  manifestation  of  the  same.  Everything 
is  of,  in,  through,  and  to,  the  Divine  Mind.  All  things  are  parts  of 
Him  ; and  these  are  as  one  Whole,  even  Nature,  Man,  and  Heaven. 

The  earths,  or  the  first  Sphere,  constitute  the  germ  ; the  second 
Sphere  is  the  roots  ; the  third,  the  body  ; the  fourth,  the  branches  ; 
the  fifth,  the  buds  ; the  sixth,  the  blossom  ; and  the  seventh  is 
Beauty  — beauty  that  blooms  with  an  immortal  fragrance.  Here 
is  the  Tree  of  Righteousness  — righteousness  because  all  is  right  and 
nothing  wrong.  It  is  the  Tree  of  Goodness  — because  nothing  is 
evil.  It  is  the  Tree  of  immortal  Life  — because  there  is  no  death. 
It  is  the  Tree  of  divine  Perfection.  — because  there  is  nothing  imper- 
fect. It  is  the  Tree  of  Truth  — because  there  is  no  falsehood  in  the 
divine  creations.  It  is  the  Tree  of  eternal  Causation  — because 
nothing  is  but  what  was  in  another  form  before.  It  is  the  Tree  of 
Love  and  Wisdom  — because  there  is  no  confusion  or  disunity;  for 
all  things  are  working  together  for  good,  and  that  good  is  the  eleva- 
tion of  all  low  and  undeveloped  things  to  a high  degree  of  refinement 
from  which  a Universe  yet  unborn  will  be  ushered  into  being  to 
breathe  the  breath  of  heaven. 

Here,  then,  is  the  Tree  whose  foundation  rests  in  the  depths  of 
Time,  and  whose  top  extends  to  the  heights  of  Eternity.  It  puts 
forth  branches  throughout  the  lengths  and  breadths  of  the  Universe, 


nature’s  divine  revelations. 


677 


and  casts  a refreshing  shade  over  the  labyrinths  of  space  whose  limits 
no  thought  can  define. 

Further  contemplations  upon  these  inconceivable  creations  would 
be  taxing  the  mind  beyond  its  powers  of  thought,  and  would  not  tend 
to  usefulness.  Yet  a word  fitly  spoken,  by  way  of  admonition,  may 
not  lose  its  influence  until  some  of  the  most  desirable  results  are 
accomplished.  Remember,  then,  that  the  germ  of  this  great  Tree  is 
in  the  First  Sphere,  which  comprehends  all  earths  and  their  inhabit- 
ants. Knowing  this,  let  every  one  strive  diligently  to  cultivate  the 
germ,  and  to  make  perfect  its  unfoldings.  Strive  to  give  its  proper- 
ties and  essences  a proper  and  truthful  direction.  Put  forth  all  love, 
and  energy,  and  wisdom,  to  effect  that  which  is  most  desirable  — that, 
the  principles  of  which  are  found  in  the  nature  of  all  men,  and  that 
which  prompts  them  to  profitable  action  ; and,  remember,  that  is 
Unity  : and  unity  is  Happiness. 

In  view  of  these  things,  the  importance  and  truthfulness  of  the 
saying  is  manifested,  that  “ The  things  which  are  seen  are  temporal ; 
but  the  things  which  are  not  seen  are  eternal and,  also,  that  the 
things  which  are  visible  are  terrestrial ; while  the  things  which  are 
invisible  are  heavenly.  While  these  truths  present  themselves  in 
bold  relief,  the  human  mind  should  put  forth  efforts  to  comprehend 
their  signification  and  importance.  In  doing  this,  mankind  will 
discover  that  the  mind  must  be  refined  and  perfected,  and  that 
when  this  is  properly  accomplished,  the  social  world  will  be  corre- 
spondingly elevated,  and  thus  be  advanced  to  honor,  goodness,  and 
UNIVERSAL  PEACE. 


END  OF  THE  SECOND  PART. 


PART  III. 


THE  APPLICATION; 

OR, 

A VOICE  T 0 MANKIND. 


The  Human  Race  is  composed  of  three  distinct  farts  Jasses, 
or  societies.  The  poor,  ignorant,  enslaved,  oppressed,  and  working 
classes,  constitute  the  lower  stratum  of  society.  The  semi-wealthy, 
learned,  enslavers,  oppressors,  and  dictating  classes,  form  the  second 
or  transition  stratum;  and  the  rich,  intelligent,  enslaving,  oppressing, 
and  idle  classes,  form  the  third  stratum,  and  serve  to  complete  the 
body  of  Mankind. 

The  poor  are  distributed  among  all  the  nations  of  the  earth, 
They  are  those  who  are  born  amid  circumstances  opposed  to  their 
nature  and  its  requirements.  They  are  those  who  have  necessities 
unsupplied,  desires  ungratified,  and  affections  uncared  for.  They 
are  the  degraded,  the  down-trodden,  the  forsaken  and  unappreciated 
of  the  land.  They  are  the  despised,  the  weak,  the  wretched,  and 
the  repulsed,  of  all  others  that  compose  the  human  race.  Inferior 
circumstances  produce  inferior  effects  ; hence  the  poor  are  also  igno- 
rant. And  because  they  are  uneducated,  they  are  the  more  easily 
chained  in  the  degrading  shackles  of  superstition,  and  enslaved  by 
laws  imposed  by  government.  They  are  imbecile,  and  hence  are 
fit  subjects  to  bear  the  burden  and  weight  of  the  upper  classes  ; and 
feeling  impressed  that  they  are  performing  their  duty,  they  submit  to 
arbitrary  and  tyrannical  government. 


GSO 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


Inferior  circumstances  not  only  create  these  effects,  but  also  slavery. 
Millions  that  belong  to  the  first  part  of  the  race,  are  existing  under  the 
most  oppressive  slavery,  and  are  compelled  to  do  honor  to  those 
who  oppress  them.  Their  thoughts  are  restricted,  and  their  innate 
powers  are  crushed  by  those  who  hold  them  in  bondage  for  the  pur- 
pose of  perpetuating  the  darkness  of  degradation  to  which  they  are 
subject.  They  are  also  sorely  afflicted,  and  with  the  most  inhuman  and 
unnatural  afflictions.  The  symmetry  of  their  forms  is  marred  ; the 
constitutional  qualities  of  their  being  are  obstructed  in  their  proper 
development  ; and  their  spiritual  faculties  are  clouded  from  birth  to 
the  grave  by  vice,  misery,  superstition,  and  all  manner  of  impositions 
possible 

The  poor  are  thus  oppressed  (yet  the  oppressed  are  not  always 
poor)  ; and  oppression  is  a protective  policy  employed  by  those  oc- 
cupying a higher  position  in  the- scale  of  social  circumstances. 

The  poor  are  also  the  laboring  and  productive  classes.  The  wealth 
of  the  world  has  been  accumulated  by  the  incessant  toil  of  those  who 
are  compelled  by  the  hand  of  oppression  to  work  constantly  to  gain 
a subsistence  : and  yet  their  labor  is  not  duly  rewarded.  In  every 
portion  of  the  world  it  is  a general  fact  that  he  who  labors  the  most, 
receives  the  least  in  return.  And  the  more  laborious  the  thing  in 
which  men  engage,  the  more  are  they  enslaved,  degraded,  and  un- 
rewarded. 

The  poor  are  the  sustainers,  because  they  are  the  industrious. 
They  are  the  producers  of  wealth,  and  of  all  the  blessings  that  cir- 
culate through  other  and  higher  societies  ; and  yet  they  are  the  for- 
gotten, the  despised,  and  the  uneducated  ! 

Poverty  is  such  a universal  affliction,  that  many  are  led  to  believe 
that  it  is  a means  ordered  in  the  providence  of  things  for  the  purpose 
of  causing  a submissiveness  in  the  nature  of  man  whereby  he  may 
receive  ultimate  reward  and  consolation.  Some  men  are  striving  to 
console  the  poor  by  these  deceptive  prospects  ; and  such  being  im- 
pelled by  interest,  are  anxious  to  have  such  an  opinion  prevail  among 
them,  so  that  poverty  and  ignorance  may  be  perpetuated,  and  that 
thereby  the  permanency  of  their  despotic  and  tyrannical  control  may 
be  secured.  In  every  portion  of  the  earth  the  poor  are  uncared  for, 
and  their  circumstances  are  very  seldom  relieved.  Still  they  are 
the  foundation  of  all  that  blesses  the  human  race,  and  of  all  which 
mankind  enjoy. 

The  semi-wealthy  are  those  who  are  situated  amid  superior  circum- 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


6S1 


stances  ; and  being  thus  situated  from  birth  to  death,  they  become 
the  mediatorial  classes,  learned  in  every  department  of  art  and  agri- 
culture. These  are  the  direct  employers  and  governors  of  the  lower 
classes.  They  exert  a continual  influence  on  those  in  their  employ, 
and  press  them  to  labor  not  agreeable  to  the  constitution  of  man,  and 
for  this  labor  give  them  little  reward.  The  mediatorial  class  thus 
enslave  and  oppress  those  beneath  them.  They  are  compelled  to 
do  this  by  an  interest  which  actuates  all  their  movements  ; and  they 
are  thus  afflicting  those  striving  for  a subsistence,  because  their  wel- 
fare and  all  their  interests  consist  in  a vast  amount  of  labor  and  little 
reward.  They  are  exceedingly  oppressive,  because  society  is  so  con- 
stituted that  the  interest  of  every  man  is  in  direct  opposition  to  the  inter- 
ests of  others  : and  thus  what  is  one  man’s  interest  results  in  anoth- 
er’s misfortune. 

The  higher  class  are  the  wealthy  and  powerful  — holding  within 
their  grasp  the  productions  of  those  beneath  them,  and  distributing 
happiness  only  as  it  is  extracted  from  them  by  the  unceasing  calls  of 
those  who  are  oppressed  and  degraded.  They  are  the  capitalists ; 
for  the  wealth  which  the  poor  create  is  accumulated  by  them,  and 
held  within  their  grasp.  Wealth  that  rightly  belongs  to  those  who 
create  it,  is  thus  given  to  those  who  earned  it  not,  and  hence  have 
no  natural  title  to  it. 

The  higher  classes  are  those  who  rest  upon  the  toil  and  labor  of 
the  mass  of  mankind.  They  are  thus  both  enslaving  and  oppressing, 
because  of  their  dependence  and  yet  their  controlling  influence,  which 
is  both  unjust  and  destructive  to  the  peace  and  happiness  that  other- 
wise would  be  enjoyed  by  the  lower  classes  of  community.  They 
are  the  enlightened  ; for  being  situated  amid  superior  circumstances, 
they  have  the  advantage  of  all  superior  attainments  and  superficial 
accomplishments  existing  in  the  world.  This  intelligence  is  the  only 
pledge  for  the  world’s  ultimate  amelioration  from  vice,  misery,  and 
degradation.  But  this  intelligence  is  at  present  improperly  directed  ; 
and  instead  of  illuminating  the  mass  of  mankind,  it  is  shrouding  the 
whole  race  with  bigotry,  superstition,  and  prejudice  ! It  is  making 
more  ignorant  those  classes -which  are  ignorant,  and  confirming  them 
in  their  low  and  unfortunate  situations.  Meanwhile  it  is  dividing  the 
human  family  into  sects  and  exclusive  classes,  and  is  also  creating 
every  species  of  disunity  and  dissatisfaction. 

The  poo?'  and  moderate  classes  are  not  the  governing,  but  the  gov- 
erned. They  are  not  the  enslavers,  but  the  enslaved.  They  are 


GS2 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


not  in  themselves  the  impure  and  unsanctified,  but  are  made  so  by 
those  above  them.  They  are  not  the  unfortunately  constituted,  but 
become  weak  and  deformed  by  the  burden  of  the  responsibility  uni- 
versally imposed  upon  them. 

The  wealthy  being  the  'powerful,  from  them  flow  all  arbitration, 
oppression,  and  absolute  misery,  that  prevail  in  the  world.  It  is 
from  this  class  that  exclusiveness  and  sectarianism  take  their  rise, 
and  flow  like  an  ocean-tide  over  all  the  classes  beneath  them. 

The  rich,  as  to  their  favorable  situations,  are  examples  of  what  the 
Race  will  be,  when  equal  wealth  and  equal  justice  pervade  the 
social  world.  Intelligence  will  then  be  the  governor  and  admin- 
istrator of  all  laws  and  principles  required  by  the  constitution  of 
the  human  family.  Then  all  may  drink  at  the  fount  of  Knowledge, 
and  thirst  not.  But  owing  to  the  disunity  that  prevails  in  society, 
the  wants  of  the  lower  classes  are  not  supplied,  and  the  desires  of 
those  in  the  higher  classes  are  supplied  with  such  a profusion,  that 
they  are  unable  to  appreciate  the  blessings  of  life,  and  the  natural 
enjoyments  flowing  from  a well-ordered  desire  and  its  adequate 
gratification. 

These  three  classes  constitute  the  Human  Race  ; and  each  of  them 
will  exist  in  its  present  condition  so  long  as  intelligence  is  exclusive, 
labor  is  unrewarded,  and  wealth  is  possessed  by  those  who  have  it 
unjustly. 

§ 2.  The  poor  are  those  who  have  desires  unsupplied.  Thus  they 
are  rendered  miserable,  and  their  existence  is  entirely  unappreciated. 
They  are  those  who  have  all  the  pressure  and  the  afflictions  of  the 
race  ; and  by  their  ignorance  they  are  compelled  to  remain  thus  situ- 
ated. They  can  not  set  forth  with  moving  eloquence  the  vice  and 
misery  that  prevail  among  them  ; they  can  not  free  themselves  from 
the  shackles  which  bind  and  crush  them  to  the  earth.  They  can  not 
escape  the  prison  of  sectarianism,  nor  raise  their  voice  against  the 
many  inhuman  proceedings  that  are  instituted  against  them.  The 
poor  lie  at  the  lowest  point  in  society,  and  are  therefore  sustaining, 
by  their  perpetual  industry,  the  great  weight  of  the  world  that  rests 
upon  them.  They  have  no  means  to  extricate  themselves,  or  to  ad- 
vance where  everything  opposes  their  progress  and  arrests  their  as- 
cension. They  can  not  accumulate  force  and  power  of  themselves, 
because  each  person  is  striving  for  a subsistence,  and  laboring  to 
supply  his  increasing  wants.  General  power  is  thus  lost  and  dissi- 


A VOTCE  TO  MANKIND. 


6S3 


pated  among  individuals  ; which  prevents  them  from  acting  as  a body 
to  ameliorate  their  condition. 

The  highest  society  exists  as  if  they  were  not  in  possession  of 
feeling  and  affection  for  what  is  just,  and  good,  and  righteous.  They 
seem  to  be  unconscious  of  sympathy,  and  unable  to  discern  the  cause 
of  the  evil  and  misery  that  prevail.  They  are  seemingly  striving  to 
benefit  all ; yet  in  that  which  appears  to  benefit  most,  a greater  in- 
jury is  done  to  the  working-classes.  And  every  isolated  act  of  be- 
nevolence, though  meant  for  good,  ends  in  affliction  ; and  every 
effort  toward  amelioration  creates  sectarian  hostility,  and  terminates 
in  depression  of  the  most  tyrannical  character  ! 

Society  is  thus  constructed.  It  will  preserve  its  structure  in  form 
forever;  but  its  constitutional  developments  will  change  ere  long 
materially  — the  result  of  which  will  be  distributive  justice  and  har- 
mony. 

The  cause  of  all  human  action  is  centred  in  these  three  things  : 
Love  (or  desire),  Necessity,  and  Interest.  Desires  are  created  by  the 
love,  or  bodily  requirements.  Necessity  is  the  desire  ungratified,  or 
the  requirement  unsupplied  ; and  Interest  is  the  spring  of  action,  and 
is  a means  by  which  love  is  rewarded,  by  which  desires  are  gratified, 
and  necessities  supplied. 

Interest,  then,  is  the  mode  of  human  action,  and  is  the  ultimate 
cause  of  all  industry,  all  invention,  all  movement,  and  intelligence, 
in  the  world.  Interest  is  the  means  employed  to  supply  the  necessi- 
ties of  the  human  body.  Where  there  is  no  interest,  there  can  be  no 
action ; where  there  is  no  desire,  there  can  be  no  interest ; and  where 
there  is  no  love,  there  can  be  no  desire. 

It  is  impossible  for  a man  to  act  without  an  interest.  His  interest 
may  consist  in  self-gratification  or  emolument ; in  sectarian  advance- 
ment ; in  local  usurpation  ; in  general  benevolence,  brotherly  kindness, 
and  charity;  in  universal  love,  or  in  the  attainment  of  knowledge. 
But  in  whatever  thing  his  interest  is  centred,  for  that  will  he  act 
alone ; and  while  thus  acting,  he  will,  as  society  now  exists,  injure 
some  and  benefit  others,  please  some  and  excite  indignation  in  oth- 
ers.— And  thus  it  is  that  interests  (being  the  cause  of  human  action) 
will,  if  not  directed  aright,  produce  unhappy  consequences. 

The  interests  of  the  poor  consist  in  rendering  themselves  and  their 
families  happy.  To  this  end  they  exert  all  their  abilities  to  extract 
from  the  earth,  and  absorb  from  the  higher  societies,  a sufficient  re- 


GS4 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


ward  for  their  labor.  Their  interests  are  opposed  to  the  interests  of 
those  who  employ  them  ; and  this  creates  an  antagonism  between  the 
laborer  and  him  for  whom  he  labors.  One  is  diametrically  opposed 
to  the  other.  Thus  it  is  that  while  industry  becomes  fatiguing  and 
disgusting  to  the  laborer,  the  employer  is  pressing  him  to  more  and 
heavier  action,  and  meanwhile  reduces  his  reward  to  the  lowest  pos- 
sible amount.  The  laborer  is  thus  discouraged  from  laboring  cheer- 
fully,  and  the  employer  is  discouraged  from  rewarding  abundantly. 
The  interest  of  the  laborer  consists  in  the  reward  ; the  interest  of 
the  employer  consists  in  the  amount  of  labor  accomplished  : there- 
fore one  is  absorbing  from  the  other ; and  the  absorption  creates  dis- 
tinction, obstruction,  and  disunity.  They  are  thus  existing  in  direct 
opposition  to  each  other. 

Thus  labor  is  despised  and  shunned  by  the  human  family,  because 
it  is  unappreciated.  Hence  poverty  pervades  the  world  ; and  this  is 
perpetuated  by  disunity  of  interests  and  a want  of  sympathizing  feel- 
ings and  affections  between  man  and  man.  The  poor  have  no  re- 
gard for  the  situation  of  the  rich,  nor  the  rich  for  that  of  the  poor ; 
and  they  thus  despise  and  repulse  each  other.  The  unfortunate 
circumstances  that  surround  and  embarrass  the  poor  from  birth,  en- 
courage the  monopolies  of  the  higher  classes,  and  the  interests  of  the 
latter  consist  in  the  distinction  thus  created.  It  thus  becomes  im- 
possible to  discover  harmony  between  the  interests  of  the  poor  and 
rich,  or  affinity  between  their  respective  situations. 

Men  may  have  their  judgment  convinced  of  what  is  their  duty  ; yet 
their  interests  consist  in  that  to  which  their  duty  is  ojiposed.  Hence 
the  world  is  immoral  and  disorganized.  It  is  proper  that  all  should 
be  so  situated  as  that  industry  may  become  a necessity,  and  that  its 
reward  may  be  legitimate  and  proportional. 

If  universal  industry  existed,  all  would  be  wealthy,  and  all  would 
appreciate  and  glorify  their  existence.  Neither  would  there  be  so 
much  labor  needed  ; for  a little  labor,  if  properly  directed,  would 
contribute  more  to  the  general  wealth  of  the  world  than  twice  the 
same  amount  in  the  present  condition  of  the  human  race.  One  third 
of  the  present  amount  of  individual  labor,  if  equally  distributed  and  ren- 
dered profitable,  would  contribute  more  to  the  happiness  and  wealth 
of  mankind  than  the  amount  of  individual  labor  now  performed;  and 
then  rewards  would  be  equal,  interests  reciprocal,  and  all  action  uni- 
versally beneficial.  As  interests  now  are  opposed  to  each  other,  all 
action  of  laborer  and  employer  must  necessarily  be  in  corresponding 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


6S-5 


opposition.  Hostility  is  constantly  being  generated  by  the  disaffec- 
tion for  each  other’s  welfare,  arising  from  this  cause.  Every  one  has 
desires  uncared  for  by  others,  and  necessities  which  none  but  him- 
self knows,  and  for  the  relief  of  which  no  one  but  himself  provides. 
The  provision  is  extracted  from , not  freely  given,  as  it  ought  to  be, 
by  others,  or  the  body  of  the  human  race.  Thus  one’s  interest  con- 
sists in  that  for  which  no  other  has  an  affinity. 

And  so  conflicting  are  the  situations  of  men  in  the  lower  strata  of 
society,  that  there  is  nothing  but  vice,  misery,  discontent,  hostility, 
and  retaliation,  existing.  Their  interests  are  like  conflicting  elements, 
which  in  meeting,  destroy  each  other’s  power.  Hence  the  harmony 
that  would  exist,  if  interests  ran  gently  into  each  other,  is  dissipated. 
Hence  he  is  immorally  situated  whose  duty  tells  him  one  thing  and 
his  interests  another. 


§ 3.  The  laborer,  feeling  an  interest  in  the  amount  of  reward  given 
for  his  toil,  has  no  interest  in  the  general  improvements  in  machinery 
that  are  made  to  relieve  and  curtail  labor.  Labor  must  be  appreci- 
ated and  duly  remunerated,  before  there  can  be  either  a pleasure  in 
industry,  or  a general  interest  taken  in  mechanical  and  agricultural 
improvements.  That  inactivity  may  be  repulsed  from  the  earth,  in- 
dustry must  command  increased  rewards.  There  must  not  only  be  a 
higher  value  set  on  industry,  but  a higher  regard  must  be  manifested  to 
him  who  labors,  in  order  to  make  all  feel  an  interest  in  activity,  and 
that  no  one  may  feel  an  attraction  to  idleness  and  speculation.  The 
laboring-classes  support  those  who  are  idle,  and  the  idle  in  return 
despise  and  oppress  those  who  labor,  because  their  interest  is  not  in 
industry,  but  in  unfeeling  speculation. 

The  interest  of  the  laborer  should  consist  in  the  thing  on  which  he 
is  employed.  Then  he  would  press  onward  in  his  physical  and  men- 
tal exertions  to  improvements  of  the  most  valuable  character,  such  as 
would  not  only  ameliorate  his  own  condition,  but  would  send  forth  a 
blessing  over  the  whole  world.  As  things  are  now  existing,  the 
laborer  feels  an  interest  in  the  reward  only,  and  not  in  the  employ- 
ment itself.  Therefore  labor  is  disgusting  and  tiresome,  while  its 
reward  alone  actuates  the  worker;  and  thus  the  proper  development 
of  his  physical  and  intellectual  powers  is  discouraged  and  obstructed. 
The  laborer  feels  no  interest  in  the  advancement  of  his  employer’s 
interest,  but  merely  in  the  amount  of  reward  he  may  extract  from 
him,  and  which  is  necessary  to  his  subsistence.  He  who  employs 


GSG 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


feels  no  interest  in  the  poor  and  their  necessities,  but  exerts  his 
power  and  ingenuity  to  press  the  laborer  to  every  possible  extreme, 
and  then  remunerates  him  agreeably  to  his  own  interests.  The  em- 
ployer does  not  reward  the  laborer  because  he  feels  an  interest  in  his 
and  his  family’s  welfare.  On  the  other  hand,  after  compelling  him 
to  labor  excessively,  he  pays  him  only  as  a man  would  feed  his  herds 
at  night.  Nay,  the  classes  who  speculate  upon  the  poor  and  the  op- 
pressed, in  many  instances  do  not  scruple  to  force  them  from  their 
families  at  an  hour  which  all  the  laws  of  the  human  system  have  ap- 
propriated to  rest,  into  the  field  of  labor  or  the  workshop  of  toil,  and 
after  compelling  them  to  work  without  cessation  until  their  energies 
are  exhausted,  reward  them  as  their  own  power  and  interest  may 
dictate  — even  as  a man  would  drive  a mule  from  his  stable,  oppress 
him  with  heavy  burdens  during  the  day,  and  at  night  requite  his  la- 
bor, and  hunger,  and  prostration,  in  proportion  to  the  amount  of  food 
he  has  garnered  up  for  all  his  extensive  herds. 

The  poor  are  thus  oppressed,  and  the  laborer  is  thus  not  justly 
rewarded.  They  not  only  have  no  interest  in  mechanical  improve- 
ments, but  have  none  in  the  cultivation  of  their  own  powers  ; for  all 
their  physical  energies  are  concentrated,  day  after  day,  on  gaining  a 
subsistence,  and  their  mental  powers  are  circumscribed  to  the  limited 
circle  of  their  degraded  occupation. 

Men  should  he  rewarded  in  proportion  to  th e amount  of  labor  they 
accomplish,  and  then  they  would  feel  an  interest  in  industry,  and  not 
merely  in  its  reward.  At  present,  however,  he  who  labors  most  and 
suffers  the  most  oppression,  receives  the  least  reward  ; he  who  is  idle 
and  subsists  upon  the  labor  of  others,  is  both  abundantly  rewarded, 
and  extensively  appreciated  for  supposed  goodness  and  virtue. 

It  is  true  that  virtue  exists  only  where  vice  is  not ; and  it  is,  more- 
over, true  that  he  who  is  idle,  is  necessarily  vicious  — and  is  no  more 
than  an  unnecessary  particle  (or  person)  in  the  constitution  of  the 
human  family.  Such  a one  is  an  excrescence  to  society,  and  is  an 
injury  to  the  welfare  and  happiness  of  the  laboring  and  industrious. 
Nothing  can  be  more  injurious  to  the  human  race  than  an  inactive 
population,  or  a class  of  persons  who  despise,  and  yet  subsist  and 
speculate  upon,  the  labor  of  others  — of  those  who  are  degraded. 

The  beehive  of  industry  typifies  what  the  race  should  and  will  be. 
In  the  economy  of  the  beehive,  one  thing  is  particularly  to  be  re- 
marked : and  that  is,  that  every  inactive  bee  is  considered  a drone  to 
the  community,  and  therefore  all  interest  and  affection  are  withdrawn 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


GS7 


from  it ; and  they  all  decide  that  the  bee  is  thus  an  iujury  to  the  wel- 
fare of  the  whole,  and  that  it  must  be  cast  from  their  midst  for  ever. 
Every  bee  is  obliged  to  contribute  its  share  to  the  wealth  and  eleva- 
tion of  the  whole  mass  ; and  they  are  taught  to  feel  an  instinctive 
affection  for  the  universal  welfare.  And  having  their  interests  thus 
centred,  nothing  can  thwart  their  activity  for  the  benefit  of  each  other 
and  the  whole ; nothing  can  prevent  the  accumulation  of  wealth,  or 
destroy  the  happiness  which  they  universally  enjoy.  Here,  then,  the 
philosophy  of  social  harmony  is  represented  ; and  all  that  is  necessary 
for  the  human  family  to  do,  is  to  adopt  a corresponding  system. 

Poverty  is  necessity  unsupplied  ; and  therefore  this  indicates  dis- 
ease in  the  organization  of  society.  — For  if  all  men  were  properly 
situated,  want  would  not  exist  in  any  part,  while  an  abundance  be- 
longs to  the  body  as  a whole  : and  absorption  would  not  exist  while 
every  one  created  his  own  happiness  and  meanwhile  the  happiness 
of  others. 

Vice,  degradation,  necessity,  and  misery,  pervade  society  only  be- 
cause there  is  no  unity  in  the  interests  and  movements  of  men.  He 
who  has  a family  to  support,  seeks  to  serve  some  person  who  may 
give  him  a reward  adequate  to  his  wants.  But  if  there  is  no  sympa- 
thy extended  to  his  necessities,  he  drowns  his'  crushed  feelings  and 
his  domestic  embarrassments  in  the  depths  of  intoxication.  He  goes 
to  every  extreme  in  this  vice  for  no  other  purpose  than  to  sear  his 
sympathies  against  the  cries  of  his  children,  and  his  sensibilities  to 
the  supplications  of  his  wife  ! He  becomes  unnerved  and  incapable 
of  laboring,  even  if  labor  is  procured  ; and  anticipating  a most  wretch- 
ed dejection  in  his  own  family,  he  lays  his  hands  on  the  possessions 
of  others,  and  ingeniously  conveys  something  to  his  family.  Thus  a 
theft  is  committed  ; and  now  the  community  is  for  the  first  time  aware 
that  such  a miserable  being  existed  ! They  appeal  to  conventional 
laws,  investigate  his  case,  and  employ  unfeeling  magistrates  to  seal 
his  imprisonment.  No  one  feels  an  interest  in  his  welfare  ; but  all 
are  pleased  at  his  capture,  condemnation,  and  repulsion  from  the 
bosom  of  society,  and  the  light  of  the  sun  that  smiles  on  all,  that  all 
may  be  happy  ! 

Not  long  from  this  and  a family  is  thrown  upon  the  institutions, 
destitute  of  all  bodily  requirements,  physical  strength,  and  mental 
energy.  The  children  are  situated  among  circumstances  of  the  most 
vitiating  and  corrupting  character.  The  mother  is  unable  to  perform 


GSS 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


her  duty  toward  them,  and  they  are  led  into  the  paths  of  vice,  igno- 
rance, and  prostitution.  Nay,  every  invention  is  sought  out  by  them 
to  relieve  their  immediate  wants,  and  improve  their  external  condi- 
tion. Under  various  circumstances,  those  children  advance  to  ma- 
turity, and  are  then  thrown  upon  society  to  find  employment  by 
which  they  may  live,  if  they  are  fortunate  and  successful  in  their 
movements.  It  may  be  that  some  one  of  them  will  advance  to  a po- 
sition tending  to  unfold  the  physical  and  mental  powers,  and  such  a 
one  may  bring  forth  living  evidence  of  innate  genius  and  magnanimity 
of  soul. 

Another  one  may  seek  domestic  labor,  but  being  incapacitated,  is 
unsuccessful,  becomes  disheartened,  and  is  cast  out  by  the  employer, 
-uncared  for,  upon  the  disunited  and  conflicting  world  ! This  one 
will  flee  for  refuge  into  the  paths  of  vice  and  misery  — will  seek  shel- 
ter where  no  human  being  should  lie,  and  drown  all  sensibilities  in 
the  abundance  of  vice  into  which  he  or  she  is  immersed  — and  per- 
haps end  where  the  father  did,  a dishonor  to  society,  and  an  outrage 
to  the  moral  sensibilities  of  the  human  race  ! 

Another  may  be  situated  differently,  but  still  where  influences  are 
corrupting  and  opposed  to  the  proper  direction  of  the  faculties.  This 
one  may  be  selfish,  ferocious,  and  barbarous  in  the  extreme  — even 
to  the  destruction  of  a fellow-being’s  life  — and  finally  swing  before 
the  gazing  world  as  a representation  of  its  own  corruption , ignorance , 
and  fanaticism! 

Another  one,  being  a female,  and  because  of  unfavorable  birth 
being  despised,  may  seek  seclusion  from  the  scoffs  of  an  unfeeling 
world  in  the  sinks  of  iniquity  and  prostitution  — and  there  live  as  a 
representative  of  social  disunity,  discord,  degradation,  and  conflicting 
individual  interests. 

Here,  then,  is  a family  unknown  to  the  world,  until  some  one  of 
them,  pressed  by  poverty,  commits  a depredation  ; and  then  the  com- 
munity takes  an  interest,  not  in  the  unfortunate , but  in  him  who  loses 
for  the  benefit  of  that  desolated  family  ! Then  one  member  after 
another  becomes  known  and  despised!  Every  innate  energy  is 
crushed  by  the  withering  frowns  of  the  social  world  ! Every  pure 
aspiration  is  pressed  back  upon  the  soul,  because  it  needs  an  atmo- 
sphere of  light,  liberty,  and  social  happiness.  The  light  of  genius 
is  clouded  by  the  inferior  circumstances  surrounding  and  obstructing 
its  development.  Nay,  every  pure  and  innate  quality  of  the  human 
soul  is  arrested  in  its  growth,  because  society  smiles  not  on  its  ten- 


A VOTCE  TO  MANKIND. 


6S9 


derness,  nourishes  not  its  roots,  and  assists  not,  by  superior  circum- 
stances, its  growth.  Everything  tends  to  darken  the  sun  of  vivacity 
and  future  prospect ; and  where  the  light  and  heat  of  this  dwell  not, 
the  human  soul  can  not  bud  and  blossom,  for  its  soil  is  barren  and 
uncongenial ! 

§ 4.  Interests  are  thus  mutually  opposed  ; and  the  effects  of  the 
opposition  are  the  evil  and  misery  that  prevail  in  the  world.  No  man 
would  be  evil  in  action  if  he  had  not  an  interest  in  being  so.  No 
man  would  touch  the  wine-cup  were  it  not  to  gratify  some  unhealthy 
desire,  created  by  influences  and  situations  in  which  men  are  often 
existing.  No  man  would  defraud  his  neighbor  and  plunder  his  pos- 
sessions, if  all  wants  were  supplied  and  desires  gratified.  No  man 
would  injure  or  destroy  the  life  of  his  neighbor,  were  it  not  to  ac- 
complish some  end,  being  actuated  by  a necessity  unknown  to  com- 
munity. Neither  would  man  injure  his  neighbor,  if  his  interests  con- 
sisted in  his  neighbor’s  welfare.  No  man  would  deceive  or  falsify, 
if  his  interests  consisted  in  honesty  and  unrestricted  benevolence. 
Finally,  no  man  or  woman  in  the  human  race  would  do  an  unholy 
deed,  if  their  interests  consisted  in  the  interest  of  the  whole , so  as  to 
comprehend  both  individual  and  universal  happiness. 

Community  are  aware  of  all  unholy  deeds  when  they  are  commit- 
ted ; and  they  manifest  no  sympathy  toward  the  unfortunate  perpe- 
trator, but  have  an  interest  in  his  condemnation  and  imprisonment. 
If  society  felt  an  interest  in  the  welfare  of  its  individuals,  then  men 
would  not  be  in  situations  that  are  vitiating,  but  would  be  placed 
amid  superior  circumstances,  and  thus  benefited  and  rendered  useful 
to  the  requirements  of  the  community  at  large. 

All  these  evils  arise  from  this  one  fact  — that  labor  is  unrewarded 
and  unappreciated  ; and  hence  that  labor  is  disgusting  to  him  who  is 
compelled  to  perform  it,  and  absolutely  abhorred  by  those  who  sub- 
sist on  the  industry  of  the  poor  and  oppressed.  No  interest  is  felt  in 
labor  itself,  but  merely  in  its  emoluments.  No  interest  is  exercised 
for  the  general  good,  but  all  interests  are  isolated,  corrupting,  ensla- 
ving, and  disorganizing.  No  interest  is  centred  in  the  general  ad- 
vancement and  happiness  of  the  race,  but  merely  in  individual  acqui- 
sitions of  wealth,  and  power,  and  aristocratic  rank.  No  interest  is 
felt  in  the  condition  of  those  who  are  unhappily  situated  from  birth 
to  the  grave,  but  everything  is  against  the  cultivation  of  their  powers, 
the  enjoyment  of  their  existence,  and  the  profitableness  and  utility 

44 


GOO 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


of  their  lives.  No  interest  is  exercised  in  behalf  of  those  who  are 
unable  to  assist  themselves  and  enjoy  the  rightful  blessings  of  life 
but  all  are  striving  to  advance  to  individual  power,  and  honor,  and 
emolument  — are  even  willing  to  exert  a commanding  influence  over 
those  who  are  depressed  and  unable  to  resist  the  tyrannical  domina- 
tion thus  exercised  over  them.  No  interest  is  universal,  but  all  are 
isolated,  individual,  and  corrupting:  and  all  this  is  existing  because 
labor  is  not  appreciated  as  a universal  blessing,  and  esteemed  in 
proportion  to  its  tendency  to  elevate  the  human  race. 

The  laborer  is  entitled  to  something  more  than  arising  at  daybreak, 
going  forth  into  the  field  and  toiling  till  dark,  and  then  returning  to 
his  couch  of  straw,  and  awaking  again  with  body  prostrated  and  suf- 
fering with  hunger.  Industry  is  entitled  to  more  than  this  ; for  ac- 
tivity is  the  wealth  of  the  world,  and  the  use  and  destiny  of  man. 
Yet  it  is  a truth  that  in  various  portions  of  the  world,  laborers  are 
confined  to  tbe  meanest  subsistence,  and  their  bodies  are  sacrificed 
to  the  enslaving  and  degrading  speculations  of  idle  men.  They  are 
forced  almost  from  their  cradles  to  the  plantation  or  the  manufactur- 
ing establishment,  and  are  compelled  to  work  as  long  as  sunlight  will 
permit,  then  to  return  to  their  desolate  homes  fatigued  and  unreward- 
ed ! While  they  are  obliged  to  lead  a life  like  this,  those  subsisting 
upon  their  labors  pass  on  regardless  of  the  destitution  spread  before 
them. 

Interests  are  so  conflicting,  that  men  sacrifice  their  real  dignity  of 
character  and  moral  worth,  by  engaging  in  every  species  of  fraud, 
imposition,  and  cruel  speculation  — and  that,  too,  as  practised  upon  a 
multitude  of  uneducated  beings  who  are  confined  to  labor  of  the  most 
oppressive  character,  both  in  the  field  and  in  the  workshop.  He 
who,  by  the  workings  of  social  circumstances,  happens  to  be  born 
where  this  oppression  and  slavery  exists,  knows  no  use  of  his  own 
being,  nor  of  the  enjoyments  to  which  he  is  entitled  by  Nature  and 
her  extensive  provisions. 

In  the  various  countries  and  kintrdoms  of  the  earth,  monarchical 
governments  and  exclusive  and  arbitrary  laws  are  instituted  as  a pro- 
tective policy  and  safeguard  to  aristocracy  and  despotism.  And  they 
are  also  as  walls,  defending  the  accumulated  wealth  of  idlers  against 
absorptions  by  the  poor  within  their  dominions.  Every  kingdom, 
with  all  its  wealth,  owes  its  birth  to  the  incessant  industry  of  the  in- 
jured and  unrewarded  poor.  The  most  stately  lord  is  nothing  more 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


691 


than  a drone,  supported  by  those  compelled  to  till  the  soil  and  bring 
forth  its  wealth  and  excellences. — And  while  the  land  is  burdened 
with  lords  and  inactive  men,  the  poor  must  be  degraded  and  deprived 
of  their  just  dues;  and  where  such  useless  materials  exist,  vice,  pov- 
erty, and  wretchedness,  will  also  dwell.  These  latter  are  unfailing 
representatives  of  indolence,  lordly  aristocracy,  and  despotic  govern- 
ments. Where  suffering  most  exists,  there  the  burden  of  idle  and 
useless  materials  is.  And  this  suffering  in  society  is  always  an  un- 
failing indication  of  conflicting  interests,  which  are  constantly  pro- 
ducing violations  of  the  injunction,  “ Thou  shalt  love  thy  neighbor 
as  thyself.” 

It  is  impossible  to  find  a radical  distinction  between  the  natures 
or  the  requirements  of  different  men  : but  there  is  a difference  only 
in  the  degree  in  which  these  are  manifested.  Some  men  require 
more  than  others  in  the  way  of  physical  or  mental  food  ; yet  all  are 
entitled  to  as  much  as  they  desire,  especially  when  that  desire  is 
governed  by  a well-ordered  Wisdom. 

§ 5.  As  he  who  tills  the  soil  feels  no  absolute  interest  in  its  pro- 
ductions, but  only  in  the  paltry  sum  given  for  his  labors,  so  the  sci- 
ence of  agriculture  has  not  advanced  to  that  degree  of  perfection  of 
which  it  is  capable.  All  improvements  are  such  as  result  from  iso- 
lated effort,  and  therefore  they  are  not  such  as  to  visibly  benefit  man- 
kind, but  their  benefits  are  dissipated  by  vain  speculation. 

Mechanics  feel  no  interest  in  the  improvement  of  machinery,  any 
further  than  it  conduces  to  individual  wealth.  There  is  no  general 
interest  manifested  for  the  relief  and  consequent  reward  of  the  la- 
borer. Hence,  if  mechanics  improve  in  arts  and  sciences  which 
abridge  manual  labor,  they  also  take  the  food  from  him  whose  em- 
ployment is  destroyed.  It  is  clear,  then,  that  the  interests  of  the 
laborer  are  opposed  to  those  of  the  mechanic  ; and  the  conflict  cre- 
ates hatred  and  local  persecution. 

Every  new  invention  should  be  hailed  with  shouts  of  joy  by  all,  as 
conducing  to  the  relief  of  laborious  employment,  and  to  the  advance-' 
ment  of  the  race.  But  instead  of  this,  every  new  invention  is  frowned 
upon  with  all  the  jealousy  of  disunited  interests.  Thus  genius  is 
crushed,  and  the  poor  man’s  energies  are  prostrated  by  the  non- 
reception of  his  invention  and  the  non-appreciation  of  his  ingenuity. 

If  a man  should  invent  a floating  battery  as  a means  of  destruction, 
or  plan  any  other  new  mode  of  destroying  human  life  and  the  interests 


692 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


of  nations,  then  would  the  public  encomiums  be  warm  and  enthusi- 
astic. Any  new  and  deathly  instrument  is  hailed  by  all  as  a reliever 
of  national  hostility,  and  an  indirect  benefit  to  the  poor  and  unfortu- 
nate. This  is  an  expression  of  a public  feeling  characterizing  every 
nation  of  the  earth  ; and  how  unholy  are  the  conditions  which  give 
rise  to  this  feeling!  These  conditions  breathe  hatred  and  wretch- 
edness into  the  bosom  of  every  excitable  being,  and  deposite  the 
poison  of  envy  in  each  neighbor’s  cup  ; and  when  they  drink,  all  de- 
scriptions of  prejudice,  hostility,  strife,  persecution,  and  fanaticism, 
flow  from  their  intoxicated  minds  ! 

The  community  is  thus  disordered,  even  in  its  departments  of  me- 
chanical industry.  Every  new  invention  for  the  destruction  of  life 
is  smiled  upon  by  the  mass  ; but  every  new  invention  for  the  destruc- 
tion of  degrading  toil , and  for  the  elevation  of  the  interests  of  the 
race,  is  only  hailed  with  delight  by  a few  good  and  benevolent  minds, 
while  the  mass,  feeling  conscious  that  it  crosses  their  interests,  scout 
at  and  frown  it  down,  that  it  may  not  go  forth  to  their  injury.  The 
laborer  is  thus  opposed  to  mechanical  improvement.  Any  exertion 
in  the  way  of  such  improvement  is  the  commencement  of  hostility 
and  persecution  between  the  inventor  and  the  mass  of  laborers. 

Tradesmen  are  all  engaged  in  isolated  pursuits,  diametrically 
opposed  to  each  other.  Each  one  establishes  a capital  and  a business 
where  the  most  advantage  can  be  taken  of  his  neighbor  and  of  the 
community.  Thus  isolated  business  among  the  tradesmen  is  lead- 
ing to  the  most  ingenious  deception  and  falsehood.  He  who  can 
converse  with  the  most  freedom,  and  present  the  most  external  in- 
ducements, has  the  advantage  over  his  neighbors  in  his  accumula- 
tions of  wealth  as  derived  and  extracted  from  the  community ; while 
he  who  is  less  competent  in  these  respects,  ultimately  fails  in  his 
enterprise,  and  then  receives  for  his  consolation  the  fiendish  exulta- 
tions of  his  neighboring  tradesmen. 

It  is  right  and  profitable  to  unveil  the  corruptions  of  society,  and 
to  present  a mirror  in  which  the  actions  and  situation  of  every  person 
may  be  visibly  and  justly  represented.  Nothing  is  more  injurious  to 
the  morals  of  community,  and  more  enslaving  to  the  poor  man,  than 
the  vast  congregation  of  tradesmen,  whose  interests  are  as  much  op- 
posed to  each  other  as  the  darkness  of  midnight  is  to  the  light  of 
noonday.  More  vice  exists  among  this  class  of  community  than  in 
any  other  department  of  society.  They  are  connected  with  each 
other  locally,  and  are  joined  externally,  to  extract  an  unreasonable 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


693 


profit  from  him  who  buys  — yet  they  are  internally  bitterly  opposed 
to  each  other’s  welfare  ; and  each  one  is  compelled  by  interests  to 
overreach  and  deceive  his  neighbor.  The  fact  of  their  being  thus 
impelled  by  misdirected  interests,  generates  every  species  of  vice  and 
disunity  among  themselves  and  in  society.  The  buyer  enters  the 
establishment  of  the  tradesman  with  the  full  conviction  that  the  latter 
will  deceive  him  if  possible . Therefore  the  interests  of  the  buyer  and  of 
the  seller  are  in  direct  opposition  to  each  other.  And  what  is  worse 
than  all  is,  that  there  is  a distrust  of  virtue  and  morality  deposited  in 
the  bosom  of  every  man  toward  his  neighbor  and  the  world  ! 

As  society  is  existing,  men  are  considered  uneducated  if  they  have 
not  an  acute  perception  of  their  neighbors’  faults  and  follies,  or  if 
they  are  not  at  all  times  prepared  with  deceptive  plans  to  overcome 
the  intrigues  and  deceptions  of  others.  If  a man  has  grown  up  from 
the  cradle  to  manhood,  in  a little  community  where  peace  and  har- 
mony dwell,  having  no  suspicion  of  evil  or  deception  as  pervading 
society,  and  having  an  implicit  confidence  in  the  purity  of  the  deal- 
ings of  mankind  with  each  other;  and  if  he  should  go  forth  into  a 
community  of  desperate  and  unfortunately-situated  men,  he  would 
he  deceived  in  the  most  cruel  manner.  His  property  would  be  taken 
from  him  for  one  half  its  value  ; his  pure  spirit  would  be  corrupted; 
his  confidence  would  be  betrayed,  and  his  natural  genius  smothered  : 
and  for  all  this  loss,  he  would  receive  the  fiendish  sneers  of  the  trades- 
men, because  he  was  not  educated , and^aware  of  their  ingenious  ex- 
pertness ! Thus  no  men  are  more  viciously  situated  than  tradesmen, 
and  none  are  doing  a more  direct  injury  to  the  social  requirements 
of  all  mankind. 

The  poor  man  is  entitled  to  food  and  clothing  in  as  great  abun 
dance,  and  even  greater,  than  he  who  subsists  upon  the  poor  man’s 
labor.  But  what  a hopeless  adventure  it  is  for  an  honest  man  to 
prefer  this  claim,  or  to  endeavor  to  procure  suitable  garments  for  his 
person  ! In  the  first  place,  the  article  from  which  clothing  is  made 
is  gathered  from  the  earth  which  he  cultivates.  Its  owner  demands 
and  receives  a profit  from  the  manufacturer  — who  presses  the  oper- 
atives to  labor  for  little  reward,  that  his  profit  may  be  greater  when 
lie  transfers  his  produce  to  the  tradesman.  By  the  time  the  trades- 
man receives  the  cloth,  the  yirojits  consume  more  than  its  original 
value.  The  tradesman  is,  however,  entitled  to  a profit  also,  and 
this  the  buyer  must  pay.  The  poor  man  then  receives  of  the 
tradesman  his  garments,  and  is  compelled  to  pay  the  combined 


694 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


tariffs  and  profits  of  the  agriculturist,  the  manufacturer,  and  the 
tradesman  ! 

Thus  from  the  labor  of  the  poor  man  are  all  these  various  and 
conflicting  situations  sustained,  and  the  many  persons  therein  engaged 
constantly  supported.  Surely  it  is  not  strange  that  poverty  exists 
where  capital  is  so  isolated  and  interests  so  discordant. 

Tradesmen  are  also  striving  to  succeed  at  the  sacrifice  of  each 
other's  interests  ; and  while  doing  so,  they  affect  the  manufacturer, 
the  operatives,  the  agriculturists,  and  those  who  toil  from  early  dawn 
till  evening  without  reward. 

There  should  be  no  local,  isolated  establishments,  such  as  are  now 
existing  ; but  there  should  be  a general  storehouse  for  every  commu- 
nity and  every  city ; and  this  should  be  abundantly  supplied  by  the 
united  industry  of  the  whole  community.  Not  a tear  should  be  shed 
in  consequence  of  hunger  ; no  bosom  should  throb  with  pain  or  sink 
with  disconsolation.  No  child  should  be  left  to  shiver  from  cold,  or 
suffer  deprivation  of  natural  wants  ; no  mother  should  lament  her 
children’s,  her  own,  or  her  husband’s  destitution.  Nor  should  there 
be  a life  sacrificed  at  the  altar  of  want,  or  destroyed  by  the  hand  of 
fearful  starvation  ; for  those  stores  of  wealth  and  abundance  should 
yield  a subsistence  to  every  one  who  moves  and  dwells  in  the  human 
form.  Then  tradesmen’s  interests  would  consist  merely  in  assisting 
others  to  their  natural  demands,  and  not  in  keeping  from  them  every 
article  of  comfort  and  subsistence  which  they  may  hold  within  their 
own  grasp,  as  at  present. 

§ 6.  The  lawyer’s  interest  is  opposed  to  general  peace  and  righ- 
teousness. Lawyers  are  in  situations  which  make  them  interested  in 
the  disturbances  that  prevail,  and  not  in  the  general  tranquillity  of 
community.  They  have  their  interests  centred  in  the  numerous  liti- 
gations caused  by  persecution  and  hostility.  Where  vice  exists, 
poverty  prevails  to  an  equal  extent ; and  where  vice  and  poverty  pre- 
vail, the  lawyer  is  most  powerfully  attracted.  Instead  of  being  peace- 
makers, they  are  peace-destroyers ; inasmuch  as  the  settlement  of 
evety  legal  question  must  be  for  or  against  the  individuals  concerned. 
The  result  of  this  is  latent  envy,  and  a secretive  determination  to 
have  their  demands  satisfied,  and  that,  too,  when  the  laws  of  society 
can  take  no  cognizance  of  their  plans  to  deceive  and  injure.  Every 
act  of  adjudication  among  the  legal  profession  is  the  commencement 
of  interior  hatred  and  hostility.  And  besides  this,  every  man  seeks 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


695 


refuge  in  the  laws  of  society  and  the  state,  against  the  injuries  of  his 
neighbor ; and  this  is  the  strongest  indication  of  disease  in  the  con- 
stitution of  society.  For  local  quarrels  and  conflicts  are  blemishes 
that  affect  society  as  ulcers  affect  the  diseased  body  ; and  it  is  clear 
that  blemishes  would  neither  affect  society  nor  the  body  of  man,  if 
the  interior  qualities  and  particles  of  the  constitution  were  pure, 
united,  and  circulating  throughout  the  whole  form  with  a perfect 
equality.  Evils  that  exist  in  society  are  like  diseased  parts  of  the 
body  ; and  the  open  contentions  manifested  through  the  workings  of 
vice  are  like  pains  that  affect  the  body  : and  both  testify  of  internal 
corruption.  And  he  is  the  true  peace-maker  who  strikes  at  the  root 
of  social  evil,  and  who  destroys  the  fruit  of  the  contaminating  tree. 

If  the  poor  of  the  earth  wrere  educated. , and  their  feelings  were  re- 
fined, there  would  be  no  stooping  to  the  vice  of  deception  and  false- 
hood ; neither  would  there  exist  so  much  disunity  which  lawyers  are 
employed  to  settle  according  to  the  established  codes  of  the  land. 
And  every  legal  decision  is  a virtual  protest  against  the  prevalence 
of  morality  and  unity  of  human  interests.  If  the  mechanic  labored 
in  connexion  with  the  tiller  of  the  soil,  and  their  enterprises  v'ere 
mutually  assistiag  to  each  other,  such  a thing  as  contention  and 
lawsuits  between  them  would  not  be  known.  Did  tradesmen  act  in 
accordance  with  the  requirements  of  the  mechanic  and  the  laborer, 
then  would  their  reciprocal  action  create  harmony,  and  the  lawyer 
would  have  no  occupation. 

The  lawyer’s  interest  is  therefore  decidedly  opposed  to  this  state 
of  things  ; and  as  they  are  exerting  an  undue  influence  in  society, 
their  opposition  will  retard  the  progress  of  social,  moral,  and  univer- 
sal reform.  Their  interests  consist  in  the  prevalence  of  ignorance 
and  imbecility',  in  the  greatest  amount  of  strife,  contention,  and  de- 
ception, and  in  every  species  of  corruption  and  degradation  that  now 
render  society  a disgusting  body  — even  as  a whitened  sepulchre, 
full  of  dead  men’s  bones  ! 

Lawyer's,  as  men,  are  good  and  honest,  like  all  other  men  ; but 
how  deplorable  to  reflect  on  their  corrupting  situations  ! From  these ' 
situations  spring  the  most  unhealthy  influences  into  the  bosom  of  so- 
ciety ; and  instead  of  reforming  and  equalizing  mankind,  and  amica- 
bly settling  their  difficulties,  they  are  merely  casting  a veil  over 
blemishes  by  an  external  legal  process,  while  that  which  they  conceal 
is  rife  with  all  sorts  of  evil,  extortion,  and  excess.  No  verdict  is 
given  without  violating  as  many  feelings  as  it  gratifies.  Hence  a 


G9G 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


great  portion  of  the  counteracting  and  conflicting  feelings  that  are  in 
the  world,  arc  because  the  verdicts  of  conventional  laws  are  in  favor 
of  or  against  the  established  interest  or  prejudice  of  some  person  or 
persons.  It  can  not  be  said  that  they  are  relieving  the  evils  of  so- 
ciety, so  long  as  verdicts  are  isolated  and  superficial  in  their  charac- 
ter. The  laws  of  Nature  are  unlike  this.  Their  verdicts  are  mani- 
fested to  all  beings,  and  all  acknowledge  their  justice,  and  are  en- 
couraged by  their  unfailing  distribution  of  justice  to  every  created 
form. 

The  lawyer’s  interest  therefore  consists  in  the  amount  of  vice  and 
misery  that  prevail,  and  not  in  the  peace,  and  unity,  and  happiness, 
which  the  world  is  striving  to  enjoy.  The  lawyer’s  situation  is  thus 
the  most  unenviable  of  any  except  that  of  the  clergyman.  But  law- 
yers are  to  be  relieved  from  their  positions  ere  long,  by  feeling  a 
thrilling  conviction  of  the  truths  of  Nature,  and  by  her  unceasing  de- 
mands for  social  reform  and  distributive  justice.  It  is  pleasing  to 
contemplate  the  day  when  men  will  forsake  theory,  sect,  philosophy, 
prejudice,  and  situation,  for  the  sole  purpose  of  fulfilling  their  use  in 
the  nature  of  things,  and  thereby  to  establish  happiness  in  every  por- 
tion of  the  world  : for  each  will  have  a position  created  by  his  own 
industry. 

§ 7.  The  physician’s  interest  consists  in  the  amount  of  organic 
violation  that  occurs,  and  in  the  abundance  of  distress  and  physical 
wretchedness  that  are  found  in  the  sick-room,  the  hospital,  the  asy 
lum,  the  prison,  the  army,  and  throughout  the  nation.  Physicians, 
as  men  not  professionally  employed,  will  express  the  most  unbound- 
ed benevolence,  and  actual  sympathy,  for  the  suffering  that  exists. 
They  will  express  all  the  yearnings  of  noble  minds  for  the  improve- 
ment and  education  of  the  poor  and  ignorant,  and  for  superior  situa- 
tions to  bless  the  poor  man’s  home  and  the  rich  man’s  constitution. 
But  a physician,  in  his  occupation,  feels  no  interest  in  any  new  in- 
vention, or  system,  or  compound,  that  might  be  effectual  in  curing 
disease.  He  feels  no  interest  in  the  advancement  of  intelligence  on 
the  subjects  of  anatomy  and  physiology,  because  a general  knowl- 
edge of  the  organic  structure  of  man  would  lead  to  a great  amount 
of  health,  inasmuch  as  then  all  would  strive  to  avoid  violation.  He 
feels  no  interest  in  the  prevalence  of  physiological  knowledge,  nor  is 
he  interested  in  any  degree  of  reform  leading  to  a destruction  of  vice, 
debauchery,  and  physical  violations.  Disease  and  pain  exist  because 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


697 


the  science  of  life  and  the  necessities  of  the  human  body  are  unknown 
to  a majority  of  the  human  race. 

The  poor  man  is  obliged  to  exert  all  his  physical  energies' to  gain 
a subsistence  for  himself  and  family.  He  is  thereby  subject  to  ex- 
posures of  every  possible  description,  and  to  sufferings  that  are  in- 
tolerable. The  atmosphere  may  change,  and  bring  disease  to  his 
exposed  body.  Labor  may  be  excessive  and  disproportionate  ; and 
its  results  maybe  deformity,  contractions,  inflammations,  and  muscu- 
lar prostration,  some  or  all  of  which  are  a portion  of  the  poor  man’s 
reward.  Thus  exposed,  he  sinks  under  disease  ; and  when  pros- 
trated on  his  couch,  amid  his  family  whose  wants  are  unsupplied,  be 
ventures  to  raise  his  voice  to  the  wealth  and  philanthropy  of  society 
in  supplication,  and  humbly  solicits  relief.  What  is  the  reply  which 
he  receives  ? It  is  the  frowns  and  silent  abuses  of  the  community  — 
and  he  can  see  that  the  world  regards  him  not.  Thus  forsaken,  he 
languishes  and  departs  unappreciated  ! Such  examples  are,  in  modi- 
fied forms,  visible  in  every  portion  of  the  world.  The  physician 
feels  no  interest  in  the  health  of  that  sick  man,  and  it  is  a matter  of 
indifference  to  him  whether  his  pains  are  soothed  or  his  situation  re- 
lieved. He  seeks  not  the  poor  man,  because  the  little  attraction 
(which  is  insignificant  indeed)  is  not  in  the  poor  man’s  possession. 
Therefore  the  poor  man  is  neglected,  because  the  physician’s  interest 
consists,  not  in  the  prevalence  of  health,  but  in  the  extent  of  disease 
among  those  able  to  reward  his  labors. 

The  wife  and  children  of  this  poor  man  are  also  exposed  to  in- 
clement weather,  and  to  every  description  of  destitution  possible  to 
conceive.  The  wife,  exercised  by  grief  and  depressed  with  sorrow, 
becomes  weakened  and  emaciated,  and  finally  occupies  the  bed  just 
deserted  by  her  unfortunate  and  neglected  companion.  She,  too,  is 
encompassed  with  sorrow,  and  is  afflicted  with  privations,  which  so- 
ciety perceives  not.  Amid  the  cries  of  her  children,  she  is  depressed 
beyond  the  possibility  of  a resurrection  ; and  she  soon  closes  her  eyes 
upon  the  world  with  a fear,  and  dread,  and  sorrow,  unknown  to  any 
but  herself:  and  the  last  vibration  upon  her  ear  is  the  cry  of  hunger 
arising  from  her  infant  child ! She  thus  dies  a sacrifice  to  human 
injustice  and  social  disorganization  ! 

The  children,  one  by  one,  are  taken  and  placed  in  the  asylum,  and 
there  cared  for  in  proportion  to  the  reward  given  to  the  physician 
and  the  overseer.  There  they  are  treated  as  si  rangers  ; there  they 
grow  like  the  plant  uncultivated,  and  finally  become  a burden  to 


698 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND* 


the  community  and  the  keeper  of  the  almshouse  who  supports 
them  all.  ^ 

If  the  physician  were  well  situated  and  properly  rewarded,  he 
would  seek  the  afflicted,  relieve  their  pains,  and  strive  to  inculcate 
physiological  truths  whereby  disease  might  be  avoided,  and  unneces- 
sary violations  escaped.  If  the  physician  were  Rewarded  in  propor- 
tion to  the  amount  of  health  that  exists,  then  would  he  feel  anxious 
to  have  vice,  and  misery,  and  degradation,  and  debauchery  to  cease, 
and  health  to  bless  the  existence  of  every  man.  These  corruptions 
gyrate  through  all  portions  and  classes  of  society,  and  the  phy- 
sician is  interested  therein.  And  where  disease  is  in  abundance, 
there  he  is  attracted,  not  because  he  feels  interested  in  the  health  and 
prosperity  of  his  patients,  but  in  that  which  he  receives  for  his  medical 
attentions. 

. Nothing  can  be  more  dishonoring  to  the  convictions  of  the  physi- 
cian than  the  corrupting  situation  which  he  occupies  ; for  he  is  com- 
pelled to  follow  the  promptings  of  his  interest,  while  his  convictions 
of  duty  and  his  higher  sensibilities  weep  over  his  ill-directed  pro- 
ceedings. The  physician’s  duty,  like  that  of  the  lawyer  and  the 
clergyman,  is  sensibly  impressed  on  his  judgment  by  Nature,  and  he 
would  cheerfully  comply  with  its  dictates,  were  he  not  so  viciously 
and  unhappily  situated.  But  interest  is  the  governing  principle  of 
human  existence  ; and  the  object  to  be  attained  is  so  to  change  the 
situations  of  men  that  their  interests  may  correspond  with  the  admo- 
nitions of  their  enlightened  judgments. 

The  physician  has  an  internal  conviction  which  he  can  not  sup- 
press, that  what  he  is  obliged  to  do  in  his  profession  is  directly  opposed 
to  his  duty.  He  can  not  resist  this  conviction  ; and  the  same  is  true 
of  the  lawyer,  mechanic,  and  the  laborer.  And  this  truth  unfolds 
the  fearful  and  horrible  fact  in  the  condition  of  the  human  race  — 
that  men  are  not  only  contending  with  each  other  in  their  social  oc- 
cupations, but  that  there  is  a constant  antagonism  existing  between 
interest  and  duty  in  every  bosom.  Men’s  interests  tell  them  one 
thing,  and  their  duty  another.  Interests  are  created  by  the  necessi- 
ties of  the  body  and  its  propensities  ; and  men,  to  supply  these  ne- 
cessities, are  compelled  to  smother  conscience  in  the  blackest  clouds 
of  social  warfare  and  conflicting;  interests. 

One  third  of  the  earth’s  population  are  bound  by  the  hand  of  dis- 
ease, merely  because  they  are  uneducated,  inferiorly  conditioned,  and 
unjustly  treated  by  the  exclusiveness  of  classes  and  aristocracies. 


A VOTCE  TO  MANKIND. 


699 


And  this  one  third  are  also  crushed  by  poverty,  caused  by  ingenious 
speculations  on  their  labor.  These  come  into  being,  live  unhappy 
and  useless  lives,  and  finally  die,  not  knowing  the  destiny  of  their 
creation.  They  live,  moreover,  in  a wilderness  of  pain,  starvation, 
and  discontentment ; and  it  is  conspicuously  true  that  physicians 
never  venture  into  that  wilderness  of  despair  ! They  never  explore 
the  regions  of  pain,  distress,  and  wretchedness,  because  their  interests 
speak,  and  their  steps  are  directed  to  the  bed  of  the  rich  man,  whose 
wealth  consists  of  the  accumulated  productions  of  that  wilderness  of 
despairing  and  diseased  beings!  Terrible  indeed  is  the  unrigh- 
teousness of  these  things  : and  they  are  truths  that  need  unveiling, 
though  they  will  thrill  the  soul  of  every  enlightened  person  with  an 
overwhelming  conviction  of  their  truth  and  importance  ! 

The  human  race  is  afilicted  with  disease.  Mankind  as  a body  are 
side,  and  need  a physician.  They  need  effectual  attention  and  per- 
manent restitution  to  health,  and  energy,  and  happiness.  The  race, 
then,  must  he  educated.  The  rudiments  of  this  education  must  con- 
sist in  each  one  knowing  himself,  in  every  anatomical  and  physiologi- 
cal particular;  and  then  the  world  will  not  be  cursed  with  ignorance, 
vice,  disease,  and  misery.  Then  physicians  will  he  useful  and  ben- 
eficial; for  their  time  and  talents  will  be  concentrated  in  the  great 
work  of  social  and  moral  reform,  and  their  interests  will  not  only 
consist  in  the  amount  of  health  enjoyed,  but  in  the  destruction  of 
ignorance,  violation,  and  local  wretchedness. 

§ 8.  Of  all  professions  and  situations  occupied  by  men,  none  is 
absolutely  more  unenviable  and  more  corrupting  than  that  sustained 
by  clergymen.  It  is  a deplorable  fact  that  all  the  miseries,  the 
conflicts,  the  wars,  the  devastations,  and  the  hostile  prejudices,  ex- 
isting in  the  world,  are  owing  to  the  corrupting  situation  and  influ- 
ence of  clergymen.  From  the  beginning  of  the  human  race  to  the 
middle  of  this  century,  nothing  has  been  more  prominent  than  secta- 
rian enthusiasm  and  theological  warfare.  And  from  the  lowest  period 
of  the  race,  there  have  been  successive  modifications  of  clerical 
power : but  each  modification  has  only  contributed  to  consolidate  the 
error,  and  make  the  evil  more  impregnable.  Clergymen  have  (like 
other  professional  men)  smothered  their  consciences  in  the  gloomy 
cloud  of  sectarianism.  They  are  all  good  in  spirit,  but  unholy  in 
situation  and  influence.  And  nothing  can  be  more  disgusting  and 


700 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


depressing,  even  to  their  own  clouded  judgments,  than  the  unrigh- 
teousness proceeding  from  the  influence  they  exert  over  an  ignorant 
and  imbecile  race. 

Each  clergyman,  like  the  physician,  is  opposed  to  every  new  sys- 
tem of  practice  and  model  of  profession.  Physicians  do  not  counte- 
nance new  modes  and  systems  of  practice,  because  this  would  be 
stepping  from  the  consolidated  systems  established  by  early  genera- 
tions. And  their  system  is  so  defended  by  a wall  of  Latin  and  in- 
significant terms,  that  no  one  can  pass  through  and  become  initiated 
without  spending  a large  sum  in  some  medical  or  technical  institu- 
tion. The  wall  is  so  unsurpassable,  that  the  majority  of  mankind 
are  obliged  to  remain  on  the  outer,  uninformed  of  their  nature  and 
the  paths  that  lead  to  health  and  happiness.  The  clergyman  is  still  a 
little  more  unfortunately  situated,  and  is  as  effectually  defended  against 
the  invasion  of  natural  intelligence,  and  the  discoveries  of  any  re- 
searcher into  the  truths  of  Nature  and  her  God,  that  clergymen  speak 
of  so  much.  They  also  have  a consolidated  system  of  error — which 
error,  however,  is  concealed  by  the  assumed  cloak  of  “ orthodoxy,” 
which  means  “ the  right  way."  — But  it  is  only  the  right  way  in  one 
sense,  and  that  is  to  defend  sectarianism  against  its  foes  ! 

Clergymen  have  a system  of  practice  which  is  guarded  by  com- 
mentaries so  vast,  and  sentinels  so  numerous,  that  the  practice  in 
general  can  not  be  overthrown,  or  new  systems  be  built  up  in  its 
stead.  They  have  not,  however,  succeeded  fully  in  this  particular, 
inasmuch  as  new  systems  of  theological  practice  are  being  conceived 
and  instituted  in  nearly  every  generation.  The  world  at  the  present 
day  is  a striking  example  of  this  truth.  It  displays  many  systems  of 
sectarianism,  and  modes  of  curing  the  diseased  soul.  — And  there  are 
also  clergymen  practising  in  each  mode  and  system  of  “salvation.” 
Some  have  more  expedient  and  plausible  ceremonies  than  others, 
and  such  generally  receive  more  patients  ; and  in  this  way  new  sects 
and  new  forms  of  sectarian  prejudice  are  established. 

Their  interest  consists  in  smothering  the  consciences  of  men,  as 
the  physician’s  interest  consists  in  general  violation  of  the  organic 
laws.  If  clergymen  can  have  a general  psychological  ignorance 
prevail,  they  are  well  pleased.  If  they  can  have  a general  effemi- 
nacy and  mental  submission,  then  their  occupation  is  prosperous  and 
their  reward  proportional.  If  they  can  have  a submissive  sectarian- 
ism, and  a moderate  yet  ignorant  prejudice  for  exclusive  sects,  then 
they  entertain  no  fears  as  to  the  perpetuation  of  their  reward,  and  the 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


701 


success  of  their  professional  enterprise.  Clergymen  can  not  deny 
that  their  interests  consist  in  the  prevalence  of  ignorance  and  secta- 
rian prejudice,  and  not  in  free  and  unrestricted  thought  and  theologi- 
cal investigation.  They  are  aware  that  the  unrestricted  exercise  of 
the  mental  powers  would  seal  an  everlasting  destruction  to  all  secta- 
rianism, and  consequently  to  their  professions.  If  the  human  mind 
were  free  from  the  shackles  imposed  by  prejudice,  it  would  not  rest 
until  every  vestige  of  chimerical  philosophy  and  theology  was  ban- 
ished from  the  earth.  The  clergyman’s  policy  proclaims  his  con- 
sciousness of  this  fearful  truth.  He  shrinks  childishly  from  the  in- 
vestigation, and  strives  to  protect  his  situation  by  a more  sanctimo- 
nious life,  and  a deeper  devotion  to  the  sectarian  prejudices  of  his 
parishioners  ! 

Previous  research  into  the  condition  of  man  and  society  has  de- 
monstrated that  man,  having  been  well  situated,  amid  many  culti- 
vations' of  his  own  industry,  began  to  exercise  his  mental  powers 
on  spiritual  subjects,  and  upon  the  most  profound  mysteries.  His 
thoughts  were  at  first  confined  to  his  social  condition  and  to  the 
things  near  and  about  him  that  were  pleasurable  and  profitable  to  the 
requirements  of  the  body.  And  after  having  removed  all  influences 
that  excited  pain  or  displeasure,  he  lived  happily,  being  abundantly 
nourished  by  good  and  congenial  productions.  Soon,  however,  the 
mind  deserted  visible  things,  and  soared  in  search  of  that  beyond  its 
comprehension.  — And  what  is  remarkable  is  that  the  first  adventurer 
in  celestial  imaginations  was  a chieftain  who  was  what  at  the  present 
day  would  be  called  a clergyman.  He,  like  others  after  him,  felt 
inspired  with  novel  conceptions,  and,  not  perceiving  their  origin, 
supposed  they  were  divine. 

From  the  first,  these  chieftains  were  adored  as  celestial  teachers, 
and  true  expounders  of  every  (without  them)  inexplicable  mystery. 
It  was  found  necessary  to  establish  a distinction  between  those  thus 
elevated,  and  the  enslaved  admirer.  Moreover,  it  was  deemed  a vir- 
tue, and  an  evidence  of  divine  religion,  for  the  poor,  depressed 
laborer  to  give  all  his  super-productions  to  the  priests  and  chieftains. 
The  priests,  thus  elevated  and  pauperously  supported,  exerted  an  in- 
fluence over  those  beneath  them,  which  established  at  once  despotic 
government  and  sectarian  usurpation. 

Clergymen  have  been  so  long  engaged  in  their  profession  — in 
perpetuating  the  primitive  doctrines  among  the  people,  carefully  pre- 


702 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


serving  every  mystery  — and  in  establishing  lines  of  demarcation  be- 
tween the  good  and  evil  in  society  — that  the  bright  functions  of  reason 
in  them  have  become  completely  beclouded  ; and  they  feel  conscien- 
tiously employed,  and  impelled  by  a sense  of  duty  to  continue  to 
promulgate  their  hereditary  doctrines.  Their  conceptions  of  duty 
are  at  the  present  day  moulded  in  their  profession.  Hence  the  most 
brilliant  mind,  the  most  sensitive  conscience,  the  most  worthy  man, 
is  pursuing  his  profession  under  the  deepest  convictions  of  a myste- 
rious duty  enjoined  upon  him.  They  feel  it  impossible  to  be  mis- 
taken in  their  work.  They  feel  that  as  the  profession  was  estab- 
lished many  centuries  ago,  it  is  no  more  than  consistent  with  the 
highest  reason  that  it  should  be  perpetuated. 

Their  interests  consist  in  the  prevalence  of  ignorance  on  psycho- 
logical subjects.  They  are  evidently  conscious  of  this  truth  ; for 
when  a new  discovery  is  presented  which  is  unfavorable  to  their 
leading  principles,  they  are  impelled  by  a sense  of  duty  and  religious 
interest,  to  defend  their  profession  against  such  an  unholy  invasion. 
It  is  with  them  as  with  the  physician.  — All  new  systems  in  his  pro- 
fession, all  new  discoveries  and  newly-invented  medicines,  he  opposes; 
for  these  are  against  his  interest  and  professional  education.  The 
success  of  any  new  medicine  would  reduce  his  practice,  and  conflict 
with  his  prejudices.  So  clergymen,  in  whatever  situation  they  may 
be  placed,  are  anxious  that  new  discoveries  and  truths  should  not 
prevail,  inasmuch  as  every  new  truth  would  convey  a light  into  their 
midst,  which  would  reveal  the  hideousness  of  their  corruption  and 
imbecility  to  a confiding  world. 

§ 9.  From  the  influence  of  such  ignorant  despotism,  the  world  is 
thus  disorganized,  and  existing  amid  conflicting  elements  of  the  most 
corroding  and  corrupting  character.  The  clergy  exert  power  over 
the  prejudices  of  every  society  throughout  the  world.  From  the 
cradle  their  doctrines  exert  their  influence  : at  youth  they  become  in- 
stamped,  and  at  manhood  the  mind  is  hampered  with  a confirmed 
prejudice  to  some  sectarian  faith,  and  to  some  formal  observance, 
barren  of  benevolence.  The  laborer,  the  mechanic,  the  tradesman, 
the  lawyer,  and  the  physician,  are  all  under  the  immediate  control  of 
clerical  influence  ; and  all  of  them  yield  to  this  influence  as  slaves 
yield  to  the  imperious  commands  of  a potentate.  Like  the  Medes 
and  Persians  with  reference  to  their  secular  laws,  they  dare  not  move 
and  raise  their  voice  against  the  corrupting  restrictions  imposed  by 


A VOICE  10  MANKIND. 


703 


the  clergymen.  For  an  open  denunciation  of  them,  or  a serious  ex- 
pression of  a conviction  of  any  new  and  higher  truths,  would  bring 
down  upon  them  the  fearful  threats  of  the  religious  profession,  and  it 
would  not  be  long  before  the  general  prejudice  would  crush  them  to 
the  earth.  Let  any  man  speak  sentiments  irresistibly  received,  de- 
rogatory to  the  religion  of  the  world,  and  the  whole  clerical  army 
would  be  arrayed  against  him.  All  sects  would  instantly  combine 
their  forces  to  repulse  and  crush  the  untrammelled  mind  ! His  voice 
would  be  hushed,  his  influence  would  be  arrested,  and  his  benevo- 
lent teachings  overwhelmed  in  the  clouds  of  ignorance  and  religious 
fanaticism  ! 

When  the  laborer  is  nourishing  the  vegetation  ; when  he  is  en- 
gaged in  beautifying  the  earth  and  perfecting  the  harvest ; in  short, 
when  he  is  connected  with  the  teachings  of  Nature  and  her  require- 
ments, he  conceives  of  a benevolent  Creator,  who  is  good  unto  all, 
and  is  no  respecter  of  persons  ; and  who,  in  his  impartiality,  has  made 
the  same  provisions  for  the  Christian,  the  laborer,  and  the  cannibal. 
The  experience  of  the  poor  man  is  more  closely  connected  with 
truth  than  that  of  any  other,  because  he  is  constantly  associating  his 
thoughts  with  Nature,  her  laws,  and  her  evident  bestowments  upon 
him.  His  convictions  are  irresistible  when  free  from  the  clergyman’s 
philosophy,  or  from  any  conventional  doctrines.  But  when  he  leaves 
the  field  and  turns  to  society,  his  better  convictions  are  instantly 
crushed  by  the  gloominess  of  the  doctrines  and  impressions  of  the 
theological  world  ! He  is  not  only  subject  to  all  the  vicissitudes 
of  life,  but  to  the  contaminations  of  sectarian  belief.  And  if  his  nat- 
ural convictions  are  too  strong  for  the  admission  of  sectarian  doc- 
trines, the  clergyman  beholds  him  as  an  outcast,  because  he  can 
not  believe  his  inconsistent  teachings.  Nay,  the  clergyman  would 
smother  what  little  hope  he  has  derived  from  Reason,  and  throw 
him  and  his  family  into  consternation  and  despair.  Being  impelled 
by  interest , the  clergyman  seeks  the  laborer,  and  endeavors  to  rescue 
his  blemished  soul  from  ultimate  destruction.  He  first  tells  the  man 
to  believe.  He  questions  the  faith  presented.  He  is  told  it  is  a sin 
to  employ  his  “ carnal  reason”  on  such  a subject.  He  inquires  what 
to  believe.  The  clergyman  presents  to  his  mind  a profound  mystery, 
not  surpassed  by  the  invention  of  the  Chaldeans  or  of  the  priests  of 
the  Juggernaut!  He  discovers  he  can  not  believe.  Then  the  cler- 
gyman’s hope  for  his  salvation  is  lost.  He  utters  a drawling  invoca- 
tion for  the  lost  scul,  and,  for  the  especial  consolation  of  himself  and 


704 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


family,  deliberately  consigns  him  to  an  inviting  gulf  of  unending 
torment ! 

Clergyman,  see  what  you  have  done,  and  behold  your  iniquity  ! 
The  man  you  have  visited  was  unsophisticated  by  the  corruptions  of 
sectarianism.  He  enjoyed  his  communions  with  Nature  ; for  in  her 
lie  saw  the  smiles  of  a divine  Creator.  But  now  he  hesitates  wheth- 
er to  return  to  his  field  of  pleasure,  or  seek  the  dens  of  iniquity  to 
smother  his  disconsolation  ! Behold,  you  have  driven  him  to  des- 
peration ! He  no  longer  loves  his  neighbor,  his  family,  or  his  na- 
tion. With  indignation  he  curses  the  earth  which  gave  him  life,  and 
the  God  who  exposed  him  to  such  fearful  destruction ! He  curses 
Nature,  man,  and  Heaven  ; for  all  appear  dark,  and  inconsistent  with 
what  you  have  called  “ divine  revelation''1  See,  then,  how  he  flies 
for  refuge  to  the  alehouse  ! And  now  his  joys  and  sorrows  are  lost 
in  a stupor,  while  his  body  is  obstructing  the  wayside  ! His  joys 
are  buried  in  intoxication.  His  despair  is  drowned  in  insensibility. 
His  physical  energies  are  lost — his  forces  are  expended.  He  has 
violated  every  law  of  his  being,  and  now,  writhing  in  pain,  he  breathes 
out  a curse  on  society,  and  dies  in  degradation  ! His  family  are  all 
infected  with  the  epidemic ; and  they,  too,  are  distributed  in  the 
asylum,  in  the  prison,  and  in  the  grave  ! 

Such  examples  have  existed  in  every  generation.  And  who  has 
caused  this  misfortune,  and  destroyed  the  natural  enjoyments  justly 
belonging  to  this  family  in  common  with  all  men  ? 

The  mechanic,  being  engaged  in  his  occupation,  can  not  devote 
his  thoughts  to  the  various  causes  existing  in  society  that  oppose  his 
happiness  and  contentment.  So  he  labors  intensely  during  the  week, 
deserts  his  business  (which  has  become  disgusting),  and  seeks  the 
sanctuary,  to  gain  if  possible  some  consolation  to  relieve  his  anxieties 
and  bless  bis  existence.  He  is  led  by  the  clergy,  and  dares  not  to 
think  or  speak  that  which  they  do  not  sanction.  The  minds  of  me- 
chanics are.  generally  enlightened  concerning  the  rudimental  princi- 
ples of  Nature  and  of  mechanism,  but  they  reason  not  concerning 
die  theology  of  their  forefathers.  They  are  submissive  to  sectarian 
restrictions,  and  are  thus  a mentally-enslaved  though  a worthy  class 
in  society. 

The  tradesman  is  obliged  to  lull  the  admonitions  of  his  conscience 
into  silence  during  the  days  of  his  business  ; for  then  he  is  compelled 
by  interest  to  invent  all  manner  of  deception  in  order  to  succeed  in 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


705 


his  occupation.  Certainly  he  violates  his  duty  by  following  his  in- 
terests. He  darkens  his  judgment  by  intensity  of  application.  He, 
however,  can  arouse  bis  slumbering  conscience  when  he  enters  the 
sanctuary,  and  drink  in  every  agreeable  expression  from  the  clergy- 
man that  would  heal  his  wounded  conscience  and  encourage  him  to 
proceed  in  his  business. 

The  tradesman  also  contributes  liberally  to  the  support  of  local 
sectarianism,  and  this  secures  him  a high  seat  in  the  synagogue  ; and 
he  is  generally  considered  as  one  of  the  “ elect."  This,  however,  is 
a matter  of  suspicion  in  his  own  mind,  and  even  the  clergyman  dares 
not  reveal  his  deepest  doubts.  The  clergyman  is  thus  obliged  to 
deceive  those  who  hear  him,  merely  that  he  may  be  sustained  in  his 
occupation.  And  so  long  as  he  can  procure  submissive  converts  to 
the  mysteries  which  he  promulgates,  he  is  pleased  ; for  this  is  one  of 
the  manifestations  the  world  requires  of  religious  purity  and  prospec- 
tive salvation. 

Men  go  to  church  with  their  interests  closed  and  their  reason  open. 
They  hear  good  and  practical  principles  taught,  and  admire  them. 
They  are  told  to  love  their  neighbor,  and  do  unto  others  as  they  de- 
sire "others  to  do  unto  them.  These  are  good  and  moral  principles, 
and  men  admire  them.  But  let  them  return  to  their  business,  and 
they  find  those  principles  impracticable  ; for  they  remember  the 
maxim  of  early  tradesmen,  that  “he  who  is  honest  can  not  succeed .” 
Hence  mechanics,  tradesmen,  and  lawyers,  admire  and  preserve  those 
moral  teachings  in  theory , but  continue  the  old  maxim  in  practice. 

Thus  clergymen  teach  that  which  is  good  occasionally,  but  not 
that  which  is  practicable.  They  tell  what  men  should  do  with  an  eye 
to  their  profession , but  are  not  willing  to  follow  their  own  advice. 
They  will  encourage  the  laborer,  but  shun  labor.  They  encourage 
ihe  mechanic,  but  have  no  sympathy  for  his  occupation.  They  ad- 
vise the  tradesman,  but  assist  not  in  reforming  his  unholy  situation. 
They  sanction  the  legal  profession,  but  are  deeply  convinced  of  the 
vitiated  practice.  They  admonish  among  themselves,  and  sometimes 
disagree,  but  they  are  careful  to  preserve  their  profession  by  strenu- 
ously opposing  the  light  of  knowledge.  They  fear  the  electric  fire 
of  intelligence,  and  shrink  from  its  penetration.  They  are  con- 
scious of  their  misty  foundation,  and  of  the  innate  barrenness  of  their 
system.  Hence  the  torch  of  wisdom  is  too  bright,  and  the  benevo- 
lence of  the  human  heart  is  too  expansive,  for  their  contracted  systems 
of  religion. 


45 


706 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


§ 10.  Clergymen  are  exceedingly  unfortunately  situated.  They 
deserve  the  sympathies  of  the  whole  world,  while  their  occupation 
should  be  changed  as  soon  as  possible.  And  their  influence  should 
be  tending  to  wisdom  rather  than  ignorance,  to  benevolence  rather 
than  restriction,  to  light  rather  than  darkness,  to  Nature  rather  than 
a book,  and  to  God  rather  than  the  devil,  who  is  at  the  present  day 
one  of  the  most  important  personages  engaged  in  sustaining  and  pro- 
tecting their  tottering  systems  against  the  invasions  of  natural  morality 
and  human  intelligence  ! 

Clergymen  have  manufactured  a theology  whose  author  is  a God 
of  inconceivable  attributes,  yet  which , are  beneath  the  natural  charac- 
teristics of  man.  The  God  whom  they  have  invented  is  only  a huge 
human  potentate,  who  is  susceptible  to  pain  and  pleasure,  to  impulse 
and  reason,  to  justice  and  injustice,  to  exclusiveness  and  benevolence. 
The  devil  whom  they  have  manufactured  is  no  less  human  except  in 
his  anatomy.  His  passions  are  as  strong  as  their  God’s  ; his  reason 
and  ingenuity  are  transcending,  and  his  influence  over  the  human 
race  is  far  more  potent.  While  the  administration  is  divided  between 
them,  the  devil's  is  the  greater  ; for  the  majority  of  mankind  are  sup- 
posed to  court  his  presence,  and  finally  to  animate  his  illumirrated 
abode  ! 

Here,  then,  are  the  creations  of  man  : a God  after  his  own  image, 
a devil  after  his  own  likeness,  a theology  after  his  own  interest,  and 
a system  of  practice  after  his  own  prejudices! 

Clergymen  feel  interested  in  the  restriction  and  suppression  of 
thought;  and  in  order  to  defend  themselves  against  it,  they  call  their 
devil  to  their  immediate  assistance.  And  by  his  influence  the  voice 
of  reason  is  hushed,  their  sanctuaries  are  filled,  their  financial  depart- 
ments are  supplied,  and  their  profession  is  thrown  into  a flourishing  con- 
dition. Can  you  not,  reader,  perceive  that  you  are  compelled  to  love 
their  God  because  you  are  frightened  by  their  devil  ? Can  you  not 
see  that  your  love  is  born  of  hate,  and  fear,  and  a mysterious  con- 
sternation ? Can  you  not  see  that  your  thoughts  are  crushed,  and 
that  the  exercise  of  your  reason  is  prohibited  because  it  is  called 
carnal  by  the  clergyman  ? Do  you  not  see  that  it  is  their  interest  that 
prompts  them  to  restrict  the  spontaneous  aspirations  of  your  bosom 
for  communion  with  Nature  and  Heaven  ? Do  you  not  see  that  the 
clergy  are  immorally  situated,  notwithstanding  they  profess  the  high- 
est morality  and  the  highest  spiritual  enlightenment? 


A VOTCE  TO  MANKIND. 


707 


Reader,  your  interest  consists  in  the  free  exercise  of  your  moral 
and  intellectual  endowments  — in  unrestricted  inquiry  and  unceasing 
intellectual  progress.  Your  happiness  consists  in  the  light,  and  uni- 
ty, and  happiness,  of  the  whole  world.  Your  interest  consists  in 
being  free  as  the  mountain-air  — in  being  as  free  to  utter  thoughts  as 
the  sun  is  to  bless  the  vegetation  of  the  earth.  Your  interests,  then, 
are  opposed  to  the  interests  of  the  clergyman ; for  he  restricts  your 
inquiries,  and  strives  to  crush  the  spontaneous  aspirations  of  your 
benevolence.  He  tells  you  you  must  believe  and  move  in  the  circle 
which  he  has  marked  out.  That  circle  is  a mere  denomination, 
characterized  by  local  hostility,  apparent  purity,  and  corrupting  pre- 
judices. He  binds  you  within  that  circle  with  the  chains  of  secta- 
rianism, which  he  locks  with  the  key  of fear,  and  attaches  to  a monu- 
ment of  imagination.  That  circle  is  walled  about  with  prejudice, 
ecclesiastical  tyranny,  oppression,  and  despotism.  Only  one  gate  is 
open  through  which  an  escape  maybe  effected,  and  there  is  stationed 

— the  devil ! He  frowns  as  you  approach,  and  you  fly  to  the  sanctuary 
and  the  shepherd  for  protection  ! Reader,  your  interests  are  with- 
out; the  clergyman' s interests  are  within.  It  is  with  you  and  your 
convictions  to  decide  whether  a sectarian  bondage  shall  oppress  the 
freeborn  mind,  or  whether  knoicledge  and  universal  happmess  shall 
bless  the  earth. 

But  there  is  one  great  consolation  for  the  enslaved  mind  who  ven- 
tures to  escape  through  the  gate  of  this  great  sectarian  wall  and  city 

— and  to  enjoy  this  consolation,  remember  that  the  chain  which  binds 
you,  with  its  lock,  is  only  fear ; the  monument  only  imagination , 
and  the  satanic  gate-keeper  only  a sectarian  phantom  ! Nothing, 
then,  prevents  your  escape.  Press  onward! — and  after  you  have 
gained  the  field  of  Nature,  raise  your  thoughts  to  Him  whose  essence 
is  love,  and  whose  wisdom  is  universal  justice,  benevolence,  and 
reciprocation  ! 

Clerical  and  sectarian  despotism  encompasses  the  inhabitants  of 
the  earth.  Like  a mantle  it  extends  over  all  nations  ; and  thus  the 
world  is  in  bondage,  not  knowing  the  kingdom  of  heaven,  which  is 
peace  on  earth  and  good-will  to  men.  Prejudices  are  so  enstamped 
upon  every  being  that  the  world  is  in  a confused  condition.  Men 
approach  each  other  only  as  their  prejudices  coalesce.  This  is  fol- 
lowing too  much  the  inclinations  of  the  body,  and  not  the  directions 
of  the  intellect. 

All  evil  sprang  from  a source  intimately  connected  with  the  influ 


70S 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


ence  of  chieftains  and  religious  potentates.  — And  these  are  still  sus- 
taining and  modifying  this  evil,  and  consolidating  it  in  different  de- 
grees in  every  portion  of  the  earth.  Men  are  self-deceived.  They 
first  admit,  through  fear,  the  teachings  of  their  chieftain,  potentate,  ot 
clergyman,  and  finally  cherish  the  faith  which  they  have  adopted  with 
great  affection,  and  are  ready  at  all  times  to  defend  it  by  bitter  anath 
emas  and  unholy"  denunciations  of  their  neighbors.  Men  are  first 
deceived,  and  then  delight,  as  it  were,  in  conscientiously  deceiving 
others.  After  they  have  admitted  a faith,  whether  congenial  with 
their  reason  or  not,  they  feel  anxious  to  sustain  what  they  have  adopt 
ed.  Hence  there  exist  in  society  religious  strife,  contention,  and 
prejudice.  Every  nation  has  all  these  combined  ; and  they  are  mani- 
fested whenever  approached  or  invaded  by  an  antagonism. 

§ 11.  Reader,  suppose  yourself  among  the  followers  of  Mohammed. 
Wander  forth  into  the  desert,  and  there  lift  your  voice  against  the 
Koran.  If  you  wish  to  see  the  sectarian  Genius,  just  utter  these 
words  : “ I disbelieve  the  Koran  and  behold  in  the  distance  a dark 
and  fearful  cloud,  from  which  is  emerging  a chariot  drawn  by  infuri- 
ated steeds,  and  in  which  is  seated  a huge,  gigantic  form,  whose 
countenance  is  as  black  as  midnight,  and  whose  garments  are  the 
wealth  of  nations.  See  ! it  approaches  with  a frightful  speed.  By 
its  side  is  seated  a darling  child  whose  name  is  Ignorance ; and  on 
the  brow  of  that  huo;e  monster  is  written  in  characters  of  fire  — 
“ Mohammedanism" ! It  rushes  by,  bearing  down  nations  in  its 
course.  War  and  persecution  are  its  attendants,  and  misery,  deso- 
lation, and  ruin,  complete  the  train  : while  over  the  whole  is  waving 
the  flag  of  fanaticism  ; and  beneath,  blood  is  as  a river  ! 

That  form  has  departed.  The  desert  is  clear,  and  you  are  de- 
serted. Reader,  meditate  upon  the  cause  of  all  this,  and  give  forth 
your  convictions  to  the  world.  Was  it  not  by  denouncing  the  Koran 
that  you  excited  the  prejudices  of  the  nation,  which  in  return  breathed 
wrath,  ruin,  and  indignation  ? And  was  not  that  prejudice  an  attri- 
bute of  the  great  Genius  of  sectarianism,  established  and  sustained  by 
a religious  chieftain  ? Did  you  not  see  how  earnestly  the  nation  en- 
gaged in  crushing  and  arresting  your  thoughts  ? And  was  not  this 
because  they  considered  you  an  enemy  to  what  they  call  truth  and 
religion  ? Think  of  these  causes,  and  let  reason  display  her  verdict 
to  the  world. 

But  you  forget,  reader,  that  you  are  a Christian , or  a resident  of 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


709 


a Christian  land,  where  the  inhabitants  are  civilized , where  the  true 
religion  exists,  where  such  fanaticism  can  not  he , and  where  such 
ruin,  dismay,  and  prejudice,  can  not  possibly  exist!  You  are  con- 
vinced of  this — and  to  demonstrate  its  truth,  go  forth  into  the  fields 
of  science  and  knowledge  spread  before  you.  Drink  in  the  streams 
of  knowledge  that  are  springing  up  about  you  in  every  direction. 
Supply  every  natural  want  — every  passion  for  which  food  is  there 
offered  ; and  now  open  your  mouth  and  utter  these  words  : “I  be- 
lieve not  the  theology  of  the  land  and  behold  in  the  distance  an 
army  of  infuriated  and  exasperated  clergymen,  armed  with  spears  of 
indignation  and  battle-axes  of — Christian  purity  ! Their  steps  are 
hurried,  their  movements  confused,  and  their  countenances  darkened 
with  fear,  while  their  mouths  proclaim,  “ Think  no  evil.”  See  how 
they  march  and  erect  a battery  of  commentaries , and  prepare  for 
battle  ! How  strange  that  every  one  is  armed  so  differently  ! Each 
one  has  his  peculiar  mode  and  plan  of  fighting,  yet  they  all  combine 
and  are  arrayed  against  you.  Behold  again  ! Just  as  they  were 
prepared  to  demolish  you  and  your  thoughts,  a disturbance  sprang 
up  in  their  midst ; and  see  what  a wretched  confusion  is  presented  ! 
Instead  of  fighting  you,  they  are  quarrelling  and  fighting  with  each 
other  ; and  what  is  stranger  than  all  is  that  their  firearms  do  not  per- 
form their  office  ! Now  they  are  again  at  peace  in  those  portions 
where  the  confusion  was  created,  and  they  are  again  prepared  to  fire 
a volley  upon  you.  Alas  for  your  reputation,  your  happiness,  your 
life  ! for  now  the  torch  is  at  the  priming.  Now  is  the  explosion  — 
and  where  are  you  ? 

You  are  now  recovered  from  your"  consternation  ; and  you  per- 
ceive that  the  whole  fire,  and  all  the  opposition,  is  only  a cloud  of 
dense  and  disgusting  smoke  ! Not  a shot  has  done  execution.  Ev- 
ery cannon  of  wrath  and  spear  of  destruction  was  pointed  at  your 
person,  reputation,  and  life ; and  is  it  not  strange  that  you  are  not 
destroyed?  Meditate. — Now  the  reason  appears  plain  : they  had 
powder,  but  no  balls  ! Your  destruction  was  doubtful  to  them,  and 
they  began  to  quarrel  among  themselves.  And  you  perceive  that 
notwithstanding  everything  was  aimed  at  your  breast,  nothing  has 
harmed  you  ; for  you  are  immortal.  Their  battery  was  destroyed  by 
its  own  explosion  ; and  what  before  was  war  and  contention,  is  now 
the  remains  of  that  old  corrupt  sectarianism,  which  you  may  deposite 
in  the  grave  of  fanaticism,  and  erect  over  it  a monument  of  ignorance 
to  be  interrogated  by  generations  yet  unborn  ! 


710 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


The  war  is  over  ; you  have  fought  the  good  fight ; you  stood  alone 
— and  are  unharmed!  And  now'  that  all  is  clear,  and  the  fields  of 
science  and  knowledge  are  blooming  before  you  with  beauty  and 
living  happiness,  you  can  repose  and  contemplate  the  strength  of 
that  power  which  preserved  you.  You  now  perceive  on  reflection 
that  you  were  clothed  with  a garment  through  which  their  spears  and 
bolts  of  sectarianism  could  notenter.  What  was  that  garment  ? — 
Reader,  with  delight  you  exclaim,  “ It  was  immortal  Truth  !” 

A religious  strife  and  party  antagonism  has  pervaded  the  earth 
ever  since  the  early  stages  of  the  human  race;  and  each  successive 
generation  has  only  modified  and  confirmed  the  previous  doctrines, 
until  at  the  present  day  there  exists  a universal  discord.  This  dis- 
cord is  owing  to  the  promulgation  of  doctrines  heretofore  conceived, 
to  the  exclusion  of  all  others,  or  of  new  truths  that  would  enlighten 
the  world.  Among  the  early  nations  a distinction  of  classes  was 
made  by  those  who  directed  their  religious  sentiments  and  governed 
their  thoughts.  These  were  chieftains,  who  were  supposed  to  exert 
a mysterious  influence  over  the  subjects  under  their  respective  do- 
minions. In  all  ages  and  countries  this  sectarian  distinction  has  been 
the  most  prominent  feature  in  society  ; and  this  is  at  the  present  day 
engendering  new  and  more  corrupting  prejudices. -t — And  all  this  is 
the  work  of  popes,  bishops,  rulers,  and  clergymen. 

Some  men  have  conceived  that  it  is  their  privilege  to  exercise 
their  reason,  and  believe  whatever  it  sanctions  : but  those  who  have 
conceived  this  truth  are  compelled  to  smother  it  for  the  want  of  an 
atmosphere  of  light  and  liberty.  Such  men  are  also  compelled  to 
arrest  their  thoughts,  and  confine  their  influence  to  a limited  circle, 
because  sectarian  hostility  and  local  prejudices  cloud  the  atmosphere 
of  free  thought,  and  render  their  existence  dark,  dreary,  and  un- 
congenial. 

There  are  nations  upon  the  earth  so  shackled  with  the  chains  of 
sectarianism  imposed  by  religious  and  despotic  governors,  that  they 
are  obliged  to  think  only  what  their  priests  permit,  and  thus  are 
slaves  to  religious  tyranny  and  fanaticism.  No  one  among  them 
dares  to  express  the  deepest  convictions  of  his  judgment;  for  before 
him  is  erected  the  fearful  prison,  the  rack,  and  the  stake,  around 
which  consuming  flames  are  created,  to  compel  submission  and  ar- 
rest the  thoughts  of  his  freeborn  mind  ! Inquisitions,  then,  are  rec- 
ognised as  a form  of  converting  souls  to  religion  and  love  to  one 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


711 


another!  It  is  known  that  in  generations  past  these  inhuman  tor- 
tures were  imposed  by  apostle-endowed  chieftains — whose  busi- 
ness it  was  to  rule  the  people  and  compel  submission,  if  not  by  en- 
slaving mandates,  then  more  effectually  by  the  rack  or  the  boiling 
caldron.  It  is  certainly  not  natural  for  the  human  mind  to  be  con- 
verted to  religion  by  lacerating  and  disorganizing  the  body  — much 
less  to  be  made  to  love  the  pope  and  his  commands  by  being  burned 
or  boiled  into  submission. 


§ 12.  The  mussulman  is  seriously  devoted  to  the  teachings  of  his 
chieftain,  and  deliberately  denounces  all  dissenters  as  infidels  and 
unconverted  beings.  He  has  a prophet  whose  life  is  clothed  with 
miracles,  whose  teachings  are  unsurpassed  for  mystery,  and  whose 
whole  career  has  never  been  equalled.  The  mussulman  can  appeal 
to  the  miraculous  power  of  Mohammed,  and  on  its  authority  he  de- 
mands conviction  and  faith  from  others.  He  tells  you  that  his  in- 
spired lawgiver  traversed  the  sun  and  its  brilliant  atmosphere  without 
casting  a shadow,  and  deliberately  separated  the  moon  with  a knife, 
and  traversed  ninety  heavens  in  one  night,  on  an  animal  that  wras  one 
half  woman  and  one  half  horse  ! The  mussulman  will  tell  you  that 
you  must  visit  Mecca  once  in  your  life,  give  one  tenth  of  all  you 
have  to  the  priest,  and  that  by  so  doing  you  will  escape  an  ocean  of 
inconceivable  flames,  by  passing  over  an  enormous  bridge,  whose 
immensity  almost  exceeds  that  of  one  human  hair!  — and  that  thus 
you  will  finally  dvrell  in  heaven  for  ever,  where  all  good  mussulmcn 
will  preserve  an  eternal  youth  ! No  miracles  can  be  more  inexpli- 
cable than  these  ; none  more  inconsistent  with  the  laws  of  Nature ; 
and,  reader,  you  do  not  believe  them  : for  they  are  written  in  the 
Koran  by  Mohammed,  and  in  the  productions  of  his  followers  ! 

But  remember  you  have  also  a book  that  proclaims  mysteries 
almost  as  inconsistent,  and  them  you  believe!  Reflect  one  moment, 
and  you  will  discover  that  the  mussulman  disbelieves  the  claims  of 
your  religion,  and  its  miracles,  because  it  is  written  in  the  Bible , and 
that  by  authors  unknown.  The  mussulman  calls  you  an  “ infidel 
dog"  with  great  self-complacency,  and  with  a serious  approbation  ot 
conscience  ; while  you  reciprocate  the  favor  by  calling  him  an  igno- 
rant Arab , having  no  hope  or  light  in  the  world! 

But  the  convictions  of  the  Mohammedan,  the  Chaldean,  the  Per- 
sian, and  the  Christian,  are  all  derived  only  from  hereditary  impres- 
sions, and  from  circumstances  not  worthy  of  distinct  veneration,  or  of 


712 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


exclusive  sectarian  faith.  All  are  seriously  convinced,  and  all  are  as 
seriously  deceived. 

War,  and  bloodshed,  and  cruelty,  and  persecution,  are  all  the 
legitimate  effects  of  sectarian  usurpation  and  priestly  government. 
Clergymen  are  indeed  most  unrighteously  situated.  Their  influence 
is  corrupting  to  the  morals  established  immutably  in  Nature,  and  the 
distributive  benevolence  contained  in  the  constitution  of  Nature’s 
God.  Men  who  are  laboring  to  reform  the  race  by  destroying  all 
sectarian  distinction,  are  sanctimoniously  opposed  by  the  theological 
shepherds  of  the  land,  who  profess  to  be  teachers  of  the  highest  mo- 
rality, and  advocates  of  the  most  universal  reformation.  Let  one 
free  mind  express  his  convictions,  and  the  clergy  of  the  land  piously 
denounce  him  as  an  “infidel  dog,”  the  same  as  the  mussulman  would 
denounce  the  clergy.  Inconsistent  indeed  are  the  social  and  general 
conflicts  arising  from  sectarianism,  with  the  teachings  of  Nature  and 
her  divine  requirements.  For  the  clergy  teach  that  exclusiveness 
whereby  sectarianism  is  preserved,  and  religious  hostility  is  engen- 
dered, whose  fruits  are  local  disunity  and  social  confusion.  Even 
domestic  happiness  is  turned  to  misery,  and  the  affections  of  parents 
and  children,  and  brothers  and  sisters,  are  all  crushed  and  disunited. 
They  no  longer  love  each  other,  for  the  clergy  have  made  them 
bigots  ! 

Reader,  have  you  a companion  ? If  so,  when  the  day  arrives  to 
visit  the  sanctuary,  do  you  not,  after  having  enjoyed  years  of  social 
bliss  and  domestic  happiness,  walk  side  by  side  from  your  dwelling, 
and  separate  on  the  corner  of  some  highway,  and  go  to  different  tem- 
ples of  worship  ? Are  you  not  united  at  your  peaceful  homes,  and 
in  everything  but  the  religious  impressions  of  your  youth,  and  their 
confirmations  to  your  minds  ? Do  you  not  separate  and  seek  dif- 
ferent modes  and  sanctuaries  of  worship  ? At  the  same  time,  do  you 
not  withdraw  friendship  and  affection  from  each  other,  and  are  you 
not  in  your  spiritual  predilections  disunited  by  a wall  of  partition 
built  by  the  sectarianism  of  the  land  ? And  was  not  that  wall  estab- 
lished by  the  clerical  profession  ? And  have  they  not  told  you  that 
you  should  forsake  each  other,  your  homes,  your  country,  your  com- 
panions and  children,  for  the  sake  of  a more  strict  devotion  to  what 
they  teach  you  to  consider  as  a holy  and  righteous  life  ? 

Families  should  be  as  one  in  their  search  after  truth,  and  their 
obedience  to  the  morality  of  Nature;  but  instead  of  this,  families  are 
fearing  to  approach  each  other,  because  of  their  religious  convictions  ! 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


713 


The  son,  surrounded  by  different  circumstances  from  those  surround- 
ing the  father,  is  impressed  with  a different  religious  doctrine,  and 
therefore  a dread  of  the  presence  of  -each  other  is  created  between 
them  ; and  they  are  no  longer  congenial  or  affectionate.  The  mother, 
too,  is  opposed  to  the  father,  and  the  daughters  are  in  like  manner 
thrown  into  confusion,  and  no  longer  love  each  other  with  the  same 
strength  of  affection  that  previously  bound  them  in  peace  together. 

Society  is  thus  disorganized,  both  in  its  general  and  particular  de- 
partments. The  corrupting  influence  of  clergymen  extends  to  fami- 
lies, to  all  the  professions  of  the  day,  and  to  all  the  governments  ; 
and  consequently  the  whole  race  is  as  a flock  of  sheep  whose  direc- 
tion is  undefined  and  whose  relations  are  no  longer  congenial.  This 
condition  of  society  will  exist  so  long  as  the  clergyman’s  interest 
consists  in  the  prevalence  of  ignorance  on  psychological  subjects, 
and  the  general  testimonies  of  Nature.  Their  interests  must  be 
changed  so  as  to  be  in  favor  of  knowledge  and  intellectual  progres- 
sion. Their  influence  will  then  be  elevating,  and  their  position  in  soci- 
ety will  be  both  useful  and  industrial.  They  must  be  made  to  feel  the 
importance  of  unrestricted  inquiry  into  the  causes  of  evil , and  of  a 
general  investigation  of  all  principles  that  govern  Nature  and  man 
with  an  unerring  government.  They  must  understand  and  cherish 
those  principles,  and  apply  their  teachings  to  the  necessities  of  soci- 
ety— and  thereby  establish  a morality  that  is  as  indestructible  as  the 
laws  that  govern  the  Universe.  Thus  they  will  improve  the  race  ; 
and  this  will  bring  happiness  and  peace. 

§ 13.  What  is  the  cause  of  the  ignorance  that  shrouds  the  world  ? 
— the  barbarous  despotism  that  exists  among  the  nations?  — the  war, 
bloodshed,  persecutions,  and  intolerance,  that  have  existed  in  every 
empire  and  portion  of  the  earth?  For  what  purpose  was  the  dun- 
geon established,  the  rack  constructed,  and  the  stake  and  flame  in- 
vented ? What  is  the  cause  of  the  religious  wars,  and  tumults,  and 
contentions,  that  have  so  sorely  afflicted  the  nations  in  every  age  and 
generation  ? What  is  the  cause  of  cities,  once  well  constructed  and 
beautiful,  and  displaying  all  the  splendor  and  wealth  of  the  land,  now 
lying  in  desolation  ? Why  is  it  that  where  once  throbbed  the  cheer- 
ful heart,  and  where  was  heard  the  sweet  voice  of  affection  and  friend- 
ship, are  now  heard  only  the  hideous  yells  of  the  beasts  of  the  forest? 
Why  is  it  that  where  all  was  once  beauty,  opulence,  and  splendor, 
is  now  a mass  of  ruins,  inhabited  only  by  the  reptile  and  other  forms 


714 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


that  disgust  the  human  eye?  What  is  the  cause  of  vast  empires, 
after  being  established  and  living  in  abundance  for  a while,  sinking 
to  be  known  no  more  except  as  the  cold  steel  of  the  long-forgotten 
warrior,  or  the  spear  of  some  infuriated  potentate  is  exhumed  from 
among  the  ruins?  What  is  the  cause  of  the  expedition  of  the  Israel- 
ites, and  of  the  laws  given  by  Moses  in  the  mount?  — of  the  unalter- 
able laws  of  the  Medes  and  Persians?  — of  the  worship  of  the  sun 
and  of  the  Juggernaut  ? — of  the  origin  of  Catholicism  and  of  Protest- 
antism, which  at  the  present  day  are  exercising  their  omnipotency 
over  the  societies  and  nations  under  their  respective  influences  ? 
What  is  the  cause  of  all  this  dissimilarity,  this  confusion,  war,  perse- 
cution, fanaticism,  and  religious  intolerance?  What  is  the  cause  of 
even  families  separating,  and  their  members  despising  each  other? 
What  is  the  cause  of  poverty,  of  vice,  and  of  all  infractions  upon  the 
physical  and  moral  laws  of  human  nature?  What  is  the  cause  of 
aristocracy,  and  pride,  and  arrogance?  What  is  the  cause  of  the 
fiendish  exultations  of  one  man  or  one  sect  over  the  destruction  or 
unsuccess  of  another?  What  is  the  cause  of  your  prejudices,  and 
why  do  you  tremble  and  shrink  from  investigation  ? Reader, 
speak  and  proclaim  the  causes  of  these.  Fear  the  frown  of  no 
legal  practitioner.  Smile  at  the  stake  and  flame.  Face  the  rack 
unmoved  : fear  not  the  rod  of  persecution,  for  truth  and  purity  will 
protect  you.  Speak  boldly  and  fearlessly  your  earnest  and  serious 
convictions  : and  Nature  will  smile  upon  you  with  her  divine  appro- 
bations ; the  angels  will  rejoice,  and  the  Divine  Mind  will  bless  your 
mind  with  celestial  knowledge.  Fear  no  clerical  practitioner  (for 
they,  like  the  physician  and  lawyer,  have  various  modes  of  practising), 
for  although  he  may  be  well  versed  in  the  learning  of  his  profession, 
he  can  not  quell  the  testimonies  of  a divine  Nature,  or  the  corre- 
sponding convictions  of  a noble  mind  ! 

The  clergyman  may  become  more  devoted  to  his  denomination, 
and  assume  a more  sanctimonious  countenance,  but,  reader,  remem- 
ber that  the  external  is  not  the  reality,  and  that  the  inside  of  the 
platter  may  be  full  of  extortion  and  excess  ! New  councils  may  be 
organized,  and  new  conventions  called.  Fearful  resolutions  may  be 
passed,  and  solemn  prayers  maybe  offered  for  yourdestruction,  and  also 
your  salvation.  But  remember  those  prayers  are  sometimes  the  spon- 
taneous desires  of  misdirected  passion.  — And,  moreover,  remember 
that  homage  is  done  to  the  Divine  Mind,  not  in  prayer  and  unmean- 
ing supplication,  but  in  harmonious  industry  and  universal  action. 


A VOTCE  TO  MANKIND. 


715 


Theory  may  be  the  profession  of  some,  but  practice  must  be  the 
manifestation  of  all.  Search  well,  therefore,  into  the  causes  of  these 
evils ; and  after  the  investigation  is  completed,  ask  those  religious  teach- 
ers who  piously  oppose  you,  whether  sectarian  despotism  and  preju- 
dice have  not  shrouded  the  race  as  a “ veil  of  covering  cast  over  all 
nations”  ? And  then  tell  him  that  that  covering  is  now  removed , and 
that  you  see  the  corruptions  of  the  whole  world.  Know  no  fear  — no 
doubt;  hut  press  onward  and  search  the  field  of  science  and  the  un- 
erring hook  of  Nature.  And  let  this  one  thing  be  your  consolation 
and  your  hope  — that  the  tide  of  intelligence  is  rising,  and  is  flowing 
to  and  over  all  nations,  even  as  an  immense  ocean  of  truth  and 
knowledge.  It  will  flow  on  to  its  destined  universality  ; and  remem- 
ber  IT  EBBS  NOT  AGAIN  ! 

The  lines  of  sectarian  distinction  are  so  visibly  drawn  in  families, 
societies,  states,  and  nations,  that  the  whole  world  can  not  fail  to  per- 
ceive them,  and  freely  admit  their  deleterious  and  corroding  influence 
upon  true  and  divine  morality.  Nation  wars  with  nation  ; and  one 
subdues  the  other  and  confiscates  its  most  precious  wealth,  such  as 
gives  to  nations  honor,  and  to  their  cities  elegance  and  beauty.  And 
the  destruction  by  one  nation  of  the  wealth  and  existence  of  another, 
is  from  the  impulse  of  local  prejudice  and  religious  usurpation.  So 
likewise  is  society  divided  into  castes,  groups,  exclusive  sects,  de- 
nominations, and  institutions,  all  of  which  inculcate  different  princi- 
ples of  frith  and  morality.  The  influence  of  these  extends  also  into 
the  boso^ii  of  families  and  divides  their  members  one  from  another. 

All  of  these  national  wars  have  sprung  legitimately  from  local  im- 
pressions disseminated  by  the  clerical  profession.  These  various 
sects  and  institutions  in  society  are  also  living  offspring  of  the  same 
parent ; for  each  one  of  them  is  an  open  expression  of  sectarian 
affection,  and  love  of  party  distinction  and  aristocracy. 

Ask  the  poor  man  whether  the  sympathies  of  the  higher  classes 
are  extended  to  him  in  his  inferior  condition  ? Ask  the  traveller  who 
has  deserted  friends  and  home,  whether  he  meets  with  sympathy  in 
society,  or  finds  a general  willingness  to  supply  his  wants?  And 
ask  the  mechanic,  also,  whether  he  can  move  in  the  higher  circles, 
or  whether  they  descend  to  and  favor  him  with  their  smiles  and  ap- 
probation ? — or  whether  he  is  not  rather  shunned  and  unnoticed  by 
him  who  has  his  footmen  in  livery,  and  whose  coffers  are  filled  with 
the  products  of  the  laborer’s  and  mechanic’s  industry  ? In  the  pres- 
ent order  of  things,  one  man  desires  to  gain,  if  possible,  the  ascen- 


716 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


dency  over  Ins  neighbor.  He  desires  to  display  more  dignity,  and 
to  accumulate  more  wealth,  so  that  he,  thus  defended  against  poverty, 
may  look  down  upon  him  who  labors  with  a species  of  triumph  and 
exultation  not  worthy  of  an  existence  in  the  human  breast. 

§ 14.  In  every  nation,  there  exists  to  some  degree  the  same  ex- 
clusiveness and  the  same  depression  and  bondage.  This  exclusive, 
sectarian,  and  prejudicial  feeling,  is  created  by  the  clerical  practition- 
ers; for  they  preach  the  doctrines  of  partiality  even  in  the  nature  of 
the  Divine  Mind.  They,  with  an  audacity  unparalleled,  call  a class 
of  their  brethren  “ sinners ,”  while  those  under  their  immediate  influ- 
ence are  esteemed  as  “ the  righteous ,”  or  “ lltc  elect."  They  have 
established  two  distinct  classes  in  society,  which  they  call  “ good" 
and  ‘•evil."  Those  who  are  good  (in  their  sij$t)  are  admonished 
to  spurn  the  evil  and  degraded,  and  to  leave  them  to  their  sinks  of 
desolation.  Thus  he  who  is  called  evil  becomes  exasperated,  and, 
for  the  sake  of  retaliation,  seeks  an  unrestrained  indulgence  in  his 
own  animal  inclinations.  Thus  a distinction  is  created  by  the  clergy, 
the  influence  of  which  fills  the  prison,  and  gives  employment  to  the 
legal  profession  and  to  the  hangman  ! It  also  establishes  prostitu- 
tion, fills  the  almshouse  and  the  asylum,  casts  the  poor  upon  society 
uncared  for,  causes  them  to  forsake  their  home  and  friends,  and  go 
down  to  the  grave  through  the  paths  of  misery,  despair,  and  intoxi- 
cation ! 

Clergymen  create  this  distinction.  They  draw  a line  between 
good  and  evil,  and,  with  an  apostolic  license,  consign  one  class  to 
the  regions  of  darkness,  wretchedness,  and  pain,  while  the  other  is 
elevated  to  the  highest  seat  in  the  celestial  heaven,  to  have  their  en- 
joyments enhanced  by  contemplating  the  miseries  of  damned  souls  ! 
So  long  as  there  exists  a sectarian  distinction  between  good  and  evil, 
so  long  will  war,  persecution,  ignorance,  vice,  misery,  and  degrada- 
tion, exist.  Meanwhile  there  will  be  the  self-righteous,  the  self-sanc- 
tified, the  “ born  again,”  and  the  religious  hypocrite,  whose  imper- 
fections will  be  obscured  from  the  gaze  of  natural  eyes  by  a cloak  of 
gorgeous  wealth  and  pretended  piety.  So  long  as  sectarian  interpre- 
tations are  confided  in,  so  long  will  governments  continue  to  be  ex- 
clusive in  their  enactments  and  privileges.  And  with  them  the  church 
will  coalesce,  and  thus  confirm  a most  unrighteous  despotism  which 
will  enslave  and  corrupt  the  morals  of  society,  and  misery  will  ev- 
erywhere raise  her  hideous  head,  weeping  in  anguish  unutterable  ! 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


717 


Party  prejudice  and  isolated  denominations  will  remain  and  en- 
slave society  so  long  as  the  clergyman’s  interest  tells  him  to  preserve 
ignorance  and  repress  the  light  of  knowledge.  A latent  cupidity  is 
generated  by  their  profession,  which  penetrates  through  all  the  reces- 
ses of  society  and  pervades  the  whole  nation.  Nay,  it  is  self  and 
universally  deceptive.  — And  this,  too,  is  the  offspring  of  clerical 
policy,  and  the  first-born  of  Ignorance  and  Hypocrisy. 

Most  deplorable  is  the  state  of  society  all  over  the  world  ! Ev- 
ery home  is  desolate  of  that  pure  morality  which  recognises  all  as 
brethren,  and  barren  of  those,  elevating  principles  which  are  taught 
by  Nature  as  the  lav/s  of  God.  Every  denomination  “knows”  that  its 
own  doctrines  are  right,  and  each  one  is  earnestly  engaged  in  denoun- 
cing and  exposing  others  ; and  thus  strife  and  sectarian  warfare  are 
perpetuated.  And  who  are  the  champions  of  the  battle  ? Are  they 
not  the  theological  gladiators,  who  exert  an  influence  on  your  minds 
and  affections  while  claiming  to  be  teachers  of  peace  and  divine  pu- 
rify? ■ Are  these  not  the  shepherds  of  the  land,  whose  flocks  are 
the  societies  over  which  they  preside  ? But  alas  ! the  flock  is  sheared 
of  their  wealth  and  the  fruits  of  their  industry,  and  that,  too,  to  sup- 
port an  army  of  useless  and  injurious  persons  in  splendor  and  ele- 
gance. For  such  men  are  useless  in  their  present  occupation  — even 
injurious  to  the  peace  and  health  of  community.  How  much  there- 
fore do  they  need  the  sympathies  of  the  world,  who  at  the  same  time 
should  strive  to  change  their  situations  and  render  them  useful  to  the 
human  race  ! 

So  long  as  clergymen  preach  distinction,  so  long  will  vice  exist ; 
and  so  long  as  they  array  the  mind  of  the  community  against  the 
free  exercise  of  the  mental  faculties,  so  long  will  prejudice  remain, 
and  mankind  will  continue  to  despise  and  abhor  each  other.  So 
long  as  men  presume  to  say,  “ I am  holier  than  thou,”  so  long  will 
bigotry  and  fanaticism  continue  to  destroy  the  happiness  of  mankind. 
So  long  as  clergymen  continue  to  say,  with  their  usual  application 
of  the  language,  “ The  good  shall  be  on  the  right,  and  the  evil  upon 
the  left,”  so  long  will  a corruption  continue  to  prevail  in  society,  and 
so  long  will  local  hostility  clothe  the  beauties  of  Nature  with  blood 
and  carnage.  So  long  as  men  preach  truths  and  not  practise  or  as- 
sist others  to  practise  them,  so  long  will  there  exist  a degeneracy  in 
the  moral  condition  of  the  race  which  all  preachers  and  systems  can 
not  regenerate  and  make  perfect. 

As  society  is  existing,  it  is  impossible  for  a man  duly  to  love  his 


71S 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


neighbor,  or  to  feel  an  interest  in  the  universal  elevation  of  the  race. 
Nor  can  one  do  unto  others  as  he  would  have  others  do  unto  him  ; 
for  every  law  and  sectarian  doctrine  opposes,  and  therefore  the  inter- 
est of  every  man  is  in  direct  opposition  to  such  a manifestation  of 
benevolence.  Men  may  preach  to  the  race  and  exhort  them  all  to 
be  happy,  while  they  do  nothing  to  accomplish  this  end,  and  while 
it  is  plain  that  every  circumstance  opposes  such  a universal  peace. 
But  as  well  might  the  clergy  preach  to  the  great  river  with  the  inten- 
tion of  arresting  its  tide  or  changing  its  course  — or  to  the  vegetation 
of  the  earth,  that  it  may  come  forth  in  all  seasons  and  under  all  cir- 
cumstances alike  — or  tell  the  black  man  that  it  is  with  him  to  say 
whether  his  color  shall  remain  as  it  is,  or  whether  he  shall  become 
white  — or  tell  the  poor  man  that  he  may  be  wealthy  at  pleasure  — 
or  the  rich  man  that  he  may  be  good  or  evil  at  will.  In  all  of  these 
teachings  the  clergyman  would  fail  to  accomplish  the  thing  for  which 
he  labored.  For  it  is  impossible  for  men  to  be  moral  and  good  when 
all  influences  are  corrupting  and  vitiating  — or  for  men  to  be  evil 
when  all  influences  are  elevating  and  purifying.  Nay,  clergymen 
should  learn  this  truth  : that  mankind  can  not  be  what  they  would  at 
pleasure,  in  any  possible  particular ; for  they  are  existing  from  birth 
to  the  grave  amid  uncontrollable  circumstances,  such  as  are  being 
created  by  every  profession,  every  government,  and  every  hereditary 
impression  upon  the  physical  and  mental  constitution  of  man.  More- 
over, clergymen  must  learn  that  these  circumstances,  which  govern 
the  world,  are  the  creations  of  man,  and  that  he  possesses  power  to 
seal  their  everlasting  destruction,  and  to  create  superior  ones  in  their 
stead,  to  bless  his  existence.  Therefore  it  is  more  than  folly  to  pro- 
claim that  which  is  absolutely  impracticable,  from  the  pulpit  to  a race 
misled  by  the  circumstances  of  their  own  creation.  Men  should  not 
cherish  prejudices  against  each  other,  so  long  as  the  sun  shines  to 
bless  the  earth  and  all  men,  and  while  the  laws  of  Nature  are  un- 
changeable and  ever  impartial  in  their  displays. 

§ 15.  One  portion  of  the  earth  is  called  a “ Christian  land.”  It 
is  thought  to  be  blessed  with  celestial  truths  that  no  other  country 
enjoys  ; and  this  is  the  constant  saying  of  those  who  are  most  en- 
gaged in  the  promulgation  of  sectarian  doctrines.  But,  reader,  in 
this  “ Christian  land”  exists  error  consolidated  and  sublimated  ; and 
there  is  also  inherent  hostility  that  would  burst  out  and  flow  over  the 
nation  were  it  not  for  the  freedom  guarantied  to  the  public  mind,  and 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


719 


the  political  privilege  of  unrestricted  thought.  These  considerations 
are  startling,  but  they  are  true,  and  are  evidently  demonstrated  in 
every  department  of  society  in  that  civilized  land. 

A more  conspicuous  manifestation  of  intolerance  is  yet  to  come  : 
for  behold  yon  chapel,  and  enter  it,  and  listen  to  what  is  said.  Ev- 
ery seat  is  filled,  and  all  look  to  the  pulpit  with  emotions  of  awe  and 
fear!  All  are  silent,  and  each  one  is  seemingly  in  deep  meditation. 
Just  now  one  arises  and  remarks  to  the  audience  as  follows  : — 

“ Perhaps  many  of  you  have  heard  of  the  audacity  and  boasting 
presumption  of  one  in  our  community  who  has  professed  to  work 
miracles,  and  to  reveal  truths  which  we  know  are  false  and  damn- 
ing,” &c. 

Reader,  this  man  is  followed  by  another  man  by  his  side,  whose 
looks  indicate  age,  and  countenance  erudition.  His  deportment 
reveals  his  superficial  enlightenment,  and  his  general  appearance 
bespeaks  devotion  and  seriousness.  He  now  addresses  the  audi- 
ence, saying  : — 

“ Many  of  you,  my  beloved,  have  read  and  heard  it  said,  that  in 
the  last  days  false  prophets  will  arise  ; that  they  will  be  as  wolves  in 
sheep’s  clothing,  professing  to  do  many  marvellous  things,  thereby 
endeavoring  to  corrupt  the  people  of  God.  Lately  such  a one  has 
appeared.  He  is  sowing  the  seeds  of  disunity,  corruption,  and  infi- 
delity, in  the  world;  and  it  becomes  us  as  Christians  and  righteous 
men  to  spurn  this  teacher,  and  reject  all  disseminators  of  his  errors, 
from  our  tables  of  communion  and  from  a seat  in  our  sanctuary. 
For,  my  beloved,  it  is  written  that  ‘false  Christs  and  false  prophets 
shall  arise  and  show  great  signs  and  miracles,  insomuch  that,  if  it 
were  possible,  they  shall  deceive  the  very  elect.’  My  beloved  fiends, 
how  strikingly  the  prophecy  is  fulfilled  even  at  this  day,  among  us  ! 
Let  us  strenuously  oppose  the  invasions  of  all  such  anti-Christian 
principles,  by  meeting  frequently,  and  invoking  the  strength  of  our 
God,  who  will  visit  such  deceivers  with  a consuming  vengeance! 
And  let  us  repulse  this  man’s  sayings  from  our  families,  lest  they 
pollute  the  rising  generation,  and  thus  damn  their  souls  for  ever.” 

Rea'der,  this  speaker  has  concluded,  and  is  again  seated.  — And 
now  do  you  see  the  audience  delighting  and  exulting  among  them- 
selves that  they  have  overcome  the  spirit  of  the  evil  one  ? See  with 
what  an  air  of  circumspection  they  arise  and  depart.  They  approach 
their  homes  and  retire,  each  having  a misty  impression  upon  his 
mind,  the  cause  of  which  he  perceives  not,  and  is  thus  deceived.  Be- 


720 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


lieving  that  their  devotion  to  the  teachings  of  their  clergyman  is  pu- 
rity and  safety  of  soul,  and  believing  that  what  they  have  heard  is  all 
truth,  they  are  hence  afraid  to  see  what  their  clergyman  denounces 
as  error. 

Such  are  and  will  be  the  manifestations  of  clerical  influence  in 
this  “ Christian  land.”  Certainly  if  it  were  not  distinguished  by  the 
term  “Christian,”  no  one  would  suspect  it  of  Christianity.  So  in- 
deed it  is  with  those  who  are  converted  to  any  sectarian  faith.  They 
call  themselves  “ righteous;”  and  were  it  not  for  this  expression, 
their  nearest  neighbors  would  have  no  knowledge  of  their  righteous- 
ness. In  almost  every  instance,  the  most  safely-converted  are  obliged 
to  tell  the  fact  before  a person  in  community  is  aware  of  it.  Is  it 
not  strange  that  men  are  “ born  again”  so  mysteriously,  and  yet  theii 
friends  discover  no  visible  change  in  their  deportment? 

Then  what  are'  men  converted  to  ? It  is  to  sectarian  prejudices  ; 
to  a mysterious  faith  ; to  an  undefinable  impression,  and  to  an  open 
enmity  to  their  unconverted  brother  without  the  denomination  of 
which  they  are  members.  They  are  converts  to  sectarianism , then, 
and  not  to  divine  morality;  converts  to  prejudice,  and  not  to  the  free 
and  unrestrained  exercise  of  the  spiritual  faculties  ; converts  to  exclu- 
siveness, and  not  to  universal  benevolence  ; converts  to  a mysterious 
faith,  and  not  to  the  open  revealments  of  Nature,  which  is  an  ex- 
pressed thought  of  the  Deity  ! 

Men  are  thus  self-deceived,  and  they  are  constantly  suspecting 
others  of  practising  deception.  They  perceive  that  they  are  con- 
stantly being  deceived  themselves,  and  hence  are  compelled  to  de- 
ceive others.  Such  rpen  often  become  misanthropists,  and  ultimately 
forsake  society,  because  they  are  suspicious  of  its  purity  and  disgusted 
with  its  conflicting  elements. 

Clergymen,  what  are  the  causes  engaged  in  producing  and  per- 
petuating these  things?  What  are  the  causes' of  “ evangelical”  dis- 
tinctions, and  the  belief  that  one  is  evil  and  the  other  is  good  ? 
What  are  the  causes  of  these  disunities  in  society?  What  were  the 
causes  of  the  crucifixion,  the  inquisition,  the  crusades,  and  of  the 
martyrdom  of  good  and  enlightened  men?  What  were  the  causes 
of  the  massacre  of  St.  Bartholomew  ? What  are  the  causes  of  war, 
devastation,  and  national  poverty  ? Why  do  men  in  each  nation 
love  their  own  local  associations  and  despise  all  others  ? Why  are 
vice  and  misery  existing?  — and  why  are  ignorance,  prejudice,  and 
restriction  of  thought?  Why  are  you,  clergymen,  fearing  that  the 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND, 


721 


“ carnal  reason”  will  discover  too  much  truth?  Why  do  you  ad- 
monish your  hearers  not  to  think  or  read  much  on  subjects  of  a high 
and  elevating  character  ? 

Clergymen,  consider  these  interrogatories  ? Remember  the  world 
requires  a full  and  candid  decision;  and  remember,  too,  that  lan- 
guage is  inadequate  to  express  the  importance  of  these  questions,  and 
their  answers.  If  you  do  not  candidly  decide  for  the  world,  the 
world  will  for  you  ere  long ; and  then  your  situations  will  be  changed  : 
your  influence  will  be  arrested,  and  your  personal  existences  made 
useful.  And  then  if  you  will  not  cheerfully  consent  to  be  happy, 
you  will  be  compelled  to  breathe  happiness,  by  your  unceasing  in- 
dustry, to  the  inhabitants  of  the  whole  earth. 

§ 1G.  " What!”  you  exclaim,  “ would  you  have  us  abandon  our 
spiritual  efforts  to  elevate  the  degraded,  and  to  reform  a sinful  race  ? 
Would  you  have  us  withdraw  our  sympathies  from  this  great  work 
of  spiritual  reformation,  and  desert  the  requirements  of  men,  that  they 
may  become  more  evil  and  contaminated  ? Would  you  have  us 
desert  our  sanctuaries  and  temples  of  holy  worship,  consecrated  to 
God  and  his  divine  revelation,  and  open  the  floodgates  of  infidelity, 
that  this  may  drown  the  religious  world  and  desolate  the  earth  ? 
Would  you  have  us  sanction  unrestricted  investigation  concerning 
that  of  which  men  are  igiiorant  — the  effect  of  which  would  be  uni- 
versal presumption  and  blasphemy?  Would  you  have  us  arrest  our 
benign  labors  in  the  great  spiritual  vineyard,  and  leave  all  the  vines, 
and  flowers,  and  shrubbery,  to  wither  and  decay  ? Have  we  not 
visited  the  widows  and  fatherless  in  their  afflictions,  shed  tears  over 
and  prayed  for  them,  invoking  the  blessings  of  our  Father  to  rest 
upon  them  and  bless  their  existence  ? Have  we  not  mourned  for 
the  condition  of  the  poor  and  necessitated  ? Have  we  not  encour- 
aged them  by  offering  the  balm  of  Gilead  to  their  wounded  and 
lacerated  bosoms?  Have  we  not  proclaimed  from  our  pulpits  — 
‘Blessed  are  they  that  mourn,  for  they  shall  be  comforted  : blessed 
are  the  peace-makers,  for  they  shall  see  God’  ? Have  we  not  offered 
hope,  and  rest,  and  consolation,  to  the  barren  bosom  ? Have  we 
not  unfolded  the  blessings  of  heavenly  bliss,  and  specifically  pointed 
out  the  strait  and  narrow  way  that  leads  unto  eternal  life  ? Behold 
these  things,”  you  again  exclaim,  and  ask,  “Are  we  not  most  impi- 
ously misrepresented  ? For  our  labors  have  been  unceasing;  we 
have  suffered  deprivations  and  perils  by  sea  and  land.  We  have 

46 


722 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


deserted  our  friends  and  homes,  and  travelled  as  missionaries  to  for 
eign  lands,  to  instruct  and  inform  the  poor  heathen  of  his  imminent 
danger,  and  of  the  means  to  escape  it?  We  have  made  an  estimate 
of  the  saved  and  lost  souls  among  them.  We  have  come  to  the 
conclusion  that  fifty  thousand  are  sinking  to  hell  every  day  ! This 
mathematical  calculation  vve  have  presented  to  an  enlightened  and 
Christianized  world,  and  called  upon  them  to  bestow  means  for  our 
support,  that  we  may  labor  for  these  poor,  ignorant,  and  abandoned 
souls.  We  have  missionaries  distributed  in  every  portion  of  the 
earth,  seriously  and  incessantly  devoted  to  their  appointed  labors. 
They  suffer  cruelties  and  persecutions  of  the  most  inexpressible 
character.  They  forego  all  pleasure  and  experience  all  pain,  that 
they  may  accomplish  the  great  work  of  spiritual  reformation.”  With 
surprise  you  again  exclaim,  “Would  you  have  us  withdraw  our 
sympathies  from  the  heathen,  and  leave  them  to  irretrievable  de- 
struction ?” 

Then,  again,  you  say,  “You  misunderstand  our  holy  religion,  and 
call  it  ‘ manufactured ,’  while  we  know  it  is  an  express  revelation  from 
God  to  man.  The  effects  of  our  holy  religion  (as  you  informed  your 
readers)  are  evidently  righteous,  from  the  great  dissimilarity  between 
the  heathen  and  Christian  nations.  The  Hindoos  are  exceedingly 
ignorant.  They  have  long  pilgrimages  ; they  expose  themselves  to 
imminent  danger — prostrate  themselves  in  the  sand,  and  let  men 
and  horses  walk  over  them  ; they  crawl  upon  their  hands  and  knees, 
and  draw  themselves,  with  the  most  idolatrous  veneration,  toward  the 
temple  of  Juggernaut.  The  ponderous  car  of  their  heathen  god  rolls 
over  and  crushes  their  bodies.  They  undergo  all  this  with  a confi- 
dence in,  and  devotion  to,  their  religion,  unparalleled  by  any  nation 
upon  the  earth.  And  when  a loved  husband  dies,  an  altar  is  erected, 
on  which  he  is  placed,  and  the  widow  is  obliged  to  accompany  the 
dead  body  as  a sacrifice  on  the  burning  pile.  The  babes  are  placed 
with  their  parents  ; the  torch  is  applied,  and  the  consuming  flame 
destroys  the  living  with  the  dead  ! — And  all  this  because  they  have 
not  the  Christian  religion!  Then,”  you  say  again,  “reflect  — for 
the  whole  heathen  world  are  like  these  in  their  sensuous  devotion  to 
a polluted  and  unmeaning  system  of  idolatry.” 

You  also  refer  to  the  heathen  philosophers,  and  point  out  their  in- 
famous iniquities.  You  represent  that  their  morals  were  debasing 
to  the  lowest  degree  ; that  all  principles  of  virtue  were  crushed  ; that 
all  privileges  enjoyed  by  the  female  sex  were  restricted  ; that  their 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


723 


chastity  was  polluted,  and  their  existence  rendered  miserable.  You 
say  that  no  teacher  ever  lived  who  promulgated  the  same  morality,1 
virtue,  and  high  principles  of  celestial  purity,  as  those  who  penned 
the  book  whose  truths  you  proclaim  from  your  pulpits  and  in  .your* 
sanctuaries  of  divine  worship  and  moral  instruction. 

Again,  you  say,  “ Our  labors  are  misinterpreted,  and  our  high 
calling  improperly  spoken  of:  for  behold  .what  our  religion  has 
done  ! On  emerging  from  the  heathen  into  the  Christian  world,  we 
perceive  wealth,  wisdom,  and  happiness,  distributed  in  every  direc- 
tion. Well-constructed  and  opulent  cities,  governed  by  our  princi-" 
pies  of  morality,  are  visible,  and  happy  villages  are  blessing  the  land, 
whose  lofty  spires  bespeak  Christian  purity  and  a righteous  nation. 
Every  art  is  cultivated;  every  privilege  is  granted  tending  to  advance 
the  agriculturist  in  his  pursuits  ; every  facility  is  offered  for  establish- 
ing and  perfecting  navigation  of  all  descriptions,  and  all  modes  of 
expedite  travel.  Every  man  has  the  freedom  of  his  own  mind, 
thoughts,  and  sentiments,  except  the  black  man,  who  is  in  slavery, 
because  slavery  is  sanctioned  by  our  religion.  And  behold  the 
wealth  and  prosperity  of  the  American  nation  ! Everything  in  its 
possession  has  flourished  from  the  beginning,  and  continues  to  thrive, 
with  all  the  blessings  a nation  can  desire.  See,  then,  what  our  re- 
ligion— our  principles — our  high  calling — has  done  for  the  civi- 
lized, nations  of  the  earth!  — And  in  view  of  all  this,  you  rise  in 
rebellion  against  our  efforts  and  our  profession  ! You  misinterpret 
our  most  holy  intentions,  our  deepest  yearnings,  and  our  serious 
devotion  to  the  principles  of  morality  and  of  human  improvement !” 

The  voice  of  Nature  replies  : Abandon  your  present,  but  establish 
new  efforts,  whereby  the  social  world  may  harmonize,  and  morality 
bloom  as  a rose,  from  the  superior  situations  of  mankind.  Do  not 
cultivate  the  flower  of  morality,  before  you  have  planted  the  seed  of 
human  industry.  Do  not  begin  at  the  top  of  a building,  before  you 
have  laid  its  foundatiop  in  the  earth.  Open  the  floodgates  of  infidel- 
ity to  all  the  useless  and  unrighteous  pirofiessions  of  the  age,  and  thereby 
establish  a fidelity  to  the  indestructible  laws  of  Nature,  and  to  her 
divine  morality.  Cease  your  mourning  for  the  widow  and  the  fa- 
therless, and  go  forth  and  labor  to  supply  their  necessities.  Cease 
your  long  and  unmeaning  prayers  and  invocations,  and  honor  the 
Cod  of  your  being  by  laboring  in  the  vineyard  of  a fertile  earth,  and 
thereby  uless  your  own  and  your  neighbor’s  existence,  with  abun- 
dance and  happiness.  An  instance  can  not  be  shown  in  which  a 


724 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND 


sigh  has  healed  the  injured  breast,  or  a prayei  has  given  food  to  the 
hungry. 

Brethren,  you  mean  well,  but  your  labors  are  useless  and  impov- 
erishing to  the  human  race.  You*  repose  unlimited  confidence  in 
the  Divine  Mind  and  his  providence  toward  his  creatures  — and  you 
are  anxious  to  have  your  Father  in  heaven  do  that  which  you  can 
do  yourselves.  You  call  for  assistance  when  you  are  depressed  with 
the  afflictions  of  those  around  you.  Your  supplications  are  pure, 
but  alas  ! they  are  unavailing  ; because,  clergymen,  though  you  are 
seriously  you  are  immorally  employed  ! 


§ 17.  Moreover,  learn  this  truth  : that  morality  is  not  in  your  sys- 
tems of  religion,  but  is  immoveably  established  in  Nature  and  in  Man  ; 
and  if  you  desire  to  elevate  the  race,  strive  to  establish  conditions 
adapted  to  its  proper  development.  Verbal  prayers  are  insignificant, 
ineffectual,  and  unprofitable.  — But  every  true  and  righteous  prayer 
consists  in  an  unchanging  devotion  to  the  principles  of  Nature,  and 
the  teachings  of  a benevolent  Father.  Then  pray  in  action  and  in 
deed , but  not  with  your  tongue,  though  seriousness  may  prompt  the 
utterance.  Be  religiously  devoted  to  practice,  and  not  to  theory. 
Tell  no  more  what  men  should  do,  but  go  forth  and  assist  them  to 
do  it. 

The  voice  of  Nature  replies  again,  that  your  system  and  profession 
are  not  misrepresented  : for  in  them  are  concealed  the  elements  of 
evil  and  disunity.  — For  behold  how  much  the  more  devotedly  the 
Hindoo  is  attached  to  his  religion,  because  he  hates  yours!  He  de- 
spises your  sanctimonious  offerings,  and  repulses  all  your  missionary 
innovations.  It  is  this  antagonism  that  retards  his  abandonment  of  all 
heathenish  and  idolatrous  worship.  Fie  beholds  other  nations  smoth- 
ered in  a sectarian  faith  imposed  by  a God  he  knows  not.  Thus  he 
loathes  and  despises  them.  Heathens  thus  centre  their  affections  in, 
and  restrict  their  thoughts  to,  the  deified  principles  of  their  speech- 
less god  — and  all  this  to  manifest  an  increased  devotion  by  way  of 
retaliation  upon  all  Christian  invaders  and  mysterious  teachers. 

The  heathen  philosophers  taught  some  good,  but  moreezuV.  They 
believed  all  they  taught  to  be  the  highest  morality,  but  as  they  de- 
scended into  sensuous  observation,  they  drew  conclusions  that  were 
both  erroneous  and  impure.  Their  minds  had  just  emerged  from  an 
immense  ocean  of  ignorance  and  fanaticism  ; and  they  rushed  impet- 
uously to  the  indulgence  of  unrestrained  animal  gratification.  Their 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


725 


Wisdom  was  uncultivated  ; their  perceptions  were  acute,  but  their 
moral  faculties  were  undeveloped. 

Between  these  two  extremes  sprang  up  the  modified  and  rational 
system  contained  in  the  book  which  you,  clergymen,  are  promulga- 
ting. Hence  this  book  contains  more  real  and  useful  principles 
dian  any  collection  of  manuscripts  on  the  earth.  Those  who  wrote 
them  were  enlightened,  because  the  extremes  of  the  heathen  igno- 
rance and  philosophy  were  an  unfailing  index  from  which  central 
and  useful  truths  could  be  deduced.  Nothing  is  contained  in  these 
manuscripts  but  what  is  of  the  highest  importance  to  the  human  race  ; 
and  this  is  especially  true  of  those  portions  indicating  the  morality 
derivable  from  universal  industry  and  reciprocal  justice.  They  are 
Dlain  — all  can  read  them  — they  need  no  expounding.  They  are 
intended  as  incentives  to  an  end  which  all  should  be  employed  to 
accomplish  — even  love  to  the  neighbor,  and  peace  on  earth,  and 
good-will  to  men.  Preaching  will  never  effect  this  : action  will  ac- 

D O 

complish  it  in  a brief  period. 

The  voice  of  Nature  again  replies,  that  the  effects  of  your  system, 
and  of  its  promulgation,  have  not  been  righteous.  But  how  is  this 
to  be  proved?  Is  not  the  distinction  evidently  visible  between  the 
heathen  and  the  Christian  world  ? — and  can  it  be  denied  that  Chris- 
tianity has  produced  the  great  elevation  of  the  one,  which  renders  the 
degradation  of  the  other  conspicuous? 

Reader,  in  the  distance  a form  is  visible.  — It  is  an  aged  man, 
whose  countenance  indicates  purity  and  benevolence  of  soul.  He 
seems  like  one  of  the  primitive  inhabitants.  His  pace  is  slow  and 
firm  ; his  form  is  well  proportioned  : and  with'  a smile  upon  his  coun- 
tenance, he  approaches  you.  Just  inquire  of  him  concerning  his 
birth  and  experience,  and  concerning  his  knowledge  of  the  heathen 
and  civilized  nations  — and  of  the  causes  engaged  in  producing  the 
manifest  dissimilarity  between  them. 

In  answer  to  your  question,  he  replies  that  he  is  an  Anglo-Saxon  ; 
that  he  is  acquainted  with  the  causes  of  civilization,  and  can  give  you 
some  wholesome  advice,  so  that  you  may  recognise  and  perpetuate 
the  causes,  that  their  effects  may  hereafter  be  more  conspicuous. 
Listen,  now,  while  the  venerable  man  utters  his  experience  : — 

‘From  the  beginning,  man  had  necessities,  which  he  labored  to 
supply.  His  increasing  wants  led  to  the  development  of  his  physical 
and  mental  attributes  ; and  this  enabled  him  to  accomplish  many  use- 
ful inventions.  Impulsed  by  a*  powerful  desire,  he  perpetuated  his 


72G 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


species,  not  knowing  the  wisdom  of  this  purpose  of  Nature.  Each 
new  being,  however,  was  made  useful  in  tilling  die  earth.  Natural 
desires  were  gratified,  social  requirements  abundantly  supplied,  and 
man’s  domestic  happiness  was  in  a measure  complete  from  his  own 
industry,  invention,  and  development. 

“ It  was  not  long  after  this  period  that  man  launched  his  mind  on 
the  ocean  of  imagination  ! Having  no  wisdom  as  a helm  to  guide 
his  thoughts,  he  ran  upon  shoals  and  bars,  and  among  icebergs,  rocks, 
islands,  and  strange  regions,  until,  alas  ! his  mind,  like  a vessel,  strand- 
ed upon  the  beach  of  a dark  and  gloomy  philosophy,  from  which 
theology  had  its  birth. 

“ The  nations  thereafter  continued  their  physical  improvements 
and  industry,  meanwhile  cherishing  and  fostering  the  various  rem- 
nants of  the  mental  wreck  which  constituted  their  peculiar  modes  of 
chimerical  and  imaginative  worship.  Each  succeeding  generation 
confirmed  the  opinions  of  the  preceding  ones,  until  the  various  na- 
tions were  prejudiced  and  infatuated,  being  devotedly  attached  to 
their  peculiar  idols  and  forms  of  religious  veneration.  They  sacri- 
ficed their  lives,  their  homes,  and  their  peace,  in  defence  of  their  re- 
ligion. Sectarian  hostility  raged  like  a consuming  fire  throughout 
the  earth,  which  led  to  the  invention  of  warring  implements,  and  of 
all  plans  of  personal  and  national  destruction.  The  moral  and  social 
faculties  of  man  were  crushed  and  perverted.  Their  little  wisdom 
was  turned  to  ingenuity  and  deception  — their  affections  to  bitterness 
and  vindictive  vengeance.  Then  it  was  that  the  whole  world  was 
divided  by  the  walls  of  sectarian  envy  and  religious  fanaticism. 
The  heathen,  exasperated,  fought  those  who  were  more  fortunately 
situated,  and  apparently  blessed  with  a better  God  and  a better  re- 
ligion. Those  who  had  cultivated  their  intellectual  faculties,  and 
abundantly  supplied  their  physical  necessities,  founded  cities  charac- 
terized by  wealth  and  splendor  ; and  they  believed  that  their  God 
caused  this  prosperity,  and  not  themselves.  With  this  conviction, 
they  rushed  against  and  strove  to  subdue  the  heathens  and  their  sys- 
tems of  social  government  and  religious  devotion.  In  this  manner, 
nation  after  nation  was  destroyed,  and  new  ones  were  established. 
Each  nation  was  as  a sect ; each  dominion  as  an  exclusive  world  ; 
and  each  one  pointed  the  sword  of  vengeance  at  its  neighbor’s 
breast.  Men  became  so  suspicious  of  each  other,  that  forts,  and 
castles,  and  monasteries,  were  erected,  and  cities  were  built  with 
walls  about  them  impossible  to  be  demolished. 


A VOTCE  TO  MANKIND. 


727 


§ 18.  “Thus  the  world  was  interiorly  degraded  — the  exterior 
expression  of  which  consisted  in  all  these  exclusive  institutions,  cas- 
tles of  defence,  cities  of  suspicion,  and  walls  of  forbidding  vengeance, 
on.  whose  heights  were  stationed  cannons  of  destruction.  All  of 
these  were  outward  representations  of  the  condition  of  the  mental 
world. 

“ While  the  world  was  in  this  condition,  a number  of  manuscripts 
were  collected  from  the  writings  of  different  historians  and  of  persons 
interested  in  the  social  welfare  of  the  race.  After  their  collection, 
they  were  voted  and  revoted  as  celestial,  by  various  councils.  They 
were  ultimately  adopted  as  canonical  : and  from  that  moment  to  the 
nineteenth  century,  their  contents  have  been  deposited  in  the  affec- 
tions but  not  in  the  judgments  of  men.  Inasmuch  as  the  affections 
are  passionate,  they  gave  forth  a religious  prejudice,  which  it  was  and 
is  almost  impossible  to  subdue  by  the  genial  light  of  Wisdom. 

“ Such,”  continues  the  aged  man,  “was  the  condition  of  the  reli- 
gious world,  that  the  Persians,  the  Hindoos,  and  the  Mohammedans, 
loathed  the  Christians,  as  the  Christians  did  them.  This  established 
the  lines  of  demarcation  between  the  interests  of  nations  and  families 
of  the  earth  ; for  all  were  opposed  to  each  other,  because  Prejudice 
wielded  her  sceptre,  and  the  nations  bowed  in  submission. 

“ The  Christian  religion  was  far  the  most  acceptable  to  the  en- 
lightened, because  of  its  pure  maxims,  and  principles  of  truth  and 
sympathy.  Soon  after  it  was  adopted,  it  became  blended  with  the 
social  relations  of  those  who  received  it ; and  local  hostility  began. 
Sects,  creeds,  and  denominations,  sprang  from  the  many  interpreta- 
tions of  the  Bible.  The  latter,  like  a tree,  has  put  forth  branches 
which  extend  into  the  mental  atmosphere,  and  absorb  the  feelings, 
interests,  and  affections,  of  men.  But  the  nations  continued  to  be 
industrious  ; and  hence  a portion  of  the  world  became  greatly  ad- 
vanced.— And  so  it  was  when  my  nation  was  confirmed  in  its  present 
condition. 

“ So  things  were  situated,  when  a man  proposed  to  discover  other 
portions  of  the  earth.  At  this  time,  navigation  was  greatly  perfected  ; 
and  Christopher  Columbus,  impulsed  by  a disposition  to  explore,  dis- 
covered the  American  continent.  The  first  settlement  in  the  New 
World  became  established.  Immigration  thereafter  was  immense. 
The  families  having  emod  social  habits,  made  the  land  fertile  in  use- 
ful  productions.  Not  long,  and  religious  intolerance  and  potential 
tyranny  endeavored  to  crush  the  free  and  equal  rights  of  the  Arneri- 


72S 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


cans,  and  to  destroy  tlipir  peace  and  prosperity  by  imposing  unjust 
claims' upon  their  property.  The  inhabitants,  being  inspired  by  a 
sense  of  justice  and  love  of  freedom,  prepared  to  defend  their  rights 
A council  was  called,  and  a noble  mind  was  intrusted  with  the  exe- 
cution of  its  mandates.  He  was  called  the  Son  of  Liberty,  and  is 
known  and  loved  for  his  vigilance  and  his  unfailing  prosecution  of  the 
work  assigned  him. 

“ The  council  decided  that  ‘ all  men  were  born  free  and  equal,  and 
were  endowed  with  certain  inalienable  rights,  among  which  were  life, 
liberty,  and  the  pursuit  of  happiness.’  Thenceforward  they  proceed- 
ed to  break  the  chain  of  despotism,  and  to  conquer  the  opponent  of 
their  freedom.  They  succeeded.  Republican  government  was 
adopted  by  the  voice  of  the  people,  and  the  race  vTas  made  happy 
and  united.  Meanwhile  the  various  sects  sprang  up,  and  endeavored 
to  divide  the  affections  of  the  nation.  They  have  in  a measure  suc- 
ceeded : for  a proof  of  which  behold  the  civilized  nations  of  the 
earth  !” 

Reader,  notice  the  puritan  father,  how  he  turns  pale  and  his  voice 
falters  in  uttering  this  last  sentence  ! But  listen  ; — he  speaks 
attain  : — 

O 

“Brethren  and  clergymen,  your  system  did  not  cause  this  civili- 
zation ; but  it  was  caused  by  primitive  invention  incited  by  necessity, 
and  by  subsequent  cultivation  of  the  social  and  intellectual  powers. 
It  was  actual  industry , and  not  preaching ; it  wras  a knowledge  of 
physical  necessities,  and  the  supplying  of  them,  that  erected  your 
beautiful  cities,  accumulated  your  wealth,  distributed  your  splendor, 
and  developed  your  elegance  and  your  fertility  of  mental  powers. 
It  was  this  that  unfolded  the  genius  of  your  natures,  and  that  gave 
you  your  worthy  citizens.  But  all  your  disunity,  conflicts  of  inter- 
ests, prejudices,  fear  of  thought,  and  sectarianism,  are  owing  to  that 
system  which  you  are  locally  promulgating,  and  endeavoring  to  ex- 
tend to  the  heathen  nations. 

“ Brethren,  I have  only  one  question  to  ask,  and  to  this  I de- 
mand an  answer  : Are  the  causes  of  civilization  owing  to  the  preva- 
lence of  Christian  principles?  — or  to  the  actual  industry  of  those 
who  could  hardly  read  them?  Were  those  wars  caused  by  indus- 
try, or  by  religious  intolerance  and  fanaticism  ? If  industry  was  and 
is  the  cause  of  civilization,  will  the  promulgation  of  your  principles 
assist  this  cause  to  advance,  or  arrest  it?  If  not,  then  can  you  say 
that  the  heathen  is  sinful  because  he  has  no  religion  ? and  that  you  are 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


729 


righteous  because  you  are  blessed  by  the  partial  favor  of  a universal 
Father  ?” 

The  old  man  has  turned  his  face  and  departed.  His  experience, 
and  knowledge  of  civil  and  religious  history,  are  valuable  to  the  race. 
Reader,  ponder  well  upon  these  revealments  — and  then  decide 
whether  the  clergy  and  their  system  are  misrepresented. 

§ 19.  Many  people  believe  that  evils  in  society  are  referable  to 
personal  vices  and  individual  constitutional  tendencies,  and  thus  they 
impose  on  man  a responsibility  which  is  unjust,  because  he  can  not 
assume  it.  He  may  cherish  the  above  belief,  but  he  can  not  prac- 
tise the  principles  of  his  conviction,  because  they  are  not  found  in 
Nature,  nor  in  Man,  nor  anywhere  in  the  constitution  of  divine  crea- 
tions. Owing  to  the  ignorance  of  parents  concerning  their  own  na- 
ture and  its  laws,  the  rising  generation  are  made  imperfect,  because 
they  imbibe  vices  or  improper  inclinations  from  their  parents  heredi- 
tarily. In  this  defect  only  are  the  evils  of  society  referable  to  per- 
sonal vices. 

But  it  is  a truth  that  human  character  is  unfolded,  either  favorably 
or  unfavorably,  perfectly  or  imperfectly,  by  the  influence  of  the  social 
and  religious  conditions  that  surround  it.  The  human  character  is 
always  a representative  of  the  soil  that  gave  it  birth,  and  the  atmo- 
sphere in  which  it  was  developed.  Inasmuch,  then,  as  man  can  not 
make  his  own  being,  character,  or  disposition,  it  is  impossible  for 
him  to  assume  the  responsibility  of  an  unactuated  free  agent. 

Mankind  are  all  composed  of  the  same  materials,  differently  com- 
bined, and  of  the  same  essences  differently  distributed  ; and  these 
different  combinations  constitute  the  varieties  of  mankind,  and  the 
dissimilarities  of  their  passions,  necessities,  and  spiritual  possessions. 

Man  can  not  think  what  he  chooses  at  will ; for  he  is  compelled  to 
create  influences,  or  court  them,  before  he  can  arrange  and  concen- 
trate his  thoughts.  In  order  to  read,  a man  must  have  a book  ; in 
order  to  converse,  he  must  have  another  to  hear  and  respond.  In 
like  manner  he  is  governed  in  all  his  physical  and  mental  tendencies. 
He  can  not  love  and  dislike  at  will  ; for  he  is  compelled  to  love  that 
which  is  lovely,  and  he  can  not  love  that  which  is  disgusting  or  un- 
congenial with  the  susceptibility  of  his  affections.  He  can  not  be- 
lieve or  disbelieve  by  desire  ; for  his  mind  invariably  decides  for  or 
against,  according  to  the  preponderance  of  evidence  presented  to  his 
spirit  by  the  senses.  Therefore  man  can  not  be  good  when  influ- 


730 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


ences  are  evil.  He  can  not  be  perfect  when  lie  is  imperfectly  con- 
stituted. He  can  not  love  when  his  affections  are  displeased.  He 
can  not  think  without  internal  or  external  causes  being  engaged  in 
inciting  and  evolving  thought.  He  can  not  believe  when  there  is  not 
sufficient  evidence ; he  can  not  disbelieve  when  evidence  preponder- 
ates. Thus  man  is  a child  of  Nature,  as  Nature  is  a child  of  the 
Deity.  He  is  governed  by  her  principles;  for  they  run  into  and 
constitute  his  being.  Man’s  only  free  agency  or  free  will  is  subject 
to  the  promptings  of  Wisdom,  which  is  his  peculiar  endowment. 
This  he  is  enabled  to  exercise  over  his  own  feelings,  inclinations,  and 
all  things  below  him  on  earth.  So  far  as  this  sanctions,  he  is  free  to 
act  or  not  to  act  ; and  this  makes  him  a passive  being,  subject  to  in- 
fluences from  within  and  without. 

Then  it  is  proper  for  all  mankind  to  know  this  important  truth  : 
that  man  in  nature  is  passive,  because  of  his  Wisdom,  which  is  a coun- 
terpoise established  against  the  Life  and  Love  of  all  created  tilings  ; 
and  that  to  make  man  moral,  all  influences  from  within  and  without 
must  correspond  to  the  nature  of  his  constitution,  and  the  highest 
suggestions  of  an  enlightened  Wisdom.  Such  is  man  ; and  such  is 
•his  relation  to  Nature,  her  laws,  and  the  Divine  Mind. 

Reader,  if  you  are  elevated  to  a seat  of  honor  to  govern  and  direct 
your  brethren  the  people,  your  interest  now  consists  in  an  exclusive 
distribution  of  favors  and  privileges  to  those  under  your  government. 
To  be  in  accordance  with  the  laws  of  Nature,  your  position  should 
be  determined  by  your  superior  constitutional  qualifications.  And 
your  government  should  contemplate  the  interests  of  all  living  crea- 
tures, and  your  privileges  should  be  distributed  according  to  the  pe- 
culiar wants  of  each  one.  Thus  you  should  assist  all ; and  that  by  a 
feeling  of  unrestricted  benevolence,  and  a wise- and  impartial  distri- 
bution of  justice,  liberty,  and  equal  rights. 

Reader,  if  you  are  a representative  of  your  state  or  portion  of  the 
earth,  your  interest  consists  in  advocating  those  measures  which  would 
benefit  those  who  gave  you  the  office,  and  in  legislating  for  the  ex- 
clusive classes  and  their  aggrandizement.  To  be  in  accordance  with 
Nature,  you  should  be  as  an  unblemished  mirror  in  which  would  be 
vividly  reflected  everything  existing  in  the  state  or  portion  of  the 
country  which  you  came  to  represent.  Then  your  government 
would  be  equal,  and  one  person  would  have  an  unbounded  confi- 
dence in  another. 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


161 

Reader,  if  you  are  a wealthy  man,  your  interest  consists  in  estab- 
lishing a monopoly  which  no  other  person  can  overcome,  thereby  to 
accumulate  more  wealth.  Hence  you  are  doing  injustice  to  the 
rights  of  men  beneath  you,  notwithstanding  you  subscribe  liberally  to 
the  support  of  the  institutions  of  education,  in  which  literature,  and 
art,  and  elegance,  are  taught ; also  to  sustain  asylums,  and  almshouses, 
and  prisons.  The  support  of  all  these  may  be  derived  from  you  ; and 
yet  you  are  doing  injustice  to  the  interests  and  rights'  of  your  subor- 
dinate brethren.  To  be  in  accordance  with  Nature , you  should  feel 
no  monopolizing  disposition,  nor  should  you  expend  so  much  wealth 
on.  local  institutions.  Each  one  of  these  being  isolated,  costs  at  least 
one  third  more  than  the  same  education,  privileges,  and  benefits, 
would  if  they  were  arranged  according  to  a system  of  reciprocal  in- 
terest and  the  promptings  of  a benevolent  soul. 

Reader,  if  you  are  a clergyman,  your  interest  consists  in  limiting 
thought,  and  restricting  the  spontaneous  investigations  natural  to  the 
human  mind.  You  are  also  compelled  to  smother  your  own  convic- 
tions beneath  the  prejudices  of  your  own  congregation,  and  the  so- 
ciety in  which  you  move.  You  dare  not  express  the  highest  con- 
victions of  your  judgment ; for  in  that  case  your  influence  would  sink, 
and  your  occupation  would  no  longer  afford  subsistence  and  emolu- 
ment. To  be  in  accordance  with  Nature,  you  should  be  teaching 
that  which  Nature  teaches,  and  should  expound  that  upon  which 
mankind  are  ignorant.  You  should  unshackle  the  human  mind  by 
cultivating  its  Wisdom.  You  should  inculcate  no  mysteries,  that  the 
human  mind  can  not  solve  ; for  rest  assured  that  whether  such  mys- 
teries are  imaginative  or  true,  they  are  unnecessary  to  the  inhabitants 
of  this  sphere.  You  should  teach  those  who  need  to  be  educated  ; 
and  teach  them  only  that  which  is  practicable,  and  tends  to  benefit 
the  whole.  Restrict  no  mind  that  is  capable  of  reason  ; and  if  men’s 
thoughts  are  not  well  directed,  it  is  your  duty  to  cultivate  their  Wis- 
dom, so  that  they  may  think  properly.  You  should  take  your  text 
from  the  simple  and  well-written  Book  of  Nature,  whose  language 
all  understand,  and  whose  teachings  all  will  receive  ; and  thus  you 
will  be  teachers  indeed.  — And  then  your ' influence  will  purify  and 
elevate  the  spiritual  elements  of  the  whole  human  race. 

Reader,  if  your  profession  is  the  law,  your  interest  consists  in  the 
numerous  vices  and  disturbances  occurring  in  society.  You  are  not 
devoted  to  justice  so  much  as  to  favoring  him  who  rewards  you  most 
liberally.  To  be  in  accordance  with  Nature,  you  should  be  con- 


732 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


stantly  engaged  in  equalizing  the  movements  of  society,  and  teach- 
ing the  world  justice  and  love.  You  should  be  earnestly  engaged 
in  giving  justice  to  those  who  need  it  most,  by  elucidating  its  princi- 
ples to  all.  And  then  you  would  be  a blessing  to  society,  and  would 
be  honored  with  the  title  of  “ peace-makers,”  which  can  not  now  be 
applied,  lou  should  be  interested  in  'peace  and  universal  justice ; 
and  then  the  principles  of  Nature  would  fully  correspond  to,  and 
sanction,  your  useful  labors. 

§ 20.  Reader,  if  you  are  a physician,  your  interest  consists  in 
vice  and  sickness,  and  in  all  manner  of  infractions  of  the  physical 
laws,  and  in  the  prevalence  of  abuses  in  society,  whereby  disease  is 
generated  and  your  profession  is  rendered  eminently  flourishing. 
To  be  in  accordance  with  Nature,  you  should  be  as  the  good  physi- 
cian, interested  in  the  health  of  the  whole  world,  earnestly  studying 
the  interests  of  others,  improving  their  minds,  unfolding  the  mysteries 
of  their  constitutions,  and  daily  engaged  in  curing  and  preventing 
disease.  Then  you  would  breathe  an  impartial  favor,  and  a healing 
influence,  to  all  about  you  ; and  you  would  thus  be  blessed  while  you 
were  blessing  the  existences  of  your  brethren. 

Reader,  if  you  are  a mechanic,  your  interest  consists  in  all  inven- 
tions that  tend  to  reduce  and  depreciate  the  labor  of  man.  You  feel 
desirous  of  obtaining  knowledge  of  art  sufficient  to  establish  youi 
monopoly,  and  to  insure  your  success  over  the  competitions  of  your 
neighbor.  Therefore  your  studies  and  inventions  are  selfish  and 
isolated.  To  be  in  accordance  with  Nature,  you  should  study  the 
geometrical  attributes  of,  and  the  mechanism  manifested  in,  all  things. 
You  should  apply  your  discoveries  to  machinery,  and  to  all  things 
profitable  to  the  human  race  universally.  Labor  should  not  be  iso- 
lated, but  general.  No  strife  should  exist,  but  on  the  contrary  there 
should  be  a constant  desire  to  advance  the  interests  of  the  world. 
Thus  your  own  wants  and  the  wants  of  others  would  be  supplied, 
while  your  existence  would  be  a blessing,  your  labor  attractive,  and 
your  occupation  happiness. 

Reader,  if  you  are  a poor  man,  your  interest  consists  in  a hurried 
and  inferior  tilling  of  the  soil  ; for  even  the  movements  of  your  labor 
are  governed  by  the  amount  of  reward  which  you  receive.  You  feel 
no  interest  in  labor  itself,  in  improvement,  or  in  the  occupations  of 
others:  therefore  your  existence  is  displeasing  and  unhappy.  To 
ne  in  accordance  with  Nature,  you  should  feel  an  attraction  to  labor 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


733 


as  arising  from  its  just  organization  and  distribution.  You  should 
be  interested  in  all  the  inventions  of  others,  and  in  all  things  tending 
to  beautify  and  render  the  earth  productive. 

Mankind,  your  interests  are  opposed  to  each  other:  and  hence  all 
the  innumerable  evils  that  prevail  in  society,  and  which  are  marrinv 
the  beauty  and  usefulness  of  the  human  race.  You  are  as  a Man 
whose  organs  are  diseased,  and  whose  requirements  are  opposed  to 
each  other.  You  are  as  a body  diseased  internally,  and  whose  dis- 
ease is  not  visible  to  the  sensuous  perceptions  of  men.  You  are 
striving  to  keep  the  surface  healthy,  and  to  make  it  appear  sound  and 
perfect,  while  the  disease  is  raging  among  the  organs  invisibly,  and 
these  are  absorbing  each  other’s  strength,  and  each  one  is  striving  to 
transcend  and  govern  another. 

But  it  is  impossible  to  continue  this  policy  of  superficial  healing 
much  longer.  The  disease  and  corruptions  of  society  are  bursting 
forth  and  contaminating  the  body  with  sores  of  filth,  and  with  un- 
healthy abominations.  An  effort  to  heal  these  outbreaks  and  running 
sores  would  be  like  a physician  striving  to  heal  a bile  when  the  blood 
is  diseased.  Mankind  as  one  human  body  must  have  a constitutional 
cleansing  and  renovating.  Then  the  body  will  rise  to  the  fulness  of 
the  stature  of  a perfect  man,  and  all  will  be  health  within  and  peace 
without.  Strive,  then,  to  feel  these  truths  and  apply  their  teachings. 
Do  not  exert  yourselves  to  keep  the  surface  whole,  while  the  disease 
is  constitutional ; but  renovate  your  system,  equalize  your  situations, 
and  thus  harmonize  one  with  another.  Be  as  a brotherhood,  and 
love  each  other.  Do  this  by  making  all  things  attractive,  and  exist- 
ence a blessing.  Do  this  by  fulfilling  your  destiny,  and  thus  honor- 
ing the  creation  of  your  Father  which  is  in  heaven.  Do  all  these 
things,  and  you  will  be  a moral  race,  united  in  your  feelings,  elevated 
in  your  affections,  refined  in  your  sentiments,  and  perfected  in  wis- 
dom. Do  this,  and  you  will  know  no  distinction  ; for  your  interests 
and  personal  existence  will  be  blended  into  one  harmonious  Whole. 
Do  this,  and  goodness  will  be  the  result  of  your  efforts,  and  righte- 
ousness the  temple  of  your  habitation. 

Thus  it  is  proved  that  society  and  the  human  race  are  diseased 
anJ  I now  proceed  to  prescribe  the  remedy. 


734 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


\ 


§ 21.  There  is  a constitutional  and  mutual  affection  manifested 
between  every  particle  and  compound  in  being.  This  is  the  law  of 
association  — which  is  the  rudimental  principle  of  Nature  established 
by  God,  who  is  Love.  This  law  creates,  develops,  and  perfects, 
Man  — and  distributes- the  race,  together  with  all  created  things,  to 
portions  of  the  earth  congenial  with  their  respective  natures  and  qual- 
ifications. Every  form  in  the  vegetable  world  is  distributed  by  this, 
law  of  mutual  affection.  The  huge  trees  are  rooted  in  soil  and 
prow  in  climates  where  the  delicate  flower  can  not  subsist.  A var- 

O O 

den  can  not  exist  where  the  wilderness  is,  at  least  until  the  soil  is 
cultivated  and  rendered  fertile.  Neither  can  the  delicate  forms  in 
the  animal  world  exist  among  those  that  are  huge,  gigantic,  and  pos- 
sessing dissimilar  habits.  The  fish  can  not  live  with  the  bird,  nor 
the  jjird  with  the  quadruped.  That  is,  one  can  not  subsist  upon  that 
which  sustains  the  other  : but  each  requires  different  food,  and  this 
distinguishes  their  individual  necessities  and  habits. 

So  with  the  human  world  : They  are  distributed  in  various  por- 
tions of  the  earth,  and  in  different  climates,  all  surrounding  things  in 
Nature  being  adapted  to  their  peculiar  constitutions,  and  congenial 
with  their  physical  requirements.  The  law  of  association  being  the 
rudimental  law  of  Nature,  and  flowing  into  and  uniting  all  things,  is 
fully  developed  in  the  human  form.  It  constitutes  men  differently, 
gives  them  different  passions,  inclinations,  and  essences  and  proper- 
ties of  soul.  It  creates  the  diversity,  the  multifariousness,  manifest- 
ed in  the  human  world.  But  although  it  makes  men  unlike  each 
other,  the  variety  is  necessary  to  harmonize  and  unite  the  whole.  The 
diversity  manifests  the  order  of  development.  It  is  the  mode  of  per- 
petual progress,  the  cause  of  happiness,  and  the  spring  of  all  life  and 
energy,  of  all  passion  and  its  gratification.  Therefore  the  diversity 
is  the  order  of  Nature,  the  requirement  of  man,  and  the  foundation 
of  harmony. 

Mankind  inherit  their  diversified  attributes  from  the  womb  of  Na- 
ture, these  having  been  there  deposited  and  impregnated  by  the  Love 
and  Wisdom  of  God.  These  attributes  constitute  the  affinity  which 
man  sustains  to  Nature,  and  to  her  provisions  to  which  he  is  entitled. 
There  is  no  passion  or  desire  of  man  which  Nature  has  not  provided 
means  to  gratify,  especially  when  such  passion  or  desire  is  governed 
by  Wisdom , by  which  also  its  gratification  should  be  regulated.  Man 
is  entitled  to  liberty,  plenty,  and  happiness,  by  Nature.  Sl^e  be- 


A YOTCE  TO  MANKIND. 


73-5 


quealhs  these  to  him,  and  ‘presents  her  larder  stored  with  bounteous 
provisions,  and  invites  man  to,  receive,  enjoy,  and  cultivate  them,  and 
be  what  she  intended  he  should. 

This  inseparable  relation  between  .man  and  Nature  and  the  Princi- 
ples of  God,  is  established  by  the  law  of  association.  There  is  no 
possible  way  to  annul  this  reciprocal  relation,  or  to  escape  from  the 
obligation  to  bow  in  obedience  to  the  laws  which  govern  it.  This 
law  of  Nature  is  divine,  because  it  is  the  Love  and  Life  of  the  Deity. 
It  distributes  impartial  blessings  to  all,  and  for  every  action  it  dis- 
penses an  adequate  reward  or  punishment.  There  can  be  no  denial 
of  the  absoluteness  of  the  connexion,  and  there  is  no  escaping  the 
effects  accomplished  by  the  workings  of  these  principles. 

Man  is,  then,  a child  of  Nature,  caressed,  and  guided  into  all  wis 
dom,  by  her  unchangeable  possessions.  Man  is  well  formed,  well 
constructed,  and  well  distributed,  on  the  bosom  of  Nature  ; and  he 
as  a dutiful  child,  should  acknoudedge  the  relation  and  submit  to  her 
wise  commands  and  dispensations. 

As  the  law  of  association  thus  unites  Nature  and  man,  and  estab- 
lishes diverse  and  multipotent  characteristics  in  the  race,  it  is  upon 
this  indestructible  basis  that  rests  the  law  of  reciprocal  justice  and 
consequent  morality  and  happiness.  Every  being,  then,  is  entitled 
by  Nature  to  liberty  and  happiness  ; and  if  every  one  does  not  receive 
these,  injustice  is  done  in  some  portion  of  the  human  world.  If  the 
desires  of  a single  being  are  not  gratified,  then  there  is  an  unjust  and 
isolated  absorption  in  some  parts  of  the  great  Body,  which  is  an  in- 
jury both  to  the  absorber  and  to  those  subject  to  the  absorption. 

All  men  have  not  the  same  desires,  and  do  not  need  the  same 
gratification.  Each  one  has  peculiar  wants,  and  the  wants  of  each 
one  differ  in  their  degrees  of  development.  Hence  it  follows  that 
happiness  should  be  dispensed  by  bestowing  blessings  in  proportion 
to  the  capabilities  of  men  to  appreciate  and  enjoy  them.  Those  who 
have  superfluous  gratifications  are  as  miserable  as  those  whose  wants 
are  not  adequately  supplied.  In  the  one  instance,  desires  become  mor- 
bid, unhealthy,  and  corrupting  ; while  in  the  other,  they  are  impetuous 
and  constantly  generating  vice,  disease,  and  unhappiness.  It  is  there- 
fore an  injury  for  any  one  to  have  more  than  he  can  wrell  employ, 
appreciate,  or  make  useful  ; while  on  the  other  hand,  it  is  unjust  to 
deprive  any  one  of  that  which  is  necessary  to  his  existence,  or  of  any 
blessing  to  which  he  is  entitled  by  Nature. 

To  prevent  absorption  in  any  part  of  the  great  human  Body,  there- 


736 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


fore,  the  Wisdom  of  men  must  recognise  the  divine  law  of  Associa- 
tion. This  law  must  be  applied  by  making  all  situations  and  all 
degrees  of  human  industry  correspond  to  its  uniform  requirements. 
Here,  then,  is  the  first  item  in  the  remedy  for  the  disease  of  the 
social  world. 

Mankind,  remember  you  must  become  acquainted  with  your  na- 
ture, your  Creator,  and  the  laws  which  inseparably  unite  and  harmo- 
nize all  created  things.  You  must  become  enlightened,  and  feel  the 
force  of  this  divine  truth  ; and  in  doing  this  you  will  remove  a part 
of  the  disease  which  now  corrupts  your  mental  constitution. 

The  law  of  Association,  then,  establishes  harmony,  and  impera- 
tively forbids  injustice  to  anything  which  it  comprehends  within  its 
dominion  ; and  this  is  only  limited  by  the  expanse  of  inconceivable 
space. 

Another  truth,  then,  is  necessarily  evolved,  and  must  be  acknowl- 
edged ; and  that  is,  that  every  man  is  not  only  entitled  to  liberty, 
plenty,  justice,  and  happiness,  but  he  has  an  important  office  to  fulfil, 
an  end  to  accomplish,  and  a destiny  to  fulfil.  Hence  each  man  must 
have  a distinct  position  in  the  great  structure  of  human  society  ; and 
that  position  must  be  determined  by  his  constitutional  qualifications, 
and  his  ability  to  discharge  the  obligations  it  imposes.  He  must 
gravitate  to  his  own  peculiar  centre,  as  this  is  determined  by  the  law 
of  association  : that  is,  to  whatever  soil,  climate,  occupation,  and  sit- 
uation, may  be  most  congenial  with  his  natural  inclinations  as  modified 
and  governed  by  Wisdom. 

Men  now  occupy  situations  which  they  are  not  capable  of  filling  ; 
and  therefore  everything  they  do  is  injurious  to  some,  beneficial  to 
others,  and  disgusting  to  themselves.  Being  compelled  to  engage 
in  that  which  they  are  not  qualified  to  perform,  creates  discontent  in 
the  mind,  and  does  injustice  to  all  dependent  on  their  labors.  But 
every  one  is  entitled  to  a position  determined  by  the  quality  and 
abilities  of  bis  constitution. 


§ 22.  Each  man  is  hut  an  organ  of  the  great  human  Body.  In 
the  present  condition  of  things,  one  organ  is  opposed  to,  and  absorbs 
the  strength  and  happiness  of,  another.  This  generates  every  spe 
cies  of  evil,  pain,  wretchedness,  and  disorganization.  But  it  is  propel 
that  each  individual,  as  an  organ  of  the  body,  should  occupy  a posi 
tion  agreeable  with  the  demands  of  his  own  nature  and  the  nature  of 
others  ; and  thus  distributive  and  impartial  justice  would  be  genet- 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


737 


ated,  which  would  remove  the  disease,  renovate  and  perfect  the 
body,  and  promote  unity  and  happiness. 

Suppose  a man  to  have  a disease  which  affects  each  organ  by 
obstruction,  absorption,  and  a disturbance  of  the  equilibrium  in 
their  forces  and  essences  : would  it  not  be  proper  to  remove  the  ob- 
struction, destroy  absorption,  and  equalize  the  forces  and  essences, 
so  that  they  might  create  health  ? Then  if  this  is  the  correct  process, 
is  it  not  equally  correct  to  remove  all  absorption,  obstruction,  and 
want  of  equilibrium  in  society  — so  that  every  man,  like  an  organ  of 
the  body,  may  perform  his  appropriate  functions,  and  not  only  be 
happy  himself,  but  generate  happiness  for  others  ? 

One  effect  of  the  law  of  association  is  known  as  harmony;  and 
harmony  is  the  soul  and  element  of  music.  Music  is  a representa- 
tion of  divine  Order  ; and  Order  is  the  Wisdom  of  the  Deity.  To 
establish  harmony , therefore,  in  society,  every  man  must  be  well  in- 
structed and  properly  situated,  so  that  his  movements  may  accord 
with  the  movements  of  the  whole  ; and  thus  the  movements  of  the 
human  race  will  be  in  concert. 

Suppose  a musical  instrument  well  constructed,  and  capable  of 
giving  forth  perfect  and  beautiful  melody.  Suppose  also  that  the 
notes  it  is  capable  of  sounding  all  accompany  it,  but  are  confused. 
Think-you  that  harmony  can  proceed  from  that  instrument?  Not- 
withstanding the  notes  are  all  there,  if  they  are  not  well  placed,  well 
timed,  or  properly  concerted,  the  consequence  will  be  that  the  most 
disgusting  and  frightful  discord  will  proceed  from  the  instrument.  So 
with  the  human  race  : the  structure  is  perfect ; the  notes  are  all  exist- 
ing; but  they  are  misplaced:  and  vice,  antagonism,  and  immorality, 
are  the  consequences. 

The  instrument  of  society  can  not  be  tuned  except  by  an  enlight- 
ened Wisdom.  Wisdom  may  arrange  society,  and  place  every  man 
in  a position|Congenial  with  his  own  nature  and  the  universal  require- 
ments of  the  race.  After  mankind  are  so  situated,  discord  can  not 
arise,  but  most  happy  harmony,  morality,  virtue,  and  righteousness, 
will  prevail. 

Man  has  no  desires  that  can  not  be  gratified.  He  has  no  peculi- 
arities but  what  some  position  would  render  agreeable  and  proper. — 
And  these  peculiarities  must  be  considered  as  a musician  would  con- 
sider the  notes  used  in  the  composition  of  a tune  ; and  Wisdom  must 
arrange  them  in  concert,  so  that  melody  may  be  fully  developed.  • 
There  is  not,  nor  will  there  ever  be,  one  being  too  many.  But  in 

47 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


1700 

order  to  make  man  fulfil  his  destiny,  place  him  in  a situation  to  do  it. 
Make  industry  attractive;  make  every  dispensation  just,  and  deter- 
mine every  position  by  specific  qualifications.  Advance  the  lower 
strata  of  society  by  pervading  them  with  Wisdom  and  pure  influ- 
ences. Then  every  man  will  perform  the  use  for  which  he  was 
destined,  and  all  contention  that  now  prevails  will  be  lost  in  the  har- 
mony of  the  whole. 

Mankind  must  be  so  distributed,  and  every  person  must  be  so  sit- 
uated, as  that  the  position  of  each  may  correspond  to,  and  harmonize 
with,  divine  Law,  such  as  is  established  by  God  in  Nature  and  in 
Man  unchangeably.  Every  individual  must  gravitate  to  the  position 
suggested  by  his  nature  and  its  necessities,  and  also  by  the  require- 
ments of  others,  above  and  below  him,  in  the  Brotherhood.  There 
should  be  no  restriction  to  individual  movements,  especially  when 
all  movements  are  determined  by  the  wisdom  and  righteousness  of 
the  supreme  governor  and  director  of  human  society.  Every  per- 
son should  be  as  harmoniously  situated  as  the  notes  in  a well-arranged 
piece  of  music  ; and  then  all  feeling,  inclination,  judgment,  industry, 
progress,  and  intellectual  attainment,  would  completely  correspond 
to  the  law  of  uniform  development  and  the  combined  interests  of 
the  whole. 

No  person  upon  the  earth  should  exist  inferiorly  situated,  because 
such  is  not  in  accordance  with  the  nature  and  order  of  divine  crea- 
tions. No  faculties  should  be  crushed  for  the  want  of  mental  liberty  ; 
no  powers  of  a mechanical,  mathematical,  or  philosophical  tendency, 
should  be  obstructed  ; for  Nature  prescribes  liberty  and  unrestriction 
of  thought.  Hence  man  should  be  so  situated  as  that  all  his  spirit- 
ual qualities  and  faculties  may  be  uncontrolled,  and  their  unfoldings 
unbounded.  That  these  things  may  be  so,  men  should  occupy  those 
positions  only  which  they  are  capable  of  filling,  and  in  which  they 
are  happy  and  at  home.  But  at  present,  some  are  teachers  who  are 
not  so  capable  of  teaching  as  many  of  their  pupils.  Some  are  occu- 
pying important  offices  by  a voice  of  the  people,  and  yet  are  not  so 
capable  of  governing  as  those  who  are  governed  are  to  control 
themselves. 

And  one  truth  prominent  among  all  nations  and  in  all  ages  of  the 
world  is,  that  the  most  useful,  pure,  benevolent,  and  intelligent  men, 
are  those  who,  receiving  a perfect  constitution  by  birth,  and  being 
naturally  situated,  have  unfolded  a teeming  intellect,  such  as  never 
proceeds  from  any  institution  or  any  mode  of  obtaining  superficial 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


739 


education.  Hence  it  is  clear  that  all  those  who  are  good  and  per- 
fect, and  have  the  most  truth,  are  the  unsophisticated  offspring  of 
Nature.  Such  minds  possess  all  the  qualifications  of  mechanics,  phi- 
losophers, and  philanthropists,  and  love  truth  and  wisdom  for  their 
own  sakes  only,  and  not  to  acquire  the  character  of  being  learned, 
and  thus  be  advanced  to  honor  and  emolument.  It  is  proper,  then, 
that  all  should  be  perfectly  arranged  and  well  situated,  so  that  all  the 
movements  of  men,  whether  industrial  or  mental,  may  accord  with 
their  own  nature  and  the  interests  of  the  whole  society. 

Men  must  become  acquainted  with  the  law  of  association  and  its 
distributions,  before  they  can  concert  an  harmonious  brotherhood  on 
earth.  And  after  men  are  well  situated,  so  that  the  whole  will  cor- 
respond to  a system  of  undisturbed  harmony,  then  will  be  developed 
the  law  of  Order.  This  Order  will  unite  them,  and  also  represent 
the  same  displayed  in  the  structure  of  the  Universe.  And  thus  the 
lowest  and  most  imperfect  will  occupy  the  lowest  point  in  society  ; 
and  a graduated  development  will  characterize  the  ascending  groups, 
until  they  rise  to  the  highest  point  of  human  perfection.  And  then 
he  who  is  the  most  perfect  in  his  physical  and  spiritual  constitution, 
will  occupy  the  highest  position  in  society,  as  governor,  and  will 
pervade  the  whole  by  Wisdom,  and  direct  them  righteously  accord- 
ing to  divine  harmony  and  universal  order. 

§ 23.  Then  there  will  be  an  order  in  human  society,  in  which  ev- 
ery group  may  represent  a planet.  And  the  groups  may  be  so  ar- 
ranged as  that  their  interests  will  revolve  around  the  central  object 
of  their  own  industry  and  the  Temple  of  Knowledge.  Let  the  Sun 
of  the  race  be  the  centre  of  all  human  wisdom,  whose  enlivening  in- 
fluence may  generate  industry,  abundance,  and  happiness.  Let  each 
group,  society,  or  slate,  be  a planet ; and  let  the  whole  give  to  and 
receive  from  the  central  Sun  congenial  reciprocations,  so  that  there 
may  not  exist  any  inertia,  restriction,  poverty,  or  unhappiness. 
Moreover,  let  each  group,  as  a planet,  revolve  within  or  around  the 
orbits  of  others,  according  to  their  relation  to  the  Sun  of  Knowledge 
and  Centre  of  pervading  happiness. 

Each  group  will  occupy  such  a position  in  relation  to  the  Centre 
or  Sun  of  society  as  is  determined  by  its  degree  of  progress,  and  its 
department  of  industry,  so  that  its  movements  may  be  profitable  and 
well  defined.  And  there  will  be  a uniform  movement  of  all  the 


740 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


groups,  both  within  themselves  and  in  their  revolutions  around  their 
central  governor  or  Sun  of  attraction. 

And  the  various  departments  of  society  will  represent  the  Solar 
System  also  in  their  mutual  exchangings  of  purified  and  perfected 
particles.  In  other  words,  persons  in  the  first  society  who  advance 
and  become  capable  of  associating  with  the  second,  must  be  permit- 
ted to  ascend  and  occupy  the  positions  in  the  scale  of  progressive 
development  for  which  they  have  become  qualified.  And  let  this 
mutual  exchange  be  continued  through  all  the  groups,  even  up  to 
the  central  power.  And  he  who  arrives  there  first  by  natural  qualifi- 
cation, will  succeed  to  the  throne  of  government.  And  so  there  will 
be  a constant  supply  of  particles  (or  persons),  both  at  the  seat  of 
government  and  at  the  extremities  of  society. 

Individual  advancement,  to  be  pure,  must  be  unceasing  and  per- 
petual. A person  in  the  lowest  society  will  gyrate  through  all  the 
positions  he  is  there  capable  of  occupying,  and  ascend  in  like  manner 
through  all  the  societies  to  the  Sun  or  seat  of  Wisdom.  A perpetual 
reciprocation  will  be  an  inevitable  consequence  of  the  arrangement 
of  society  according  to  the  divine  law  of  association.  Therefore  an 
incessant  progression  will  characterize  human  society  and  its  compo-  . 
nent  parts. 

This  mutual  exchange  of  particles,  or  individuals,  will  result  natu- 
rally from  the  order  of  refinement  in  each  group  or  society  ; for  their 
degree,  or  nearness  to  the  centre,  must  be  determined  by  their  innate 
capabilities,  and  their  absolute  relation  to  the  centre  of  Wisdom.  So 
every  individual  will  feel  an  inclination  toward  the  centre  of  attrac- 
tion ; and  all  his  efforts  will  be  concentrated  to  gain  the  lofty  seat. 
Also  his  interest  will  consist  in  the  purity  of  his  progress;  for  decep- 
tion and  impure  enlightenment  would  only  render  a person  more 
gross,  and  cause  him  to  remain  in  a lower  society  longer  than  he 
otherwise  would.  Besides  this,  persons  will  mutually  assist  each 
other,  inasmuch  as  a reciprocal  assistance,  without  any  isolated  ab- 
sorption, will  materially  accelerate  the  purification  of  all,  and  accom- 
plish it  more  in  accordance  with  natural  law. 

Each  group  will  of  itself  constitute  a little  world,  or  a congregation 
of  affectionate  and  inseparable  individuals,  laboring  for  each  other’s 
welfare.  They  will  accumulate  wealth  for  each  other’s  enjoyment, 
and  exchange  favors  one  with  another,  for  the  purpose  of  making 
their  group  exceed  as  much  as  possible  the  lower,  and  approach  in 
refinement  the  higher  ; and  thus  a lower  and  higher  interest  will  be 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


741 


established.  Each  group  should  be  like  a planet  in  every  particu- 
lar ; for  each  planet  is  an  accumulation  of  mutually-agreeable  parti- 
cles, all  assisting  to  effect  a universal  refinement.  And  thus  associ- 
ated, they  revolve  with  unanimity  around  the  Sun  or  Centre  of  their 
existence  ; and  so  should  each  group  in  the  Solar  System  of  mankind 
on  earth.  Each  group,  society,  or  state,  as  a planet,  should  be  con- 
stituted of  mutually-assisting  particles  (or  persons),  congenial  with 
each  other  and  with  the  sun  or  centre  around  which  all  societies 
should  revolve  in  their  movements  and  efforts  to  advance  and  become 
perfect. 

This,  then,  should  be  the  order  of  society.  Then  mankind  wrnuld 
represent  the  harmony  of  the  Solar  System,  in  which  no  disturbance 
is  discoverable,  because  the  great  central  Sun  is  both  the  parent  and 
governor,  whose  pervading  influence  sustains  an  indestructible  equi- 
librium. 

After  having  established  this  Order,  a Form  will  be  developed. 
This  will  be  an  expression  of  human  wisdom,  and  will  indicate  the 
beauty  of  developed  social  happiness.  This  form  will  be  as  a human 
body  in  its  arrangements  and  interior  movements,  but  will  correspond 
externally  to  the  structure  of  the  Universe.  By  Form  is  meant  the 
mode  of  preserving  and  perpetuating  Order,  serving  as  a chart  upon 
which  will  be  impressed  the  situation  of  each  person  in  society,  and  the 
relation  of  each  to  the  central  power.  This  Form  will  not  only  be  the 
mode  of  preserving  external  Order,  but  of  perfecting  interior  industry 
and  individual  character.  It  will  be  the  Body  of  Mankind  — a per 
feet  representation  of  interior  order,  harmony,  and  association.  It 
will  be  the  means  by  which  all  mankind  can  associate  with  the  beau- 
ties of  Nature  and  the  laws  of  God,  even  as  a man  associates  with 
external  things  through  the  senses  of  the  organization.  And  the  hu- 
man  race  will  have  a Form  that  will  be  a perfect  representative  of 
interior  purity,  harmony,  and  spiritual  loveliness  — that  will  be  a 
perfect  likeness  of  its  interior,  even  as  the  human  body  is  an  image 
of  the  soul. 

Mankind  always  had  and  always  will  have  a Body,  and  that  will 
represent  the  interior  ; and  therefore  a knowledge  of  the  Sold  of  so- 
ciety may  be  had  by  carefully  viewing  its  Form.  — And  at  present  this 
is  very  imperfect  and  very  much  disconcerted. 

This,  then,  should  be  the  plan  of  reorganizing  society  and  the 
human  world  : First,  develop  Light,  or  the  law  of  association.  Un- 
fold its  teachings  and  apply  them  to  the  race.  By  this  means,  Life 


742 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


will  be  established , which  is  industry,  harmony,  and  happiness.  Then 
perfect  Love  will  reign  ; for  Light  and  Life  are  Love.  — And  asso- 
ciation and  harmony  are  the  legitimate  effects  of  Love,  and  Love 
is  God. 

After  having  developed  these,  an  Order  will  be  displayed  in  the 
structure  of  the  race.  This  order  will  be  the  standard  and  law  of 
human  industry  and  mental  qualification.  It  will  confirm  a unity  of 
interest,  and  an  unchanging  reciprocation  of  feeling,  affection,  and 
mental  associations,  from  the  lowest  to  the  highest  degree  of  human 
advancement. 

From  this  the  human  world  will  receive  a Form  — which  will  be 
the  fulness  of  the  stature  of  a perfect  Man.  And  this  Form  will  be 
the  great  exterior  representative  of  interior  love  and  industry,  and 
also  the  mode  by  and  through  which  the  great  Soul  of  Mankind  will 
commune  with  the  excellences  of  higher  Spheres.  Then  Order  and 
Form  will  be  established,  which  are  representatives  of  Wisdom  — 
such  as  will  emanate  from  the  centre  of  social  government,  and 
spread  distributive  justice  over  the  earth. 

Then  society  will  be  in  this  condition  : Perfect  Light  and  Life, 
which  are  association  and  harmony,  the  whole  of  which  will  consti- 
tute Love  perfectly  developed  : — and  Order  and  Form,  which  are 
movement  and  mode,  and  which  will  constitute  Wisdom,  perfectly 
developed.  Thus  the  human  race  will  display  Light  and  Life, 
which  are  Love,  and  Order  and  Form,  which  are  Wisdom.  Thus 
will  be  established  universal  happiness  — because  the  whole  race  will 
represent  the  harmony  of  all  created  things,  and  typify  the  express 
majesty  of  the  Divine  Creator. 

§ 24.  Not  only  can  human  society  be  made  to  represent  the  har- 
monious movements  displayed  in  our  Solar  System  and  in  the  Uni- 
verse, but  it  can  be  made  to  correspond  in  every  possible  division 
and  particular  to  the  uniform  kingdoms  and  creations  of  Nature. 
The  lower  stratum  in  the  human  world  will,  when  properly  arranged, 
take  the  lowest  point,  and  correspond  to  the  primary  stratification  of 
the1  earth.  And  the  strata  or  groups  of  society  may  be  uniformly 
situated  one  above  another,  as  relative  innate  purity  and  capability 
may  determine,  and  as  is  represented  in  the  geological  formations  of 
this  terrestrial  sphere.  — And  the  highest  group  may,  in  all  its  intel- 
lectual and  brilliant  excellences,  correspond  to  the  bosom  of  Nature, 
or  the  last  stratum  of  the  earth. 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


743 


But  human  society  may  be  organized  on  a more  definite  plan  even 
than  this.  The  first  or  incapable  group  of  society  may  he  so  con- 
structed as  to  represent  the  mineral  world.  That  is,  it  may  have 
three  divisions : the  first  being  the  lowest,  the  second  being  the  me- 
diatorial, and  the  third  being  the  highest — and  the  whole  composing 
a perfect  structure,  and  meanwhile  naturally  immerging  into  the  so- 
ciety or  group  next  above.  Every  particle  in  the  mineral  kingdom 
is  incessantly  engaged  in  activity,  whereby  the  good  of  each  is  mu- 
tually established,  and  a reciprocal  interest  is  caused  to  pervade  the 
whole.  So  it  may  be  with  the  first  group  or  lower  stratum  of  society. 
One  may  assist  to  sustain  and  develop  another,  which  in  return  will 
act  upon  others;  and  thus  will  be  established  an  interior  industry  so 
perfectly  organized  that  no  person  will  be  compelled  to  labor  exces- 
sively, to  sustain  unjust  responsibilities,  or  be  in  any  way  deprived 
of  his  physical  and  mental  requirements. 

The  second  group  may  be  made  to  correspond  in  its  structure  to 
the  vegetable  kingdom  : and  this  can  be  accomplished  by  understanding 
the  mutual  relations  existing  between  all  plants  as  individuals,  and 
how  they  are  inseparably  engaged  in  promoting  a general  good,  ob- 
serving a righteous  reciprocation  among  themselves.  Society,  then, 
in  its  second  department,  would  be  a representative  of  the  vegetable 
kingdom. 

The  ascending  group  may  correspond  to,  and  typify  in  every  de- 
partment, the  animal  world  and  its  harmony.  So  may  the  highest 
or  central  group  correspond  to  Mankind , in  their  relation  to  Nature 
and  the  various  kingdoms.  And  as  man  is  lord  over  of  all  subordi- 
nate creations  ; as  he  possesses  the  wisdom  of  love,  and  is  a crown 
of  material  perfection,  it  is  suggested  that  the  central  group  of  human 
society  should  manifest  all  the  intelligence  and  perfection  of  the 
whole  race  concentrated.  It  may  be  the  throne  of  human  govern- 
ment, and  the  unfailing  source  of  justice,  benevolence,  and  liberty. 
This  may  be  the  centre  of  attraction  to  which  all  should  be  inclined, 
and  by  which  ail  will  be  assisted  to  attain  any  degree  of  eminence, 
possible  for  Wisdom  to  desire. 

Society  may  be  divided  and  subsided  into  as  many  groups  or  fami- 
lies as  may  be  suggested  by  Wisdom  and  existing  circumstances  ; 
and  each  individual  group  may  correspond  to  the  infinite  variety  con- 
tained in  each  kingdom  in  Nature.  That  is,  the  lower  stratum  of 
society  may  comprehend  as  many  towns,  counties,  or  states,  as  may 
be  determined  by  general  desire,  and  by  a just  estimate  of  human 


744 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


character  and  its  qualifications ; and  these  again  may  be  subdivided 
into  a variety  of  families  or  associations.  And  then  they  will  corre- 
spond precisely  to  the  specific  compounds  that  are  contained  in  the 
mineral  kingdom.  There  is  an  infinite  variety  in  this  kingdom,  and 
all  have  distinctive  existences.  So  society  may  be  constructed  : and 
harmony  will  be  the  inevitable  consequence,  inasmuch  as  harmony  is 
invariably  manifested  in  the  mineral  kingdom,  as  a result  of  its 
structure. 

So  also  the  second  stratum  may  comprehend  as  many  portions  of 
towns,  counties,  or  states,  as  will  harmonize  with  the  situation  of  the 
lower  ; and  this  may  represent  the  vegetable  kingdom.  Yet  it  should 
only  be  distinguished  from  the  lower  and  higher  by  a different  struc- 
ture, though  one  calculated  to  perpetuate  individual  progression. 

So  with  the  third  stratum  ; and  so  also  with  the  fourth , which  may 
be  the  centre  of  the  human  family,  either  on  one  continent  or  o'n 
both,  and  situated  where  all  facilities  exist,  or  can  be  made  to  exist, 
by  which  its  influence  may  descend  through  all  the  lower  strata  and 
contribute  to  their  health,  happiness,  and  advancement.  From  this 
centre,  a just  administration  must, and  will  proceed  ; for  no  one  can 
be  the  governor,  emperor,  or  lord,  of  the  human  race,  unless  he  has 
attained  the  highest  possible  degree  of  human  wisdom.  Such  a one 
will  be  calculated  to  rule  and  govern  all  the  departments  of  human 
industry,  direct  and  perfect  the  establishment  of  all  conveniences, 
explore  and  investigate  all  phenomena,  and  distribute  peace,  justice, 
and  harmony,  to  all  without  distinction. 

Society  may  be  thus  organized,  inasmuch  as  the  structure  and  laws 
of  Nature  suggest  the  plan.  Moreover,  the  latter  constitute  a foun- 
dation upon  which  the  superstructure  may  be  erected  indestructibly. 
And  all  its  parts  may  be  united  by  the  same  laws,  actuated  by  the 
same  general  interests,  and  be  preserved  in  the  same  undisturbed 
harmony. 

Such  is  the  anatomy  of  society  presented  for  human  contemplation 
and  analysis.  It  is  merely  a general  suggestion  ; and  although  true, 
it  may  be  deemed  impracticable  by  many  good  and  intelligent  minds. 
Such  must  analyze  the  features  of  this  suggestion  ; and  if  it  is  not  found 
to  be  true,  and  more  suggestive  than  it  would  at  first  appear  to  be,  it 
should  lead  to  a better  structure  ; and  then  its  impulse  will  be  pure, 
useful,  and  remedial  of  the  present  disorganized  state  of  all  human 
society. 


A VOTCE  TO  MANKIND. 


745 


Such  is  the  cure  for  the  corroding  disease  dwelling  in  the  vitals  of 
the  human  race,  and  existing  in  every  society,  state,  nation,  and  em- 
pire, upon  the  earth.  The  disease  has  been  revealed  unexaggerated  ; 
its  remedy  is  simple  and  will  be  effectual,  if  properly  applied. 

Having  presented  society  in  its  disorganized  condition,  and  the 
principles  to  organize  it,  it  is  proper  to  explain  how  these  principles 
may  soon  be  comprehended,  and  their  teachings  applied  — and  how 
men  may  proceed,  without  much  destruction  of  interests  or  violence 
to  local  prejudices,  to  accomplish  the  reorganization.  This  can  be 
done  without  changing  the  component  parts  of  present  society,  and 
also  without  dislocating  men  from  their  present  positions,  or  destroy- 
ing their  situations,  except  in  a qualified  degree,  to  which  they  will 
cheerfully  accede,  and  thus  effect  the  general  millennium.  Remem- 
ber that  all  this  harmony  may  be  established  without  creating  any  se- 
rious conflict  or  disturbance  in  the  present  organization  of  social 
affairs.  But  in  order  to  accomplish  this,  a living  energy  must  in- 
spire every  philanthropist  and  every  enlightened  teacher,  and  they 
must  be  unceasing  for  a little  time  in  preaching  to  the  inhabitants  of 
the  earth,  “ Repent  ye,  for  the  kingdom  of  heaven  is  at  hand.”  Fot 
all  must  repent,  or,  in  other  words,  receive  the  conviction  that  dis- 
tributive justice  must  pervade  the  social  world  before  God’s  kingdom 
can  come,  and  his  will  be  done  on  earth  as  it  is  in  heaven  — or 
throughout  all  the  higher  spheres  of  celestial  happiness.  Keeping 
this  in  memory,  I will  now  proceed  to  direct  how  the  great  remedy 
maybe  obtained,  how  the  disease  may  be  arrested  and  the  system 
renovated,  and  how  the  divine  kingdom  may  be  established,  and  the 
new  heaven  and  new  earth  wherein  dwelleth  righteousness  may  be 
understood,  acknowledged,  applied,  and  established,  throughout  the 
human  race. 


§ 25.  To  succeed,  the  primary  movements  to  elevate  social  re- 
lations, and  to  establish  individual  industry,  may  be  commenced  on 
this  wise  : Six  agriculturists,  inspired  with  the  principles  of  charity 

and  the  spirit  of  improvement,  and  having  a desire  to  associate, 
may  form  themselves  into  an  association  or  corporation,  with  com 
bined  interests  and  desires  for  prosperity.  They  must  fully  under- 


746 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


stand  each  other,  both  as  to  their  physical  and  mental  qualifications 
and  must  knowhotv  near  they  can  approach  a unity  of  interests,  and 
how  much  each  can  contribute  to  the  interests  of  the  association. 

They  may  enter  into  an  agreement,  such  as  will  constitute  them 
a corporation.  This  agreement  must  be  based  upon  a plain  diagram 
representing  their  individual  possessions,  interests,  intentions,  and 
proposed  mode  of  condensing  and  organizing  labor.  This  instru- 
ment of  agreement  must  be  as  a map,  representing  their  farms,  with 
their  value,  their  situations,  their  qualities -of  soil  as  to  fertility  or  bar- 
renness, their  various  locations,  and  the  positions  which  they  re- 
spectively occupy  in  relation  to  the  nearest  village,  to  the  rivers  or 
ports  of  commerce,  and  the  existing  facilities  of  effecting  an  access 
to  the  most  populous  and  opulent  cities.  Moreover,  it  must  repre- 
sent every  kind  of  soil,  with  its  precise  condition,  as  productive  of 
vegetables,  oats,  rye,  wheat,  barley,  corn,  and  also  state  the  amount 
and  condition  of  meadow  and  wood  lands.  A clear  and  lucid  inves- 
tigation, calculation,  and  statement,  must  be  made  in  reference  to 
the  amount  of  labor  necessary  to-  bestow  upon  each  division  of  one 
or  all  of  the  farms  in  order  to  render  it  fertile,  productive,  accessible, 
and  remunerative. 

Each  individual  must  make  a clear  and  truthful  statement  of  the 
embarrassments,  obligations,  and  expenses,  to  which  he  is  at  present 
subject ; and  also  of  the  probable  amount  of  money  required  to  ad- 
vance the  condition  of  his  farm  to  a high  slate  of  cultivation. 

This  agreement  must  be  the  spontaneous  expression  of  their  be- 
nevolent and  united  minds,  impregnated  with  the  desire  and  intention 
to  remedy  their  own  estrangement  in  industrial  pursuits,  and  to  cor- 
respondingly benefit  community. 

Six  men,  possessing  farms  in  proper  relations  to  each  other,  would 
be  the  least  possible  number  who  could  concentrate  and  produce 
power  among  themselves,  such  as  would  be  sensibly  felt  by  all  sur- 
rounding them.  To  this  number  any  additional  number  may  be 
joined,  if  the  land  occupied  by  them  is  in  close  connexion,  and  un- 
broken by  any  opposing  landholder  or  agriculturist. 

After  deciding  on  the  structure  of  their  corporation,  one  of  the 
members,  who  is  most  competent,  should  be  chosen  to  officiate  as 
governor,  or  president,  and  recording  secretary.  He  should  be 
qualified  to  suggest  improvements,  and  to  decide  upon  the  most 
proper  mode  of  organizing  and  distributing  labor  advantageously. 
This  person  should  be  the  centre  around  which  the  rest  should  re- 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


747 


volve  or  act  in  unity,  and  to  whom  they  will  look  for  justice  in  his 
dispensations  and  propriety  in  his  suggestions  and  plans  of  labor  and 
improvement.  This  one  will  manage  the  affairs  of  the  association, 
and  be  as  a standard  to  the  corporation. 

After  having  spiritually  associated,  devised  their  plan  of  agree- 
ment, and  having  all  arrangements  in  order,  agreeable  to  the  situation 
and  interests  of  each  one,  it  is  proper  to  institute  the  most  searching 
investigations  as  to  what  may  beautify  their  land,  and  restore  fertility 
to  the  barren  portions  — and  as  to  the  most  feasible  plans  to  arrange 
and  condense  their  labor  for  the  accomplishment  of  this  end.  They 
must  understand  the  science  of  organic  chemistry  in  all  of  its  ramifi- 
cations, so  that  they  may  restore  to  weak  soil  its  required  equilibrium 
of  organic  matter,  and  thus  fertilize  and  render  it  productive.  They 
must  also  understand  and  apply  in  the  tilling  of  their  land  the  teach- 
ings of  modern  geology  and  magnetism.  They  must  learn  never  to 
exhaust  the  soil  of  its  requisite  chemical  properties,  which  is  now 
frequently  done  by  uninformed  farmers.  Soil  can  only  retain  its 
thriftiness  and  capacity  of  vegetable  production  by  having  restored 
to  its  bosom  as  much  elementary  matter  as  is  taken  from  it.  To 
sustain  the  fertility  of  the  soil,  then,  it  is  necessary  to  understand  the 
principles  of  geology  and  chemistry  ; the  qualities  of  marine  and  allu- 
vial deposites  ; the  action  of  decomposed  vegetable  and  animal  com- 
pounds ; the  constitution  of  the  earth  and  atmosphere,  and  the  mu- 
tual relation  which  exists  between  them,  and  their  co-operation  in 
rendering  fertile  a parsimonious  soil.  Understanding  these  impor- 
tant principles,  and  perceiving  their  practicability,  they  will  be  ena- 
bled to  devise  the  most  agreeable  means  of  applying  them,  so  as  to 
make  them  profitable  in  promoting  their  individual  wealth  and  gen- 
eral advancement. 

Then  they  must  inquire  into  the  various  modes  and  plans  of  or- 
ganizing and  combining  labor  ; how  much  labor  it  is  proper  to  be- 
stow upon  any  given  object ; at  what  time  it  should  be  bestowed,  and 
how  many  can  labor  profitably  to  accelerate  its  accomplishment. 
Knowing  these  things,  and  adopting  the  proper  plans  of  proceeding, 
they  should  call  to  their  assistance  as  many  laborers  as  can  properly 
and  profitably  be  employed. 

They  should  not  work  over  three  quarters  of  the  period  of  sun- 
light ; and  the  employment  of  each  one  must  be  of  such  a char- 
acter as  will  agree  with  his  constitutional  abilities  and  his  desire  to 
be  entrao-ed. 

O O 


74S 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


Tims  organized,  the  distribution  of  labor  for  each  week  may  be 
determined  at  the  close  of  the  previous  one  ; and  in  this  way  each 
person  will  understand  the  portion  assigned  him,  the  position  he  is 
to  occupy,  and  the  amount  of  labor  he  is  to  accomplish.  The  labor- 
ers should  be  distributed  in  groups  of  numbers  and  strength  sufficient 
to  perform  within  the  week  the  amount  to  them  allotted. 

Each  member  of  the  association  must  keep  a strict  account  of  his 
personal  and  general  expenses,  of  the  amount  of  labor  accomplished 
in  each  six  days  on  hisvfarm,  and  of  the  number  of  men  by  whom  it 
was  accomplished.  Thus  each  one,'  at  the  end  of  the  week,  should 
bring  to  the  governor  a truthful  register  of  labor  received  from  the 
groups  of  the  association. 

The  quarter  of  time  not  devoted  to  the  field  may  be  set  apart  for 
individual  diversion,  instruction,  study,  and  contemplation.  Let  it 
be  exclusively  devoted  to  all  things  pertaining  to  mental  and  moral 
improvement.  — And  thus  he  who  labors  will  labor  with  a pleasure 
and  profit  to  his  physical  being,  and  will  change  manual  labor  for 
mental  advancement  in  every  department  of  science,  art,  agriculture, 
and  spiritual  truth. 

In  this  manner  can  labor  be  condensed,  made  attractive,  profitable, 
and  elevating.  And  this  is  the  rudi mental  step  toward  establishing 
among  the  tillers  of  the  land  a reciprocal  movement,  and  a privilege 
of  assisting  themselves  and  community  to  a more  congenial  and  use- 
ful existence.  This  maybe  called  an  “ Agricultural  Association.” 
They  will  discover  that  they  have  the  advantage  over  all  individuals 
of  like  occupation  in  society,  and  that  they  will  be  enabled  to  supply 
the  requirements  of  a populous  village  with  more  ease  and  profitable- 
ness than  any  dealer,  merchant,  or  speculator. 

§ 26.  The  Firm,  in  some  thriving  and  populous  village,  town,  or 
city,  should  erect  a large  and  capacious  Storehouse,  which  should  be 
wisely  constructed  and  adapted  to  the  reception  of  their  various  pro- 
ductions. It  should  be  situated  conveniently,  and  made  in  every 
possible  manner  suitable  to  receive  tbeir  abundant  productions,  which 
may  be  distributed  according  to  the  wants  and  requirements  of  the 
people.  In  this  storehouse  they  must  deposite  in  order  the  various 
creations  of  their  industry,  which  should  be  valued  at  the  same  price 
which  the  community  are  compelled  to  pay  for  the  same  articles  to 
merchants  and  grocers  under  the  present  system  of  trade.  This 
storehouse  and  its  abundant  possessions,  belonging  to  the  Agricul- 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


749 


turist  Firm,  would  be  a living  illustration  of  the  advantages  of  organ- 
ized and  rewarded  labor,  and  a blessing  to  community. 

This  establishment  maybe  conducted  by  any  well-qualified  person 
chosen  by  the  association,  and  his  assistants  may  be  of  his  own 
choosing  ; and  they  all  should  belong  to  the  association,  and  to  a 
greater  or  less  extent  have  an  interest  in  its  stock  and  wealth,  so  that 
each  individual  may  have  an  interest  centred  in  the  prosperity  of  the 
Firm,  both  in  respect  to  the  farms  and  the  establishment.  Thus  a 
unity  of  action  would  exist  as  a spontaneous  result  of  the  situation 
of  each  individual ; and  this  would  remove  all  deception,  and  develop 
justice  and  honesty  in  each  being. 

Each  farmer  should  receive  credit  in  proportion  to  the  amount  of 
slock  by  him  deposited,  and  should  be  rewarded  in  proportion  to  its 
increasing  revenue.  A value  must  be  placed  upon  each  article  of 
produce  by  the  united  voice  of  the  whole  Firm.  This  should  be  a 
standard  by  which  each  parcel  should  be  valued  as  it  enters  the  es- 
tablishment ; and  credit  should  be  given  the  depositor  accordingly. 
The  amount  of  stores  in  the  establishment  will  be  governed  by  the 
productions  of  the  farms,  and  the  reward  of  each  laborer  will  hold  a 
relation  to  the  amount  of  produce  in,  and  the  benefits  derived  from, 
the  establishment.  Thus  there  will  be  a reciprocal  exchange  of  in- 
terests, which  will  secure  the  permanency  of  the  association,  and  ren- 
der inexhaustible  the  capital  of  the  Agriculturist  Firm. 

The  contents  of  the  storehouse  may  be  sold  to  the  community  as 
they  demand,  at  a price  determined  by  the  benevolence  of  the  Firm, 
— who  under  such  circumstances  can  sell  at  least  fifteen  per  cent, 
cheaper  than  the  same  articles  can  be  sold  by  individual  tradesmen 
in  villages  and  cities.  And  even  then  the  productions  will  yield  the 
producers  .at  least  twenty-five  per  cent,  profit.  And  according  as  the 
distribution  of  labor  is  advantageous  can  this  ratio  be  increased,  even 
to  double. 

There  will  be  a mutual  deposition  of  capital,  and  a corresponding 
interest,  which  will  constitute  the  whole  association  an  established 
monopoly,  and  which  will  compel  a change  in  the  present  order  of 
industry,  trade,  and  commerce.  The  influence  of  such  an  associa- 
tion, properly  situated,  would  extend  to  adjoining  townships  and 
counties,  and  would  be  sensibly  felt  in  various  portions  of  the  state. 
This  would  attract  -one  farmer  after  another  into  the  association,  to 
arrest  the  depreciation  of  his  land,  and  the  decrease  of  the  inflow  of 
wealth  from  its  productions.  No  individual  farmer  could  compete 


750 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


with  the  association,  and  consequently  its  influence  would  continu- 
ally widen  by  taking  more  into  its  constitution.  And  an  influence, 
corresponding  to  that  exerted  on  all  members  of  the  association, 
would  be  exerted  on  the  inhabitants  of  the  adjoining  towns  and  coun- 
ties ; so  that  by  a gradual  yet  permanent  expansion,  this  system  of 
agricultural  labor  would  ultimately  comprehend  a whole  state.  Then 
other  states  could  not  resist  its  tranquillizing  influence,  and  would 
adopt  a similar  mode  of  combining  wealth  with  industry,  and  interest 
with  energy  and  knowledge. 

At  first  it  would  be  best  for  associations  of  not  less  than  six  to 
form  in  various  parts  of  towns,  counties,  or  states,  where  all  neces- 
sary facilities  are  existing,  and  all  circumstances  are  such  as  to  justify 
the  enterprise.  These  small  associations  being  once  established, 
would  enlarge  until  the  interest  of  one  would  run  into  and  become 
the  interest  of  another;  and  ultimately  a whole  state  would  be  com- 
bined as  one  Firm,  governed  by  the  same  principles  of  justice  and 
industry,  and  actuated  by  the  same  interests  to  all  physical  and  intel- 
lectual improvement. 

The  first  good  object  of  such  an  association  will  be  to  combine  in- 
terests, wealth,  power,  sympathy,  and  benevolence,  and  to  bring  men 
in  closer  relations  as  to  their  social  and  intellectual  natures.  Their 
interests  will  consist,  not  in  the  accumulation  of  needless  wealth,  but 
in  happiness — which  each  person  will  enjoy,  from  being  so  situated 
as  to  render  others  happy.  Not  for  the  purpose  of  speculating  upon 
community  will  the  association  labor,  but  to  ameliorate  the  condition 
of  the  mechanic  and  the  various  professions,  by  supplying  their  wants 
abundantly,  and  at  a price  which  falls  within  their  resources. 

The  second  object  will  be  to  combine  labor  so  judiciously  that 
one  man,  by  working  no  more  than  under  the  present  system,  may 
produce  twice  the  amount  of  labor,  and  create  more  food  for  general 
consumption.  And  thus  it  will  be  proved  that  organized  industry  is 
the  only  proper  and  effectual  means  of  supplying  the  requirements 
of  consumers,  and  making  labor  agreeable,  healthful,  instructive, 
and  remunerative. 

Another  object  will  be  to  increase  the  demand  for  laborers,  and 
advance  the  reward  of  labor  — thereby  giving  employment  to  those 
who  are  now  idle,  and  providing  a proper  subsistence  for  those  for- 
eign immigrants  who  are  becoming  citizens  of  the  United  States,  and 
are  being  distributed  in  various  portions  of  each  state,  destitute  of 
property,  health,  and  food.  By  increasing  the  demand  for  labor, 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


751 


and  augmenting  its  reward,  industry  will  become  attractive  to  those 
who  ore  compelled  to  labor  for  a subsistence.  And  by  having  this 
labor  well  distributed,  and  applied  wisely  and  scientifically,  it  will 
make  the  soil  productive,  so  that  under  any  atmospheric  vicissitudes 
it  will  yield  enough  to  supply  the  wants  of  the  whole  association,  the 
laborers  included,  and  supply  the  storehouse  with  sufficient  to  redeem 
all  expenses,  and  dispense  an  adequate  and  agreeable  reward  to  each 
member. 

Another  valuable  object  will  be  attained  ; and  that  is,  that  six  farms 
of  ordinary  size,  conveniently  situated  in  reference  to  the  ports  of 
commerce  or  towns  and  cities,  would  be  made  to  produce  as  much 
as  ten  farms  of  equal  size  and  quality  of  soil  under  the  present  system 
of  cultivation.  Three  fourths  more  may  be  derived  from  one  farm 
than  is  under  the  existing  crude  system  of  labor  and  agricultural  sci- 
ence. An  application  of  the  principles  and  teachings  of  chemistry 
in  the  cultivation  of  the  soil,  would  restore  to  it  the  most  surprising 
thriftiness  and  richness  of  production.  It  could  in  a little  time  be 
made  to  produce  sufficient  to  preserve  its  equilibrium  of  moisture 
and  fertility,  and  also  to  supply  the  increasing  wants  of  the  associa- 
tion and  the  community. 

§ 27.  If  six  farms,  then,  can  be  made  to  yield  as  much  as  ten  do 
under  the  present  system  of  agriculture,  is  it  not  reasonable  to  sup- 
pose that  the  various  vicissitudes  of  the  seasons  can  not  destroy  more 
than  the  amount  ordinarily  produced  by  four  farms'?  And  then  the 
productions  of  six  would  yet  be  preserved,  which  would  afford  an 
ample  reward  to  the  laborer  and  the  capitalist.  No  season,  however 
unfavorable,  ever  destroys  more  than  one  half  of  the  ordinary  pro- 
ductions of  the  soil.  And  even  what  would  remain  in  such  a one 
would,  in  association,  more  than  supply  all  wants,  and  leave  un- 
touched all  individual  investments. 

Men  who  engage  in  this  enterprise  must  not  feel  that  the  accu- 
mulation of  money  is  their  object,  but  the  greatest  amount  of  happi- 
ness. Therefore  the  six  agriculturists  must  be  men  having  a high 
sense  of  justice,  benevolence,  and  sympathy,  not  only  for  each  other, 
but  as  respects  the  social  condition  of  the  community  at  large.  They 
must  feel  that  money  is  not  valuable  as  productive  of  happiness  ; that 
it  is  no  security  against  the  invasion  of  disease,  poverty,  or  destitu- 
tion ; that  it  is  no  benefit  to  their  children,  to  community,  or  to  the 
world.  They  must  feel  that  money  is  now  but  a subject  of  individual 


752 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


and  general  infatuation  — and  that  it  is  a most  useless  substance, 
and  should  not  attract  die  attention  of  the  noble  mind,  nor  command 
the  obedience  of  that  dignified  soul  who  feels  that  he  lives  for  wis- 
dom and  happiness,  and  not  for  slavish  degradation.  With  these 
feelings,  they  will  come  together  and  join  their  individual  posses- 
sions, for  the  purpose  of  increasing  power,  charity,  benevolence,  and 
happiness.  They  must  not  join  for  the  purpose  of  increasing  indi- 
vidual wealth,  or  speculating  on  the  laborer  or  the  community  ; but 
for  the  purpose  of  increasing  the  demand  for,  and  the  reward  of, 
labor,  and  to  beautify  the  soil  by  applying  scientific  principles,  and 
thus  perfecting  its  fruitful  qualities. 

These  men  must  well  understand  the  depths  of  their  own  judgments, 
and  of  their  feelings  of  benevolence  and  desires  for  unity.  — And  if 
each  can  arrive  at  the  conclusion  that  they  are  living  here  to  live 
again,  and  that  their  true  desires  and  destinies  are  to  procure  happi- 
ness, then  they  may  form  an  association  impervious  to  all  selfish  and 
aristocratic  innovations.  They  must  not  join  their  farms  for  the  pur- 
pose of  receiving  as  much  interest  as  under  their  present  mode  of 
cultivation,  but  for  the  purpose  of  feeling  as  one  family,  united  in  their 
interests  and  enterprise,  and  one  in  their  intentions  to  benefit  the 
laboring  classes,  themselves,  and  the  community  at  large. 

In  justice,  there  is  no  right  to  claim  a stipulated  interest  for  the 
appropriation  of  any  portion  of  land,  inasmuch  as  the  soil  is  a be- 
stowment  and  dispensation  of  Nature,  unmerited  by  the  existence, 
ingenuity,  or  industry,  of  any  human  being.  In  truth,  labor  is  the 
use  and  destiny  of  man  on  earth,  especially  when  that  labor  is  attrac- 
tive, well  distributed,  and  well  compensated.  Then  the  association 
must  exist  on  this  wise  : — 

The  existence,  person,  or  body,  of  every  laborer,  must  be  consid- 
ered as  the  only  real  and  natural  investment  in  the  capital  of  the 
Firm.  The  industry  of  each  individual  is  the  personal  bestowment 
of  capital,  for  which  each  is  entitled  to  every  blessing  and  real  re- 
quirement of  life,  and  for  the  bestowment  of  which  the  association  as 
a body  is  accountable.  In  this  way,  each  individual  would  feel  an 
interest  in  the  amount  of  labor  accomplished,  and  its  results,  and 
therefore  an  interest  in  the  action  of  the  whole.  La.bor  alone  must 
be  remunerated  ; capital  should  be  considered  as  an  auxiliary  — as 
a dispensation  of  Nature  — and  the  foundation  upon  which  the  pro- 
posed superstructure  can  rest  and  be  successfully  established. 

The  object  of  having  a standard  price  to  each  article,  and  a con- 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


753 


ventional  rule  as  regulating  the  creation,  deposition,  and  distribution, 
of  the  productions,  is  to  facilitate  the  preservation  of  memoranda,  and 
to  conform  as  much  as  possible  to  mercantile  arrangements  that  are 
existing  ; and  also  that  there  may  be  a definite  value  affixed  to  each 
article,  to  labor,  and  to  the  goods  or  property  which  each  member 
appropriates  to  himself  from  the  productions  of  the  whole.  These 
rules  of  procedure  would  be  proper,  in  order  to  conform  in  a meas- 
ure to  present  usages  and  cherished  prejudices,  and  to  a distaste  for 
a too  sudden  transition  from  the  present  system  to  such  an  association 
of  labor  and  interest. 

Labor  must  have  a reward  prescribed  in  the  rules  of  the  compact  , 
and  that  must  be  in  proportion  to  the  amount  and  kind  of  work  per- 
formed, and  the  circumstances  under  which  each  one  labors  : each 
having  a position  assigned  him  in  the  field,  which  he  is  qualified  to 
sustain.  And  this  rule  must  apply  to  all,  from  the  one  who  digs  the 
trench,  to  the  governor  of  the  association  ; and  the  reward  in  all  cases 
must  be  graduated  according  to  the  labor  accomplished  by  the  indi- 
vidual, and  must  be  determined  by  the  wisdom  of  the  enlightened 
members  and  the  sanction  of  the  governor. 

Remember  that  each  one  must  be  situated  advantageously  in  the 
field  and  in  every  other  department  of  the  Agriculturist  Association. 
Let  Wisdom  govern  the  distribution  and  compensation  of  labor,  and 
not  desire  or  impulse.  Things  being  situated  in  this  wise,  labor  could 
be  rewarded  justly  and  proportionally ; and  this  by  a conventional 
sum  established  by  the  wisdom,  justice,  and  benevolence,  of  the  first 
associates.  And  these  must  be  careful  not  to  have  more  interest  in 
self-emolument  than  in  the  cheerfulness  and  happiness  of  the  laborer. 

Understand,  then,  that  each  man  is  to  labor  three  fourths,  of  a day, 
for  which  he  is  to  be  credited,  and  is  to  have  as  much  as  is  necessary 
for  his  comfort,  for  which  he  shall  be  charged.  At  the  end  of  each 
season,  a general  statement  of  affairs  must  be  made  and  presented  to 
each  member,  stating  the  amount  of  labor  performed,  its  reward,  the 
amount  of  produce  received,  and  the  balance  of  its  proceeds  after 
expenses  are  defrayed.  And  after  each  laborer  is  duly  rewarded, 
the  unexhausted  wealth  must  be  justly  distributed  to  each  primary 
depositor  of  property,  as  the  just  interest  on  his  investment. 

Labor  is  the  first  and  only  thing  absolutely  demanding  reward. 
An  interest  must  be  paid  upon  its  outlay ; and  after  this  the  capitalists 
may  receive  the  remaining  sum,  more  or  less,  as  interest  on  their 
primary  deoosition  of  property.  The  land  can  not  be  destroyed  — 

48 


ft 


754  A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 

will  not  lose  its  value  — will  never  fail  to  be  a substantial  guaranty 
against  poverty  or  destitution.  The  human  body — the  laborer — is 
the  only  rat?  capital  demanding  an  interest  from  the  wealth,  strength, 
and  opulence,  of  the  association.  And  it  is  the  man  and  his  efforts 
that  must  he  appreciated,  and  not  the  unmerited  soil,  to  which  no 
man  by  nature  has  a just  and  exclusive  claim. 

§ 28.  And  in  order  to  conform  to  the  present  state  of  education, 
and  to  existing  social  movements,  it  is  proper  to  commence  a new 
heaven  and  a new  earth  with  as  much  caution,  gentleness,  and  judg- 
ment, as  can  he  brought  to  bear,  in  reference  to  the  present  and  a 
better  system  of  social  and  intellectual  affairs.  And  hence  the  ne- 
cessity of  having  good  and  benevolent  men  to  give  the  first  impetus, 
and  to  consequently  compel  the  remaining  portions  of  the  community 
to  adopt  a new  system  of  social  organization.  A sacrifice  must  be 
made  for  the  purpose  of  attaining  a glorious  reward,  and  a more  de- 
sirable state  of  things. 

The  generality  of  minds  will  oppose  this  benevolent  system,  and 
believe  it  to  be  impracticable  ; but  this  will  not  arrest  the  efforts  of 
six  well-associated  agriculturists,  and  the  influence  which  they  will 
exert  over  all  the  portions  of  each  town,  county,  state,  kingdom,  and 
continent. 

These  are  the  incipient  movements  necessary  to  institute  or  create 
from  the  old  a new  world  in  respect  to  social  interests  and  happiness. 
These  first  movements,  after  having  been  in  operation  for  a few  sea- 
sons, will  resolve  themselves  into  systems  already  conceived  and 
partly  established.  New  suggestions  will  be  made,  leading  to  im- 
provements in  every  department  of  agriculture,  science,  social  reform, 
and  happiness.  After  being  thus  organized,  each  person  will  con- 
ceive how  he  can  improve  and  advance  his  individual  interests,  and 
also  the  objects  of  universal  benevolence.  Therefore  the  community 
will  glide  imperceptibly  from  this  crude  system  of  association  to  the 
highest  point  of  physical,  social,  and  intellectual  cultivation  ; and  ul- 
timately they  will  arrive  at  that  eminence  of  perfection  which  will 
establish  peace  on  earth,  love  to  the  neighbor,  and  good-will  to 
all  men. 

On  this  rudimental  principle  may  the  association  be  conceived 
and  established.  And  it  will  resolve  itself  from  one  system  into 
another,  and  incessant  progress  will  exemplify  the  constitutional  ten- 
dency of  human  nature,  until  the  earth  will  yield  abundantly;  until 


A VOTCE  TO  MANKIND. 


755 


the  farms  appear  like  gardens  ; until  industry  is  appreciated  as  a bles- 
sing; and  every  member,  participating  in  the  goodness  thereof,  will 
fulfil  the  destiny  of  his  creation.  And  all  being  associated  in  inter- 
ests and  wisdom,  will  exercise  distributive  justice,  and  be  happy  ! 

Love,  unity,  peace,  power,  wisdom,  wealth,  and  happiness,  will  be 
the  inherent  attributes  of  the  constitution  thus  formed.  And  these 
attributes  will  spring  up  and  flow  forth  among  the  various  and  higher 
branches  of  art,  science,  and  mechanism.  Once  establish  such  an 
association,  and  the  demand  for  the  invention,  perfection,  and  manu- 
facturing, of  agricultural  implements,  will  be  increased.  This  will 
arouse  the  genius  of  every  inventive  mind,  as  men  will  see  the  need 
of  instruments  to  till,  beautify,  and  make  fruitful,  the  soil.  The  in- 
fluence of  this  will  extend  to  all  mechanics  and  their  various  objects 
of  pursuit.  Consequently  a corresponding  association  must  be  formed 
among  them,  so  that  they  may  supply  the  demands  of  the  farmer,  and 
so  that  the  two  associations  may  freely  exchange  productions  and 
wealth  with  each  other. 

An  association  of  mechanics  for  the  purpose  of  perfecting  and 
utilizing  machinery  may  be  composed  of  from  fifteen  to  thirty  mem- 
bers. An  article  of  agreement  must  join  them  in  unity,  and  specify 
all  their  various  investments,  their  proposed  distribution  of  labor,  the 
kind  needed,  the  qualifications  of  the  members  to  perform  the  various 
and  specific  branches  of  mechanical  labor,  the  number  of  hours  to 
work  in  one  day  (which  should  be  with  them  not  more  than  two 
thirds  of  sunlight),  the  advantages  which  they  will  have  in  respect  to 
commerce,  and  the  proposed  location  of  their  association,  which 
should  be  in  a convenient  and  accessible  place.  These  things  must 
be  all  clearly  stated  upon  their  articles  of  agreement.  They  must 
have  their  principles  of  mechanism  distinctly  impressed  upon  each 
laborer  ; and  in  the  same  things  must  all  their  novices  and  apprentices 
be  instructed.  They  must  comprehend  the  requirements  and  demands 
of  the  farmer.  They  must  understand  the  relation  which  exists  between 
chemical  and  mechanical  principles;  they  must  study  well  to  adapt  each 
movement  in  their  employment  to  the  various  occupations  and  labors 
instituted  by  the  agriculturists.  They  must  learn  wTell  to  perfect  and 
condense  labor,  by  inventing  and  establishing  machinery  within  the 
circumference  of  the  farmer’s  interests,  in  the  form  of  saw-mills,  flour- 
mills, manufactories,  and  establishments  for  the  construction  of  agri- 
cultural implements. 


7 56 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


An  association  of  mechanics  may  so  diminish  their  individual  lia- 
bilities and  expenses,  as  to  render  machinery  available  to  all  demand- 
ed, and  that  at  a price  corresponding  to  the  cheapness  of  the  soil’s 
productions.  As  mechanics  are  now  situated,  they  lose  all  the  ad- 
vantages of  invention  and  wealth,  because  they  are  existing  isolatedly, 
each  striving  to  compete  with,  or  take  advantage  of,  his  neighbor. 
They  have  power  and  wealth  immense,  but  this  being  distributed 
among  individuals,  loses  in  influence  and  profitableness  : and  thus 
they  are  weak,  though  strong  ; and  are  contending,  though  one  in 
occupation. 

An  association  will  remedy  all  these  evils  ; for  instead  of  each  me- 
chanic having  an  establishment  incurring  individual  expenses,  they 
may  conjoin,  combine  their  power,  wisdom,  and  wealth,  unite  their 
movements,  and  organize  their  laborers  ; and  then  the  expenses  of  a 
large  association  will  not  exceed  those  of  five  individual  establish- 
ments as  these  now  exist.  Instead  of  having  workshops  disconnected, 
they  may  have  them  all  combined  in  one  well-constructed  establish- 
ment erected  by  the  association,  sustained  by  their  united  wealth,  and 
supported  by  the  immense  productions  of  the  Agricultural  Associa- 
tion. Every  laborer  could  obtain  provision  for  himself  and  his  fam- 
ily with  ease  and  without  fear  of  destitution,  because  provisions  would 
exist  in  abundance.  Thus  cheerfully  impelled  onward,  each  me- 
chanic would  gravitate  to  the  establishment  of  the  association,  and 
enjoy  a pleasure  in  industry.  His  mind  would  be  unclouded  with 
the  fear  of  poverty  and  domestic  necessities.  He  would  work  the 
time  allotted,  and  devote  the  remainder  of  the  day  to  amusement, 
instruction,  contemplation,  and  investigation.  He  would  feel  an  in- 
terest in  labor,  both  for  his  own  personal  and  for  the  general  welfare. 
He  would  not  be  fatigued  with  gratification  or  monotony  — but  the 
hours  of  labor  would  be  a relief  from  other  pursuits  in  which  he 
might  be  engaged  ; and  the  variety  would  make  existence  desirable 
and  render  it  a blessing.  Such  would  be  the  situation  and  condition 
of  each  member  of  the  association. 


§ 29.  Each  member  must  be  interested  in  his  own  success  and 
he  success  of  the  whole  establishment.  Each  one  must  consider  his 
person  — his  body  — as  living  capital  invested  : his  labor  will  be  the 
interest  of  that  capital,  which  will  supply  his  individual  necessities, 
and  conduce  to  the  wealth  and  emolument  of  the  whole  association. 
For  remember  that  labor,  when  justly  appreciated,  organized,  and 


A VOICE  TQ  MANKIND. 


757 


remunerated,  will  yield  more  absolute  wealth  than  it  now  can,  under 
the  present  system  of  fatiguing  and  disgusting  employment.  One 
man  would  accomplish  as  much  in  two  thirds  of  one  day,  thus  situ- 
ated, as  three  would  at  present.  Then  the  reward  of  that  labor, 
being  proportionate,  would  more  than  supply  his  necessities,  and 
would  contribute  to  enrich  the  treasury  of  the  association  besides. 

As  labor  is  distributed  at  present  among  mechanics,  at  least  one 
third  of  the  labor  apparently  accomplished  results  in  no  good,  but  an 
absolute  injury.  Among  mechanics,  there  are  some  who  obstruct 
the  process  of  business  and  counteract  the  efforts  of  others  : for  what 
one  does  is  undone  by  another.  They  are  like  a machine  disabled, 
and  unmoved  by  any  adequate  power,  foreign  or  inherent.  The 
parts  of  this  machine  are  the  laborers.  They,  as  cogs  in  a wheel, 
should  be  situated  with  reference  to  each  other  so  as  to  produce  har- 
mony in  their  motion,  and  power  in  their  action  and  influence.  Each 
man,  as  a cog-wheel  of  the  machine,  must  be  relatively  and  wisely 
placed,  in  order  to  realize  all  the  harmony  and  accomplish  all  the 
labor  desired. 

On  this  principle  must  labor  be  organized  : In  the  mechanical  es- 
tablishment, each  member  will  have  his  position  and  labor  allotted 
to  him  by  the  judgment  of  the  governor  or  qualified  judge  of  justice 
and  industry.  Each  member,  then,  will  assume  a position  in  the 
living  machine  of  human  industry  in  which  he  may  assist  those  below 
and  above  him,  and  contribute  to  the  wealth,  strength,  and  harmony, 
of  the  whole. 

This  establishment  should  be  near  some  thriving  village  or  opulent 
city,  and  accessible  to  some  seaport,  so  that  they  may  hold  commerce 
with  regions  where  their  materials  exist,  and  with  all  manufacturing 
establishments  in  the  state  or  states  of  the  continent. 

Their  chief  object  must  be  to  assist  the  agriculturist  in  his  enno- 
bling enterprise.  They  must  feel  an  interest  in  beautifying  and  per- 
fecting the  soil,  so  that  all  wants  may  be  supplied.  An  association 
thus  constituted  would  not  long  exist  before  their  interests  would  run 
into  and  inseparably  unite  them  with  the  Agriculturist  Association. 
For  farmers,  being  enlightened  in  the  science  of  cultivation,  would 
feel  the  immediate  importance  of  mechanical  invention,  and  of  the 
application  of  mechanical  principles  and  machinery  in  the  cultivation 
of  the  earth.  They  would  discover  that  machines,  not  yet  in  their 
possession,  would  be  useful  as  auxiliaries.  Thus  their  demand  for 
mechanical  labor  would  be  increased.  This  would  stimulate  the  as- 


758 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


sociation  to  study,  construct,  and  perfect,  machinery  to  suit  the  re- 
quirements of  the  soil  and  its  cultivators.  This  would  give  them 
labor  immense  ; and  hence  they  could  not  resist  the  feeling  of  inter- 
estedness in  the  welfare  and  improvement  of  those  requiring  their 
inventions.  Thus  the  mechanic  would  feel  an  interest  in  the  aim- 

O 

culturist  — the  result  of  which  would  be  a combination  and  conden- 
sation of  wealth  and  power  ; and  thus  the  whole  would  become  an 
Agri-mcchanical  Association. 

The  bodily  necessities  of  tbe  multitude  thus  employed  would  cre- 
ate a substantial  centre  of  interest  for  the  various  tradesmen  and  me- 
chanical productors  that  now  exist  individually  in  society.  The 
abundance  of  cattle  and  herds  produced  would  contribute  very  largely 
to  the  interests  of  the  manufacturers  of  leather  ; and  they,  by  follow- 
ing similar  suggestions  and  improvements,  would  concentrate  and 
combine  their  occupation  in  a form  so  as  to  compete  and  correspond 
with  those  who  supply  them  with  business,  at  a price  in  inverse  pro- 
portion to  the  abundance  of  the  stock  produced.  The  leather-man- 
ufacturers would  soon  discover  that  the  articles  of  their  creation  can 
be  supplied  with  more  abundance  and  ease  under  this  system  than 
under  the  present,  and  their  processes  would  be  so  greatly  improved 
and  accelerated  as  to  enable  them  to  manufacture  their  leather  with 
more  promptness  and  pleasure,  and  then  to  afford  the  community 
their  productions  at  a price  corresponding  to  the  price  of  that  which 
they  receive. 

The  shoe-manufacturers  would  then  find  it  proper  and  profitable  to 
form  themselves  into  a similar  association.  One  association  in  this 
branch  may  be  composed  of  from  seventy-five  to  one  hundred  mem- 
bers. With  an  equal  distribution  of  labor  according  to  individual 
ability  and  desire,  they  may  combine  their  stock,  labor,  and  move- 
ments, and  produce  one  third  more  than  the  sSme  number  of  men  at 
present,  under  the  most  favorable  circumstances.  Each  one  may 
have  his  peculiar  branch  allotted  to  him,  and  not  be  compelled  to  do 
any  more  than  his  interest  may  dictate  — remembering  that  his  inter- 
est must  be  the  interest  of  the  association.  Similar  principles  of 
labor  and  investment  must  be  adopted  as  in  the  other  associations  ; 
and  the  object  of  their  labor  and  productions  must  be  centred  in  the 
desire  to  supply  as  abundantly  as  possible  the  demands  of  the  Agri- 
mechanical Association  and  the  poor  in  society.  Inasmuch  as  their 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


759 


expenses  will  be  decreased  from  one  third  to  one  half,  thus  associ- 
ated, it  is  agreeable  to  reason  to  suppose  that  what  they  may  produce 
will  flow  forth  and  supply  all  demands  with  a spontaneousness  that 
will  encourage  every  laborer  and  bless  every  destitute  being. 

In  like  manner  may  an  association  of  hatters  be  formed  — the  num- 
ber of  members  being  the  same.  There  should  be  with  them  the 
same  investment  of  body,  interest,  and  labor,  and  the  same  recipro- 
cal and  harmonious  movement  should  be  established.  And  the  ob- 
ject to  be  attained  must  in  every  particular  be  similar  to  that  of  the 
shoe-manufacturers. 

So  likewise  may  the  clothiers  or  garment-makers  be  joined,  and  be 
producers  of  wealth  and  happiness  upon  the  same  reciprocal  principles. 

And  there  are  minor  occupations,  all  of  which  should  be  compre- 
hended within  the  three  great  associations.  They  may  be  so  situ- 
ated as  to  have  their  interests  parallel  with  the  interests  of  the  organ- 
ized bodies,  which  will  be  planned  and  elucidated  by  those  who  will 
study  the  principles  of  social  industry,  interest,  wealth,  and  power. 

Men  may  pass  from  the  present  into  this  system  without  any  ma- 
terial sacrifice,  and  with  the  full  assurance  of  retaining  their  present 
personal  possessions  ; and  if  vigorous  in  their  enterprise,  they  will 
acquire  much  more. 

30.  There  is  no  means  at  first  to  ameliorate  the  condition  and 
curtail  the  labor  of  females.  At  present,  each  female  parent  has  as 
much  labor  to  accomplish  in  her  household  as  three  can  with  propri- 
ety do.  The  reason  is  clear  : Every  woman  having  a family  is 
obliged  to  struggle  through  isolated  labor  unassisted,  and  with  do- 
mestic embarrassments  which  are  frequent  and  increasing.  And  the 
labor  of  every  family  is  as  much  as  the  labor  of  three  would  be  if 
they  were  situated  nearer  to  each  other,  so  that  one  large  and  well- 
constructed  machine,  by  the  assistance  of  a few  females,  would  do 
all  the  washing  of  a large  number  of  families.  And  baking,  sewing, 
embroidery,  horticulture,  and  all  labor  suitable  to  each  qualified  fe- 
male, may  be  performed  with  more  ease,  less  embarrassment,  and 
with  delight.  These  are  among  the  progressive  steps  not  as  yet  well 
Ao  urge,  inasmuch  as  they  will  be  the  spontaneous  effects  of  the  prima- 
ry movements  herein  recommended  for  the  farmer  and  the  mechanic. 

The  order,  form,  and  influence,  of  these  co-operative  associations, 
will  legitimately  extend  to  the  manufacturers  ofi  cotton  and  woollen 


760 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


fabrics ; and  the  action  upon  them  will  be  effectual  and  salutary. 
They  will  find  it  impossible  to  subsist  under  their  present  system  of 
labor : for  the  opulence  and  strength  of  the  Agri-mechanical  Associ- 
ation will  indigate  the  possibility  of  establishing  manufactories  of  a 
more  agreeable  and  productive  nature.  The  manufacturers,  then, 
will  be  driven  to  the  exercise  of  reason  and  justice,  a conformity  to 
which,  however,  will  be  found  more  profitable  and  agreeable  than 
their  present  isolated  operations.  The  result  will  be  a reorganization 
and  condensation  of  labor  among  this  class  ; and  its  remuneration 
will  create  an  interest  and  happiness  among  the  operatives. 

Of  the  cotton  and  wool  manufacturers,  the  proprietors  of  from  four 
to  six  establishments  may  associate,  unite  their  wealth,  combine  their 
strength,  and  become  a powerful  monopoly  whose  influence  will  ex- 
tend through  every  state  and  into  other  kingdoms.  They,  like  other 
assQciationists,  will  discover  the  proper  means  of  establishing  their 
interests  and  organizing;  their  labor  in  due  relation  to  the  interests 
and  labor  of  the  agriculturist  and  the  mechanic. 

In  foreign  kingdoms,  operatives  are  compelled  to  labor  from  two 
thirds  to  three  fourths  of  every  twenty-four  hours  unrewarded.  Their 
physical  energies  are  prostrated,  their  labor  is  misdirected,  and  their 
productions  are  not  much  honor  to  the  employer,  being  associated  in 
the  mind  with  poverty,  disease,  and  death.  An  association  may  so 
direct  the  movements  of  the  laborers  as  to  make  them  all  productive, 
pleasurable,  interesting,  and  remunerative.  Those  who  engage  in, 
and  become  members  of,  the  association,  may  have  their  respective 
positions  assigned  to  them  in  the  various  branches  of  labor  in  the 
establishment.  So  well  may  they  be  arranged  in  forms,  series,  and 
groups  — in  positions,  movements,  and  qualifications  — that  all  united 
will  be  as  a moving  machine,  exceedingly  productive  of  the  various 
articles  they  conjoin  to  create.  In  the  manufactories,  this  system  of 
labor  has  already  arrived  to  some  degree  of  perfection.  Manufactur- 
ers exercise  more  wisdom  in  the  distribution  of  labor  than  do  most 
other  men.  Yet  they  are  laboring  under  disadvantages  and  monopo- 
lizing influences,  foreign  and  immediate,  which  compel  them  to  en- 
force the  operatives  to  more  labor  than  they  in  justice  can  be  required 
to  perform,  and  to  reduce  their  compensation  — and  all  for  the  pur- 
pose of  overcoming,  and  yet  sustaining,  monopoly  and  competition. . 

Their  form  of  association  will  be  derived  from  those  established 
before  them.  The  most  active  means  must  be  instituted,  the  most 
enlightened  ingenuity  must  be  exercised,  and  the  most  benevolent 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


761 


and  just  feelings  cultivated  ; and  these  will  secure  harmony  in  their 
proceedings,  success  in  their  enterprise,  and  unity  in  their  stock, 
strength,  labor,  wealth,  and  benevolence. 

Their  interests  are  so  intimately  allied  to  those  of  the  wool  and 
cotton  growers,  that  it  will  be  impossible  for  one  to  thrive  without 
affecting  the  other  correspondingly.  The  perfection  of  agricultural 
science,  and  the  knowledge  of  the  constituent  parts  of  the  vegetable 
and  animal  forms,  will  give  to  the  cultivator  of  the  soil  a controlling- 
influence  over  the  mechanic  and  the  manufacturer.  He  will  learn 
to  produce  well,  cheaply,  and  abundantly,  and  even  not  to  feel  the 
expense  of  the  production.  The  wool,  selected  in  parcels  of  various 
degrees  of  refinement,  may  by  the  Agriculturist  Association  be  made 
suitable  to  enter  the  machine  to  come  forth  in  cloth  for  the  com- 
munity. 

If  manufacturers  will  not  unite  their  operations  with  those  of  the  cul- 
tivator, the  mechanics,  so  intimately  connected,  will  unite  in  estab- 
lishing a manufactory  for  their  own  benefit  and  objects  of  benevo- 
lence— and  thus  drive  those,  who  are  not  willing,  to  organize  them- 
selves correspondingly  without,  to  flow  into,  and  become  members 
of,  the  united  Establishment.  Once  join  the  farmer  and  mechanic 
in  unity  and  benevolence  of  action,  and  the  whole  social  world  will 
be  obliged  to  follow  their  example,  or  form  a close  relation  to  the 
associations  that  will  be  already  established. 

Thus  the  sympathy  will  be  communicated  from  the  agricultural 
association  to  the  various  departments  of  trade,  mechanism,  and  man- 
ufacturing. And  the  germ  once  deposited  on  the  bosom  of  the  soil, 
will  grow  up  unimpeded,  until  all  other  departments  of  society  will 
come  into  corresponding  unity  of  action  and  interest. 


§ 31.  The  next  and  most  important  movement  will  be  among  the  va- 
rious professions.  The  great  load  of  corruption  and  social  disease  ari- 
sing from  their  vitiating  situations  will  then  be  nearly  removed,  and  every 
member  will  become  a useful  wheel  in  the  great  machine  of  humani- 
ty. The  immediate  effect  of  the  preceding  associations  will  be  felt 
among  the  legal  profession.  For  men  will  have  learned  to  exercise 
the  principles  of  legal  and  moral  justice  in  their  own  lives,  and  in 
the  affairs  of  their  various  establishments.  There  will  be  no  neces- 
sity for  long  and  tedious  suits  concerning  personal  or  real  estates. 
The  business  of  chancery  will  be  diminished.  The  exercise  of  su- 


762 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


pcrftcial  justice  will  be  discarded  and  despised  ; and  (lie  profession 
will  glory  in  the  downfall  of  that  which  they  are  now  convinced  is 
neither  righteous  nor  beneficial  in  its  influence. 

There  may  then  be  an  association  of  this  profession  consisting  of 
from  seventy-five  to  one  hundred  and  fifty  members  — each  member 
to  contribute  capital  of  valuable  information  to  the  treasury  acknowl- 
edge, which  the  chief  and  best-qualified  mind  must  preserve.  They 
must  not  confine  their  attention  exclusively  to  the  principles  of  legal 
and  social  jurisprudence  ; but  they  must  investigate,  and  accumulate 
valuable  information  to  benefit  the  farmer,  the  mechanic,  and  the 
manufacturer.  They  must  promote  justice  in  the  discovery  and  ap- 
plication of  'practical  principles  ; and  this  should  be  the  chief  object 
of  the  legal  association.  They  may  devise,  according  to  their  asso- 
ciated wisdom,  the  most  agreeable  social  constitution  similar  to  those 
already  established. 

And  it  is  proper  for  each  member  to  have  his  field  of  inves- 
tigation allotted  to  him : and  all  should  observe  the  various  changes 

O O 

of  occupation  necessary  to  sustain  physical  and  cultivate  intellectual 
health. 

Their  labor,  then,  may  be  distributed  in  this  manner:  Four 
hours  of  each  day  may  be  devoted  to  the  demonstration  of  the  prac- 
ticability of  discovered  principles.  Their  work  should  pass  through 
the  various  Series,  one  being  higher  than  the  other,  for  criticism,  un- 
til it  reaches  their  governor,  who  shall  reject  or  sanction  their  con- 
clusions. In  one  association  there  may  be  six  Series.  The  first  or 
rudimental  Series  should  be  engaged  in  the  useful  departments  of 
elementary  science  and  literature.  The  labors  of  this  should  be 
modified  and  corrected  by  the  second  Series,  enlarged  by  the  third, 
demonstrated  by  the  fourth  ; their  various  ramifications  may  be  un- 
folded and  their  practicability  determined  by  the  fifth  ; the  whole  may 
be  rejected  or  sanctioned  by  the  sixth,  which  shall  consist  of  the  gov- 
ernor and  his  associates.  — And  thence  the  discoveries  or  principles 
will  flow  perfected  to  the  farmer  and  the  mechanic,  and  their  appli- 
cation will  enrich  the  soil,  bless  the  farmer’s  industry,  inspire  the 
mechanic  with  confidence  in  the  foundation  of  his  movements,  and 
make  his  efforts  successful  ; and  their  general  influence  will  be  adapt- 
ed to  the  wants  of  the  community,  and  the  results  will  be  honoring 
to  the  legal  profession,  as  displaying  distributive  justice  and  harmony 
in  their  highest  modes  of  manifestation. 

This  association  must  be  watchful  of,  and  interested  in,  the  various 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


763 


movements  of  the  associationists.  They  must  elucidate  and  explain 
all  principles  of  justice  and  amicableness  to  each  member;  lecture  to 
them,  and  instruct  their  minds  in  the  mysteries  of  Nature,  her  beau- 
ties, her  bestowments,  teachings,  and  requirements,  and  in  all  princi- 
ples which  are  necessary  for  each  individual  to  comprehend,  for 
happiness. 

Four  hours  of  each  day  should  be  thus  occupied  by  the  various 
Series  of  the  legal  association.  The  governor  must  be  the  supreme 
judge  of  equity  and  harmony,  which  he  must  freely  dispense  among 
the  various  groups  of  each  association  when  required.  He  and  his 
courtiers  or  associates  must  be  the  just  jurors  or  judges  of  every  ap- 
parent discrepancy  that  may  occur.  Every  one  should  repose  con- 
fidence in  them,  because  their  objects  and  interests  must  be  recipro- 
cal. They  must  not  rest  when  there  are  any  elements  of  dissatisfac- 
tion in  any  of  the  various  groups  of  the  community.  They  must 
not,  as  they  now  do,  wait  until  such  disturbances  involve  families  and 
estates  in  long  and  tedious  discussions  ; but  they'  must  be  •peace- 
makers— and  go  and  extinguish  all  corrupting  disaffections  ere  they 
are  fanned  into  a dissolving  flame  of  passion  and  social  contention. 
Thus  they  will  not  only  teach , but  practise  the  principles  of  dis 
tributive  justice,  the  tranquillizing  influence  of  which  will  ad- 
vance them  to  honor,  and  elevate  every  member  in  the  various 
associations. 

Thus  labor  is  to  be  distributed  in  this  association  for  four  hours  of 
each  day.  The  remainder  of  sunlight  will  be  devoted  to  the  culti- 
vation of  the  floral  kingdom,  to  the  fine  and  refining  arts,  to  amuse- 
ments, to  any  diversion,  so  long  as  that  benefits  the  physical  and 
elevates  the  moral  being. 

An  association  can  not  long  exist  on  this  wise  before  they  will  be 
attracted  to  the  beauties  of  the  soil.  They  will  appreciate  its  bles- 
sings, and  resort  to  it  as  a diversion  and  pleasure,  and  as  a relief 
from  the  incessant  fatigues  of  wealthy  gratification,  and  the  depres- 
sion of  mental  attention  and  emulation.  They  will  discover  in  labor 
an  attraction  ; and  they  will  devote  themselves,  as  inclination  may 
dictate,  to  the  farming,  mechanical,  and  manufacturing  employments. 
Some  will  be  predisposed  to  the  invention  of  machinery,  to  which  a 
portion  of  their  time  will  be  with  pleasure  and  profit  devoted.  Oth- 
ers will  be  interested  in  the  artistic  pursuits,  employing  themselves  in 
sculpture,  portrait  and  landscape  painting,  and  also  in  expressing 
their  instincts,  affections,  genius,  and  intelligence,  in  the  multifarious 


7G4 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


creations  which  will  spontaneously  flow  from  their  association  and 
general  unity  of  interest. 

All  that  should  be  done  in  the  way  of  legalizing  and  demonstrating 
the  principles  of  justice  to  the  community,  can  be  accomplished  in 
the  brief  period  of  four  hours  in  each  clay.  And  in  whatsoever  ad- 
ditional pursuits  they  engage,  their  time  and  talents  will  be  remuner- 
ated in  proportion  to  all  their  physical  and  mental  wants,  remember- 
ing that  Wisdom  is  to  be  the  administrator.  Their  existence  will  be 
useful,  honored,  elevated,  and  generally  purifying  to  all  the  lower 
yet  happy  laboring  classes. 

Immediately  will  the  fire  of  this  association  be  communicated  to 
the  physicians  — who  will  form  a similar  association  or  institution, 
constituted  of  a similar  number  of  congenial  and  well-qualified  mem- 
bers. The  medical  institution  will  be  devoted  to  the  discovery  and 
arrest  of  disease,  and  not  to  the  tiresome  practice  of  curing  diseases 
which  are  already  contracted,  as  is  the  mode  at  present. 

This  institution  must  also  be  composed  of  six  Series,  or  states,  or 
parts,  the  centre  of  which  will  be  their  Professor  and  Judge.  Labor 
is  to  be  distributed  among  each  Series  such  as  they  are  qualified  and 
willing  to  perform.  Their  interests,  as  a whole,  will  be  the  interest 
of  the  other  and  subordinate  associations. 

The  labor  of  the  first  Series  must  be  to  explore  the  physical  con- 
dition and  structure  of  every  individual,  and  to  communicate  their 
discoveries  to  the  second  Series.  These  are  to  investigate  the  facts 
and  place  them  in  a proper  juxtaposition  to  the  name  of  the  diseased 
or  defective  individual,  and  the  group  of  which  he  is  a member. 
The  statements  in  this  form  must  be  given  to  the  third  ; analyzed  by 
them  and  given  to  the  fourth ; the  proper  remedies  and  treatment 
must  be  stated  by  them  and  given  to  the  fifth  — who  will  decide  upon 
the  appropriateness  of  the  remedy  to  the  cause  and  nature  ot  the 
disease.  The  sixth , consisting  of  the  Judge  and  Professors,  will 
sanction  or  disapprove  the  proposed  treatment,  and  despatch  the 
proper  members  to  officiate  in  the  application  of  their  remedies  to 
the  patient. 

In  this  way  may  every  disease  be  discovered,  properly  under- 
stood, and  most  permanently  cured  — which  never  can  be  done  un- 
der the  present  system  of  isolated  investigation  and  practice.  Then  all 
professional  discussions,  anathemas,  and  denunciations,  will  be  abol- 
ished, and  conflicting  systems  of  practice  will  not  exist : for  all  will 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


765 


be  combined  as  one  true  system,  taugbt  and  established  in  the  nature 
of  things. 

§ 32.  Four  hours  of  each  day  may  be  thus  employed.  Let  the 
chief  object  and  interest  be  to  keep  the  people  from  violation  by 
teaching  them  the  constitution  of  their  being,  the  necessity  of  obedi- 
ence, and  the  propriety  of  cleanliness,  exercise,  and  judgment,  in  all 
their  individual  and  social  relations.  Each  individual  must  learn  the 
importance  of  exercising  a clear  and  potent  wisdom  in  his  living  and 
occupation  ; and  the  various  associations  must  construct  all  the  con- 
veniences for  bathing,  washing,  and  thorough  cleansing,  as  they  are 
directed  by  the  physicians.  They  must  be  governed  in  their  house- 
hold relations,  in  their  diet,  in  all  things  relating  to  health,  according 
to  the  dictation  of  the  physicians.  Such  must  be  the  labor  of  the 
physicians  ; and  such  must  be  its  results. 

Each  association  will  reward  the  legal  and  medical  institutions  in 
proportion  to  the  good  they  accomplish  in  their  four  hours  of  indus- 
try, which  will  be  vast  and  appreciated.  For  talent  will  be  deeply 
esteemed,  and  proportionally  remunerated.  Each  association  will 
discover  that  they  can  not  succeed  without  the  existence  of  the  legal 
and  medical  professions  ; for  the  first  will  disseminate  the  principles 
of  justice,  and  the  latter  the  blessings  of  health  and  the  knowledge  of 
personal  physiology.  One  will  be  indispensable  to  the  other  ; and 
thus  they  will  approve,  assist,  and  bless,  each  other’s  movements. 

Another  object  of  the  medical  institution  must  be  to  investigate  the 
principles  of  chemistry,  physiology,  allopathy,  homoeopathy,  hydrop- 
athy, magnetism,  atmospheric  and  solar  electricity,  and  all  things  ap- 
pertaining to  the  human  body,  either  directly  or  indirectly.  They 
will  discover  that  each  one  of  the  various  systems  of  medical  practice 
at  present  existing  contains  some,  but  not  all  truth,  as  is  claimed  for 
each  one  by  its  respective  professors.  They  will  discover  that  each 
system  recognises  some  principles  susceptible  of  the  most  beneficial 
application.  They  must  combine  all  the  medical  discoveries  and 
sciences,  and,  from  a searching  investigation,  produce  one  grand  and 
unequivocal  System  of  medical  practice.  Let  their  superioi  wisdom 
direct  the  application  of  each  discovery,  principle,  prescription,  rule 
of  regimen  and  therapeutics.  And  by  the  conventional  sanction  of 
the  judge  and  professors,  an  incontrovertible  system  will  be  estab- 
lished, which  will  arrest,  overcome,  and  dispel,  every  species  of 
organic  and  functional  disease. 


7G6 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


Each  Series  and  Degree  of  members  must  have  their  field  of  labor 
and  investigation  so  wisely  adapted  to  their  abilities  as  to  make  the 
distribution  of  industry  in  the  whole  institution  to  precisely  corre- 
spond with  that  of  the  associations  upon  which  they  depend,  and 
among  which  they  officiate. 

The  remainder  of  the  day  may  be  devoted  to  social  festivities  and 
all  species  of  gymnastic  exercises  calculated  to  promote  physical 
vigor  and  energy  of  intellect.  Or  they  may  participate  in  the  vari- 
ous and  agreeable  branches  of  agriculture,  mechanism,  and  art. 
They  may  enter  into  every  species  of  amusement,  so  long  as  an  un- 
clouded Wisdom  sanctions  the  justice,  propriety,  and  profitableness 
thereof. 

On  this  wise  may  one  legal  and  medical  association  be  established  ; 
and  they  will  constitute  an  established  central  and  attractive  power, 
such  as  can  not  be  resisted.  Its  influence  will  extend  over  all  the 
relative  professions,  and  form  them  into  a similar  community  of  wealth 
and  elevation. 

And  now  will  the  highest  profession  be  compelled  (for  they  will  not 
make  the  move  without  compulsion)  to  form  a similar  constitution,  for 
the  unrestricted  dissemination  of  knowledge,  the  crushing  of  preju- 
dices, and  the  advancement  of  the  moral  and  intellectual  world  ? The 
clerical  profession  must  form  an  institution  for  the  purpose  of 
moral  culture  and  spiritual  progress.  And  inasmuch  as  they  are,  or 
at  least  should  be,  the  most  worthy  of  all  professions  and  individuals 
in  the  constitution  of  society,  it  is  necessary  to  explain  the  most  fea- 
sible and  congenial  plan  of  reforming  them,  so  that  they  may  reform 
society. 

Clergymen,  associated  in  numbers  of  from  fifty  to  seventy-five,  may 
organize  an  institution  in  which  each  member  (the  whole  being  dis- 
tributed in  classes)  may  occupy  a position  according  to  the  require- 
ments of  the  institute,  and  the  use  it  is  intended  to  accomplish.  This 
institution  is  to  be  arranged  upon  principles  similar  to  those  control- 
ling others  — with  members  so  arranged  as  to  produce  an  harmonious 
movement,  both  among  themselves  and  with  reference  to  the  com- 
munity. It  is  to  be  the  seminary  for  instruction,  especially  for  in- 
struction in  the  higher  branches  of  knowledge.  It  is  to  have  con- 
centrated all  the  combined  literature,  science,  philosophy,  and  the- 
ology, that  now  exist  in  the  universities  and  collegiate  institutions  of 
the  land.  Their  object  must  be  to  understand  the  depths  and  widths 


A VOTCE  TO  MANKIND. 


767 

of  natural  law  and  science  ; to  bring  forth  and  analyze  all  the  theologi- 
cal isms  of  the  land  ; to  reject  the  evil  and  preserve  the  good  out  of 
the  vast  congregation  of  systems ; to  understand  the  theology  of  Nature, 
and  the  manifest  constitution  of  the  Divine  Mind,  and  to  blend  sci- 
ence, and  theology,  and  reason,  and  philosophy,  into  one  grand  sys- 
tem of  education.  They  must  discard  all  restriction  of  thought  and 
investigation,  all  circumscribing  prejudices,  all  unholy  teachings  and 
systems,  that  now  pervade  the  mental  world  ; and  finally,  they  must 
discard  all  things  tending  to  establish  sects,  or  to  promote  distinction 
or  prejudice,  and  receive  only  that  which  flows  spontaneously  from 
the  indications  of  Nature,  and  the  sanctions  of  a free  and  well-con- 
constructed  judgment.  This  must  he  the  object  impressed  upon 
such  a number  of  clergymen  before  they  can  effectually  reform  the 
social  and  moral  world,  and  form  an  immoveable  institution  of  knowl- 
edge and  righteousness. 

With  this  object  duly  in  view,  the  institution  may  be  established 
in  this  order  and  form,  to  succeed,  and  bless  society  : Seventy-five 
members  are  as  many  as  should  enter  into  one  association.  These 
may  be  divided  into  six  classes.  To  preserve  form  and  order,  they 
should  be  situated  in  progressive  relation  to  each  other,  so  that  the 
six  Series  maybe  so  many  steps  of  literary,  scientific,  and  theological 
development,  commencing  at  the  primary  class,  and  ascending  to  him 
who  presides  in  the  sanctuary  of  the  people. 

The  first  class  must  be  composed  of  qualified  individuals  whose 
degree  will  be  above  the  office  of  the  highest  physician  in  the  previ- 
ous institution.  They  are  to  be  the  transition-step  from  the  legal  and 
medical  field  into  the  scientific  and  philosophical.  They  must  take 
up  the  various  subjects  where  the  physician  leaves  off.  And  the 
results  accumulated  by  them  must  be  transferred  to  the  second  de- 
gree— and  so  onward  and  upward  to  the  sixth,  who  shall  be  the 
emperor  of  social  righteousness.  Thence  their  vast  scientific  and 
spiritual  accumulations  will  flow  to  the  lower  associations,  be  compre- 
hended by  them,  well  adapted  to  their  wants,  actualized,  and  made 
eminently  useful  and  practical. 

§ 33.  The  six  Degrees  are  all  steps  of  relative  perfection.  Each 
person,  according  as  he  has  advanced,  may  be  designated  by  the  pe- 
culiar brilliancy,  taste,  and  elegance,  of  his  habiliments.  A distinc- 
tion must  thus  be  established,  in  order  that  there  may  be  an  attrac- 
tion for  the  situation  of  every  individual  that  will  extend  to  and 


7G3 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


elevate  the  lower  classes.  The  members  in  the  various  degrees  are 
to  he  situated  in  positions  agreeable  to  their  most  wise  desires,  and 
according  as  their  abilities  to  sustain  and  render  themselves  useful 
may  suggest. 

The  establishment  to  be  erected  by  this  institution  may  in  its  ar- 
chitectural qualities  display  all  the  superior  combinations  of  beauty, 
use,  order,  form,  adaptation,  agreeableness,  and  magnificence.  It 
may  be  decorated  with  examples  of  every  mechanical  and  architec- 
tural invention.  It  may  represent  in  structure  externally  the  com- 
bined contributions  of  art,  science,  and  architecture,  and  be  a stand- 
ard of  magnificence  : and  all  this  for  the  important  purpose  of  rep- 
resenting the  advancement  of  this  age  beyond  those  that  are  gone  by, 
and  for  the  purpose  of  indicating  the  progress  of  the  race.  The 
structure  should  be  such  as  to  captivate  all  tastes  and  affections,  and 
to  suit  all  desires  in  respect  to  order,  form,  and  splendor;  and  it 
should  be  a standing  representative  of  the  wisdom,  wealth,  strength, 
opulence,  and  refinement,  of  the  whole  nation. 

Interiorly,  it  should  possess  the  attributes  of  cheerfulness,  fascina- 
tion, splendor,  convenience,  and  refinement,  and  should  imbody  all 
the  architectural  conceptions  of  what  should  be  the  sanctuary  of  hu- 
man wisdom  and  righteousness. 

It  should  have  six  apartments,  which  must,  in  structure,  corre- 
spond to  the  degrees  of  their  respective  occupants.  Each  chamber, 
or  apartment,  should  possess  all  the  conveniences  suitable  to  the  de- 
partment of  the  association  to  which  it  belongs  : and  the  appearance 
of  each  member  must  fully  correspond  to  the  position  occupied. 
Thus  the  building,  both  internally  and  externally,  must  be  adapted 
to,  and  must  correspond  with,  the  use  and  end  contemplated  — as 
also  must  its  occupants  to  the  offices  respectively  assigned  to  them  ; 
and  thus  the  whole  institution  will  display  the  harmony  of  Wisdom 
in  actual  demonstration. 

The  emperor  and  his  courtiers  and  counsellors  are  to  legislate  for 
the  several  associations  within  the  circumference  assigned  to  their 
institution.  They  are  to  disseminate,  irrespectively,  justice  and 
judgment  to  every  individual  — and  to  be  the  governors,  presidents, 
kings,  or  lords,  to  exercise  justice  and  wisdom  as  derived  from  sci- 
ence and  the  savings  of  combined  systems  by  them  accumulated,  ana- 
lyzed, refined,  and  practically  applied.  They  are  to  be  the  gover- 
nors in  respect  to  all  which  subordinate  classes  require  to  bless  and 
make  them  happy.  They  are  to  have  perfect  confidence  in  the 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


769 


people,  which  the  latter,  as  brethren,  will  desire  and  reciprocate 
The  lower  associations  will  represent  the  successive  developments  of 
the  great  human  machine  of  industry  and  happiness  ; and  the  highest 
or  clerical  institution  must  be  the  pervading  power  to  penetrate  and 
start  into  unceasing  activity  all  the  subordinate  departments  of  soci- 
ety. They  must  legislate  for,  and  apply  the  principles  of  morality, 
science,  and  refinement,  to  every  individual  who  requires,  and  thus 
sustain  a watchfulness  over  the  whole  flock,  feeling  desirous  to  per- 
fect and  perpetuate  social  unity,  and  thus  contribute  to  the  interests 
and  requirements  of  the  Whole. 

Seminaries  and  universities  at  present  existing,  are  not  such  as 
disseminate  the  hind  of  knowledge  that  mankind  require.  And  as 
they  are  isolatedly  and  conventionally  situated  and  supported,  they 
are  not  accessible  to  those  classes  who  need  education  and  refine- 
ment. Therefore,  to  prevent  the  perpetuation  of  this  educational 
system,  let  an  institution  be  formed  as  has  been  proposed.  Let  the 
reward  which  is  now  given  to  pastors  by  their  congregations,  the 
wealth  lavished  upon  the  erection  and  gorgeous  embellishment  of  the 
churches  and  systems  that  are  now  individually  or  collectively  sup- 
ported, within  a given  territory,  be  combined  and  concentrated,  with 
the  strength  and  intelligence  of  the  people,  into  just  one  institution 
of  seventy-five  members.  It  may  be  supported  by  the  same  amount 
of  contributions  that  are  now  made  to  individual  societies,  clergymen, 
and  universities. 

This  project  can  be  easily  accomplished  by  presenting  the  public 
mind  with  a clear  calculation  and  statement  of  the  funds  required, 
the  movements  necessary,  and  the  amount  of  good  to  be  legitimately 
derived  therefrom  by  all.  In  each  county,  shire,  state,  or  kingdom, 
there  is  wealth  expended  sufficient  to  organize  and  sustain  more  in- 
stitutions of  this  character  than  will  be  found  absolutely  necessary. 
Then  collegiate  technicalities  will  be  bestowed  upon  those  who  are 
qualified  to  justly  appreciate  and  apply  the  immense  and  useful  at- 
tainments which  they  will  denote. 

But  the  identity  of  these  several  institutions  now  existing  will  be 
lost,  and  their  isolated  wealth  will  be  distributed  amono;  deserving 
individuals.  It  will  extend  to  the  almshouse,  to  the  asylum,  to  the 
hospital,  to  the  mariners’  association,  and  to  the  poor  of  every  town 
and  state  ; and  it  will  not  lose  its  force  until  it  descends,  by  the  in- 
dustry of  every  restored  and  elevated  being,  to  the  soil,  whence  it 
will  send  forth  an  abundance  to  all  in  return.  This  all  may  be  done 

49 


770 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


without  seriously  depreciating  the  capital  or  riches  of  one  person  in 
society.  On  the  contrary,  it  will  enrich  and  advance  them  to  honor 
and  happiness. 

The  change  must  be  only  in  this  particular  at  present,  viz.,  that 
the  various  sects,  with  their  clergymen,  should,  instead  of  dividing, 
unite  their  strength  and  wealth,  with  their  bestowments  upon  mission- 
aries and  upon  isolated  institutions  of  education  ; and  thus  an  alliance 
should  he  effected  between  all  sects.  Their  clergymen  should  meet, 
assisted  by  the  same  as  they  now  receive,  or  any  proper  sum,  as  a 
reward  for  their  industry,  and  form  an  institution  upon  the  principles 
of  distributive  justice  and  wisdom.  And  those  who  now  support 
religious  systems  and  benevolent  institutions  will  find  it  much  to 
their  advantage  to  cast  their  bestowments  into  the  treasury  of  such  an 
enterprise  ; for  all  would  be  correspondingly  enriched  and  elevated 
thereby.  On  this  wise,  then,  may  clergymen  be  improved  in  situa- 
tion, and  be  advanced  to  personal  and  general  honor,  wisdom,  and 
righteousness. 

§ 34.  The  form  and  structure  of  society  is  now  made  manifest. 
The  formation  of  the  agricultural,,  mechanical,  and  manufacturing 
degrees  or  associations  of  industry,  strength,  and  wealth,  are  the 
three  movements  necessary  for  society,  that  it  may  preserve  its  iden- 
tity, and  establish  a foundation  on  which  to  exist  and  thrive  im- 
mensely. These  are  the  rudimental  forms  necessary  to  establish. 
They,  as  one,  constitute  the  body  of  Love,  or  of  reciprocal  move- 
ment. The  farmer , mechanic , and  manufacturer , are  a trinity  com- 
posing one  body  of  industry  and  equal  distributions  of  labor.  They 
are  at  the  bottom,  and  support  all  else,  and  bence  correspond  to  the 
principle  of  Love  contained  and  demonstrated  in  the  nature  of  the 
divine  creations. 

Then  the  legal,  medical , and  clerical  associations,  are  a trinity 
forming  one  Whole,  which  corresponds  to  Wisdom.  The  first  ar- 
range all  conventional  movements  on  the  principles  of  equity,  har- 
mony. and  practicability.  They  restore  all  deranged  or  defective 
personal  and  conventional  bodies  to  a state  of  health  and  harmony, 
and  consequently  are  those  who  recognise  justice  and  display  it  with- 
out distinction  in  their  various  administrations.  The  second  seek 
out  and  restore  all  the  subjects  of  disease,  whether  personal  or  gen- 
eral, to  a state  of  health  and  strength  ; and  thus  assist  the  legal  pro- 
fession in  their  occupation  and  influence.  The  third  accumulate 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


771 


science,  art,  theology,  and  philosophy,  which  they  make  perfect  and 
practicable.  These  they  disseminate  among,  and  freely  apply  to, 
the  members  of  each  association,  as  they  in  wisdom  desire  or  require. 
Hence  the  clerical  institution  will  be  the  great  court  of  justice,  the 
temple  of  liberty,  and  the  sanctuary  of  knowledge  and  righteousness. 
Their  influence,  in  practice,  will  proclaim,  “ Fear  not,  for  behold  we 
bring  you  glad  tidings  of  great  joy  which  shall  be  unto  all  people.” 
The  response  will  be,  “ Glory  to  God  in  the  highest,  on  earth  peace, 
good-will  to  men.” 

Thus  the  legal,  medical,  and  clerical  associations,  are  three  parts 
of  one  whole  system,  which  corresponds  to  Wisdom.  So  the  struc- 
ture of  society  will  be  an  imitation  of  the  structure  of  the  Universe ; 
and  its  Soul  will  be  like  the  structure  of  the  Divine  blind,  which  is 
Love  and  Wisdom.  The  kingdom. of  heaven  will  be  on  earth,  and 
under  its  dominion  each  one  may  repose  in  undisturbed  confidence, 
fulfil  the  destiny  of  his  being,  and  glorify  the  unbounded  blessings 
of  higher  spheres. 

Family  forms,  sympathies,  and  relations,  if  is  proper  to  preserve  — 
inasmuch  as  it  is  not  necessary  to  change  any  of  the  conjugial  attach- 
ments that  now  exist,  to  successfully  establish  the  principles  and 
movements  of  an  association.  Directions  concerning  these  things 
will  naturally  arise  from  the  wisdom  and  investigation  consequent  on 
such  a social  organization. 

But  education,  both  primary  and  scientific,  needs  to  be  essentially 
changed  : that  is,  there  must  not  exist  so  many  and  dissimilar  modes 
of  impressing  youthful  minds  with  doctrine  instead  of  practice,  and 
with  useless  instead  of  practicable  principles.  There  must  exist  a 
unity  in  education,  and  a progress  in  administering  instruction  to  the 
young.  And,  agreeably  with  the  sympathies  and  present  prejudices 
of  every  family,  the  present  system  may  be  essentially  and  profitably 
modified  in  the  following  manner  : — 

The  Agricultural  Association  may  have  a department  and  system 
of  rudimental  instruction  for  their  young,  in  which  may  be  taught 
the  primary  rules  of  orthography,  etymology,  syntax,  and  prosody. 
These  should  perfect  the  instruction  in  this  department. 

The  Mechanical  Association  may  have  a system  in  unity  of  plan 
with  the  latter,  taking  from  this  lower  branch  into  their  own  hands 
the  charge  of  the  education  which  may  be  given  to  their  children. 
This  stage  of  education  should  range  from  the  primary,  through  ge- 
ography, arithmetic,  and  mathematics,  comprehending  all  the  primary 


772 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


principles  of  mecnanism,  and  the  general  principles  of  the  whole 
Agri-mechanical  Association. 

The  manufacturers  will  likewise  adopt  a system  of  educating  their 
young  — which  will  proceed  from  the  general  education  of  the  latter 
class  into  its  various  ramifications,  and  will  also  consist  in  practically 
demonstrating  the  principles  impressed  on  their  children  in  the  school 
of  the  mechanics. 

The  legal  association  may  have  a seminary  for  taking  up  the  vari- 
ous instructions  of  the  last  system,  and  carrying  them  on  through  the 
rudimental  branches  of  their  own  attainments. 

And  so  the  medical  and  clerical  associations  must  proceed  — the 
latter  to  bestow  every  species  of  valuable  information  in  possession 
of  the  race.  They  are  to  teach  none  other  than  sound,  unprejudi- 
cial, and  practical  principles  of  life  and  happiness.  And  the  instruc- 
tions in  this  department  are  to  be  considered  the  completion  of  every 
proper  and  useful  education. 

The  various  associations  may  have  systems  thus  successively  es- 
tablished, so  that  in  the  ascension  from  the  farmer’s  to  the  highest  in- 
stitution, one  perfect  system  of  education  may  be  completed. 

It  will  be  discovered  (according  to  various  writers  on  education) 
that  children  should  not  be  mentally  fatigued  with  instructions  de- 
rived from  books,  a monitor,  or  anything  that  may  interfere  with  the 
natural  process  of  the  development  of  their  tender  faculties  ; and  that 
an  age  of  from  six  to  eight  years  is  necessary  for  each  child  to  attain 
before  being  introduced  into  any  school  of  education.  In  this  way 
all  fatigue  may  be  escaped,  and  all  youthful  interest  for  instruction  be 
preserved. 

At  the  age  of  eight  years,  the  natural  predisposition  and  mental 
and  physical  qualifications  of  each  child  will  be  sufficiently  unfolded 
to  indicate  to  the  parent  the  hind  of  education  or  employment  which 
would  be  agreeable  and  proper.  It  will  be  found  that  some  children 
will  pass  from  the  farmer’s  family  through  all  the  systems,  until  they 
attain  a high  seat  in  the  people’s  sanctuary.  And  this  will  be  deter- 
mined by  the  innate  aspirations  of  the  mind  indicated  even  in  child- 
hood. If  the  child  is  born  amid  the  circumstances  of  the  agricul- 
turist, and  if,  as  the  faculties  unfold,  lie  indicates  a disposition  for 
science  and  philosophy,  and  manifests  a general  veneration,  he  should 
pass  directly  from  the  primary  school  to  the  legal,  and  thence  to  the 
clerical.  If  a child  is  inclined  to  the  medical  profession,  let  his  in- 
clinations be  cultivated,  and  let  him  pass  directly  from  the  primary 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


773 


to  the  medical  school,  where  he  will  receive  his  required  instruction. 
A pre-qualification  and  predisposition  should  never  escape  the  ob- 
servation of  a parent,  in  any  of  his  children.  His  convictions  must 
be  communicated  to  the  institution  to  which  the  child  is  by  nature 
attracted,  and  by  which  its  education  will  be  freely  given. 

§ 35.  It  will  also  be  discovered  that  some  children  born  amid  the 
circumstances  of  the  legal,  medical,  and  clerical  profession,  will  be 
disqualified  for  any  of  these,  and  by  nature  will  gravitate  to  the  me- 
chanical or  agricultural  employment.  So  there  will  be  an  equal  and 
just  exchange  of  desires  and  attractions  among  the  children  of  each 
association,  which  will  gratify  their  parents,  and  banish  all  social  dis- 
turbance from  the  community. 

On  these  principles  will  education  of  every  low  and  high  degree 
be  perfected  — distributing  equality  or  preference  to  all  according  to 
innate  ability  and  natural  attraction. 

As  men  are  at  present  situated,  education  does  violence  in  many 
instances,  both  to  body  and  mind.  Some  who  are  now  debased,  dig- 
ging the  trench,  laying  the  wall,  or  slavishly  tilling  the  earth,  are  bet- 
ter qualified  by  nature  to  be  physicians,  or  teachers  of  science,  than 
many  of  those  who  are  thus  situated.  Many  who  are  now  clergy- 
men would  be  in  their  element  if  in  the  workshop  or  in  the  field.  So 
with  many  physicians,  lawyers,  manufacturers,  and  mechanics.  Men 
are  now  compelled  to  engage,  for  a subsistence,  in  that  in  which  it 
is  neither  their  nature  nor  desire  to  engage.  This  is  the  reason  why 
the  various  professions  have  men  who  dishonor  their  employment 
and  prostitute  their  superficial  education.  And  so  men  in  the  vari- 
ous branches  of  farming  and  manufacturing  who  do  not  succeed  in 
their  employment,  being  always  dissatisfied,  striving  to  escape  from 
their  situations,  and  being  finally  compelled  to  remain,  lose  all  inter- 
est in  their  avocations,  and  are  neither  useful  to  themselves  nor  to 
society.  Details  concerning  these  important  truths  may  be  found  in 
the  writings  of  valuable  men  who  have  thought  upon  and  investigated 
the  causes  of  social  disunity,  and  unfolded  the  errors  of  present  edu- 
cation. But  it  would  not  be  important  to  multiply  examples  in  this 
place.  Yet  these  can  be  perceived  by  every  enlightened  mind  who 
can  distinguish  the  relation  between  cause  and  effect. 

Association  would  remedy  all  these  evils  — would  not  only  culti- 
vate all  the  good  interests  of  the  human  soul,  but  give  them  a truthful 
and  proper  direction.  Men  who  are  now  engaged  in  the  various 


774 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


modes  of  employment,  would  at  once  gravitate  to  that  which  is  most 
congenial  to  their  nature  and  qualifications.  Children  would  inevi- 
tably do  the  same  ; and  therefore  an  equality  would  be  the  highest 
result  of  such  a social  and  educational  organization.  Every  facility 
must  be  conceived  and  practised  by  the  superior  association,  for  the 
purpose  of  instructing  and  refining  each  child  and  parent. 

Women , in  each  association,  should  exercise  as  much  taste  as  the 
men  — inasmuch  as  they  suggest  all  the  life-imparting  impulses  to 
the  male  department.  They  must  cultivate  and  display  their  con- 
ceptions of  the  beautiful  as  manifested  in  any  of  the  delicate  arts  and 
sciences,  which  must  be  among  the  chief  objects  of  the  ascending 
and  superior  associations  to  cultivate.  The  floral  kingdom  can  be 
greatly  advanced  in  beauty,  order,  and  instruction.  All  the  high  de- 
grees of  beauty  which  may  be  displayed  in  dress  and  ornament,  and 
the  various  possessions  sanctioned  by  the  wisdom  of  the  governor, 
can  be  derived  from  the  delicate  textures  of  flowers.  This  may  be 
the  primary  field  of  the  females. 

Thence  they  may  ascend  to  the  refined  arts  of  painting,  embroid- 
ery, and  all  the  higher  branches  as  relating  to  beauty  and  grandeur, 
and  cultivate  all  the  lovely  conceptions  of  Nature  and  art.  These 
things  must  be  the  essential  attraction  of  the  female.  And  she  will 
receive  all  the  accomplishments  which  a superior  wisdom  can  dis- 
pense, and  which  well-constructed  institutions  abundantly  possess. 

Thus  the  education  of  youth,  male  and  female,  may  be  conducted  ; 
and  the  result  will  be  a total  destruction  of  all  disunity  now  caused 
by  individuals  occupying  situations  for  which  they  by  nature  are  in 
no  wise  qualified. 

Such  must  be  the  Body,  and  the  movements  within  must  be  the 
Soul,  of  society.  The  superior  or  clerical  association  should  thus 
be  the  seat  of  justice,  legislation,  and  dispensation  ; and  all  subordi- 
nate ones  will  perform  the  important  offices  assigned  them.  And 
from  the  harmony  and  unity  of  the  whole,  will  proceed  social  hap- 
piness AND  SPIRITUAL  ELEVATION. 

One  facility,  one  most  powerful  engine  of  freedom  and  of  the  dis- 
tribution of  thought,  must  be  attached  to  the  superior  association,  and 
thus  be  a part  of  it,  and  that  is  the  Press.  This  wields  an  omnip- 
otent sceptre  over  the  public  mind,  and  is  a rightful  vehicle  for  the 
dissemination  of  personal,  local,  scientific,  and  general  information. 
A printing  department,  then,  should  be  composed  of  a congregation 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


775 


of  present  proprietors,  and  conducted  upon  the  most  expeditious  prin- 
ciples which  the  science  of  mechanism  can  without  difficulty  supply. 
A multitude  of  presses  maybe  governed  by  one  well-constructed  en- 
gine, and  labor  may  be  so  distributed  as  that  as  much  labor  as  is  at 
present  accomplished  may  be  performed  in  one  third  of  the  time. 

This  must  form  an  important  part  of  the  superior  association. 
The  interest  of  printers  must  be  concentrated  on  the  great  end  of 
social  unity,  and  on  the  equal  distribution  of  knowledge.  Until  they 
agree  to  this,  there  will  exist  as  much  disunity  in  their  pursuits  as 
now  exists.  Those  who  are  competent  to  preside  at  the  editorial 
table  should  perceive  at  a glance  the  consistency  of  this  proposed 
system.  They,  moreover,  should  exert  their  influence  in  promulga- 
ting the  high  principles  of  magnanimity  and  benevolence  of  soul. 

One  truth,  however,  is  particularly  impressive,  and  that  is,  that  if 
he  who  wields  the  pen  to  inform  the  public  mind  through  journals 
and  books  of  the  day,  does  not  perceive  the  importance  of  these  prin- 
ciples of  social  reform,  he  is  most  certainly  not  qualified  for  the  office 
which  he  is  compelled  by  circumstances  to  occupy.  A movement 
can  not  be  depended  upon  as  commencing  in  this  class,  but  only 
among  the  laboring  classes  — the  farmers  and  the  mechanics  — who, 
when  once  organized,  will  draw  the  social  world  into  their  conso- 
ciable  embrace. 

The  mercantile  business  as  now  existing  will  be  essentially  changed. 
The  provisions  sold  by  the  grocer  will  be  procured  from  the  Establish- 
ment of  the  farmers.  And  this  will  consequently  compel  those  of  this 
branch  to  congregate  into  a large  association,  or  submit  to  be  attract- 
ed into  the  various  employments  adopted  by  the  six  associations. 
The  same  destiny  awaits  those  who  are  now  engaged  in  the  retail  of 
manufactured  goods  : for  the  manufacturers  will  also  have  an  Estab- 
lishment for  their  productions  — which  will  be  distributed  according 
to  increasing  demands.  And  this  will  be  more  convenient  and  prof- 
itable than  to  have  their  productions  gyrate  through  the  hands  of  the 
tradesmen,  which  is  nothing  more  nor  less  than  advancing  the  first 
profits  to  a price  almost  equal  to  the  cost  of  the  goods  primarily. 

The  detached  mechanics  in  villages  and  cities  will  be  drawn  into 
the  associations,  for  they  can  not  exist  separate  from  them. 

§ 36.  Finally,  the  rudimental  movements  of  the  association  must 
begin  on  these  gentle  principles  ; and  then  they  will  gradually  modify 


776 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


the  present  system,  until  it  is  resolved  into  a new  one.  This  plan 
will  not  offend  established  prejudices,  nor  disturb  the  present  rela- 
tions of  families,  friends,  and  social  organizations  ; but  it  will  address 
itself  to  those  who  are  advanced  and  prepared  to  enter  immediately 
on  this  grand  and  elevating  enterprise  of  social  and  moral  reformation. 

I am  not  impressed  to  enter  into  details  concerning  the  advanced 
stages  of  the  reorganization,  nor  of  the  movements  required  — as 
these  will  be  for  future  consideration,  and  the  careful  investigation 
of  their  promulgators.  Wisdom  and  circumstances  will  govern  the 
details  of  the  several  associations  ; and  therefore  it  would  be  prema- 
ture to  attempt  now  to  unfold  tbe  subject. 

The  machinery,  the  structure,  the  primary  movements  have  thus 
been  suggested  and  explained  ; and  if  they  are  in  their  essential 
teachings  obeyed,  the  legitimate  consequences  will  be  the  peace  and 
happiness  which  the  race  desires. 

This  will  be  the  era  of  peace.  And  remarkable  as  it  may  appear, 
it  is  true  that  the  most  prominent  writers,  from  the  time  of  Confucius 
and  Zoroaster  to  the  present  century,  have  spoken  of  this  period 
with  a great  deal  of  prophetic  delight.  Each  one  has  contributed 
some  principles  that  are  true  and  practicable.  They  descend  from 
the  heathen  philosophers,  and  flow  through  the  Old  and  New  Testa- 
ments, and  are  presented  in  various  forms  at  the  present  day. 

Swedenborg-  has  done  more  than  any  other  person  to  accumu- 
late, sift,  and  preserve,  the  useful  productions  of  each  nation  : and 
he  has  formed  them  into  a system  that  is  practicable  and  serviceable 
to  every  mind.  Yet  they  can  not  now  be  understood  or  applied  so 
extensively  as  when  the  superior  Association  is  formed,  and  their 
wisdom  is  concentrated  for  the  purpose  of  accumulating  and  applying 
all  truths. 

Heretofore  I have  referred  to  the  several  revelations  that  have  been 
given  by  men  in  every  century  within  the  limits  of  national  chronol- 
ogy. Their  teachings  in  the  main  are  important.  They  can  only 
be  proved  so,  and  applied  with  a benefit,  after  society  is  formed  into 
a closer  and  more  agreeable  relation. 

Now  it  is  made  manifest  that  the  teachings  of  Jesus  were  descrip- 
tions of  effects  to  flow  legitimately  from  such  a social  organization. 
And  likewise  the  prophets  indulged  in  the  same  delightful  anticipa- 
tions of  glorious  effects  to  be  one  day  enjoyed  on  earth.  Men  have 
not  distinguished  properly,  in  examining  the  teachings  of  Jesus,  the 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


777 


nature  and  relation  of  cause  and  effect.  These  they  have  confounded, 
and  generally  the  effects  described  by  him  are  taken  for  primary  causes 
to  reform  society.  The  golden  rule,  the  feeling  of  brotherly  love, 
love  to  the  neighbor,  and  such  like,  are  not  causes,  but  effects,  which 
\yill  be  realized  and  consummated  ere  long  on  earth.  He  taught 
what  should  be,  not  that  which  would  produce  it : he  spoke  of  effects, 
not  causes.  He  spoke  of  unity,  and  spiritual  consolation,  elevation, 
and  happiness  ; but  not  of  social  evils,  their  causes,  and  the  means  to 
remove  them. 

Then  he  who  loves  and  admires  the  doctrines  of  this  great  and 
glorious  Reformer,  should  abandon  immediately  tbe  preaching  of 
effects,  and  exercise  bis  wisdom  to  reconstruct  society  — to  introduce 
causes  which  may  harmonize  social  interests,  so  that  those  very  de- 
sirable effects  may  be  realized.  He  who  would  honor  his  Master 
(or  the  type  of  the  human  race,  which  is  Jesus),  must  abandon  mere 
speech,  and  proceed  to  action.  Preach  in  deed,  and  not  in  speech. 
Cease  unmeaning  prayers,  and  go  forth  into  the  sinks  of  social 
wretchedness  and  desolation,  and  offer  an  assisting  hand,  which  is  a 
prayer  divinely  manifested.  Discrimination  must  be  made  between 
the  causes  of  social  evil  and  the  effects  of  brotherly  kindness  and 
charity,  which  latter  only  were  described  by  the  elevated  moral  Re- 
former. This  being  done,  no  man  will  be  called  a heretic  if  he  pro- 
poses movements  of  reform  not  intimated  in  the  teachings  of  Jesus; 
for  one  thing  is  certain  — that  no  man  can  transcend  the  principles 
of  these  teachings  in  his  most  active  imaginations  of  social  unity  and 
peace,  inasmuch  as  they  are  the  highest  principles  of  social  and 
moral  reciprocation.  This  once  acknowledged,  and  it  will  be  con- 
ceded that  he  honors  the  teachings  of  Jesus,  wdro  is  active  in  institu- 
ting principles  and  movements  of  reform,  so  that  the  grand  effect  of 
love  to  the  neighbor  may  be  fully  and  unchangeably  established. 

Recurrence  to  the  writings  of  Charles  Fourier  is  necessary  for  the 
purpose  of  bringing  his  social  system  before  the  world,  so  that  man- 
kind may  investigate  it,  and  give  a just  verdict  as  to  its  truth,  mo- 
rality, and  practicability.  It  is  impossible  to  escape  the  conclusion 
that  he  revealed  many  truthful  causes  and  principles  of  reform  that 
must  be  in  some  degree  practised  before  the  kingdom  of  heaven  can 
be  established  on  earth.  I am  impressed,  then,  to  suggest  that  those 
who  engage  in  the  reform  should  accumulate  the  various  principles 
and  suggestions  of  moral  and  philosophical  writers.  They  must 


77S 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


discover  how  much  real  truth  each  author  imbodies,  its  relation  to 
present  existing  evils,  the  extent  of  its  application,  and  the  results  if 
practised. 

The  great  movements  of  the  day  are  all  advancing  the  public  to 
this  desirable  consummation.  The  efforts  for  the  abolition  of  slave- 
ry; those  for  the  repeal  of  capital  punishment;  the  reform  of  prison- 
discipline  ; the  temperance  reformation  ; the  liberality  of  the  various 
sects  ; the  general  open  demand  of  the  public  mind  for  some  relief 
from  social  and  mental  embarrassments  ; the  agitations  in  various 
portions  of  Europe  ; the  elevation  of  the  public  morals  ; the  manifest 
sympathies  toward  the  poor  and  degraded;  the  excitement  among 
the  inhabitants  of  Scotland  for  the  relief  of  their  poor  ; the  general 
condition  of  France  ; the  liberal  investigations  of  Germany  ; the  re- 
searches among  the  tombs  and  monuments  of  Egypt,  revealing  the 
truths  of  national  antiquity  ; the  absolute  predominance  of  facts  over 
imagination , and  truth  over  error  ; the  general  condition  of  the  hea- 
then world  ; and  finally  the  movements  among  every  nation  of  the 
earth,  both  social,  scientific,  and  spiritual  — all  proclaim  the  approach 
of  this  sublime  era. 

Our  country,  its  interests,  wealth,  and  government,  are  fearfully 
involved  in  a peace-destroying  war,  the  result  of  which  will  be  a 
powerful  reaction  on  every  mind  ; and  this  will  accelerate  the  insinu- 
ation of  these  principles,  and  their  practice.  The  era  is  nigh  : the 
judgment-day,  when  wisdom  shall  predominate,  will  soon  arrive; 
and  this  will  banish  ignorance,  error,  prejudice,  and  fanaticism,  from 
the  earth.  A general  revolution  is  at  hand.  It  is  already  kindled  — 
Wisdom  will  fan  the  sparks  into  a flame,  and  this  will  consume  con- 
tention and  sin,  and  all  will  come  forth  purified,  elevated,  happy  ! 
This  is  the  flame  of  Love  — the  consuming  vengeance  of  Truth 
and  Goodness.  For  it  is  a fact  that  whatever  new  truth  is  pre- 
sented to  the  world,  no  matter  how  gentfe,  lovely,  and  fascinating, 
it  may  be,  it  is  to  establish  a prejudice  like  a consuming  fire  of  ven- 
geance. Hence  it  is  opposed  : and  the  conflict  demonstrates  the 
difference  between  truth  and  error,  reason  and  fanaticism.  But  the 
prospect  is  clear  — the  purifying  fire  of  Love,  Truth,  and  Knowl- 
edge, will  consume  all  else,  and  vengeance  will  only  be  manifested 
in  the  conflict  of  established  prejudices. 

§ 37.  Such  is  the  era  foreseen  by  David,  Isaiah,  Jeremiah,  Eze- 
kiel, Daniel,  Zechariah,  and  Malachi.  Such  was  the  period  impressed 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


779 


upon  Confucius,  Zoroaster,  Brama,  Jesus,  Mohammed,  Fourier,  and 
upon  male  and  female  writers  of  every  century  down  to  the  present 
day.  It  was  sung  in  the  Orphic  hymns  of  Egypt,  described  in  the 
writings  of  heathen  poets  and  philosophers,  preached  and  anticipated 
by  Paul,  and  metaphorically  described  by  John  in  the  Apocalypse. 
It  is  that  which  gives  consolation  to  every  writer  who  feels  the  im- 
portance of  a social  reformation  ; and  it  is  that  which  inspires  the 
bosom  of  every  philanthropist,  gives  consolation  to  the  depressed, 
hope  to  the  disquieted,  promise  to  the  philosopher,  arid  an  asylum  to 
the  admirer  of  Nature  and  worshipper  of  her  manifestations. 

Unspeakable  inducements  have  been  presented  to  an  aspiration 
for  this  sublime  consummation  : for  behold  the  deepest  and  most  se- 
cret recesses  of  Nature  have  been  searched,  and  their  immense  pos- 
sessions revealed.  The  magnificence  of  the  material  Universe ; its 
undying  energies,  qualities,  essences,  and  combinations  of  beauty  — 
have  been  unfolded  and  brought  forth  unexaggerated.  From  the 
central  power  of  terrestrial  creation,  the  successive  degrees  of  devel- 
opment ; the  manifestations  of  each  step;  the  results  of  each  creation  ; 
the  unvarying  tendencies  of  all,  their  teachings  and  their  practicabil- 
ity, have  been  shown  forth  in  their  enchanting  grandeur.  The  crea- 
tion of  the  earth  ; the  form,  essence,  and  production,  of  each  king- 
dom ; the  general  concentration  of  power  in  the  creation  of  man  ; his 
attributes  ; his  social  and  spiritual  qualifications  ; his  unlimited  and 
righteous  exercise  of  power  over  the  various  created  things  beneath 
him  ; the  relative  positions  and  offices  which  he  and  the  subordinate 
creations  sustain,  and  the  unity,  order,  wisdom,  grandeur,  and  ex- 
cellency of  all  divine  developments,  have  all  been  unfolded  to  man. 
More  than  this,  the  stupendous  grandeur  of  the  spiritual  habitations 
has  been  reflected  upon  his  spiritual  vision.  Their  celestial  attrac- 
tions, their  dispensations,  their  requirements,  have  been  presented 
to  the  lively  and  willing  intellect  of  man.  The  grand  architecture 
of  all  terrestrial  and  celestial  things  has  been  presented  in  a true  form 
for  the  purpose  of  impelling  man  onward  and  upward  in  the  improve- 
ment of  his  natural  life  and  spiritual  being. 

The  laws  of  Nature  have  been  clearly  unfolded,  from  which  may 
be  drawn  a code  of  just  and  righteous  laws  of  social  government. 
These  have  been  applied  to  society,  and  directions  have  been  given 
for  their  practice.  Society  has  been  arranged  so  as  to  represent  the 
material  and  spiritual  creations  of  the  Divine  Mind  — so  that  an 
equal  harmony  may  pervade  it,  which  may  restore  the  disunited  and 


?so 


A VOICE  TO  MANKIND. 


I 


conflicting  race  to  the  bosom  of  Nature,  to  her  principles,  and  to  the 
love  of  God. 

Then,  tillers  of  the  soil — agriculturists  — who  among  your  vast 
number  shall  be  the  first  to  deposite  the  germ  of  social  happiness, 
and  bless  your  brethren  ? Multitudinous  as  you  are,  are  there  not 
six  among  you  ready  in  social  and  moral  culture  to  enter  upon  this 
glorious  enterprise  ? Mechanics,  who  among  you  shall  first  manifest 
the  righteousness  of  your  cause,  your  industry,  your  art,  as  the  art 
of  Nature  ? Who  among  your  number  shall  be  the  advocates  of  dis- 
tributive justice,  attractive  labor,  and  a proper  compensation  ? Man- 
ufacturers, will  you  not  concentrate  your  wealth  and  power  to  effect 
a general  good,  and  assist  all  co-workers  in  the  vineyard  of  industry 
and  happiness  ? 

Lawyers,  who  among  you  shall  give  the  first  impulse,  and  promul- 
gate and  establish  these  principles  of  association,  of  justice,  of  human 
brotherhood  ? Who  in  your  vast  numbers  is  qualified  to  ascend  to 
the  honorable  seat  of  government,  to  be  a supreme  judge  ? Who 
shall  bring  forth  his  energies,  his  mental  strength,  to  accomplish-this 
desirable  end  ? Physicians,  in  your  midst,  who  is  the  one  to  be  the 
grand  professor  and  governor  of  your  elevated  and  useful  occupa- 
tion ? Who  shall  ascend  to  the  various  degrees  of  honor  and  use- 
fulness ? Clergymen,  what  one  among  you  is  qualified  to  be  the 
grand  king  and  lord  of  social  righteousness,  such  as  shall  be  derived 
from  the  laws  of  Nature,  and  shall  flow  to  and  comprehend  every 
being  of  the  earth  ? Who  shall  be  the  number  to  congregate  and 
legislate  for  the  people  ? Who  shall  prove  by  actual  demonstration 
that  he  is  a nobleman  by  nature,  and  a philanthropist  in  action? 
Who  among  you  shall  go  forth  and  disseminate  the  principles  of  so- 
cial reform,  preach  the  kingdom  of  heaven,  dispense  intelligence,  and 
elevate  the  depressed  ? Upon  you  and  your  holy  proceedings  de- 
pends the  success  of  those  teachings  which  it  has  been  the  burden 
of  every  intelligent  mind  to  conceive  — and  suppress,  for  the  want  of 
mental  liberty. 

Agriculturists,  mechanics,  manufacturers  — do  you  not  feel  the 
importance  of  changing  your  own  and  your  laborers’  situations?  — 
of  supplying  all  wants,  and  establishing  universal  industry?  Law- 
yers, physicians,  clergymen  — do  you  not  feel  the  omnipotence  of 
Nature’s  truths?  Do  you  not  see  that  they  are  immortal  and  can 
not  die  ? Give  ear  to  her  proclamations  and  her  admonitions,  and 
proceed  to  change  your  situations  in  life,  and  strive  to  represent  the 


A VOTCE  TO  MANKIND. 


7S1 


heavenly  societies  on  earth.  Nature  demands  obedience.  Upon 
her  and  her  laws  depends  your  misery  or  happiness.  She  every- 
where proclaims  this  truth : that  at  her  hand  is  the  punishment  of 
every  vice,  and  the  reward  of  every  virtue  ; that  in  her  bosom  is 
nourishment  and  inexhaustible  provisions  for  all  her  creatures  — but 
that  they  must  bow  in  submission  to  her  commands  to  receive  her 
spontaneous  bestowments. 

Finally,  I will  leave  you  all  to  interrogate  Nature  and  the  Divine 
Mind,  to  determine  whether  error  shall  reign  instead  of  truth,  vice 
instead  of  virtue,  misery  instead  of  happiness,  or  contention  instead 
of  harmony.  J discover  that  your  inquiries  will  be  fully  and  satis- 
factorily answered,  your  reason  convinced,  your  minds  elevated, 
your  movements  righteous,  expeditious,  and  immediate.  And  the 
results  thereof  will  be  the  destruction  of  all  sorrow,  and  the  ushering- 
in  of  joy  unspeakable  and  blessings  immense.  This  once  accom- 
plished, and  behold  — your  uncultivated  fields,  dense  and  fearful 
forests,  untraversed  morasses,  barren  deserts,  gloomy  wildernesses, 
are  all  beautiful  gardens,  yielding  the  choicest  productions  of  earth. 
Happy  villages  are  visible  in  every  direction.  Valleys  are  teeming 
with  all  the  excellences  of  life  and  industry.  These  bespeak  pros- 
perity and  happiness.  Even  your  valieys  are  exalted,  your  rough 
and  impassable  places  are  made  smooth,  the  crooked  and  fantastic 
are  made  straight  and  beautiful,  and  all  nations  rejoice  in  social  unity 
and  righteousness  ! 

Innumerable  contributions  of  science  and  art  are  derived  from  ev- 
ery village.  In  every  continent,  nations  converse  through  the  me- 
dium of  the  electric  fire.  Powerful  engines  are  in  motion  perfecting 
commerce,  convenience,  safety,  wealth,  and  science.  Every  port  is 
thrown  open,  and  each  county  enjoys  the  blessings  of  unrestricted 
intercourse  with  all  others.  Mutual  exchanges  are  made,  reciprocal 
justice  is  displayed,  and  a halo  of  peace  is  the  crown  of  every  na- 
tion. The  deserts  are  cultivated  and  bring  forth  abundantly.  The 
wilderness  blossoms  as  the  rose.  Earth  is  a terrestrial  heaven,  peo- 
pled with  superior  beings,  typifying  in  their  lives  the  grandeur  and 
holiness  of  Paradise.  All  contention,  all  strife  and  national  animosi- 
ties, have  for  ever  ceased.  The  flag  of  Liberty  is  unfurled,  and  the 
ocean  of  Truth  is  rising,  and  the  fount  of  Love  is  on  earth,  springing 
up  unto  everlasting  life.  Behold  — every  child  of  the  Eternal  One 
is  laboring  with  pleasure  in  the  field,  in  the  departments  of  science, 
in  the  courts  of  justice,  in  the  temple  of  health,  or  in  the  sanctuary 


782 


A VOICE.  TO  MANKIND. 


of  peace  and  brotherly  love  ! Each  one  is  situated  as  is  prescribed 
by  Nature  and  her  Creator.  His  kingdom  has  come,  his  will  is  done 
on  earth  as  it  is  in  heaven.  — And  all  rest  even  while  they  are  beau- 
tifying and  gardenizing  the  soil.  Strength,  opulence,  grandeur,  and 
glory,  are  visible  in  every  department  of  social  life.  None  are  weak, 
depressed,  diseased  : all  are  strong,  elevated,  healthy.  The  milen- 
nium  — the  day  of  peace  — the  era  of  righteousness  — is  established. 
Everything  proclaims  glory,  and  honor,  and  immortal  life.  Nothing 
is  lost  — all  are  saved.  He  who  rules  omnipotent  hath  spoken  from 
the  solitary  deserts,  and  from  the  monuments  and  persecutions  of 
ages  bygone.  He  has  revealed  his  character  in  every  particle,  leaf, 
flower,  and  tree,  and  arched  the  heavens  with  his  glory.  He  has 
impressed  on  man  the  express  image  of  his  nature  and  attributes. 
He  has  crowned  him  the  lord  of  creation.  He  has  elevated,  refined, 
and  perfected,  the  formerly-misdirected  race  of  man,  and  brought  the 
whole  to  the  fulness  of  the  stature  of  a perfect  being-  ! 

Such  will  be  the  appearance  of  the  earth  ere  long!  The  vision 
indicates  prosperity  and  peace.  It  is  an  object  for  which  all  should 
labor  ; it  is  an  end  yet  to  be  accomplished  ; it  will  be  : but  who  among 
you,  brethren,  shall  deposite  the  germ , establish  the  nucleus  — the 
central  power — of  righteousness?  Your  reason  — your  unclouded 
intellects  — will  decide.  To  prove  your  superiority,  your  innate 
magnanimity  and  goodness  of  soul,  do  not  rest  in  pain  while  you 
may  be  active  in  undying  pleasure.  All  that  has  been  promised  in 
every  age  to  this  century,  will  be  fully  realized.  When  distributive 
justice  pervades  the  social  world,  then  virtue  and  morality  will  bloom 
with  an  immortal  beauty.  The  sun  of  righteousness  will  arise  in 
the  horizon  of  universal  industry,  and  shed  its  genial  rays  over  all  the 
fields  of  peace,  plenty,  and  human  happiness  ! 


THE  END. 


INDEX. 


Scribe’s  Introduction,  and  Biographical  Sketch  of  the  Author,  l-xxii. 
Author’s  Address  to  the  World, 1-4. 


INDEX  OF  PART  I.,  OR  THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  NATURE. 


GENERAL  DIVISIONS. 

Prefatory  Remarks,  pp.  5-22. 

The  true  mode  of  Reasoning  unfolded,  22. 

Explanation  of  Animal  Magnetism  and  Clair- 
voyance, and  of  the  manner  in  which  the 
author  received  his  impressions,  30-56. 

Matter  and  Motion,  and  the  general  principles 
which  they  involve,  57-85. 

Experience  of  the  true  Mechanic  appealed  to, 
85-93. 

Experience  of  the  true  Artist  appealed  to,  93- 
98. 

The  first  Cause  and  its  Attributes,  104-120. 

SUBJECTS  DISCUSSED  OR  TOUCHED  UPON 
IN  PART  I. 

Anatomical  structure  of  Man,  83-85. 

Anatomy,  Physiology,  Geology,  &c.,  deduc- 
tions from,  77-85. 

Animal  Magnetism,  exposition  of,  29-37. 

Animal  Magnetism,  summary  recapitulation  of 
argument  on,  53-56. 

Artist,  the  true,  experience  of,  93-98. 

Atmosphere,  stratification  of,  79.  147,  296-298. 

Author's  magnetic  metamorphosis  analogous 
to  death,  46,  645. 

Cause,  the  Great,  with  its  attributes  as  proved 
by  Nature,  104-120. 

Cause  of  life,  CO,  and  elsewhere. 

Clairvoyance,  exposition  of,  and  how  the 
author  received  his  impressions,  37-56. 

Clairvoyance,  independent,  not  to  be  induced 
voluntarily,  44.  ‘ 

Conclusion  of  the  key,  118. 

Demoralizing  situations  of  men,  8,  687,  et  seq. 

Ecclesiastical  establishments,  and  their  influ- 
ences, 21. 

Errors  of  investigators  to  be  excused,  101. 

Evils,  past,  and  their  causes,  18. 

Eocus  of  Truth,  41. 

Great  Positive  Mind,  the  focus  of  concentric 
spheres,  40. 

Great  Positive  Mind  the  Cause,  Nature  the 
Effect,  Spirit  the  Ultimate,  72,  80,  and  else- 
where. 

Inertia  of  matter,  the  question  discussed,  57-60. 

Interests,  opposition  of,  14,  691,  et  seq. 

Interior  philosophers  and  clairvoyants,  former, 
44,  45. 

Internal  and  external,  connexion  of,  38,  39,  and 
elsewhere. 

Inventions  mere  imitations  of  Nature,  86. 


Laws  of  Nature  should  be  the  rules  of  human 
government,  15. 

Magnetism  and  Electricity,  the  vehicles  of  sen- 
sation and  motion,  32. 

Magnetism  the  sphere  of  man — universally 
connecting  medium,  32. 

Magnedziug,  process  of,  33-37. 

Magnetic  subjects,  different  states  of,  33-37. 

Matter  and  Motion,  57,  et  seq. 

Matter  in  its  progressive  stages  of  refinement, 
48,  49. 

Matter,  all,  will  pass  through  animal  life,  118, 
149. 

Matter  nltimates  itself  in  Mind — Spirit,  50,  51. 

Mechanic,  the  true,  and  his  experiences,  85-93. 

Motion,  co-existent  and  co-eternal  with  Matter, 
70,  and  elsewhere. 

Motion,  geometrical  principles  of,  69. 

Motion,  perpetual,  can  not  be  invented,  89 
(note). 

Nature’s  forces  mechanical,  88. 

Organs  of  sense,  remarks  on,  30,  637. 

Paltetiological  sciences— the  Infinite  Circle,  72 
-75. 

Panorama  of  creation's  progress,  62-64. 

Progression — -Correspondence,  91-93,  and 
elsewhere. 

Reformer,  the  true,  and  his  persecutions,  17. 

Reason,  the  office  of,  5. 

Reasoning,  the  true  process  of,  22-29. 

Sensation,  internal  medium  of  proved  by 
dreams,  31. 

Series,  degrees,  and  correspondences,  64-69, 
594,  599. 

Serous  and  mucous  surfaces,  32. 

Skeptics,  honest  and  dishonest,  21. 

Space  and  time,  suggesting  divine  perfections, 

* 116. 

Spirit,  individualization  of,  76,  77,  593-622. 

Spirit,  its  relations  and  powers,  42,  43. 

Spirit,  theories  respecting,  99. 

Spiritual  forms  and  substances  cognizable  to 
spirit  only,  47,  647. 

Stellar  system,  immensity  and  reciprocal  move- 
ments of.  107. 

Tree  of  Knowledge  and  Tree  of  Evil,  15. 

Truth  and  good  must  ultimately  triumph,  16. 

Uniformitarian  and  morphological  theories,  81 
-83. 

Universal  generalization  — Deity  — Nature  — 
Spirit,  70-85. 

Vices  and  miseries  of  past  ages,  12. 

Vortex,  the  Universe  a,  77,  122,  and  elsewhera- 


7S4 


INDEX. 


PART  II.,  OR  NATURE’S 

GENERAL  DIVISIONS. 

Origin  and  structure  of  the  Univercffilum,  121 
-159. 

The  Solar  System,  159,  214. 

Origin  and  geological  history  of  the  Earth.  214 
-328. 

Primary  Formation,  223-232. 

Transition  Formation,  233-242. 

Carboniferous  Formation,  242-259. 

New  lied  Sandstone  Form’n,  259-268. 

Oolite  and  Cretaceous  Form’ns,  269-282. 

Tertiary  and  Diluvial  Form’ns,  282-291. 

Alluvial  Period,  291-328. 

Early  History  of  Man,  328-368. 

Origin  of  Language,  368-373. 

Origin  of  Mythological  Theology,  377-414. 

Ancient  oracles  and  prophets,  with  a discus- 
sion of  the  probabilities  and  principles  of 
true  prophecj',  414-428. 

Criticism  on  the  Bible  with  its  various  books, 
with  accounts  of  their  authors,  434-559. 

History  of  Jesus,  with  remarks  on  prophets 
and  6ther  teachers,  &c.,  559-580. 

Accounts  of  Revelators,  ancient  and  modern, 
581-592. 

The  material  and  spiritual  constitution  of  Man, 
together  with  his  relations  to  the  Universe 
and  the  Spirit  World,  593-643. 

The  spiritual  worlds,  with  man’s  progress 
through  them,  described,  643-677. 

SUBJECTS  DISCUSSED  OR  TOUCHED  UPON 
IN  PART  II. 

Adam  and  Eve,  329. 

Alluvial  Period,  291-328. 

Early  vegetation  of,  305. 

Early  animals  of,  310-322. 

Alps.  Himalayah,  and  other  mountains,  when 
upheaved,  247. 

Anastasis  (resurrection),  application  of,  522. 

Asteroids,  their  origin  and  constitution,  193- 
196. 

Astronomical  relations  of  many  things  recorded 
in  the  Old  Testament,  455. 

Atmosphere,  everything  has  its  own  peculiar, 
147. 

Atmosphere,  original  of  the  earth,  228,  240. 

Atmosphere,  weight  of  during  the  New  Red 
Sandstone  Period,  262,  263. 

Atmosphere,  constitution  of  with  reference  to 
vocal  sounds,  331. 

Attributes  in  the  Great  Chaotic  Mass,  127. 

Beginning  of  the  Creation,  121. 

Believers  in  the  Shaster,  the  Koran,  and  the 

Jliblc,  486. 

Bible,  improbable  accounts  in,  based  on  actual 
facts,  455. 

Bible,  origin  of  the,  420,  547.  554,  555. 

Bible,  remarks  on  interior  origin  of  the,  540, 541. 

Bible,  what  respect  is,  and  what  is  not,  due  to 
the,  431-434. 

Bible,  Notices  of  varjous  books  of,  with  their 
authors,  as  follows : IV ritings  of  Moses,  434 
-444;  book  of  Joshua,  414;  Judges,  444; 
lluth.  44G  ; books  of  Kings,  447 ; Chronicles, 
448;  Ezra,  448;  Nehemiah,  449;  Esther, 
450  ; Job,  450  ; Psalms,  457  ; Proverbs,  460  ; 
Ecclesiastes,  461  ; Songs  of  Solomon,  462; 
Isaiah,  462;  Jeremiah.  468;  Ezekiel,  471; 
Daniel,  472  ; Hosca,  474  ; Joel,  475;  Obadi- 
ah,  476  ; Jonah,  476  ; Micah,  479  ; Nahum, 


DIVINE  REVELATIONS. 

479  ; Habakkuk,  480;  Zeplianiah,  480  ; Hag- 
gai,  480  ; Zechariah,  481 ; Malachi,  483;  Mat- 
thew, 492;  Mark,  524;  Luke,  532;  John, 
535  ; Acts  of  the  Apostles,  536  ; Epistles  of 
Paul,  539;  Epistles  of  James,  Peter,  John, 
and  Jude,  544;  Revelation  of  St.  John,  544. 
Bimana,  the  first,  319. 

“ Breaths,”  or  winds,  first  supposed  Evil  Prin- 
ciple, 378. 

Buildings  of  stone  first  constructed  in  Central 
America,  338,  354,  355. 

Cain  and  Abel,  333. 

Origin  of  the  account  of,  405. 
Carboniferous  Formation,  251-258. 
Catastrophes,  viz. : at  the  close  of  the  Old  Red 
Sandstone  period,  246;  close  of  Coal  period, 
258  ; close  of  New  Red  Sandstone  period, 
267  ; at  the  Flood  or  Deluge,  346,  393. 
Central  America  and  China  settled,  337,  354. 
Central  American  tribes,  theology  of,  343  ; 
same  perpetuated  among  subsequent  Egyp- 
tians, Jews,  Ac.,  454. 

Chalk  beds,  how  formed,  279,  280. 

Chinese  records,  antiquity  of,  455. 
Circumference  of  the  Earth  after  formation  of 
first  coating,  232. 

Coal,  how  formed,  251. 

Coal  period,  vegetation  of,  255 
Animals  of,  256,  257. 

Communion  of  spirits  with  man  on  earth,  675. 
Comparative  anatomy,  inductions  from,  292. 
Complexions  (of  men),  origin  of  the  dissimiiari 
ty  of,  366-368. 

Concentric  spheres  of  Heavens,  123,  673. 
Conception,  conditions  and  laws  of,  367. 
Contractions  of  the  earth,  243,  260,  268. 
Correspondences,  309,  and  elsewhere. 
Correspondences,  law  of,  applied  to  an  under- 
standing of  creation,  293,  296,  298. 
Correspondential  architecture,  380. 

Creation,  magnitude  and  order  of,  136-143. 
Crystallization,  the  law  of,  231. 

Day,  completion  of  the  first  geological,  249  ; of 
the  secoyd,  261  ; of  the  third,  269  ; of  the 
fourth,  283  ; of  the  fifth,  291  ; of  the  sixth,  328 
Death,  natural,  moral,  spiritual,  413,  414. 

Death,  process  of,  643. 

Deluge  or  Flood,  345-347,  391-394. 

Nations  destroyed  by  the,  347,  394. 
Traditions  concerning  the,  394-400. 

Bible  description  of  the,  a spiritual  cor- 
respondence, 348,  349. 

Deterioration  of  species  in  our  own  day,  304. 
Devil — Satan — origin  of  the  idea  of)  4il,  412, 
518,  549. 

Dia  magnetic  principle,  227,  289. 

Divinations  by  the  flight  of  birds,  &c.,  415. 
Divine  Existence,  nature  and  mode  of  the, 
121-124,  377,  463,  618,  639,  673. 

Divine  Will— Progression— Harmony,  1 53-157. 
Druids,  643. 

Dry  land  appears  and  continents  established, 
248,  249. 

Dwellings  (ancient)  formed  of  trees,  joined  and 
thatched  at  top,  354. 

Egypt,  Jerusalem,  Greece,  Spain,  &c.,  settled, 
356-359. 

Electricity,  its  connexion  with  the  Great  Sun 
and  Great  Positive  Mind,  147. 

Equilibrium,  law  of,  152. 

Essence  (internal)  produces  external  form,  299, 
305,  618,  639,  and  elsewhere. 


INDEX. 


785 


Evening,  a geological  is  approaching,  304. 

Evil  Principle,  origin  of  the  beliel  in,  342,  343, 
378,  549. 

Exleri'r  creations  unfold  interior  attribntes, 
294. 

Fire  the  original  substance,  121,  125,  145. 
Foetal  development,  its  stages  correspond  to 
the  geological,  303. 

Forces  of  planetary  motion,  143,  145. 

Forms,  progression  of,  123,  593. 

Forms,  Series,  and  Degrees,  594,  599. 

Forms,  uses  of,  616. 

“ Free  will,”  the  doctrine  of,  discussed,  463, 
529,  530,  629,  633-636. 

Frost  and  snow  daring  the  New  Red  Sand- 
stone Period,  286,  287. 

Fucoides,  how  first  formed,  237,  238. 

Garden  of  Eden,  322. 

Correspondential  signification  of.  335. 
Garden  of  Eden,  fall  of  man,  original  sin,  &c., 
origin  of  conceptions  of,  549. 

Generalization  only  is  aimed  at,  145. 

General  resurrection  and  judgment,  origin  of 
the  idea  of,  550. 

Genesis,  book  of,  when  and  where  written, 
387,  388. 

Origin  of  accounts  in,  388-390,  399,  401, 

■ 403,  405,  408,  411,  412. 

Geography  of  the  E arth  previous  to  th e deluge, 
344.  345  ; after  the  deluge,  347. 

Gravitation,  philosophy  of,  144,  and  elsewhere, 
Great  Internal  and  External  of  the  Universe. 
151. 

Great  truth  essential  for  man  to  know,  639. 
Iieat,  Light,  and  Electricity,  143,  144,  161,  and 
elsewhere. 

Hell  of  fire,  origin  of  the  idea  of,  343,  550. 
Herschel  or  Uranus.  168. 

Hieroglyphics  used  after  the  deluge,  349. 
History,  early,  of  man,  328-377. 

Ice-Mountains  of  Tertiary  Period,  283,  286. 
Indians,  American,  their  origin,  345,  354. 
Period  of  their  setdement,  362. 

Their  theology,  362,  396. 

Inner  unfolds  the  outer,  640,  and  elsewhere. 
Inundations  with  icebergs  during  Tertiary  Pe- 
riod, 283, 289. 

Jesus,  very  ancient  prophecy  concerning,  458. 
Prophecy  concerning,  by  David,  459  ; 
by  Isaiah,  465,  466  ; by  Jeremiah,  469 ; 
by  Ezekiel,  471 ; by  Zecliariah,  481 ; 
by  Malaehi,  483. 

Jesus,  history  of,  559-572. 

Origin  of  statements  concerning  him,  566. 
Josephus’s  account  of  hini,  578. 

John  (Saint),  personal  account  of,  535. 

Joshua  manipulated  by  Moses,  441,  443. 
Jupiter,  184-187. 

Botany  and  Zoology  of,  187-189. 
Human  inhabitants  of,  189-192. 
Language,  origin  of,  368,  373. 

Language,  the  first  human,  330,  368. 
Language,  Chinese,  source  of.  371. 

Language,  Greek,  origin  of  the  orthography 
of,  371. 

Language,  Indian,  372. 

Language,  vocal,  led  to  deception  and  disunity, 
332,  369,  378. 

Language,  tradition  of  the  origin  of,  408. 
Lessons  of  planetary  creations,  210-214. 

Light,  analysis  of,  288. 

Lines  of  variation,  and  no  variation,  governing 
temperature,  282,  287-289. 


Love,  Will,  and  Wisdom,  622-63G. 

Low  things  not  to  be  despised,  324,  325. 

Luke,  personal  account  of,  534. 

Magnetism  discovered  by  the  ancients,  417, 
441,  443,  469. 

Man,  the  first,  322. 

Man,  where  first  located,  329. 

Man  a microcosm,  351,  598,  612. 

Man,  what  is  he  materially  ? 593-604. 

Man,  what  is  he  spiritually?  604-622. 
Mankind,  the  animal  types  of,  314-322 
Mankind,  two  original  tribes  of,  352. 

Mankind  originally  long  united,  369,  378. 
Mankind,  classification  of,  366. 

Mark,  personal  account  of,  532. 

Mars,  physical  condition,  botany,  and  inhabit- 
ants of,  196-202. 

Marsupialia  of  the  Oolite  Period,  272. 

Material  Universe  a representation  of  the  Spir- 
itual, 639. 

Matter,  constitution  of,  597. 

Matter,  different  grades  of,  227. 

Matter,  its  divisibility,  Ac.,  225,  226.  ' 

Matter,  the  original  condition  of,  131. 

Matthew,  personal  account  of,  509,  523. 
Mercury,  physical  condition,  productions,  and 
inhabitants  of,  206-208. 

Metals,  segregation  of,  254,  255. 

Miracles — “supernatural,”  507,  508. 

Miracles  of  Mormons  and  Shakers,  528-530. 
Miraculous  conception,  idea  of  examined,  492. 
Misdirected  thoughts  of  mankind,  375,  376 
Moses  and  his  writings,  434-443. 

Moses’s  birth  and  its  circumstances,  435,  436. 
Moses’s  alleged  miracles,  437,  445. 

Mosaic  law,  the  use  of,  440. 

Motion,  its  first  ascension  into  life,  233-235,  233, 
Mythological  theology,  origin  of,  377-414. 
Nations,  original  division  of,  332,  333. 

Nations  before  and  after  the  deluge,  351-368. 
Nature  a Thought  of  the  Divine  Mind,  326. 
Nebulous  Zones,  the  six  great,  128-130. 

New  Beginning,  Epoch  of,  149. 

New  Red  Sandstone  Formation,  261. 

New  R.  Sand.  Period,  Animals  of,  262-267. 
New  Testament,  its  relation  to  Old,  487-4 JD. 
Nice,  council  of,  547,  554. 

Ninth  and  eighth  planets,  161,  165-168. 
Objections  to  this  work  anticipated,  642. 

Old  Red  Sandstone  Formation,  241. 

Oolite  and  Cretaceous  Formations,  269-282. 
Oolite  beds,  how  formed,  269,  270,  273. 

Oolite  Period,  fishes  of,  270. 

Plants  of,  271,  2.72,  278. 

Animals  of,  277,  278. 

Opinions  concerning  Christ’s  mission,  501. 
Opposites  do  not  exist,  212,  and  elsewhere. 
Oracles  aDd  prophets,  origin  of  the  ideas  con- 
cerning, 414-421. 

Origin  of  Evil,  337. 

Mythological  theory  of,  411. 

Origin  of  the  earth  described,  219-221. 
Original  dimensions  and  mutations  of  the  earth, 
221-223. 

Original  coating  of  the  earth,  223. 

Original  Sin,  Atonement,  Faith,  and  Regen- 
eration— doctrines  of,  examined,  514-517. 
Osseous  fish  development,  242. 

Paul  (Saint),  personal  account  of,  536,  543. 
Paul’s  philosophy,  &c.,  543. 

Planetary  and  general  motion,  cause  of,  163. 
Planetary  development,  uniformity  of,  170- 
172,  175. 


7S6 


INDEX. 


Planets,  eighth  and  ninth,  161,  165-168. 

Positive  and  Negative  of  the  Universe,  124. 

Primary  stratified  rocks,  formation  of,  229. 

Primitive  elements  and  compounds,  230-232. 

Progressive  development  of  species,  236. 

Prophecy  (truthful),  possibilities  and  probabili- 
ties of'  42’.~428. 

Prophecy,  its  principles,  422,  423. 

Prophecy,  original  application  of  the  word.  550. 

Prophets  and  prophecies,  true,  of  the  Bible, 
426  -428. 

Prophets,  who  and  what  they  were,  573. 

Qitiadrumana,  the  first,  285. 

ltadiata.  polyparia,  and  articulate,  first  forma- 
tion of,  239. 

Revelators,  former  notices  of  as  follows  : Isaiah 
— David — Jeremiah — Zechariah,  581 ; Mala- 
ohi — Jesus,  582;  Confucius — Brama — Zoro- 
aster— Mohammed,  583  ; Galen — Seeress  of 
Prevorst — Luther — Calvin,  584  ; D'Holbach 
— Fourier,  585  : Swedenborg,  587 , Plato — 
Xenophon — Socrates — Cicero,  590. 

Sacred  hooks,  ancient,  multiplicity  of,  420 

Sacred  writings  of  the  Jews,  573. 

Saturn,  172. 

Geography,  botany, and  zoology  of,  If  7-180. 

Human  inhabitants  of,  180-183. 

Scratches  and  grooves  on  rocks,  cause  of,  283, 
284. 

Seas,  the  first,  their  depth,  224. 

Seasons,  when  first  established,  282. 

Senses,  classification  of,  637. 

Seven  days  of  creation,  origin  of  the  idea  of, 
405-407. 

Sheo 1,  Hades,  Tartarus,  and  Gehenna,  as  used 
by  the  ancients,  417,  441, '443,  469. 

Shinar,  the  valley  of,  settlement  in,  383. 

Theology  of  its  inhabitants,  384. 

Silurian  Formation,  241. 

Soul,  the  human,  and  its  three  general  divisions 
622-629. 

Spiritual  spheres  revealed,  643-677. 

Stomachs,  Nature’s,  309-616. 

Substances  in  the  original  Chaotic  Mass,  126. 

Sun,  the  great  central  of  Univerccelum,  121-131. 

Sup  of  the  Solar  System,  159,  209. 

Sun  feared  as  an  angry  deity,  343,  379. 

Sun,  the  Great  Spiritual,  639,  672,  673,  674. 


PART  III.,  OR  VO 

GENERAL  DIVISIONS. 

Evils  of  present  Society,  679-733. 

The  Remedy,  734,  745. 

Mode  of  applying  the  remedy,  745-778. 

SUBJECTS  DISCUSSED  OR  TOUCHED  UPON 
IN  PART  III. 

Antagonisms  of  interest,  684,  691,  et  seq. 

Cause  of  human  actions.  683. 

Classification  of  mankind,  679-682. 

Clergymen,  their  situation  and  influence,  699. 
Concluding  reflections,  778. 

Each  man  an  organ  of  the  Social  Body,  736. 
Educational  system,  how  to  be  changed,  771. 
Family  relations  to  be  preserved,  771. 

Form  of  society,  741. 

Gravitation  in  society,  738. 

General  principles  of  organization,  741-744. 
Interests  and  oppressi&ns  of  the  poor,  684-686. 


Suns,  the  six  great  circles  of,  128-130 ; wiln 
their  planets,  132-136. 

Swedenborg,  allusions  to,  45,  349,  403,  449,  545, 
587,  674,  776. 

Telescopic  (supposed)  view  of  the  Earth  from 
Venus,  229. 

Tertiary  Formation,  283-291. 

Tertiary  Period,  plants  during,  284. 

Animals  during,  284,  285. 

“ The  Lord  spake,”  anciently  a common  ex- 
pression,  438. 

Theology,  the  future  true  system  of,  339,  340. 

Theories  respecting  the  origin  of  the  Earth, 
214-218. 

Theos  and  Dens,  insignificance  of,  377. 

Tides  during  early  periods  very  high,  243,  244. 

Tides,  theories  of  the  cause  of,  245. 

Time,  origin  of  ordinary  divisions  of,  406,  407. 

Toledo,  council  of,  547,  554. 

Tower  of  Babel,  the  account  of,  451. 

Tracks  of  animals  on  New  Red  Sandstone, 
262,  266,  287. 

Transmutation  of  species,  276. 

Trinity,  origin  of  the  idea  of,  402,  403,  552. 

Truth,  the  divinity  and  unchangeableness  of 
428-431. 

Univerccelum,  121,  and  elsewhere. 

Universe,  end  of  the  present,  152. 

Uranus  or  Herschel,  168. 

Use  of  Nature.  323. 

Utero-gestation,  first  exemplification  of,  272, 
274,  275,  278. 

Vegetable  and  animal  creations,  general  re- 
marks on,  300-302. 

Vegetation,  the  first  terrestrial,  243,  251. 

Vegetation  (early)  of  the  Alluvial  Period,  305. 

Venus,  physical  condition,  productions,  and  in- 
habitants of,  202-205. 

Vortex  of  the  Great  Positive  Mind,  122. 

Wars  among  primitive  nations,  359-364- 

Water  (the  original),  its  density — its  composi- 
tion, 224-229. 

Water,  gelatine,  &e,,  generated  by  light,  237. 

Winds  and  rains  (violent)  during  chalk  forma- 
tion, 280. 

Wisdom,  the  supremacy  of,  631. 

Zends,  origin  of  the,  453. 

Zoroaster,  theology  of,  385. 


CE  TO  MANKIND. 

Lawyers’  interest,  694. 

Mechanics'  interest,  691. 

Machinery,  its  relations  to  the  interests  of  the 
laborer,  685. 

Mercantile  business  to  be  changed,  775. 

Order,  law  of.  developed  in  society,  739. 

Physicians’  interest,  696. 

Steps  (initial)  to  be  taken  by  Farmers,  745 ; by 
Mechanics.  755;  by  Manufacturers,  759  ; by 
Lawyers,  761 ; by  Physicians,  764  ; by  Cler- 
gymen, 766. 

Tradesmen’s  interests,  692. 

The  Press.  774. 

Universal  affinities,  734. 

Vice,  misery,  and  degradation,  resulting  from 
present  antagonisms,  687. 

Violence  to  body  and  mind  by  false  education, 
773. 

What  interests  do,  and  what  should,  exist,  730. 

Woman,  part  of  the  education  of,  774. 


DAVIS’  REVELATIONS, 

The  following  extraordinary  work  (of  which  the  present  is  the 
eighth  edition),  has  been  before  the  public  since  the  4th  of  August 
last.  Considering  its  size  and  price,  it  has  met  with  a sale  almost 
unparalleled.  Notwithstanding  the  extensive  discussion  and  inquiry 
that  have  been  excited  in  relation  to  it,  no  attempt  has  yet  been  made 
to  overthrow  the  statements  in  respect  to  its  origin , as  set  forth  in  the 
introduction,  though  these  statements  are  thrown  open  to  an  easy 
refutation  if  false.  Nor  have  any  attempts  been  made  to  overthrow 
the  grand  principles  of  its  philosophy,  if  we  except  the  ridicule  and 
misrepresentations  of  those  who  are  indissolubly  wedded  to  old  forms 
of  thought,  and  who  for  the  most  part  acknowledge  that  they  have  not 
consecutively  read  the  book.  In  relation  to  the  attacks  of  such  we 
have  nothing  to  offer.  But  while  we  are  profoundly  conscious  of  the 
intrinsic  power  of  the  work  to  stand  before  the  world  as  its  own  un- 
aided and  successful  advocate,  we  deem  it  not  improper  to  here  intro- 
duce the  following  testimonies  from  different  persons  and  presses,  as 
so  many  incentives  to  that  candid  perusal  and  investigation  which  all 
works  should  have  before  they  are  decried  : 

PROF.  CtEO.  BUSH,  in  an  article  in  the  New  York  Tribune  of 
September  1st,  mainly  designed  to  prove  the  truth  of  what  is  claimed 
respecting  the  origin  of  this  book,  employs  the  following  language  in 
regard  to  its  intrinsic  character  : “ Taken  as  a whole,  the  work  is  a 
profound  and  elaborate  discussion  of  the  philosophy  of  the  universe  ; and 
for  grandeur  of  conception,  soundness  of  principle,  clearness  of  illus- 
tration, order  of  arrangement,  and  encyclopaediacal  range  of  subjects, 
I know  of  no  work  of  any  single  mind  that  will  bear  away  from  it  the 
palm.  To  every  theme  the  inditing  mind  approaches  with  a certain 
latent  consciousness  of  mastery  of  all  its  principles,  details,  and  techni- 
calities, and  yet  without  the  least  ostentatious  display  of  superior  men- 
tal prowess.  In  every  one  the  speaker  appears  to  be  equally  at  home, 
and  utters  himself  with  the  easy  confidence  of  one  who  had  made  each 
subject  the  exclusive  study  of  a whole  life.  The  manner  in  the  scien- 
tific department  is  always  calm,  dignified,  and  conciliatory,  as  if  far 
more  disposed  to  excuse  than  to  censure  the  errors  it  aims  to  cor- 
rect, while  the  style,  so  far  from  ‘ unmeaning  bombast,’  is  easy,  flow- 
ing, chaste,  appropriate,  with  a certain  indescribable  simplicity  that 
operates  like  a charm  upon  the  reader.” 

It  is  but  just  to  say,  however,  that  Prof.  B.  dissents  from  the  theology 
of  the  work  which  he  thus  commends. 

From  N.  P.  Willis  (“  Home  Journal of  August  21). 

“ In  saying  explicitly  that  we  can  not  conceive  of  a more  absorbing 
and  captivating  book — (to  us  far  more  so  than  any  novel  we  have  ever 
read) — we  have  no  need  to  express,  one  way  or  another,  an  opinion  as 
to  the  supernatural  quality  of  these  “Revelations.”  To  an  unbeliever 


9 


TESTIMONIES. 


it  will  be  a most  delicious  and  far-reaching  work  of  imagination,  writ- 
ten with  a vast  background  of  scientific  and  philosophical  knowledge  ; 
while  to  the  believer  it  will  be,  of  course,  like  converse  with  an  arch- 
angel on  the  comparison  of  other  worlds  with  ours.” 

The  New  York  “ Sunday  Dispatch,”  whose  editors  are  well  acquaint- 
ed with  the  book  and  the  manner  of  its  production,  has  given  a series 
of  commendatory  articles,  from  which  we  select  the  following  passage, 
from  among  many  of  the  same  tone  and  spirit : — 

“ Never  have  there  been  presented  at  one  view  a cosmogony  so  grand, 
a theology  so  sublime,  and  a future  destiny  for  man  so  transcendent. 
In  science,  in  religion,  and  in  mqrality,  it  is  a book  which  will  be  wel- 
comed with  rapture  by  the  most  enlightened,  the  loftiest,  and  the  purest 
minds.” — (Dispatch  of  September  12.) 

From  the  Rev.  W.  M.  Fernald  (in  the11  Boston  Courier,”  Sept.  2). 

“ For  ourself  we  must  say  it  is  the  most  truthful  book  we  ever  read. 
It  is  exciting  and  spiritualizing  to  the  last  degree.  It  throws,  in  so 
brief  a space,  more  light  on  the  Bible  than  any  other  book,  though  there 
are  passages  which  seem  unjust  to  its  great  teachings.  It  is  not  re- 
markable, indeed,  so  much  for  the  revelation  of  principles  or  laws 
which  have  not  heretofore  been  discovered,  for  all  principles  and  laws 
in  the  material  and  spiritual  worlds  are  eternal,  and  in  enlightened  so- 
ciety are  generally  known.  But  in  the  combinations  of  those  laws,  in 
the  numerous  forms  and  modifications  of  truth,  it  is  a vast  storehouse 
of  spiritual  and  intellectual  treasure  such  as  the  world  has  never  before 
known.  I say  this,  after  much  reflection,  coolly  and  deliberately.” 

From  a long  review  of  this  work  in  “ The  Harbinger ,”  edited  by 
Rev.  Mr.  Ripley,  we  quote  the  following : — 

“ The  excellent  spirit  which  pervades  its  pages,  the  modesty  and  sim- 
plicity of  its  tone,  its  freedom  from  enthusiasm,  the  purity,  sweetness, 
and  piety  of  its  sentiments,  and  its  constant  recognition  of  the  suprem- 
acy of  reason  and  the  freedom  of  the  mind,  will  create  a prepossession 
in  its  favor  even  among  those  whose  sturdy  attachment  to  ordinary  ex- 
perience would  lead  them  to  question  the  claims  of  an  angel  from 
heaven,  and  to  distrust  the  testimony  of  one  risen  from  the  dead.  Judged 
by  the  usual  principles  of  criticism,  as  the  work  of  an  uneducated 
shoemaker,  not  two-and-twenty  years  of  age,  we  may  safely  pronounce 
it  the  most  surprising  prodigy  of  literary  history.  If  the  young  man 
is  to  be  viewed  only  as  a philosophical  poet,  who  has  given  his  epic  of 
the  universe,  among  other  bards  of  ancient  and  modern  times,  Dante 
and  Milton  may  well  hide  their  diminished  heads.” 

From  a notice  of  the  book  in  the  September  number  of  the  Roches- 
ter “ Truth's  Telegraph,”  we  extract  the  following:  “ We  have  glancea 
at  portions  of  this  astonishing  work,  and  find  ourself  in  a perfect  maze 
and  confusion  of  ideaS'wlnch  it  is  impossible  at  present  to  express.  To 
view  it  in  whatever  light  we  may,  whether  as  a production  of  an  un- 
bounded imagination  taking  its  flight  in  the  Universe  of  Romance,  or 
as  the  clear  impressions  of  a mind  in  that  condition  which  is  analogous 
to  angelic  life,  it  comes  to  the  mind  as  something  which  transcends  its 
understanding  of  possibilities.  And  yet  the  great  amount  of  demon- 
strable knowledge  exhibited  which  it  is  utterly  impossible  for  Mr.  Davis 
to  have  been  in  possession  of,  and  equally  impossible  for  his  magnet- 


TESTIMONIES. 


3 


izer  to  Lave  communicated,  renders  it  absolutely  absurd  to  suppose  that 
it  could  have  been  produced  in  any  other  manner  than  the  last  supposed 
and  the  one  in  which  it  claims  to  have  originated.” 

From  a defence  of  the  book  in  the  Troy  “ Budget ,”  of  August  23d, 
by  Rev.  T.  L.  Harris,  we  quote  the  following  : “ Neither  Mr.  Lyon,  nor 
Mr.  Fishbough,  nor  any  or  all  of  the  witnesses,  nor  Mr.  Davis  himself, 
while  in  the  normal  state,  was  capable  of  producing  the  work,  or  had  op- 
portunity to  do  so  without  detection,  if  capable.  On  this  subject  I speak 
entirely  from  personal  observation.  During  nearly  two  years  in  which 
the  gentlemen  in  question  resided  in  New  York,  the  writer  of  this  ar- 
ticle was  in  the  habit  of  visiting  them  at  all  times  and  all  hours.  Their 
occupation  during  every  day,  and  almost  every  hour,  can  be  accounted 

for All  of  them  were  accessible  at  all  hours.  The  lectures 

were  invariably  given  before  witnesses.  Mr.  Davis  has  lectured  in  my 
presence  for  four  hours  in  succession.  Having  heard'the  lectures  de- 
livered orally — having  read  them  in  the  original  manuscript — in  the 
copy  prepared  for  the  press,  in  the  proof-sheets,  and  in  the  printed  vol- 
ume, I can  certify  that  there  are  no  omissions,  additions,  or  variations 
of  idea  whatever  ....  It  is  not  possible  that  Mr.  Davis  had  committed 
the  work  to  memory  and  repeated  it,  as  the  work  of  another,  since  all 
of  his  time  save  that  employed  in  lecturing,  was  spent  in  the  company 
of  his  friends,  and  even  his  sleeping  hours  were  watched  by  a person 
occupying  the  same  room  .....  The  evidence  of  hundreds  of  eye- 
witnesses attest  the  reality  of  Davis’s  spiritual  powers,  and  prove  him  to 
have  capacities  equal  to  the  production  of  the  work.  I know,  from  per- 
sonal experience,  of  the  reality  of  these  transcendent  powers.  He  has 
healed  me  of  a dangerous  disease  which  had  baffled  the  skill  of  physicians. 
He  has  read  my  most  secret  and  deepest  thoughts.  He  has  made,  in  my 
presence,  most  astounding  prophesies  which  have  met  with  an  exact  ful- 
filment. I have  seen  him  in  states  of  mental  elevation  which  transcended 
all  history  or  knowledge — states  when  earth  had  apparently  no  secret, 
and  the  future  no  marvel  wlych  he  did  not  see  and  know,”  See.,  See. 

From  Hunt’s  Merchants'  Magazine  of  October. 

“ This  is  certainly  an  extraordinary  work — the  most  so,  perhaps,  that 
has  appeared  during  the  present  century.  It  purports  to  consist  of  the 
consecutive  reasonings  and  revelations  of  a spirit  freed  by  a certain 
process,  the  philosophy  of  which  is  explained,  from  the  obstructing 
influence  of  the  material  organization,  and  exalted  to  a position  which 
gave  access  to  a knowledge  of  the  structure  and  laws  of  the  whole  mate- 
rial, and  spiritual  Universe.  Aside  from  this  claim,  it  is  a most  remark- 
able production,  and  would  be  so  considered  if  it  had  been  put  forth  with- 
out such  pretensions,  which  we  do  not  mean  to  say  are  not  well  founded. 
For  boldness  of  conception  and  comprehensiveness  of  plan,  so  far  as  we 
know,  it  is  without  a parallel  in  the  history  of  literature,  philosophy, 

and  religion It  seems  to  take  in  the  whole  range  of  human 

knowledge,  and,  not  content  with  our  earth,  the  author  visits  other 
planets  and  other  worlds,  and  discourses  to  us  of  their  inhabitants  and 
peculiarities,”  &c. 

The  London  “ People’s  Journal,”  contains  a letter  from  Parke 
Godwin,  written  from  New  York,  in  which  the  writer,  after  presenting 
a brief  synopsis  of  the  contents  of  the  book,  speaks  as  follows  : “ Such 


4 


THE  UNIYEHCCELUM. 


is  a brief  outline  of  this  extraordinary  work — extraordinary  in  every 
light  in  which  we  may  regard  it ; for  whether  it  be  what  it  purports  to 
be  or  not,  it  displays  an  astonishing,  almost  prodigious  power  of  gen- 
eralization. But  if  it  be  the  work  of  Davis,  who  is  known  in  bis  nor- 
mal state  to  be  a young  man  of  only  ordinary  acquisition  and  power  of 
mind,  then  it  opens  up  one  of  the  most  singular  and  wonderful  chapters 
in  all  literary  history ; and  that  it  is  the  unaided  productions  of  Davis 
there  are  hundreds  of  the  most  respectable  and  soundminded  men  in  this 
city  most  profoundly  convinced,  after  a deliberate  inquiry  into  all  the  cir- 
cumstances of  the  case.” 

Other  testimonies  of  the  same  general  purport  might  be  introduced, 
but  the  foregoing  are  deemed  sufficient.  The  style  of  the  work  is  clear 
and  forcible,  and  characterized  by  that  simplicity  which  distinguishes 
a disposition  to  present  Truth  as  the  only  object.  Judged  by  a natu- 
ral and  not  by  Sin  artificial  and  conventional  standard,  it  is  generally  if 
not  universally  approved.  Reader,  do  not.  a phenomenon  so  startling, 
a philosophy  so.  expansive,  and  general  developments  so  intrinsically 
and  vitally  important,  deserve  your  serious  and  unprejudiced  attention] 
Read,  reflect,  and  be  enlightened  and  profited. 


BOOKS  PUBLISHED  BY  J.  S.  REDFIELD. 

JUST  PUBLISHED, 

In  One  Volume,  12 mo,  Cloth — Price  $1.25. 

THE  IIGHT-SIDE  OE  NATURE ; 

OR, 

GHOSTS  AND  GHOST-SEERS, 


BY  CATHERINE  CROWE, 

AUTHOR  OF  4<  SUSAN"  HOPLET,”  “LILLY  DAWSON,”  ETC. 


OPINIONS  OF  THE  PRESS. 


This  book  treats  of  allegorical  dreams,  presentiments,  trances,  apparitions,  troubled  spirits, 
haunted  houses,  etc.,  and  will  be  read  with  interest  by  many  because  it  comes  from  a source 
laying  claim  to  considerable  talent,  and  is  written  by  one  who  really  believes  all  she  says,  and 
urges  her  reasonings  with  a good  deal  of  earnestness. — Albany  Argus. 

It  embraces  a vast  collection  of  marvellous  and  supernatural  stories  of  supernatural  appear- 
ances and  occurrences  out  of  the  ordinary  course  of  events. — N.  Y.  Globe. 

Miss  Crowe  has  proved  herself  a careful  and  most  industrious  compiler.  She  has  gathered 
materials  from  antiquity  and  from  modern  times,  and  gives  to  English  and  American  readers 
the  ghost-stories  that  used  to  frighten  the  young  ones  of  Greece  and  Rome,  as  well  as  those  that 
accomplish  a similar  end  in  Germany  and  other  countries  of  modern  Europe. — Phila.  Bulletin. 

It  is  written  in  a philosophical  spirit — the  author,  however,  disclaiming  any  intention  or  pre- 
tension of  teaching  or  enforcing  opinions. — Philadelphia  Courier. 

The  object  of  Miss  Crowe  seems  to  be  more  to  suggest  thought  than  to  teach — to  stimulate 
inquiry  and  observation,  in  order  that  we  may  endeavor,  if  possible,  to  discover  something  re- 
garding our  psychical  nature,  as  it  exists  here  in  the  flesh, and  as  it  is  to  exist  hereafter  out  of  it. 
— Philadelphia  Dollar  Newspaper. 

To  those  who  delight  in  ghost-stories,  we  commend  this  publication,  as  the  result  of  the 
investigations  of  one  who  is  evidently  a Ann  and  enthusiastic  lover  of  the  marvellous. — Journal. 

This  queer  volume  has  excited  considerable  attention  in  England.  It  is  not  a catchpenny 
affair,  but  is  an  intelligent  inquiry  into  the  asserted  facts  respecting  ghosts  and  apparitions,  and. 
& psychological  discussion  upon  the  reasonableness  of  a belief  in  their  existence. — Boston  Post. 

In  this  remarkable  work,  Miss  Crowe,  who  writes  with  the  vigor  and  grace  of  a woman  of 
strong  sense  and  high  cultivation,  collects  the  most  remarkable  and  best  authenticated  accounts, 
traditional  and  recorded,  of  preternatural  visitations  and  appearances.  Those  persons  who  be- 
lieve in  the  Rochester  knockings  will  find  many  incidents  related  here,  which  throw  them  quite 
into  the  shade. — Boston  Transcript. 

This  is  a copious  chronicle  of  what  we  are  compelled  to  believe  authentic  instances  of  com- 
munication between  the  material  and  spiritual  world.  It  is  written  in  a clear,  vigorous,  and 
fresh  style,  and  keeps  the  reader  in  a constant  excitement,  , yet  without  resorting  to  the  clap- 
trap and  melodrama  of  narrative. — Day-Book. 

The  book  is  filled  with  facts,  which  are  not  to  be  disputed  except  by  actual  proof.  They 
have  long  been  undisputed  before  the  world.  The  class  of  facts  are  mainly  of  a kind  thought 
by  most  persons  to  be  “mysterious  but  there  will  be  found  much  in  the  book  calculated  to 
throw  light  upon  the  heretofore  mysterious  phenomena. — Providence  Mirror. 

This  book  is  one  which  appears  in  a very  opportune  time  to  command  attention,  and  should 
be  read  by  all  who  are  desirous  of  information  in  regard  to  things  generally  called  mysterious, 
relating  to  the  manifestations  of  the  spirit  out  of  man  and  in  him.—  Traveller. 

This  is  not  only  a curious  but  also  a very  able  work.  It  is  one  of  the  most  interesting 
books  of  the  season— albeit  the  reader’s  hair  will  occasionally  rise  on  end  a$  he  turns  over  the 
pages,  especially  if  he  reads  alone  far  into  the  night. — Zion's  Herald. 

A very  appropriate  work  for  these  days  of  mysterious  rappings,  but  one  which  shows  that 
the  author  has  given  the  subjects  upon  which  she  treats  considerable  study,  and  imparts  the 
knowledge  derived  in  a concise  manner. — Boston  Evening  Gazette. 

This  is  undoubtedly  the  most  remarkable  book  of  the  month,  and  can  not  fail  to  interest  all 
classes  of  people. — Water-  Cure  Journal. 

The  lovers  of  the  marvellous  will  delight  in  its  perusal.  Those  who  believe  in  the  supernat- 
ural interruptions  of  those  general  laws  by  which  our  universe  is  governed — in  mysterious 
knockings — in  ghosts  and  witchcraft — will  find  much  in  the  book  to  confirm  them  in  their 
superstitions. — Buffalo  Commercial  Advertiser. 

To  the  lovers  of  the  strange  and  mysterious  in  nature,  this  volume  will  possess  an  attractive 
interest. — N.  Y.  Truth-Teller. 

The  work  itself  is  written  in  an  easy,  agreeable,  and  natural  style,  is  wisely  divested  of  all 
those  terrible  heartbreaking  phrases  of  German  mysticism  which  so  often  encumber  books 
of  this  character,  and  is  carefully  adapted  to  the  comprehension  of  the  every-day  reader,  with- 
out being  permitted  to  sink  into  a trifling  or  unworthy  ton e.— Albany  Register. 

The  book  is  interesting  from  the  incidents  presented,  partaking  of  the  marvellous,  and  the 
style  in  which  it  is  written. — Utica  Daily  Observer. 


BOOKS  PUBLISHED  BY  J.  S.  REDFIELD. 


WORKS  OH  HEALTH  AID  LONG-  LIFE. 


THE  USES  AND  ABUSES  OF  AIR; 

Showing  its  Influence  in  Sustaining-  life,  and  Producing  Disease,  with  Remarks  on. 
the  Ventilation  of  Houses,  and  the  best  Methods  of  Securing  a Pure  and  Wholesome 
Atmosphere  Inside  of  Dwellings,  Churches,  Court-Rooms,  Workshops,  See. 

BY  JOHN  H.  GEISCOM,  M.  D. 


t 


cjocjo 

m 

o- 

cjocp 

CV» 

'f 

T 


“ To  any  body  blessed  with  eyes  and  reason  it  would  seem  the  most  natural  thing  in  the 
world,  that  mankind  should  have  discovered  that  pure  air  and  plenty  of  it.  was  the  element  with 
which  God  had  surrounded  the  earth,  tor  the  purpose  of  sustaining  the  breath  of  life  in  the 
beings  he  had  placed  upon  its  surface.  But  tins  first  and  rational  thought  gives  place  to  amaze- 
ment, if  we  carefully  examine  the  dwellings  of  the  human  race,  whether  costly  or  simple,  and 
observe  how  systematically  all  provision  has  been  omitted  for  providing  them  with  an  adequate 
supply  of  the  vital  liuid.  No  man  would  deny,  in  the  abstract,  that  after  air  has  been  once 
inhaled  and  ejected  from  the  lungs,  it  is  unsuitable  for  breathing  again,  until  it  has  been  mingled 
with  the  great  ocean  of  atmosphere  and  received  a fresh  supply  of  the  life-sustaining  principle 
of  which  it  has  just  been  deprived.  But  it  is  easy  to  establish  the  fact,  by  mathematical  dem- 
onstration, that  the  great  majority  of  public  apartments,  the  ordinary  dwellings  of  families,  and 
especially  the  sleeping-rooms  of  all  classes,  do  not  furnish  one  quarter  the  supply  of  fresh  air 
requisite  to  the  full  and  healthful  play  of  the  lungs,  and  the  performance  of  their  important 
functions  upon  the  system.  It  is  not  difficult  to  understand  that  this  air-famine  must  necessa 
rily  weaken  and  enfeeble  the  system,  rendering  it  peculiarly  susceptible  to  the  absolutely  poison- 
ous vapor  exhaled  from  the  lungs,  and  the  constant  deperdition  of  the  particles  of  human 
bodies.  And  when  we  reflect  that  this  evil  has  been  exerting  its  baneful  influence  for  thou- 
sands of  years— indeed  ever  since  men  began  to  build  and  live  in  houses — accumulating  its 
direful  effects,  and  perpetuating  them  from  generation  to  generation — we  shall  be  prepared  to 
admit  that  to  the  breathing  of  noxious  and  impure  air,  mankind  owes  most  of  the  epidemic  and 
endemic  scourges  with  which  it  is  afflicted. 

Recently  our  medical  and  sanitary  writers  have  been  drawing  the  attention  of  the  world  to 
this  subject,  and  endeavoring  to  arouse  it  to  the  momentous  importance  of  ventilation  and  pure 
air.  But  no  prejudices  are  so  6trong  as  those  which  endanger  the  lives  of  their  possessors.  In 
fact,  prejudice  and  ignorance  seem  to  be  the  pet  vices  of  humanity,  and  are  the  more  fondly 
cherished,  and  the  more  obstinately  clung  to,  in  proportion  to  their  power  of  doing  mischief. 

But  such  a book  as  this  must,  we  think,  effectually  awaken  society  to  a sense  of  its  danger 
It  is  understood  to  be  from  the  pen  of  John  H.  Griscom,  M.  D.,  agent  of  the  Commissioners 
of  Emigration.  It  is  arranged  in  a plain,  striking,  and  inductive  method,  and  written  in  a clear, 
forcible,  and  perspicuous  manner.  It  contains  very  little  mere  speculation,  but  an  abundance 
of  well-authenticated  facts,  from  which  conclusions  the  most  logical  and  irresistible  are  drawn. 

The  work  is  divided  into  three  parts.  The  first  treats  of  the  nature  of  the  air,  it3  functions 
in  the  animal  economy,  and  the  structure  of  the  human  system  intended  lor  its  reception. 
The  second  part  enumerates  with  brevity  but  frightful  distinctness  the  evils  imposed  upon 
the  world  by  impure~air  and  the  lack  of  ventilation  ; and  the  third  is  devoted  to  a clear,  scien- 
tific, and  practical  discussion  of  the  best  means  of  ventilating  every  species  of  building.  The 
whole  book  is  a complete  manual  of  the  subject  of  which  it  treats ; and  we  venture  to  say, 
that  the  builder  or  contriver  of  a dwelling,  school-house,  church,  theatre,  ship,  or  steamboat, 
who  neglects  to  inform  himself  of  the  momentous  truths  it  asserts,  commits  virtually  a crime 
against  society  and  his  fellow-creatures. 

But  not  the  least  valuable  portion  of  this  work,  is  that  which  contains  directions  for  applying 
a sufficient  ventilation  to  houses  and  other  buildings  already  erected.  There  is  scarcely  a 
dwelling  or  an  apartment  in  this  choking,  suffocating  city,  which  might  not  be  supplied,  at  a 
most  insignificant  expense,  with  fresh  air  and  means  for  carrying  off  the  dead  and  poisonous 
exhalations  from  the  lungs.  In  this  view  the  work  possesses  an  inestimable  value  to  all  classes  ; 
and  we  trust  that  the  public  will,  for  its  own  sake,  read  it  as  universally  and  as  thoughtfully  as 
it  deserves.” — TV.  Y.  Metropolis. 


c y 


ch 


“ We  should  be  glad  to  believe  that  this  brief  notice  would  induce  our  readers  to  buy  this 
work,  and  read  it  thoroughly  and  attentively.  Certainly  this  is  a matter  of  great,  of  paramount 
importance.  We  pay  doctors  to  dose  and  drug  us ; we  awake  from  a feverish  and  disturbed 
sleep,  with  a sensation  of  mental  and  physical  heaviness  and  depression  which  finds  no  relief 
until  we  go  into  the  pure  air,  outside  our  ill-ventilated  dwellings ; and  yet  we  learn  not  wisdom 
from  this  painful  and  wasteful  experience.  We  see  our  little  ones,  pale,  and  weak,  and  de- 
jected, inside  of  our  infernally  (there  is  no  other  word  to  express  the  truth)  constructed  dwell- 
ings. and  we  take  them  into  the  open  air,  and  lo  I the  color  comes  back  to  their  cheeks,  and 
the  smiles  chase  one  another  over  their  young  faces — yet  we  seem  not  to  heed  the  warning 
and  instruction  which  nature,  more  kind  and  more  potent  than  all  the  doctors  and  all  their 
drugs,  thus  freely  gives  us.  When  shall  we  learn  that  God  in  giving  us  life,  has  also,  apd  as 
beneficently,  provided  the  means  of  fostering  and  nourishing  life?  When  shall  we  learn  to 
estimate  at  their  proper  value,  pure  water  and.  pure  air,  which  God  provided  for  man  before  he 
made  man,  and  a very  long  time  before  he  permitted  the  existence  of  a doctor  : We  com- 

mend the  Uses  and  Abuses  of  Air  to  our  readers,  assuring  them  that  they  wflll  find  it  to  con- 
tain directions  for  the  ventilation  of  dwellings,  which  every  one  who  values  health  and  com- 
fort should  p it  in  practice.”— TV.  TV.  Dispaicn. 


Price , in  Paper  Covers , 50  cents — Boftnd,  75  cents. 


I 


t 


